Digitized by the Internet Archive
in 2011 with funding from
University of Toronto
http://www.archive.org/details/thmassagaerkib02eir
n{
»í£í>afv"
i/lftAM
RERUxM BRITANNICARUM MEDII ÆVI
SCRIPTORES,
on
CHRONICLES AND MEMORIALS OF GREAT BRITAIN
AND IRELAND
DURING
THE MIDDLE AGES.
Kr,41. Wt. B 1j:ó.
THE CHRONICLES AND MEMORIALS
OF
GREAT BRITAIN AND IRELAND
DURING THE MIDDLE AGES.
PUBLISHED BY THE AUTHORITY OP HEH MAJESTY'S TBEASUET, UNDER
HE DIRECTION OF THE MASTER OF THE FvOLLS,
On the 26th of January 1857, ihe Master of the Rolls
submitted to the Treasury a proposal for the publication
of materials for the History of this Country from the
Invasion of the Romans to the reign of Henry VIII.
The Master of the Rolls suggested that these materials
should be selected for publication imder competent
editors without reference to periodical or chronological
arrangement, without mutilation or abridgment, prefer-
ence being given, in the first instance, to such materials
as were most scarce and valuable.
He proposed that each chronicle or historical docu-
ment to be edited should be treated in the same way as
if the editor were engaged on an Editio Princeps ; ajid
for tliis purpose the most correct text should be formed
from an accurate collation of the best MSS.
To render the work more generally useful, the Master
of the Rolls suggested that the editor should give an
account of the MSS. employed by him, of their age and
their peculiarities; that he should add to the work a
brief account of the life and times of the author, and
any remarks necessary to explain the chronology ; but
no other note or comment was to be allowed, except
what miglit be necessary to establish the coiTCctness of
the text.
The works to be published in octavo, separately, as
they were finished ; the whole responsibUity of the task
resting upon the editors, who were to be chosen by the
Master of the EoUs with the sanction of the Treasury.
The Lords of Her Majesty's Treasury, after a careful
consideration of the subject, expressed their opinion in a
Treasury Minute, dated February 9, 1857, that the plan
recommended by the Master of the Eolls "was well
calculated for the accomplishment of this important
national object, in an effectual and satisfactory manner,
within a reasonable time, and provided proper attention be
paid to economy, in making the detailed arrangements,
without unnecessary expense."
They expressed their approbation of the proposal that
each Chronicle and historical docimient should be edited
in such a maimer as to represent with all possible correct-
ness the text of each wTÍter, derived from a collation of the
best MSS., and that no notes should be added, except
such as were illustrative of the various readings. They
suggested, however, that the preface to each work should
contain, in addition to the particulars proposed by the
Master of the Rolls, a biographical account of the author,
so far as authentic materials existed for that pm'pose,
and an estimate of his historical credibility and value.
Bolls House,
December 1S57.
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
A LIFE
.or
ARCHBISHOP THOMAS BECKET,
IN ICELANDIC,
AVITII
ENGLISH TRANSLATION, NOTES AND GLOSSARY,
EDITED
BY
EIRÍKR MAGNÚSSON, M.A., Kt- Dbkg.
SUB-LIBRAKIAN OF UNIYERSITT LIBRARY, CAMBRIDGE.
VOL. II.
PUBLISHED BY THE AUTHORITY OF THE LORDS COBtMTSSIONERS OF HER MAJESTY'S
TREASURY. UNDER THE DIRECTION OF THE MASTER OF THE ROLLS.
LONDON:
LONGMANS & Co., Paternoster Row; TRÚBNER&Co.,LudcxAte Hill:
ALSO BY
PARKER & Co., OXFORD ; and MACMILLAN & Co., CAMBRIDGE ;
A. & C. BLACK, AND DOUGLAS & FOULIS, EDINBURGH j
AND A. THOM & Co., DUBLIN.
1888.
i/SfiAR^
íiGGl^
Printed by
Eyiíe and Spottiswoode, Her Majesty's Printers.
Tor Ilev ^laifsty's Stationery Office.
CONTENTS.
CONTENTS.
Page,
Preface - - - - - iii-clxxix
I. The history of Thomas saga - vi-xxxv
II. The history of Thomas skinua - - xxxv-xlviii
III. Various recensions of Thomas sagas - xlviii-lviii
IV. Authors of Thomas sagas - - Iviii-lx
V. Thomas saga and the sagas of Gudmund
Arason - . . . Ix-lxix
VI. Collation - - . > Ixx-clvii
VII. Various notices - - . clvii-clxxv
FORMÁLI - - . . . 2-6
KAP. LXXXII. e^l4
KAP. LXXXIII.
Bref P>akka koiinngs . _ _ _ . j4_9o
KAP. LXXXIV.
Er Heinrekr konungr tok skriftir - - ' . 28-42
KAP. LXXXV.
Mertkileg vitran er bar fyrir eirn bróöur Í Cancia - 42-48
KAP. LXXXVI.
Af Ilerra páfans bréfi, er hann skipaöi skrift
50-60
CONTENTS,
(3)
PROLOGUE
Page.
3-7
CHAP. LXXXII.
'-15
CHAP. LXXXIII.
The letter of the king of the French - - 15-29
CHAP. LXXXIV.
How king Henry was shrived . . - 29-43
CHAP. LXXXV.
A remarkable vision which appeared to a certain
brother at Canterbury - . - . 43-49
CHAP. LXXXVI.
Of the letter of the Lord Pope when he ordained
shriving . . . _ . 51-61
,4) CONTENTS.
KAP. LXXXVII.
Morkiligar vitranir
"O'
Page.
60-68
KAP. LXXXVIII.
Miraculum _ . - - - oy-74
KAP. LXXXIX.
Miraculum af Thomasi . - - - 76-84
KAP. XC.
Af jartcionagerSum bins heilaga Thome - - 84-92
KAP. XCI.
Miraculum af hinum heilaoja Thdmasi - - 92-100
KAP. XCII.
Af jarteignagerðum bins heilaga Thome - - 102-106
KAP. XCIII.
Af jarteignum hius heilaga Thome erkibyskups - 106-1 1Ö
KAP. XCIV.
Fra kalle einum - . . - . 118-126
KAP. XCV.
Af ekkju eimii er sat - - - . 126-130
KAP. XCVI.
Af gofgum vin Thome - - . . 130-140
CONTENTS. (5)
CHAP. LXXXVII.
Page.
"ReiHtarkablo visions _ . .
61-69
CHAP. LXXXVIII.
(A miracle) . - . .
69-75
CHAP. LXXXIX.
A miracle of Thomas . . . . 77-85
CHAP. XC.
Concerniiiii the miracles of St. Thomas - - 85-93
CHAP. XCI.
Miracle of the holy Thomas - - - 93-101
CHAP. XCII.
Of the miracles of St. Thomas - - - 103-107
CHAP. XCIII.
Of the miracles of the holy archbishop Thomas - 107-119
CHAP. XCIV.
Of a certain carl . - - - - 119-127
CHAP. XCV.
Of a certain widow - - - . 127-131
CHAP. XCVI.
Concerning a certain noble friend of Thomas - 131-141
(6) CONTENTS.
KAP. XCYII.
Page.
Erkibyskiipsins nndirlögr í Caneia - - 140-146
KAP. XCVIII.
Um jar teignagjörð Thome _ - - 146-156
KAP. XCIX.
Af Jordanus riddara . - - - 156-172
KAP. C.
Af Hlöðve Frakka konniid - - - 172-184
n
KAP. CI.
Er ror Drottinn ----- 184-190
KAP. CII.
Frá Alexsaudro páfii - - - - 190-196
KAP. cm.
Frá helgan Thome - . . . 196-210
KAP. CIV.
Af herra Stephanum - . - - - 210-222
KAP. CV.
Af Máhilld móöur Thome - - -• - 222-226
KAP. CYI.
NÚ er at lykt leidd - - . . 228-240
.CONTENTS. (7)
CHAP. XCVII.
Page.
The Archbishop's undirlogr ? in Cancia - - 141-147
CHAP. XCVIII.
Coiiceriimg Tiiomas' working of miracles - - 147-157
CHAP. XCIX.
Concerning the knight Jordanns - - - 157-173
CHAP. C.
Of Louis king of the French -' - - 173-185
CHAP. CI.
When our Lord - . - . - 185-191
CHAP. CIL
Of Pope Alexander - - - . 191-197
CHAP. CHI.
Of the translation of Thomas - - - 197-211
CHAP. CIV.
Of Lord Stephen ----- 211-223
CHAP. CV.
Of Maild the mother of Thomas - - - 223-227
CHAP. CVL
Now the story is brought to an end - - 229-241
(8) CONTENTS.
APPENDIX I.
Page.
Fragments of Thomassagu . . - 24-5-284
APPENDIX 11.
Extract from Mariusaga - - - 284-289
APPENDIX III.
An Icelandic hymn in praise of St. Thomas - 289-293
APPENDIX IV.
Littera fraternitatis concessa Wytfrido fiHo Juarii
de Insula do Island - - . . 293-294
GLOSSARY - - . - . 296-584
INDEX 587-611
y\ /N wrvx'-v/^ rvr\y>r
PREFACE.
PREFACE.
At different times various narratives of the life of ah wstories
of BfCKCt
Archbishop Thomas Becket have .been current in Iceland, caiieciTho-
T ' ' 1 -I • 11 -I T • ^^^ saga.
indiscriminately designated by the comprehensive name
of Thomas Saga. This term beino- misleading- Ave deal Distinction
. between
with it in this introduction in the followino- manner. oth«?i* The-
^ , mas saigas
When *we have in view the whole oTOup of Icelandic ti"d the
f^ i- present one*
writings relating to Thomas of Canterbury, or an unde-
fined portion of it, we refer to either as " Thomas saga "
or '' a saga of Thomas.'** But the narrative which, under
the title of " Thomas Saga Erkibyskups," now issues
completed from the press, as well as the codex containing
it, called Thomasskinna, we designate as T., when
occasion demands that either should be distinguished
from other writings of a similar character.
The Icelandic Thomas saga stands in a relation of General re-
unique interest to English history and literature. It Thomas
was in existence at a remarkably short period after English
the Archbishop's death. It soon exercised an influence
nothing short of momentous on the relations between
Church and State in Iceland. It secured for the name of
St. Thomas a popularity which eclipsed that of every
other saint, save the Virgin Mary. As we know it T)/\
now, it is largely due to the pen of an Englishman
who, in the literature of his own country, is unknown as
a biographer of Becket ; and thus it occupies a position
of especial interest in relation to the existing lives of the
Archbishop.
It is our duty in this preface to deal with Thomas scope of the
saga under these different aspects as briefly as is con-
K 541. a*
vi PliEFACE.
sLstent with completeness. For the sake of clearness
and convenience we propose to treat the subject under
the following heads : —
I. The history of Thomas saga.
II. The history of Thomasskinna.
III. Various recensions of Thomas sagas.
IV. Authors of Thomas sagas.
V. Thomas saga and the sagas of Gudmund Arason
VI. Collation of T. with extant lives of Becket.
VII. Various notices.
I. The history of Thomas saga.
News of the 1. GENERAL OBSERVATIONS. —The news of the mui'der
signer. of* Archbishop Thomas of Canterbury, one of the most
i"eirnd heart-stirring occurrences of the eventful 12 th century,
beisupposed. seems to have reached Iceland sooner than would be
generally supposed from the long distance it had to
travel across that gulf of isolation which is commonly
believed to have been at all times fixed between the
communi- island and the outer world. But communication with
quent England, during this and the four succeeding centuries,
was by no means uncommon ; on the contrary, it was
one of constantly increasing frequency until the pro-
hibitive trade policy of the 16th and 17th centuries suc-
ceeded in excluding all foreign commerce from the
from the couutry. The begimiing of this intercourse was coeval
uient ou-^' with the history of the country. In the days of its
^^ ■ settlement Iceland was colonized, to a large extent, by
immigrants from Great Britain. That period was by
no means such an exclusive period of sword and
Trade inter- slaughter as is commouly supposed. It was, what all
war periods are, a time of commercial intercourse as well,
and when the viking ceased, in the 11th century, to be
the scourge of the British coast, there followed, in the
wake of his dragons, the northern ships of burthen with
course.
PEEFACE.
Vll
peaceful traders on board, and laden with furs from
Norway and fish from Iceland to be exchanged for
England's fine textile fabrics, wine, honey, malt, and
wheat. As to Iceland, this trade, it would seem, rather
flourished than flagged as time wore on. Indeed,
towards the end of the 12th century English trade had,
apparently, asserted a paramount influence in Iceland.
About A.D. 1200 it is truthfully related, that the national English ,
•^ yard mea-
standard measure of leno-th was chano-ed, so as to cor- sure intro-
° ^ duced.
respond exactly with the English yard.^ That this
violent innovation was the result of a most pressing
necessity may be inferred from the words of the record.
It was carried at the instance of a most influencial bishop
backed by the mightiest men of the country, chiefly his
own kinsmen.^ Paul Jonsson, bishop of Skalholt (1195-
1211), to whom the measure was chiefly due, had himself
studied in England ^ and, having thus become acquainted
with EngHsh institutions, was, no doubt, better able than
most of his countrymen to realize the importance for his
native land of facilitating commercial intercourse with
England. We shall see, further on, when we come to
discuss the " Littera fraternitatis " of Vigfus Ivarsson (vii)
that, in the loth century, the English trade was flourish-
ing more than ever. Under circumstances of commercial
intercourse the news would naturally reach the country
very rapidly of an event which sent a thrill of horror
through every heart of the Christian world. But, besides
commerce, other interests had for a long time formed
bonds of intercommunion between the two countries.
From the very dawn of Christianity in Iceland we Earij' mis-
find that, amone^ the missionaries who busied themselves from Ene-
Ö land.
with the fortification of the new faith in the semi-pagan
community, Englishmen took a prominent and, as it
1 Pals saga. Biskupa sögiir, I.,
135; Diplomat. Island., I., 306-
310.
- Pals saga. Bisk, sög., ib^
'^ Pals saga. Bisk, sög., I., 127.
VIll
PllEFACE.
' huok
wise.
Riulolph.
aftorwiircls
abbot of
AlihiKilon,
first luonas
tery in
Iceland
would seem, the most civilized and humane, and there-
Bernara the fore the most popular, part. Among these a Bernard
Wilfried's? or Willard's ? son (Bjarnvarðr Vilrá-Ssson)
won for himself the surname of " Bookwise,^" no doubt
because he brought a library with him to the country
and startled the unlettered islanders Avith his literary
proficiency. Another, Rudolph ^ by name, is stated to
have spent nineteen years in the country as a missionary
bishop, sent there by St. Olaf of Norway ; and that he
really was sent by St. Olaf we may infer from the
notice on him in the Hist. Coenob. Abendonensis, where
it says, on his death as abbot of Abingdon, that he had
founded the been a Norwegian bishop.^ He was the first man that
ever founded a conventual establishment in Iceland^ ; and
although his small monastery of Bær in Borgarfjord
soon collapsed after his departure, he had none the less
been the means of making the rough and ready islanders
acquainted with catholic humility and self-abnegation in
their most ideal aspect. No doubt it was connected with
the missionary eflforts of these Englishmen that Gudlaug,
the oldest son of Snorri GoSi, in his day the most in-
fluential chief in the country, took the vow, and left the
country to spend the life of a recluse in England (cca.
A.D. 1016).^
Anglo- 2. Literary Connections. — The early missionaries,
Saxon books .
brought to out of whose number we content ourselves with men-
1 eel and.
tioning these two only, brought with them English, that is,
Anglo-Saxon, books, and thus made the people, at a very
early period, acquainted A\dth a language which bore a
A.-s. looked strong similarity to the native idiom. Indeed, the early
icSancfers Icelanders looked upon the Anglo-Saxon language as one
with their and the same with the Icelandic,^ a view wherein we at
own tongue.
Gudlaug
Snorrason
goes to
England to
take the
vow.
^ Hungrvaka, Bisk, sög., I., 65.
■^ lb.
3 Wharton Angl. Sacra, I., 167.
"* Hungrvaka, Bisk, sög., 1. c.
■' Isleudinga sögiir, II., 307.
^ See treatise " Um stafrofit,"
Snorra Edda, II., 12. That the
author of this treatise, which is
written before 1160, is more fami-
liar with English than with any other
language, excep Latin, is clear
PEEFACE.
IX
least discern as strong a proof of familiarity of inter-
course between the two people, as of accuracy of scholar-
ship in comparative philology. And so much is certain The ice-
that, when the Icelanders were framing and adjusting phabet
their alphabet, during the 12th century, they adopted partly, on
Anglo-Saxon letters, where the runic or the Latin of the
alphabets did not express the sound with sufficient saxon.
distinctness.^ The earliest writer in the language, Ari
the Learned, betrays familiarity with Beda as an autho-
rity whom he had studied.- The not inconsiderable sagas rdat-
number of sagas extant, derived from English sources, líSd.
show that English literature was a subject that in-
terested the Icelandic clerks of old. Sagas, such as
that of Edward the Confessor,^ of St. Oswald,^ the Breta-
sögur^ and monk Gunnlaug Leifsson's paraphrase of
the prophesies of Merlin,^ &c., evince, how eagerly the
early Icelandic clerks availed themselves^of opportunities
for studying English history, opportunities which only
could be the result of frequent intercommunion. Even
to this day these sagas have an interest of' their own, as
being not unfrequently based on records now lost or
unknown. Moreover, registers of Icelandic churches
show that books of English penmanship continued for a
long time to be in request in the country.'^
from the manner in which he sets
forth the principle of his ortho-
graphy : " this is how Englishmen
" have framed their alphabet, let
" their example be our guide."
Ilis language impresses us as that
of one who had studied in England.
^ See the treatise already re-
ferred to, 8n. Edda, II., 32, 3G,
38, and the succeeding treatise, ib.,
52-56.
" Landuámabók, Isl, sög., I.,
23.
3 Flateyjarbók, III., 463-472;
ed. also by .Ton SigurSsson, An-
naler for nordisk Oldkyndighed,
1852, pp. 1-43.
■* Ed. by Jon Sigur"Ssson, Ann.
for nord. Oldk., 1854, pp. 3-91.
•^ Ed. by J(5u Sigur'Ssson, Ann.
for nord. Oldk., 1848, pp. 102-215.
'^ Ed. by Jon Sigur'Ssson, ib.,
1849, pp. 14-75.
' Thus we may mention, e.g.,
that at the church of Iltiis in
Enjoskudal, " tvær aspiciens bækr
" enskar " are mentioned in 1394,
and at the same time " tvær messu-
'* bækr enskar " nt the church of
Skinnastaitir.
X
PREFACE.
Bishop
Thoi-lftk
visits Eng-
land and
studies at
Lincoln.
His effigy
set up at the
Priory of <(
Kyme in
Lincoln- "
shire.
3. IcELAXDic Visitors to England. — About the life-
time of the Archbishop, and in the course of the next
twenty years after his death, we find that England was
visited by men of great note in Iceland. Thorlak the
son of Thorhall, afterwards bishop of Skalholt (1178-
1193), and his countiy's patron-saint after death,^ went
abroad and studied theology at Paris and Lincoln, re-
turning to Iceland about 1161. His sojourn in England
fell thus within the palmiest days of the gTeat chan-
cellor. Thorlak could not have failed hearing much
rumour about Thomas's unexampled lordliness, or about
his wise and considerate Church policy — " Thomæ præ-
" sidio tutus et quietus manebat ecclesiæ status." ^ On
returning to Iceland we may be certain that Thorlak
continued to correspond with friends in England, in
the ecclesiastical life of which country he must have
found much to delight his pious mind, and w^here his
own life had taken that saintly mould which charac-
terised it throughout. Such correspondence could not
have passed in silence over the one great event of the
time. The records of Thorlak's own life point in this
direction. The younger saga of this bishop bears a clear
testimony to his having been not only remembered, but
held in saintly veneration, in England, after his death, in
the very locality of his whilom sojourn : — -
" In Kynn in England," the saga has it, " a man by
" the name of Audunn, had an effigy made in honour
of the blessed bishop Thorlak, and when the effigy
was made and had been placed in the church, a certain
" English clerk came forward and asked, of whom that
" image might be, and was told it was of bishop Thorlak
" in Iceland.3 " By the wording of the saga it would
seem as if he who penned this passage looked upon
^ He was declared saint in 1199.
Isl. Ann.
- Roger de Pontigny Materials,
IV., 12. Cfr. Fitzstephen, III.,
23.
^ Þorláks saga bin yngri, Bisk,
sög., I., 357.
PREFACE. XÍ
Kynn rather as a place of one than of many churches.
Scholars take Kynn to be a corruption of Lynn — at that
time a populous town of many churches, and too well
kno^^^l to Icelanders in the 12th and 13th centuries as a
chief centre of northern commerce, to be so mistaken. We
maintain, on the contrary, that in Kynn we have, in a
slight disguise, the name of Kyme, a priory of Lincoln-
shire, connected with the see of Lincoln,^ and make
bold to suppose, that Audunn may have been an Ice-
landic monk of the place, having been recommended
by Thorlak to some of his former friends at Lincoln.
It was doubtless at abbot Thorlak's suggestion — he
was abbot of Ver or Thykkvibær before he was bishop —
that his nephew and successor in the see of Skalholt, His nephew,
Paul Jonsson, also went to England, where he studied for studies iu
a time, and from where he returned, according to his bio-
grapher, so well furnished with learning and clerkly
lore, as to excel all men in his native country.^ Accord-
ing to the saga he married young, which probably
means that he was not yet 20, and when he had lived a
few winters with his wife^ he went abroad. This, we
take it, refers to the age of, say 23 or so, and as Paul was
born in 1155, his stay in England probably fell in the
years 1178 and afterwards, that is, about five years after
the canonisation of St. Thomas, when the whole countiy
rang with his miracles, and most of his popular bio-
graphies were already in public circulation. We cannot «nd p^o-
possibly imagine that a young and eager-minded student brought
of theolooy such as Paul was, a scion of the noblest i^m records
. °*^ ^ relating to
family in the country and an aspirant to high ecclesias- Thomas.
tical dignities at home, should not have taken care to
secure records concerning a saint who, at the very time,
eclipsed all other saints in Christendom by the marvels
which were daily occurring at his grave. When we
^ See Dugdale, MonasticoD, j - Pals saga, Bisk, sog., I., 127.
Vol. VI., 377-78.
Xll
PREFACE.
Björn the
English.
Rafn Svein-
bjariiarson
goes on a
pilirrimajre
to Canter-
bury.
come to discuss the evidence of early traces of a Thomas
saga in Iceland (I., 4), we shall have occasion to return to
this point more in detail.
In reviewing Icelandic visitors to England at this
time we cannot omit to mention Bjorn, surnamed the
English.^ Although nothing is known of him beyond
his name and surname, the latter is sufficiently sugges-
tive of his having had unusually close or extensive con-
nections with England, perhaps having spent there a
portion of his life. He appears to have flourished about
the latter part of the 12th century, and to have been thus
a contemporary of bishop Thorlak. Any Icelander of
note at that time having connections with England may
be credited with disseminating news, if not importing
to the country records, of Thomas of Canterbury.
But the person who we can with absolute certainty
assert brought to Iceland literature relating to Thomas,
was the pious, and in his daily conversation almost saintly,
Rafn Sveinbjarnarson of Eyrr, in Arnarfjord, within the
north-western ])eninsula of Iceland. He was contem-
porary with the bishops Thorlak and Paul. As early
as about A.D. 1195 we find him making a vow to St.
Thomas, a fact which in itself makes it more than pro-
bable that then ohesiay he was acquainted with a Latin
or an Icelandic life of the saint. This vow, which bears
impoi-tantly on the history of Thomas saga, occurred
under the following circumstances : —
" It so happened in Dyrafjord, at a spring-mote when
" as Rafn was there, that a walrus came upon the land,
" and people went to hunt it, but the ' whale ' leapt into
" the sea and sank, having been wounded in the hollow
'' (of the body). Then people went thereto in boats and
" made grapnels for the purpose of hauling the ' whale '
'' ashore, but without any avail at all. Then Rafn
" made a vow to the holy Bishop Thomas, towards the
^ Lamlnáma, Isl. sog., I., 142.
PREFACE.
Xlll
" securincj of the ' whale -; the ' head-fast ' teeth of the
" ' whale/ to wit, (i.e., the scull of the walrus with the
" teeth in it), if they should avail in bringing the ' whale '
'' ashore. And then, when he had made the vow, they
" had no trouble in bringing the ' Avhale ' a-land. After
" this Rafn went away, and they brought their ship
" to Norway. This winter Rafn spent in Norway. And
" in the spring he went west to England, and visited the
" holy Thomas Archbishop of Canterbury and brought
" St. Thomas the teeth. And there he spent his money
'' towards a temple, and commended himself to their
" prayers. This is proved by Gudmund Svertingsson : —
" I put on record, that the man of firm intent
" Went from the ' blue-wanded steed ' (i.e., ship)
" To do his homage to the most holy
" Thomas, the repressor of all woe." ^
We cannot for a moment doubt that Rafn, on quittins;' Must have
^ , .p , . . °, brought
Canterbury, brought away, by gift or otherwise, copies of records of
Lives of the saint, all extant biooTaphies of Thomas back with
having at that time been put to writing. Some record
of the saint's miracles must also have found a place in the
pilgrim's library, the miracle collections being the most
' Eafns saga Sveinbjarnarsonar,
Bisk, sög., I., 641-2 : Atburör sá
geyi'Sist Í Dýrafiröi á vorþingi, þá
er Rafn var þar, at rosm-hvalr
kom upp á land, ok fóru menn
til at særa hann, en hvalrinn hljóp
á sjó ok sökk, því at hann var
sær'Sr á hol. SítSan fóru menn til
á skipum, ok geyr'ðu til sdknir, ok
vildu draga hvalinn at landi, ok
unnu engar lyktir á. í*á hét Rafn
á enn helga Thomas biskup, til
þess, at nástskyldi hvalrinn : haus-
fastar tennar or hvalnum, ef þeir
gæti ná'S hvalinn at landi fluttan ;
ok sí^an, er hann hafSi heiti'S, þá
vartS þeim ekki fyrir at flytja at
landi hvalinn. I'essu uæst for Rafn
K541.
í brott, ok kvdmu þeir skipi sínu
vi"5 Noreg I*etta sannar Gu'S-
mundr Svertingsson í drápu þeirri
er hann orti um Rafn .... |)ann
vetr var Rafn í Noregi. Ok at
vori for hann vestr til Englauds
ok sótti heim enn helga Thomas
erkibiskup í Kantarabergi, ok
f ærSi enura helga Thómasi teunar ;
ok var^i hann þar fé sínu til mus-
teris, ok fal sik undir þeirra bænir.
í*etta sannar Gu'Smundr Svertings-
son.
Get ek þess, er gékk at lúta,
geS fastr, enum helgastxi
böl-huekkjauda, af blakki
blás vandar, Thómási.
xiv PREFACE.
venerated portion of the literature relating to the martyr.
By Rafn, therefore, Iceland certainly acquired materials
for the compilation of a Thomas saga, besides what
might have been brought to the country already before.
Thus, before A.D. 1200, we can aver, without at all
drawing on imagination or stretching probability beyond
leo'itimate limits that, at least some, records of Thomas
of Canterbury had reached Iceland.
4. Early ixdications of Thomas >saga. — Though
there is no direct evidence of the existence of a Thomas
saou in Iceland earlier than the middle of the 13th
century, yet we have indirect evidence of it of a much
earlier date.
Aimtoryof In the older saga of bishop Thorlak there occurs a
kn°wn at P^ssage, the import of which can be understood only by
b]shi°^* "^ ^^ ^^^ ^^ Thomas saga. The author who, by his own
SfSiiSe'^ evidence, was in daily conversation with the bishop, and
must therefore have been a clerk at Skalholt, for some
time at least, during Thorlak's episcopate, refers^ in the
following manner, to the bishop's careful observance of
fast-days : —
Sice^of fast- " -^® enjoined a strict observance of the Friday fast,
nected°i'ith " ^^ ^^^^^ ^'^^ meals should be taken on no Friday not
Thomas « being a Feast-day, except on that one which falls in
" Easter-week. So rigorously did he himself observe
'' Fridays, that on every such he partook of dry fare
" only, if he was well, but when he was sick, he so far
" relaxed and mitigated the fast as, on entreaty, to allow
" himself to eat white food on Ember-days and Fridays,
" thus setting an example to those who now desire to
" do things such as these in a manner the most beseem-
" ing in the face of God. During his episcopate bishop
" Thorlak happened to be ill once when Christonas day
'' fell on a Friday, and he was faint, and yet he
" tasted meat on that day, thus shoiving, by his example,
" that to do so tvas better (more proper)." ^ Evidently
^ I^orláks saga elzta, Bisk, sög., I., 106.
PREFACE. XV
the logic of this passage halts in a manner to leave the
impression that the mind of the author was influenced by
some extraneous reminiscences besides the recollection he
had of the bishop's own norm of life. First he gives to
understand that the bishop allowed two meals on Fridays,
being Feast-days ; and then he goes on to detail the
bishop's observance of Christmas day falling on a Friday,
that is to say, he goes again partly over the ground he
had already covered. This latter observation of his is
especially noticeable. By Icelandic law Christmas day
was to be kept in the same manner as Easter,^ a rule to
which the law attached no exception, nor is there any
special provision for the observance of Christmas day
in case it should fall on a Friday. Consequently, the
law being clear on this point, there was no ground for
doubting what it was right to do, and no necessity for
a special example being set for the guidance of others.
Again, there were many exceptional cases which made it
lawful to eat meat on a Friday, all cases, in fact, which
came under the category of saving one's life — " at bjarga
" öndu sinni " — and bodily illness was one. There was
therefore, in reality, no special example set by the bishop
in doing, on the specified Christmas day, what he did.
The same thing was lawful to every one. And yet the
biographer pointedly exhibits this observance of Christ-
mas day falling on a Friday as hallowed by the special
example of the bishop. In doing this, we submit, he
Avas under the influence of a reminiscence of a passage
in Thomas saga, which he had probably heard discussed
by the clerks of Skalholt, possibly even by the bishop
himself The last Christmas day that Thomas of Can-
terbury lived he observed, in the words of Herbert of
Bosham, in this manner ; — " in mensa sæculi, more suo,
" se jucundum exhibuit, ita etiam, quod ea die, quæ
" sexta feria erat, et natalis Domini dies, carnibus,
* Grágás, Konungsbók, ll,Staí5arh(51sbók, 26.
b ^
Xvi PREFACE.
" sicut alii, vesceretur; eas tali die sumere qilam ah-
" stinere religiosius judicans." ^ It is obvious that the
words in italics are the original of the sentence, " yet he
" tasted meat on that day, thus showing by his example
" that so to do was better (more proper)." What in
Iceland was common custom, and as such attracted no
particular notice, was here singled out as a subject which
derived a particular importance from the fact, that the
greatest of saints had given it his especial sanction.
Thomas's view on the point evidently struck the Ice-
landers as original. Although the author of Thorlak's
saga does not enter into that matter, yet we have from
another quarter a direct evidence of such having been
the case. We shall see, when we come to discuss the
relation between Thomas saga and the sagas of bishop
Gudmund Arason, that this very point had also been
under discussion at Holar about A.D. 1200; and from
the reference made to it in the " mi^saga " of Gudmund we
learn that the words, "carnes ea die sumere quam ab-
stinere religiosius judicans " set the Icelanders a-thinking
as to what thought might be implied in the expression
''religiosius," and that they reasoned it out by the
symbolic proposition ; "as darkness flieth for light, so
" flieth the fast for the feast." On these gi'ounds only
can it be understood how Thorlak's biographer could
have thought of referring to Christmas day, falling on
a Friday, as he has done. That being the case, it
follows that, at Skalholt, there must have been a
Thomas saga, in all probability in bishop Thorlak's own
day, certainly before his saga was w^ritten, or before
A.D. 1200. We may even imagine that bishop Thorlak
himself who, as his biographer says, " was always writing
holy books," - may have left behind, at his death, some
Icelandic record of Thomas of Canterbury, though no
^ Herbert, Materials, III., 485.
^ Í'orláks saga elzta, Bisk, sög., I., 104.
PREFACE. XVU
mention is made of such any more than of any other
writing of his.
There is also a very strikino; resemblance observable R«sem.
blance
between Thomas sa.o^a and the sag^a of bishop Paul of between the
sajfa of
Skalholt in one point, namely, Paul's reluctance to bishop Paul
. *^ and Thomas
accept the bishoprick of Skalholt and Becket's to con- saga.
sent to the election to Canterbury. In bishop Paul's
case this is all the more striking, because there is no
record of any objection having been made to him, nor
of his election having been contested ; on the contrary,
he w^as urged by all men of influence, and particularly
by the bishop of Holar, to accept the charge. In his
own lordly character there was nothing to warrant the
inconceivable modesty ; he was energetic and nobly
ambitious, his father was regarded by the whole com-
munity as the greatest lord, and he himself as the
greatest clerk, in the land. He had undoubtedly been
intended for the office by his uncle, whom he had visited
on his death-bed, and from whom he had received, as a
last parting gift, his consecration ring. The very words
of Paul's saga are so curious as to deserve a place here : —
'^ The next summer after the death of bishop Thorlak
'^ the holy, Paul was elected bishop : before (the election)
*^ there had been a lono- discussion concernino- that
" matter ; at last, however, the affair came to this, that it
** was submitted to bishop Brand, mostly by the counsel
*' of Hallr Gizzur's son: but he (bishop Brand) chose
" Paul to proceed abroad (to consecration). But he was
" not quick in giving his consent, and one after the
'* other went to pray and persuade him, both bishop
'^ Brand and his (Paul's) brothers and other relatives ;
'' yet he withheld his consent and thus rode home from
" the thing. Then he went to Oddi to the ' Church-
" day ' at the feast of the men of Selja (July 8th) deeply
" concerned (about his affairs). But when all had done
" their utmost to persuade him to yield, and he saw
" that there was no one in whose way he might stand,
XVlll
PREFACE.
" unless thereby offending against the will of God, which
" was far from being his desire when he gave a more
" serious consideration to the affair, the Holy Ghost
'' inspired his heart to submit to the responsibility."/
The inappropriateness of this description to the situation
is transparent. In comparing it with the election of
Thomas, we come on almost verbal agreement between
the tv/o records, e.g., " leita lærSir menn at fa samþykt
" ok játyr^ikosningsins afsignu^um Thómase. Enn þat
" mál er eigi fljott " (I. 80), and : " þar var ok signa-Sr
" Thomas, ok var nii ahyggjusamr um sitt efni" (I. 74).
Evidently Thomas saga is here the source of a statement
which the circumstances did not warrant.
Thus it is clear that, at the southern see, records
relating to Thomas of Canterbury must have existed as
early as the latter end of the twelfth century. At the
northern see they were known quite as early.
When Rafn Sveinbjarnarson returned from Canter-
bury, probably about 1197, he must, as we have already
Lives of^"^ said, have brought back with him some Thomas litera-
Thomas. ture. It SO happened that the man who, only a few
years later, was elected bishop of Holar, Gudmund
Arason, was Rafn's dearest friend in the country. Such
was Gudmund's attachment to his friend that,' when he
went abroad to be consecrated, he entreated Rafn to
accompany him, no doubt because he knew, how he
Rafn pro-
bably pre-
sented
bishop Gud
^ Pals saga, Biskupa sögur, I.,
128 : Et næsta sumar eptir andlát
í'orláks byskups ens helga var Pall
kjörinn til biskups ; á^r var mjök
long tilræíSa um J)at mal, ea þar
kom um siSir, at |)at var lagt undir
Brand biskup, mest at rá'Si Halls
Gizzurar sonar, ea hann kaus Pal
til utanfer'Sar. En hann játti eigi
bratt undir at ganga, ok gekk ann-
arr til at ö'Srum at bi'Sja hann,
Brandr biskup ok svá brætSr bans
ok aSrir bans astvinir, en hann
synjaiSi ok for vi'S f)at heim af |)ingi.
Si'San for hann í Odda til kirkju-
dags um Seljumamia messu, me'S
mikilli áhyggju. En er allir voru
a þrotnir at biSja hann til, ok hann
sá, at þá var vi^ öngva^at bægjast
nema í móti Gu^s vilja væri, ok
vildi hann þat víst eigi, þá er hann
ihugaSi sitt ráíS, iþá skaut hinn
helgi andi honum því í hug, at
leggjasjalfan sik í áb jig's til þyrftar
mönnura.
PREFACE.
XIX
could rely on Rafa's good manners and knowledge of the
world, who himself had spent his life in humble cir-
cumstances, in indiscriminate ministrations to his so-
called poor, and in superstitious exercises of every sort.
We doubt not, that Rafn, on his return from Canterbury,
took the occasion of cheering priest Gudmund, who was
a fanatically devout person, with the gift of some
precious record of the great new saint. No gift could
Rafn have chosen more pleasing to Gudmund or more
suitable to his taste. We shall see, when presently we
come to advert to the influence which, as we maintain,
Thomas saga exercised on the mind of Gudmund, that
he affords the best evidence of the existence of the
saga in the North from before A.D. 1200.
In the meantime, we may here adduce as an impor- Koibein
, . f, rr^i -1 Tumason
tant witness to the existence oi ihomas saga m the
north of Iceland at an early date, Koibein Tumason.
He was one of the mightiest men in bishop Gudmund's
diocese and, as such, soon became one of his many
implacable enemies. Like' so many well-born Icelanders,
Koibein was a poet, and would, on given occasion,
celebrate striking events in his life by a memorial verse.
Of one of these songs of Koibein,' dating from the last year
of his life, 1208 — he fell fighting against the bishop's
" alms-people," a rabble of lawless vagabonds — we still
possess a fragment in which the following couplet
occurs : —
Gu^ hefir biskup^ gjorvan
Glikan Thoma at riki,
i.e., God has made the bishop like unto Thomas in
masterfulness.^ This is an important testimony in more
ways than one. It shows that Kolbeinn knew the
Compares
bishop Gud-
luund to
Thomas.
1 We read "biskup" for " Gu«-
" mund." Kolbeinn was too fine a
poet to commit the offence of string-
ing together in one line three words
beginning with g.
- MiSsaga GnSm. Arasonar, Risk,
sög., I., 491, note 2. Cfr. II. G3.
XX
PREFACE.
frobably in
celandic.
saint of Canterbury to have been a man of domineering
disposition, a knowledge, that he could not have
obtained from current popular rumour, which depicted
Thomas' life as one of steadfast humility, inoffensive
constancy, and perpetual sacrifice to worldly cruelty and
persecution. Such was the inferential description of
the saint presented to the age in which he died by
He must monks and churchmcn. Only by studying the records
uvUof ^^ of Thomas' life, and drawing his own independent infer-
ence from the historical evidence contained in them,
could Kolbeinn ever have known him as of overbearing
temper, and by such means only could he have come to
draw the comparison set forth in the song. It is clear,
then, that Kolbeinn must have studied a Life, or Lives,
of Thomas of Canterbury. But in what language was
that life ? We answer, without hesitation, Icelandic.
This we infer from the fact that, when in Advent of
the year 1207 the bishop proceeded to excommunicate
Kolbein, he read out the excommunication to him, in
the words of the sagaman, " a norræna túngu," i.e., in
Icelandic.^ Obviously, the biographer of Gudmund
would not have deemed it necessary to mention this,
unless it was a deviation from ordinary practice, for
it is self-evident that, had it been the common, custom
to couch such fulminations in the vernacular idiom, the
observation, that an Icelandic bishop excommunicated
an Icelander in Icelandic would not only not have been
called for, but would have sounded silly and ludicrous.
The attempt made by a later scribe, who was struck
with the angularity of the notice, to smooth over the
matter, by saying that this was so done in order that
they might all understand it ^ (Kolbein and his band)
goes only for what it is worth, but means very little,
as no sort of doubt could exist among Kolbein's followers
^ MiSsagaGu^ra. Arasonar,Bisk. | 2 n^^
sög., I., 490.
PREFACE. XXI
as to the fact, that he was excommunicated, no matter
whether the language employed was Icelandic or Latin.
Evidently departure from ordinary custom in this case
could have been adopted for one reason only : that,
namely, of preventing Kolbein, disobediently inclined,
from shelterino- himself under his io^norance of the
language in which the excommunication was couched.
If he did not understand the Latin of an excommunica-
tion, it follows that he could not have studied Latin
biographies of Thomas of CanterbuT-y. The conclusion,
therefore, is inevitable that before 1207 a saga of the
saint was current in the diocese of Holar, not only in
Latin, but almost certainly in Icelandic as well.
A passage out of the oldest saga of bishop Gudmund,
the so-called priest's saga, or narrative of his doings as
priest, brings us by a step still further back in time
upon the trace of Thomas saga, though it leaves it un-
decided whether it was in Icelandic or Latin. A certain The vision
of Ranveie
woman in the east of Iceland, Ranveig by name, con- pp^p^s to the
^ ' ^ . . vision of the
science-smitten for her familiarity with priests, had a assumption
vision, in the year 1198, which the writer of the saga
states he himself heard her relate to priest Gudmund in
1201.-^ In being conducted through the abodes of the
blessed by the three great northern saints, St. Olaf,
St. Magnus, and St. Hallvard, she was shown, amongst
other glorious habitations of saints, the one reserved for
priest Gudmund, who was to be one in his time, though
he never was canonised after all. At this point of the
story the words occur : " ok man hann ver^a mestr
" upphalds ma^r landi þessu ok sitea eige i legra seti en
" Thomas erchibiskup a Englande," ^ i.e., " and he shall
" be the greatest stay of this land and shall sit not in
" a lower seat than Thomas the archbishop in England."
This unmistakeably refei's to what is stated in a vision
which a certain monk at Canterbury had, within a week
^ GutSm. saga, Bisk, sög., I., | ^ lb., 454.
451-454.
XXll
PREFACE.
of the death of the archbishop, recorded in Fragment E
(II., 279, 12-20) ' — ^ ^^^^ monk appeared to the living,
telling the latter many glorious things of Thomas, finally
adding, that he was led forward by God's mother, Mary
herself, and the holy apostles, and sundry martyrs and
confessors and virgins, before an exalted and a golden
seat of judgment, which closed and opened by a folding
door. " But he who sitteth in the seat riseth up against
" him, fair and goodly beyond the sons of men, and he
" embraced Thomas and kissed him and gave him a
" blessing, whereupon he was led to a seat and placed
'' among the apostles." The only inference possible
from the above vision of Ranveig is that, already before
1198, or, at any rate, before 1201, she had heard or
read this description of the assumption of St. Thomas,
and that, before these dates, Thomas saga was known
in the east of Iceland, either in Latin or in Icelandic.
The literary relationship between the Gudmund sagas
and Thomas saga wiU be discussed hereafter.
There is evidence, too, to show that at the early period
we have now in view, or, at least, not long afterwards,
other sources relating to the life of archbishop Thomas,
than the current prose writings of contemporary bio-
graphers, must have been known in Iceland. Among
the philological treatises attached to the Edda of Snorri
fca/dquotrs ^^^re is ouc by his nephew, Olaf Thordsson, called White-
onThoma? scald (ob. 1259), entitled " málfræ^innar grundvöUr," or
fundamental principles of grammar where, unexpectedly,
in illustration of the metrical variation called Runhenda,
we come on a quotation of two initial verses from a
twelfth century poem on Thomas of Canterbury by an
unknown author : —
Ante chaos, jurgium indigestae molis
Adhuc (h)yle gravida foetu magnae prolis.-^
1 In the Edda, IL, 84 (Copenh.
1852), whose editors were not ac-
quainted with the source of the
quotation, these verses run :
PREFACE.
XXlll
In another philological treatise, called " málskrú^s-
" fræ'Si," or, the lore of rhetorical figures, he illustrates
" apostropha," Avhich he defines as " the figure " which
is produced " when an absent person is spoken of as
" present," by this couplet (beside other examples) ; —
Teitr gefr Thomas ytum
Trúar-bót fyrir si^ Ijotan.
and was
author of a
" drápa " on
him.
i.e., " cheerful giveth Thomas to people faith's-amendment
" for manners hideous," ^ which is evidently derived
from a laudatory poem on Thomas, a Thomas drapa, now
lost. As author of the poem a person of the name of
Olaf is given, and critics agree in Olaf Whitescald him-
self being the person meant ; so that the suggestion lies
near, that the drapa reflected the Latin carmen already
mentioned. Though the writings of Olaf do not b(ilong
to the earliest records afifording evidence of the existence
in Iceland of literature relating to Thomas, they have
the peculiar interest of proving, how records of exceeding-
scarcity and, so far as we know, not referred to by con-
temporary writers, found their way to the extreme north
comparatively early in the day. In connexion with poenf pro.
this Latin poem we may observe that, apparently, it was known to
known to abbot Arngrim of Thingeyrar, author of the Thmge^ai-.
youngest saga of Gudmund Arason. In one instance he
compares the tribulations of Gudmund to that jewel,
" gimsteinn" (gemstone), Thomas Kantuariensis (Gudm.
Sag., Bisk. sog. IL, 109,04); nowhere else do we recol-
lect having seen the same expression used in Icelandic
Ante chaos virginum indigeste
molis
adhuc yle gravida fetu magne
prolis.
The poem is printed in Edelestand
du Meril's Poesies populaires latines
du moyen age, 8vo, Paris, 1847,
pages 70-93. In illustration of the
figure " Sinatrismos " (Synathrois-
mus) in his málskrú^s-fræSi,
Edda, IL, 246, Olaf adduces 2^
strophes which, though not di-
rectly translated from, seem to have
been suggested by this poem. Pre-
sumably Olaf was himself the
author of these strophes.
1 Edda, II., 204.
xxiv PREFACE.
writings relating to Thomas, and we much doubt if it
occurs in any of the contemporary ones, except this
Latin poem, which in its eighth stanza (p. 78) introduces
him first as
Thomas, honor præsulum, gemma Deo cara.
For Icelandic prose, even Arngrim's, pedantic as it is,
the expression : " gimsteinninn Thomas Kantuariens "
has that peculiar lack of " propriety" of style, which
gives it a somewhat comic turn. In poetry it would
pass unnoticed, into prose it could hardly have found its
way, except by means of a reminiscence, least of all into
a context, where the real point of comparison lay in the
earthly sufferings of Thomas.
Change in 5, ThOMAS SAGA AND BiSHOP GUDMUND ArASON. —
the relations • • p x> p r^
of Church The above referred-to visit of Ram to Canterbury, and
and State ni t i i r» t ^ ' ,f t
Iceland. importation into Iceland of " life-stories and records
of miracles relating to Thomas of Canterbury, coincide
with the beginning of a new era in the life of the
Icelandic people. Only a few years after Rafn's return
a decided move was made, for the first time in Icelandic
history, to vindicate the authority of the Church against,
and to assert its complete independence of, aU secular
jurisdiction. A conflict with constitutional" law and
long established custom was inevitable. This rapidly
led to open hostility between lay lords and spiritual, the
former regarding themselves as, w^hat indeed they were,
the traditional guardians of the institutions of the
commonwealth. When neither side could come to a
compromise on a modus vivendi, appeals were made to
the archbishop of Drontheim, which only served to add
fuel to the fi.re, as he could act but as a partisan of one
side. The only hope of deliveiy from such a deadlock
lay in a counter appeal by the lay lords to the powerful
arhitviiiin of the king of Norway. He, however, in
his turn, was not slow to seize the opportunity for the
accomplishment of his o^vn ambitious designs on Iceland,
PREFACE. XXV
by setting one lord against the other, and thus, through
division, to reach the goal of supreme power. The reign
of law, which hitherto had regulated the relations
between Church and State, soon passed into that of
unscrupulous ambition and unbridled violence ; so that,
at last, tired of the resultless struggle, the country threw
away, as of little worth any longer, its autonomy, and
acknowledged the suzerainty of the King. During this
period of suicidal convulsion the hitherto vigorous native
literature received its fatal blow. It may seem startling,
but historically it is impossible to dissociate this change
from the name of Thomas of Canterbury, since un-
doubtedly the primary impulse emanated from his " life- Bishop Gud-
stories," and the principal author of it was his avowed primary ^
disciple and imitator, Gudmund Arason, bishop of Holar, this Saiige.
1203-37 (elected 1201).
Already as a priest this personage had earned a great Gudmund
name for the saintliness of his life, for his wonder-work- ^^ ^"^^ *
ing powers, and infatuated fanaticism. He had been
going about the country consecrating fountains and
fords, and healing the sick, and had already risen to the
rank of a living saint in the mind of the multitudes,
though this devotion found its contrast in the mockery
of unbelievers, who would class the bones of his saints
among relics of the equine species, and who desecrated
his hallowed fountains.
As soon as he was installed in his see, he took the Gudmund
earliest opportunity afforded to assert the principle of insists on
. -T jr clerical im-
the immunity of the clergy from secular jurisdiction, munities.
though in his law suits, while he was in priest's orders,
he had not once appealed to his bishop, but had prose-
cuted his cases in accordance with constitutional law.
Not only was he the first Icelandic bishop who insisted He was the
'' ^ ^ ^ first bishop
on these clerical immunities, but he carried his theory i" ^f'^fVl^
''to start the
into practice with a onesidedness as utterly regardless ^ii^orv.
of circumstances as his violence was reckless of con-
sequences. A})peals to " land's law and right " he
XXVI
PREFACE.
Took Tho-
maii's exam
pie for his
guidance.
answered by immediate excommunication, which only
resulted in violent exasperation and blood feuds, and for
himself in an existence on sufferance alternating between
flights from one place to another, captivity, and exile.
The principle, for which the bishop fought so recklessly
and suffered so hard, was an unheard of novelty in Ice-
land,^ and it is impossible to understand, how it could
have been so blindly insisted upon by one man against
almost all the best men in the country, unless his fanati-
cism was fired by the example and, as in those days it
was thought, the infallible authority, of the great new
saint, whose every miracle was looked upon as a hea-
venly endorsement of the justice of his actions and the
rio'hteousness of his cause. In Gudmund we cannot
help recognising Thomas of Canterbury rearisen, smaller
only, much more narrow-minded, and even less tractable
He was com- than of vore. Let it not be supposed that we are here
monly con- *^ ^ ^ ■•■
sidereci tobe drawinoj a vaoue historical inference from fancy only.
the imitator . J J
of Thomas. The historical records relating to Gudmund, the Islen-
dinga saga by Sturla Thordson, and the sagas specially
written of him, substantiate to the fullest extent the
sketch we have drawn in general outline of the bishop
and his times. The inference, that Gudmund was chiefly
influenced in his action by the lessons of Thomas saga,
is corroborated sufliciently by what we have already
stated with regard to his bosom friend Rafn's importa-
tion of Thomas literature to Iceland, and by the com-
parison of him to Thomas drawn by Kolbein Tumason,
which, being a contemporary record, stands for an
expression of the general opinion of those who were
1 A raoTement in a similar direc-
tion, but very different in kind,
had been attempted by Giidmund's
contemporary, bishop Thorlak,
namely, to bring under episcopal
controll the economical affairs of
churches belonging to lay patrons,
but was wisely stayed by him, when
persuasion could not overcome the
resistance of patrons too mighty for
him to cope with. Þorláks saga
yngri, Bisk, sög., I., 281-291.
This Guðmund well knew ; but the
meekness of Tho>rlak was less to his
mind than the " masterfulness " of
Thomas.
•PREFACE. XX^Il
capable of forming one. This opinion soon passed into
a current tradition, so that in the bishop's own day
the common, and by no means shortlived, belief was that
he was another Thomas. In the two older sagas of him,
though no deliberate expression is given to that view,
yet the under-cuiTent thought unmistakably indicates it.
But in Arncrrim's sao-a of him this current tradition has
blown into full bloom, for there the comparison is car-
ried out with a simplicity that knows no historical
scruples. When it is borne in mind, that Arngrim,
where he did not follow written books, depended on
stories related by the bishop's relatives, Thorkel and
Helgi, " who both lived for a very long time after the
" departure of Lord Gudmund, and told of him so many
" notable things which are not found written in books," ^
we are at liberty to take that fact as an evidence of the
continuity of the contemporary opinion.
6. Popular ITY of Tho:\ias ix Iceland. — When Lives Private
adoration.
of Thomas began to circulate in Iceland, it soon be-
came manifest, how popular a saint he was. We have
already referred to Rafn's vow, which occurred before
A.D. 1200, and does not, of course, represent a solitary
exception, but a common rule. Further on we come to
refer to him as patron saint of chuixhes, but may here
by way of introduction adduce instances of individual
cases of adoration. In 1255 Brand Jonsson, abbot of Abbot
Brand
Ver, prayed for the success of a venturous blood feud Jonsson.
undertaken by certain kinsmen and friends of his, among
whom was Thorgils Bodvarsson, surnamed '' SkarSi," of
whom more in detail presently, in these words : — " Tilda
" ek nú, at GuS væri ySr f}TÍr vápn ok vörS, ok hylj un-
'' arma^r Thomas erkibiskup,"- pray we now, that God
may be your ward and weapon, and Thomas archbishop
your intercessor. By this time, of course, the abbot
^ GuiSm. saga, Bisk, sög., IL, I - Sturlunga, ed. Vig^fusson, IL,
146. I page 205.
XXviii PREFACE.
of Ver was conversant with the events of Thomas's life
from both Icelandic and Latin sources,
Thorgiis ^ The first time that we actually meet with the name
"SkarSi." ^^ ^homas saga is in 1258 when, on the 22nd of January,
the above-mentioned Thorgils was foully murdered at
Hrafnagil in Eyjafjord, in the following circumstances :
" Thoro-ils rode to Hrafnagil and had good cheer there,
" and his men he disposed about the various homesteads
" round. People offered him a choice, as to what enter-
" tainment he would have for the evening, sagas or
" dance. He asked, what sagas there were to choose
" amono'. He was told that there was a saga of arch-
" bishop Thomas, and that he chose, for he loved him
" beyond all other holy men. Then the saga was read
" through until they did for the bishop in the church
" and cut off his (tonsured) crown. Then people say
" that Thorgils gave up, and said : ' a fair death indeed,
" ' such a death.' Shortly afterwards he fell asleep.
" Then the saga was dropped and people betook them-
*' selves to supper." Thorgils's love for Thomas, as here
expressed, we may take as an utterance given to the
common feeling of the country.
Ecciesiasti- We now procccd to enumerate instances of official
cal honours ^ i • t i •
shown to veneration shown to the saint. In this matter we are
Thomas. • i • i p i
entirely thrown upon the meagre notices which are lound
scattered through various charters, and a few fragments
of old inventories. For the sake of completeness, we
shall adduce all that we have been able to collect bearing
on this point.
Mass sung At the church of Oddi, in the provostship of Rane^ar-
forhimat ' ^ i
Oddi. vellir, the goodly seat of the descendants of the famous
Sæmund the learned, the reputed collector of the poetic
Edda, a mass " de Sancto Thoma " was to be sung, every
other week, according to the " maldagi " or church charter
included in bishop Vilchin's collection of 1397. This
" Sancto Thoma " can refer to no other saint than arch-
bishop Th. of Canterbury. The church was dedicated to
PREFACE. XXIX
St. Nicolas, and it would be out of question to suppose
that means had been bequeathed for the singing of a
special mass for Thomas the apostle. How early this
mass may have been instituted we cannot say, but we
may safely infer that it had been done long before
bishop Vilchins's days.
In a charter, dated 1318, of the charter collection of aL
Audunn Thorbergssou, bishop of Holar, 13 1 3-1321, of the
church of As, in the district of Kelduhveríí, within the
provostship of Thingey (Þingeyar prófastsdæmi), it is
stated that there was " Thomas Söngr," Thomas's song,
which we take to mean, that a mass in honour of St.
Thomas had been endowed there, as at Oddi. These
seem to be the only churches in Iceland, where the saint
was honoured in this special manner.
The following churches were certainly dedicated to dlUicated to
St. Thomas of Canterbury : ^^"^*
Cca. 1220, the church of Holmr (otherwise generally
called Innri-Hólmr) on Akranes, in the provostship of
Borgar-fjord, was dedicated, among other saints, to
" Thomasi erchibikupe." Diplomatarium Islandicum, I.,
416.
1226, in the priory church of Vi^ey, near Reykjavik,
an altar, on the southern side of the church, was dedicated
to " Thoma," among other saints, which Thomas doubt-
less means the Cantuarian Saint. Dipl. IsL, I., 489.
1257, the church of Hvanneyri, in Andakil, within the
provostship of Borgar:Qord, was dedicated, among other
saints, to " Tomas erchi biskops." Dipl. IsL, I., 592.
1318, according to the 'maldagi' of bishop Audunn
Thorbergsson, the church of Hvammr (otherwise known
as Kirkju-Hvammr) was dedicated to the holy " Thomas
erkibps."
1394, by the ' máldagi ' of Petr Nicholasson, bishop
of Holar, 1392-1402, the church of Gnupr, in Midfjord,
was dedicated to the holy " Thomæ erkibpi." It is pro-
bably by an oversight only that the dedication of the
K541. C
XXX PREFACE.
church is mentioned neither in the maldagi of bishop
Audimn of 1318, nor in that of Jon Skalli, bishop of
Holar, 1.358-1391, of 1360.
From a charter in the same bishop's collection of ' mal-
dagar/ dated 1399, we learn that the church of As, in
Kelduhverfi, which we have already mentioned, was
dedicated to the holy " Thomasi erkibpi." As in the
case of the church of Gnup, it is hardly anything but a
clerical oversight, when the maldagi of bishop Audunn
does not mention the dedication, while it enumerates
as belonging to it certain church appointments relating
to the Cantuarian saint.
By bishop Vilchin's maldagi (1397) the church of
Strönd, in Selvogr, within the provostship of Arnes, was
dedicated to the Blessed Virgin and the blessed " Thomas
erkibiskup."
By the same authority, in the island of Engey, near
Reykjavik, Oddgeir Thorsteinsson, bishop of Skalholt,
1366-1381, dedicated the church there, amongst other
saints, to " Thomæ archiepiscopo."
The same bishop's ' maldagi ' also testifies to the church
of Yarmalækr, in the provostship of Thvera (in Borgar-
fjord), having been dedicated to the holy '' Thomase
erchibiskupi."
The same record testifies, that at Hvammr, in- the pro-
vostship of Rangarvellir, the church was dedicated to
'' Thomas erkibpi."
The church of Otrardalr, in Arnarfjord, within the
provostship of Bar^astrond, by the same 'maldagi,' was
dedicated to '' Thomæ archiepiscopo."
Still further the same authority gives the church of
Hamrar (dat. Homrum), within the provostship of Rang-
arvellir, as dedicated to '' Thomæ erkibps."
To these may yet be added the church of Hruni, in
the provostship of Arnes, dedicated to archbishop Tho-
mas. S. Nielsson, Prestatal og profasta, IV., 8.
Among churches, where efiigies, " likneski/' and
PREFACE. XXXI
pictures, " skript," of Thomas are mentioned, we may
enumerate the following ;
1. Skumssta^ir, in Landeyjar, within the provostship
of Rangarvellir i " Thomas skript." Yilchin's ' maldagi/
2. Strönd, in Selvog : " Thomas skript." lb.
3. Hamrar, in the provostship of Rangarvellir :
" Thomas skript.'^ lb.
4. Hagi, in the same provostship ; " Thomas skript."
lb.
5. Hvammr, in the same provostship ; " Thomas
likneski." lb.
6. BessastaSir, on Alptanes, dedicated to St. Nicholas,
had " Thomas likneski," ib., which we take certainly to
be that of St. Thomas of Canterbury ; probably given by
English traders, for whom the neighbouring harbour of
Hafnarfjord was a favourite resort.
7. The church of Engey: " Thomas likneski." Ib.
8. Varmalækr : " Thomas likneski." Ib.
9. At the church of Hoffell, in the provostship of
Skaftafell, was a " Thomas likneski," ib., which is much
more likely to have been of the English saint than of
the apostle.
10. In 1318, b}^ Audunn's 'maldagi,' the church of As,
in Kelduhverfi, alread}^ meationed, possessed a'* Thomas
likneski," and by the maldagi of Olaf Rognvaldsson,
bishop of Holar, 1459-95, the same church possessed,
still in 1461, a " Thomas likneski " with a veil or cover-
let over it, " me^ duk."
11. By the authority of Audunn's 'maldagi,' the afore-
mentioned church of Hvamm, in MiSfjord, possessed a
" Thomas likneski" which, by the 'maldagi' of 1360,
by bishop Jon Skalli, we learn was a " likneski Thomæ
erkibps," a statement again corroborated in 1394 by
the ' maldagi ' of bishop Petr Nicholasson, already men-
tioned.
12. In 1396 the 'maldagi' of bishop Petr states that
the. church of Riimr, in the provostship of Skagafjord,
c 2
XXxii PREFACE.
possessed a " Thomas likneski." The church being
dedicated to St. Andrew, it hardly admits of a .doubt,
that this effigy was that of Thomas Cant.
13. According to the same ' maldagi,' there was at the
church of Eyjardalsa, in Bardardak, within the provost-
ship of Thingey, a " Thomas likneski," as well as one of
the church patron, St. John. Doubtless the former
meant Thomas of Canterbury.
14. At the church of Muli, in the same provostship, is
also mentioned in Petr's and Olaf s ' maldagi ' a " Thomas
likneski," which, we doubt not, was that of Thomas
Cant. The church was dedicated to " God, our Lady the
" holy Mary and St. Nicholas." According to the so-called
Sigurdar registr or church inventories made 1551, for
the churches in the diocese of Holar by Sigurd, priest
of Grenjadarstad, a son of bishop Jon Arason, we find
that, in the church of Muli, there still existed the Qf^gy
of Thomas, cca. 1526.
15. The same register also records a " Thomas likneski "
at the church of Hrafnagil, where Thorgils SkarSi had
Thomas saga read to him in 1258 ; we doubt not that
this e&igy was of Thomas of Canterbury.
16. A '' Thomas likneski " is also recorded by Sigurdar
registr at the cathedral church of Holar, in 1525.
17. Lastly, we may mention that, according to Olaf's
* maldagi,' there was a " Thomas likneski " at Modru-
vellir in the provostship of Eyjafjord, when bishop
Gottskalk visited that place for the first time, in 1445.
These are the churches, where we have found evidence
of ecclesiastical honours shown to Thomas of Canterbury.
Very possibly more instances of this interesting kind
might be brought together by a more thorough search.
But it must be admitted that, considering the late date
of the saint, and the small number of new churches in
the country after that date, what we have adduced is a
strong proof of the veneration in which he must have
been held in Iceland of old.
PREFACE. XXXIÍÍ
7. Diffusion of Thomas saga. — As a last paragraph
in this history of Thomas saga, we may add a review of
places at which, at various times, we have found it men-
tioned. All the instances adduced refer, apparently, to
an Icelandic version of it.
1. The earliest mention of a Thomas saga occurs, as
we have stated already, in the Islendinga saga, under
date of 1258 ; doubtless it was the property of the church
of Hrafnagil.
2. In 1318, we learn from Audunn's ' maldagi' that, at
the church of As, in Kelduhverfi, there were, besides the
already mentioned effigy, also two sagas of Thomas.
The wording of the document is somewhat obscure. It
states that the church possesses "Thomas saga," and goes
on to the enumeration of other things, when again it
mentions " Thomas sogu." But subsequent ' maldagar '
seem to make it quite clear, that two sagas are meant ;
for, in 1399, the Petr's 'maldagi' refers to these books
as " Thomas historia," mentioning, however, afterwards
" Thomas saga væn ok önnur forn,'" i.e., sl Thomas saga
in good condition and another old, that is worn with eld,
which implies that at this time the place possessed three
copies of Thomas saga, and one of them actually then
in a state of decay. This is borne out by the maldagi
of bishop Olaf Rognvaldsson of 1461, in which only
two books relating to Thomas are mentioned, one as
" Thomas saga god bok " and the other as " Hystoriakver
" af Sancto Thomase," which we take to mean that then
the " old " saga mentioned in 1399 had disappeared. The
" historia kver " would apparently correspond to " Thomas
historia " of 1399. ''Historia" being gen. plur., and
" kver " meaning a quire, a small book ; that book must
have contained a small collection of miracles of Thomas.
3. In 13G0, according to the 'maldagi' of bisho}) Jon
Skalli, and still, in 1394, according to the 'maldagi' of
bishop Petr, a Thomas saga belonged to the church of
Gnupr, in Midfjord.
XXXiv PREFACE.
4. In 1394, Petr's ' maldagi ' records a Thoroas saga
belonging to the church in Hvammr, of Midfjord.
5. In 1396, two Thomas sagas are stated to have been
at Holar, Ai^n. Magn. Coll. of Chartres, Fasc. v. 18.
6. In 1397, the Vilchin's 'maldagi' testifies to a
Thomas sa2:a belonofinof to the church of Strond, in
Selv'ogr.
7. At the same time we learn from the same authority
that the church of Hvammr, in the provostship of Rang-
arvellir, possessed a Thomas saga.
8. According to the ' máldagi ' of bishojD Jon Skalli,
a Thomas saga belonged, in 1360, to the church of Hösk-
uldsstadir, in the provostship of Hunavatn, which was
still there when bishop Petr caused his inventory charters
to be collected, in 1399.
9. In 1461, by the 'máldagi ' of bishop Olaf Rognvalds-
son, the monaster}^ of Mödruvellir possessed a volume
in which were written together : Kross saga, Stephanus
saga — Thomas saga erkibps — Antonius saga.
10. In 1525, the above referred to ' Sio-urdar reo-istr'
counts a Tumas saga as belonging to the cathedral
establishment of Holar, but at Christmas, twenty-five
years later, when another inventory list was made of the
cathedral belongings, the saga is not mentioned, and was
then probably lost to the library.
11. In 1525, the same record enumerates, among the
books belonging to the monastic libraiy of Munkathvera,
in Eyjafjord a Tumas saga.
12. In 1589, among the books of the deceased bishop
of Skalholt, Gisli Jonsson (ob. 1587), a Thumas saga is
mentioned. Cfr. Am. Magn. 258. 4to. pp. 433, 434.
This review, though falling perhaps short of complete-
ness, even as far as still existing records may be concerned,
and they certainl}- give only a very imperfect idea of
what the extent of Thomas literature in Iceland must
have been from the 13th to the 16th century, is yet a
sufficient indicator of the popularity of Thomas saga.
PREFACE. XXXV
We learn from it, what is the most noteworthy point in
the matter, that most of the churches to which Thomas
saga belonged were rather poor and unimportant places,
so that we are free to draw the inference that, if the
inventory lists of the wealthier and more important
ones were accurate and exhaustive, the number of copies
of the saga once existing in Iceland would be very
largely increased.
II. The history of Thomas skinna.
Of all the number of Thomas sagas, that once upon a
time must have been current in Iceland, thei'e is now
only one copy left in a state of completeness, the skin
book commonly known by the name of Thomas skinna.
1. Description of T. — It is a bulky volume, measur-
ing 11^ x8|- inches, containing 21 gatherings of eight
leaves each. Besides the " Thomas saga Erkibyskups,"
it contains a saga of King Olaf Haraldsson (St. Olaf) of
Norway. Thomas saga covers the first 11 gatherings of
codex. It is complete, but for the ninth gathering, out
of which the two innermost leaves are missing, leaving
the lacune which occurs in Yol. II., p. 6 ; this lacune,
however, is partly filled up by fragment E., II., 270, 271,
274-276. The first leaf of the first gathering is left
blank, the text of the saga beginning on fol. 2 recto.
The codex is written in three hands, the first covering
fols. 1-77 inclusive (Vol. I., 2-460, 3), in a bold gothic
character. The second, very little, if at all, later, and
not much different from the first, extends to fol. 101
inclusive (Vol. I, 460, 3— II., 118, „). The third, a dis-
tinctly later one, covers the rest of codex.
2. Age of the MS. — Professor Unj^er considers the
first two hands to belong to the 14th century; the
third, we are aware, is referred to the 15th ccntiuy ;
but we are of oi)inion that the whole of T. must
XXXVi PREFACE.
have been written within the 14th. From the sen-
tence, T., Í. 22, i_t, " at haus dæmum gei^i sva Ste-
" phanus Langatun í Englandi, ok enn si^ar þrír meist-
" arar vestr á Skotlandi, at bæn Isibell drottningar, er
" atti Eirikr komingr Magnússon," we gather an un-
certain limit as to the time, when the present copy of
the saofa was taken. The sentence is evidently an
interpolation, but whether an editor's or a scribe's must
be left undecided. King Eric died in A.D. 1299; the
preterite atti shows that he was dead, when these words
were penned. Queen Isabella died in 1358 and, strictly
taken, the words might have been written as well before
as after that date, though they rather leave the im-
pression that the latter was the case. But there is
hardly room for doubting that, not very many years
after the last-named date, the present copy must have
been in existence. This we infer from an orthographic
peculiarity, which, as a rule, tells a pretty certain tale,
in Icelandic MSS. From the 13th century and onwards
a phonetic movement of a peculiar nature began to
manifest itself. The termination iir, which up to that
time is uniformly so written in the plurals of feminines
terminating in a, in the oblique cases of terms of kin-
ship, fö^uj\ mö^ur, hró^ur, dóttur,systibr, in n'om. fem.
and nom. and ace. neut. of adjectives in «rr and urr,
as önnur oí annarr, y^ur oi y6{v)arr, nokkur of nokk-
livr, in nom. and ace. neut. of fjórir, fjögnr, and in
certain other forms, begins to vacillate, being some-
times written r only, i.e., being treated as a letter, not
as a syllable. On the other hand, the common termi-
nation V begins, at the same time, to expand into uv.
During the 13th century these vacillations make but
rare signs of existence; but in the course of the 14th
grow gradually into one consistent tendency, which by
the end of that century has asserted for the r of the
olden time a general phonetic value of xlv. Taken
PREFACE. XXXVIJ
by the different handwritings T., in this respect, gives
the following results : —
1st hand (I., 2-460,3) ; r for ur :—
fó^r (faudr, -fodr, fod-), 16,26» 18>29' ^^y \i> 1*^2,19,
• 204,s, 220,2«, 258,1,, 272, .g, 382,26, 422, ,9,
428, .3, 438,3; mó«r, 4, ,„ 14, 21, 16,27, 204, ^^ ;
bro^r, 250, ,, «, 15, 378, „ ,„ 396, ,,, 408, „ 422, .2 ;
fjogr, 26, 17, nokkr (quae) 384, 4, y^r, fern, sing.,
64, 19, ySr, neut. pi., 380, 03, tillaugr, 392,6
29 cases.
ur for r : — •
tekur, 16, 3, kemur, 24,2, straumurinn, 32, 9, fotur,
32, IS, skilur, 38, §, offur, 104, 15 - - 6 cases.
2nd hand (I., 460, 3.— 11, 118, ^) ; r for ur :—
fö«r, L, 510,15, 550,8,16, IL, 24,3, 66, 7 ; moSr,
XL, 4,13, «4,15; bró^r,IL, 24,23, 42, i^, 50, 23, 64,2,
92,24- - - - - 12 cases.
ur for r : —
y^ur (vobis), I., 488,3, (but yiSr in the same line
as well) heldur (rather), 488, g, aptur, 548, 25,
vottur, 1 1., 18, 17 ; felur, 44, 10 ; skilur, 46, 17 ;
virSuligur, 60, 10 - - - 7 cases.
3rd hand (II., 118, n, 240) ; r for ur :—
fö«r, 124,24, 150,11, 160,1,, 190, 13, 216, i^, 224,,,
226,9, 234,27; mó^r, 160, 19, 182,23; faustr,
198,22; naúckr (really for naukkurr, quidam),
210, 4 - - - - 12 cases.
ur for r : —
fagurliga, 122, 5 ; silfurs, 216,27; feguriS, 224, 20
3 cases.
Without going into a statistic analysis of these figures,
it is enough to point out that, in comparison with the
ground covered, both tendencies of vacillation increase
at an inconsiderable rate in the successive hands. And
XXXViii PKEFACK
the real phonetic iir- tendency to which we have alluded
already, must be said to have made, as yet, a com-
l)aratively slight progress. On that ground it seems
hardly possible that the copying out of T. could have
taken place much later than cca. 1360.
The saga is certainly written in Iceland, and by an
Icelander, a certain sprinkling of Norwegianisms, such
as 1 for hi, þessor for þessi, and a good many cases of
barbarisms and questionable syntax notwithstanding.
8. Owners and whereabouts. — As we have here
to deal with a unique MS., it is a matter of interest as
well as importance to trace its history as far as it can
now be ascertained, the more so that this has never
been done before, and the sources of this history are
almost entirely found in the marginal entries which
figure up and down the volume, and are thus destined
to share the fate of the MS. So far as we are aware,
no record whatever beyond these entries exists, which
might throw a light upon the fate of Thomas skinna
prior to its reaching its final destination on the shelves
of the Eoyal Library at Copenhagen.
We shall first give these entries in due order (includ-
ing, for the sake of completeness, even a couple of
doggerel ditties which have no connexion with the fata
lihelli) and afterwards add our comments upon them.
1. On the front fly-leaf we find, in a handwriting of
the l7th century, the following rhymes : —
Heita ma f)ad heimsins kurt
Og höfdíngskaprinn mesti
Vinum ad veita vel J)á burt
reir vikia ser á hesti
Dæmi eru Jjad gomul og god
Gedsemd ma þad kalla
Vináttu halda a vizku slod
Vel um dagana alia. I. e. :
PREFACE. XXXI ÍC
"It may be called the greatest worldly curtesy and
lordship to give a good treat to friends on their riding
away.
" It is a good old custom, worthy of the name of noble-
mindedness, to maintain friendship in the path of
wisdom throughout all days."
2. On the first blank leaf of the first gathering is
written, in the handwriting of Thormod Torfason (Tor-
fæus, the antiquarian and historian) : —
Thomas Skinna
kallaz pi (þessi) bok.
i.e. This book is called Thomas Skinna.
o. On fol. 2, recto, is written, at the foot : —
þssa Bok a Eg Arne Ottz s mz Riettu
Oc hna selldi mi' Mats Skrifve, =
þessa bok a eg, Arni Oddsson, ok hana
selldi mier Mats skrifare ; i.e.
Of this book am I, Arne Oddsson, the rightful owner,
and it was sold to me by Mats (Mads) the Secretary.
4. On fol. 10, verso, at the foot, is this mono-
gram
3:k
5. On fol. 29, verso, at the top, not in Arni Oddsons
hand : — Arne Odds son A f)essa Bok mz Riettu þar
kan Eingiri at seigia J moti, i.e. Arne Oddsson is a
rightful owner of this book, that no one can gainsay.
6. On fol. 30 recto :—
Fromum Æruverdugum Dugandismane mynu Ast-
kiæra faudr Sira Joni Jonssyni kkiu presti a Myrcka
J horgardal J eyjafirdi= Fromum æriiverSugum dugand-
ismanne minum ástkæra föSr síra Jóni Jonssyni
kirkjupresti a Myrká í Hörgárdal í EyjafirSi, i.e., to
the x^io^-'^i reverend, worthy man, my beloved father,
Sira Jon Jonsson, the church priest of Myrka in Horgar-
dal within Eyjafjord.
xl PREFACE.
7. Fol. 30, verso, at the foot boustrophedon : —
Æruverdvgum fromu Dygdarykum Heidursömum o*"
HalærtSú HöfSings maiii Sera Ai'ngryme Jonssyne a
Ökrum j blaundu hlyd = Æruveríugum frómum dyg^Sa-
ríkum hei^ursömum ok hálæi'^um höf^ings manni Síra
Ai'ngríme Jóussyni á Ökrum í Blondnhli^, i.e., to the
reverend, pious, virtuous, honourable, and most learned
gentleman, Sira Arngrim Jonsson at Akrar in Blondu-
hlid.
These two last entries have been blotted out imper-
fectly.
8. Fol. 36, recto, at the top : — þordr Ein'^^s Rosa Arna-
dottor=:{)ór^r Einarsson, Rosa Arnadóttir.
9. Fol. 38, recto, in the same hand as entry 5 : — anno
1609 á tveggia postula messu, i.e., on the mass of St.
Philip and St. James, (May 1st) 1609.
10. Fol. 39, verso, margin: Gudinör Arnason = Gu^
mundr Arnason.
11. Fol. 48, verso, margin:— Rafn Jon son = Rafn
Jonsson.
12. Fol. 49, verso, at the foot, written longitudinally
up the page : — Bokin heyrir til mz riettu fromu Dands
Mane Dada Arna syne godum vin = bokin heyrir til
me'S riettu fromum dandis manni Da^a Arnas}Tii go Sum
vin, i.e., the book belongs rightfully to the pious good
man Da^i Arnason (my) good friend.
13. Fol. 64, recto, margin, in the handwriting of Torfi
Jonsson (entry 14): — Margriet Dada dotter A bokina med
riettu en eingin aiiar = Margriet Da"Sadótter a bokina
me^ riettu enn einginn annar, i.e., Margret Dadi's
daughter is rightful owner of the book, but none
beside.
14. Fol. 67, recto, margin : — Torfi Jonsson med eigin
hndi = T. Jonsson meS eigin hendi, i.e., T. J. with his
own hand.
15. Fol. 86, recto, at the foot, up the page longitu-
PREFACE. xli
dinally : — Arne Dada son á Bokina z hans samarfar, i.e.,
the book belongs to Arni Dadis son and his co-heirs.
16. Fol. 165, verso (on the fly-leaf at the end of cod.) :
— Arne Dadason a þessa sogu Bok Anno 1631; and
below: þessa Bok Eiga Erfingiar Dada heitins saluga
Arnasonar = Arne Da'Sason a {iessa sögu-bók, i.e., Arni
Da^i's son owns this story-book — this book is owned
by the heirs of the late departed Dadi Ami's son.
On entries 4 and 11 we can offer no remarks throwing
any certain light at all upon the history of the MS.
The monogram may, perhaps, stand for Jon Thorlacius (a
latinized patronymic for the vernacular f^orlaksson), but
that brings us no nearer to the identification of the
person signified by it. Nothing either, beyond entry 11,
is known of a Bafn Jonsson that might serve to link
his name with the volume.
The rest of the entries, with the exception of 6, 7,
and 9, all point to relations of kindred, which show
that for a long time the MS. must have remained in one
family, and enable us to connect genealogically together
the first and the last owner, mentioned as such, in Ice-
land, in the following manner : —
Arni Oddsson.
Gu^mundr (10) Da«i (12) Bósa (8).
Margret (13) Arni (15, 16).
Arni Oddsson, whose autograph we have in entry 8, is
undoubtedly the person of that name who in Icelandic
records figures generally as Arni of Mi^garSar, a home-
stead in the neighbourhood of Snæfells jökull, within
the bailiwick of Thorsnes (Þórsnessþing). We first met
with him in the capacity of henchman to Martcinn
Einarsson, bishop of Skalholt, 1549-1556, in whose suit
xlii
PREFACE.
Matz, the
Secretary,
the first
known
owner.
he made a voyage to Denmark in 1554, and married, in
the course of the winter, " Dorothea the German,"
(Espolin, IV., 107). Through the bishop's interest, no
doubt, he obtained, during the sojourn in Denmark, the
bailiwick of Thoi^nes ; for in that jurisdiction he does
duty as baihif in 1555 (Espolin, IV., 112). In 1563, on
the 27th of September, he took part in an important
enactment at Bessasta^ir (Espolin, IV., 133). He was
still alive as late as 1593 (Espolin, V., 74).
According to entry 3, Arni bought the book from one
Matz, a " secretary." Matz is the older spelling of the
common Danish name Mads. For one so-called, and
occupying the post of a " secretary," we need go to no
other place in Iceland than Bessastadir, which at this
time was the seat of the government of the country.
In Matz, therefore, we have the secretary to the Gover-
nor, possibly his deputy. Just about this time, it would
seem, it was etiquette to address and to speak of the
Governor's principal clerk as NN. "secretary." Such
was the case with that ill-fated Kristian Skrifari (Mr.
Secretary Christian), whom the Icelanders slew at
Midnes, 1551, in revenge for the execution of bishop
Jon Arason and his sons. However, excepting Mads,
Kristian seems to be the only historically known person so
entituled, and it must remain an open question, whether
the title descended from him to Mads, or the reverse,
(though the former is more probable), as there is no posi-
tive evidence to show, at what time Mads was discharg-
ing the functions of a secretary. But from Bessastadir,
we take it, the book came into Ami's hands.
Nothing is known of the history of our codex previ-
ous to its becoming the property of Mads, and we can
only indulge in uncertain, though not improbable,
guesses, as to its earlier fate. First, the question sug-
gests itself : how did the volume come into the hands of
Mads, the Dane, by purchase or otherwise ? It does
not seem very probable that he should have cared to
PREFACE. xliii
secure it by purchase. Mads, a Dane, though he might
have had some knowledge of the spoken idiom of the
day, could not be supposed to have been so familiar with
the lanoTiasre in which it was written, as to have been
able to understand it, for then, as now, to understand
Icelandic a Dane must study it as a dead language. For
such a study there existed as yet not one single auxiliary.
Evidently, the contents of the volume could have had
but little attraction for one acting under a government
the chief aim of which was to root out popery, and to
establish a radically anti -popish protestantism. Lastly,
the very handwriting, which is anything but easily legi-
ble, would to a Dane have made the readins: of the MS.
simply impossible. Mads's selling of the MS. to Arni
Oddsson would seem to indicate that the seller's inte-
rest in it was one of lucre, chiefly. Forsooth, it might
be surmised, that for that very reason he might have
obtained it by purchase. But even that is not very pro-
bable. He could not have kno\vn the market- value in
Iceland of an article he himself knew nothing about,
and in which, therefore, he could not reasonably be sup-
posed to have speculated. There could be no question of
any other market ; for, as yet, foreign, i.e., Scandina\'ian,
interest in Icelandic literature was not awake, and when
it was roused, Icelanders, not Danes, were employed to
secure the literary treasures of Iceland for private col-
lectors and public libraries (Finnr Jonsson, Hist. Eccl.
Isl., IV., Preface).
The volume itself seems to supply evidence ofTheMS.
having been copied to the order of a monastic authoritv, copied tb the
.. I'll i» 1-1 i" order of
Since it contains the sagas oi the two most popular some monas-
saints in Iceland, St. Thomas and St. Olaf. The reason
for putting together into one volume the personal history
of the Cantuarian saint and the pragmatic history of
the reign of St. Olaf could not have been a historical,
but only a religious. The prologue to Thomas saga
shows clearly, that the edition was intended to serve as a
xliv PREFACE.
handbook to " recluses " : — At hóglífisma^r hafi nærhend-
is, hvat er hann girnist. . . . af þraut ok þolinmæ-Si
þessa píslarvotts, (I., 2, 15.1-). The edition, therefore, was
issued to meet monastic wants, and we doubt not that,
once upon a time, copies of it were found in most, if
not all, monastic libraries in the country, although
existing records fail to throw light on the point.
Came,pos- The Wealthy monastery of Vi^ey might reasonably
videy into be supposcd to havc been provided with such a highly
hands. treasured guide to saintliness. Now this monastery,
situated but a few miles from Bessasta^ir, was, in 1539,
sacked by the Danish officials of the latter place, and,
without doubt, the contents of the library found their
way to " Government House," together with the rest of
the plunder. If the library contained a Thomas saga,
which we see no reason for doubting, that Thomas saga
went to Bessasta^ir certainly ; and seeing that from
Bessastabir, in all likelihood, our codex came into Arni
Oddson's hands, it must be allowed that there is a strong
presumptive evidence in favour of its having been the
property of Vi"Sey monastery, previous to the sack of
1539. There is nothing to show, at what particular time
the codex may have become the property of Arni Oddson,
though it is more probable to have happened before
than after his removal to the West in 1555.
Dadi, Ami's Among Ami's children were Dadi and Gudmund,
sons, and a daughter, Eosa ; they all have their names
entered in codex (entries 12, 10, 8, respectively), no
doubt because it was their joint heritage. Gudmund
is mentioned as Ami's son, Byskupasögur, II., 613. Rosa,
we take it, was married to Thordr Einarsson (entry 8), of
whom otherwise there is nothing known, that we are
aware of But of Da^i it is stated, that he moved to the
northern quarter of Iceland, and, as it seems, to the baili-
wick of Eyjafjord, about 1613 (probably several years
before, and possibly 1609 of entry 9 may have a refer-
ence to that fact), where he married Kristin, daughter
PREFACE. xlv
of a well-to-do goodman, Jon Bjarnarson of Grund, and
occupied the post of bailiff (Espolin, V., 131). Entry 12
makes it clear that, when it was penned, Da^i was the sole
possessor of the book, by which time, therefore, he
must have redeemed the shares of his co-heirs in the
volume, which he probably did before he left the West
for the North, or some time before 1613.
On his death, which occurred in 1G20 (Espolin, VL,
10, 14) our codex went to his heirs, two of whom are
mentioned : Margret, as sole owner (entry 1 3), and Arni, Marpret
in the double cai^acity of joint owner with his co-heirs dauirhter.
(entry loj, and sole owner m lOol (entry l(i). Here it is son.
to be observed that the term ' samarfar,' co-heirs, shows
that, besides Margret, Arni must have had one or more
brothers, or one or more sisters. Two brothei^s besides
him are mentioned, Thorleif and Odd. But it is
not unlikely, that Arni had, at least, one sister besides
Margret ; for Torfi Jonsson, of whom nothing is other-
wise known, makes the declaration (entry 13) that
Margret is the sole owner of the book, which looks like
a receipt to Margret for the payment of his, that is, his
wife's, MargTet's sister's, share in the volume, vouched
for in the next entry (14) by his own hand. It looks
strange that Margret should be mentioned as sole owner
of the book in one entry, and Ai-ni, her brother, in another.
This, however, is easily accounted for. Margret was
undoubtedly the older of the two, but Arni was only
17 years of age, when his father died. While he was a
ward, it stands to reason that his trustee or trustees
miorht have arrano^ed with Marcjret for his share in the
volume, and sold it to her. In some such way she must
have become sole possessor of it shortly after her father's
death. But it is clear that Arni, on attaining majority,
took measures to secure the heirloom for the male
descendants of the family, as he is the sole o^vner in 1631,
when, in all probability, his sister had been married for
some time to Jon Jonsson, a priest, who held the living
K541. d
xlvi PREFACE.
of Melar, in Borgarfjord, in the west coimtiy, 1623-1663
(Espolin, v., 131, S. Nielsson, Prestatal og Profasta, YI.,
o).
Ami himself was a man of great consideration, and
lived for a long time at Asgeirsa, in Vididalr, within the
bailiwick of Himavatn, and died, a centenarian, at the
house of his son, provost Thorleifr of Kalfafell, within the
provostship of Skaftafell, in 1703, (cfr. Espolin, Y., 181,
YL, 84, YIL, 4, YIII., 83).
C(xi. lent to By entry 6 we learn, that the MS. must once upon a
oSyrkaf time havc been in the hands of Jon Jonsson, who was a
priest at Myrka, in Horgardal, within the provostship of
Eyjafjord, about 1587, but of whom nothing further is
andtoAiu- kno^^^l ; and l>y entry 7 that it must have been sent for
Learned^ perusal to Arngrim Jonsson tlie '' Learned," while he
was domiciled at Akrar, in Blonduhlid, a homestead in
the parish of Miklibær, within the provostship of Skaga-
:Qord. Ai'ngrim returned to Iceland from his studies at
the university of Copenhagen in the summer of 1589 ;
in 1590 the prebend of Miklibær was conferred on
him (Finnr Jonsson, Hist. Eccl. Isl., III., 443-445), and
Espolin states distinctly that, in 1592, he had given up
holding house at Akrar and had set it up at Miklibær
(v. 67). Consequent]}' the MS. must have been in his
hands in 1589-90, or thereabout.
Passed out Long before Ami's death, 1703, he and his heirs had
of the family seen the last of a heirloom which had been so religiously
Torfason. preserved in the famil}' for upwards of a century. On
the 27th of Mav, 1662, Kino- Frederick the Third of
Denmark issued a letter to the bi.shops of Skalholt and
Holar requesting them to assist his favourite, the historian
Thormod Torfason (Torfæus), in collecting, '' either by
purchase or otherwise," such antiquities, i.e., old manu-
scripts, as might be heard of in the country', the which
Thormod was to procure for the Royal Library of Copen-
hagen (Hist. Eccl., III., 462). Thormod went to Iceland
in the course of the same year, and spent the winter at
PREFACE. xlvJÍ
Skalholt with the learned bishop Brynjolf Sveinsson
who, at that time, had prohably the finest library of
Icelandic MSS. in the world ; and from and through him
Thormod obtained a considerable number of MSS. codices.
In the spring of the following year he left Skalholt on a
visit to the bishop of Holar, Gisli Thorlaksson (1657-
1684)_, where, no doubt, he made considerable additions
to his acquisitions at Skalholt (Hist. EccL, III., 569, and
note d). In this journey to Iceland Thormod secured
the possession of our codex ; and though there is nothing
to show how, or where, it changed hands, the probability
is, that on his way north he paid a visit to the goodman
of Asgeirsa, and, armed with the royal mandate, obtained
the codex then and there. That he came by it on the Wasdepo-
*^ , sited by him
occasion of this visit to the country, and not durino- a v^. the Royal
•^ ^ Libi-ary of
later visit, in 1671, and deposited it in the Royal Library ^^}^^^'
of the Danish capital on his return, is proved by documen-
tary evidence. In the Arnamagnæan collection of MSS.
No. 435^ 4 to (formerly Ny Kgl. Samling 1853) contains
several leaves under the title : *' Catalogus librorum non
" compactorum, quos ex Islandia in Regiam Bibliothe-
" cam attulit Thormodus Torfæus 1662." In this cata-
logue there is first an enumeration of the printed books
acquired, after which, on page 101, follows this heading :
" Manuscriptorum in pergameni Catalogus," which again
is sub-divided into two paragraphs :— 1, " Episcopus
" Schalholt(ensis) hos misit "; — 2, page 102 : — "Reliqua
" liæc comparavi." Under this head the 2nd entry runs :
" Sancti Tliomae Archiepiscopi Cantabergensis et Sancti
" Olavi Regis Norvegiae Historia, folio." At tlie end of
this catalogue, page 105, the note is suffixed: — ''Detto
" forskrefne er skreven efter Mons^" Thormod Torfesens
" egen Haand," i.e., the afore-written is copied after
Mr. Tl). T's own handwriting ; to which is added, in the
handwriting of Arni Magnusson : "1712 i Octobri."
The last event to be mentioned in the history of Thomas- Wont to
, Norway.
skinna, a name given to the codex by Thormod himself,
d 2
xlviii PREFACE.
is its removal to Norway, either in 1G64 or in 1G82, in
which respective years Thormod obtained the loan of
Rcstomito a large number of MS S. from the Royal Library, which
' he retained until 1704, wlien the whole collection was
restored to its proper place, in which admirably conducted
institution Thomasskinna has remained safely deposited
ever since.
III. Various recensions of Thomas sagas.
The term Thomas saga covers various narratives
relating to Thoma^s of Canterbury, more or less inde-
pendent of each other, which fall naturally into the two
main groups ; the sagas of his life, and those of the
gesta post martyrium ; in which latter group we also
include the records of his miracles. A third group
represents writings which, for convenience, we include
under the general denomination of Thomas saga, but
which are apparently merely homiletic abstracts of the
two former groups.
A summary of this classification gives the following
result : —
tiou of ThO'
xuas sagas,
?ilfn nf Thn- ^' — ^^^^^ ^f the Hfc of thc archbishop.
1. The "lifs-bok," contained in T., I. ; also represented
by fragments A. and B. of the appendix.
2. Another such, but a different recension, now known
only from fragment D.
3. A fragment of the Quadrilogus prior (Lupus).
B. — Sagas relating to the gesta post martyrium.
4. The narrative contained in T., II., 2-92, which, by
its distinguishing element, the miracles, points to Benedict
of Peterborough as its source.
5. Fragment E., an older recension, substantially
covering, so far as it goes, the same ground as the pre-
ceding and doubtless drawn from the same source.
ith
PREFACE. xlix
6. The miracle-saga, T., II., 92-172 (or, possibly, to
184), which, for the miracles it contains, owes its origin
to Robert of Cricklade. Also represented by the rem-
nants preserved in fragment C.
7. Additamenta of later authorship, T., II., 184-240.
C. — Homiletic abstracts.
8. Fragment No. 2, folio, at Stockholm, and the shreds
of the first leaf of fragment D.
We shall now proceed to show on what grounds we
adopt this classification, exhibiting at the same time the
relation between T. and the fragments A.-E.
(1.) The "lifs-bok " only comes here into consideration Comparison
f> • • 1 /> A -T) -T^ OfT. I.witl]
as a type of comparison with fragments A., B., D., on fragments
Avhich we have to offer the following remarks : —
A. (II., 245-48) is derived from the same original as,
but is copied at an earlier period than, T. ; as would
appear from its preserving older forms, as fingu (II.,
24G, o,) for feingu (I., 262, .,), mála-efni (II., 246, i,) for
malefnin (I., 262, o^), harmanliga (II,, 247, 2s) foi' hörmu-
liga (I., 268, lo) ; in the phrase suSr at sio (II., 246, ^i)
it probably preserves a truer reading for, sui5r um sjo
(I., 262, 2;0> 2-8 also in omitting hann before Herbert
(II., 247, 2.], cfr. I., 268, -). But, on the other hand, it
betrays predilection for the forms meSr instead of me^,
svo for svá, and ei for eigi. To judge from this small
fragment, it would seem to have been a more carelessly
executed copy than T. is, considering that in one place
it leaves out goSa vilja (II., 246, ^, cfr. I., 262, n,), with-
out which words the sentence has no sense.
B. (II., 248-259) is also a sister copy to T., but of an
older date, as may be inferred from its reluctance to the
use of the definitive declension of nouns, ejj., konung
(II., 249, ij,) for konunginn (I., 266,22), konungi (II.,
249, jy) for konunginuin, (I., 266, 21), and from forma
such as snaror (II., 252, 25) for snorur (I., 276, i„), also
from its avoidance of otiose pleonasms : I)eir J)acka
honum hæversklega af halfu erchibysku}>s (II., 250, or.)
1 PKEFACPJ.
for : af hálfu Thomas erkibyskups (I., 270, ,.^, her med
leggr einn rikr ma'Sr byskupinum sua fallit orcl (II.
253, 2.0 for : her meS leggr honum einn rikr ma^r
byskupinum, &c. (L, 278, ,5), a nearer approach, too, to
an older diction is discernible in the sentence : a^rir
mæla þvers i moti, segia erkibyskup fram standa med
guds retti (II., 250, 37) for : a^rir mæla þvers i mot at
erkibyskup frammi standi, &;c. (I., 270, 20) ; for har^Sr
(I, 266,15) it reads diarfr (II., 249, j.,), for mikilmennsku
(I, 266, ;^o) trumenzku (II., 249, 25). for áskilna-Sar (L,
278, s) atskilna^ar (II., 263, 9) all probably better and
truer readings ; it preserves the sentence missed out by
the copyist of T., 354, 5 : i veg fram til borgar þeirar,
er heitir Bitvrica ; þar tekr hann gott orlof med blidri
blezsan af herra pafanvm, 257, 22 21- I^ makes a similar
blunder to T. of the proverbial saying : fugit impius
nemine persequente : flyia (unreadable . . . .) af
riki, which must have read : flyia omildir þott enginn
biodi þeim af riki (II., 252,33 cfr. I., 276^,1^).
(2.) D. (II., 261-269) represents two recensions of
^' Thomas saga, one entirely independent, the other an
early type of T. The snips remaining of the first leaf
of this fragment, though short, are sufficiently long to
show that the contents must have been a mere abstract
of some Thomas saga framed in a manner that reminds
strongly of the tenor of Cod. 2 Stockholm (see No. 8).
In contrast to all existing lives of Thomas of Canterbury,
these two agree in making the archbishop go in person
to fetch the pall from the pope, and in words which
decidedly point to a common origin : —
D. Cod. 2 Stock.
Litilli stvndo si^arr byrr En bratt eptir þat bio
hann ferS sina or landi a hann for sina til pafa fund-
pava fund Mexandritercij. ar ok tok þa pallium at
Ok i þessarri fer^ tekr hann honum ok tign þa alia er
af honum pallium ok alia erkibyskups dæmi íylgdi.
erkibyskups tign.
Contents of
PREFACE. li
The rest of this fragment (leaves 2-4) cannot belong-
to the same recension as the first leaf. Not having seen
the MS. fragment, we cannot tell, whether the hand-
writing of the first leaf differs from the rest, and so
decides the question. Both might have formed the
contents of one volume written by one scribe, and this,
we suggest, must be the case. With leaf 2, namely, the
narrative assumes its natural breadth, beo-innino- with a
peroration of the speech of the earl of Ai'undel before the
pope, to which nothing corresponds in T., or in the one
known Latin renderino' of it by Alan. This remarkable a unique
^ *^ remnant of
piece of A^TÍtino: runs thus : — " for thinos unlawful, but \^3 eari of
A p ^ _ -^ ^ ' Arundel s
*' rather for this, to deliver our kino- and his friends from ^i**^^ ^'^*
' ^ ^ ^ C5 ^ fore the
" the slander of his enemies. Yet, my lord, it behoves you I'^i'^-
" to consider to what pass matters have come already.
" You stand much in need of support, as does Holy
'' Church. But the lords who, in the northern quarter
" of the world, have the greatest power at present, are
*' the two emperors, and the king of the French, and our
" king. Now on neither emperor can you rely for
" support, whereas both the others bear you good will.
'' And should you forfeit the friendship of either king,
" then consider what harm might be done thereby to
" yourself and to Holy Church." Compared with this,
Alan's rendering of the earl's speech comes to a lame
and pointless end. But it is difficult to imagine, how
the king's cause could have been pleaded more ably
than it is done here, considering the lukewaimness of
the curia, and the decidedly hesitating attitude of
Alexander himself The broad and true view taken
of the political situation precludes all possibility of
invention on the part of the Icelandic editor. Indeed
there is such a distinct air of genuineness about the
passage that one is tempted to suppose that it must
have been supplied by the earl himself to the original
writer.
The whole of the first piece of leaf 2 (IL, 203 ,„ ^^^-'^^^^^^^^
Hi PREFACE.
264, J is peculiar to D., having nothing in T. corre-
sponding to it. But all the rest included in this frag-
ment is found, in substance, in T. ; the main difference
being that D, in telling the story, is more brief, but in
translating letters, more exact and much more literal.
But it is clear at a o-lance that thouo-h this is a much
older recension, yet T. is a mediate descendant of it,
nearly every sentence, where substantial agreement
obtains, being cast in the mould of D, and the wording
of a great many being partly or wholly identical in both.
This fragment spells rno^r (for mo^ur), II., 262, ■^-.
Quadriiogus (^3 ) ^ fragment preserved in Cod. No. 17, 4to, among
the Icelandic MS. at the Royal Library of Stockholm.
This is a free translation of the older Quadriiogus,
edited by Lupus. This saga was left uncompleted by the
translator, and has, since it left his hand, suiiered greatly
from ill-treatment. See Prof. Uuger's preface to. Thomas
saga, Christiania, 1869, where this fragment is printed,
pp. 1-282. Of this same fragment two insignificant shreds
are found, described and printed by Prof. Unger's ed. of
Thom. saga, pp. 507-519.
T. i.andT. (4.) That the story terminatino- T., I., 558, and that
II. indepeu- , . , , . ^ -.t i • m ■■
deut sagas, wbich begms T., II., 2, though m Tomasskmna run-
ning on as a continuous narrative, once upon a time,
formed two separate and independent Thomas sagas is
easily discernible, even from the one fact, that at the
jointure of the two the latter begins with the heading
" Formali," preface ; certainly an appropriate heading
to an independent story setting forth the gesta post
martyrium, but utterly inappropriate in a continuous
narrative. This becomes still clearer, when we examine
the end of the preceding chapter, where the editor,
who amalgamated the two stories, tries to make the
passage fi'om one to the other smooth and natural by
saying that he is going to pronounce a funeral sermon
over the martyr's grave. This shows that he had in his
mind what was nearest at hand, namely, the preface of
PREFACE. Jiii
the second saga. Had he been the author, he would
have opened to the reader a broader and more pro-
spective vista over the contents of the coming por-
tion of the saga, which is far from being all a funeral
sermon. As a mechanical editor only he joins the two
portions together in such an artless way that the
orimnal distinction is left undisturbed. Thus it follows
that, once upon a time, these two portions of T. were
separate sagas ; and we may add, that, when the
amalgamation of T., I. and II., took place, Robert ofT. n. con-
Cricklade's "saga" (No. 6), with chapter C. following it, two sagas.
had ah'eady been joined to No. 4, ( = T. II., 2-92) so, that
then the " formali," with chapter LXXXII. — C. formed
a continuous Thomas saga (probably so called). That
such really was the case may be infei'red from the fol-
lowing fact : — In relating the two visions by whicli it
was revealed to the Archbishop how, at a future date,
he was destined to stand king Henry in good stead, and
how the king and his two sons would come untimely
and undesirably by their end (I., 388-390), the writer
promises, that the fulfilment of these visions shall be
set forth in the end of the story. Only the former of
these visions, however, is reverted to in the saga again
(II., 170 ff.), the second is not even alluded to. Such
an editorial slip as this could only occur because the
two sagas Avere independent of each other. The amalga-
mator knew that in the end of the story it was explained
how, by the saint's intercession, king Henry overcame
his enemies ; and was under the impression that at the
same place there was also a notice to show, how the
vision, pointing to the death of the king and his sons,
was fulfilled. Being merely a cojiyist, he forgot, when
lie came to the end of the story, what he had said before,
and because the second story, as he found it, contained
no such notice about the second vision as he had said
it did, and having nothing to add of Ids own, lie left
the story as he found it without that notice. At what
lív PREFACE.
particular time this amalgamation may have taken place
we cannot tell ; but it seems older than the 14th century.
See Yar. Not.
The words " in the end of the story " deserve a special
notice. It is clear that when the two sagas were fused
into one, the second finished with the fulfilment of the
vision already alluded to. King Henry's penitential
visit to, and penance at, Thomas's grave, coupled with
his victor}^ over the rebellion of 1174, through the saint's
intercession, as it Avas commonly looked upon to have
been, form really the natural finale of the historical
drama in which the two men had been the chief actors,
and are the last events recorded by the contemporary
biographers. We take it, therefore, that the composite
saga, T., II., 2-184, finished, when the two were amal-
gamated, with chapter C, with the exception, of course,
of the last passage (II., 184, 9.19).
Tiie first As indicated in the clasification above, this composite
II.,' in the saga traccs its origin, in the main, to two /independent
diet of Peter- sourccs, namely, Benedict of Peterborough and Robert of
Cricklade. It begins with a preface which, up to the
lacune (II., 6), is not derived from Benedict (see collation) ;
but the missing portion of it was, no doubt, draAvn from
that source, because in its coincidences, after the lacune,
with fragment E., which has preserved a considerable
portion of Benedict's preface to his miracles, a common
source is unmistakeable. So also the miracles, which
are introduced in T. (II., 2-92), are clearly culled from
Benedict only, and follow (though with omissions)
his OA\Ti order. Such, too, is the case with the few
which are preserved in E., though they do not quite
follow the order of T.
Correspond- (5.) Fragment E., IL, 270-284, represents an early
riagin. E. to recension of the beginning of the first saga of T., II.,
'Miracles' but diftcrs from it considerably. The preface, thouoh
of Benedict . , • , n \ ^ ■ t
of Peter- preserving a good many points oi resemblance in sub-
stance, is widely different in the wording. In coming
. PREFACE. IV
to the miracles, which are all drawn frora Benedict,
and, as far as they go, correspond to the same in T., the
writer introduces them with a translation of Benedict's
preface to his collection of miracles. The con-espondence
between the two prefaces, however, is such, that the
former omits some things which are, and adds otheis
which are not, contained in the latter. But where the
two correspond, the translation is close and pointed.
Like D., this fragment deals with historical matter more
abbreviatingly, with matters not historical and with
letters more exactly, than T. In this respect the dis-
tance between E. and T. seems, on the whole, to be
rather greater than between D. and T. These two
fragments, we mav observe here, are the oldest remnants
now left of Icelandic literature on Thomas of Canterbury.
Each appears to owe its origin, cei'tainly to a contem-
porary, if not, indeed, to the same author. The main
difference in the style of tha two is, that D. is more
crisp, rather more curt and incisive, E. more mannered,
slightly more straining at rhetoric effect, and generally
smoother.
In this fragment we meet with the spelling, kvi"Svr
for kvi^r ; but in the oblique cases of patronomics, of
which not a few occur in it, it observes consistent adhe-
rence to the old spelling, v/r. Thus, in point of penman-
ship it is the oldest record existing of the T. class ; T.
itself being the latest.
(6.) When the whole list of miracles derived from Robert of
Benedict is gone through, we suddenly come, II., saga.
92,9.1,, on this strange declaration: '' Now of the great
" abundance of miracles which God Almighty bestowed
" on his worthy martyr Thomas we may write no more
" thereof, speaking by way of similitude, than a few
" small drops, tltat were brought hither by former men,
" which, in the name of God, we thus begin." The mira-
cles thus announced begin with the one related by Robert
of Cricklade in a letter to Benedict of Peterborouoli.
Ivi PREFA(!E.
The following miracles are, for some time, expressly
ascribed to Robert as the author, and evidently all are
tacitly understood to come from the same source. Not
one of these miracles, with the exception of the first,
is found in Benedict ; some few correspond to William
of Canterbury's, as far as the subject is concerned, but
are treated in a way which puts it altogether out of
question that he could be the source. (For references
see the list of miracles at the end of " collation.")
Here then is a clear evidence not only of the second
saga of T. being a composite one, drawn from two
independent sources, one Benedict of Peterborough, the
other Robert of Cricklade, but also of the miracle
records of the latter having been brought to Iceland
" by men of old," that is, having apparently been the
earliest miracle record that reached the country. Each
must once upon a time have formed a separate saga by
itself, which some editor found it convenient afterwards
to fuse into one. The strange thing is, however, that
of Benedict's large collection of miracles so few should
have been included in T., only 17 out of some 286 ;
Ave can only account for it by supposing that, what
we have in T. is only a fragment of what once was a
much laro'er work.
C (II., 260-261), corresponding fragmentarily to T., II.,
148-158, we take to be older than the T. ; the difler-
ences are slight, except in one instance, where C. has
decidedly a better and truer reading : meS ollu alaga-
laust= entirely unencumbered, i.e., free of all interest
(II., 260.,) for T.'s meS ollum lagalesti (IL, 148,,,,),
which has no definite sense ; but our interpretation of
the words seems to represent what the scribe had in his
mind. This fragment spells lætur (for lætr), II., 261,-,
móSr (for móSar), 261, i^.
Later addi- (7.) The additamenta to T. (T., II., 184-240) we need
tlOnstoThO- 2- 1 i 1 • n rm V ' J /
mas saga, notice but briefly. They are evidently the result of a
Thomas's scholai-'s afterthought, who collected them for
PREFACE. Ivii
the purpose of having the history relating to the hero as
complete as possible. He had observed, that the
canonization had not found its chronological place in
the previous narratives, the reason of which was that
it was not mentioned by the contemporary biographers,
possibly because it was not convenient to do so, since
it was a Roman act not solicited by any high authority
from England, and took place before the reconciliation of
the king with the church. Hence its anachronistic place
in T. The account of it, as well as that of the principal
events which are included in these additamenta, are
drawn from contemporary chroniclers, and probably other
sources as well, but are of much later authorship than
the rest of T. Though we class them, as we must, as
a portion distinct from the rest of the contents of T.,
they probably never formed a separate saga by them-
selves.
(8.) A fragment preserved in the Royal Library ofHomiktic
Stockholm, No. 2 in the Icelandic collection, already '
printed by linger in Helgra-manna sögur, II., 815-320.
It is a concise precis of a Thomas saga of which nothing
else is preserved, with the exception of the shreds of
the first leaf of fragment D. (see p. 1). The original .
of this abstract has differed from all other known
Thomas sagas. The name of the bishop of London
figures as Gunzilinus, though elsewhere as Gillibiarkr.
Thomas is made to go in person to fetch the })all from
the pope. His personal appearance is described in the
following manner : " He was of rather tall middle
" stature, courteous, dark of hair, with a rather long
'' nose, straight-faced, distinct in his speech, and clear
" spoken, bland in his discourse and at times somewhat
" stuttering ; he spoke through a smiling face, but
" with his speech there went neither laughter nor
" stuttering to any degree of fault, but it was deemed
" rather to give him an air of blitheness and grace."
It accounts for the dispute that rose out of the crown-
Iviii PREFACE.
# ing- of the younger Henry by making the Archbishop
refuse to perform the ceremony on the ground that there
ought not to be two kings in the same kingdom at one
and the same time. Otherwise it agrees in substance
with T. It would seem to have been intended to serve
as a commemoration homily for St. Thomas' day, because
it winds up, in homily fashion, with an exhortation to
the congregation to pra}" to the saint for various bless-
ings, such as peace, prosperity, good year, wealth,
happiness, long life, and eternal salvation.
ly. Authors of Thomas sagas.
With regard to the Icelandic authorship of T. and its
predecessors our information is very meagre. Two
persons, both priests, are certainly mentioned as authors
of Thomas sagas. In No. 586, 4to., in the Ama Magn.
collection at Copenhagen from the beginning of the
15th century, we read: — il/erkiligir tueir Kenne menn
BergGuim- bcroT orunsteins SOU z ion hestr, hafa skrifat lifs saup'u
Jon Hestr. virSulígs hcrra thomas cantuaríe7?sís erkíbps huorr med
sjnuryi hætte huersu hann þreytíiz fyrir guös krístnj j.
eíngla7iöj allt til pinjngar z ei J)uj siSr lief ir huorgi
þe/ra aukit grunduoll sialfrar saugunar er stendr j bok
þe/re er speculur/6 historíalí heiter,^ i.e., notable two
teachers (priests) Berg the son of Gunstein and Jon
" hestr " have wiitten the story of the life of the
worthy lord Thomas Cantuariensis archbishop, each in
his own way, hoAv he strove for the Church of God in
England even unto his passion, and none the less has
neither of them added to (?) the groundwork of the
story which stands in the book called speculum histo-
riale. — This is the oldest record we know of which
mentions by name Icelandic translators of Thomas saga.
This notice has found its way into a later writing
by a rustic savant, Jon Gudmundsson, called the
1 Cfr. Dr. Vigfusson in Felagsrit, xxiii. year, 1863, p. 148.
PREFACE. lÍX
learned, who flourished in the 17th century, with the
only diflierence that the name Jon hestr is turned into
Jon Hallsson icfr. Lvtill battur kyrkna rans, Arna Jon Hestr
Mao-n., No. 727, 4 to. fol. 17'^\ How this chano-e ni the identical
° ' . . . ' . ^ with Jon
name came about it is unimportant to inquire, as also, Haiisson
how the priest who is here called Jon hestr is identified Hoit.
by other later authorities with a Jon " holt," prebendary
of Hitardal, who died according to the Annals in 1802,
both surnames indicating, probably, one and the same
person. The important fact is, that two authors of
Thomas saga are known ; that the two sagas are inde-
pendent of each other, and that between the mentioning
of the two authors there lies an interval of a century.
Berg Gunsteinsson being referred to in the years 1201
and 1218. Of these authors nothing is otherwise known.
It has been supposed hitherto, with good reason, that
Berg Gunnsteinson was the author of the " Older
Thomas saga," that is to say, of the recension of which
fols. 2-4 of fragment D. are now the sole representatives
left,^ and, as we think, wrongly, that Jon Hestr or Holt
was the author of T. According to the above notice, both
men wrote a saga of Thomas up to his passion. The
second, composite, saga of T., which is the saga of the
miracles, is not con temijlated. Now, it is evident thatT. repre-
sents the
the saga told in T., I., and the sasa told in D. is really saga of Berg
^ ' . ' ° -^ Gunnsteins-
one and the same, with the difference, as we have stated ^on in a
popularised
above, that T. is a popularised descendant of D. ; the ^ovm.
saga, in the old acceptation of the term, that is, the his-
torical matter and framework, is the same in the main.
No Icelander of old would have classed them as two J^n Hestr
probably
difterent saoas. But the translation of the older Qua- t'le author
Ö ^ of the trans-
drilogus (No. 2, Royal Lib., Stock.), to which we have ^^H^'^^^! '^'^
referred already (p. liij, stands out as a work inde- ^^>-'"^-
pendent of T., both as to its fi*amework and language.
^ The Saga, represeuted by frag-
ment E., may also be due to the
same pen, though it formed an in-
dependent narrative from the begin-
ning. That it is a contemporary
production is evident.
Ix PREFACE.
We are aware that Professor Unger takes this saga to be
due to a Norwegian author, on the ground of its con-
taining a good many laxities of language and syntax,
that would not make it a particularly creditable Ice-
landic production. But be3^ond this there is nothing to
connect it Avith Norway, nor do these literary qualities
preclude it from being an Icelandic product, and the
codex itself comes from Iceland and is clearly of Ice-
landic workmanship. We are strongly inclined to think
that the author of this saga was none other than Jon
Hestr, or Holt. These surnames, whichever ma^^ be the
right one, have an un-Icelandic, but not at all an un-
Norwegian, sound — indeed we meet with a Norwei^ian
in the latter part of the 13th century, Bjarni, surnamed
/^esír (Flateyjarbók, HI., p. 153); there would, there-
fore, be nothing to hinder Jon Hestr, or Holt, having
really been a Norwegian, though he was domiciled in
Iceland.
V. Thomas saga and the sagas of Gudmund Arason.
It is supposed by some scholars that T. is the work of
Arngrim abbot of Thingeyrar, in Northern Iceland, ob.
1362.^ This Arngrim is the author of the .third and
youngest saga of bishop Gudmund of Holar, to which
we have referred already. The w^ork is a concoction of
two older sagas of the bishop, with slight additions from
other sources and a good deal of Arngrim's own inven-
tion. The first of these two older sagas, called " priests'
saga, Gu^mundar " (to which we have already referred
above, p. xxi.), deals with the events of Gudmund's life
up to the close of his priestly ofiice, and is originally
put to writing some time between 1212-20 (Biskupa
sogur, I., 407-486). The second, or " miS saga," from cca.
1320, deals with his checkered episcopal career (ib.
48G-558, 559-618). The connexion betw^een T. on one
1 See Thomas saga erkibyskups, eel. Unger. Christiania, 1869, III., xxx.
PREFACE. Ixi
side and the ' mi^saga ' and Arngrim's compilation on the
other, constitutes such an interesting chapter in the Ice-
landic literature of Thomas of Canterbury that it must
be dealt with here in some detail.
In the ' miSsao-a ' of Gudmund occurs a lonof conversa-
tion between him and the archbishop Thorir of Drontheim,
which, though a forgery from beginning to end, is none
the less interesting, on account of the connexion it be-
trays with Thomas saga. Among other queries put to
the bishop of Holar by his Grace of Drontheim this was
one : " En hvat ætlar þú um sty rj old þá ena miklu og
" bardaga, er þu ert viSstaddr, sva optliga sem er, hversu
" Gu^i liki þat, því at þat er fornt mál, at ' eingi taki
" ' sva Í tjornina at eigi ver^i votr af ' " (Bisk, sog.,
I., 587), i.e.j '' what have you to say about those great
" disturbances and fights whereat thou art present, fre-
" Quently as they come to pass, how such may like God,
" for it is an old saw, that no one so taketh hold on a
" tarn that he be not wet thereby ? The words " taki
" Í tjornina" have found their way into a poem on
the life of Gudmund by a 14th century poet, Einar
Gilsson (Biskupa sog., 11. , 102):
engi ''tekr" ok slett yfir slongvir
slungins gulls "i tjorn" at fullu,
reikna þat sva, " at " vist '^ ei vökni," kc.
as well as into Arngrim's own compilation (ib. 97) :
'' f)vi at enginn tekr J)urr 1 tjorn." It is curious, that
it should not have struck the editors of Biskupa sögur,
that the phrase " at taka i tjorn " was an impossible
Icelandic grammar, or, at least, a very questionable.
But fragment E. clears up the corruption which sticks
here in the one word " tjorn" in an interesting manner.
In discussing Thomas' title to saintship, Benedict, in his
introduction to the miracles, brings forth, as an irre-
fragable proof of its goodness, that the Archbishop was
pope Alexander's adherent, and scorned the opponent,
K541. e
Ixii pk?:face.
the antipope Octavian. Now, so argues Benedict, it
Alexander had been the really schismatic pope in the
eyes of God, Thomas, the adherent of such an enemy of
God, could not have wrought miracles, kc. The sen-
tence with which we are concerned r\ins thus : — Qui si
esset schismaticus, nequaquam martyr noster a tanta labe
transisset immunis, nee picem tetigisset quin ab ea in-
quinatus fuisset^ (Materials, II., 24), and is in E. (T., II.,
275, i7_i9) thus rendered ; " ok ef hann væri þrætuma^r
" þaa mætti þessi Thomas eigi vera skirr e^a reinn frá
" þeim fleck þvi at eingi tekr sou i tioTV'ím {i.e., tjöruna)
" er eigi lo^i vi^."
As it is evident that the author of Gudmund's saga
borrowed this argument from Thomas saga, so also it is
equally clear that to him, and not to a later scribe, is
due the corruption of tiorvna into tjörnina. In the
answer, namely, put by the saga writer into Gudmund's
mouth, he makes the bishop miss altogether the point
of the proverb, and talk a great deal of nonsense to the
effect that he and his followers, " taka í eitt vatn," and
" taka Í eina tjörn," under the vague impression that
the question was about sharing all things in common
(cfr. Biskupa sogur, I., 580-582).
In another passage in this conversation we also discern
an echo of Thomas saga. The canons of Drontheim,
some of whom, like Alexander's cardinals, in the case of
Thomas, are made to take up an unfriendly attitude
towards bishop Gudmund, and to ask him, amongst
other things, if it was true that, according to report, he
allowed two meals of meat to be eaten on Fridays in
Iceland. This he declared to be unfounded. "Then
" they asked, 'Allowest thou not meat to be eaten if
" ' Christmas day fall on a Friday ? ' ' Certainly, I allow
" ' that,' said bishop Gudmund. 'What dost thou do then
" ' with the Friday ? ' said they. Bishop Gudmund ques-
^ Quotation from Eccli. xiii. 1.
PREFACE. Ixiii
'' tioneJ : ' What, indeed, do you do with the darkness,
" when light cometh into the house ? ' They answered
*' nothing. Then spoke bishop Gudmund : ' the Lord's
" ' day is His birthday, but not a fast day, for so flieth
" ' the fast for the feast, as darkness for light, so that it
" ' vanisheth utterly.' " Clearly this was an unusual
Christmas custom introduced by bishop Gudmund. The
origin of it we have in T. (I., 512, ^^_^o\ " He (Thomas),
" together with all the others within the hall, eateth
'' meat, saying, that the reverence for the glory of that
" feast, on whatsoever day it might happen to fall, was
" the better shown forth, by not abstaining from any
" allowable gifts of God " — ut ea die, quæ sexta feria
erat et natalis domini dies, carnibus, sicut alii, vesce-
retur; eas tali die sumere, quam abstinere religiosius
judicans. Both the sagas which are contained in T.
were, therefore, not only known to the author of the
' mi^saga ' of GuSmund, but supplied him with materials
for his own composition, and were possibly already
tlien fused into one nari^ative.
Clear as is the connexion thus pointed out between
T. and the 'mi^saga' of bishop Gudmund, the relation
between ArnoTÍm's Gudmund-sacra and T. is demon-
strably still closer. Arngrim, in his day famed for
learning, acted for some time as official in the diocese of
Holar ; but his moral conduct was such, that the clergy
deposed him as official, and pressed him so hard as abbot,
that he not only resigned that office, but renounced bene-
dictinism, on the plea that he had resolved to enter the
Franciscan order and to join a house of it abroad. In
1358, however, an archiepiscopal legation reinstated him
in his office, and the Franciscan pretext was forgotten.
His saga is evidently composed with a view of being
dedicated to some foreign potentate, obviously the Arch-
bishop of Drontheim. In his description of Iceland he
takes the standpoint of a foreign writer, as if the country
was not his own (Bisk, sög., II., 5, 111), carrying tlic
e 2
Ixiv PREFACE.
delusion so far even as to explain what is meant by the
term " alþing " (II., 05), which makes the supposition
probable, that the archiepiscopal legates imposed the
composition of the work on the clerical misdemeanant
as a sort of honourable expiatory fine. At first sight
the language of Arngrim's saga bears such a striking
resemblance to that of T., that one is tempted at once
to accept him as the author of the latter. But on closer
inspection the first illusion vanishes. Through the first
half of Gudmund's saga this resemblance in language is
striking, but after that, when the author's stock of re-
miniscences was exhausted, the divergence becomes easily
discernible. Even through the first half of the saga
we can trace in the thick of the reminiscences from T.,
which all bear the stamp of a translator hampered by
the foreign idiom, glimpses of the native feeling of an
original writer. But we shall best be able to decide the
question of his authorship of T. by comparing it to his
own saga
Thomas s. Gudmund's saga.
Herra i\.drianus páfi Hann (Adrianus pafi
fjor^i me^ því nafni vígÖi fjórSi) víg^i til krúnu Fri^-
Fridrek hinn fyrsta keis- rek keisara fyrsta. me'ð því
ara til krúnu, ok þvi sýnd- nafni ; sj'-ndist því keisar-
ist keisari nokkuru hæfr í inn hlý^inn heilagri Róma
hlý^ni vit Róma kirkju kirkju me'San þeir lifSu
meSan þeir lif^u bá^ir. Enn bá'ðir ; en eptir fjögr ár
sva sem herra Adrianus herra páfans, sem hann er
var út hafinn skutlast kar- út hafinn, brestr upp mikit
dinales í tvo sta^i ; birtir rugl i sjálfri Bóma fyrir
þá Fri^rekr hvat í hon- nýjan páfa kosning, þvi at
um bjó, þvi at hann fylgdi sjálfir cardinales skutlast
þeim cardinalibus er verr í tvá sta'Si ; birtir þá Fri^ -
höf'Su. Hefja þeir allir rekr keisari hverr hann
samt til páfadóms sterkan var, þvi me'S fylgi byskup-
þrætumann er hét Octovi- anna ok afli ríkisins veitir
PREFACE. Isv
anuS; enn si^an vettir cardi- liann þeim cardinalibiis er
nales kjósa þann mann, er verr hof 5u, því at þeir allir
þann tíma hét Eollant enn samt kjosa digTan þiætii-
síSan Alexander tertius. mann er Octovianus het.
Ok at beim kosnino-i snvst Annan veo^ me^ cardinal!-
HlöSvir Frakka konuno-r bus stendr Louis Frakka
me^ cardinalibiis, ok Hein- konuno-r ok Heinrekr An-
rekr, nii koniingr yfir Eng- daga viæ England skonungT.
landi, enn þann tíma her- Kjósa þeir þann mann er
tugi Andagaviæ ok sá kosn- þá het Rollant canceler.
ingr öflgaí^ist, því at GiiS Efldist sa kosningr, þvíat
viídi (I., 90-92). Fridrekr GuS vildi (Bisk, sög., II.,
keisari ferr sva ofdi-ukkinn 3, 14-25) ■ — Fri^reki keisara
me^ ilskunni, at þegar ann- voru kirkjunnar náöir þá
arr villupáfinn valt, hóf svá lei'Sar, at æ hóf hann
hann annan alt til :QórSa annan iDrætumann,. er ann-
nianns (^'6. 92, ^.g). arr valt or (1-6. 3, 28-30)-
Here the ao-reement between the two sao-as is too
close to depend on one common source only. Evidently
one is the source of the other. In Thomas saga the in-
troduction of these historical remarks is to the purpose.
In Gudmund's saga they are utterl}^ iiTelevant, and
therefore borrowed.
The author's object, though not openly avowed, was
evidently to make bishop Gudmund all through as
complete a counterfeit of Thomas of Cajnterbury as the
different framework of circumstances would allow.
Thus, in the enumeration of the visions prognosticating
the future greatness of Gudmund (Bisk, sög., II., 7-8),
the visions prophetic of Thomas's fame are obviously
the pattern from which Arngrim copied. As the saga
proceeds this intention is pronounced most clearly. Out
of many passages which might be quoted in support of
this statement, we may content ourselves with one :
" What man is there, indeed, who, on so many occasions,
" resembles that jewel, Thomas Cantuariensis, as this
" very Gudmund in his trials. A short while ago it was
" read " — lithi var lesit, a phrase out of Thomas saga.
]xvi TREFACE.
natural in the case of one who merely copies what others
have written before him, unnatural in the case of an
oriííinal writer — '' how he was in a common case with
" Thomas, when his kinsfolk were scattered about ;
" secondly, when unshaken he stood up for the right of
" the church ; thirdly, when he was charged with break-
" ing the peace by disturbances and stubborn action ;
" fourthly, when he fled and escaped from his natural
" enemies; so that in his praise, in common (with
" Thomasj, might be said the same word of the prophet :
" laqueus contritus est et nos liberati sumus." The irre-
levancy of this comparison only affords a strengthened
proof of the intention of the author. In the personal
description of GuSmund we have this parallelism :
Thom. s. Gudm s.
hvass Í hugviti (I., 28, j^) — var hann þegar hvass í
glöggr í allri grein til hugviti ok gloggrar greinar
brjosts ok bækr (ib., 20^ ^.o) bæ'Si til bækr ok brjóst-
— indæll ok ástúSigr í vitru (Bisk, sög,, II.,
allri vi^ræSu (ib., 28, n) — 11, ,6-27) — mjok ástúSigr
hann lær^i þat eina er var hann bæöi frændum ok
hann lifði sjálfr (ib., vinum (ib., 21) — hvat er
104, 110). hann lær^i a'Sra me^ or^-
Hún læÆ hann at vir^Sa um, fylldi hann fyrri sjalfr
ok vegsama hina sælumey, í sínura verkum (ib. 16,29).
GuSs mo^ur Mariam, um- sæla Gu^s mo-Sur Mariam
framm alia helga a^ra (I., elskaSi hann ok tilba^ um
1 8^9-11)- fram alia heilaga menn
(ib., 1-, 32).
Here the dependence on T. is all the more obvious
that in the ' prests saga ' of Gudmund, where we should
expect to find these details recorded, they are not even
alluded to as distinctive characteristics of his youth.
We may still adduce a few illustrations :—
Thom. s. Gudm. s.
eru þá li^Ligar dyr ok lofut er þá orlof til inngöngu
innganga (II. 130,6-7)— Sá því at kirkjan er upplokin
PREFACE.
Ixvii
ma&' er vel hugSi at önd-
verSri sögunni (ib. 92, ^-) —
MeiiT enn einuQi J)eirra
mundi þat fagrt synast at
bera hæstu rödcl í vígslu-
ger^ svá mikils herra (I.,
^^y lo-ii) — 6^^ ^^ vi^i' ma^r
huglei-Sir (ib., 68,67) — niá
þat hiigiei^a (ib., 88, g.^^) —
Taka þeir orlof ok gera
sinn veo' framm til Sen-
nonisborgar (ib., 266, 15,) —
sitr í samlialdinni i^ran
allan tíma, &c. (ib., 174, ^J
— Eio'i höfum vér fundit
dao'stætt nær si»naSr Thó-
mas var kjörinn (ib., 86, 04)
— tárlig gó^ýst (ib, 104,V)
— Nú er um farit f^ær
framm-sýnir er fyrir runnn
sæliim Thóme (ib., 16, ig) —
er piltrinn nefndr Thóraas,
sem Gu^ haf^i löngu dis-
ponerat (ib., 14,19) oftliga
kemr á eitt mót góSr vili
Gu^s ok illr ok vondi' vili
inanns (ib., 70, §) at jþetta
stríS mætti lí^a, enn fribr
formerast (ib. 284, j.,) — ann-
arr hlutr fellr sá til, er
mikla hræring lerSir af (ib.,
144, ^) — þeir rangturna
allar gerSir erkibyskups ;
þat er liann talar, þýSa þeir
til vinstri handar, and the
])assagcs following (ib.,
178, 1, sqq.) — hann vill sýna
ok li(5ug (ib., 17, 4.5) — Sá
ma^r sem vel huosa^i hvat
nú hefir lesizt (ib. 21)
— Skipar biskup Sk al-
ii oltsnsis sira GuSmundi
liæstu rödd yfir alia kenni
menn (at the translation of
St. Thorlakas, ib., 23, ^s) ma
þat vitr ma^r vel hugleiSa
(ib., 25, -). — Kemr hann
Í þann bæ, sem hann gerir
sinn veg, at þar liggr maSr
. . . svá ... at samhald-
in kör var hans heimili
(ib., 25, 25-27) — foi' einn
bóndi dagstætt at sækja
tíbir (ib., 26, is) — tárligri
góSfysi (28, 13) — Fjrr var
ritat, hversu spar ok for-
synir bendii fyrir löngu
biskupliga tign sira GuS-
mundar (ib., 38, .,3) — nti na-
læoist sá tími soo-unnar er
drottinn . . . hefir lougu
disponerat (ib., 38, .yi-^e) —
optliga sækir eitt mot gó'Sr
vili Gu"(Ss ok illr vili manns
(ib., 40, 27), utterly irre-
levant to the circum-
stances.— hlutast til góÖir
menn, at friSr mætti form-
erast (ib., 63, 32) — fj'rir
jDa hræring, sem nii gengr
Í heruSin (ib., 67, .j,,) —
ilestar hans gjörÖir voru
afþýddar ok hneigbar til
vinstri handar, ölmusur
Ixviii PREFACE.
bæ^i GuSi ok mönniim sitt bans til au^nav, vigslur
hægri handar umskifti (ib., til ofdirfSar, einoi^S til
84, g). ákefSar ok iifri^ar (ib.,
93, 1.3) — fyrir hægri bandar
skifti græ'Sara vars (ib.,
135, 7).
Arngrim Words cliaracteristic of T. re-occur in Gu^m. s., siicb
SSiTAom as dagstæddr (above), frjalsi (140, ^g)? iUing (117,15),
hig^'their''" or^flaug {Q(),^i, 118>3i), staddr, fixed, actual (133,5),
lue power, ^^j^g^^^ ^^ inconvenieuce with hnportionities or the like
(140, 33), &c., but in a manner that betrays only loose
familiarity Avith their real power in T., and gives the
impression that they are, like most of the adoptions from
T., introduced as uncritical imitative adornments of style.
In the case of ^ dagstætt ' and the phrase ' gera sinn
veg ' — to mention no more — the thoughtlessness of the
imitator shows itself, in the former.instance, by foisting
an adverbial sense on a participle, and forcing it in
where it is not wanted at all, in the latter, by using in
the absolute sense of iter facere the phrase " gera sinn
veg," which T. never introduces without construing it
with the local adverbs of motion frá or fram, &;c. ; this
phrase, too, Arngrim thrusts into a sentence where it
is not in the least required to make sense, but figures
as the veriest piece of imitative pedantry.
He uses On the other hand Arngrim uses a test word, ölmusa
* ölmusa in . . , . , .
a sense in alms, frequently in a sense m which it never occurs in
which It . .
never occurs T., though it is met with there over and over again,
in the sense, namely, of alms-person, alms-people (46, 7,
105, 40, 143, 18, 144, 13, &c.). If Arngrim was the author
of T., we submit that he could not have escaped leaving
behind him the evidence of that fact in this use of
and 'god- olmusa. Gó'Sfysi, devotion, another word of exceed-
lysi ma j ' j
like manner, ingly frequent occuiTcnce in T., Arngrim, on the other
hand, shuns, though not altogether. It occurs in two
places in his saga : 28, 13, where it is a direct quotation
from T., and 15, 3, in the sentence : altaris embætti^
PREFACE. IxÍX
sjálft ílutti hann ok framdi me^ svá mikilli gæzku ok
gó^fýsi af guShræzlu, where it is evident that Arngrim
had no clear notion at all as to the real meaning of
gó^fýsi ; it was for him an archaism thrown in from
memory at haphazard.
To sum up then. ArnoTÍm set to work writino- Gud- Reasons
Hffiiiiist) his
mund's saga for the express purpose of establishing as being the
complete a parallelism between his hero and Thomas
of Canterbury, as he could. For this reason, or from
the love of the subject, he had made himself so familiar
with the language of Thomas saga, that he wrote in it
as in an acquired dialect. In the first half of Gudmund's
saga his reminiscences abound in great number ; in the
second they become much more scarce, and the two
dialects of Gudm. s. and T. diverge perceptibly. As a
natural consequence Arngi'im uses the phraseology
of T. in the manner of an imitator. To him T. is a
Ciceronian classic whom he strives to rival, but whom
he fails to reach, because his ideal itself is an imitation
of Latin, and thus Arngrim's native idiom asserts itself
now and again, even where the reminiscences come
thickest, whereby his language is rendered uneven
throughout, but especially in the first part of the saga.
He uses in forced senses and constructions the terms
he admires in his original. He uses words commonly
occurring in T. in peculiar senses of his own, entirely
foreign to T. Where he is least fettered by his ideal,
his language, in spite of sustained straining at the
opposite qualities, manifests clearly that tenuity and
absence of dignity which characterise the 14th century
literature. Beyond the superficial resemblance of the
style there is no ground on which Arngrim's author-
ship of T. could be established. He cannot possibly be
the author of the recension T.
Ixx
PREFACE.
T. collated,
not neces-
sarily to
actual, but
to existing
soiu'ces.
Dates of
contem-
porary bio-
grapliies
fixed in
order to
make the
collation
more intel-
ligible.
V. Collation.
We have already indicated in the history of Thomas
sao-a, how various records relatino^ to Thomas of Canter-
bury found, at various times, their way to Iceland ; most of
them indeed at an early period. The earliest arrivals vrere,
undoubtedly, the contemporary biographies ; later fol-
lowed contemporary and other chroniclers. Out of these
authorities the saga grew into its present shape, covering
at last a period of 50 years after the death of the arch-
bishop ; for, as it now^ stands, it terminates with the trans-
lation and enshrinement in 1220. It is, at this time of
day, a hopeless task to trace the successive stages of this
growth. The only alternative left us is ,to show, how
and where T. agrees with existing sources. But in order
to save space we must conduct the collation on general
lines, except in the more important and characteristic
portions of the narrative. We must also have it under-
stood that, in pointing out similarity to, or agreement
wdth, this or that source, we do not thereby always indi-
cate a direct dependence of T. on such originals. Our
duty is fulfilled Vvdien the references to existing sources
are given. For convenience sake the j'eferences to the
Latin authorities are given from Canon Robertson's
' Materials for the history of Thomas Becket,* in this
series.
But in order to place the collation in a clearer light, —
having regard especially to those readers, wdio may be
supposed to be less familiar with, or have less easy access
to, the sources of T., — we deem it right and necessary to
introduce it with notices on the known contemporary
writers, the chief aim of which shall be to fix, as far as
can be done, the date at which each respective biography
was written. This is a matter of great importance, not
only because it has not been done before, but because it
is the keystone of a critical treatment of the contempo-
rary Lives, in which, as might be expected, very numerous
PílEFACE. Ixxi
cases of inter-dependence are observable. Thus, speak- fiic bio-
. . , praphers
incr crenerally, it is quite clear that Garnier, the so-called fail into two
° ^ . . . . main groups.
Roger de Pontigny and Grim form a distinct group by
themselves. In the earlier part of the story there is a
close agreement between these three biographers, both
as to arrangement and treatment of the subject. All
three mention facts on which other authorities are silent,
and, as a rule, an event mentioned by one is mentioned by
all. All three, too, make a special point of professing their
utmost care in making their narratives absolutely truth-
ful. The rest of the biographers deal with the story, in
the main, on independent grounds, when we except
William of Canterbury, who appears here and there to
fall in with the manner and method of the afore-named
group.
From evidence supplied by the contemporary bio-
gTaphers themselves we are led to infer that they wrote
their several contributions in about the following'
order.
1. Benedict of Peterborough, so styled, because i^^'isoiis for
after having been prior of Christchurch, Canterbury, Benedict of
from 1175, he became abbot of Peterboroiiofh in 1177, i?^^?"sii
in which office he spent the rest of his life, ob. 1193.
We place him the first in the series from the following
considerations.
At the end of his life Fitzstephen introduces the fol- F'tz-
ci t ^ . T . • i T Stephens
lowing notice : — "Sed de miraculis ejus m Anglia, sacer- evicieuce.
" dotorum et bonoruin virorum testimonio declaratis, et
" in capitulo Cantuariensis ecclesiæ publico recitatis,
" codex conscriptus exstat, præter alia quæ longe lateque
" in Gallia, in Hibernia, et ubique terrarum operatus est
" sanctus Thomas, qui bus memoriæ commendandis defuit
" qui scriberet." Here we have two distinct facts at-
tested to ; first, that at this time a codex existed at Can-
terbury containing the record of the miracles which had
taken place in England ; secondly, that other miracles,
chiefly foreign, were already collected, but no one had
Ixxii niEFACE.
been found as yet to edit them properly. They existed,
on slips, we may infer, in the rough state of the first
delivery from'the devout pilgrims' lips. These two points
we have to consider separately.
Two persons Firstly, then, we know, that only two persons, connected
with Canter- with Canterbury, wrote " Miracles," namely, Benedict
'3iiracies.' and William of Canterbury. One of the two must have
been the author of the " magnus codex " in question, and it
is easy to show that, beyond doubt, that one was Benedict.
Benedict's Several MSS. of his miracula terminate with the fourth
of the book of Canon Robertson's edition,^ which the learned
contained Editor accepts as proof that orio-inally Benedict's own
only three . .
books. work probably terminated with that book. But we go
boolSdded further, and say that, '' finally," it terminated with the
authorf ^ fourtli book, whicli is manifestly a later addition, though
by the same writer, subjoined to the preceding three
books with a new preface, and deals with occurrences of
later dates, embodying foreign as well as home miracles.
This fourth book is written after 1177, as is clear from a
iireat fire which in that year occurred at Rochester, beinof
The miracles ' o
of the first referred to. With the first three books the matter is
three books ^ n i • i
au refer to different. Here all the mn*acles, with not one excep-
England. . . ■*-
tion, occur in England, and, as far as they are amenable
to chronological tests, all refer to the first year after the
Distinction murdcr. This is the main distinction between Benedict
between
Benedict's and William, who mixes up throughout Ene'lish and
and WÚ- ^ ' ...
liam's foreio-n, particularly Irish, miracles, with no special
miracles. o ' i J ' ' ^ i
regard to chronology at all. Benedict's '' miracula "
therefore must be meant by that " codex magnus " which
Fitzstephen mentions.
Time of Secondly, to what time does this notice of Fitz-
' Stephen refer, and what is it that is pointed out by the
words, " præter alia . . . quibus memoriæ commendandis
" defuit qui scriberet " ? In his glorification of the mul-
tiplicity of the cures effected by the great " leech " at Can-
Kobertson, Materials, II., xxvii.
PREFACE. IXXÍÍÍ
terbuiy, Fitzstephen makes one allusion to time which,
though proving directly nothing, is yet not without its
indirect importance. He says, "Leprosi septem infra
" primum annum ibi sunt mundati." He would hardly
have mentioned the first year only, if he had written
several or many years after the murder ; in that case
such an allusion would have been somewhat inane.
But if he wrote a year or so after the murder, the ex-
pression would be quite natural. We shall now approach
this question more closely.
In the epistle dedicatory by the chapter of Canterbury
to Henry II., prefixed to the volume of miracles edited
by William of Canterbury, the following account is ren-
dered of that writer's labours in connection with the
compilation of the volume : — " evolutis a passione decem
" circiter et septem mensibus, tertia visione monitus,
" tandem fratri qui circa hæc operam dederat a principio
'' cooperator et coadjutor accessit. Cum enim vires ejus
" res incepta videretur excedere, et emergentia miracula
'' frater ille solus audire non sufficeret et scribere, . . .
" mane vero, congregatis fratribus et conquerentibus
" quod minus sollicita diligentia miraculis audiendis ad-
" hiberetur ... ex decreto communi injunctum est et
" huic partes suas interponere." The monk then, who
had been charged, from the date of the death of the
Archbishop, with taking down stories of miracles brought
by arriving pilgrims, had been able, for seventeen months,
alone to discharge this duty ; but from that point of time
the multiplicity of the miracles rendered a coadjutor
necessary, and for that post William was chosen, who
then steps in the appointed editor of the miracles. This
becomes still clearer from his preface to his own Life
of Thomas : " Vivensque in cœlo nihilominus servo suo
*' tenetur ex promisso. Nam cum miracula ejus, quæ in
" schedulis occultabat incorrecta et imperfecta, rogaretur
" a fratribus exponere transcribenda, ait ei, &;c." A col-
lection of miracles, therefore, jotted down on slips of
Ixxiv PREFACE.
parchment, had been aceamulated, and this accumulation
William was appointed, in July 1172, to reduce to a
properly edited whole. It is evident that Fitzstephen's,
" præter alia, quæ longe lateque in Gallia, in Hibernia,
" et ubique terrarum operatus est sanctus Thomas,"
can refer to nothing but to that, which is meant by
William's " miracula quæ in schedulis occultabat in-
" correcta et imperfecta." Equally clear is it that Fitz-
stephen's " quibus memoriæ commendandis defuit qui
scriberet," resolves itself, at a later moment, into the in-
junction of the chapter, " injunctum est et huic partes
" suas interponere," and William's "... rogaretur a
" fratribus exponere transcribenda." It then follows, that
Benedict's miracles, in their original shape, were written
before Fitzstephen wrote ; that he wrote before seventeen
months had elapsed from the murder ; and further that,
fr-om that date, WiUiam begins to edit the book of
miracles which goes by his name.
Another We are able to adduce another, and an important evi-
timeof dence in suj)port of the early date to which we assign the
' compilation of Benedict's " Miracula." As paragraph LII.
of that work he introduces a letter written to him by
Robert of Cricklade, prior of St. Frideswide's, Oxford,
wherein the latter sets forth, how he was cured by the
water of St. Thomas of a hurt in his leg received by an
accident out in Sicily. Robert begins his letter by stating
that he had come by the mishap, " præteritis jam ferme
" duodecim nnnis aut eo amplius ^ ;" and by the Icelandic
translation, which proceeds from a fuller original than
that which is preserved in the now extant MSS. of
Benedict, we are informed that he was out in Italy on
an errand which he would rather not mention publicly.
What this errand was we learn from the " Register"
of St. Frideswide's, preserved in the library of Corpus
Christi College, Oxford, No. clx., which contains, among
' Mat., II. 97.
PREFACE. Ixxv
other documents relating to that priory (p. 23G), a con-
firmation by Pope Hadrian IV. of its privileges and
properties.^ The document is a most minute list of all
things belonging to the institution, evidently framed by
one thoroughly acquainted with the matter even to the
utmost detail; that is, indeed, by the prior himself.
After the heading, "Confirmatio Adriani Papæ," it
begins : " Adrianus episcopus dilectis filiis, Roberto
" priori ecclesiæ Sanctæ Frideswidæ de Oxonia," &;c.
Though not included in the editions of the privilegia
of this pope, nor mentioned by Jaffe in his Regesta
Pontificum Romanorum, there is no reason to doubt
its authenticity. The business, on which Prior Robert
was out in Italy was, therefore, to obtain papal con-
firmation of the privileges of St. Frideswide's. Now
Pope Hadrian IV. reigned 1154-59. Prior Robert
could therefore not have obtained from him this con-
firmation later than the year 1158-59. Writing, as he
himself says, 12 years or more afterwards, fixes the date
of his letter to Benedict, and, at the same time, of
Benedict's Miracula, to the year 1171-72 ; which tallies
exactly with the conclusion we have come to from
Fitzstephen s evidence.
Thus, then, we have a certain date ascertained for the Benedict's
compilation of the miracles. But Benedict wrote a
passion too, and, according to the opinion of some scho-
lars, a " Life " as well. As to this latter point T. states
expressly, that he wrote " many and beautiful things of
" the laudable life, departure (passion), and miracles of
'* the archbishop."- No doubt this statement is a faithful contem-
reproduction of a contemporary original, yet other con- TmS ^^^*
temporary authorities gainsay it. Roger de Pontigny iuuini
mentions that, when he wrote, Benedict, then a prior of life of
Canterbury, had only written " de his quibus post mor-
1 Dugdale, ed. Caley, &c., vol. ] - T., II., 44.
ii., 147. I
IxXVi PREFACE.
" tern Dominus sanctum suum mirificavit."^ Grim, how-
ever, also writing at the time, says, that he wrote both
" martyrium and miracula." ^ Neither authority knows
anything of his having written a Life of the Archbishop.
A later, yet contemporary, author, Elias of Evesham,
states distinctly : " Benedictus enim abbas Burgi de fine
" tantum et de his quæ post finem contigerant, scripsit.'^ "
These authorities seem also borne out by the fact, that
Benedict's work is first laid under contribution by the
compiler of the Quadrilognis, when the story comes to
deal with the events which were immediately connected
The value with the murder. None of these authorities, however, were
evidence, dh^ectly connected with Canterbury. None of them knew
either a Life which certainly was in existence when they
Avi'ote, namely Fitzstephen's, Elias of Evesham not even
the Life by Grim, which makes us hesitate to take
their evidence as conclusive. Now, in a passage, derived
Probability from Benedict's passion and inserted in the Quadrilogus
ins written prior, wc read : " In finibus enim transmarinis adhuc
a Life of ^ \
the^Arch- <' positus, duobus abbatibus, Pontiniaci scilicet et Yallis
" Lucentis, sicut irrœscvipsimus, passurum se esse mar-
" tyrium et in ecclesia occidendum manifeste prædix-
" erat."^ It is supposed that the words, ''sicut præ-
" scripsimus," are inserted by the compiler of the Quad-
rilogus. It is possible that such may be the case, though
we should not have expected him to express himself
so personally ; sicut antea scriptum est, or some such
neutral statement, would have been more natural, and
more true. Besides, the compiler is very careful not to
add anything of his own. But granting that the words
are due to the compiler of the Quadrilogus, we have be-
fore us a sentence which does not yet seem quite natural.
At the time, when Benedict wrote, there probably was as
yet no Life of Thomas in existence. But this notice
1 Mat., IV. 2. I s Mat., IV. 425.
- Mat., II. 448. I ^ Matt., II. 12 ; IV. 395.
PREFACE. IXXVÍÍ
baldly introducing two unknown abbots, to whom the
Archbishop foretold his death, obviously has its reason
d'etre in the supposition, that the reader was familiar with
the real background of the prediction, the very vision by
which it was caused, and from which it derived its true
significance. This familiarity, on the part of the reader,
could not be presumed by the writer, unless he knew
that a Life, containing the story of the vision, was in
circulation, which it was certainl}^ not at the time, the
two authors who mention it, William of Canterbury and
Herbert of Bosham, both writing later than Benedict ;
or else, bore in his mind that he had set it forth in
writing himself, which means, that he had written a
life of Thomas.
In the Icelandic saga only two authors of Lives of
Thomas are mentioned by name, namely, Benedict and
Robert of Cricklade. The more we examine that saga,
the more we are inclined to the opinion, that some con-
fusion in the names of these two authors may have
taken place. It seems, for instance, somewhat strange,
that an inmate of St. Frideswide's, Oxford, should have
been so familiar with the personal relations between
archdeacon Thomas and archbishop Theobald, as the
passage betrays which in T. (I., 36) is ascribed to prior
Robert. The same observation also applies to the notice
of the secret purpose which guided archbishop Theobald
in introducing his archdeacon to king Henry (T. L,
44-46), and to the description given of the first cause
of the dissent, which is peculiar to the Icelandic saga,
yet, ,as we show in the collation, probably the most
coiTect, of all the accounts given of that matter in the
contemporary Lives (T. I., 138). In all these points
the author betrays personal acquaintance with the actors,
and special insight into the secrets of the archiepiscopal
entourage. These, not to mention others, are matters
on which we might expect an inmate of Canterbury to
speak with that certainty which T. betrays ; but which
K541. f
Ixxviii
PREFACE.
we could hardly expect an Oxonian, collecting biographical
material after the Archbishop's death second hand, to have
written about so positively. We cannot withhold the
opinion that in T. the subject-matter must be chiefly
divided between Benedict and Robert of Cricklade, and
that by some confusion on the part of the Icelanders
they ascribed to the latter what was really due to the
pen of the former. So much is certain, that the contri-
butions of both authors were among the earliest impor-
tations to Iceland of Thomas literature, and that the
miracles written by these authors were fused together
perhaps as early as A.D. 1200.
Fitzstephen. 2. WiLLiAM FiTZSTEPHEN (filius Stephani) was One of
the trusted and confidential servants of Thomas, both as
chancellor and Archbishop. He describes his relations
to him in these words : — " Ipsius boni archipræsulis et
martyris Thomæ vitam et passionem ego Willelmus,
filius Stephani, scribere curavi : ejusdem domini mei
concivis, clericus, et convictor ; et ad partem sollicitu-
dinis ejus oris ipsius invitatus alloquio, fai in can-
cellaria ejus dictator; in capella, eo celebrante, sub-
diaconus ; sedente eo ad cognitionem causarum,
epistolarum et instrumentorum quæ offerebantur lec-
tor, et aliquarum, eo quandoque jubente, causarum
patronus. Concilio Northamptoniæ habito, ubi maxi-
mum fuit rerum momentum, cum ipso interfui ;
passionem ejus Cantuariæ inspexi ; cætera plurima,
quæ hie scribuntur, oculis vidi, auribus audivi ; quæ-
dam a consciis didici relatoribus." ^ He was one of
the three who, out of all the followers of the Archbishop,
did not fly away panic-stricken from him in his last
The.«iateof moments.^ His Life of the Archbishop which, as we
have proved already, was written within seventeen months
after the death of the latter, is one of the most valuable
contributions to the literature on the murdered prelate,
1 Mat., III. 1-2.
2 Mat. ib. 139.
PREFACE. IXXÍX
and shows the author to have been really superior to
the other writers in the true instincts of a biogi'aphical
chronicler. It is a remarkable fact, that his life, quite
as favourable to the Archbishop as any of the rest, and
quite as unfavourable to the King, should not be referred
to by any contemporary biographer, nor Fitzstephen's
name be even mentioned once.
To this day this has been a puzzle to the historians I'l^o^abie
•^ ^ reasons why
of Thomas. It has been sugo-ested, that the reason of^is,^®^\8
oo ' unknown to
this silence might be, that Fitzstephen had offended the comem-
o r poraries.
partisans of the Archbishop, by taking too lukewarm an
interest in the cause of the church. But after their
hero's death nothing could have been more welcome to a
party so offended than Fitzstephen's thorough-going and
unmistakeably whole-hearted glorification of him.
In our opinion this silence is to be accounted for by a
different theory. The obvious suggestion is, that the
contemporary writers did not know of the existence of
this Life ; that its author had his own reasons for not
allowing it to pass into public circulation, until the
time had passed, within which the contemporary Lives
were written. It was composed at a time, when the
passions of both parties ran at their highest, and by
an author, who was so peculiarly circumstanced, that
the publication of it would certainly be detrimental, if
not altogether fatal, to his personal interests. He shows
himself to have been a polished man of the world, and
an easy courtier. He, an official of the Chancery and
an avowed partisan of the archbishop, succeeded by a
scholarly addi'ess to king Henry, besides other means,
no doubt, to 'purchase peace and grace for himself at
a time, when the rest of the archbishop's friends were
persecuted and banished without mercy. Now Fitz-
stephen is identified by a very learned authoiity with a
person of that name who, in the first year after the murder,
was appointed sheriff of Gloucestershire, and afterwards
acted as judge itinerant, probably to his death, which
f 2
Ixxx
PREFACE.
John of
Salisburj'.
His friend-
ship with
and rela-
tions to
Thou as.
"Why he is
placed the
third in the
catena.
is stated to have occurred in 1191.^ In such circum-
stances reasons of common prudence would naturall}^
suggest to the author the risk he might run of giving
offence in high quarters by allowing the biography to
be published. What more natural then, than that
during king Henry II.'s lifetime (till 1189) he should
have withheld it from publication ? If so, it could not
have been known to any of the other biographers, the
last of whom, Herbert, finished his Life in 1186-87.
3. JoHX OF Salisbury, bishop of Chartres 1176-
1180, universally regarded by his contemporaries as
the most eminent English man of letters of the time,
studied in France under Abelard and other famous
teachers and, returning to England, became secretary
to archbishop Theobald of Canterbury. On Thomas's
entering the service of that prelate, an attachment was
formed between him and the secretary, which lasted to
the former's hour of death unbroken, although John of
Salisbury did not hesitate, on given occasion, frankly
to remonstrate with him on his wilful impetuosity and
want of tact,- or to warn him against unwholesome
studies in ecclesiastical law."^ We place this author the
third in the series, because Hoger de Pontigny, in the
preface to his Life, mentions him, beside Benedict as,
apparently, the only other author he knew of a Life of'
Thomas : — " porro aliqua de beati viri vita et actibus
" pretiosæque mortis ejus triumpho vir illustris Johannes
" Saresberiensis claro quidem et fideli, sed admodum
" succincto edidit eloquio."-:^ Not only is the author
not yet a bishop, but Benedict is prior of Canterbur}^
at the time : — " De his autem quibus post moixem
" Dominus sanctum suum mirificavit, vir venerabilis
*' Benedictus, Cantuariensis ecclesiæ prior, copiosam
» E. Foss., Judges of England,
Biogr. Jurid. p. 270.
- Benedict, Mat., II. 9.
^ Ep. 138, J oh. Sarisb. opera,
ed. Giles, vol. i. p. 196.
4 Mat., IV. 2.
PREFACE. IXXXÍ
" texuit relationem." ^ John of Salisbury having been
appointed bishop in 1176 and Benedict prior of Can-
terbury in 1175, it follows, that John of Salisbuiy could
not have written his " succinctum eloquium " later than
1175-76. When he wrote, he himself states, however,
that many and voluminous writings on the subject were
already in existence : — ''■ nam gestorum ejus seriem nosse
" si cui forte in voto est, a magnis, quæ ah illo et de
" illo scripta sunt, voluminibus erit mutuanda."^ It is The brevity
■^ . . .01 his narra-
noticeable that this author's brevity gave a certain ti^e dis-
•^ ^ appointed
umbraöje to his contemporaries. Thus Roo-er de Pon- thecontem-
^ ^ ° ^ poranes,
tigny, who undoubtedly reflects general opinion on the
subject, says, continuing the above quotation, " in quo,
" etsi devotioni fidelium plurimum profuit, ad plenum
" tarn en minime satisfecit, compendiario (ut ipse asserit)
" utens sermone, ne ilia scilicet quæ tunc temporis
" notissima et vulgata habebantur diffusius et expres-
" sius prosequens, non tarn necessarius quam superfluus
'' videretur. Sane si hoc eidem Johanni facere placu-
" isset, nullus proculdubio utilius vel melius illo id
" efficere potuisset, cui et dicendi facultas erat incom-
" parabilis, et rerum gestarum certissima inerat no-
" titia."^
4. Edward Grim was a secular clerk of Cambridge, Edward
who happened to be on a visit to Canterbury at the p^^nt at
time of the murder,^ and was the only person present on * ^ ^^^ ^^'
the occasion who made any show of manly courage, with
the exception of the Archbishop himself. In warding
ofl the first blow aimed at the Archbishop he had his
arm severely wounded. His Life, which bears strong His Ufe
resemblance to those of Garnier and Roger de Pontig-ny, that of Gar-
was finished after Benedict's promotion to the priorate of Roger de
Christ Church, as we learn from a story he tells at the Date of ' *
composition.
1 ]yiat. VI. 2. 1 Cantcrbun's having left written
o -., XT -,^^ mi • • xi- 1 1 memoirs of his own life.
2 Mat., II. 302. This is the only j 3 ^^^^^ ^^ ^
mention we know of Thomas of 4 ^^^^ m ^ 139^ 49g^ .529-30.
Ixxxii PEEFACE.
end of his biography,^ setting forth how, through
Thomas's intercession, in a dream Benedict, who had
fallen into disfavour at court, was restored to royal
grace. In this story Benedict is thus referred to : —
" antequam prioratum Cantuariæ suscepisset, dominus
" Benedictus offensam regis incurrit ;" and again, — " igi-
" tur, ut prior aflfuit, exponitur visio ; " and further, —
" beatus igitur Thomas, cujus martyrium et miracula
" vir iste de quo loquimur eleganti stylo transmisit ad
" posteros/'^ The nature of the story would require that
Grim should have alluded to Benedict as abbot of Peter-
borough, if he really was so at the time, when this was
written ; but the fact that no allusion is made to him as
such, is a negative proof of Grim's having composed his
life during Benedict's priorate of Christchurch, that is,
before 1177. That he composed it after 1174 is evident
from the manner in which he alludes to king Henry's
penance at the martyr's tomb in that year.^ The date of
this life, therefore, must be between 1175-1177. When
^ , ^ , Herbert wrote his " Catalo2:us eruditorum Thomæ," in
Died before °
1186-87. 1186-87, he mentions Grim as "jam a rebus humanis
" exemptus."^
Of his manner as editor Grim, stronsfly remindinpf of
Hiseditorial ^ . „ . ^. "^ . . ®
procedure. Gamier, makes the profession : — '* Pie igitur parere
cupientes quorundam devotioni, . . . quæ ad nos-
tram pervenere notitiam, illorum scilicet relatu, qui
viventi familiarius adhæserunt, vel nos ipsi perspexi-
mus, ipsius de quo loquimur patrocinantibus mentis
stilo perstringere satagemus, præmonentes lectorem,
minime consonare veritati quicquid hinc alii vel scrip-
serunt vel scrip turi sunt, quod huic narrationi nostræ
probe tur esse contrarium."^
Roger de 5. RoGER DE PoNTiGNY. — By this name we quote
"Anonyiius the life, which Canon Bobertson, on ^'rounds of insuffi-
I." Identity ' =■
xincertain. ~
1 Mat., II. 448.
2 ikiat., II. 448-449.
3 Mat., II. 447.
4 Mat., III. 530.
s Mat., II. 355.
PREFACE.
lx^
XXlll
cient identification of the author, ascribes to " Anonymus
" I." The author professes to have ministered to the
archbishop during his exile, and to have been ordained
by him.^ In Thomas of Froimont's composite life of
the Archbishop, a monk, named Roger, is stated to have
been the holy man's minister, while an exile for Christ
at Pontigny.^ This is all the evidence on which the
identification of the author, as Roger de Pontiguy,
rests. But this Life having for a long time been quoted
in the name of this author, we do it also, more for the
sake of convenience than from conviction. That he Probably
was at Pontigny, when the archbishop was there, is with Pon-
certain ; that he was of Pontigny, not unlikely. In de-
scribing the archbishop's arrival at that monastery the
author speaks of the joy of the monks, as if he were
not one of their number at the time.^ Afterwards,
speaking from the point of time when he was writing
the Life, he refers to them as his brethren, which
would seem to mean that then he was a member of
their brotherhood.*
It may be noticed, that in Thomas Froymont's com- Hisnation-
posite Life of the Archbishop there are several passages
introduced under the name of ' Rogerus,' ^ doubtless the
same person as the author with whom we are dealing,
and among these occurs one, describing the Archbishop's
dislodgment from Pontigny, in a much more circum-
1 Mat., IV. 2.
2 Giles. S. Thorn. Cant., II. 52.
3 Mat., IV. 64. Pontiniacences
vero de adventu tanti hospitis supra
modum gavisi sunt, gratias agentes
ei quod ad eos declinasset, maxime
autem domino papæ, qui eos tanto
hospite honorari dignatus fuerit.
4 Mat., IV. 64 : Ipse vero vir re-
verendissimus, quam sancte, quam
religiose, se ibidem habuerit referre
supersedemus, ne et fratribus nos-
tris notam (nota) ingeramus, et
brevitatis metas excedamus. We
doubt not that " nota," well known
matters, is the right reading ; " no-
tam,'* a stamp of discredit, is out
of question. The " am " in notam
is evidently a reflex of " am " in
** ingeramus."
5 Anecdota Bedae. Ed. J. A.
Giles, London. 1851, pp. 248-263.
In ascribing this compilation to
Thomas Froymont, and not to Philip
of Liege, as Dr. Giles has done, I
follow the authority of Canon Ro-
bertson, Mat., IV., xi., footnote '-.
Ixxxiv PREFACE.
stantial manner than is the case with any other biogra-
pher referring to that subject. This, too, might, perhaps,
serve as an evidence of probability of his being a
monk of Pontigny. But besides this there are also
passages in this Life which would seem to prove him
to have been a foreigner. In describing the first cause
of dissent between king and archbishop, he introduces
the subject in the following manner : — " Erat consuetudo
" in partibus illis, ut rex, ad abundantiorem cautelam
" et custodian! regni sui, per singulos comitatus regni
" vicecomitem unum de fidelibus suis constitueret ; con-
" sueverantque comites et barones eidem vicecomiti,
" regio videlicet ministro, duos solidos de singulis di-
" mensionibus terræ suæ, quas patrio nomine hydas
" vocant, annuatim ab hominibus suis facere dari, &c." ^
It is difficult to see, how a native Englishman could
write in this way, unless, indeed, we suppose he was
living abroad, and was writing for foreigners from a
foreigner's standpoint. But even this supposition meets
a .strong check in the fact, that the source of the pas-
sage just quoted is apparently Garnier : —
" Kar en Engleterre ad une kustume mise,
" Ke I'Aide al Yeskunte est par les kuntez prise,
" Si est par dubles soud par les hides assise, fcc./'^
where the author of the Latin life paraphrases Engle-
terre by "partibus illis," and sees necessar}^ to explain
that " hides " was a thing so called " patrio nomine.'*
In one instance, it would seem, he inadvertently made a
French slip in his Latin, giving the adjective of Lon-
doniæ, which is his form of the name, the form Lun-
drensis for London iensis.^ Not that we urge it as a
strong point, because the passage is evidently a trans-
lation from Garnier, whose " Lundreis " "* might have
been the cause of the slip.
1 Mat., IV. 23. I 3 Mat., IV. 8.
2 Gamier, p. 30. | 4 Garnier, p. 9, last stanza.
PEEFACE.
Ixxxv
The only wi'iters on Thomas of Oanterbiu'v known to i>ate of his
. life.
the author are John of Salisbury, whom he mentions as
" vir illustris," not as '' episcopus Carnotensis," and " vir
'' venerabilis Benedictus Cantuariensis ecclesiæ prior,^ "
which fixes the date of his Life to the year 1175-76.
In agreement with Garnier, this author thus renders
an account of his editorial procedure : " . . . nihil om-
" nino inserentes nisi quod vel ipsi vidimus et audivimus,'
" vel certissima ac fidelissima eorum qui interfuerunt
" relatione cognovimus.-
6. WiLLiA^r OF Caxtfrbury was a monk of Christ- wiiiiam of
church, which society he entered during the Archbishop's
exile.'^ On his return home the Archbishop ordained him,
alone out of the number of those who had entered the
monastery during his absence, deacon.* He was present
at the scene of the murder up to the moment, when
Fitzurse cried out : " Strike I " at which word he frankly
confesses : — " Ego qui loquor, arbitrans me giadio pariter
" ])ercutiendum, tanquam peccatoi'um conscius et minus
" idoneus martyrio, celeii tergiversatione gradus ascendi
" complodens manus."^
William wrote both a volume of miracles and a Life of Wrote both
the archbishop. We have shown already that he beo-an and a Life
-. ,• Í. ;i . 1 • ii .^ . .E^ a Of Thomas.
the redaction 01 the miracles m the summer oi 11/2.*" Date of the
But when he finished the work is more difficult to prove, nate of the
It stands to reason, that too long a time should not have
been spent in compiling a work, for which a vast popula-
I'ity could be counted upon, especially, too, when it is
borne in mind, that the king himself, most probably on
the occasion of his penitential visit to Canterbury, 1174,
had requested the chapter to supply him with the work
when done.^ The mention by the chapter, in its epistle
1 Mat., IV. 2.
2 lb.
3 Mat., I. 119.
* Mat., 1. c. cfr. ib., p. 2.
* Mat, ib. 133, 134.
^ Above, p. Ixxiii-iv.
" Hujus rei gratia dilectum fra-
trem nostrum Giiillelmum, cum
libello cui per aliquod tempus invi-
gilavit, sicut postulastis, ad cclsi-
tudiuem clementiœ vestræ trans-
mittimus. Mat. I., 138.
Ixxxvi PREFACE.
dedicatoiy to the king, of the appointment of TTilliam to
the editorship seventeen months after the death of the
archbishop, indicates that between that date and the
dedication no long period of time could have intervened
After a long period not months, but yeai^s.. are referred to.
Few events, which can be brought within chronological
control, are of any date later than 1175 ; ^ and two years
and a half seems a reasonable time for the redaction of
the contents of the volume to have been got over. John
of Salisbuiy is not refeiTed to as bishop of Chartres,
and Benedict of Peterlx)rough seems to be alluded to as
just appointed prior of Christchurch, on the translation of
prior Odo to the abbey of Battle,- an allusion which canies
with it an additional weight by being introduced just at
the end of the volume. To judge fi'om the contents of
the work we should suppose that, either the chapter
themselves were not intimately familiar with them, or,
that they presumed the king would not trouble himself
with a close study of them, for it is not a book of pane-
Seems, from gyrics ou the king's doings, least of all on his Irish war, in
sympathies, the Condemnation of which William, it seems to us, dis-
an Irishman, plays a feeling full of patriotic ardoiu', and sometimes ex-
pressed in a manner which strikes us as eminently Irish :
in illustration of which we may adduce one example : —
'" Fili Hugords Roberte, nobilis Angliæ, hostile invasion e.
" vexaveras Hyl^eiTiiam, sed rediens ab expeditione dolore
'•' capitis peracuto vexabaris, adeoutetiam sphitus exha-
'' latione fusum Hybemiensium sanguinem luisses, nisi
" maiip'is sanguinem in doloris remedium tibi sump-
" sisses in potum." ^ If William, who certainly seems to
have been a foreigner, was not an Irishman, he was one
of strangely ardent Irish sympathies, one who evidently
1 "We are aware that occurrences of question that it could have taken
are mentioned which may even be the compiler from 10 to 12 years
referred to dates as late as 1182 or 'to complete it.
even, perhaps, 1184. Bm knowing - Mat., I. 542.
when the work was begun, it is out ^ ^lat.. I. 507.
PREFACE. IxXXVÍÍ
took care to have Ireland strongly represented in the
miracles, and who was not afraid to condemn an affair
which had the sanction and blessing even of the pope
himself.^
His Life of the saint was wiitten, if not after the
miracles were finished, certainly after the redaction
of them was taken in hand, as the preface to it makes
clear : — " . . . nam cum miracula ejus quæ in schedulis
" occultabat incor recta et imperfecta, rogaretur a fratribus
" exponere transcribenda, ait ei in visu noctis, * Elige
" ' tibi quod vis.' Hac audita voce misericordiam in se
" martyris intellexit volentis laborem suum, quem ipso
" præmonente subierat, imo donum proprium remune-
" rare." At what particular time it may have been
finished, we have no means of settling. But we
may reasonably suppose that it was shortly after the
miracles, or, about 1176.
7. Garnier de Pont Sainte Maxence. — This Picard Gamier,
poet wrote first a summary of the life of Thomas, appa- wrote a Life
rently immediately after the murder, in the first fervour Soien from
of the deep agitation which the great misdeed at Canter- ""^'
bury created, copies of which, through the dishonesty of
a scribe, found their way into public circulation : —
*' Més eel primer romaunz m'unt ecrivein emble,
" Ainceis ke jo l'éusse parfet et amende
'* Et Tamer et le duz adulci et tempre."^
But finding, on further inquiry, that his work was incom- ami then
plete, and inexact, he went to Canterbury, in 1172, to on another
i/»T 1 ji«i». -1 more full
gather iresh and more trustworthy information on the and accu-
rate.
subject, with a view to embodying in his recast poem
everything that was of a corrective and complementary
nature. To this end he selected his informants only
from among eye-witnesses and those who had been longest
on terms of familiarity with the murdered prelate, prin-
' Migne,Patrologia,tom. ccclvi,, j ^ Gamier, p. 6.
cols. 1441w42.
Ixxxviii PREFACE.
cipal among whom were the archbishop's sister Mary, who
became abbess of Barking in 1173, and the prior and the
monks of Canterbury. After four years' labour he had,
in 1176, finished what he calls his ''Sermun/' consisting
of no less than 5,835 lines, written in 1167 five-line
stanzas of the '• laisses monorimes " type. As he went
on with the poem he was in the habit of reading it out
to visiting pilgrims at the martyr's tomb ; such, at least,
we take it, must be the real meaning of the opening
stanza of his epilogue : —
" Guarniers li clers del Punt fine-ci sun Sermun
" Del martir saint Thomas et de sa passiun,
" Et meinte feiz le list a la tumbe al barun.
" Ci n'a mis un sul mot, se la verite non." ^
Hisedito- The author's manner of proceedino- with his conscien-
rial pro- . t'itíit i
cedure. tious and, in the Becket literature, perhaps, on the whole
the most important, work, is best described in his own
words : —
" Se vuleiz escuter la vie al saint martyr,
" Ci la purreiz par mei plenerement oir.
" N'i voil rien trespasser, ne rien n'i voil mentir.
" Quatre aunz i ai bien mis, al fere et al furnir,
" D'oster et de remettre poi la peine sofi'rir.
*' Primes treitai dejoie, et suvent i menti;
" A Cantorbire alai ; la verite oi ;
" Des amis saint Thomas la verite cuilli,
" Et de eels ki I'aveient des I'enfance servi.
" D'oster et de remettre le travail en sufiri.^
" L'an secund que li Sainz fu en I'iglise ocis
" Commenchai cest roman, et mult m'en entremis ;
'' Des privez saint Thomas la verite apris ;
" Meinte fez en ostai co que jo ains escris
'' Pur oster la men5unge, et al quart, fin i mis."^
We quote Garnier from C. Hippeau's edition, 8°, Paris,
1859.
1 Gamier, p. 205. I -^ lb. p. 206.
2Ib., p. 6.
PREFACE. IxXXÍX
8. Alan of Tewkesbuey was an Englishman who, Aian.
after having been for some time a canon of Benevento,
returned to England in 1174, and became prior of Christ-
church in 1179. Some ten years later he was transferred
to the abbey of Tewkesbury in Gloucestershire, of which
he remained the head till his death in 1202. His life is His Life a
supplement
professedly an amplification of, and a supplement to, John g^ilsim-^'s
of Salisbury's narative, and comprises the time and
events from the date of the Council of Clarendon to the
ineffective peace-meeting at Montmirail, January 25,
1164 — Jan. 6th, 1169. It was meant by the author to
be an introduction to the large collection of letters
relating to the Archbishop's history, which he brought
together, and arranged, and was not written until that
arrangement was accomplished, as may be gathered from
his preface : — '* cætera suis in locis epistolæ ipsæ plenius
" prosequuntur." ^ Alan's labours were finished within its date.
John of Salisbury's life- time, since he alludes to the latter
as episcopus Carnotensis, without adding beatæ memo-
riae, or the like ; and as John was bishop of Chartres
1176-1180, Alan's work must have been finished within
the period of those four years. His Life distinguishes Thespeeches
PIT* T ' 1 ^ inserted
itseli from the rest oi the biographies by the many by him •,
speeches it contains, which are remarkable for relevancy,
conciseness and point. It is not known that the author
ever was personally acquainted with the Archbishop or
present at any of the scenes he describes ; this has been
taken as derogatory to the authenticity of the speeches
and the historical value of Alan's work. If he was him- their
self the first to collect these speeches, there seem to be '
obvious reasons, why care should have been taken to have
them unimpeachably accurate. He was himself, accord-
ing to contemporary testimony, a man of very high
character. Most, if not all, of the speakers, many of
whom would be certain to read his work, were alive
1 Mat., II. 323. Cfr. also 351 : Hæc itaque iccirco hie posuimus, &c.
XC PREFACE.
when he wrote. In collecting the letters he was neces-
sarily obliged to correspond with those in whose posses-
sion they were, and might thus be reasonably supposed
to have asked them for abstracts of their speeches on
given occasions. But this does not account for all the
speeches. We have already (above p. li) referred to
the fragment of the earl of Arundel's speech preserved
in T. (II., 268,24-33), to which nothing corresponds in Alan,
of which, therefore, his Life could not have preserved the
original ; and yet that fragment is just as remarkable,
as any of the speeches introduced by Alan, for their dis-
Aiatinottiie tinö'uishinsf o ualities. This ö'oes far to prove, that Alan
author of , . ,« , , % ■. , . ,
the speeches, himseli was not the author 01 the speeches, certainly not
of which , ,
there pro- of that spcech. But it Doints another way as well. It
bably . . .
existed a secms to US to indicate, that there existed, before Alan
collection n • p • o i i i* i
from an wrote, a collection of mmutes of speeches delivered by
earlier date, •in i«in« -,
the actors m the drama, which collection was drawn
upon by him for the period he took in hand to record.
That there were two renderings of the speech of the
earl of Arundel -^ is clear ; or, if there was only one,
then Alan did not copy it out to the end, but someone
else did, and his work got to Iceland before Alan's report
of the speech was known there, the fragment alluded to
being contained in the oldest recension known of the
saga, but Alan's rendering being preserved in T. 1. 282-84.
Nothing is more likely than that the Archbishop should
have taken care to have minutes taken of speeches, as
well as of other proceedings, in the affairs he had on hand,
to which, according as events unfolded themselves. Perhaps we are
bab/^john here on the track to those " magna, quæ ah illo scripta
alludes. "^ " sunt, volumina '' to which John of Salisbury alludes,
as left behind by the Archbishop. Perhaps, too, we
have, in this theory, the clue to the fact, that the Ice-
landic saga abounds in verbatim reports of speeches
beyond any other life of Thomas.
1 Alan, Mat., II. 339-340.
PREFACE. XCi
9. Herbert of Bosham, the son of an Englishman Herbert,
who afterwards entered the church was, from the time His reia-
' ^ , tions to the
of Thomas's promotion to the archbishopric, his con- archbishop,
stant attendant, secretary, instructor in holy scripture,
and confidential agent. It would appear, that the Arch-
bishop placed more reliance in the judgment of Herbert,
than in that of any other of his servants, as according to
Herbert's own account he was not only appointed the
archbishop's spiritual adviser, but a sort of guardian of
his fame as well, whose business it was to ascertain, how
public opinion expressed itself on his master's proceed-
ings. In many of the Archbishop's letters the pen of
Herbert has left unmistakeable traces. He wrote a Life His Life of
of the Archbishop in six books (tomi), which, for bad bishop.^'
literary taste, irrelevancy and vanity, stands perhaps
unrivalled in English literature, and yet is a very valu-
able contribution to the Thomas cycle of writings for
the historical matter it contains, the author having had
all through exceptional facilities for knowing the truth.
To the life he added, as a seventh book, a "cataloerus His"cata-
. logus erudi-
" eruditorum Thomæ " which, though short, is in taste the torum
° . Thomæ."
best thing he wrote relating to his master. This he fol-
lowed up with the supremely prolix and prosy Liber
Melorum (Book of Songs), the subject of which is a Liber
comparison of Thomas, " martyr miles," to the Saviour,
*' Christus imperator," interlarded with some historical
matter relating to the ' gesta post martyrium.' A homily
on Thomas and a copy of the customs of Clarendon com-
plete this author's opera relating to Thomas of Canter-
bury. Herbert's Life was begun, apparently, in 1184, as The date of
may be inferred from a notice in its early part : — "...
'* præsertim cum a viri hujus, de hoc mundo excessu jam
" quartus decimus annus sit, quo scribo hæc." -^ He was
still engaged on the work after (Aug. 19th) 1186, when
he mentions the death of king Henry's son Geoffrey.'^
» Mat., III. 192. I 2 Mat, ib. 461.
Xcii PREFACE.
But that he had finished it before the death of Henry II.
1189, although, as the work now stands, the king's death
is mentioned in immediate connexion with that of his
son,^ is obvious from the evidence of the Catalogus eru-
ditorum, the last portion of the Life, where the author
refers to Pope Urban III, ob. 20th Oct., 1187, as "hodie
" totius ecclesiæ rector." The passage relating to Henr^^
II.'s death, therefore, must be, as Canon Robertson has
suggested,^ a later interpolation, and the Life must thus
have been finished between August 19th, 1180, and
October 20th, 1187.
crickíídÍ 10. Robert of Cricklade. We enter this writer the
last in the catena of the contemporary authors, not be-
cause we think he wrote last of them, but because we
have no means of ascertaining when he wrote. This is
the author to whom the saga refers as its chief authority
so frequently under the name of prior Robert of Cretel.
That Cretel is a corrupt abbreviation of Crecelade, by
which form Cricklade is also found designated in Latin
writings, admits of no doubt ; for the letter which Rob.
addressed to Benedict, on the healing of his suppu-
rated leg by Thomas's water,'^ is preserved in T., and
there ascribed to the same prior Robert who elsewhere is
called prior Robert of Cretel.^
His career This Writer, otherwise known by the name of Rober-
" tus Canutus, is said by Leland to have been born at
Cricklade, to have been educated there and afterwards
in Oxford, where he joined the fraternity of St. Frides-
wide. His studies, it would seem, were chiefly directed
towards natural history and theology. Among his
writings Pits mentions " Deflorationes historiæ naturalis
Plinii," in nine books, dedicated to king Henry II. In
theology he was a prolific writer, but as a writer on the
life of Thomas of Canterbury he is entirely unknown to
fame in his own country, when we except the letter to
1 Mat., III. 461. I 3 Mat., II. 97-101.
2 Mat., ib. xxii. I 4 x.^ jj. 92.
PREFACE. XClll
Benedict, already referred to. Dugdale mentions him as
prior of St. Frideswide's in 1154, and as chancellor of
the university in 1159 ; Pits, as having flourished about
1170, and Leland as having lived in the reigns of Richard
and John. From his letter to Benedict, written not later
than 1172, we learn that he was travellino- out in
Sicily about 1159 ; and that he was already a prior of
St. Frideswide's at that time, is attested by pope Ha-
drian's confirmation of the privileges of his monastery.
Otherwise very little seems to be known about this
author. After his cure he was a frequent pilgTÍm to
Canterbury,^ and apparently an assiduous collector of
miracles.
Robert is first introduced in the Icelandic sao-a, by Referred to
1 • p . 1 . T i 1 • T ^ y in the Sara.
name, on the occasion oi the accident which, as a youth,
Thomas had, in narrowly escaping drowning: — Now
concernino: the miracle which the Lord wrouoht in this
place it is fit that the tale be told in the words and
according to the relation of prior Robert of Cretel, who
-svrote in Latin the life of St. Thomas.- His Life is cited
as the original of the characteristic description of the rela-
tion of archdeacon Thomas to archbishop Theobald f on his
authority, too, the saga bases its statements with regard
to the archdeacon's devotion, almsgiving and journey ings
in the service of the church of Canterbury.^ This author
is also referred to by name as authority for the tales told
of the chancellor's devout life and chaste habits.'^ He is
not referred to in the story of the life of the archbishop
again by name, which may be merely a case of avoidance
of repetition. In the second volume he is first introduced
again as the author of the miracle which he relates of
himself, and to which we have referred already. Here
the sao'a observes that he begins first witli himself, after-
wards passing over to miracles wrouglit on others,''' and
» T., II. 106.
2 T., I. 32.
3 T., I. 3G.
< T., I. 38.
» T., I. 50, sqq.
Ö T., II. 92.
K541. (T
xciv
PREFACE.
The Quadri-
L)gues,
composite
Lives of
Thomas.
The Older
Quadri-
loirus.
from that passage onwards all that is related of miracles
is derived from Robert's collection. It is an especially
noticeable fact, that fragment E, which represents the
earliest recension of that portion of Thomas saga which
deals with the " gesta post martyrium," also refers to the
miracle which was wrought on Robert's leg,' which
proves that Robert's Life must have been among the
earliest importations to Iceland of records relating to
Thomas of Canterbury. Indeed, that portion of T. II.
which is demonstrably derived directly from him, is
stated expressly to have been brought to Iceland by the
men of old/^ as if it were known to have been among the
earliest importations of Becket literature to the country.^
Lastly, we may briefly mention the so-called QuAD-
RILOGUES, or composite Lives of the archbishop, of
which there exist two, one older, Quadrilogus ])rior,
one younger, Quadrilogus posterior. The term Quadri
loii'us derives its orio-in from the fact that, at least
the older is compiled, in a certain sense, from four
special lives ; John of Salisbury's, Alan of Tewkesbury's,
William of Canterbury's, Herbert of Bosham's, unto
which is added the passion by Benedict of Peterborough,
whose work the compiler does not consider in the light
of a life, but merely as record " of the end, and of those
" things which happened after the end." The older Quad-
rilogus was compiled at the suggestion of abbot Henry
of Cro^dand,^ by " E. humilis dictus monachus de Eve-
sham," whose real name is said to have been Elias
A-bbot Henry himself shared the editorial labour with
the Evesham brother, and the compilation was finished
in the 3'ear 1198-9. This work was first prepared for
the press, from a Vatican IMS., by the Augustinian hermit.
Christian Wolf (Lupus), who was professor of theology
at Louvain and Doua}^ (born at Ypres in 1612, died
1681,) but was not published till the year after his death
1 T., II. 284.
2 T., II. 92.
3 See above, p. Iv.
4 From 1191-1236.
PEEFACE. XCV
at Brussels, 1682. The date of publication has given to The younger
this edition the current title of the younger Quadrilogus,
as the publication date of the other Quadrilogus, Paris,
1495, has secured for it the common title of Quadrilogus
prior, which, in point of authorship, is manifestly later.
It thus contains the legend of the oriental descent of the
archbishop, and has passages from Lives, which were
unknown to the compiler of the older Quadrilogus, Fitz-
stephen's and Grim's. But otherwise these two Quadri-
logues agree very closely as to the subject matter, when
we except the prologues, which are totally different.
Of the older Quadrilogus a remodelled edition was The older
made by Roger, monk of Croyland, at the request of re"5ist! ^^^'^
abbot Hemy, wdiich w^as finished in 1212-13. The
method adopted in this edition was to let the correspon-
dence tell the tale ; hence, after the council of North-
ampton especially, the work consists mainly of letters,
or extracts of letters, relating to passing events. In
its narrative parts this edition agrees substantially with
Elias's story, but the arrangement of chapters differs
considerably. This edition, preserved in " MS. e Museo,
133," in the Bodleian Library, has never been printed.
Passing now over to the collation itself, we have to Collation.
observe that we leave unnoticed general historical re-
marks which, by way of introduction and ' orientation '
of his readers^ the Icelandic editor of Thomas saga has
deemed fit to insert in the beginning chapters of the
story.
The preface though, in the main, the Icelandic editor's
original composition, bears in one particular resemblance,
though it may be accidental, to Elias of Evesham's epistle
dedicatory to abbot Henry of Croyland (Mat., IV. 425) :
" nee poterat fieri quin alicui aliquid deesset quod alter
" forte haberet " = " þat er einn setti framar ok fullkom-
" liga, let annarr um liSa " (T., I., 2, 7). But otherwise it
is evident that the last editor of T. has known the
g 2
XCvi PREFACE.
Quadr. prior, though he has not framed the narrative on
the basis of that work, but on the basis of the older Ice-
landic recension or recensions of T.
The words by which the birth of Thomas is introduced
(T., I., p. 12, if.), come nearest to those of Roger de
Pontigny (Mat., IV., p. 3). The first vision (T., I.,
12, i5_22) differs both from Grim (Mat., II., p. 35G), and
Roger (1. c), and Garnier (p. 7), as it seems, on account
of a certain reluctance on the part of the Icelandic
translator to render in all their nakedness the words of
Grim (1. c.) : " vidit in sinum suum universam aquam
" Tamensis fiuminis influxisse" (a literal correspondence
with Garnier), or those of Roger (1. c.) : " visum est ei
" quasi Tamesis fluvius totus in ventrem suum per os
" influeret." The interpretation does not tally with
those of the authorities adduced, being here based on
the words spoken by Christ to the woman of Samaria,
John iv. 14, but by Grim and Garnier, whom the former
translates, taken as signifying rule over many people, by
Roger as drawing multitudes to Canterbury. Garnier,
having stated the currently told interpretation, adds
" Sulunc mei, vives eves en sun ventre porta," which
undoubtedly has a near approach to the Icelandic (cfr.
Grim, too, II., 357). The second vision (I., 12, 22-14, i_c)
corresponds pretty closely to Grim (1. c.),'but with this
difference, that he leaves out the interpretation, as does
also Roger (1. c), while Garnier (1. c.) gives one that
closely resembles the Icelandic : —
" Vis m'est en verite
" Tute Syon ne poet comprendre sa bunte."
The third vision (I., 14, g_jo) answers to Grim (1. c),
and Garnier (1. c), but the interjoretation tallies neither
with that of the former, nor that of the latter ; these
two being the only authorities who mention this vision.
The fourth vision is peculiar to T. alone (I., 14, ^^-is)-
The fifth (I., 14, is-lO, j.^g) finds its counterpart in Grim
Preface. xcvii
(1. c), Roger (IV., 3-4), Garni er (8), and Fitzsteplien
(Mat., III., p. 18), but with this difference, that these
authorities agree in making the mother see the infant
uncovered in the cradle. The conversation between
mother and nurse comes nearest to Fitzstephen's report
of the same (1. c, 13-14). Chap. IV. (L, 16-18) ap-
proaches nearly to Roger (IV., 7-8), who, to some extent,
copies John of Salisbury (Mat., II., 302-3), but the
matter is largely expanded in T. Chap. V. corresponds
to nothing in the contemporary lives. This, too, as far
as we know, is the only life of Becket, which ascribes to
him the authority of the tAvo proses mentioned.
Chapter VI. is peculiar to T., introduced for the
purpose of establishing a clearer historical nexus be-
tween the reigns of Stephen and Henry II. Chap.
VII. opens with the statement that, when Thomas came
back from school, had finished his education in fact,
he was 22 years of age. This is also borne out by
William (I., 3), who avers this to have been his age
when he joined Richer de I'Aigie. The personal de-
scription of Thomas (T., I., 28,9_i8) bears strong similarity
to John of Salisbury's (II., 302) and Fitzstephen's (III.,
17) ; yet the divergencies are considerable, and the
statement, that he stuttered somewhat, which recurs in all
personal descriptions of Thomas in Icelandic records (see
Cod. Stockh. No. 2, above, p. Ivii., also fragment D., Vol.
II., 262,14, and Appendix II., Vol.11., 288,17), is borne out
by no other contemporary author. Tke passage (Vol. I.,
28, i9-30,i_3) relating to his habits of life after leaving
school, is peculiar to the Icelandic version. Chap.
VIII. describes more circumstantially the sojourn
with Richer de I'Aigle, and especially the episode
of Thomas's miraculous escape from drowning, than
the authors who mention these matters, Oarnier (8-9),
Roger (IV., 6), and Grim (IL, 350-61). Yet, though
the api)roach is nearest to Grim, that author could not
have been the innuediate source ; he does not, any
I . i
íLCVlll PREFACE.
more than the others, mention Richer's connexion
with the court, AA^hich the source of the Icelandic has
known. But the Icelandic version, on the other hand,
knows nothing of Grim's remarkable statement, embodied
in this paragraph of his narrative (II., 360), about the
inherent love of truth in Thomas, which forbade him to
utter an untruth even in jest ; a statement which, if the
Icelandic editor had known it, he would certainly not
have eliminated from the text. Moreover Eecket's con-
nexion with his kinsman Osbern Witdeniers (Eight-
penny), which the three named authorities all introduce
into their narratives at this stage, is unknown to the
Icelandic recension. The account of Becket's removal
to Canterbury and advancement to the post of arch-
deacon comes nearest to John of Salisbury's (II., 303),
who, in agreement with Herbert (III., 167), makes
Thomas take the step of his own accord, led by divine
inspiration, while all the other authorities state that he
was introduced to Theobald, some averring that it was
done by an official of the archbishop's (Grim. II.,
361, Roger, IV., 9, Garnier, 10), but Fitzstephen (III.,
15), that it came to pass "per duos fratres Boloni-
'' enses, Baldewinum archidiaconum et magistrum Eu-
*' stacium, hospites plerumque patris ejus et familiares
" archiepiscopi." The passage about his law-studies
(T., I., 38, -ff) comes near to Roger's statement (IV., 10),
and John of Salisbury's (II., 304), yet not in such a way
as to warrant the assumption that either could have
been the immediate source. Thomas's missions to Rome
on behalf of archbishop Theobald (T. I., 38, ^^_^c) are also
mentioned by Fitzstephen (III., 16) and Garnier (10).
This chapter was evidently drawn from the author
whom T. knows as Robert of Crete], who is quoted
throughout, and to Avhom, therefore, the divergencies
from other authorities are due.
Chapters X. and XL (T., I., 40-44) appear to be due
to the original Latin author, being introduced for the
PREFACE. XCÍX
purpose of serving as historical vistas, one opening the
view up to the coming ruler of Canterbury, the other to
the new king of England. The probable origin of the
misstatement about the division of England into ecclesi-
astical provinces is pointed out in footnote 8, p. 40.
In introducing the story, Chap. XII., of Henry II.'s
accession to the throne, and the doubtful character of his
advisers, T. rests on an authority we do not know now ;
but the reasons which led archbishop Theobald to intro-
duce Thomas to the king (T., I., p. 46) are elsewhere given
in a similar manner, cfr. John of Salisbury (II., o04),
with whom William of Canterbury agrees almost verba-
tim (I., 4, 5), Roger (IV., 11, 12), wha, liowever, adds
that the introduction was entrusted to the bishopa of
Bayeux and Lisieux ; Grim (II., 863), who assigns as
cause the archbishop's desire to reward Thomas's services ;
Fitzstephen (III., 17, 18), avIio ascribes the recommenda-
tion to the bishop of Winchester ; and Herbert (HI.,
172-73), who makes Theobald alone responsible for it.
The underhand manner in which the recommendation
was conducted according to T. (1. c), where it confessedly
is of the nature of an ecclesiastical plot, is nowhere else
mentioned. But sigoiificant statements in support of T.
may be adduced from contemporary sources : Roger
(IV., 12) not only avers that while Thomas was chan-
" cellor : tutus et quietus manebat ecclesiæ status ; ipso
" in omnibus pravam regis voluntatem et collateralium
" ejus clandestinas machinationes cautc et quasi ex oc-
" culto, ne suspicion! pateret, frustrante," but, on the
occasion of his nomination by the king to the arch-
bishopric, the same author adds this important notice
(IV., 14) : " Thomas namque ex industria circa personas
" et res ecclcsiasticas quasi severissimum se exhibebat,
*' ut tali occasione omncm a se suspicionis notam excu-
" teret, et regis voluntati, quam intime novcrat, melius
" sub hac palliationc conveniret. Credens itaque rex
" propositum suum adversus ecclesiam per eum potissi-
C PREFACE.
" mum posse impleri, quippe quem sibi in omnibus fide-
" lissimum et ad voluntates suas pronissimum expertus
" fuerat, irrevocabiliter disposuit ut ecclesiæ Cantuari-
" ensi præficeretur antistes." The only construction
that can be put on this statement is, that it was an
understood thing all along, that Thomas's conduct as
chancellor was to be so regulated as to put the king off
his guard, with a view to making his nomination of the
chancellor to the eventually vacant see of Canterbury
all the surer. This is what the statement of T. under
discussion seems to point to as having been the real aim
of that " holy astuteness," which from first underlay
archbishop Theobald's plan in introducing Thomas to the
king. According to T. (I., 40, 20-22) ^^ appears that, in
the beginning, Thomas acted as court chamberlain, which
is not even alluded to in any other life of him. At this
point T. introduces the chronological statement that now
Becket was 38 years of age, having been 15 years con-
nected with Canterbury. A review of the chronology
of the story thus far is therefore in place here. Our
starting point must be his age when he left school.
T. (I., 28, s) states it to have been 22, adding that then
his mother was dead (I., 28, go)- Roger (lY., 8) avers
that his mother died when he was 21 years of age, ob-
serving : " exinde circa studia Thomas se remissius cœpit
" habere," which evidently means that then he left off
studying at school. William of Canterbury (I., 3) says his
mother died, when he was 22 years of age, and Garnier
(9) makes him " vint et un an, u plus, sulunc recort,"
when he came back from school. At this time, there-
fore, the preponderance of the evidence goes to show
that he was at the age of two and tAventy. As to the
actual year, Benedict of Peterborough (II., 19) decides
the question, saying, that when he died (1170) he was
in his 53rd year, which means, since he was born on
St. Thomas's day, and died on the 29th of December,
that he was 52 years and nine days old. He was, then,
PKEFACE. CÍ
born, not as stated (T., L, 12) in 1118, but in 1117, con-
sequently he returned home from school in 1139.
Next we have to account for the time which elapsed
from this date until he joined archbishop Theobald.
Here the records are not so conflicting as, at first sight,
they appear to be. Grim (IL, 3 GO) says that he first
went to Richer de TAigle, not mentioning how long-
he remained with him ; then, that he took service with
Osbern Witdeniers "fere per triennium" (ib., 361).
Roger (IV. 6) agrees with Grim, with regard to de I'Aigle,
and makes Thomas enter Osbern's service at 21 and
remain with him " ferme per triennium " (ib. 8). Gar-
nier (8) states distinctly that the sojourn with de I'Aigle
lasted for half a year ('' ben demi an ensemble ") and
that the service under Witdeniers extended to '^ ne sais
" dous ans u treis " (9). William of Canterbury (I., 4)
says that, after two or three years from his mother's
death, which occurred when he was two and twenty, he
was admitted to the household of archbishop Theobald.
To these records corresponds the notice inT. (I,, 34, ■^.._■^^)
that Thomas remained for two years in de TAigle's ser-
vice, and that he was at the age of 24 when he gave
up that manner of life. The "fere (ferme) triennium "
of Roger and Grim, the half year + two or three, of Gar-
nier, the two or three years of William, and the calcu-
lation of T., all come really to one and the same thing :
that Thomas spent more than two, but hardly fully
three years, in secular pursuits betw^een his return from
school and entry into archbishop Theobald's service. It
follows then that he came to Canterbury in the course
of the year 1142. Tacking unto this the chronological
statement of T., mentioned above, that he was 38 years
old when he joined the court of king Henry, it follows,
that that event took place during the king's first regnal
year ( = Thomas's 38t]i), ]i)th December 1154— I8tli
December 1155, which agrees perfectly with other con-
temporary authorities, according to whom the appoint-
Cii PREFACE.
ment took place a short time after the king's accession :
cfr. John of Salisbury (II. 304) : " post modici tempo-
" ris intervallum cum dux Normanniæ; &c., in regnum
" Angliæ successisset, elaboratum est ab antedicto ar-
" chiepiscopo ut archidiaconus suus regni cancellarius
'' eificeretur;" Fitzstephen (III., 17-18): '' Consecrato
" igitur per manum ejusdem archiepiscopi regis f actus
'' est Thomas cancellarius ; Herbert (III., 172) : " archi-
" præsul Theobaldus, qui ipsum in regem unxerat, id
^' post modicum procurat, ut Thomas hie noster, ju-
" venis adhuc et archilevita novus, regis novi et pariter
" adhuc juvenis, intret aulam." The calculation (T.,
I-> 46, - is), possibly due to the Icelandic editor, that
Thomas had been 15 years connected with Canterbury
at this time, has no chronological signification.
The description of the chancellor's great favour at
court and of the splendour of his daily life (T., I., 48, .^..jg)
is in independent agreement with the narratives by
Fitzstejohen (III., IS), and Grim (IL, 363), and Garnier
(12) ; cfr. also William of Canterbury (I., 5), and Her-
bert (III, 174-175).
The stories illustrative of the chancellor's devotion
and chastity (T., L, 50-54) are, as may be inferred from
the Icelandic context, due to the author whom the saga
calls Robert of Cretel ; the latter of these, however,
is also found in William of Canterbury (I., 6), from
whom it has been incorporated into the Quadrilogues ;
and in Garnier (12), who seems to be the original source,
and who is more circumstantial than William. The
account of the chancellor's liberality (T., I., 54, ^^-56, i_^,),
resembles what is said by contemporary writers on the
subject, especially Garnier (11); cfr. Grim (II., 365) and
Roger (IV. 13) none of these, however, could have been
the direct source of T. The distinction between his
mode of bestowing gifts on rich and poor (T., I., 54-56)
is nowhere else mentioned. The account (T., I., oG, ^^y^
of the grant of a feoff to the chancellor is drawn from
PREFACE. ciii
an unknown source. Fitzstephen is the only contem-
porary writer who refers to any such grant (III., 20) ;
but he cannot be the source here. The chancellor's
adversities at court (T,, I., 56, ^^^o^) are also referred to
by contemporary writers, John of Salisbury (II., 304-5),
Grim (ib. 864), Herbert (III., 177) ; but none of these
authorities could have been the immediate source of the
Icelandic. The statement included in the quoted pas-
sage, that he defended the interests of the church is,
as we have already seen, distinctly borne out by Roger
(IV., 12), and we may here add the valuable evidence of
Fitzstephen (III., 23) to the same effect : '* Dei omni-
" potentis instinctu, Thomæ cancellarii suasu, dominus
" rex vacantes episcopatus et abbatias non diu retinebat,
" ut fisco suo patrimonia Crucifixi inferrentur ; immo
" sine magna mora honestis illas dabat personis, et
" secundum Deum." The short allusion to the chan-
cellor's foreign policy and wars rests on no knoAvn
authority ; the " book " which the Icelandic refers to
may possibly mean Robert of Cricklade's w^ork ; Fitz-
stephen (III., 33-35), who is explicit on these matters,
could not possibly be the source hinted at. The pas-
sao'e relatino- to the chancellor's w^eariness of court life
(T., I., 58, i:-60, 1..^) bears strong resemblance to John of
Salisbury's words to the same effect (II., 304-5), though
evidently they could not have been the immediate
source.
The introductory notices to the election of the chan-
cellor to the archbishopric of Canterbury (T., I., 60-62)
are peculiar to the Icelandic life ; only the statement
relating to Theobald's tenure of office is found in Her-
bert (III., 180). But the account of the chancellor's
interview with Henry, and the conversation between
king and chancellor (T., I., 64) closely resembles Her-
bert's account of the same (III., 181), with, however, an
important difference : in the Icelandic the chancellor
advises the selection for the post of a fitter and better
civ PREFACE.
person than himself; to this there is no aUusion in
Herbert. What follows (T., I., 66-70), is substantially
in agreement with Herbert (1. c), though more circum-
stantially tolcl in T. But the passage setting forth the
king's conviction, that Thomas would be a prop to the
dynasty (T., I., 68, 22-'<^0, i_r,) is borne out by William of
Canterbury (I., 6) and John of Salisbury (II., 305).
The reflections on the situation (T., I., 68, ^_.,.,, and 70, -^.-^^)
do not seem to be due to the Icelandic editor, but rather
to his source, an unknown one.
The election at Canterbury and its confirmation at
London, Chap. XV., is not derived directly from aiiy of
the contemporaiy lives (cfr, Herbert, III., 183-4; Fitz-
stephen, ib. 36; Roger, IV. 16-17 ; Grim, II., 366-67;
William of Canterbury, I., 8-9; Garnier, 15-18 ; iind
John of Salisbury's singularly short account, II., 306).
From the Icelandic version it appears that, because no
agreement could be obtained from the monks at Can-
terbury, an appeal was made to the bishops in council
in London. This is not hinted at in the other lives,
though the opposition of the monks is pointed out ; and
the description of the protracted transactions in London
is here much more detailed than in the other authorities.
Chap. XVI. may be said to be almost wholly without
a counterpart in the extant lives, Avhich pass over
Thomas's release from secular obligations in very few
sentences (cfr. Grim, II., 367 ; Fitzstephen, III., 36 ;
Herbert, ib. 185 ; Roger, IV., 18), and make no men-
tion of his resistance against the election after his
acceptance of the nomination by the king. The chro-
nological statement that he had been chancellor for
-Qrve years, compared with what we have said before
on the date of his appointment to the chancellorship,
gives the correct date of the episcopal election, 1161.
On the calculation of the saga, making the year to be
1165, we shall have more to say at the end of this
collation under the head of various notices. Cha}).
PREFACE. CV
XVII. begins by recording an event in Thomas's life to
which no allusion even is made in other Lives : his
monachal ordination at Merton abbey. Herbert, wlio
was in his company on the occasion, does not mention
the incident, but he does not either give any pointed re-
ference to what is specially remarked by other contem-
porary authorities, as William of Canterbury (I., 10), John
of Salisbury (II., 306), namely that, after his consecra-
tion, he took up the monachal habit having, according
to Gamier (23), Grim (II., 368), Roger (IV., 21), been
somewhat unceremoniously reminded by the fraternity
of Canterbury of the propriety of appearing in a regular's
attire in his own cathedral. The conversation (T., I.,
84, go ff.) corresponds pretty closely with Herbert's report
of the same (III., 186). The consecration. Chap. XVIII.,
is described much as by Herbert (III., 187), difiering
from him in adding, in conformity with Garnier (24)
and the older Quadrilogus (IV., 281), that Adam abbot of
Evesham was at the head of the mission sent to fetch the
pall, cfr. Fitzstephen (III., 36). The notice (T., I., 90-
92) of pope Alexander's troubles at Rome, showing how
it came to pass, that he had come north over the Alps
to Montpelier, where he bestowed the pall, is peculiar
to this life, though Herbert (1. c.) also refers to the same
thing, but much more briefly.
Chap. XIX., treating of the archbishop's daily life,
rests on an authority which differs considerably from the
extant Lives, though a general agreement is recognisable
with Herbert (IIL, 193-97) and William of Canterbury
(I., 10). In the Icelandic the treatment is more matter
of fact. But the account given of his works of humili-
ation and mercy, as also what is said of the prelate's
biblical studies in Chap. XXI., agrees in substance with
Herbert (IIL, 198-207); cfr. John of Salisbury (II.,
307) : yet Herbert could not have been the immediate
source, as his narrative contains points of interest not
found in T., which the Icelandic translator would cer-
evi PREFACE.
tainly not have suppressed, had he known them, as, e.g.,
what he relates about the prelate's study of scripture in
the midst of a ride through the country, and his conver-
sation with Herbert on such occasions (ib. 206). Tlie
description of his manner of officiating (T., I., 102-104)
follows, in a condensed form, that of Herbert (III., 210-
11) with, however, additions from an unknown source.
The manner of the archbishop's table (T., I., 106) reminds
of Herbert's description of the same (III., 225-6), but is
here more circumstantial. It is worthy of notice, that this
is the only life of Becket, which mentions Pope Urban III.
as one of the archbishop's company at Canterbury. Her-
bert, in his catalogiis eruditoritin Thomce (III., 528 29),
-gives to understand that this acquaintance began during
the exile, when Humbertus Lombardus, as Urban hight
before he was pope, was archdeacon of Bourges. In the
account of the archbishop's abstemiousness, love of sacred
reading at table, care for the sick and the poor, &;c. (T., I.,
108-110), a substantial correspondence is recognizable
with Jolni of Salisbury (II., 806-308) and Herbert (III.,
231-38) ; yet not close enough for either to have been the
immediate source of T. Chap. XXII., in that portion
which treats of Thomas's solicitude in ordinations, agrees
pretty closely with Herbert (III., 238-539) as condensed
in the first Quadrilogus (lY., 291-292). The portion of
this chapter which sets forth his integrity (T., I.,
112,7-114) is in general agreement with Herbert (III.,
223), cfr. John of Salisbury (II., 307). The story, illus-
tiative of this characteristic in the archbishop, with
which Chap. XXII. winds up, is also found, in substance,
in Herbert (I.e.). In this chapter the agreement with
the mentioned authorities is only general, but none of
them could have been the immediate source, nor yet the
condensed narrative of the first Quadrilogus, which differs
from the Icelandic considerably in point of arrangement.
Cliap. XXIII. , introducing the first cause of the troubles,
agrees substantially wdth Herbert (III. 249-53) as con-
PREFACE. CVÍÍ
densed in the Quadrilogus, but is not drawn from that
source immediately. In the Icelandic saga the matter
arises out of the archbishop's first visitation tour, which
seems both natural and historical, but of which there is
no mention in other lives of Becket. Chap. XXIV.,
treating of the council of Tours deals with the subject
much more circumstantially than the principal source in
tlie extant lives, Herbert (III., 253). From the Icelandic
account we learn that the real errand of the arch-
bishop was to renew obsolete privileges of Canterbury,
to wliich Herbert only alludes in passing at the end of
his notices on the council. Again we cannot point to any
direct source of Chap. XXV. among the extant lives,
though substantial agreement is apparent with Her-
bert (III., 255-59). The story of the archbishop's con-
secration of a church at Westminster (T., L, 136) must
rest on some mistake, and seems evidently to refer to
the consecration of " Nobile illud et resale monaste-
" rium de Redinges, in quo divæ recordationis Henri-
" cus, quondam Anglorum rex, secundi Henrici nunc
" illustris regis nostri avus, in mausoleo gloriose qui-
'' escit," Herbert (III., 260). The account of the trans-
lation of Edward the Confessor (T., 1. c.) is also men-
tioned by Herbert (III., 261), but is not derived from
him immediately, but from the same source as the
previous blunder.
Chap. XXVI., as shown in T. (I., 138, foot note"),
difters, in its account of the impost opposed by the
archbishop, from all the contemporary biographers. As
the account of the tax is given by Grim (II., 373-74),
Roger (IV., 22), William of Canterbury (I., 12), Gamier
(30), the gist of the dispute seems only to have been, that
what was given by English tax-payers in general (duo
solidi per hydam) of a free will, should not be levied
as a crown tax. Evidently the primate had no right to
interfere in such a matter, except so far as church lands
were concerned. There is no mention of the disputed
Cviii PREFACE.
tax having been called Danegeld, from which tiie church
was exempted, but, as we shall now proceed to show,
it was of a totally different nature.
In Chap. XI. of Leges Edwardi Confessoris (Ancient
Laws and Institutes of England), De Denegeldo, we read :
'*' Denegeldi reddicio propter piratas primitus statuta
" est. Patriam enim infest antes, vastacioni ejus pro
" posse suo insistebant : sed ad eorum insolenciam re-
" primendaiu, statutum est Denegeldum annuatim red-
'' dendum : i. duodeeim denarios de una quaque hida
" tocius patriæ, ad conducendos eos qui piratarum irrup-
" tioni resistendo obviarent. De hoc quoque Denegeldo
" quieta erat et libera omnis terra que de ecclesiis
" propria et dominica erat, eciam de ecclesiis paro-
''■ chiarum ad idem pertinentibus, et nichil in ejus re-
'' demptione persolvebant, quia majorem fiduciam in
" oracionibus sancte ecclesie habebant, quam in de-
" fensionibus armor um. Et banc libertatem habuit
" sancta ecclesia usque ad tempus Willelmi junioris,
" qui de baronibus tocius patriæ auxilium petiit ad
" Normanniam retinendam de fratre suo Roberto eunte
" Jenisalem. Ipsi autem concesserunt ei iiij. sot de
" unaquaque hida, sanctam ecclesiam non excipientes :
" quorum dum fieret collectio, clamabat ecclesia, liber-
" tatem suam reposcens, sed nichil sibi profuit." This
extract is based on MS. authority as old as the 13th cen-
tury, according to the statement of the Editors, and we
know no reason, why its authenticity should be doubted.
It is obvious that the tax, from which the church had for-
merly been exempted, was not levied on her by William
Rufus, but a new tax was imposed, of a different kind,
and for a different pui'pose, and, indeed, exactly the very
purpose, which the Icelandic saga says was its origin.
This gives a natural clue to the archbishop's protest,
which thus becomes a protest only on behalf of the
church against, what undoubtedly must have been in the
eyes of churchmen, an attempt at turning an accidental
PREFACE. CÍX
accommodation into perpetual spoliation. We have no
doubt, that the source of the Icelandic saga here is
Robert of Cricklade, or, as we have hinted elsewhere
(above p. Ixxvii) Benedict of Peterborough, who has had
a better information on the subject than the other autho-
rities, which, it would seem, all have Garni er for a pri-
mary source ; but he, a foreigner, might very well be
supposed to have formed an erroneous view on a subject,
the history of which he did not know except by hearsay
evidence.
The story (T., I., 142, i., sqq.) about the clerical homicide
in the diocese of Salisbury is also found, but much less
circumstantially told, in Herbert (III., 264-5) ; that of
Philip de Brois (T., T., 144, 4 sqq.) with various degrees
of circumstantiality, in Fitzstephen (III., 45), Herbert
(ib. 205), Grim (II., 874-5), William (I., 12-13), Roger
(IV., 24), Gamier (31-32), but in the Icelandic it difters
from them all, in not stating his primary offence to
have been manslaughter, and in other points as well.
Chap. XXVII. contains much which is not found in
the extant lives : 1. the opening speech cf the king ;
2. the archbishop's exhortation to the bishops; 3. his
reply to the king ; for the long doctrinizing sermon put
into his mouth by Herbert (III., 208-72), could not pos-
sibly have been the immediate origin of the considerate
reply of the Icelandic version ; 4. the king's rejoinder to
the archbishop. But the final reply of the archbishop is
indirectly hinted at in Herbert (III., 273). The defec-
tion of bishop Hilary (T., I., 454, ^_^) is also mentioned
by Herbert (1. c.) who pointedly observes that his one
dissonant reply, amidst the unanimous voice of sulvo
OTcline 8U0, was bona fide. The king's final speech is
only recorded in T.
Chap. XXVIII., after a general introduction peculiar
to T., proceeds to deal with the defection of the bisliops
and introduces, in agreement with William of Canterbury
(I., 14), the bishop of Lisieux as the author of the
K.'541. h
ex PREFACE.
scheme, by which the split in the episcopal camp was to
be effected (cfr. Grim, II, 377 ; Roo-er, IV, 29-30 ; Gar-
nier, 33). For the statement (T, I, 158, 7_io), that the
king tried repeatedly to win the archbishop over by
friendly means, I find no authority, unless perhaps Her-
bert (III, 276), where, however, it is not the king him-
self, but outsiders who are interested in the matter. The
part assigned to the earl of Winchester and the abbot of
" Almes" (T., I, 160, 2 sqq.) corresponds with what is also
recorded by Grim (II., 378), William (I., 15), Roger
(lY., 31), and Garnier (34), though none of these autho-
rities could have been the immediate source, as in the
Latin Lives the name is Philip de Eleemosyna, and in
Garnier, de Almosne. The place, too, where these lords
met the archbishop with the pope's message, Tenham, is
unknown to the Icelandic version, as is also the name of
the place where the archbishop promised the king to
keep the customs (T., I., 160, j^.^^), which Herbert (III.,
277) says was Oxford, Garnier (35) and Roger (IV.,
32), "Woodstock in the neighbourhood.
Chap. XXIX. on the Council of Clarendon is, in sub-
stance, told in T. as in most of the contemporary lives,
Roger (IV., 33-37), Fitzstephen (HI. 46-49), Herbert
(ib. 278-289), William (L, 16), Grim (II, 379-383),
Garnier (36-37), John of Salisbury (II., 311); but none
of them could have been the immediate source of the
Icelandic, which is more circumstantial than any of the
rest, and more pointed. It approaches nearest to the
accounts of Grim and Roger, except the description of
the winding-up scenes which comes closest to Grim. It
should be noticed that the reflections on the " fall " of
the archbishop (T., I., 164-66) remind strongly of
similar observations on the incident by William of
Canterbury (I., 17).
In chap. XXX. the report of the speech of the clerk
who rebuked the archbishop is a close rendering of an
orio'inal which has been identical with Alan of Tewkes-
PREFACE. CXÍ
búiy's report of the same (IL, 324-25). This speech is
in the Icelandic life ascribed to Herbert, whereas by
Alan it is referred to the cross-bearer/ the Welshman
Alexander Llewellyn. The mistake of the saga is pro-
bably due to the editor's belief that Herbert really was
the cross-bearer, and the only one in the company who
might presume to speak in such terms to such a prelate.
The account of the archbishop's repentance, and of the
mission sent to Rome, comes nearest to Herbert's relation
(III., 292-293), but is much more circumstantially given
in the saga.
Chap. XXXI. seems to have no exact counterpart in
the extant lives, except the passage (T., I., 178, ^_^-),
which strongly reminds of John of Salisbury's words on
the subject (II., 309-10), though by him they are linked
into a different connexion, introduced as they are before
John enters upon the narrative of the troubles with the
king. The question of transferring the legatine power
from the archbishop to some one of the king's own
choice (T., I., 178, 20 sqqO^ is also treated by Grim (II.,
884) and William (I, 25). The flight abroad, which
in the interval between the councils of Clarendon and
Northampton was attempted by the archbishop (Grim,
II., 389 ; Herbert, III., 293 ; Roger, lY., 40 ; William,
I., 29 ; and Garnier, 49, 50), is, strangely enough, un-
known to the Icelandic version. The king's enforcement
of secular law against clerical offenders (T., I., 180, loir,)
is also attested by Gamier (41-43), Roger (39), Grim
(II., 385). The general reflections on the situation (T.,
I., 180, i6_184), are peculiar to T., with the exception of
the decree which the archbishop was never tired of
repeating (T., I., 182, sqq.), which is also introduced
in support of clerical immunities by W^illiam (I., 2G).
Chap. XXXII. follows, in substance, the more detailed
narratives, especially that of Herbert, but varies from
them in many ways. The first matter under discussion,
the story of John the Marshal, which is circumstantially
h 2
CXU PREFACE.
told by Gamier (51-52), Grim (II., 390), William (I., 30),
seems to be, as such, unknown to the Icelandic version,
thonghthe first charge (T., I., 18G, iSqq.) evidently refers
to the same case. In this matter T. closely follows Her-
bert (III., 297), with Avhom Eoger (IV., 42) partly agrees,
though he makes, apparently, two cases out of one (cfr.
IV., 43). The fine inflicted agrees with Herbert's state-
ment (I.e.). The archbishop's reply, however, though
agreeing in its first part with the same source, differs
from it towards the end. The account of the proceedings
of the second day of this council (T., I., 186, 23-I88)
corresponds in substance with Herbert's narrative (III.,
298-299), though not as a direct source ; it answers no
closer to Grim (II., 391), nor Koger (IV., 42), who makes
the 500 marks, which, according to T., the King claimed
back as having been merely a loan, to be a fine inflicted
for disobedience of royal summons.
To the account of the proceedings of the third day
(T., I., 190-200) Alan (II., 326) and Herbert (III.,
298-9) bear the nearest resemblance. It is to be noted
that for the statement (T., I., 192,1.4), which in substance
agrees with Alan's : " ex edicto regis seris objectis," the
saga refers to " some books," as authority ; that is to say,
the statement is introduced into the narrative from an
authority other than the principal source of the saga. It
follows therefore that even in this chapter Alan's narra-
tive, or some narrative agreeing with Alan's in the^above
notice, which is found in no other extant life of Becket,
is not the main source of T. The counsel taken with the
bishops, and their respective answers (T., I., 192-98),
follow closely the account of the same matters by Alan
(II., 326-28), with this difference, however, that the first
speech of bishop Hemy of Winchester (T., I., 192, g^jc) is
not found in Alan ; yet a clear allusion to it occurs in
Herbert (III., 300). The continuation (in 1'.) to the end
of the chaj^ter resembles Alan, but not closely. The
omission of the names of the two earls whom the arch-
PKEFACE. CXÍÍÍ
bishop bade be called is common to T. (I., 198, r,) and all
the contemporary lives but William (I., 39), who, how-
ever, introduces them under quite different circumstances,
and on a different occasion, yet connected with the coun-
cil of Northampton. Chap. XXXIII. in its opening-
passages reminds of William of Canterbury (I., 40). The
story of the archbishop's illness, and the suspicion it
roused (T., I., 200, 07-202, j.^j), is also related in the con-
temporary lives, William of Canterbury (I., 32), Fitz-
stephen (III., 56), Herbert (ib., 300-301), Alan (II, 329),
Grim (II., 392), Roger (lY., 44). The ominous rumours
referred to, T. (I., 202, 1-.21), are also mentioned by William
of Canterbury (L, 32),' Roger (IV., 44), and Alan (II.,
330) ; and the advice consequent on these rumours, given
by a monk to the Archbishop, to celebrate the mass of
St. Stephen protomart^^r (T., I., 202, .o.oo, 206, 0^-208, ^ J,
is also referred to by other contemporary writers, as
Herbert (III., 304), Fitzstephen {ib., 56), Grim (11, 393),
Alan (II., 330). The speech delivered by the archbishop
to his brother bishops appealing to Rome (T., I., 204,
206) is found in substance in Herbert (HI., 302-303), as
also the counter appeal set up by the bishop of London.
Chapter XXXI Y., dealing with the proceedings of the
last day, agrees in substance with the description of the
Quadrilogus of the same, which is a condensed narrative
drawn from Herbert (III., 303-304), William (I., 36),
Alan (II., 330-31) ; cfr. Grim (II., 394-97), Fitzstephen
(III., 56-58), Roger (lY., 44-52). However, the speech
of the Aixhbishop (T., I., 208, ,^.210, ,.,;) and that of the
king (T., I., 214, (jii) seem to have no counterpart in the
contemporary lives.
Chap. XXXY. opens with an account of the situation,
which closely agrees with Herbert's description of the
same (III., 307). What then follows (T., I, 216, ...220, ,_,)
corresponds to Alan's record (II., 331-332), though with
this difference, that the speech of tlie earl of Arundel
(ih., 220, ^_y^ is peculiar to T., and the interchange of
CXIV PREFACE.
words between that lord and the archbishop (ib.,
220, 12 ^^^•) only agrees in substance with Alan's report
of the same (II., 331-332).
The story of the Archbishop's withdrawiil from the
council (T., I, 222,9-224, ^.g) is, in the form it has in T.,
peculiar to that version, though it is also referred to in
Alan (II., 333), William of Canterbury (I., 39-40),
Koger (IV., 51-52), who mentions the accidental stumb-
ling of the Archbishop, Grim (II., 398-399), Herbert
(III., 310), and Fitzstephen (ib., C8). The agreement is
closest with Alan, who alone (I.e.) gives the congratula-
tory address of the multitude of sick and poor who
greeted the prelate on his escape (T., I., 222, g^.g,), and the
Archbishop's thanksgiving address on his arrival at St.
Andrew's (T., I., 224, g^). The interview between the
Archbishop and the bishops of Chichester and London at
St. Andrew's (T., L, 224,9.226, iJ, closely follows Alan's
narrative (II., 334). The clauses introductory to the
impending flight (T., I,, 226, 15.22) correspond loosely with
Herbert (III., 312), the rest of this chapter, in substance,
witli John of Salisbury's account ^(11., 313).
In Chap. XXXVI. the opening paragraph (T., I.,
228, 20--30, 1,7), descriptive of the Archbishop's prepara-
tion for the flight, agrees substantially with what Alan
writes to the same eff*ect (II., 334-335). The dream (T.,
230-232) is also recorded by William of Canterbury (I.,
41-42), but is set forth in T., in far more graphic detail.
The long explanation of it in Chap. XXXVII. is peculiar
to T. alone. My surmise, that Valbuvg (T., I., 230, ^.^
might mean Walburgetone, is corrected by Canon Kobert-
son (William of Canterbury, I., 41) who gives, as its
equivalent, Wabridge forest in Huntingdonshire.
The vision recorded in T. (I., 238, g.^^) is alluded to by
Herbert (III., 313), but its interpretation (T., I.e., 17 sqq.)
is peculiar to T. alone. The concluding passages of this
chapter (T., I., 238, 27 sqq.) remind of Herbert (III., 322).
Chap. XXXVIII., recounting the various stages of the
PREFACE. CXV
flight of the Archbishop, comes nearest to the relation
of Herbert (III., 318-330), with, however, the following
variations : — 1st stage, Northampton to Grantham, 25
miles (Herbert, III, 324; T., L, 2i2); 2nd stage, Grant-
ham to Lincoln, 25 miles. But while Herbert (I.e.) makes
him consummate the 3rd stage by going in a boat from
Lincoln to Hermitorium, 40 miles, and remain in hiding-
at the latter place for three days, T. (I.e.) makes him
cross the river at Lincoln and then walk the distance of
40 miles on foot to Hermitorium, and remain there three
days or more. The account given by T. of the prelate's
forlorn manner of life at this place resembles, but agrees
not with, Herbert's description (I.e.). The next stage
from Hermitorium to Boston agrees with Herbert, with
the difference that T. makes no mention of the distance,
" decem milliaria ; " so also the next from Boston to what
T. calls Havelorr, and Herbert Haverolot, which Canon
Robertson identifies with Haverholme. The last stage
from Haverholme to Eastry is described more in detail
by Herbert (I.e.) than by T. (I, 244). On these wander-
ings the other lives speak with much vagueness ; cfr.
William of Canterbury (I., 42), Gamier (73-74), Roger
(IV., 55), Grim (II., 399).
Here we must notice the conflicting statements of the
biographers as to the date of the council. Fitzstephen,
who was present at it, gives the date as octava Sancti
Michaelis, feria tertia, i. e., Tuesday, October 6th ; and
Herbert, also present at it, as hebdomadæ feria quinta,
sexta ante beati Calixti natalitium, i. e., October 8th,
Calixtus day being counted exclusive. But Herbert,
not sure of the date, states it reservedly as " tempus, ni
fallor," Sec. T. gives the date as pridie idus Octobris,
i.e., Wednesday, October 14th ; while the contemporary
chronicler Gervase gives it as either iii. idus Octobris =
October 13th ; or, die tertia ante festum Sancti Kalixti,
October 12th (or 11th if St. Calixtus day be counted
exclusive). All these authorities, however, agree in
CXvi PREFACE.
referring the same proceedings to the same day of the
week. It would seem that Fitzstephen and Herbert are
really in substantial agreement. The meeting was sum-
moned for Tuesday October 6th, Fitzstephen (III., 50) ;
that day nothing was done, as the king was out hunting.
Next day, Wednesday, was by the same authority (I.e.)
apparently spent in settling an accidental grievance of
the archbishop's^ and in the preliminary discussion on the
case of John the Marshal. Thursday, it would seem, the
case of John came on for judgment, and at that point of
the proceedings Herbert's account begins. The real dif-
ference, therefore, between T. and these authorities is that
T. places the council a week later, but refers its proceed-
ings otherwise to the right days respectively. As to the
day on which the Archbishop left England, T. agrees with
Herbert in referring it to November 2, both making the
mistake of calling the day Tuesday, and T. committing
further the blunder of referrino- All Saints' dav to a
Monday. In Herbert, who also makes the mistake of
referring All Souls' to a Tuesday, we have a further
blunder in the statement : " qui fuit . . . quintus decimus
" dies ab ilia tertia feria, ab illo die Martis, quo apud
" Northamtune pugnarat ad bestias." By Herbert's own
chronology the memorable Tuesday at Northampton was
the 13th of October, so that the day in question was
really the 21st after the memorable Northampton Tues-
day. The editor of T., or his source, has, apparently,
observed this conflict between Herbert's chronolop'ical
statements, and, by giving primary importance to the
words : " qui fuit quintus decimus dies, &c.," brought
chronological harmony about by fixing the date of the
council a week later than it really was, i. e., October 13th.
The last Tuesday of it fell thus on October 20th, and
from that date, counted inclusive, to the Tuesday that
the departure from England took place, which was really
November 3rd, also counted inclusive, we have the exact
number of 15 days. In this way the statement of T.
PREFACE. CXvii
(I., 246, 3) that the archbishop departed on the loth day
from that third day on which he was most worried at
Northampton, tallies correctly with T.'s chronology. But
this affords no explanation of the blunder in Herbert,
which, w^e maintain, is not, and cannot be his own. We
must consider it a later interpolation by some ignorant
scribe, and w^e Avould point out that the source of it micdit
have been a heedless construction of Frtzstephen's words,
wdio says that the Archbishop remained in hiding in Eng-
land " a decimo quinto die post Sancti Michaelis usque
''• ad secundum diem Novembris." Duiing the following
night (" nocte " as Herbert has it), w^e take it, the passage
was effected, that is on Tuesday, November 3rd.
The story of the passage and landing one mile from
Gravelines (T., I., 246, 5 sqq.) agTees substantially w4th
Herbei-t (III., 324-25), but the encounter with the
fowding youth who suspected Thomas of being the Arch-
bishop, goes with Alan (II., 335). The account of his
fatigue and dexterous evasion from discovery (T., I., 248)
resembles the similar accounts by Herbert (III., 325)
and William (I., 42-43) as condensed in the Quadrilogus
(IV., 329-30). The anecdote of the Archbishop being-
recognised by the ostler at Gravelines (T., I., 248-252)
is also found in Herbert (III., 326-328), as is also (III.,
328-29) the story of the letter sent by king Henry
to the count of Flanders, and the causes of the enmity
between Thomas and that count (T., I., 252-53).
Chap. XXXIX. agrees, with some considerable varia-
tions, wdth the first Quadrilogus (lY., 332-34) as con-
densed from Herbert (III., 328-332), Alan (II., 336), and
William of Canterbury (I., 43) ; cfr. also Fitzstephen
(III, 71-72), Roger (IV., 56-57), Grim (II., 400-1),
Gamier (74-75).
The long and detailed story of the mission to king
Louis, Chap. LX., has, in its introductory part, no direct
source in the extant lives, though Ú\(i matter is mentioned
by Grim (II., 401), William (4445), and Herbert (III.,
CXVlll PREFACE.
332). First, when the saga comes to relate, how Thomas
sent his messengers to follow the King's legation close on
their heels unknown to themselves, Herbert (III., 333)
is the nearest source, and so to the end of the chapter, cfr.
also Grim (II., 401) and William (I., 44-45) ; but none
of these sources constitutes the immediate original of T.
Chap. XLI., with the exception of the account of the
interview of the Archbishop's emissaries with the pope
(T., L, 272, 7—274, ^^), where it follows Herbert (III.,
334), but in a strongly condensed form, comes nearest to
Alan (II , 337-340), so near, indeed, that Alan might be
taken as the immediate source. None of the other
extant lives could have been the source here, cfr. Grim
(II., 402-403), William of Cant. (L, 45-46), Fitzstephen
(III., 72-74). It is noticed already that the editor of
fragment D. (T., II., 263-64) has known a source of these
speeches which, in the one that it preserves of the earl
of Arundel, differs altogether from the known authori-
ties (see above, p. li-lii). What follows the address of
the earl in T. (I. 284, ^^ — 280) answers, in substance,
nearest to Herbert (III., 330-338). Among the j^ropo-
sals put forth by the royal ambassadors, the third (T.,
I., 286, 9_ii) finds a not distant parallel in Grim (II.,
402).
Chap. XLII. agrees substantially with Herbert (III.,
338-340), and, in that portion which describes the
Archbishop's reception by the cardinals at Sens, with
Alan (II., 341). Chap. XLIII., down to T., I, 294, ,,,
answers, in a general way, to Alan's narrative (II., 341-
42). At this stage T. (I., 294-98, cfr. I, 168, ,r,_,^) intro-
duces first the customs of Clarendon, those nine of the
seventeen, at least, which were the most objectionable
from the church's point of view. In this arrangement
T. depends upon none of the extant lives, nor are the
customs, as given in the contemporary Lives, the direct
source of T. : cfr. Fitzstephen (III., 47), Herbert (ib.,
280-284), and more particularly the " Causa exsilii et
PREFACE. CXÍX
" martyrii beati Thomæ, Migne," cxc, cols. 1413-16),
William (I., 18-23), Grim (II, 380) ; see also Lyttelton's
life of Hemy II. (vol. iv., pp. 182-185), Stubbs' select
Chai-ters, &e. (pp. 131-134). The story of the refutation
by the archbishop of cardinal William of Pavia, Chap.
XLIV., though, as stated in T., I., 300, footnote 5, it
bears close resemblance to the account of it oiven in the
Speculum historiale of Vincent de Beauvais, is also re-
ferred to by the contemporary writers : William of Can-
terbury (I., 46), Garnier (83), Grim (II., 403-4), Roger
(IV., 61, 63). It is noticeable that Herbert, himself
present on the occasion, does not even associate the
name of this or any other cardinal with the discussion
(III., 340-356). The condemnation by the Pope of the
constitutions of Clarendon, Chap. XLV, represents a
condensed account of Herbert's description of the final
interview with the Pope (III., 341-43) ; the matter is
briefly alluded to by Roger (IV., 63-64), and by William
(I., 46). The story of the resignation of the arch-
bishopric into the hands of the Pope corresponds with
Alan's account of the afliair (II., 3-42-43) ; the fact is also
mentioned by William (I, 46), Grim (II., 403), and, on
hearsay evidence, by Fitzstephen (III., 76). Strangely
enough, Herbert,who was with the Archbishop all through,
does not even allude to any such resignation. The
clauses describing the mode of the Ai'chbishop's restitu-
tion to his see agree with Alan's account (II., 344), but
the matter is told much more circumstantially in T.
Closest to Alan comes also the story of the Archbishop's
retirement to Pontigny (III., 344-45), though it is also
mentioned at length b}^ Herbert (III., 357-58), and
shortly referred to by Fitzstephen (III., 76), John of
Salisbury (II., 313), Garnier (90), Grim (II., 404), Roger
(IV., 64), and William (I., 46). The passage at the end
of this chapter (T., I., 312, - sqq.) is peculiar to T. alone.
The story told in Chapter XLVII., of the Cistercian
habit; procured from the Pope himself, is based on a
CXX PEEFACE.
source closely allied to Alan (II., 345-40). Divergencies
to be mentioned are, in the first instance, that T. makes
the Pope request the archbishop to benignly accept the
raiment on the ground that he wore such an one him-
self, while Alan's words are : " Dicite domino Cantuari-
" ensi, quod habitum ei misimus qualem habuimus, non
" qualem vellemus," words which agree exactly with
those quoted by Roger (IV., 64) and Grim (II., 345).
In the second instance, Herbert is stated in T. to have
been the messenger chosen to fetch the habit. This is
mentioned in no other life of Thomas. He is further
made to crack jokes with the archbishop about the fit
of the dress, which in the Latin authonties in one point
are a good deal broader than in the saga, but Alan as
well as Grim give it clearly to be understood that the
interlocutor was the cross-bearer, Alexander Llewellyn.
The description of the archbishop's studious habits at
the monastery, of his diet, illness, &c. (T., I., 316, -^_^^)
expresses briefly what Herbert (III., 376-77) and Fitz-
stephen (ib., 77) relate on the subject, cfr. William (I.,
49), Grim (IL, 412-13) ; but the nature of the illness as
described by the last named authority is unknown to
T. as well as to the other writers who mention it. The
vision recorded in T. (I., 316-318) is given only by Fitz-
stephen (HI., 83) and Grim (II., 419).
Chap. XLYIII. enumerates, in a manner peculiar to
T., the oppressive measures taken by the king on learn-
ing, how fruitless his mission to the pope had turned
out. Its statement, however, that the property of every
priest who died within the diocese of Canterbury should
be confiscated (T., L, 220, Q_y^), and that the king himself
appointed priests to vacant churches (i6., i^_ir^, is borne
out by William (I., 52) ; the appointment of the arch-
bishop of York to visit the southern archi episcopal
diocese (ih., i4_2o) 1« also testified to by William (I., 46) ;
and the confiscation of the Archbishop's property, and
the instalment of Ranulf de Broc into the stewardship
PREFACE. CXXl
of the see, is corroborated by Herbert (III., 360), Roger
(IV, Qo), Grim (II, 404), and Gamier (91).
At this point of the story (T, I, 322) we come upon
the tirst of the numerous letters, portions of letters, and
abstracts of letters, inserted into the Icelandic narrative.
Two of the extant biographers intersperse letters, in a
somewhat similar manner, into the story, namety,William
and Grim ; but neither is, in this peculiarity, the source
or type of the Icelandic. Out of the five letters which
Grim inserts, three are found in T. (Thomas to Henry,
I, 342-4C, Grim, II, 419-421 ; the English bishops to
Thomas,!, 394-396, Grim, II., 408-409; and the arch-
bishop's reply, I., 398-410). Of the letters inserted into
William's narrative only one is found in T., namely,
Foliot's to the Pope (T., L, 380-386, and in a fragmen-
tary state, II., 266-268, William, I., 58-59). It is quite
evident that for the plan of embodying these letters in
the narrative T. does not depend upon any of the now
extant lives of Becket. But as a composite life still
existed in an unpublished MS., " e Museo," No. 133^ in
the Bodleian Library at Oxford, by a monk of Croyland,
named Roger, who re- edited the older Quadrilogus, or
rather re-wrote a composite life on a new plan, I deemed
it my duty to ascertain, how far that Avork might be
the Icelander's model. The distinctive peculiarity of
Roger's work is, that it inserts into the nan-ative a vast
number of letters and fragments of letters throughout,
beginning immediately after the council of Northampton
and continuing to the end, suppressing even the narra-
tive itself, where the information contained in the let-
ters is considered ample enough to take the place of
it. But it soon became evident that this recension was
entirely unknown to the Icelandic editor ; between it
and the saga there is no agreement but by accident.
Equally clear is it that the Icelandic editor lias not
known Alan's large collection of the correspondence relat-
ing to Thomas, a fact, which goes far to prove, that T.'s
CXXU PREFACE.
agreement with Alan in the speeches, is really an agi-ee-
ment with some other source, which was closely allied
to Alan. This, too, bears out what we have advanced
on this point above (p. xc). If such a separate collec-
tion had been known in Iceland, it would certainly have
been mentioned or alluded to or made use of in the
Thomas saga ; but such is not the case. Consequently
the letters contained in Thomas saga must have been
embodied into the main source of that recension, that is,
into Robert of Cricklade's or Benedict's Life of Becket ;
and that the Icelandic editor did not depend on the
collection of Alan of Tewkesbury, seems further evident
from the fact that in the Icelandic version there are
inserted letters which seem not to exist anywhere else.
References to the Latin originals of the letters, which
the editor has been able to verify, are given in footnotes
in their proper places.
Chap. XLIX. in its introductory part, though sub-
stantially corresponding to Alan (II., 846), may be said
to be really peculiar to T. ; thus the action attributed
to " discurrentibus interim hinc inde nunciis ad pacis
" reformationem," the saga ascribes to epistolary inter-
vention of men of goodwill in France. The account of
the negotiations between the Pope and the King (T., I.,
o2G, 12-328) finds also a parallel in Alan (I.e.), but much
less circumstantially set forth than in T.
Chap. L., in its description of Henry's schismatic
plans (T., I., 830, 3.27), answers in substance to William
(I., 52), though tha,t author could not have been the
direct source, as he refers the overtures of king Henry
to join the emperor's schism to a date posterior to the
archbishop's removal from Pontigny (wherein he is fol-
lowed by the Quadrilogues), but T. to a time anterior
to that event. What next follows (T., I., 380, 27 to the
end of the chapter) is a summary of the retaliatory
measures taken by the King against the Archbishop and
the Pope, corresponding in substance to what William
PREFACE. CXXÍÍÍ
(I., 53-55) terms " novæ constitutiones regis," which he
inserts under 10 heads in his narrative, without, tow-
ever, stating under what circumstances, local or other-
wise, they were issued. But Gamier (93-95) followed,
as usual, by Grim (II., 405-406) and Roger (IV., (jo-QQ),
states positively that the king, '•' a Clarendone ad fet
" sun concilie assembler,'' and there issued the oppres-
sive enactments. It is not impossible, that such might
have been the case ; but it appears as likely that
the words " novæ constitutiones regis," which seem to
have been the title given to the document, when in
public circulation, suggested the idea, that these orders
had been issued at the same place as the famous *' con-
" stitutions " of 1164. The assumption was all the more
natural, that the great assize of Clarendon took place
the same year that these orders were issued (Stubbs'
select Charters, pp. 134-139).
As to the mission at this time, 1166, of the alleged
papal legates, Gerard, a sub-deacon, and Master Vivian
(T., I., 332, ;i6 sqq.), there is a confusion in the story
which we shall now try to clear up. At this time no
papal mission is mentioned by the contemporary autho-
rities. But Herbert (III., 383-385) states that during
1166 the Archbishop despatched, on three different occa-
sions, messengers to the king with a view to redressing
his wrongs. Twice a Cistercian abbot, Urban by name,
undertook the task. His first mission must have taken
place before the i-estoration of the legatine power to
Thomas, that is, before the 24th of April, because, as
Herbert says, the letters he bore were of the sweetest,
> " supplicationem solam, correptionem \'ero, nullam vel
" modicam, continentes," and stood in marked contrast
to those taken out on Urban's second mission, wliich
took place after the restoration of the legatine power :
" cui et vice hac non adeo suavia ut prius, sed et
" duriora legati viva voce dicenda injunxit, et littcras
*' aliquantulum austeritatis continentes destinavit.''
CXxiv PREFACE.
These missions having failed utterly, a third was de-
spatched in the person of a noted peace-maker, a tattered
bare-foot brother named Gerard the '' shoeless,'' accom-
panied by another person, whom Herbert does not men-
tion. We take it, that this is the Gerard whom T.
here introduces as a papal legate to king Henry, though
such a confusion seems very strange. This will become
clearer by a closer examination of the Pope's letter
to the King, and the account of the king's dealings with
the legates, and the part the bishop of Lisieux took in
the negotiations, as set forth in T., chap LI. and LII.
The letter of the Pope seems by its wording to fit into
the current of events exactly. It announces to the King
his resolution to restore to the Archbishop the legatine
dignity which Alexander, at the instance of Henry,
under certain restrictions, had conferred on the Archbishop
of York in Feb. 1164 (Ep. Alex. III., ccxxxvii., Migne,
cc, 285-286), thus, on that point agreeing with another
letter from the. same authority, of date April 24th
(Easter-day), 1166, in which the English clergy are called
upon to yield due obedience to the Archbishop as the
constituted papal legate to England (Fp. Alex. III.,
eccxcii., Migne, ib. 412-413). Now the letter in T. con-
tains this significant statement : " And we refuse hereby
" to close his mouth any longer." This refers to nothing
that thus far has been recorded in T., but it refers
most naturally to what the Pope might be supposed to
have borne in mind when writing. He had, namely, by
Peter's authority, really " closed " the archbishop's mouth,
by warning him, in a letter dated in June, 1165 (Kp.
Alex. III., cccli., Migne, ib. 377), to abstain until Easter
this very year (1166) from visiting his opponents with
ecclesiastical censure.s. At or about this very date
(April 24th, 1166) Alexander, in a letter to the Archbishop
removes this restriction (Ep. Alex. III., cccxciii., ib, 413).
The letter, announcing to the English clergy the restora-
tion of the legatine dignity to the Archbishop, was, for
PREFACE. CXXV
reasons which are beside the immediate question, not
delivered in England till the 30th of June. It is obvious
that the Pope could not make himself guilty of such a
discourtesy as to pass the king over in utter silence on
such an occasion. A letter addressed to the latter an-
nouncing the change would naturally have been delivered
at the same time, that the one to the clergy was pro-
mulgated, and the letter in T. might represent such an
original, as not only coming in at the right moment in the
narrative, but bearing in the features already exhibited
the stamp of real genuineness. Though no such letter is
known to exist now in originali, yet portions of this
letter, which we failed to verify, when editing the first
volume of the Saga, we now identify as embodied in one
of Alexander's to king Henry, (Ep. Dcxvii., Migne, cc,
586-88) dated Beneventi, vi. Idus Maii, and rightly
referred by all authorities to 1169, by which the Pope
announces to the king the appointment of the mission
headed by Gratian and Vivian. The correctness of the
date of this letter is further corroborated by an epistle
from Thomas tc Vivian (Ep. Thomæ clxxiii, Migne,
cxc, 646-647), criticising his conduct as legate, in which
we read : — '' Cæterum quod hortaris nos, ut descendamus
" ad colloquium regum, quod habituri sunt die Dominica
" proxima apud S. Dionysium, &c.," a meeting at S. Denis
having only once taken place, and without any doubt
in 1169. In T. the letter appears in a ver}^ condensed
and a very disguised form, and the statements which
we have just been discussing do not appear in the
Latin letter at all. The tone of the Latin letter is
very different from that of the Icelandic, much more
considerate and conciliatory : cfr. ' nunc autem, quoniam
" ex litteris postremo per nuntios tuos nobis transmissis,
" animum tuum in his, divina inspirante dementia, no-
" vimus leniorem, et ad id quod regis Christianissimi et
" pii principis est, non modicum inclinatum, gaudio gau-
" demus in Domino, etc." — The solution of the question
K541. i
CXXvi PREFACE.
seems to be that, in T., two letters are here fused together,
one, treating of the restoration to Thomas of the legatine
power in 1166, the other, dealing with the mission of
Gratian and Vivian in 1169 ; the original author, who-
ever he was, having satisfied himself, that both belonged
together, and referred to two inseparable facts which
happened in 1166 ; the interchange of the names of
Gratian and Gerard might be an accident only, or it
might be the result of a deliberate choice on the part of
the author of T. or his original, taking Gerard, the archi-
episcopal legate, to have been the Pope's legate at the
same time, and Gratian as a variation or corruption
of it.
The description in Chap. LII. of king Henry's beha-
viour towards the legates tallies, in its extreme brevit}'',
with the account of the transactions sent to the Arch-
bishop by a friend who was present at the proceedings,
(Ep. Cuiusdam amici ad Thomam, Var. Epp. ccclxxxiii.,
Migne, cxc, 720-22). From that letter, too, we learn,
that bishop Arnulf of Lisieux favoured the king's party,
which explains the statement of T. that the king threw
it out, as a disdainful suggestion, that the bishop of
Lisieux might, if he liked, write an answer to the Pope
about the transactions. The Bishop's letter, as it appears
in T., is but a short, though faithful, precis of the original
letter (Arnulfi Lexov. ep. Ixii., Migne, cci., 91-92). The
account of this mission cannot be borrowed from any
now extant life of Thomas ; the behaviour of the king,
which in the opening passages of Chap. LII. is accen-
tuated as " noisy " and " brawling," evidently rests on
some such testimony as the above referred-to anonymous
letter to Thomas, but not on Herbert's description of
the proceedings, still less on William's. Pightl}^, all
that which refers to this mission should come into the
story at p. 444, where it is again referred to, but is
dismissed with a few general sentences, without even
the names of the legates being mentioned.
PREFACE. CXXVÍÍ
Chap. LIIL, after some general remarks on the situa-
tion of affairs, gives a pretty full precis of what T. intro-
duces as the first letter of the Archbishop to the King-
after his flight abroad. We have mentioned akeady the
three missions from Thomas to the King during 1166, and
the gradually increased severity of tone assumed by the
former. We have sui^mised that the first mission of
Urban took place before Thomas was restored to the
legatine ofiice. A letter which, from its cordial and
temperate tone, might be supposed to have been taken
out on that occasion, still exists, in the salutation of
which Thomas styles himself only " Cantuariensis eccle-
" siæ humilis minister " (Ep. clxxviii., Migne, cxc, 649-
51). In the present, the salutation of which is only
preserved in the Icelandic, he styles himself " legate," so
that in it we have probably that, ' somewhat more stern,'
missive, which Urban took with him on his second
mission, which, as we have pointed out above (p. cxxiii),
took place after Easter, 1166. So that, almost certainly,
this is not the first letter from the Archbishop to the
King after the flight abroad. Yet T. is not the only
authority which regards it so ; Fitzstephen (III.;, 81)
seems to look upon it in the same light.
Chap. LIY. introduces the banishment of the Prelate's
kindred as a retaliatory measure resorted to by the King
and his counsellors, on learning that the Archbishop had
been restored to the legatine office. In no other extant
life is such a connection put forth ; on the contrary, the
banishment of the Archbishop's kin and partisans is una-
nimously connected by the extant authorities with the
failure of the negotiations of -the first mission to the
Pope, and the sympathy with which the Archbishop was
treated in France : cfr. Herbert (III., 373), William (I.,
47), John of Salisbury (II., 313), Gamier (91), Grim
(II., 404), Roger (IV., 64-65). The portion of this
chapter (T., I., 350, i^ to the end), which reviews the rela-
tion of the King to public, particularly ecclesiastical,
i 2
CXXVlll PREFACE.
opinion, does not seem to depend immediately on any
of the extant lives.
The historical matter of Chap. LV. is also found in the
contemporary writers, but nowhere connected in the same
manner. The Pope's departure for Italy seems to be men-
tioned only by Alan (II., 347) ; Herbert, the Archbishop's
constant companion, does not even allude to it, although,
if it is historical, that the archbishop accompanied Alex-
ander as far as Bourges (T., IL, 257, 22-2:? j Alan, 1. c), Her-
bert must not only have been aware of it, but, in all pro-
bability, have been in the Archbishop's suite. But at this
time Herbert has a somewhat loose hold on the thread of
the narrative. T. is the only Life of Thomas which puts
the Pope's departure and the restoration of the legatine
office in strict and correct historical connection. In T.
(354, -_ij, it is averred, that the Pope left himself behind
with the Archbishop, joining his authority with the archi-
episcopal power of the latter, &;c. ; cfr. Herbert (III., 397).
As we have already seen, the legatine power was restored
to the Archbishop April 24th, 1166 ; about, or rather,
immediately after that date, the departure took place, for
there is documentary evidence to show, that on or about
April 2Sth the Pope arrived at Bourges. The affair of
the bishop of Salisbury (T., I., 354, 20, sqq.) is mentioned
by Herbert (III., 391-92) and Fitzstephen'(III., 92), but
their accounts, as to the facts of the case, do not
tally with that of T. The letter, excommunicating the
Bishop, agrees, substantially, with the text preserved in
Migne, cxc, ep. cxlvii., 628, but neither with that of
William (I., 63), nor with á third recension, now pub-
lished in Materials, Y. 3.97-99. But the letter excom-
municating John of Oxford (T., I., 358-60) is only
preserved in T. The letter addressed by the Archbishop
to king Henry at this juncture (T., I., 360-68) is a
pretty full abstract of the original, and much more severe
in tone than that already discussed. The salutation
bears witness to his writing in his legatine capacity ;
PKEFACE. CXXÍX
quite possibly this is the third letter which he wrote to
the king from Pontigny, and of which "shoeless" Gerard
was the bearer.
The story of the Archbishop's removal from Pontigny,
reception by king Louis, and settlement at Sens, is hei'e
related in a more circumstantial manner than by any
contemporary authority, cfr, Herbert (III., 397-407),
William (I., 50-51), Koger (IV., 65), Fitzstephen (III.,
83-84), John of Salisbury (II., 313-315), Grim
(II., 413-15), Garnier (128-138). The choice of St. Co-
lumba's monastery, near Sens, for residence, which is
mentioned by all these authorities, with the exception of
John of Salisbury and William, is, however, unknown to
T. The story of the Archbishop's dream, prognosticating
the manner of his death, follows pretty closely Herbert's
account of the same (III., 405-406), cfr. William (I., 51).
The introductory remarks of Chap. LVII. seem pecu-
liar to T. The Pope's letter to the bishop of London is
introduced here out of date, no doubt on the ground of
the clause (T., L, 378, ^.,_-^^) : " Now, in the third place, it
" seemed to him a matter not to be borne with, that the
" Archbishop should abide in quiet in Pontigny in com-
" pany with poor Gray-monks, according to our com-
" mand." But the original letter contains no such
statement, and is, besides, dated Claremont, June 8th,
1165. However, we doubt not, that the statement was
found in the Latin original. The letter of the bishop of
London in answer to this of the Pope is a pretty full and
exact translation of the first half of the original. The
earliest recension of Thomas saga must have preserved
a close translation of the whole letter, as may be inferred
from fragment D., (T., II., 266-68). The concluding
sentence in which the bishop refuses to lend money to
the Pope, has nothing corresponding in the now extant
Latin original. The letter of the Pope to which the
saga next alludes (T., I., 386, 17) is, no doubt, the same
that Alexander dispatched from Gradus Mercurii, August
CXXX ' PREFACE.
22, 1165 ( see T., I., 380, foot note 14, where the mis-
print cxc. should be corrected to cc). No other Life of
Thomas deals with this correspondence in the way that T.
does.
Chap. LIX., in its introductory passages, is peculiar to T.
The two visions it records are both found in Herbert,
but not joined together as is the case here, nor set in the
same frame of circumstances. The first, to which refer-
ence is made again (T., II., 176, 2o-178) in the same cir-
cumstances into which Herbert weaves it, is found in
Herbert's Liber Melorum (Melus II., Migne, cxc, 1320-
21 ; cfr. Materials, IV., 419), told, of course, with far
greater prolixity than in T. ; the second we find intro-
duced by Herbert (HI., 460-61) in 1170, when he brings
the crowning of the young king (June 14) under debate.
No extant Life could have been here the immediate
source of matter or arrangement. It may be noticed that
the explanation of the second vision, which is promised
at the end of the story, never occurs ; on the contrary
the writer supposes that Henry the younger is still alive
in 1220 doing homage to the saint on the occasion of his
translation (T., II., 204-206). The paragraph relating
to the archbishop of York (T., I., 390-92) agrees in
substance with William of Canterbury (I.,- 60), who sup-
ports his statement by adducing the Pope's letter, to
which the saga refers. This letter (ep. Alex. III.,
ccclxxxiv., i^Iigne, cc, 406-7 ; Materials, V., 296) is
dated Laterani, v. kal. Feb. (January 28th), and by
collectors rightly referred to the year 1166. It is ad-
dressed to the bishops of England, warning them not to
join in any violation of the rights and privileges of Can-
terbury. It is worthy of note that, in part, the wording of
this letter is identical with that of a letter addressed by
the pope to the archbishop of York, peremptorily forbid-
ding him to carry the cross through the province of Can-
terbury. We suggested (T., I., 392, footnote 7) that this
latter epistle, though referred by the collectors to January
PREFACE. CXXXÍ
1164, (by Migne, who prints it in two places, first to
1162, ep. Alex. III., Ixxxv., and again to 1164,
ccxxxv., vol. cc, 161, and 282-283, resp.), must be con-
nected with this very Lateran epistle, their actual rela-
tion appearing obviously to be prohibition to York not
to infringe on the rights of Canterbury, and warning to
the bishops not to incur penalties in joining York in any
act of disobedience of this order. Our view has now
been corroborated by Canon Robertson's edition of this
letter. Materials, V., 68, from MS. Claudius, B. II., Cott.
Coll. in the British Museum, where it is dated Lateran i
iv. Idus (10th) Decembris, seven weeks before the one to
the bishops was penned. There are obvious difficulties
in the way of referring it to the year 1164. During
January in that year the Pope had written in a friendly
tone to York to abstain from carrying the cross in the
southern diocese until the controversy concerning the
privilege of York in this respect should have been duly
settled. For York to have offended against this prohibi-
tion within the same month, and the matter to have gone
to the Pope for decision, at the same time that Thomas
was taken up with the preliminaries of the transactions
of Clarendon (Jan. 25-28), seems almost out of question.
Besides, the letter would seem to have been penned in
consequence of the defenceless state of the province of
Canterbury having been taken advantage of by the
northern prelate. While therefore nothing seems to
favour the date 1164, nothing seems to war against Dec.
10th, 1166.
The correspondence between the bishops of England,
in the name of Gilbert Foliot of London, and Thomas
(T., L, 894-410), is peculiar to this Life, to Garnier
(111-124), and to Grim (II., 408-12), who, however,
introduces it at a different date, aftei' the crowning of
Henry the younger. The letters as given in T. are but
abstracts of the originals, though to the point through-
out. Foliot's letter is not dated, but is written early
CXXXll PREFACE.
enough in tlic year to allow the bishops time to proceed
to Rome and be there by Ascension day (June 2nd),
the term fixed for the appeal by Foliot.
Chap. LXII. (misprinted LXXII.), T., I., 410 sqq.
introduces the mission of cardinals William and Odo
with, various observations which do not appear in the ex-
tant Lives. William (I, 64) says the king demanded the
mission, on the ground, that his friends had been excom-
municated. Of the king's secret letter to these commis-
sioners (T., I., 412, 9_i4) he makes no mention, nor any
other contemporary biographer. The proceedings and
result of this mission are told by William (I., 64-65)
substantially in the same manner as in T., except that
Thomas's dream is not referred to by that writer : but in
Herbert (III., 409-412), who gives a long-spun account
of the legation, the dream is recorded in agreement
with the account of it in T. As the account of this
mission is rendered in T. neither of the authorities
mentioned could have been the original source, nor yet
the Quadrilogus ; it must depend upon an unknown
authority.
The excommunications mentioned in Chap. LXIII. are
not, as we wrongly indicate, (T., I., 418), those of Vezelay,
which we supposed the Icelandic version had misplaced
in date, but they are those of Sens, and are rightly
referred by T. to the year 1167 (Herbert, HI, 413-414).
It would seem that T. knew no particular narrative of
the proceedings at Vezelay, which are graphically dealt
with by Herbert, but confined itself only to the principal
letters of excommunication written on that occasion.
The passage relating to prayers for the archbishop
having been prohibited throughout England (T., I.,
420, 4.«) agrees with Herbert (III., 360). But both
accounts would seem only to amount to an amplifica-
tion of some record similar to Fitzstephen's (HI.,
83) : " In capella domini regis in cantico illo festivo,
" Christus vincit, non dicebant archiepiscopo, cum
PREFACE. CXXXÍÍÍ
'•' ventum esset ad ilium versum, seel archiepisco-
" pus, pax, salus et vita." In stating that the party
inimical to Thomas, after the excommunications of
Sens, appealed against him to Rome, T. seems to
follow Herbert (III., 412-413), or, rather, some similar
source. Herbert states that the appeal was made at
Le Mans, which statement is also embodied in the Quad-
rilogues, but the Icelandic knows nothing of any place
at which it was issued. After mentioning that the
king and his party displayed fresh activity in conse-
quence of the excommunications of Sens, Herbert (III.,
415) goes on, in words somewhat similar to the Saga
(I., 420, 19, sqq.), to describe the interest the French king-
now took in the dispute ; and the result of the busy
communications is told in the sao-a in a condensed form in
harmony with Herbert's prolix account (III., 417-18).
Pope Alexander's letter to the King (T., I., 422-24) has
no place in any other life of Thomas, but is here only an
abstract of the original (T., 1. c, footnote 10). The sub-
stance of Chap. LXIY. (T., I., 424-26) is also found in
Herbert (HI., 418), with the exception of the admoni-
tion which Louis is made to administer to Henry (T., I.,
426, 7_i3). But the account of the meeting at Mont-
mirail (T., I., 426, i8-432), which T. seems (I., 433, 03) to
place somewhere in the neighbourhood of that place, is
told in closest agreement with Alan's relation of the same
(IL, 347-349) ; cfr. Herbert (IIL, 418-426), Fitzstephen
(III., 97), William (I., 73-74). Chap. LXV., setting
forth the estrangement of king Louis in consequence of
the Archbishop's unyielding attitude at Montmirail (T.,
I., 432-436), agrees substantially with Herbert (IIL,
427-437) as condensed in the Quadrilogus prior (IV.,
362-63); cfr. also Alan (IL, 349). The rest of the
chapter (T., I., 436, .,.,-440) agrees with Alan (IL, 349-50),
cfr. Herbert (IIL, 439-40), William (I., 75), with the
exception of the passages which follow king Louis's
penitential effusion (T., L, 440, io-2.j), whicli are peculiar
CXXXIV PREFACE.
to T., iDossibly the Icelander's own reflections. Chap.
LXVI. (T., I., 440-42) is not directly drawn from any
extant contemporary life, but is in closest agreement
with Alan (II., 351). The precis in oratione clirecta of
the letter written by Henry to the French king (T., I.,
442, 8-n) answers, in substance, to what Alan (1. c.) sets
forth in narrative style. The sequel (T., I., 442, ^7-444)
agrees with Herbert (III., 440) as to the influence
brought to bear on the French king for the purpose of
causing a new legatine mission to be sent out from Rome.
But the mission itself, that of Gratian and Vivian, is
dismissed with only a short notice to the eflect that it
proved utterly futile (see p. cxxiii-cxxvi). The meeting
at Montmartre is described (T., I., 444, 25-448) sub-
stantially in the way that William deals with it (I., 75),
but T. is more circumstantial ; the incident of the kiss
of peace (T., I., 446, 03, sqq.) is told somewhat after the
way of Herbert's (III., 450-51) condensed account of it
in the Quadrilogus prior (IV., 367).
The introductory matter of Chap. LXVII. (T., I.,
448, 21-450, i_7) is peculiar to T., and may only be the Ice-
landic editor's own, introduced in order to show that
the refusal of the kiss of peace at Montmartre had its
cause in the secret plan which the king was hatching
at the very moment, namely, of having his son crowned
in despite of Canterbury, which also Herbert implies
(III., 358). The account of the act itself, although
similar to that of the Quadrilogus prior (IV., 368-369),
difíers from all extant authorities in a marked degree ;
cfr. William (I., 81-83), Herbert (III., 458-460), Roger
(IV., 66-67), John of Salisbury (II., 815), Fitzstephen
(III., 103), and Garnier (97-98), who makes it take
place anterior to the archbishop's removal from
ÍPontigny. T., namely (I., 450, ii_2o)> states that king-
Henry sent ambassadors to Rome to procure an order
from the Pope, authorising the archbishop of York to
perform the ceremony. No other Life refers to any such
FKEJb'ACE. CXXXV
mission on this occasion, yet in itself it is quite plausible
that it might have been sent, considering what had
gone before in connexion with the state poHcy, which
was consummated on June 14th, 1170. Henry II. had
for a lono" time entertained the idea of crownino- his
son. Already during Thomas's chancellorship he had
taken care to pave the way for the coronation, by em-
. ploying the irresistible influence of his great chancellor
to cause homage to be done to his son by the barons
and other mighty men of England (Roger, lY., 13). The
nomination of Thomas to the see of Canterbury was
avowedly an act done with that view ; indeed Grim
states positively (IL, 366) that the king sent the chan-
cellor to England, "pro diversis negotiis et præsertim
" ut filio suo, jam tunc coronando in regem, fideHtatem
" et subjectionem acciperet ab universis, et juraretur in
" regem." Probably both the last named authorities
refer to one and the same act. But that the matter wai>
not left altogether in abeyance from 1162-70, may be
inferred from the letters which pope Alexander wi^ote in
the interval to the archbishop of York, who was per-
petually on the alert for asserting pri^dleges for his see
at the expense of Canterbury. We conclude, namely,
that whenever the pope finds it necessary to address
the northern primate on this subject, rumour of impend-
ing coronation was abroad, carrying with it sohcitations
on the part of the Northern, and remonstrances on the
part of the Southern Primate. Thus we find that, as
early as July 14th, 1162, Roger of York obtained from
the Pope the privilege of crowning kings in England
(Materials, Y., 21) ; it was, however, revoked by the
same authority, April 5th, 1166 (Ep. Alex. III., cccxc,
Migne, cc, 411 ; Materials, Y., 323), on the ground that
he had learnt that, by immemorial custom, the priWlegc
appertained, to Canterbury. Nevertheless, May 3 1st,
1167, at the request of the King, the Pope authorises the
Northern Primate to crown his son (Ep. Alex. III. cdlv.,
CXXXVl PREFACE.
Migne, cc, 457); but again, Feb. 26th, 1170, forbids
the same Archbishop peremptorily, under threats of
severe penalties, to have anything to do with the coro-
nation ceremony (Ep. Alex. III., dcxcv., Migne, cc, 653).
The author, that is, the Latin source, of T. has appa-
rently known some record setting forth, how the pri-
vilege of May 81st, 1167, was solicited, but deeming it
powerless in the face of the prohibition of February 26th,
1170, saved the pope's ioconsistency by only mentioning
the latter as the outcome of a royal mission of 1167.
Herbert (III., 458-59) states positively that the last of
Alexander's letters was the result of remonstrances from
Thomas ; and. while T. (I., 452, i^-ig) makes Thomas
send letters of warning to the bishops not to proceed to
the unlawful consecration, Herbert (III., 459) positively
avers, that letters of the Pope's were so sent, and that
such really was the case we learn from a papal letter
probably of date February 26th, 1170 (Ep. Alex. III.,
Dcxcvi., Migne, cc, 653), which, following immediately
the above-mentioned epistle of the same date, forbids
every kind of infringement of the privileges of Can-
terbury by the bishops of England. The reception of
the letter is in T. (I., 452, 12-21) described in a manner
similar to Herbert's, (1. c) ; the rest of the stovy agrees
with William (I., 83), except the reflections attached to
it (T., I., 454, i_if,), which are peculiar to T. alone.
Chap. LXVIII. (T., I., 454-458, ^_y^) corresponds sub-
stantially with the narratives of Herbert (III., 462-63)
and William (I., 76), as woven into the Quadrilogus prior
(IV., 369-370) ; agreeing with it even in connecting with
the coronation, the letter of Alexander, whereby he con-
stitutes the bishops of Rouen and Nevres commissioners
of peace (Ep. Alex. III., Dclxxvi., Migne cc, 637-39);
though that document is dated January 19th, more than
four months in advance of the coronation, and does not
refer to that act at all. In arrangement and detail there
are such discrepancies, however, between the Quadri-
PREFACE. CXXXVÍÍ
logus and T., that the former could not on any account
have been the immediate source of the latter.
The latter portion of this chapter (T., I., 458, i„ — 460),
descriptive of the transactions preliminary to the peace,
as well as Chap. LXIX., setting forth the reconciliation,
are in general agreement with the story as told in the
Quadrilogus (IV., 371 — 373), which is a condensation of
Herbert (III., 463 — 69) with one [)assage inserted from
William (I., 84), which roughly corresponds to T. (I.,
462, 19 — 464, i_g). In agreement with Herbert (III, 466)
T. (I., 462, 7_i^) states that the understanding between
King and Archbishop as to the punishment of the bishops,
who crowned the young Henry, was arrived at in private
without witnesses ; cfr. Fitzstephen (III., 1 07 — 111) ; this
important statement seems afterwards to have escaped
the memory of some of the contemporaries, who would
volunteer to act as witnesses, having heard the king
himself agreeing to the excommunication of the bishops
(see the letter of Theobald count of Blois, T., II., 20).
The latter portion of this chapter (T., I., 464, .,0 — 4-68)
still follows, substantially, the story as told in the Quad-
rilogus prior (IV., 372-373) ; cfr. Herbert (III., 467-69).
But it commits the singular blunder of makino- John of
Salisbury Thomas's successor in the see of Canterbury.
Herbert, in mentioning the mission sent by Thomas to
the King consisting of himself and John, adds to the intro-
duction of the name of the latter : " postea Carnotensem
" episcopum ;" which at first sight would seem to be tlie
original source of the blunder. But such, we take it,
is not the case ; the Icelandic translator shows himself
throughout far too careful to be capable of changing
Carnotensem into Cantuariensem and episcopum into
archiepiscopum. The blunder must have been already
in the original from which he translated. It is again
repeated T., II., 42, in the words : " they cleanse the
" church of Canterbury, and choose for archbishop
'' thereof John of Salisbury, a lawful man, who had
CXXXVlll PREFACE.
'' been in exile with the blessed archbishop Thomas ;"
and again, T., II., 184, archbishop John is made princi-
pally instrumental in procining the canonisation of
Thomas. It is e\ádent that thouo^h it miííht be allowed
that the mistake was the translator's in the first instance,
in the second and the third it must depend on the inde-
pendent sources from which the translation was made.
Chap. LXX follows generally the line of the narrative
of the Quadrilogus (IV., 373-374) as condensed from
Herbert (HI., 469-470) ; but amplifies it considerably
with details which are either not mentioned, or else only
alluded to in passing, b}" Herbert, such as the intro-
ductory clauses about the differences between Henry and
the count of Blois, and the statement that the king
returned fi'om Chaumont into Xormandv. and there
established a great court, even as also tlie reasons which
the writer conjectures directed the king's coui^se at this
juncture (T.. I., 472, ig-o]). Here, it ma}' be obseiwed,
the translator possibly knew that his source was
Herbert ; as, in giving the interpretation of the king's
address, he adds : " But the master who wi'ote these
"■ things in Latin saith that these words had called fitly
" to mind the example of Satan vaunting his bounty on
" the mountain." Herbert, however, sa^'s distinctly that
the intei^iiretation was not his, but his master's, the
Archbishop's.
Chap. LXXI. opens with a rapid review of the Ai'ch-
bishop's stay abroad, and departure from Sens, with a
notice inserted about Symon, archdeacon of Sens, to the
effect that he joined the Archbishop's suite for the purpose
of a family ^-isit to England, which is mentioned in no
other contemporary life of Thomas, except, in different
circumstances, Garnier's (165). The long and circum-
stantial account of the famous carbuncle of the French
reo^alia. how it was found, and how Thomas, fore-
knowing that it would be his property eventually,
asked the French king for the gift of it, is peculiar to this
PREFACE. CXXXÍX
Life only. In T, II., 212-222, the story is told at great
length, how Louis Tilth's son, Philip II., was fain to
promise the jewel to Canterbury as a price for his being
healed of leprosy, and how, on regTetting the bargain,
when the saint had done his part of it, the stone jumped
from the ring and was at once firmly set in the golden
face of the shrine. As these stories are told in the Ice-
landic they are due to an unknown author. Diceto (I.,
'43-233), Gervase (L, 293), Bened. Peterb. Chron. (L,
240-2), mention that Louis on the occasion of his son's
sickness did homage at the shrine, and bestowed lordl}^
e'ifts on the saint, but no mention is made of the rino-.
Nowhere have we succeeded in finding corresponding-
originals in other writers, though allusions to both stories
are not wanting ; cfr. Materials, II., 298, and IV., 265.
Louis, however, is only known elsewhere to play the
part that in the Icelandic saga is ascribed to his son
Philip. The thread of the narrative is again taken up,
T., I., 478, 28, at Thomas's arrival at Whitsand, but is
again interrupted by Chap. LXXII. (T., L, 480-
484, i_i.2); describing the effect which the settlement
of peace and the Archbishop's impending return
produced in England. This portion of the chapter
is derived directly from no extant life of Thomas. It
may be observed that the mission of John of Salisbury
to Canterbury, which William (I., 602) mentions first
after the arrival at that place of the primate, is here
inserted in better chronological order, prior to that
event.
The next passage (T., I., 482, i^oq) deserves a passing-
observation. While Thomas was at Whitsand, he sent
before him letters of suspension and excommunication to
the archbishop of York, and the bishops of London and
Salisbury, which letters they received according to some
authorities at Dover ; according to others, at Canter-
bury ; cfr. Herbert (III.,47l-72), Fitzstephen (III, 1 17),
William (I., 89), Roger (IV., 68), Thomæ Epp. ad Alex-
andrum papam, xxvii (Migne, cxc. 484-87). But T.
Cxl PREFACE.
describes the mode of the delivery of these letters to the
archbishop of York in his own cathedral church substan-
tially in the same manner as Fitzstephen (III., 89, 90) sets
forth Berengar's deliver}^ to the bishop of London of the
letter of excommunication which Thomas issued against
him at Clairvaux, April 13th, 1169. It would almost seem
as if William of Canterbury (1. c.) was cognisant of tiie
mode of delivery of the letter of suspension to the arch-
bishop of York having been effected in a manner similar
to that described in the Icelandic saga, though differentl}'
localized, when he says : " Dum itaque littus obsidentes
" exspectant, ante exspectatum puer Dovram præmissus
" litteras suspensionis in oratorio beati Petri porrexit."
Was the " puer," whom the archbishop's enemies after
the reading of the letters searched for in order to take
his life, but who saved himself by flight (William, I., 95)
that " javenis, non litteratus, periculo multo se exj)onens,
'^ sed pro Deo mori non veritus " (Fitzstephen, III., 89),
who so successfully took the Clairvaux fulminations to
London and York the year before — Berengar himself
again ?
The latter portion of this chapter (T., I., 484-88) gives
the story, independently of the arrangement of the
Quadrilogus, and in substantial harmony with William
(L, 86-87) and Herbert (IIL, 471-76). In mentioning
Guzalin as one of the ringleaders with Ranulf de Broc
in stirring up the country against the Archbishop, T.
refers evidently to that " Gocelinus frater reginæ," that
is, Joscelin of Louvain, younger brother of Adeliza the
queen of Henry I., who afterwards, acting on the part
of the young king, forbade the Archbishop to proceed
on a visit to him at Winchester (Fitzstephen, III., 121-
122 ; William, I., 112-13). In no other life is Joscelin
associated with Ranulf in his proceedings on the arrival
of the primate.
Chap. LXXIIÍ. (T., I. 488-492, i_2o) traces the thread
of the story in a general agreement with the Quadrilogus
(lY., 376-378), which, however, is not the source of T.
PREFACE. Cxli
Thus the part taken by John of Oxford (T., I., 490,ic_i9),
which the Qnadrilogus does not mention, agrees with
William (1,100-101) and Gamier (1G4) ; cfr. John of
Salisbury (ep. 300). In the same manner the episode of
Symon archdeacon of Sens (T., I., 492, n-is), cfr. p. cxxxviii.
above, is unknown to the Quadrilogus, but is related by
William (I., 101) and Garnier (165), these two being
the only contemporary authorities who mention these
things. The rest of this chapter (T., I., 492, .o-494), de-
scribing the entry of the archbishop into Canterbury,
may be said to be peculiar to T., though a general agree-
ment with Herbert (III., 478-79), cfr. William (I., 102),
is observable.
The proceedings of the fii^st day of the archbishop's
residence at his see after the return. Chap. LXXIY.
(T., I., 496-498, i_.2i,), are set forth in a manner peculiar to
T. ; but recurring points of agreement are observable
with Herbert (III., 480), William (I., 102-104), and
Fitzstephen (III., 120-121). The remainder of the
chapter (T., I., 498, 2,r502) follows closely the story
as condensed in the Quadrilogus (IV., 379-381) from
Herbert (III., 481) and William (L, 105, 122-23).
Chap. LXXV. (T., I., 504-506,i_.2o), runs in general
agreement with Herbert (III., 482-483). It is notice-
able, that in mentioning the mission of Richard, abbot
of St. Martin's (Dover), T. omits the words which now
stand in the original : " postea in sede Cantuariensi
" suum successorem." Had these words stood in the
" original of the saga, it is not likely that the editor
would have struck them out, for, as a rule, he is careful
to embody such historical notices in his text. But
otherwise it is in vain to speculate, how he came to
prefer the blunder, above referred to, in the case of John
of Salisbury, to the true statement about Richard. It
does not appear, that the Icelandic editor knew the
detailed account of this mission of Richard's, or its
K 541. k
Cxlii PREFACE.
results, as set forth by William (I., 105-111), and Fitz-
stephen (III, 121-126).
Chap. LXXVI. exhibits a general agreement with the
Quadrilogns (IV., 382-385) as condensed from William
(I., 120-29) and Herbert (III., 484-487), but its word-
ing, except in the recapitulation of the speeches inserted,
depends on a different source altogether. Into the
report of the speeches of king Henry, T. inserts a pas-
sage (L, 514, .,_J which is derived from Grim (II., 429)
or some similar source; cfr. Garnier(175).
In Chap. LXXVII. the passage of the Channel by the
conspirators is told in conformity with the Quadrilogus
(I v., 385-86), but more detailed and not immediately
depending thereon. T. introduces into the story here
(I, 518,19-522, i_3) rumours which came to the ears of the
archbishop, of the intentions of the knights, while they
remained at Saltwood, making up their plans. The circum-
stantial narrative of these rumours, and their effect upon
the archbishop, seem to be peculiar to T. only. Fitz-
stephen (II 1., 130) alludes to them in general terms : " ante
'•' adventum eorum beatus archiepiscopus de imminente
" occisorum ejus ingressu certissime fuit edoctus." The
passage in T., which seems to bear a distinct impress of
genuineness, lends a feature of additional interest to the
dreadful drama. This chapter winds up with a state-
ment to the effect, that the four knights arrived in Can-
terbury^ on the '' fourth " day of Christmas (Dec. 28th),
late in the evenino- and remained in the town durinof
the night, behaving quietl}^ after the fashion of ordinary
travellers. Here the source of T. has followed, not the
Quadrilogus, which states the day correctly in the words
of Benedict, ''die Natalis Domini quinto," but Herbert
of Bosham (III., 488), who, possibly from predilection,
makes it " quartus Natalis Domini dies, videlicet in
" Sanctorum Innocentium die." But while he dates the
murder on that day, T., by making the knights rest over
PREFACE. cxl
111
night in Canterbury, brings it over to the next, in order
to effect chronological harmony with the next chapter,
and to give the correct date to the murder.
Chap. LXXVIII. runs in general agreement with
the Quadrilogus (lY., 386-392) ; yet such are the trans-
positions, abbreviations of some, and additions to
others of the speeches of the interlocutors, that that
record could not have been the immediate source of T.
The close of this first interview w^th the kniohts, as
described by Benedict, who is the sole authority here,
where John of Salisbury indignantly rebukes the Arch-
bishop for his want of tact, is not even alluded to in T.
Chap. LXXIX. though, like the preceding, generally
in harmony with the Quadrilogus (IV., 392-94!), as
condensed from Benedict (II., 9-13), William (I., 131-
133), John of Salisbury (II., 319), and Herbert (III.,
402-403), is not derived from that source immediately.
Thus, on returning from the first interview to their
comrades, T. alone makes the knights arm with the
declaration that they " hold the archbishop a dead man
" by reason of the folly which is manifest in him." The
description of the armour of the knights does not tally
with the Quadrilogus, which gives it first in the words
of Benedict, and afterwards again, on their entering the
church, in the words of William. The progress of the
armed band into the archiepiscopal palace is more de-
tailed in the Quadrilogus, while, on the other hand, T.'s
statement that all the palatial chambers resounded with
the noise of the housebreakers, and that the monks at
their evening service in the cathedral mixed their voices
with the terror and fear caused by these proceedings, is
peculiar to T. Again in stating that the archbishop was
as blithe as if the murderers had come to bid him to a
wedding, is unknown to the Quadrilogus, but is derived
from Grim (II., 433). In the same manner the intro-
duction of the notice about the evensong of the monks
(T., L, 534, i9_.,j) seems to be peculiar to T., while the
k 2
Cxliv PllEFACE.
reason urged by the clerks who surrounded the arch-
bishop (T., I., 536,^"^), that he ought to go to the cathe-
dral to attend service, as the monks had done theirs,
is not recorded in the Quadrilogus, but by Fitzstephen
(III., 188), who is also the authority for the statement
(ib., 10.12) ^^^^ ^^® archbishop went now last in the pro-
cession. The archbishop's reply to those about him
(ib., i7_i9) is peculiar to T. But the description of his
reception in the cathedral by the monks (ib., i9_22) agrees
closely with Fitzstephen (1. c), as far as it goes. The
scene at the re-opening of the door of the church is much
curtailed, though Benedict, apparently, is the source. In
stating that the archbishop was ascending the grades to
the chancel, when the knights entered the church, T.
(I., 538, 1) does not follow the Quadrilogus, but Fitz-
stephen (III., 138), and falls in immediately after that
with Benedict, though without following him closely ;
giving, for instance, the reply of the archbishop, when
charged to come along and to consider himself a prisoner,
at greater length than Benedict, and embodying in it
the opening words of the speech, by which the arch-
bishop, according to John of Salisbury, (II., 319),
interceded, on behalf of his people. According to T.
(I., 540,i3_i5) the knights tried to pull the archbishop
out of the church, in order to execute their deed outside ;
for this Grim (II., 436) is the only authority. But on
the other hand it is unknown to T. that the archbishop
shook de Tracy so violently that he almost fell on the
floor, a feat which we may be sure would not have been
eliminated from the Icelandic narrative, if the Quadrilo-
gus had been the immediate source of T. The last pas-
sage of this chapter (T., I., 540, i5_26) is peculiar to T.
alone, accounting by a miracle for what Fitzstephen
states thus : " quod poterat renitebatur, et monachi eum
" retinebant."
In Chapter LXXX. we still observe the same general
agreement with the Quadrilogus (IV., 396-99), and simi-
PREFACE. Cxlv
]ar discrepancies in important details as iu the pre-
ceding. Thus, according to T., de Tracy begins the
attack, woimding Grim, the only other authority for this
being Fitzstepheu (III., 141), cfr. Gamier (194-). By the
rest of the authorities the deed was done bv Reoinald
Fitzurse. It is, however, noticeable that they are con-
tradicted by William (I., 134), who declares that de
Tracy afterwards, when at Saltwood the knights Avere
conferring together and verifying the actual part that
each had taken in the murder, boasted having wounded
John of Salisburv, whom he mistook for Grim. The
words in T. (I., 544, f,_io) '' offrandi sik lifandi fórn " recall
Grim's : " seipsum hostiam oflerendo " (11. , 437) ; but the
sentence, '• sem . . . sinnar " (ib., jo-i-:)? ^^^ " þröngvandi . . .
himinrikis " (ib., 16-20)? seem peculiar to T. The outrage,
which T. alone (I.,. 546, i^-o^), after an introduction all its
own (ib., .vig), ascribes to Ranulf de Broc, is by Benedict
(Quadrilogus) referred to the fourth knight, without his
name being given; by Herbert (III., 50G) to Robert de
Broc; but by Fitzstephen (III., 142), Grim (II., 438),
Roger (IV., 77), and Gamier (196) to Hugh Mauclerc of
Horsea. The imitation of the outrage by Robert de
Broc (T., ib., oss-iq.)? ^^^^ ^^^ ditlerence that no blood or
brains were scattered about, is based on the words in-
serted in the Quadr. from William (I., 135), " vacuo ver-
" tici mucronem infixit," by which in reality he describes
Hugh Mauclerc's proceedings. These words being imme-
diately followed in the Quadr. by Herbert's evidence in
proof of Robert de Broc having committed the first out-
rage (III., 506) : " ut dicebatur, de præfataiUa viperarum
" progenie Robertus de Broc hie erat,'' this person came
in T. to be charged with an ofience, of which the ej'e-
witnesses make Hugh Mauclerc only guilty. This
seems to be the only obvious way of accounting for the
discrepancy on this point between T. and the other
authorities. That T. had neither the Quadrilogus nor
Herbert for immediate sources, as it gives no reference
(xlvi PKEFACE.
to the spearman Longinus whom both introduce as a
parallel illustration, may be taken as granted. The
words which Benedict puts in the mouth of the fourth
knight, " Mortuus est ; quantocius eamus hinc/' T. di-
vides between the two Brocs, making the first exclaim,
" He is dead, he is dead ! " and the second, "Away hence,
" away hence l " The behaviour of the knights (T., I.,
548, 2-7)^8 set forth in agreement witli theQuadrilogus(IY.,
898) ; but the next passage (ib., -_^^) is drawn from John
of Salisbury's considerations on the murder (IL, 318),
embodied in the Quadrilogus (IV., 401), and the end of
the chapter, referring to the plunder of the j^alace, from
the Quadril. (ib., Benedict IL, 14); on this point there
is a general agreement between all the extant autho-
rities.
Chap. LXXXI. departs even somewhat more than the
preceding from the Quadrilogus. It opens with a state-
ment (T., I., 550, 4,12) which agrees nearest with Herbert
(III., 518) ; the additional observation, that wealthy folk
did not choose to run the risk of royal displeasure by
giving open vent to their grief, is not in exact agreement
with Herbert (1. c), who merely observes, " sed ut omit-
*•' tamus divites, soli pauperes accelei'averunt ad summi
" imperatoris militem trucidatum sic, etc.," but seems to
have a reminiscential leaning towards Grim (II., 439) :
" nemo tamen palam ausus est profiteri quia malum est,
*' metu ministrorum regis qui discuri-ebant, etc." The
next passage (ib., j., 17) is partly derived from Grim (III.,
439) : '' Quis stupor intuentium, qui luctus, quanta fuerit
" lamentatio intuentium, quis explicet ? " partly from an
unknown authority. The miraculous manner in which
T. accounts for the coagulation of the blood in cup-sha])ed
forms, into which the stone floor sunk for its reception,
is elsewhere unnoticed, but the description of this pheno-
menon runs (T., I., 552, i_;>) into a reminiscence of Grim's
words (II., 437) Avhere, giving his account of the murder,
he says of the third knight, " grave vulnus inflixit, quo
PREFACE. cxl
VU
" ictu et gladium collisit lapidi, et coronam, quae ampla
'' fuit, ita a capite separavit^ ut sanguis albens ex cere-
'' bro, cerebrum nihilominus rubens ex sanguine, lilii et
" rosæ coloribus virginis et matris ecclesiæ faciem con-
" fessoris et martyris vita et niovte purpuraret/* The
gathering up of the blood is in T. (ib., q_S), related in agree-
ment with Fitzstephen (III., 148), but Benedict's much
more detailed account (II., 15 ; Quadril. IV., 404) is quite
unknown to the Saga, which otherwise would certainly
not have eliminated so graphic an evidence of the eager
devotion of the multitude. The two miraculous pheno-
mena (T., L, 552, s-ie) are unknown to other contempo-
rary writers ; for although there exists a " Passion "
ascribed to Grim, in which it is related how, after havino-
borne his wound for a year, he was miraculously cured
by the martyrs advice (Materials, II., 288), any such
speedy cure as T. mentions is nowhere else recorded.
The mystical interpretation given of the fragments of
the sword found under the body on its removal (T., I.,
552, 17.27) is based on two different notices of Benedict-:
'^ Elevato auteui sancto corpore de terra . . . inventa
" sunt sub eo malleolus ferreus et bisacuta (bryntröll)
" (II., 15), and "satisque veritate congruum videtur, <&:c.,
(II., 13) ; the mystical sense which Benedict evolves out
of these implements in his second notice — a hammer of
evil doers — is not known to T. in this connexion, but
occurs in T., II., 2, yy The removal of the body to a
bier, and the adjustment of the crown to the skull, agrees
with Herbert's statement (III., 519), but the washing of
the face at this stage of the burial proceedings is j)eculiar
to T. Of the account of the appearance of the face (T., I.,
^»^4, 2-7) Benedict (II., 15) is the source. But the de-
scription of the state of the, corpse during the night
(T. ib., -,,0) falls in with Herbert (III., 529). Tlic i-e-
moval of the body to the crypt, and burial there (T., I.,
554, ij,.2o. 558, 10-12), is set forth in accordance with John
of Salisbuiy (II., 322), and the reason given for the
Cxlviii PREFACE.
liuiTÍed burial (ib., 20 ^'^i'^-) agrees vaguely with Benedict's
statement (II., 16-17), to which, in closer agreement, T.
returns again (I., 5oQ, i^^j^). The discovery of the un-
expected token of the Archbishop's sanctity, the hair-
cloth, with its unusual length, is set forth (T. II.,
556, losqri.) ill agTeement with Benedict (II., 17) and Grim
(III., 442). The story of the well (T., 556, -.^o) is un-
known to all contemporary writers, and apparently no
direct authority can be adduced older than the Poli-
stoire, of the latter end of the 13th century ; but that it
must be much older, and indeed a contemporary one, is
evident from the miracles which refer to the water of
St. Thomas, in the accounts of which it seems tacitly
understood, that it came from the well. The great ex-
portation of water from Canterbury which is indicated
by Fitzstephen (III., 150) and Benedict (II., 134), would
naturally suggest to the popular mind a holy well from
which such healino* fluid was drawn.
As already indicated, the contents of Vol. II. once
upon a time constituted an independent saga, as the
preface to it, besides other criteria, seems clearly to show.
Originally it v^^ould seem to have consisted of two
principal parts : the story of the gesta post martyrium,
with Benedict's miracula interwoven (cfr. Fragment E.),
which is now contained in T. II., 2-92 ; and a work
of Robert of Cricklade's, chiefly on miracles, T,, II., 92-
168, or possibly — 184. The rest is drawn from later
sources.
After a few introductory remarks, which seem to be
peculiar to T., the preface falls in (II. 2, ii-4, i-^) with
John of Salisbury's considerations on the Archbishop's
death (II., 316, 317), with which, however, the corre-
pondences is somewhat loose, though the main points
are caught correctly. In the parallel, drawn between
the 'new martyr' and the Saviour (T., IL, 4, 14-6, n),
PREFACE. Cxlix
Herbert's Liber melorum, or some similar record, seems
to be the source, as we have pointed out in the Saga ;
but the parallel between Thomas and the Saviour, drawn
by John of Salisbur}^ (II., 318-19), which immediately
foUows the source of the first portion of the preface,
and the parallel drawn by William (I., 2), the editor of
T. does not seem to have known. Tlie subject in T.
is broken off here by a lacune of two leaves ; but the
missing matter is supplied to some extent by fragment
E., II., 274-76, which is partly drawn from Benedict's
prologue to his Collection of Miracles (II., 23-26), partly
from some other source which we do not know now.
What the source of II., 6, n-lO, i_^, may be we have
not succeeded in verifying. The account of king
Hemy's mission to Canterbury to disavow all parti-
cipation in the murder (T, II., 10, 5-I2, j.^-) agrees
loosely with William (L, 124-126); cfr. Gesta post
Martpium (IV., 409-10). In stating that some of the
Archbishop's friends betook themselves abroad after the
murder, in order to set forth its unheard-of atrocity be-
fore the Pope, T. apparently refers to Alexander Llew-
ellyn and Gunter, sent by Thomas shortly before his
death, to France, whom the news of the murder reached
on their way, and who were bearers of the denunciatory
letters to the Pope. The insertion of the letters (T., II.,
122-24), which are all abstracts, more or less full, of the
originals, is peculiar to T. alone (for references to the
originals see the footnotes). From the letters T. goes
over to the first of the miracles. But as we treat the
miracles under a separate head, we refer to the para-
graph on them at the end of the collation. In review-
ing the relations of Kome to the state of affairs imme-
diately after the murder T. (II., 26, n, sqq.) seems to
be in discord with other authorities, which represent
the pope as only too desirous of inflicting the severest
censures on all the king's dominions ; cfr. especially a
letter by Richard of Ilchester to Gilbert Foliot, Giles,
cl PREFACE.
S. T. C, vi, 260, 261, and a letter from the king's
envoys, Hoveden, II., 25.
At this point T, (II., 20, sqq.) takes up the story again
before the murder, by referring to a letter of pope
Alexander of Oct. 9th, 1170, by which he appointed
the Archbishops of Sens and Rouen to interdict the King's
cismarine dominions, if he should evince himself un-
willing to carry out the terms of his agreement with
the Archbishop of Canterbury. The terms of peace were
never carried out, and when, in addition to that, the
murder, which all people at the time laid to the guilt
of the king, supervened, the mandate of Oct. 9th
remained in full force, and must be fulfilled. Hence the
action of the archbishops. William of Sens, acting
under the terms of the mandate, singly pronounced the
interdict in Jan. 1171. In the account of these pro-
ceedings T. betrays reliance on Brompton's Chronicle,
Twysden, 1064-67. In averring that king Henry wrote
to the pope (II., 30, n) in meek words, fcc, T. seems to
allude to a letter, still extant, in which the King,
announcing to the Pope the death of the primate, prays
for the medicament of the holy father's salubrious
counsel (Variorum epp. ad Alex. III., xxxi, Migne, cc.
1388-89).
In the account of the dealings of the new legates
with the King, T. (II.) follows loosely the Gesta post
Marty rium (Herb. III., 542-3). The vague treatment of
events at this time observable in T. is already adverted
to in the notes to the text. In setting forth the story
of the settlement of peace at Avranches, T. (II., 36-38)
differs from all extant authorities in adding to the
shrift the flagellation which, two years later, the King
received at Thomas' tomb at Canterbury (T., II., 174,
sqq. ; Grim, II., 447). The manner in which the excom-
municated bishops were again brought to the bosom of
the Church (T., II., 38) is referred to in notes to the
text ; and for authorities on the fate of the murderers,
PREFACE. cli
see T,, II., 40, footnote 9. The insertion into the story
of the gesta post raartyriiim of the part taken by bishop
Bartholomew of Exeter is peculiar to T. The letter of
the Pope defining the bishop's mode of procedure against
the various classes of offenders in the case is not dated,
but seems referable only to the year 1171. The next
historical point Avhich gleams through the miracle -
legends, is the opening, on April 2nd, 1171, of the crypt
to pilgrims visiting Canterbury. Here T. (II., 8G, sqcj.)
agrees with Benedict (Mater., II., GO), but adds to the
account various details not adduced by the latter autho-
rity, especially the statement that the mighty lords of
the land set up a determined resistance against those
who would divulge or disseminate stories in evidence
of the martyr's sanctity (T. II., 90), which finds its
corroboration in Fitzstephen's account of the attitude
of the de Brocs towards believers in the new miracles
(III, 151).
The account of the young King's sedition (T. II.,
172-180), of the father's penance at Canterbury, and of
the termination of the revolt, though in general vague
harmony with Herbert (Liber Melorum, mel. ii. not. 9,
Mat., III., 544—48), depends 'evidently on some other
record, though neither on Grim (II., 445-47), Garnier
(209 sqq.), Gervase (I., 242), Diceto (i., 355, 373, sqq.),
nor Brompton (1083 sqq.) This authority has dealt in
a slipshod manner with facts and dates. Thus here
king Philip II. of France, instead of Louis VII. his
father, is made the principal ally of the young Henry,
being apparently so mistaken for Philip count of
Flanders (cfr. Gervase, I., 243 ; Diceto, i., 373.) Here
the events are placed in 1175, instead of 1173-74. Here
too, the most ignominious point of the sovereign's
penance, the flagellation at Thomas's tomb, is omitted,
although Herbert (1. c.) emphasizes it very solemnly as an
event until then unheard-of in history. On the other
hand, in conformity with Herbert, the vision to wliich
clii
PREFACE.
we have alluded above (page cxxx.) is brought in here
again in order to bear out its fulfilment while, how-
ever, Herbert's observation that it had been related to
the King and he had recognised in it a true prophetic
vision, is not mentioned. A new vision introduced
immediately after the King's successful issue from his
troubles (II., 180-182), seems to be peculiar to T.,
though the eventual outcome of it, namely, the confirma-
tion of the privileges of Christ Church, Canterbury,
seems to refer to that charter which king Henry granted
the monastery in 1175 (William I., 494), but which
this latter authority represents as due to a vision of
quite a different character, and, apparently, the same
to which Grim (II., 448) ascribes the reconciliation of
the King and prior Benedict. What T. next relates
in evidence of the King's repentance and reformation
(II., 182, ii_i<5), depends evidently on some legendary
account of the King's last days.
The account of the canonization of Thomas (T., II.,
184-194) is peculiar to T. alone. Here, in the first
place, the event is placed in the year after the revolt
of the King's sons, whereas it happened in the very year,
when the revolt broke out, 1173. The circumstantial
account in T. of the event follows some unknown source.
Here the initiative comes from England, whereas it
really came from Rome — according to the author of Vita
Alexandri III. (Migne, cc. 38) from the church and
people of Gaul. Pope Alexander having authorised the
apostolic legates Theotwin and Albert to make rejoorts
to him on the subject of the Archbishop's death, with
a view to canonization, it was due to their informa-
tion— " habito itaque testimonio litterarum vestrarum "
— that, on the 21st of February,^ the act of canonization
was performed by him ; and in the letter in which he
^ "We must correct here an error
■which inadvertently we committed,
T. II., 186, footnote 19, in dating
the canonization March 13th; the
date should have been given as
above.
PREFACE. Cliii
announces this to his legates, it seems that he studiously
abstains from mentioning any other informants as to the
miracles except in general terms those, " quibus fidem
" adhibere consuevimus " (Ep. Alex. III., MxxL, Migne,
cc. 909). The council, at which T. avers it was agreed
upon to send messengers to E-ome to request the pope to
canonize the new saint, was really a council holden at
Westminster on the 3rd of June, three months and
11 days after the canonization, for the purpose of elect-
ing the new archbishop of Canterbury, Diceto, (i., 3C9),
Gervase (I., 244).
From the canonization T. skips a period of 47 years,
to the translation, 7th July 1220 — by the peculiar
chronology of T. dated 1224— of which it (II., 194-208)
gives the most detailed account existing, so far as we
know. Here the story begins by saying, that the act
was countenanced by the Pope, and indeed Honorius III.
authorised it by a letter dated Jan. 25th (viii. kal.
Feb.), 1219, addressed " ad universos Christianos per
" Angliam constitutos " (Migne, cxc. 979-980). Setting
forth the account of the ceremony itself, T. divides it
into three distinct acts: — 1. (T., IL, 196-202, i_2o) the
removal from the vault in the crypt of the bones of tlie
saint to a chest, made for the purpose, and then secretly
put away. This ceremony took place on Saturday, June
27th (v. kal. Jul.). 2. (T., ih., 202, ,,-208, j,,) the
solemn ceremony of the translation proper, on Tuesday,
July 7th. 3. (i6. 210-212) the enshrinement which,
according to the notion of the Icelandic sagaman, took
place some time afterwards. Among those assisting at
the translation the sao-a mentions kins: Henrv, the son of
Henry, evidently meaning the son of Henry II., wlio was
crowned in Cantcrburj^'s despite in 1170, but who died
in 1183. This must, of course, be 'due to the interpo-
lating pen of a thoughtless scribe, who was led away by
the reference of the original annalist to the young king
cliv PREFACK.
(Edward III.) devoutly assisting at the ceremoii}', and
thought that it was the young Henry indeed, of whom
the talk was still in 1220. As its authority in the
description of the two first-named acts the saga mentions
" The Master," who is an author whom we are unable to
name ; in all probability the allusion is to Vincent de
Beauvais' Speculum Historiale. But otherwise the ac-
count, though far more detailed in T., corresponds to the
description given in Annales Waverleyenses (Gale,
Scriptores, II., 185-186), and Matthew Paris, (III.,
Ó9-60).
In the description of the third act (T. II., 212), a
sentence occurs which must be noticed, to the effect,
that pilgrims retuining from Canterbury reported as a
common saying among Englishmen that never, after the
ofierings to the shrine, had England been so rich again
in gold. We have taken some considerable trouble in
tracinof the source of this statement, but in vain. Un-
doubtedly it looks as if by '"' pilgrims " were meant
Icelandic pilgrims. What pilgrims from other countries
returning home might have said on the subject of the
shrine would hardly have got to Iceland, or, if it had,
would have taken some shape different to what is really
before us. We recognise in the sa^^ing a faithful reflec-
tion of that sense of blank amazement with which the
sight of the golden shrine would naturally strike a simple
beholder coming from a goldless country like Iceland ;
we discern in it the benighted visitor's want of percep-
tion of what Enoiish wealth meant, as well as his icmo-
ranee of the manner in which the Canterbury offerings
were accumulated. His imagination, thus unguided by
knowledge, would obviousl}^ suggest to him the idea
that the flood of gold, which resulted in such a magnifi-
cent object of art as the shrine, must necessarily have
left a permanent ebb-mark behind. To us it is clear, that
here an Icelandic pilgrim's simple fancy must have put
PREFACE. clv
tlie word in the month of Englishmen, wlxo themselves
doubtless made a different estimate of the effect upon
the nation's purse.
The last chapter of the saga (II., 228-240), containing
a mystical comparison between Elisha and Thomas of
Canterbury, is drawn from a source which we have not
been able to verify.
Visions and Miracles.
In collatinof the visions and miracles with the orioinal
sources we content ourselves with only giving the
bare references. We may, however, mention that what
is now known of Benedict's work in Icelandic on
this subject is only a small fragment in comparison
with the original. There is no reason, why only glean-
ings from the first 32 miracles of Benedict's work should
have been selected for preservation, while the I'est was
allowed to be clean forgotten. We doubt not that what
is left of Benedict's miracles in Icelandic, is a small
remnant of a larger work which once upon a time repre-
sented, possibly fully, the first three books of the Latin
original (see above, p. Ixxii.). As has already been
pointed out, the miracles fall naturally into two groups,
one by Benedict, the other by Robert of Cricklade. To
the former belono- the f ollowino; :
1. Vision of Argentan announcing
the death of Thomas - - T., 11., 24, 278 Bened. II. 29
2. Vision of Brother Benedict, in
which Thomas appears to him
holding a Hghted lantern in-
veloped in fog - _ _ jb. 44, 27G ib. 27
3. Vision of Bishop Bartholomew of
Exeter ----- i7>. .50 ib. 28
4. A person of Canterbury sees two
wands grow up from the arch-
bishop's armpits _ _ - ib. 60, 278 ib. 30
5. A dead monk reveals to a living,
how the martyr was honoured
in heaven - - * _ ib. 279 ih. 31
G. A monk of Canterbury hears in a
dream a respond and verse in-
dicative of approaching miracles ib. 64 ib. 34
L'., i:
L, GG
Bened. II.
34
ib.
68
ib.
55
ih.
72
ib.
54
ib.
74, 279
ib.
76, 279
ib.
57
ib.
78, 280
ib.
58
ib.
82, 281
ib.
59
ib.
82, 281
ib.
60
ib.
90
ib.
283
ib.
61
ih.
283
ib.
62
clvi PREFACE.
7. The archbishop appears to a monk
of Canterbury indicating the
approaching manifestations of
his miracles - - - -
8. A son of William of Canterbury is
cured by the martyr's blood
9. A woman is cured of ague -
10. Another woman cured in a similar
manner - - _ - _
1 1 . Samson of Oxford cured of dumb-
ness _ - - - -
12. Gofridus of Canterbury cures his
three sons by application of the
martyr's blood _ - _
13. A blind man is cured by the same
means . - _ - -
14. Ermelin is cured of lameness
15. Roger archbishop of York is cured
of ophthalmia - - - -
16. Alditha is cured of a hurt in the
knee - _ _ _ _
17. Al vena cured of curvature of the
spine - , - - -
To the second belong the miracles which are intro-
duced, T. II., 92, 12-1 p ^^ having been brought out to
Iceland by the men of old, or by former men, and have
no counterparts in Benedict's collection. Nos. 19, 20,
21, 32, bear a distant resemblance to William of Can-
terbury, Mat. I, Lib. II. (3), V. (1), VI. (157), II. (44),
respectively ; but such is the distance between these
miracles that not even the subjects of the stories agree
in both recensions. William of Canterbury could not
under any circumstances have been in any one case
the original of T. It is evident, from the manner in
which the first of these is introduced in the name of
Robert of Cricklade, that all the following owe their
authorship to him :
18. Robert of Cretel is cured of a hurt on his leg by the
water of Thomas's well, cfr. Benedict II., 97 - II., 90, 284
19. A mutilated man is cured by a vow to the martyr - II., 102, 283
20. A man hanged at Perigueux kept miraculously alive
by the Saint ------- II., 110
21. A dead cow restored to life through a vow to Thomas II., 118
22. The cut-off leg of a man restored to him through a
vow II., 126
24. A church consecrated by Thomas after his death - II., 130
25. A mother's deformed son restored to full health - II., 134
PREFACE. civil
2G. A burglar rotbing the cathedral treasure betrayed
by the intervention of the martyr _ . _ II., 1-10
27. A falcon which had lost its eye is healed - - II., 140
28. A mother dying from giving birth to a dead child is,
together with it, brought to life again - - II., 148
29. The son of knight Jordan called to life again - - II., 156
30. A drowned child brought again to life - - - II., 162
31. Three sons of a certain widow brought to life after
having lain for a long time in their grave - - II., 164
32. A page of king Henry, kicked to death by a horse,
brought to life again - . _ _ - - II., 168
33. The martyr appears to the king in a dream - - II., 180
34. The famous carbuncle of the French regalia mira-
culously attached to the shrine of the martyr - II., 212
35. The son of a knight Robert miraculously saved from
drowning - - - - - - - - It., 208
VII. — Various Notices.
1. Mariu Saga. — In the extract from Mariu saga,
p. 198-203, given in Appendix II. (T. II., p. 284-289),
we have an intermediate fragment of a Thomas saga
between T. and some text which has stood in close con-
nexion with E. The portion of the Stockholm codex
from which this extract is derived is, in the opinion of
Professor Unger, written in the iirst quarter of the 14th
century. That the extract is derived from a lost
Thomas saga becomes clear from this passage, " þegar 1
" öskublomi, sem fyrr var greint, setti signaSr Thomas
" gu^s moSvr Mariam sinn vakran verndarmann " :
already in the bloom of youth, as is set forth above,
the blessed Thomas appointed God's Mother Mary his
watchful guardian, cfr. T. I., 1 8, ii_i2. To that, which
is here stated to have been set forth above, there is no
allusion made in Mariu sao-a. It becomes still more
evident, that the passage is a scribe's or a compiler's
thoughtless copying when, further on (T. II., 288, 2a_2,),
we read, " Go^s moþvr Mariam elskaíSi hann vmfram
" alia menn ok fal henni a hendi alia sina framferiS
" nærst almatkvm o-oSi "' : God's mother Mary loved he
beyond all men, and committed to her care all his ways
next to Almighty God — which the author, when he
bethought himself of giving a picture of Thomas's per-
K .541. 1
clviii
PREFACE.
sonal cliaracteristics, copied^ forgetting that he had
ah'eadv alluded to it.
This extract bears in parts a strong resemblance to
the preface of T. II., and comes still closer to the cor-
responding portion of fragment E. From the miracle
in Paris the author passes over to the fulfilment of it,
and from that to the deserts of the Archbishop, in a
manner which shows that, beside the life book, he had
before him the story of the gesta post martyrium,
beginning in a similar way to that which is now pre-
served in T., as this comparison makes clear : —
T. II., 2.
Alt sitt lif leiddi hann stóruui
heilagliga, hreiun ok grandvarr á
siiin likanL Erkibyskup rar hanu
at tign ok vigslu, primas allrar
Englauds kristne, ok þarme'Sposto-
ligs saetis legatiis. Var þat vel
veröugt {)TÍ at alia tima firnst
haun verit hafa hinn rettvisasti
domare, er hvorki halla'Si rettum
dome fyrir fémútur né mauna-muu.
Sva sterkr ok stöíSugi' me'S kirkj-
unne, a'S hann veik af rettri reglu
hvorki fyrii" blitt ue stritt, sva rétt-
vislega harör vi^' ómildan lyð, at
hann má |)eira hegna'Sarhamarr
vel kallast. Enn fátæki'a manna
ok harm|irunginna var hann hinn
háleitasti huggari. . . Nú ef sökin
gerir mann go^an í Gu'Ss augliti,
sem einginn efar vitr mab'r, {)á
finst bans sok eingi réttvísari, |)vá
at haun striddi í mote GuSs dviuum,
er roe's öllu vildu fyrirkoma kirkj-
unnar rettendnm. En hva'S e^a
me^S hverjuin hætti hann let sitt
blezaSa lif, er öllum kunnigt, at
hann var drepinn iyiir Gu'Ss moSur
altari í höfutS kii'kju Englands af
sjálfs sins andiegum sonum.
Appendix II., 286.
Fylldiz ok siþan einkar fagrliga
þat, er þe<si kistill spaíSi fyrir, |)viat
þessi gvSs ma^r Thoujas enski son
Gillibertz ok Moalldar ötta^V ok
föddr i Lvndvnum var'S si|)an Kant-
variensis erkibyskup ok allz Eug-
landz primas ok postoligs sötis legatvs
vm allt England. Ok er {)at vel
verSuct þviat hann h^i, sitt lif
storvm heilagliga ok finnz alia gotv
verit hafa enn rettvisazti, er hvarki
halla^'e nökkvrn tima rettvm domi
fyrir femvtvm ne manna mvu,
Sva var hann sterkr ok stöSvgi* me'5
kirkivnni moti Heinreki kon^ugi
ok bans ratSvneyti, at hann veik
ser huarki af rettri reglv fyrir
konvnofsins blibV ne striSv hotvm
ne bar's indvm. Sva var hann
rettvisliga bar Sr vi'S hina omilldari,
at uel matti hann þeira begnaSar-
bamarr heita, enn fatökra manna
ok harmþrvnginna var hann hinn
baleitazti hvggaii. Nv ef sokin,
sem engi vitr matSr efar, gerii- mann-
inu go'San i gvíJs avghti, |)a finnz
bans sok ekki rettvisligra ; J)viat
hann striddi moti gvSs ouinvm, er
kirkivnni ok hennar rettindum
villdu me'S öllu fyrirkoma me^
siuvm bolwSum ovönvm . . .
PREFACE.
clix
287, g : En hvar e^a Die's hverivm
hötti hann let lif sitt, |)a er þat
öllvm kunnict, at hanu var drepinii
i heilagri höfut kirkiv allz Eng-
landz, þeiri sem öllvm öíSrvm er
tignari, h^ri ok haleitari. Her me'5
var hann pindr af sinvm vndir-
mönnvm ok andligum sonvm.
On further comparison we find that the recension,
from which the Extract in Mariu saga was made, was
closely allied to, possibly a copy of that represented by
fragment E. : —
E. T. II,, 270,;.
allrar kristninnar, ok fyrir þvi er
hann sannliga pislarvatr, litt aa ^v
vigslvpallinn ok er hann hiun
æzti erkibyskvp ok legatvs, ok maa
hann fjrir þvi sannliga heita postoli.
leita f)v at liflazstvndinni ok hittiz
ball's drottinsligs bvr'Sar, vir'S |)v
dav'Sasta^inn, ok er {)at havfvt-
kirkian i Anglia. Hverir erv dav'Sa-
menn hans, eigi gy^ingar eigi hei^-
ingiar, helldr hans vndirmenn ok
eignarsynir. Nv af f)essa hins helga
mannz dyr^ ok iartegnagior'S fagni
mær ok mo^ir nyian Abel dyr'S
hafa avSIaz af bro^vr drapi, fagni
hvn ok nyian Jakob legstan fra
bro'Svrligv hatri, fagni h\Ti ok
nyian Joseph frelstan af bræ'Sra
avfvnd ok nv rikiandi i himneskri
havll. i'essi hinn haleiti gv'Ss þionn
Thomas erkibyskup gaf sitt lif
fyrir gv'Ss savk a fior^a ari hins.
xii. hvndra^s fra holligvm gv^s
getnaiSi. Eptir Dionysivm m.° c.°
Ixx. iiij. kalendas Janvarij. a þri'Sia
degi vikv aa elliptv ti^ dags at
likamlligri Krists bvr'Sarti^, honvni
til erfvi^is ok piningar, f)at yr'Si
þessum til hvilldar ok haleitrar
dyr'Sar, til þeirar lei"Si oss allzvalld-
andi gv^ sa er bæ'Si er vpphaf ok
Appendix II., 288, 32.
allrar kristninnar, fyrir |)vi er hann
sannr pislarvattr. Lit a vigslu
pallinn ok er hann hinu özti byskup
ok allz Englands primass ok posto-
ligs sötis legatvs, ok ma hann af
|)vi sannliga heita postoli. Leita
at liflatz stvndinni, ok hittiz a
hati'S drottinligs bvr^ar. Vir'S
dav^asta'Sinn, ok er höfv'Skirkian
i Englandi. Hverir vorv dau^a-
menn hans ? Eigi giö'Singiar, helldr
vndirmenn hans ok andligir synir.
Nv af f)essa mannz dyr^ ok iartegn-
vm fagni heilög kristni, m^r ok
mo^ir dyi"S hafa ö'Slaz af drapi
bro'Svrligu. Eagni hon ok Joseph
selldan af brö^ra sinna ofvnd ok nv
rikianda i himinrikis höll. Enn
|)essi hinn haleiti ok hinn göfugligi
gv'Ss vin Thomas Cantuariensis
erchiby skvp ok allz Englands primas
ok postoligs sötis legatvs var pindr
a |)vi ari, er li'Sin voro fra vars herra
holldgan m. ara c. ok Ixx. ok eitt,
a fimtögimda ári ok þri'Sia sealfs
sins alldrs, fiorda kalendas Janvarii,
þri'Sia dag vikv, a elliptv ti'S dags,
fimta dag iola, at vars herra likara-
lig bvr^arti'S, honom til erfi'Sis,
yr^i J^eim til huilldar ok haleitrar
dyrSai-. Til þeirar hinnar sömv
1 2
Clx PKEFACE.
endir allz bins gotSa, ok þo Ufir ok leiöi oss varr lavarSr Jesus Kristr,
rikir an enda. sa sem böSe er upphaf ok endir,
me^ fetSr ok helgvm anda lifir ok
rikir einn gvS i {)renningu vm allar
alldir verallda.
The personal description of Thomas which precedes
these reflections and historical notices corresponds ahnost
word for word to T. L, 2S,g_i:.. We may, therefore,
infer that, wlien the extract was made, probably in the
beginning of the 14th century, Thomas saga existed in
a form similar to that which is now presented in T.
2. The Chronology of Thomas Saga. — In one
respect our saga proves itself utterty independent of all
other records relating to the life of Thomas of Canter-
bury, viz., in its chionology. The oldest fragment E.,
and the latest recension, that is, the present text, both
agi'ee in dating events, when referred to calendar years,
four years after their real date. No authority is adduced
in support of this method of computation, but so much
is certain, that the Icelandic translators could not pos-
sibly have been left in any doubt as to the cln-onology
adopted by the Latin biographers. Without going into
any lengthy argument in supj^orb of this particular point,
it is enoucrh to refer to Benedict's statement, averrino-
that the archbishop died " anno ab incarnatione Domini
millisimo centesimo septuagesimo," which E. renders : ' a
fiorSa ari [bins atta tigar, or possibly : bins, viii*^ tigar]
bins. xii. ljvndra-(Ss fra holligvm gv^s getnaiSi ' = in the
foui*th year of the eighth decade of the twelfth hundred
from the incarnation of God. The words in l>rackets
are supplied by us, having evidently been missed out in
E. by a scribal oversight. But to this sentence E. adds
immediately: — " Eptir Dionysium m^.c^. . Ixx*^" '^.e., ac-
cording to Dionysius 1170. — Now it is evident, that the
author of E. gives in the first chronological statement
the really correct time as he considered it ; in the second
he gives it as he knows it to be commonly accepted ; for
PREFACE. Clxi
Dionysius here can only refer to Dion^^sius Exigiius, the
author of the æra vulp-aris, or Christian time-reckonino-.
This contrasting of the two methods of computation
shows, that the Icelandic author took his stand by the
first, on grounds that to him were of sufficient autboritv
tc prove the incorrectness of the second, which he ad-
duces merely as a computistic fact.
The same chronology is also observed in the priest's
saga of bishop Gudmund, which makes Beda responsible
for it/ a charge on that author which is not so utterly
void of foundation as editors have hitherto supposed.
But Beda's authority alone is not sufficient to account
for the whole difference. The Icelandic clerks of the
12th and 13th centuries must have come to this chrono-
logical conclusion by some comparative method of in-
quiry, and as we take it, they could have arrived at it
only by comparing Beda with the chronological state-
ments of Josephus in his account of the reign of Herod
the Great, and by collating the result thus obtained with
the declarations of the gospels.
The long established fact that the Dionysian era begins
too late by four years, may be said to rest almost en-
tirely on the chronological statements contained in Fla-
vins Josephus's account of the reign of Herod tlie Great,
embodied in his Antiquitates Judaicæ and his history
De bello Judiaco. That this writer was known to Ice-
landic scholars of the 13th century at least is evident from
the Gydingasögur of Brand Jonsson, abbot of Ver and
afterwards bishop of Holar, 1263-64, in which he is not
only cited as a special authority for a special statement,-
but is the very source from which the chronological locus
classicus in question, the account, namely, of the last ill-
ness of Herod and his death is derived.^ That this author
was known in Iceland a long time before ma}^ fairly be
* Biskupasögur, I., 415.
2 Gydiiigasögur, ed. G. Þorlak':-
son. Copenh., 1881, p. 59.
3 Il>,, cli. xxxi,
clxii PREFACE.
assumed. Briefly stated, the chronological statements of
Josephus amount to this : Herod was nominated king of
Judæa in the 184th Olympiade, in the year of the con-
sulate of C. Domitius Calvinus and C. Asinius Pollio,
that is, anno urbis 714.^ But he did not obtain a secure
enjoyment of his throne until he had overthrown and
slain the actuai ruler, the last Asamonean Antigonus,
which event took place during the consulate of Agrippa
and Caninius Gallus, a. u. 717.^ Herod reigned for 87
years from the date of his nomination, and died 84 years
after the overthrow of Antigonus, that is a. u. 750.^ To
these chronological landmarks Josephus adds yet one of
paramount importance, at least for modern research.
During Herod's last illness there occurred the sedition
of Matthias the high priest whom he overcame, and with
his accomplices caused to be burnt alive. " That very
night,'' says the historian, there occurred an eclipse of
the moon.* This eclipse it has been ascertained occurred
at 1.48^ in the morning of the 18th of March, in the year
of the Julian era 4710, corresponding to a. u. 750. It is
not necessary to assume that the Icelanders of the 13th
century knew how astronomically to control this eclipse ;
the other dates were quite sufficient for their purpose.
From their study of history these islanders knew well
enough, as did all the mediæval chronologists, Beda their
chief included, that Dionysius Exiguus began his era in
the year of Rome 754. They also knew that Beda did
not agree with this time-reckoning, who not only dis-
tinctly says that Dionysius began it in the second year of
his era,^ but who also, in common with the early fathers,
placed the birth of Christ in a. u. 752 : '^anno Cæsaris
1 Antiqu., 1. XIV., ch. xiv., § 5.
2 lb., XIV., ch. xvi., § 4.
dominicæ incarnationis annum in
capite pónendo manifeste docuit se-
3 lb., XVII., ch. viii., § 1 ; De : cundum sui circuli annum ipsum
bello Jud., I., ch. xxxiii., §8.
4 Antiqu., XVII., ch. vi., § 4.
•5 Qui in primo suo circulo quin-
gentesimum tricesimum secundum
esse, quo ejusdem sacrosanctæ in-
carnationis mysterium cœpit. De
temp, latione, ch. XLVII.
PREFACE.
clxiii
August! XLII., a morte vero Cleopatræ et Antonii
quanclo et Egyptus in provinciam versa est, anno xxvii./
Olympindis cxciv. anno tertio, ab urbe autem condita
anno dcclii., . . . Jesus Christus Filius Dei sextum mun-
di ætatem suo consecravit adventu." ^ Here then Beda
was to the chronological inquirer a distinct authority for
the vulgar era of Dionysius beiug wrong by at least
three years, removing its commencement back from a. u.
754 to 751. By Josephus' evidence on the death of
ITerod it must be removed further back by a year at
least, since by.the testimony of the Evangelists Christ was
certainly born before the death of that king. Thus the
statement, that Beda was the authority for the time-
reckoning observed in Thomas saga, is to a great extent
correct as, no doubt, he was the principal source by the
aid of which the Icelandic clerks came to that chrono-
logical result.
3. LiTTERA FRATERXITATIS, concessa Wytfrido luarii
filio de Insula de Island, Appendix lY. (T. II., pp.
293-4).
Besides the Icelanders mentioned above as havino-
been in England during the 12th century, we may here
mention two visits to Canterbury, which took place in
the early years of the loth, within a short period of each
other.
Bjorn Einarsson, a wealthy^ chieftain (ob. 1415) of
Vatnsfjöi'Sr in the west of Iceland, in one of his many
extensive travels visited " the holy Thomas" of Canter-
bury, 1410 ; but of this visit nothing is knoAvn beyond
the bare fact, that it took place ; as Bjorns itinerary, with
the exception of an alleged quotation from it in the
Greenland Annals (Grænlands Annálar) by the peasant
annalist Bjorn of Skai^sa, of doubtful genuineness (cfi-.
K. Maurer, Skí"Saríma, page 37), is now wholly lost.
Five years after Bjorn Wy tfridus luarii filius de Insula
^ A clear clerical blunder for
xxviii., as all trustworthy autho-
rities have it.
2 De temp, ratioue, ch. LXVI.,
sexta æt!i«i.
clxív PREFACE.
de Island, i.e., Vigfús Ivarsson Hólrar, went to Canter-
bury on the pious errand explained in the littera frater-
nitatis. The difference between tlie name Wytfridus and
Vigfus may be accounted for by the following fact. This
same Yigfús had in 1402 obtained from " frater Augus-
" tinus de Undinis, ordiuis S. Benedicti, Apostolicæ Sedis
" Nuntius," at the court of Queen Margaret of Denmark,
a letter of indulgence for one hundred persons in Norway,
chiefly his own relatives, no doubt, where his name is
spelt Wichfridus (Deplomat. Norveg, v. No. 415). This
letter undoubtedly was Vigfus's chief credential to the
chapter of Canterbury, and from it the name was copied
into the littera fraternitatis as Wytfridus, c being read as
t by a common mistake. De Insula is evidently a transla-
tion of Holmr, Engl, holme, island. The identity of Vigfus
Ivarsson with the person mentioned in the letter is borne
out absolutely by the other names mentioned in it. This
Vigfus belonged to a Norway-Icelandic family,^ members
of which frequently occupied prominent posts in Iceland
from 1307-cir. 1432. When first appearing on the scene,
we find these Holms allied by marriage to the two noblest
and most influential families of southern Iceland : the
men of Oddi, descendants of Sæmund Sigfusson the
learned, on one side, and the men of Hawkdale;^ the pro-
geny of Isleif Gizurarson, the first bishop of Skalholt,
on the other. Ivar Jonsson Holmr, the earliest mentioned
representative of the family in Iceland, arrived there,
apparently for the first time, in 1307, the bearer of royal
mandates, by which one half of the royal tax of the
country was conceded to the king's bailiffs^. In 1312 he
^ A relative of this person, we ] tal og lögmanna, Safn til Sögu
Islands, II., 55. Espolin, I., 21,
and r, Jonsson Hist. Eccl. I., 426,
make this Ivar a son of Vigfus,
and identical with that Ivar who
first appears in 1345, though later
Espol. doubts their identity, I„ 79,
take it, was that Vigfus I^■arsson
who died during king Hakon Ha-
konsson's expedition to the " West-
ern Isles," in 1262. Fornmanna
Sögur, VIII., 125.
2 Islenzkir. Annálar, 1307, cfr.
Jon Sigur'Ssson in Lögsögumanna-
PREFACE.
clxv
appears again, but with the title of Herra, which shows
that, in the interval, he had been knighted.^ He married
in Iceland a lad}^ by name Asta,^ whose relationship to the
above-mentioned families appears from this table : —
Isleifr Gizurarson, bp. of Skalholt. Sæmundr the learned.
Teitr
Hallr
Gizur
^ I
Porvaldr
I
Teitr
Loptr
Jon ; his daughter :
Solveig ; her son
rorlákr ; his daughter
Klængr marr. Þorger^r.
' -v '
I
Asta m. to Ivar Jonsson Hólmr.
From 1312 no mention is made of the family until
1345, when an Ivar Vigfusson Holrar, uncertain what
actual relation to the foregoing, makes his appearance in
the annals, apparently as a royal commissary or governor
of the island.^ Again he is referred to in 1351 as being-
entrusted with high official functions, and in 1354 (or,
according to others, in 1352), when the annals state that
he arrived in Iceland with the startling news, that he had
fai'med the revenue of the whole country for three years,
being at the same time appointed to the post of royal
coDimissary.'* In 1358 he acts as a representative of the
laity of Iceland in certain disputes which at that time
strained the friendly relations between the church and
' Isl. Ann. 1312; Laurontius sacra
in Biskupa Sögur, I., 825 (886).
2 Espolin, I., 21, Isl. Ann. 1. c.
Jon Sigurdsson, 1. c. Hist. Eccl. 1, c.
^ Espolin, I., 79.
-* Isl. Ann. 1301, 13.V2, 1353,
1354; Espolin, I., 82, 84; Hist.
Eccl. I., 426.
clxvi
PREFACE.
the lay community.^ In 1365, in the capacity of royal
commissary, he comes forward at the althing summoning
to the king's presence certain leading persons among the
laity.^ And in the same year he undertakes, on behalf
of the papal legate Guido de Cruce, to collect the papal
revenues of Iceland.-^ Some authorities aver that he held
this commission still in 1369.* He died in 1371.^
In 1389 we find the Canterbury pilgrim mentioned
for the first time, and in the capacity of governor of the
country.^ It seems likely, though there is no direct
evidence to show it, that he was a son of the foregoing.
In 1393 he is connected Avith an important constitutional
incident, being commissioned by Queen Margaret of
Denmark to attempt the enforcement of new taxes on
the people of Iceland by the aid and consent of the repre-
sentative assembly, and his popularity is attested by the
attitude of the diet, who '' for the sake of Vigf us " con-
sented to give a certain amount once for all, on condition
that it should not be called a tax nor ever be demanded
again.'^ He appears as arbitrator in a blood-suit in
1394.8 In 1397 (April 27th) a still existing charter
(Arnamagnæan Coll. Fasc. v. 20) bears witness to his
having declared his wife, Gu'Sri'Sr Ingimnndar dottir,
to be possessed, in her own right, of property, in Ice-
land and Norway, amounting in value to " five hundred
hundreds." Consequently he had been married before
this date, and the statement of the annals, that he
brought his wife with him, apparently for the first time,
to Iceland in 1403, then presumably just married, since
her age at that date is given as fifteen, muse depend
on some confusion. In 1402 we find him at Roskild,
as has been said before, in treaty with " Augustinus de
1 Hist. Eccl. I., 528.
2 Hist. Eccl. II., 213.
3 Diplomat. Noru. III., No. 339.
1 Isl. Ann. 1369.
5 Isl. Ann. 1371 ; Hist. Eccl. L,
426; Espolin, I., 99.
6 Isl. Ann. 1390; Hist. Eccl. I.,
441; EspoHn, T, 110.
7 Isl. Ann. 1393.
s Isl. Ann. 1394 ; Hist. Eccl.
1. c. Espolin, I., 119 ; Jon Sigurös-
son, 1. c. 75, 76.
PREFACE. Clxvii
Undinis." lu 1405 and 1408 he figures as high steward,
or master of the ceremonies, at two of those grand social
banquets which form such a striking feature of that
age.^ In 1409 (July 2nd) he is acting at the althing,
and on the 7th of the same month at an island called
rerney, in his official capacity as governor of the
country, vindicating certain commercial prerogatives
vested in the crown.- Again, in 1413, he figures as
one of the signataries to a deed drawn up by the
bisliop of Skálholt, conferring certain privileges on the
mouastery of Yi^ey.^ This same year, in the capacity
of governor, he enforces upon a certain English trader,
named Richard, some restrictive provisions regarding
his choice of market station, apparently in favour of
the bishop of Skálholt.^ In 1415 king Eric of Pome-
rania invested the then bishop of Skálholt, Arni
Olafsson, with the governorship of all Iceland.^ On
learnino* this Yis^fus Ivarsson Holmr, in the summer of
the same year, betook himself on board one of six
English tradei^ then lying in the harbour of Hafnar-
fjorSr, and sailed with 60 " lasts " of fish and a great
quantity of precious things away to England.^ On the
7th of the following October we find him, as the littera
fraternitatis testifies, on his pious errand at Canter-
bury. We have no means of confirming or refuting the
statement of the littera, that Vigfus was related to
Thomas Becket — ex cujus propagacionis hnea se asserit
descendisse — though we have made a somewhat diligent
search with that view ; but that Yigfus himself believed
it is evident, and his character and career seem to pre-
clude the idea of any intentional fraud on his part. It
might perhaps be possible, if search were made in
Norway, to bring some light on this obscure 2:)oint.
1 Isl. Ami. 1405, 1408 ; Espo-
liu, II., 3, 4.
' Jon SigurSssou, I. c. 170, 171.
^ Espolin, XL, 8.
^ Isl. Ann., 1413.
5 Espolin, II., 10, 11,
•^ Espolin, II., 11.
Clxviii PREFACE.
All Vigfús's immediate family connexions mentioned
in the letter tally correctly with what we learn about
them from Icelandic records, as far as they go. His
mother's name was Margi-et, she was the daughter of
Össui*, and is supposed by Icelandic genealogists to have
been of Norwegian descent.^ His wife's name was
Gu^rfór (=Gutreda), the daughter of one Ingimund,
probably of Norwegian origin.- Of their children
only three seem to be kno^vn in Icelandic records:
Ivar, who married Sophia, daughter of the greatest
north country nobleman of the time, Lopt the Mighty
of Mo^ruvellir.'^ This Ivar must have been a man
of great promise, for in 1431 (on June 14th) we lind
his name first among the signataries to the oath of
allegiance to king Eric of Pomerania.'* As the story
goes, he was slain by the attendants of that epis-
copal miscreant Jon Gerriksson*^ who, after having
plundered the archiepiscopal see of Upsala, and been
deposed by papal authority,^ was rewarded by king
Eric with the see of Skálholt, where the Icelanders soon
lost patience with him, and put an end to his career in
a sack sunk down in a* river, 148o.' Another of
Yigfus's children was Margret (Margarita), of whom the
story goes, that she refused the hand of Magnus, the
above-named bishop's butler who. in revenge for the
slio-ht, slew her brother and set fire to the house.
Escaping from the burning house, she is said to have
made her way to Mö^ruvelhr, and to have vowed that
she would marrv whomsoever that wrouo-ht revenoe
for her injuries. Thorvald, son of Lopt, accepted the
challenge, having himself sufifered great indignities at
1 Espoliii, I., 107.
- Espolin, I., 110, 120.
3 Espolin, II., 33.
^ Jon Sigurdsson in Lögsögu-
manua tal og lögmanna, Safn til
Sogu Islands, II., 176.
^ In Swedish records called Jo-
hannes Jerechini.
6 Espolin, II., 24, 25 ; Lange-
beck, Script. Eer. Dan. VI., 236 ;
Upsala Ai'kestifts herdaminne, Up-
sala, 1842, I., 7.
7 Espolin, n., 29-33.
PREFACE. clxix
the bishop's hands, and wrought the revenge as ahead}'
stated.^ A third child of Ivar's, Erlendr (Ellendrus),
is also named in Icelandic records. The rest of the
children mentioned in the document are unknown in
Iceland; their names are all genuine or current Ice-
landic names, except Edmundus, which is a transforma-
tion of Ingimundr, clue, no doubt, to the scribe of the
chapter taking the former as an English equivalent for
the latter ; the son thus named in the Latin document
was evidently named after his maternal grandfather,
Ingimundr.
It is evident that this Canterbury document is per-
fectly genuine. As such it settles a hitherto vexed
question in the history of the Canterbury pilgrim.
There exists, namely, in the i^rna-Magnæun Collection
(No. 238, 4to. fol. 24b) a document of the following
tenor :
BrEF FYRI HOLUM I GRIMSNESI.
Þad giore e^ gvdridvr ingemundzdotter ollvm godvm
monnvm kvnnigtt med þesso mino opnv brefi . at ec
gef^' j heidvr med gvd &l hans signada modir Marie til
æverndiligx bæna haldz til videyar stadar jordina sem
holar heita med viii. kvisfilldum sem lio;^ i orimsnesi
fyri sal vigfvsar jvarsonar »fc hans sonar, ellendz, sem gvd
þeirra sal frelsi til æfverndiligrar eignar, med ollvm
beim ooonnvm &; o'ædvm sem til hennar lio-avr & leioit
■too o oo o
hefvr fra fornv & nyiv & avngvv undann ski lid v, svo
framt sem ec matte framast med loovm hana eicjnazt,
O O '
samþyckte minn sonvr jvar, þessa mina giord med mier,
og til sanninda hier vm setti ec mitt innsigle fyiir þetta
bref er giortt var j bravtarhollti jn die sancti Mngni
martiris anno domini mcd\ij.
1 Espolin, II., no.
Clxx PREFACE.
Deed for Holar in Grtmsnes.
I, Gudi'id, daughter of Ingimund, make known unto
all good men by this my open letter, that I give, in
honour of God and His Blessed Mother Mary, for per-
petual offering up of prayers, to the monastery of Videy,
the farm which is called Holar, with a stock of viii.
" cow-gilds" (= farm-stock of the value of eight cows),
within Grimsnes, for the souls- of Yigfus Ivarsson and
his son Ellend — on whose souls may God be merciful —
in perpetual possession, with all commodities and ad-
vantages thereunto belonging and having belonged from
of old and from of late, with nothing exempted, all as
fully as I might the same by fullest right in law have
acquired. To this my deed gave consent my son, Ivar,
with me conjointly, and in witness thereof I put my
seal to this letter, which was done at Brautarhoit in die
Sancti Magni martiris (16th April) Anno Domini mcdvij.
In the light of the Canterbury document it is clear
that here we have to deal with a deed the spuriousness
of which now becomes obvious, at least as the date of it
stands. The wording of it indicates that both father
and son must be considered as dead when it pretends to
have been drawn up. But the Hist. Eccl.. positively
affirms (lY., 170) : certum est Vigfusum Ivari filium
Islandia exiisse anno 1429 et in illo intinere obiisse.
Moreover, amoug the estates belonging to the monastery,
at the time of the dissolution, Holar is not mentioned at
all, cfr. Hist. Eccl. IV., 94-96.
4. Editorial. — In reproducing the text of T. it was
out of question, that the authorities of the Royal Library
of Copenhagen could be expected to lend over to England
the unique MS. containing this important contribution
to English history. To me, as librarian, it seemed so
unreasonable to make even a request for the loan of the
MS. that I chose rather to advance no solicitation to that
effect at all, There was, too, all the less reason to do
PREFACE. clxxi
this, that the object of the publication was in the main
historical, and Professor Unger had reproduced, letter
for letter, the text of the MS. in his edition of Thomas
saga, Christiana, 1869. My duty was, then, to examine
the printed text carefully, and, where any point of
doubtful grammar or questionable style presented itself,
to ascertain the reading of the MS. This I have done.
In every case Professor Unger's reading has proved correct.
The not inconsiderable number of text alterations found
in the present edition are therefore independent of the
readings of the MS. Conjectures, however, have been
indulged in only in cases where the change is self-evi-
dent. I may here add a few more : Vol. I., 128, g, after
Englands there ought to be added probably, konungs ;
p. 164,1, after segja, the word hann seems to be a repe-
tition of hann in the same line, I have now no doubt
that it ought to be altered to þat ; p. 308, jg, satt,
neuter of sattr, " at peace with,'' is hardly the right
reading, a better, though not quite satisfactory, would
be satt, neut. of sannr, true, reliable, settled ; Vol. II.,
16,7, Þeini altered to þeirra gives better sense ; p. 42, lo,
at must go out; p. 54,22, sina, "his," seems to be a
scribe's blunder for syna, " manifest ;" p. 98, 93, ok should
probably be at; p. 86,5, bræ'Si, "anger," should read
bræ-Sr, " brethren," the sentence being a translation
of an original which must have agreed more or less
closely with Benedict's : " opinionem nostram minui
" ajebant qui talentum nobis creditum videremus ab-
" scondere" (Mat. II, 60).
In the appendices the spelling of the MS. has been
retained ; in the main text it has been normalised, the
MS. spelling being indicated in the footnotes. Syste-
matic deviations from the MS. spelling are : enn in all
its senses for en, ft for pt where kindred languages
have preserved ft in the root, and framm for fram. As
to enn, this spelling of the word in all its senses is not
only borne out by the oldest vellums, such as the Ehici-
clxxii PREFACE.
dariiis, one of the oldest, if not the very oldest Icelandic
vellum book in existence, but also by the alliterative
rhymes of the poets, which are an irrefragable evidence of
the correctness of the spelling. Scholars seem inclined
to doubt the fact, that enn, in the sense of hut, ever,
except by a mere accident, is sounded by the poets in
the manner here stated, and some maintain that it is an
enclitic particle, thus ascribing to it a phonetic element
which is utterly foreign to the Icelandic language. In
the poems it not only bears in hundreds of cases the
weight of the first syllable in Drottkvæ^r hattr, which
is invariably long, a function entirely impossible for an
enclitic particle, but in addition to that bears the allite-
rative stress of a verse in no end of instances as well, e.g.,
'Knn varS eigi en min'^a.
Ætt-skarS þat er hjó BarSi,' Hei'Sarvíga saga. Isl.
Sog. II., 390.
Enn þótt ellri iinnisk. Grettla, 23.
Enn re's orSskvi^ ssLnnSb, ih. 32.
Enn fyr mækis mu^ini, Gisla saga, C7, 154, 167.
Enn ek mun me^ svi^mum, Sturl. Vigfusson's ed.
II., 220.
Enn (printed en) í mot fyri m'67in\xm, ih. 321.
Enn (printed en) eld-broti U7i7?ar, ih.
Enn ef aptr koma ^unnsæ., ih, I., 164.
Enn er mót-fór ma?i7ia, ih. 261.
Enn þptt ófri'S sun^ian, Erringar Steinn, Edda, I.,
440. '
Enn herskipum hran'/iir, ValgarSr, ih. 500, &c. &;c.
With regard to the spelling of ft for the customary
pt of the editions, it is enough to observe that p in Ice-
landic before the hard dental muta has always been
pronounced f, even where p is the thematic exponent of
the sound. No Icelander pronounces, unless he be
trained to it, pt otherwise than as ft. The old Icelandic
clerks, to whom the Latin language was the main ortho-
graphic guide, were led involuntary to the spelling pt
PREFACE. Clxxiii
for ft, from the fact, that, the Latin did not possess the
combination ft, but abounded in pt. It is acknowledo-ed
on all hands, that the spelling adopted here is the right
one, cfr. Cleasby's Dictionary, 137a: ''the spelling with
" pt in such words as aptan, evening, aptr, after (see,
" however, article aptr, 2.3a), &;c. is against the sense
" and etjnnology, and is an imitation of Latin MSS."
As to the phonetic value of pt, see Konrad Gislason Old-
nordisk formlære, § 75.
The spelling of framm for fi-am is not only borne out
by the modern pronunciation, but by ancient use as well,
hv&mmsi, þaz ek berk fra'jnryi. Edda, I., 412.
fra,mm mot lagar gla77i77ii. (Snorri) ih. 630.
Should it be objected that this word also rhymes with
gram in '
gu^r vox um um gra7'/i
gramr sotti fra77i,
we -answer that it is not proved, that m in gTam was
sounded as a soft m (English m in came) ; elsewhere at
least it rhymes with undoubted mm : —
grams und arnar hramr/ia ; even in the case,
Sva for þat fram
at flestr of nam, we think it is doubtful
whether nam was not pronoimced namm, cfr. Danish
nemme. Consistently we ought to have spelt lunm, not
um, in which word the feeling of the hard m was so
strong of old that very frequently it is found in the
vellums spelt umb, and to this day it is pronounced by
every Icelander as umm.
5. Note. — In T., I., 364, i5_i9, we read: Ozias, frægr
Juda konungT af mörgum sigri, er Gu^ gaf honum, hofst
Í kennimanns þjónustu fórn at færa, því var hann
líkþrá lostinn ok or kirkju rekinn ok do í því. This,
in the Icelandic rendering, corresponds to the following
in the Latin text of the letter : — Oza quoque, etsi rex
K 541. Ill
Clxxiv PREFACE.
non esset, quoniam arcam Domini tetigit, et tenuit
nutantem ad præcipitium bobus recalcitrantibus, quia
ad eum non pertinebat, sed ad templi ministros, indig-
natione Divina percussus, juxta arcam Domini corruit
mortuus (Mat. V. 274). In the first instance we have to
correct Hosiah to Uzziah, son of Amaziah, king of Juda,
for it is evident that he is the king meant in the text.
His example, as set forth in II. Chron. XXVI. 16-21,
seems to be exactly that which was wanted to give
point to the Archbishop's argument, while the illustra-
tion adduced from the incident of the driver Uzziah, as
recorded in II. Sam. VI. 3-7 and I. Chron. XIII. 7-10,
seems really to miss the point altogether. We cannot
help thinking that here the Icelandic text repi'esents the
original letter faithfully, but the Latin passage a later
corruption.
Finally, it is my duty to acknowledge the kind
assistance I have received in the execution of my work.
First to the memory of the great Jon Sigurd sson I
owe to state that, besides affording me his unreserved
assistance whenever I appealed to him on doubtful points,
it is largely due to his liberality in admitting me to his
rich collections, that the matter contained in the preface
xxviii.-xxxv. is due. To the renowned editor of the laws
of the Icelandic Commonwealth, Dr. Vilhjálmr Finsen,
Judge in the Supreme Court of Judicatm^e at Copenhagen,
I am indebted for untiring kindness and valuable assist-
ance, especially in matters connected with the littera
fraternitatis. To Dr. Jon Thorkelsson, for steadfast
friendship and instructive correspondence, I gladly offer
my grateful acknowledgments; and here. I take the
opportunity of stating that I received in a letter from
him a conjecture on the difficult passage, Vol. I., 94, j.,,
identical with my own, but too late to refer to it in
the note. To the Arna-Magnæan stipendiary, Mr. Gu^-
mund rorláksson, are due the new readings in Frag-
ment B., Appendix I., pp. 248-252. And to him and
PREFACE. clxXV
Mr. Finnr Jonsson of the University of Copenhagen, I
owe kind and valuable replies to queries relating to the
history of Thomas saga. I acknowledge last, though by
no means as least, the unvarying kindness and generous
interest which my learned chief, Mr. Bradshaw, has
so readily extended to me on every arising occasion.
EmíKK Magnússon.
Cambridge, June 18S8.
clxxvi
ERRATA.
ERRATA.
Ix, footnote, xxx. read ***.
Vol. I.
, 8
10
18
26
32
32
36
38
38
50
64
68
69
84
90
92
96
106
110
110
118
124
130
142
146
148
150
154
164
170
174
180
g, eingin read einginn.
16, prior read priorr.
23, framsett read frammsett.
15sizt read K^sist.
s, Eptir read Eftii'.
11, siálfr read sjálfr.
footnote 3, uonndur 7'ead uonnduz.
g, prior read priorr.
5, i*vi er, read því er
c, |)esssk<5 la read |)ess skdla.
15, brast read brást.
i3> ^^g^'^S^ read lágliga.
1, |)arfnist read f)arnist.
1, furthurance read furtherance.
15, silkiklædi read silkiklæSi.
le, kanaka read kanúka.
19, Adríanus read Adrianus.
20, Roma read Roma.
22, |)raungslir read þröugslir.
o, honumm read honum.
9, liflat read líflát.
4, for^ast read for^azt.
9, i read i.
23, lagst read lagzt.
23, biskup read byskup.
footnote ^, coneilum, read concilium.
19, snarast read snarazt.
26, dirfist read dirfizt.
footnote 1, nefnDega read neiniliga.
2s, at, read at
12, snarist read snarizt.
ig, har-ma read harm-a.
24, klerkunun read klerkunum.
22, saurr read saur.
4, konum read honum.
ERRATA. clxxvii
Vol. I., 182,23, veral dligum read veraldligum.
24, kirkjunar read kirkjunnar.
198, 12, erkbyskupinum read erkibyskupinum.
204. 8, brigzlandi stundum read brigzlandi, stuudum.
24, heftist read heftizt.
210.9, okk read ok.
212, 26, feg-jalda read fégjalda.
220. 19, öíiruvís read ö^ruvíss.
23, eingin read einginn.
224. 17, bli'Skast read blitSkast.
230. 6, laundyrr read laundyr.
8, klekr read klerkr.
14, þyss read þys.
234. 20, konuugsmannua read konungsmauna.
250. 18, gle^ist read gle^izt.
254. 3, bonorö read boner's.
256, ly, komust read komuzt.
292, 12, hitt read hit.
296. 16, ley fa read leifa.
308.21, sviptist read sviftist.
330. 19, fyjara read fylgjara.
334. 17, snarist read snarizt.
336, 11, me^, read me^
340, 26, ek read ok.
380, footnote 7, 377-379 read 877-879.
384.22, ér read er.
394. 18, For'Sist read Fordizt.
396.4, astutS read ástú'S.
398. 20, óttist read óttizt.
402.5, vansæmi read vansami.
footnote ^3j Icelanders read Icelander's,
affiixit read afflixit.
404, 4, |)er read þér.
g, skildast read skyldast.
18, en read enn.
406. 23, eptir read eftir.
410, 3, LXXII. read LXII.
414.24, tapast reaíí tapazt.
418.24, ^^read'^^.
424, 14, streingir read strengir.
426. 3, lesist read lesizt.
430. 25, leyf «1 read leifSi.
432. 21, stalS read sta'S, er.
436, margin, St. Louis read King Louis.
442. 7, fekkst read f ékkst.
444, 23, Ileiurekr read Ileinreks.
466. 4, huersu read hversu.
20) \}^^' i^'cad J)ér.
Clxxviii ERRATA.
Vol. I., 466, oo, annsuör read annsvör.
492, ic her read her.
1-, engi read eingi.
494, 2Q, öngvann read öngvan.
.500, 10, heist read helzt.
21, rettindavald read rettindavald.
.504. ig, engiiiu read eÍQginn.
24, flekkast read flekkazt.
548,24? maundráp read manndráp.
554, 9, fögur read fögr.
Vol. II., 2, 12, postolegs read postoligs,
18, 2, brixluS read brigzlu'5.
12, Vpp 7-ead Upp.
44, ig, si|)au read si^an.
52, 3, flytiz read flytist.
64, margin, responsoy 7'ead respond.
68, 23, þikkiz 7-ead þikkist.
80. 13, Hæc read Hæe est.
88. 14, hár read hárr.
92, 23, priorinn I'ead pridrrinn.
93, CXI. read XCI.
100.3, Frani 7-ead Framm.
134, footnote -", hörmuligan read hörmulegan.
156, 4, sém 7'ead sem.
162. 4, gammall read gamall.
172, !(,, grepta'Sr read grefta^r.
1 84, marginal note, canonise read canonize.
204. 4, vuder j-ead under.
206, g, folkslus read folksins.
208, 20» byrinn 7ead byrrinu.
220, 2s, unnder 7-ead under.
224, 1J-, seigist read segist.
226, 1-, vitkazt read vitkast.
234, 29, gudomlig read gu^domlig.
236, 15, Því read því.
252, 12 redi read r^di.
35, þafinn read pafinn.
253, 4, glesi- read gl^si-.
, 8> farselldar read fars^lldar.
255, 29, lausa 7-ead lausu.
259, ig, hafvm read havfum.
260, 9, allu 7-ead avllu.
264, 9, dafan ok mallasan read davfan ok mallav«an.
265,24, ardvelligarr read avdvelligarr.
266, 14, Lvudva read Lvndvua.
267. 5, þa 7-ead þav.
1^,354 read 384.
11, trath rerti/ travtt.
ERRATA. clxxi
Vol. II., 268, 2, va read sva.
269, 32) clii'Slig[vm] read dav'Siig[vm],
270, -, 1 read 2.
279, 2, dr^'S read dyr'5.
291,27, ^P^^^ clæmi 7-ead eptir-dæmi.
IX
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
K541. Wt. B1275.
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
T171.
Reflexions
on the
murder.
FORMÁLI.
Blezaðr sé sá Gu^ himneskr, er sér ^ valde þvílík-
an 2 )?jón, sem nú er hér ^ greftra'Sr ; J?ví at kosningr
heilagrar speki skein yfir honum ]?egar í æskublómi ^ ^
ok fyrr enn hann væri^ fæddr.^ Hér^ er leiddr log
brandrinn, sá er mó^ir lians Mailld leit^ me^ háfum
eldi stand a upp í lofti^, því at nú hefir ástarhite
lifanda Gu'Ss hafi^ hann upp af jar^ríki. Alt sitt líf
leiddi harm stórum heilagiega, hreinn ok grandvarr á 10
sinn líkam. Erkibyskup var hann afS tign ok vígslu^
prímas allrar Englands kristne, ok far me'S postolegs
sætis ^ legatus. Var fat vel ver^ugt, því at alia tíma
finst ^^ haim verit hafa hinn réttvísasti ^^ dómare; er
hvorki halla'Si réttum ^- dome fyrir fémútur ^^ né 15
iQanna ^^ mun, svá sterkui' ^^ ok stö^ugr me^ kirkjunne,
a'S hann veik af réttri ^^ reglu livorki fyrir blítt né
strítt/'^ svá réttvíslega ^^ har^r vi^ ómildan ^^ If^, at
hann má feira hegna^arhamarr ^ vel kallast. Enn
fátækra manna ok harmþrunginna var hann liinn 20
háleitasti huggari. Ekki finst hans life bjartara, J?ví
1 sier, T.
^^ riettuisazti, T.
" þuilikann, T.
12 riettum, T.
3 hier, T.
13 fiemutur, T.
■* qskuhlomi, T.
i^ manna added by Prof. Unger.
5 u^ri, T.
13 So, T.
6 Mdr, T.
16 riettri, T.
' Heir, T.
1' sír/(/í, T.
** So altered by
the
editor ;
liet,
i^ riettvislega, T.
T.
19 omilldann, T.
ö sqtis, T.
20 hegnadarhamar, T.
»0 finz, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS.
Blessed be that heavenly God, who chose for his
servant such an one as him who now lieth here buried ;
for election by Holy Wisdom shone over him in the
bloom of his youth, yea and before he was born. Here
is now entombed that burning brand which appeared
to his mother with high flames issuing aloft therefrom,
for now the heat of the living God's love hath lifted him
up from the realms of earth. All his life he led in a
right holy fashion being pure and heedful of his body.
He was archbishop by dignity and ordination, the
primate of the whole church of England, and thereby
the legate of the apostolic see. And right worthy it
was, for he is found to have been at all times the most
rightwise of judges, and one who never allowed a right
judgment to be swayed by bribes or respect of per-
sons ; and in so firm and steadfast a manner he stood by
the church, that no means, soft or severe, ever brought
him to depart from a right rule ; so rightwisely stern
towards wicked people, that he may well be called their
hammer of revenge. But to the poor and afflicted he was
the most exalted comforter. Than his life nothing may
A 2
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
1171. at hann fyrirleit^ alia heimsins fegr"S, fostrland ok
fjarhlute, frændr ^ ok vine, takandi fyrir Gu^s ast bæ^i ^
á sigpk sina frændr ^ fátæktar ^ útleg'S ine^ svá myklum ^
ok margháttu^um ineinger"Sum. Sex ár þoldi hann
útleg^ me^ svá myklum hugarkrafti, at hann líktist ^ 5
sjálfum Gu^s postolum í sinne sta^festi. Nu ef
sökin ^ gerir mann go^an í Gu^s augiiti, sem einginn
efar vitr ma^r, þá finst *^ hans sök^ eingi réttvísari,^
því at hann striddi í mote Gu'Ss ovinum, er me'S ollu
vildu fyrirkoma kirkjunnar rettendum.-^^ Enn hva^ 10
e-Sa me'S hverjum hætti^^ hann let^^ sitt bleza^a lif,
er ollum kunnigt, at hann var drepinn fyrir Gu^s
mo'Sur ^^ altare í höfu'Skirkju ^^ Engiands af sjalfs ^^ sins
andligum sonum. Ok J^au lof er rettliga-^^ renna at
hans líílæti ^^ eru frábær^^ í frumtignum, )?á er limr- 15
inn likist ^^ höf^ino í mörgum ^^ greinum. Hver
heilagra manna samvinnandist ^^ framar sjálfri Gu^s
pínu enn ];essi Thomas ? Lit a þat, er fylgir, ok munt
þú sanna svo verit hafa. Hvortveggi for^a^i sér-^
um stund fyrir óvina valdi, ]?ar til ^ inn gekk ^"^ fyrir- 20
ætlu-S^^ ti-S af sjálfum Gu'Se. Ok bá'Sir fyrir sögSu^^
sína písl, fyr enn framm kæmi.;^^ bá^ir mót runnu
sínum banamönnum me^ líku or^taki, ok báöir ]?águ
fri^ sínu fólki. Hvartveggi bar svá hógværliga^
^ Tor fyrir liet ( = fyrirlét), from
fyrirláta, to forgo ?
^ frqndr, T,
3 h^di, T.
^* fatqktar, T.
5 SoT.
ö liktiz, T.
7 saukiji, T.
^ finz, T.
^ riettuisariy T.
^^ riettendum, T.
" ^^ííz, T.
12 /zeí, T.
13 moí/r, T.
i^ haufudkirkju, T.
15 So U, ; sialf, T.
i^ rietUiya T.
17 Zz/Í^íi, T. ; liflati, U.
18 /m6^r, T.
19 likiz, T.
20 manrgum, T.
21 Prof. Unger reads : er samvinn-
andizt, which gives hardly satis-
factory grammar or sense. I am
inclined to think that samtvinna^ist
may represent the original reading:
what saint's martyrdom was more
entwined with = more closely re-
sembling, &c.
22 sier, T.
23 Prof. Unger adds er after til.
24 gieck, T.
2' fyrir^tlvd, T.
2^ sauydu, T.
27 k^mi, T.
28 hogu^rliga, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 5
be found brighter, for he scorned all this world's glitter,
even his native land and wealth, kinsmen and friends ;
taking, from love of God, upon himself and his kinsfolk
the poverty of exile, together with great and manifold
hardships. For six years he endured banishment in such
firmness of mind, that he resembled the very apostles of
God in his steadfastness. Now, if the very cause maketh
a man good in the sight of God, the which no wise man
misdoubteth, then no cause may be found more just than
his was, for he struggled against the enemies of God,
whose aim was to bring utterly to nought the rights of
the church. But by what cause, and in what manner he
lost his blessed life, is known unto all men, inasmuch as
he was slain before the altar of God's mother in the
cathedral church of all England by his own spiritual
sons. And the praises which rightfully appertain to his
death are the most rarely met with among the merits of
martyrs, and only when the limb resembleth the head in
many ways. Who among saints hath gone through ^
passion more closely resembling the very passion of God
than this Thomas ? Consider what now followeth here-
after, and thou wilt find, how truly it hath been so.
Both saved themselves for a while from the power of the
enemy, until the season came by which bad been ordained
before by God himself Both foretold their passion
before it came to pass ; both went forward to meet their
banesmen with a similar address, and both prayed for
peace for those about them. Both bore in so lowly a
6
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
1171.
sjalfan píslarpálminn, at lambinu liktusfc bá'Sir, því at
]7essi ágætisma^r,^ erkibyskupinn, bar eigi bond ^ e'Sr
klæ'Si^ sér til hlífSar, eigi heyr^i anclvarp eSr styn
af bans brjoste, heldr sofna^i bann sva sætliga,^ sem
bans dau^i dyrkast eilííliga.^ Bá^ir leifSu ]7eir fe- 5
muni sinum kveljörum ok bvartveggi leiddist í
nýrre^ steinþró af sínum hug^armönnum. Svá fylgir
]?jónn berra sínum, signa'Sr Thomas Lausnara varum,
er um langan tíma ofíra^i sig bfandi fórn Gu'Si
sjálfum me^ margbátto^um gæzkuverkum,^ lerkandi 10
sinn likam frá lýtum ok löstum me^ bár^ ....
Consterna-
tion caused
at the news
of the arch-
bishop's
death.
KAP. LXXXII.
. . . . ma rettliga, at einskis ^ manns ^^ or^færi ^^
skýrir ]?at me^ fuUu, bver uggr ok otti, börmung ok 15
bræzla ^^ kom yfir alt folk ^^ í Englandi bæ'Si ^^ lær^a ^^
ok leika ok almúg fyrir dráp ok dau'Sa Tbóme erki-
byskups, því líkt sem fólkit væri^^ lagt at jöröu ok
eingi lyfti upp sínu böföi, me'San nýjast var um
sagöa börmung.^^ Sem marka má af oröum eins 20
byskups, þami tíma sem einn af klerkum kom fyrir
bann bi'Sjandi fulltings á sínu máli, segir sig ^^ mis-
baldinn viS einn konungsmann bæöi^^ m'e'ð ran ok
" annarri vanvir^u. Byskupinn svarar : " Hvat megum
" ver ]?er gjora ? HirSir várr ok höfu'S, binn bæsti ^^26
1 agi^tismadr, T.
i. notulæ 8-26, Migne, cxc. 1295-
2 haimd, T.
1297.
3 kl^di, T.
4 s§tliga, T.
^ eilifigha, T.
9 einkis, T.
10 manz, T.
" ordf^ri, T.
12 hrezla, T.
^ nt/re, T.
7 gi§zkuuerkumy T.
13 folk added in U.
1" b^dii T.
^ Here is a lacune of two leaves
15 l^rda, T.
in T. The comparison made here
1^ uqri, T.
between the passion of Christ and
1-^ haur^nung, T.
that of the martyr is derived, in a
1^ sigh, T.
strongly condensed form, from Her-
I'-' b^di, T.
bert of Bosham's Liber Melorum,
-0 h^zti, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 7
fashion the very palm of passion, that they resembled a
lamb ; for this glorious man, the archbishop, bore forth
neither hand nor raiment in defence of himself ; not a sigh
nor a groan was heard to escape his breast, nay rather
fell he so sweetly asleep as the perennial \\'orship of his
death sheweth. Both left things of value to their tor-
mentors, and both were entombed in a new stone
sepulchre by their loving friends. In this wise the
servant followeth his master, the blessed Thomas our
Saviour, he who for a lono^ time offered himself a livinir
sacrifice unfco God with manifold works of mercy, wean-
ing his body from sin and vice with hair. . .
CHAP. LXXXII.
. , . may rightfully, that no man's manner
of speech can fully explain, what terror and awe, what
sorrow and fright fell upon all folk in England, learned
and layfolk alike, as well as npon the commonalty, from
the slaughter and death of archbishop Thomas ; indeed
it appeared as if the people were smitten down to earth,
and no one durst lift up his head while the said affliction
was at its freshest. This may be inferred from the
words of a certain bishop, when once upon a time one
of the clergy appeared before him praying him for aid
in a certain case, which he said was one of unfair deal-
ings by one of the king's men, who had both I'obbed him
and brought other shame upon him. The bishop
answered : " What may we afford to do for you ? Our
" shepherd and head, the highest bishop in the whole land,
8 THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
1171. « byskup Í ollu ^ landinu er drepinn ok deyddr ^ í sínum
" erkistóli ok mó^urkvi^i alls Englands, er drottnins:
" ma rettliga kallast annarra ^ kirkna. Af hverjum
" skulum ver nu fullting fa, hvar er traust vart, sto"S
" eSr styrkr ? Byskuparnir em drepnir í kirkjunum, ^
" heilagir sta^ir era svivir^ir ok saurga^ir, goSir menn
" fóttro'Snii^ enn glæpamenn ^ tigna^ir/' pviligt var at
heyra, ok J?ó meir í bvísli enn hámæli/ því at sumir
konungsmenn váro sva grjotligir í sínu brjósti, at
þeira ofsi ok ^rfirgirnd gekk upp til afarkosta yx6 10
lærdóminn^ fyrir slik ódæmi/ sem syndist í þeim sta^,
sem konungsma^r ^ atti malum at skifta vi^S einn
klerk. Ok sem ])á greindi mjög ^ a, tala'Si bann sva :
" Yeizt J)ú eigi," sag^i bann, " at oss, konungsmönnum ^^
" er nú kent at raka kruniir klerkanna ?" Ma af sliku 15
marka, bversu bátt illmennit geisa'Si því er sam-
kvæmt-^^ sitr milli • bofu^s -^ ok ber^ar, )?at er at skilja
Heinrekr konungr gamli ok bans hir^. pvi at þar birt-
ist meir begomlig '^ dýr^ ok bræsni ^^ fyrir mönnum ^^
enn kristiligr barmr j^eiiTar ^^ gratligrar óbæfu/^ sem 20
Ijost ma ver'Sa í )?vi sem fylgir. pvi at )?ær ^^ bækr,^^ er
The kins framast fylgja Heim^eki gamla, setja ]?at í fja^stu eftir
archbishop's and] at erkibyskups, at ranfengi J^at er honum fluttist
proper .^ ^^ Kantúaría léti ^^ bann flest aftr færa.-^ Enn )?at
segir -- eingi ^^ bok, at bann feny tti ^^ ser -^ eigi nokku^ 25
af. Her-^ meS fer "þat, at sva sem bann hefir frett
» auUu,T.
« dauddr, T.
3 annara, T.
* gl^pamenn, T.
« hamuli, T.
^^ l^rdominn, T.
7 od^nii, T.
8 So altered by Prof. Unger
konunyr, T.
9 Z7«05r^, T.
^0 ko?iu?igsmaunnum, T.
1^ samku^mty T.
^' haufuds, T.
^^ hiegomligh, T.
14 Ar^snz, T.
1^ maunnum, T.
16 So T.
17 oAf/M, T.
18 )>fr, T.
20 /«eii, T.
* f^ra, T.
-■^ seigir, T.
2-^ en^i, T.
2^ fienijtti, T.
-' s?er, T.
26 i/ier, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 9
" is smitten and killed in his arch-see, in the mother-
" womb of all England, that may rightly be called the
" queen of other churches. From whom may we now
'' get aid ? where is our trust, stay, or strength ? The
" bishops are slain in the churches, holy places are filled
'' with abomination and uncleanliness, the good are trod
" under foot, but the wicked are honoured."
Things of this kind were now to be heard, uttered
though they were in whispers rather than in loud words,
for some of the king's men were of such stony hearts,
that their fierce insolence, by reason of their hearts'
unexampled wickedness, grew even into overbearing
deeds against the learned men, as came to pass in a
certain place, where a king's man and a clerk had some
dealings together. On their disagreement growing
earnest, the former spoke in this way : " Dost thou not
" know that we, the king's men, are now taught how to
" shave the crowns of the clerks ? " From this it may
be seen, how wantonly wicked people, that is to say,
king Henry the old and his court, gave reins to the
thing which hath its seat between head and shoulder.^
For they showed forth rather vainglory and hypocrisy
before man, than any christian soitow for this grievous
abomination, as will be clear from what follows here-
after. For the books that favour king Henry the old
the most record it among the first things done by him
after the death of the archbishop, that of the wrongfully
begotten goods which were brought to him from
Canterbury he let most be brought back again. But
no book averreth that he did not turn some of tliem to
his own use. And herewith went also this, that on
^ This obscure passage from: gave | the tongue, i.e. the language held by
reins, &c. seems to be an allusion to I King Henry and his party.
10
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSUPS.
1171.
Messengers
sent to Can-
terbury to
exculpate
the king.
fall erkibyskupsins fyrir vopnum sinna manna, lætr^
hann li'Sa nokkura daga, á^r hann gerir klerka sina
me^ brefuin til Englands, at þeir fegri bans mál fyrir
capitulo Kantuariensis.
Ok feir frammkomnir ^ kalla bræ^r ^ samt me^ 5
J/viliku orSfelli : " Ver '* erum sendir til y^ar,^ bræ^r,^
" af Heinreki konungi gamla þess erindis, at afsaka
" fyrir ySr bans meinleysi, at einginn grunr leggist til
" bans af þeiri óbamingju, sem bér me^ ySr befir at
" borizt. pvi at konungrinn fell ^ í sára bryg"S, svá sem 1 0
" bann spurSi ]?at ferliga verk, sva at þrjá daga bélt^
" bann sik ut af beilagri kirkju me^ því har^lífi, at
" bann ]7arna^ist alia fæ^u^ utan kendi liti^ af kjarna-
" mjolk, bafSi einvistir utan alia gle^i, því at bonum
" syndist fær^-*^^ a sitt riki mikil ófræg^/-'^ ok vaiia vildi 15
^' bann skilja sik me^ öllu blutlausan af ];essii verki,
" in est fyrir þann ótta, er margar meingerSir erkiby-
" skups befSi bræit-^"-^ hann til nokkurrar^^ ]?eirar^^
" bræ^i/^ at vondir ogiftumenn befSi tekit í sitt framm-
" bleypi. pvi at ];ungbær^^ var su meinger^, er 20
" hé"San,^' fluttist frá y^r, at ben-a væri ^^ bannsettr ok
" allir er vi'S vigslu sonar bans váro. Var su örin ^^
" þar fyrir bættlig.-^ at bon flaug at óvöru,^^ því at kon-
" ungrinn bug^i allan óþokka ni'Srsettan a þeim fundi,
" er fi.i'Sr formera^ist i Franz milium bans ok Tbomam 25
" erkibyskups. Nu þóttust þeir, er glæpinn^ unno
'' befna konungsins meinger^a a ];eim manne, er bonum
" átti bezt at ömbuna ^^ fyrir margfaldan ^^ soma. Enn
^ ktr, T.
2 framkomnir, T.
3 hr^dr, T.
4 Vier.T.
5 yduar^ T.
6 brqdr, T.
7 fiell, T.
8 hiellt, T.
9 f^du; T.
'^Ard,T.
" ofr^gd, T.
^- hr^rt, T.
^3 nockurar, T.
14 So U. ; Yeira, T.
15 hr^di, T.
16 \>unghqr, T.
'' hicdan, T.
1^ Mere,'T.
19 aurinn, T.
-0 hgltngh, T.
-1 ouauru, T. .
2" gl^piim, T.
-2 mimhuna, T.
^4 margfaldann^ T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 11
hearing of the archbishop having fallen before the
weapons of his own men, he allowed several days to pass
by or ever he sent his clerks with letters to England
to put a fair face upon his affairs before the chapter of
Canterbury.
And having arrived, they summoned the brethren
together, with words framed in the manner followinor :
" We are sent to you, brethren, from king Henry the
" old, with a commission to bear witness to his innocence
" before you, so that no suspicion may fall on him for
" the grievous mishap which hath come to pass here
^' among you. For the king fell into sore tribulation as
" soon as he heard the news of that fell deed ; so much
" so, that for three days he kept away from holy church,
" doing penance even to the extent of abstaining from
" all food, taking only little almond-milk, and abiding
" in solitude, reft of all joy ; for it seemed to him, that
" a great dishonour had been brought upon his realm ;
*' withal he would scarcely deem himself without share
" in this work, chiefly from fear, lest the many hurt-
" ful deeds of the archbishop might have moved him
*' to some such vent of anger as might have spurred
" wicked men on to reckless actions. For sore, indeed^
" was the provocation which was bruited abroad from
" you here, to the effect that the lord king was excom-
" municated together with all those who had been
" present at the coronation of his son. That ari'ow was
" even therefore a dangerous one, because it came flying
" unawares, while the kinsr thouo^ht that all ill-will had
" been allayed at that meeting whereat peace was
" settled in France between him and archbishop Thomas.
" Now, those who wrought the wicked deed deemed
'' they wreaked thereby the injury done to the king on
" the man who had most to requite to him for mani-
'* fold honours received. But so far removed from any
12
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
1171.
" sva var konungrinn fjarri þeira fjrirætlan,^ at þann
" tíma, er glæprinn ^ geröist, hug^i hann )?á vera á sínum
" garöi. Bölfa^^ verk er vor^it ok svá óheyriligfc, at
" æfinlega '^ mun í minnum haft ok aldri um aldr gleym-
'' ast. Enn því Ijótara sem ]7at prófast, hæfir ^ )7ví 5
" sí^r undirmönnum ^ konungsins at ætla ^ honum
"■ nokkura samvitand, e^r vilja þar af. Enn ef nokkur
" ílekkr í ]?essu male hefir honum færzt ^ fyrir eins-
" hverja bræ^i/ hæfir/^ at hann af máist meS y^varri
" bæn ^^ ok gó^fýse. Sýnir hann konungrinn sína mýkt, 10
" at eigi ofsækir^"^ hann frammli'Sinn,^^ beldr gjarna
" fyrirlætr^* sálunni þat, er hann misgerSi. pví bý^r
" hann, at þér -"^ grefti'S Thómam svo sæmiliga ^^ hjá
" sínum forf e^rum, erkibyskupunum hér ^^ í Kancia, sem
" eingin sturlan um aldr hefSi hrært -^^ bans lífdaga."^^ 15
Nú þótt Heinrekr konungr ger^i sér þvílíka skrök-
semd,-^ lina^ist eigi barmr þeira vi^ slíkt, er fyrir
^tiíttle"^^ váru, beldr veljast til nokkurir af ástvinum erki-
byskups, at fara or landi ok framm ^^ til Róms, at þeir
ílyti berra páfanum me"S fullum sannendum svá mikil 20
hörmungarefni.^ pessir sækja ^^ upp í Franz ok finna
Messengers
sent from
news to
Borne.
^ fyrir^tlan, T.
2 gl^prinn, T.
3 Baulfad, T.
^ ^finliga, T.
= h^fir, T.
^ undirmaunmim, T.
7 ^tla, T.
8 f^rdz, T.
9 br^di, T.
10 h^fir, T.
11 b^7l, T.
12 ofs^kir, T.
1^ framlidinn, T.
14 fyrirlqtr, T.
15 )>ier, T.
1^ sqmiliga, T.
17 hier, T.
18 hrqrt, T.
1^ The message delivered to the
chapter of Canterbury agrees sub-
stantially with the Latin text of the
same in the Gesta post Martyrium.
But one of a number of discrepan-
cies between them must be noted
here, namely this, that here Henry
is represented as being unaware of
the departure of the murderers at
the very time when the murder
took place, for that is what the Ice-
landic text must be supposed to
imply, while in the Gesta he is
represented to have taken measures
for guarding the coasts of Nor-
mandy, in order to prevent the
murderers effecting their purpose.
20 skrauksemd, T.
21 fram, T.
22 haurmungarefniy T.
23 s^kja, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS.
13
" knowledge of their intention was the king that, at the
" time when the crime was committed, he believed they
" were indeed at his court. An accursed deed has been
" done, and one so unheard of, that for ever it will be
" remembered, nor in any age be forgotten. But the more
" wicked it proves, the less it beseemeth the king's
" subjects to hold him guilty of any complicity therein
" or connivance thereat. But should he, by reason of
" some angry behaviour, not be utterly spotless in this
" matter, it behoveth that such a spot be wiped off by
" 3^our prayers and goodwill. For the king showeth his
" heart softened inasmuch as he persecuteth not the
*' departed one, but pardoneth readily his soul all that
" he did amiss. He therefore ordereth you to bury
" Thomas among his departed forefathers of Canterbury,
" as honourably as if no trouble had ever befallen to
'' disturb his life-days." Now, although king Henry put
on this feigned guise, the grief of those who were there
gathered together was allayed none the more ; and, this
notwithstanding, some of the well beloved fiiends of the
archbishop joined together, betaking themselves abroad
and proceeding to Rome in order to bring to the lord
pope true news of the gTcat cause of their grief These
14
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
1171.
Lodvis konung. Profast þeim, sem var von, at ólíkr
var hann Heinreki konungi, því at jrfir lífláte Thome
erkibyskups hefir Frakka konungr tarligan harm ok
trega. Ok hann skrifar me^ ]?eim til herra páfans þat
bréf, er svo byrjar : 5
King Louis
writes to
the Pope.
KAP. LXXXIII.
Bréf Frakka Konungs.^
Hinum helgasta fe^r ok æzta- byskupi Alexandro
pafa sendir kve^ju Lofvis konungr af Franz. Sá son
er saurgar mæ& ^ sina svivii-Sir mjök manneskjuna, ok IQ
brytr löo:málit^ hæ^ileoja,^ úminnioT^ velgerninofs várs
Lausnara. Aiimr er sa ma^r, er ser lætr ^ öngrar ^
hrygSar fa, hverja skamm e^r ska'Sa sem fær ^ heilög
kristni í frammhleypi -"^^ Gu-Ss ovina. 'Nú, ef ollum
kristnum mömium ^^ er rettliga gratandi harmr kristn- 15
innar, kallar su skylda myklu hærra-*^^ til ySar-^^ enn
nokkurs annars. Nu er nyjung^^ grimmleiks^^ ok
ofse údæma ^^ inn leidd, |7vi at nu hefir aumlig ^'^ upp
risit ok dau^lig^^ illska-^^ moti ástvinum Gu'Ss, ok
svei-^i lagt Í sjáldr Kiists, slökkvandi Ijós ok lampa 20
Englands kristni, svo mjog -^ Ijotliga sem gTÍmmliga.-^
Hvert kallar þetta et meinlausa bló^ til hegningar,
utan upp á ySr ? pvi vakni^ vi-S, heilagr fa-Sir, ok upp-
1 This letter, beginning, "Ab
*' humanæ pietatis lege recedit filius,
" qui matrem deturbat,"' is inserted
among Variorum Kpistolæ ad Alex-
drum III. in Migne's Patrologia,
cc, col. 1378. But as we have it
there, it could not have formed the
original to our text, which contains
pointed sentences not occurring in
the Latin recension as we now
have it.
2 qzta, T.
' m^dr, T.
■* laugmalit, T.
» h^diliga, T.
* vmÍTmigr, T.
' ktr, T.
^ aungrar, T.
' Ár, T.
10 framhleypi, T.
11 vmunnum,T.
1- h^rra, T.
13 yduar, T.
1* nyung, T.
'•^ grimleiks, T.
1Ö ud§ma, T.
17 aumliga, T.
1^ daudligh, T.
19 ilhska, T.
^ miogh, T.
"1 grinUigaj T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 15
men wended their way into France to have a meeting
with king Louis ; and, as might be looked for, he proveth
himself to them right unlike unto king Henry, for the
king of the French falleth into tearful grief and sorrow
at the death of archbishop Thomas, and writeth with
them a letter to the lord pope which beginneth thus :
CHAR LXXXIII..
The Letter of the King of the French.
To the holiest father and highest bishop, Alexander,
Louis the king of the French, sendeth greeting. He
who detileth his mother shameth sorely humanity, and
breaketh the law mockingly, forgetful of the benefits of
our Saviour. And wretched, in sooth, is the man who
is not moved to sorrow at any shame or hurt which the
insolence of God's enemies bringeth upon the holy church.
Now if all men have a rightful cause to grieve for the
affliction of the church, the duty so to do calleth louder
to you than to anyone else. Now a novel cruelty and
insolence unexampled has been brought about, for now
a wretched and deadly wickedness hath been raised
up against God's own beloved, the sword having been
thrust into the very pupil of Christ's own eye, slaking
the light and lamp of England's church in a fell no less
than a cruel manner. Unto whom crieth this innocent
blood for revenge, but to you ? Awake, therefore, holy
father, and arise in just chastisement. Draw from the
16
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
1171. risit til rettrar ^ refsingar. Dragit or sli"Srum sver'Sit
bins heilaga Petri, ok hoggvit ^ framm ^ til hefndar
eftir svá heilagan ^ mann, því at bans dreyri ok dauSi
hljo^ar hatt um alia kristni. Nú þeir menn er bref
bera,^ ok sins forstjora dyrligs ^ bafa svo börmoliga 5
misst/ mega ySr inniliga greina allan^ batt ok efni
];essara stórtí^enda, ok trui'S ]?eim or'Sum sva sem
vorum. Valete.
Margir höfSingjar í Franz skrifu'Su til lierra pafans,
)?ótt þar af sé ^ fair nefndir. Enn þat er Ijost af 10
letrum, at næst-^^ Frakka konungi skrifar Vilbjálmr
erkibyskup af Sainz ok Tbeoballdus af Blesis, er fyr
var nefndr. Erkibyskups bref befir |?at form, sem
her^^ ma beyra:^^
The arch- Alexandro, Gu^s vin, binum æzta ^^ byskupi sendir 15
Scniwites kve^ju Vilhjálmr, lagr jTJonn Sennonis kristni, me^
ope. g^^i'^gj^j^ bly'Sni. Y'Svarri postoligri tign er band-
fengi^ vald a bimni ok jör^u,^* ok y^r í bendi leikr
tvieggjat sver'S til beilagrar begningar, yfirsettr allar
)?jó^ir ok riki, sva at þér megi^ konunga i ^ötri læsa/^ 20
ok ríkismenn í rekendur keyra.^*^ pví er y^r alitanda,
bversu vingar^rinn Gu^s er nu gey mdr, nær^^ því sem
Davi^ sag'Si, því at göltr ^^ af skógi ok önnur ^*-^ villisvín
hafa bann biti'S,*'^^ ok eti'S Kantarabyrgis kristni, ok
enn beldr almennilig ^^ mó^ir sitr ok drýpí me^ hörm- 25
ung^^ ok gráti, fellir tár bló'Si blandat í y^ru augliti,
^ riettrar, T.
2 huoguity T.
2 fram, T.
'* heilayann, T.
5 her a added in U.
^ dyrieigs, T.
7 mist, T.
^ allann, T.
9 sie, T.
10 7l^St, T.
11 hier, T.
1^ This letter, beginning, " Vestro
*' apostolatui, Pater sancte, data
" est omnis potestas in eœlo et in
" terra," Migne, ib., col. 1430, is
here given in a very condensed
form.
13 ^zsta, T.
14 Cfr. Matth. xxviii. 18.
15 l^sa, T.
16 Cfr. Ps. cxlix. 6-8.
17 w^r, T.
18 gaultr, T.
1^ aunnur, T.
2« Cfr. Ps. Ixxx. 8, 13.
-' ahnenniUcfh, T.
2^' haurmu7ig, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 17
sheath the sword of the holy Peter, and march forward
dealing blows of revenge for such a holy man ; for his
blood and death cry aloud throughout all Christendom.
Now the men who carry this letter, and have had to
forego their ruler in such a sorrowful manner, may
set forth to you in all fulness the whole mannei' and
matter of these great tidings, and we pray that you
believe in their words as in our own. Valete.
Many lords in France wrote to the lord pope, although
few of them are named by name. But books on the
subject make it clear, that next to the king of the French
writeth William, archbishop of Sens, as well as Theobald
of Blois, who has been mentioned before. The arch-
bishop's letter was framed in the form that here may be
heard : —
To Alexander, God's beloved, the chief among bishops,
William, humble servant of the church of Sens, in
devoted obedience, sendeth greeting. Into the hands
of your apostolic highness is delivered power in heaven
and on earth, and in your hand playeth a two-edged
sword for holy chastisement, you being set over all
nations and kingdoms, for the purpose of clasping kings
in fetters, and putting in chains the mighty ones. It
behoveth you, therefore, to consider, how the guarding
of God's vineyard now accordeth with the words of
David, inasmuch as the boar from the wood and other
wild swine have eaten it up, and devoured the church
of Canterbury ; aye, and still more, the catholic churcli
sitteth drooping in affliction and weeping, shedding tears
blended with blood before your face ; and is set up like
K541. B
18
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
1171.
og^ er sva sett sem teinn í bakka ok höf5 at skot-
spæni,^ brixluð af sínum kunningjum,^ er skaka sin
höfu^ at lienne * ok segja : Hvar er nu Gu^ þeira ? ^
Enn liiin stynr mot ba^i þeira ok drepr ni^r böM,
kallandi til y^ar.^ Heyri'S bennar rodd,^ beilagr fa^ir, 5
ok befniö bló^s sonar ySvars ok Gu^s pislarvotts,® erki-
byskups af Kancia, er nu liggr drepinn sem krossfestr
sakir verndar beilagrar kirkju. OguiiigT blutr ok
ódæmilig ^ ilska me'S gu^rækiligum '^^ glæp ^^ er voröin
á vorura dögum, svá at öllum gnestr í eyrum/^ 10
úbejrrt ^^ me'S hei'Singjum, ok eigi finst -^* getl^ slíkra
údæma ^^ meS sjálfum Gyöingum. Vpp er nú risinn
annarr^^ Heródis, er illger^amenn sendi af sinni sí^u,
er eigi skömmu^ust ^^ at berja ok sverSum særa ^^ krism-
a'Sa kórónu erkibyskupsins í musteri Drottins. Nú 15
at vitnisbm^^ ritninganna ok eigi sí^r gó'Sra manna,
ger'Sist þessi ma'Sr sannr píslarvottur ^^ hærSi ^^ fyrir sök ^^
ok sárleik, fyrir lífit lofsamligt ok sjálft lífláti'S. Nú rísit
upp, beilagr fa'Sir, me'ð strí'Su kristiligs rettar,^^ ok
fremit begning gu'Sligra laga eftir ]?ann, er lögunum ^^ 20
fylgdi ok fyrir þeira soma er ^^ gaf sik í dau^a. Seti^
lækning ^^ lignum blutum ok gefit forsjó úkomnum.
Hverr ^^ sta^r er nú traustr ? Hræ'Siligr ^^ úfri'Sr bló%-
. ' ogh, T.
- skotsp^ni, T. Cfr. Lam. iii. 12.
3 Cfr. Ps. xxxi. 11.
4 Cfr. Lam. ii. 15.
5 Cfr. Ps. cxv. 2.
^ yduar, T.
"t raudd, T.
^ píslaruotz, T.
^ odqmilig, T.
^° gtí^r^kiligumf T.
'' 9kP, T.
^- gnestr i eyruni, Prof. Unger,
correctly ; cfr. *' tinnient ambæ
" aures ejus," a quotation from
1 Sam. iii. 11 ; gnistr i aurum, T.
^^ vheyrtyT.
14 fijiz, T.
/5 ud^ma, T.
1^ annar, T.
1^ skaummuduz, T.
18 s^ra,T.
19 So T.
20 b^di, T.
21 sank, T.
22 riettar, T.
23 laugumim, T.
2'i Prof. Unger suppresses er ; but
it is retained here as correctly
serving a rhetorical purpose.
25 l^kning, T.
26 /iuer, T.
27 hrqdiligr, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 19
a pole at butts, and is had for a target, being a reproach
to her acquaintances, who wag their heads at her, sa\áng,
" Where is now their God ? " But she o'roaneth at their
mockery, and droojDeth her head while raising her cries
unto you. Listen to her voice, holy father, and avenge the
blood of your son and God's martyr, archbishop Thomas
of Canterbury, who now lieth slain, as crucified, because
of his defence of holy church. A horrible thing, and an
unexampled wickedness, together with a godless crime
hath befallen in our days, one that rendeth the ears of all
men, an unheard-of thing among heathens, a heinousness
not found mentioned even among Jews. A second
Herod is now arisen, who has sent out on his behalf
evil-doers that were not ashamed to go warring, and with
swords to wound the anointed crown of the archbishop
in the temple of the Lord. Now, by the testimony of
Scripture no less than by the witness of good men, this
man was a true martyr both as to his cause, and his
penances, his laudable life, and his very death. Arise now,
holy father, with the stern authority of christian right,
and wreak the chastisement of divine law for him, who
always walked in the law, and gave himself in death
for the honour thereof. Supply healing for the things
which have come to pass, and warning for things to
come. Where is now a place of safety? A dire trouble
B 2
20
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
1171.
Count
Theobald of
Blois writes
to the Pope.
ar kirkjurnar^ ok dregr í daii'Sa hina hæstu ^ stolpa
kristninnar. Vakni gu^ligr rettr,^ ok væpnist * login ^
til frammgongu ^ at hefna blo^s ok bana þessa manns/
er af Englandi kallar sva hátt. at skelfr undir eigi at
eins jör^in, heldr jafnvel himnarner. Gefit |^au heil- 5
ræ'Si ^ liarmi varum, at }^varri ^ tign se ^^ til frægöar/^
enn lieilagri kirkju til hjálpar ok uppreistar. Valete.
Herra Theoballdus ^"^ skrifar sva fallit lierra pafanum
af sama efni : ^^
Alexandro me^ Gu'Ss myskunn hinum liæsta-^^ byskupi 10
sendir kve^ju^^ Theoballdus jarl me^ drottinligri hly'Sni.
Y-Svarri^ tign, heilagr faöir, sýndist betr at semja ok
fri^ gera milium Englands konungs ok Thomam erki-
byskups. Ok á þeirn fundi var ek eftir ^^ ySru bo's!, ok
ek sa Heinrek konung taka Thomam erkibyskup í 15
fri-S, ok játaöi J?at saraa fyrir alia sina menn. Erkiby-
skup kærSi ^" bæSi ^** á konuug ok bj^skupa ura a.flagliga
vígsluger"S vi'S Heinrek unga, enn konungr gafst-^^ í
vald um þat alt bæ'Si-^ fyrir sina hönd^^ ok byskup-
anna ; gekk- me'S, at o%ert var, ok erkibyskup me^ y^ru 20
rá"Si leggr J?ar -^ upp á J^vílika sk3^n, sem honum sýndist.
Hér ^ var ek nær,^^ ok l^at mætta ^^ ek me"S ei^i sanna.
Lýsist hé^an-'^ ]?ví framar, hversu afskapligt er, ef
^ kirkiunnary T.
2 hqstu, T.
3 riettr, T.
^ n§pniz, T.
^ laugin, T.
* framgaungUf T.
7 manz, T.
8 heilr^di, T.
^ yduarij T.
1° sie, T.
" fr^ffdar, T.
^- Theobald count of Blois.
^^ This letter is found among Va-
riorum epistoicB ad Alexandrum
III., No. 89, beginning : " Vestræ
" placuit majestati, ut inter domi-
" num Cantuariensem archiepisco-
'' pum et regem Anglorum pax
" reformaretur, et integra firmare-
" tur Concordia." Migne, Patro-
logia, cc, col. 1447-48.
1^ h^sia, T.
1^ quediu, T.
16 eptir, T.
1' k^'.di, T.
>3 b§di, T.
19 gafz, T.
20 b^di, T.
21 kaund,T.
22 gieck, T.
23 So altered by the editor ; þat,
T.
2^ Hier,T.
25 7i^r, T.
26 mqtta.T.
27 hiedan, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 21
covereth the churches with blood, and dragsreth into
death the main-stays of the church. Let God's right
awaken ; let the law put armour on, and proceed to
revenge this man's blood and death which cry so loud
from England, that not only trembleth again the earth,
but also the very heavens. Give to our grief such
wholesome counsel as may redound to your highness*
glory, and to the help and restoration of holy church.
Valete.
Lord Theobald writeth to the lord pope on the same
matter in the manner following :
To Alexander, by the grace of God, the chief of all
bishops, earl Theobald in humble obedience sendeth greet-
ing : It seemed good to your highness, holy father, to
frame and settle peace between the king of England and
archbishop Thomas. And by your order I was present at
that meeting, and I saw king Henry receive archbishop
Thomas into peace, the which he also agreed to on
behalf of all his men. At the meeting archbishop
Thomas accused both king Henry and the bishops of
having unlawfully performed the coronation of king
Henry the young ; but the king delivered himself into
the archbishop's power as concerning all such matters,
and did the same on behalf of the bishops, confessing
that it was a deed of presumption, and agreeing that by
your counsel it should be left to the archbishop to treat
the matter as should seem good unto him. I was present
thereat, and to this I could testify by oath. Hence it
beconieth the more apparent, how abominable it is, if
22
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
1171. hirting byskupanna me^ y^varri skipan eftir^ lögun-
um^ skyldi gefast í sök^ ok sættarrof* erkibyskup-
inum. NÚ at samdri sætt ^ ok fri'Su^u mali milium
]?eira, sneri sá Gu'Ss inaör óttalauss ^ ok öruggr ^ heim
til sinnar kirkju þess erendis, sem nú er öHum Ijóst, 5
at gefa sitt höfu'S^ undir högg^ ok píslarvætti.^^
petta et saklausa lamb fórnfær^ist ^^ í musteri Guös a
næsta^^ dag^^ eftir^* píslartí'S saklausra sveina í þeim
gta^S, sem fórnfærist -^^ várs Herra bló^ allri kristni til
hjalpar, Gaf hann gla^r sitt bló^ í frelsi kirkjunnar. 10
Konungsins menn hinir kærustu/^ e'Sa^^ heldr hundar
af bans böU/^ ger^u sig^^ verkreka fjandans ok unnu
sva Ijotan ni^ingskap, sem úbeyr^r er amiarr^^ þvílíkr.
Enn ef ek tala langt af tilfor^^ ok efni þessarra^^
údæma,^^ má vera, at mér vir^ist til rogs ok fjandskapar, 15
ok J?vi kys ek, at þeir birti y^r framar, er brefit bera,
því at af þeirra ^^ or'Sum fáe þér ^^ skilt, hversu údæmi-
ligr ^^ harmr, nau-S ok áfelli vor^in ^^ eru allri kristni
í ]?essa manns^^ drápi ok dau^a,^^ J?ó at erkistólinum
í Kancia liggi næst ^^ ok í mestu rúmi svá börmuligt 20
fráfall síns herra ok böf^ingja. pví má hin rómverska
mó^ir eigi lengi^^ J^egja^^ yfir slíkum hlutum, svo at
henne sé lýtalaust, því at hver skömm ^^ e^r ska^i sem
1 eptir, T.
2 laugunum, T.
3 sauk, T.
•* s^ttarrof, T.
? s§tt, T.
^ ottalans, T.
7 So U. ; orauggr, T.
^ haufiid, T.
'•^ haugg, T.
^° p{slaru§tti, T.
11 fornf^rdiz, T.
12 ngsta, T.
1-^ dagk,T.
» eptir, T.
i^ fornf^riz, T.
16 ki^ruztu, T.
17 e>a, T.
18 /iaw//, T.
13 sigh, T.
"" annaVj T.
21 iiZ/awr, T.
22 þessara, T.
23 ud^ma, T.
24 So T.
25 þier, T.
26 ud^miligr, T.
27 uordinn, T.
28 manz, T.
25 So altered by Prof. Unger;
daudi, T.
30 w^si, T.
31 leingiy T.
32 þeigia, T.
33 skaum, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 23
the chastisement inflicted upon the bishops by your
command, and according to law, should be made a cause
for breaking the peace made with the archbishop. Now
when agreement had been framed, and peace had been
brought about in their aíFairs, the man of God returned
without fear and misgivings home to his church, but on
an errand, which now hath become manifest to all folk,
namely to deliver his head up to blows, and himself to
martyrdom. This innocent lamb was sacrificed in the
temple of God the very next day after the martyrdom of
the Innocents in the very place, where the blood of our
Lord is sacrificed for the salvation of all Christendom.
He gave his blood cheerfully for the freedom of the
church. The kino's dearest friends, or rather the dosfs of
his court, made themselves the workers of the deeds of
the devil, and wrought such a lewd deed of shame that
the like thereof hath never been heard of. But lest I
should be charged with malice and enmity, if I should
speak at length about the things which led up to the
perpetration of these unexampled things, I rather prefer
that the bearers of this letter should make the matter
further known unto you ; for from their words you
may understand, what an unexampled grief, misery, and
affliction hath befallen the whole of Christendom in the
slaying and the death of this man, although it cometh
most home to the arch-see of Canterbury, and that see
must needs take most to heart such a sorrowful end of its
ruler and lord. The Roman mother cannot therefore
without blame abide long silent concerning these
things, for every shame and hurt which may be done
to the daughter becomes a dishonour which reflecteth
24 THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
1T71. ger er dotturinni, dreifist su svivirSing alt til mæ^r-
innar,^ ok eigi er mo^ur há'ðungarlaust, ef dóttir hennar
er hertekin. Til y^ar ^ kallar, heilags fö^ur,^ dreyri
ok dauSi ]?essa lieilaga manns,* ok bi^r hefndar eftir^
sig. Enn y^r se nær ^ ok samra^r alsvoldugr Gu^, 5
leggjandi allan'' hefndarhug lögligrar^ strí^u upp a
y^vart brjost me'S ]?eirri frammkvæmd,^ at heilog kirkja
frelsist af Ijotri svivir^ingu ok endrbætist -^^ til fegri
ásjónu. Yalete.
NÚ hafa lesin verit l7rjú bréf ]?riggja höf^ingja af 10
Franz, er oil gera minning af ]?eiri rödd/^ er dreyri
vir^uligs Thome GuSs pislarvotts sendi til himna, þá
er hann krúna'Sist undir vopnum sinna undirmanna.
pvi synist vel fallit, at su birting, er samhljó^ar^- þess
háttar efni, setist næst-"^ bréfum þessum svá sem styrkt- 15
ar innsigli.-^^
a?Ai5entan ^ þeim sta'S, er Argentheus heitir, bar fyrir einn
aícbblshop^ virSuligan mann í sveíhi á næstu ^^ nótt, á^r þar
auuoimced kæmi ^^ tí^enda sögn^'' af erkibyskups láti. Honum
heyr^ist upp í lofti'S/^ sem ein rödd ^^ kalla'Si me^ svá 20
miklu megni: " S.é hér," sag'Si lion, "bló^ miki'S kallar
" af jörSu til Gu^s, framar enn bló^ Abel for^um, er
*' í "uppliafi heims var drepinn af bró'Sur ^^ sínum." Sá
ma'Sr íhugar drauminn ok segir eftir^^ um daginn
félögum ^^ sínum, sem þeir tala milium sin um ýmis- 25
liga hluti. Öllum ^ sýndist fyrirburSrinn merkiligr,
þótt þeim væri-^ þá enn eigi
1 m§drinnar, T.
* yduar, T.
3 faudr, T.
^ manz^ T.
5 eptir, T.
6 np', T.
<" allann, T.
^ laugligrar, T.
^ framku^md, T.
10 endrb^tiz, T.
" raudd, T.
1- After snmhljó^ar T. adds þeiri.
" n^st, 1\
Ijós þý^ingin. Enn litlu
^ innzsigli, T.
5 n^sUi, T.
6 k^mi, T.
saugn, T.
s loptid, T.
9 mwdí/, T.
20 Sie,T.
21 5roc?r, T.
22 eptir, T.
2^ fielaugum, T
24 Aullum, T.
25 M^rt, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 25
upon the mother ; and the mother is surely not without
shame, if her daughter be taken captive. Unto you,
holy father, crieth the blood and the death of this holy
man, praying for revenge. And we beseach that God
almighty may be with you, and that His counsel may be
your counsel, and that He imbue your heart with a
spirit of revenge for lawful chastisement which may
have tbe effect of holy church being freed from fell dis-
honour and reformed so as to shew forth a fairer coun-
tenance afterwards. Valete.
Now have been read three letters from three lords in
France, all of which make mention. of the voice which
the blood of the worthy God's martyr raised to heaven,
when the crown of his head was cut off by the weapons
of his underlings. It seemeth therefore well fitting that
a certain vision bearing out this matter be brought in
next to these letters as a corroborating seal to them.
In a certain place called Argentheus a certain worthy
man had a vision in sleep the night before the news of
the archbishop's death arrived there. It seemed to him
as if he heard, up in the air, a voice cryiog in a right
mighty manner : — " Behold,"' it said, '' much blood crieth
'' from earth unto God, louder even than the blood of
" Á bel in days of yore, who in the world's beginning was
" slain by his brother." The man considering the dream,
related it the next day to his comrades, as they happened
to be discoursing together on sundry matters. And unto
all of them it seemed, that the vision was one of weighty
import, although the meaning thereof was not yet clear
26
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
1171. si^ar gengr inn at þeim sá, er segir drap ok dau^a
Thomas erkibyskups. Einn af þeim talar þá : " Sé nú,
" félagi/ " sag^i hann, " hér er nú þat kall, sem þú
" heyrSir í nótt, því at utan ef kallar þetta hit ^ mein-
'^ lausa bló^ hátt ok hvelt til lifanda Gu^s. Fljótvirk 5
" ok lifandi er sjá rödd ^ ok gagnfærri * hverju sver^i
" fvíeggju'Su, ok engi rödd^ er ]?essi samKk, at svá
" skjótt hafi flutzt^ ok fyllt allar álfur heimsÍDS kristn-
*' innar, ]?vi at hennar dfr^arhljómi snara^i ^ út á
" hvert jar^arskaut, eigi minnr enn af bló^i Abels 10
" fyrsts^ píslarvotts."^ Enn þó at ^^ loft^^ fyUist me«
píningarrödd ^^ heilags Thóme, heyra þat eigi því
heldr
Heinrekr konungr
rerc?a?c7' ^öldr kardinales í Eóm e^r
upTiS^Sse g^^li^ 6r fleygir svá margan flutning ok fiorinn ^^
of the
murder.
í eyrun á ];eim, at þar af daufeyrast þeir margir, 15
ok snúa frá vandlæti ^^ G\v6s ok laganna, sljófandi svá
eggteininn hins heilaga Petri, at ]>sly fyrir fær-^^ herra
páfinn stórligt ámæli^^ af morgum^^ manne, því at
allr hinn heitasti bruni, er svara átti ]?vílíkum ódæm-
Thepopeat um,^^ bræ^ist ^^ fyrir honum. Enn bó ver^r l7at í 20
last consents . „ . on i - v f /v
sí^ustu dregit fyrir bæn-^ ok bref goora manna, at
' fielagi, T.
2 hitt, T.
3 raudd, T.
gagnf^ri, T.
5 raudd, T.
7 So altered by the editor ; sua-
radi, T., -which gives no meaDÍng.
s fystz, T.
3 The story of this vision agrees
closely with the same told in Bene-
dict's Miracula, lib. i. 2. But the
words here put into the mouth of
an acquaintance of the visionary of
Argentan as being called forth by
a discussion of his vision, " Fljót-
" virk . . . tvieggju'Su " occur in
Benedict's Miracula, in a commen-
tary on a vision of Bartholomew,
bishop of Exeter, immediately pre-
ceding that of Argentan : " Viva
" est enim vox eju^ et efficax et
" penetrabilior omni gladio anci-
" piti." Robertson, Materials for
the History of Thomas Becket, ii.
28, 29. The Icelandic story comes,
therefore, in aU probability, from
an original of a different recension
to that which we know now.
So altered in U. ; et, T.
lopt, T.
- pining arraudd, T.
^ florunn, T.
* uannlqti, T.
^ am§U, T.
' maurgum, T.
^ od§inum, T.
9 br^diz,T.
^ hqn, T.
THE STORY OF. ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 27
to them. But shortly afterwards stepped in to them
one who told them of the slaying and the death of arch-
bishop Thomas. Whereupon one of them spake, saying :
" Behold now, good fellow, here is the cry which you
" heard last night, for without doubt this innocent blood
" crieth loudly and clearly unto the living God. Swiftly
" acting and living indeed is that voice, and more pene-
" trating than any two-edged sword, and no voice is like
*' unto this one, in so swiftly having been borne abroad
" and filling all quarters of Christendom in the world ;
" for the glorious sound thereof shot out into every the
" outermost corner of the earth, no less than that of the
" blood of Abel the first among martyrs." Yet, although
the air was filled with the cry of the passion of the holy
Thomas, the cardinals at Rome heard it none the more
therefore, or king Henry the old either, who hurled into
their ears so many remonstrances and promises of money,
that many of them gave a deaf ear thereto, and turned
away from the face of God and from the law, thereby
blunting the edge of the sword of the holy Peter, so that
the lord pope received mighty reproach therefore from
many a man, while all the hottest ardour with which
such abomination ought to have been met dwindled away
in him. But at last, by the prayers and letters of
28
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
. 1171. herra páfinn sendir þann bo'Sskap Vilhjalmi byskupi
interdict on af Sainz ok byskupinum af Ru'Suborg, at stórmæla *
marine alt ríki Heinreks konunsjs fyrir sunnan sio. Ok sa
dominions n t ' t-.,,.. , ^
of king sem iramar lylgir erendmu til hirtingar, skal me^
Henry. . . o '
öllu einlítr til frammfer^ar,^ ]?ótt annarr ^ hallist or 5
fyrir vild eSr vanmegn,^
The arch-
bishop of
Sens sum-
mons the
king to a
conference.
The arch-
bishop of
Rouen
inclines to
temporize.
KAP. LXXXIV.
Er HeINREKR KONUNGR TÓK SKRIFTIR.^
Sem bref herra pafans koma til erkibyskups í Sainz,
tekr hann svo j^eira skilning, at enn skal hann fyrri ^10
gera or^ Heinreki konungi ok bjó"Sa honum samtal
til yfirbotar a sinn fund, beldr enn steypa stórmæli ^
yfir riki bans. Ok sva gerir erkibyskup, at hann
skrifar til Heinreks konungs í þann skilning, at hann
kjose, hvárt hann vill, sættast ^ e'Sr storm ælast.^ 15
Heinrekr konungr tekr ]?etta upp, at hann sækir^^
framm ^^ til Sainnz m.e6 mörgu stórmenni, bæ'Si ^^ bysk-
upiim, klerkum ok leikmönnum. Ok er skjótt at
greina, hversu sá fundr for, at þar skorti eigi vi'S
slæg^ir,^^ undanfærslur ^* ok sakverndir,^^ svá at byskup 20
af RúSulDorg viknar fyrir, segist heldr skulu sækja^^
páfann sem fyrst, enn stórmæla ^'' Heinrek konung me'S
þvílikri vörn,^^ sem hann lei^ir málit. Enn herra Vil-
1 storm§la, T.
2 framferdar, T.
3 anvar, T.
^ The letter here referred to is
chronologically misplaced by the
Icelandic Sagaman, it having been
issued Anagniæ on the 9th of Oct.
1170, enjoining the archbishops of
Sens and Rouen to lay the French
dominions of king Henry under in-
terdict, if within thirty days from
its communication he should not
have complied with the terms of
peace arranged between him and
Thomas. Alexandri Epist.,DCclxix,
Migne, 200, col. 708.
5 skriptir, T.
6 fyri, T.
7 storm^U, T.
8 s^ttaz, T.
9 storm^laz, T.
0 sqkir, T.
1 franiy T.
2 bqdi, T.
3 sl^gdir, T.
4 vndanf^rzlur ^ T.
^ sakvendir, T.
* s^kia, T.
' storm^la, T.
^ vaurriy T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 29
good men, it was brought about that the lord pope des-
patched an injunction to William bishop of Sens, and
to the bishop of Rouen, to put under interdict the whole
of king Henry's realm south beyond sea. And he pro-
vided that he who should execute the commission so as
to carry out the chastisement, should be thoroughly
competent to do so alone, even should the other recede
either from obsequiousness or infirmity.
CHAP. LXXXIV.
How KING Henry was shrived.
As soon as the letters of the lord pope came to the
archbishop of Sens he interpreted their purport to be,
that first he must needs once more send word to king
Henry, to ofifer him a parley for the purpose of doing
penance before plunging his realm into an interdict. And
this the archbishop doeth, writing to king Henry, ofifer-
ing him the choice between peace and interdict. King
Henry resolveth to proceed to Sens with a large and
lordly company both of bishops, clerks and lay -folk. And
it is soon told, how that meeting went off, for there were
wanting neither wiles, evasions, nor shifts, unto which
the bishop of Rouen yielded at length, declaring that he
would rather go and see the pope first, before pronounc-
ing an interdict on king Henry, after the defence he
had brought forward in the case. But lord William
30
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
1171.
But the
archbishop
of Sens
acts single-
handed and
imposes the
interdict.
Eling Henry
disregards
his proceed-
ings.
and re-
quests the
Pope to send
legates to
treat with.
Two legates
are autho-
rised to
settle all
questions
arising out
of the
murder.
hjalmr öruggar ^ sik því framar me^ sam]?ykkt sins
kapítulí, far me^ byskupa í Franz ok annarra ^ lær^ra ^
manna, sva at hann fellir et sterkasta* forbo"S yfir
alt riki Heinreks konungs fyrir sunnan sjo, bjo^andi
far meö erkibyskupum ok Ijo^byskupum undir valdi 5
Roma kirkju, at J?eir haldi ok haldast láti þessar álögur,^
þar til sjálfr herra páfinn ley sir fær ^ Toae^ sinni rök-
semd.^ Heinreki konungi fikkir nú at fröngva,^ enn
sakir fess, at Villijálmr hefir framit me^ öllu sitt mál
ok vald í þessu máli, viU konungrinn honum öugva^lO
lotning veita, heldr skrifar hann nu af nýju til páfans
me'S mjúkum orSum framar enn fyr, sem i^randa
manni heyrir, þeim er sik viU betra ok Gu^s mys-
kunnar leita. Her me^ bi'Sr hann, at herra páfinn
sendi til bans af sínu valdi tvo legatos, at þeir geri 15
honum alia skyldu me^ lausn ok likn allra hluta, er
þeir sjá hann í flekka^an."^ VerSr herra páíinn fessu
har-Sla feginn, kjósandi tvo kardinales i þetta eyrendi,
þá er hann treystir bezt at standa fjrrir konunginum
me'S lögum ^^ ok réttlæti.^^ pessir taka nú fuUt vald út 20
af kúría me^ öllum greinum, er at lúta því hrygSar-
máli, sem heyrir erkibyskups lífláti, svá bverjum
skrifta ^^ meira manni ok minna, sem þeim sýnist log ^*
til bera.^^
Sem þessir legátar koma til Englands, .finna þeir 25
Heinrek konung í þeim sta'S, er beiter^Doram.^^ Kon-
1 auruggaTf T.
2 annara, T.
3 l§rdra, T.
■^ sterkazstaf T.
5 alauguTy T.
7 rauksemdy T.
" jyraungua, T.
^ au7igua, T.
^*' Jleckadann, T.
^^ laugwn, T.
12 riettlqti, T.
12 skripta, T.
" laug, T.
15 The legates here alluded to
were cardinals Theotwin of St. Vi-
talis, afterwards bishop of Portus,
and Albert of St. Lawrence in
Lucina (afterwards pope Gregory
VIII.), chancellor of the Koman
see. Gesta post Martyriunif Lu-
pus, p. 147 ; Mansi, xxii. 137, 138.
1^ The place to which the Ice-
landic text gives the name of Do-
ram, evidently on the supposition
that it was Durham in England,
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 81
showeth himself all the more firm, being backed therein
by his chapter, and the French bishops, and other learned
men, and so inilicteth the severest interdict on the
whole of king Henry's kingdom south beyond sea, com-
manding at the same time, under the power of the church
of Rome, archbishops and suffragans to hold themselves,
and let be holden, these impositions, until the lord pope
himself should remove them with his authority. King
Henry deemed that now in sooth his affairs were grow-
ing straiter, but because William had executed his
errand and used his power entirely alone, the king
refused to yield him any obedience, but wrote once again
to the pope in meeker words than ever heretofore, even
as it behoved a penitent person to write, desirous of
mending his ways and seeking God's mercy. At the
same time he prayed that the lord pope would send
by his own authority two legates to him, in order that
they might dictate to him all things that it behoved
him to do, both as to absolution and indulgence, in all
matters wherein they might find him guilty. At this
the lord pope was much rejoiced, and chose for this com-
mission two cardinals such as he trusted best to abide
by law and right before the king. These men now
received full power from the curia in all matters which
appertained to the sad affair which concerned the death
of the archbishop, and to shrive every one, high and
low, as should seem to them right and lawful.
Now when these legates come to England they meet
king Henry in a certain place called Doram. The king
32
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
1171.
The king
refuses to
abide oa
oath by
their deci-
sions, and
goes away
to Ireland-
ungrinn tjar sik bli^an í J?eira tilkvomu, enn þann
tíma sem þeir leiSast framm ^ í málagreinii', ok kardi-
uales bjo^a konunginuin ei^S vinna eftir^ lögum '^ at
standa a þeira dómi, á'Sr hann væri ^ leystr, bregzt hann
sva styggr vi'S, at hann byst þegar til bruttrei'Sar. 5
Ok sem hann er buinn í veg, talar hann sva til kar-
dinales : " Nau^sun ^ rikis vars krefr oss at koma til
" Irlands fljott í j^essum tima, viljum vær,^ at J?ér bí^it
was really the castle of Gorham
(^Gesta post Martyrium, Lupus, p.
147), now Goron, situated on the
banks of the river Colmont, in
Mayenne in Normandy, (Stanley,
Memorials of Canterbury, p. 87,
and note 6). The statement that
the legates had come to England at
this time to treat with king Henry,
shows a misconception of the chro-
nology of passing events, due, as it
seems, to the Icelandic translator
having attempted to tack unto
Gervase's notice of the event that
of the Gesta post Martyrium.
Gervase says : " Decrevit et hoc
" Romana curia ut duo legati ad
" cognoscendam causam ecclesiæ
" mitterentur in Nonnanniam, et
" ad ultionem de morte Sancti
*' Thomæ inferendam. Quod cum
*' regi innotuisset citissime trans-
" fretavit in Argliam." Gervase,
1419. The passage of the Gesta
runs: "Rexautemet legati primo
" convenerunt apud Gorham die
" Martis ante Rogationes, ubi invi-
" cem recepti sunt in osculo pacis.
" In crastino venenint Saviniacum,
" ubi archiepiscopus Rothomagen-
" sis et multi episcopi et proceres
" convenerunt. Quumque ibidem
" de pace Domini tractatum esset,
" quam rex secundum mandata
" eorum absolute jurare renuit, rex
" ab eis cum indignatione rccessit
" in hoc verba: Redeo in Hiber-
" niam, ubi multa mihi incumbunt.
" Vos autem in pace ite per terram
" meam ubi vobis placuerit. Et
" agite legationem sicut vobis in-
" junctum est." If king Henry
really did use these words on this
occasion, which seems likely enough
from the legate's letter to the
archbishop of Sens describing the
proceedings — " Quum autem non
" possemus in omnibus convenire,
" recessit ipse a nobis velut in An-
" gliam profecturus," — they could
only have been meant as a threat,
for he certainly did not act upon
them. According to the chroni-
clers, who are remarkably circum-
stantial on the proceedings of king
Henry from the time he left Nor-
mandy and came to England, on
his way to Ireland, on the 6th of
August 1171, tin his return to
Normandy in 1172, it is evident
that the legates never were in Eng-
land during that time ; moreover
they expressly state that the legates
waited for the king in Normandy.
See Diceto, ed. Stubbs, i. 347-351 ;
Gervase, 1419-21 ;Brompton, 1069-
80 ; Epist. Fol. ed. Giles, No. 387,
vol. ii., p. 122-125.
1 fram, T.
2 eptir, T.
' laugum, T.
■* u^ri, T.
^ Naudzsun, T.
^ u^r, T.
OO
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. oo
showeth himself right blithe to them on their arrival, but
when they came to treat of the matter of their mission, and
the cardinals demanded of the king that he should swear
an oath, according to law, to abide by their judgment, before
beinor absolved, he started thereat in such anger that
forthwith he prepared to ride off, and being ready to go
away spake to the cardinals saying : — " The need of
" our realm requireth that we should go to Ireland with
*' all speed, as at this time, and we desire that you abide
K541. C
34
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
1171-2. '' }i^QY i landi, ]7ar til ver komum aftr.^ Ok ei bonnum
" ver, at ]>ev hafit framm^ heiTa páfans bo^skap vi^
" þá menn, sem hly-^a vilja y^ni vakli." Legatarnir
taka ];at ráfS, at þeir skipa í ferS me^ konunginum
tvo góífúsa menn, bysknp Pictavensem ok erkidjakn 5
King Henry Sariboriensem,^ bjóöandi ]/eim af herra páfans álfu, at
goes 0 - j^^^^^ \q{^[ konunginn til mýktar, hvat er þeir mega
me^ sinum fortolum/^ Ok ];at verSr sva, at konungr-
inn ver^r víkjanligi^ ]m er hann kemr aftr ^ or
Irlandsferöinni.^ Finnast þeii^ ]?á í þeim sta^, er 10
land.
1 apir, T.
2 /ram, T.
^ According to the Gesta post
Martyrium, the persons charged
by the legates to biing king Henry
to terms ■were Amulf, bishop of
Lissieux, and the archdeacons of
Poitier and Salisbury. Lupus, 147.
"^ fortaulum, T.
5 aptr, T.
* Again the mistake pointed out
p. 30, note 16, is here repeated.
The time that passed from the first
meeting at Goron, to the delivery
of the king's oath at Avranches, is
thus given in the Gesta post Mar-
tyrium : " Rex autem et legati primo
" convenerunt apud Gorham die
" Martis ante Rogationes," i.e.
Tuesday, May 11th. "In crastino
" venerunt Saviniacum," i.e. "Wed-
nesday, May 12. "Tunc cardina-
" les arctiori consilio revocarunt
" episcopum Lexoviensem et archi-
" diaconum Pictaviensem et archi-
" diaconum Saresberiensem " (see
note 3), " et per eos laboratum est,
" quod sexta feria sequenti rex et
" cardinales apud Abrincas conve-
" nerunt," i.e. Saturday, May 20th;
and then the text goes on : " Sed
" quia rex filium suum voluit ad-
" esse, ut quæ pater permitteret,
" ille etiam asseveraret, terminus ei
'•' dilatus est usque ad sequentem
" Domi?iicam proximam, videlicet
" Ascensionis Domini. Tunc in
" publica audientia rex manu sua
" tactis sacrosanctis Evangeliis ju-
" ravit," &c. That by the sequen-
tem Dominicam proximam must be
meant Rogation Sunday, 5th after
Easter, May 21st, is evident from
the letter of the legates to the
archbishop of Sens, describing the
proceedings between them and the
king : " ad prædictam processimus
" civitatem " (i.e. Abrincas), " ad
" quam Dominica, qua cantatur
" Vocem jocunditatis, convenimus
" cum personis plurimis et ipse
" nobiscum," &c. . The words "Vo-
" cem jocunditatis " decide the date,
being the beginning words of the
Introit for Rogation Sunday. Con-
sequently, the date on which king
Henry came to terms of peace with
the church, is Rogation Sunday,
May 21, 1172. The inscription to
be read on the one pillar still re-
maining of the whilom great Xor-
man cathedral of Avranches, which,
in modern French, avers that the
reconciliation of the king to the
church took place " le Dimanche,
" xxii. Mai MCLXxn.," brings all the
less authority to bear upon the im-
portant question of the actual date
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 35
" here in the land until we return. Nor forbid we you
'' to execute the commission of the lord pope on such
" people as are willing to obey your power." The legates
then resolve to order two men of good- will, the bishop of
Poitiers, to wit, and the archdeacon of Salisbury, to
accompany the king, commanding them, on behalf of
the lord pope, to bring the king into meeker mood, all
that their persuasions may avail. And thus it came to
pass, that the king showed himself more pliable, on
returning from the journey to Ireland. So they met
c 2
86 THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
1171. Brinchas beitir. Sver þá konungrinn, at hann skal
lialda allar þær^ skiiftir,^ er kardinales setja honum.
Meeting at pat stendr ok Í hans ei^staf, at hvarki bau^ hann ne
Avranches. -^ , ,
n72 ^^^ girntist, at erkibyskupinn væri ^ drepinn f enn meS |7vi
gengr hann, at hann hafSi kært ^ fyrir vinum sinum, 5
svo sem erkibyskujDÍnn væri ^ einn af hans mein-
ger^armonnum. Eftir '^ er6 unninn fara þeir framm í
skriftabo"S ^ vi^ konunginn, ok hafa þat upphaf, at hann
skal ganga klæ^lauss^ fyrir J?á kirkju, sem þeu' nefna
til, ok þar skal hann frammfallinn ^^ þola opinbera 10
hú^stroku. Svá sem j^eir stand a fyrir me^ lima, enn
hann gengr at framm ^^ me^ nöktum^^ líkama, segir
hann sva : " Herrar minir," segir hann, " Kkamr minn
" er Í y^ru valdi, ok þó at ]>ev bjó"Sit mér at fara til
" Jorsalalands e^a^^ í annan sta-S til frelsis heilaori 15
'^ kirkju ok kristninni, skal ek )?at gjama gera." Sem
konungr hefir tekit ra^ningina, er þat upphaf á skrift-
um^^ hans frammleiöis/^ at allar skipanir, sem hann
hafSi sett vi-S Clarendun moti frelsi kirkjunnar, skal
hann e}^a ok aftr -^^ kalla, ok allar a'Srar úvenjur, er a 20
hans dögum^^ váro innleiddar,-^^ enn þeir landsvanar sem
fyrir honum váro, skulu sva lagfærast -^^ ok betrast, sem
herra páfinn leggr rá^ á. Her me^ skal konungrinn
halda heilaga Jorsalalandi til starfs tvö hundrat ridd-
ara me^ sva dyran kost, at hverr riddari hafi eigi 25
of this peace, that it is an impossi- ! ^ k^rt, T.
ble one, the 22nd . of May 1172
falling on a Monday, and not on a
Sunday. It is strange that both
Gervase, 1422, and Brompton, 1080,
should agree in dating the peace
" V. kal. Octobris," Sept. 27, while
Diceto refers the act to a date ante-
rior to Pentecost : " promisit, qu:>d
" ab instanti festo Pentecostes us-
** que in annum tantam pecuniam
" daret," &c.
' Hr, T.
2 skriptir, T.
4 drefinn, T.
^ u^rij T.
7 Eptir, T.
^ skriptabod, T.
9 Medians, T.
10 framfallinn, T.
" fram, T.
1' nauktuniy T.
13 e>a, T.
1* skriptum, T.
1^ framleidis, T.
16 aptr, T.
17 daugum, T.
1^ After innleiddar T. adds ok inn-
leiddz.
19 lagferaz, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 87
in a' place called Avranches, where the king swore
to hold to all shrifts which the cardinals misfht die-
tate to him. In the words of his oath it was also
expressed that he neither ordered nor desired the murder
of the archbishop ; but he confessed having complained to
his friends of the archbishop as being a man who wrought
harm ao-ainst him. The oath havinir been sworn,
they proceed to dictate the shrift to the king, whereof
the beginning was, that he should walk stripped of his
clothes to a certain stated church, where he should kneel
down and suffer a public flagellation. Now as they
stood there before him whilst he walked alone: himself
with his body naked, he spoke thus, saying : — " My lords,
" my body is in your power, yea, and though you should
" order me to go to Jerusalem, or to any other place for
"the freedom of holy church and Christendom, I shall be
" ready to do so." Having received the flagellation, the
king shriveth afresh, and commenceth by binding him-
self to annul and repeal all the constitutions of Claren-
don, which were framed against the freedom of the church,
as well as all other abuses which had been introduced
in his day ; but the customs which prevailed before him
in the country were to be amended and improved accord-
ing as the lord pope might deign to direct. Besides this
the king was to maintain for service in the holy
land of Jerusalem two hundred knights at an expense
88
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
1172. minna goz enn ]?rjú hundrat gullpenninga. Her me^
leggia þeir honum kárínu samfasta me^ bænahaldi.-^
Játar konungr þessu öllu- blíMga. Her me^ bjó'Sa
kardinales, at Heinrekr konunoT unoji skal srano^a í
borgan allrar skriftarinnar,^ at hann frammkvænii ^ 5
hverja grein, ef fa'Sir hans þrotnar.^
The Legates Greindir legati leysa byskupana þrjá, Robert, Gilli-
tain bishops bert, Jocelin.^ Báru þeir lano-a pínu eiæpa ^ sinna,
and others. , . . ^ o 1 ö 1 _^
1171. því at ]7eir aftignoSust byskupsdom ok heilögu embætti
jafDan sí^an, ok þó hallaSist at þeim meiri J^ungi 10
sumum, sem enn mun síSar geti^ ver^a. Kardinales
taka ok fjóra riddara, er drepit höfSu sælan^ Thómam,
me^ ]7eiri lausn ok skrift/^ a^ þeir skulu fara til
Jórsalalands. Ok ]?at lialda þrír af þeim roe^ iSran
ok góSvilja, enn Vilhjálmr af Traz, er fyrstr vann á 15
erkibyskupinnm, ver^r svikinn af illra manna fortöl-
1 h^nahalldi^ T.
2 auUu, T.
3 skriptarin7iar, T.
^ framku§mi, T.
5 This account of the peace be-
tween the king and the churcli
agrees virtually with that of the
Gesta post Martyrium, Lupus, 148,
but with the essential diflFerence that
here the king is made to undergo
flagellation on his naked body,
while in the Gesta the fact is dis-
tinctly denied : " non tamen exutis
" vestibus, neque verberibus appo-
" sitis." The penance which took
place two years later at Canterbury
seems to be mixed here up with the
absolution of Avranches.
6 By a mandate dated Tusculani,
April 22, 1171, (Brompton, 1068,
Folioi, Ep. 336,) pope Alexander
had authorised the archbishop of
Bourges and the bishop of Nivers
to absolve the bishops of London
and Salisbury from their excom-
munication. A similar mandate,
dated ib., Oct. 23, had been made
to the archbishop of Eouen and the
bishop of Amiens for the absolution
of archbishop Iloger of York, Avho
was absolved, according to Diceto,
348, on the feast of St. Nicolas,
Dec. 6th, 1171, and restored to his
episcopal office. The bishop of
Loudon was absolved by the bishop
of Nivers and him of Beauvais, in
company with the abbat of Pon-
tigny, in the beginning of August
1171, Diceto, i. 347; but he re-
mained still suspended from office
till May 1st, 1172, when he was
finally restored to his episcopal dig-
nity at Aumale by the archbishop
of Rouen and the bishop of Amiens.
Diceto, i. 351. About Jocelin of
Salisbury all authorities are silent.
^ gkpa, T.
8 emh^tt'i, T.
9 s^lan, T.
w skript, T.
" aí/í, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 39
of no less than three hundred golden pieces each. Over
and above this they dictated him an unbroken fast of
forty days with prayer. Unto all this the king consent-
ed meekly. And here withal the cardinals ordered king
Henry the young to enter a bail for the shriving, so that
he should fulfil every clause therein, in case his father
should fail to do so.
The said legates absolved the three bishops, Robert,
Gilbert, and Jocelin. A long pain they bore for their
crimes, inasmuch as they were stripped of their bishop-
dom and holy office ever afterwards, and yet greater
heaviness fell upon some of them, as will be related here-
in-after. The cardinals also received the four kniohts, who
had murdered the blessed Thomas, in absolution, im-
posing upon them the penance of going out to Jerusalem.
This three of them performed in repentance and good-
will, but William de Tracy, who had been the first to
deal the archbishop a blow, was begiiiled by the per-
40
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
um/ svá at hann sitr eftir.- Ok því fær ^ hann
guSliga liefnd, sva at hann fiina^i kvikr, ok baSar
hendr leysti brutt af honum í axlarli^unum. Syndi
hann í J?essum kvolum ^ sanna i^ran, ok sagSist trua, at
heilagi Thomas byskup mundi honuca likna mega meS 5
sinni bæn^ fyrir Gu^i. Ok J?ótt hann hafi myskunn
fengit, var þó nytsamligt, at sva mikill glæpr ^ væri '^
opinberliga hegndr af GuSi, ö^rum^ til vi^sjonar,^ Lika
for ^^ fengu margh', at í ]?eira föruneyti ^^ höfSu fremstir
verit, at skjotr ok skammr varS )7eira endn\ Sumir 10
nrSu bráí)dauSir an jatning ok þjónustu, sumir ofverkj-
Tim lostnir, sva a"S ^- þeir bitu af ser fingr eSa tung-
una or hofSinu. Sumh' funu^u lifandi, sva til dau^a
færSir,^^ einir vitlausir, a'Srir djöfulóSir, sýnandi sva
hver ódæmi -^^ ];eir hofSu^^ framit í föSurdrápe^^ me^ 15
fylgd ok sam]7ykki. Enn ]7rir riddarar fyr greindir
foru þvT betr. at þeir börSast^" fyrir Jórsalalandi ok
feUu^^ far.
Enn allar þær -^^ skriftir -^ í England!, sem varr
herra tok eigi til sin me^ bráSri hefnd, skipa kardi- 20
nales upp í sýslur byskupanna, sem hlotnast, ok ber
)7á Bartholomeus Exoniensis í ]?vi mali hæsta -^ raust,
|7vi at hann haf^i skrifat til herra páfans, hversu
skrifta'-- skyldi j^ess háttar mönnum, er a nokkum
1 fortauhim, T.
2 eptir, T.
4 kuaulum, T.
5 b§u, T.
6 gl^pr, T,
" u§ri, T.
^ audrum, T.
5 The account of the fate of the
murderers of the archbishop agrees
substantially with the Gesta post
Martyrium. The story of Tracy is
taken from Herbert's Liber Melo-
rum, ■who avers to have it from the
bishop of Cosenza in Sicily, Tracy's
confessor in his last illness. Migne,
exc. 1306. For a more trustworthy
accoimt of the fate of the murderers
see Dean Stanley's Memorials of
CaJiterhiirg, pp. 78-86.
10 faur, T.
11 faurxinauti, T.
12 ath, T.
13 fqrdir, T.
1 * od^mi, T.
15 haufdu, T.
1^ faudr drape, T.
1' baurduz, T.
18 fiellu, T.
^^ Hr, T.
-0 skriptir, T.
21 h^stu, T.
22 skripta, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 41
suasions of evil persons to sit behind. And therefore
he fell under God's revenge, inasmuch as he rotted alive,
and both his arras were dissolved from his body in the
shoulder-joint. Under these torments he showed true
repentance, uttering his belief in the power of the holy
Thomas to avail him for mercy before God. And al-
though he may have found that mercy, yet it was neces-
sary, that so great a crime should be openly avenged by
God, for the warning of others. In a similar manner
fared many who had been the foremost among the
followers of the knights, their end being short and
sudden. Some died a sudden death without confession,
or the last rites ; some wei'e smitten with sudden fits,
so as to bite off their fingers or the tongue out of their
head. Some rotted alive and were thus brought to their
death ; some went mad, others became possessed by the
devil, tlius showing what abomination they had worked
in giving their aid or consent to the murder of the father.
But the three knights aforenamed fared better, inasmuch
as they fought for the land of Jerusalem and there
felj.
But all penances in England, which our Lord did not
inflict himself by sudden revenge, the cardinals prescribed
throughout the dioceses of the bishops according to what
was due to each ; in which afíair the voice of Bartholo-
mew of Exeter is most chiefly heard, for he had written
to the lord pope counselling, how such men should be
shrived, who had in any way partaken in the heinous
• 42 THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
hátt hafói samlagazt þeim há^uliga glæp/ er var^ í
drápi erkibyskups, hvort sem þat væri ^ fyrir rán e^a
róg,^ meS fylgd e"Sa ^ samþykkt.^ Ok hér ^ í mót
hafSi herra páfinn skrifat honum bréf, sem sí^ar mun
ver^a nokkuru Ijósara, því at nú fyr er me^ lykt 5
álítanda, liversu )?essir kardinales ok postoligs sætis^
legati voru nytsamligir Englands kristni í sinne til-
kvomu. peir leystu byskupana, ]?á sem dregit liöf^u
Thómam erkibyskup undir dóm me^ veraldar höf'Singj-
um,^ liér me^ svarit konunginum at bans fordæmdar ^ 10
villur ok si'Sleysur, ok sta^it í vígsluger^ sonar bans
bæ^i ^^ til smánar erkibyskupi ok lögunum.^^ Hér me'S
breinsa ]?eir kirkjuna í Kancia ok kjósa til erkibyskups
ineistara Jón af Sarisber, lögiigan^- mann, er bafSi í
útleg^S^^ verit^^ me^ sælum^^ Thómasi erkibyskupi.^^ 1 5
peir leysa ok ríki Heinreks konungs af stórmælum/^
ok eftir-^^ ]?at venda ]?eir signa^ir aftr^^ í Róm.
KAP. LXXXV.
Merkilig vitran er bar FYRIR EIRN BRÓ^UR^^ í
Cancia. 20
1171.
A vision. Nú sem Heinrekr konungi- gamli ok sjálfir mann-
drápsmenn vir^uligs berra erkibyskupsins eru settir af
sjálfiim Gu^i e^a'^^ kirkjimnar lögum^^ bér.á jaröríki
- gkp. T.
2 u^ri, T.
3 rogh, T.
■* e>úí, T.
5 samþi/kt, T.
6 hier, T.
7 setis, T.
^ haufdingjum, T.
9 ford^mdar, T.
'0 hqdi,T.
11 laugunum, T.
1- laugliyan, T.
13 nthlegd, T.
i^ verit added by Prof, linger.
■'^ sqhun, T. I -^1 e\>a, T.
i""' Here the mistake made about I -- laugum, T
the successor of archbishop Thomas
in vol. i,, p. 466, 6 (note 3), is re-
peated, evidently from a written
source, and not, as has been sug-
gested, from a mere interchange of
Carnothum for Cantuaria. The le-
gates, besides, took but a very
passive part in the election of arch-
bishop Richard. Gervase, 1423-
25 ; Diceto, 368-69.
1'^ stornii^lum, T.
13 eptir, T.
'-^ aptr, T.
-0 brodr,T.
THE STORY OF AECHBISHOP THOiMAS. 43
crime, which was committed in the murder of the arch-
bishop, whether by robbing or slandering, or by aid or
assent. In answer thereto the lord pope had written to
him a letter, which hereafter will be set forth in a clearer
manner, because now it behoveth first to review unto
end the manner in which these cardinals and legates
of the apostolic see proved useful to the church of Eng-
land by their visit. They absolved the bishops, who had
dragged archbishop Thomas under the judgment of
worldly lords, and had also sworn before the king to
hold his condemned errors and abuses, and had been
present at the coronation ceremony of his son for the
purpose of bringing to shame both the archbishop and
the laws of the church. Besides this they cleansed the
church of Canterbury, and choose for archbishop thereof
John of Salisbiuy, a lawful man, who had been in exile
with the blessed archbishop Thomas. They also absolved
the realm of king Henry from interdict, and after that
these blessed messengers returned back to Rome.
CHAP. LXXXY.
A REMARKABLE VISION AVHICH APPEARED TO A CERTAIN
BROTHER AT CANTERBURY.
Now that king Henry the old and the very murderers of
the worthy lord archbishop were brought to repentance
either by God himself or by the laws of the church here on
44
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
1171. undir i"Sran, ma heyriliga segjast í þá liking, sem þat
náttmyi'kr léttist-^ nokkuS, er lagSist jut Englands
kristni, þá er Thomas erkibyskup var saklauss'^ drep-
inn Í höfuSkirkjunni.'^ Enn nú má sýnast, sem yfir
landinii liggi þungi ok ]?okufall mikit, me^an "* margir 5
af þeim ganga enn ohegndir, er sambundnir váro
J?essi Gu^s rei^e, me^ hverjum tildrætti^ fyr e^a
si^ar, innan lands e^a utan J^at hefir vorSit. pessir
allir höfSii tapaS rettlætis^ birti, ok því standa ]?eir
rettliga " merktir fyrir dimma )?oku, er oftliga ^ felur ^ 10
sjálfa sólina me"S sínum fordrætti.-^^ Svá skyggja þessir
óbættir^^ þat skæra^- Ijós, er nú leynist í Kantarabyrgi
fagrt ok göfugligt-^^ fjrir hæsta-^'^ Guöi, pessa skýring
vottar vitran sú, er ]?ar var^ at erkistólinum í Kancia.
Benedict, Eiiin af bræ^rum,^^ snildarma-Sr ok klerkr mikiU, var 15
abbot of l?ar milli annarra/^ er-^' síþan^^ samdi möror letr ok
Peter- • ^ .
boroueh,has fógr ^^ af lofsamligu lífi sæls -^ Thórae, frammför -^ ok
jarteignum erkibyskups. Honum sýndist nm nátt, sem
hinn heilagi Thomas erkibyskup væri^^ ski'ýddr ok
albúinn til þjónustugjör'Sar Jmr í höfu"Skirkjnnne. 20
Hann var rjó^r í ásjónu ok har^Ia bjartr, sem ma^r
I liettiz, T.
- saklaJis, T.
3 haufutkirJijunni, T.
•* 7neþan, T.
5 tildr^tti, T.
6 riettlqtis, T.
" riettiliga, T.
3 So Prof. Unger ; ojliga, T.
9 SoT.
10 fordr^tti, T.
II obettir, T.
12 skiera, T.
13 gaufugligt, T.
14 hqsta, T.
1* br^drum, T.
16 annara, T.
1' So altered by Prof. Unger;
etiTiy T.
13 si)>an, T.
19 faugr, T.
-0 sqh, T.
-1 framfaur, T. The brother here
alluded to is Benedict, after-
wards prior of Canterbury, 1175,
and eventually abbat of Peter-
borough from 1177, the well-known
author of a Passion and a book of
miracles of St. Thomas. It is no-
ticeable that he is described here
as an author of a Life as distinct
from a Passion and the Miracles of
St. Thomas. I have not succeeded
in tracing the authority from which
the Icelandic statement is derived,
but the context leaves no doubt
about its resting on some authority
not the translator's own.
=2 u^riy T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 45
earth, it may fitly be said, speaking by way of simili-
tude, that somewhat lighter grew the night-darkness
which fell on England's church, when archbishop
Thomas was slain sackless in the chief temple. But still
it might seem as if heavy mist and mighty fog lay over
the country, while some persons still roamed at large
unpunished, who were accomplices in this work worthy
of God's anger, no matter by whatsoever causes, or how
soon or late, inland or abroad, they might have become
partakers therein. All these men had lost the bright-
ness of righteousness, and therefore they stood as fit
types of dim fog, which often hideth the very sun by
its veil. Even so these unreformed men obscured the
bright light which now hid itself at Canterbury fair
and noble before the highest God. This interpretation
is borne out by a vision which happened at the very
arch-see of Canterbury.
Among the rest of the brethren there was a man of
parts, and a great clerk, and one, moreover, who com-
posed many writings and fair of the laudable life of the
blessed Thomas, of the death and the miracles of the
archbishop. One night it seemed to him, as if the holy
archbishop Thomas stood robed and ready to perform
service in the cathedral church. He was ruddy of face,
and right bright of countenance, and looked as one of
46
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
1171. ma þekkiligastr ^ vera. Bro^urinn lysti at sja upp a
hann, enn synin var at sinne eigi lengri, J?vi at her
vaknar hann. Ok enn a^ra nott ber fyrir hann á
allan ^ sama hatt. Hann hugiei^ir nu me^ ser,^ hvat
þetta raune ]?ý^a, ok tekr ]?ann skilning, at honmn 5
mun gefit færi,^ ef hann vill spyrja nokkurs, gengr
nær ^ meir erkibyskupinum ok bei'Sist blezonar. Her
me'S talar hann svo : " Bi8 ek þik, herra minn, at yör
" mislíki eigi, ]7Ótt ek spyri nokkurs." " Tala )?ú/'
sagSi hann. " Ert ]?ú ei frammli^inn ^ ok dau^r ? " 10
sag^i bro^irinn. " Erkibyskupinn svara^i : " Ek var
" dau^r, ok nu upprisinn." Munkrinn svarar : " Ef
" þú reist '' upp samvinnandi pislarvottum, sem vær ^
" truum, hvi synir þú eigi heilagleik ]7Ínn fyrir monn-
" um?"^ Hann svara^i : " Ek ber fagrt Ijos í hendi, 15
" enn þat fær ^^ eigi sýnzt fyrir þoku þeire, er at
" þreyngvir." Munkrinn skilur ^^ eigi, hvat þetta
merkir. '* Yilt ]>ú sjá skýringina ? " sag"Si erkibyskup.
" Vil ek gjarna," sag^i bró^erinn. Heilagr Thomas
breg'Sr þá upp skri^ljóse myklu me^ brennanda kerti : 20
" Hygg nú at," sag^i hann, " hvat þreyngvir Ijósinu."
Munkrinn sér, at þoka svá þykk legst umbergis hjá
ok at skri'Sljósinu, at Ijósit hylur^^ ok felur^^ me^
öllu. Bró^erinn skilur ^^ þá sýnina, at verk hans gó^
ok dýr'Slig raætti ^^ birtast fyrir mönnum, ef eigi stæ^i ^^ 25
fyrir óhegnd iUskuþoka hans ófri'Sarmanna. Hér eftir ^ ''
gengr erkibyskup til altaris ok setr skri^ljósit annan
veg-^^ hjá altarino fyrir grá'Sunum. B3rrjast )?á messa
utar í kórinn tónlaust me^ ]?ví upphafi : Letare Jeru-
salem}^ Herra erkibyskup segir til j^eira, er messuna 30
^ þekkiligazsti-, T.
'^ allann, T.
^ sieTy T.
' f<^ri, T.
5 ngr, T.
^ /ramlidinn, T.
7 So altered by Prof. Unger;
reis, T.
8 u§r, T.
3 maunnum^ T.
10 /f, T.
11 So T.
1- ni^tti, T.
13 st^di, I'.
1^ eptir, T.
1^ uegk,T.
If' Introit for Mid-Lent Sunda)-,
THE STOEY OF ARCHBISHOr THOMAS, 47
the goodliest presence. The brother would fain behold
him, but at this time the vision endured no longer, for
hereat he awoke.
Again, another night, the same vision appeared to
him. And he pondered, what this might betoken, and
deemed that it must be meant for a hint for him to take
the occasion thus offered him to put forth a question if he
felt inclined, and so he drew nearer to the archbishop, and
prayed him for a blessing, speaking thus at the same time :
" I pray you, ray lord, that it may not mislike you, if I
" put a question to you." " Speak thou," said he. " Art
" thou not departed and dead ? '* said the brother. The
archbishop answered, " I was dead, but am now arisen
" again." The monk answered : " If thou hast arisen to
''' be the fellow worker with other martyrs, as we believe,
*' why showest thou not thy holiness before men ? " He
said : '' I carry a fair light in my hand, but it may not
" be seen because of that fog that lieth heavily over all."
The monk understandeth not what this may import.
*^ Desirest thou to see the interpretation ? " says the
archbishop. '' Fain I would," says the brother. The
holy Thomas then showeth forth a great lantern with a
burning candle : " Behold now, what it is, that obscureth
" the light." The monk then perceiveth that such a thick
fog surroundeth the lantern from all sides, that it hideth
and obscureth the lio-ht thereof altoo-ether. The brother
then understandeth the vision to mean, that the arch-
bishop's good and glorious works might be revealed
to man, if the fog of the unchastened wickedness of his
enemies did not stand in the way. After this the arch-
bishop goeth to the altar and placeth the lantern on one
side of it before the grades ; whereat there beginneth out
in the chancel a mass, not intoned, with the words :
"Letare Jerusalem." The lord archbishop then speak-
48
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
1171.
byrja, at hann vill heldr hafa annat messunnar upphaf,
]>vi at Letare Jerusaleon merkist fyrir fagna'S. pvi
hefsfc upp lagliga '^ hormungar ^ officiiim Exsurge quare
ohdormis.^ SiSan ^ vaknar broSirinn ok hugsar eink- '
auliga ^ þau or^in, er erkibyskup sag^ist dau^r verit 5
hafa ok nu upprisinn. Ok þat skilr hann svá, at
upprisan er bans lif nu í Gu'Si, þótt hann ^ se framm-
li^inn ^ at manndoms e^li.^ Nu er Ijoss vottr lesinn
yfir skyring þoku þeirar, er fyrr var set.^ Enn þat
niá undra, ef fljott er a litiS, hvi lægri ^^ menn fóru 10
óleystir, me'S því at sjálfr konungrinn ok hinir mestu
manndraparar váro undirlag'Sir. Enn j^essarri ^^ undran
latum svara Yilhjálm af Traz, ef hann var^ svikinn
meS fortölum/^ er fyrst sær^i ^^ erkibyskupinn, hvat
raun )?á hinum li^a, er sekr manndrápsmaÖr eftir ^^15
lagadome Hggr undir harSýögi sjálfs^^ sins ok svikligum
fortolum^^ vondra manna, at hann se -^^ saklauss meö
ölKi/^ J>ví at eigi váro enn svæf'Sir^^ öfundarmenn ^'^
Thome erkibyskups í Engiandi, þótt hann væri^^ af-
sleginn veröldinni. Enn hversu marga sjálfr herra 20
pafinn dæmir ^^ manndrápsmenn hafa vor^it í bans
dau^a, mun birtast þessu næst ^^ í sjálfs hans bréíi.^*
^ lagligha, T.
2 haurmungar, T.
• 3 Introit for Sexagesima.
4 Siþan,T.
^ einkannlega, T.
^ hann added hy Prof. Unger.
7 framlidinn, T.
^ This vision agrees closely with
the vision which Benedict himself
says he had on the night of the
martyrdom of the archbishop, and
with which the first book of his
miracles opens : " Aspiciebam in
" visu noctis martyrii ejus " —
" quia etsi mortuus est ex infirmi-
" tate, sed vivit ex virtute Dei."
Materials for the History of Tho-
mas Becket, ed. Robertson, vol. ii.,
pp. 27-28
9 siet, T.
*" kgri, T.
1^ þessari, T.
^- fortaulum, T.
13 s^rdi, T.
14 eptir, T.
15 So altered by Prof. Unger
sialf T.
16 sie, T.
17 saklaus, T.
18 aullu, T.
19 suefdir,T.
-'' aufundarmenn, T.
21 n^ri, T.
22 d^mir, T.
23 n^st, T.
24 brefui, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 49
eth to those who began the mass, signifying his desire,
that a mass with some other beginning should be chosen,
for Letare Jerusalem signitieth joy. And therefore they
commence, in a low voice, the sorrowful service " Exsurge,
" quare obdormis ? " Thereupon the brother awaketh,
and pondereth with himself over the words, wherein
the archbishop said, that he had been dead but was
now arisen. And he understandeth this to mean, that
his resurrection is his life now in God, although he
was dead after the nature of man. Now a clear testi-
mony hath been read concerning the interpretation of
that fog which was seen before. But it may be mar-
velled how it came about, that inferior persons should
go at large unabsolved, while the king himself and the
greatest mui^derers were included in absolution. But
let William de Traci give answer to this wonder ; for
if he was beguiled by persuasions, he who was the
first to wound the archbishop ; what then must have
been the case of others, when one, who is a guilty mur-
derer according to the judgment of the lavv^, remaineth
in his own hardness of heart, and abideth by the deceitful
persuasions of wicked men, who make him believe that
he be perfectly sackless ? for as yet they were not all
dead in England who bore archbishop Thomas malice,
although he himself had been cut off from the world.
But how many the lord pope deemed guilty of murder
through the death of [the archbishop] will now appear
from his own letter.
K641.
50 THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
KAP. LXXXVI.
Af HERRA pIfANS BRÉFI, ER HANN SKIPAdI SKRIFT.^
1171. Bartholomeus Exoniensis harma^i einkanlÍ2;a mest
XT'a' (
Barthoio- af byskupum fráfall bins lieilaga Thome, sva at sorglig
of Exeter, hryg^ tok liann meS öllu. par af sýnist honum eina 5
nott, sem ma^r gengi at sænginni ^ ine'S ]?essum or'Sum :
" Hvat Lryggvir ];ik ? " sag^i hann. Byskup þóttist
svara : '• Líflát míns vir^uligs herra Thome erki-
" byskups." Draumma^rinn talar : " Sannliga er hann
" frammfarinn ^ af ]7essi veröid, enn þó lifa me'S ySr 10
*' armar bans ok bendr." Eftir^ þat vaknar byskup
ok skilur^ sva synina, at armar muni J^y'Sast fyrir
befnd öfundarmanna ^ ok ofri^ar, enn bendr til jar-
teigna ok beilagleiks, þegar giæpi ^ vándra manna
rymdi sva fra, at þær ^ mætti ^ opinberliga skina.-^^ ] 5
pvi befir byskupinn sig nu framm^^ me^ brefi berra
páfans/^ at bjálpa fólkino, lei^andi -^^ ];á til i^ranar sem
saka^ir varo, eftir ^^ því formi sem bréíit vottar, þótt
mörgum ^^ þætti ^^ þungt undir at búa, þeim er á'Sr váro
kaldir frá öllum krafti ^^ gó^ra verka. pat berra páfans 20
bréf byrjar svá :
Pope Alex- Alexander ^^ þjónn ]7Jóna Gu'Ss sendir vir'Suligum
directs how bró'Sur ^^ Bartbolomeo byskupi Exoniensi . kveöiu -^ ok
to deal with ;_ ^ "^
the guilty.
1 skript, T.
2 senginni, T.
3 framfarinriy T.
^ Eptir, T.
5 SoT.
^ aufundarmajina, T.
7 gl^pir, T.
8 þ^r, T.
9 m§ttí, T.
^o This vision follows in Bene-
dict's Miracula immediately after
his own : " Sicut et episcopo Exo-
" niensi Bartholomæo, de morte
" ejus graviter dolenti " — " vivunt
et manus ejus ad operandum et 20 quediu T.
" brachia ejus ad vindicandum."
Materials, ib., pp. 28, 29.
11 /ram, T.
^- So altered by Prof, linger;
pafanum, T.
^'^ leiþandi, T.
1^ eptir, T.
^^ maurgum, T.
1^ Htti, T.
17 krapti,T.
^^ This letter is found among iJpp.
Gilherti Foliot, ed. Giles, No. 356,
ii., pp. 80-84 : " Sicut dignum
•" est." Migne, cc. col. 894-96.
1^ brodr, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 51
CHAP. LXXXVI.
Of the letter of the Lord Pope when he
ORDAINED shriving.
Among the bishops Bartholomew of Exeter mourned
most chiefly for the death of the holy Thomas, so much so
even that he was seized by an utter giief. Being in this
state it seemed to him, one night, as if a man came up
to his bed with these words : "What grievest thou ? " said
he. The bishop thought he answered : " The death of
" the worthy lord archbishop Thomas." The dream-
man then said : " In sooth he hath departed from this
" world, yet his hands and arms are still living among
" you." After this the bishop awaking, understand-
eth the vision to import that arms must needs be-
. token revenge on people who bore him malice and
enmity, but the hands must point to miracles and
saintly deeds, when the crimes of the wicked shoukl be
so far removed as to allow such deeds to shine openly.
The bishop therefore bestirreth himself, according to a
letter from the lord pope, for the salvation of the people,
leading to repentance those who were accused of guilt;
according to the form prescribed in the letter, hard
though many a man found to abide thereunder who had
already been bereft of all power to do good works. This
letter of the lord pope beginneth thus :
Alexander, the servant of the servants of God, to tho
venerable brother Bartholomew, bishop of Exeter, sendeth
D 2
52 THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
1171. postoliga blezan. Sva sem J?at er makligt^ ok sam-
tengt- allri skynsemd, at vandamal í kristnum rétt^
flytiz undir prof postoligs sætis,* svo skyldumst ver
af J?jónu stilt ekjunnar ahyggju at leysa ]?ær^ sömo ^
questiones, sem Gu^ gefr oss at skilja, svarandi ser- 5
hverjum,^ er várt rá^ vilja sækja,^ at forsjá rómverskrar
kiistni,^ er höf^ingskap ^^ heldr í allri veröld, sem
Drottinn skipa^i, lysi j^at er leynist, at efasemd fiiTÍst
hjörtu sérhverra. Vitra ]?ín skrifa^i til vár af þeim
hörmungargreinum/^ er at lúta Kfláti heilags Thome ok 10
vii^uligs mamis ^ forSum Kautuariensis erkibyskups, ok
þótt ver höldiim ^^ J?at efalaust, at J?ú ert bæ^i -^* forsjáll
ok vel læ'Sr ^^ á beilaga bók, viljum ver annsvara ser-
hverju-^^ me^ várri skynsemd ok skilning laganna.
Setjum vér í f}n;stu, sem þér er kminigt, at réttvísum^'' 15
dómara eru sex hlutir bugsandi ok vir^andi í bverju
máli, þat er aldr ok vizka/^ kyn ok tegund, stund ok
sta'Sr. Eftir^^ þessum atvikum ok tilrás eiga dómar
retta forman, enn eigi eftir-^^ ásjónu ok vexti last-
anna, því at oftliga -^ kann svá veröa, at í sama glæp -^ 20
eru eigi allir me'S einum bætti -- sakbitnir, J?ó at
margir þjóni til bans a sama tíma. Sjáum nú í fyrstu
þá vonda menn, sem bertu -^ konungsins bug me^
röngmn ^^ fortölum -^ í batr bins beilaga Tbóme, þá er
Ijóst af lögum,-*^ at 'peir eru pínandi meö bar^ri strí^u, 25
ok J^ó eigi svá framt, at þat gangi allt í banoi'Sssök -^
1 So Prof. Unger ; makUt, T.
" sajnteingt, T.
3 riett, T.
4 s^tis, T.
' )>^, T.
^ saumo, T.
' sierhuerium, T.
8 sqkia, T.
9 So Prof. Unger; kristi, T.
^^ liaufdingskap, T.
^^ haurmunyaryreinum, T.
^2 manz, T.
^^ haxddum, T.
» b^di, T.
^5 Iqrdr, T.
^^ sierhueriu, T.
^' riettuisum, T.
^^ uizska, T.
19 epiir, T.
^ optliga, T.
21 ^/f;j, T.
22 h^tti, T.
23 Acr«M, T.
-^ rauugum, T.
2^ fortöhim, T.
26 laugum, T.
27 banordzsauk, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 53
greeting and apostolic blessing. It being proper, and con-
sistent with all reason, that all grave cases under canon
law should be brought to trial before the apostolic see, we
are in duty bound by the solicitude incumbent upon us in
pursuance of our office, to solve the same questions accord-
ing to the understanding given unto us by God, answering
each one, who desireth to seek our counsel, that the fore-
sight of the Eoman church, to which appertaineth the pri-
macy throughout all the world according to the command
of the Lord, bringeth to light that which is hidden, in
order that doubt may be removed from the heart of every
one. Thy wisdom wrote to us referring those sorrowful
things which concern the murder of the holy Thomas,
that venerable man, aforetime archbishop of Canterbury ;
and although we have no doubt, that thou art both pru-
dent and well learned in holy writ, we will yet answer to
every clause according to our reason and the provisions of
the law. And first we lay down the rule which is known
unto thee, that a rightful judge must weigh and consider
six things in every case : age and knowledge, sex and
condition, hour and place. According to the concurrence of
these accidents, judgments must receive their due framing,
but not from the outer appearance and fashion of the crime
itself; for it may often happen, that all bear not an equal
share of guilt in the same crime, although many may
have a share in it at one and the same time. Let us first
look at the wicked men, who with wrongful persuasions
hardened the heart of the king into hatred against the
holy Thomas ; now it appeareth clearly from the law,
that they are worthy of being punished with a severe
chastisement, yet one which should not be carried so fiir
54
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
1171.
erkibyskupsins, nema "þeira róg^ haíi geisat svá gu^-
rækiliga,^ at beriim or^um liafi þeir provocerat kon-
unginn upp á líf ok líkam þess heilaga manns/'^ Ok
ef )7eir eignasfc pyngvi grein af þessum tveimr, eru ]7eir
sekir sannliga J^ess meinlausa dreyra. Hér næst * 5
eru samhleypismenn ];eira fjögra, er upphaíliga níddust
á sínum herra. Ok ef svá grimt var þeira föruneyti,^
at ]7eir bu'Sust at grípa, slá e'Sa ^ herdraga erkibyskup-
inn framm "^ undir dau^a sver^, þá eru ]?eir nálega
svá pínandi, sem þeir er hann sær'Su.^ Enn ]?ó er 10
betr, at þeir finni fyrir líkn, ef ];eir ger^u eigi svá
illa, sem þeir hugso^u. Hér næst^ eru þeir raenn,
er sér völdu^^ ]?á^^ bölfo^u^^^ ]?jónustu at bera fólk-
vopn ok herfórur í vafning e^r rökkum-^^ upp á garS
erkibyskupsins. Sannliga dikta þeim login ^^ fulltekna 15
manndrápssök ^^ fyrir há^uliga leynd ck undirhyggju,^^
ef þeir váro svá aldrs komnir, at þeir sto^u meÖ or'Si
ok ei^i. Hér fylgja þeir ríkismenn, er fyrir nálæg'^^^
ok visso máttu stö^va^^ glæpinn ^^ ok jafnvel vernda
byskupinn, enn ger^u hvarki, utan ^^ heldr efldu^^ 20
þeir svá manndráparann, at hann skyldi me^ friálsu
fara í sína Gu^s [rei^i. pessum glæpámönnum ^^ fellr
í höfu^ ^^ sú ritning, er svá segir : Qui potuit homi-
nem liherare a morte et non liherauit, ii^sum occidit.
1 rogh, T.
2 gudrekiliga, T.
3 manz, T.
4 n^st, T.
5 fauruneyti, T.
6 e)>a, T.
7 fram, T.
8 s^rdu, T.
9 TígSÍ, T.
ío iía?í/t/?í, T.
i^ So altered by the editor ; síia,
T.. which is quite correct, if the
adjectÍA'e hölfodu is changed into its
weak form bölfafSa; sua is much
more likely to be a repetition of
sua before ilia in the preceding line
than haulfodu is to be the original
author's bad grammar.
12 haulfodu, T.
13 raukkum, T.
1^ laugin, T.
15 manndrapssauk, T.
1^ undirhiyggiu, T.
17 So Prof. linger ; TiaZ^rf, T.
13 staudfa, T.
1*-' gl^pinn, T.
-0 y/an, T.
"1 So altered by Prof. Unger
elfdu, T.
'2 gl^pamaunnum, T.
23 )iaM/Mí/, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 55
as to be a punishment for the crime of having murdered
the archbishop, unless they by their slander should be
proven to have raged in so god-forsaken a fashion as
in clear words to have provoked the king against the
life and body of the holy mar . But if they happen to
be in the gTaver one of these two cases, they are in truth
guilty of that innocent blood. Next to these stand the
men who joined in the conspiracy of the four who
committed the deed of shame on their lord. And if their
company was of so cruel a mind as to offer to seize or
to smite or to drag the archbishop prisoner under the
sword of death, these abettors are to be punished with
almost the same punishment as those who wounded
him. Yet it is better that they should meet with
mercy in case they did not act as wickedly as they
thought. Next to these come the people who lent them-
selves to such an accursed service as to carry weapons
and armour in wrappings or rugs up into the archbishop's
court. In truth the laws tax such with the full guilt
of manslaughter for such a heinous concealment and
treachery, if they had already arrived to an age of dis-
cretion, so as to understand the importance of words and
oaths. Next to these follow the lords, who by their pre-
sence might have stayed the crime, and even defended the
archbishop, yet doing neither, on the contrary egged the
murderer on, so that he should of his free will fall into
God's anger. Upon the head of these criminals falleth the
award of scripture which saith : Qui potuit homincm libe-
rare a morte et non liberavit, ipsum occidit. Which being
o6
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
1171.
pat er sva Ijosara, at sá drepr manninn, er hann ma
vernda vit dau^a, enn veitir honum öngva^ hjálp.
Nú er til "þeira at tala, er samneytuSust - J?vi rani,
er maundraparar veittu kirkjunnar gozi, erkibyskups-
ins frammfarins ^ e^a* lians jTJÓDUstumanna.^ pessir 5
eru pinandi, at peir skipi aftr^ me-S skilriki hvem
þann penning, er þeir tóku, ok þótt þeir verndi sig
me^ þeiri ásjónu, at ]?at sama góz liaíi þeir gefit fá-
tækum ^ fyrir sál erkibyskiipsins, er sá hlíf ^arlitr eigi
lögligr,^ því at svá segir ok vottar heilög bók, at várr ^ 10
Herra þiggr eigi ran í sína fórn. Enn J?ó, ef ]?eir finn-
ast, at svá hafi me^ farit, viljum vér, at hafi álögur^*^
minni, pví at eigi au^guSust þeir af kirkjunnar gózi,
enn eru þar me'S, sem vér ætlnm ^^ hlutlausa hafa
verit af drápi, sí^an^'^ þeir voru þar hvergi nærri.^^ 15
peir eru enn einir í landinu, er spiUzt hafa me^ sam-
neyti bannsettra, bæ^i ^* manndrápara ok ránsmanna.
Er þat prófanda í )7eira máli, hvárt þeir samneyttu
fyrir ótta e^a ^^ elsku, vitandi e^a ^^ óvitandi, þar eftir ^^
eru þeira skriftir ^^ temprandi. Sí^ast allra setjum vér 20
þá vansignu^u klerka, er me^ fylgd ok rá^um kvomu
væpntir ^^ til þvílíkra glæpa.^^ Er þat í fyrstu ]?eira
pína, at allan ^^ lífstima dirfist einginn ]?eira alltaris-
^ auvgua, T.
2 So T. Prof. Unger pro])Oses to
read samnetjvfSust, from samnetjast,
whicli is the common word in Tho-
mas Saga for communicare ; but
samneyta occurs frequently as well
as an equivalent for samnetjast;
cfr. samneyti bannsettra and
sameyttu below í but the reflexive
form of T. is wholly illegitimate,
and may be due either to the in-
fluence of the reflexive samnetjast^
or it may be a later scribe's sub-
stitution ; but I dare not eliminate
it from the text.
^ framfarins, T.
4 eþa, T.
^ So Prof. Unger ; þionustumon-
num, T.
6 aptr, T.
7 fat^kum, T.
^ laugligr, T.
^ uar, T.
'^ alaugr, T.
^ §tlum, T.
^ siþan, T.
^ nqrri, T.
^ b^di, T.
5 e\>a, T.
^ eptir, T.
7 skriptir, T.
uqpntir, T.
9 gkpa, T.
20 allann, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 57
interpreted meaneth : — he slayeth a man who, when he
might save him from death, afFordeth him no help. Now
turning to those who sliared in the murderers' spoliation
of the goods of the church, those of the departed
archbishop, or of his servants, they must be punished
by returning honestly every penny they took ; yea,
although they might defend themselves with the plea
of having given the same to poor people for the
soul of the archbishop, that colour of defence is by no
means lawful ; for the holy book saith and testifieth,
that our Lord accepteth not robbery for oft'ering. Yet
should any be found who should have dealt with the
goods after this fashion, we desire that they may be fined
less, inasmuch as they did not enrich themselves with
the goods of the church, and that they be counted among
those whom we judge as innocent of the murder, since
they were nowhere present at it. Further there are those
in the land who have become contaminated by commu-
nion with excommunicates, murderers as well as robbers.
Now in their case it must he ascertained whether they
did so from fear or from love, knowledge or ignorance,
and in accordance therewith their shrivings have to be
regulated. Last of all we place those wretched clerks, who
with the weapons of aid and counsel came to be mixed up
with these misdeeds. Their first penance is, that through-
out their lifetime not one of them shall presume to perform
58 THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
1171. þjónustu fremja, heldr skyldar lögmálit ^ meö kristnum
rett,^ at ef sva ma vera, þröngvist^ )7eir allir undir
æfinligt* regluhald^ munka e^a^ kanunka, þó sva,
at um fimm ár e'Sa ^ sjau se þeir sífelt utan kirkju.
Enn eftir ^ þat li'Sit hafi ]?eir ]?á minnÍDg eftir ^ reglu, 5
at eingi ^ j^eira lesi leccionein e'Sa ^ frammi syngi nokk-
urn hlut, heldr standi J^eir lágt í lítilæti ^ me^ sálm-
um ^^ ok heilögum bænum,^^ bi^jandi líknar fyrir
sína glæpi,-^^ svá lengi sem þeir lifa. Huglei'S J^at,
bró^ir, í þínum dómum ok skriftabo^um,^^ at flestar 10
af J^essum greinum J^yngir bæ'Si ^"^ stund ok sta'Sr.
Yalete.
The bishops ]S[ú er l?at levst, sem fyr var til vikit, at me^ svá
act on these j ./ ? j 7
directions. "berurD bo'Sskap ok skilning lierra páfans hafa b3^skup-
ar sig framm ^^ eftir ^^ megni at prédika líkn ok 15
lausn lierteknum, lei'Sandi ^'^ burt af villistigum aftr ^^
í fa^m lieilagrar kristni ]?á, sem á^r höfSu sínum
mannkostum ok si^fer^i hörmuliga^^ tapa^ rue's hlýöni
vi'S óvinenn ok sínar rangar girndir. par þynnist nú
sú synda]7oka, er á^r ^^ var greind, svá at Gu^s mys- 20
kunn nálægist ^^ fólkit dag ^^ af degi, at }^at megi
njótanda veröa ]:>ess hins bleza'Sa ávaxtar, er upp kann
at renna afþví hveitikorni, er lifanda f éll ^^ í jör^ina ok
enn liggr lukt innan ^^ kirkju í Kancia. pví stendr vel
þessu næst,^^ at vær ~^ heyrura sýn^^ )7á, er skýrir ávöxt- 25
^ laugmalit^ T.
2 riett, T.
2 þraunguiz, T.
4 ^finligt, T.
5 The halld in regluhald supplied
by Prof. Unger.
fi e\>a, T.
7 eptir, T.
^ engi, T.
*J Util^ti, T.
1" spalmum, T.
^i h^num, T.
1-^ gkpi, T.
i^ skriptahodum, T.
i^ ^>^rf/, T.
'5 fram, T.
^6 epízr, T.
^' leiþandi, T.
18 apír, T.
i'-' haurmulega, T.
2>í aþr, T.
21 nal§giz, T.
22 rfa^A, T.
23 _^eZ/, T.
2^ innann, T.
25 WfSÍ, T.
26 ?/gr, T.
27 sýn added by the editor.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 59
the service of the altar ; but laws and canon-right make it
a duty, that if so it must be, they must all of them be
forced under perpetual rule of monks or canons, yet in
such wise that for five or seven years they keep out of
church. But when that time is passed, let them still be
reminded of the rule, so that none of them ever read
the lessons or ever stand forth singing, but let them stand
low in humility with psalms and holy prayers, praying
mercy for their crimes as long as they live. Consider,
however, brother, in your judgments and shrivings, that
most of these penalties are to be made more severe ac-
cording to hour and place. Yalete.
Now it is shown, as was hinted at formerly, how
through this peremptory command and reasoning of the
lord pope the bishops laid themselves out, by all means
in their power, to preach mercy and absolution to those
in bondage, leading them back from, the paths of error into
the bosom of holy church, who had already sadly lost
their virtue and morals through obedience to the enemy
and their evil passions. Thereby that fog of sin of
which we spoke before groweth thinner, so that God's
mercy approacheth nearer to the people day by day, that
they may partake of the blessed fruit which is to spring
up from that corn of wheat which fell living into the earth,
and still lieth concealed within the church of Canterbury.
It is well fit, therefore, next to these things, to hear, as
60 THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
1171. inn,^ hver hans uppras verSr e^r hver hæö ^ í
heilagri Gu^s kristni.
KAP. LXXXVII.
Merkiligar vitranir.
A truthful Svo syndist sannor^um manne, sem hann væri ^ 5
CaSberbury komiiin Í kór Kantuariensis kirkju. par stó-S mikill
Wnds grow mannQöldi bæ^i^ lærSra ^ ok ólær'ðra^ ýmissa stéttaJ
archbishop's Her me'S svnist honum sem yfir háaltari^ ligTffi framm-
armpits . *
li^enn ^ Thomas erkibyskup, skryddr silkiklæ"Sum ^
blo^rau^um. A^ir^uligur ^^ ma^r í munkabúningi sitr 10
undir liöfSi hans ok sty^r sinni hendi hvárn veg at ^^
hofSinu. Enn erkibyskup halla'Sist á þann silki-kodda
rau^an, er liggr yfir hne-'^^ bro'Surins. pvi næst -"^^ renna
upp vendir tveir blomga^ir, serhvorr ^^ af sinum hand-
veg,^^ me^ svo fljotum vexti, sem þeir vili upp í gegnum 15
]?ekjuræírit.-^^ Allir í kórnum undra J^etta mjok, á"Sr
int^rpreta- munkriun talar svo til þeira : " Hví standi "per, bræ^r/^
vision. " sem undrandi sýn þessa ? fái ]?er ^^ eigi skilt, at vendir
" þessir merkja fræg^ ^^ ok dýr^ þessa bins heilaga píslar-
" votts ? Svá sem vendir leita til bimins, svá munu 20
'' vaxa ok margfaldast hans dyrSarlof -^ fyrir Drottni.
'' Vaxa muno þeir okútbrei^a sínar limar yfir alia jör^,
" ok J?eira lengdar -^ mun eingi ^ endir." pessir signo'Su
vendir merkja ^^ þat sama, sem for'Sum birtist fru
Mailld. Hygg at, hversu likzt ^^ hefir þröngleiki ^^ kirkj 25
1 aauaiLxtiniiy T.
2 h^d, T.
^ u^riy T.
4 b^di, T.
5 l§rdra, T.
^ ol^rdra, T.
7 stietta, T.
^ frawlidenn, T.
9 silkikl§dum, T.
10 So T.
" So altered by the editor ; af, T.
12 y^n^■e, T.
13 n^st, T.
14 sierhuor, T.
15 handuegh, T.
16 þekiur§frit, T.
17 6r^i/r, T.
IS þier, T.
'^ fr^gd, T.
20 dyrþarlof, T.
21 leitigdar, T.
22 ený^, T.
23 merkir, U.
24 Zi/iiz, T.
25 \>raungleiki, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 61
the fruit becometh brighter, what be the manner of its
growth or how high it reareth itself in God's church.
CHAP. LXXXVII.
Rei^iarkable visions.
To a certain truthful person it seemed as if he was
within the chancel of the church of Canterbury, where
there was standing together a great multitude of peo-
ple, learned as well as lay folk of sundry stations. At the
same time it seemed to him as if archbishop Thomas lay
dead on the high altar, decked in robes of silk of a blood-
red hue. A certain reverend person in the garb of a
monk sitteth under his head, and with both hands stayeth
the head on either side. But the archbishop reclined on
the red silk cushion which lay across the lap of the
brother. Then, next, he seeth, how two wands spring
up, each from either armpit, with such a quick growth as
if they would shoot through the roof. All those in the
choir marvel much at this until the monk speaketh to
them thus :
" Why stand ye, brethren, as in wonder at this sight ?
may ye not understand that these wands betoken the
fame and glory of this holy martyr ? for even as the
wands aim heavenward, so, in a similar manner, shall
the praise of his glory multiply before the Lord. Yea,
they shall wax, and spread their limbs over all the earth,
and of the length of their limbs there shall be no end.
These blessed wands betoken even the same thing as the
vision which aforetime appeared to lady Maild. Observe,
how the church, being too small to compass their growth
62
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
1171. unnar, at taka þeira vöxt ok uppruna, fordyri^ a
Kristskirkju í Lundúnum,^ er kvi^ug Mailld matti
eigi innganga. Sér^ )?ú ok í ö^ru* lagi, liversu eitt
hefir at )?ý^a ^ lengd ok vi^erni limanna, eftir ^
skyring bro^urins, ok J?at pell hit væDa/ er roddin^S
kva^^ for^um ollu^*^ Englandi vi^ara.^-*^ Her upp yfir
talar meistarinn : Mikill pislarvottr reis upp me^ oss,
ok sannliga mun hann liefjast ok mjök háleitr ver^a,
því at jörS rQun fyllast me^ hans lofi, ok heimsbygS
mun sja mega, at Drottinn mikla"Si hann í augiiti 10
konunga. Ok ]?at er verSugt/^ því at sa mun eigi
finnast, at glaSari gengi fyiir Gu^s naihi undir dau^a
kvol/^ sem bæSi birtist sama dags me^ or^um hans ok
verkum. Ok er Ijost, hvat til bar. I fyrstu sa ástar-
hiti, er hann hafSi til Skaparans bæ^i-^* at pinast fyrir 15
hans réttlæti^^ stundliga ok at vera me'S honum
si'San^^ eiliiliga. Her me^ var nátturuligt, at ]?eim
manni, er sva kvaldi sig ok sinn likam sifelt me^
hárklæöi^^ ok hu^strokum, ]?ótti einskis vert, hvat
hann ]?oldi litla stund, at hann mætti ^^ sva æskiiiga -^^ 20
lúka sínum meinlætum.-^ pví var ]?essi sál gu^dóm-
inum harbla J?ekk, ok J?ar fyrir skunda^i sjálfr
Drottimi at lei'Sa sinn vin út af ranglátri veröld, at
fagna^r skyldi ver^a af hans sigri bæ^i ~^ Gu'Ss engl-
um á himne ok svá þeiri kristni, er nú" sat ^^ me^ 25
sorg ok harmi.^
1 So altered by
the editor
for-
13 kuaul,T.
dyr, T.
i^ b^di, T.
- Sundunum, T.
15 riettl^ti, T,
3 Sier, T.
16 si\>an, T.
^ au]>ru, T.
17 harhl^di, T.
' i>l/\>a, T.
'8 m§tti, T.
6 eptir, T.
" ^skiliga,T.
7 u^na, T.
20 meinl^twn, T.
^ rauddin, T.
21 b^di, T.
9 quad,T.
22 sath, T.
1" auUu, T.
23 This vision is the same that
" uiþara, T.
Benedict records in the 3rd chapter
12 uerþugkf T.
of his fiist book of miracles. But
THE STOPvY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 63
and spread, resembleth the door of Christschurch in
London through which the pregnant Maild might not
enter. Again understand, on the other hand, how the
length and the wide spread of the limbs signifieth, in
the interpretation of the brother, one and the same
thing as the fair pall which aforetime the voice said was
wider even than all Enoiand. Conceniing this matter
the Master speaketh thus : A gTeat martyr hath arisen
among us, and in sooth he shall be raised up, and be
much exalted, for the earth shall be filled with his praise,
and the nations of the world shall be made to see, that
the Lord mao'nified him before the face of kinoes. And
rio-ht worthv it is, for the man will not be found who
in a more rejoicing manner ever underwent the torment
of death for the name of God, as was manifested on the
very day [of his death] by his words and deeds. And full
clearly the reason thereof is manifested : in the first place,
in that fervid love, which he bore to his Creator in suffer-
ing passion for his righteousness in the flesh, to abide
with him afterwards for ever. And secondly, it was
natural that the man who so tortured himself as he did
ceaselessly with haircloth and flagellations, should deem
it as worth nothing, what he had to suffer for but a brief
space in order that he might end his life of penance in
such a desirable manner. Therefore this soul was right
acceptable to the Divine being, and even therefore, too,
the Lord himself made haste to lead his friend out of the
wicked world, in order that liis victory shoiúd give joy
both to the angels of God in heaven, and the church,
which now sat in sorrow and grief.
64 THOMAS SAGA EKKIBYSKUPS.
1171. Ok hverso nálægist ^ hennar gie^i til bloms ok dyrSar
Canterbury heilagi'a jartegna, birtist svo einum bro^ur - í Kan-
"sponsoy" túaría. Hann munkrinn þóttist koma í kórinn þar
predicative heiina, ok sér samankomiiin mikinn fjölda lær&a ^
ing miracles, manna at syngja óttusöng.^ Ok sem út gengr yfir 5
fjor^u Leccionem, ver^r fall á tí'Sinni um eina stund,
á^r einn ungr ma"Sr forkunnar vænn ^ riss ^ upp, byrj-
andi meS sætustu ^ rodd ^ ok sönghljó^um ^ ]?at sama
responsorium, er svo stendr í upplesnum oi'Sum :
Ex^^ summa rerum leticia ■'^
Sur)imus Jit '^^ planctus in ecclesia
De tanti^- patroni ahsencla,
Seel cum redeunt^^ rairacula,
Redit 'popido leticia.
Her fylgir versit : -'■^
Concurrit turha langmdorum
Et conseqibituT graciam^^ heneficiorum.
petta ma svo norræna : ^^
Af hæstu^^ gle^i hlutanna
VerSr hæsta ^^ sút '^'^ milli kristinna manna 20
I frávero svá mikils forstjóra,
Enn j^á er jarteignir til koma,
Kemr ok gle^in til kirkjunnar sona.
there are discrepancies between the | the fourth Lesson in the matins
two, especially in the moral attri- j sernce for St. Thomas of Canter-
buted to " the Master," which show bury ; the verse belonging also to
that the Icelandic translator must the same Lesson. In some service-
have had before him a much more I books the Respond begins : Tu7ic ex
wordy rendering of the vision than &c. ; while in the verse plurimorum
any we know now. Cfr. Materials^ is inserted before languidorum, and
ii., pp. 30, 31. i remediorum stands for beneficiorum.
1 nal§giz, T.
2 brodr, T.
3 lerdra, T.
■* otiusming, T.
^ u^nn, T.
6 m, T.
7 sqtuztu, T.
^ raudd, T.
^ saunyhliodum, T.
^^ This is the fourth Kespoud to
" So altered by the editor ; sit, T.
12 taiito, T.
^2 So Prof. Unger ; reddeu7it, T.
1-* Gracia, T. U. The translation
of consequitur, þigyja, shows that
gracia is a blunder for graciam.
1^ nor^na, T.
i'5 hqstu, T.
1' suth, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 65
And how her joy approacheth its blooming in the
glory of holy miracles, was thus manifested to a certain
brother in Canterbury. The monk dreamt that he came
into the choir of the church, and saw there a great mul-
titude of learned men together singing matÍDs. Now,
when the fourth lesson came to an end, there followed a
pause in the service for a while, until a certain young
man of wondrous goodliness of look rose up, beginning
in the sweetest voice singing the very responsorium
which being read out sounded thus :
Ex summa rerum lætitia
Summus fit planctus in ecclesia
De tanti patroni absentia ;
Sed cum redeunt miracula,
Red it populo lætitia.
Here followed the verse :
Concurrit turba languidorura
Et consequitur graciam beneficiorum.
Which may thus be done into Northern tongue :
Af hæstu gle^i hlutanna verSr hæsta sút milli
kristinna manna í fráveru svo mikils forstjora enn þá
er jarteignir til koma, kemr ok gle^in til kirkjunnar
sona.
K 541. E
66
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
]i7i. Saman koma sveitir sjukra fegna
Ok þiggja myskunn hans jartegna.
Her eftir^ vaknar munkrinn ok man vel sönginn^
bæSi'^ at or^um ok hljo^um. Enn er hann segir
bræSrum ^ synina, bregSr þeim ýmislega vit, j^ví at 5
sumir vakna til vonar, enn öSrum ^ aukr ^ harm ok
endrnfjar til aminningar, hversu bleza^an ^ fö^ur ^
þeir höfSu láti^.^ Nú er sýnt af þessum englasöng,^^ at
myskunn himnakonungs vænir^^ fólki sínu, at jartegna-
blóm hins virSuliga Thóme píslarvotts, er hvilir í 10
Kancia, mun brátt nálægjast/- ok liversn J?at fyllist
eftir ^^ Gu^s fyrirætlan/^ stendr vel ákveSnum^^ tíma
forsögn^^ sjáEs Thóme erkibyskups, sem nú skal
greina.
The arch- Sá var einn af bræ^iTim ^'^ í Kancia, at svá píndist 1 5
appears to í harmi ok hugarangri eftir ^^ erkibyskup, at sumir
Canterbury, menn ætluöu ^^ lífit kosta, því at liann mátti öngva ^^
gle^i fá, petta ]?olir eigi lengr hinn mildasti faSir
erkibyskupinn, heldr kemr harm ok vitjar svá mjúk-
liga l^essa, sem hryggr var, sera mó^ir huggar barn 20
sitt, snúandi harmi í huggan ok angri^^ í andligan
fagnaS. Hann bleza^r ok signa^r birtist honum í
svefni me^ því upphaíi, at hann byrjar psálminn
Miserere ok býör bró^urnum at lesa me^ sér eftir ^^
versaskifti.^^ Enn er psálminum ^^ lí^r, fiiTÍst erki- 25
byskupinn nokkut lítt sem hótandi bruttferS sinni.
Munkrinn andvarpar )?á sárliga ok bi^r me^ tárum,
1 eptir, T.
2 saunginn, T.
3 hqdi, T.
"* hr^drum, T.
5 audruvi, T.
^ For awAr = eykr, 3 pers. síng.
ind. impers., Prof. linger proposes
an impossible aukar.
7 blezaþann, T.
8 faudr, T.
^ This same vision is recorded in
Benedict's Miracula. See Mate-
rials, ii., pp. 33-34.
^° englasaung, T.
^^ u^nir, T.
^2 nal^gaz, T.
13 eptir, T.
1^ fyrirqtlan, T.
1^ aquednum, T.
i*"' forsaiign, T.
17 br^drum, T.
15 ^tludu, T.
aungua, T.
So altered by the editor ; angr.
-^ uersaskipti, T.
" So U. ; spalminvm, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. G7
Saman koma sveitir sjukra þegna
Ok þyggja myskunn bans jartegna.
After this the monk awaketh, and remembereth the
song well, both as to words and tune. But when he
telleth the vision to the brethren, they are variously
affected thereat, for while in some it awaketh hope, in
others, it increaseth sorrow and refresheth the memory
of the blessed father they had lost. Now from this
angelic song it is manifest that the mercy of the King of
heaven imbueth his people with the hope, that the
miracles of the worthy martyr St. Thomas, who resteth
in Canterbury, may soon bud into bloom, and how that
cometh to be fulfilled, according to the will of God,
it suiteth Avell that the time appointed therefore be
indicated by a prophecy of archbishop Thomas himself,
as now shall be related.
There was a certain brother in Canterbury, who was
so overcome with grief and sorrow for the archbishop, that
some folk thought it would cost him his very life ; for
he might have no joy whatsoever. This the most com-
passionate father, the archbishop, may endure no longer,
but cometh to visit the one thus smitten with sorrow,
as sweetly as a mother who comforteth her child, turning
grief into consolation and sadness into spiritual rejoicing.
The blessed Thomas appeareth to him in sleep, making
towards him by beginning to sing the Psalm Misererey
and bidding the brother to read it with him according
to the division of the verses therein. But as the psalm
weareth on the archbisliop retireth somewhat, as if
threatening to take his departure. The monk then
sigheth sorely, and prayeth him with tears not to leave
E 2
68 THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
1171. at hann fyrirlati hann eigi. Sá bleza"Sr fa"Sir snýr )?á
aftr ^ til bans sem hrærör ^ af harmi sonarins, ok
talar sva : " Hvat hiyggvir þik, son minn ? tempra
*' þinn harm ok lei^ inn til þín hugganarefni, því at
" litill timi mun a^r li^a, enn þú heyrir ]?at flytjast,^ 5
" er þik mun gie^ja. pvi vert me^ styi'kum hug, at
" nálægt ^ er mjok, at þú fair huggan." Eftir ^ sva
talat hverfr hann ^ brutt af syn bro^urius. Enn bans
fyrirheit brast eigi, því at vitran )7essi gjör^ist um
varit litlu fyiir páskir í sama árgang, sem hann 10
kruna^ist, ok a ]?eiri páskatí^ birti Drottinn sina
dyrS yfir heilagleik ástvinar sins me'S því upphafi, at
sja hinn signa'Si Thomas birtir^ 1 syn, me^ hverri
atfei-S táknin skulu gerast. ^
KAR LXXXVIII. 15
MlRACULUM.
A son of a Ma^r hét ^ Vilhiálmr, einn go^r húsbóndi 1 Kan-
certain %) ^ o
William of túaría, hann atti un^^an son, er tok kverkamein hætt-
Canterbury o -'
is cured by Hat ^^ me^ ö^rum^^ siúkdómi likamligum. Hans mein
the blood of ^ . . -^ ^ J=>
the martyr, þyngir svo mjök, at um fimmtán ^- daga liggT hann 20
nálægr^'^ dau^a, ok at hann mætti^^ myskunn fa
eftir ^^ gu^ligri fyrirsjó, svá sem léttir-^^ var skipaSr
hans meini, þiggT hann þá vitran, at hann þikkiz
kominn í höfutkirkjuna/^ ok ser enn heilaga Thoraam
erkibyskup fyrir altari í gu^iigu embætti ^^ me^ svo 25
tiguligri JTJónustu ýmissra stétta/^ sem aldri sá liann
fyri. Honum |7Íkkir sem erkibyskup sjáist um ok
renni þangat aug-um, sem hann er. Annan veg hjá
altarinu sér hann, at stendr einn munkr me^ kalek.
1 a-ptr, T.
2 hr^rdr, T.
^ fliytazy T.
'' nalqgt, T.
^ eptir, T.
6 hann added by Prof, linger.
' hirttiz, T.
^ This vision is found in Bene-
dict's Miracula in the same order
as here. Materials^ ii., pp. 34, 35.
9 Met, T.
0 h§ttligt, T.
1 audrum, T.
■^ fimtan, T.
3 nal^gr, T.
4 m§tti, T.
' eptir, T.
6 liettir, T.
" haufutkirkjuna, T.
s anb^tti, T.
9 stietta, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. G9
him. The blessed father then returneth to him as if
moved by the sorrow of his son, and speaketh : " What
" grieves t thou, my son ? still thy grief, and be of good
" cheer, for ere a short while passeth away thou wilt
" hear of things which will bring gladness unto thee.
" Fortify thy heart, therefore, because the comfort which
" is to come to thee approach eth apace." Having
spoken thus he departeth out of the brother's sight.
But his promise failed not, inasmuch as this vision took
place in the spring shortly before Easter, within a year
of liis being crowned with martyrdom, while at Easter-
tide the Lord manifested His glory in the holiness of his
beloved friend with such a beginning that the blessed
Thomas revealeth in a vision in what manner the
miracles were to begin to operate.
CHAP. LXXXYIII.
There was a certain person called William, a well-to-
do citizen of Canterbury, who had a young son, that was
brought down by some sorely dangerous malady of the
throat, together with other disorders of his body. Hjs
illness grew so heavy, that for fifteen days he lieth anigh
to death's door. Now that he might have some ease
from his suffering according to divine dispensation, which
had so ruled it that he should be relieved from his
heaviness, he hath a vision, dreaming that he had
come to the cathedral church and saw the holy arch-
bishop Thomas before the altar doing holy service with
such a stately administration of various orders of men
as he had never seen before. He thoui^ht he saw the
archbishop turn his eyes towards the place where he
was. But on the other side of the altar it seemed to
him a monk had his station with a chalice in his hand.
70
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
1171. Hinn sjúki skilr þat, at sa kalekr hefir at lialda
bleza^an^ dreyra heilags Thome erkibyskups, ok |7at
vottar heilagr Thomas, ]>vi at þessu næst ^ talar hann
sva til munksins : " Gef ]?eim sjúka ^ piltinum af blo^i,
'^ ok mun honum bætast."^ Ok hann hug^ist drekka, 5
ok kenndist sva sætt ^ sem hunang væri.^ Ok af
þeim sætleik/ er hann þóttist kenna um alt sitt lif í
þeim bleza'Sa ^ drykk, vaknar hann bratt aftrdreginn ^
Í allan sinn sjúkdóm. Hann segir fo^ur ^^ siniim
vitran þessa ok kvezt hafa styrka von sinnar heilsu, 10
ef hann öSla^ist-^^ í sinn drykk einn dropa af blo^i
erkibyskups. FaSir hans dvelr at reyna bræ'Sr ^^ ]7ar
um, þótti ok fyrsta manni raikit áræ'Si^^ at byi^ja þat,
sem einginn ^^ hafSi a^r gjört, J?ví at enn í a^ra grein
la yfir otti bæSi^^ af konungs alfu ok hans rikismanna, 15
ef Thomas erkibyskup er hafinn til heilagleiks ok
jartegna. Enn í þeiri dvöl ^^ gengr í svá óbæriligan ^'^
vöxt ^^ krankdómr unga sveins,-^^ at hans kvi'Sr þrútnar
svá, at mönnum ]7Ótti þess von, at hann mætti ^^ eigi
ósprunginn bera. Hér meö tapar hann málit af kverka- 20
meininu. Fa'Sir hans þoiir nú eigi lengr þrautina,
fer til bræ^ra^^ kirkjunnar, segir ]7eim sýnina ok bi^r
þá fyrir Gu^s ^^ skyld, at þeir veiti honum leyniliga
einn blóSdropa, ok þat fékkst^^ um sí^ir. Enn ]?egar
sem piltrinn berg^i J>ann drykk,^^ er dreyrinn var í 25
dreypt, læg'Sist ^^ kvi^blástrinn, enn kverkr mýktust,
svá at litlu sí'Sar þiggr hann aftr ^^ fulla heilsu í alia
1 blezaþa7if T.
2 n^st, T.
^ So altered by Prof. Unger
siukia, T.
4 hqtaz, T.
5 sqtt, T.
6 u^ri, T.
7 sqtleik, T.
8 hleza)>a, T.
'•^ aptrdreginn, T.
10 fcmdur, T.
11 audlaþiz,T. ,
12 br^þr, T.
13 ar^di, T.
1* engiun, T.
15 bgdi, T.
16 duaul, T.
17 obqriligan, T.
1^ uauxt^ T.
1^ So Prof. Unger ; suens, T.
2« w^ííz, T.
21 br^dra, T.
22 So Prof. Unger ; gud, T.
23 fiekz, T.
2^ dryk, T.
25 /f Í/Æ2, T.
26 a/)<r, T.
THE STORY OF MICHBISHOP THOMAS. 71
The patient understood that this chalice contained the
blessed blood of archbishop Thomas, and to that the
holy Thomas testified by next talking thus to the monk :
" Give the sick man to taste of the blood, and he will
" be whole." He thought he drank thereof, and found
the taste to be as sweet as the taste of honey. But from
the sweetness which he thought he perceived from that
blessed potion pervading all his body he awaketh to find
himself sunk into all his former ailment. He now
teUeth his father of this vision, saying that he has a
firm hope of recovering his health, if he could only
obtain one drop of the blood of the archbishop to mingle
with his drink. His father hesitated importuning the
brethren in this matter, and it seemed to him a great
venture to be the first to try what none had done before
him, because, on the other hand, there stiU lay on the
people heavy fear of the anger of the king and his lords,
if an attempt should be made to elevate archbishop
Thomas into sainthood as the worker of miracles. But
while the father hang^eth thus back, the illness of the
youth taketh such an unendurable turn, that his beUy
swelleth to an extent that people doubted that he might
bear it without bursting. At the same time he loseth
his speech from the throat-malady. His father can bear
no longer the trial, but goeth to the brethren of the
church, telling them of the vision, and praying them in
the name of God that they would give him secretly one
drop of the blood, which prayer they at last granted him.
But no sooner had the young man tasted the diink
whereinto the blood had been dropped, than the swelling
of the belly abated, and the throat softened so that in a
short time he was fully restored to his wonted health in
72
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
1171.
A woman
is cured of
ague.
sta'Si, lofandi Gu^ ok j?at dyr^arsamligt vinber, er
honum gaf þvílíkan heilsudrykk sins ver'Sleiks ok
avaxtar.-"^
NÚ sem einn haf"Si ö^lazt ^ þvílíka myskunn, þó at
lagt færi ^ í íyrstu, var eigi langt, á'Sr hverr * sag^i 5
ö^rum,^ svo at sjukir menn me'S ýmso kyni sækja ^
kirkjuna í Kancia. Milli hverra kom ein kona riöusjúk.
Hun gengT at munkinum, er var sakrista ^ kirkjunnar
ok geymdi dreyra erkibyskups milli annarra^ lielgra
doma, bi^jandi^ litilatliga fyrir nafn Gu^s ok kristiliga 10
elsku, at harm gefi henne blo^dropa heilags Thome til
heilsubotar, ok hann hneigist^^ til myskunnar yfir hennar
vesöld, milskandi blo^dropann me^ vatn ok gefr henni ^^
at bergja. Ok þegar í sta'S leggr GuÖ henni svá au^-
velda mildi fyrir me^algöngu ^^ sins ástvinar, at sottin 15
Ayr ok hörundit ^^ aftr ^^ skipast í allan ^^ sinn lit ok
náttúru, sem fulltekenni mannsins-^^ heilsu er fylgju-
samr.^^ Enn hverjar lofgjor^ir hon veitti varum Herra
ok bans virktavin, fáum vér eigi skrifat, ]?vi at upp
^ This miracle is here connected
■with the last recorded vision, as
being the first among the miracles
wrought by the blood of the Saint.
The vision, says the Icelandic au-
thority, occurred shortly before
Easter 1171, and the miracle which
follows it is stated by Benedict,
who also records it, to have occurred
on Thursday before Easter. But
the connection here established be-
tween the last of the visions and
the first of the blood-miracles is
lost in Benedict, who also differs
from the Icelandic in giving the
name of William to the son, not
to the father, and in omitting all
mention of the father's hesitation to
act on his dream. Benedict himself
goes from visions over to miracles
(not wrought with the martyr's
blood) as early as Dec. 31, 1170.
Materials, ii., p. 37, and cfr. p. 55.
2 audlazy T.
' Ari, T.
4 huer, T.
^ audruni, T.
6 sqkia, T.
7 So Prof. Unger ; sakristia, T.
^ annara, T.
^ biþiandi, T.
^^ So altered by the editor ; n^giz,
T.
^^ So altered by Prof. Unger ;
honuvi, T.
^2 medalgaungu, T.
^3 haurundit, T.
" aptr, T.
15 allann, T.
1Ö manzsins, T.
17 Aiitv fylgjusamr T. adds er.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 73
every way, praising God and that glorious vine-berry
which gave him this health-bringing potion of his wor-
thiness and of the fruit thereof.
Now when one person had received so great a mercy,
although at first it was only talked of in a whisper, no
long time wore away till each told the other thereof,
so that sick people of both sexes seek the church of
Canterbury. Among the rest there came also a certain
woman suffering from ague. She goeth to the monk
who was the sacristan of the church, and together with
other holy things had also in his keeping the blood of
the archbishop, praying him humbly, in the name of God
and of Christian love, to give her for her health a drop
of the blood of Saint Thomas. He was moved to com-
passion over her ailing, and mixing one drop with water
gave it to her to drink. And forthwith God granted
her such free mercy for the mediation of his beloved
friend, that the fever departed and the skin resumed
again all its natural hue and property such as goeth with
a fully established health of man. But all the praises
she gave to our Lord and his venerable friend we may
74
THOMAS SAGA EKKIBYSKUPS.
1171. hé^an^ margfaldast svá mjök þakklætin,^ sem jar-
teignir fjolgast ; ^ ei f>vi ólíkast, sem þá er dau^voni
ma'Sr þiggr málit, ok kviknar þat dag^ frá degi.
Hverju váro ]?eir líkari enn dairSvona manni, er lágu
Í sorg ok sút,'^ tárum ok trega nótt ok dag,* sva at 5
lífsháski la vi^, sem af munkinum var litlu lesit. Nu
lifnar hann ok margir a'Srir, væntandi^ emi framm-
leiöis ^ meira fagna'Sar, ok sva var^. pvi at nott
snerist í blí^an dag ok harmandi sút í signa^a hátí^
andligrar ^ gie^i. Lofa'Sr se ^ sá Gu^, er einn gefr 1Ö
ollum liuggan eftir^^ gi'át, því at nú munuj^á sömo ^^
allar ];jó^ir sæla^^ kalla, er á^r ]7Óttu eymdarfullir, því
at Drottinn, sá er máttugr er, gjör^i þeim m^^kla liluti.
Me'S^^ líkum hætti-^^ mátti önnur^^ kona lof varum
*V \JXHCbLL __. , , /»• -1-1 ^ 1 * 1 ^ I 1 (* n * ♦'l^
cured by ^ Drottm syngja, er.ryrir sömo ^^ paskir let ■^*' iiytja sig ií>
blood. til Kanciam me^ hörmuligan^^ krankdóm, at kviSrinn
hljóp me^ ofverkjum í óbæriligan^^ þrota, svá at alt
lífit sýktist af upp ok ni^r. Enn jamframm^^ sem
hon ö^laöist '•^^ at bergja þá milsku, er í dýr^ligum
dauSa Thóme erkibyskups var sætliga -^ blezut af 20
Heilögum Anda, mýktist meinit svá íljótt, at fullkomin
Another
woman
lieilsa lao'^ist benni aftr
22 í
alia sta'Si.2^
1 hieþa7i, T.
2 þackl^tin, T.
3 The miracle here recorded seems
to be the same that Benedict re-
lates of a certain Audrey (Athel-
drida) of Canterbury, suffering from
quartanæ = a quartan ague. The
monk -who in the Icelandic text is
called a sacristan or sexton, is by
Benedict called " custos mausolei
" martyris." The order of these
last two miracles is in Benedict the
reverse of that in the Icelandic
Saga. Materials^ ii., p. 54.
■1 dagh, T.
5 suth, T.
6 u^ntandi, T.
' franileidis, T.
^ anndligrary T.
9 sie, T.
10 eptir, T.
11 saumo, T.
12 s^la, T.
13 meþ, T.
" h^tti,T.
15 aunnr, T.
16 liet, T.
17 haurmuligaii, T,
1^ ob^riliganriy T.
1^ jamfram, T.
20 audladiz, T.
12 s^ttliga, T.
22 aptr, T.
23 Possibly this miracle is the
same that Benedict relates of Sax-
eva, a woman from Dover, who had
been suffering from Christmas uiito
Easier, Materials, ii., p. 74.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 75
now record nowise, for thanksgivings become now hence-
forward as manifold as the miracles multiply ; not unlike
the case of a man, who at death's door receiveth his speech
that quickeneth thenceforth day by day. For unto what
more fitly than unto a dying man might those be likened
who lay in sorrow and sadness, tears and grief, by
day and by night, their very life being in peril, even as
we read a short while ago concerning the monk ? Now
he reviveth, and with him many others, living in the
hope of a still greater joy, a hope in the end fulfilled.
For night was turned into a mild day, and grieving
sorrow into a blessed festival of spiritual joyance. Praise
be to God, who alone giveth unto all comfort after
weeping, for even now the very folk shall be called
blessed by all nations who were deemed wretched before,
for the Lord who is mighty hath done great things unto
them.
In a similar manner another woman, had occasion to
sing praise unto our Lord : she had caused herself to be
brought to Canterbury even before this very Easter-tide,
suffering from a grievous disorder, by which her belly,
with exceeding sore pain, had swollen in a manner not
to be endured, and the bowels had become affected
altogether. But as soon as she had the good luck to
taste the mixture which in the glorious death of arch-
bishop Thomas was sweetly blessed by the Holy Ghost,
the pains abated so quickly that she was restored to
perfect health in every way.
76
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
1171.
Samson of
Oxford
cured of
dumb-
ness.
KAP. LXXXIX.
MiRACULUM AF ThOMASI.
Páskadaginn sjálfan, er kóróna má vel kallast ann-
arra^ Gu^s hátí^a, vann várr^ Drottinn í Kancia
yfirbæriligt ^ verk á )?eim signa^a degi. pangat sotti ^
mállauss* ma'Sr, ok litlu si'Sar enn hann kom í kirkj-
una, fellr hann ni^r ok bryzt um fast, sva fro^a
flaut framm ^ or munninum. Enn eftir ^ þat li^it ^
sezt hann upp ok hefir fengit mál sitt, þó í fyrstu
nokkut óskýrt. Enn J?at verSr skilt af hans or^um, ^^
at hann J?yrsti, og^ ba^ gefa ser drekka. Enn þótt
kirkjan væri ^ a^r meö litlu folki, var eigi langt, abr
fyrir ];essi ti^endi at fjolmenni skortir eigi. Hverr^^
at öörum ti^ast spyrr ^^ ]?ann saluga mann, hveJT ^^
eöa hva'San hann væri,^ enn honum ver^r mæöusamt ^^ 1 5
at svara morgum,^^ því at malit var bæ^i ^* seint ok
vanmegnt at sva komnu, ok var^ oft ^^ at endrbeiöa, ef
skiljast mætti.-^^ pó kemr þar, at hann segist vera af
byskupsdæmi ^^ Oxinfjord, segist hafa sofnat úti fyrir
fimmtan ^^ árverum ^^ óvarliga ok vaknat rae^ því mál- 20
leysi, sem hann bar allan ^^ tíma síöan ^^ til þessa dags.
Samson kvezt hann heita gó"Srar samvizku ok haf'Si
jafnaa verit me'S skjrrum mönnum, ok húsbóndi hans
var þar nærr ^^ samtféa. pessi Samson færSi ^^ kirkjunni
' annara, T.
2 uar, T.
3 yfirhqiiligt, T.
'^ mallaus, T.
^ fram, T,
6 eptir, T.
7 li\>it, T.
8 ogK T.
^ ^i^ri, T.
10 Huer,T.
H spyr, T.
12 m§dusamt, T.
13 maurgum, T.
" 6^í/í, T.
15 opí, T.
16 w^^í<^•, T.
1' byskupsdqmi, T.
18 ^wto?i, T.
i^ So T., which, though possibly
a blunder for arum, which Prof.
Unger substitutes, may be the
author's translation of ennium in
quinquennium, (^fimmtán being pro-
bably a scribe's blunder).
20 allann, T.
21 si\>an, T.
22 n^rr, T.
23 f^rdi, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THO:srAS. 77
•
CHAP. LXXXIX.
A Miracle of Thomas,
On the very Easter day, which may well be called the
crown of God's other festivals, our Lord wrougrht in
Canterbury a surpassing miracle on that blessed day.
A certain dumb man having come to the place, shortly
after entering the church, falleth down and writheth hard
about, so that froth oozetli out of the mouth of him. This
having passed over he sitteth up, having now recovered
his speech, though at first it was somewhat indistinct.
But so much could be understood of his words that he
thirsted, and prayed that drink might be given him.
Now, although there were but few people in the church
before, yet ere long there was no lack of people thronging
together there through the very tidings of this occurrence.
One after the other they ask eagerly the wretched man
who he was and whence he came, but it wearieth him to
answer so many, the speech being as yet both slow and
feeble, and so he had to be asked over and over again be-
fore he could be understood. But at last the matter pro-
ceeded so far that he said he was of the diocese of Oxford ;
said that, fifteen years ago, he had heedlessly fallen asleep
out in the open, and had awakened with that dumbness
from which he had suffered ever since unto this day.
On coming to he said his name was Samson, and that he
had always been with trustworthy people ; and withal
his master happened to be present there at the same
time. This Samson brou^iht unto the church of Canter-
78
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
1171. Í Kancia fagrt offr, ]?vi at me^ skilrikum vottum syndi
hann kórsbræSrum ^ bjartan ^ heilagleik Thome erki-
byskups. Hann sagSi tvo dýrSliga menn hafa vitra^
ser ^ Í svefni, at hann skyldi fara til Kanciani ok
sækja^ heim me^ go^u hjarta þann nýja píslarvott, er 5
þar hvílir, ok ef hann bæ^i^ ser myskunnar me^
au^mjúku hjarta efalauss ^ í heilagleik þess gó'Sa
manns/ mundi hann p'iggja mál sitt. pat lag*Si hann
til af orSum himneskra sendibo^a, at sá væri^ nú
eingi ^ sta^r í veröld, at sjúkir menn myndi skjótara 10
bót ö^last^^ enn Kancia. Svá for J?essi Samson þa^an
í brutt, at harm lofa^i GuÖ bæ'Si ^^ af hjarta ok
munni.^^
Enn dýi'kast sami páskadagT me^ annarri^^ jartegn
dýr^ligii, er svá byrjar. Gofridus het ma"Sr, hann var 15
by appijóng nótarius í Kancía ok átti þriá sonu, alia me'S uno-um
the martyr s . . . .
blood. aldri. Svá lagSist mikit á hans afkvæmi/^ at allir
synir hans váro sjukir samtí^a, þó me^ þeiri sundr-
grein, at tveir af þeim höfSu lengi kvalizt í þeim sjúk-
dóm, er menn kalla ri^usótt. pat mein er fult me'S 20
spilling ok sífelldum skjálfta.^^ Enn einn piUtrinn
hafSi nýliga fengit hættligan^^ krankdóm, svá at fjóra
mána^i lá hann í rekkjo, ok á þenna páskadag leiddr
at andláti, drykklauss -^^ um þrjá daga, mállauss ^^ ok
dau^r í limunum. Fa^ir hans huglei^ir ^^ um piltinn^ 25
Jjann tima sem hann er í höfu^kirkjunni ok þjónustast,
Grofridus of
Canterbury
cures his
three sons
1 korsbr^þrunif T.
2 biartanriy T.
^ sier^ T.
^ s^kia, T.
5 h\>i, T.
^ efalauSy T.
7 manz, T.
^ u^ri, T.
^ engi, T.
10 audlaz, T.
" h^di, T.
1- This miracle is also recorded
by Benedict, first in his second
book of the Miracula, but is told
by him much more circimistantially
than here, especially as to the
manner employed to extort from
Samson the truth about his dumb-
ness. Materials, ii. 57, 58.
13 annari, T.
14 afku^mi, T.
15 So U. ; skalfta, T.
16 h§ttUgan, T.
17 drycklaus, T.
1^ mallaus, T.
I!' So U. ; huglidir, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 79
bury an offering, a fair one indeed, inasmuch as through
upright witnesses he showed forth to the canons the
bright holiness of archbishop Thomas. He said that two
wise men had revealed it to him in sleep, that he ought
to go to Canterbury and visit with a confiding heart the
new martyr who rested there, and that if he prayed for
mercy for himself in a humble heart, nothing doubting
'the holiness of that good man, he would regain his
speech. He also added, in the words of these heavenly
messengers, that there was now no place in the wide
world, where sick people would get more speedily re-
stored to health than at Canterbury. In such manner
this Samson departed thence, that he praised God not
only with his heart but with his mouth also.
This same Easter day was still further glorified by a
glorious miracle, of which the story beginneth thus : —
There was a certain man, Gofrid by name, who was a
notary in Canterbury, and had three sons, all of young
age. Such hard lot befell his family, that all his sons
fell ill at the same time ; yet with this difference, that
two of them had long been tormented with the disease
which is called ague, a disorder which is full of corrup-
tion and ceaseless shivering. But one of the youths had
lately fallen into a dangerous illness, so that for four
months he had been bedridden, and was this Easter day
even at death's door, having taken no drink for three
days, and being speechless, and torpid in all his limbs.
The father, thinking of the boy as he happened to be
in the cathedral church, while the sacrament was being
80 THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
1171. bi-Sjandi ^ sacristam gefa ser orlof at bregma einum
linskauta í bló^ Thomas erkibyskups. Ok sem hann
hefir þat J^egit, vitjar hann piltsins sem fljótast, leggr
skautann í vatn, ok )?at bland meS signo^u blóSi
erkibyskups ber hann at piltmum sva frammkomn- 5
um,- sem a-Sr var gi^eint. Ok þegar sem nalgast munn-
inum, kennir hann kraftinn,^ breg^r upp augat annat,
tekr málit í sta^ ok talar svá : ^' Skal ek J?etta drekka,
" fafc minn ? " Ok þegar hann hefir bergt J?ann
dyr^liga drykk, sezt hann upp, ok tekr fæ^u/ styrk- 10
ist sva sama dags, at hann riss ^ upp af rekkju ok
klæ^ist ^ at marki til leiks me^ ö^rum ^ piltum. Enn
er notarius ser )?at haleita tákn, er piltinum veittist^
me^ sva mikilli íljótvirkt, rennr hann framm ^ til
hofu^kirkjunnar bo^andi kórsbræ^rum ^^ sinn fagna^. 15
Ok sva mikil gie^i var^ a J?eim dyi^ardegi af þessum
tveimr stórtáknum, er nú hafa verit lesin, at korinn i
Kancia matti vel syngja me^ sælum ^^ psalmista i^^ Hœc
dies qiuim fecit Dominvis, exulteonus et Icetemur in ea.
NÚ sva go^a raun sem linskautinn erkibyskups haf^i gefib 20
einum pilti syni Gofridi, hugleiSir ^^ hann frammlei"Sis -^^
til þeira tveggja, er ri^usjukir váro. Renni^ honum ]?at
rá'S til hugar me'S Gu-Ss tilvisan, at hann sni"Sr sundr
skautann ok bindr sinn hlut upp um hals hvorum
piltinum, ok þegar an dvöP^ fylgir sa kraftr^^ umband- 25
inu, at þeir ver^a bá^ir heilir. Li^r sva út heill
manner. Enn eftir ^^ þat lystir þess nótaríum til profs,
at taka bui't umbandit af öSrum ^^ piltinum. Er þá
eigi langt, á^r sótt ok skjálfti hristir þat auma lif nú
sem fyrr. Hvar fyrir bans fó^ur^^ er J?at annast at
1
biþiandi, T.
2 framkomnum, T.
3 kraptin7i, T.
■^ ris, T.
6 kl^diz, T.
7 audrum, T.
8 So U. ; uittiz, T.
» fram, T.
^ korsbr§þrum, T.
11 s^lum, T.
^' So Prof. Unger ; spalmista, T.
Cfr. Ps. cxviii. 24, Hæc est dies, &c.
13 hugleiþir,T.
i^ franúeidis, T.
15 duaul, T.
16 kraptr, T.
17 eptir, T.
1^ audrum, T.
19 faudur, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 81
administered to him, he prayetli the sacristan to allow
him to dip the corner of a clout of lÍDen into the blood of
archbishop Thomas. Having done this, he goeth at his
speediest back to see the boy, and layeth the linen into
water, and the mixture made of the water and the blessed
blood of the archbishop he applieth to the boy, thus far
gone as was said before. And forthwith, as it is brought
near to his mouth, the boy perceiveth the power thereof,
and lifting up one eye, and resuming forthwith his
speech, he speaketh thus : " Shall I drink this, father ? "
And when he had tasted that glorious drink, he sitteth
up and taketh food, and gaineth such strength that very
day, that he riseth from his bed and dresseth moreover
to go and play with other boys. But when the notary
sees this exalted token, which manifested itself in the
boy with such speedy workÍDg, he runneth forth to the
cathedral church notifying unto the canons his great joy.
And so great was the gladness on that glorious day from
these two great miracles, of which we have just read,
that the choir in Canterbury might well sing with the
blessed Psalmist : '' Hæc dies quam fecit Dominus, ex-
" ultemus et lætemur in ea." Now Godfrey, seeing that
the linen rag of the archbishop had done to the one boy
his son such good service, thinketh of the other two,
who were suffering from ague. And by God's dispensation
he conceiveth in his mind the idea of cutting the rag
in sunder and tying the pieces round the neck of each
boy ; and without delay there proceeded such liealing
power from the bandage, that they became whole, both
of them. In such manner a whole month passeth away.
But after that the notary desireth to undo the bandage
of one of the boys. No long time weareth away, how-
ever, ere sickness and trembling shaketh his suffering
body just as much as before. Wherefore the father
K 541.
82
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
cured.
tirra hann eigi sinni hjálp. Ok jafnframm ^ sem
heilagr domrinn kemr aftr ^ yfir hálsinn a honum,
fann hann fullkomna heilsu.^
A blind man Ma þat vel skilja eftir^ líkendum, hversu ]7vílík
tákn mundu vekja sjúka menn at sækja ^ Tbómam 5
erkibyskup meir ok meir. Milli liverra kom einn
blindr ma'Sr fátækr ^ ok hrummr, er fyrir tveimr árum
hafSi sýnar mist, ok nú leiddr af húsfreyjo sinni e^a syni
til allra nau^synja. Ok er hann heyrir, hversu [bló^-
dropar erkibyskups birta sig me'S dýr^ ok jarteignum, 10
sækir^ hann í Kanciam ok J^iggr fyrir Gu^s nafn
nokkurn dropa af þeim dýrmæta ^ dreyra. par af
gerir bann sem smurning augunum, ok sem hann hefir
borit yíir augasta'Sinn þá bleza^a^ samtempran, ber
"þat til samtí'Sa/^ at ungr piltr, er hann átti, kve^r vi^ 15
hátt ok fellr í hjá honura. Gamli ma^r gieymir ];á
sakir elsku vi^ barnit, livat liann hafSi á^r gert, ok
skundar til at hjálpa piltinum, ok fyrr enn hann tæki ^^
sveininn liöndum/^ sér hann giöggt ^^ bá^um augum,
hvar hann lá. Er þat vel trúanda, at eigi lægi ^^ hónum 20
]7á í minna rumi, hverjar lofgjöi-^ir hann var skyldugr
Thóma erkibyskupi, enn reisa barnit af jöröu.^^
pvílíkum þakklætisger'Sum ^^ vi'S sjálfan Gu^ samlag-
ast sömum ^^ páskum su kona, er Ermilin hét. Hon
hafSi borit fótarmein um fjögur ár me'S svá miklum 25
óhægindum/^ at hnýtti ok krepti fótinn í hnéli'Snura,
Ermelin
cured of
lameness.
2 aptr, T.
3 This miracle is also recorded
by Benedict, who designates the
father as a baker (pistor) of Can-
terbury. It is to be noticed that
the words, " Hæc dies," &c. are in
all MSS. of Benedict's Miracula
found at the end of the story of
Samson of Oxford, which, with
other things, proves how different
must have been the recension of
the miracles which the Icelandic
translator had before him, from that
in which we now know them.
^* eptir, T.
5 s^kia, T.
6 fatqkr, T.
" sqkir, T.
^ dyrmqta, T.
9 hleza\>a,T.
i*^ samtiþa, T.
11 t^ki, T.
1- liaundum, T.
13 glaugt, T.
14 kgi, T.
15 This story is also told by Bene-
dict of a certain Manwin of Can-
terbury. Materials, ii., p. 59.
i** ]pakkl§tisgerdu7n, T.
17 saumuni, T.
1^ oh^gindum, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 83
taketli good heed not to deprive him of his help. And
as soon as the holy relic is done round his neck again he
gaineth his health fully.
It may well be understood, that it stood to reason,
how such miracles must needs urge sick persons to go
to Canterbury and to visit the holy Thomas more and
more. Among others there came thither a certain blind
and decrepit man, who had lost his sight two years
before, and was now led by his wife or son wherever he
wanted to go. And when he heareth, how drops of the
blood of the archbishop manifest themselves in glorious
miracles, he goeth to Canterbury and receiveth for God's
sake a drop of that precious blood. Out of this he
maketh a sort of ointment for the eyes, and as soon as
he did on the eye this blessed ointment it befell, even at
the very time, that a young boy, a son of his, yelled out
aloud, having had a fall close beside him. The old
man, out of love to the child forgetting what he had
done already, hieth to help the boy, and before touch-
ing the youth with his hands seeth clearly with both
eyes where he lay fallen on the ground. And it may
well be believed indeed, that in that moment it lay no
less on his heart to give due praise to archbishop Thomas,
than to raise the child up from the ground.
In similar praises to God Himself joineth this very
Eastertide a certain woman hicrht Ermilin. For four
whole years she had borne on a hurt in her leg ac-
companied by such rigidity that the leg became knit
and drawn up in the knee-joint, and to such a degree
F '1
84
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
1171.
sva at eigi tok jöi^, ok því mátti hon ekki spor ganga
staflaust. po ilyzt hon a einnhvem hátt til lieilagrar
kirkju Í Kancia, ok í ];eim sta^ fellr hon til jar^ar svo
sem Í ovit e^a umbrot, er fyrr hafSi legit Samson
mállausi. Hé^an ^ ríss - hún upp me^ réttum ^ fótum 5
ok sterkri göngu ^ lofandi Gu^, er dásamligr birtist í
sínum vevkuni ^ meS heilögum Thómasi erkibyskupi
ok ö^rum^ sínum ástvinum.'^
KAP. XC.
Af jarteigxagerdum hixs heilaga Thóme.
10
The miracles
begin on
Maunday-
Thursday
1171.
pessa páskatíö enu næstu^ eftir^ dýr^aifult pislar-
vætti ^^ heilags Thome erkibyskups, bar svá í kalen-
dario, at upprisudagr várs Drottins Jesú Krists stó^
fimmta -^^ Kalendas dag ^- Aprilis mána'Sar.-^^ pá bar
bo^imartíö Gabrielis til várrar frú GuSs mó^ur ^^ upp 1 5
á skii^dag.-^^ Ok því setjum vér )?etta svá til gTeinar, at
bækrnar '^^ hljó^a jarteignagjörS signa^a Thóme á J^ann
dýi'Sai'dag b^ajazt hafa, sem lausnari vor hóf hina
dýr^ligstu upprás lausnar vorrar me^ óumræ'Siligu ^^
stórmerki sinnar holdganar f}TÍr skínanda brjósfci Marie 20
meyjar, ok )?at samj>ykkist vel me^ vináttu várrar frú
ok hins heilaga Thome, at '^^ J?au liefSi bæ^i -^^. me^ nokk-
urum hætti -^ sömo -^ tí^, at oil -- heimsbyg^in kynni
J?ví framar at frægja^^ þeira tign. Lofsamligt er þetta
1 HieþaJi,T.
- ris, T.
3 riettum, T.
'* gaungu, T.
^ verkum added by the editor.
^ audrum, T.
^ Benedict calls the woman Eme-
line, and his story differs consider-
ably from ours. Materials, ii., p.
60.
8 nqstu, T.
9 eptir, T.
10 pislaru§tti, T.
11 fimta, T.
1- dagk, T.
13 i.e., March 28th, 1171.
14 modr, T.
15 March 2.5th.
16 b^krnar, T.
17 oumr^diligu, T.
18 aíA, T.
19 6gííi, T.
20 h^tti, T.
-1 saumo, T.
22 aw//, T.
23/r^^ia, T.
THE STORY OF • ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 85
that she might not even touch the ground, wherefore
she could not walk one step without a crutch. Yet
somehow she was brought to the holy church of Canter-
bury, where she falleth on the earth as in a fit or spasm,
on the very spot where Samson the dumb had formerly
fallen. Hence she ariseth with both legs straight and
a vigorous walk, praising God who manifesteth Himself
in his works through holy Thomas no less than by his
other beloved friends.
CHAP. XC.
Concerning the miracles of St. Thomas.
This Eastertide, the next after the glorious martyr-
dom of the holy archbishop Thomas, the calendar showed
that the day of the Resurrection of our Lord Jesus
Christ fell on the fifth calends of the month of April.
Then, also, the feast of the Annunciation by Gabriel to
our Lady, the mother of God, fell on Maundy-Thursday.
These things we set forth in this detailed manner,
because the books testify that the working of the
miracles of the blessed Thomas began on that glorious
day, when our Saviour began the work of our salvation
by the unspeakable miracle of His incarnation neath
the beaming breast of the Virgin Mary ; and well it
accordeth with the friendship between our Lady and the
holy Thomas that, in some sense, they both should have
the same anniversary, in order that all the world might
extol their glory all the more. Laudable indeed is this
8G
THOJIAS SAGA EKKIBYSKUPS.
1171. hvorttveggja ^ upphaf : annat til lifs ok lausnar lieimin-
um, enn annat til hjálpar ok huggunar sjúkum mönn-
um. NÚ bii'tist svá páskavikan í blómi jarteigna, at
Pilgrims to pílagrímar sækjancli ^ vilja eigi lengr ^ þola, at skript
demand fi-ee lieilao's Tliome sé "* afti' ^ streno'd,^ seo-ia óheyrilÍQ-t, at 5
access to the ^ . .
martyr's bræ^i '^ læsi ^ hans legsta'S ok lialdi me^ leynd, sem
jar^folgit fe/ pat-'^ er maSr ann ongum ^^ njota, segja
betr standa eftir^- Gu'Ss retti^^ ok kristiligTÍ skyldu,
at tmandi menn djrki J^ann meö mjúklæti -^^ her a
jar^ríki, sem várr Drottinn sæmir ^^ himneskri dýr^ í 10
sínu ríki. petta samþykkja formenn kirkjunnar, at
skript ok stíikur upp lúkast á sétta dag páskaviku
qnarto nonas Aprilis ^*^ me^ auSfærum ^^ veg^^ til graft-
ar^^ GnSs ástvinar. Hvern dag mátti J?ar sjá vit hans
steinþró nokkut einkanligt-^ dýr^artákn.^^ Hér má nú 15
sjá npplokinn brunn DavíSs konnngs til hreinsanar ok
heilsubótar bæ'Si ^^ sál ok líkama. Hingat stígr nú
Gu^s engill niSr af himni at hræra ^^ tjörnina í Hierú-
salem,-^ eigi einum sárum e^a -^ sjiikum til fagna^ar,^*^
heldr ótalliga mörgum.^^ Hér mátti sjá akrinn Axæ -^ 20
I huorhieggiu, T.
- s^kiandi, T.
3 leÍ7igr, T.
4 sie, T.
5 aptr, T.
^ streingd, T.
^ br^tU, T.
s Igsi, T.
0 jee, T.
10 So U. ; þar, T.
II aungum, T.
1- eptir, T.
13 rietti, T.
i^ miuklqti, T.
i^ s^mir, T.
i*"' z.e. 2nd April 1171.
17 audf^runiy T.
15 Mc^/í, T.
1"-* graptar, T.
20 einkannligth, T.
-1 dyrþartakn, T.
-- 6f>í, T.
23 Arf m, T.
2^ Heirusalem, T.
25 eþa, T.
26 fagnaþar, T.
2'' maurguni, T.
-5 Editor's alteration; a.rc, T.and.
U., as if it were not a proper
name ; and axe daugguadan meant
ear-bedewed, with the ear of its
com covered by dew ; and, possi-
bly this may have been the scribe's
conception of the context. But it
is hardly possible to admit that it
could have been the original trans-
lator's mistake, who, as it seems,
undoubtedly knew his Latin too
well to imagine Lat. axis to mean
Icel. ax = ear of corn = spica. The
rendering of palea by ax, Thorn.
S., vol. i., p. 158, 1. 27, and note 9,
THE STOEY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 87
beginning in either ease : in the one for the life and the
salvation of the world ; in the other for the cure and
the comfort of disease-stricken people. Now the Pas-
chal week shone so forth in the bloom of miracles, that
pilgrims visiting will no longer suffer that the crypt
of the holy Thomas should remain shut and bolted ;
saying that it is a matter not to be tolerated, that ill-
will should keep his tomb shut, and guard it as secretly
hidden as a treasure buried in the earth, the enjoyment
of which is grudged to everyone ; saying further that it
accords better with the right of God and christian duty
that the believers should humbly worship him here on
earth, whom our Lord honoureth with heavenly glory in
his kingdom.
This the rulers of the church consent to, so that the
crj^pt and the chapels are opened on the sixth day of the
Paschal week, the fourth of the nones of April, an easy
access being opened to the grave of God's beloved friend.
Every day there might now be seen some wondrous
token of his glory. Here therefore might be seen the
open fountain of king David for the purification and
restoration to health both of soul and body. Hither now
descendeth from heaven the angel of God to trouble the
fountain in Jerusalem, not for the joy of one person only
smitten with sores and sickness, butfor the joy of an un-
told multitude of people. Here was to be seen the field of
88
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
1171.
döggvaSan ^ ok blomga'San ^ bæ^i^ ofan ok ne'San,^ því
at sumum ]7ar gratandum likams mein veittist heilsa,
ok öörum^ sýtandum andar sár gefst líkn ok lei^rétta.^
Her matti sjá oleum óþrotnanda ^ in lechito,^ þat er
feit ^ ok frjósöm ^^ milska í ver^leikum Thome erki- 5
byskups. Her^^ ma nú sjá, hversu kerin ^^ mörg at
tölii ^^ ílytjast litlo oleo framm ^^ fyrir Heliseum, því at
þanniginn flytjast margir, er mist höfSu sinnar heilsu.
Enn fyrir Gu^s almátt ok me^algöngu ^^ heilags Thóme,
"þiggja ]?eir í Kancia nógligt oleum, ]?ví at þeir kvomu 10
]7ar hungrandi meö heilsuleysi, enn sneru burt albeilir
ok fullir meö faguaSi. Hér me^ endrlifnuSu andir
lær^ra^^ manna sem vakendr me'S Jacob af þungum
svefni, því at stigi hár meö stórmerkjum var reistr til
himna. Enn þó at gröf -^^ þessa píslarvotts prýddist 15
dagliga ýmissum veizlum himnakonungs, varo eigi ]>vi
heldi' alvarliga ^^ hreinsut þau iUgirndarlijörtu, er meö
gamalli öfund^^ höf^u grimmazt móti heilögum Thóm-
proves notliing. It is also safe to
assume that the original translator
knew his Bible well enough to be
aware of this being a biblical quo-
tation. The sentence Her matti . .
. . lei^retta is a translation after a
sort of : " Videres Axæ" (probably
written, as in all now known MSS.
of Benedict's Miracula, axe) " con-
*' ferri qnotidie irriguum tarn supe-
" rius quam inferius, his infirmi-
" tates corporum, illis animarum
" suarum vulnera deflentibus," Be-
nedict, Materials, ii. 61, and is, as
Canon Robertson has shown, an
allusion to Caleb's gift to his
daughter Achsah : " Dedit ei "
(e.e. Axæ) " Caleb irriguum supe-
" rius et inferius," Josh. xv. (16-)
19, Judges i. (12-)15, probably
originating, as Canon Robertson
points out. Materials, i., p. 11, note
1, in St. Gregory's interpretation
of the cited places, Dialog., iii. 34.
^ daugguadann, T.
- blojngaþa7i, T.
3 b^þi, T.
■* neþan, T.
5 andrum, T.
^ leiþrietta, T.
" o\>rottnanda, T.
^ i.e. lecytho, from the Greek
X-hKvQos. Cfr. III. Reg,, Vulg.,
xvii, 14, and " lecythus olei non est
'' imminutus," ib. 16.
9 feitt, T.
^0 friosaum, T.
» Hier, T.
*^ kierinn, T.
i=i taulu, T.
14 fraiii, T.
1' medalgaungUy T.
16 krdra;T.
17 grauf, T.
1^ aluarliyha, T.
19 aufund, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 89
Achsah bedewed, and decked with flowers up and down,
for unto some of those, who were weeping there over
their bodily hurts was granted health, and unto others,
grieving over the sores of their soul, was given ease and
help. Here might be seen the oil, that failed not in
the cruse, being the fat and fruitful balsam of the merits
of archbishop Thomas. Here may now be seen, how the
vessels, many in number, were brought with little oil in
them before Elisha, for even so are many brought here
who had lost their health. But by the omnipotence of
God, and the mediation of holy Thomas, they receive in
Canterbury plentiful oil, inasmuch as they come there
hungering and out of health, but turn away whole and
full of joy. Now, too, were reawakened from heavy
slumber the minds of learned men, resembling the watches
about Jacob, for a high ladder of miracles was reared
even up to the very heavens. But daily decked with
various gifts from the King of heaven as was the grave
of this martyr, yet none the more did those malicious
hearts receive any sincere cleansing, who in old envy
had pursued deeds of hatred against the holy Thomas.
90 thó:mas saga erkibyskups.
nn ase. pví at rikismenn í laadinu sjá konungsins
to^thebSief skemmd æ-^ því feiiigri, sem þeir liafa betra mann at
bishop?'' ' hatri haft ok saklausan- ofsóttan alt til lífláts. HéSan-^
leiSir, at hinir hæstu^ liöf^ingjar^ í landinu setja bann
fyrir me^ ognan lifs ok lima, ef nokkurr ^ kallar 5
Thómam erkibyskup helgan e^a^ pislarvott. Enn
hversu ^ ]?etta gekk ut, \dr^ist vitrTim monnum ^ æ^ra ^^
•flestum jarteignum, því at livat er konungsvaldit
kann ogna folkinu, ákafast sókn því meir til graftar ^^
erkibyskups, sva at alb vegr milium Lundima ok 10
Kantúaría, íimmtigi ^^ mílna, var ]?akinn af tilfaranda
fólki ok burtfaranda. Enn af þvílíkri trúfesti fólksins
þurni hot, enn þróaSist umbót, því at jamvel konung-
ar, jallar ok aörir liöfSingjar ^^ sóttu margir um haf
sunnan ^^ me^ mikilli gó^fýst. Hér meS fer þat, at 15
þeir sjálfir. er mesta heitan ok barSmæli-^^ höfSu lagi;
á píslar vætti ^^ erkibyskups, ki'júpa nú til fóta honum
heldr uggendr enn ógnendr, knú^ir me^ vanheilsu e^a^^
ótta ýmissa atbur^a. Hvert er dásamligra verk, enn
at heimrinn tigni pann í dag, er í gær ^^ fyrirleit hann, 20
sæki ^^ )?ann heim í dag meo mjúkum knéföllum,-^ er í
gær-^^ flýíi hann, bi(5i "þann fulltings í dag sinni öndu-^
ok líkama fyrir augliti Gu^s, sem í gær^^ fyrirleit
hann me^ ótta veraldi£js -- valds e^a ^^ eiginlioTÍ illsku
Roger of sekrar samvizku ? Hé^an-^ af er svá skrifat eitt milli 25
of blindness, annara, at Rodgeir erkibyskup af Jork f ékk -^ svá
- saklausann, T.
3 Hieþan,T.
4 h^stu, T.
^ haufdingiar, T.
^ nockur^ T.
7 eþa, T.
s huerssu, T.
^ maunnum, T.
10 ^dra, T.
11 graptar, T.
1- fimtigi, T.
13 haufdingiar, T.
1"* sunnann, T.
1' hardm^U, T.
i^ pislaru^ttíj T.
1" eþa, T.
18 gi^r, T.
19 s^ki, T.
'0 knefaullum, T.
-1 aunduj T.
-- ueralUgs, T.
-3 eþa, T.
24 Hieþan, T.
-5 Jceck, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 91
For the mighty men in the country now see that the king's
shame is all the more keenly felt, the better the man was
whom they had beset with hatred, and whom, although
innocent, they had persecuted even unto death. Hence
it cometh, that the highest lords of the land forbid, under
peril of life and limbs, any one to call archbishop
Thomas a holy man or even a martyr. But the outcome
of this seemeth unto learned men even to surpass most
miracles, for threaten the people with all its might as
the king's power would, the pilgrimages to the arch-
bishop's grave multiply all the more, so much so, that
the whole road from London to Canterbury, fifty miles,
was crowded by people coming to and going fro. On
account of this true faith of the people the threats left
oif, but a reforming spirit manifested itself, for even
kings, earls, and other lords came, many of them from
south over sea, with great devotion. Herewith it now
also cometh to pass, that even those who had used most
threats, and had spoken most fiercely against the mar-
tyrdom of the archbishop, now kneel down at his feet,
fearing far rather than threatening, being forced into this
condition either by ill health or by fear caused by various
visitations. What can be more glorious than this that
the world should worship him to-day whom it despised
yesterday? should throng to fall on its knees meekly
to-day before him from whom it fled yesterday, should
to-day pray him to be of avail for their souls and bodies
before the face of God, upon whom it heaped yesterday
the contumely of the threats of worldly power, or despised
with the inward malice of a guilty conscience. Concern-
ing this it is written amongst other things that arch-
bishop Eoger of York got so violent a pain in his eyes
92
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
stri^an augnaverk, at hann varS blindr báSum augum
ok vi'S þetta áfelli skiftir ^ hann skapi ok lieitir - á
sælan^ Thómam erkibyskup sér til heilsubótar. Her
meS sækir^ hann til Kantúaríam me'S mjúklátri bæn ^
ok frammfalli,^ ok hann fær^ þegar myskunn me'S svá 5
mikilli gjöf, at hann þiggr bæ"Si ^ aftr ^ syn ok fulla
heilsu sinna augna. Snerist hann si^an^^ til heilags
Thomam me'S ástú^ fyrir áleitni, ok mikilli vir^ing^^
fyrir margfaldan ^^ motgang.-^'^ Nú svá mikla næg^ -^^
sem almáttigr Gu^ lag's! upp a jarteignagerð sins vir^u- 10
ligs píslarvotts Thóme, megum vér eigi meira skrifa
þar af til líkingar at tala enn nokkura smádropa, er
hingat fluttust af fyrrum mönnum,^^ hvat er svá byrjast
í nafni Gu'Ss.
KAP. XCI.
15
MlEACULUM AF HINUM HEILAGA ThÓMASI.
Sá ma^r er vel hug^i at öndver^ri^^ sögunni,^'' heyrSi
Robert of
Cretel
relates how p ^ i'i r, iq • ^/-r>ix
hewascurecineindan ^^ oitar ^^ enn um smn prior Kobert, er marga
w^te/of hluti hefir skrifat í latínu sælum -^ Thómasi til virSing-
Thomas'
welL
ar, ok þar af skal í fyrstu setja ]7at, er hann bo bar af 20
sjálfum sér, ok lætr ^^ þa^aa -"^ dreifast til annarra ^^
manna, þat er bin himneska myskunn veittx fyrir erki-
byskupsins ver^leika. pat efni byrjar príórinn me^
kve'Sjusending þeim bró^ur,^* er Benedictus hét.-^ Sá
1 skiftir, T.
2 heitr, T.
3 So Prof. Unger ; sglam, T.
4 s§kir, T.
- b§n, T.
« framfalli, T.
' Ar, T.
« bq\>i, T.
3 aptr, T.
10 si\>an, T.
11 uirþing, T.
12 margfaUþan, T.
i^ Neither by William of Canter-
"burj, nor by Benedict of Peter-
borough, is any allusion made to
this miracle.
14 Tl^gd, T.
1' maunnum, T.
1^ aunduerdri, T.
17 saugunni, T.
1^ nefnþan, T.
19 opiar, T.
20 s^/wm, T.
21 l^tr, T.
22 þa>an, T.
23 annara, T.
2* éro^r, T.
25 Aíeí, T.
THE STORY OP ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 93
that he grew blind on both, in consequence of which
affliction he turned his mind and made vows to holy
Thomas for the healing of his hurt. Hereupon he proceeded
to Canterbury, where he uttered sweet prayers, humbly
kneeling, and forthwith he was mercifully heard, and
on him was bestowed the great boon that the sight and
the full health of his eyes was restored to him. Hence-
forth he turned towards the holy Thomas with love
instead of persecution, and great worship instead of
manifold contrariety. Now of all the abundance of
miracles which God Almighty bestowed on his worthy
martyr Thomas we may write no more thereof, speaking
by way of similitude, than a few drops, which were
brought hither by persons in former days ; and, in the
name of God, we begin thus.
CHAP. CXI.
Miracle of the holy Thomas.
He who gave good heed to the beginning of the story,
must have heard mentioned, more than once, prior
Robert, who hath written in Latin many things to
the glory of the blessed Thomas. Now of these
things must be set down, in the first place, what he an-
nounceth as concerning himself, and even that which,
as he eketh out the story, toucheth the heavenly
mercy gTanted through the merits of the archbishop.
These matters the prior beginneth with a salutation to
a certain brother, hight Benedict. This Benedict had
94 THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
Benedictus hafSi heyrt a því or^ mikit, at lieilagr
Thomas hefSi unnit prior Rodbert fagra jarteign á þann
hátt, at hann. hefSi grætt -^ fotarinein þat undarligt, er
príórinn haföi lengi óhægliga^ borit. Ok til sannrar
vissu J?ar um, skrifar bro^ir Benedictus til priors, at 5
hann geii lionum rue's letri fulla grein, hversu ^ taknit
gerSist, ok þat fær "^ hann me"S þviliku formi.
Bref.
Príórr^ Robert, minnsti þræll^ Gu'Ss þjóna, sendir
bro^ur ^ Benedicto ]?á kve^ju ^ at lifa me^ Gu'Si. Sva 10
sem ]?ú beiddir mik meS astarafli, ger^i ek eftir ^
megni, ok þó minnr vel enn ek vildi, því at klerkdómr^
vannst mer eigi, at skrifa þat miraculum me^ sva
fagrligum hætti,^^ sem skyldan by^r ok krefr mik,
Gu'Si til tignar ok sælum ^^ Thómasi. Hef ek þar þess 15
háttar efni, sem ek var staddr, nú fyrir tólf árum, allt
út í Sikiley. Enn fyrir hverja sök ^^ ek var ]?ar
kominn svá langt hé'San ^^ af mínu fóstrlandi, sé ek eigi
nau'Ssunligt -^* at skrifa í J>essu máli, ok þvi læt ^^ ek
þat um lí^a. Enn þar bar svá til, sem ek ger^i minn 20
veg frá borg Cattania,-^^ at ek ætla-Si^^ framm^^ til
Síracúsam, veik svá vi'S leiSinni,^^ at sá sjór sem heitir
Mare Adriaticum var mér til vinstri handar.^^ pat
heíir þú bæ'Si ^^ heyrt ok lesit, at sá sjór er grimmrar ^^
náttúru me"S straum ok stórri bylgju, einkanliga ^^ 25
1 gr^tt, T.
2 oh§gliga, T.
3 huerssu, T.
5 Prior, T.
7 6roþí>, T.
^ quediu, T.
9 eptir, T.
10 k^tti, T.
^i sqluni, T.
12 söm/í, T.
13 he\>an, T.
i"! naudzsunligt, T.
i^ /?í, T.
i^ So corrected by Prof. Unger
tattharia, T.
17 ^í/arfz, T.
18 /ram, T.
1^ leiþinni, T.
20 hanndar, T.
21 ^>^>^, T.
22 grimrar, T.
23 einkannliga, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 95
heard great rumour gone abroad as to how the holy
Thomas had wrought a beautiful miracle on prior Kobert,
inasmuch as he had cured a certain hurt of his leer which
the prior had borne long with great trouble. And for
the sooth certainty thereof brother Benedict wrote to
the prior praying him to set forth in a full manner in
writing, how the miracle came to pass, which writing
he received in the following form.
Letter.
Prior Robert, the least slave among the servants of
God, to brother Benedict sendeth the greeting that he
may live with God. What thou didst ask of me in the
strength of thy love, I have now done to the best of my
power, though failing to do it as well as I should have
wished, inasmuch as my clerkship sufficed not to write
the miracle in such a fair fashion as duty demandeth and
exacteth of me, for the honour of God and the blessed
Thomas. Now I begin the matter when as, twelve years
ago, I happened to be all the way out in Sicily. But for
what cause I had come there so far away from my native
country, I see no reason to set forth in this writing,
wherefore I let that pass by. Now it so happened, as I
was making my journey from the town of Catania, being
minded to proceed to Syracuse, that the road along
which I was travelling turned such way, that the sea,
called the Adriatic, was on the left hand of me. Thou
hast both heard and read how that sea is of a boisterous
nature, both as to tide and huge surf, most chiefly so if a
96
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
mest, ef sterkr sunnanvindr æsir ^ hann at landinn,
sva at kemr bæ'Si ^ bra^r vo'Si mönimm ok skipi, ef í
]?ann sjó rekr í )>ess hattar storm i. Svo gengr ok
bylgjufall me'S brimi upp a ströndina;"^ ok allt er buit
til brots,^ er fyrir verSr at óvöru,^ því at þat sjófar- 5
kyn er undarliga í akvomu, sem ek fann a sjalfum
mer, því at rett sem minn vegr la me'S öllu ^ framm ^
vit sjoinn, gaf ein alda í atfallinu ^ sva har'San ^ slag •
utan a lærit ^^ ok legginn ni'Sr frá hné, at þegar sló
þrota^^ í lioldit, enn illsligum ro^a utan á hörundit.-^^ 10
pó kvomumst ek framm ^ til Síracúsam, ok leita'Sa ^^
ek fætinum ^^ léttis ^^ á hverja lund, er ek kunni, rue's
rá'Si gó'Sra manna, ok svá skipa'Sist þá fyst ^^ vit plástr
ok annan^^ lækidóm,^^ at þrotinn svina'Si, ok ek þótt-
umst náliga heill. Svo snera ek heimlei'Sis aftr^^ í 15
Róm. Ok sem ek dvaldist þar nokkurar nætr,^*^ þótti
niér enn framar létta ^^ fætiniim,^^ svá at heim hingat
í England í öllum ^^ veg ^^ var mér meinlætalaust.^^
Enn litlu sí^ar minntist aftr^^ þrotinn, ok "þó eigi svá
verkmikiU sem í fyrstu. Bar ek þetta svá níu ár, at 20
ek starfa'Si vi'S minn fót me^ bló"Slátum, plástrum, nær-
ingum,^^ srayrslum ok ýmisligum lækningum.-^ Enn
eftir^^ )?etta li^it þyngir svá meinit, at mín umleitan
vinnr ekki. Grefr þá lærit^^ ok fótinn me"S munnum
^ ^sir, T.
2 b^þi, T.
^ straundina, T.
4 brottz, T.
* ouauru, T,
« aullu, T.
7 fram, T.
^ attfallinu, T.
^ kardann, T.
10 /^yzí, T.
» þrotta, T.
12 haurunditf T.
13 tótoþa, T.
14 f^tinum, T.
15 Zie«ís, T.
16 So Prof, linger ; /msí, T.
17 annann^ T.
18 l^kidom, T.
19 apír, T.
20 n^tr, T.
21 /teíto, T.
22 fqtinum, T.
23 aulluin, T.
24 we^Æ, T.
25 meinl^talaust, T.
26 aptr.T.
27 n^ringum, T.
28 l§kingum, T.
29 €ptir,T.
30 /fr^•í, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 97
strong south wind urge it on unto the land, so that speedy
danger awaiteth both men and ships that may happen to
drift into that sea in such a storm. In such manner
breakers tumble against the shore with great surf, that
ever3rthing is in risk of being wrecked which happeneth
to be taken imawares, for the nature of that sea is mar-
vellous strange when it toucheth aught, as I found out,
concerning myself; for just as my way lay close along
the very sea, a billow travelling against the shore smote
me so hard outside on the thigh and the leg down below
the knee, that the flesh swelled forthwith, and the skin
was smitten with malignant redness. Yet I found my
way unto Syracuse, and I sought for my leg every kind
of ease I could think of, according to the advice of good
men, and at first a change was brought on througli
plasters and other medicines, so that the swelling went
down, and I thought I was well nigh whole again. Then
I returned on my way back to Rome, and for the several
nio-hts I dwelt there I thouo'ht the leoj was still more
relieved, so that all the way home to England I was
free from pain. But shortly afterwards the swelling made
itself felt again, yet not so painful as it had been in the
first case. And this I bore for nine years, endeavouring
to cm-e my leg by bleeding, by plasters, nourishment,
ointment, and sundry medicines. But all these things
having been tried, the hurt grew so heavy that all at
tempts were of no avail. Whereupon the thigh and the
K 541. Í'
98
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
ok vogföllum ^ bæ'Si - uppi ok ni'Sri, enn j^rotinn sva
geystr, at liann vav eigi lægri ^ enn lærit '^ sjalft nndir.
Enn )?ar sem fotrinn sýndist slettari ^ ok minnr bias-
inn, )?utu upp^ smábólur me^ óvera, enn sumsta^ar
blö^rur^ stórar me"S vatni ok sYÍ"Sa. GjurSist nú náliga 5
allr fotrinn graiinn me^ hoi ok þeim sárleik, at ek
mátti varla ])ola klæSi ^ af lagt e"Sa ^ yiir. Ok sva
sog'Su '^^ phisici, at ek hef^i efalaust fengit þat mein, er
morbus kronicus lieti/^ ok aldri ma manns ^- hendi
grætt ver'Sa. Enn ]}ó gaf Gu"S mer J^ann styrk, at ek 10
bar mik jafnan til heilagrar kirkju ; enn J^at er ek leysti
sk^^ldunnar minnar/^ var-5 ek allt sitjandi ^^ at gera,
eigi si'Sr þótt ek ger^i sermonem fyrir staSarfolki váro.
Ok Í ]?eim srSasta^"" argang, er ek bar J^enna sjúkdóm,
J73^ngdi mer sva mjök móti páskum, at ek felP*^ í hug- 15
arangr, ef ek skyldi öngva^^ J^jónustu gjöra mega hvarki
Drottins viirs pinu ne ^^ dýrðligri upprisu. Ok hvat
meira ehv leno-ra, ek ba^ liknar Drottin mvskumisam-
an,^^ ok bann heyr^i mig sj^ndugan, veitandi mer þá
hupo-an fra skirdegi ok framm ~^ um fior^a dao- paska, 20
at þat embætti •^■^ mátti ek allt fremja innan kirkju,
sem framast laut at mimii skyldu. Enn he^an — upp i
fra laust aftr'-^ verk ok minni vesöld framar enn fyrr,
ef ]mt mátti. Kom ]?at nú í hjarta, sem ek heyr^i
dagiiga ])Sl\i blezobu takn, er heilagr Thomas erkibysk- 25
up vann i Kantúaría, at ek munda sækja -^ legsta^
bans, hvat sem mik kostaiSi. Ok J^at tok ek ra^s, at
^ uogfaullum, T.
2 6fþ/, T.
3 Iqgri, T.
-* Iqrit, T.
^ sliettari, T.
^ So Prof, linger
" hlaudrur, T.
5 kl^di, T.
9 eþa, T.
'^^ saugdu, T.
" hieti, T.
12 vianz, T.
ypp, T.
miliar, T.
So Prof, linger ; sitafidij T.
siþazta, T.
Jieil, T.
aungua, T.
nie, T.
myskunsamann, T.
fra7n, T.
emb^tti, T.
hieþan, T.
aptr, T.
s^kia, T.
THE ST07ÍY OF AKCHBISHOP THO^rAS. 09
leg iilcemted with open sores and matter issuing therefrom
both np and down, the very swelling growing as high even
as was the thickness of the thigh itself But where the
leg seemed smoother and less sw^ollen, there small boils
would burst out with itching, while in other places large
blains blew up filled with water and smarting sorely.
And now the leo- became nearly all hollow with o-atherino-
matter, accompanied by such pain that I might scarcely
endure any covering laid thereon or lifted thereoff. And
the phj^sicians said that I had, without doubt, caught the
disease which is called onorhus chronicus, and is not to be
healed by the hand of man. Yet God gave me such strength
withal, that I could always get to holy church, but when-
ever I ministered to my duties, I had to do all things a-
sitting, yea, even when I preached sermons befcDre the
people of our city. And during the last year that I bore
this ilhiess, the hurt grew so sore on me towards Easter-
tide that I fell into heaviness of mind, lest I should not
be able to minister to any service at our Lord's Passion
or His glorious Resurrection. What more or further ? I
prayed the gracious Lord for His mercy, and He listened to
me^a sinner, granting me the comfort that from Maundy
Thursday even unto the fourth day after Easter, I might
do all service within the church which it was chiefly my
duty to perform. But after this my hurt grew painful
anew, even more so than before, if more it could be. It
now entered my heart, on hearing dail}^ reports of the
blessed miracles which the holy archbishop Thomas was
working at Canterbur}^, that I had better visit his grave,
whatever it might cost me. Having made up my mind.
G 2
100
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
ek hrærSa^ inik heiman, ok framm- fékk^ ek
komizfc til Kantúaríam mæddr "^ af vecrarlenofd ok
laminn af meinlætum ^ mins sjúkna^ar. Fram fell ^
ek til grafar GuSs pislarvotts, bi^jandi liknar ok lækn-
ingar ' í hans árna^aror^i yí^ vám Herra. Ok svá 5
reis ek ]?a^an ^ upp, at ek haf^i meira ^ þegit, enn
mer væri ^^ þá enn kunnigt. Fékk ^^ ek mer vatn liins
sigTiaSa Thome, ok bar ek a fotinn, á^r ek for at sofa.
Ok sva geriSa ek þrjú kveld hvert eftir^- annat. Sem
ek veik aftr^^ í veg, skipaSist nú annan veg^^ vi^ 10
rekstrinn enn fyr, )?vi at nii letti ^^ dag ^^ fra degi, sva
at fotr var alheill, er ek kom heim, sva at livergi sa
mark e^a^^ munna, blöSru^^ né-^'^ bólu, at harm hef^i
sjúkr verit. Máttu ]?a sja ok skilja, minn kærasti -°
bro^ir, hver lof ok J;akklæti-^ }?eir mimdu gjalda Gu^i 15
ok hans virSuligiim piningarvott, er se^-- hofSu minn
langan vanmatt. Ok )?at segi ek þinni elsku, at til
allrar aflraunar -^ er sa fotr minn miklu önio^grari -^ enn
sa annarr,-^ er aldri syktist. Nii er úti meS sannend-
um )7etta efni. Geymi þik Gu^, minn góöi vin, ok 20
efli Jntt bro-Semi til sinna bo'Soi'Sa.-^
^ hr^rda, T.
- fram, T.
3 Jieck, T.
■* 7n(ddr, T.
^ meinlqtum, T.
c fiell, T.
" l^hiingaTy T.
s þaþöw, T.
° So Prof. Unger ; mer a, T.
10 u^ri, T.
11 Fieck, T.
1- eptir,T.
13 aptr, T.
1-^ uegh, T.
15 Uetti, T.
16 da^h T.
1' c]>„ T.
IS blauþrn, T.
19 nie, T.
20 hiqrazti, T.
-1 þackl^ti\ T.
-- s/ci/, T.
-3 So Prof. Unger ; alfni7i7iar, T.
-"• auruggariy T.
-5 annar, T.
-•^ Tliis letter is found among
Benedict's Mii-acula, Materials, ii,,
pp. 97-101, as addi-essed, at Bene-
diet's request, to himself. But the
differences between the two texts
are so great, that the Latin text of
the letter, as we have it now, could
not hare been the Icelandic trans-
lator's original. See Preface.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 101
I betook me from home, and worked my way to Canter-
bury, weary with the long journey and sorely smitten
with the hurt of my sickness. I knelt down at the grave
of God's martyr praying for mercy and healing through
his word of intercession with our Lord. And up I rose
from that place in such a manner that I had received
more than at the time I was aware of. Now I got the
water (from the w^ell) of St. Thomas, wherein I bathed
the leg before I went to sleep ; the which I did for three
nights running. When I turned back on my way home,
the disease took a different turn at my attempts at
driving it out, for now I grew easier day by day, so
that, when I came home, my leg was thoroughly whole,
there being nowhere a mark or a scar to be seen,
neither blain nor boil to show that it had ever been
diseased. Now thou mayest see and understand, my
dearest brother, what praise and thanks they gave unto
God and His worthy martyr who had seen my long in-
firmity. And I tell your love, that for any exertion
this leg is much stronger than the other, which never was
diseased. Now this matter is truly told to the end. May
God preserve thee, my good friend, and strengthen thy
brotherhood in the keeping of all His commandments.
102 ' THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
KAR XCII.
Af jarteignagerdum hins heilaga Thome.
Amairaed i^u er aftr ^ at venda í sömii - frásögn,'"^ er næst ^
thoi-oufrhiy var lesiD, ]7ví at tvífölclu ^ efni ma vist ei andsvara
rae^ einligri frásögn.*^ Byrjar þar nú annat sino, 5
Sem príóiT ^ Robert er í Kantúaría iiieS sitt fotar-
mein, heyrir bann í staSnum mikla frægS ^ af þeiri
jarteigD, er bleza^r Tbomas bafSi litki imnit, ok sa
ma>)r, sein beilsubotina bafSi fengit ok p'egit, bafSi far
fyrir fain dogum '^ verit. Enn Jnit tákn var flutt svá 10
miki]lar dvrSar, at beilao-r Tbomas befSi gefit bonum
aftr^^ bæ^i-^^ augu, er á^r váro útstungin, ok þar me 6
eistim, er lit váro bleypt af manna voklum ^- ok í jör^
graiin. pessi ma^r var kynjaSr af ]?eim kaupsta^, er
Dedeford beitir. pat var í byskupsdæmi ^^ ok sýski 15
virSuligs berra Húgónis Dunelmensis. Enn er príórr ^^
Robert skib\ at sa maSr beiir nf farit burt af Kancia
Í sömo ^^ bálfu landsms, sem nú bggja bans vegar
heimleiSis, by^r bann sinn förnneyti/'^ at J^eir kosti
me^ albi frett ^^ ok eftirleitan ^^ at fa þenna mann, at 20
príórrinn beyri af &jálfum, bvat Gu§ bafði gert í sínum
stórtáknum. Ok me^ vilja várs Herragengr svá til
efnis, at rett ^^ úti á veginum mæta-*^ þeir )7essum manni,
þar er Iiann ^.'^noq- mæoibora,-^ ok dóttir bans eiii me5
Evidencefor bonum. Príórr -- lætr -'^ J>á eigi lengi at biSum, spyr, 25
' hvárt bann er sá maSr, er augu sín ok eistii bafói
' aptr, T.
- saumu, T.
•* frasangn, T,
■^ n^st, T.
^ ttLÍfaulldu, T.
^ frasaugn, T.
"> prior, T.
^ daugum. T.
^o aptr, T.
11 bq\>i, T.
12 uauUdum, T.
13 byskupsdqmiy T.
i^ prior, T.
i'' sauvWf T.
1*^ faiiruneyti, T.
17 friett, T.
i^ eptirleitaiiy T.
i'' riett, T.
20 m^ta, T.
-1 iH^þiliga, T.
22 Prior, T.
23 htr, T.
THE STOEY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 103
CHAP. XCII.
Of the miracles of St. Thomas.
Now it behovetli to return unto the same tale that we
read even now, as two events may nowise be set forth
in one single story. So anotlier tale begins thus : While
prior Robert with the hurt of his leg sojourneth at Can-
terbury, he heareth in the city great praise spoken of a
certain miracle which the blessed Thomas had then lately
wi'ought; the man, who had got his health restored, having
been there a few days before. And of this miracle the great
glory was set forth, that the holy Thomas had given him
back again both his eyes, which had already been gouged
out, and therewithal, too, his testicles, which by the hand of
man had been taken out of him and buried in the eartlj.
This man v/as a native of the market-town of Detford,
within the bishopric and diocese of lord Hugh of Durham.
But when prior Robert heareth, that this man hath lately
left Canterbury and gone into the same part of the country
through which his ways now lie homew^ards, he enjoineth
his company to try by every inquiry and search to get hold
of this man, in order that the prior may hear for himself
what God hath wrought for him in his great miracles.
And by the will of our Lord it so cometh to pass, that on
the open road they meet this very man whereas he walk-
eth wearily on with one of his daughters beside him. The
prior then tarrieth not, but asketh if he be the man who
104 THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
aftr ^ fengit ok J?egit fyrir ver'Sleik hin>s heilaga Thome.
Hinn jatar því bæ^i^ íljótt ök gia^liga, segir )7at svá
satt, sem Gu'S er ok ríkir á himnum, at þessir limir
váro honum aftr^ gefnir fyrir Thómam erkibyskup.
pat lætr ^ hann ok fylgja, at þegar í fyrstu er haim 5
var kvaklr í afláti limanna, sag^ist hann kallat hafa
sælan'* Thómam ser til dugna^ar, ok )?ar fyrir ö^lazt^
svá mikla myskunn, sem nú mátti sýnast. Svo skilj-
ast þeir, at príórr^ gefr hoimm nokkura peninga fyrir
vináttu heilagfs Thóme. Rí'Sr^ hann sí^an framm^ til 10
Lundúna, ok sem hann sitr þar yfir bor^ um kveldit
me'S sinni fylgd, kemr einn ókiinnr klerkr utan at
herberginu ok bi^r orlofs inn fyrir hann. Sem liann
kemr ok ]?eir talast me^, segir hann priori ]?á sögu/*^
at þar í sta^num var fyrr nefndr Húgó byskup Dun- 15
elmensis, segist vera einn af bans klerkum, ok vottar
J?at eyrendi byskupsins at vitja gröf ^^ heilags Thóme.
Príórr ^ spyr þá, hvort klerkrinn liefir nokkura kynn-
ing af þeim manni, er hann fann á veginum úti.
Klerkrinn segir, at me'S ]?eim manni íiytjast fullkomin^^ 20
sannindi, at Thomas erkibyskup hefir gert meS honum
hit ágætasta ^^ verk í aftrskipan ^^ þeira lima/^ er fyr
váro tjá^ir, ok hann segir svá klerkrinn : " Minn herra
" byskupinn/' sag^i hann, '' vildi grun á bera i fyrstu,
" er hami heyr^i, því at svá mikit verk sýnist honum 25
" standa at gera meS lögligu^^ skilriki, ok þvi sta'S-
" festi hann meS luSi bræ'Sra^*' sinna, at hann sendi
" tvo sannor^a menn til Dedeford, at );eir skyldi
" eftir ^^ leita viS valdsmenn sta^arins, hvárt þessir
1 aptr, T.
- ki>i, T,
■' ktr, T.
^ s^lann, T.
^ audlaz, T.
^ prior j T.
7 Ri\>r, T.
« fram, T.
'J saugu, T.
í'J yrauf, T.
^^ fuUkominn, T.
1- agi^tazta, T.
^"^ aptrsJdpan, T.
'^ /mtt inserted by the editor ;
Prof. Unger proposes hluta.
^' lauyligu, T.
1Ö br^dra, T.
17 epí2>, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 105
had got again his eyes and parts through the merit of the
holy Thomas. Unto this the man answereth yea, quickly
and rejoicingly ; avouching it to be as true even as God
abideth and reigneth in heaven, that these very limbs
were restored to him through archbishop Thomas. Here-
unto he addeth that, even at first, when he was tortured
with the loss of these limbs, he had called unto the blessed
Thomas to avail him, and had received thereby the great
mercy which now was manifested in him. In such a
manner they part, that the prior giveth him some money
out of love to the holy Thomas. Thereupon he rideth
away unto London, and Avhilst he sitteth at table with
his company in the evening, a strange clerk cometh from
outside unto the chamber, praying for leave to go in to
see the prior. When he cometh in and they begin to
talk together, he telleth the prior, that the very bishop
Hugh of Durham aforenamed was in the town, he being
himself one of his clerks, and avoucheth it to be the
bishop's errand to go visit the tomb of the holy Thomas.
The prior then asketh if he know aught of the man whom
he had met abroad on the road. The clerk answereth
that that man bringeth a full true talc of archbishop
Thomas havino; done unto him the most glorious deed in the
restoration of those parts which were mentioned before ;
and further the clerk speaketh : " My lord, the bishop,"
said he, " was at first minded to misdoubt the story hcar-
" ing it, for so great a miracle, it seemed to him, must be
'•' established by lawful proof; he therefore resolved, with
" the consent of his brethren, to send two truthful men
" to Detford, to inquire of the authorities of the town,
" whether these things had come to pass, even as the tale
106 THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
" hlutir heféi svá gerzt/ sem frá fluttist. Ok þeira,
" er sendir varo, profaSist svá me^ sannindum, at
" sag Sir limir varo brutt teknir af manninura, Í jör^'^
'' grafnir ok fóttro^nir. Enn nú var öllum Ijóst í
'' Dedeford, at sami maSr haf^i skygn augu, enn eigi 5
" var l^eim sva kunnigt, at hann hefSi getna^arlimina
" aftr ^ l^egit. Enn sa hlutr lýstist ]?á framai", er ]7essi
" maSr for briitt af Dedeford ok í meiri nálægS * viS
'' byskupsstol mins lierra, því at hann sendi mik ok
" annan klerk Kato at skoSa likam mannsins,^ livárt 10
'• hann hefSi alia sina limu. Ok sem viS fluttum
" honum aftr ^ fiillkomin sannindi þess hlutar, at sa
^' maSr var óskaddr heilsu meö náttúrligum líkam,
" gladdist minn lierra, gerandi margfaldar j^akkir GirSi
" ok háleitum bans pislarvott. Ok meS því at þessi 15
" maSr var fátækr^ ok bjost nu framm ^ í j)ílagríms-
" fer'S veg^ bins beilaga Tbome, gaf minn berra til
'' ferSar balfa mörk ^ silfrs." Svo sag^i klerkr þessi.
Enn um morguninn eftir ^^ gekk ^^ príórr ^'^ Robert at
vitja byskup Hugonem, þar sem bann sat me^ sinu 20
foriineyti/^ var þá enn i því samsæti^^ talat af ];essari
jarteign me^ andlignm fagnaSi, því at byskiipinn sjálfr
sag^i bana, sem nj^vor^in ti^indi.^^ Ok J?at efni lykt-
ast sva.
KAP. XCIIL 25
Af jarteignum hins heilaga Thome ebkibyskups.
Príórr ^- Robert sem bann baf^i J^egit beilsnbot,
ger^ist mörgu sinni ástsamligr pílagrímr bins beilaga
1 gerdz, T.
" iaurd, T.
^ aptr,T.
4 naiggd, T.
^ manzins, T.
6 fat^kr, T.
'' fram, T.
8 uegh, T.
maurky T.
10 eptir, T.
1» (lieck, T.
^- prior, T.
1' faxirunejftiy T.
1* sams^ti, T.
1* tiþindi, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 107
" went. And the messengers proved with full truth that
'' the man had been deprived of the said limbs, and that
" they had been buried in the earth and trodden under
" foot. But now it was manifest to all folk of Detford,
'' that this same man saw with both his eyes, but they
'' had not the same knowledo^e of his havinii had his
" manly parts restored to him. But that matter became
" better known afterwards, when this man left Detford,
'' and came to dwell in closer neighbourhood to the see
" of m}^ lord, for he sent me, and another clerk, named
" Kato, to view the body of the man, as to wliether he
'' had all his limbs entire. And as we brought back to
" him the full truth in the matter that the man was un-
'• impaired in health and with a natural body, my lord
" was gladdened, giving manifold praises to God and his
'* exalted martyr. And inasmuch as this was a poor
'' man, and now made ready to go on a pilgrimage to the
" holy Thomas, my lord gave him to that end one half
'•' mark of silver." Thus the clerk told his tale. But the
next morning prior Robert went to see bishop Hugh
where he was staying wdth his company, and joined
them at table, where he spoke of this miracle with
spiritual joy, for the bishop himself related it as an event
which had lately come to pass. And in this wise that
matter cometh to an end.
CHAP. XCIIT.
Of the miracles of the holy archbishop Thomas.
Prior Kobert, having got back his health again, became
many a time a loving pilgrim of the holy archbishop
108 THÓ:srAS saga erkibyskups.
Robert of Thóme erkibyskups. Her me^ vottar hann í sínu
Cncklade J l
testifies of ietri, at flokkar sottii til Kanciam af öllum^ áttum í
many pil- '
primages to r,eiina tima, eio-i at eins Eno-lands hálfum, heldr Skot-
Canterbury. • ^ o o ' ^ ^
lands ok Frakklands,- ok enn heldr vi'Sri veröld,
árna^aror^ at sækja^ ok heilsugjafii' þiggja nie'S ver^- 5
toiSp^'f leikiim ]7ess haleita píslarvátts, er ]?ar hvilii\ Ok til
mSS'piu^^ marks her um, segir baun, at einn tima, sem bami
SefbiS'- ^^^^^ ^^^ Kanciam, var ]iqx kominn einn \arSuligr erki-
byskup af Austrbálfuuni ok primas, bans erkistoll var
Í þeiii bálfu veraldar, er menn kalla Nigros Montes. 10
Hans eyrendi var j^at einkanligt"^ í Yestrbálfuna alt
nor^r bingat a England at vitja legsta^ar bins beilaga
Tbóme me^ J^ægiligii ^ lotning ok mjúkum bænum.^
HafSi bann ok nor^r í löndin ' jafnframm^ nytsamlig
kirkjunnar eyrendi me'S bo^skap ok brefum Alexandri 15
páfa, ]>6 at ]:>at greinist eigi framar. KórsbræSr^ ok
einkanlio'a ^^ forma^rinn í Kancia toku bann me^
miklum fagna^i ok vænum^^ kosti. PríóiT^"^ Robert var
Í ]7eirri veizlu, ok sem j^eir-"^^ váro gladdir í Gu^s gjöfum,
spurSi^^ bann erkibyskup, bvat einkanligt ^ bann leiddi 20
allt af ^^ Austrriki svá lano-t í NorSrbálfuna. Erki-
byskupinn svarar bonum lítilátliga: "Síi'aminn:" segir
bann, " iindrast eigi vara kvomii, ];vi at y^r Englands-
" mönnum^^ gaf berra Gu^ sva dýröbgaji píslarvott,
'' at bann fyllir náliga allan ^'^ heim me^ sinum stor- 25
'• táknum, ok sem ver sottum noi'Sr bingat um fjallit,
" beyrSum ver skilrikuliga sagt, at ber mimi bratt
" koma sa ma'Sr, er meS brefum ber ySrum eyrum mikla
aullum, T.
Fraklanz, T.
s^ltia, T.
einkannligtf T.
þ^giligrt, T.
b^num, T.
laundirij T.
iafmfram,, U.
Korsbrqdr^ T.
^'^ einkannliga, T.
" u^minij T.
12 Prior, T.
13 }peir added by Prof. Unger.
1^ spyrdi, T.
1' a/ added by Prof. Unger.
1^ Englanzmaunyium, T.
17 allann, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS, 109
Thomas, In his writings he testifieth that crowds of
people flocked to Canterbury about this time, not only
from England, but also from Scotland and France, yea
moreover, from all the wide world, to obtain his inter-
cession, and to receive the restoration of their health
through the merit of the exalted martyr who resteth
there. And in testimony thereof he relateth, that once,
when he went to Canterbury, a worthy archbishop and
primate from Eastern lands had come there, whose arch-
see was in that region of the world which men call Ni-
gros Montes. His errand into the Western parts was
chiefly to go all the way north hither to England to visit
the resting place of St. Thomas with fitting humility and
sweet prayers. He also had on hand, travelling into the
Northern lands, sundry weighty matters concerning the
church, together with messages and letters from pope
Alexander, although that matter is not further set forth
here. The canons, and most chiefly the head ruler at
Canterbury, received him with good cheer and choice fare.
At that feast prior Kobert was also present, and whereas
they had become gladdened with God's gifts, he asked
the archbishop what matter had most chiefly brought him
all the way from the Eastern realms so far into Europe.
The archbishop answers him humbly : " Sir," says he,
'* wonder not at our coming here, for unto you, Engiish-
" men, God gave such a wondrous martyr, that he fiUeth
" nearly all the world with his miracles ; for as we were
" proceeding on our way northwards over the Alps, we
" heard truthfully told that there would soon arrive a
" certain person, who by the letters he carrieth will
110
THOMAS SAGA ErvKIBYSKUPS.
nyjnng,^ at hann hafi frjálsazt af snoru - dau^ans
A man
hanged at
Perigord
kept mira-
culously
alive by
archbishop
Thomas.
'' fyrir ]7essa Gu'Ss vinar verSleika. Enn fyrir iitan
" hafit er næg'S^ bans jartegna, sem vær^ megum
'•' ySr mei) engu moti greina."
Gjörðist svá litlu sí'Sar, sem erkibyskup fyrir sagSi, 5
at Sii iiia'Sr kom til Kantúaríam austan af Equitania
ok J>eim stab, er Petragoris heitir, hann liaf^i meS
ser skilrikt letr byskupsins Petragoricensis ok enn
fleiri læröra^ manna til vitnisburSar ok mikillar dá-
semdar,^ sem lionnm veittist. Brefin " vottu-Su, at 10
J^essi ma'Sr var liengdr á gálga, enn fyrir hverja sök^
];at gerSist, vill príórr Ptobert um líí)a sakir lang-
niælis,^ l^at var a sumartima nærri ^^ "sólstö^u,^^ sem
dagar ver'Sa lengstir. Hekk ^^ ]?essi ma"Sr uppi allt
fra J^ri'Sju stund til elleftu, ok vit nott sjálfa kom 15
húspreyja bans ok frændr ^^ me'S J?ví orlofi dómarans,
at taka hann til graftar. Enn er hann kom a jör^,
settist hann upp. Bra monnnm )?á ýmisliga vi^, því
at snmir flý'Sii, enn a^rir, þeir er hugsterkari váro
e^r ^'^ meir elsku^u hann/^ héldust ^^ \r6, spyrjandi ];ó 20
me'S undran, hvat um væri.^^ Enn hann tekr sjálfs
síns höndum ^^ )m hiilning af ásjónunni, sem kvalarinn
haf'Si fengit honum í uppfestíngunni, lítr sí^an ^^ skýr-
liga J^eim á bak, er frá honum ílýja, ok talar svá :
" lívar fyrir renna þessir svá hart, e^a^*^ hvat hræöast^^ 25
" \úv, at ek heíi öngvan -- dag gla^ara átt ok haft á
" minni æfi,-^ l^ví at hinn sælasti -^ Gu^Ss píslarvottr
^ nyung, T.
- snaurUf T.
3 n^gd, T.
4 u^r, T.
5 I^rdra, T.
^ dasemþar, T.
' Brefuin, T.
8 sauk, T.
9 la?igm§lis, T.
10 jiqrri, T.
11 sohtaudu, T.
12 Hiech, T.
13 fr^ndr, T.
i^ eþr, T.
i^ hanu added by Prof. Unger.
16 hiellduz, T.
17 ueri, T.
i^ haujidum, T.
19 siþan, T.
20 eþa,T.
-1 hr^daz, T.
22 So Prof. Unger ; aungna, T.
23 f/?, T.
2* s^lazti, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. Ill
bring unto your ears great news, inasmuch as he hath
been freed from the snare of death through the merits
■ <j
of this friend of God. But beyond the see there is
such an abundance of his miracles as we may in no
wise relate."
Now it came to pass, shortly afterwards, even as the
archbishop had foretold, that the man he had spoken of
came to Canterbury travelling fi'om the east from a place
in Equitania called Perigord, bringing with him letters of
evidence, from the bishop of Perigord and sundry learned
men beside, testifying to the great mh-acle which had
been wrought on him. The letters made good, that this
man had been hanged on a gallows, but for what cause,
prior Robert avoideth mentioning on the plea of pro-
lixity ; this happened in summer-time near the solstice
season, when the days are longest. This man hung up
from the third even unto the eleventh hour, and by
night his wife and kinsfolk came with leave from the
judge to take him down for burial. But when he came
down on the earth, he sat up. At this the people were
wondrously affrighted, some flying away, but others,
who were either stouter of heart or loved him more,
remaining quiet, questioning with wonderment what
was the matter. He now removeth from the face the
coverinor which the executioner had done round it when
o
he hung him up, and gazeth with clear eyes in the
direction of those who fled away from him, and speaketh :
" Why do these folk run so hard, or what are they afraid
'' of ? why, I have never had a more pleasant day in my
'' life, for the most blessed of God's martyrs, archbishop
112 THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
'^ Thomas erkibyskup lyfti ^ mer upp ok styrkti mik
" hunangligum sætleikum/ J?ví at ek hugsa^i hans
" dýrö ok heilagieik, aSr snaran pindi mik, ok si^an
" gaf him mer hvikl ^ enn öngva ^ pisl." Enn er
]7essa manns ^ or^ heyrast sva skyr ok fagna^arfull, 5
sniia ]>eiv aftr,^ er a^r flf^u, lofandi ok dyrkandi varn
Drottinn ok hans haleita pislarvott.
Nu samti^a sem ]?essi ma'Sr kom í Kantúaríam, var
];ar viröuligr^ herra ok vigsluson Thome Kogerus Yi-
gornensis byskup, J>vi at hann sótti þangat oftliga ^10
me^ sannri ástú'S. pví gladdist hann miklum fagna"Si
af J?eiri sögn^ ok letrum, sem nu var lesit. HafSi
hann ok samtal vit J'ann mann, at vita sem gjörst
alia grein, hversu gjörzt^*^ hafSi, ok honum áheyranda
leggr sa ma'Sr til vaxtar jarteigninni, at þann hnút, 15
er kvalarinn setti a virgulinn, let^^ hann mæta^-
sjálfum barkanum, at því brá^ara skyldi hann slokkna.
Ok þenna virgul tviskifti ^^ byskupinn í Petragoris/^
)?vi at hann vildi, at í ]?eiri kirkju lifSi til dyr^ar^^
sælum ^^ Thóraasi erkibyskupi æfinlig -^^ minning ]?essa 20
stórmerkis, enn ]?ann hluta sem byskupinn leif^i,
flutti pílagrímrinn til Kantúaríam, ok ];ar me'S þá
flíku, er honum var fest fyrir augu, ok þetta hvort-
tveggja var bundit upp hátt fyrir allra manna augum
í Kantúaríensis kirkju. Hér me^ for ]?at til fyllingar, 25
at einn sæmiligr^^ kennima^r af sömo^^ borg Petra-
goris^^ sótti ]^enna tíma til Kantúaríam, vottandi svá
' íypti, T.
- SQtleiJuiniy T.
^ huilhJ, T.
•* aungua, T.
5 manz, T.
•> aptr,T.
^ iiirþuliyr, T.
^ optliga, T.
9 saugu, T.
10 giordz, T.
ii liet, T.
•■"^ tuiskipti, T.
i^ So Prof. Unger ; Fetagoris, T.
^'^ dyr]>ar, T.
^*'* sg/?íw, T.
1' ?^«//v, T.
i^ s^miligr, T.
i'' saufjio, T.
-'^ So Prof. Unger ; Petagoris, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 1V3
" Thomas lifted me up, and strengthened me by honeyed
" sweetness even because I called to mind his glory and
" holiness just before the snare was to torture me, where-
" upon it gave me only rest, but no pain." But when the
man's words are heard so clear and full of rejoicing, those
who had fled returned thereat, praising and glorifying
the Lord and his exalted martyr.
At the same time that this man came to Canterbury,
there happened to be staying there the worthy lord and
consecration son of Thomas, Roger bishop of Worcester, for
he would often repair thither in true love. He was there-
fore greatly gladdened by the tale and the letters we
have just read of. He also spoke to the man, in order to
gain the fullest knowledge of the matter, as to how it
had come to pass ; and in his hearing the man addeth this
to the tale of the miracle, that the executioner liad put
the knot of the halter right against the weasand, in order
that his life might the sooner be extinguished. And this
halter the bishop of Perigord divided in two parts,
desiring that in the church of that city there should be
a perpetual reminder of this miracle for the glory of the
holy archbishop Thomas ; but that part, which was left
by the bishop, the pilgrim brought to Canterbury, and
therewithal also the clout which had been fastened round
his eyes ; and both these things were hung high up
before the eyes of all folk within the church of Canter-
bury. This matter was still more fully established by a
worthy teacher of this same city of Perigord happening
to visit Canterbury about this time, who testified to the
KöU. H
114
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
Robert of
Cricklade
saw himself
the halter
hung up in
Canterbury
Cathedi-al.
Robert of
Cricklade
proves the
miracle to
have been
true and
genuine.
vor^in ^ oil - ]?e5si sannindi. Her iipp yfir talar svá
Kobert príórr :^ " Eigi var ek í Kantúaría, J>á er
'' ]?etta for framm^ enn litlu si^ar kom ek þangat at
"■ bi^ja raer myskunnar, ok þegar sem ek hafSi tignat
" virSuligan ^ gröft ^ herra Thome erkibyskups, spur^i 5
" ek þann fyrsta bró^ui', er ek farm, hvat satt væri ^
'' af uppfestingarmauni ];eim, er nu for af mikit or^."
Enn miinkrinn vikr þegar sinni Lendi upp í kirkju-
bolfit ok segir sva : " Se ^ knmpan/' sag^i hann, '' J^ar
" mattu lita virgulinn til vitnis, bversu^ sonn^^ er jar- 10
" teignin.^^ Ok ];at vil ek segja ]?ér me'S, at sva flytja
" nu pílagrímar af Aquitannia, at sa hlutr af vi^mmi/"^
" er Petragoricensis byskup belt^^ eftir,^'* skini morg-
" um ^^ jarteignum ok margföldum ^^ táknum."
Nú hverr^" sem stundar, segir príórr Robert, at 15
dimma þetta dyr^artakn me^ ósannligu mótkasti/^ má
ek leggja bonum ];ar í móti læging^^ ok aftrkast^*^ fyrir
fuUkomin sannindi. Sú er or^ao-er^ vondra manna í
)?essu efni, at maSr megi margar stundir lifa á gálg-
anum, ef snaran vei-^r log^ -^ fyrir ofan barka, sem 20
næst^'^ hökunni.^ Enn hér má bera mót pvílíkan ^^
vott, því at í æsku ^^ minni tala^a ek mörgu ^*^ sinni
vi'S þann mann, er bangit haf^i, ok þá líf me^ þeim
atvikum, sem nú skal ek segja. pat málb;yT:jast svá,
J^essum manni til áfellis, at kappsamir menn ok gildir 25
^ uor)pm, T.
2 anll, T.
2 prior, T.
-* fram, T.
^ rdrdidigann, T.
^ graupt, T.
' u§ri, T.
8 Sie, T.
^ hucrssu, T.
-•^ saunn, T.
•^ iarteigninn, T.
^2 uiþnnni, T.
'•' h'p/n, T.
i^ eptir^T.
^^ maurgum, T.
^^ margfaulldum, T.
1' hier, T.
ís mothkasti, T.
19 kgi7ig, T.
20 aptrkast, T.
21 langd,T.
22 »^sí, T.
23 haukunni, T.
2^ þuilihajm, T.
25 ^S^M, T.
"" v'fivrqv. T,
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 115
truth of all these things having befallen in this very
manner. Concerning this prior Robert speaketh thus :
" I was not myself at Canterbury, when these things
" came to pass, but shortly afterwards I came there to
'^ pray for mercy for myself, and forthwith, as I had
" worshipped at the tomb of the worthy lord archbishop
" Thomas, I asked the first brother I met, what was the
" truth of that hanged man, about whom there was then
'' such great rumour abroad." But the monk pointed
with his hand up to the vault saying : '' Lo, good fellow,"
said he, '' there you may behold the halter for a witness
" as to the truth of the miracle. And this I will tell
" you, too, that pilgrims from Aquitania relate, that
" the part of the halter, which the bishop of Perigord
" retained, shineth now with many miracles and mani-
" fold tokens."
Now, whosoever studieth, says prior Robert, to cast
a slur on this glorious miracle on the score of its being
false, I may humble that man again and refute him by
full truth. In this matter evil persons will frame their
talk in such wise as that a man may live many hours on
the gallows, if the halter be adjusted above the apple of
the throat as near as may be to the chin. But against
this there is a witness to be brought ; for in my youth
I spoke many a time with a man who had hung on a
gallows, but whose life had been saved in the manner
that here followeth. The story of this man's condem-
nation beginneth by certain violent and mighty men
accusing him of being guilty of fornication with a cer-
H 2
116
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
báru at honuin legorSssok ^ uin fræadkonu - sína meS
svá miklu forzi, at ]?eir taka hann til snöru ^ me^
öllu ódæradan.^ Ok sem )?eir draga hann framm •' at
gálga, fylgir su kona, er malit re is af til þvílíks vo^a,
J>vi at frændum ^ hennar ];ikkir vel fallit, at lion 5
sæi " sinn elskara,^ liversu ^ hann spinkar. Ok sem
þeir hafa lagt ^^ á hann snoruna ^^ alt uppi vi^ hök-
una/^ sem hann ilutti mer, eru j^eir svo rei^ir, sem
hann hengdu,^^ at í sta^ fara þeir hurt fra homim,
utan SÚ kona, er ek greindi, pvi at hun, sem ek truir, 10
elska"Si hann meir enn abrir. Nii var J;etta vonda
verk eigi sva leyniliga gert, at öngvii* ^^ menn hef^i
grun a. He^an ^^ lei^ir ]?at, at riddari nokkur setr til
rasar sinn hest framtn ^ a völlinn/^ ér gálglnn stóö,
ok sveipar til sver^inu a virgulinn f3rrir ofan höfu^it.^^ 15
Ekki á hann ]?ar meiri dvöl,^^ enn maSrinn fellr ofan.
Konan er svá hugdjörf í sér, at ei ílýr hiin, heldr
gengr hon at honum ok skoSar, hvárt hann lifir, ok
til profs þar um tekr hun lindahníf sinn ok höggr ^^
á herSarnar. Nú. for svá, at blóð flaut or benjum, 20
því at sál var i líkamanum, enn ei kendi hann ]?ess
heldr enn dau^r, því at vitiS alt var þegar frá honum.
Nú ílyzt þetta framm ^ til húsfreyja hans ok frænda,-*^
at hann se -^ ofan tekinn, ok þvi ætla -- vinir hans at
veita honum gröft.-"^ Ok er þeir koma til hans, skilja 25
þeir hann -^ hafa líf, J?ví at bló'Srás mikil er á þeim
^ legordzsauky T.
2 fr^ndkonu, T.
■^ snauru, T.
■* odqmdann, T.
5 fram, T.
^ fr^ndum, T.
' s^i, T.
^ So Prof. Unger ; ekskara, T.
^ huerssu, T.
10 lagtt, T.
11 snauruna, T.
12 haukuna, T.
13 So Prof. Unger ; heindu, T.
i^ au7iguir, T.
i^ Hie\>an, T.
16 uaidliiiUy T.
17 haufudit, T.
13 duaul, T.
13 haugyr, T.
20 fr^nda, T.
21 sie, T.
22 ^tla, T.
23 graupt, T.
2^ ^í7;/7i added by Prof. Unger.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 117
tain kinswoman of his, and proceed with such reckless-
ness as to bring him to the halter without judgment
having been passed on him at all. And as they drag
him along to the gallows, the woman, out of whom the
case had risen and grown to such a perilous pitch,
followed after him, for her kinsfolk deemed it well fit
that she should see how her lover sprawled. Now, when
they had put on him the halter close up to the chin,
even as he told me, they who hanged him were so wroth,
that they went straightway away from him, out- taken
the woman, whom I mentioned, for she, in my belief,
loved him more than the others. Now, this evil deed
was nowise done so secretly as that no one had an
inkling thereof. Hence it cometh to pass, that a certain
knight, galloping his horse into the field where the
gallows stood, sweepeth his sword at the halter above
the head, but tarrieth no longer tlian while the man
falleth down. The woman was so stout of heart, as not
to fly away, but goetli up to him to learn whether he be
still alive, and for a proof thereof she taketh out the
knife of her belt and woundeth him in the back. It so
feh, that blood flowed from the wounds, for the soul was
still in the body, but he felt it no more than if he were
dead, for his consciousness had already forsaken him.
Now it is told his wife and kinsfolk that he hath been
taken down, and therefore his friends make ready to give
him a burial. And when they come to him, they perceive
that life is still in him, for a great flow of blood cometh
118
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
benjunij er konan haf^i höggvit ^ hann. Yar hann þá
heim fluttr í herbergi þeirar sömo ^ sinnar unnastu.
Eétti^ hann vi^ íijótt ok lif^i lengi si^an.^ Nu ef
hann matti eigi þola hálfa stund dags þá snöro/ er
iipp var sett alt undir höku,^ hvat er þá um hinn at 5
tala, er hékk^ frá þri"Sju alt til elleftu ti'Sar,^ kyrktr
me"S hnút ok virgii a mi^jum barka ? Sannliga eru
þín verk, Drottinn, mjök dásamlig, at var^veita sva
maunsins^ lif moti náttúru, )?ví at ]?itt er alt vald ok
riki á himni ok jor^u.^^ 10
A dead cow
is restored
to life
through a
vow to
Thomas.
KAP. XCIV.
Fra kalle einum.
KalP^ bjo ok átte sér^^ konu ok son einn ungan.^^
pat var ein au'Sigs manns jör'S er hann leigöi, ok liggr
vi^ skogarnef nökkut.-^^ Karl var eigi rikari at^^ gang- 15
anda fe/^ enn hann atti kú -^^ eina svartílekkótta ^^
ók knýflótta. Hún ^^ var svo elsk at ' kalle, at hún
fylgdi honum sem smárakki, hvert er hann for. Nú ^^
geingr svo til um daginn, at hann ferr til skógar eftir -^
vana, ok kýrin me'S honum. Li^r nú dagrinn alt til 20
kvelds,^- ok ];au eru ^^ þar bæ'Si samt. Enn si'San víkr
karl burt í mörkina^^ at velja sér^^ efnetré, felr þá
^ haugguit, T.
2 saumo, T.
3 Bietti, T.
■* siþan, T.
^ sjiauro, T.
*^ hauku, T.
" híeck^ T.
8 ti\:ar, T.
^ manzins, T.
!•> iaurdu, T.
'^ Here begins a third baud in T.
12 sier, T.
13 vngan, T.
!■* nauckut, T.
1' ath, T. nearly throughout; that
this word is to be spelt at, and not
a^, in this section of the Saga, is evi-
dent from compounds like athuinna,
in which the dental mute t has
never softened into a dental aspi-
rate ^.
1' kw, T.
18 suarttfleckotta, T.
19 Hvn, T.
-Ö Nv, T.
21 eptir, T.
22 ;^Me//íÍ2, T.
23 erv, T.
24 maurckina, T.
25 sier, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAy. 119
from the wounds which the woman had given him. He
was now brought home into the very chamber of this
same sweetheart of his, and speedily he recovered, and
lived a long time afterwards. Now if he might not en-
dure for half an hour the halter placed close up under
the chin, v,"hat shall then be said of the other, hanging
from the third unto the eleventh hour strangidated with
halter and knot midway round the throat ? Verily thy
works, 0 Lord, are glorious, thus to preserve the man's
life against nature, for thine is all might and power in
heaven and on earth.
CHAP. XCIY.
Of a certain carl.
There was a certain carl, who had a wife and a young
son. He tenanted a wealthy man's farm, lying near the
spur of a certain wood. The carl's wealth was nought
more than one single cow, dark-speckled and short-homed.
It was so fond of the carl, that it followed him, like a
small dog, wheresoever he went. Now one day it so
happened that he went to the wood, as was his wont,
and the cow with him. And the day passeth thus on
to evening, that they keep in the wood both together.
But then the carl turneth away into the thick of the
wood to choose for him some timber, so that the view
120
THðlCAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
sfn í TiiillTiTn hans ok kýriimar. Hon )K)ler ]?at eigi
vel ok vifl leita fóstra sins, pvi at ineir elskar hún^
hann enn afkvæmi sitt ; þat til marks nm, at sto
haföe for hennar &rit mn- moi^ainn, at nvlx)rinn
kálfr var eftír ^ at húsi, ok fó vilde Lún ^ fai a sem 5
áXr. £nn hversa henni tekst ^ leitin. miin síSar
Ijosara, ver&L Enn fat hevrer karl í mörkina/ at
hún kve^r vií5 hátt Hann flrter yá. feríinne ok vill
srna sik : :s:ni sinne, enn ^ er eigi pess kostr, J^ví
:.* j. 7 :.s: e:gi. TTaTiTi leitar þá heim at bænum, 10
r: _. /It iLÍzmzT kálfsins ". eyíist f^at alt fyrer
i: : riilz: :■ 'rrm )>ar komin. Lí5r nú svo
L : - 1 :_ __!::!:!: í gó^a Ijósi, fara þau
1 - - -/ - - : : _ _ :í iinaa um sí^r, hvar
kyrin hefer gein^it : „ á hrísrunn nökkum,^ enn 15
d|úpt fcn T var hon daní, efter^
likendam - ^ .7^- ::: u draga npp^ kúna^^
ok flá, ok í £-::!. :: :i" at annarr^-^ knrfill
fylgir hú?ii-:-T i-i. ^i: v.: t : rfter.^ Sí^an hrinda
]iaxi bnkr _- : r. : :.-. forboS lá viS í 20
EoglandL- : -- _:^:iiibii kvikende.^^
HúíSna £; - /._ „a:. a ætlar kail at
lia& til &:: -::__ ::.- :. ' .zuer^ Ok )7at fer
svo, at :. - .: . rtr fala liú^ina,
enn eii^. "5r \-: : irSi. Hann berr 2o
hwD. slii: '- ^ii^ iK il ríka nianns,
er b^?-^^--" t^-ti .. . .: i- : .: nnm, at öU ^
- aptr, T.
*^ Æin^lœndú T.
*• «aaícA-wr, T.
ö hmht7m.de, T-
■> TheilaliesmAðSi^r'úauir are
PraC UBger*s rpaliliiikio, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 121
between him and the cow was intercepted. This the
cow beareth not well, but seeketh to find its master,
whom it lovetli more than its own off*spring, as was seen
from its having left in the morning a new-born calf in
the house at home, yet being willing to go away none
the less, as usually. But how it succeedeth in the search
will clear up anon. Now, however, the carl hearetli in
the wood that it belloweth loudly. He then hietli
away to show himself to his pet, but may do so nowise,
as now it is to be found nowhere. He then maketh for
the house, thinking the cow might have remembered the
calf, but all this is a vain ado for him, for it hath not
come there. And thus the night weareth. But in the
morning, when daylight was bright, both man and wife
go into the wood, and find at last how the cow had gone
into a certain thicket of copse wood whereunder there
was a deep slough, and here it lay dead, as was like
enough after so long a time. Then the}^ drag it out,
and flay the hide off, and in skinning it, it so chanceth,
that the one horn goeth with the hide while the other
was left on the head. Then they tumble the carcase
into the slough, it being forbidden in England that any
one should eat the flesh of any quick thing that had died
a natural death. The hide they brought home, the carl
being minded to sell it in the market the next day. And
it cometh to pass, that he goeth to the market, oflering the
hide there for sale, but no one ofl*ereth him more than
half the price. He now carrieth home the hide of the
cow, and cometh to the wealthy man to whom the manor-
house belonged, and complaineth to him of having
i
122 THOMAS SAGA ERKTBYSKUPS.
atvinna ^ er farin. Sa dugande ma^r harmar þat, ok
fær honum fyrst í brá^abirg'S .xx. bleifa brau'Ss me^
þess báttar or^um : " Seg mer,^ felagi,^ J?á er þetta er
'' farit, ok skal ek styrkja'* til me^ ]?ér.^" Karl þakk-
ar honum fagurliga ^ ok fer beim si'San. Hugsar nú 5
um/ bvat likast er um bú^arsölunaj^ ok synist honum,
at eigi mune annat vænna til avinnings, enn gjöra
félag ^ viö ^^ Tbómam erkibyskup. Ok því gefr hann
bonum bálfa bú"Sina, sækir sí'San torg, ok nú bjó'Sast
l^egar í mót bú'Sinne firamtan ^^ enskir peningar, ok 10
svo selr bann. Skiftir ^^ sí'San ver^inu í mi^il erki-
byskups ok sín, skal Thomas hafa átta peninga, enn
harm sjálfr sjö. petta félag litr heilagT Thomas, ok
leggr svo fagra ömbiin -^^ í mót,^^ at á næstu nótt eft-
er,^^ sem ]?au sálug hjón liggja í^^ sæng sinni, vakna 15
]?au vit, at eitt naut ^^ háreyster úte.-^^ Kerling talar
svo : " Kall minn, sag'Se hún, upp muntu standa veröa
" ok vikja nauti ]?essu frá húsum okkrum." Hann gjörer
svo, geingr út ok ser,^^ at her ^^ er kýr komin harSla
lík þeiri, er hann átti, utan ^^ þat ber í milium, at 20
þessi hefer einn knýíil ok ]?ó í mi^ju enni. Ye^r var
vott, ok ])YÍ vill hún gjarna inn komast, svo kunnigt
sem hon átti J^ar heima. Hann vísar henni til annars
]?orps, ok litlu sí'Sar kemr hún aftr-^ ok gjörer sömu-^
óná'S sem fyr. Kall vísar henni á brutt annan tíma 25
ok þriSja. Enn )?at vinnr honum ekki, því at nú
^ athuinna, T.
" mier^ T.
3 fielaxji, T.
■* styrckia, T.
5 ))ier, T.
6 SoT.
7 vm, T.
8 hudarsauluna, T.
9 fielag, T.
10 uith, T.
11 fimtan, T.
12 Skiptir,T.
13 aumbim, T.
14 moth, T.
15 epter, T.
i^ ^' added by Prof. Unger.
^7 nauth, T.
13 vte, T.
19 sier, T.
20 hier, T.
21 vtaii,T.
22 aptr, T.
23 saumo, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 123
lost all his livelihood. This good man grieveth his lot,
and giveth him first, to stave off urgent need, twenty
loaves of bread, with these words :~ '^ Tell me, good fellow,
" when this is up, and I will still lend thee some help."
The churl thanketh him well and goeth home. He now
turneth over in his mind, what may be the likeliest
thing to do for the sale of the hide, and it seemeth to
him, that he can do nothing better towards profiting by
the sale of the hide than to enter a partnership with
archbishop Thomas. He therefore promiseth to give
him the half of the hide, whereupon he goeth to market,
and forthwith fifteen English pennies are offered for it,
and he striketh the bargain. He then shareth the price
between the archbishop and himself, so that Thomas
getteth eight -pence, he seven himself. To this partner-
ship the holy Thomas turneth his eye, and giveth such
a fair reward in return therefore, that during the next
night, as the hapless couple lie in their bed, they awake
at a neat bellowing loudly outside. The carline spoke :
" Now, husband, thou must get up to drive the neat from
" our house." Doing this, and going out, he seeth, how a
cow has come there, right alike to the one he had owned
before, with the difference, however, that this one has one
short horn in the middle of the forehead. The weather
was wet, and therefore it will fain get in, showing a
knowledge of the stead as if it belonged to it. He
driveth the cow away unto another village, but shortly
afterwards it returneth, making the same disturbance
as before. The carl turneth it away for a second and
a third time. But this availeth him not, for now it
124
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
kemr hún -^ aftr ^ ok krefr húss ^ me'S svo myklu ^
megne, at nu ^ kallar kalfr í móti. Kails son mælti
þá, J^ar sem hann liggr : '' Vaki nu, fa^ir ; kýr þín kall-
" ar ok kalfr okkarr j^ar í mot." ^ Bonde leiSer þá
inn kuna,^ ok færer liana til torgs nm morguninn ^ 5
efter, ok kennist hun af öngnm '-^ manni. Her ^^
finnr hann rika mann felaga sÍDn ok seger^^ honum,
hvat um ^- er. Hann svarar : " Ek skal at leita,
" seger^^ hann, hverr^" a ku^^ þessa, er ]}ú.^^ seger^^
" i fra, enn ek skal Ijá fer^^ aSra ku ^^ fyst til ]?inna 10
" nauSsynja. Enn eg skal fara me'S þér ^^ at sja }>essa
" ku,^^ er þer-^^ lei^ir fjölskylda af, ef ek kenner hana
" eigi siSr enn ]>'d,^^ hvaSan af byg'^inne at mer ^^
'' J?iker vonligt, at hon se ^^ til komin." Svo gjora
J7eir. Enn riki ma^r talar J^á : 'MVInn ekki )7at til/' 15
sagSi hann, "at Thomas erkibyskup hail ömbunat ^^
" ]?er ^^ felagit ^^ ok reist upp ku ^'^ ];ina. Enn hversu -'^
" þetta er fallit, mun okkr heldr Ijosara, ef vær för-
" nm ^^ at skoSa fenit ]?at sama, er hon fell ^* í, ]^ví
" at ef hennar bukr er þa'San í hurt, megum vit stö^- 20
" ugt ^^ halda, at kýrin er þér ^^' aftr ^ goklin." Enn
hvat lengra,^^ enn þetta mál próf-iSist svo me^ allri
greÍD, at kýr fátæka manns var leidd aftr- til lífs fyr-
er lofsamliga milde hins vii^uliga fö^ur-^ Thóme erki-
1 JW71,T.
2 aptr, T.
3 hvs, T.
■^ myklv, T.
5 nv, T.
6 moth, T.
7 kvna, T.
^ morgunin, T.
^ aungum, T.
10 ^ier, T.
11 seiger, T.
12 y»i, T.
13 huer.T.
14 y^u;, T.
15 þM?, T.
16 þ/er, T.
17 >y, T.
i^ niier, T.
19 sie, T.
20 auvtbu7iat, T.
21 fielagit, T.
22 Awersy, T.
23 faurum, T.
24 /e//, T.
2» staudiigt, T.
26 leingra, T.
27 /ar/rfr, T.
THE STORY OF • ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 125
Cometh again demanding to be let into the house, so
eagerly, that even the calf answered it again. Then spoke
the carl's son whereas he was lying in bed : " Wake now,
" father ; our cow is calling, and our calf calleth again/'
The goodman then led in the cow, and took it to
market the next day, where, however, it was known by
no one. He now goeth to the wealthy man, his neigh-
bour, and telleth him, how things have come to pass.
He answereth, '' I shall make a search to find out who is
" the ONvner of the cow thou tellest me of, but meanwhile
" I shall lend thee a cow of mine for thy need. Now I
" will go with thee and have a look at this cow, which
" falleth thus a burden on thee, if perchance I may know
" more about it than thou, and have some idea from what
" part of the neighbourhood it may be likely to have come."
And now they do so. The wealthy man then speak eth :
" But," said he, " what if archbishop Thomas hath re-
" warded thee the partnership, and raised up thy cow ?
" We shall know all the more plainly, how that matter
" standeth, if we go and look at the very slough wherein
" it fell, for if the body be away from there, we may hold
" it as settled, that the cow hath been restored to thee."
What more ? but this matter was found and proven in
every way to stand even so, that the poor man's cow
had been called back to life through the laudable mercy
of the worthy father archbisliop Thomas. The rich man
126
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
byskups. Rika manni fannst ^ svo mikit um ^ þeniia
hlut, at liann vill samlagast í J?ví sælum Thómase, at
stygja kosti karls "þessa, svo at hann gefr honum fyrst
landskúna,^ ok þar á ofan jar^arkot, er hann haf^i á'Sr
leigt. Kom nú sá fagna'Sardagr yfer j^au kaii ok 5
kerlingu, sem aldri haf^i á'Sr orí5it fyr á þeira æfi, at
J>au voru or^in landeigancli. Enn hverjar þakker er
þau gjör^u þeirn signaSa lierra, er því volli, fáum vær
eigi me^ or^um greint í þessu málr, ok svo er lykt^
hjartteignar í Gu^s nafni. 10
A son,
having ill-
treated his
mother, can-
not enter
Canterburv-
Cathedral,'
vmtil due
penance is
done.
KAP. XCV.
Af ekkjtt einne er sat.
Ekkja ein sat í litlum bæ, hún átti son frum-
vaxta ^ kominn a skilningar aldr. pat ber svo til um ^
einn dag me^ þeim mæ'Sginum, at hon huspreyja 15
ávítar hann son um^ einhverja mismune.'^ Enn hann
tekr þat me^ svo vanstilltre bræ^i, at hann hefr upp
annan fotinn fyrir brjost henni me^ svo höröum ^
slag, at hon hnigr til jar^ar í ómegin. Fyrst í sta^
li^u svo framm^ nökkurer^^ dagar, at ungi ma^r 20
gleymer verkit ^^ an i'Sran ok yferbot, sem þat sé ^^
einskis ^^ vert.-'^'^ Kemr nú svo þessu næst at si^venju
gó'Sra manna, at hann sæker me'S ö^ru ^^ fólki í Kan-
túaríam, ok er hann kemr at musterisdyrunmn hins
heilaga Thóme, þröngvist ^^ fyrer hann einn ok annarr, 25
svo at aldri fær hann inn komizt. Ok J?ótt hann
leiti svo til, a^ einginn^'^ ma^r sýnilig]?-megi honum frá
1 fa7izt, T.
- vm, T.
■^ landzkwna, T.
•* er lykt inserted by Professor
Uuger.
•'' frvmuaxta, T.
'"' vm, T.
' missmime, T.
^ Jiaiirdiim, T.
» fram, T.
'" nauckurer^ T.
11 vercJiiL T.
12
^,T.
13 einkis, T.
i-* vertt, T.
i^ audru, T.
1' þrangiiizt, T.
1" eivqiv. T,
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 1 27
thought SO much of this matter, that he desireth to do
the blessed Thomas fellowship in righting the affairs of
this old carl, wherefore he first maketh him a present of
the cow which formed the stock of the holding and, to
boot, of the cot-holding which he had formerly tenanted.
And now dawned on the carl and the carline the joyful
day which they had never known before in their life,
that they had become owners of land. But as to the
thanks they gave unto that blessed lord we may nowise
set them forth in this writing ; and so the miracle cometh
to an end, in the name of God.
CHAP. XCV.
Of a certain widow.
In a small town there resided a certain widow, who had
a grown-up son who was already come to years of discre-
tion. It so cometh to pass, one day, between mother and
son. that she, the mistress of the house,^ chideth him for
something dohe amiss. But he taketh this in such vio-
lent anger, that he lifteth one foot driving it against her
breast with so hard a kick, that she droppeth swooning
to the earth. At first some days passed away during
which the young man forgot the deed, showing no re-
morse nor regret, as if it had been of no account. But
then it befalleth that, following the wont of good folk,
he goetli on a pilgrimage to Canterbury. But when he
cometh to the door of the temple of the holy Thomas,
the people push on before him one after the other so
that he could never get in. And endeavouring even to
get in, when no person visible was there to thrust him
128 THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
hrinda, bæger honum ei J)vi si^r Gu^s domr ósýniligi^
sem ovinrinn sjalfi' se ^ fyrir honum. Hann undrar ^
sina ógiftu^ ok leitar til eins kennimanns, ber upp
fyrir honum sitt vandkvæSi^ ok biSr hjálpræ^is. Prestr-
inn svarar : " pu raunt hafa vanrækt ^ meö nökk- 5
" uruDi ^ hætti þinn hfuat, ok mun stort ^ a standa,
" þótt þú hafer gleymt, því at heilagr Thomas skilr
" þik Í hurt ^ fra sinu folki ok dæmer ]?ig omakligan
" heilagrar kh'kju,^ ok ]?vi hæfer þér ^^ einginn^^ vegr
" utan ^- at leita myskunnar me'S jatning ok i^ran, ok 10
" leita vel efter,^^ hvat J^ik hent hefer." Hann gjörer
ok svo, skriftast ^^ vi'S ]?enna sama prestinn, ok finnr
þó eigi, hvat honum er mest at meine, ok }?vi er hann
inngoDgu^^ kirkjunnar jamnfjarre ^*^ sem a^r, þótt hann
freisti. Prestrinn seger ^^ þá : "Jatning ]?in mun ^^ eigi 15
" svo vandvirkt,^^ sem nær þyrfti ok nau"Ssyn krefr,
" því leita )7Ú efter^^ enn framar peim óbættum glæp,
" er J?ig mun^^ ];röngva^^ því dau^ligar, sem ]?ú hefer
'* meir vanrækt."^^ Hann salugr fer í annat^^ sinu, ok
me^ tilvisan Heilags Anda finnr hann glæpinn, er 20
hann í féll^^ fyrer þessa misþyrming^^ sinnar mó^ur.
Prestrinn seger ^^ þá : " Eigi er undarligt, J>ó at heilög
" kirkja fyrerliti ];ig, ];vi at óbættr þessi glæpr fyrer-
'■ bý^r þér -^ kristinna manna samlag." • Hann talar
]?á me^ tárum : " Hvat er nú til ráSs," sag^i hann, " svo 25
'' at ek megi hjálpast ? " Prestrinn svara^Si : " Hér ^^
1 sie, T.
2 unndrar, T.
^ ogiptu, T.
^ uannkuœdi, T.
^ uannrcekt, T.
6 nauckurum, T.
7 stortt, T.
s burtt, T.
9 kirkv, T.
10 \>ier, T.
11 eingin, T.
12 vtan, T.
13 epter, T.
14 skriptazt,T.
i^ inngaungu, T.
i^ iamfiare^ T.
1' seiger, T.
i^ myw, T.
i^ vannuirkt, T.
-0 þrauíigua, T.
21 u'an7irœkt, T.
22 annath, T.
23 ^eZ/, T.
24 jnissþyrming, T.
25 þ/er, T.
2« ^/cr. T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 129
away, God's unseen judgment pushetli him back none the
less, as if the very fiend was standing there before him.
He marvelleth much at his misfortune, and seeketh out
a certain clerk, breaking his mind to him as to his
trouble, and praying for his help. The priest answer eth :
" Thou must needs have neglected in some way thy
" manner of life, and even in some great matter, although
" thou hast forgotten it, since the holy Thomas sepa-
'*' rateth thee from his people, and judgeth thee un-
" worthy of holy church, and therefore there is no other
" way open to thee, than to seek for mercy by confession
" and repentance, and to search thyself as to wherein
" thou hast happened to do amiss." This he doeth ;
shriving to this very priest, yet failing to find out
wherein he hath done most wi'ong, and therefore he is
even as far from entering the church as before, try it as
he may. The priest then says : " Thy confession, be-
" like, is far from being as sincere as it should be, and
" necessity demandeth. Search therefore for the misdeed
" for which no boot has been done as yet, for it will surely
" press thee all the more deadly that thou must needs
" have long neglected to repent of it." The wretched
man goeth away a second time, and through the guidance
of the Holy Spirit he calleth to mind the misdeed which
he committed in the ill-treatment of his mother. The
priest then says : " No wonder that the holy chui'ch
" should despise thee, while this misdeed, not being done
" boot for, forbiddeth thee to hold communion with
" Christian folk." Then he speaketh in tears : " What
" shall I do," said he, " so that I may be saved ? " The
priest answereth : " It seemeth to me, that for this there
K541.
180
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
'' sýnist mér ^ eingin skrift ^ hepiligri til liggja, ef
" ];ú. vilt alvaiiiga þig bæta, enn ];á taker ]?aiin liminn
" Í hurt ^ af ]7Ínum ^ likam, er saurga'Sist ^ í svo liæ^i-
" ligum giæp." Hinn horfer ekki a tillagit, setr
öxi^ á fótinn, ok liöggr ^ í bui't^ af sér.^ Skríör 5
sí"San at kirkj adp'unum hins lieilaga Thóme. Eru þá
li'Sugar dyr ok lofut innganga. Hér^ me^ l^iggi' Harm
svo mykla himneska myskunn ok aflausn ok líkn andar-
innar fyrer bæn ok verSleika hins bleza^a Thóme
erkibyskups, at af högg^dnn ^^ fótrinn gafst-*^-"- honum 10
fyrer mjúka þján ok tárligt áheit til heilaga Thómam
me^ SYO göfugligri -^- hjartteign, at svo sem liann hafSi
bundit fótarstúfiun vit afliöggit,^^ á^r enn hann skrei'S
inn í kirkjuna, gekk hann svo græddr ok albættr út^^
af musterinu, sem aldri liefSi bann skemdr vor^it, 15
nema J?at dýr^armark bins beilaga Tbóme erkibyskups
bar bann æ síían, sein rau^r silki]?ráí!r lægi umberg-
is^^ fótinn, þar sem af bafSe verit böggvit.^*' Svo
gjöi-^e bann sinn veg ^^ í loíi Gu^s ok bans ástvinar,
leystr af glæp ok leiddr í myskunn Græ^ara vors Herra 20
Jesú Kiists.
KAP. XCVI.
Af göfgxim^^ vin Thome.
4Ssecraíed Beimini bet -^^ ríkr ma^r, Hann baf^i verit gó^r
bfsh^p^' felagi -^ Tbómam ok stö"Sugr ^^ vin, svo lengi ^^ sem 25
^ mier, i.
2 skript, T.
3 burtt, T.
^ )pbivm, T.
^ savryadizt, T.
6 auxi, T.
' hauyyr, T.
3 sier, T.
9 Hier, T.
^° ajhaugguinn, T.
^^ So altered by the editor ; gaf,
T.
^2 So Prof. Unger ; gufugligri^
^^ afhauggit, T.
1^ uth, T.
^^ vmbergis, T.
^6 haugguit, T.
17 negh,T.
^^ gc^ifg^irn, T.
19 hiet, T.
-'^ fielagi, T.
'1 staudugr, T.
'- leingi T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 131
'* is no shriving more meet than this, if thou wilt ear-
'• nestly mend thy life, that thou deprive thy body of the
" limb which became guilty of such a fearful crime." The
other, not looking twice at the counsel given, driveth an
axe against his leg, and cutteth it off; whereupon he
creepeth up to the door of the church of the holy Thomas,
which now was free to him, and into which entry was now
permitted. Besides this he partaketh so largely of heavenly
grace and absolution and mercy for his soul through the
prayer and merits of the blessed archbishop Tliomas, that
the cut-off leg was restored to him through humble penance
and tearful vows to the holy Thomas by this glorious
miracle : that, having tied to the stump of the leg the
cut-off part of it before entering the church, he walked
out of the temple so whole and sound, as if lie had never
been maimed at all ; only, ever afterwards he bore a
mai'k of the glory of the holy archbishop Thomas, in the
shape of what appeared like a band of red silk wound
round the leg where it had been cut off. After this he
betook himself away with the leave of God and his be-
loved friend, absolved from his crime, and brought to the
mercy of our Healer and Lord Jesus Christ.
CHAP. XCVL
Concerning a certain noble friend of Thomas.
There was a certain rich man called Beimini, who had
been Thomas' good fellow and fast friend, as long as they
I 2
132 THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
Thomas hann lifSe her ^ í heimi. pessi riki maSr eflde ^ stort ^
after his
death. hús á sínum búgar^, at liann ætla^i, at kirkja skyldi
vera. Heilagr Thomas haféi játa^ honum, at vígja
húsit, enn þar til unnust honum eigi lífdagar, ok því
stendr^ sönglaust^ þat nýja virki.^ Býzt nú til 5
byskup annaiT ^ at fremja vígsluna, sem herra Thomas
var under lok li^inn. Bóndinn seger^ sér^ þat mjög
iim ]?veran ^^ hug, at nökkurr ^^ byskup vígSi þat sama
hús, nema sá sem honum hafSi játaS. Hann ver^Sr
þá spur^r, hverr^^ sá væri. Bóndinn seger^ hann veil
nafnfrægan/^ J?ví at hann heiter heilagT Thomas erki-
byskup. Sýnist þá sumum mönnnm/^ sem trú bóndans
rise mjög í loft^^ upp, ef hann ætlar honum vígslu-
gjörS-^^ á jar'Sríki, sem var leiddr úr þessu life. Ok
]?ó ver'Sr honum von sín ei at öngu/^ því at heilagr 1
Thomas fagr ok dýrligr birtist ^^ honum í svefne ok
talar svo fcil hans, ok segist^^ kominn at fylla sitt
fyrerheit í helgan kirkjunnar : " Ok til þess/' sag's!
hann, " at her '^ um sertu ^^ ifalauss ^^ me^ öllu,^^ skal
" eg fa ]?ér ^^ ii. votta, er kirkjan skal syna ]>ér á morg- 2
" in, at hun er vigS. Enn annarr^ vottr er sa enn
" Htli gullkross, er ek legg hér^ under koddann hjá
" þér,^^ ok sa sami kross vil ek at dyrkist ^^ i þessarri ^^
" kirkju ok skutlist í öngvan^ sta'S annan, at hann
'* syni nálægum ok okomnum, hvat Gu^S hefer gjört^^S
1 flier, T.
2 elfde, T.
3 stortt, T.
4 ste7indr, T.
^ saunglaust, T.
^ uircM, T.
7 annar, T.
^ seiger, T.
9 sier, T.
1" þuerann, T.
^^ nauckur, T.
12 ^Mcr, T.
13 nafnfrœgann, T.
1^ maunnum. T.
15 /ojJi, T.
i*' vigslvgiord, T.
I'' aungu, T.
18 birttizt, T.
19 sez^ízí, T.
20 sí'erííí, T.
21 ifalauSyT.
22 a?í//rí, T.
23 þíer, T.
24 dyrckizt, T.
25 þessarí, T.
26 aunguaiij T.
27 greorW, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 133
lived together in the world. This rich man reared a
large house on his estate intending it for a church.
The holy Thomas had promised him to consecrate the
house, but not having had the grant of life's day to do
it, the great structure stood now empty, and no song was
heard therein. But now, that lord Thomas was departed,
another bishop prepared to perform the consecration.
The goodman avoweth it to be much against his mind
that any other bishop than the very one who had pro-
mised it should consecrate the building. He was then
asked who that bishop was. The goodman answered
that he was famous enough, for his name was even the
holy archbishop Thomas. And it seemeth to certain
people that his faith riseth aloft high enough if he mean
him to perform a consecration on earth who had been
taken away from this life. Yet his hope cometh nowise
utterly to nought, for in beauty and glory the holy Thomas
appeareth to him sleeping, speaking to him, and say-
ing that he hath come to fulfil his promise to consecrate
the church. " And," said he, " in order that thou mayest
" have no misdoubting concerning this matter, I shall
" leave thee two tokens, which the church shall show
" forth unto thee to-morrow in proof of its being conse-
" crated. One token is the little golden cross which I
" place here under thy pillow, the which I desire should
" be worshipped within this church, but on no account
" be allowed to go to any other place, in order that it may
" show to living folk and those to come hereafter what
134
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
Archbishop
Thomas
wrought
afterwards
many mira-
cles at
the same
church.
A mother's
deformed
son is re-
stored to
full health.
" me^ þessarri ^ kirkju fyrer mina bæn ok me^al-
" gongu."^ Svo seger^ hann blezaSr. Enn bondinn
vaknar, finnr krossinn, því at synin var falslaus. Her *
me^ er kirkjan svo fallin sem vatne ausin bæöi utan
ok innan,^ enn ^ ]>ó var hon J?ur átaks. Her ^ fylger 5
annat þessarri ■'• ásýnd, at ilm haf^i hun svo sætan, at
vel ma heita enn þriöe'^ vottr liennar vigslu. pat
fylger her ^ me^ í lofi GuSs ok tign bins beilaga
Thome, at kirkja skein si^an morgum ^ taknum, j^vi
at eitt Í milium annarra ^ endemarka ^^ finnst sva 1(
skrifat, at í nökkurum^^ árgang á fimmtudag-^^ jóla,
þat er heimfer^artí^ beilags Thóme til himinríkis,^^
ö^la^ist^* þá albætta lieilsu sá, er á^r var krypp-
lingr/^ daufr ok líkþrár. Svo dýra fylling fékk bond-
inn '^^ ]?ess fyrerheits, at stórar veizlur voru yferlag^ar, 11
framar enn bann kunne at kjósa, ]?ví at þær sömu-^^
máttu í kristninne æfenlio-a ^^ skína.
Hér^ fylger me-S vígsluhjartteign ok þat bleza^a
litilætisverk/^ er hinn signa^i fa^er Thomas framdi
me^ einne fátækri konu. Hún átti einn smápilt svo 2(
hörmulegan^^ ok aíleiddan sinne náttúru, sem hann
væri allr frásnúinn^^ sínu^^ e^li me^ undarligum krank-
dóme. Hún sálug mó'Serin heyrer dagliga, hversu
heilagr Thomas skin bjart^"' í Kanncia, ok því berst
hún þat fyrer at færa honum barnit. Enn svo var 2í
vegrinn langr af ]?eim bý, at eigi sóttist meira á
sjötján dögum/^ ok þó berr hún sig til. Er svo greindr
1 þessari, T.
2 medalyaunguy T.
^ seiger, T.
4 Hier, T.
^ ijinann, T.
fi cn, T.
' þridie, T.
'^ maurgum, T.
^ nnnara, T.
1*^ endemarcka, T.
^^ nauckurum^ T.
12 fjmtndag, T.
13 himirikis, T.
'■* ok audladizt, T.
15 kryplingr, T.
lö hondin, T.
1" sauvm, T.
^^ avenliya, T.
1' litilœtisvercli, T.
-' hanrmuligan, T.
'* frasnvinn, T.
^- sinv, T.
23 biartt, T.
-^ davgiim, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 135
" God hath done in this church through my prayer and
''mediation." Thus speaketh the blessed one. And the
goodman awaketh and findeth the cross, for the vision was
none of a false sort. Besides this the church showed as
if it had been sprinkled with water outside and inside,
yet it was dry to the touch. And to this appearance of
the church there was added this other strange fact, that
it was filled with a sweet odour, which may well be
taken as a third token of its having been consecrated. By
God's will and the glory of the holy Thomas it was added
to these thinofs that the church often afterwards shone
by many miracles ; for among other wonders this is found
written, that in a certain year, on the fifth day of Yule,
being the day of the departure of holy Thomas to the
kingdom of heaven, one who formerly had been crippled,
deaf, and leprous, received his health fully restored. The
goodman had the aforesaid promise so gloriously fulfilled,
that large grants were bestowed upon the chiu'ch, even
far beyond what he ever could have wished, for the same
were of a nature to shine ever afterwards in the church
(by their fame ?).
With this consecration-miracle is coupled also the
blessed deed of humility which the adorable father Thomas
manifested on a certain poor woman. She had a small
boy so grievously and unnaturally afiected, as if he were
utterly turned out of his natural estate by a disorder most
strange. The afflicted mother heareth daily, how the holy
Thomas shineth briglitlj- forth at Canterbury, and therefore
resolveth to bring unto him the child. But from the town
where she lived the way was so long that, from there
to Canterbury and no further, could the journey be made
in seventeen days ; yet she betaketh herself away. Of her
186 THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
biina^r heiinar í veginum, at bun hefer eina skikkju
yzta klæ^a, ok þar under ber hun þat sáluga barn.
Nú^ sem hún hefer farit fimm daglei'Ser ok hefr upp
hina settu, kemr ma^r a veginn^ í mót^ henne, hann
er bli^r í ásjónu, ok svo buinn sem þeira formenn, er 5
koma heim af Jórsölum/ pví at hann berr fagran
pálmvönd í sinne hende.^ Hann talar fyrr^ til kon-
unnar, sem J^au mætast : " Hvat ber þú svo leyni-
" liga under skikkjunne," sagSi hann, " sem J>ú viler,
" a^ eingi sjai ?" Hun svarar ok segist ekki bera 1^
nema klæ^i sin, j^vi at hun ofremst at syna utlenzk-
um^ manni sitt afkvæmi svo ferligt vorSit. Palmari
vikr þá at henni djarfliga, ok varpar skikkjuskautit
út a handveginn, svo at hann sér^ fuUgjörla, hvat
under ^ er. Konan sálug ro^nar ]>á, ok því eigi ólíkt, 15
sem hun hrinde -^^ barninu fra ser ^ me^ hárre '^^ rödd ^^
nökkurre.^'^ Ok svo ferr, at pálmari^^ tekr me^, enn
hún lætr laust, liefer at hendr um ^^ eina stund ok
þuklar limu ^^ aftr ^^ í lag me^ svo bleza'Sri kunnáttu,
at þenna pilt fær hann aftr ^'^ mó^urinne ^^ albættan 20
til allra li^a, sem aldri heféi hann krankr ^^ orSit.
Pálmari ^^ seger þá : " pú munt -^ ganga ekki lengTa ^^
" í kveld enn framm ^- til sta^arins, er nú sér ^ þú.
" Ok ]?ann byskup, er þar sitr, máttu finna, ef þér^"*
" likar, ok tjá honum, hvat þér ^^ hefer veitzt á veg- 25
" inum. Seg honum þar me^, at sá er heilan gjör^i
1 Nv, T.
2 negin, T.
•^ moth, T.
■* Jorsauhon, T.
' heímde, T.
l fí/r, T.
' vtlenzkum, T.
« sicr, T.
'•* winder, T.
1" hrinnde, T.
^i hare, T.
12 raudd, T.
i^ nauckure, T.
i^ palmar, T.
15 ym, T.
i*"' //my, T.
1' í/jjír, T.
i^ modrinne, T.
i^ kranckr, T.
■-" 7>iy;í/, T.
21 leingra, T.
-2 /raw, T.
2:* 'sier, T.
2^ þ/er, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 137
dress on the road it is related that she had a cloak over
her garments, wherennder she carried the poor child.
Now when she had done five days' journey and had
begun the sixth, there cometh a man walkinor alone the .
road up to her, blithe of countenance and arrayed as are
the leaders of those folk who come retm-niuo- from Je-
rusalem, for he carrieth a fair palm-wand in his hand.
As they meet he speaketh to the woman first, saying :
" What is it that thou carriest so secretly under thy cloak,
'^ as if thou didst not want any one to see it ? ' She
answereth, professing to carry nought but her clothes, for
she was shy to show to a foreigner her offspring in such
a dreadfully deformed state. The palmer then turneth
boldly towards her, throwing the skirt of her cloak back
over the shoulder so that he seeth full clearly what was
hidden thereunder. The poor woman blusheth, and in a
manner thrusteth away from her the child with a loud
scream. And so it cometh to pass, that the palmer taketh
it into his arms, while the woman letteth it go, and for a
while he passeth his hands over it and toucheth its
limbs, and brinoreth them into sound state ^-ith such a
blessed craft that he delivereth the boy back to his
mother fully restored to health in all his limbs and joints,
as if he had never been disordered at all. The palmer then
speaketh : " To-night thou shalt go no further than to
" the place which thou beholdest now before thee. If
'' thou art so minded, thou mayest go see the bishop who
" liveth there, and set forth to him what hath befallen
" thee on the way. Tell him also that he, who cured
lo8 THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
" piltinn vill, at hann fari til Kanntarabyrgis ok bo^i
" bræ^rum hjartteignina. Enn mer ^ sýnizt rá^, at þú
" vender aftr ^ í átthaga l^inn, því at ]?ú ert vanfær í
^' þvílíka farlengd."^ Svo skilja þau, at pálmari ^ ferr
heim til hirainríkis/ enn liim lofar Gu^ ok sæker 5
heim byskupinn, sem henni var bo'Sit. Ferr ^ J^at allt
síSan sömu' lei^, sem á^r var rita"S í forsögn^ vors
Drottins vinar, at byskup fór framm^ til Kannciam
at frægja hjarteign, emi konan snere aftr til ættjai-^ar
siiinar. Svo hngga^i bleza^r fa^er harm]?rungit brjóst. 10
Arcbbisiiop Enii hversu hann o'íör^e vi^ gamlar konui\ er harm
Thomas ^ . , ^c^
ATovks lieim sóttu, " er frásaoriar vert.^^ I fám or^nm at þótt
miraclos, .
particularly "þaer kæmi svo forhrumar til bans meS knút ok of-
on old, ....
decrepit verkium,-^ at eio^i mætti miúkr-^^ lóíi meinlætalaust í
womeu. .^ ■' o i^
nánd koraa, sneru þær svo í burt,^^ at J?ær bör^u ^^15
me^S knefum þá sömu^ sína limu, at aller mætti sjá,
hvat þær böfSu ^^ J^egit fyrer píslarvættisins ^^ veröleika.
Beyond all Svo ok hveriar heilsubætr er hann vann fólki sínu
be bestowed . "^. . vi-niifi
the grace of heima 1 Kaniicia, nær emsji maor letri lukt.^^ par var
bis miracles . ,^ t-iq >••/• o
on the em kona svo bjúg ok hrj^ggdregiD, "^ at á þrimr arum 20
Canterbury, mátti him aldri upp rettast, erm þegar er bun kunne
at kijupa -^ ni^r at j^eim signa^a erkibyskupsins lik-
ama, gekk bun svo í bm^t,^^ at bæ^i var bun rett ok í
öllum -^ li^um albætt.
Her-- ferr )?at me^, at kirkjan i Kanncia baf^i feng- 25
it ^^ svo vakran geymara, at ilbæ'Sismörmum ^^ var
1 m/er, T.
- aptr, T.
^ farleingd, T.
^ palmar, T.
^ /t;7niriki's, T.
6 Fer, T.
'' saumu, T.
•'* forsaiign, T.
9 fram, T.
i^j'soiit', T.
^1 vent, T.
13 mjvkr, T.
1^ hurtt, T.
1^ haurdu, T.
16 haufdu, T.
1" pislarvœttissins, T.
1"^ /«r/^ T.
1^ hryggdreiyin, T.
20 krivpa, T.
"1 </«<Ví/»í, T.
2- i7/er, T.
23 feingit, T.
12 ofiierckium, T. 24 iUrccdismaunnum, T
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 139
" the boy, desireth the bishop to go to Canterbury to
" announce the miracle to the brethren there. But it
" seemeth to me the wisest thing that thou thyself canst
" do, to go back to thy dwelling-place, for thou art too
" feeble for the long journe}^ thou hast set thy heart on/'
So they part ; the palmer returning to the kingdom of
heaven, but she, praising God, wending her way to see the
bishop even as she had been told. Thereupon all things
fell out according to the command of God's friend wiitten
above, inasmuch as the bishop went to Canterbury to
glorify the miracle, but the woman went home again
to the dwelling-place of her kin. In such manner the
blessed father comforted a sorrow-smitten heart.
But it is well worth relating, how he dealt with old
women who would come to him. This is in few words
set forth thus : even if they came to him so utterly de-
crepit from knots and excessive pains that even the soft
palm of the hand might not come near them without giving
pain, they went away so as to knock with their fists these
very limbs, in order that all folk irdght see what gifts
they had received through the merits of the martyrdom.
But as to the cures which he wrought on his own people
at home in Canterbury, it is for no man to write that
matter to an end. There was a certain woman so crooked
and crippled in her back, that for three 3'ears she might
never stand upright, but forthwith when she knelt down
before that blessed body of the archbishop, she went away
in such a manner, that she was hoth straight and whole
and sound in all her limbs.
Besides this, the church of Canterbury had now got
such a watchful overseer, that what she possessed lay
140
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
eigi innan handar þat, er hún átti, j^ótt þeir fengi^
He betrays inn komit ok ætlu^u at stela, par af er svo skiifat.
a burglar iii ■*
thecathe- at einn gildr pjofr leyndist til nótt at lokka upp allar
Canterbury, lokur ^ ok hurSer, er geymdi kirkjuna, ok ma likligt
sýnast, at sa bölvaör ^ hals hafi of mjög heima alinn 5
verit Í gar^inuin, svo kunnliga sem hann for. Nti*
sem hann kemr í kirkjnna, sopast hann um fast, at
stuldrinn skuli ekki smávægr vera bæSi me'S gull ok
silfr, hrapar eitt gullker af sinne stö^u^ svo hatt ok
hvellt ni^r á múrinn, at hann heyrer glogt ^ fyrst 10
kh'kjuvörSrinn ^ ok jafnvel þeir menn, er lágu í næstum
herbergjum. Svo geymdi Gu^s ma'Sr nú frammliöinn ^
sitt góz^ ok heilagrar kirkju, at j^jofr var haldinn ok
sÍDum samdrætti frátekinn. Skal nú hé^an^^ víkja
til einkanligs -^^ hlutar, er vor Drottinn vann meS vild 1 5
ok ver^leika J?essa síns ástvinar.
KAP. XCVII.
Erkibyskupsins undirlögr^^ í Cancia.
Svo er lesifc, at í ]?eiri sýslu sem einkanliga^^ liggi'
under ^^ erkibyskupinn í Kantúaríam, var einn falkin- 20
A falcon
and a man
having each
that of the' er klokr a bess hattar i^n. pat ^^ er sa ma^r, er
former is
restored to
the latter,
and vice
versa.
ferr me^ hauk ok hund ut '^^ a ^^ mörk ^^ at afla veiSi-
skapar fyr þá fygiing, er fálkinn slær me'S sínum Aug
ok snarri natturu ni^r af loftinu/^ enn rakkinn flytr
saman, hvat er honum feHr, ]?vi at meistaradomr hefer 25
vanit þá báöa, at hvorr ^^ gjorer sina syslu. Nú ^^
1 feingi, T.
2 lokr, T.
3 bmilvadTf T.
4 Nv, T.
5 staudu, T.
« glaugt, T.
7 kirkivuaurdrinn , T.
^ framlidinn, T.
9 godz, T.
10 hiedan, T.
'1 einkannligSy T.
12 unndirlaugr, T. See Preface.
1^ cinkannligay T.
» ynííer, T.
15 þaíA, T.
16 v/, T.
17 So Prof, linger ; \>aa, T.
' ^ maurcky T.
19 loptitiu, T.
20 ^?<or, T.
21 iVy, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 141
nowise loose for the hands of misdoers, not even if they
broke in to steal it. Concerning this it is written that
a certain very big thief went secretly one night to force all
bolts and locks by which the church was secured, and
full likely it may seem that that accursed fellow must
have been brought up at the very bishop's court, since
he went so knowingly about his affair. When he cometh
into the church he sweepeth up the things hard and fast,
in order that his theft should be none of a trifling kind
either in gold or silver ; but then a certain golden vessel
tumbleth from its stand upon the stone floor with such a
loud ring that first the church -watchman and then those
who slept in the nearest chambers heard the sound.
In such manner this God's man, though departed from
the world, kept his goods and those of holy church, that
the thief was seized, and all his stolen goods were taken
from him. And now we shall turn to a singular thing
which our Lord did through the will and merit of this
His beloved friend.
CHAP. XCVII.
It is said that in the diocese which appertaineth to
the archbishop of Canterbury there lived a certain fal-
coner, well skilled in his craft. But a falconer is one
who goeth a-field with hawk and hound to hunt by
fowling, whereof the manner is this, that the hawk
swoopeth in his flight and swift nature down from the
air, while the hound bringeth together whatever falleth
down in his way, for by training both have become wont
to do their business each by himself Now it so faUeth
142 THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
gengr ^ svo til urn ^ daginn, sem falkinn snarar upp
efter^ einum fugli, retter einn kvistr sik meinliga í
mot '^ honum út ^ af eikinne, svo at augat annat úr ^
bans höfSi "^ fellr til jar^ar. Ok sem hann kemr
aftr ^ á armlegg herra sins, sýner hann Ijosliga, hvat 5
hann hefer látit. Ok meSr J>vi, at fugiinn var hinn
vænsti^ gi'ipi'j harmar svo eignarma^r, sem hann hafi
storan ska^a fengit,^^ hugsar J^egar me'S ser/^ at hann
skal flytja fálkann^^ til lækningar hinum sæla Thómase
erkibyskupi, þvi at hann var nu frægastr lækner i 10
öllu ^^ Englandi.^^ Svo gjörer hann, hefer sig framm ^^
Í veg til Kantúaríam ok flytr me"S ser^^ falkann. Ok
at komnum degi ^*^ sem hann nálga^ist sta'Sinn, ri^r i
moti honum mikit hoffolk, J>vi at svo li^u nu iiestar
ti'Ser dags af degi,^^ at flokkar foru annattveggja fra 15
e^r til. Fyrer )7essum ^^ skara var einn rikr ma-Sr
vænn ok ungr at aldri, hann vikr at falkiner,^^ sem
þeir mætast, ok spyr þegar, l?ví hann færi í þvílikan ^^
sta'S svo sem me^ leikligri hoflist, *'at þu berr fálka
*' á hendi,^^ sem þu skuler á fuglavei'Si ^^ fara." Hinn 20
seger^^ honum í mót, hversu fallit er, þat er fuglinum
til hefer borit ok hvat hann vildi þiggja. Enn þetta
efai tekr riki ma'Sr me^ ferligum útbijót,^^ seger ^^
okristiligt verk, at kalla a heilagan mann um ^ ' slikt,
" e^a hyggr ]7Ú," sag^i hann, " at erkibyskupi þike varSa, 25
" hvort hræfuglinn ^^ hefer heldr tvö aiigu ^^ enn eitt."
1 so, T.
2 vm, T.
^ epter, T.
4 moth, T.
5 vthy T.
6 vr, T.
' haufdi, T.
8 aptr, T.
^ uœnnzti, T.
10 feingit, T.
11 sier, T.
12 falkan, T.
13 aullu, T.
14 Einglandi, T.
*^ fram, T.
16 deigi, T.
1' \>essvm, T.
13 After falkiner T. adds a super-
fluous ok.
1^ þuilikan?!, T.
20 Aew7ic?z, T.
21 So Prof. linger ; /míjí/m ueidu,
T.
22 seiger, T.
23 yíörzoí, T.
24 hrœfuglin, T.
25 awi^y, T.
THE STORY OF AECHBISHOP THOMAS. 143
this day, that when the hawk shooteth aloft after a bird,
a branch of a tree happeneth to stretch out across his
line of fiight, and in such a perilous manner that one eye
falleth out of his head to the earth. And when the bird
returneth to the arm of its master, it showeth plainly what
it hath lost. Now, the bird being a right goodly thing,
the owner grieveth as if he had met with a great loss,
and at once maketh up his mind to bring the hawk to
the blessed archbishop Thomas to be healed, for he was
now the most renowned leech in all England. And this
he doeth, betaking himself on the way to Canterbury.
and bringing with him the hawk. And on the day when
he approacheth the city, a flock of courtly folk come
riding along the way up towards him, for now day after
day passed in such manner, that at most hours thereof
flocks of people would be travelling there, coming this
way or going that. At the head of this flock was a
certain mighty man, goodly to behold and of young age.
On meeting the falconer, he at once turneth towards him
asking how he cometh to be travelling to such a place
in a mind bent on play and coui'tly craft, " seeing that
" thou carriest a hawk on thy hand as if thou wert going
" a-fowling." The other telleth him how matters stand
with him as to what had befallen the bird, and what he
wanted. But at this the mighty man breaketh out
fiercely, saying that is a most unchristian work to call in
the aid of a holy man in such a matter, " or deemest
" thou," said he, '^ that the archbishop careth, whether
" the carrion-bird hath two eyes or one? "
144
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
Hinn seger,^ at hann vænter í miskunn Thome, at
hann virSi ser^ ei til minnkanar, hvat sem rae^ gó^ri
æru ok lítilæti ver^i hans kallat. Svo skilja þeir, at
riki ma^r setr nei f3rrer. Kemr falkinn tii sta^arins
ok ílýgr framm fyrer altari heilags Thome. Ok ei 5
hefer hann þar lengi^ dvalizt, á^r enn hann heyrer
ferS mykla framan at musterinu. Hann ser ^ brátt, at
hér^ geingr^ inn öndver^u^ brjósti svo klæddr ma^r,
sem hann haf^i mætt a veginum, þat ser hann ok
me'S, at J?essi geingr^ nu ^" me^ si^ri hettu^ ni'Sr fyrer 10
ásjónu,^ ferr hann lagr ok lotinn sem harme þrunginn.
petta undrar falkiner harSla mjog. svo uppreistan sem
■þessi riki ma^r bar sik, |?á er ]?eir fund us t.-^^ Ok
þegar sem fyrst er færi, vikr hann at honum ok spyr,
]>vi at hann se^^ þar kominn, svo nylega sem hann 15
for þa'San. Enn hann fær þvílíkt andsvar : ^^ ^' Félagi
" minn," sag^i hann, "mik stendr sú sök/^ at ek er
" fallinn í vors Herra misþykt^^ ok hins heilaga Thóme
" erkibyskups, fyrer þá dirf'S ok dóm, er eg setti
" framm í dag á veginum, þat er til heyr^e þer ^^ ok 20
" fálkanum, því at litlu sí^ar enn vit skildum, þótti
*' mér ^^ líkast, sem beyg^r mannsíingr kæmi at mínu
" auga me^ svo strí'Sum áverka/^ at þegar gekk augat
" ni^r á kinnina. pví em ek kominn at" fri'Smælast
" vit Gu^ ok hinn heilaga Thomas me'S sannri i^ran, 25
" ok jamvel bi'S eg þik, at þú fyrerláter mér ^^ íyrer
" þá reiting, er eg gjöröa þér/^ ok );ar me^ vil ek, at
" þú bi^er myskunnar." Má þetta efne lúka utan
langmælgi, hversu einkanliga ^^ GuÖ Drottinn skipa'Si,
^ seiger, T.
2 sier, T.
3 leingi, T.
4 hier.T.
5 so, T.
^ aundverdu, T.
7 nv, T.
8 hettv, T.
^ asionv, T.
10 funnduzt, T.
" sze, T.
i^ annsuar, T.
13 sank, T.
i^ viissþykt, T.
15 þier, T.
i^ mier, T.
17 avercka, T.
i^ einkannliya, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 145
The other answereth, that by the mercifulness of
Thomas he hopeth that he will not account to his
shame anything for which he may pray hhn in true
honesty and meek humilit3\ ^^ parting thereupon, the
lord set himself stoutly against this. Now the hawk
cometh to the church and flieth up to the altar of the holy
Thomas. But only a short while the man hath tarried
there, when he heareth the noise of many people entering
the temple. He soon seeth that there walketh at the head
of the crowd a man dressed even as he was dressed
whom he had already met on the road, and he also
seeth that he wareth a slouching hat covering his face,
and he walketh bowed and bent as if smitten by sorrow.
At this the falconer marvelleth much, remembering-
how high-stomacked the lord had borne himself before,
when they met. And as soon as he seeth his way to
it, he turneth to the lord, asking, how it was, that he
had come there again now, having only just lately left
the place. And this was the answer he got : " Good
" fellow," said he, " this is the cause thereof, that I have
'' fallen under the displeasure of our lord the holy arch-
" bishop Thomas for the bold outspokenness which I be-
" trayed on the way to-day, as to the matter concerning
" thee and the hawk. For shortly after our parting it
'' seemed to me, as if the bent finger of a man moved to-
" wards my eye, doing me such harm as to gouge it out
" unto the cheek. Therefore I have come back, to seek
" peace with God and the holy Thomas in true repen-
" tance, and I will even beg thee to forgive me the affront
" done to thee, and entreat thee moreover to pray for
" my mercy." This matter we may bring to an end
without prolixity by relating that in a wondrous manner
God the Lord so ruled it, that the man and the bird under-
E511.
146 THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
at ma^r ok fugl skiftu^ svo, at vors Herra bo^i, at
maörinn haf^i fugis auga, enn fuglÍDn þá aftr '^ manns
auga. Fræg^ist þetta verk ^ af því margfaldliga,^ at
hverr ^ sem skynja^i hvort^ þeira form ok náttúru,
mátti þat sannliga dæma, at þat var ö^rum '^ eigin- 5
ligt af skapan, er annar hafSi. Var riki maíir sí^an
myklu skygnari enn a^r, )?ótt hann væri nökku^ ^ ein-
leitr, enn ];at fylgdi ]?vi, at svefn J'urfti hann svo
litinn J?vi auganu, er fiiglinn haf^i haft, at honum
þótti mein a, því at þat vildi náliga vaka allar nætr. 10
Er her ^ j^vert ^^ í móti þat, er fálkanum til heyrer,
hann var svefnugr sem ma'Sr, svo at honum kom
var la a fætr e^r á Aug til sinnar i^ju. Lyktast hjart-
teign me^r J^eim or^um, at Drottinn er dásamligr me^
Thómase erkibyskupi ok öllum^^ sínum ástvinum. 15
KAP. XCVIII.
Um^^ jaeteignagjöed Thóme.
Svo miin ^^ vitrum mönnum sýnast mega, at hjart-
teignaforn hins bleza'Sa Thóme erkibyskups samlíkLst
vel uppreistnm vi^i, þeim er pálmi heiter. Sá vi^r er 20
vaxinn^^ ólíkr ö^rum^^ trjám, ]?ví at hann er minnstr
vit jör^, enn megnastr æ til vaxtar ^^ svo sem rót ^d"Sar-
ins, er fagiinn me^ náttúru fyrir manns augum merk-
er ^^ hún. pví skýra J?ær vitraner er upphafliga runnu
sem rót under hjartteignum, því at svefnar tjár hug- 25
skoti, enn eigi líkams augliti. Upp ■'^ af þessarri ^^ rót
gekk vi'Srinn vægiliga meiS smærum hjartteignum ytri
^ skiptu, T,
2 aptr, T.
3 verck, T.
■* margfalldUga, T.
5 hver, T.
6 hvortt, T.
7 audrum, T.
* naukkud, T.
9 hier, T.
10 þuertt, T.
" aullum, T.
12 Fm, T.
13 mvn, T.
!■* vagsinn, T.
i^ audrum, T.
i^ vaxstar, T.
17 mercker, T.
^8 Fpi?, T.
19 ]>essari, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 147
went such a change, according to the command of our
Lord, that the man had a bird's eye, but the bird got
back a man's eye. This miracle became far-famed and
manifoldly for this reason, that whosoever inquired into
the form and nature of either eye, could judge truly, that
by creation it was natural to one, what the other had.
Now ever afterwards the lord was much more keen-
sighted than before, thouo-h he was somewhat odd-lookins ;
but with this it went that he needed so little sleep for
the eye which the bird had had, that he deemed it a
right troublesome matter, as it would be awake through
nearly all the night. The hawk's case was the contrary ;
he being as sleepy as a man is wont to be, so that he
might scarcely be roused to his feet or to flight to do
his work. This miracle endeth with the words that the
Lord is made glorious through archbishop Thomas and
all his beloved ones.
CHAP. XCVIII.
Concerning Thomas' working of Miracles.
It will seem to wise men that the miracles of the
blessed archbishop Thomas may well be likened to the
straight tree called the palm-tree. That tree groweth
unlike unto other trees, beiug narrowest at the ground,
but spreading out in growing, even as does the root of
other trees.^ This
similitude makes plain the visions which from the be-
ginning went as roots under the miracles, for dreams set
forth things spiritual, not things with a bodily appear-
ance. Up from this root the tree grew gently by lesser
miracles for its outward branches, until it exjDanded into
^ The blank represents a corruption in the original which defies all
attempts at restoration.
K 2
148
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
lima, )?ar til harm proa^ist æ til meiri vaxtar, sem im
um ^ tima liefer lesit verit. KöllT:im ^ vær nu ^ komit
upp at limum ok sjálfum ávextinum, )?ví at allra manna
skilningT er einn i því máli, at ]?at se^ hit hæsta
hjai'tteignablóm heilags nianns, ef hann p>iggr þá til o
lifs me^ sinum ver^leik, sem áör eru dauSer ok burt^
úr ^ heiminum. Ok )7vi skal );essu næst byrja J?at
efne til lofs ok dyr^ar sælum Thome erkibyskupi, at
signa^r Daví^ psalmista '' syngi honum J?vi framar
hepiligar : Justus ut palma florebit.^ 10
A mother I nálægS vit erkistólinn ^ í Kanncia sat ^^ einn bóndi,
child-bed nykvæntr ma^r ok vel fiáreio:andi. Hans buo-ai^r
is brought to f ,^ • • j- / v v\ • -i ^ ^
liie again, stoo eigi nrr stamum enn ^^ emar tvær v]kui\ par i
bynum sat mágr bans ok kynfer^e umbergis. Tvo
frændr nana at ti hann mjog olika, annarr ^- var mo^ur- 1 5
bró"Sir^^ bans, gestrisinn ma^r ok gó-Srar frægSar, hrein-
lyndr ok alú^arvin klerkanna i Kanncia fyrer ástúS
heilags Thome. Hann haf^i lagt fyr nefndum systursyni
sinum nökkut ^^ góz ^^ til kvonarmundar me^ öllum ^^
lagalesti. Annarr ^^ frændi bóndans var illmenni mikit, 20
bafSr í stórmælum af heilagri kirkju, bannsettr me-S
dIIu-^^ fyrer svo há'Suliga skemd, at hann haf^i lagzt^^
me^ tveimr systrum, enn verndar síSan giæpinn me'S
þrjózku ok vill eigi vit skiljast. Bóndijin, er vær
nefndum í fyrstu, er svo blindr, at hann dregr í 25
fylgi me^ þeim frænda sínum, er verr^^ haf^i, ok honum
þikist hann veita þat li^ at vera einginn leitamaSr
til Kanntarab;^^'gis, heldr^*^ í mótdrætti þat smátt er
1 vm, T.
2 Kaullum, T.
3 nv, T.
4 sie, T.
5 hurtt, T.
6 vr, T.
7 So Prof. Unger
s Ps. xcii. 12.
' erckistoliji, T.
10 sath, T.
spabnista, T.
11 e7i}i, added by the editor.
12 annar, T.
1' modrbrodir, T.
1"* nauckut, T.
15 godz, T.
16 auUum, T.
17 auUu, T.
13 lagdzt, T.
1' ver, T.
20 heUdr, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 149
a constantly increasing growth, even as has been read
now for a while. Now we hold that the growth has
reached up to the branches and the very fruit, for all
men ao-ree in iinderstandino^ it as the hi^*hest flower of
the miracles of a holy man, when he fetch eth to life
again by his merits those who were already dead and
out of the world. And therefore, next in order to these
things, we shall begin setting forth this matter to the
praise and the glory of the holy archbishop Thomas, that
the blessed Psalmist David may the more fitly sing of
him : Justus ut palma florebit.
In the neighbourhood of the arch-see of Canterbury
there dwelt a certain goodman newly married and well
to do. His homestead stood no farther away from the
place than two miles only. In that very town lived
his brother-in-law, and his other kinsfolk in the neio-h-
bourhood round about. He had two near kinsmen right
unlike each other ; one being his mother's brother, a hos-
pitable man and of good fame, upright of heart, and a
dear friend of the clerks in Canterbury for the sake of
his love to the holy Thomas. He had handed over to
his sister's son some goods as a dowry with his wife
altogether contrary to law. The other of the goodman's
kinsmen was a right evil fellow, excommunicated from
the church for such a heinous shame as having lain with
two of his sisters, and afterwards obstinately defending
his crime and refusing to desist from it. The afore-
named goodman was so blind, as to make a common cause
with the very one of his kinsmen who was in this evil
case, deeming that he was giving support to his cause
by not going on pilgrimages to Canterbury but rather
150 THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
til féllr. Sömu ^ leiS ferr þat, er heilögum ^ Tliomase
til lieyrer, því at hvorki ^ hans ne onniu' ^ teikn vill
hana í sinu húsi geymast lata. Ok því var ei undar-
ligt,^ ])ó at þat eynidarherbergi stæ^i til raikils
bardaga, er svo syktist margfaldliga.^ Nu geingr svo 5
til efms, at húspreyjan er me^ barne, ok efter ^
li'Sinn^ tiraa legst hon í sótt at kvenna si^. Horf-
er^ ]?at ei vænliga, því at hennar lettakonur skilja
brátt, at burSrinn er liflauss -"^ me^ henna, enn sottin
harSnar J?vi meir ok herder sig inn at lifi sjálfrar 10
hennar. Er nu gjort ^^ bo^ efter" fö^ur^- hennar,
kemr hann ]?angat fljott til huspreyja-^^ sinnar ok dott-
lor ^^ ok at J^essu frændli^i samankomnu ^^ me^ eymd
ok angri gi'ét hans hus i allar álfur. Ok J?ó stendr enn
efter ^ nokkut,^^ ]?vi at bonda fellr svo nær af nftekn- 15
um ^^ astum-"-^ at hugr hans glatar sinn styrk ^^ ok
veltr^^ Í svo mikit volaö, at hann er buinn til ferSar.
Huspreyja in sjuka kenner gjörla, hvat ser ^^ li^r, at
dau^e sjalfr er fyrer dyrum, ok |7vi hugsar hun þang-
at at renna til fulltings ok hjálpar, sem nu var 20
allra o-oSra manna si^r í Enoiandi.^^ Enn saker ^
veykleika bonda sins ok fyr greindrar illmennsku ^
J?orer hun eigi at heita a hinn heilaga Thomam fyrer
ser,^^ svo at hann ^^ viti, ok þó vill hun gjarnan fa
nokkut -^^ af hans blezo^um -^ teiknum at bera yfer 25
^ Saumu, T.
- heilaiigum, T.
3 hvorcki, T.
^ aunnr, T.
■5 unndarligt, T.
^ margfalldliga, T.
' epter, T.
8 lidin, T.
9 Horuer, T.
10 lijlaus, T.
11 giörtt, T.
12 faudr, T.
13 huspryiv, T.
" dottr, T.
15 samankomnv, T.
1Ö nauckut, T.
1' nyteknvm, T.
13 astvm, T.
19 styrck, T.
20 velltr, T.
21 sier, T.
22 Einglandi, T.
2^ So Unger ; sak only, T.
2-* ilhnenzku, T.
2' hami added by Prof. Unger.
26 blezaudum, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 151
by setting himself against the church in every little matter
that might happen. In the same manner he dealeth in
matters concerning the holy Thomas, for he would have
in his house no relics appertaining to him or any one
else. And therefore it was not to be wondered at, that
that miserable home should have to undergo a hard
punishment, being so manifoldly diseased.
Now it so befalleth, that the goodwife grows heavy
with child, and in course of time falleth sick after the
manner of women ; which matter taketh a nowise hopeful
turn, since her midwives soon make sure that the child
is lifeless within her. But the throes harden more and
more, even so as to threaten her very life. Now a
messenger is sent to her father, who soon joineth his
wife and daughter, whereon, the family being thus
gathered there together in misery and sadness, the whole
house was filled with weeping in every quarter. And
yet there was something more withal, for in his young-
love the husband took all this so much to heart that his
mind lost its strength altogether and fell into such a state
of wretchedness as to be about taking its departure from
him. The sick wife clearly perceiveth how it fareth
with her, and that the very death is at the door,
and therefore thinketh to hasten thither for help and
relief, whither to go it was now the wont of all good
folk in England. But by reason of her husband's dis-
order, and the aforesaid wickedness in him, she durst not
make a vow for herself to the holy Thomas with her
husband's knowledge, and yet she longed to have some
152
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
sig. pat tekr hún rá'Ss at síSustu, at bun kallar sinn
trúna^armann ^ ok fær honum leyniliga eitt iingrgull
har^la vænt ok seger ^ svo til bans : " pil skalt ^ fara
" til Kantarabyrgis ok bera sælum Tbóœasi kve^ju
" mína nieö þessarri ^ minning. Her ^ me^ skaltu ^ 5
" bi"Sja bann, sem J?ú kannt bezt, at Imnn virM mik
" eigi samblandna ^ þeiri fæ^, er bóndi ^ minn leggr til
" bans, því at svo vil ek frjálsast úr ^ allri kvöl, sem ek
" truer bans heilagleik ok ek treyster bans bænura.
" Gjarna vilda^*^ ek, at þú feinger vatn hans, ok ef 10
" ek er lifs. Enn flýttu ^^ feröinne, því at sóttin geingr
" mér ^- nær." SendimaMnn ^^ ferr sem íljótast má
hann ok fær vatnit, enn )?ó er búspreyjan erind, á^r
enn bann kemr aftr.^^ Vex nú eymd at nyju."^^ Vit
þat var bóndinn/^ áör harmsleginn, vitlanss^^ me^ öllu/^ 15
ok j?at er nú meira starf í bænum at geyma hann
lifanda enn búspreyina dau^a. pat er nú ráös tekit,
at bleypt er nú upp í býinn til þess lika manns, er
reyndr var at gó^um rá'Sum. Ok ]?egar sem hann
heyrer svo mikinn harm, breg'Sr bann vit ok kemr 20
framm. Er þar ógla^ligt inngöngu/^ oinn er dau^r,
annarr -^ vitlauss,-^ allt folk var í kveini ^'^ ok angri.
Eíki ma^r leitar efter "^^ spakliga, bversu til befer geing-
it um -^ sóttarfar liúsfrúrinnar e^r vanheilsu bóndans.
1 trvnadarmann, T.
2 seiger, T.
3 skallt, T.
■* þessari, T.
5 Hier,T.
^ skalltu, T.
' savihlanna, T.
* bonndi, T.
9 vr, T.
10 villda, T.
11 Jlyttv, T.
12
nuer.
13 Senndimadrinn, T.
i< aptr, T.
15 nyiv, T.
i^ bonndinn^ T.
17 vitlauss, editor's alteration. T.
reads : Vit þat var bonndinn adr
harmslegmn vitleysis, &c., an evi-
dent blunder of a thoughtless scribe,
■who wanted vitleysis to be governed
by harmsleginn, or by vor ; both
cases of an inadmissible syntax.
18 auUu, T.
19 inngautigu, T.
20 annar, T.
21 vitlaus, T.
22 kuein, T.
23 epter, T.
24 vm, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 153
of his blessed tokens borne over her. At last she made
up her mind, and calleth a certain trusty man, and
delivereth secretly to him a golden ring, a right goodly,
and said to him : " Thou shalt go to Canterbury, and
*' bring the holy Thomas my greeting, together with
'' this reminder. And therewithal thou shalt pray him
" as well as thou canst, not to hold me a partaker in the
" ill-will which my husband beareth him, for even as I
" desire to be rid of all my pains, even so do I believe
" in his holiness and trust in his prayers. I would fain
" thou shouldst get his water, and if I be alive . . . But
" hasten thy journey, for the sickness lieth heavilj' on me."
The messenger went at his speediest, and got the water ;
yet, or ever he cometh back, the goodwife lieth bereft of
her life already. Now the grief waxeth anew withal. And
thereat the goodman, already sorely smitten with grief,
waxeth clean witless, so that now it becometh a harder
ado in the town to keep him alive than to watch over
the goodwife dead. Now the people betake them to a
certain rich man up in the town who was renowned for
wholesome counsel. And forthwith, on hearing the
tale of this great grief, he bestirreth himself and cometh
forward to them. And a cheerless entry he hath into
the house in sooth, where one person lieth dead, another
is mad, and all folk deep in lamentations a.nd sorrow.
The rich man inquireth wisely, how all had come to
pass, as concerning the illness of the goodwife and the
disorder of the husband.
154 THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
Sa ma^r seger ^ honnm, sem for til Kannciam, hversu ^
husfruin ^ friSmæltist ^ vit sælan ^ Thomam. Riki
ma^r seger |?á : " Eg þikjumst skilja, at frændi
" minn er haklinn ^ tvennre " sekt, ok J7vi er honum
" makliga komit tvefalt^ syndagjakl ^ fyrer þanii ó- 5
" j7okka, er hann hefer sækim ^^ ThÓDiase ok sta^num
" Í Kancia, mun ^^ bann hafa latit husfrn ^^ sina, enn
" fyrer sitjan vi^ frænda sinn bannsettan, mun -^^ hann
'' hafa tapat samvizkunne." Si^an talar hann svo vit
þann sama mann : " pii skalt fara í annan tima til 1 0
" Kantarabyrgis ok færa Thómase vin ininum-^^ bring
" þenna, er ek fær J?ér,^^ ok her ^^ me^ ber )?ú or^ mín
" síi'a Guzalin, at bann komi til mín me^ þá beil-
" aga dóma^ sem hann væiiter at mesta myskunn
" megi afla, ]m at vær þurfLim nú^*^ nijög vi^." 15
Sendima^rinn skilar bringnum ok flytr sem greint
var prestinum.^" Síra Guzalin býst á þann hátt til
þessa móts, at bann flytr me'S sér ^^ vors Herra likama
ok bló^bland bins heilaga Tbóme erkibyskups. Ok
sem hann kemr framm ^^ til bæjarins,-*^ bi^r riki ma^r 20
hann gjöra ]?eim buggan fyrer Gu^s nafn. Hann
byijar svo, at bann lætr bland beilags Thome erki-
byskups í vígSan kalek, sí^an berr hann yfer evkar-
istiam í kross ok lætr 1 si^ustu fórnarbjólit mæta
vatninu. Svo bleza^an liquorem leggr harm me'S 25
léttri fjö^r yfer auga búspreyjunnar frammli^innar.*^^
Ok henni bregSr líkt vit sem sofanda manni, ef þann
^ seiger, T.
- So Prof. linger ; haorsu, T.
3 husfruinn, T.
4 fridmœlltizt, T.
^ sœlanii, T.
6 halldinn, T.
7 tuenre, T.
8 tuevalt, T.
^ syndagialld, T.
10 sœlvm, T.
" mvn,T.
1- husfrv, T.
i^ 7nhwm, T.
i^ þier, T.
15 hier, T.
16 7W, T.
1" prestÍ7iwn, T.
18 sier, T.
19 fram, T.
■^" bqiarins. T.
"1 framlidinnar, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 155
The man, who went as messenger to Canterbury, told
him how the good wife had made her peace with the blessed
Thomas, whereupon the rich man speaketh thus : " Me-
" thinks I understand now that my kinsman is beholden
" in twofold guilt, wherefore on him hath deservedly
" fallen a twofold wages for sin. For the ill-will he
" beareth the blessed Thomas and the city of Canter-
'^ bury he must have lost his wife ; but for his commu-
" nion with his excommunicated kinsman he must needs
" have lost his reason/' Thereafter he speaketh further
to that same man ; " Thou shalt go again, a second time,
" to Canterbury, and bring my friend Thomas this ring,
" which I now deliver unto thee, and therewithal thou
" shalt bring my word to Sir Guzalin to come unto me
" with such holy things as he deemeth may afford the
" greatest mercy in this case ; for now we stand in great
" need indeed thereof."
The messenger handeth over the ring, and delivereth
unto the priest the message afore-mentioned. Sir Guzalin
prepareth for their meeting in such a manner as to bring
with him the body of our Lord and a mixture of the
blood of the holy archbishop Thomas. And when he
aiTÍveth in the town, the rich man prayeth him, in the
name of God, to give them some comfort in their afflic-
tion. He beginneth by putting the mixture of the blood
of the holy Thomas into a consecrated cup, whereupon
he carrieth thereover the eucharist so as to make the
sign of the cross, and, at last, maketh the pyx touch the
water. The fluid, thus consecrated, he spreadeth with a
light feather over the eyes of the goodwife where she is
lying dead. And she starteth like one asleep being so
156 THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
veg er vit^ hann komit. Hun sér^ upp augum ok
renner til sýnar. Enn litlu si^ar, sem hiin gTeiner,
me^ hverju ^ sottarfar hennar liofst í fp'stu, kallar
hun til sin )?ær léttakonur,^ sém fyr baf^i hún, segist ^
kenna, at bm^^rinn befer lif þegit, ok bun vænter -5
sér- letta. Hvat er lengra,^ enn me'S fyrstu skerpu,
sem benni kemr, fæ^er bun sveinbarn, bæ^i vænt ok
liftnikit. Ok rett jafnframm " sem piltrinn ® kom í
Ijós, var fa^er bans aftr^ leiddr í sama ^^ sam^^.zku.
Ma þat gó^r ma^r buglei'Sa, bversu^^ safnabrinn^- munde 10
)?ar sætliga Gu^ lofa ok bans baleitan vin Tbómam
erkibyskup. Sira Guzalin skir^i piltinn ^'^ nýfæddan ^^
me^ Tbómas nafne, þvi at bann skilde, bversu J>at
var vibkvæmiligt, at þann sem erkibyskup reisti til
lífs, beite bans eignarnafne. Yar bóndi-'^'^ eigi sí"San 15
minni' góSviljugr enn á^r barSundinn.^^ Ok-^^ sá kyn-
þáttr elska^i sætHga þann blezaSa GuSs mann Tbóm-
am erkibyskup, er me^ Gu'Si lifer án enda.^^
KAP. XCIX.
Af Jordan us riddara. 20
The son of Jórdanus beiter riddari, ríkr ma^r ok mikill vin
a kmeht ., ,
called to lift
XXX..O x.v.^«,^.v ^
L^v,, y
^^^^ r^ — o'^' — —
again by
Thomas'
Wflt'PT
jafnan fegins ^^
bende,
2° bvort er )?eir fóru framm e^r
»* <X 1^1 •
1 uith,T.
1- Editor's alteration ; fagnadrin,
- sier, T.
T., i.e. the joy, which is out of
3 hueriv, T.
question.
•1 Vettakonr, T.
13 pill (inn, T.
^ seiyizt, T.
1^ nyfæddann, T.
^ lemgra, T.
'5 bonndi, T.
' joft'fram, T.
16 hardiimdin, T.
^ piUtrimi, T.
1" After Ok T. adds ac/r, an eri-
9 aptr, T.
dent repetition of adr before hard-
10 So T. Profes
sor
Unger
pro-
inndin.
poses to change soma into
s{7ia.
1^ erinda, T.
But for such a change
there
is no
19 /e?>in5, T.
necessity.
20 hermde, T.
11 fiver sv, T.
THE STORY OF- ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 157
touched. She turneth up her eye, and looketh around.
And shortly afterwards, recalling in her mind how her
illness first began, she calleth to her the mid wives she
had erst had, saying that she perceiveth that her birth
hath received life, and that she hopeth now to be de-
livered. What more, but at the first throe that cometh
upon her she bringeth forth a male child, a goodly and
right healthy one. And forthwith as the boy was
brought forth his father was restored again to his reason.
Any good man may well consider how sweetly the folk
there assembled did give their praise to God and his
exalted friend archbishop Thomas. Sir Guzalin bap-
tised the new-born child to the name of Thomas, well
understanding how befitting it was that he, whom the
archbishop had raised to life, should bear his own name.
After this the goodman was no less devoted to the holy
Thomas than he had been full of hardness of heart
towards him before. And this family ever afterwards
loved sweetly that blessed God's man, archbishop Thomas,
who liveth with God everlastingly.
CHAP. XCIX.
Concerning the knight Jordanus.
There was a certain knight hight Jordanus, a mighty
man, and a great friend of the holy Thomas, inasmuch as
he used always to receive with open arms his pilgrims,
158 THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
frá, veitti hann öUum ^ herbergit, er hafa vildu, ok
mörgum ^ bæ'Si samt hús ok viöværi. pat fell ^ til í
lians herbergjum me^ Gu"£s domi, at um^haustit í
Augusto mána^i, kom J^ar inn sott mikil ok stó^ allan
tima iramm ° til páska. Enn eigi greiner bok, at 5
manndau^i fylgdi svo mikill )?eiri sott, enn þat stendr^
skrifat, at Jordan átti son, er Yiljálmr heiter, hann
var komicn á tíunda vetr. Fóstrmó^ur átti hann piltr-
inn,^ er honum haféi veitt fagrt uppfæSi,^ hún tekr
sott ok andast.^ Ok þegar á þi-Sja degi^^ efter/^ 10
sem huin er greftn^,-^- sjkist piltrinn ^^ urn ^ atta daga,
enn andast -^^ si^an a þri^ju tí^ dags, er vær köllum '^^
dagmál. Ok íijótliga kemr prestr ok sjmgT sæmiliga
yfer piltiniim/^ þvd at honum j^ótti ofrs von efter ^^
svo ríks manns son. Alia hina næstu nótt efter^^ er 1-5
vakat yfer piltinnm ^^ me^ grát ok Ijoskeriim, því at
bæ^i fa^er ok roo-Ser sátu í sorg. Næsta morgin eft-
er ^^ koma ]7ar xx. pílagrímar hins heilaga Thóme
erkibyskups. pessir höf^n ■'^' verit í Kancia ok flytja
þa^an me^ sér-^^ heilagt vatn af hans benjum.^^ Eidd- 20
arinn tekr ]7á me"S ástú^ efter^^ vana, gjörandi'^^ þeim
vænan snæ^ing me^ sjálfs síns gózi,^^ á^r enn þeir
fara á burt-^ af bans garSi. Ok sem at þeir leys-
ast í bnrt,- bi'Sr hann ]?á at gefa sér ^^. af vatne
heilags Thóme. Kemr prestr brátt á garíinn í móti 25
líkama sveinsins, at hann flytist ok greftist."^^ Ridd-
^ auUum, T.
2 manrgum, T.
3 fiell, T.
■* vm, T.
5 fram, T.
^ stenndr, T.
7 pilltrinn, T.
^ ^PPf<^di, T.
^ ainidazt, T.
10 deigi, T.
11 epter, T.
12 greptud, T.
13 piUtrin, T.
i-í (ouidazt, T.
15 kauUum, T.
i^ pilltinvm, T.
17 haufdu, T.
i^ sier, T.
19 benivm, T.
2*^ giorarmdi, T.
21 godzi, T.
22 burtt, T.
23 greptizt, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 159
coming as well as departing, giving quarter to all who
desired it, and to many both house and provisions
together. By the judgment of God it so befell, that his
house was visited one autumn-tide in the month of
August by a great plague, which lasted all the time unto
Easter. But the book relateth not that with that plague
there went any great loss of life. But it is written, that
Jordanus had a son, William by name, who had already
reached his tenth winter. The youth had a foster-
mother^ that had given him a right goodly education ;
who was taken ill and died. And already on the third
day after her burial, the boy was taken ill, and, having
been laid up for eight days, died at the third hour of the
day, which we call day-meal. And speedily the priest
Cometh to sing the death chant over the youth worthily,
inasmuch as he looked for a goodly fee for so rich a
man's son. All through next night watch is kept over
the youth amid weeping and lighted lanterns, for both
father and mother sat there mourning. Next morning
twenty pilgrims of the holy archbishop Thomas arrive
there who had been in Cancia, and who brought with
them the holy water of his wounds. The knight re-
ceiveth them lovingly, as was his wont, setting a goodly
repast of his plenty before them before going away from
his house. And as they were about to break up he
prayeth them to give him a little of the water of St.
Thomas. Soon the priest cometh to the house for the
body of the youth, in order to have it brought away and
160
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
arinn seger,^ at prestr skal fyrst taka vatn ^ hins
heilaga ^ Thome ok dre}']^)a í munn piltinum/ ok
seger^ )?at sitt hugbo^, at heilagr Thomas leiSi aftr^
son hans í veraldligt lif. Prestrinn seger svo, ok skip-
ast ekki vit, bySr sig enn til at færa líkit til kirkju- ^
graftar, seger/ at ]?etta er vitleysi at varSveita
svo lengi ^ daii^an mann. Jordan seger,^ at betr
skal profa J>at mal, á^r enn piltrinn ^ er grafinn :
" pvi at mer ' vikst aldri hugr um ^ fat/' sag^i hann,
" at Thomas erkibyskup muni til sin um ^ taka, 10
" ek var hans maSr ok vin alia stund, ámeöan hami
'• lif^i." Si^an o-eÍDgr hann at likamanum ok setr knif
Í milium tanna honum ok hellir si^an vatninu ofan í
búkinn, ok til J?ess, a^ vatnib skull ni^r leita í brjóstit
ok því framar, lyfter^*^ hann upp höf'Sinu.^^ Ok sem 15
hann hefer her ^- at sta'Sit um hrí^, kemr rau^r
flekkr í vinstri kinnina, ok nökkuru ^^ sí^ar lyfter ^^
hann upp augiinum, svo giöggr^^ í sinne grein, at
hann kenner bæSi fö'Sur -^^ ok móSur ^^ ok talar svo til
þeira : "pví standit þit me^ harmi yfer mér," ^ sag^i hann, 20
*' þar sem hinn heilagi Thomas byskup vill, at ]?it
" fagnit bæ"Si ? pví leiddi hann mik aftr,^ at ek
" skyldi lifa ykkr til hugganar." Svo reis hann upp
af börum ^^ heill ok albættr. Haf ^i dau^r verit ^^ alt
frá J?ri^ju^^ tíS -*^ ok til þrettándu -^ stundar á næsta 25
dag efter.-
T.
1 seiger, T.
2 vatnn, T.
^ So Prof. Unger ; heilag only,
"* pilltuwm, T.
5 aptr, T.
^ leingi, T.
7 pilltrin, T.
^ mier, T.
9 vm, T.
10 lypter, T.
" haufdinv, T.
12 hier, T.
i^ nauckuru, T.
i^ glauggr, T.
15 faudr, T.
16 modr, T.
1' baurum, T.
is daudr verit added by Prof.
Unger.
19 þridiv, T.
20 tidh, T.
21 þrettafivdu, T.
22 epter, T.
THE STORY OF 4-RCHBISHOP THOMAS. 161
buried. The knight prayeth the priest first to take the
water of the holy Thomas, and let it drop into the mouth
of the youth, saying, at the same time, that his mind
forbodes him that the holy Thomas will bring back his
son to earthly life again. The priest doeth as he was
bid, yet without any avail, whereupon he once more
ofFereth to bring the body to burial, protesting that it be
a right foolish thing to keep so long unburied the dead
body. Jordan answereth, that that matter shall have a
fuller trial still or ever the youth be buried in the earth :
" For I can never get it out of my mind," said he, " that
" archbishop Thomas will not make his power manifest
" now ; for I was his man and his friend ever, as long as
'' he was alive." Thereupon he goeth up to the body,
and thrusting a knife in between the teeth, he poureth
the water into the body, and in order that the water may
penetrate into the breast and thenceforward further still,
he lifteth up the head. Now when he hath been busy
in this manner for a while, a red speck was seen to flush
the left cheek (of the youth), and shortly afterwards he
lifteth up his eyes, being then so clear of understanding
as to recognise both his father and mother, to whom
he speaketh thus : —
"Why do you stand grieving over me," said he, " when
" the holy archbisho]) Thomas desireth that you should
" both be rejoicing? Even therefore he hath led me
" back to life, that I should live for your comfort." So
he rose from the bier hale and wholly restored, having
been dead from the third hour of the day until the thir-
teenth hour the next day.
K541.
162 THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
Aciiiid Fylger hér^ enn annat dýr^artákn líkt í sömu^
its bath is grein. Ekkja nökkur ^ sat^ í bæ litlum nære sió í
life. England], liún átti iij. börn/ dótter hennar var frum-
vaxta, önnur ^ ];révetr^ sonr hennar var misseri>s '^ gam-
mall. Nú ^ geingr svo til, at áli^nu sumri, at ekkj- 5
an fer til laugar me^ J?esse tvö enu ^ yngri börnin ^^
at þvo )/eim ok búa til svefns. Sem þa-u voru á'Sr
laugmó-S, enn er )?au sitja í laugunne, kalla fjölskyldur^-'-
at mó^urinne, svo at hún geymer eigi rá'Ssins, því
at bun bý& um ^^ eldra barninu^^ at hugsa til bins 10
yngra. Ferr bún til i'Sju sinnar at vinza korn. Enn
barnfóstri^ tekst eigi betr enn svo, at J?at, sem
geyma skyldi, ferr-^^ í burt ^^ at leika ser/^ enn smá-
bamit kafnar í langunne. Ok stundu sí^ar sender
húspreyjan ]?á dóttur sína elztu at sækja verkfære-^^ 15
nökkut/^ er þar liggr hjá laugunne. Kemr bún aftr^^
ma's gi'átliga sögu,^^ at barnit er drekkt^^ í laugar-
vatninu. Mó^er renni' til, tekr barnit ok ber meÖ
kvein ok kall út á ví"San vöU, ok vi'S bennar kall
koma þar saman v. ekkjui^,^^ því at karlmenn voru á 20
sjó róner, enn sumer í akrverki.^^ pær taka piltinn,^^
velta ^^ ok skaka, ef nökkut ^^ mætti vatnit upp ganga,
ok kemr til einkis starf J?eira. par ber at framm
einn Jórsalafara, ok sér á um stund, hvat- þær bafast
at ok sí-San talar bann svo : " Til hvers kemr y^vart 25
1 hier, T.
2 saumu, T.
3 nauckr, T.
4 sath, T.
^ baurn, T.
^ aunnur, T.
' misseriss, T.
9 Nv, T.
9 ejiv, T.
^° baurnin, T.
li Jiolskyldr, T.
12 vm, T.
13 barni7iv, T.
1» &Mr«, T.
16 sier, T.
17 verckfœre, T.
18 nauckut, T.
19 apír, T.
20 saugu, T.
21 (fre^íA, T.
22 eckivr, T.
23 akrvercki, T.
24 pilltimi, T.
25 vellta,T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 163
Along with this there goeth another glorious miracle,
a similar and of the same kind. A certain widow lived
in a small place in England near the sea-side, w^ho had
three children ; a daughter of ripe growth, another three
years of age, and a son half a year old. It so befalletb,
once upon a time, late in summer, that the widow taketh
the two youngest children to a bath to wash them and
prepare them for bed. The children being already tired
from the bathing, yet still sitting in the bath, the mother
is called away by her duties and forgetteth herself, inas-
much as she ordereth the eldest of the two children to
take heed of the youngest, while she herself goeth about
her business winnowing corn. But with the nursing there
goeth no better luck than this, that the one of the two
children which was to have looked after the other, runneth
away to play, and the infant is drowned in the bath. Some
time afterwards, the goodwife sending her eldest daughter
for some implement which she had left behind beside
the bath, the latter returneth with the woeful tale of the
child being drowned in the bath. The mother runneth
to the bath, and lifting up the child carrieth it out into
an open field, crying and calling out aloud. At her cries
some five widows assemble round her, for the husbands
were away out fishing, or busy in the fields. The
widows take the child, turning and shaking it about
to try if the water might be brought up ; yet their
endeavours are of no avail. Now a certain crusader
happened to pass by, and having looked for a while at their
ado, spoke thus : " What availeth you your business
L 2
164
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
Two sons of
a certain
widow arp
raised f iv n
the dead,
having lam
in their
?rave for
several
years.
" starf? Fait ]?ér^ ei skilt, at piltrinn - væri
" löngii^ dau^r?'' Eiii af ekkjunum tekr )?á til or^s :
" Yær skulum heita allar samt ^ á vom Herra ok heil-
" agan Tbomam erkib3-skiap me-S knefalle ok lieilagri
" bæn Pater noster, niu sinnum, a^ vær fáum huggan." 5
pær gjöra svo. Ok er alt samt.^ Önnur^ talar ]?á
til moSurinnar : ^ " Tak einn J^rá-S," sag^i Imo, " ok
" legg vit likit ; heit J^ar Gu^i me^, at gefa heilugum
" Thumase svo hatt kerti ok færa sjálfum Thumasi,
ok afhenda/' '' Ok litlu si^ar enn þetta var gjört,^ 10
flaut úr^ munninum bæ^i blóS ok vatn, ok þar næst
blöski'ar ^^ piltrinn - bá^um augum. Sí'ðan kemr krytr
nökkur^^ í brjóstit, J^ar til at grátr fylger. Svo var
hann af dauba reistr fj^rer vald ok ver^leika iiins
bleza^a Thóme erkibj-.skups. HafSi hann flotit iij. 15
stunder í laugarvatninu, enn a'Srar fimm j^a-San ífrá,
har til er hann lifiiabi piltrinn.- Hann hét ^- GiUi-
bert ok lifSi lengi^^ síðan.
Enn var önnur^^ ekkja kj'nstór ok au^ig, hún^^ var
einkanligr ^^ Yin Tliónie erkibyskups ^' hér ^^ í lífi, hvat 20
þat kosta^i góz,^^ e^a fylgi. Sonu átti hún þrjá, er svo
hétu "^^ Ciprianus, Gustus, Regulus. Ciprianus var
elztr, enn Eegiilus yngstr. Aller voru J?eir bræ^r í
sörau -^ vináttu til Thómam erkibyskups me.^ opinberam
gó'Svilja.-- I þann tima, sem heilagr Thomas var út- 25
» þ/er, T.
- pilltrinn, T.
3 launyu, T.
-* samtt, T.
^ Aiamr, T.
^ modrinnar, T.
7 afheuda, editor's alteration.
Thumasi. Ok af enndi, T., which
makes neither grammar nor sense.
8 giortt, T.
9 vr, T.
10 hlauskrar, T.
11 nauckur, T.
1= hiet, T.
13 leingi, T.
1^ aunnr, T.
15 hvn, T.
'^^ einkannligr, T.
i-" erckihyshup, T.
18 hier, T.
19 godz, T.
-0 hietv, T
-1 sanmv, T.
-- Prof. Unger reads : Al/er voru
þeir bradr i saumv vinattu til Tho-
mam erckibyskups med opinberum
godvilia i Yf^im tuna, sem heilagr
Thomas var uthlagr. Voru þeir, Sec.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 165
" do ye not understand that the boy is dead long ago ? "
Whereupon one of the women taketh up the word, say-
ing : " Let us all pray to our Lord and the holy arch-
" bishop Thomas, kneeling on our knees, and repeating
" nine times the holy prayer of Pater noster, in order
'• that we may be comforted." This they did. Yet
iill remained still as erst it was. Another of the widows
then talketh to the mother : " Take a string," said she,
" and lay it down beside the body, and make there-
" withal a vow to God to give unto the holy Thomas
" even so high a candle, and bring it to the holy Thomas
" yourself." Now shortly after this having been done,
there flowed out of the child's mouth both blood and
water, whereupon he blinked with both eyes. Then
folio weth a certain rattle in the breast, which ended in a
weeping cry. In this way he was released from death
through the merit and power of the blessed archbishop
Thomas. For three hours the boy had been floating
in the bath, and five hours further passed or ever he
revived. His name was Gilbert, and he lived a long life
afterwards.
There was still another widow, a noble and wealthy,
who had been a great friend of archbishop Thomas while
he was alive, both in matters of money and availing help
of other kind. She had three sons, hight Ciprianus,
Gustus, Regulus. Ciprianus was the oldest, but Regulus
the youngest. All these brothers had the same friend-
ship with open goodwill towards archbishop Thomas.
The whole time he spent abroad in banishment, they, as
166
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
lægr,^ voru þeir, sem fyr matti likt heyrast í sögunne,^
svo höndla^er ^ ok haldner, sem konungs svikarar,
ok |?ar fyrer letu þeir bá*Ser sitt líf. Ok einne natt
si^ar enn ]?eir voru grefta^er,^ fær Regulus bro'Ser
þeira brá^a sótt me^ bana ok er lagSr í sömu^ gröf.^ 5
Svo liggja þeir útleg'Sartíma ^ Thóme erkibyskups ok
þar til er hann birtest^ fyrer sinn háleitan dau^a me^
lifuadum^ hjartteignum. Enn svo langan ^^ tíma
fékk^^ mó^er þeira ]?riggja varla glaöan dag, því at
hún grét hsd^i sona lát, ok hversu afskapliga er J?eir 10
voru slegner me^ hatri ok hermd vi^ hennar vin
Thómam erkibyskup. Ok því ser-"^^ mildr^^ fa^er til
lienDar ok kemr í svefne til hennar me^ blí^um or^-
um ok bleza^arfullum/^ sem lienni þakkande allar
sínar velgjörSer. Seger ^^ ok Ijósliga, at þann manna- 15
misse sem hún hefer fengit, hvort sem heldr er fyrer
bans skukP^ e^r ö"Sru^'^ vegs í láti sona sinna, skal
henni aftr ^^ bætast. Efter ^^ svo dýrliga vitran, vaknar
hún, ok fýser^ þrátt at vitja þeirar kirkju,^*^ sem syner
hennar voru grefta^er ^ at. Ok sem hún ^^ kemr at 20
kirkjunne ok ber sig inn í gar^inn, lýstr upp Ijósi
myklu fyrer hennar ásjónu, svo at fyrer ótta, er
hana grípr í sýn þessari, þoi'er hún eigi framm at
halda ferSinne, ok víkr sér^^ aftr^^ at hli'Sinu. Ok
But the context demands evidently
the intepunction which I have
adopted.
I uthlœgr, T.
" saugunne, T.
3 haundlader, T.
^ greptader, T.
° sawnv, T.
6 grauf, T.
7 vtlegdariima, T.
^ So altered bj the editor; birt-
ter, T.
^ lifunndum, T.
^^ langamiy T.
II fieck, T.
Í2 sier, T.
Í3 milldr, T.
1* In all probability hlezadarful-
lum is nothing but a miswrit for
blezanarfuUum, but I have not felt
quite at liberty to substitute the one
for the other.
15 Seiger, T.
16 skulld, T.
1' audru, T.
1^ dptr,T.
19 Epter, T.
20 kirkiv, T.
21 hvn, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 1G7
might be deemed likely enough from what has been heard
before in the story, were treated and done by as if they
were indeed the king's traitors, wherefore it came to
pass that both lost their life. And on the night after their
burial, theú' brother Regulus was taken by a sudden ill-
ness which brought him to his end, so that he was laid
in the same grave with the rest. Thus they lay during
the time that archbishop Thomas spent in banishment,
even until he appeareth after his glorious death in living
miracles. But all that time their mother scarcely saw
a happy day, but mourned both the death of her sons and
the fearful manner in which they were slain out of
sheer hatred and malice to her friend archbishop Thomas.
Therefore the compassionate father turneth his look unto
her, and appeareth to her in sleep with sweet words and
fall of blessino' thankinor her for all her kind deeds towards
him, declaring openly, too, that the loss she has sus-
tained in the death of her sons, be it caused through him
or otherwise, shall be repaired. After this glorious vision
she awake th, desiring forthwith to go to the church
whereat her sons lay buried. And straightway as she
approacheth the church and betaketh herself into the
churchyard, a great light blazeth up before her face, so
that by the great fear which therewithal fell upon her
from this vision, she ventureth not to proceed on her
journey, but turneth back to the gate. Forthwith she
168
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
an dvöl he3^rer him, at henni er efterfor ^ veitt,
Enn hull hræ^ist ekki því minnr, ]7ar til at otti flýr,
enn fagna'Sr fyller hennar brjost; því at til beggja
handa ganga her - framm ^ syner hennar fyr nefnder,
reister af dau^a, e^a sannara orStak, at þeir voru 5
roister til lifs af jarSar leir, ok þó voru |>eir nú ^ bæ'Si
væner ok vel haldner í valdi ok ver^leikum vors
Drottins astvinar Thome erkibyskups. Mun ^ vel
skiljanda uianni synast einkanliga íVammkvæmt ^ í
J?essu dyr^arverki J?at, er fyr me^ or'Sum vors Herra 10
Jesu Kristi var lesit i vitruninne, at slikt vald, sem
harm gaf Petre postula voldugum Jons syni, þvílíkt
mundi " hann gefa vir^uligum Thome Kantúariensi.^
Annan skilning ma l?ann lei^a af þessu dýr"Sartákne,
hversu milde heilags Thome skin meS himnesku Ijose, 15
ef hann hefer dau'San lifgat fyrer bæn Jess manns,
er omakligastr var á ^ jar^riki fyrer ofsokn ok utleg^er,
fyrst honnm sjalfam ok þar út^^ ífrá bæ-Si frændum
ok óskyldum/^ meS svo hör^u ^- grim Jarbatri, at
sjálfr dauSinn skýldi ^^ mörgurn ^^ af ]?eir;i safna^i, sera 20
nú^ var litlu lesit af tveimr bræ^ruixi, Cipriano ok
Gusto.
pessa grein eignast me^ öllu ^^ Heinrekr konungr
gamli. Hann reiÖ um ^^ dag at skemta sér ^^ meÖ
death by a fálka á fuö'lavei^i, ok einn kertissveinn, röskr^^ ma*Sr 25
norse, is o ^
called to rann me^ honum á fæti. pa^an efiör^ist svo hættliga,
life asrain. ^ ^ ^^ _ ö '
at kornhestr konungsins slær fætinum til mannsins
svo snart ^^ á mi^jan kvi^inn, at þegar lágu i^ren úte.
King
Henry's
page,
smitteu to
^ epterfaur, T.
2 kier, T.
3 fram, T.
^ íiv, T.
^ Mvn, T.
^ framkuœmt, T.
' munndi, T.
^ Kantvariensi, T.
^ á, so Prof. Unger; om. in T.
»0 uth, T.
11 oskylldvm, T.
12 haurdu,T.
13 skylldí, T.
1* maurgum, T.
15 aullu, T.
16 vm, T.
17 sier, T.
i^ rauskr, T.
19 snart, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 169
heareth that she is being followed ; whereat she feareth
no less than before, until her fright flieth away, and re-
joicing filleth her heart, for now step forward on either
side of her her sons aforenamed risen from the dead, or,
in more fitly chosen words, the aforenamed men were
raised from the clay of the earth, yet being now none
the less both goodly to behold, and well protected under
the power and merits of the well-beloved fi'iend of our
Lord the archbishop Thomas.
Now to a man who hath a will to understand, it will
seem clear, that this glorious miracle showetli forth most
chiefly a proof of that which was read in the vision
before, concerning the words of our Lord Jesus Christ,
that the same power which he gave to Peter, the mighty
son of Jonah, the very same he would give to the worthy
Thomas of Canterbury.
Another lesson may also be drawn from this glorious
miracle, to wit, how the mercy of the holy Thomas must
needs shine in heavenly brightness, if indeed he did call
to life a dead man, through the prayer of one who of all
men in the world was the least deserving; being the
very one who had persecuted and enforced banishment,
in the first instance on Thomas himself, and, moreover,
on not only his own kinsfolk, but on those as well who
were not of kin to him ; and that with such hard hatred
and cruelty, that death only sheltered many of their
number, as indeed was read just now concerning the two
brothers Ciprianus and Gustus.
This clause appertaineth altogether to Henry, the old
king. One day as he rode out a-hunting with falcon
to divert himself, a certain page, a brisk man, happened
to accompany him on foot. Hence this misfortune befell,
that the king's courser struck his foot so hard against
the abdomen of the man, that the inwards rolled out
170 TEIK^S ?±C-±
SET •* \.^ySl1TL[
1 uy ■{ : ^sa&..
:=^ 15
iiaim.
^
Ij-iftl
^ T
. Ma
^LJil -
%»''
e» beil'
agle
fyrer
' - . (' I '■ _ .
3 JGEíeáM^X.
^fiiáDirftti^T.
^ 1— riiif T.
Hw«,T-
M ««i«r,Mr!ra£i:ik9er;«iii.ÍBT.
*tmmmkn:'- 7
» ^^0- T.
3:^ JÍÉ,T.
0i«Br0;X.
»4p»rf«rf.T.
THE STOKY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 171
forthwith. This mishap the king grieveth sorely, though
he was hard of heart beyond most men. And hence
there pervadeth his guilty soul such boldness that he
falleth on his knee, and sendeth up a prayer to the holy
Thomas to be merciful enough to call to his mind
whether at any time he had been well pleased with his
dealings, and to afford such cure in this troublous case as
that the young man might be brought to life again.
What more, but the king soon thereafter seeth with his
own eyes, having retired to some distance from the body,
how a man dressed in bishop's robes steppeth up to the
young man whereas he lieth reft of life on the field.
This bishop stoopeth down over the man, laying on him
his hand after the fashion of one who waketh a man up
from his sleep. This matter cometh to an end in such a
manner, that the bishop vanisheth, and he riseth up who
was dead already. Tlien king Henry, stepping nearer,
asketh how it fare with him. But the young man,
making before him the sign of the cross, said that he had
slept as soundly as if some great heaviness had been upon
him from the time the horse smote him. The king
answereth that here an event had befallen which was of
far more weighty nature than a merely natural sleep ;
'' nay, indeed, archbishop Thomas hath bestowed on us
" his mercy and restored thee to life."
Shortly afterwards the king visited the resting place
of the hoi}' Thomas, walking barefoot three miles to the
city, and making an offering of seven marks of silver,
and three marks of gold.
It behoveth here to call to mind, although it be found
recorded in many places among the stories of holy men,
that when the Lord God desireth his friends to be espe-
cially glorified in the church by holiness and mighty
172
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
standa ^ bæner syndugra manna, at þeira dýr^arfullr
ver^Íeikr skíne svo yfer jarSríki sem fyrer hans aug-
liti. Enn veiter Thomas erkibyskup Heinreki konungi
fleire velgjör'Ser, sem í því lýsizt, sem hér ^ fylger.
King Louis
VII. dies,
118>>.
Philip II.
succeeds to
the throne.
The young
king Henry
revolts
against
his father,
1175.
KAP. C. 5
Af Hlödve^ Frakka konungi.
Svo byrjar þetta mál, at ágætr lierra Loviss Frakka
konungr, ástsamligr vin bins heilaga Thome erkibysk-
ups gekk framm * ahnenningsveg til fe^ra sinna ok
var grepta^r í mustere vorrar fm ^ Gu'Ss mó^ur, því 10
er hann hafée eflt^ ok tignat fogrum ^ presentum.
Af hans ágætri utferiS ^ er svo bjart ^ til frasagnar ok
lystiligt, at hans legsta^r birtist ^^ me'S hjartteignum.
Tok þá konungdóm í Franz fyr nefndr Philippus
son hans. Hann var litillar heilsu ok kendi líkþrár, 15
ok J>ann krankdom þyngdi me^ honum ár af are, J?ar
til sem ender^^ gjoi^ist a, sem si^ar mun sagt verSa.
Enn nu er fyrst at venda til Engiands, at Hein-
rekr konungr ungi^^ mægist vit Philippum Frakka
konung ok eflisb þar fyrer bæSi til lands ok fylgis. 20
Li^a nu ^^ svo timar, at fölnan ^^ fellr í frændsemi
)?eira fe^ga, svo at margar greiner ok metna^arhot
me"S vondra manna me^algongu ^^ ok syndagjaldi^^
gamla konungs verSr J?eim til askihia'Sar, ok ]?at efne
þrutnar ^^ svo mi^il þeira me'S afskapligum hætti, at 25
a fimmta ^^ are efter ^^ pisl bins sæla Thome erkibysk-
^ stannda, T.
2 hier, T.
3 Hlaudve, T.
4 /ram, T.
Ó frv, T.
^ So Prof. Unger
7 Jaugrum, T.
8 vthferd, T.
9 So Prof. Unger
Í0 birttizt,T.
elft, T.
biortt, T.
^^ ennder, T.
^'^ vngi, T.
13 nv, T.
14 faulnan, T.
1^ medalgaungu, T.
1^ synddgialldi, T.
17 þruttnar, T.
18 ^ffiía, T.
15 epter,T,
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 173
miracles. He nowise alloweth the prayers of sinful man
to withstand their glorious merits shinincr abroad on
earth even as they shine before His own countenance.
Archbishop Thomas bestoweth still further benefits on
king Henry, as will appear even from things hereinafter
related.
CHAP. C.
Of Louis king of the French.
Here beginneth a story, which telleth how the excel-
lent lord Louis, king of the French, and a dearly beloved
friend of archbishop Thomas, went the common way of
all flesh to his fathers, and was buried in the minster of
our Lady, God's mother, the which he had endowed and
magnified by fair presents. Of his laudable departure
the bright and sweet rumour went forth, that his resting
place shone in deeds of miracles. After him his son
Philip aforenamed succeeded to the kingdom of France.
He was a man of feeble health, being afilicted with
leprosy, v/hich illness gi-ew on him more heavily from
year to year, until it came to the pitch of which the tale
will be told hereafter. But fir.st it behoveth to turn to
England, where the young king Henry becometh allied
by marriage unto Philip, king of the French, and thereby
groweth mightier both as to lands and lordly power.
Now as time weareth on, the love between father and
son beginneth to fade away, inasmuch as many ditfer-
ences and deeds of ambition, together with the mischief-
making of evil persons, and the curse of sin which lay
upon the old king, all serve to estrange them from
each other ; which matter swelleth between them to so
abominable a degree, that in the fifth year after the
passion of the blessed archbishop Thomas it cometb to a
174 THOMAS SAGA EEKIBYSKUPS.
lips halda^ j^eir syo ófrændsamligt strí'S, at þeir
búast í höggoröstu - me^ fylktu li^i. Enn þeira
stjifa vai^ eigi líkr, ]?ví at ungi^ konungr hefer til
fylgis bæ'Si mág sinn Frakka konung, ok J^ar me^
Heurythe Skota konunof. I mót þessum ^ iii. bofSino-ium ^ befer 5
youns allies . . ^*^
himself with gamli konuno^r seni eina bönd*^ fulla, bví at bæ^i
of Scotland vaidsmenn ' ok aimuo^mn i hnofiandi fylofer noniim
and Louis »/ o
vn. of eiffi. enn ^ lætr bann fullkomlio^a sér ® at baki, svo
Frauce. ° ' ° . .
at varla má sá finnast, at riú veiti bonum fullan
trúnat. Er nú svo komit málit, at Skota konimofr 10
me^ sínum styrk er icn kominn í England, því at
konungs ríkin Skotlands ok Engiands skilr ei meira
enn einn fjallgai^r ok lögr ^^ einn harla mjór. Enn
Frakka konungr bjóst ^^ til skipa sunnan nm ^ sjó, ]?ví
at sú er ætlan þeira konunganna at hafa gamla kon- 15
nno: fanginn ok af flettan öllum^'^ sæmdum.
Henry II. Emi er hann hevrer, sem bann er staddr íyrer sunn-
penance at an sió, hversu beimnnn herder sio- í mot-"-^ honum
Canterburv, " ^
bæ^i til báska lífs ok sæmda, óttast bann efter ^^ mann-
dóms bætti at falla svo bæ^iliga^^ fp-er sínum ó\T.n- 20
\\m, SYO ríkr ok ujopreistr sem bann baf^i lengi ^^
farit, ok bvert rá^ er bann megi reisa í móti þvílíkum
YO^a, finnr hann falslaust, J?ví at ]:'at brást bonum
eigi. pat er svo fallit, at bann minnist a þá elsku/^
sem for^um baföi verit -^^ í milium bans ok bins beilao-a 25
Tbomam, ]>á er bann var ^^ bans kancelier, fp-er þessa
endi'minning ok einkanliga -^ saker myskunnar, er veitt-
1 hailda, T.
2 hauggoraustu, T.
3 tmgi, T.
^ þessvm, T.
^ haufdingium, T.
6 Aaw7i(f, T.
' So Prof. Unger ; ualldzmann,
T.
8 €?^i e/in added bv Prof. Unger.
9 si'er, T.
10 /ai/^r, T.
11 biodzt, T.
1- rni, T.
13 aullum, T.
1^ »io//i, T.
15 ef>/er, T.
1^ So Prof. Unger ; hadilig, T.
1' leingi, T.
18 elskv, T,
19 rerííA, T.
-0 ^<a72w far added bv Prof.
Unger.
21 einkannliga, T.
THE STORY OF . ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 175
quarrel between them, so unbecoming of kinsmen, that
they make ready for a pitched battle Avith armies drawn
up in fighting order on either side. Their strength was
unequal, inasmuch as the young king had for allies both
the king of the French and therewithal the king of the
Scotch. Against these three lords the old king had but
a handfnl of meu, as it were, the lords as well as the
commonalty of England not attending him, but turniag
their back upon him altogether, so that scarcely might
one be found, who would now serve him in full fealty.
Even so far had the matter proceeded now, that the king
of the Scotch, with his force, had entered England, the
two realms of Scotland and England being parted by no
other division than a mountain range and a certain water
right narrow. But the king of the French prepared an
expedition from south beyond sea, it being the design of
the kings to take the old king prisoner, and to deprive
him of all his honour.
But (king Henry) hearing, as he was sojourning south
beyond sea, with what hardihood the world bestirred itself
against him, aiming at the peril of his life and the undoing
of his honour, he dreadeth, after the nature of man, to fall
in an inglorious manner before his enemies, so masterful
and so lordly as he had long borne himself before. Now
the resolution that he taketh with a view to opposing
this danger, he fincleth to be in no manner a vain one,
for it failed him in no wise. And this was even the
nature of that resolution, that he called to mind the love
that formerly had been between him and the holy
Thomas, when he was the king's chancellor, and in the
remembrance of this, and especially for the sake of the
176
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
ist Í mannzins lífgjöf, sem fyr var skrifat, treystist
hans hjarta ^ nú í annan tíma at kalla til liins
heilaga Thomani. Ok me'S því byrjar hann sina pila-
grims ferö sunnan um ^ sjo at sækja til Kantúaríam.
Ok sem fyrst ser ^ hami til ^ staöarins, stígr hann 5
ni^r af hestinum ok afklæSist öllu ^ konungsskrú^i,
tekr síSan fátækligan ^ kyrtil,'^ geingr si^an berrfættr
framm ^ til ]?eirar kirkju, er astvinr Guos dyrka^i enn
at nyju bæöi me^ bló^i sínu^ ok björtum^^ hjart-
teignum. par vaker konungr um^ nóttina me^ bænnm 10
ok ákalle til Gu'Ss ok heilags Thómam. Enn lun"^
morgininn lieyrer hann messu ok stendr^^ berrfættr
at heuni, ok efter ^^ liana sungna nefner hann sér ^
vætti fyrer öllum^^ áheyrindum Qærverundum, at
hann tekr aftr^"* ok ónýter allar þær skipaner ok si's- 15
venjur, sem þeim erkibyskupi hafSi missætti ^^ af
staöit, gjörandi^^ p»etta enn at nýju allt^^ opinbert/^
sem fyr haf^i hann játat kardinalibus. Hér ^^ me^
leggr hann sjálfan sig ok sitt líki under vald ok
vernd hins heilaga Thóme erkibysknps. Ok þetta allt 20
saman heyrer sá bleza^r Gu^s ma-Sr, þar sem hann
stendr á fjalle uppi, efter^"^ j^ví sem sjálfum ^^ honum
sýndist í svefne for^um í Franz. pat fjall er Jesús
Kristus sté á, er hvirfill yfer öllum^^ fjöllum, J?at er
at skilja dýrSarkonungT yfer öUuni ^^ helgum Thomas 25
erkibyskup samtengdi-^ sig þessu fjalli. pann fugla-
1 hiartta, T.
•- vm, T.
^ sier, T.
■* til, added by Prof. Unger ; it
makes the context clearer, but it
may be doubted that it ever stood
here.
^ aullu, T.
^ fatœMegann^ T.
^ kyrttil, T.
8 /raw, T.
^ sinv^ T.
10 biorttum, T.
11 stenndr, T.
12 epter, T.
13 aiillum, T.
1^ aptr, T.
1^ After ynissœtti T. adds hafdi.
1^ gioranndi, T.
1' alltt, T.
1^ opinhertt, T.
19 Hier, T.
"*^ So U. ; sialum, T.
"1 samieingdi, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 177
mercy that had been shown him in the restoration to
life of the man whereof the tale hath been written
already, his heart felt bold now again to call unto the
holy Thomas. Therewithal he starteth on a pilgrimage
from south beyond sea to visit the city of Canterbury.
And as soon as he catcheth the first sight of the city, he
dismounteth from his horse, and putteth away all his
kingly raiment, whereupon he taketh on a poor kirtle,
and then walketh barefoot unto the church which God's
beloved one once more giori6ed both by his blood and
bright miracle?. There the king watcheth during the
night in prayers and invocations to God and the holy
Thomas. But the next morning he heareth mass,
whereat he standeth in bare feet, and when that had
been sung he calleth unto him witnesses, in the hearing
of the whole cono-reoation there assembled, and abro-
gateth and undoeth all the ordinances and customs which
had been the cause of enmity between him and the
bishop, thus making all public which befoie he yielded
to the cardinals. Therewithal he commendeth himself and
his realm to the power and protection of the holy arch-
bishop Thomas. And unto all this giveth ear the blessed
God's man, whereas he standeth upon the mountain, even
according to the vision which appeared unto him in his
sleep aforetime in France. The mountain which Jesus
Christ ascended is the head of all other mountains, and the
vision is so to be understood, as that the glorious king of
all other saints, archbishop Thomas, associated himself
with this mountain. The swarm of birds which crowded
K641.
178
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKLTS.
:Qölda er flykktist-'- at Heinreke konungi honum til
meina, J^at er fjolmenne ok herfólk, er nii safnast
lionum á mot,- )?esser aller dreifast \r6s vegar, því at
heilagr Thomas rermr ni^r af fjallinu ^ at hjálpa kon-
iino'inum Die^S sinum dyi^arlioum verSleikum. Enn 5
hvat merker fyrer j^ann eina mann, er í drauminum
sto'S at styrkja fuglana konuDgi til ófæru, Frakka
konungr e^a Heinrekr ungi,^ viljum^ vær eigi dæma,
J?ví at greinin haUast til beggja. pat flytr unga konung
under ]?ySing, at fa^er bans var af honum ómaklig- 10
astr motgangS;^ enn Frakka konuEg " lei^er )?at und-
er glosu,^ er sa ma"Sr fekk ^ snart^^ s^n.pubögg -^^ af
Thomase, enda^- fær hann í þann sama púnkt svo
snarpan sjúkdóm, at hann sezt-^^ aftr^^ ok er hvergi
fær.-^^ Svo frjálsast gamli konungr, sem synin forspá^i, 15
af allri ogn ok otta sinna ovina fyrer ver^leik vors
Drottins ^vinar. Ok þegar sem hann fregnar, at
Frakka konungr er fratekinn, er ]?vílíkt, sem alb.'
stormr falli í hurt, valdsmenn^^ ok almúgi halla^^ sig
aftr^^ til fyrra^^ go'Svilja hann at hefja ok honum 20
fylgja. He^an ^^ gjörist svo, at beggja viner gangi ^^
Í me^al þeira fe"Sga, svo at sættarfundr er skipa^r.
A þeim fundi styrkja )?eir fe%ar meS sonnum -^ fri^i
sina fi'ændsemi. par fylger sú raSagjoi-S, at ]7eii'
bá^er samt^- skulu draoja landher at Skotakonuno-i ,25
at hann hafi makliga kaupfer^ ut af rikinu. petta
Í Jlycktizt, T.
= moth, T.
3 fiallinv, T.
^ vngi, T.
* vilivm, T.
^ moihgangs, T.
'' So Prof. Unger ; konungr^ T.
s glosv, T.
9 fieck, T.
10 snartt, T.
11 suipiihaugg, T.
12 ennda, T.
13 setzt, T.
1-^ aptr, T.
15 far, T.
1^ vaUzmeJui, T.
17 So Prof. Unger; hala, T.
IS fi/ra, T.
19 Hieda?}, T.
'^ Prof. Unger alters this 3 sing,
subj. into the corresponding indica-
tive iorm., ganga ; it makes smoother
grammar, but nothing else calls for
the change.
-1 saunnvm, T.
« samttf T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 179
round king Henry to hurt him signifieth the war host
which now gathereth against him : but all these now
become dispersed far and wide, because of holy Thomas
descending from the mountain to help the king with his
glorious merits. But whether that one man who in the
dream stood urging the birds to compass the king's
ruin, may signify the king of the French or Henry the
young, we will not decide, inasmuch as the matter may
apply to both. The young king may be signified for
this reason, that from him his father was least deserving
of rebellion. But the king of the French may be under-
stood to be meant, because the man (in the dream)
received a smarting blow from Thomas' rod ; and withal
the French king caught at this time so fierce an illness
that he desisted and could move nowhere. Thus the old
king was delivered, even as the vision predicted, from all
fear and awe of his enemies through the merit of the
friend of our Lord. And straightway as he heareth that
the king of the French hath fallen back, it appeareth as
if all the storm that was brewing died away suddenly,
while men in authority as well as the commonalty return
to their former goodwill towards the kiug in exalting
him again and according him their allegiance. Hence it
cometh to pass, that the friends of both father and son
go between them and bring it about that a peace-meeting
was settled upon. At this meeting father and son agreed
both to draw together an army against the king of the
Scotch, and give a deserved speed to his journey back
out of the kingdom. And it cometh to pass, that they
M 2
180 THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
ferr framm,-^ at þeir elta - Skotakonung hurt ^ af
Englandi, ok þar upp yfer vinna þeir mikit hervirki
a hans riki bæ'Si me'S eldi ok vopnum.
Archbishop gyo stó^ liiiiii heilao^i Thómas hiá gamla konunsri í
Thomas ® . ,
appears in v>essari l>raut, sem nú ^ var greint, ok bó lætr hann 5
dreams to J^ r ^ ^ o :> j
king Henry, ^i her ^ Ivktast sína elsku vi^ hann, bvi at hann
inducing *' ^ '
himtomend i3Íj.^ist,6 honum Í draumi me^ rei'Suoiio'u yferbrao-gi,
his ways. . . o '
segjandi ^ berum oi^um, at bans illgjörSer svo
storar gjöra hann í burt ^ úr ^ aUra kristinna raanna
von, utan hann taki sig under ^ svo beiska i^ran ok 10
alvarliga me^ pisl ok har^retti, sem ]?eim manne heyr-
er, er svo Ijothga leiddi sina lifdaga. Ok til marks
her ^ um ^^ gaf honum til vitnis, at á sömu ^^ nótt,
sem hann geingi af sæng, mundi hann brjota sina
hönd,^^ ok þat sama fylldist. Snerist konungrinn ]?á 15
fyrer þessi ógnaror'S til fremri i"Sranar enn fyr me^
l.ungT ok hárklæ^i, }>ar til at bleza^r ^^ Thomas
birtist ^ i annat sinn ok er nú heldr bli'Sari, segjandi ^
svo, at nú hafi hann fengit ^^ nökkura ^^ lífs von
fyrer augliti bins heilaga dómara ok eilifa, ef hann 20
spiller ei um ^^ he^an ^^ af pessa efasemd, er heilagT
Thomas setti síöast til gamla konungs, ok af annari
grein versa þann hinn syi^giliga, er sjalfum Thomase
birtist ^ i Franz, sem fyr var lesit, latum vær J?at
muna, at ongva ^^ dirfö e'Sr dom viljum vær a leggja, 25
hversu ^^ hann hefer farit úr^ )7essu lifi, því at hann
reiknast a me^al þeira manna, er Gu^s þolinmæ^i hafa
reynt i fremsta lagi bæ^i fyrir lögbrot ^^ ok óhlý^ni,
1 fram, T.
3 eUta,T,
« burtt, T.
< nv, T.
» hier, T.
« hirttizt, T.
' seigiajidi, T.
8 vr, T.
9 vndir, T.
JO VJM, T
1^ saumv, T.
1' AaM«(/, T.
^2 So Prof. Unger ; bezadr, T.
^'feinyit,T.
^5 nauckura, T.
1« hiedan,T.
^7 aungua, T.
^8 hversv, T.
19 laughrot, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 181
chase the king of the Scotch out of England, whereupon
they wreak great ravages hi his realm both by fii^e and
sword.
In such a manner the holy Thomas stood by the old
king in this trial, even as was related just now ; yet by
this he alloweth his love for him not to come to an end,
for he appeareth to him in a dream with a fro^vning
countenance, saying unto him in plain words, that his
many great misdeeds must needs deprive him of every
hope cherished by christian people, unless he undergo
such a bitter and earnest penitence with penance and
chastisement as behoveth one who leads such an evil life
as he did. And as a token of this warning he told the
king that that very night, on going out of bed, he would
break his arm ; the which also was fulfilled. Now by
these words of warning the king turned to repentance
more earnestly than he had done before, fasting and
wearing the hair-cloth, until the blessed Thomas ap-
peareth to him once again, being this time more blithe of
countenance than before, announcing to him that now he
might have some hope of life before the face of the holy
and eternal Judge, if henceforward he injure in no way
his present state. To this condition, last expressed by
the holy Thomas to the old king, on one side, and on
the other to that verse of sad burden, which Thomas
himself heard in a vision in France, as was read before,
we accord such consideration as to abstain fi'om the pre-
sumption of passing any judgment on the manner in
which he departed this life, for he is counted among the
men who tried God's lonor-sufferin4i to the utmost, both
by their trespasses of the law and their disobedience in
182
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
Tlu-ough
such Aisions
king Henry
becomes
friendly
disposed
towards the
chiu'ch of
Canterbury.
ok til þess at efterkomandi -^ forSist því framar ]?vílík
dæmi, lætr Drottinn ^ oftliga,^ sem ritningar greina,
þess háttar manna frammför ^ allann tima heilagri
kristne okunna vera. Enn ^ til dyr'Sar sælurn Thómasi
erkibyskupi ma þat vel triiast ^ fyrer þá hluti,^ sem '^
nil ^ ha fa næst lesner verit, at mjukliga mun ^ hann
hafa frammi staöit fyrer valdinu, ef konungrinn var
meS nokkurum^^ hætti disponera^r til andligrar^^
myskiinnar, ok fyrer sitt bló^ ok bana ma harm þegit
hafa, at þat sé^^ falslaust, er iinnst í sumum bokum ^^ ^^
af iöran koniingsins, ]?at fyrst at hann lag-^i ástú^
til kirkjunnar í Kanncia skipandi J;angat me^ anefndu
æskiligt ^* offr í galle ok silfri, ame^an hann lif'Si, ok
her^^ me^ at hann hafi skilit vit drottninguna, gefit
upp allt rikit syni sinum ^^ ok geingit í hreinlífra '^
manna safnat eSa einvister. Nú^ ef J>etta er satt,
mun hinn heilagi Thomas svo hafa um geingit me^
sinum verSleik vit -^^ Gu'S, at þat hafi konungrinn
J7egit, sem ölP^ hans málaskifti^^ lágu viSr, at hann
hafi sannliga gratit sina gie^i me'S hinum ^^ sæla DavíiS ^^
konungi ok signa'Sri Marie Magdalene.^^ Ma þat ok
vel segja,^"^ ef Thomas erkibyskup hefer haft '^^ í fylgi
me'S ser^^ her^^ um ^^ unnustu sina, Gu'Ss mo^ur^^
Mariu,^^ tekr brutt ^^ allan efa, at pa hefer Heinrekr
konungr fengit ^^ go^a daga. Ma ok svo nelzt mykja 25
^ epterkomande ^ T.
2 drottin, T.
^ So Prof. linger ; oplega, T.
* framfaur, T.
» En, T.
6 trvast, T.
7 hlvti, T.
8 ny, T.
9 mvn, T.
10 nauckurum, T.
11 annligrar, T.
12 sie, T.
13 bokvm, T.
1* So Prof. Unger ; œskligt T.
1^ hier, T.
1^ So Prof. Unger; synum, T.
'7 vith, T.
18 aull, T.
19 malaskifte, T.
20 hinvm, T.
21 So Prof. Unger ; Magdale only
22 seigia, T.
23 haftt, T.
24 sier, T.
25 r7n, T.
26 modr, T.
2" il/brni;, T.
25 6ry«, T.
29 feingit, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 183
other ways. And in order that posterity should the more
surely avoid such examples, the Lord often taketh care,
even as scripture witnesseth, that the end of such men
should be unknown to holy church through all ages.
But for the glory of the blessed archbishop Thomas it
may well be believed that, by the means of which we
have read abeady, he must needs have meekly con-
fronted the royal power, if the king showed himself
in any manner disposed for spiiitual mercy, and to
his blood and death it may indeed be truly due, which
is found written in some books concerning his repent-
ance, to wit, firstly, that he turned a loving mind
towards the church of Canterbury, bequeathing to it by
a deed a goodly offering in gold and silver during his
lifetime, and secondly, that he divorced the queen, gave
up the whole realm to his son, and betook himself to a
convent of men of pure living, or became a hermit.
Now if this should be true, it must needs follow, that
the holy Thomas by his merits interceded with God, so
as to bring the king into a state of mind on which all
his affairs depended, namely, that he truly repented him
of his pleasures in company with the blessed king David
and the blessed Mary Magdalene. And it may well be
assumed if the archbishop Thomas was herein aided by
his bride, God's mother Mary, that all doubt must be
removed as to king Henry having come by a good end
184
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
All people
in England,
high and
low, desire
to have
Thomas
canonized.
versa þann, er heilagr Thomas heyr^e frammsag'SaD/
at me^ Ijosum ritningum hafa marger hluter svo
verit fyrerætla^er af Gu'Si,^ at þeir skyldu eflast í
sina frammkvæmd ^ ok eigi ver'Sa ö^ru * vegs enn
me^ bæn ok ver^leik heilagra. Veitti ok Drottinn ^
svo langan^ tima Heinreki konungi til i^ranar, at
hann lif^i full átján ár ok anda^ist ^ a nítjánda efter^
fall ok heimfer^ Thome erkibyskups til hinmarikis.
Enn nu skal hé^an^ víkja til J>ess, er fyre var, at
Heinrekr konungr ungi ok Jon erkibyskup ok |?ar 10
meö valdsmenn ^ ok allr almugi í landinu hefer einn ^^
ok sama vilja til lofs ok dyr^ar hinum signa^a Thome
erkibyskupi, at svo sem hann birtist margfaldliga ^^
bleza^r me'S velgjor'Sum ok allskonar hjartteignum ^^
vi^ folkit nær ok fjarre ^^ utau ^* lands ok innan, svo 15
dýrkist^^ hann í heilagri kirkju af ollum ^*^ kristnum
monnum^^ me^ vir'Suligu hátí^arhaldi/^ sem hann sam-
reiknast
riki.2o
fyrer takn
heilögum ^^
mönnum -^^ í himin-
KAR CI.
Er vor Drottinn.
20
A council is Sem Fsú tí'S ^^ kom, er vor Drottinn Jesús Kristus
the purpose vilde sælan Thómam svo ve^samast lata \^er iarSríki,
of request- . . . .
ing the pope sem hann var me'S honum haleitliga vir^r i eilifu ^^
archbishop ríki, skipar konungr ok erkibyskup almenniligan fund ^^25
^ framsagdan, T.
2 gvdi, T.
' framkvœmd, T.
4 avdru, T
* langann, T.
^ So Prof. Unger ; anndazdist, T.
' epter, T.
* hiedan, T.
^ vallzmenn, T.
10 So Prof. Unger ; ei nu, T.
11 margfalldliga, T.
12 hiarttegnvTHf T.
1^ Jiare, T.
14 vtan, T.
15 dyrckizt,T.
16 avUvm, T.
17 maunnum, T.
1^ hatidahalldi, T.
1^ heilaugum, T.
20 himiriki, T.
21 So Professor Unger ; sotin, T.
22 So Professor Unger ; ilifvy T.
2^ /ynd, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 185
And the verse which the holy Thomas heard pronounced
may perchance be susceptible of a somewhat milder in-
terpretation than its burden implies, by the consideration
that, according to plain scripture, many things have been
pre-ordained by God to come to pass in one certain way,
from which their course of fulfilment may not deviate,
unless prayers and merits of saints intercede. And,
wdthal, the Lord granted king Henry so long a respite
for repentance, that he lived for full eighteen years, and
died in the nineteenth, after the fall and departure liome
to the kingdom of heaven of archbishop Thomas.
But now let us turn from these matters to things
which took place before ; to wit, how the young king
Henry and archbishop John, together with men in au-
thority and the whole commonalty of the land, become
of one mind to give praise and glory to the blessed arch-
bishop Thomas, so that even as he appeareth manifoldly
blessed in good deeds and all manner of miracles to the
folk far and near, inland as well as abroad, so even shall
he be worshipped in holy church by all christian people,
with worthy feasts, being, through his miracles, counted
among the saints in the kingdom of heaven.
CHAP. CI.
When our Lord.
When the time came that our Lord Jesus Christ would
let the holy Thomas be glorified throughout earth in a
manner answering to the exalted honour in which he
was held by Him in the eternal kingdom, the king and
the archbishop summon a general council in England of
18G
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
Í Eno'landi ^ allsliattar sbetbar lær^ra ok leikinanna.
Messengers Á ^ ]7eim fundi er bat ^taSfesb meS blezaa ^ GuSs ok
to Rome. • sam]?ykkt allra go^ra mauna, at seadiboSar meí
bréfum^ ok bænarorSnoa^ herra konungsins ok allrar
alþýSu skulu gjorast til kuriam til Alexsandrum pifa 5
me^ þeire frammferS^ ok flafcningi, at signa^r
Thomas erkibjskup leiddist í samsveit heilagra manna
fyrer J/at postuligt vald, er Jesus Kristus gaf páfanum
til þvílíkra stórliluta. Ok svo sem þeir fóru ^ ok
framm^ kvomu^ tjande dýrligar hjartteigner fyrer 10
sjálfum lierra pafanum, ma ]?vi hver goSr ma^r nær
geta, hversu gla^liga heilug Roma kirkja mundi taka
þessnm erindum, því at sá sem málefnin eignast, er
svá frægr í kristninni af sta^festi ok J^olinmæ^i, vand-
læti-^^ ok heilogu lifi, sem hann bære skínanda Ijós 15
í sínum höndum ^^ fyrer hvers manns hugskoti. Enn
}?at er bækr vikja til; at þetta nytsemdarerindi ^^
fære nökkiit ^^ seinna, enn flesta mundi vara, má þat
vitrum manni Ijóst verSa, hva^an leiddi, rétt af því
Aj-ciibisiiop romverska rá^uneyti, er herra páfann afleiddi fyrer 20
canomzed þat fylgi ok efterlæti,^^ sem nökkiirir ^^ kardinalis
Wednesday, höf^u ^^ ólöodiora ^" veitt Heinrekl konuncri. Ok l?á
Marcli 13, . . . . . . ^
1173. frammkvæmdi ^^ Drottinn sinn vilja í þessii máli ok
skipa^ri tí^, þat er at skilja in capite ieiunii/^ því at
þann sama dag efter^^ evangelium ^^ geingr sjálfr herra 25
^ Einglandi, T.
' Aa, T.
3 hlezann, T.
4 brefvm, T.
^ bænarordum, T.
^ framferde^ T. Prof. Unger
reads framfer^, which is the com-
mon form. Framfer^i is also a
common form, ©nly it occurs no-
where else, so far as I know, as a
feminine.
' fori', T.
8 fram, T.
^ kuomv, T.
1'' So altered by Professor Unger,
in all probability correctly ; uann-
mætti, i.e. feebleness, T., which can-
not be meant.
1^ haundum, T.
^■^ nyttsemdar, T.
^3 naiickut, T.
" epterlœti, T.
^^ nauckurir, T.
16 hatifdu, T.
1' olaugliga, T.
1^ frdmkvœmdi, T.
1^ i.e., Ash- Wednesday, March 13,
1173.
2^ epter, T.
'1 ewafigelium, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 187
folk of all manner of stations, lay and learned. At this
council it is resolved, by the blessing of God and consent
of all good people, to send messengers, bearing letters
and messages by word of mouth from the king and the
whole commonalty, who shall proceed to the court of pope
Alexander, to plead and bring it about that the blessed
archbishop Thomas be received into the ^community of
saints by the apostoHc authority which Christ Jesus gave
unto the pope for such weighty matters. Now travelling
on this errand, and arriving in Rome, the messengers
expound unto the lord pope himself the glorious miracles,
and any man of good will may understand how gladly
the holy church of Rome received their messages ; for he,
whom alone the matter concerneth, is so far-famed in
the church for his steadfastness and patience, his zeal
and holy manner of life, as if he carried in his hand a
shining light unto the soul of every man. But seeing it
hinted at in books that this profitable errand sped some-
what more slowly than most folk could have anticipated,
it will be clear to any wise man whence that delay must
needs have arisen, from that Roman council, to wit, which
strove to lead the lord pope astray by that favour and
obsequiousness which certain cardinals had accorded to
king Henry. And yet the Lord brought His wiU to be
done, in this case, and at the fixed time, in capite jejunii,
to wit ; for on that same day, after the gospel, the lord
188
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
pafinn Die^ sinum ^ bræ^rum kardínalibus upp ^ á
kór, fly tj ancle sjálfr þetta hit hjálpsamliga erindi til
lofs ok vir^ingar sælum Thómasi erkibyskupi, hversu
hann striddi fyrer Gii^s kristne me"S útlegS ^ ok mein-
gjoi^um, me^ saklausum dau^a, ok nú* gæddr Gu'Ss 5
'sdnattu ^ skinandi me^ bjartteignnm.^ Efter ^ mild-
an^ sermonem, sem honum likar, tok bann ser í
hönd ^ þann lykil himinríkis/^ er Lausnari vor gaf
Petri postula fyrstum ^^ dau^ligra manna her-^^ á jöröu,
ok hverr ^'^ bans vikarius efter ^ annan beldr^^ ok befer 10
me^ sömu ^^ röksemd ^^ at leysa ok upp - Ijúka, hvat
er rettlæti digtar a himne ok jor^u. M.e^ svo dýrligu
valdi ■'^ postuligrar roksemdar ^^ lei^er berra Alexsander
páfi sælan píslarvott virMligan ^^ Tbómam erkibyskup
inn í katbalogiam sanctorum, bjóSande af Gu^s álfu ] 5
ok beilagra postula Petri ok Paulí, at bann dýrkist
me^ lofsöngum -^ ok ábeitum, sem binn báleitasti -^
Gu'Ss vin. Ok svo sem þessi lögtekning -- beilags
Tbóme for framnj -^ í sjálfri Petrs kirkju fyrer ótalleg-
um -^ fjölda lærdóms ok leikmanna, befr sjálfr herra 20
páfinn Tedeum, ok bann syngst lít-^ af kardinalibus
ok lær^um mönnum -^ svo bátí'Sleofa -^ me^ brinofdum
klukkum, sem vor Drottinn -^ Jesus Kristus lofa^e fyr
í sinne beilagri kristne. Hér ^ efter^ skrifar berra
^ sÍ7iv7n, T.
- vpp, T.
3 vthlegd, T.
4 nv, T.
^ vijiattv, T.
^ hiarttegnvm, T.
■ Epter, T.
8 milldan, T.
9 haund, T.
10 himirikis, T.
11 fyrstim, T.
12 hier, T.
13 huer, T.
14 helldr, T.
15 saumu, T.
i^ rauksemd, T.
1' Ha/M, T.
18 rauksemdar, T.
i^ virduligann, T.
20 lofsaíingum, T.
21 So Professor Unger ; haleilazta,
T.
22 laugteknmg, T.
23 /mw, T.
2"* otalegum, T.
25 fí/i, T.
2'' niauniuim, T.
27 After hatidlega T. adds smo
28 For i-or Drottinn T. has í/ro«-
i7W ?/ors.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 189
pope himself goeth in company with his brethren, the
cardinals, up into the chanceJ, himself deliverino- on this
profitable subject a discourse to the praise and glory of
the blessed archbishop Thomas, how he fouo-ht for God's
church araid banishment and provocation and by his
innocent death, but now did glory in God's love, and
shine in mighty miracles. Having delivered a sweet
sermon, as long as he thought fit, he took into his hand
that key of the kingdom of heaven, which our Saviour
gave unto the apostle Peter, first among all mortal men
on this earth, and each of his vicars one after the other
holdeth and keepeth, with the same authority to loose
and to unlock wheresoever justice demandeth in heaven
and on earth. With this glorious power of apostolic autho-
rity the lord pope Alexander bringeth the blessed martyr,
the worthy archbishop Thomas, into the catalogue of
saints, ordaining on behalf of God and the holy apostles
Peter and Paul, that he be worshipped with songs of
praise and with vows as the most exalted among God's
beloved friends. This canonisation of the holy Thomas
having taken place in the very chm'ch of St Peter before
a numberless multitude of learned men and layfolk, the
very pope himself intoneth the Tedeum, which was sung
to its end by the cardinals and the learned men, in so
solemn a fashion amid ringing bells, as our Lord Jesus
Christ of 3^ore gave permission to in his holy church. After
190
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
páíiiin nor^r í England^ þat fagna^arletr,^ er allri
landsbyg-S birtist;^ hvat Gu^ Drottinn liefer )?eim veitt
Í sæmd ok sælan hei^r sins pislarvotts erkibyskups.
pat bref formerast svo í nafne Gu^s.
Pope Alex-
ander
auu ounces
the canon-
ization to
the English
church.
KAP. GIL 5
Fea AlEXSAXDEO PÁFA.
Alexsander ^ pafi, jTJón )?jóna Gu"Ss, sender virSulegum
bræ^rum ei kibyskupum ok lySbyskiipum ok ö^rum ^
kirkjunnar forstjorum ok hennar klerkum í England! ^
kve^ju "^ ok virSuliga blezan. Dyr^liga ilmar ySvart 10
land ok enn heldr ^ oil ^ almennelig kristne af þeim
bleza'Sa sætleik, er Gu^ eilifrar dyr^ar veiter ver^leika
vir^uligs -^^ fööur/^ bins heilaga Tbome erkibyskups, er
bæ^i finnst í sinu ^- lifi ^^ dásamligr ok dyr^arfullr.
Ok me"S þvi at lifet skein me^ margföldii^^ blómi 15
kraftanna/^ birti ^^ ]?at sama vor Drottinn makliga
efter ^'^ bans sigrsamligan dau^a, er ^^ æskiligt er a at
minnast, J^vilikt er bans var efsti dagr me^ frabaerum
sigTÍ ok pry^i pislarvættis. Nu \6 at oil ^ efasemd se ^^
fjarre bans virSuligum beilagieik, vildi ^^ J>ó Lausnari 20
vor ok Lavar^r Jesus Kristus tigulega birta ^^ bans
fræg^ ^- ok ágæti me'S mörgum ^^ táknum . ok stórum
bjartteignum efter ^"^ dauSann, til þess at aller megi
^ EinyJand, T.
- So Prof. Unger ; fagnadrletr,
T.
3 birttizt, T.
^ This letter is dated Signiae
(Segni) according to some in capite
jejunii, seep. 186, note 19 ; accord-
ing to others, iv Idus Martii, or
March 12th, 1173 : Redolet Anglia
fragrantia et virtute signorum, &c.
Migne, c. pp. 901-902. Cfr. TVil-
kins Concilia, 1. 475.
^ audrum, T.
^ Einylandi, T.
7 kvediv, T.
8 helldr, T.
9 mdl, T.
^0 So Prof. Unger rightly, as it
seems ; vi?'duligum, T.
" faudr, T.
^- sinv, T.
^3 liji^ added by Prof. Unger.
'^'^ margfauUdu, T.
^^ kraptanna, T.
16 hirtti, T.
17 epter, T.
13 er added by Prof. Unger.
19 sie, T.
20 villdi, T.
21 6^■r«a, T.
22 So Prof. Unger ; frœg, T.
23 maurgum, T.
THE STOEY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 191
this the pope writeth north to England a letter of great
joy which, being made known unto the whole country,
announced, what the Lord God had gTanted them through
the honour and the blessed glory of his martyr the arch-
bishop. This letter was thus formulated in the name of
God.
CHAP. CII.
Of pope Alexander.
Alexander, pope, the servant of the servants of God, to
his reverend brethren, the archbishops and diocesans, and
other rulers of the church as well as her clerks in Eng-
land, sendeth greeting and worthy blessing. A glorious
fragrance pervadeth your country, or rather the whole
catholic church from that blessed sweetness, which the
God of eternal glory bestoweth on the merits of that
worthy father, the holy archbishop Thomas, who in his
life is found to have been as adorable as he was glorious.
And inasmuch as his life shone in manifold blossom of
powers, our Lord revealed the same, according to his
desert, after his victorious death, the which it is desirable
to bring to memory now, considering what his la,st day
was in its peerless victory and splendid martyrdom.
Now although every kind of doubt be removed as to his
worthy holiness, yet our Saviour and Lord Jesus Christ
desired to reveal in an exalted manner his fame and
excellence, with many tokens and mighty miracles after
192
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
sjá Í kristninne, livat hann hefer þegit af sinum ^
Gu^i fyrer þann háska ok harmkvæli, fyrer sta^festi ok
stora mæ^i, er hann þoldi her - í heimi fyrer sins
[Drottins nafn.^ Ollum ^ birtist ^ fyr sem nálæg^ust ^
hans lofsamligu ^ lifi, hversu hans athafner ok lítlát 5
var makligt hverju lííi. Her - fyrer birte ^ Drottinn
ollum ^ þeim, hver erfi^islaun sinnar frammgöngu ^^ er
hann hefer oSlazt^^ í himnaríki. Nú at heyrSura
mörgum^- ok myklum táknum me^S logligu^^ próíi
fyrer oss ok vorum bræ^rum, tökum ^^ vær ]?at allt 10
me^ skylldu bæ^i fagnandi ok J?ví trúandi,^^ at heil-
agr Thomas erkibyskup lifer eilííiiga meS Gu^i, ro^inn
píslarvottr í sínu bló^i, enn meS íblæstri Heilags
Anda^^ at opinbera þat sama ok bjó^a svo haldast
um ^^ kristnina, ok því sé^^ öllum ^ kunnigt náverund- 15
iim ok efter^^ oss komundum, at me'S rá^i ok blí^u
játyröi bræSra vorra '^^ tökum ^^ vær andlega in capite
ieiunij vir^uligan Thómam erkibyskup í catalogum
sanctorum í Petrs kirkju í ótalligu -^ fjölmenni lærSra
ok ólæröra ^ nær veranda, pví bjóSum vær yör af J>vi 20
valdi,-^ er vær berum, at píningardag svo dýrligs
manns haldi þér ^^ hátí^lega í hverjum árgang krjúp-
andi meö au^mýkt under hans bleza^ar bæner, at
íyrer -^ sinn volduga ^^ ver^leik, er hann ö^la^ist '^" í
^ sinv7n, T.
2 hier, T.
' drottins nafn. Prof. Ung«r ;
nafns drottins, T.
^ Aullum, T.
5 So Prof. Unger ; bœtizt, T.
^ So Prof. linger ; nalœguzt, T.
7 lofsamligv, T.
8 birtte,T.
' aullum, T.
^° framgaungu, T.
" audlazt, T.
^' maurgum, T.
^' laugligu, T.
^* taukum, T.
^^ truanndi, T.
16 annda, T.
17 ym, T.
13 s/e, T.
1« e;?íer, T.
*o Mora, T.
'1 otalligv, T.
2' After olœrdra T. adds a super-
fluous oA.
25 j^a//c??, T.
=4 þ^•er, T.
^' So Prof. Unger ; om. in T.
26 uollduga, T.
27 audladizt, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 193
death, in order tliat all folk may see in the clmrcli, what
he hath obtained from his God through that peril and
those torments, for his steadfastness and great tribula-
tion, which he had to endure here in this world for the
name of his Lord. Formerly it was revealed unto all who
were acquainted with his laudable life, how his actions
and death were worthy of every praise. Therefore, the
Lord hath revealed unto all these, what reward for his ser-
vices he hath received in the kingdom of heaven. Now
having heard set forth many and great tokens lawfully
proven before ourself and our brethren, we feel in duty
bound to accept it all, rejoicing in the belief, that the
holy archbishop Thomas liveth for ever with God, a
martyr, reddened in his own blood,while, at the same time,
we are inspired by the Holy Ghost to reveal the same,
and to command, that such he shall be holden throughout
the church ; be it therefore knoAvn, unto all now living
and after us coming that, by the counsel and sweet
consent of our brethren, we receive the worthy arch-
bishop Thomas, spiritually, in capite jejunii, into the
catalogue of Saints in the church of Saint Peter in the
presence of innumerable multitudes of people, lay and
learned. We therefore command you, by the power which
we have, that the day of the martyrdom of so glorious a
man you celebrate every year, kneeling humbly down and
committing yourselves to his blessed prayers, that by his
K 5-tl. N
194 THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKFPS.
Gu'Si meo lofligri sta^festu allt til dauba, lei-Se haÐn
3'Sr ok Ja^i sem sina eiginsonu ^ af nálægri dýflizu
til samlags vakba manna ok eilifra fagna^a, Yalete
in Cristo.
petta bref herra pafaus, sem nu - var lesit meo log- 5
tekning ^ bins lieilaga Tbome, tok allr Englands * lý'Sr
me"íS svo bátí^Iegum fagna^i, sem sjálfr Drottinn heföe
l^^eim sent'' skinanda Ijos af liimnum. Ok ]?á fyrstu
bátí'S, er ]?eir liekJu ^ siniim fe^r Tbómasi erkibj^skupi
at stobnum í Kanncia, kunniim vær ei gTeina me'S 10
Ö'Srum '^ bætti, enn sokn me^S ofFr var svo mikil, at
þótt fátækr tæki me^ í morgin því öUu ^ gózi,^ væri
liann fullríkr at kveldi.^^ Sýndi ok vor Drottinn
Jesús Kristr mörgu^^ sinni, bversu þessi lögtekning'^
var ]?ægilig ok samj^ykt bans gu'Sdómligu veldi/- því 15
at ^^ oftast ^^ mnndi svo til bera, at á sjálfan krunu-
dag erkibyskups yr'Si þær nökkurar ^^ bjartteigner, er
frábærar máttu kallast.
Lií)U nú svo langer tíraar, at bátiSarbald ^^ Gu"Ss
vinar tigna-^ist me'S allre sæmd ok bei^r mn ^' öll •'^ 20
England s '^ béru^ ^^ ok vííia annars sta'Sar. Enn bans
bleza^r bkamr lá )?ó lágt í steinpró luktr -^ sem
á^Sr, Jiar til Drottinn mykla^i bann ok upp"^^ bóf
iir -- sameio'nu duf ti '^^ dauöra manna, at svo sem
hann skein öSrum ^ bæri í sálunne, væri bann ok 25
^ eiginsoHVy T.
" nv, T.
3 laugtekning, T.
^ Einglandz, T.
5 sentt, T.
6 hieUdtí, T.
"* audrum, T.
8 auUu, T.
9 godzi, T.
10 kvelldi, T.
11 maurgu, T.
i^ f«//í//, T.
13 For \>ví at, Prof. Unger,
reads )pat.
!•* op/crsí, T.
i^ nauchirar, T.
16 hatidarhaUd, T.
1? rw, T.
18 auU, T.
15 ;iíe7-z/ff, T.
20 So Prof. Unger ; lukr, T.
^i t7?p, T.
22 vr, T.
25 í/í/jií/, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 195
mighty merits, which God hatli acknowledged in him
through his Laudable steadfastness even unto his death,
he may lead you and bring, as if you were his own chil-
dren, from the present prison, unto the company of God's
elect and unto eternal joy. Valete in Christo.
This letter of the lord pope, which was read even now,
containing the canonization of the holy Thomas, the
whole people of England received with such a solemn
rejoicing, as if the Lord himself had sent them a shinino-
light from heaven. And of the first feast, which they
held in honour of their father, archbishop Thomas, at the
see of Canterbury, we know no other tale to tell, than
that there was a wondrously gTeat assemblage of people,
bringing their offerings, which were so plentiful, that if a
poor man had received them, beginning from morning, he
would have become rich enow ere eventide. Our Lord
Jesus Christ, too, showed many a time, how acceptable
to Him was this canonization, and how agreeable unto his
divine power ; for on most occasions it would so happen
that on the very day of the archbishop's crowning some
miracles would come to pass which might be called mar-
vellous indeed.
Now long time passed that the feast of this God's
friend was celebrated with all honour and orlory throuofh-
O t.' O
out various districts in England and in many other places
besides. Still his blessed body remained locked up in a
stone vault as before, until the Lord magnified him and
raised him up from the common dust of the dead, in order
that, shining above others as was his spirit, he himself
N 2
19G
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
hans likamr signa^r ok hverjum vir^uligri. Ok því
er nu þat efni greinancla þessu næst, hversu upptöku-
clýrS ^ hins heilaga Thome me^ skrinsetning frerast
a fylldum^ tima efter^ tilskipan Heilags Anda.
KAP. cm. 5
Fra helgan Thome.
pa er li^it var fra hingatbur^ vors Herra Jesú
Krists [)?úsliundru^ ok tvci ok tuttugu^ ok fjögi^ ár,
a íimmtuganda ^ are efter ^ pining hins heilaga Thome
á dögum^ Honorii ^ páfa, l?riSja ^ me^ ]?vi nafne, er 10
enn átti sat ^ efter ^ Alexsandrum páfa tercium í
postiiligu sæti, ok a timum^^ Stefani Kantúariensis
erkibyskups, er hinn fjor^e sat efter ^ virSulegan ^^
Thomam í ]7ví valdi/- kveykti svo mjog ást ok hjart-
teignagjör^ heilags Thome hjörtu ^^ Englismanna/^ at 15
Die's samvild ^^ ok atkvæSi ^*^ herra pavans vilja þeir
eigi leingr ]7ola, at þeira dýrligaste ^^ fa"Ser liggi svo
lágt Í skriptinne, sem fyrst er ^^ hann var leiddr, heldr
at ^^ hann tignist ok í virSuligan sta^ upp ^^ hefist,
at allr lySr luti honum ok hjalpist í hans ver^leik- 20
um. Enn me^ því at vær nefndum Stefanum fyr
* vpptaukudyrd y T.
- fi/Udvni, T.
3 epter, T.
■^ T. reads \>ushundmd ok tuo
tuttuyu, &c., where it seems evident
that an ok after tuo has been left
out carelessly, the grammatical
figure being : >>?<s = ten hundreds
and two (hundreds) and twenty,
&c. Professor linger reads : þus-
hundrad tuo hundrud ok tuttugu,
&c., but there is no absolute need
for so TÍolent an alteration of a text
which becomes classically correct
as soon as the evident omission of
ok is repaired.
■> fimiagunda, T.
'' dauguni, T.
^" Honori, T.
^ \>ridie, T.
^ sath, T.
^" timvm, T.
^' virdidigamij T.
1- valldi, T.
13 hiortv, T.
1' EingUsmanna, T.
'•^ samvilld, T.
1Ö ((thkvœdi, T.
1' So Prof. Unger ; dyrligizte, T.
13 er added by Prof. Unger.
1^ a< added by Prof. Unger.
20 fjDjO, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 197
and bis blessed body sbould also enjoy bigher bonour
tlian was accorded to any one else. And tberefore, it
beboveth now next to tbese tilings to relate, bow tbe
solemn ceremony of tbe translation of tbe boly Tbomas,
and bis ensbrinement, was performed in tbe fulness of
time, according to tbe ordinance of tbe Holy Gbost.
CHAP. cm.
Of THE TRANSLATION OF TuOMAS.
Wben one tbonsand two bimdred and twenty-four
years bad passed from tbe birtb of our Lord Jesus Cbrist,
in tbe fiftietb year after tbe passion of tbe boly Tbomas,
in tbe days of pope Honorius, tbe tbird of tbat name, wbo
sat tbe eigbtb in tbe apostolic see after pope Alexander tbe
tbird, and in tbe days of Stepben, arcbbisbop of Canter-
bury, wbo was tbe fourtb, after tbe wortby Tbomas, wbo
beld rule in tbat see, tbe love and miracles of tbe boly
Tbomas so enkindled tbe bearts of tbe Englisb people,
tbat by tbe consent and tbe agreement of tbe lord pope
tbey will endure no longer tbat tbeir most glorious
fatber sball lie so low in tbe crypt as when fii'st be was
entombed, but ratber desire that be be honoured and
raised into a worthy place, in order that all folk may bow
to him and become partakers of his merits. But having
mentioned before in this book Stepben wbo was called
198
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
Í bokinne, er kalla^r var Langatún,^ sýnist vel standa -
at greina meS einne klausu;^ hversu^ mikirin mann
DrottÍDii valdi til afc gjora translacionem hins heil-
aga Thome. Enn sú klausa byrjast svo, at J;essi
Stefanus var svo mikill klerkr,^ at Jnnocencms ^ páfe 5
tercius, Linn dýiiigasti ma^r næstr fyrer Honorium, setti
]7ar af svo fallinn skilning, J^á er grain gjöröist af vis-
dómsmönnum ^ í veröldinne,^ herra páíinn tók svo til
or^s : ''Eigier kristnin rikare enn '-^ svo, " sag^i hann,"
•' at hún befer bálfaa þri^ja klerk.^*^ Stefanus Langatún^ 10
" i Eijglandi '^ er fuUr klerkr/ annar raa^r meistari
'' Galfridus er ok allv klerkr/ vær eriun enn jm'Si, ok
" ei meir enn halfr." Her ^^ er vottr klíírkdóras ^^ Ste-
pliani, ok bætti þat alia vega, er mannkostum heyrSi,
því at eftir^^ bans veraldligt^^ lif birtist '^ vel kristn- 15
inne, bversu kær er bann var Gu^i. pvi sam]?ykker
]?at önniir^^ bans gæzka, at bann kallar til Kantú-
aríam nökkura ^^ sæmiliga kennemenn, ok þó lágt i fystu.
Má þar nefna mibil annarra ^^ berra Rigard Sarisberi-
enseni byskup. Herra Stefanus erkibiby&kup bý^r ok 20
öllum -^ kórsbrædruni -^ ]?ar, munkum ok öllum -^ til-
komnum lær^um mönnum,^^ at balda -^ föstur -^ me^
•27
beilögum -^ bænum þrjá næstu -^ daga, á'Sr gangi
ni-^r til legsta^ar Gu^s píslarvotts, ok sem kista er
1 Langathiuiy T.
14
epíer, T.
- stannda, T.
15
veralldligt, T.
ð klausv, T.
16
hirttizt, T.
^ kversv, T.
17
aunnr, T.
5 klerch; T.
18
iiauckura, T.
^ So Prof. Unger
hiníi nocen-
19
annara, T.
cius, T.
20
avlliun, T.
7 v/sdomsmaimnum,
T.
21
korshrœdram, T.
^ veraulldinne, T.
OT
maiumum, T.
5 en, T.
23
/ia//dö, T.
10 klercJi, T.
24
faustr, T.
11 Einglandi, T.
25
heUanyum, T.
18 Hier,T.
26
7iœstVy T.
^^ klerckdojns, T,
:7
^a/í^ri' added by Prof. Ungeic
TH£ STOEY OF AECHBISE ? 7Z 199
Langtoii, it seemeth well befittÍD^ -: forth in one
clause how great a man the Loni ; L -y peifonn the
translation of the holj Thonia- 7 : :^r >•> b^in-
neth that Stephen was so great . ti.: - . Inno-
ceniias the third, a right glorioiLs man, .L -r
of Honorius, estimated his leamrng on cci^ -?
made of men of wisdom in the world, m w .r'^ ui uiis
import : '' All the riches that the chorch can boasi of
'" in leainiog come to this^*^ said he, '^ thai she hath but
'' two clerks and a half. Stephen Langton in Enghind
is a fuU clerk ; the second is master Gai&idus, a fall
" clerk, too ; but the third am I, being nj more than
" half a one." Here is a testimonjr of Stepheo's clerk-
ship, which in every way was adorned by all things
appertaining to maoly virtues, for after his life in this
world it was clearly revealed unto the chnreh, how dear
he was to Grod. It therefore accordeth well with his
goodness of soul in other things that he should call unto
Canterbury certain worthy teachers^ quietly thouo^ that
matter went at first. Of these may be mentioned
among others, Eichard the bishop of Salisbury. Lord
archbishop Stephen also commandetíi all canons^ monks,
and all the learned men there assembled, to fast amid
holy prayers for the next three days before going
down to the resting place of God s martyr. And when
200
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
fagrliga gjor meS sönnnm^ lási, geingr herra erkiby-
skup ni^r í gröftinn - meS lær^um möiinum ^ nökkuri *
stund ^ efter ^ completorium, sem veraklar " folk er
Í náSum, pat var fimmta ^ kalendas dag Julij, þat
er ^ tveiiii nottum fyi-er heimferSardag postiila Petri ok 5
Paiili. peir ganga aller samt framm^^ at steinþrónne
SVG lítilátliga sein skyldugt ^^ var, at J^eir falla til
jar^ar me^ tárligum ^- bænum ^'^ umbergis ^^ legsta^inn.
Enn efter ^ f^at gjort bæ'Si langa stund ok kristiliga,
by^r erkibyskup nökkiuTim ^^ af munkum^^ at taka 10
upp ^' raarmarahellu/^ J^a er lukti ^^ stein]?róna. Ok
sem ]?at er gjort,^^ finna þeir fa gran tliesaur -^ ok
ilmanda-'^ organum-^ Heilags Anda me^ J>vi forme
klæ^anna, sem hæsta kennemanni til heyi^er, þótt þat
felle-^ sem í fölska,-^ saker mikillar fyrnar,^^ þegar at 15
á var tekit. Svo voru^^ menn gó^fúser-^ í J^essu'^^
verki,^^ sem fljotande tar barn vitne. Somu^^ bræSr,
sem berat höf^u ^- gTÖíina/^ taka upp ^' þan ^ helgustu ^^
bein, leggjandi ni^r oil ^^ samt á eitt dyrligt klæ^i.
Ok sem þat er svo gjort me^ allri vandvirkt,^^ bera 20
- grauftinn, T.
^ maxinnum, T.
■* nauckuriy T.
5 stund, T.
'■' epter, T.
' ueral/da?', T.
s Jimta, T.
® er added by Prof. Unger.
^^ /ram, T.
ii ski/lldugt, T.
1- Varliyum, T.
^^ baiivm, T.
^^ vmhergisy T.
^5 iianckirum, T.
^^ mvnkum, T.
'' vpp, T.
'^ marmctrahellv, T.
i9 yÁí/, T.
-f' ^/Örí^ T.
-1 thesair, T.
"■- ilmannda, T.
-^ organvm, T.
-^ TzeZ/e, T.
-5 faulska, T.
-^ So T. Prof. Unger proposes
the classical /^mrfar.
2S godfvser, T.
2!^ þcsst', T.
^0 fc;-cX-/, T.
'-^^ Sau?nv, T.
32 /ia,//iZi-, T.
33 graufina, T.
3Í >ai-, T.
35 helgvztv, T.
36 i/«//, T.
37 vanuirkt, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 201
the chest had been made m a fair fashion with a trusty
lock to it, the lord archbishop goeth down into the
crypt together with the learned men some time after
compline, when the world's people were already at
rest. This took place on the fifth of the calends of
July, two nights, to wit, before the mass of the apostles
Peter and Paul. They now proceed all together in such
due humility unto the stone vault, that they prostrate
themselves to earth in tearful prayers around the tomb.
Having prayed a long time and devoutly, the archbishop
ordereth certain of the monks to remove the marble slab
which closed the stone vault. And having done this,
they find the fair treasure and fragrant organ of the
Holy Ghost shrouded in such raiment as appertaineth
to the highest teacher, which, however, fell into dust by
reason of its great eld when it was touched. The
devotion of those present while performing this work
was borne out by their flowing tears. The same brothers
who had laid open the grave, took up the most holy
bones, laying them down again on a certain costly cloth.
And this having been done with every care, they bring
202
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
þeir ^ þaDn heilagan dom framm - fyrer sjálfan erkiby-
skupinn. Er ]>á kistan til latin, );vi at erkibyskupinn
vill þessa þjónustu sjálfr fremja, at leggja beinin
ni^r Í kistmia;^ meS þeim liætti, at >'snjóli\T.tr dúkr
er laginn^ yfer ok under.^ Enn á rae^an at Lann 5
gjorer ]?etta bleza^a verk, at skipa niSr beinum,^
liggja lær^er menn frammfallner '^ meb bæn ok tárum.
Lítinn part ^ af beinnm lætr erkibyskup fyrer utan
kistmia,^ til þess at skifta ^ ]?eim til dýröligra höfu'S-
kirkna-^ e^a veita nokkurum ^^ ágætum personam 10
Í ^- ástargjöf, at minning astvinar Drottius dreifist
ok frægist því framar, seui bans beilagr dónir dýrk-
ast^^ví^ara. Sem þetta er allt fagrliga fyllt ok kistan
aftr^^ læst, skipar erkibyskup somum^^ bræ^rum at
bera hana í eion virSulegan ^^ ok |?ó le^aiiligan staS, 15
)?vi at SÚ er forhugsan bans í þessu ^^ máli, at bátiS-
lig translacio Tbóme skal svo fremi gjorast^ sem ferr
á^r um landit, at binu^^ dýriistu böfSingjar ^''^ bæ^e
kirkjunnar ok kurie "^ sé -^ náverande svo signa^ri
JTJónnstu, ok i J^etta forskot skipar liann tíu^'^ daga, 20
svo bjó^ande, at á sí^asta nonas dag Julij mána^ar
kvomi -^ ];eir aller í Kantúaríam ^^ lær^er menn ok
ólær^er, er vegsama vilja heilagan Thómam erkiby-
skup. Her ^^ af seger '^ meistarinn, at greinda -'^ muni
^ So Prof. linger ; om. T.
2 fram, T.
3 kistvna, T.
^ lagi7i, T.
5 unnder, T.
^ beinvm, T.
7 framfallner, T.
s ;?aríí, T.
9 sAí/Jía, T.
Jo haufutkirkna,T.
^^ Jiaiickurvm, T.
12 So Prof. Unger ; ok, T.
i^ dyrckazty T.
1* cr/jí?-, T.
^^ saitmvni, T.
i^ virduligann, T.
17 þessu, T.
18 /unt', T.
1'-* haufdingiar, T.
2" Ayric, T.
21 sie, T.
22 ííy, T.
23 komv, T.
2^ Kanntvariam, T.
25 ^íer, T.
26 se/^rer, T.
2'" So Prof. Unger ; greiiid, T;
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 203
the Loly relic before the archbishop himself. Then the
chest is brought forward, for the archbishop choose th for
himself the service of laying the bones into the chest;
which was done in such a way, that a white weed was
laid under and above. But Avhilst he ministereth at this
blessed service, disposing the bones, tlie leained men
lie kneeling around in prayers and teais. A small
portion of the bones the archbishop leaveth outside the
chest, in order to divide them among certain olorious
cathedral churches, or to make a loving present of them
unto certain excellent persons, in order that the memory
of God's dearly beloved one may spread the more, the
more widely his holy relics shall be worshipped. All this
having been fairly fulfilled, and the chest having been
closed, the archbishop eujoineth the same brothers to
carry it away unto a certain lionourable yet hidden place,
for in this afíair he acteth oi\ the forethought that the
solemn translation of Thomas shall take place then first,
when news hath had time to d;o abroad throuo'hout the
land, that the greatest lords both from the church and from
the pope's court may be present at such a blessed service.
For this reason he fixeth an interval of ten days, order-
ing that on the last day of the Nones of the month of
July (1st of July) they shall all come to Canterbury,
learned men as well as unlearned, who have a mind to
worship the holy archbishop Thomas. Concerning this
204
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
ver^a fjölda þess er sótti til Kantúaríam fyi^ nefndan
fær hann eigi gjört/ p'ví at staxSrinn Í Kanncia ok
oil ^ þau ]?orp, er lagu urabergis,^ voru svo full me^
folki, at marger nr^u vnder tjöklum ^ at biia ^ e^a
berum himne. pesser voru ]^ar tveir hofSingjar,^ 5
vii^uligr faSer ok postuligs sætis legatus, er hét^
Fandulfhus, annarr^ Viliamr Remensis erkibyskup. El
kunnum vær at nefna fleire utan ^ lands tilkomna,
enn innan lands ma nefna fystan Heinrek konung
Heinreks son me'S jörlum, barónum ^^ ok alls kyns 10
valdsmönnum/^ her ^- me^ byskupar, ábótar ok prí-
órar ok a^rar stétter lærdómsins af ýmissum hér-
uöum.^-^ Nú^^ í nafne GuSs kemr þri^ja stund dags
nonarum Julii, sem byskupinn er skrýddr ^^ me^ by-
skupum ok ö^rum ^^ stéttum fyr nefndum, ganga 15
]?eir meS liátí^legum ^^ söng ^^ niSr í gröfti/^ J?ar
sem kistan gej^mdist. He's liverre tign hún fluttist
]?a'San upp -^ í kirkjuna ok skipa'Sist í bee's yfer alltari,
sem fyrer var búit/-^ má lielzt ^- greina í fám or'Sum,
at Kantuariensis kirkja léti gjarnan framme alia ]?á 20
vegsemd, er liún -^ mátti veita sínum fe^r ^* me^
klukkum,^^ söng ok skrú^a, ok eigi at eins þar innan
kirkju,-'' beldr-^ fagna^i allr sta"Srinn me'S hátí^legri
* The sentence at greind .
. eigi
>3 hiervdum, T.
yjört is evidently corrvipt
, and
14 Nv, T.
although the sense is pretty
clear,
15 So Prof. Unger ; skrddr, T.
yet the actual restoration of the
1"^ aiulrum, T.
text is more than I can ventui'e on.
1' hatidlegvm^ T.
2 auU, T.
1^ saung, T.
3 vmbergis, T.
,
li' ^ra«/<^ T.
4 tiolldiim, T.
20 i;;j;j, T.
^ bva, T.
21 6t'í7, T.
^ haufdingiar, T.
22 Ae/Mzi, T.
7 hiet, T.
23 hvn, T,
5 anjiar^ T.
24 /ei/n T.
9 vtan,T.
25 kluckvm, T.
10 baronvm, T.
26 AlVý^á', T.
11 valid zmaiauiiun, T.
•■^7 Ae/Wr, T.
12 hier, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 205
the master relateth, that he may not state the number
of the multitudes of people who assembled on the
settled day at Canterbury, as the city of Canterbury
and all surrounding villages were so filled with people,
that many had to abide under tents or under the open
sky. These two lords were there, the w^orthy father
and legate of the hol}^ see Fandulfhus by name, and the
archbishop of Reims. None, beside these, know we to
mention, as having come from abroad ; but among those
from England itself we may name first king Henry, the
son of Henry, who w^as there surrounded by earls,
barons, and every kind of mighty folk, therewithal
bishops, abbots, priors, and the other orders of learned
men from various districts. Now, in God's name, cometh
the third hour of the Nonæ of July, at which hour the
bishop standeth robed together with the other bishops
and orders of learned men afore-named, who then proceed
amidst solemn singing down into the cryj^t where the
chest was kept. The solemnity with which it was
brought thence up into the church and was placed over
the altar, where preparations had been made for it, may
be best told in these few words, that the church of Can-
terbury showed forth in a free manner every honour
which she could do unto her father, in bells rung, in
song, and splendid appointments, not only inside the
church, but also in the joyance in which the city mani-
206
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
glebi, konungrinn ok aller út ^ frá j^óttust - sem
gædder GuSs gjöf, ef þeir máttu í nökkuru ^ til þjóua.
Svo livílík lofmessa ]^ar var eflcl '^ samdægris til sæmd-
ar sælum ^ Tlióme er ei ^ ott at greina, ]n^í at í
þeire sömu "^ messu var^ svó ^ lengd ^ saker ofranar 5
ok gó'Sfýsi fólksins, at varla sýndist um^^ síöer út^^
ganga. Heinrekr konungr minntist nú æskunnar^^ ok
YÍröi sinn fóstrfö^ur ^ "^ me^r allre gó^fýsi, bæ'Si þjón-
andi ok ofrandi, sem mildum^^ konungi he^T'Si. Enn
j;at er greinanda, at sí^an konungrinn li-Sr, setr 10
bókin ]?at folk me'S beztum '^^ hug verit hafa ok frj áls-
leik til Tliómam erkibyskups, sem var iir ^^ sýslu
Lundúna byskups, ok má ];ar skynsaralig gTein til
finnast, at |?eir dýrku'bu framar ö'Srimi ^^ J?ann dýr-
mætan gimstein, er byrja^ist í þeira mó^arhúsi.^^ Enn 15
svo sem fólkit lag^i signu^um^^ Thóraasi bæ^i mjúka
bæn ok mikit ofr í gulli ok silfri, lætr hann eigi á
sik liallt verba, |?ví at sjálfan bátí^isdag sinnar upp-
töku ^^ gæddi hann skínöndum "^ hjartteignum, \6 at
1 vth, T.
2 þottvzt, T.
3 7iavckurv, T.
4 So Prof. Unger : clfd, T.
•^ salvm, T.
c ei, so Prof. Unger, probably
correctly ; var, T., which seems
more likely to be a thoughtless
scribal repetition of the preceding
var, than a miswrit for varf, vaiia
or varleya scarcely.
' saumv, T.
* suo, T. ; this form, with o un-
accented, stands in this handwriting
in T. for the demonstrative adverb,
which in classical writers is svá
(sua), sva (sua) = so, thus. The
grammatical structure of the sen-
tence : i... messu var'^ ' sua' leingd
=in mass was so length, is as im-
possible in Icelandic as in English.
But b}' lengthening the vowel we
get the feminine (in an unclassical
form of course) of the demonstr.
pron. sa, and only by so interpret-
ing suo can the sentence be made
grammatical at all.
9 hingd, T.
1" vm, T.
11 vth,T.
^2 askvnnar, T.
13 fostrfaudr, T.
1* milldum, T.
15 heztvm, T.
16 ^.^^ T.
1' audrvrn, T.
1^ modrhusi, T.
19 sigjiudvm, T.
-" npptauhv, T.
21 skinaundum, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 207
fested its solemn hilarity, the king and all other folk
deeming themselves as partakers of a divine gift if they
might in any Avay minister to the festivit}'. It is a
matter not soon told, what sort of thanksgiving ceremony
was performed this same day for the honour of the
blessed Thomas, for that very ceremony grew so loDg
for the sake of the offerings and the devotion of the
people, that it seemed as if it were never coming to an
end at all. Kino- Henry now brouo-ht to mind his
youth, and honoured his foster-father with ever}' mark
of devotion, ministering to the ceremony and making
offerings befitting a liberal king. But it may be men-
tioned that next to the king the book notes the people
from the diocese of London, as having showed the
greatest kindness and liberality to archbishop Thomas ;
for which the plausible reason may be adduced, that
they worshipped beyond others the precious gem which
traced its origin to their mother church. But sweet as
were the prayers, great as were the ofierings in gold
and silver which the people bestowed upon the blessed
Thomas, he alloweth himself to be outdone in no wise,
for on the very^ day of his solemn translation he con-
ferred on them shinino- miracles., althouoh we have not
208 THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
vær höfum ^ )?at ei letrliga fundit til serhverra '^
greina, utan ^ J^essi hjartteign stendr í miM annarra.^
pann sama dag sem fyr var gTeindr í hatí^arhaldi
Thomas erkibysknps, var einn riddari í sjófer^ at
sækja til Kantúaríam, hann hét ^ Robert ok átti 5
ungan^ son innbyr^is, ei' ilia kuiini sig at vakta/
saker æsku,^ "þá er skipit tok barman skri^ me^ fullum
b}^. petta profa^ist svo, því at piltrinn ^ var geymslu-
laus, hefer sik svo ovarliga, at honiim varpar iit^^
Í bylgjuna. Riddarinn hefer aiigabrag^ á )?essu brátt, 10
þó at fljótt bærist at, ok ];ví dvelr hanii ekki, at
kalla piltinum ^^ dugna^armann, ok an dvöl heyrer
vinr Drottins þetta kail, því at )?egar sem piltrinn ^^
hafSi tekit eitt kaf af J^eim fyrsta steyt, er honum
varpa^i, skant honum hatt upp ^- úr^^ sjónum,^^ ok 15
þegar tekr hann sinn skilning, hvert hann átti at
vænta full tings, hann talar svo : " Heilagr Thomas,
'' mattu^^ hjálpa mér/ö ef þíi vilt.''^^ g^^an er ]?vílíkt,
sem hann siti a sjonum an allri kafFerS. Var su
hjartteign ]?vi meiri, at byrinn var svo snarpr, sem 20
bokin greiner, at skipit snara^i tvo orskot-^^ framm^^
fra piltinum, ^^ áí)r enn skipverjar fengu^^ lægt seglit
vi^ fyrsta riddarans kail. Sat svo pilltrinn um-^ eina
stund dags, því at bans dugna^armenn fengu,-^ mikinn
erfi^issveita me^ androSri,-- a^r enn yeiv fengu-^ hjálpat 25
honum, sem skynsamr ma^r ma skilja af suarleika
vindarins. Sem þeir koma rae^S skipinu ]?ar sem hann
^ haufum, T.
- sierhverra, T.
3 vtan, T.
^ amiara, T.
5 hiet, T.
^ uugann, T.
' uagta, T.
8 (^shv, T.
9 pilltrinn, T.
10 vth, T.
" pilliinum, T.
1- vpp, T.
13 vr, T.
1^ sionvm, T.
15 mattv, T.
16 mie.r, T.
1' viUt, T.
18 aiirshot, T.
19 /ram, T.
20 fengu, T.
-1 r/», T.
22 anndrodri, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 209
found them set forth in detailed particulars, with the
exception of the following miracle, which is recorded
there amongst others.
The very day on which, as it is stated before, the
celebration of the translation of archbishop Thomas fell,
a certain knight happened to be voyaging by sea for the
purpose of proceeding unto Canterbury ; he was hight
Robert, and had with him on board the craft his young
son, who by reason of his youth, knew but badly how to
take care of himself when the vessel got under way,
sweeping along before a full wind at will. Now it came to
pass, the youth being left unlooked-after, that he behaved
so heedlessly as to tumble overboard into the billows.
The knight soon catcheth sight of this, swiftly as it
came to pass, and tarrieth therefore not in calling upon
an intercessor for the youth, and forthwith the Lord's
friend heareth his calling, for as soon as the youth had
had one dive from the first tumble, when he was cast
overboard, he emerged high out of the sea, and forth-
with regaineth his presence of mind, and understandeth
where he might look for saving aid, and speaketh thus :
*• Holy Thomas, thou mayest help me, if thou wilt."
And after this it was as if he sat on the sea, no kind of
immersion taking place at all. This miracle was all the
greater for this reason, that the wind was so brisk that, as
the book relateth the matter, the ship had swept the length
of two arrow-shots past the youth, before the crew could
take in the sail at the first cry of the knight. Thus the
youth sat for one whole hour, because his salvors had
great labour in pulling against the wind, before they
might save him, as any sensible man may well under-
stand from the swift-blowing wind. And as they bring
K541.
210
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
sitr a bylgjunum, taka J?eir liann ^ heilan upp í
skipit. Enn er fa^er hans spur Si, hverja grein liann
haf^i á lífgjöf sinne svo langri, svara^i hann rosk-
mannligum - or^um ok sag^Si, at nökkur ^ vir^uligr
ma^r kom til hans i sjonum ok frjálsa^i hann af 5
dauSligum haska bæ^i fyr ok si^ar. Enn fyi^er ]?essa
söofn ^ fekk ^ hinn heilaofi Thomas enn um sinn
makligt ^ lof sinne milcli bæ^i j^ar innbyrSis ok í
Kanntúaría sem J?eir frammkvomu ^ samdægris. Prýdd-
ist þá enn^ sú signa'Sa háti^ at auk annars roe's 10
J^essum andligum fagna"Si. Má þat ætla, ef líkar, at
riddari Robert mundi ofra sælum Thomasi nokkura
gullpeninga fyrer svo mykla vináttu ok velgjör'S, sera
hann hafSi veitt honum.
Var ]?essi translacio heilags Thóme síSan haldin 15
árhga meS skipan herra páfans um alia Angliam ok
um fleiri lönd,^ er lítit lei's frá upptöku,-^^ ]?at er
á næsta dag efter ^'^ octauam apostolorum Petri et
Pauli.'^
The shrine
of St.
Thomas.
KAP. CIV.
Af herra Stephanum.
20
Herra Stephanus Kantuariensis erkibyskup ferr
J?essu næst meS sinne góSfýse til J^eirar ráSagjörSar
at vikja oiir hins heilaga Thome honum til skrin-
gjorSar. Ok sem þat er stööugt ^^ meS áeggjan kon- 25
ungsins ok annars stormemiis í landinu, kostar erki-
^ ha7in added by Prof. Unger ;
om. in T.
2 rauskmminligum, T.
3 iiauckr, T.
^ saugn, T.
^ fieck, T.
^ maglikt, T.
' framkuomv, T.
^ Prof. Unger reads : Enn fyrer
\>essa saugn . . . hcedi þar innbyrdis
ok i Kanntuaria. Sem þeir fram-
kuomv samdœgris pryddizt þá etm,
&c. The particles þá enn show
that the full stop is rightly removed
from Kanntuaria to samdœyris.
9 lav7id, T.
^^ upptaukv, T.
11 epter, T.
1- i.e. on July 7th.
13 staudugt, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 211
the ship to where he sits on the waves, they rescue him
hale and sound into the vessel. But when his father
asked him, what account he could give of his life having
so long been saved, he frankly answered and said, that
some venerable man came unto him, whereas he was in
the sea, and delivered him from the deadly peril from
first to last. But for this story the holy Thomas got
once more a worthy praise for his mercy, both on board
the vessel and in Canterbury on their arrival there
the same day. That blessed feast was thus still
furtlier adorned, in addition to the rest, by this spiritual
joy. If you like, you may well think that knight
Robert would fain offer unto the blessed Thomas some
golden pennies, for so great a mercy and benefit which
he had conferred upon him.
By the command of the lord pope this Feast of the
Translation of the holy Thomas was sithence held yearly
throughout all England, as well as throughout other
countries a short time after the date of the translation
itself, that is to say on tlie next day after the octave of
the Apostles Peter and Paul.
CHAP. CIV.
Of lord Stephen.
The next thing done by lord Stephen, archbishop of
Canterbury, was that, in his devotion he resolved to
convert the offerings made to the holy Thomas into a
shrine for him. And when this had been settled by the
urging of the king and other mighty folk in the land,
o 2
212 THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
byskupinn þar til |?ann vildasta ^ meistara, er fast
matti Í þeim löndum.'^ Enn er almúginn í Englandi'^
fékk * sanna vissu her ^ um, birtust vinsælder
heilags Thome svo myklar me^ folkinu, at þeir
vilja skrin hans af öngum ^ málmi steypast '' lata neraa 5
gulli einu, ok þat for framm.^ par af flytja svo
pílagrímar heilags Thome orSfall Englismanna,^ at
aldri hail England or^it svo gullrikt sem á'Sr, ok
þakka þeir þar Gu^i fyrer. Nú rae^ svo dýrum
kosti ok völdum ^^ meistaradóm var"S skrínit hit 10
vænsta ^^ verk, er menn hafa sé'S,^^ alt steinsett
umbergis, ]?ar sem bezt mátti bera til fegr^ar ok
ásýndar. Sem skrínit er algjört, leggr erkibyskup
þar í heilagan dóm vir^uligs pislarvotts Thóme ok
skipar yfer mi^ju háaltare, eigi hæra enn þat stó"S 15
ni-Sr á efri tabulam^ horf^i annat brjóst í austr, enn
annat í vestr.
c^bínde"^ Nú svo vir^Suligt sem vær höfum^^ skrifat af
French skrÍDgjör^ ok setning Thóme, sýnist honum enn
becomes ^^^ ^^^^ ^ skorta nökkut/* ok því krefr nau'Ssýn, at 20
St^hed^to^ vær minnmnst, hvar upp gafst forSum, hversu for í
the shrine, niillum Thómas erkibyskups ok Loviss Frakka kon-
ungs, þá er hann beiddist at eignast karbunkulum í
þeira skilna'Si, enn fékk^ eigi. par af er svo skrifat
fyrr í bókinne, at heilagr Thomas sag^ist fa mundu 25
steininn, þó at siSar væri. Er nú tími kominn, at
SÚ spásaga fyllist meS þeiri atfer^/^ sem hér^ stendr.
Vær sög^um ^^ fyr, hversu Philippus Frakka kon-
ungr var ostyrkrar heilsu ok kendi líkþrár þegar í
* villdazta, T.
2 laundum, T.
^ Einglaiidi, T.
^ fieck, T.
Ö hier, T.
* aungum, T.
7 So Prof. llDger ; stypazt, T.
8 fram, T.
^ Einglismanna, T.
^0 vauldum, T.
1^ vcB7inzta, T.
12 sied, T.
13 haufvm, T.
1'* nauckut, T.
15 athferd, T.
16 saugdum, T.
THE STORY OF .ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 213
the archbishop procureth for the work the greatest
master in the craft who could be found within those
lands. But when the commonalty of England got full
certainty of this, the love which the people bore to St.
Thomas was soon revealed, since they would hear of his
shrine being made of no other metal but gold alone,
which, indeed, had to be done. Hence the pilgi^ims to
St. Thomas's shrine repeat the saw of the English, that
after that time England never grew so wealthy in gold
as before, and for that they give thanks unto God. Now
by this mighty expense and choice workmanship the
shrine was the most excellent work of art that had ever
been seen, being set all round with stones, wherever
beauty and effect might thereby be best set off. When
the shrine was finished the archbishop depositeth there-
within the holy relics of the worthy martyr archbishop
Thomas, and placet h it above the middle of the high
altar, only so high that it rested on the upper table
thereof, one face of it pointing to the east, the other to
the west.
Now worthy as have been the things which we have
already written of the translation and the enshrining of
Thomas, it seemeth to him none the less that something
still is wanting; and therefore necessity demandeth that we
should revert to the story, where we left it aforetime, when
it was shown,how matters went betw^eenarchbishopThomas
and Louis the king of the French, when the former desired
to have that carbuncle at their parting, but got it not.
Concerning this matter, it was written before in this book,
that holy Thomas said he would have the stone, although
it might come to pass later on. Now the time hath come
for that prophesy to be fulfilled, as, indeed, it did become,
accordino- to the manner hereinafter related. We men-
tioned before in how feeble health Philip the king of the
French was, having been inclined to leprosy from his youth
214 THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
æsku, enn í þennan tíma hefer hans^ mein svo
mikit^ megin me'S honum feingit, at harm legst í
rekkju^ frá landsstjórn ok útrei^um.^ Nú ber svo
til einn dag, sem hann liggr mæ^iliga meö harmi
hugar ok mó^er hans, di'ottningin gamla, sitr yfer 5
honum, tekr hún svo til or^s : " Son minn," sagSi
hún, '' hverja ætlun hafi^ ^ }?ér ^ á um krankdóm
" jrSvarn, at j^ér^ liggit í pínu dag ok nótt, enn
*' Frakkland fen- sem höfSingjalaust V^ Konungrinn
svarar : '' Hver er mín ætlun þar um utan at bera, 10
'^ sem ek kann bezt, ok þakka Gu^i fyrer." Drottn-
ing talar þá: "Saniiliga er ];at mín hugan,^ at y^r
" sé ^ til rei'Su heilsugjöfin, ef J?ér sparit ei kost-
" inn." Konungrinn svarar : " Hvat er þat í voru
'' valdi, at vær mnndum ei gjarnan gefa til ]7ess, IS
'' at þiggja heilsnna ? "Frúin talar : " Eg man gjörla,
^' hversu or'Sræ^a for i milium fó^rs-^^ y^vars ok
" Thóme erkibyskups, á^r enn hann vendi heim til
" Engiands,^^ at erkibyskup, kaus af þessu ríki )?á
" vináttu, at eignast ^'^ þann karbúnkulum, er þér ^ 20
" Frakka konungar hafit elskat mest næst^^ sjálfri
*' krúnunni/^ enn fa'Ser y^var halla^ist undan ok
" nenti eigi til at lata. Heilagr Thomas talari svo
" fallin oi-S, at ek skilde efalaust, at honum var
" hugfast at fa steininn. Nu er, son minn, at 25
" kjósa um tvo kosti, at liggja þannin 1 kör ^^ ok
" bi^a svo bana, e"Sa heita til heilags Thomam ok gefa
I So Prof. Unger ; han7i, T.
- After mikit T. adds med.
3 reyckjv, T.
"* vthreidvm, T.
5 haji, T.
^ þier, T.
? haufdingjalaust, T.
8 So T. ; hugsan, U.
9 sie, T.
w faudrs, T.
II Ei7}glannz, T.
1^ So Frof. Unger ; cm. in T.
ii» So Prof. Unger.
!■* krvnvnnar, T. ; this genitive
would seem to indicate that the
original reading was elskat mest
sjálfrar krvnvnnar ^(jow have) loved
most of the very crown jewels, i.e.
of the regalia, but such a construc-
tion is, at all events, strained, while
Prof. Unger's suggestion is natural.
15 kaur, T.
1^ \>anninn, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 215
upwards ; but at this time the disease had gained such
a strength over him, that he took to the sick-bed, for-
going the government of the land, as well as all travelling
abroad. Now it cometh to pass one day, as he lieth
wearied with sorrow of mind, and his mother, the aged
queen, sitteth over him, that she accosteth him in these
words : " My son," said she, " what think you about your
'' sickness, lying as you do day and night in sore pain,
'' while France remaineth as if reft of her head ?" The
king answereth : " What should I think about it but to
" bear it as best I can, and thank God therefor ? " Then
tlie queen speaketh : " In truth my mind tells me, that
" restoration to your health is ready for you if you do
" not grudge the cost." The king answereth : '' What
'' could it be among the things whereof we are possessed
" that we should not be fain to give for the restoration
" of our health ? " Quoth the lady : " I mind quite
" clearly, what words passed between your father and
" archbishop Thomas before he returned home to England,
" when the archbishop wished to have in token of friend-
" ship from this kingdom that carbuncle which you,
" kings of France, have always cherished most, next
" indeed to the crown itself, but which request 3'our
'' father declined, not being able to bring himself to give
" up the stone. The holy Thomas spoke in words which
" left it an undoubted matter that he had a strong
" desire to get the stone. Now, my son, you have to
" choose between two things, to lie on the sick-bed as
" you are now doing, and thus to await your death, or
(' to make a vow to the holy Thomas to give him the
216 THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
" honum steininn, ok færa sjálfr til Kannciam." Kon-
ungrinn svarar sem brosandi : ''GuS viröi/' sag^i^
hann, "hversu koster þesser eru ojafner, ok a því
" gjörum vær öngva^ dvöl at kjósa, hvern er vær
'' viljum upptaka, heldr heitum vær þegar í sta'S 5
" ok játum under Gu^s vitne, at þennan ^ kar- '
" bunculum gefum vær sælum Thóme erkibyskupi,
" ok at vær skulum hann sjálfr ílytja til Kantúaríam
" yfer hans háaltere."'* Hann hefer svo sagt, at
haDn þarna'Sist ^ alia : bi^stund, at líkþráin fellr öll^lO
ni'Sr af honum í sængarklæ^in ^ me"S svo myklum
krafti, at á sama augabrag^i stendr hann upp al-
heiU me'S svo hreinu höröndi^ ok heilu brjósti,
sem aldre á daga sína hef^i hann krankr or^it. Li'Sa
nú svo nökkurer^ dagar, at herra konungrinn 15
unde vel vi^ skifti '^^ þeira erkibyskups, á me^an
nýjast var um heilsugjöfina. Enn er timinn lengd-
ist/^ runnu til hans slikar hugsaner, sem fyr voru
lesnar af or^um fö^ur ^^ hans, at gjarnan, vilde hann
öSru ^^ gózi ^"^ viö koma, heldr enn lata steininn, ef 20
heilagr Thomas vildi sam)7ykkja ok erkibyskupinn í
Kanncia. Af þessum sínum rá^agjöi^um býst hann svo
í pílagiimsfer^ til Thómam, at hann tekr ósnöggliga^^
til tesauriam, J>ví at heldr viU hann leysa steininn
tvennu ver'Si, enn leggja hann efter.^^ Ok því er 25
Ijóst af þeim steinsins dýrleik, sem fyr var skrifa^r, at
hann flyti me^ ser til Englands ^^ sextigu punda silfurs.^^
Sem hann kemr til Kantúaríam, tjár hann greiniliga
erkibyskupinum alt sitt heit me^ sannindum, birt-
^ sagdi added by Prof. linger.
' au7igua, T.
2 þennann, T.
^ So Prof. Unger ; haa haUte7'e,T.
^ So Prof. Unger ; þar}iizt, T.
6 auU, T.
'' sœngarkladinn, T.
^ hauraundi, T.
^ nauckurer, T.
^0 skiiJti, T.
11 leingdizt, T.
1- faudr, T.
13 audruy T.
14 godzi, T.
1' osnaugglega, T.
16 epter, T.
1' Einglandz, T.
18 So T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 217
" stone, and to bring it yourself to Canterbury.'* The
king answered with a smile : " God knows," said he,
" that these conditions are unequal indeed, and certes I
" shall not tarry deciding which of the two I choose,
" but promise forthwith and vow, God being my wit-
" ness, that this carbuncle I shall give to the blessed
" archbishop Thomas, and that I shall bring it my^self
" to Canterbury, and place it on the high altar there."
He hath so said himself, that after this he had not to wait
one moment till the leprosy fell clean away from him
into the bedclothes, and so utterly, that he stood up in
that same twinkle of an eye, thoroughly healed and with
his skin so clean, and his breast so whole, as if he had
never ailed aught all his lifetime. Now some days wore
away^, during whicli the king enjoy'ed right well the ex-
change he had made with the archbishop, while his feel-
ings as to his restoration to health were at their freshest.
But when time grew longer, thoughts, similar to those
of which we formerly read in the words of his father,
awoke within him, inasmuch as he would fain make the
payment in some other goods rather than to have to part
with the stone, if the holy Thomas, as well as the arch-
bishop of Canterbury, would give their consent thereto.
With this counsel at heart he prepareth to go on a pil-
grimage to Thomas, in such a way that he taketh an
unstinted amount of money from his treasury, being
desirous rather to buy in the stone at double price, than
to leave it behind. And from the price of the stone,
which has been stated already, it is clear that he must
needs have carried with him sixty pounds in silver to
England.
When he cometh to Canterbury he setteth forth clearly
and truly to the archbishop the whole story of his vow,
218
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
andi öUum ^ go^um monnum '^ bæ^i Die's or^um ok
sjálfs sins ásýnd, liver su dýrliga myskunn er hann
hafSe l^egit. Hér^ me^ hefer hann umleitan, at
erkibyskup mune samþykkja fyrer bond * heilags
Thome, at hann leyse steininn svo miklu ver^i, 5
sem Karlus keisari kosta^i hann fyrst a Jorsalalandi,
greinandi erkibyskupinum, at þat voru attatiger pnnda
silfrs. Ok meS ]?vi at Frakka konnngr sæker
þetta svo fast, at hann leggr bæn til, hugsar erki-
byskup, at hann muni hafa fuUt umbod af alfa 10
heilags Thome at skipa þessu efter ^ sinne vild
ok konungsins bæn. pvi frjalsar hann steininn játande
at taka lausagóz^ svo mikit. Sem þetta er þegit^
gjörist Frakka konungr har^la gla^r ok talar svo :
*' Til J>ess," sag^Si hann, ''at vær gjörum örugt^ í 15
" vorre hérkvomu,^ at einkis kyns heitrof stendi' á
" oss viö heilagan Thómam, þá viljum vær leggja
^' til annat '"^ fe ^^ jafnmikit,^^ }>ví at þá erum vær
'^ óttalauser, ef vær leysum^^ steininn tveimr verSum."
Nú sem þetta allt er^^ greint ok gjört, geingr 20
Frakka konungr í samkundu me^ erkibyskupi, ok
berr sama dag ]7at væna gull sér ^* á hendi.^^ Ok hvat
lengra,^^ enn í þann tima sem hann ætlar at leysast
af gar^inum, vill hann taka orlof bins heilaga Thomas.
Geingr nú i höfuíkirkjuna-^^ ok upp á efsta gradum ^^ 25
fyrer háaltarit,^^ talandi svo til skrinsins, sem til
lifanda '^^ manns : " Bleza'Sr sérttú,^^ herra vir^uligr
1 aullvm, T.
2 maiaimim, T.
a Híer, T.
^ hannd, T.
^ epter, T.
^ lausagodz, T.
" aurugt, T.
s hierkuonwy T.
'■* annath, T.
'' fie, T.
'^i iafnmikith, T.
2 leysum added by Prof. Cnger.
^ er added by Prof. Unger.
•» sier, T.
^ henndi, T.
^ leingra, T.
' haufudkirkivna, T.
^ So Prof. Unger; graduam, T.
^ haaalltarit, T.
^° hfannda, T.
'1 sierttu, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 219
revealing to all good men, both by his words and his
appearance, what glorious mercy had befallen him.
Therewithal he endeavoureth to persuade the archbishop
on behalf of the holy Thomas to give his consent to his
buying-in of the stone for as much money as it had first
cost the emperor Charles in Palestine, stating to the arch-
bishop that that was eighty pounds. And because the
king of the French pleadeth his cause so eagerly, even as
to support it with prayers and entreaties, the archbishop
supposeth, that he must consider himself to be invested
with full powers on behalf of the holy Thomas to
do in the matter according to his own will and the
king's prayer. He therefore consenteth to the stone
being ransomed, and declareth his willingness to take
the money for it which had been offered. This having
been consented to, the French king becometh mightily
glad, and speaketh thus : " In order," said he, " to make
" it proven by our visit here, that we are guilty of no
" sort of breach of promise against the holy Thomas,
" we will pay for the stone its full price over again, for
" then we feel released from all fear, if we pay double
" value for it." Now this being all declared and acted upon,
the kino* of the French holdeth a conference with the arch-
bishop, wearing that same day the goodly ring on his hand.
What more, than the very hour that he was to depart from
the court, and being also desirous to take leave of the holy
Thomas, he walketh to the cathedral church, and up on
to the uppermost step in front of the high altar, speaking
to the shrine as if he were speaking to a living person :
" Blessed be thou, worthy lord archbishop Thomas, for
220 THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
" Thomas erkibyskup, fyrer alia þá myskunn ok heilsu-
" gjof, er ]m veitter mér^ í þínum ver'Sleik.
" Hefer ek nu leyst til min me^ tveimr vei^Sum
" þennan karbunkulum, er ek het"^ í fystu, at þú
" skylder eignast, ok þar um bi^ ek J?ik, at þú 5
" blezer steininn mer ^ ok minum efterkomundum ^ til
" sæmdar ok salubotar." Efter* svo talat hefr hann
iipp höndina^ me^ gullinu, svo at handarbakit
borfer at skrininu, lætr sí^an hjólit karbúnkúli kyssa
framan á mitt brjóstit, ok efter ^ þat gjört víki^ bami 10
til fylgdarinnar ok ætlar at klæSast til burtrei^ar.^
Enn er hann berr höndina ^ at glófanum, er í burtu ^
geislinn, ]>\i at gullit er tómt.^ Hann víkr sér ^ þá
mót ^^ alltarinu ok sér ^ þegar, at karbunkulus
birte,^^ hvar hann var kominn, þiker konunginum 15
nau"Ssyn at ganga til altaris í annan ^- tíma ok sjá,
hversu vorSit er. Marger vir'Suleger menn fylgdu
honum at sjá }>etta stórtákn, ok var^ öllum^^ s,ug-
Ijóst me^ sama hætti, at greindr karbúnkúlus var
svo meistarlega saminn í miöju brjósti á skríninu, 20
sem höfuSsmi^rinn^^ haf^i hann þar í upphafi sett,
)?ví at svo var hann læstr, at gullstaupit bar umberg-
gis upp yfer hvassasta hjólit. Frakka konungr
talar }>á : " pakka vil ek "þer/^ heilagr fa^er, alia J^essa
'' skipan, fvi at svo samer bezt fyrer Gu'Si, sem þér ^^ 25
" líkar, ok þótt þú kjóser nii karbúnkúlum heldr enn
'' allt þat góz,^^ er ek flutti hingat, skal ek ok því ei
" unnder mik draga ]?at, er ek lukti á'Sr þinne kirkju.
" Sé^^ nú þín eign hvortveggja. Enn bi^ ek fik
^ mier, T.
- hiet, T.
'^ epterko7nu?idiim, T.
4 Epter, T.
^ haundina, T.
6 bvrttreidar, T.
7 burttu, T.
s tomtt,T.
9 sier, T.
10 moth, T.
11 birtte, T.
1- annann, T.
13 aullvni, T.
14 haufvdsmidrinti, T.
15 þier, T.
16 godz, T.
17 5?e, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 221
'' all thy mercy in the restoration of my health, which
'* through thy merits thou didst bestow upon me. I
" have now ransomed to myself this carbuncle by a
" twofold price, the very one which erst I vowed that
" thou shouldst be the owner of, and now I pray thee
" that thou bless the stone, for the honour and spiritual
" healing of myself and my successors/' Having spoken
thus he lifteth up his hand with the ring on it in such
a manner that the back of the hand turned towards
the shrine, and therewithal having made the oval of the
carbuncle to touch the front of the shrine in the middle,
he turned to his following, making ready to array
himself for his departure. But being about to fit the
gauntlet to his hand, lo, the lustre is gone, for, indeed,
the gold setting was empty. Turning then towards
the altar, he perceiveth forthwith, that the very car-
buncle discovered where it was gone, wherefore the king
deemeth needful to go. once more to the altar, and to be-
hold how these things had come to pass. Many worthy
men went with him to behold this wondrous portent,
and unto all it became clear in one and the same way,
that the said carbuncle was so masterly set in the centre
of the front face of the shrine, as if the master- wright
had set it there himself in the beo^innino- for so well was
it secured that the gold-fitting enclosed the edge of the
circular basis all round. Speaketh then the king of the
French : " Thanks will I give unto thee, holy father, for
" all these dealings ; for so things must needs be most
" acceptable to God, even as thou wilt that they should
*' be ; yea, although now thou choosest the carbuncle in
" preference to all the wealth that I brought hither, I
" shall none the more take back to myself that which
" already I have bequeathed to thy church. Be it now
" thine all together. But therewithal I pray, that thou
222 THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
" me^, at ]>n minnist min í bænum J^ínuin ok árner
'' mér-^ þeirar heilsu andlegrar,^ sem er í ö^ru'^ lífi,
'' efter* þeim hætti sem fyr veitter þú mér líkams
*' heilsu meS Gu'Ss fulltinge." Svo seger ^ hann, ok
vender sí^an í veg. 5
Ok þessi tvö verk heilags Thóme, er nú voru
lesin í lireinsan konungsins ok me"(Stekt ^ karbunkúli,
urSu svo fræg, at innan '^ lítils tíma runnu )7au
yfer öll^ ríki fyrer nor^an^ fjall. Enn þat má setja
í enda -"^^ þessarrar hjartteignar, at lausagóz ^^ hins 10
heilaga Thóme me^ brent-^^ silfr var nú or^it svo
mikit bæ^i af fornu ofri ok Trie's frammlagi ^^ Frakka
konungs, at erkibyskup let steypa ni^r í stóra blý-
kápu, at hún stæ^i me^ sínum farmi under skín-
andi-^^ sólu ]?ví at vitrum mönnum ^^ er vel kunnigt 15
at sólarhitinn múterar málminn, svo at blý snýst í
silfr, ef fyrndin ver^r svo mikil stö^unnar/^ sem nátt-
úran beiSist.
KAP. CV.
Af Máhilld módur Thóme. 20
Nú sem lesin hefer verit um stund hjartteigna
fræg^ hins heilaga Thóme erkibyskups, mundi Má-
liilld hans líkamlig mó'Ser þat játa, ef hún mætti
hejrrast/^ at nú væri frammkomit sýner J?ær, er
henni birtust fyrer þeim bleza^a sveine, því at borg 25
lifanda^^ GuSs, þat er heilug kristne; fagnar nú
^ mier, T.
2 anndlegrar, T.
3 avdrv, T.
^ epter, T.
■^ seiger, T.
6 medtegt, T.
' innann, T.
3 öm//, T.
9 nordanvy T.
10 eniida, T.
i^ lausagodz, T.
12 brentt, T.
'3 framlagi, T.
i^ skinaniidi, T.
1'^ maimnum, T.
i** staudannar, T.
1" heyraztt, T.
13 lifannda, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 223
" mind me in thy prayers, and that thou intercede on my
'' behalf for my spiritual salvation in the life to come,
" after the fashion in which thou didst bestow on me by
^' God's help the health of my body." Thus he speaketh,
and then he wended on his way.
These two works of the holy Thomas, of which we
have just read, the purification of the king and the recep-
tion of the carbuncle, became so famed, that within a little
time the rumoui' of them went abroad over all countries
north of the Alps. But we may add to the end of this
miracle, that the treasures in burnt silver belono-ingr to the
holy Thomas had now become so great, what with former
offerings and the bounty of the French king, that the
archbishop let pour it all into a large chest of lead, and
ordered it to stand with its freight in the sheen of the
sun ; for unto wise men it is well known, that the heat
of the sun changeth the metal in such a manner that
lead becometh silver if it standeth as long as nature
demandeth.
CHAP. CV.
Of Maild the mother of Thomas.
Now as we have been reading for a while of the glory
of the miracles of the holy archbishop Thomas, Mailed,
his fleshly mother, would certes confess, if she could be
heard, that now the visions had come to pass which were
revealed unto her before the birth of that blessed child ;
for the burgh of the living God, being holy church, rejoic-
224 THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
sæmiliga af þeim árþyt, er út fell ^ af hennar kvi'Se,
sem Temps í Lundimum spá^i for^um.^ E^Sa Gillibert
fa'Ser heilags Thome, hvat mundi hann segja^ þeim
ávexti, er hveitikornit gefr í Kanncia? Mætti hann
tala me^ Jsahac höfu'Sfó^ur : ^ Ecce odor filij mei, sicut 5
odor agri pleni, etc.^ Af þessum dýrSarsamligum akri
ilma^i svo langt me^ gjof Heilags Anda, at a tiu
arum fyrr enn heilagr Thomas geingi me^ tignarklæ^i
sin iyrer sannan ^ Jsahac Drottinn vorn Jesúm Krist,
skein hans okomin dýr^ ok Kanntarabyrgis kristne 10
fyrer spádóm allt tit a JorsalalaDd.^ pat er svo Ijos-
ara, at einn enskr ma^r skilrikr sotti út yfer haf
til grafar Drottins. I J?ann tima var í Jórsulum
sá hreinlífisma^r í múnkaregiu, er spádóm haf'Si þegit
af Gu^i. Hann mæter enum enska manne á J>essum 15
veg ok talar svo til hans : " Vin minn/' sag^i hann,
" hvert ríki er þín fóstrjör^ ? " Hannseigist vera fæddr
í Engiandi.^ pá talar múnkrinn sem fylldr nýjum
fagna'Si : " Dásamlig Anglía, mjög dýrlig Angiía, hver
" má þína ókomna fegui-^ ^ skýi^a." Ok enn spyr hann : 20
" Kenner )?ú nökkut^^ Kanntúaríam ? " Pílagrímr
segist ^^ ei þar verit hafa. pá talar munkrinn í annat ^^
sinn me^ andligri gle^i brjósts síns : '' Blezut ertu,
" Kantúaría, gla^lig ok unatsamlig. Sæl er J?ín ham-
" ingja, "því at ]?eir dagar munu koma, at slíkum 25
" hætti muntu tignast me^ sókn ok ofri, sem Jerá-
" salem, Róm, eöa sæll Jacobus i Kompostellam."
pessi spádómsorö flutti enski ma^r heim, hvat hann
hafSi heyrt af múnkinum. Enn efter ^^ x. ár liSin,
1 fiell, T. I 7 go Prof. Unger ; Jorsaula-
2 I put a full stop after fordum \ land, T.
because the context evidently re- j ^ Einglandi, T.
quires it. Prof. Unger reads /orrf-
um, eda &c.
3 seigia, T.
4 haufudfaudr, T.
5 Cf. Gen. xxvii. 27.
^ sannann, T.
9 SoT.
^^ nauekut, T.
^1 seigiz, T.
^2 annath, T.
^3 epter, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 225
eth now right seemly in the rush of that river which fell
out of her womb, even as the river Thames in London
betokened aforetime. Or, then, Gilbert, the father of
holy Thomas, what would he say to the plant which bear-
eth the wheat-ear at Canterbury ? He might well speak
with Isaac the patriarch : Ecce odor filii niei sicut odor
agri pleni, etc. From this field of wondrous glory the
fragrance spread so far, through the grace of the Holy
Ghost, that ten years before the holy Thomas went
arrayed in bis robes of glory before the true Isaac, our
Lord Jesus Christ, his glory to come and that of the
church of Canterbury shone in prophesy even all the
way out in the land of Jerusalem. To relate it more
clearly, a certain Englishman and truthful, went on a
pilgrimage out beyond the ocean unto the sepulchre of
the Lord. At that time there was in Jerusalem a certain
anchorite, a monk by order, who had received from God
the gift of prophesy. On his way he encountereth the
Euglishman, and speaketh to him after this manner :
" Friend," said he, "in which realm is the land that
'' fostered thee?" He said he was born in Eno-land.
Then spoke the monk, as if filled with fresh joy :
" Admirable England, right glorious England, who may
" set forth thy beauty to come ? " And still he ques-
tioneth : '' Knowest thou, perchance, Canterbury ? " The
pilgrim said he had not been there. Speaketh then
again the monk in the spiritual joyance of his heart :
" Blessed art thou, Canterbury, gladsome and delightful.
" Blessed is thy destiny, for the days shall come that
" thou shalt be honoured in pilgrimages and offerings,
' even as Jerusalem, Rome, or the blessed James of
'* Compostella." These words of prophesy, which he
had heard from the monk, the Englishman brought back
home with him. But when ten years had passed away,
K óU.
226
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
sem hjartteigna Ijos hins beilaga Thome skin yfer
England^ meir ok meir, minntist ]?essi Jorsalafari
sinna or^a ok sag^Si svo til sinnar fmr, et Degleotesta
liet ^ : '' Vel muntu hugieitt liafa, livat ek sag^a y^r
" for'Sum, sem ek kom heim af Jorsulum, liversu bro'Ser- 5
" inn lofa^i ]?etta land ok einkanlega Kanntúaríam. Nú
" mun fylling a komin meö bleza^ri frammkvæmd^
" þess, er bans spádómr sagSi : sannliga er ]?at nú fyllt,
" at sæl er Kanncia sins fo^ur '^ ok forstjora, þvi at
" hverr^ aldr, stett ok vigslapallr fagnar under bans 1
" bende, ok jafnvel þrætumenn þiggja ]?ar birti sann-
" leiksins. Ostyrkum formonnum veitist þar bverr
" styrkr til birMegrar áhyggju, beilsa sjiikum, enn
" likn i'Srondum,^ blinder sja, enn baiter ganga, breins-
" ast likþráer, enn beyra daufer, dauber iipp risa, enn 15
" mállauser tala, frægjast fátæker, enn kararmenn öflg-
" ast,^ vatnþrungner mjófast, enn óöer vitkazt, brott-
" fellder ^ græ^ast, enn ri^skelfder bætast." " Ok at ^^ ek
" renne um," seger ^^ meistarinn, í fám or^um : fyllast
'' ]7ar margfaldiga nær ölP'^ gn^spjallleg^^ or^ ok tákn."^^ 20
Hér^^ upp yfer er þat boSanda J?eira Gu^s piningar-
vott til lofs ok vir^ingar, at bimneskt Ijos kom iiij.
sinnum yfer bans alltari, svo at )?ar af tendra^ist
])au kerti, er a^r voru loglaus. Vatn bans skifti^'^ v.
sinnum sinum lit, er );at byrla'Sist sjukum monnum,^^ 25
einn tima bvitt sem mjolk, enn^^ iiij. sinnum rautt
sem bló"S.
^ EingJand, T.
2 hiet, T.
3 framkvœmd, T.
^ faudr, T.
'" So Prof. linger ; hvern, T.
^ formsunnum, T.
' idraunjidum, T.
^ So Prof. Unger ; anlfgazt, T.
9 hrolfellder, T.
'^^ at added by Prof. Unger.
1^ seiger, T.
12 aull, T.
^'^ gudspialleg, T.
14 taknn, T.
15 Hier, T.
i'5 skiptti, T.
17 maunnum, T.
1« en, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 227
and the light of the miracles of the holy Thomas was shin-
ing more and more throughout England, this Jerusalem
pilgTÍm brought to mind the words of the monk, and said
to his lady, whose name was Degieotesta: "Thou wilt have
" considered well that which aforetime I said unto thee,
" when I came home from Jerusalem, how the brother
" praised this land, and more especially Canterbury. Now
" shall that have come to pass, through a blessed ful-
'' filment, which his prophesy foresaid ; for in sooth it is
" now fulfilled that Canterbury glorieth in her father
" and ruler, for every age, state, and order rejoiceth
'' under his hand ; yea even schismatics receive there
'' the brightness of the truth. On feeble rulers is coq-
" f erred there the strength for pastoral solicitude, health
" is given to the sick, mercy to the repentant, the blind
" see, the lame walk, the leprous are cleansed, the deaf
" hear, the dead rise agaiu, but the dumb speak, the
" poor are honoured, the bed-ridden grow strong, the
" dropsical grow thin, the crazy get reason, the epileptic
" are healed, but the palsied recover." " And," says the
Master, " to review it in few words : there, indeed, are
" fulfilled, in a manifold manner, nearly all evangelical
" words and tokens." Over and above all this it must be
declared for the praise and honour of this God's martyr,
that four times a heavenly light appeared over his altar,
so that therewith the candles were lit which stood there
without lights before. His water changed colour five
times on being given to sick peo])le, once becoming as
white as milk, and four times as red as blood.
p ii
228 THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS
KAP. CVI.
NÚ ER AT LYKT LEIDD.
Nu er svo komit, at bok ];essi er at lyktum
leidd, ok mun í fremsta lagi svo synast vitrum monn-
um/ ef liiin ver^r smásmugliga sko^u'S, at hennar 5
æzti skilningT megi viSrkvæmiliga eignast l?at uppkast,
at liann liggi luktr ok samlesin í fígúru )?eiri, er
iinnst in libro regum '^ af Eliseo spámanne ok Suna-
mittiti, ok at J^at vercSi Ijosara, viljura vær sýna
meí) myskunn Gu^s ok arnan lieilags Thome erki- 10
bysknps, hversu likist. Svo er lesit, at Sunamitis
var ein húspreyja sins eigins boncla me^ Israels folki.
I lierbergi )?eira hjona hvildist mörgu ^ sinne Heliseus
propbeta, sem bann for um byg^ina, hvar fyi'er Suna-
mitis talar svo til bonda sins einn tima : ''Eg"* bug- 15
*' leiSi me^ mer,^ sag'Si bun, at þessi beilagr ma^r
" kemr oftliga^ til okkars berbergis, ok því sýnist
" mér^ vel fallit, at vit gjorum bonum litit ber-
" bergi, ok latum ];ar koma sæng bans ok boi^,
" sæti ok keii^isstiku/' Nu er at sja til glosu 20
p>essara bluta. Heliseus befer til þess iii. bluti einkan-
liga, at bann merker vorn Herra Jesiim Kristum,
);at er nafn ok bjartteigner í lífinu, enn frábær-
ast ö^ru/ at bans rotin bein reistu dau^an mann
til lifs. Nafn bans þy'Sist : salus Dei. pa beilsu 25
sendi Gu^ sinu folki, er efter^ likams dau^a a
krossinum reisti mannkindina til lifs ok Ijóss ^ fra
eilifum myrkrum. Svo þjónar nam Helisei vors
Drottins myskunn ok mætti. Sunamitis þýSist bertek-
inn, ok því merker bun sal mannkynsins, er 80
Jesus Kristus leysti me^ sinu blo^i brutt úr ber-
^ maunnum^ T.
« optliga, T
- Cfr. 2 Kings iv. 8-10.
7 audrv, T.
^ 7naurgv, T.
8 epter, T.
' Egh, T.
5 lios, T.
^ mierj T.
THE STORY OF AKCHBLSHOP THOMAS. 229
CHAP. CVI.
Now THE STORY IS BROUGHT TO AN END.
Now we have come so far, that this book is brought
to an end ; and first of all things it will appear to wise
men, if it be carefully examined into, that the gist of it
may fitly be represented as lying shut up and folded in
the figure, which is found in the book of Kings, written
about the prophet Elisha and the Shunammite ; and in
order that this may be made all the clearer, we will
show, by the mercy of God, and the intercession of
the holy Thomas, how the two correspond.
We read that the Shunammite was a woman married
to a husband, both of whom were of the folk of Israel.
The prophet Elisha would many a time take his rest in
the house of these wedded people, when he travelled
through that country-side, wherefore the Shunammite
once speaketh thus to her husband : '' I am turning it over
!'- in my mind," said she, "how repeatedly this holy man
" Cometh to harbour with us, and therefore it seemeth
" well to me, that we should make a little chamber for
" him, and let there be brought for him his bed and
" board, his stool and his candlestick."
Now let us look to the interpretation of these things.
To Elisha appertain three things especially by which he
may signify our Lord Jesus Christ ; these being his name,
and the miracles he wrought in his lifetime, and this,
which is the most extraordinary in comparison with
other miracles, that his withered bones raised a dead man
to life. His name signifieth Solus Dei. That salvation
God sent to his folk, who after His death on the cross
raised all mankind to life and light from eternal dark-
ness. In this manner the name of Elisha servcth to
signify the mercy and might of the Lord. Shunammite
signifieth captive, and therefore she betokeneth the soul
of njankind, which Jesus Christ released l)y his blood,
230
THOMAS SAGA •ERKIBYSKUPS.
lei^slu fjandans. pessa Suuamitem gister Heliseus
oftliga,^ því at vor Herra kemr me^ mörgum^ liátt-
um andligrar ^ vitjanar til kristins manns sálu.
Fyrst tjar hann henni hanclaverk sin í skepnunne,
at hull merke J>aSan, hverre tign Skaparinn er 5
virSandi ; kemr fyrer hjartteigner ok heilaga ritning,
kemr fyrer predikan sinna bo^or^a ok hjartans mykf*
me^ áblæstri Heilags Anda, kemr fyrer motgang
ok efterlæti/ kemr me^ ogn ok fyrerheitum.^ pa
er Drottinn kemr ok vitjar hans, ]?á er hann dvelst 10
á gisting, rettlæter hann ; kemr hann ok ferr, at
hugskotit kenne sig J?ar fyrer ok lítilætist því meir,
at eingi er önnur ^ gjöf enn af guSligri mildi efter
sjálfs hans vild. Bondi j^essarar Sunamitis er
skynsamligr skilningr í brjósti mannsins til J?ess skip- 15
a^r at stjorna, leiöa ok hagræSa sálina til frjósemd-
ar andligs avaxtar J^essum sinum stjornara, tjar
sinne sal, er oftliga '^ vitjast af vorum Herra, at
þau bæ^i samt fái ]?eim heilaga manni litit herbergi
til meiri navistu. Sannliga er Jesus Kristr heilagr 20
heilagra, ]?vi at an honum er engi ma^r heilagr vor^-
inn. Yel sag^i Sunamitis, at hús Helisei skal litit
vera, þvi at ekki hjarta uppreists metna^ar hæ^
herberger i honum, heldr hvilist hann gjarnan i
lægiS ok litileik. Setjum^ nú Súnamitem þessa fyrer 25
sal bins signa^a Thome, at vær sjáum því betr,
hversu samþykkist sannleikr ok figura. Ljost er
lesanda manni, at sannr Heliseus vitja'Si mörgum^
háttum hans blezaöa lif Vitja'Sist hann fyrer hjart-
teign, ]7á er signup Gu^s mo^er sende honum byskups- 30
^ optliga, T.
2 tnanrgum, T.
3 annligrar, T.
-1 myyt, T.
^ epterlceii, T.
fyrerheitvm, T.
Professor
Unger puts a comma after fyrer-
heituni; but a full stop is neces-
sary, to show that there the dis-
course on the external visitations
comes to an end, while by the
words p« er Droltinii, &c., the
writer turns to inward visitations
of Divine Grace.
7 aunnr, T.
^ So Prof. Unger ; sictivm, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 2;jl
from the devil's captivity. Elisha would often go and
visit this Shunammite ; that is to signify, that our Lord
Cometh by a manifold manner of spiritual visitation
unto the soul of a Christian. First he setteth forth unto
her His handiwork in the creation, in order that she
may thereby understand what honour is due to the
Creator ; then he visiteth her through miracles and holy
writ ; visiteth her in the preaching of his command-
ments through the heart being softened by the insph-a-
tion of the Holy Ghost ; visiteth her through tribulation
and prosperity ; visitetli her with threats and promises.
When the Lord cometh and visiteth her so as to tarry
a guest with her, then he justifieth her. But when on
coming He at once departeth, he doeth so in order that
the spirit may thereby the rather realize its condition, and
may the more humbly perceive, that there be no gift but
what cometh from Divine grace according to God's own
will. The husband of the Shunammite signifieth rea-
sonable understanding in the breast of man, which is
set to rule, guide, and dispose the soul for a fertile yield
of spiritual fruit unto this her governor ; and counselleth
his soul, being often visited by our Lord, that they both
together should make for that holy man a little chamber,
that he may the longer tarry with them. Verily, Jesus
Christ is the Holy one of all the holy, for without him
no man hath become holy. Well spoke the Shunammite
in saying that the chamber of Elisha should be a little
one, for no heart elated by the haughtiness of pride
may receive him as guest, for he dwelleth rather in
lowness and humility.
Let us now set this Shunammite in lieu of the soul
of the blessed Thomas, that we may the more clearly
perceive, how truth and similitude agree between them.
Now it must be clear to any man reading thereof, that
the true Elisha visited him in many a wise throughout
his blessed life. He visited him in the miracle when the
blessed mother of God sent him the bishop's robes in
232 THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
skru^ann í Paris, sem fyr var lesit. Kom ok sami
Heliseus fyrer heilaga ritning,^ ]7vi at su blezuS sála
greiddist svo nogiiga letrligum skilning, sem lesit var,
at hann for yfer vii. lister liberales. Yitja^ist bans ^
her ^ raeS fyrer upptendran ok au^mýkt hjartans, 5
því at hann finnst alia götu '^ verit hafa J?at mjukasta
]if, er GuS Jeitar meS tarligri góSfýst. Vitjaör var
liann af vorum Herra fyrer motgang ^ ok bliSu, sem
lieyrist í liaus lifsögu^ i^ijog frábært, livort i sinne
grein. pessi virSulig sala svo vitju^ af Gu^i minnti 10
a sina skynsemd at smiSa vorum Heliseo litit her-
bero'i. Sannlio-a fekk ^ beilasfr Thomas Græ^ara vorum
o o o
litit bus fyrer sinn brjosti, "pa er hann bjo honum til
návistar lága samvizku me^ sönnu^ iítilæti. Hj^gg
at, bvat satt er, at ]?á er bann var kannzelier alia 15
vega gæddr heimsins blíbu, lá bann frammfallinn ^ á
náttarj?eli fyrer Gu^s mnstere. Sé ^^ "þessu næst, hversu
liaDn setti sæliim Helíseo :Qóra bluti til ná^ar, sæng
ok bor'S, sæti ok kertisstiku. Sæng er sofanda manns.
pessa sæng veitti signa'Sr Thomas sínum Græ^ara, því 20
at allan^^ lifsveg hér á jörSu byrg^i^- hann bæ^i
augTin frá J^eire girnd, er fiesta feller, sem er kvenna
návist. Hversii prófa^ist ]7etta mál, þá er búsbóndinn
gruna^i bann, sem bann var kanziler, utan svo at
lifna^r bans var hreinn fyrer Gubi, er bann lá-^^ framm- 25
fallinn ^ á berre^^ jorS ok sofna^r efter-^^ knéfölP^ ok
1 ritiunyh, T. I ^ saunnri, T
' So T. correctly, although the ' ^ framfalliim, T
construction is unusual ; Professor
Unger, possibly led by Vitiadr var
hcnui'm the next sentence, proposes
to read hav7i.
^ hier, T.
-^ gautv, T.
5 77)othga7ig, T.
c Hfsaiigu, T.
^ ýeck, T.
Í0 Sie, T.
" or/Zaw?/, T.
^- So Prof. Unger ; h/rdi, T.
'3 er ha7i7i added by Prof.
Unger.
14 So Prof. Unger ; hœre, T.
'•' epter, T.
1*5 knefaull, T,
THE STOEY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 233
Paris, of which we have read before. That same Elisha
also manifested himself to him through holy writ ; for
that blessed soul gaiued so plentifully understanding in
letters, according to what was read before, that he mas-
tered the seven liberal arts. Therewithal He manifested
Himself in the enkindling and the humility of his heart,
for his is found throughout to have been the sweetest
life, seeking God in tearful devotion. He was visited by
our Lord through distress and prosperity, of either of
which in its turn marvellous things have been read in
the story of his life. This worthy soul, thus visited by
God, called upon her Reason to make a little chamber
for their Elisha. And verily the holy Thomas furnished
our Healer with a little chamber in his breast whenas
he prepared a lowly conscience in true humility for His
dwelling-place. Give heed unto that which is the truth,
that when he was chancellor, in every way blessed with
worldly prosperity, he lay prostrate before God's temple.
Behold, then ao-aio, how he set forth four fchinors for the
comfort of Elisha : a bed, a board, a stool, and a candle-
stick. A bed is for him that sleepeth. With this bed
the blessed Thomas furnished his Healer ; for all through
his life's path here on earth he covered both his eyes
against the temptation, which bringeth most men to fall,
the company of women, to wit. How was this matter
proven whenas the hostler misdoubted him, when he
was chancellor ? how ? but in such a way, that his life
was found pure before God, while he lay prostrate on
the bare earth, having fallen asleep after long kneeling
234 THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
bæner. Gakk he^an-^ framm ^ tii synar, hversu hann
reisti bor^it ok bjo sætit vorum Herra, þann tíma
sem hann var erkibyskup vor^inn. BorS í þessum
staS er beilug ritning )?vi at hún flytr gu^hræddum
klerk rikar ok fagTar sendingar, er svo heita, historia, 5
allegoria, tropologia, duo testamenta. Minniligfc ma
vera, hversu Thomas erkibyskup elska'Si J?etta bor^
Gu^i til lofs, á me^an hann matti meS friÖi sitja, þá
er hann vakti ^ longum ^ natta me^ heilagri stiideran,
si^an at hann haf^i a^r kropit at fotum fátækra 10
me^ tar ok trega. Bjo hann ok sætit Jesú Kristó,
■því at ^ þann ilm, er hann herberg^i af gu^ligii ritning,
tjá^e hann sinne hjörS me^ sætri ok signaSri kenning.
Ok ]?ví merker sæti predicanar embætti, at sá sem
a^ra lærer, skal líkjast sitjanda manni, lær^r fjaer 15
Gu^s angliti án alhi bæ^ ok hégómadýr^.^ Enn
hvat munum vær tala af ]7eiri kertisstiku, er hann
bjó blezuSum Heliseo, utan þat helzt, at hennar
form ]?jónar ölhi ^ hans lífi, ok einkannliga síSan
þyngdi meö þeim Heinreki konungi. pat er merki- 20
ligast form á því smíSi, at kertisstika haíi þrjá
samhka fætr, ok jafnlangt í milhmi aUra ; af mi^ri
understö^u ^ þeira fóta skal leggrinn rísa réttr ok
óhaUr allan ^ veg upp under bringuna, er læser
leggþáttinn, J^a^an upp úr mi^ju geingr 'sá broddr, 25
er á stendr siálft kertit me'S brennanda log. pessi er
glósa. prír samlíkir fætr merkja vorn Herra Fö^ur ^^
ok Son ok Heilagan Anda, einnar ok sannrar under-
stö^u/^ því at gudómlig gæzka er ^^ grundvöllr ok
uppheldi allra gó^ra hluta. Af svo dýrmætri under- 30
hiedan, T.
- fram, T.
^ uagliy T.
^ laungum, T.
^ After at T. adds i.
^ hiegomadi/rd, T.
7 aullu, T.
^ understauda, T.
9 allann, T.
ío faxidr, T.
^^ vnderstaudu, T.
'2 So Prof. Unger ; ok, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 235
and prayers. Proceed then unto the vision that showetli,
how he set up the table and furnished the stool for our
Lord at the time, when he had become archbishop. The
table in this case signiiieth holy writ, which setteth forth
for a God-fearing clerk rich and fair gifts, such ais are
called historia, allegoria, tropologia, duo testamenta. It
must indeed be memorable, how archbishop Thomas
loved this table for the glory of God, while he might sit
thereat in peace, watching as he was wont to do through
the night in holy study, having first knelt adown at the
feet of the poor in tears and contrition of heart. He
also fitted the stool for Jesus Christ, for the fragrance
which he stored up from godly writ he imparted to his
flock in a sweet and salutary teaching. And therefore
the stool betokeneth the ojffice of teaching, because that
he who instructeth others is to be likened unto a sittinof
man, learned before the face of God, yet without pre-
sumption or vain glory.
As to the candlestick which he (the husband of the Shu-
nammite) furnished for the blessed Elisha, what else can
we say about it than that itsform betokeneth his (Thomas')
whole life, and that especially after the time when matters
grew heavy with him and the king. The thing chiefly to
be noted in that work of craft is that a candlestick shall
have three legs all alike, and with even distance between
each. From the middle iointure of these leo's the shaft
riseth straight and inclining no whither all the way up to
the brim, which bindeth the shaft above together. Thence
riseth from the centre the spike whereon the very candle
is stuck with a burning light. And this is the interpre-
tation. Three legs, all alike, signify our Lord, Father,
Son, and Holy Ghost, in one and true foundation, for
divine goodness is the foundation and su})port of all
good things. Out of the very midst of such a glorious
28G
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
sto'Su ^ reistist í mi^ju lif ok frammfer^i ^ heilags
Thome erkibyskups svo rett ok röksamligt,^ at
eingin oga e^r illska matti honum vikja fra lettri
refill p*u^lio;ra setnino-a, siSan Imoo-D- ^ um sinn
11] eS sælum Petri postula. Ok ]?vi svo, at þröng^o
harblífis kringla læsti ^ alia hans lífsþáttii meS ];eiri
áhyggju hjartans, at ]>at er hann byrja^i meS
vandlæti " laganna, skyldi hann utlei^a me^
æskiligum® enda. Af ]>eiri ^hyggju*^ leiddi ):'at
smásmao[lio-a, at livorki var^ hann blekktr um 10
aldr si San fyrer blitt ne stritt, sem );á prófa^ist í
Frannz, er sléttmæloi Heinreks koniinos leiddi svo til
missýnis Frakka konnng sem a^ra höf^ingja/^ iitan
]?essi einii ö^rum ^^ skygnare stó'S óblekktr í siinii
náttúrusta^festi, pví at lifanda Ijós brann jfer þessa 15
kertastiku. Lysanda kerti merker vorn Herra
Jesúm Kristum, eina persónu í tvennre náttúru.
Loof merker hans sfii^dóm, enn vax manndóminn.
Kirkja í Kantúaría geingr framm ^- me^ vætti, at
glósa þessi er falslaus, ]7ví at hit himneska ]jós, GræSari 20
vor Jesús Kristr, sannr GuS ok sannr maSr, hvílist í
ídgna^i sinnar dýrSar yfer þat réttlæti ok staSfesti,
harSlííi ok smásmygli, er bleza^r faSer Thomas erki-
byskiip fórnfærí^i honum me'S píslarsigTÍ, sem sjálfr
Græöari vor greiner í ]7essiim oi-^um : " Sá er mér ^^ 25
" líkist," sag^i hann, " geingr eigi í myrkrum, heldr
" mun hann birte ö"Slast ^^ eilífs fagna^ar." Nú
svo sem heilaojr Thomas öSlast'^* vir'Sulioja M ritnino-
at fylgja Gu^s Syni meS göfugligum^^lifna^i, svo veitti
' vnderstaudu, T.
- framfcrdi, T.
3 So Prof. Unger ; raugsamligt,
^ So Prof. Unger ; huaugg, T.
^ þrau?ig, T.
6 So Prof. Uuger ; lcBsta, T.
7 vanjilcpti, T.
T.
So Prof. Unger ; œskuUgum,
^ So Prof. Unger ; aaheygiu, T.
^^ haufdingia, T.
^^ audruni, T.
12 /ram, T.
13 mier, T.
'^ audlazt, T.
1^ gaufuglignmy T,
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 237
foundation rose the life and conversation of the holy
archbishop Thomas, so straight, and so full of authority,
that no threats or wickedness might turn him from the
straio'ht rule of divine sentences, after haviuof once
stumbled with the blessed apostle Peter. All this for the
very reason, that a tightly drawn encasement of ascetic
living enclosed with such an anxious care in his heart
all the strands that made the thread of his life, that
whatsoever he began in the zeal of the law, that he
must carry out to the desired end. From this anxious
care it followed strictly that never afterwards in his life
was he betrayed by soft means or hard, as was proven in
France, when the smooth language of king Henry so
misguided the sight of the king of the French, as well as
that of all other lords there, this one, more clear-sighted
than the rest, stood undeceived in his natural steadfast-
ness ; even so, because a living light was burning on
this candlestick. A lighted candle also signifieth our
Lord Jesus Christ, one person in two essences. The
light signifieth his Godhead, the wax his Manhood. The
church of Canterbury standeth forth a witness to this
interpretation being faultless, for the heavenly light, our
Healer Jesus Christ, very God and very man, abideth in
his glory rejoicing at the justice and steadiiistness,
chastisement and exactitude which the blessed father
archbishop Thomas offered him in the victory of his
passion, as our Saviour himself witnesseth in these words :
" He that followeth me," said He, " shall not walk in
" darkness, but shall have the light of eternal joy."
Now even as on holy Thomas is worthily fulfilled tiie
scripture that he followeth the Son of God in a noble
238 THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS. •
Drottinu honum háleitan hei^r þar í móti, sem hep'S-
ist Í sögumie,^ at )?eira lofsamlig pina samlikist í
mörgu - lagi, ok því líti lær^er menn til þessa háleita
lierra Thómam erkibyskups la^andi bans efterdæmi^
sér ^ til andlegrar ombunar ^ Die's loo^lioT.'! ^ frammferS ^ 5
heila9:rar roksemdar,^ sérbverer^ ok aller samt tilæsk-
ingai^^Tier beilagi-ar kristni luti þessum bimna-
konungsins ástvin, því at svo sem bann þre^^tti allt til
pislar fyi'er kirkjunnar frelsi, svo mun bann \41jugr
ok myskunnsamr ok mjiikr at bjálpa bennar lögligu^^lO
aíkvæmi. Xú sá góSi kristinn maSr, sem minnast
YÍll þessa pislarvotts, þótt eigi se-*^^ oftar^- enn iirr
sinn í sjö náttiim, vite )?at efalaust, at þriSja dag í
viku befer Drottiiin bonum skipat til einkannlegTar
tignar, sein Ijósara verSr í fylgjandi klausii.-^^ priSi 15
dagr viku var síSastr )7Íngs í NorSantún, ]?á er
bo^inn for bæst me'S eldi ofsóknar í rnót^^ bonum
framm ^^ under flóttann. pann sama vikudag gekk
bann i baf út ^^ af Sandvik, at forSa lífi sínu til
útlegSar,^" at kirkjunnar sök ^^ yi-Si )?ví kunnari 20
lærdóm kristninnar. A JniSja dag let bann út^^ af
Flaundr beim til E norlands ^^ efter-^ friS formeraSan
í milium bans ok Heinreks konungs, ok á sama
vikudag efter^^ einn mánuS liSinn fell bann fi'amm^^
í berbuS bimnakonungs réttlætis vöndr ok ' veraldar 25
Ijós, kirkjunnar afl ok elska lýSsins, ok ágætr vemd-
ari sinnar lijai-Sar, árnandi öllum -^ líknar, er bans
^ sauguniie, T.
- mavrgv, T.
^ epterdœrni, T.
4 sier, T.
^ aumhunar, T.
^ laugligri, T.
' framferd, T.
^ rauksemdar, T.
^ sierhierer, T.
10 laugligu, T.
11 sie, T.
- optar, T.
3 klavsv, T.
^ moth, T.
fram, T.
6 fí/í, T.
' vthlegdar, T.
5 sa?/^, T.
^ Einglandz, T.
=0 epíer, T.
21 ay//y»?, T.
THE STORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 230
manner of life, even so the Lord granted him an exalted
honour in reward therefor, as was heard in the story,
which showed that their laudable passion bore resem-
blance in many ways. Let, therefore, learned men look
unto this exalted lord archbishop Thomas, following his
example, that they may have a spiritual reward, by law*
fully maintaining holy authority. Let each one and all
together, who are the adopted sons of holy church, bow
to this beloved friend of the King of heaven, for as he
struggled unto his very passion for the freedom of the
church, even so shall he be willing, and merciful and
ready to help her lawful offspring.
Let now any good Christian, who desireth to remember
this martyr, even if not oftener than once in seven nights,
know without doubt, that the Lord hath ordained tlie
third day of the week for his especial worship, which
will be still more clear from the folio wino- clause. The
third day of the week was the last of the council of
Northampton, when the surf of the fire of persecution
rose highest against him, forcing hira to take to flight.
On that same day of the week he put to sea away from
Sandwich to save his life in exile, in order that the
cause of the church should be the better kno^vn unto the
learned community of the church. On the third day of
the week he departed from Flanders and went home to
England, peace having been formulated between him
and king Henry. And on the same day of the week
after tlie lapse of one month he fell prostrate to earth in
the tabernacle of the King of heaven, the wand of right-
eousness and the light of the world, the strength of the
church, and the love of the people, and an excellent
defender of his flock, interceding for mercy unto all who
240
THOMAS SAGA ERKIBYSKUPS.
dyrkan ^ frægj a me^ aíláti annniarka'- ok efterleitan "^
GuSs myskunnar. Bi^jum nu aller samt þennann
valinn ástvin almáttigs Gu"Ss, at fyrer Jau meinlæti,
er bann bar a sinum likam fyrer ast himnarikis,
árne haiin oss hvildar í öSru * lííi, at vær forSumst 5
)?au mein ok myrkr, er omilder ]?ola, enn ö^lumst^
at lifa me^ p>eim, er^ oss leysti fra eilifri kvöl ok
leiddi fyrer sitt banabló^ til andlegra ok himneskra
fagnaSa. peim Græ'Sara vorum Jesú Kristó sé lof ok
áyr& me^ GuSi feSr í eining Heilags Anda um 10
eilifar akler veralda. Amen.
1 dyrckann, T.
^ So Prof. linger ; ok anrrmarcki,
^ epierleitau, T.
•* audrv, T.
5 audlumzt, T.
^ er added by Prof, Unger.
^ sie, T.
THE RTORY OF ARCHBISHOP THOMAS. 241
glorify his worship in desisting from evil and striving
after God's mercy. Let us now all together pray this
well-beloved elect of almighty God, that by the hurts he
bore on his body for his love of the kingdom of heaven,
he may procure for us rest in the life to come, and that
we may eschew the torture and darkness which the
wicked must endure, but may obtain the favour of living
in company with Him who delivered us from eternal
pain by the blood of his death unto spiritual and hea-
venly joy. Unto Him, our Saviour Jesus Christ, w^ith
God the Father, in the unity of the Holy Spirit, be praise
and glory through the world's everlasting ages. Amen.
K 5 n ,
APPENDICES.
<? 2
245
APPENDIX I.
Fragments of Thomas Saga.
Of the recension, which the present text of Thomas
Saga follows, there exist, in Cod. No. 6G2a, quarto, in
the Arna-Magnæan collection of MSS. in the library
of the University of Copenhagen, three fragments of
three different membranæ, two of which we have quoted
already as A. and B. (Thom. Saga, Vol. i., p. 262, note 5,
and p. 264, note 8), the third of which we here call C.
In the same collection of MSS. is also found, in Cod.
No. 234, a fragment of amembrana in foL, containing an
earlier recension of the Saga, which we call E, Of this
recension there also exists a small fragmen b of a mem-
brana in a very mutilated state, in the Record Office of
Norway, which we call D. But for these two fragments
this interesting recension of the Saga is not known to
exist any more. All these fragments we subjoin as they
now exist, giving in each case an exact reference to the
page in the Saga to wliich they correspond.
Fragment B. is here printed in extenso, so far as it can
be read, now for the first time.
Fragment A.
Of this fragment only the upper part of one leaf is left ; it
represents a codex in quarto with the lines written right across
the page. On the recto of this fragment 22 lines arc left standing,
on the verso 23. The handwriting is fine, has an antique appear-
ance, and is, according to Prof. Unger, not later than the first
half of the 14th century.
Recto (Thom. Saga i., p. 262,2 — 264,i.j). sem mesta
frægd suo fyrir herra pafanum sem Fracka konungi
246 APPENDIX í,
ok audru stormenni hvar er |?eii' koma. giorir hann
ser })aa liking sem hann vili laughin giarna geyma, at
allr uarnadr ok elfrnir Kantuariensis kirkiu skulu
standa med fullri naad ok írelí>i. suo sem Thomas
erkibyskup setti þat allt samann undir vernd sinnar 5
appellacionis til heilagrar Roma kirkiu ok herra paf-
ajis. Medr )>essuin bodskap giofaz iiogurra iiegna þeir
rennarar um rikit. at j^ar til sendiboj^ar koma heim
af kuria. skal allt kyrt nera. Enn ]}ann tima er sendi-
boþar eru albunir medr miklum metnadi. rada J^eir 10
i uegh, ok... nægra silfr enn sannendi. meiia gull en
p'ann er ]>uilikum persouum til heyrdi. pær pre-
sentur sem þeir bera Died ser af konungsins halfu. eru
eigi smaaleitar. j^uiat uel er kunnigt. huerssu sialfr
herra paiiiin er nu fee|?urfi sakir j^ess ufridar er honum 1 5
ueitiz af unadum. Suo er ok bans romuersku radi
þat hugat af Heiureki konungi. at þeir muni meirr
h3^ggia at presentum en^rettendum. ok suo muni þeim
synaz malaefni sem feegiafir dickta fyrir þeira briosti.
Suo sækia þeir sina ferd med miklum pris. J?ar til j^eir 20
koma sudr at sio. ok ]?a saumu nott sem Thomas
erkibyskup tok a litlum bati ut af Englandi ok feck
bliduidri. fingu þessir a storu skipi suo mikit uos bædi
storms ok ofsæfis at þeim hellt uid haska. Sem þeir
eru komnir i Flandr. hallda )7eir J^egar fram a uegh. 25
ok þann sama dagh at apni. sem Thomas erkibyskup
hafdi farid adr um morginin af klaustri heilags Audo-
mari. koma l?eir i stadinn ok eru þar um nott. (»k ];o
leyniz fyrir );eim huar erkibyskupinn ferr. A næsta
morgin TÍda þeir ok sækia upp i Franz. Yerdr heil- 30
agi' Thomas erkibyskup sannligha uiss af J^eira ferdum
ok giorir, sem hann uar uanr med mikilli uiz.sku sin
rad ok utueghu aa panu haat. at bann sendir meistara
Herbert ok enn annan sinn klerck uitran mann at
slaz i fauruneyti med sendibodum konungsins uuit- 35
undum at ])eiv.
APPENDIX I. 247
Vei-so (ib., L, p. 266, ^^— 268, ^^). En er Heinreks
konungs senndibodar heyra þuiliut andsuar. er engi
þeirra suo liardr at uernda kyoni þat er bann sagdi.
faa )7eir ok engaan orskurd af Laiidue konungi þann er
5 þeir iiieghi beja sinum herra. ok þui taka þeir lliott
orlof. ok giora sinii uegb iiarn tii Sennonis borgar.
enn eftir );eirra biottterd af Kompin koma |?ar iiæsta
dagh sendiboþar Thome erkibyskups. );eir bei}7az eiuk-
anligha at Hnna konungiun. þiiiat )?eir hafua bref
10 erkibyskups til bans, i bueriu bann kynnir konuDginiim
sina utlegd biþiandi fridland i bans riki fyrir guds
skylld. peir faa lliott orlof Jmiat Frakka konangr
tekr ];eim med sannri blidu. einkanligba (i) þann
pungt sem ]?eir bera bonum quediu erkibyskups. þuiat
15 bonum bafdi Tbomas allan tima hugþekkr uerit. af fysta
er bann uai'd Heinreks konnngs kanceler. fyrir þaa
dygd ok mikilmennzsku er bann neitti sinum berra
med beilum radum lettrar skynsemdar. en sakir ]?ess
at Frakka konungi eru j^essir menn ukuonir. sem nu
20 standa fyrir bonum. spyr bann suo fallit. eiu þit af
Leimamonrium Tbome erkibyskups. þeir segia suo uera.
Konungrinn tekr þaa bæuerskliga moti J7eim baþiim.
ok minniz til þeira. Siþan tekr Herbert til frasagn-
ar greinandi )7aa mædu. er Thomas erkibyskup bafdi
25 J^olt a sio ok a lanndi si)mn bann for brot af Nor);-
anthun. nemv bann ok koriunííinum hueriar mein-
giorjnr ok afarkosti bann feck adr bann fordajn seer
med ilotta. En er Lauduer konuugr heyrir suo barm-
anuliiiha rædu. taraz bauii medr heilaori sampiuiniiliu.
30 Silvan segir bann þeim iiiuirj^uligba. bvad Heinrtkr
konungr bafdi skrifiiat til bans aa skada erkibysku[)s.
ok buerssu bann bafdi suarat. ok eun talar haiin.
Heinreki konungi sagdi barm, hefdi nytsamligt uerit
a J^essarri tid at bugleida bv^at Dauid setr suo reit-
35 skyrtt i spalminum, at su reidi er ein abyrg)>arlaus
fyrir <iudi. sem ei snaraz i ueirn bans biuijjmali. ok ei
riss med ibrgirnd. heUdr af Ijarmi laugbrotzins. Her
248 APPENDIX I.
til suarar Herberth me(i)stan. Minn herra sagdi hann.
);essar rittningar myndi konungrinn giarna gey rat
hafua ef hann yndi ser iamuel i kirkiunni sem þer
]7a er þuilikt uerdr sungit. Konungrinn brosir at ord-
um hans. Brytr nu. 5
Fragment B.
This fragment also represents a quarto codex, of which the lines
ran right across the page, 36 a page. Professor linger takes it
to be of the same age as A. Of this codex there are extant only
three leaves, the two first cohering. All that now can be read of
the almost effaced wiiting on the first leaf is printed below, the
orthographic and other peculiarities of codex being carefully
maintained. Of the upper right-hand corner of the first leaf
a snip has been torn, leaving the first six lines of both pages
only half What now cannot be read has been filled out from
the text of the Saga in smaller type,
1st leaf, recto ib., L, p. 264, s — 268,22.
uiss af þeira ferdiim ok gerir sem hann uar uanr
me'S mykilli vizku sin ráö ok iitvegu á ]?ann hátt, at hann
sendir meistara herbert ok enn annan sinn klerk uitr-
an mann at slást í föruneyti með sendiboðum konungsins 10
iivitöndum, at peir megi öll J'eirra rað ok frammfer^i fví
smásmuglegar skilja, sem peir fylgja fastara- Sua fara þeir
eptir sem hinir fara undan ok hafa dagliga vissu af,
hvat J)eim líðr. Er nú ekki fyrr at segia af sendebodvm
heinreks konungs • en þeir konia í ]>ann stað er Kompin 15
heitii-. þar finna ]>eú' Hlöðvi fracka konung • ganga fyrir
hann ok kuedia • sem honum somdi, tjá honum síðan
bréf Heinreks konungs af Englandi, hvert uppbrotit hefir
likan skilning sem fýrr uar skrifat af filipp iarle at sá
tohmas • er fýr var cantuariensis erkibyskup hafi or hans 20
riki sua flját ok farit sem eínn suikari. Her med
stendr sua skrifat • at heínrekr konungr bidr hlavdue
konung • sua miukliga sem sinn herra • at hann lati
þann thomam huarki hafa fridland ne nockvra nad
ioUum franz. Sem hlauduir konungr hefir breíit yfir 25
lesit hitnar hann ihiarta sinu med gudligu uannleti •
ok lierdir sinn hug ijnoti ]>m orði heinreks • konungs •
APPENDIX I. 249
er hann kallar • thouiam • sinni semd aftignadan • ok im-
dir suikara nafii settan );uiat ferligt ord gerir optliga
stygd godvm manne • ]?uiat Salomon segir • at sa einn
(? meg)i uitr kallast er tempra kanu sina tiiDgu. Hlaudvir
5 konimgr talar ]?a • her stendr sua skrifat • at • thomas se
...legi sinum ^ heidr ok iialld(i ?) enn ver spyrivm ydr
hueiT þat matti med rettu gjöra at deponera hann.
pat er kuunigt at heinrekr er konuiigr ieingiandi ok
vær erum rettr konungi^ eigi síðr her i Franz, ok megiim
10 ver J)ó eigi ]?yí helldr aftigna ein minsta klerk j ollu
vara Riki • En er • heinreks • konungs sendibodar heyra
J^uilikt andsuar er einghe J^eira sua diarfr at vernda
kynni J'at, er hann sagði, fá |>eii' ok eingan orskord af
hlavdve konunge • ]?ann er J^eir megi bera sinum herRa •
15 ok pYL toku peii' fljótt orlof ok gera sinn veg framm til
senonis borgar • En eptir þeira brottferð af Kompin
koma J>ar næsta dag sendiboðar Thome Erchibyskups • ];eir
beida einkannliga at iinna konung, ]'vi at j'eh- hafa bréf
erkibyskups til bans i hverju hann kynir konungi sina
20 utlegd bidiandi fridlands í hans riki fyrir guds skjld
peir fa fliot orlof þuiat fracka konungr teki- l^eim uied
sanri blidu eiukanliga í j'anu punkt seni þeir bera honuni
kuediu • Erchibyskups • puiat honum hafði Thomas alia
tima hng]>ekki' verit, af fyrstu er hann varð Heinreks konungs
25 canceler • fyrir );a dygd ok trumenzku er hann veitti
sinum heiTa með heilum ráðum rettrar skynsemdar • Eun
sakir J>ess at fracka konungi eru J'essii- báðii- menu úkunn-
igir sem nu standa fyrir honum spyr hann sva fallit •
Eru ]>it af heima inönnum Thome erkibyskups? )>eii- segja
30 tívá vera. Xonungrinn teki* J>a heuerskliga móti J>eim báÖum
ok minnist til ])eira. Sitian teki* hann Herbert til frásagnar
greind (greinandi ?) þa niedu er Thomas erkibyskup hafÖi
]?olt a sjó ok la7\di, síðan hann for brutt af Norðantún ;
segir hann konung(in)um hueriar ineingeröir ok afar-
35 kosti hann fekk, áðr emi hann forðaÖi ser með flótta. Enu
er hlavduir konungr heyrir sua liorinuliga ræðu tárast
hann me(S heilagri sampining • Sidau segir hann )>eini
innviriSuliga huat heinrekr konungr hafM skrifat til hans af
250 APPENDIX I.
skaíia erkibyskups ok Imevsu haiin suaradi • ok enn talar
hann. beinreki konungi hefði nytsamligt verit á þessi tid at
huo-leida huat Davíð setr sva rett t^kyrt í sálminum at sú
reiði er ein abyrg^ai'l^^is fyrir Guði, sem eigi snarast i gegn
haus lögmáli ok eigi riss með yfirgirnd lielldr af harmi 5
lögbrotsins. Her med til suarar meistari Herbert: "Minn
" herra," sagði hann, " J^essarrar ritningar.
I leaf verso: ib., T., p. 268,22_274,io.
mundi konuugrinn gjarna geymt bafa, ef hanu ynndi ser
iafnuel i kirkunni sem ]?er j^aer þuilikt verðr suugit. 10
KonungTÍun brosir at orðum haus . Brytr upp jiessu nest
bref Tbome' Eicbibyskups • er stendr med þeiii
beiðslu, isem áðr var sagt, ok ]'ó svarar kouungr eingu
)>ar til at siuni. El'u sendlbodar a konungs gaiði um
nóttiua í'rjáklega reikuaðir, bæði með blíðu ok godum 15
kosti • En um moigiuinii tímanlega kallar konungr-
inn sitt ráð, biitandi J>eini bréf ok beizlu Ercbibyskups •
Geingr ]?at íliott, ]'ví at allir stauda með, at l'at hafi góðau
enda. Eru ]>\i uæst seudiboðar iuukallaðii'. Konungrinu
talaði siio til þeira. herra Thomas heíir skriíat til uar sua 20
fallin ord • at ver muiium gefa honiiui fridland í váiu
ríki (feemr) ver uilium ok giarna gera • jmiat kruou
fracka konvings befir )?at leingi fylgt • at útlægja eigi
saklausa belidr bialpa þeim sem utlegdir iierda fyrir
uaudlgti guds bodorda • þeir þacka boiium hæverskliga 25
af lialfii Ercbibyskups • taka sidan orlof ok bafa sik
fram i veg til Sennonis sem berra Thomas bafde bodit
þeim.
SEm sendibodar beinreks koimugs koma degi fyrr med
rikdom ok presentum fram i pafagaið, enu íátækir seudi- 30
menu Thóme erkibyskups, ýta j'eir pegar bæði ilutnÍFig ok
fiarlut vid cardinales ser til fylgis. uar J^ar sua skip-
at sem battr er heimsins at menn eru mislikir adrir
tapa réttvísi ok fylgia femunum aðrir ottaz gud ok
sinna laugunum adrir segia heinRek konung í Euglandi 35
barðla réttvísan ok stiornsaman en Thomas Ercbibyskup
framgiarnan ok forzugan . adrir mæla j^uers í móti . segia
Ercbibyskup framstanda med guds retti ok sem hann
APPENDIX I. 251
sor i sinni uigslu ok ])m kalla þeir skyldugt, at hin
romuerska modii- styrki liann i laugligri framterd • en
beriz eigi moti þeim, er him á at efla til allra godra
liluta. Vel ma sua kalla at cardinales t>-eno-i með
5 pretum í tua staði, p\i at sumir ruglast af agirnd sumir
af otta fyi-ir pafans bond edr sina. ef Heinrekr konimor
hefir eigi fullnad allra siuna mala • ok J?ui uilia J'eir
bat ekki heyra, sem erkibyskupeins malum er tii o-reida
ok eigi uilia J^eir mmua^t til bans sendiboda er þeir
10 koma a garðinn. fat angrar miok J?akumpána þuiat j?eir
skilia vel at slikir eiu uinir beinReks konunos enu
ofundarmeuu Erkibyskups. po flytr sua di'ottin þeira
mal at' ]?eir fátækii' fa fyrr oilof sama dags simiar ]?ar-
kuamu inn fyrir beria pafanu. Enn byskupar fulhikir
15 at fe. Enn er þeir koma iim kueðja þeir uu'duliora
sem uert er postoligan berra. Bera bonum ]?ar næst
aaðmjukliga kuediu síus Yirðuligs faudur Tbome erki-
byskups. peir segiaz fyrir fa sank j^ar komnir at
kynna berra pafanum. Jivat erkibyskupi líðr. Byi-ja j'eir
20 ]?ar, með orlofi berra pafans j fvrstu, hversu Thomas erki-
byskup var ofsotti' j Norðantim af beinReki konungi ok
bans stormenni • Her n^st • buersu bann Ibrdadi ser
með leýniligum flótta, sidan bueria farleingd ok uegbar
vás er bann bar lanz ok lagar alt framm i klaustr saucti
25 bertini. Enn er alexander • paíi • bafdi beyrt ledu
)?essa kemst hann við ok klauck af huggæði, enn talar
sidann. Thomas Erkibyskup segir bann litir eDn j
licamanura ok ])0 krunaz haiin j'egar meS píslarvættis
fegrd í andanum • sua segir bann blessadr ok gefr
30 sendibodum erkibyskups blitt orlof meft postoligri blezsan
til sins herbergis. Enn )?egar a uesta morgin sem cardina-
les era samtt komiiir í consistorio berra patans • kallaz
)?angat sendibodar beiuReks konuDgs bedi byskupar ok
leikmenn. par koma ok sendibodar bins heilaga • tbome •
35 2nd leaf, recto, Thom. Saga, I., p. 274,i-— 280,j •
at peir megi beyra bvat geriz )^ot )>eir standi 1^'gia
ok tlyti færra. Sem kominn er til heyriligr timi
252 APPENDIX I.
stefnu )7essarrar • 8ynir enn Gillibert af lundun-
iim sina mykilmenzsku. puiat haiin stendr fyrstr
iipp ok tekr sua til erendis upp a personu herra
pafans. Heilagr fadir segir hann almennilig stiorn
heilagrar kristni uekr at ydr þeiri forsia yfir andligum 5
sonum ydriim • at )?eir er uel uilia ok styrkiaz med
yduari roksemd. ]?at gera sem þeir rett skilia. Ok ];eir
er rangt uilia se af páfaligu valdi sva hirtir, at ]?eir snarist
fra illu ok geri gott. Sa madr truiz eigi yduari uizsku
uel lika er ser truir einum ok eirigis manns rad uili 10
heýra • utan helklr gera allt med brede ok sinu ein-
redi berandi sundrlyndi milli uarr byskupanna • at hverr
hati annan, virða eingis ualld ok uilia konungs af eing-
landi • nema helldr leggia herradom bans sva udyi-t sem
als ecki. Sva veit vit sem ek kann segia 5'dr • at nyliga 15
hefir upp sprungit mikit missætti milli kirkiunar ok
konungs af einglandi er auðveldlega mundi legz hafa ef
goduili ok vizska hefdi um gengit meir með stilling enn
stridu • meir med radi enn rasandi forsi • Thomas Erki-
byskup eignaz J^ann lut at heyra eingis mannz rad • 20
eigi helldr uarr byskupanna enn annarra, ok pyi fær
hann med sinni framleypi ]>at, er hann fýsir, J>at er úná(5
ok margfalldr vroe • er styrlar fridsama menn • ]?uiat
hans akefd gefr eingv gaum eigi timunum, ei skynsemd,
heldr egnde hann os ok byskupunum J^er snaror at ef 25
uar uizska hefdi eigi skilt J»a saumu l>jálma myndi þessi
mal enn til uerri lykta le(i)tt hafa. Enn síðan ver
for(Sudumz hans umsatir sneri hann sinum Glep upp
a herra konunginn • at uanuirda sua allt hans ráö ok
riki. Her med úfregði hann oss bredr sina ok til þess 30
at hann metti bæí5i konunginum ok oss fyrirmæla uann
hann sua oheyrðan hlut at hann flýf5i sitt fostrland • fyrir
utan ogn ok afarkosti. í^ví má honum vel segiaz at flyia
(omildir ?) ]'ótt eingi bjóði (|?eim ?) af riki. Sem her er komit
eyrindi byskupsins • talar herra J^afinn ]?ýrm brodir 35
segir hann Gillibert svarar sannliga mvn ek ]?yrma
homim. [Herra paiimi segir eigi bidivm ver at ])ú
APPENDIX I. 25 o
þyrmir honum helldr sialfum ];er ^ vid );e.ssi ord sliofar
drottinn sua uit ok skilning byskupsins, at eigi gekk sidan
ord af bans munni. Enn bilarius byskiip tekr sidan til
mals er meira traust befir á sniolhim framburd e:lesi-
5 ligra orða enn á sannindum mætra skynsemda • bann segir
sua til berra páfans beidarligr fadir • segir bann. Ydari
bed ok heilagleik til beyrir aftr at kalla ok endi-bæta utan
alia duol til fridsamligrar farselldar ok réttrar uppreistar •
buat er kristni GuÖs ok almúganum verðr til atskilnadar
10 sem nu bafi þer beyrt af Lundúna byskupi vm hríö.
per megit eigi dissiinulera • ef eins mannz uanstilli sturlar
heilaga kristni meÖ dul ok drambuisi ok ]>ess kostar at
buerR bati annan Harmr er oss ];at tbomas Erkibyskup
hafnar hvers manns radum ok diktar svá meinliga utvegv
15 med sinu einrgdi at hann megi ser ok berra konunginum-
]?ar med lerdum ok leikfólki sem mestar vnaöir inn
bera. Enn slik framferd i kristni guds beyrir a engann
ueg sua mikils báttar personu ok ]>vi skilduz ];eir rett-
liga uit bans forz ok radleysi sem adr uoru bans vndir-
20 menn af skyldumm • Byskupinn talar sua snialla latinu •
sera buertt ord ueri skreytt ok þui þikir monnum sem
nockur veralldlig gledi • buersu listvliga hann þikiz sina
tolu greida. Hedann geriz sua at blatr mikill brestr
upp i berberginu þuiat menn bofdu leingi bundiz. Her
25 med leggr einn rikr madr byskupinum sua fallit ord •
Seint ok ilia komtu til bafnar • J þessu gerir gud
byskupinn sua þauglan sem bann bafi latit tun.
2nd leaf, verso, ib., I., p. 280, s , — 284,20.
gun a en
80 er Rodgeir ercbibyskup af Jork ser ]?at, bversu tueir
byskupar bafa farit, bugleidir bann med ser, at bonum
skal eigi sua takaz, at nokkur ueiti bonum blatr fyrir
sina uanstilli, belldr skal bann tempra sik med megni,
buat sem bonum byr i briosti. Hann bcfr sua sitt
mal til berra pafans : Verk ok uili Kantuariensis ercbi-
' The words from [ are written in the margin.
254 APPENDIX I.
byskups fra upphafi ero eingum kunnari en sialfum
mer, ok ]>m kann ek lysa, hver hans lund er, at þat
er hann liefir statt um sinn iiiun hann eigi auduelliga
um vennda, ok þui ma skilia, at J'at hugar hardende
hefir hann fett med laungvm vuana fyrir þa grein, at 5
hann profadiz iafnan madr sua pragiarn. pui ser ek
eigi likara utueg honum til hirtingar, en ydr skilning
ok skipan, heilagr fadir, leggi honum heillt ord med
hardri hende, sua at hann megi kenna sialfan sik.
Sem her er komit taalunni hviliz hann litla rid, en 10
leggr til ]?esse ord : " pat ueni ek," sagdi hann, " at þeim
" er undirstanda min ord ok uarn vanda Einglismanna,
" gnegiz vel J?ot eigi tali ek leingra/' Sem hann
fagnar, talar Bartholomeus sua til herra pafans :
" Heilagr fadir," segir hann, " j^etta mal |?arf eigi at 15
" draga monnum til medu med ordafiolda, J>uiat sua
" mykit efni gengr eigi til uegar, fyrr en Thomas
" erchibyskup er nerri. pui bidium ver j^luart ualld,
" at þer skipit j^a legatos af ydru seti, at ];essum
^' malauoxtum ueiti laugiigt prof, ok ydr flyti, sem 20
" fallit er." Eigi talar hann fleira. Vigornensis byskup
þagde a stefnu þesse, ok ma þaí truaz af godum uilia,
þuiat Thomas erchibysku}- uar uigslufadir hans, sem
fyr sagde. En þessu n^st stendr upp iarlinn Vilhialmr
af Arundinel, bidr orlofs at tala nockur (ord), ok )?ui 25
gefnu hefr hann sua sina r^du : " Heilagr fadir," segir
hann, '' huat er byskupar þesser hafa talat um stund
" er OSS med ollv lej^nt, er eigi (undir)staundum latinu,
" þui hefir oss eptir uaru uiti at gera kunnigt, til hvers
" ver erum sendir a yduarn fund af minvm herra 30
*' konunginum. Eigi er þat uart eyrende at efla J?retur
" edr meinmeli, einkannliga sizt fyrir sua ag^tum
'* herra, sem þer erut, huers bode ok banne oil kristnin
" hneigir ok allt iardriki hlydir, helldr enim ver
" komnir at bera ydr bref ok eyrende mins herra 35
" konungsins af Einglande birtande þann goduilia, er
" hann uenz at uenda til yduar ok enn uendir hann,
APPENDIX T. 255
" Enn fyrir hueria matti haiiii sina gæzsku ok gocluilia
" ydr kunnan gera nema uolldugazstu menn af sinuni
" lanndum? Hefdi hann þessum edri fuiidit, vere þeir
" giarna her komnir sakir yduarrar tignar. Vel er ok
5 " minDÍligt hvilikan ueg ok uirding minn herra koii-
" imgrinn ueitti ydr ok heilagri Roma kivkiu i iiigslu
" sinni, þa er hann setti sik ok allt sitt goz undir
" yduart ualld ok uilia, ok þat ma med sonnu segiaz
*' upp a mina tru, at herra konunginum i Einglande
10 " finnz eino'i ueralldar stiornari til fridaro-ezshi traust-
" tari ok til yduar godfusari. Sua er ok ei sidr
" Thomas erchibyskiip Kantuariensis uel iiordinn i
'* sinu uallde ok uitrleik, þuiat hann er skygn bede at
'* greina sik ok adra, ]?o at sumum syniz hann nockut
15 " forr ok framhuass. Ok ef p'esse sturlan veri eigi
" til uar inn komin, mundu lerdir ok leikmenn med
" fagnadi lifa undir godum konungi ok hinum bazsta
" erchib3^skupi. pui er su uar ben einkannlig til
*' yduar, heilagr fadir, at yduart ualld ok millde beri
20 " ];a forsio, at j^etta strid metti lida, en fridr formeraz
" ined fagnadi sannrar elsku." Jarlinn taladi sua
heidarliga upp a sina modurtungu, at margir lofudu
miok. Margt var talat a stefnu })eire, þuiat sendibodar
Heinreks konungs hofdu margan vtbriot, at bans uili
25 metti fullgeraz. Su er eiii J^eira umleitan, at herra
paiinn demi konunginn rettuisan i ollum skiptum J>eira
erohib3^skups, ok eigi er fegra, en þetta flytia med þeim
nockurir kardinales, er meirr elska presentur
3rd leaf. lb., I., p. 348;^!— 360,
i faustu ok lausa er )?eir attu, er nu landflemir hann.
30 Her med ero gvds eignir |;ui forligar ok fastara vndan
dregnar kirkiu, sem erchibyskup hafde bedit i sinu
brefi, at J^er skilldi med guds laugum aptr leggiaz.
pat saluga folk er vtlegdiz, sekir flest sudr um sio, ok
margir af þeim allt fram i Pontis a fund crchibyskups.
35 En þat ma godr madr hugleida, hversu )?at blezsada
256 APPENDIX I.
briost mnnde samharnia ]?eira sorg^ einkannliga fyrir
)?at, er hann sjmdiz verda sua sem þeira vtlegdar sauk
J?oat vuiliande, ok eigi ]?ui helldr uiknar hann i þessum
ofridar stormi, helldr stendr hann e ]mi sterkligar, sem
hann ei' til fallzsins meirr knuinn. Treystir hann nu 5
blezsadr a uini sina at gera nockurt rad fyrir ]?eim
fateka fiolda. Ok sua gengr nu med honum milldc
guds, at ollum þeim þiggr hann einhveriar hialpir i
ymissa stade. peir varo adrir af hans frendvm, at
helldr uilldv leita ser utuegha en kera fyrir honum, 10
ok þott ]?eir ryfi sina naudnngareida }>ar um, var þeim
þat lofligt af laugunum, finnz ok sua skrifat, at til
uarygdar leti herra pafinn leysa margan af ]?eim serum.
En er ];etta eymdarverk Heinreks konungs spurdiz um
laund, harma godir menu, hversu hans aufund studerar 15
framleidis at angra meinlausan erchibyskup ok nu adr
utleo-an. Sannliga er su uidfreo-d uolltin Heinreks
konungs, er herra Thomas ueik til nest i brefi sinu.
Fyr var tidrett um hans goduilld, framstaudu ok fylgi
med Romveria kristni ok retkiornum Alexandro pafa, 20
en nu risa malsemdir af hans vhlydni ok eidum med
sambande ];retumanna, þar med af hatri ok hermdum,
er hann efldi mot erchibyskupi, þuiat eigi syniz uitrvtn
monnvm sekiligt, )?o at herra Thomas byde • fyrir þa
sauk sitt ualld af haundum fyrir heiTa pafa, er hann 25
hafde leitz til vleyfdrar samþyktar med konunginum.
Ei virdiz ok sakvent, )?ott herra pafinn skipadi honum
aptr sinn heidr ok heila semd, ok heyrde þa kardinales
matuligha miok þar vm, er meirr elskudu framlog
Heinreks konungs en heilagrar kirkiu laugh. Nu 30
skilia uisir menu, sem verkin uatta, at slikar greinir
risa af grunni med konungsins hiarta, ok )?ui er sua
audsynt, sem saugunni lidr, at hann ferr § Hardnande
meirr ok meirr moti kirkiunni, þott adrir hofdingiar,
er motgang veittv kristninni, se nv komnir i nockurn 85
myktar anda, sem fremzstan ma til nefna Fridrek
keisara. Nu er vndir lok lidinn fiorde hans þretupafi,
APPENDIX I. 257
er þeir kaulludu Kalixtum. Geriz nu sua med miUde
gilds ok godra iwanna fortolvm, at keisarinn leggr af
illzskv l^eivi at taka pa fleiri ok snyr nu til fridar vid
Alexandrvm pafii. Yard su J?eira sett, sem segir ia
o kronicis, at keisarinn krossadiz til Jorslalandz med allt
sitt herfolk, )niiat þa uar nyliga vnnit Jorsala riki vndir
Saladin konuno; af Babilon fyrir bauluadan aorano- ok
vfrid heidinna ]noda. Ok sem fylliliga stendr i )?es.s
b attar letrvm. Her med snytz Griklandz konungr ok
10 Sikileyiar til settar uid herra pafann litlu sidar. Ok
þa er þuilikir lilutir heyraz, verdr oUvm ]nii liosara,
hverr hardydgismadr Heinrekr konungr i Einglaude
lieiir verit, at þa er adrir siaz vm ok betaz, verdr
hann af hordvm hardari ok af vandum verri.
15 Af hatri Englismaxxa vid frexdr Thomas.
Nu faonar lieiluo- Eomveria kirkia ok oil kristnin,
er herra pafinn ok keisarinn ero sattir, ok þui flygr
su frægd innan vm Franz, at eptir lofligum sid rom-
uerskra byskupa etlar herra Alexander pafi at venda
20 heira til sins aanduegis i Rom. Ok er )'at fregn hiun
signade Thomas erchibyskup, ferdaz hann fliotliga til
Sainnz ok fylgir herra pafanvm i veg fram til borgar
þeirar, er heitir Bitvrica. par tekr hann gott orlof
med blidri blezsan af herra pafanvm ok sn}^- aptr i
25 Pontiniacum. Yar J?esse skilnadr þeira sidazstr i )>essv
lifi, þuiat t^eir savz alldri sidan likamliga. En þat er
eigi gleymanda, hversu þeir skilduz merkliga, J^uiat
med nockurum hetti setti herra pafinn sik sialfan
eptir hia erchibyskupinum, )^ott hann snere heim til
30 Roms, ]?a er hann samlagade sina rauksemd erclii-
byskupsins uallde, at hann metti auruggr uegha guds
uuine med sverde bins heilaga Petri sua frialsliga, sem
hann hefde beggia þeira rad ok ualld i hcnnde. puiat
herra pafinn hafde nu feingit fulla raun, hvert ofrcili
35 Thomas erchibyskup tok ser i fang, Jniiat hann sialfr
K 541. 11
258 APPENDIX I.
hafde gort marga ordsending ok aminning til Eing-
landz bede lerdvm ok leikmonnum, sem hann sat i
Sainz, ok stod sem adr, vtan Lelldr þyngir, þuiat ler-
domrinn likiz nu konungsmoonum at draga iindir
sik kirkiu goz i Kanncia. Ma þar einkannliga til 5
nefna Jocelin af Sarisborg ok Joon bans decaii af
Oxenford. peir badir samt ballda vndir sik eina kirkiu-
eign bardla goda, er lytr undir stolinn i Kancia.
Heria pafinn bafde gort ]?eim badum aminning J?ar
vm sua frama at leggia embettit. ef l7eir bellde eignina. 10
En |?eir stodu sem adr bafande bede samt lord ok
emb^tti. Her med fregn beilagr Thomas sua mykit
hatr Einglismanna vpp a vtlegd frenda sinna, at iafnuel
skulu vskylldir menn bans giallda, ef J^eir liafa bonnm
heimolligir verit, er hann sat i Kancia, þo at )7eir 15
hallde landzuist at kalla, Ma her nefna til sira Yil-
hialm, er var kapalin byskups. Hann er nu gripinn
af konungsmonnum allt til dyflizsv ok sitr ]?ar i
fanghelsi, sem er byskupsdemi Jocelin af Sarisborg,
ok þo finnr hann i sinni þraunging hvarki manndom 20
ne formeli byskupsins. Syniz erchibyskupi J^esse nial
avU samt sua margfalliga sink, at ei se leÍDgr þolanda
pinvlaust, ok pui skrifar bann sitt bref huerivm J;eii"a,
ok þat bref er byskupinum til heyrir byriaz sua.
Bref Thomas. 25
Thomas med guds miskunn erchibyskup at Kantara-
byrgi ok pafans legatus sendir kuediu Jocelin byskupi.
pat ueit uarr herra, huersu ver þickiumz ydr elskat
hafa ok ydvarn soma aukit med einkanligri astud.
En her i mot taukv ver af ydr roargan motgang ok 30
vhlydni, sua at ver mégum eigi haurmungarlaust herma.
Ok er OSS J>at fremra, er þer fyrirlitit herra paf-
ann ok fremit byskups embetti med olydni vid hann,
ok þar fyrir fellr þin uirding vndir haska uigslunnar,
þuiat ultra )7Ín vill eigi vid keonaz, hversu slikt er 35
APPENDIX I. 250
afskapligt ok hinvm legrvm haskasamligt til eptir-
dgmis. Vncirum ver ok, er J7er vitid Vilhialm kapalin
varn i yduarri byskupssyslv lialldinn i baundvm ok
dyflizsu, en synit lionum einga iiienzskv. Her tyrir
0 biodum ver 3div broderni iiiidir krapti heilagrar
hlydni ok bandz vidlaugii med postoligv vaJlde, at
J?er leggit nidr savnghliod i hverri kirkiu allz yduars
byskupsdemis ok \>egit sua um allan J7ann tima, sem
sira Vilhialiiir sitr herfanginn, ok þetta afelli skal eigi
10 fyr leysaz, en herra pafanum ok oss iieitiz lagligh
yfirbot. Sua endaz bref til byskups, en þat a dekan,
sem her fylgir.
Brefsending Thome.
Thomas med guds miskunn Kanterabyrgis erchiby-
15 skup sendir Jooni dekan þa kuediu at snaraz fra illu
ok gera gott. Rangleti þitt ok radleysi hafvm ver
)7olat, sem fremzst er þreytanda eptir laugunvm eins
mannz at bida. En nu er reynt, at uarar bidstundir
auka þina meinsemd, ok vart lieilsvrad vikr Jhi sinlfum
20 ]?er til afellis med forlitning vid hen a pal'ynn okoss.
Nu erv þinar sakir sua liosar, at per skyllda lavgin
ok vart byskupligt embetti fram i moti J^er, ok )hií
isetiiun ver Jnk, Joon, med þessv varv brefe i sterkara
forbod, tiaskildan guds likam ok heilagri kirkiu, ]n\i-
25 til at þu betrar þinn lifsveg, ok betir laugligha )>at
sem brotit er. Biodum ver )7cr undir hestu bandz
vidlaughv, at J^u samnetir liuarki konunginu ne adra
menn J^inu Ibrbode. Sua lukaz þessor bret', ok er
Host af [mi sem c[)ter ier, at huargi þessarra sneriz til
30 bata. Ma l^at ok sannliga segia af þeiri aulld, sem
nu er i Einglandi; at illuiliadum manne
Fragment C.
This ÍH u fragment of a codex ^vhK•h has been written in two
columns a page. ProfesHor Ungcr refers it to tlie beginning of
R 2
260 APPENDIX I.
the 15th century. The now existing remnant, only the upper
part of one leaf, is in a very mutilated state. Letters and words
in brackets are filled in by Prof. Unger.
1 Column, ib., II., p. 148,i4-25. di umbergis bann. T[ua]
frændr atti bann nana [m]io[g o]lika. annar uar moder(!)
broder bans [g]estrisinn madr ok godrar frægdar, brein-
lyndr [ok] abjidarvin klerkanna i Kanncia fyrer astnd
[bi]ns beilaga Tbome, bann bafdi lagt fyrr nefndum o
systursyni sinum mikit goz til kuonar[mun]dar med
ollu alaga laust. Annar frændi bondans var illmenni
mikit, bafdr i st[ormæ]lum beilagrar kirkiu, bannsettr
med allu [fyrir suo] baduliga skemd, at bann befdi lagiþt
med] tueim systrum, enn verndar sidan glæp[inn med] 10
þriozku ok uill eigi nid skiliazt. Bon[dinn er ver]
nefndum fyrst, er suo blindr,^ [at bami d]regzt i fylgi
med ];eÍDi fr[ænda sinum] er uerr bafdi
2nd column, ib., II., p. 150,22-152,ii. leika bonda
b[ond]a(!) sins ok fuUgreindrar bans illmennzku þorer 1-5
bun [eigi] at beita a binn signada Tbomas fyrir sier,
suo at bann uiti, ok ])o vill bun giarna nockut fa af
bans beilugum teiknum at bera yfir sig. pat tekr bun
rads i siduztu, at bun kallar sinn trunadarmann ok
færr bonum leyniliga eitt fingrgull bardla uænt ok 20
seigir suo til bans : " pu skallt fara til Kantarabyrgiss
" ok bera sælum Tbomasi kuediu mina med ]?essari
" minning, bier med skallt )>u bidia banD, sem þu kannt
" bezt, at bann uirdi mik eigi samblandna þeiri fæd, er
" bondi minn leggr til bans, jniiat suo nil eg frialsazt 25
" ur allri kuol, at eg truir bans beiiagleik, ok eg treysti
" bans [bænura. Giarna vi[llda eg, at )?u iiengir uatn
''...■ eg er lifs. Enn"
8rd column, ib., II, p. 154, 10-21. " i annann tima til
" Kanterabyrgiss ok færa Tbomasi uin minum bring 30
'' J^enna, er eg færr þier, bier med ber ]m ord min siera Gu-
" zalin, at bann komi til min med þa beilaga donaa, sem
'•' bann uænntir at mesta myskun muni afla, þuiat [uer
' Profes.sor Unger reads blidr.
APPENDIX I. 261
" þurfum] nu miog." Sendimaclr ferr, skilar nu hringinum
ok flytr sem greint var prestnum. Siera Guzalinn byzt
a J^ann batt til þe.ssa mozt, at hann flytr med sierr uars
cbottins likama ok hlodbland liins heilao-a Thome erki-
5 byskiips. Sem hann kemr frani til bæarens, bidr riki
madr hann gefa ];eim huggan i guds nafni. Hann
byriar suo, at hann lætiu^ blod heilags Thome i nigd-
ann kalek. Sidan berr hann yfir eukaristi[am i kross
ok lætr i sijduztu fornar hiolit.
10 4th column, ib., IL, p. 156,2:3-158,12. huort er J.eir forii
fram edr fra, ueitti hann ollnm herbergit, er liafa uilldu
ok morgum bædi hiiss ok uiduæri. pat hell til [i bans]
herbergium i guds dom, at um haustit i ogusto manadi
kom þar inn sott mikil ok stod allann tima framm
15 til paska. [Enn eigi] greinir bok, at manndrap yrdi
mick[it i] J^eiri sott. Enn þat stendr skrifat at
[Jojrdan atti son, er Uilhialmur hiet, hann uar k[om]-
inn a tiunnda vetr. Fostrmodr at[ti hann] pilltrenn,
er honum hafdi ueitt f[agrt uppjfædi, hun tekr sott
20 ok anndazt. [Ok þe]gar a J>ridia deigi eptir, er J? . . . .
sykizt pilltrenn um atta da[ga enn anndazt sidan a]
J^ridiu tid dags
Fragment D
is a remnant of a fol. Codex dating, according to Professor
TJnger's statement, from the beginning of the 14th centur}'. It
is -written in a fine and hokl hand, two cohimns and 33 hnes a
page. What now is left amounts only to portions of four leaves.
Of the first leaf a fragment is left of the top and the bottom, con-
taining, respectively, the first and last six lines, the first line, how-
ever, of the top portion being cut off. Of the second leaf the
twelve top lines are missing. Of the third leaf the inner half of
the width is cut away, and of the thus remaining second recto
and first verso column the seven bottom lines ai'e cut away also.
The fourth leaf represents the full height of Cod. and number of
lines on the page. But of its inner margin a slice is cut away
into the writing beyond the beginning and final letters of the
lines on either side, and of the outer so much as to leave only a
few letters standing of column 2 recto and 1 verso.
262 APPENDIX I.
1st leaf.
1 Column, cfr. ib., I., p. 88,20, and 122,i9, &c. legvm
hætti af tilkomandi miskvnn heilags anda at skapit
skipa"Siz i briostino sva viS hveria vigslona sem
vpplesin or^in vigslonnar bv^v hana at hall da. Litilli
stvndo si^arr byrr hann fer^ sina or landi a pava 5
fvnd Alexandri tercij. Ok i J^essarri ferö tekr hann
af honom pallivm ok alia erkibyskups tign ok . . .
Cfr. ib., p. 28,9. ps i hofvt lienni ok tok hon
heilsv sina. Erchibyskvp Thomas var harr ma'Sr a 10
voxt grannvaxinn ok lioslita^r svartharr. neflangr rett-
leitr bli^ligr i yfirbrag^i hvass i hvgviti inndæll ok
astsamligr i allii viSreSv. skorinoi^r i formelom ok
littaiJ stamr. hann var sva hvass ok gleggr i skiln
2 Column, cfr. ib., p. 28,i^, and 18,9 if. heyr-Si i 15
ritninofvm e^a lao^ademvm l>at var honom allt tiltekt
)?a er hann villdi J»at fiammi hafa. GvSs mo^r
Mariam d3n'ka^i hann ok vir^i vmfram alia a"Sra helga
menn ok fal henne a hendi allt sitt ra^ nest gv^i.
Forsiall var hann (i) me^ferS sinni ok ra^agiorS. 20
vand^^rkr i sak
Cfr. ib., p. 108,5 if. tv. Ok eigi dirfiz inn
dramblati eSa inn drambsami afsavkvnar orSvm e^a
litilmagninn legSiz eigi fyrir af avitan. Allar stvnder 25
\>eY sem a milli vr^v svefns ok ti^a ok likams no^-
synia j?a sat hann yfir malvm manna e^a ritningvm
eSa merkiligv hiali ok vara'S
3 Column, cfr. ib., 108,ig ff. J»rætvmenn for^a^iz
hann ok alldri villdi hann samneyta bannsettvm 30
monnvm. ok hvern dæm^i hann )?ann sinn win er a
moti sneriz heilli kenninngo. Mikill var hann sto^a-
ma^r fatekiom monnum sva at enno^i for tomvm hond-
vm a brott sa er til hans kom me^ bæn. Theo-
APPENDIX I. 263
balldvs erchib3'skvp var sva
Cfr. ib., p. 158,7, and 180,ic. nockvat foUnon fell a biana
vingan þeirra konvngs ok erchib3^skvps j^a ganga ])eir
5 mi ok fram vi^ ok taka l>a vndir sik at drao-a fe heil-
agrar kirkio ok sakir a ler^a menn. En byskvparnir
'pegm ok þora eigi vm at vanda. Mikla stvnd lego-r
konvngi' a at samþyckia Thomas vi^ sik be"Si meiS
4 Column, ib., p. 1 40,10 ff. gi vi^ hotin ne blotnar vi5
10 bli^nielin. En fyrir ];vi at hann giorir litinn manu
vir^ingar mvn i hegninngv vsiSanna ok liann rafsa^i
iafnt }»eim er me^ konvnginom voro vig^vm ok
vvig^vm sin afbrig^i ef j^eir brvtv gvSs bo^Sorb ok
rett heilagrar kirkiv þa leggiaz þeir nv fast til fiand-
15 skapar i moti honvm er fornir
Cfr., ib. p. 178,5 ff. ÖV or^roms ok eptirmelis refsing
rangynda til grimSar ok agangs fiarheimtor kirkna til
ágii'DÍ hvskaiila fiol^a til metna^ar ok þat er hann
20 tok s^'ma Ivti framarr en hinir f^-rri byskvpar ];a matv
þeir til diarfteki ok sva matti at kve'Sa at ecki giorSi
hann þess ne mellti er eigi p»yddi bans vvinir aflei^iz
ok á vinstra veg ok tia^v þat
2nd leaf.
1 Col._, cfr. ib,, p. 2S2, til vleyf^ra Ivta helldr til bins
25 at færa konvng varn ok hans vini vndan alygi vvina
bans. En po megi J^er hen-a ilivga hvar korai^ er.
per ervb miok li^Ss þyrftvgir ok heilog kristni en j^eir
ero nv hofSinnpfiar i norSrhalfv heimsins er mest valid
hafa. Keisarimi hvartveggi ok Fracka konvngr ok
30 varr konvngr. Nv er hvargi keisarinn y br at fvll-
tino'i en hinn hvartveofori er vel vilia^r. Ok ef ber
tjmi-S vinattv annars hvars konvngsins l)a hvgsic) er
hverr ska^i af ma goraz yt5r ok heilagri kirkio. Pav-
anom þocka^iz enskis þeirra ræ^a iafnvel sem iarls-
35 ins ok svarar fa ok vel bab )^a settaz vitS Thomas
264 APPENDIX I.
erchibyskvp ok kvaS hann rettarra mela en J?a i ollom
J^eirra skiptvm. pa er Thomas erchibyskvp for a pava
fvnd er hann flySi heiman fra stoli sinvm vndan
vfri"Si vvina sinna. ]?a sto'Sva^i hann ellzgang i þorpi
eino litlo a gotonni. pa er J?eir Thomas erchibyskvp 5
ok Alexander pavi satv i herbergi nockoro ok tolo^o
vm mal ]?eirra Thomas erchibyskvps ok Heinreks
konvngs þa gengv ]?ar inn tveir menn ok hafSi(!)
krypling i fa^mi ser dafan ok mallasan en
2 Cokimn, ib., p. 31 6,21 ff. chibyskvp rodd sva melande. 10
Heyr^v Thomas min kirkia man dyi^kaz i p>ino blo^i.
hann svara'Si hverr ertv drottinn. Roddin melti. Ek
I. c
em Jesvs Kristvs gv^s sonr ok fa^ir );inn. Thomas
svara^i. VerSi sva vel drottinn at );v dyrkiz i minv
blo^i. Roddin svara'Si at sonnv man min kirkia 15
dyrkaz i ];ino blo'Si ok J?a er hon tignaz af ]?er þa
skalltv tignaz af mer. Nv eptir j^essa ena dasamliga
vitran ok (er) af lei's mannlegr otti þa girntiz hann
a ]>etta eitt er fyrr var sagt. Ok þa gengr abotinn
framm ok segir sva. petta ma þer óvmbreMigr fagn- 20
a^r vera herra þvi at J>v hefir mælt vi-S sialfan gvS
i dag. Thomas svara'Si. hversv mattv ]?at vita. Abot-
inn svara^i. Vittv J>at at ek heyi'Sa a. Thomas ba^
þa ok baS at hann skylldi engvm manni segia me^an
lif hans væri ok hann gior^i sva. Lo^verr Fracka 25
konvngr ok margir a^rir rikizmenn leggia her or'S sin
til ok ben vi-S Heim^ek konvng at hann skyli taka i
sett vi^ sik Thomas ercliibyskvp ok heim i land.
3 Column, ib., p. 322,i ff. giof gv^ligrar miskvnnar
postoliga tign ok ])o miok vmakligir ]?a megvm ver 80
eigi baki snva viiS varvm sonvm þeim er til var kalla
i sinvm noSsynivm fyrir þat faSerni er ver erom j^eim
skvlldbvndnir til fvlltings ok fri'Sanar ]?ar er favlnar
fegrS heilagrar kristni e^a ileckaz hennar birti ]7a
megvm ver eigi fat fyrir sal vara hlio'Si hylia e^Sa 35
or^alavst lata. Ok þar sem er vppreist y^r Thomas
erchibyskvp af Cantia er J?er hafi^ vtlagiSan giort
APPENDIX 1. 265
bæ-Si fra vinafctv ytiarri ok riki. );a skylldi j^at nv fvll-
giort vera ok ef hann liefir i nockvro ni^ra^ yí)aiTÍ tign
J^a hafi-S )?er nv fvUsadda rei^i y^ra a lionom ok ærna
skript setta honom. Ok ])wi at konvnglikt riki kann
5 at refsa ];a skylli ok konvngiig miskvnn kvnna at
tempra. ]?a kippi^ nv i mvnn ok hepti^ rei^i ySra
at )?ar er p'er er kvnnikt at stri^a J;a se )?er kvnnikt
at miskvnn a p>vi at hverr sa konvngr er hann styrir
rangliga ser sialvom )?a mvn Lann skaiuma briíS
10 hallda rikino. Ok he^an af bi^iom ver y^i-a.
4 Column, ib., p. 376,rj if. hofvm til y^ar giort e^a
me^ hverso miklo kostg-æfi herra Heinrekr konvno-r
ba^ OSS at vcr legSim leyfi til at er tekit ecSra by-
skvpstol i Lvndvnvm en J;v haf^ir abr i Herfvrd ok
15 talSi hann til )?essa marga no^syn mikla kva^ pa borg
konvnoiikt riki ok haseti i landino. Enn hann sao-gfi)
);ik vel tilfelldan ok fyrir o^rom byskvpom at vera
bæ^i at ætt ok viti ok villdi ];ina vitro hafa ser at
ra^agior^ be^i til rikis stiornar stvndhgrar ok andar
20 bialpar eiliiligrar ok girntiz J;vi pig ser nalegstan at
hafa. Nv fyrir ];vi at ver siam hverso mikit gott af
J>essv mætti hliotaz. ]?a letom ver f>etta eptir ySr ok
skip\^vm ySr yfir et æzta seti lio^byskups i Lvnd-
vnvm. Ok nv ]?vi ardvelligarr ok innverligarr(!j
25 sem ver letvm þetta veitazk ]>a ventvm ver avaxtar af
þesso ok latiS oss eigi at hegoma verSa e^a tál J^at
sem oss var ]^a heiti^ J;vi at ver trvvm J^ik vita hvat
er titt er hverso konvngrinn skiptir skapi sino ok
me^ferS vi"S helga kristni fra pyi sem var e"Sa sn3'z
80 hann i mot henni ok l^yngir henni e'Sa se til var
skoti^ malvm e^a var vitia-^, sva ok ef liann er
3rd leaf.
5 Column, ib., p. 378," w. Verba ser til hialpar ok
sino riki til farnaSar bædi nv ok i5Í"Sarr. N>' treyst-
35 omz ver ySan-i vitzko her vel vm at per leggit stvnd
266 APPENDIX I.
a vi^ konvnginn vm allt þetta iafnsaraan ok sva vm
þat er heilagri kristni var'Sar felom ver þer á hendi
til vrabotar. Einkamiliga felom ver y^r a hendi ok
bio"Svm yi>r saman at heimta Petrs toll vm allt Augl-
iam. ok sendir(!) til var sem fyrst megv^ er. ok eon 5
helldr mælom ver til þess at ]>er fengit oss nockvt fe
at láni fyrst af siaJfvm y^r e^Sa o^rvm ok sendit oss
sem f}Tst en J^er takit annat si^arr iaf(n)mikit af
Petrs fe ok þickir oss sem J?er gefit oss þetta fe.
Valete. Gillibert byskvp gjorir nv bref avnnor i moti 10
þessvm til pava ok svarar þessvm ok segir sva.
Bref byshvps til pava.
lb., p. 380,10 ÍF. Herra sinom ok fe^r Alexandro
pava senn(dir) guSs þionn ok Lvndva kristni gvds q.
ok sina sky 1 Ida hly^ni ok þionosto einkannligrar astar, 15
boo ySart kom til var herra ok tokvm var me^
skylldri virSingo ok flvttvm fyrir varn herra konvnginn
raed flvtningi Ro^geirs byskvps sem þer kva'Sot a. ver
barom bref y^r be'Si f3'rir avgo ok ey(ro) konvngi ok
tia^vm ser hver oi^ ok atkvedi fyrir honom me^ 20
aeggian til batna^ar ok avitan ....
3 Column, ib., p. 382,4 if. Ok Romaborgar kristni
vir"Sa ok veria sem me^r sina ok y^rum helgvm bodvm
litillatliga hly-Sa vm alia hlvti halldinni sinni tign ok
si^vm ok soma sins rikis ok ef nockor fvll e^a fe^ 25
hefir a or^it af bans hendi til y^ar herra, þa seg[ir]
hann hver sok til þess var at þer herra hof'Svt eigi
hans malvm sva tekit e^a þann orskvr^ á giorvan sem
hann var"Si e^a venti ok þotti honom, allmiklo skipta
ok þottiz hann nockvo^ i þvi svivir^r vera ok fyrir- 39
litinn. En þo at sva veri þa ventir hann þ[o] j^a'San
fo^orlio^rar forsia ok enn bli^arri or^a ok meiri orskvr"Sa
a annarri st\Tido. Fa^ir ok a at viso heiinollt son
sinn at beria ei^a hvgga er honom likar. Engvm
manni kvez hann hafa bannat y^ar at vitia En ef35
APPENDIX I. 2G7
nockvrvm stormalvm er skoti^ vndir 3"Sarn dom J^a
eignar hann p>at ser til vanda ok vir^ingar p'ar af );ar
er forn venia i hans riki at engi klerkr skal fara or
bans riki slikra eyrenda nema hann syni honoin a'br
0 bref ok orendi pa er eigi minki han.s riki e^a valid
eSa rett i ne einn sta^ ok fyrir vtan );etta bi^r hann
hvern fara ok malom skiota vndir y^arn dom ok ef
nockot er af giort i moti ySrv valldi i þessv þa vill
hanu y^r þat beta ok betra eptir lerSra manna domi
10 i sinv riki. En er þer sog-^vt hann samneyta viS
þræto.
4th leaf
1 Column, cfr. ib., I., p. 354,i^ betra er sar at græ^a
enafhoggvi^ at gr[æ^a þvi] at iafnan groa skiott stór sar
vndir [læknis] hendi þar sem tratt e^a eigi verSa vi&
15 græ[ddir af] hoggnir limir. Afhœggit giorir ok orvil[n-
an hejilsvnnar p>ar er skiott grærr iafnnn mikit [sar
vn]dir go"Svm lekni. Nv væri gott raS ef j^^r [tekiz
sva] allz per ero^ enn æzsti leknirr i kristninni [at per
lejggit fyrri stvnd á at græ^a sarit ef nock[ot er] helldr
20 en i^f hoggva kristninni enn gofgaz[ta limi]nn ok gœra
pat it ogorliga a henne er seint e^a eigi [mvn] at heilv
grætt ver^a hvat er nu pa ef y^r . . . rSa at engo
hof^ hvat er pa. er pa ()rvættan[da gv]^s miskvnnar at
eiori megi hann hana av^laz a ett . . iíS eSa mvn Kristr
95 pa sva skamhendr vera [at hann m]vn eigi hialpa mega
peim er hann vill e^a sva [pvng e]yro hans at hann
megi eigi hej^ra bæn sinna manna [eSa] kail peirra er
vndir hans miskvnn leita pvi at [opt s]kiptir liann
skiot urn skapi manna ok veitir opt [ove]nta hh ti f^^rir
oQ bænir heilagra manna. Konung[Hg ti]gn kann sin
at hefna ok ottaz eigi stvndvm at ve[ga i m]oti. Ivon-
vngr er mykiandi meii hoglynndi ok sig[randi] me 6
polinme^i likn ok linleik eia metzt eigi [man]dráp
2G8 APPENDIX I.
ilia, er einn hefir sver^ brvgöit i hendi [en all]ir a^rir
slyppir hia at hoggva J?a a tvær henii[dr va ok ef
menn ero i havi i miklvm stormi at be[^i lig]gr vi^
lifs tion ok fiar er eigi ]?a betra ok kasta [j^a h]el]dr
farminvm til lifs monnvm helldr en allt tyniz [iafn- 5
samjan. heimsliga mvn ySr ek þickia mela en J^o [geng]r
mer gott til. Nv fari sva at J)essi ver^i endir [helldr
at] Thomas erchibyskvp hafi vtlegS allar stvndir ok
ræn[tr o]llo sino riki en England allt leggiz i ohlySni
vi"S [ySr] sem gvS forSi )?v[i]. Er eigi ];a betra eptir- 10
synar [at] hafa helldr be"Sit urn hri^ ok j^olat vm
stvndar
2 Column, sakir ^ . . lo a f . . oss fa . . ly^ni .
. ia
sinn . . . taka . . yfir . . . snva . .
til
hans . . . lang . . . illi ok . . ver ok . . .
tion 15
. . fjiors . . . raz e . . Öi m . . . missi
,
far . . toll . . . ma k . . vn J^ . . ma .
.
OSS eigi . . . eigi fe . . . sva . . . Nv .
,
valid ...
A^ . . ySr . . haf . . konvng o . . . .
20
3 Column.^ . . k oss . . alfvm . . ver sem . . r^ing
. . . r ok ein . . . Heinr . . o'Sr . . mit .
at bry ... la hann . . . J7vi at . . . vilia . .
fvm . . ttar . . . ok . . . stui . . elski . . .
ra rett . . Thomas .... sig sva . . . s tign 25
. . . oss sa . . yrr si . . . gv'Si . . . inni
. . . i rang .... a honom . . . i ve^i .
pit ^ . . . lyst . . . igi vir . . . r e^a ....
bref
4 Column, konvnginom ok mælir sva. 30
1 Only the first letters of each
line left.
2 Here be^ns a new chapter
with a capital A.
^ Only the last letters of each
line left.
^ In red {ca^tituhaii) .
APPENDIX I. 269
Bref.
lb. L, p. 332,23 fF. Alexander byskvp [nonn þiona gv^s
sendir [kve^iv ok] postvlega ble[zan hinvm] kersta
syni .sinvm Heinreki Englanclz konvngi. Y[^ra vizjko
5 trvvra ver frædda vera af nattvro skyn[semin]nar hgö
a,t hverr er þvi meirr skvllbvndinn [vi^ gv^ sem]
hann liefir meira Ian af gvSi i av^re^vni i þessi [ver-
olldv]. Nv ma ]?at ok j7Ín tign sia at fra ]?vi er gvS
li[of sva] hatt ]iina tign milli manna at hann setti
10 þig k[onvng] matkan ok storfengian at allri heims
vir[Öing] vm fram a^ra fiesta hversv skylldvgir er
e[rod fyjrir allt þetta vndir pat at standa ok efla er
ho[nom er vijliat. cf ]>v villt rettliga vndir bans vilia
stan[da ok] makliga gvSi ombvna. ok eptir skilriki
16 [velgoi^a ]7eir]ra er hann hefir a^r til ySar gort ])vi at
sva se[gir Grejgorivs pave. GvSspialligr sannleikr
bi^r OSS [vand]liga virSa ok at hyggia at eigi demimz
ver fyrir )?[at] jn-ngligarr af gv^i a doms degi en
a^rir se[m hann h]efir oss meira lanat i mannvir-Singv
20 eSn, fi[areignvm] en o&vm monnvm ];vi at ]?a er
avkaz gvSs gi[afir] i lanino þa avkaz sva skvlldin ok
afgiall[d vi'S] gv^ þessa lansins ok þeim mvn litillatari
o[k fvsa]ri at veria gv^s kristni ok fliotari til gvöþ
]?io]nosto ok bans bo'Sor^a sem hann er meirr skvll-
25 bv[ndinn] fyrir eptirleti heims þessa sælvnnar. Nv
s[kolv] ]7essi aminningaror^ fyrirmenn heilagra(r) k[ir-
kio] ok sva veralldligir valldzmenn opt fyrir hyg[giv]
avgvm hafa ok lata sialldan or minni falla [at fyrir]
])£ii Ian sem þeir hafa af gvöi fyrirdemiz peir [eigi a]
30 efsta degi. Nv er hcSan af ef ver elskvm y^[r vm-]
Iram a'Sra konvnga e^a kristna menn ok ySr )7ess
e[igi] syniat af varri halfv er veitanda er da(Slig[vm]
manni. Ok til ]?ess po at sva sem J^er erv<S yfii*
[o'SrvQi] monnvm at viti ok nki sva skylldvt ]?er ok
35 fyrir v[era]
270 APPENDIX I.
Fragment E
is found in the Arnamagnæan Collection in Cod. No. 234. Only
three leaves are now extant, each with 44 lines a page. The
Codex to which this fragment belongs is known to have been
written about A.D. 1325.
1st leaf.
Cfr. ib., II., p. 1, allrar kristninnar ok fyrir þvi er
hann sannliga pislarvatr. litt aa )?v vigslvpallinn ok er
hann hina æzti erkibyskvp ok legatvs. ok maa hann
fyrir þvi sannliga heita postoli. leita þv at liflazstvndinni iq
ok hittiz hati^ drottinsligs bvr^ar. v[ir^ þjv dav^a-
sta^inn. ok er J>at havfvtkirkian i Anglia, Hverir erv
dav^ainenn lians. eigi gySingar. eigi heiSingiar. helldr
bans vndirtnenn ok eignarsynir. Nv af þessa bins helga
mannz dyrS ok iartegnagiorS fagni mær ok mo^ir nyian ^^
Abel dyr^ hafva av^laz af bro^vr drapi. fagni hvn ok
nyian Jacob leystan fra bro^vrligv hatri. fagni hvn ok
nyian Joseph frelstan af bræ^ra avfvnd ok nv rikiandi
i hiiiineskri havU. pess(i) hinn haleiti gv^s )7Íonn
Thomas erkibyskvp gaf sitt lif fyrir gv^s savk a 9q
fiorSa ari bins .xii. hvndraSs fra hoUigvm gv^s getnaSi.
Eptir Dionisivm m^. c^. .Ixx. .iiij^. kalendas Janvarij.
a þriSia degi vikv aa elliptv tiS dags at ' likamligri
Kristz bvrSarti'S. honvm til erfvi^is ok piningar. þat
yr^i J?essvm til hvilldar ok haleitrar dyröar. til j^eirar 25
lei^i OSS allzvaUdandi gvS sa er bæ^i er vpphaf ok
endir allz bins go^a. ok þo liíir ok rikir an enda.
Eptir bans dav^a holligan [varu] bans banamenn
eigi minnr til liar aagiarnir en til glæpa. þaa ganga
J;eir þegar inn i havll ok herbergi erkibyskvps ok ræna qq
þar þvi avllv sem þeir hittv i gvlii ok silfri bokvm
ok brefvm hestvm ok savSlvrn ok allzkonar boi'Sbvna^i
ok go^gripvm. ok skiptv avllv sin i milli sem herfangi.
ok lik^v sik enn i þvi riddavrvm Pilati iarls J?eir er
gv^ krossfestv. er ]?eir Ivtskiptv me^ ser sialfs drottins 35
APPENDIX I. 271
klæbvm. ok gior^v þessir hvar framarr. Ok þessa
kvnni konvngr þeim alia oþavk þaa er j?eir komv til
lians. ok let flesfc aptr fara þat er þeir hof^v tekit ok
vndi hann ilia viS. ok harma(^i) miok þetta verk.
5 p'eir iokv j^vi enn aa ofan sina illzkv. at þeir bavnuvöv
at iar^a lik erkibyskvps [me^] av^rvm byskvpvm.
helldr kvo^vzt þeir sky lid v sockva þvi i nockvrnn
pytt e^a festa aa galga. En me^an er þeir fara at
liripsa ok ræna. þaa samnaz .saman mvnkar ok klerkar
10 til þessa hins lielga likama ok inaa þat travtt i ætlan
færa eSa frasavgnn hvilikr harmr e^a liversv mikill
gratr þar var er ])eiv sia sitt havfvt ok sinn fobvr
havggvinii hvila i faSini raæ'Srinni. Vist matti þar
synazt endrnyiazt spaorS Hieremie Vox in Rama audita
15 est ploratiis et ululatus miiltus. Ryttr var lieyr^r
gratr ok mikil }ding. Ok er þeir afklæSa likit til
þvattar ok skry^ingar J;aa tinnz þat er fair vissv fyrr
at allr likamrinn var i Ivsvgv harklæ^i vafvi^r millvm
hals ok hæls. gaf Ivsin af ser klaöa en klæSit svi^a
20 ok maa þvi sannliga svaa segia at liverr linn- bans
likama væri sannliga pislarvatr fyrir gvbi. SiSan var
)7vegit likit ok skrytt ok uazett. Ok snemma fyrr enn
til kiæmi þeir gv^ni^ingar er hann havfSv vegit. paa
leggia klerkar hann i stein|?ro ok iarSa fyrir altari
25 Jons baptista ok hins Jjelga Avgvstini postola Einglis-
manna. ok verSa þar si'íSan mikil taknn ok margar
iarteignir alltt til J^essa dags gvSi til lots ok dyrSar
ok hinvm helga Thomasi til vir^ingar.
lb., p. (j,n ft'. Eingis manz or^færi er at mvna eptir
30 hverssv mikill vggr ok otti hormvng ok ræzla kom yiir
alltt folk i Einglandi bæ^i klerka hina hæri ok hina
lægri ok alia al'Sy^v fyrir );enua atbvrS. urap ok davba
Thomas erkibyskvps sva at eingi þorbi hofv^s at hefia
fyrst eptir. Maa )7at birtazt af orbvm ok andsvavrvm
35 eiiis byskups þaa er einn klei'kr bans kom fyrir hann
ok baS hann retta mal sitt viS einn konvnirsmaim. hiMin
kvez biL'Si ræntr ok vanvirbr i avS(r)v. paa svara^i
272 APPENDIX I.
byskvp. Hvat megvm ver J^er giora. hir'Sir varr ok
hofvt hinn hæsti byskvp i Eingiandi er deyddr ok
drepinn i sinvm erkistoli. ok i J^eiri kirkiv er drotning
er ok moSir allra annarra i Einglandi af hverivm
megvm ver nv fvllting faa ok hvertt travst megvm 5
ver sækia. hvar er Bio's var ok styrkr. Byskvparnir
skolv drepnir i kirkivnvm. lielgir staSir svivir^ir, ok
savrga'Sir. go'Sir memi fottro'Snir en glæpamennÍDÍr tign-
a'Sir. jnlik bormvngarorS varv bvervetna heyr'S ok
hiolvfc i Einglandi. ok ]70 meirr i hvislv en i baraæli. 1
Einn virSvligr maÖr villdi sætta klavstramenn ok
konvngsmenn. er' j^eir villdv taka vndir sik eignn
nockvra e^a iorS af kanokvm ok villdi bann fylgia
maali ]?eira kanoka. ]:»aa mællti einn konvngsmabrinn.
Veiz ]7v eigi enn ]7aa at oSs er nv kenntt at raka krvnvr 15
y^rar klerkanna. Nv af (slikv) ma mavka bversv ofsi
illmennis geisa'Si batt e'Sa bversv lagtt Iv'Sra'Si grand-
veri go^mennis. pessv næst sendir Lo^vir Fracka
konvngr bref til pafva.
lb., p. 14,8 ff. Hinvm bærsta feSr ok binum æzta by- 20
skvpi Alexandre s. q. Lo^Svir Fracka konvngr ok skyllda
lySni. Miok brytr saa svndr avll lavgin menzkvnnar
er bann savrgar ok svivir^ir sina mo^vr ok vist er
saa vminnigT velgiorninga sins lavsnara er bann lætr
ser eingrar brygSar faa. bver ska^i e^a skavm sem 25
gior er beilagri kristni. En ])o er ySr berra J?at mest
barmanda. ok nv mætti vpp vekia til nyivngar barma-
ins ok begningar glæpsins nyivng grimleiks ok ofsi
odæma, þvi at nv befvir avmliga vpp risit illzkvgi'im'S
mannanna i moti astvin gv^s ok sverSi lagtt i sialldrit 30
Kristz. ok slokt lios ok lampa Eingiandz kristni
sva liotliga sem or^it er. Vaknit nv berra ok risit
vpp til refsingar. dragit or sli^rvm sverSit Petrs post-
ola til befnSar eptir J;enna binn belga mann. ];vi at
blo^ bans ok davSi kallar hormvliga vm alia kristnina. 35
Se. til begningar ok til avka þessa vandkvæ^is. |7aa
birtir gvMig milldi bans verí>leika meS iartegnvm |7ar
APPENDIX 1. ' 273
sem hann hvilir. Ok birtiz nv fyrir livers nafui hann
hefvir barizt e^a dav^a );olt. En J?essir menn er bref
bera ok sins fav^vr ok forstiora liafa hormvh'ofa mist,
mvnv y^r inniliga segia kvnna allan atbvi-b ok efni
5 þessa vandkvæöa. ok trvit );essa manna or^vm þar
vm sem vorvm, Valete.
lb., p. 20, 10 if. Alexandro me^ gvSs miskvnn hinvm
æzta byskvp(i) s. q. TheobaJklvs hertvgi ok Fracklanz
forsiama"Sr ok me^ kve-Siv skvUda vir^ino- melS droit-
10 inligri ly^ni. y^arri tignn herra syndizt' sæt at semia
ok fri^ at giora milli Einglanz konvngs ok Thomas
erkibyskvps ok eptir y^rv bo^i var ek a J^eim fvndi
ok viö fri^giord. ok at sam^ri sæt ))(ei)ra tok konvngr
hann bli^liga ok );acksamliga ok het honvm fri^i iyviv
15 sik ok sina menn. Erkibyskvp asaka^i konvnginn
nockvt vm vigslvgior"S sonar sins, kvat hann ]>vi bra^-
rai)it hafva ok J?at var fyrir hans vitorb giortt ok
leyfvi. Konvngr iattar ]?essi savk ok kve^r sik of-
giortt hafa ok gaf J^etta mal i byskvps valid. Hann
20 segir ok byskv^^ana sekia );essa mals )?ar er }>eir hafva
konvno'inn vio-San i moti setnino-v ok retti heilaorrar
o o o o
kristni. ok )?eir hofSv ];etta giortt meirr at villd
havf^ingia en gv& lavgvm. Konvngr mælti ok ecki
i mot þvi ok ba^ erkibyskvp );ar slikan dom a leggia
25 sem honvm syndizt vi^ y^art ra^ ok samj^ycki. petta
alltt heyr^a ek ok J^etta alltt skal ek bvinn særvm at
sanna. e'Sa ];eim. Ivtvm av^rvm er ]?er vilit at mer
heimta her vm. Nv at sva komnv mali ok friSv(^v)
)7eira i millvm, þaa sneri sia gvSs ma^r sinni fei"^ lieim
30 til stols sins orvggr ok ottalavs. ok )7ess erendiss sem
nv er avllvm knnniktt. at hann gaf sitt havfvt vndir
havgg ok sinii hals vndir svcrS. petta hit saklavsa
lamb ];olSi pisl ok davSa a næsta dcgi cptir pislartid
hinna saklavsv sveina. ok var hans helgv bloöi vt
35 hellt i )7eim sta^ sem Kriz bloS er fornfærtt alh*i
kristni til hialpar. Hinir kiærstv Jnonostvmenn kon-
vngs ok helldr hvndar af havjl hans giorSv sik dicf-
K5U. s
274 APPENDIX I.
yIs p>i^æla. ok vnnv ]>etta ni-Singsverk. er vheyrt er
slikt fyiT sakafvllir a saklavsvm. En efni ok atfor
J>essa vdæma ]>aa ottvmz ek at segia. ])vi at vera kann
at mer se \irtt til fiandskapar ok rogs j^o at satt se.
Vil ek ]n'i helldr at ]?eir votti ]>etta mal berligar ok 5
fvllkomligar ei bref bera. Xv iiiegv ]>er af ]?eira fra-
savgnn iiema hversv mikill harinr eSa hvilik nav^ ok
afelli oriSiu er allri kristni i p>essa manz drapi ok
dav^a. \>o at mest se erkistollinn i Kancia. Nv
maa ok hin romverska moSir allra kirkna yfir slikvm JO
Ivtvm eigi leingr ]?egia amælislavst. J^vi at hver skavm
ok neisa sem gior er dottorinni. );aa fellr ]>egar sv
svivii^ino- ok til mobvriimar. ok eioi maa moS^Tinni
)>at neisvlavst vera, ef dottirin verSr liertekin. Til
3' bar kallar dreyri ok davM J^essa Inns lielga manz. 15
ok beiciir hefnSar eptir sik. En ySr enn lielgi faSir
se nær ok sainrabi allzvalldandi gvS saa er me^ sins
sonar drej'ra ]?o syndafleck af heiminvm. hann skioti
y^r i briost hefn-^ar ok hegnningar framkvæmS sva at
heilvg kirkia sv er nv er skemi) me^ liotri hneykingv. 20
mætti hressazt af stri'Sri hegningv. Yalete>
2nd leaf.
nvt)v gvbinn þaini er þaa baf^i setz ok sat aa stoli
skelmisdrepsins. til svivirSingar postoligv sæti ok paf-
vanvm. fylldi J^aa ok fleckadi mikinn Ivta lieimsins. 25
hverr megi vpp tina e^a i frasavgnn færa alia J^aa
illing er yfvir geek i J^ann tima. En almattigs gv^s
milldi hefir fj^rir hvgat avllvm til rettingar ok hialpar i
vthellingv j^essa bins saklavsa bloiJs ok lambs. )?vi at
heban af leibretti livn margan ok lockabi til lei-Srettv 30
ok lavsnar. Xv at skinandi birti taknanna. )>aa e3'dd-
iz noek^i: sva myrkr lastanna. ok tok at jnoazt ok
vaxa sa^kornit Kriz i go^ri sa^ioi'^. ok endrlifnv^v
blomar kraptanna aa akri gv^spiallamanna ok liknanda
liosi iarteignanna ok vr^v a hverivm degi i traviii 35
drottinligrar biar^ar sav^ir af v^avrgvm ok virk'cSa-
APPENDIX I. 275
menn af viking vm at lysanda skini hans iartegna.
Snervzt hvernn dag margir menn af rangri gavtv ok
bavi^v ser aa briosfc ok hvrfv aptr til gy^s sins.
Skry^izt nv kennimenn gv^s rettlæti. J^o at nockviv se
5 til si^ at dæmvm sinna vndirmanna. ok takit vpp
fri^semi af rangri vtleg^ bins helga Thomas erkiby-
skvps. sta^festi af dav^a bans, ok af taknvm bans
vandyrkligrar avmbvnar. Liti nv vpp þrætvmenn ok
þriotlyndir til j^essa lioss ok lampa er gvS befir halt
10 sett yfvir kertistlkvna. ok maa ];aa bverr sia ok
skilja bvartt bann er staddr ok skipa^r innan fa^ms
kristninni e-Sa af snií)inn bennar samvelldi. Her er
nv ];at lios. er ];aa birti gaf kristninni ^ begat i vestr-
balfv beimsins at i vppbafi þessar J^rætv kvnni
15 skipta liosi or myrkrvm. Ok at ræk^vm ok reknvm
Octoviano af pafvasæti. val^i bvn ser til berra ok
bir^is Alexan'Sr. Ok ef bann væri brætvmaSr. þaa
mætti );essi Thomas eigi vera skirr eí>a reinn fra J?eim
fleck. )?vi at eingi tekr saa i tiorvna er eigi lo^i vi^.
20 En þat birta iartegnir bans at bann var skirr þess
mals þvi at engi matti slik taknn giora. nema gv^
væri me^ bonvm. Nv me^ þvi at gvös mattr er
sva mikiJl me^ bonvm. enda se bann vig^slvson Alex-
andri ok ellistod vm alia vestrbalfv kristninnar. þaa
25 villaz þeir avSsæliga er sitt kne beygia fyrir )?etta
skvrgo"S Baal. enn fja^irlita sinn fo^vr ok forstiora
Alexandr pafva. þann er gv^ befir val^au. Ok ef
bann væri eiöi af gvSi vall^r. bverssv mætti Thomas
erkibyskvp vera bans vigslvsou ok styrkingarstob. ok
30 ]>o beilagr. Mætti bann bæ'Si vera þrætvma^r me^
pafvanvm Alexandro. ok lika þo gv^i. ok vera i ly^ni
ok samþyeki ollv vi^ hann en enda lif sitt vi^ J^at ok
skina si^an iartegnvm. j?vi at engi taknn mætti bann
nv vinna nema gvo væri me^ bonvm. Nv maa avllvm
35 av^sæt vera at tilgangr ok savk beilagsleiks bans
* kristninna, Cd.
s 2
276 APPENDIX I.
hefvir verit vandlæti almenniligrar trvar ok vornn
kristiligs si'Sar. )^vi at hann bar^izt fast ok bravt
niör si^venivr er allra hellzt vorv ovenivr. bæ^i nyiar
ok fornar. þær er syndvzt i moti standa retti heilagrar
kirkiv. Ok ]?aa er hans synir hinir ellii saa sinn 5
fo^vr mæddan ok þiaSan i þvilikv starfvi. ok i annan
sta'S rao^vrlikt frelsi hallaz til haska. )?aa selia þeir
sem Esav svivirSliga sina frv^mbvr^i vi^ einv saman
ertraso^i.^ En sia gv^s kappi her'Si hvg sinn eigi at
minnr sva at lycktvm tok hann sætliga ok feginsam- 10
liga dav^a oheyr'Srar grim'Sar. ok manravn dæmilavsrav
vtleg'Sar. Hver er sv tegvnd manna i heilagri kristni.
er eigi megi ser nockvt nvtsamliktt hitta i þessi fehirzlv
er folgin er i Kaneia. JmSan veittizt þrætvmonnvm
lies sannleiksins. styrkr ok travst iær^vm monnvm. 15
heilsa sivkvm. liknn ok miskvnn þeim er lei^rettazt
vilia. ];vi at af bans ver^leikvm taka syn blind ir.
gavngv halltir. reinsaz likj^rair. heyra davfvir. dvmbir
mæla. dav^ir lifna. Ok skiotazt at segia ]?aa græ^azt
þar allzkonar mein. ok nær avll gv^zspiallig taknn 20
fremiazt )?ar fyrir hans verSleika. Engi hofvm ver
lesit ne einn heilagra manna sva skiott eptir dav^ann
ok sva skamri stvndv sva mavrgvm ok storvm
iarteignvm birzt hafva sera p'enna mann.
lb., p. 44, 15 fF. A hinni næstv nott eptir hans sigrfor 25
saa merkliliga syn agiætr mvnkr einn ok hvar agiætri
at snilld ok dicti er hann dicta^i vm hans dyrS.
hann ]?ottizt sia hinn helga Thomas skr^^ddan byskvps
skrv^a ok ganga at altari sva sem til messvsavngs.
hann var lioss ok rio^r yfvirlitz. vir'Svligr ok þeckiligr. 30
petta hit sama bar ok fyrir hann a^ra nott ok hina
þri^iv. hann hvgsar fyrir hvi sva optt hit sama bar
fyrir hann. Ok potti sem hann mvndi spyria skolv
nockvrs. ok vita ef hann svara'Si honvm. hann ];ottizt
)7aa ganga nær meirr ok bei"Saz blezanar af honvm. ok 35
^ crtrasir^i, Cd.
APPENDIX í. 277
si^an -mællti hann. Reizt eigi mer herra. þo at ek
spyria nock\TL's. Mæl ])v sagdi hann. Herra sagSi
hanrí. ert ]n- eigi framlibinu ok dav^r. Hann svara'Si
aa latinv en hinu spvr-Si aa wavlskv. DavíSr var ek
5 kvab hann ok hefvi ek vpprisit. paa mællti mvnkr-
iiiD. Ef ]>v hefvir sannliga v})prisit. ok ert ]>y sam-
YÍrSandi pislarvattvin gvbs sen> ver trvvm. Lvi s^mir
\)v þaa eigi mavurivnvm heilagleik )min berliga. Hann
svara^i. Lioss ber ek i liendi. en J>at maa eigi synazt
10 fyrir ];okv J>eiii er f}TÍr stendr. Hann hvgsar mvnkr-
inn ok skilr eio'i livar til þetta koni. Yilltv sia seo-ir
hann. Vil ek lierra sagíJi hanii. J)aa bra hann vpp
skri^liosi miklv hinni liæoTÍ hendi meb brennanda
kerti. ok baí) liann lita aa avllvm megin. Mvnkrinn
15 giorir sva ok ser hann at þoka sva mikil legzt at
skri^liosinv avllvm megin sva at felr kertissliosit. ok
nv skilr hann synina ok verk hans go^ ok iartegnir.
ok raattv þo eigi birtaz fii'ir mavnnvm fyrir sakir illzkv
lians vfribarmanna er þaa var enn vhegnd. SiSan
■ 20setr hann niSr skriSliosit hia altari. pvi næst var
vpphafvit i korinvm hati^likt messv vppliaf ok fagn-
abarfvlltt ok þo savngiavst Letare Hiervsaleni. En
erkibyskvp beudi )/eim at eigi væri }>at svngit ok hof
vpp hormvngar officivni lagiiga ok litilli savngravst
25 Exvrge. En )>at )?ydizt ^ sva. Ris vpp ]?v drottinu
hvi sefr J^v. ris vpp )?v. rek oss eigi af havnd\Tti til
lykSa. hvi snyr þv fra andlit þitt. ok gleymir |?v
yfvirhryg^ vavri. fylgir kvi^vr varr iorbv. ris vpp
þv drottinn ok hialp oss vi^ ok leys oss. Eptii' )?at
30 vaknar hann ok ilivgar dravm sinn. ok þessi orS at
davSr var ek ok em ek nv vpprisimi. ok skilr hann
J^aa þo at bann væri dav^r at likams æSi. at J?o lifvir
hann af krapti Kristz. Sva sem vitrat var byskvpi
Bartboloineo Exoniensi cr allmiok barma'Si bans liflat.
35 þa syndizt bonvni nui^r i svefni ok spyiT. Hvat
278 APPENDIX I
hryggvir )?ik. Litlat kvat hann ok davtJi ^ Thomas
erkibyskvp(s). Hinn svara^i. Sannliga er liann dav^r.
en þo lifva armar bans ok hendr. Sva er ok. sann-
liga lifva hendr hans til iartegnagiorSa ok armar hans
til hefnöar. 5
lb., p. 24, 17 ÍÍ. pat bar ok fyrir einn vir^vligan mann
i svefni. at hann heyr^i kail ok ravdd ogvrliga i loptit
vpp ok mællti sva. Se her. bloS mitt kallar af ioi^v
til gv^s meirr en blo^ Abels for^vm. þess er drepinn
var i vpphafvi heims af bro^vr sinvm. pessi Ivtr 10
var^ i þeim sta§ er Argentevs heitir. hina Dæstu nott
aör þar kiæmi ti^endin vm liflat hans. pessi ma^r
ihvgar dravminn. ok vm morgvninn segir hann sinvm
felavgvm er þeir talazt vi(S vm ymsa atbvr^i. Avllvm
þotti þeim mikils vm vertt. en einginn þottizt skilia 15
hvat þat var. Ok er þeir ræddv vm j^etta. þaa geek
maí5r einn at þeim ok segir þaa drap ok dav^a
Thomas erkibyskvps. Ok þaa segia þeir til þess manz
er dravminn haf^i dremyt. Her er nv fram komit
þat hit hafva kail er ])v heyi-Sir i nott þvi at ifvalavst 20
er at þetta hit saklavsa blo^ kallar mattvliga til gv^s.
pat var ok satt at travtt hefvir þat kail or^it e^a
]?av ti^endi er iafnnskiott hafvi heyr^ verit e^a ilvtt
heimsenda i millvm sem þetta.
lb., p. 60, I ft*. Fam nottvm eptir solarfall syndiz einvm 25
vngvm manni olygnvm sem kominn væri mikill mann-
iioldi bæ^i lær^ra ok olær^ra i korinn Kantvariensis
ecclesie. hann þottiz sia hinn helga Thomas erkibyskvp
hvila erendan yfvir altarinv vndir dyrSligv klæ^i ok
mikit hægendi vndir hof^i honvm ok vir^vligan mann 30
i mvnkaklæSvm sitia vndir hof^i honvm ok herSvm.
honvm syndiz sem tveir vendir rynni vpp af sinni siSv
hans hvarr ok skiott vaxa sva at honvm þotti )7aa ok
)?aa sem þeir mvndi ganga vpp i gegnnvm ræfr kirki-
vnnar. honvm þottv allir vndra þetta miok. paa tok 35
1 ífai-'«í/j Cd.
APPENDIX I. 279
saa til or^z er sat \Tidir havfSinv. Hvi vndiizt þer
þetta. þessir vendir benda fp-ir frægð ok dryS þessa
mannz ok sva sem þer sa^ vavndvna vpp renna. sva
man þroaz ok vpp renna taknn ok iarteignir bans.
5 man J7at ok synaz i þeiri vitran ok syn er eptir ferr
bverssv miok bann var tigna^r ok vppbatVi^r.
A savmv vikv eptir liflat Tbomas erkibyskvps
vitra^izt einvm munki mvnkr saa er mavrorvm davo-vm
fyrri var davSr. bann J7ottizt spyria bann margs. ok
10 at'lyktvm at Tbomasi erkibyskvpi vandliga. en binn
sag^i ok lag-Si morg orö bonvm til lofs ok dyr^ar ok
þær alyk^ir sins nials. at binn belgi Thomas erki-
byskvp væri framleiddr af sialfri gvös mo^vr Marie
ok belgvm postolvm ok nockvrvm pislarvottvm ok
15 iatavrvm ok meyivm fyrir baleitiin domstol ok gvlligan.
þann er tveim bvrövm matti Ivka vpp ok aptr. En
saa ris vpp i moti er i stolinvm sitr fagr ok fri^r
vmfram sonv manna, bann fa'Sma^i Thomas ok kysti
ok gaf bonvm blezan. Si San var bann leiddi- til sætis
20 ok skipat me§ postolvm. En sia vndrar þetta ok spvr^i
bver savk til þess væri er bonvm var i æSra sta^
skipat en binvm belga.
8 id leaf.
lb., p. 74, 11 fí'. );rota ok avll var bvn bolgin oivan til
25 knia. b\Ti var þangat flvtt af tveim konvm leynibga
ok er bvn bergSi f>essv vatni. er milskat var bloSi bins
belga Thomas erkibyskvps. f>aa var^ bvn j^egar beil.
lb., J). 76, ff". Nv kemr liinn baleiti paskadagr sialfr.
saa dagr er bver kirkia fylliz iagnaSar ok gleSi. en
30 bofvtkirkian i Kancia sitr þaa oin i brygiJ ok bariiii
beyrir bvn dætr sinar sætliga syngia, en l^olir sialf
beirskliga ]?ogun ok )?vnga. en til livgganar |'ar me?^
bormvng, saa er b3a"gSi mvnn til lois vio sik ki3rSra
manna lavk vpp þann dag mvnn til mals þess er aSr
35 var mallavss. pessi maSr tcHr J'ar nihi i kirkivnni
280 APPENDIX I.
ok bravz þar vm ok bar^iz lengi. ok fell frav^ mikit
or mvnninvm ok at lyktvm settizt hann vpp ok mællti
fyrst oskyrt ok þo sva at skilia matti. ok beiddi fa
ser drykc. Av~S var kirkian af mavnnvm. )?vi at
engar vorv trSir. en viS ];essa nylvndv aa einni stvndv 6
dreif at meiri manniiol^i en skiott mætti telia. hverr
at av^rvm spvr^i hverr e^a hvaöan væri. en serhverivm
var honvm torsott at svara. );vi at honvm var mæ^i-
samtt malit. ok varS optt at endvrnyia hit sama a^r
sagtt yr^i. Hann kvazt ætta'Sr vera af kirkivsoknn 10
Oxeneforö. ok sagSi sik fyrir fimtan vetrvm vti hafva
ni-Sr lag'Sz heilan ok. sofnat ok vaknat mallavssan.
kvat ser J?at vera vitraS ok boSit af tveim dyr^ligvm
mavnnvm at hann skylldi );angat sækia ok ]?enna
hinn nyia pislarvatt. ok hann mvndi J?ar taka mal sitt 15
ef hann bæ^i ser |?ar liknar ivanarlavst [vm] hans
helgi ok verdleika. kva^v engan ]?ann sta^ þaa vera
i veravlldv er skiotari mvndi til heilsvgiafva(r) en J^ar.
Hann sag^i sik Samson heita, Nv var )?at vatr
heilsvgiafvar hans at mal hans bættiz ok ort>agTein 20
dag eptir dag ok villdi p>o eigi fvllkomit ver^a.
Hvsbondi saa er hann haf^i langa stvnd me'S ser
haf^an kvazt optt hafva hann drvckinn giorvan ok
lockat til mals. ok alldri or'S feingit af honvm. En
af ]?essvm hinvm fagra atb\^-S );aa matti ]?ar sva 25
Bannliga sem i av^rvm kirkivm segia hec dies
quam f.
lb., p. 78, u ff. A );essvm hinvm sama dyra degi drott-
inligrar vpprisv kallaSi hinn helgi ma^r einn svein
dav~Svona til lifs ok heilsv. Sveinninn het Gelldivinvs 30
son Godevini skrifvara )?ar aa sta^. Hann var iiora
manv^r þiac^r i þvngvm vanmætti. ok at lycktvm laa
hann .iij. daga ok .iij. nætr matlavss dryckla.vs vitlavs.
penna dag er fa^ir hans kom fra kirkiv eptir J^ionostv-
tekiv fær hann þaa na^ linskavta þeim er davg'Sr var 35
dreyra Thomas erkibyskvps. hann vavkva^i linskavtann
i vatni ok bar vatnit at mvnni hinvm sivka sveini
APPENDIX I. 281
ok iafnskiott brazt bann vi^ tilkomanda kraptinvm.
sem hann vaknaSi af svefni ok braa i svndr annat
avgat ok spvrbi. Skal ek p>etta drecka pati minn.
Si-San dreckr hann ok );vi næst bergir hann fæzlv ok
5 styrkizt sva at fimta daginn leikr hann meS avSrv
vngmenni.
pessi hinn sami Go^efridvs atti enn a^ra .ij. fionv
ok var hvarfcveggi miok mædr ok matfarinn af vihv.
Nv cr hann sa ok reyndi hvat sia linskavti meS bloSi
JOheilags Thomas erkibyskvps vann þessvm syni haos.
J?aa skiptir hann skavtann i tva Ivti. ok bindr aa hals
hvarvra hinna. ok var^ hvartveggi ]?egar beill. Ok at
li^nvm ]?a^an fra iiorvm vikvm e^a fira )>aa tekr hami
þessa lækning af halsi avSrum );eira. ok ];egar tekr
15 sveinninn at skialfva alh' af riSv. Hann vndraz nv
miok ))enna atbvi'S ok lætr p>egar aptr i sama sta^
þenna helgan dom ok er j^aa slikr heilivagr sem fyrr
syni hans.
lb., p. 82 4 if. Eptir þessi taknn fram komin vakna vi^
20 sivkir menn. ok sækia meirr ok meirr til hans graptar ok
lækningar. Einn ]7ar af borgarmonnvm blindr ok fatækr.
hann var alkvnnig hann haf^i tveim vetrvm
a^r syn mist, hefvir þaa son sinn iafnan ok stvndvm
hvsfrey sina fyrir lei^toga. En til þess at hann mætti
25 lei^togalavss ganga )?aa ba'S hann faa ser nockvrnn
dropa af ];essv hinv helga blo^i Thomas erkibyskvps.
ok hann feck, heim kemr hann ok ri^r yfvir avgv ser.
Ok i ]>yi bill fellr a golfvinv hia honvm son hans
vngr er varla kvnni ganga. ok kve'Sr vi^ hatt ok
30 grætr. Hann sprettr vpp skiott ok gleymir þvi er
hann hafSi abr giort. s var var af avgvm ser blobinv ok
þrifr til sveinsins. ok fyrri en hann feingi til hans
naö þaa sa hann. hverr maSr vissi hann a^r blindau
hafva verit. ok hverr maSr sa hann nv sianda.
35 lb., p. 82, 2.5 if. Kona ein havlltt fær þaa ok heilsv aa
þessvm paskvm er het Ermelin. iiorvm vetrvm abr fell
hvn ok meiddiz kneit sva at knytti sinarnar ok krepti
fotinn ok styddi hvn sik viiS staf i Ibtar stalS. ok cigi
282 APPENDIX 1.
matti hvn eitt stig staflavst ganga. Nv af tilspvrnii
hans iartegna J?aa ferr hvn til Kristz kirkiv ok bi^r
bænar sinnar ser til heilsv. ok er hvn kemr J^ar. þaa
ferr hvn ni^r þar sem mallavss ma^r haf^i a^r ni^r
fallit. bravzt þar vm ok velltizt i niiklvm ohægendvm 5
allt til aptans. at lycktvm viö nott riss hvn vpp
þrejtt ok )7o heil. Baöv menn liana sty^ia sik vi^
staf. en hvn kva^ ser enga þorf þess. kvaz eigi vilia
sto^ )7aa er gv^ haf^i gefvit henni heilsv.
lb., p. 86,3 ÍF. I þann tima varv þaa enn lyktir allir 10
kreptir (.'k stvkvr ok engir mattv ly^menn atgavngv
na. J7ar sem steinþio hans var. nema ]?at væri leyniliga.
En folkit þolir ilia ok segir hina lærSv menn vilia
miiinka ok ni^r drepa dyrS gv^s ok bins sæla Thomas
erkibyskvps. ok sem þeir villdi follgit fe i iorSv eiga 15
ok var^veita sva at eingi nyti. Bi^ia þaa vpp Ivka
kraptinn. enn byrgia eigi tilsoknn ok heilsvgiof vi^
sivka menn. Ok er korsbræ^r sia fcrv þvilika folksins.
þaa giora þeir at villd hinna. þo at kirkian stæ^i ti^a-
lavss. Quarto nonas Aprilis favstvdaginn i paskavikv 20
varv vpploknar hvríiir ok lasar sva at hans groptr ok
stein];ro var þaa avllvm heimil til atsoknar. hvernn
dag matti þar sia nockvr dyr^lig taknn. )7ar mattir
]?v sia brvnninn Davids vpplokinn til hreinsanar
syndgvm ok savrgvm þar ok hrær^a svndtiornina af 25
einglinvra. ok eigi einn til heilsv leiddan. helldr marga.
]?ar matti ok sia akriun Axi ^ genginn ok davggva^an
bæ^i of van ok ne^an. J>vi at svmvm þar gratavndvm
likams mein veitizt heilsa. en svmvm sytavndvm
syndir sinar ok andar sar gafz þar liknn ok leiSretta. 30
þar maa ok sia olevm in lechito vþrotnanda. at er
miskvnn almattigs gvös. Sia þar meS kerin Helisei
ok avll me^ litlv oleo. ok þo vaxanda avllvm til
fyllar. )?vi at j^angat flvttvzt margir sivkir. en aptr
forv heilir ok miskvnnarfvllir. þaa endrlifna^i l^ar andi 35
læröra manna meS Jacob, ok sva sem vaknendr af
> See II., p. 86, note 28.
APPENDIX I. 283
svefni ok vorv þaa hvgga^ir ineb fagnaSi. En þo braz
enn bavmrinn yfvir hvgganina ok var^ rikri. ]>\i at
þeim var eigi lofvat at lofva gv^ eptir efnvm. ne þenna
hinn helga inann. bvarki i ti^agioi-b ne vppbvi-Si
o iartegna. En ])o var<5 mart ok stort til stormerkia
hvernn dag.
Þannvg var tlvtt at )nimi' konvm ok )>ar niSr lavg^
kona fotveil er het Alditlia. jn-iv misseri hafbi hvn
alldregi aa sinn fot stigit. ok la hvn i reyckiv alia
10 þaa stvnd ok var iafnan nær ætlat dav^a. I vinstra
fæti hennar laa verkr i kne. ok þroti sva mikil(l) at
]?a^an af knytti sinarnar en krepti fotinn. ok haf^i
hvn sva mikinn sarleik. at vaiia J^olSi hvn sinni
heudi vi^ at koma. En J^aSan ferr hvn sva at allr
15 )?roti ok sarleikr var brottv or fæti hennar. Ok til
vitnisbvr^ar gelinnar heilsv. þaa lystr hvn hai-tt hnefva
sinvm aa kneit. at siandvm mavrgvra mavnnvm. ok
J?otti avllvm mikils vm vertt er saa. en þo var h\Ti
iafnan hoi It si^an. Ok fyrir þvi vai'S sva at eigi er
20 vartt at vita ok halfv si?r at dæma. j^vi at ver trvvm
hans heilagleik at þvilikv matt hafva hennar fot
græ^a me'S f\'llv sem annarrar konv þar i Kaneia er
Alvena het. ressa konv haf^i sva vanheilsa leikit
ok beyg^a at hvn matti eigi vpp rettazt ok hvergi
25 matti hvn staflavst flytiazt sex misseri i sifellv. hvn
legz til bænar fyrir steinþro hans ok riss þa^an heil
vpp ok rett sva at hvn )'yrfti alldri si^an staf ne
sto^.
lb., p. 102. I þeim sta§ e^a )'orpi er heitir Bedefor •
30 densis var einn ma^r sva sarlicrha leikinn at avo[vm
hans var vtleyptt ok eistvni. ok hvartveggia i iorS
QTafvit. en sakar til kvnnvm ver eioi at se^jia. ok i
þessvm harinkvælvni kallar j'essi hinn avmi mai^r aa
hinn helga Thomas erkibyskvp ser til liknar. ok |'ar
35 fyrir fær hann a[)tr at fvUv syn sina ok avgv ok sva
aSra latna limv. pessi iartegnn var miok grvnv^ i
fyrstv. )7ar til var til fullz ranzakat. at han(s) kvnnir
284 APPENDIX 11.
menn vitnvöv þat sem eigi matti sia eöa vita. Ok
Hvgi byskvp af Dynholmvm let sina tva klerka hand-
taka hann ok forvitnazt vm getna^arlimvna ok finna
]7eir Srinnliga ]m me^ lionvm fvllkomna. En sion var
savgv rikri vm syn hans ok avg-v. þvi at p'at var 5
avllvm fyrir avgvm.
lb., p. 94. Roddbert prior at OxeneforS var staddr
i Sikiley xii. vetrvm fyrr ok for lei^S sina fra borginni
Katania ok til Siracusan. ok la vegrin fram mei íir^-
invm Adriatikvm. ok sva nær at brim ok bylgia siov- 10
arins meö afalli vindaiins brestr a vinstra fæti hans
sva at jn'ota ok ro^a lavst i lærit eptir, ok stvnd er
hann hvilldiz i Siracusan. ok hafSi vi^ bæ"(Si bakstr
ok bat vi'S plastr. þaa svina'Si ok myktizt fotrin. ok
II. 15
Extract from *'Mariu Saga," Ed. C. E. Uiiger, Christiauia,
1871 (after Cod. Membr. ISTo. 11, quarto, in the Icelaudic Collec-
tiou of MSS. at the Ro^^al Library, Stockholm). Cfr. Thomas
Saga I., 20 if.
Af Thoma erkibyskupi.
Sva er senniliga skrifat, at einn klerkr Thomas at
nafni var a vngvm alldri til nams i Paris a Frakk-
landi. pessi bleza^r ma^r hinn vngi Thomass var
þegar gieddr ok geislaSr me^ agiötu si'Sfei^Si, halldande 20
sÍDn likam ok sal i hreinvm meydomi, );ar me^
hiartanliga elskande vara fru sanctam Mariam mo^vr
Cristz, er fyrir gengr öllum þeim me^ haleitu epter-
dömi, sem sic var^ueita storvm hreinliga i fogru
skirlifi. pegar i öskvblomi, sem fyrr var greint, setti 25
signa^r Thomass gv^s mo-Svr Mariam sinn vakran
verndarmann ok göfugligan geymara, J^jonande hoDni
hversdao-liga me^ hiartaligum skierleik heilagra bona,
ok );ar meS sem hann )?roaz i klerkdomi diktar hann
APPENDIX II. ' 285
drottningunni niarga fagra lofsöngva, pa seiii lieilog
kristni helldr ok hefir si^an ok syngr fagrliga sealfum
gu'Si ok bans sotustu mo|?vr til virþingar. Nu ])o at
Thomass lifSe vel ok go^mannliga vpp a sinn likam,
5 voro eigi a^rir skolaklerkar bans kumpanar sva orugg-
ir til hreinlifis a þeim tima, helldr liafi5i huerr ok
einn leyniliga vnnvstv ser til skemtanar.
Nv berr sva til einn vetr, sem Tboraass er enn i
skolanvm at fostv inDgangr kemr at hendi, ok klerkar
10 lifa i verra lagi. pri^ia dag binn nösta fyrir oskvdag
korna þeir saman i einn staS me^ glennsi ok gamni
miclv. Segir ]?a bueiT ö"Srum, buersv bans vnnasta
er vitr ok vel fallin i ollvm sinvm atfei'^iim, ok setia
siþan stefnvdag eptir vm morgininn, at ]ni skal bverr
15 fram bera )?at klenodivm, sern bans vnnasta befir
honvm gert. Enn Tbomas sitr bia ok ]?egir, );a er
þvilicir Ivtir ero tala^ir, J?viat bann bafSi enga unnustu
nema vara frv sanctam Mariam, fyrir pa grein befir
bann ok ecki klenodivm, pat er bann megi fram bera
20 fyrir sina kvmpana. Her fyrir er Tbomas gabba^r ok
bleginn af peim klerkvnvm, at bann gerSi sic sva
einleitan fra ö^rvm mönnvm. Ok sem peir slita pvi-
likar rö^vr, gengr signaör Tbomas til kirkiv ok fellr
til bonar fyrir alltari sobar Marie sinnar vnnvstv
25 bi^eande bana meS tarvm, at bon veiti bonvm til
bvggunar nöckut klenodium. Eptir vm myrgininn
aSr messvtimi se kominn bafa klerkar stefnu sin i
millvm, sem talat var fyrra dag. Berr pa buerr peira
fram pann grip, sem bverium til beyrir, lit a sipan til
30 Tbomam me^ glennzligv vi'Sbrag^i eptir spyrjande,
hvat bann se fram setiande. Hann svarar sva : " £k
" befir eina kiervstu ok sotvztu vnnvstn," seorir bann,
'' pa er mer fer-Si fagrt klenodivm a pessi nott ok pat
" sama skal ek nv bigat bera."' Hann gengr si]>an i
35 sitt stvdivm ok finnr i einvm staíS i berberginv, bvar
stendr sniabuitr kistill Ivktr vandliga ok orpinn meS
sva miclv yfirvöttis forrai mcistarliga, at engi iarMigs
286 APPENDIX II.
mannz hönd matti sva fagrliga lika ok grafa ok allfc
anil at at gera. SignaSr Thomas tekr \^p )?enna kistil
me^ miclvm fagna^i, berr fram fyrir kvmpana ok
bi"Sr ])a vpp Ivka. Enn sva sem kistil linn er vpp
lokinn syniz þar i liggiande allr byskupligr skrv^i 5
sva litils vaxtar, at hann matti allr liggia i )?eim
litla bov^c. Skiptir nu skiott vm rom klerkanna,
lofuSu nv allir gv^ ok bans signu'Su mo'Svr, þviat
þeim gaf vel skilia, at þessi kistill var eigi iar^neskr,
helldr til kominu af sealfri himinrikis cvria, at hann 10
meti sinvm farmi skyllde vera fyrir sogn okominna
Ivta, J>eira er ofarr meir fylldvz innan p»essa mannz
lifdaga.
Fylldiz ok si];an einkar fagrliga þat, er )>essi kistill
spaSi fyrir, þviat þessi gvSs maSr Thomas enski son 15
Gillibertz ok Moalldar otta^r ok foddr i Lvndvnum
var^ siþan Kantvariensis erkibyskup ok allz Engiandz
primas ok postoligs sotis legatvs vm allt England.
Ok er þat vel ver'Sact, J>viat hann lifi)i sitt lif storvm
heilagliga ok finnz alia gotv verit hafa enn rett- 20
visazti, er hvarki ballade nockvrn tiraa rettvm domi
fyrir femvtvm ne manna mvn. Sva var hann sterkr
ok stö^vgr meS kirkvnni moti Heinreki konvngi ok
bans ra^vneyti, at hann veik ser huarki af rettri
reglv fyrir konvngsins bli^u ne stri'Su hotvm rie har^- 25
indvm. Sva var hann rettvisliga har^r viö hina
omilldari, at uel matti hann þeira hegna^arhamarr
heita, enn fatökra manna ok harmþrvnginna var hann
hinn haleitazti hvggari. Nv ef sökin, sem engi vitr
ma^r efar, gerir manninn go^an i gv^s avgliti, pa 30
finnz bans sok ecki rettvisligra ; þviat hann striddi
moti gv^s ouinvm, er kirkivnni ok hennar rettindum
villdu me^ ollu fyrirkoma me^ sinvm bolvv^vm
ovonvm. Enn hann villdi, sem vai*^, öllvm þeim
ovenivm brott hrinda, sem höföingiarnir höf^u a'Sr 35
leitt vpp a kirkivnnar ska^a. Ecki finnz lifi bans
heilagligra, þviat hann fyrrleit alia beimsins fegr'S, þar
APPENDIX ir. 287
rne^ fiarluti fröndr ok vini ok allan )>eira felagskap
fyriv gV(Ss ast, takande a sic ok sina frendr fatöktar
vtleg-S me^ marghattivbum inö^um odumiligra mein-
gerba • vi • ár i samt. Enn aptr tekinn af vtlegSinni
5 meS fuUri vndirhyggio Heinreks konungs ok hans
manna þolir liaiin signa'Sr heim kominn til Cantva-
riain sarlio-an davSa.
En hvar eba nie^ hverivm liotti liann let lif sitt,
j^a er p>at öllvm kunnict, at hami var drepinn i lieil-
10 agri hcjfiitkirkiv allz Engiandz, })eiri sem ollvm ubrvni
er tignari heri ok haleitari. Her me^S var liann pindr
af sinvm vndirmömivm ok andligiim sonvm. Enn
)>ann tima sem j^eir gv^rokir glopanienn voro inn komn-
ir i kirkivna ok skokv sin sverS yfir erchibyskvpsins
15 hofSi enn lifanda hneio-^iz sa o-vds via oc bans sötvztv
mo^vr elskari at nalogu kirkivnnar altari, sic meiS
þvilicvm orSum a hendi felande solli Marie gvá^
mo^vr : " pessarrar kirkiv patronis ok hinvm heilaga
" Dionisivm pinslarvatt fel ek mic a hendi ok kirki-
20 '' vnnar sok." Eptir þessi orS ofirar hann sic hinvm
hösta gy^i i pislarvöttis forn framfallinn fvrir heilact
altari, sa er optliga er vanr mei) tara vthellingv at
fornfera Kristz likam me^ hans blezaba blo^e. Sva
var þessi himnakonvngs virktavin gTÍmliga felldr i
25 gv^s vingardi, at krismaligr partr byskvpligrar krvnv
var sniSinn me^ havsnvm mikill af hans hofSi. Ok af
þvi odömiliga sári floSi sva mikit bloS vm daginn oc
nottina eptir, at kirkian matti vel kallaz sem lavgut
i hans blo^i. Enn ))vi meir varu fylgiandi lutir likam-
30 ligri natturv gagnstabligir, J?viat bans asiona blekna^i
eigi eptir sva stor högg ok sár. Eigi þornabi hami,
eigi grofv þyckvar bruckvr hans enni ))vi belldr,
eigi p>röngdi ok nöckvrs konar avgvnvm, eigi sign
)?av ne svcku, eigi flavt ok nöckvrs kyns vátt vt af
35 mvnni e^a nösvm, eigi var halsinn skorpnabr ne her-
þarnar nibr sigv, eigi sealfr likaminn stir^ari ne skinnit
a bonvm rvmara, ok a engvm lut uSa lini lians likania
288 APPENDIX II.
matti sea nöckvrs konar þat mark, at hann ];orna^i lie
þyrri e'Sa at lionum setti, helldr sva sem lifandi mvnde
þessa mannz dav^a likame vera, þat me^ þessu synande,
at liaDs davde er honvm i gv^s avgiiti raeirr til vii^u-
ligs vei^leika enn nöckvrrar minkvnar, var^ueittri 5
andlitzins fegr^ ok yíirbragöi, skirleik ok iDÍartleik ;
syniz hann ]?a nöckvra bli^n i sioninni frammi Lafa,
sem hann bar iafnliga lifandi i sinu bleza^a briosti,
sva framt, at likara syndiz J^vi, at hann hefSi sotliga
sofnat, avgvm ok mvnni aptr loknvm me^ lifligvm lit, 10
enn hann hefSi sva har'San davSa ];olt me^ andvörp-
vm ok angri.
Thomas erchibyskup var ma'Sr einkar somiligr ok
kennimannligr i sinv lifi, harr ma^r a vöxt ok grann-
vaxinn, lioslita'Sr, svartr aa har, neflangr ok rettleitr, 15
bli'Sligr i yfirbrag'Si, hvass i hvgviti, inndoU ok astu^igr
i allri vi^ro^v, skorinor'Sr ok skyr i frambvi^^i, stamr
nöckvt litt. Sva var hann hvass i skilningi ok stor-
liga glavggr, at hann greiddi vitrliga vaudar spvrn-
ingar. Sva var hann ok minnigr, at þat sem hann 20
heyr'Si um sinn i heiiavgum ritningvm e^a lagadomvm,
var honvm o-reitt ok tiltekt hvern tima, er hann villdi
frammi hafa. GvcSs moþvr Mariam elska^i hann vm-
fram alia menn ok fal henni a hendi alia sina fram-
fer^ nærst almatkvm gv^i. Sva var hann bl^zaSr 25
i allri sinni framfer^ sem nv bar ravn a, at gvS almatt-
igr gerjn hann makligan þvilikrar dyr^ar. Ymfram
flest domi falla dyr^arlutir til J^essa pislarvátz, )?viat
hann tignar lofligt lif ok davSasavk, vigshipallr, stund
ok sta^r. Rannsaka lifit, ok mvntv finna haleitt oh 30
heilact, er hann fyrir ]?vi gv^s iatari. Grein davSa-
sökina, ok er eigi hans eins sök, nema helldr allrar
kristninnar, fyrir )?vi er hann sannr pislarvattr. Lit a
vigslupallinn ok er hann hinn ozti byskvp ok allz
Englands primass ok postoligs sötis legatvs, ok ma 35
hann af þvi sannliga heita postoli. Leita at liflatz
stvndinni, ok hittiz a hati^ drottinligs bvr^ar. YirS
iJ>PENDIX III. 289
daTSasta^inn, ok er höfvSkirkian i Englandi. Hverir
voro dau^amenn hans? Eigi giö^ingiar, helldr \aidir-
menn hans ok andligir synir.
Nv af þessa mannz áyv^ ok iartegnvm fagni heilög
5 kristni, mer ok mo^ir, dyi'8 hafa ö^laz af drapi bro^vr-
lign. Fagni hon ok Joseph selldan af brö"Sra sinna
öfvnd ok nv rikianda i himinrikis höll. Enn j^essi
hinn haleiti ok hinn göfngligi gvís vin Thomas Can-
tuariensis erchibyskvp ok allz Englandz primas ok
10 postoligs sötis legatvs var pindr a þvi ari, er li-Sin voro
fra vars herra holldgan .m, ara .c. ok Ixx. ok eitt, a
fimtögiincla ári ok )?ridia sealfs sins alldrs, fiorda ka-
lendas Jaiivarii, þri^ia dag vikv, a elliptv tiS dags,
fimta dag iola, at vars herra likamlig bvrSarti^, honvm
15 til erfi^is, yr^i þeim til huiUdar ok haleitrar dyr^ar.
Til þeirar hinnar sömv lei^i oss varr lavar^r Jesus
Kristr, sa sem bö^e er upphaf ok endir, me^ fe-Sr ok
helgvm anda lifir ok rikir einn gv^ i þrenningu vm
allar alldir verallda. Amen.
20 APPENDIX III.
An Icelandic hymn in praise of St, Thomas.
Thoiiuts dictur ercMhiskups}
Hæstur heilagur andi,
hei^Lir þinn bi^ eg standi ;
25 gef mier gæ'Szku siiinna,
suo giorla mætta eg jnna
dyi*^ og dasemd jnna,
dagliga naer a5 skina;
m^^k j^u tungu mina.
' From a skin-book in the Arna-
Maguæaa library at Copcnhap:on,
K541.
No. 713, 4to, pp. 5S, 59, from circa
1550.
290 APPENDIX III.
Geisle gii^s enn frome
giordiz heilagur Thome,
runnenn upp rue's bloma
bædi me'5 tign og soma,
0 hafinn j hæsta sæte
hei^urinn tru eg at bæti
herra thomas enn mæti.
Veglegur vigslv palla
me'S virSÍDg gey mdir alia,
10 þv elska^ir gu^ meö iprj^i
umfram alia lySi,
ackta^er atferS dyra,
eingen naer at skyra,
þu kunner kristne at styra.
15 Eingiandz uegur og some
erchibiskup Thome,
lySur og landzmenn smaller
þeir lofa hann Thomas aller ;
hann mintiz milldi verka,
20 mest fyri sina klerka,
ef i^run fengu sterka.
Allopt avma fæddi,
einkvm naukta klæddi,
bli'Sur og biartvr at lita,
25 berandi asian huita.
hiellt hreinlifis dyg^ir,
hata^i fals og lyg^ir,
aungum veitir styg^ir.
Gioi'^ir guSs lavg bio'Sa
30 græ^arinn eingiandz þio^a,
ly^ir landzins snialler
lofuöu Thomam aller,;
kveiktizt kur en liote
kappa gu^s aa mote
35 , si^ar synv bote.
APPENDIX III. 291
Ferligt forz og bræ^i
fra eg vra landit stæ^i,
gior^u gvmraar vida
gu^s uin moti stri^a;
5 liet af lögunum ganga
lofa^an Thomam fanofa
og rakv j utleg^ stranga.
Veturna vij. enn svinne,
svo hefi eg lagt j minne,
10 it\T: aldri na"Si
erchibiskups la^i ;
heima satn hiyggvir
herrans frændur dyggvir,
hann j utleg^ ^yggWi^-
15 S(yrg)er^ sveiten auma
sina racta(?)^ drauma,
huert skulum hialpar leita,
e"Sur hver ma biarger veita ?
finzt nu fatt til bota,
20 flester anauS hliota,
faum vier dau^ann skiota.
F(ang)inn ^ gu^s nam fregna,
fri^arins ba^ til þegna,
buimi biargir at veita
25 byzt hann heira at leita^
liktizt liufur at næmi
lausnarans eptir dæme
heim fra eg her(r)ann kæme.
Aumer illzku syna
30 alldri letv duina,
upp me^ einii ra^i,
egnder pukans sa'Si,
fer-Sazt flockurenn bar Si
* Conjecture ; for the letters iu
brackets there is a hole in Cod.
2 Conjecture ; rac'la, Cod.
' Conjecture \ hole in Cod.
T 2
292 APPENDIX III.
fram at biskups gar^i,
So aunguan mann þat uar^i.
Heilagur hirSer sau^a
hræ^izt ei sin dan^a,
5 faldi sig favSur a hendi,
fram j korinn iiendi ;
kongs menn kvnnu ilia
kirkiu fri^i at spilla,
J?ung var þeirra villa.
IQ ÆSa ogna braver
jna aa biskups na^er,
aungv vætta eira.
ei )?arf hier vm fleira.
letu laufann skipta,
25 lifi thomas suipta.
þung var þeirra ogipta,
Fyrir pru^ligt pislar vætte,
postulum likur at mætti,
þu þolder dapran dau^a,
9Q dreyi'an gafztii enn rau^a,
fyrir milldi ok myskunn sæta
meineri giorer at bæta.
ei ma þessa þræta.
PisJar vottur enn pini"Si,
25 pryddur biskups skiTi^i,
liggur j legsta^ hreinum,
leysir folk af meinum,
sannheilagur fyrir soma
saminn til helgra doma
^0 me"S sæmd j sialfri Roma.
Halter hrumer og o^er,
hverskyns aumar J^io'Ser,
aller aa þik heita,
aungum villtv neita ;
35 þu græ^er sara og siuka,
APPENDIX IV. 293
svo rna or^um liuka.
minkar mattinn piika.
Lattv, enn liufe herra,
lavstv vora þverra,
5 arna oss allz ens o-oda
vi^ yfirdomarann ];io^a,
þins mun J7rællinn hliota
þurfa fylgis niota,
svo hann fae huofo-un skiota.
10 Yaxe vist me^ soma
vegur þinn, sancte thoma,
aukizt æ me^ piydi^
allir LI'S eo- at hly^i.
hier skal bro^urenn standa,
15 hverfa burt til landa.
lof se helgum and a.
Amen.
Appendix IV.
Canterbury Cathedral Register, R. 19, fol. 83.
Littera fraternitatis concessa Wytfrido filio Juarii de
20 Insula de Island.
Omnibz Xpi iidelibus ad quos p'sentes I're pervene-
rint Job'es Sancte Cant. Eccl'ie Prior et ejusdem loci
Cap'lum sal'm in D'no sempiternam. Cum non decet
devocionis odoriferam faniam sub modio occultari, que
25 cotidie in martire glorioso sancte Thoma, eciam in iil-
timis terræ finibus, miraculorum fama clarius et cre-
brius elucescit, mentesque hominum ad superne clari-
tatis aciem alicit et invitat ; ad communem omnium
liominum noticiam eo fervenciori desiderio cu])imus
30 pervenire, quo nonnullos credimus ea occasione ad ma-
joris devocionis gratiam incitari, ct ut ipsius patroui
29 4i APPENDIX IV.
nostri beata merita persequamur, et in ejus mentis
confidentibus subsidium pietatis divine, quantum ad
nos attinet caritative imperciamur. Hinc est, quod
nos Prior et cap'lum p'fate ecclesiæ dicti martiris mi-
5 nistri humiles et devoti, ob devocionem et precum in-
stanciam quibus penes nos vir venerabilis Wytfridus
filius Juarii de Insula de Ysland pro se, matre, uxore,
et liberis suis, institit et ob favorem quo dictam ec-
clesiam nostram et martirem gloriosum devotissime
1 0 revei'etur, ex cuius propagacionis linea se asserit de-
scendisse, caritatis intuitu sibi, suisque matri, uxori,
et liberis quos nunc procreavit aut in posterum pro-
creabit, omnium devocionum participacionem que in
dicta sancta ecclesia Cantuar. die ac nocte in conspectu
15 exercentiu' aut fient inperpetuum, tam in vita quam
in morte elargimur teque W}i:fridum in domo nostra
capitulari una nobiscum presentem, unanimiter, Mar-
garetam matrem tuam, Gntredam uxorem tuam, Ju-
arium, Edmundum, Ellendrum, Thurlacum, Ceciliam,
20 Ulfridam, Margaritam, Ingeridam tuos liberos, licet
absentes, ad nostrarum oracionum suifragia et alia
pietatis opera, ac in fratres et sorores nostras, tenore-
presenciarum specialiter acceptamus. In cujus rei tes-
timo' sigir n'l'um co'e p'sentibus est .appensum. Dat'
25 Cantuar in domo n'ra capitulari vii° die mens. Oc-
tobr. secundum cursum et computacionem eccl'ie An-
glicane Anno D'ni Millesimo quadringentesimo quinto-
decimo.
GLOSSARY.
GLOSSARY.
A, A.
A, 1. and 3. sing. yres. ind. ofeiga,
q. V.
A, pj'ep. ivifh dat. and aec. — A.
with dat. — a, local ; indicative of
absence of motion: — 1, o«, upon :
syndist sem eitt pell lægi á piltin-
um, I., 14,23; á litlum báti, L,
246, 13 ; á baki on the bach, I.,
230,19; á múi'inum, I., 222,24;
á veginum, II., 102, 23. — 2. in^
within : á himni, á jarðríki, I.,
14' 115 12* — ^* Ic^nporal ; in : á
nýjum tímum, L, 2,^2 ; á dögum
Úrbani, I., 4, ^3 ; á hans dögum,
I., 12,5; á þeiri tíð, I., 56,5; á
þeiri sömu nótt, I., 230, § ; á nátt,
dag, I., 98, 28« — 2. at : á ýmsum
tímiim at various times, I., 2, 4. —
c. objective ; in : þvíathann liafÖi
á henni ... alt sitt traust, I.,
18, 14. — 2. at, (^denoting occupa-
tion, and in many cases equivalent
in sense to the English prefix 0-,
ichcn followed by a present par-
ticiplc) : á dýraveiði, ahunting,
I., 6,21, 230,10- — 3. at, by, of,
{indicative of continuance of
cpcration) : þar til at Guðs mildi
Á — cont.
mæddist á þessu réttdænii, I., 8, 17.
— 4. of, {serving as a ci?'cum-
scription of a genitive) : krefr
haun þegar sjálfr útgreiðslu á öUu
gózinii, I., 188,10. — B. ivith acc.
— a. local; implying motion about
or towards the place. — \,on,upon :
sell' úþolligt gjald á klaustr, I.,
6, 7. — 2. into, unto : farim báðar
samt lit á víðan völl, I., 16,8;
ofíliga kernr á eitt mot góðr vili
Guðs ok illr ok vondr vili manns,
I., 70, 8 ; ivllt norðr hingat á Eng-
land, II., 108, 12 ; hereto also
belo7igs the adverbial phrase
á brutt, (orig. á hvant= into the
road) ; abroad, away, I., 226, 12.
— 3. against: herjar, eigiá heiÖ-
inm dóm, heldr á hinn saklausa
svein, I., 6,4,5; þóít fjandinn
með sínum fylgjorum grimmist a
mik, I., 206, 11 ; er Heinrekr
konungrstriddi upp á Gaskoniam,
I., 58, 4. — 4. corresponding to
the Engl, prefix a-, when indi-
cative of inotion, á liæl aheal,
aback=:backwa?'ds, I., 206, 12« —
b. temporal ; at, by, during : á
daginn by day, during the day-
time^ I., 50,
16'
c. modal or
instrumental ; in, by : -A eingva
298
GLOSSARY
A — cont.
lund, á alia lund, Í7i no way^ in
every loay, I., 14,2, 'i'8, 12 ; á
eingan hátt, I., Q6j ^ ; á nokkura
lika mynd, in somewhat the same
10 ay, I., 18, iQ. — d. partitive ; as
tOj of: svartr á hár of, with black
hair, I., 2'^, 9. — e. adverbial ; on,
at : var þetta svá þjtt af vitrum
mönnum, at meiri mundi verða
dýrð ok virðing þessa burðar . . .
enn jarÖlig kristni mætti með taka,
eÖr skilnÍQg á koma, I., 14, 3-g.
Á (ár, ár),/., a river, I., 12,15.
Abbadís, /., an abbess, I., 202,28?
254,3.
Abbatia,/., an abbey, I., 256,12«
Áblástr (-rs, dat. áblæstri), m., in-
spiration, II., 230, g.
Abóta-dæmi, n., id., I., 6,3, 296, 23.
Aboti (-a-ar), in., an abbat, I., 10, u.
Á-bjrgð (-ar), /., responsibility, I.,
362,1.
Abyrgðar-lauss, öc?., ;ío^ responsible,
^ I., 268, 18.
A-byrgjast, v. )ned., to be responsible
_/ó;',L, 364,28.
Aðr, adv., before : sem áðr er tjáð,
I., 50, 13 ; áðr liann kemr ina á
fimdinn, I., 76,22; áðr ok síðan,
before and after, I., 130,8. —
2. formerly, previously, hann var
áðr prióiT Beccensis, I., 10, q, ^q.
— 3. first : hann resignerar áðr
leu ok auðræSi, I, 82, ig. — 4.
already : virðist eigi nauðsynligt
at setja sem með nýrri letrgerð
þat, er áðr var fært ok fagrliga
samit, I., 2, 10 ; ok hefir áðr tekit
kærligt orlof af Heinriki konungi,
I., 128, 1 ; þótt ríkir menn e?r
Áðr — cont.
konungsmenn haldi nii áðr þe ssar
eignir, I., 118, 20; útlægðr er nú
áðr erkibyskupinn, I., 450, 3.
Conjwict. with ind.ajid subj. — a.
with ind. — 1. ere, until, áðr dauði
konungs ga£ honum aftrlivarf, I.,
10, 18 ; áðf eldsgangr eyddi þeira
góz, I., 12, 11 ; áÖr hann gekk til
þeirar sveitar at gerast Kantúari-
ensis erkidjákn, I., 38
> 1 5
áðr
konungr dæmir þenna Thdmam
meiri sæmdar makligan, I., 46, 22 ;
ok þar hélt vit um tíma, at greinir
miindi til renna, áðr þat sam-
þyktist öllum, I., 88,13; þaðan
var harðla skamt áðr dssina sjálfr
tök við, I., 32, 11« — 2. ere, when :
áðr erkibyskupi sýnist umráðs
vert, I., 44, 17 ; with an emphatic
enn following, prius quam, er
eigi langt aÖr enn sjálfr herra
konungi'inn hefr sina ræðu, I.,
146,13. — b. imth subj., ere,
before: sem nogliga mun lysast
i þessu máli áðr liiki, I., 44, i^.
A^venta, f., advent: í fyrstu viku
aðventunnar,{)at er,einni nótt eftir
Andreas-messu, I., 488,24.
A-eggja (aS), v.a., to egg on, to spur,
to incite, stundum áeggjandi at
hann krjúpi konunginum, I.,
^ 204,8.
A-eggjan (-ar), i.,egging-on, urging-
on, spurring-on, instigation, I.,
230, ig. — 2. exhortation, her meí5
lögðum vér mjúka bæn með
áeggjan til batnaðar, I., 380.25-
— 3. suggestion, prompting : þó
at þú afsakir þik svá, hefir þat
gerzt fyrir þína áeggjan, I., b2^, 21-
GLOSSARY.
299
Á-eggjanar-orð, Ji. pL, inciting
words, revengeful language^ I.,
512, 26«
Af. prep, with dcit. — 1. local, with
an implied notion of evolution ;
from : efldi hann klaustr af
grundvelli í þeim stað, I, 10, ^.
— 2. of motion ; from, out of:
af himni, I., 14, 9 ; af skola I.,
28, 6 ; lit af konungs-garði, I.,
6, 1 ; kemr ilmandi rödd af loftinu,
I., 16, 9 ; brutt ferð af Teröldinni,
I., 16, 19 ; Thomas ríðr nii af Lim-
diinum, I., 84, 3. — 3. temporal ;
from: alt af bernsku, I., 428,3-
— 4. causal ; from : af þeim inn-
leiðslum, siSlersum ok óvönum
leiddi svá langar limar, at margs
manns lif dróg til litlegðar, I.,
6, 16 ; ok enn grunar oss, af sjálfra
yðarra orðum, at J)ér séð eigi at
eins frammlútir á oss í fjársökiim
fji'ir annarra hönd, I., 204, 20« —
5. privative ; from : vann Yil-
hjálmr England af Haraldi, I,, 4, iq.
— 6. partitive; from, out of:
fleiri enn einn eSr tveir af þeira
fjöld hafa skrifat lif ok lofsam-
ligar mannraunir Thome Can-
tuariensis, L, 2, 3 ; at hóglífismaðr
hafi nærhendis hvat er hann
girnist i Guðs lofi af þraiit ok
þolinmæði þessa píslarrotts, I.,
2,16- — 7. objective ; about, con-
cerning, respecting, touching : af
stiga þeim er lesit in speculo, I.,
8, iq; af J)eim ráðnm er svá lesit,
I., 18,8; lieilög bók segir svá
mikit af bans meistaradom, I.,
20, 3. — 8. instrumental ; by.
through : Ijost er vorðit af letrum
Af — cont.
þeim, I., 2, 2- — 9. active ; by: var
þetta svá þýtt af vitrum mönnum,
I., 14,3.
Afar-kostr, jn., iniquitous terms,
xinjust conditions, I., 268, ^q?
276, 17, 378, iQ. — 2. excessive
masterfuhiess, overbeaHng con-
duct, I., 222, 13, IL, 8, 10.
Afar-orð, n. pi., high words^ threats,
L, 156,21,162,1-.
Af-brot, n., trespass, I., 366, g,
404,9,498,9.
Af-dæma (d) v.a., to condemn, to
annul: hann orskurðar ok af-
dœmir þat fordæmiligt er, I..
302, 19 ; þessk níu vanar eru
bölvaðar siðleysur ok afdæmdar
allri Guðs kristni, I., 304, g.
Af-eigna (að), v.a., to renounce : a.
ser alia hlýðni við Rómakirkjii,
I., 330, 10.
A-feUi, n., peril, danger: biðjandi,
at hann firri þá alia samt svá
bráðu áfelli, sem nú liggr yfir,
I., 162,22; ti^iin tjár, ... at
erkibjskup vægi til fyrir þröngv-
andi nauðsyn, at lærdómrinu
forðist enn meinligra áfelli, I.,
164, ij.. — 2. oppression : hverjum.
son minn, heyra þessi orð } rétt
yðr sjálfiim . . . er jáðuð at
halda þá bölvaða konungsins
vana, kirkjunni ok klerkuuum til
áfellis ok lináða, L, 170,05. — 3.
infliction oý ecclesiastical ce?isure,
penance, punishment : biðjum vtT,
at þér temprið yÖra reiði fní for-
bo?5i ok banns áfelli, I., 384, 15 ;
því mun yðr sýnast ofmælt, at vér
leitaÖim saka eftir áfellit, 1.,
300
GLOSSARY.
Á-felli — cont.
406, 23 ; (þeir) skýra honum þar
með, hvert áfelli ySr gnæfir, I.,
458, 18 ; segir síðan öllu fólki
hátt ok vægðarlaust, hvert áfelli
komit er, at þeir skulu vera allir
sem bannsettir, er nær váro vígslo
unga konungs, I., 482, 22« — 3.
calamity, affliction, 11., 22, jg,
114,25.
A£-fletta (t), v.a., to strip, to depinve
of : eru sumir öllu góðu afflettir
ok keyrðir af landi brutt í eilífa út-
legð,Í, 142,9.
Af-flutniug, f., misrepresentation,
slander^ I., 512, 23.
Af-gjald, n., rent, interest, requital^
II., 269, 22-
A£-ganga, f., deviation, straying,
error, trespass, I., 86, n.
Af-henda (d), v.a., to deliver, II.,
164, 10;
A£-högginD, -höggvinn, ad., cut off,
L, 384,20,11., 130,10.
Af-klæða, v.a., to undress, to strip,
I., 556, 19. — 2. " to unclothe,^' to
uncover, to unveil, to discover, I.,
176,12-
Af-kvæmi, 71., offsjjring, I., 390, n,
IL, 78,1,, 136,12.^
Ai-kynjaÖr, ad., degenerate, un-
natural. I., 542, 15.
Af-kynjast, v. med., with dat., to
degenerate, to show one^s self un-
worthy of : Guð íirri oss því, at
afkynjast svá vorri romverskri
kristni, I., 328, 19 ; sá Frakka-
konungr, sem gullsins missir af-
kynjast svá mjök sínu forellri, at
hann berr eigi um aldr úhalla
sína krúno, I., 478, 13.
Afl (-S, öfl), n., force, I. 540, i^. — 2.
validity, I., 124, 15.
Afla (að), v.a., to acquire, to obtain,
to secure; a. fjár, I., 6, 4, ^'•.476, 29,
II., 140, 22. — 2. to bring about, to
accomplish: I., 254:, q, 414, jg,
528, 17. — 3. to cause, to effect —
2,., with the per s. in dat., the thing
in gen. : lát þér eigi hrygðar afla
þetta efni, I., 80,24 5 þessar harma-
tölur allar samt afla erkiby-
skupi viðrkomningar, I,, 164, 21 ;
ma sýnast undarligt, at þvílík
frammferð aflaryðr eigi kinnroða,
I., 408, 24« — b. with the thing in
ace. : afla honum slikar hugsanir
mikla hrygð, I. 80, 21 ; Þ^t aflar
Giiðs manni mikla mæðu á þeim
degi, I., 298, 24 : þat aflar honum
nokkurn otta, I. 222,^0. — 4.
with til, to redound to, to be fruit-
ful of: nu ma auðsýnt vera
hversu heilögum Thómasi mundi
þat afla til verðleiks, I., 508, 9.
Af-laga, ad., abnormal, unlaicful,
^^ out of question^' I., 72, 15.
Af-lagÖr, ad., with dat., stripped
of, deprived of : her stendr svá
skrifat, at Thomas se aflagðr
sinum heiðr, I., 266, 3.
Af lagligr, ad., unlawful, II., 20, i,.
Af-lát, n.^ loss, damage, forfeiture,
II., 104, g. — 2. intermission,
cessation, an afláti, unceasingly ,
I., 456, 14.
Af-lausn, f., absolution, IL, 130, 3.
Af-leiða, c.a., to lead astray, IL,
186, 20' — Med., to go astray, I.,
164^23 5 ^^ depart from,l. 328, 13.
Af-leiddr, /J./?., deprived of, II.,
134,21.
GLOSSARY.
301
Af-lel(5ingr, m., shuffl,m(j, prevari-
cation : segja honum í augu, at
afleiðingr ok orðaglæsur bans . . .
stoða honum nu eigi, I., 458, ^e-
Af-letta, imp.^ to abate, ok sem aflett-
ir nokkut tárunum, I., 520, 22^
Afli (-a), ??i., stai/, aid, support,
help, I. 38, 20-
Af-lima (að), ?;.«., Í0 dismember, to
mutilate, I., 180, 14.
Afl-lau5s, ad., powerless, faint,
feeble, I., 232, 26-
A£-loka, v.a., to unlock, I., 24, ^g-
Afl-raun, yi, trial of strength, exer-
tion, II., 100, 18«
Al-lögligr, ad., unlawfid, perverse,
revolting, I., 334, jg.
Af-neita, v.a., to renounce, to repu-
diate, I., 336, 25«
Af-?aka, v.a., to excuse, to excidpate,
to justify. I., 172. 3^. — 2. to dis-
avoiv : þar með flytr hann, sem
■ honum var boÖit, at afsaka erki-
bjskupinn af öUu meingerðarkyni
til konungsins, I., 504, g. — 3. to
vindicate : ver erum sendir til
yðar, bræíSr, af Heinreki konungi
gamla þess erindis, at afsaka fyrir
yðr hans meinleysi, II., 10, 7.
Af-sakan, f, excuse, justification,
I., 174, 2 ; exculpation, I., 444. ^g.
Af-segjast, v. med., to renounce, I.,
330,25.
Af-setja, v.a, to suspend, to depose,
I., 500, 12-
Af-skapliga, adv., unlawfully,
wrongfully, intolerably, excess-
ively, I., 322, 5, 110, 0, 322, 5,
404, 1,, 454, 11.
Af-skapligr, ad., unlawful, intoler-
able, I., 134, 14*, unnatural, detest'
Af-skapligr — coid.
able, hateful, abo?ni?iable,l.,lS2,iQ,
356,24,400,2,420,3; II., 20,23-
Af-skeiðis, adv., astray, I., 142, ^.
332, j3.
Af-sleginn, ad., with dat., cut off
(/ro;7z,)L, 374,13; II., 48, 20-
Af-snið (-s), n., that which is cut
off, slice, I., 554, j.
Af-sniðinn, jo.p., cut off, excommu-
nicated, II., 275, ^t-
Af-stúka, f, a chapel in a cathe-
dral church or a minster, I.,
244, 16.
Aftan (-S, c?a^ apni, II., 246,26), ^'^-j
even, evening, I., 264, 3.
Aftan-söngr. m., " synaxis," vespers,
1., 534, 20? 22*
Af-tekt (-ar-ir),y., rent, income, re-
venue, I., 66, 8, Q2, 13, 296, 96-
Af-tigna, v.a., to degrade, to dis-
honour, to disgrace, I., 144,2,
266, 3,496,12; IL, 38, 9.
Aftr (aftur, (aptur), I., 548, 25), adv.,
1. éttcA', kemrRodbertaftr, I., 6,29;
konungrinn . . . kallar hann aftr
til sin, I., 64, 8 ; sem ek veik aftr
Í veg, II., 100, 10 ; kemr aftr a
armlegg herra sins, II., 142, 5. —
2. back again, again ; hann skip-
aÖi gjarna aftr eignina, I., 8,20;
skal aftr vikja til Heinreks kon-
ungs I., 12, 4 ; eigi kom fyrr
aftr straumrinn at sniia bjolit, I.,
34, J. — 3. to, up ; in the phrase :
strengja a. to put to (a door), to
shut up, to close, I., 424, ^.
Aftr-dreginn, jt?.p., drawn back into,
sunk into again, relapsed, 1 1., 70, ^.
Aftr-hvarf, n., return home, 1., 10, ^;
return, I., 480,22-
302
GLOSSARY.
Aftr-kast, w., rebuffs disappoint-
ment: enn er Yilhjálmi kemr
þetta aftrkast, bregðr honum heldr
Í brún {cfr. herra pafinn sendir
bref a bak þeim flettandi þá brutt
af öllu dómsatkvæÖi, 414, ;ig), I.,
414,20« — 2. refutation: nu hverr
semstundar atdimma þetta dýröar-
tákn með ósannligu mdtkasti,
má ek leggja honum þar í móti
læging ok aftrkast, II., 1 14, ^y.
Af tr-lag, n.^ return^restoration, hvárt
konungrinn vill halda orð sín um
aftrlag þeiraeigna, er játaÖar voru
í þeira sætt, I., 466, 9.
Aftr-skipan,y., restoration^ ef hann
semr eigi falslausan friÖ með Thd-
masi erkibyskupi undir rétta yfir-
bót ok aftrskipan alka luta, I.,
456, 25? Thomas hefir gert með
honum hit ágætasta verk í aftr-
skipan þeira lima, er fyr váro
tjáðir, II., 104, 22-
Af-virðing, /., discourtesy^ disre-
spect,!., 176,10 5 disparagement,
dishonouring, I., 178, ig-
Á-gangr, m., inroad, invasioíi, I.,
352, 15. — 2. worry, vexation, I.,
200,14.
Á-girnd, /., avarice, greed, I., 6, ^5,
112,11, 140,15. — 2. ambition, L,
126,6-
Ágirndar-þorsti, m., thirst of ava-
rice, I., 548, 22«
A-girni, f, greed, avarice, I., 46, 5.
A-gjarn, ad., avaricious, I., 4, 21«
Á-gæti, 71., fame, excellence, glory,
II., 190, 22-
Ágætis-maðr, m., an excellent, glo-
rious man, II., 6, 2-
Á-gætr, ad., excellent, 1., 2, g, 366, 10 .
— 2. exalted, I., 282, ig. — 3. 50-
lemn, hann vill gera . . . ágæta
kirkjiivígslu, I., 136, 5. — 4. mar-
vellous, II., 104,22-
A-hald, n., scuffle, tussle, struggle,
^ I., 540, 18.
A-heit, n., avow, II., 130, n, 188,17.
A-hejrandi {dat.pl. áheyrindum, II.,
176, 14), pres.p., hearing, present,
^n., 112,14-
A-hlaup, n., onset, onslaught, I.,
188,19. — 2. an attack, raid, I.,
^ 60, 13.
Á-hlýðinn, ad., ready to listen,
lending a willing ear^ I., 44, 20^
^■lijggja,/., care, concern, 1. 234, 14.
— 2. anxiety, I., 478, 9. — 3. soli-
citude, I., 130, 13, II., 52, 4. — 4.
^ í/wí^, I.,46,2o, 134,5.
A-hyggjast, v, med., to be concerned,
to be care- stricken, I., 438, 5.
A-hyggjusamr, ad., solicitous, I.,
A-kafast, v. med., to rage : ok sem
herra erkibyskup ser æði þeira
svá ákafandi, I., 530, 23- — 2. to
multiply fast : ákafast sókn því
meir til graftar erkibyskups, II.,
90,9.
A-kafliga, adv., eagerly, furiously,
I., 230, 15.
Á-kall, n., a shout, cry, I., 232, 17,
544, 2- — 2. claim, demand, I.,
6, 29- — 3. invocation, II., 176, n.
A-kast, n., vexation, insult, I.,
408,1.
Á-kefð, /., eagerness, vehemence,
violence, I., 162, 10, 188, 10, 276,8,
394,
20 ?
meÖ ákefð, eagerly,
peremptorily^ I., 214, 4.
GLOSSARY.
SOS
Akefðar-oi'ð, n. pi., exaggerated lan-
guage, I., 18,23.
Akr (-rs,-rar), ??2., afield, II., 86, 2o>
224, 6.
Akr-verk, n.,field-work,ll., 162, 21.
Akta (að), v.a., to heed, to look after,
to gather in, I., 108, 22«
Á-kveðinD, p.p.t stated, fixed, II.,
^ 66, 12.
A-kvoma,/., a touch, II., 96, q.
Ala (el, ól-ólum, æli, alinn), v.a., to
bring up, to keep, to maintain,
IL, 140, 5.
A-lagalaust, neut. ad.,as adv.yun-en-
cumbered, II., 260, 7.
Al-buinn, ad., ready, fully equipped
for a jouriiey, I., 126, 7, 262, j,'
— 2, with til prepared for, II.,
44, 20.
Al-bættr, ad., wholly restored to
health, convalescent, II., 130, ^4,
138, 24 ; a. heilsa, restored health,
IL, 134, 13.
Alda (öldu, öldur),/], a wave, II.,
96,8; t/^^' kigh contention, tu-
multuous strife, I., 10, 17.
Al-ðyða, II.,27l,32=alþýöa.
Aldri (jirop. the apocopated ?i\(\i'\^\',
aldri óei??^ dat. o/^aldr^age, gi a
negative suffix: aldrigi=?2oi m
ö^e, never), adv., never, T., 8, 3,
72, 9, passim ; a. síÖan, ;zo wore,
wever afterwards, I., 354, 7.
Aldr (-rs, -rar, dat. pi. öldrum), m.,
age, II., 52, ^7 ; at öldrum, ac-
cording to age, I., 6, 26 ; um aldr,
for life, for ever, I., 448, 4.
Á-leitni, /*., Me act of teasing ^harass-
ing ; worry, vexation, insults, I.,
176, ig, 398, 15 ; persecution, II.,
A-leitni — cont,
92, g. — 2. prying curiosity, pert
inquisitiveness, I., 202, g.
Alfa (-U, -ur) ; /, quarter of the
globe, cardinal point, region :
allar álfur heimsins, II., 26, q
2. quarter, corner, part, direction :
grét bans hiis í allar álfur, II.,
150, 14. — 3. '' half" in behalf:
af GuSs álfu, on behalf in the
name of, Gcd, I, 336, 1, 342, go,
482, 13 ; af hen-a páfans álfu, IL,
34, g ; af álfu heilags Thome, II. ,
218, 10 ; af konungs álfu, IL, 70,15.
See hálfa.
Al-heill, ad., quite healed, L, 552,i3 ;
IL, 100,10. — 2. convalescetit, II. ,
^ 88,11.
Á-liðÍDD, ad., far spent : at áliðnu
sumri, in the latter part of sum-
mer, II. , 162, 5.
Á-líta, v.a., to vietv, to examine, I.,
108, 21. — 2. to consider, to give
heed to, IL, 16, 21, 42, g.
A-litning,/, consideration, I., 400,i9.
Al-kunnigr, ad., generally known,
L, 192, 17.
All-mikill, ad., very great, right
many : sækir þangat allmikit folk,
I., 460, 5.
Allr (oil, alt or allt), ad., all, 1., 8, 0-,
passim. — 2. complete, finished,
thorough : a. klerkr, IL, 198, 12-
Allra-heilagra-messa, /., All Saints'
Day, L, 244, jg.
Alls-háttar (prop. gen. cf allr hattr,
all kind), as ad., of every kind,
IL, 186,1.
Al-mattigr, ad., almighty, I., 78, j,
^42, iq; IL, 92, iQ.
304
GLOSSARY.
Al-máttkr, the syncopated form of
almáttigr, I., 316, ^e-
Al-máttr, m., " all-might.^'' omnipo-
tence, II., 88, 9.
Al-menniliga, adv., commonly, gene-
rally, by all people, I., 332, g.
Al-menniligr, ad., public: sem á-
skilnaðr þeira varð á alnienniligu
þingi, svá skal ok þeira sættar-
gerð með sama liætti, I., 160, ^s ;
— 2. general: æ innan þriggja
ára skulu þeir halda einn alraenn-
iligan fund — general synod —
af öUum klaustrum sama lifnaðar
fyrir héÖan hafit, I., 370, ^, cfr.,
IL, 184,25- — 3. catholic: a.
kristni, catholic church, I., 222, g,
304,115 310,4; a. stjorn heilagrar
kristni, I., 274, ig ; a. móðir, the
catholic mother, the church, II.,
16, 25-
Al-menniugr, m., the public, people
in general, I., 196, ig.
Almennings-vegr, m., the way of
all flesh, death, II., 172, 9.
Al-múgi, m., the nation, lætr hann
almúgann í öllu Englandi vinna
þenna eið, I., 330, 24- — 2. the
laity : yðvarri hæð til heyrir af tr
at kalla ok endrbæta, . . . hvat
er kristni Guðs ok almúganum
verðr til áskilnaí5ar, I., 278, 7. —
3. the commonalty, the common
people, II.5 174,7.
Al-múgr, m.=almúgi, 3. II., 6,17.
Al-sagðr, p.p. commonly said, I.,
99
Al-siða, ad., commonly customary,
L, 28, 25«
Als-kyns {prop. gen. o/alt, ncut. of
Als-kyns — cont.
allr, and kyn, kifid, used as an)
ad., of every kind, I., 554, 24.
Als-voldugi\ ad., omnipotent, II.,
24,5.
Alt and allt {neut, of allr, used as
an) adv., all through, all the way,
alt til krúnu blóðsins, I., 4, 1, alt
framra í dauða dyrr, I., 6. 19 ; alt
norðr um fjall, all the way, I.,
90,14.
AltarijW., an altar, I., 228, 23, 344,3,),
II., 46, 27, 28 5 altaris embætti, the
mass, I., 174, g; altaris þjónusta,
id., II., ^Q, 23-
Al-tekit, n. {of altekinn = '* all-
taken "), generally accepted,
commonly agreed on, I., 478, 12.
Alúöar-vin, m., intimate friend, I.,
92, ig; II., 148,17.
Á-lútr, ad., ^^ gibbosus,^^ stooping,
hunch-backed, I., 314, gg.
Al-vara(-vöru), /!, sincerity, I., 320,4.
Al-varliga, adv., earnestly, in earn-
est, I., 38,17, 202,27. — 2. sincerely,
uprightly, I., 386, 19. — 3. sedu-
lously, I., 158, 22- — 4. thoroughly,
entirely, I., 186, g, 234, 13, II.,
88, 17. — 5. for good, finally,
siðan skilja konungarnir alvarliga,
I., 434, 22.
Al-varligr, ad., sincere, upright, I.,
458, 25- — 2. sound, deep, a. svefn,
I., 230,2-
Al-þýða (-u), /'., the public, people
in general, I., hQ, 1, 460, 25 ; II.,
- 186,5.
Á-lögur,y. pi., impositions, penances,
ecclesiastical penalties, I., 140, n,
II., 30, g, ^Q, 12- — 2. reproofs,
chidings, I., 110,3. — ^- Hi-treat-
GLOSSARY.
30.
Alögur — CO lit.
ment, overbearing dealings, I.,
22,,,,
Á-mec5nn=meðan, II., 182, ^3.
Á-minna, v.a., to admonish^ to loarn,
I., 334, 29- — 2, to remind, to
exhort, I., 386, ^g-
Á-minniligr, ad., full of admojiition,
memorahle, I., 172, 20«
Á-mimiing,y', admonition, I., 104, 7,
118,1., 132,8, 340,9, 510
' 6*
2.
reminding, putting in mind : eun
með {3VÍ at konungr lætr seint við,
snerpirerkibyskup sinar áminning-
ar, I., 134,13,- dagliga berr liaDii
yztan stola livitan yfir oil sin
klæði, til áminningar, hvat er liann
reiknast Gutii skyldiigr, I., 98, §.
— 3 exhortation, encouraging ad-
vice ; leggr páíinn honum f öSiirlig
orS, meÖ áminning, at því röskligar
rísi hann upp incð vernd kirkjunii-
ar, sem uii í iiálægð liafði lot á
vorðit þeiri staÖfestusem haunvar
Guði skyldugr, I., 174, ^g. — 4.
reproof, rebuke: sá er varralaiiss
er er sik játar undir stjórnarvald
lieilagrar kristni, enn þegir síöan
yfir ániinning, ok rettri liirting
sinna undiimanna, I., 234, g. —
5. remembrance, reeollcction :
öðrum aukr harm ok eudrnýjar til
áminningar, hversu blezaðau föður
þeir höfðu látið, II., Q6, 7. — 6. a
token, sign, symbol, æ skipaðist til
meiri gæzku bans bjarta, sem
bæiiarorÖin upplesin gcingu til
vaxtar með veizlum ok liminning-
imi várs Drottins gjafa, I., 88, 22-
Á-minningar-orÖ, n. pl., words of
■warning, I., 340, 0(3, 360, 25.
K541.
Á-mæla, ra., to blame, I., 432, 2«
A-mæli (-s), n., blame, reproach, I.,
294, 7 ; II., 26, 13.
Ad, pi^ep. with dat., without : an öU-
um efa, I., 18, 12; an efa, I., 164,
7 ; an dvöl tcithcntt delay, I., 78,
26» 150,8; an forsjc), I,, 110, ^^;
an lögligri prófan, I., 1 12, 5 ; an
öllu prófi, icithout any evidence
being taken, I., 118,05; an aHri
vægð L, 140, 9 ; an allri blífð,
affording no protection,!., 182,2 '"
an allri umluigsan thoughtlessly,
Á-nauð, /',, trouble, distress : þar
blektumst ver, þá er vér biigSum,
at þér sæklið ánauð ok fátækt ok
eríiÖi til þess eina, at niýkja
konungs reiði, I., 394, n.
Á-nauÖar-ok, n., yoke of servitude,
I., 58, iQ.
Andaligr, ad., andligr.
Andar-heilsa, /'., salvation of the
soul, I., 344, 27.
Andarinnar see önd.
Andast, med. o/"anda, to breath one's
last, to die, I., 8, 15, 320, ip
Andi (-a-ar), m., soul, spirit, ghost,
I.,274, 4,beilagi'a. Holy Ghost, I.,
14, ig. — 2. mind, temper : kæra
þegar með liörÖnm anda, bví liann
liefist at bannsetja bysknpana, I.,
490,23.
And-lát, n., death, T., 10, o.j; II.,
78, 24-
And-lauss, ad., exspircd, dead, I.,
548, 12-
Andligr, ad., spiritual, I., 4,9; a.
f^ælíL, spiritual salvation, I., 210,
13 ; a. sár, spiritual hurts, I., 232,
23; a. lif, I., 234,1; a skynscmi,
U
806
GLOSSARY,
And-ligr — cont.
reason, I., 234, 21 ; a. freistni,
spiritual temptation^ I., 234, 30 ;
faðerni andligt, spiritual father-
hood, I., 342,19; a. forsjo, spiri-
tual care, I., 360, 94 ; a. hjálp,
spiritual aid, guidance, I., 378, 2 ;
a. faSir, spiritual father, I., 494,
15. — 2. ecclesiastical: andlig
stríÖa, ecclesiastical censure, I.,
174, 29. a. stjoin, ecclesiastical
government, I., 198, ^.
And-lit, «., face, countenance, I.,
000, 10, oo4, J.
And-róðr, m., rowing against a
head ivind, II., 208, 25.
Aud-skoti {-a), in., the devil, I., 170,
10-
And-svar, n., an answer, I., 72, g,
198, 15, 212, 3, 214, 1, 226, 12. ^^^,
15-
And-svara, v. a., to ansiver, II., IO2.4.
And-svara-raaðr, m., one deputed to
answer on behalf of a7iother, a
deputy., a dclegcde, I., 186,5.
And-varp, n., a sigh, I.,316, 20' 510,
16' 558, 14 ; II., 6, 3.
And-varpa, v. a., to heave a breath, to
sigh, II., 66, 27.
And-virða, v.a., to earn, to merit, to
deserve : at þar fyrir andvirÖi
hann ser himnariki, I., 378, 27-
Á-nefndr, p.p., mentioned, stated by
name: er Rodgeirr ánefndr í
þessi oftekju, I., 392, 4 ; hann
játar raeÖ orÖum ok handleggr
erkibyskupinum at þær ánefnd-
ar jarðir skal hann aftr
leggja, I., 460, 21 ; fixed: kall-
andi saman byskuparaeðáneí'ndum
Á-ne£ndr — cont.
degi, I., 452, iq; meÖ ánefndu,
stating a fixed amount, II.,
182,12.
Angr (-s), n.y grief sadness, I.,
228,3, 238,20- — 2. anguish, II.,
m, 21. — 3. \voe, I., 386, ^. — 4.
trouble, 1., 414, iq.
Angra (að), v. a., to grieve, I., 92, §,
13,246,4,272,10,350,16,424,3.—
2. to trouble, to vex, I., 400, 9, 420,
og. — 3. to afi^ect, I., 360, 5. —
Med. angrast, to be remorseful, I.,
346, 20-
Angrligr, ad., sorrowfid, sad, I.,
364,6,390,13.
Annarligr, ad., alien, i. e. derived
from some one else: a. vizka,I.,102,
6, 300,15. — 2. feigned, assumed,
dissimulating : er þat Ijóst vitrum
manni, at þessa sína ástundan
klæðir erkibjskup meÖ annarligri
ásjónu I., 46, 10«
AnnaiT (önnur, aunat, gen. annars,
annarrar annars, dat. öðrum, ann-
arri, öðru, acc. annan, aðra,
aniiat. Pl. aÖrir, aÖrar, önnur,
gen. annarra, dat. öÖrum, acc.
aÖra, aí5i'ar, önnur), ad., other, I.,
2, 8, passim ; annarr . . . annarr,
one . . . tJie other : þá er annarr
lemr, enn annarr liggr undir, I.,
286, g. — 2. another still, sá heitir
annarr Heinrekr, I., 28, 9 — 3.
second, á dögum Urbani páfa ann-
ars, I., A, 13. — 4. next : þing í
NorSantún byrjaÖist sem nú sagÖ-
ist, enn laukst þriðjudag í annarri
viku, I., 240, 16- — o. one of two :
augat annat úr bans höf Öi fellr til
jaröar, II., 142,3.
GLOSSARY.
807
Annat-hvárt {jieuf. of pron. indef.
annaiT-hvarr) as adv.^ either ; a.
eða, either, or : bjóða þeim annat-
hvárt, gefa upp sæmclina, eör kné-
falla, I., 308, 03 ; varla fiiinst sa
maðr, at ei^'i sé aniiathvárt baiin-
settr eðr bannsettum samnetjaðr,
I., 418,24; iiiiiiatliN art injök sljór
eðr of foíT, I., 430, ^q.
Annat-tveggja, adv., cither^ II.,
Ann-marki (-a), m., a fault, tres-
pass, 1., 110, g, 458,22.
Anii-.svara = and-svara, II., 52, ^3.
Annt, 7ieut. adj., superl. annast :
tJiis luord is allied to onn z=husi'
ness on hand, concern, and occurs
only in the impers. phrase : bans
föÖr er þat annast, to his father it
is the first concern, his father
has most at heart, II., 80, 3Q.
Anza (að), v.a. to notice, to pay
regard to, I., 446, 13, 498, 3p
Apostolus, m., apostle, I., 228^ 15.
Appellacio, /., appeal, I., 392, |-.
Appellera, c.a., to appeal, I., 332, j.
Appelleran,/., appeal, I., 206, jg.
Ar (-5,), n., a year, I., 4, ^g ; ar af
ári, year by year, 11., 172, jg.
Ár-gangT, m., a year's cycle, a year,
I., 136,2, 308,27; ^^•> ^^? u'
134,11.
Ár-gæzka, f., '* annona^' yearly
produce, supply, fertility : staðr
með mikilli árgæzku, a place in a
fertile district, I., 132, 13, 372, 12.
Aria, adv., early, I., 388, 14, 468, 23.
Arligr, ad., yearly, I., 38, 3, 296, og.
Armleggr, >;?., arin, I,, 342,2;.
Aimr, ?n., an arm, II., 50, n.
Árna (að), v.a., to pray for, biðr
liann þá Giiðs ölmiisiimenn at
árna sér Guðs miskunnar, I.,
98,23-
Arnaðar-orð, n. pl., intercession, I.,
4, 3, y ; IL, 100, 5.
Árnan (-ar), /., intercession, II.,
Artic'uleia, va., to digest. I., 398,3.
Articulus, 7;?., an article, I., 166,23.
Ár-verum, prob. a corruption, the
scribe, having, after icriting ar,
the first part of arum, a?id then
changing it into vetrum, left the t
out and forgotten to make a note
that ar was to be struck out;
to íimtán íirverum in II., 76, 20
corresponds iimtan vetrvnr of
fragment E., II., 280, n; vetrum,
therefore, should probably take
the place o/'árverum.
Ár-jjytr, m., the sound of a rushing
river, II., 224, j.
Á-ræði, n., rish, venture, II., 70, 13.
Á-saka (aS), v.a., to accuse, I.,
172, 3Q. — 2. to blame, to chide, to
reprove, I., 380, ^q^ 424, 5. — 3. to
calumniate, to revile, I., 394, j.
A-sakan (-ar),/., accusation, reproof,
rebuke, I., 110, 7. — 2. a reprehen-
sible act, mischief " culpa,'' I.,
362,,.
Á-sjána {-n-nv),f,face, visage, coun-
tenance, I., 204, g.
Á-sjó. y*., protection, aid, shielding,
I., 500, 22.
Á-.sjóna (-u-ur), /., face, visage,
countenance, I., 2, ig, 18, 1, 248, op
504,1-, 542,24; II., 110,22- — 2.
appearance, I., 46, 10, 222, 15 ; II.,
U 2
308
GLOSSARY.
A-sjóna — cont.
52, 19. — 3, sonhlance, I., 190, 25«
— 4, pretext, guises II., 56, ^.
Á-skeyti, n., a dart, I., 132,9.
Á-skilnaðar-efni, n., matter of dis-
cord, L, 292, 6.
ÁskilnaÖar-grein, f., cause of dis-
cord, I., 112,25.
A-skilnaÖr (-ar), m., discord, dis-
sension, I., 160, 18» 278, 8 ; dispute,
I., 294., 22, 25, 374, 2-
Asni (-a-ar), ui., an ass, I., 400, 12«
A-sokn (-ar-ir), f, onset, attach, I.,
370, ,,.
Ast (-ar-ir), /!, love, loving-kindness,
^ I, 110,9,258,16.
A-sta(5a,y., stand, ground for asser-
tion, I., 56,29, 168,11. — 2, s/tppo-
sition, I., 248, ig.
Astar-afl, n., power of love, II.,
94, „.
Astar-eldr, m., love's fervour, I.,
14,16.
Astar-ojöf,/., loving gift, II., 202,ii.
Astar-liiti (-bite), ;;?., fervour of
^ /ot'e, II., 2,8, 62,1^.
Ast-riki, w., loving-kindness, I.,
114,3.
Ast-samligr, «i/., loving, affection-
ate, J., 'Sm,^^^, IL, 106, 2s-
Ast-úð (-ar), /., love, I., 108, 15,
120, 19, 132, 19, 324, 20. — 2, kind-
ness, mercy, I., 336, 5. — 3, fa-
vour, popularity, I., 88, 3.
Ást-ú(5igr, ad., an\iahle, I., 28, n,
■ 118,2.
Á-stundan (-ar),/, study, exertion,
endeavour, I., 50,15, 234, j^-,
316, 4. — 2. Gfiw, intention, pur-
A-stundan—
posCy I.,
-cow/.
46,9, 160,23, 460,6,
518
5 26'
Ast-vina (-u),/., a female favourite^
a sweetheart, I, 22, j^.
Ast-viiir, ?;i., beloved friend, I.,
16,
13)
164,
29,
488
5 18)
490,
J 13)
^ 492. 1.
A-sýnd, /., appearance, exterior
looh, li., 134,6.
At, pr on. rel., which, that: hversu
sii renta aktast inn ... at þagat
liggr, I., 108,22; þat herbergi, at
herra Thomas sitr i, I., 216, 20 5
þar meÖ lætr hann fylgja þat opit
bréf, at fyrirbýðrundir banns pínu
at nokkurr byskup dirfist á þá
vígslugerð, I., 452, 5, líka for
fengu margir, at í þeira föruneyti
böföu verit, II., 40,9-
At (^Swed. att), conjunct, with ind.,
suhjunct. and infinitive, that, to.
— 1. with ind, of facts real or
assumed as such, that: Ijost er
vorðit ... at fleiri enn einn eöa
tveir liafa skrifat, &c., I., 2, 3 ; vel
ma segja, at bans blezut ásjóna
befír dreift farit, I, 2, 18, passim.
— 2. with subj. : that, in order
that : at bdglífismaðr bafi, I.,
2, 15 ; at þetta verk iipp-byrist,
framm-flytist ok lukist, I., 4, 7 ; at
bonum sé til lofs, I., 4, §, &c. —
3. ivith infinit, to : at setja samt,
to compose, I., 2, 13 ; for the pur-
pose of, at afla Ijár, I., 6, 4,
passim.
At (^Swed. at), prep, ivith dat. —
1. local, of stationary state : at,
by, beside: nefnir bok stund ok
staÖ þar til fyrir sunnan sjo^ at
GLOSSARY.
309
At — coat.
landaraæri miðil Franz ok Xor*!-
manniam^ I., 06,27« — --• <]f ^'^o-
tion ; trncards : enri er liiin bar
sik at cljTum kirkjunnar, I., 14, ^ ;
(haiin) ríðr framm at ániii, I.,
32, 5 ; Jig. : nil mim synast sem
stigagrein þessi liiti at konuiig-
innin, I., 8, 22« — 3. suggestive of
consequential relations ; follow-
ing, throng Ji, 1>ij^ according to :
at lians dæmum following Jiis
example, I., 22, ^ ; at bæn Isibell,
I., 22, 3 ; at því, after, next to this,
I., 16, - ; in consequence thereof,
I., 526, 12 j ^^ öklrum, bi/ reason
of his age, I., 6, 26- — 4. in
various adverbial phrases : at
úvilja, unintentionalli/, I., 6, 22 ;
at fe, of as to money, I., 12, ^^ ;
at eins, only, I., 42, ^ ; at njju,
anew, I., 94, 3. — 4. with dat.
absolutus, denoting a transitory
co?iditi07i : at kristninni stynjandi
arnid the groans of the chui'ch,
I.. 396, 1, cfr. 402, 19. — 5. as an
adv. : ok sem þær stanckn, þar at,
I., 16, 9. — 6. icith comparatives
^=Engl. the, or any the : at minna,
the less, or, any the less, I.,
48,27, *^c.
At, sec eta.
Ata (ötu, ötiir), /'., mutual conten-
tion, strife. See kapp-ata.
Á-tak, n., touch, 11^ 134, g.
At-bnrðr, 7«., an event, hap, acci-
dent, rircumstance, I., oQ, 25, 238,
2i> 414, 2\ ; ll'j 90, 19.
A-tekt, /., leading 071, drawing
by means of earnest persua-
sion : var eigi fyrir sakleysi,
þótt liann mæddist nokkut i, síðan
Á-tekt — cont.
her for jafnfranim flutningr ok
átektir þeini, or liaiis ráðniieyli
skyldii vera, I., 422,^.
At-fall, n., the shore-ward rush of a
brcaher : gaf ein akla í att'aUinu
svá IiarSan shig iitan li lærit ok
legginn niÖr frá Imé, II., 96, g.
At-ferð, f, means, or manner of
proceeding, II., 68, ^.
At-ganga, /!. access, admission, II.,
282, „.' ■
At-gerð, /;, proceedings, doings, I.,
34, ,.3- '
Aígerðar-lauss, ad., un-deolt with,
unheeded, left alone : lierra erki-
bysknp ser at þctta mál svellr svá
með koimnginiim, at þat fær eigi
atgerðalaust verit, I., 144, j2.
At-hafnir, f. pi., ways of life,
actions, conduct, I. 94, jq ; II.,
192 -
At-hngall, ad., careful, heedful, I.,
110,16.
At-kugliga, adv., attentively : i
fyrstu hlyddi liaiin athiigliga öllii
lians eyrindi, I., 300, 29.
At-hygli, y., heed, wary considera-
tion. I., 150, 7.
Atján, card, num., eighteen, I.,
46, ,7.
At-kall, n., clamour, outcry : Iiaun
var liáðuliga mot réttindum lit
rekinn af riki koiuingsins ok sinni
áttjörÖ með atkalli stóriiiennis i
landiuu, I., 232, 21.
At-kvæði, 71., vote, decision, verdict,
I., 74,23, 208,32, 220,1, 414, j,.
— 2. authority, II., 196, jg. — 3.
syllable: tiaöviii .«er liver orÖ ok
atkvedi fyrir lionuni, IÍ., 266, 20'
no
GLOSSARY
At-skilnaðr, íh., dísaeiit, discord, 11.,
2o3j gj
At-sókn, /'., access, admission, II.,
282,22-'
At-staÖa, /., urging, pressure, I.,
422, 2-
Átt, see eiga.
Átt (-ar-ir), f., direction, quarter,
XL, 108,2-
Atta, card, num., eight, I., 498, 25.
Átta-tigir, card, num., eighty, I.,
476, 22-
A^tt-hagi, m., native soil, home, II.,
^ 138,3.
Atti, see eiga.
Atti, ord. nu?n., the eighth, 11.,
196,11-
Átt-jörð, f., native countri/, I.,
-o^, 21.
Attn, áttum, see eiga.
Átu, átum, see eta.
At-vik, 71., event, I., 18,23. — 2.
circumstances, I., 108, g, 140,4;
II., 114,24,. — 3. evidence, I.,
112, 93, 298, 19. — 4. accident,
II., 52, 18.
At-vinna,y., livelihood, II., 122, ^
Aivð-fuiidinn, «f/., easily perceived,
I., 486, 1.
AuÖ-færr, ad., easy to pass : skript
ok slúkur iipp lúkast á sétta dag
páskaviku með au^færiun veg til
graftal" Guðs ástvinar, I., 86, 13.
Auðga (að), v.a.y to e?irich, 1., 324, iq,
364,3; IL, 56,13.
AiiÖgaðr, p.p., oidoivcd, enriched^
I.,334,5.
Auðigr, ad., wealthy, rich, I., 12, n,
30, e-
Auð-kenna (d.), v.a., to make easily
recognisable ; med., to be easily
recognised : með því sama niaiki
Auð-kenna — 6'0/<^.
vitraðist hann siðan mörgum mönn-
um ok auðkenridist svá þeim, er
áðr kunnu hann eigi, I., 554, g.
Auð-mjiikr, ad., lowly, humble, I.,
272, 17 ; IL, 78, -. — 2. devoted,
zealous, I,, 386, 3.
Auð-mýkt,/., humility^ II., 192,23.
Aiiðr, ad., empty, void : avð var
kiikian af mavnnum, II., 280, ^.
Auð-ráðr, ad., easily persuaded,
pliable, I., 140, ig.
AuS-ræði, n., ivealth, property:
hann resignerar áðr í höud Plein-
reks unga alt þat lén ok auðræði
er hann haféi haldit uær ok firr
af krimunui, I., 82, 1-.
Auð-sýna, v.a., to shoiv clearly, I.,
2, 19 ; to ijidicate, I., 238, 17 ; med.,
to appear, to become manifest, I.,
440,17.
Auð-sýnn, ad., clearly seen, clear,
I-? 176,10, 352,2.
Auð-sæliga, adv., clearly, percep-
tibly, transparently, II., 275, 25.
Auð-særr (-sæ, -sætt), ad., easily
seen, clear, II,, 275, 35.
Auð-veldliga, adv., easily, I., 274, 29,
280, 12.
Auð-veldr, ad., easy, I., 38, 17. — 2.
free, ready: a. mildi, II., 72, 14.
AvfviKl, II., 270, 18, see öfund.
Auga, n., an eye, I., 24, 21, 86, 1^.
Auga-bragð, n., the twinkling of an
eye, I., 32,23, 390,3. — 2. the
catching sight of: riddarinn liefer
avigabragð á þessu brátt, þó at
fíjótt bærist at, II., 208, i^.
Auga-sjáldr, 71., the pupil of the eye,
I., 420, 30.
Auga-staðr, 7n., the eye externally,
IL, 82, 1,.
GLOSSARY.
311
Aug-lit, «., face^ countenance, I.,
360,22? 552,5; II., 16,26) 62, jq;
appearaiice^ II., 146,26«
Augljoss, ad., clearly seen, mani'
/c^^l., 406,ii.
Augna-verkr, m., pain in the eyes,
II., 92,1.
Aug-syn, /'., sight, face I., 464, 4,
524, 20.
Auka (eyk, jók-jókum, yki, aukinn),
v.a., to " eke,^^ to increase, I.,
356, 17 ; impers., öörum aiikr
harm, iii others it increaseth grief,
II., 66, 6- — 2. to add to : foiÖizt
at auka þyngsl yfir þunga, I.,
394, 19. ; þeir iokv þvi enn aa
ofan sina illzkv, II., 271, 5. — 3.
to exaggerate : enn at þetta lof
bins blezaða Thome er eigi orðum
aukit, I., 114,6. — "^' ^^ '^ÖW^^'
vate : enn nú er reynt, at yorar
. biðstunclir auka þína meinsemd,
I.,3ó8,i;.
Auki (-a, -ar), m., addition : til auka,
in addition, to boot, I., 348, 12. —
2. aggravation, enn at dikta
dauðaráð í háleitum tíma var
enn til mikils auka þeira glæps ok
vesalda, I., 518, le-
Aumligr, ad., wretched, abominable,
II., 14,18.
Aumr, ad., iveak, suffering, feeble,
II., 80,29« — 2. poor, destitute,
I., 108, 17. — 3. lor etched, miser-
able ; bans vegr liggr nokkut
bærra enn þeira manna, er leggjast
niðr Í saur ok syndir þessa auma
lifs, I., 24, ly. — 4. woefid : aumr
var ek minnar dirfóar, ivoe is me
for my boldness, I., 172, 13. — 5.
ivicked, abandoned : skildu þesair
aumo mcnn svá sina farsæld lands
Aumr — cont.
ok lagar, at þat mundi gott fyrir
(tuÖí, I,, 518,1. — Aumt, ',\,used
as a noun, misery : luins blezut
sampining mátti ekki aumt ?já,
I., 110,11.
Ausa (eys, jós-jósum, ysi, ausinn),
v.a.,prop., to ladle, hence, to pour,
to sprinkle : her með er kirkjan
svo failin sem vatne ausin bæði
utan ok innan, II., 134, ^.
Austan, adv., from the east, II.,
110,6.
Austr (-s), n., the east; til austrs,
to the east, T. 244, g, 542, 5.
Austr-riki, n., eastern realtn, the
Orient, the East, I., 104, 12.
A-verki (-a -ar), ;«,, a icound, T.,
544. 4 ; hurt : þótti mér likast,
sem beygðr mannsíingr kæmi
at minu anga, með svo stríðum
áverka, at þegar gekk augat niðr
á kinnina, II. 144, 23.
A-vinningr, m., gain, profit, income,
I., 56,8, 76,15, 86,6, 398,16- —
2. selfish aim ? I., 68, 25.
Á-vint ( = and-vint, á=:and), n.. ad.,
against wind, against a Jiead-
wind : er a. mun æra um söxin af
ofbeldi Romverja ok þeim stornii
er standa mun norðan af Anglia,
L, 26,io; r/r. L,90,i6.
A-vita, vjL, to blame, to reprove, I.,
140,16,168,26.
A-vitall (-s), m., inkling : enn vv
erkibyskupsér,bversu liorlir,grHn-
ar hann um, at kelling muni bafa
lengit nokkurn livital, bverr maiSr
hann er, I., 250, j2.
Á-vítan (-ar), /., ' mordacitas,* re-
proof, chiding, I., 172, 2,5, 3 12, 10,
380, .,5.
312
GLOSSARY.
Á-vítanai'-orÖ, ii. pL^ ivords of re-
proving, I., 380, 13.
Á-vítur, f, ph, iiphraidings, re-
proofs, chiding s, I., 392, 3.
Á-YÖxtr, ;«.,//•?/ íY; kölliim vær nú
komit iipp at limum ok sjálfiim
áyextinnm, II., 118,3. — 2. in-
crease, fruit, I., 86, 5, 378, 3, II.,
08, 22' — ^' ificome, rent, I., 190, 15.
Axlar-liðr, ;;/., s/iouldcr-joint, II.,
40,3.
B.
Bað, see biðja.
Báðir (báðar, Ijæði ; gc?f. beggja ;
dat. báðum ; acc. báða,báÖar,bæði),
pron.indef., both, I., 10, ^^,passi)n.
Báðu, see biðja.
Báðu {dai. sing. neut. of a lost
strong báÖi) in the phrase : at
báðu : má þat svá upp taka fyrir
honum með annarri undii'hyggjo,
at honum væri bjrr at báðn,
hversu til tækist um erkibysknps
heimkvomu, that in either case
he might have a fair chance of
escape {from suspicion of com-
plicity), I., 472, 21-
Báðiim, see biðja.
Bagall, ;;/., a bishop's staff] a cro-
zier, L, 24, j^.
Bak (-P, pi. bök), n., the bach, I.,
180,2,-», 182,2; ^ ^^^> ^^ horse-
bach, I., 222, 2s ; after : litr síðan
skýrliga þeim á bak, gazes after
the?}}, II., 110,24.
Bak-fella, v.a., to refute, I., 148, jg.
Bakki (-a, -ar), jn., a river-bank,
I., 32, g. — 2. a bank, butt, mark
to shoot at, II., 18, J.
Bak-verpa, v.a., to throw behind, to
cast away, I., 418,26'
Balsamuin, n., balsam, I., 558, 5.
Bana-blóð, n., bloodshed unto death,
L, 82, 3.
Bana-maÖr, m., a banes-man, a
murderer, II., 4, 93.
Band (s, pi. bond), n., bonds, fet-
ters, I., 356, 26'
Baiidingi (-gja, -gjar), ;;/., one in
fetters, a prisoner, I., 286, 7.
Bani (-a, -ar), ?n., death, 1., 196,9,
372, 235 488,5-
Bann (-s, bandz, II., 259, g, og? P^-
bönn), n., forbiddance, prohibi-
tion, veto, L, 282, ^g ; .*íctja bann
f\'rir, to prohibit, II., 90, .^. — 2.
excommunication,!., 358, 25 ; cause
of excoinmunication, I., 502, g.
Banna (að), v.a., to forbid, I., 344,i5;
to preclude, to debar from, I.,
368, 22«
Bann-færa [-fera], v.a., to excommu-
nicate, I., 344, 13, 364. 30, 378, 7,
406, 1.3.
Baun-setja, v.a., id., I., 152, §, 344,29,
418,4; n., 148,21.
Banu-settr, p.79. as a sb., an excom-
municate, I., 406, jcj.
Bann-sunginn,p.ji?. sung into ban, so-
lemnly excommunicated, I., 406, 14.
Bauns-ör, f, the arroic, dart, bolt
of excommunication, I., 366,^9.
Bar, see bera.
Bara (-u, -\iv),f., '• borc,'^ wave, fig.
emotion, I., 80, j.^.
Barða, see berja.
Bar-dagi, m., beating, I., 362, ^5 ;
knocking, I., 534, jg ; fight, I.,
532, 4. — 2. chastisement, p)U7iish-
ment, II., 1 50, -.
Barir, f. pi., a hier, I., 554, ^, ^j. •
cfr. böriir.
GLOSSARY.
íl3
Barki (-a, -ar), m.^ the tvcasand,
IL, 112,17, 114,20.
Barn (-s, pi. born), ??., a child, I.,
12,13, IL, 150,6.
Barn-domr, m., childhood, I., 18, 21-
Barn-fostr, ji., nursing, II., 162, 12.
Baru, see bera.
Bárum, see bera.
Barún (-s, -ar), m., a haron, I., 56,10.
Barúnía,/!, barony, county, I., 56,9.
BatI (-a), m., amendment, hetteriny,
L, 358,28,490,26.
Batna (að), v. inchoat., to improve,
L, 442, 23.
Batnaðr (-ar), ?n., amendment, I.,
380, 25.
Batr (-S, -ar), m., a boat, I., 2 14, 13 ;
Petrs bcitr, Peter's boat, i.e., the
Roman Church, I., 44, 93.
Batt, see binda.
Bau"5, see bjo^a.
Baztr, I., 284, 9 (II., 255, 17), I.,
440, 27. See beztr.
Beðinn, see biðja.
Beið, see bíöa.
Beiða (dd)[bæddi, 1.,4:12, foot note 0],
v.a., ivith acc. or absol., to pray
for: fagnandi sínum feðr ok blezan
beiðandi, I., 494, 3 ; to ask for, to
request,!., 42, 1, 180,6, 412, 15;
to require, to demand : I., 140, 4 ;
to crave, to call for, to want, I.,
108,11.
Beiða (dd), i\«., to bait, to harass,
to vex: konunglig ogn kann at vega
nogu snarpt, ok liefua sin ef hann
þykkist harÖliga bciddr, I., 384, 27.
Beiðni, f, craving, desire, beiÖni
úleyfðrar girndar, I., 108, 3.
BeiSsla (-n), f, request, 1., 200, 9,
268, 27, 270, 9.
Bein (s), 71., a bone, I., 548, 13.
Bein-brot, n., breaking of bones, I.,
o 18, 19.
Beinn, ad., straight: er beinast horf-
ir moti Flandr, ivhich stands at
a spot from ichere there is the
shortest cut over to Flanders, I.,
484, 7 ; rennr it beinasta framm í
móti þeim, runs the straightest
loay, I., 538, 9.
Beirskliga, for beiskliga, adv., bit-
íír;Vv, II.; 270,39.
Beiskr {der. from bita, to bite,
icherefore the spelling shoidd be
beizkr=:«Ziy7Y/i7.r), ad., bitter, re-
morseful, I., 204, 6, incensed,
full of malice, I., 528, -.
Beisl {der. from bitn, io bite, should
therefore properly be spelt beizl),
n., a bridle, see foil.
Beisl-lauss, ad., without a bridle,
L, 248, 7.
Beit, see bita.
Ben (benjar, jo/. benjar),y., a ivound,
IL, 116,20.
Benda (d), v.a., to bend, to draw cc
boio, I., 366, 17.
Bera (bar, bar-bar um, bæri, borinn),
v.a., to bear, to carry : hann let
bera ki-oss fyrir ser, I., 320, is ;
r/r. 490, -b.brcf, I., 78,92, 282,18 5
b. folkvopn upp a garÖ bysknps,
II., 54, 13 ; b. vopn a, to carry
tveapons against, to attack sicord
in hand, I., 374, g. — Fig., to bear,
to sustain : h. vald, to bear power
or offire,ll., 192, 21 ; b. hæstu rödd,
to sustain the principal part^ to
take the lead, L, H^, w — -• ^<^
wcar^ linnn bar icyinliiia siinr))t
li.-irklæöi á sinn Ihmwu likani, J.,
814
GLOSSARY.
Bera — cont.
94, 16 ; hann berr fyrir utan þau
klæÖi sem bæði eru hvít ok hrein,
I., 94, 18 ; dagliga berr hann yztan
stola hvitan, I., 98, 7. — Fig., to
bear about^ ' gercre ' ; hann bar tvo
dyrliga menn, bore about, acted in
the capacity of, I., 94, 1^. — 3. to
carry, to bring : bréf . . . er
meira berr ávítauar enn, the bur-
den, contents of ivhich, is more in
the nature of fault-finding than,
I., 398, 15 ; at seudiboðar megi
honum bera sem mesta frægö,
bring him-=-bring forward in his
favour, 1., 262,2; b. á pláz, to
bring to public notice, to expose,
I., 198,4; ^' kve'ðju, to bring a
greeting, I., 272, 17. — 4. to bring
forth, to give birth to : honum
gafst ekki borinn erfingi, I., 26, 17.
— D. to bear, to endure: viljum
vér bera fyrir Guðs uafni hvat
er á gnýr, L, 150, 19; enn þat
harðlífi berr eigi bans náttúra, I.,
316, 6 ; gengr í svá óbæriligan vöxt
krankdómr unga sveins, at mönn-
um þótti þeí?s von at hann mætti
eigi ósprunginn bera, II., 70, 20 ;
hafói borit fótarmein um fjögur
ár, II., 82, 25 ; hann segist eingan
rekstr e^a mæðu vilja bera fyrir
því fé ok frelsi, er hann veit efa-
laust kirkjunnar eign, ef hún skal
úrænt vera, I., 118,27. — 6. to
smear, to rub on : ok sem hann hefir
borit yfir augastaÖinn þá blezaÖa
bamtempran, II., 82, 14. — Iinpers.
with a passive signification, to be
borne, hence to be bor?ie up, as it
were, to beproininent, to shoiv, ^^c. :
þat er af hverra oríum hæst berr,
Bera — cont.
such of each ivrite?-'s words, as
are of the greatest importance, I.,
2, 14 ; berr þat hæst í þvi máli,
the chief point being, I., 476, 15.
— 2. toith certain prepp. to be
borne on, as it ivere, to come to
pass, to haj)]jen, to befall : b. á :
sem raun á bar, as the drift
of experience shoived, I., 32, 13 ;
cfr. I., 476,18; but esp. in a
compufistic sense : to fall (o?i) :
á hvern dag sera hana (hátíðina)
berr, I., 512, n ; cfr. þessa páskatíð
bar svá i kaleudario, II., 84, jg.
b. at, to chance to ai^ive : gera
sem herhlaup í landit at mæta erki-
byskupi, ef hann berr at, I., 484,
1 ; b. fyrir, to happen, to appear,
I., 84, 23, 372, 24 ; b. til, to come
to ]mss,l., 12,12, 52,29, 142,12;
— Befi. constr. : bera sik, to carry
one's self to deport one's self, II.,
b. sik at, to move to-
144
5 13*
wards, to approach, I., 14., 1 ; II.,
98, IP — b. sik brott, to deviate,
to stray, I., 236,- 27. — b. sik vel, to
be of good cheer,!., 438,7. — Med.
berast at (c/)-. Tpers. 2), to happen,
II., 10, 9 ; berast fyrir, to be
busy about, I., 518,22' — ^'' ^«-
rious phrases : bar mikla da-
semd Í hjörtum heyrandi manni,
aivakened much delight, I., 302, 3 ;
b. forsjd, to bring foresight to
bear, I., 284, n ; b. hugsan fyrir,
to take heed lest, I., 344, 26 ; b.
vitni, to bear loitness, to jrrove, I.,
304, 9 ; b. grun a, to misdoubt,
II., 104,24. — b. brutt, ^0 thrust
out, to expel, \., 304, 15. —
With prepositions : b. framm, to
GLOSSARY.
315
Bera — cont.
bring forward^ to set forth, I.,
24, 3 ; to advance, to bring in
evidence, I., 166,26? -60,24. — b.
fyrir, to set before, to submit for
inspection, I., 2,
11'
b. meÖal,
to bring in, to throw in amongst,
to introduce, I., 274, 24. — h. mot,
to object by IV ay of argument, II.,
114, 21. — b. til, to bring about, to
cause : langr vani bar til þess Tho-
rn am erkibyskup at bafa rikuliot
borð, long custom brought it about,
I., 106, 25' — b. to bring about,
to bring to bear, to be pos-
sesscd of, hann bar ok til klerk-
(l(5m at finna svá meistarlig orð,
I., 172, 24- — c. to try, to fit :
þeir sjá lykla marga eiiishvers
staðar a múrinum ok bera til
hvern at öðrum, I., 222,^.
Bera (að), v. a., to lay bare, to un-
cover, to unveil, II., 200, jg-
Ber-fættr, ad,, barefoot, I,, 54, j., ;
II., 170, 23.
Berg (-s), n,, a reck, I., 182, lo-
Bergja (fS, t), v.a., to taste, to drink,
b. þann drvkk, II., 70,05.
Berja (berr, barða-börðiim, berði,
barinn), v.a., to beat, to smite, I.,
210,1. — Med, berjast fyrir, to
fight for, in defence of, II., 40,17.
berjast mot, to fight, to struggle
against, I., 272,3.
Berliga, adv., clearly, I., 172,3;
manifestly, I., 196, 4, 442, jg ;
openly, I., 112,5, l'J'^S20-
Berr, «r/., bare^i naked, I., 156, j,
428,2; IT., 232,26- — ^- ('pci^ -
b. himiiin, II., 204, 5. — 3. mani-
fest, I., 358, 19. — 4. plain, per-
emptory II, ., 58,1^, 180,8.
Betr, comp. of vel, better, I., 66, jg?
210,23; IÍ., 54,11.
Betra (að), v.a., to amend, to reform,
I., 112,-, 324,11.-2. to emend,
II., 36,22-
Betran (-ar), /'., amendment, I.,
410, 1.
BeygÖr, ad., bent, crooked, II.,
144,22.
Seygja (ð,), v.a., to bend, to bow,
L, 348, 18, 386, 3.
Beztr, superl. of góðr, best, 1.,
38, 21; beztu menu, leading peo-
ple, 'proccri; I., 212,25.
Bið, n, pi,, delay, loaiting, príórr
lætr þá eigi lengi at biðum, II.,
Biða (bið, beið-biðum, biði, biðit),
v.n., to abide, to await, to icait,
I., 72, g, 312,5; b. luidir koiumgs
atkvæÖi, to abide the king's de-
cision, I., 74, 22. — 2. to remain :
b. úti, to remain outside, I., 524, 9.
Biðja (bið, bað-báðum, bæði, beÖiun),
v,a,, to ask, to pray : b. hann
tenatSar nokknrs, I., 50, 25 ; þar
með vil ek, at þú biðer miskuunar,
II., 144, 28 ; mörgu sinni bað hann
Theoballdum ... at hann skyldi
aftr takast i bans þjónustn, I.,
58, 13 ; b. fyrir, to pray for, I.,
420,4. — -^^^d' biöjast fyrir, to he
engaged in praying, to pray
habitually, I., 316, .^.—Refi, b. sik
undan, to pray to be excused, I.,
216, 13. — 2. absol., to beg : því at
handviss var þeim ölmusan er
h-d^n, I., 100,12.
Bið-stund, f, postponement, delays
I., 198,24; ^^C), 3 ; waiting^ I.,
358,,,., 406,
IH-
316
GLOSSARY.
Bifa ((5), occurs only in med., to
shakCf to tremble, I., 182,7.
Binda (bind, batt-bundum, byndi,
bundiun), v. a., to hind, I., 208, 32,
210, jl;. — 2. to tie, to tie up, to
wrap in, II., 80, 24. Med. bindast,
to restrain one's self, I., 278, 25»
332,15.
Biudendi, f., abstemiousness : með
svá miklum bindendis krafti, I.,
106,29-
Bindindi,/"., id., 1., 316, 5.
Birta (-t), v.a., to make known,
to declare, I., 62, g, Q>Q, 15, 76, 9,
152, 15 ; to announce, I., 180, 4. —
Med., birtast, 1. to become bright :
ban s leg staðr bi rt ist með h j artteigu-
um, II., 172, 13. — 2. to appear,
to be revealed to, I., 8, 13, ^^, 13,
126,6, 11., 132,16.
Birti, /., brightness, I., 134,22, 322,
26; II., 4^,9.
Birting,/., vision, I., 318, 4 ; II., 24,
14«
Bita (bit,beit-bitum, biti, bitinn),t?.a.,
to bite, to cat up, to devour, II., 16,
21.. — Fig. to bite, to gnaiv, to tear
ivith remorse : Enn þótt öfund liafi
bitið þar iim nokkurs yðvars bjarta,
I., 402, 24- Imjyers, : lýkr svá
tali þessu, at mörgum ....
bitr J)á þegar í brún, that
many a man turned countenance
thereat, I., 488, ig ; ma þat
eigi bér um liða, hversu hann
klerkinn beit bannit, how the
cxconuniinication told on him, I.,
512, 4.
Bjartr, or/., bright, I., 16,27, ^^^<^<'',
77ianifest, 302,9. — 2, pure, I., 54,
27. — 3. upright, I., 70, 2, 448, g ;
bjar(,<í5 adv., brightly, IL, 134, 2^.
Bjóða (býð, bauð-buðum, byði,
boÖinn), v.a., to bid, order, com-
mand, I., 62, 22, ^Q, 29, 220 , 5 ; b.
um, id., II., 162, 10- — 2. to sum-
mon, I., 146, 3, 160, 19. — 3. to
invite, I., 200, 22, 384, 12. — 4.
b. mot, II., 122,9; ^>. vi^ð, IL,
120, 25, to make a bid, to bid for.
— 5. to offer, I., 128, 5, to tender,
to propose, II., 28, n ; bjóöa af
böndum, to resign, I., 350, 25 ; !>•
ofriki, to offer violence, I,, 276,
19 ; b. sik framra, to volunteer, I.,
330, 11 ; b. sik til, II., 160,5, and
bjóðast til, I., 412, 13, id. — Irnpers,
þykkir honum eigilett á bjóða um
bans vanstilli, it seemed to him
that his intemperate disposition
augured of no ease {on the king''s
jmrt), I., 454,19. — Boðinn, p.p.,
disposd, in the jykrase, b. til,
ready to, bent on, I., 202, 27,
442,5.
Bjiigr, ad., boioed, bent down, crip"
/;M,L, 232,25; IL, 138,20.
Blaðra (-að), v.a., b. tunguiini, to
wag the tongue; cfr. ^ mihi soli
mutirc permittitur^ I., 500,27.
Blaðra (blöðru, blö'Örur),y., a blain,
IL, 98,5, 100,13.
Bland, n., a mixture, IL, 80, 4, 154,
22*
Blanda (-að), v.a., to blend, to 7nix,
IL, 16,26-
Blása (blæs, blés-blésum, blési,
blásit), v.n., to bloio : er því likt
sem á blási fagr sunnan vindr, as
if a fair south wind blew vp, \.,
510, 20« — 2. to bloio, to sound {the
trumpet') : A na^sta morgin er
GLOSSARY.
317
Blása — cont.
kemr, sem blasit cr ok {jing sett,
I., 186,24.
Biásimi, «í/., swollen, injlamcd, II.,
98,3.
Blautr, acL, soft, miry, shishij, I.,
246,0.
Blekking,/., deception, I., 516,23.
Blekkja (t), v.a., to he guile, to de-
ceive, to mislead, 1., 394
? 10?
1.,
412,2,; II., 236, 10 ; L, 140, i„
440,3.
Blekna, i.e., blikna(aÖ), ■r./?.,fo groio
pale, loan, II., 287,30-
Bles, blesi, blésiim, see bla-sa.
Bleyðast, v. med,, to become faint-
Itearted, I., 500,3 ; 516, -.
Bleza (að), v.a., ivif/i dat., to bless,
I., 156,6-
BlezaÖar-fuUr, ad., fall of blessing,
II., 1 66, 14, /ooi Moie ^4«
BlezaSr, ad., blessed, I., 2, ^g ; þau
blezoðu lákn, blezööuin teiknum,
II., 98,25, 150,25.
Blezaa (ar, -ir), f., blessing, good
'Wishes, I., 286, 95, 288, q.
Blíða (-u), f, fondness, I., 54, 4. —
2.fnendskip, loving-kindness, I.,
122, 6, 336, 1. — 3. favour, I.,
56, 6? 16* — 4' sweetness, delight,
I., 20, 14, 30 22, 232, 29. — o.j^lea-
sure, joy, cheer, I., 252,22«
Blíðast, r. med., to gladden, to be
pleased at, I., 288,8.
BlíÖka (aS), vn., to appease, to soften,
I., 180,10, 224,1,.
Blíðliga, adc, kindly, I., 380,27-
Blíð-mæli, n. pi., soft words, ' blan-
ditiœ; I., 342, 20-
Blíðr, aul., blithe, cheerful, haj)py :
I., 18,1, 28,1,3,56,14,224,,. — 2.
Blíðr — cont.
kind, ready, willing : þar urn var
eugu framm farit nema með blíðri
saaiþykt herra konuiigsins, I.,
I., 528, 15 ; blíÖ játyrði, ready
assent, II., 192, ig. — 3. favour-
ably disposed: eru þeir spurðir,
hvorsu friðligt sé í Englandi eðr
fólki blítt imi heimkvomu erkibysk-
ups, I., 486, 26- — 4. calm, still,
tranquil: áin varð í augabragði hit
blíðasta silvetni, I., 32,23- — Blítt,
n., as suhst., kindly demeanour,
kind language, I., 158, §. — b.
prosperity., I., 136, ^.
Blíðii-bragð, n., blithe presence,
kindly expression of countenance,
I., 160,16.
Blíö-viðri, n., fine, ccdm loeathcr,
I., 262,25.
Blinda (að), v.a., to blind, I., 232, 30,
Blirid-leikr, m., blindness, I., 400, 1-.
Blindr, a.d., blind,!., 2:^2, o^-, II.,
Z^O, 14.
Bl(55 (-s), n., blood, L, 4, 1, 208, 30.
Blóð-bland, n., blood-)nixture, II.,
154, 19.
Blóð-dropi, m., a drop of blood, II.,
70,24.
Blóð-drvkkja, f, drink of blood,!.,
238, l
Blóðga (að), v.a., to stain with blood,
Vl., 18, 23.
Blóð-lát, n., blood-letting, bleedinq,
.II., 96,21.
BlóÖ-rás, /!, a stream, a streak if
blood, I., 554, 3 ; flow of blocd,
IL, 116,20-
BlóÖ-rauÖr, ad , blood- red, II., 60,
JO-
818
GLOSSARY.
Blóð-refill, m.y the j)oiat (blade?) of
the sivord, blóð-reíillinn brestr í
marmaranum, ok sverðit brotnarí
tvo hluti, Sfc, cfr., gladioque in
pavimento marmoreo confracto,
tarn cuspidem quam yladii suica-
pidum reliquit ecclesiœ, I., 544,
23-
Blom, /I., Jlotce?', II., 66, j^, 863,
190, 15.
Bldmgaðr, ad., hi fiowci\ flower-
ing, II., 60,11.
Blomi (a, -ar), m.^Jioiver, II., 274, 3^.
Blotna (aS\ v. inchoat., to groiv ivet,
to become moist a it d soft, I., 256, j.
— 2. Fig., to soften, 11., 263, 9.
my {-s),n., lead, 1., 210,,.
Blj-kápa, f, a chest of lead, II.,
222,13. ■
Blöskra (að), v.a., b. augum, to
blinh, to wink, II., 164, 12«
B0Ö (-s), order, injunction, com-
mand, L, 72,3, 282,^6, 420,5.—
2. in pL, a message, I., 524, ^g. —
3. an offer, a proposal, I., 330, 21,
384, 11, 428, 16 — 4. an entertain-
ment, a banquet, I., 224,5.
Boða (aÖ), v.a., to " bode,'' to an-
nounce, to proclaim, to declare, I.,
8, 18. ^^j i3> 1 1 6, 16- — 2. to testify,
toivitness : skal í fyrstu setja þat,
er hami boðar af sjálfum sér, II.,
92,
20-
3. to mention : her með
feiT þat, bversu hann geriv til vors
elskuliga bróöui' Thomas erki-
byskups .... sem vér megum
eigi úharmandi boÖa, I., 378, 12.
BoÖa-föll,?i.jo/., over-toppling break-
ers, I., 236,9.
Boöi (-a, -ar), m., a breaker, see boða
foil.
BoÖi (-a, -ar), m., a messenger, I.,
2/2, iQ.
Boðinn, see bjoc^a.
Boð-orð, n., commandment, I.,
104, 30, 304, 4; II., 100, 2P
Boð-skapr (-ar), m., an announce-
ment, decree, proclamation, I.,
218,1, 262,10.-2. message, I.,
456,23, II., 108,15. — 3. sum-
mons, I., 184, 11. — 4. order, com-
mand, I., 40, ig, 458, 3. — 5. de-
mand, request, I., 212, 13. — 6.
authorization, commission, I.,
124,7.
Bogi (-a, -ar), m., a bcw, I., 366, 17.
Bdk (gen. bækr, 7;/. bækr), /*., a
book,J.,2,^^,lU,,,.
B(5ka-lesning, /!, reading of books,
study, I., 394, 13.
Bok-list, /!, learning, I., 20, g.
Bola (-U, -ur), /'., a boil, II., 100,13.
Ból-staðr, m,, manor house, II.,
120, 27.
Bol-öx,y*., a pole-axe, I., 534, 1, 2«
Bdndi {-a, pi. bændr), m., a good-
man, a host, I., , 250, 9^, II.,
132, -.,10; a tenant, II., 124,4.
— 2. husband, II., 150, 22?
228, 12«
Eón-orð, n., loooing, courtship, L,
254,3.
Bora (að), v.a., to bore, to drill : sá
djöfuls limr steytir sverðs-oddin-
um niðr í hausinn boraðan, I.,
546, 20-
Borð (-s), n., a table, I., 98, ig ; sitja
yfir borð, to sit at table, IL, 104, n.
— 2. board) hospitality : firrast
hann ok fyrirláta margir þeir,
er með honum þangat riðn, ok
bans rikuligt borÖ lengi þágu, I.,
GLOSSARY.
319
Borö — cont,
200, 20« — ^' ship-board, in the
Jig. phrase : segja sitt raál rneð
öUu fyrir borð boriÖ, thrown over-
board, I., 500, 21«
Borg (ar, -ir),/., burgh, a fortijied,
place, stronghold, I., 48, i^.- — 2.
a city, I., 12, i6, 298, 2,21; lI-»
112, 2«.
Borga (að), v,a., to pay, I., 188, 21.
Borgaii (-ar-), f., a mortgage, a
security, I., 188, jp — 2. bail,
surety : ganga í b., to enter a bail,
II., 38,5.
'Bor inn, p.p. of hera.
Bot (-ar, bætr), /'., relief, i/nprcve-
mejtt in health, II., 78, ^.
Bra, see bregða.
Bráð (ar, -ir), /!, a quarry, I., 82,4.
Bráða-byrgð, /'., help that staves
off urgent need, make-shift, II.,
199
Bráð-dauÖr, ad., suddenly dead, II.,
40,11.
Bráð-látr, ad., rash, hasty, impe-
tuous, I., 482, 20«
BráÖr, ad., sudden, I., 204, 9, 238, 21,
414,
24 '
II., 40
J 20)
166,5-2.
rash, precipitate : eigi hæfir vitru
at bera lengi rauÖa kinn fyrir
bráðan punkt, I., 194, 24. — 3.
hasty, cursory, I., 68,4, 428,25-
— 4. imminent, open, II., 96,2-
— o. fierce, dire, I., 162, 22-
BragiS (-S, brögÖ), n., a turn, a
move : verÖa fyrr at bragði, to be
the first to move, I., 392, 15. —
2. a wile, a trick, a cunning move,
I., 368,25.
Brátt, n. of bráðr, as adv., quickly,
I., 290,13.-2. soon, I., 110, g;
II., 108,27.
Brauð (-s), n., bread, I., 012,3. —
2. livelihood, I., 500, jj.
Braust, see brjota.
Braut, see brjdla.
Bref (-s), n., a letter, I., 4, 4.
BregÖa (bregð, brá-brugðuin, brygði,
brugðinn), v.a., to turn, to
move : b. vit, to turn about, to
start,!., 62, Q, II., 1 10, ^3; to bestir
one's self, I., 326, 13, 414,5, II.,
152,20; !>• ii land sina, to turn
to one's ways of thinking, I.,
466, 17. — b. upp, to turn up^ to turn
on: hanii bregðr upp skriðljósinu,
I., 54, 10 ; to take out, to draw forth,
I., 294, g. Med. bregðast vit, to
fly into passion, II., 32, 4. — 2. to
draw : meÖ brugönu, sverði, with
a drawn sword, I., 538, 27. — 3.
to dip : biðjandi sacristam gefa
sér orlof at bregi)a einum lin-
skautai blóö Thomas erkibyskiips,
II., 80, 1. — 4. Impers., to change,
to alter, to vary : varla kom sá
tiginn maðr á garðiiiii, at brygði
þessu samsæti, I., 106, 20 y brugöit
er ok þeiri skipan, sem Lofuis
konungr hafði haldit iim hríð, I.,
434, 28 ; enn er Vilhjálmi kemr
þetta aftrkast, bregðr honum heldr
í brún, he turned countenance,
started with surprise, I., 414, 20'
— Med. bregðast, to fail, I.,
130, 1(5 ; lieilög ástundan brást
honum aldri, I., 50, 15 ; bregðast or,
to slip out of to desert, I., 516,7.
Breiða (dd), v.a., to spread, I.,
248,9.'
Breiðr, or/., broad, I., 11,25» -■1^)24 5
b. safnaiSr, large (tssonbly, I.,
20, 12 ; b. málstefiia, a numerously
attended meeting, I., 190, 9.
320
GLOSSARY.
Brendr, p.p. of brennu, burnt, re-
fined: b. silfr, I., 476,22; ^^"5
suhst., id., I. 402,15.
Bresta (brest, brast-brustum, brysti,
brostiun), v.n., to break, to crach,
to burst, I., 164,22; ^^. ^U^P? ^^
burst up, to break forth, I.,
I., 278,24, 308, 12-
Brestr (-s, -ir), m., a crash, crack,
I., 534, 185 breach, defection, I.,
468,-.
Breyskr (from brjota, brant, should
be spelt etymol. breyzkr), ad.,
brittle ; but oily in the moral
sense: frail, feeble, weak, I.,
22,12.
Brigzla (aÖ), v. a., to reproach, to
taunt, L, 204, g; II., 18,2-
Brigzli, n. pi., reproaches, I., 434, g.
Biixluð=brigzluÖ.
Brim (-s), n., suif, surge, II., 96, ^.
Brjóst (-s), n., breast, I., 50, 13 ; fig.
heart, I., 262,22; mind^ 300, 13,
L,20,2.
Brjota (bryt, braut-brutum, bryti,
brotinn), v. a., to break, to xcreck,
I., 44, 23, 0^1 19. — 2, to break,
to trespass,!., 358, 24; b. moti, to
trespass against, I., 524, 29. —
3. fig-, to break up, to elicit :
hann brant skilnino; iit af liverjnm
salmi 1 saltara, I., 20, og- Phrase :
b. kappi við, to contend against,
I., 394,11. — Med. bijotast, /'o
ferment, in the fig. sense, to
rankle, to fester : hvert þat brngg
ilsknnnar er í þeim braust móti
Thómasi, var sannliga móti
krnnnnni, I., 56, 22 ; þetta brýst
enn með konnnginnm, rankles in
the king^s breast, I., 140,25.
Bróðerni, n., brotherhood, II.,
100,21.
BróÖir (-nr, bræðr), m., brother, L,
4, 21, 192, 29.
Bróðurligr, ad., brother-like, II.,
289,5.
Brok (-ar, brækr), f., breeches, I.,
0Ö0, 9.
Brosa (t), v.n., to smile, I,, 64, n.
Brot (-s), n., breaking, breakage,
I., 534, 2- — 2. wreck, ship-wreck,
L, 44,25", 11., 96,5.
Brotinn, see brjota.
Brotligr, ad., in the nature of
trespass or guilt, I., 396, 1^.
Brotna (aÖ), v.n., to break, to crack,
I., 182,8,544,24.
Brott, adv., away, I., 158,^", 238, 1 ;
out of, I., 184, 1; Í brott, gone
off, vanished, I., 302, 9 ; af brott,
clean off: setti hann öxi á einn
skjotinn ok hjd af brott rdfnna,
I., 508, 4.
Brott-feldr, ad., palsied, II., 226, 17.
Brott-ferð, f., departure, I., 238, 23,
244,,.
Brii (-ar, brýr), f., a bridge, I.,
32,9.
Brúðr (-ar, -ir),yi, bride, I., 408,29,
548,26.
Brngg (-s), n., brewing, plotting,
concocting, I., 56,21-
Brngga (að), v. a., to brew, I.,
512,17.
Brnllanp, n., i.e., bnið-hlanp, not a
genuine Icel. word, Dan. bryllop,
Sioed. bröllopp), n., a bridal
feast, I., 534, i^.
Briin (-ar, brynu), f, a brow, I.,
156,1,414,21,428,2.
Brnnnr (-s, -ar), ;;/., '''- bourn ^' a
well, I., 556,8,9.
GLOSSARY.
821
Brustii, brnstum, see bresta.
Brut, adv., = brutt, I., 90, j^.
Brutt, adv.,=:bvott, I., 34, ^j., 82, i-.
Brutt-ferð, f., departure, I., 16, jg,
II., 66, 27-
Brjggja (-11, -iir), /., a bridge, I.,
32,7.
Bryning, (-ar), /I, ^^ whetting, ^^ ex-
hortation, charge, I., 78, 14 ; in-
stigation, I., 500, 25.
Brynja (-11, -iir), f., coat of mail,
defensive armour, I., 50, ^4.
Bryn-tröU, n., a halberd, I., 534, ^.
Bræða (dd), r.ö., ío w^e/í, I., 336,20-
Med. bræðast, to melt away, to
vanish, II., 26, 20«
Bræði, /'., anger, I., 154, 5, 448, 2 ;
rashness, precipitation, I., 274, 23.
Biia (by, bjo-bjuggum, byggi,
búinn), v.n., to abide, to dwell,
only in Jig. sense : birti þá Frið-
rekr hvat í honum bjo, I., 90, 24;
b. Í skapi to inhabit the mind, to
be in the mind, I., 280, 7. — v.a.,
to prepare, to make ready : b.
borð, to set the table, I., 98, 17 ;
b. til svefns, to get ready for bed,
II., 162,7; búit hug yðarn til
þolinmæði, prepare your mind
for, I., 150, ig ; b. um, ^o build,
to set up, I., 32, 9. — Refl. constr.
b. sik, to get one's self ready, I.,
60, 15 ; 62, 23 ; b. sik undir^ to show
willing readiness, to prepare for ,
I, 344, 4. — Med. búast, to get
ready, to prepare, I., 28, 26» — !>•
\}A, to be prepared for ^ II., 132,5.
Buí5u, see bjoða.
Buðum, see bjóða.
Bú-garÖr, ;/i., home-stead, 11., 132,2,
148,12.
K541.
Búinn, p.p., of bua, as ad., prop.
dressed, I.," 212,6; H. 136,5.—
2. equipped, fitted out, I., 64,4;
hence : ready, prepared, I., 44, 23 ;
b. til, on the point of, about to, I.,
188, 19. — 3. neut, búit, done : svá
búit, so done, I., 248, jg.
Búkr (-S, -ar), m., the trunk, the
body, IL, 160,14, carcase, II.,
124,20.
Búnaðr (-ar), w., a habit, garment,
I., 312,22, 314,3, IL, 136,1.-2.
preparations for a journey, equip-
ment, I., 474, 11«
Bundu, see binda.
Burðar-tíð, /., nativity, I., 506, ^^,
508, 2g.
BurÖr (-ar, -ir), m., {that which is
borne), foetus, child, I., 12, jo,
14, 5 ; II., 150, 9 ; creature, I., 430,
29. — 2. birth, descent, I., 402, 7.
BurÖugr, ad., well born, I., 20, 13.
Burgeiss, 7n., a burgess, I., 506, 4.
Burt, adv. away, II., 102, 17,
130,3,5.
Burt-reið, f, riding off, departure,
I., 462, 8.
BustiguU (-s), /;/., " ericius,'' a
hedgehog, urchin, I., 230, ^.
BýÖ, see bjóða.
Byði, see bjóða.
Bygð {-SLT,-ir),f, inhabited parts,
settlements, country ..side, I.,248,g,
476, 13. — 2. whereabouts, haunts,
1., 232, 22«
Byggi, see bua.
Bylgja (-u,-ur),y!-, a billoiv, breaker,
II., 04,95. — 2. sea {running),
IL, 208,''io.
Bylgju-f'all, n., rush of billows, surf\
IL, 96,4.
322
GLOSSARY.
Byndi, see binda.
Býr, {gen. býjar, ace. by), 7n., town,
I., 520, 6, 11., 148, 14-
Byrðr, (-ar,-ar),/., a burden, I., 78, 9.
Bjrgja, (ð), v.a., to shut, to close,
I., 334, 25, 424,13,11., 279, 33.
Byrja, (að), «;.«., to begin, I., 16, j,
24, 25, 300, 30- — Imjpers., oportet,
I., 482,10, 530,17.
Byria (aÖ), v.ö., ío blend, to 9niæ, to
make tip, as a potio)i, honum þótti
nokkurr maSr byrla sér eitr í einu
guUkeri, I., 416,5; "^^^^ 'hdins
skifti V. sinnum sinum lit, er þat
byrlaÖist sjúkum mönnum, I.,
226,25.
Byrr (-jar), m., wind at will, /air
wind, I., 480, 1, 484, 2 ;^^. means
of getting off) escape, I., 472, 21.
Byskup, m., a bishop, I. 40, 15,
passifu.
Byskupligr, ad., bishoplike, episco-
pal, I., 358, 20, 540, 12.
Byskups-gar^r, m,, episcopal court,
a see, I., 114,2.
Byskups-skrúð, 7i., episcopal robes,
II., 170,10.
Byskups-skrúði, m., id., I., 24, 13.
Byskups-stoll, m., an episcopal
chair, a see, I., 376, 26«
BæÖi, see biðja.
Bæði, adv., both, I., 4, 20-
Bægja (ð), v.a., to balk, to push
back, 11., 128,1.
Bæn (-ar, -ir),/., a prayer, I., 24, 2 ;
II., 134,1; gera bæn, to say a
prayer, to pray, I., 74, 7.
Bæna-hald, n., continuous praying,
11., 38, 2.
Bænar-orð, n.,pl. praying words, en-
treaty, I., 386, 17, 412, 0.
Bæna-staðr, m., subject of a petition,
a proposal, I., 286, 1.
Bær (-jar, -ir), m., an (open) town,
L,48,i2.
Bæri, see bera.
Bæta (tt), v.a., to " better^' to im-
prove, to restore, referring to
health, II., 70, 5. — 2. to amend,
to make amends for, to make
good, I., 358,23, 378,17, 494, 30.
Bölía (að), v.n., to " bellow,'' to
howl, I., 534,9.
Bölfaðr (bölvaðr), ad., accursed, L,
176,13,304,6; n.,54,13.
Bölfan (bölvan), f, a curse, ex-
communication, I., 500, 13 ; an
accursed deed, I., 546, n.
Bölfanar-verk, n., an accursed deed,
I., 418,9.
Bon (=bæn), f., a prayer, II.,
284, 28, 285, 24.
Börur,/.j9/., a litter, I., 202, 15 ; cfr.
barir.
D.
Daga (aÖ), v. impers., to daion :
sem fyrst dagar, hefir hann sik
uppi, I., 50,29.
Dag-brún, f, day-brow {the day's
brow lifting, as it were), dawn,
glimmer of day, I., 52, n.
T)2ig-ÍQV^, f, journeying by day, I.,
244,3.
DsigiigSL, adv., daily , I., 98,7, 158,27«
Dag-mál, 7i. pi., " day-meaV i.e., the
time at 9 o'clock a.m., II., 158, 13.
Dagr, (c?a^. degi, degi, IL, 269,3o;
dat. plur. dögum), m., day, I.,
4, 13 ; virkr dagr, working day,
every day, I., 206, 27 ; á daginn,
GLOSSARY.
323
Dagr — cont.
in the day time, I., 50, ^g ; dag
frá degi and dag a£ degi, day
after day, L, 146, 26 ; II-> 58, 21-
— 2. day-break, daivn,!., 24:i, 20 ;
lýsir af degi, day is breaking, I.,
156,5.
Dags-werk, n.^ a day^s ivork, I.,
462,7.
Dag-þingaii,/., a meeting, I., 76, 13,
288,5.
Dáligr, ad., wretched, miserable, I.,
236,24- — 2. hateful, shameful,
L, 520, 10.
Dásam-ligr, ad., admirable, I.,
112,^4. — 2. glorious, II., 90, jg,
118,8, 190,14. — ^* (adorable, I.,
552, 10« — 4. adoring, glorifying,
I., 34,3.
Dá-semd (-ar), y'., admiration, I.,
302,3. — 2. marvel, II., 110, 9.
Da-semi, y.,=dá-semd, 2., I., 24, ^g.
Dauða-dagr, w., " dying day^^ death,
I., 42,15.
DauÖa-raaðr, m., a doomed man, I.,
538,15.
Dauða-ráð, n., deadly plot, I., 518,15.
Dauða-son, m., son of death, I.,
418
>13-
Dauða-sonr, m., id., I., 484, 3.
Dauða-sök,y!, guilt worthy of death,
capital offence, I., 196, 9.
Daut5i (-a), m., death, I., 6, 19,
164,20.
DauÖliga, adv., in a deadly manner,
L, 330,9.
DauÖligr, ad., mortal, I., 58, 20,
530, 18« — 2. deadly, d. illska, II.,
14, 19. — 3. deadly, undying,
implacable : d. liatr, I., 144, g ;
öfund, 514,5.
DauÖr, ad., dead, I., Q>Q, 2q, 104, gg,
514,12.
Dauð-staddr, ad., at the point of
death, " in articulo mortis,^^ I.,
458,21.
DauS-vona and dauÖ-voni, ad., id.,
II., 74, 2,4.
Dauf-eyrast, med., to grow dull of
hearing, i.e., to turn a deaf ear
to, II., 26, 15.
Daufr, ad., deaf, II., 134, 14, 22G,i5.
Decan, m., a dean, I., 88, g.
Decreta, (-u, -ur),/., decrees, de-
cretals, I., 152, 4.
Decreta {Q^'),v.a.,to decree, I., 208, 31.
Decretum, ?i.,= decreta, I., 302, g.
Degradera, v. a., to degrade, I.,
152,9.
Deila (d.), v. a., to quarrel, I.,
158, 10»
Deila (-U, -ur), f., a quarrel, I.,
374,4,412,17.
Deponera, v.a., to depose, I., 266, iq.
DeyÖa (dd), v.a., prop, to put to
death, II., 8,1, hence: — 2. to
mortify : hann deyddi sinn likam
ok sitt hörund með hárklæði ok
húðstrokiira, I., 104, 23.
Digr, ad., big, stout, I., 14, g ; hence
masterful, overbearing, I., 428, 3.
Digta, see following loord.
Dikta (að), v.a., to dictate, to set
up, I., 294, 18- — 2. to compose,
to wi'ite, hann diktar lofgerðir
vorrar £rú, bæði til einsligra lestra
ok prosur til kirkjunnar, L, 20,35,
cfr. 22, 5. — 3. to concoct, to plot :
enn at dikta dauÖaráð í háleiíuni
tima var enn til mikiis aiika þeini
gla^ps!, 1., 518,15. — 4. to enact
by edicts, to enforce by law, I.,
X 2
324
GLOSSARY.
Dikta — cont.
420, 20, 456, 13 ; II., 188, ^g- — 5.
to frame, to pass {as judgment),
L, 172,17, 186,14,220,8.
Dimma (d), v.a., to obscure, to make
little of, hverr sem stundar, at
dimma þetta dýrÖar-tákn, II.,
114,16.
Dimma (-ii), /'., gloom, I., 510, 21.
Dimmr, ad., " dirn^^ dark : d. þoka,
thick fog, II., 44,10.
Dirfast, V. med., to he hold enough
to, to presume, to dare, I., 86, n,
146,26,420,6,452,15 IL, 56,23-
Dirfð (-ar), f., presumption, over-
holdness, I., 172, i^; II., 144, 19,
180,25.
Disputcra, v.a., to dispute, to dis-
course, I., 108, g.
Dissimiilera, v.n., to wink at, I.,
278,9.
Djarfliga, adv., holdly, frankly,
in a straight-forward manner,
I., 188,15.
Djarfr, ad., hold, presumptuous,
I., 62, 11, 68, 10, 332,1. — 2. /)wi^,
free-spoken, I., 214, 19, 466, 13.
Djarf-tæki, /., rapacity, IL, 263, 21.
Djúp, n., deep, depth, I., 302, i^.
Djúpr, ad., deep, IL, 120, ig ; fig. :
flytr sira Yilhjálmr eigi djúpara
enn svá, sir W. floateth no deeper
than so = exhihits his shallowness
of mind to such an extent as . .,
I., 414, 1. — 2. deep-rooted, fixed,
settled : liann skilr því gjörr
hversu ástiindan konungsins er
djúp ok meinlig kristninni, I.,
160,23« — 3. profound, penetra-
ting : Lanfrancus, siðlætisraaðr
Djúpr — cont.
mikill, ok ineistari einkar djúpr,
I., 10,8.
DjöfuUigr, ad., diabolical, devilish,
I., 546,21, 552, 24.
Djöful-óðr, ad., " devil-mad^^ pos-
sessed, having devil, II., 40, 14.
Djöfuls-limr, 7n., devil's limb, a
member of the devil, I., 546, 19.
Djörfung (-ar), f, pride, insolence.
L, 17
'5 16*
Dómari (-a, -ar), m., a judge, I.,
78,11.
Dom-draga, v.a., to drag into court,
I., 42,9.
Dominus, I., 302, 24.
D(5mr (-S, -ar), w., '^-dom,^^ heiðinn
dómr, heathendom, \., 6, 5 ; heilagr
domr, holy, sacred appointments,
sacred furniture, relics, I., 492, 27 ;
IL, 72,10, 82,2, 202,
12«
D(5mr (-s, -ar),??i., a court of justice,
L, 70, 7, 188, 5. — 2. a jury : nefn-
ist Í d(5m þar yfir tolf menn af
leikvaldi, L, 298, n- — 3. judg-
ment, L, 172,17, 186,9,11,13.
Doms-dagr, m., ^' day of doom^' day
of judgment, I., 104, 19.
Dottir (-ur, pi. dætr), f, daughter,
L, 26,18; n., 24,1,2.
Dottur-son, m., a daughter's son, a
grandson, I., 26,23«
Draga (dreg, dró-drógum, drægi,
dreginu), v.a., to drag, to draw. —
1. to drag : þá er hverr dro með
liöföum rétt ok frelsi kirkjunnar
uudir krúnuna, I., 46, 3; svá eru
þeir nú gripnir af sýslumönnum
sem úlærðir, ok dregnir undir
limalát, L, 142,6; Philippus er
dreginn undir opinbera húðstroku,
GLOSSARY.
325
Draga — cont.
I., 144, 15 ; sannast sá kvittr, at
manndráparar erkibyskups muni
taka bans likama með forzi, ok
draga um staÖinn, I., Sd6, ^ó '•> ^'
upp, to drag out {of a slough), II-,
120, 17 ; d. Í dau^a, to drag into
death, II., 20, ^. — Fig, to seize, to
confiscate, to appropriate : skutlar
jarðir ok eignir kirknanna ok
Draga
dregr
undir
konuDgsgarð,
I..
, 10 ; d. undir sik,
to seize, I.,
,11, 134, 10 ; þeir . . . muni vilja
draga af henni þat, er öllu þessu
var æÖra, . . . erkibyskupsins
likam, i.e., drag, pull out of her
hands, I., 554, 25. — 2. to draio :
wsem hann hefir svá sagt, dregr
hann af ser vigsluguUit, I., 306, 26 ;
tak nu svá til dæmis, at bogi sé
bendr ok or sé dregin, I., 366, jg ;
d. úr slíÖrum, to draw from the
sheath, to unsheath, II., 16, 1. —
Fig. to draw on, to lure, sá gnll-
penningr er veröldina dregr með
megni, I., 116,9 ; Þ^^ dregr drjugt,
er af honum leiðir, his deeds draw
hard, i.e., have relentless conse-
quences, I., 136,23 ; þvi dregr oss
skyldaþér atsenda áminningarorð,
I., 360, 25 ; d. undir glosu, to draw
in under, i.e., to make tlie subject
of, comments, I., 552, 21 ; d. dærai,
to draw, adduce examples, I.,
430, 17 ; þetta mál þarf eigi draga
{zrzdraio on, draw out) mönnum
til mæSu, I., 280,24,; ^- ^^^^' ^^
to draw an army together against,
to march on or against, II., 1 7 8,25 ;
d. til samþyktar, to draw or b 'ing
cont.
pers. in a sort of passive sense :
to be draicn, to move towards ; af
þeim innleiðslum . . . leiddi svá lang-
ar limar, at margs raanns lif drog
til útlegðar, I., 6, 13 ; dregr framm
at.
time
draws, wears towards,
I., 22, 11 ; bann dregr {or, should
it be dregz ?), í fylgi með þeim
f rænda sínum er verr bafði, assc-
sociates himself with, II., 148,25;
verðr svádregit í sr6\\?>i\\,t he matter
eventually is so brought about, I.,
470, 20 ; rfr. þó verðr þat í síðustu
dregit, II., 26, 21- — Reflexive
constr., d. sik framm, to come for -
ivard, I., 148, 2- — Med. : enn
því jafnframm dragizt þer i fri'ðar-
grein, you make as if you would
let yourselves be drawn, I., 404, 20 ;
bvárt sem undan dregst at fornu
eðr nýju, whether long ago or
lately it has been drawn away,
i.e., has been detached from, I.,
118,19-
Draka (dröku), f, a streak, I.,
554,3.
Dramb, n., {prop., fat which gives
increased bodily size, weight, im-
portancc, braivn, in fact, cfr.
linakka dramb, the brawn of the
neck of e.g. a ram, a boar, SfC,
hval-drambr, whale blubber),
stomach, arrogance, pride, haugh-
tiness, I., 498, 29.
Dramba (acS), v.n., to vaunt, to exalt
one's self I., 132, 7.
Drambsamligr, ad., ambitious, I.,
I'i'^j 11-
Drambsanir, ad., proud, insolent,
to consent, I., 136,
20»
/m- I I., 408,1.
326
GLOSSARY.
Dmmhsemi,/., pride, L, 178,12«
Drambsemis-fdtr, m.^foot of 'pride,
I., 512, 29«
Dramb-visi,y., haughty temper, I.,
278, n.
Dramb-viss, ad.^ of haughty dispo-
sition, I., 428, 3.
Drap, see drepa.
Dráp (-s), n., manslaughter^ mur-
der, II., 6, 17.
Drapu, see drepa.
Drápum, see drepa.
Draum-ma^r, 7n., ' dream-man,^ II.,
50,9.
Draumr (-s, -ar), 711., a dream, I.,
12, 23' 232, 13.
Dreg, see draga.
Dreifa (ð) v.a., causal to drifa, to
scatter: Joceliu . . . profar sik
mim síöar leigumann einn þá er
vargrinn kemr at dreifa hjörÖina,
I.^ 142, 25 ; enn þótt aðrir dreifist,
though others take to flight, I.,
312,11. Med. ar^Mo^st, to be dis-
traught {in mind), I., 412,23«
Dreift, n. ad. as adv., dispersedly :
fara d., to become widespread, I.,
2jl8-
Drekka (drekk, drakk-drukkum,
drvkki, drukkinn), v.a., to drink,
I'5 12j 22' 512, ig.
Drekkja (t), v.a., to droion, II.,
162, 17.
Dreng-lyndr, ad., of manly heart,
noble-minded, I., 54, 25.
Drepa (drep, drap-drápum, dræpi,
drepiun), v.a., to strike; hence,
d. fæti, to strike the foot against,
to trip, to stumble, I., 222, jq.
Fig. : drepa fæti svá hart í sinni
úvenju, to stumble so violently
Drepa — cont,
over one's oivn mischief, I., 234, n.
— 2. to smite, to slay, to kill, I.,
544, 17, II., 4, 12, 8, 1, 5, 38, 12-
Fig. to destroy : liverr sem lýgr,
drepr sina sal, I., 402, 21-
Drejri (-a), m., {connected with
Goth, drjúsan, Germ, drausclien,
Dan, drysse, Engl, drizzle ?)
blood, in flowing condition, I.,
548,22.
Dreyrugr, ad., bloody, sanguinary,
L, 236,12.
Drifa (drif, dreif-drifum, drifi, cbif-
inn), v.n., to drift : drifr f)á mik-
it folk samt i einn staí5, 1., 72, 23.
DrjúgT, ad., {^doughty'), long in
coming to an end, lasting, en-
during : þat dregr drjúgt, er af
honum leiÖir, I., 136, 23.
Drjupa (drýp, draup-drupum, diypi,
dropit), v.n., to drop, to drip, I.,
232, g.
Drd, see draga.
Drogu, see draga.
Drogum, see draga.
Dropi (-a, -ar), m., a drop, II., 70, n.
Drottinligr, ad., liege, loyal, d.
hlýðni, II., 20, 11. — 2. dominical,
d. hátiÖ, the Nativity of the Lord,
I., 512, iQ.
Drottinn (-s, dat. drottni, pi. drottn-
ar), m., lord, sovereign, I.,
538, 11 ; the Lord, I., 6, g.
Drottins-dagr, m., the Lord's day,
L, 200,26.
Drottnan (-ar), y., dominion, sway,
rule, I., 546,2«
Drottning (-ar, -ar), f, queen, I.,
20,51.
GLOSSARY.
327
Drúpa (t), V.M., to droop^ to he down-
cast, II., 16,25.
Drykklauss, ad., ivithout drink, II.,
78j 24*
Drykkr (drykkjar), m., drink, I.,
9°5 24> «^12, 20-
Drýpr, a corrupt 3 sing, pres. ind.
for ávú^'iY from drúpa, II., 16, 25.
Drægi, see draga.
Dræpi, see drepa.
Duga (Ö), v.n., to do, to avail, to
answer a purpose, I., 72, jq) 338, lo-
Dugande, pres. p. of duga, as ad.,
in condition to avail, d. maðr,
IL, 122,1.
Dugnaðar-maðr, m., a helper, salvor,
IL, 208, 12-
Dugnaðr (-ar), m., avail, II.,
104,7.
Diikr (-S, -ar), m., a cloth, I., 98, jg.
Dul (-ar), f, presumption, super-
ciliousness, I., 278, II, 498, 29-
Dvala, see dvöl.
Dvaldi, see dvelja.
Dvelja (dvel, dvaldi-dvöldum, dveldi,
dvalit), v.n., to dwell, to abide, to
sojourn, I., 30, u, 54, ^, 468,13.
— 2. v.a., to defer, to postpone,
to put off: Alexander páfi dvelr
þat, I., 286, 5. — Med., to icait,
to lapse: þótt hennar formanni
lieyri með skyldu at kalla aftr jörð-
ina, ottar oss, at þat dvelist á vor-
um dögum, I,, 226, 7 ; bíðandi
höfum ver beðit ef þér vildit víkja
yðru ráÖi á réttan veg. Enn hví
þat dvelzt enn í dag óttumst vér
at þat valdi sem ritningin segir,
&c., I., 360, li.
Dvöl (dvalar, dvalir), f, delay,
tarrying, I., 188, 14, 248, 1, 308, 12 ;
Dvöl — cont.
II., 70, 17. — 2. continuance, du-
ration, I., 20, iQ. — 3. digression,
I., 70, 17.
Dýfliza (-U, -ur), /'., a prison, I.,
286,7, 356,6; IL, 194,0.
Dygð (-ar),/., help, favour, further-
ance, avail, I., 192, 19. — 2. faith,
faithfulness, faithful friendship,
L, 136,1, 154,9, 200,16. — 3.
faith, devotion, piety, I., 52, 19,
— 4. continence, ahstemiousnesSy
L, 108,2.
DygSar-maðr, m., a true man and
trusty, an upright, Jionourable
man, I., 214, iq.
Dygðar-verk, n., dutiful action, I.,
310,13.
DygÖar-þjónusta, f, faithful service,
L,470,9.
Dynjandi, ad., dinning, roaringy I.,
8, 14.
Dynr, m., din, I., 520, iq.
Dyr (-s), n., animal, I., 230, 14,,
476, 10.
Dýra-'^^eiðr,y., chase, hunt, I., 6,21-
Dýrð (-ar, -ir), /., glory, I., 4, g,
78,3, 334, 5 ; hégómlig dýrð, vain
glory, II., 8, 19.
DýrÖar-dagr, m., day of glory, IL,
80, 16, 84,
18-
DýrÖar-fullr, ad., full of glory,
glorious, I., 172,22? 510,2; H->
172,1,190,14.
Dýrðar-hlj(5]nr, m., sound proclaim-
ing glory, II., 26, 9.
DýrSar-konungr, m., king of glory,
IL, 176,25-
Dýröarligr=dýröligr, IL, 178, 5.
Dýrðjir-lof, n. pi. .glorifying, glorifi-
cation : svá munu vaxa ok mare:-
328
GLOSSARY.
Dýrðar-lof — cont.
faldast bans dýrðarlof, II.,
60, 21.
DýrÖar-maðr, m., 07ie made glorious,
a saint, I., 546, 4.
Dýrðar-maik, n., a mark, a token of
glory, IL, 1 30,16-
Dýrðar-samligr, ad., glorious, ador-
able, II., 72, J.
DýrÖar-tákn, n., a glorious token, a
miracle, II., 86, ^5, 114, ^g, 168, 14.
DýrÖar-verk, n., a glorious deed, a
miracle, II., 168, iq.
Dýröligr, ad., glorious, I., 166, §,
552,1; n., 46,25.
Dýrka (að), v,a., to ivorship, to adore,
L, 132,e; IL, 6,5, 132,23.-2.
to glorify, I., 82, 2, 316, 22, IL,
176,8-
Dýrkan (-ar), f., fame, glory, L,
70,13.
Dýrleikr (-s), 711., great price, pre-
ciousness, L, 476, 29.
Djrligr, ad., costly, precious ; d.
klæÖi, II. , 200, 19. — 2. worthy,
adorable, excellent, glorious, L,
"■*? 15? 28» ""*> 14 '•> I-t'5 16, 5, 132, jg.
— Dýrligt, 71., «5 subst., segist
dýrligt af því efni, glmnous things
are recorded concerning that
matter, L, 88, 20-
I)ýr-mætr, ad., precious, L, ^6Q, ^.
Dyrr (dyr, IL, 130, 7), n., pL, a
door, L, 6, 19, 14, 1, 430, 5, 524, 4.
Dyrr, ad., costly, precious, expen-
sive, I., 476, 17 ; d. kostr, high
cost, IL, 36, 25. — 2. choice, ex-
quisite: enn þeir voru sæmdir dýr-
um sendingura af honum sjálfum,
er til gavðs kvomu, I., 106, 22- —
3. dear, desirable : svo djra fyll-
Dýrr — cont.
ing fekk bondinn þess fyrerheits,
IL, 134, 14. — 4. worthy, exalted :
d. herra {the Pope), L, 300, jg ;
dýrustu höfðingjar, IL, 202, ig.
Dæma (d), v.a., to deem, hold, con-
sider : d. sik makligan, to deem
07ie's self worthy of, I., 202, 20« —
2. to perceive, to realise : sem
þeira skynsend mátti vel dæma, er
sátu Í hjá honum, L, 108, i- — 3.
to decide: enn hvat mevker (merk-
ez ? ) fyrir þann mann . . . Frakka
konungr eÖa Heiurekr ungi
viljum vær eigi dæma. IL, 178,8-
— 4. to judge, L, 152,3; ^- J^^y
to sit in judgment on, I., 412, 14.
Dæmi (-s), 71. (that by luhich one
judges,) example, illustration,
similitude, L, 2, ig, 22, 1, 70,9,
210,6.
Dæmilauss, ad., unexampled, IL,
276, 11-
Dæmi-saga, /"., story illustrative of,
or corroborating, a statement, L,
50, 19.
Dogor (davgðr), ad., bedewed, irri-
gated, L, 280, 35.
Döggvaðr, ad., id., IL, 88, 1.
Dökkr, ad., dark, dull, I., 210,9-
E.
E(Sa, and eðr, adv., or, L, 80, 10 ; 1 1.,
22, 11, passi?n.
Eðli (-s), n., nature, IL, 134, 29.
Ef, co?ij., with ind. and subj., if, I.,
22, 21, passim,.
Ef (-s), n., doubt ; fyir utan ef, with-
out a doubt, L, 250, gg, 526, 4.
GLOSSARY.
329
Efalaust, ??. r/f/., as adv., irit/wut
doubt, L, 118,27, 502,-.
Efanligr, ad., doiihtfid, dof/btable,
L, 210,2,.
Efa-semd (-ar), /., uncertainty,
doubt, II., 52, Q. — 2. conditional
stipulation, IL, 180, 2i'
Efi (-a), m., doubt, I., 18, ^g*
EHa- (d), v.a., to strengthen : hvárki
líf né líkam sparir hann til at efla
ríkit, L, ó8, 6 ; hér £}TÍr gefr
honum þá tillögii einn góðr maðr,
at svá sem Guð eflir heilsu lians,
muni hann segja messu, I., 202,
23 ; kalla þeir skj'ldugt, at hin
romverska móðir. . . . berist eigi
móti þeim, er him á at efla til allra
góðra luta, L, 272, 3. — 2. to rear,
to build up, to found : efldi hann
klaustr af griindvelli, í þeim
stað er Kadon heitir, I., 10, 4;
. þessi ríki maðr eflde stórt liús á
sínnm búgarð, 11. , 132, -^; greftaðr
í musteri vorrar frii, því er hann
hafði eflt ok tignat tögrum pre-
sentum, II., 172, i^- — 3. to give
impetus to, to encourage, to stir
up, to set agoing : eigi er þat várt
eyrendi at efla þrætur eÖr mein-
mæli, L, 282, ^^ ; sem Heinrekr
konungr hcfir staðfest at . . . efla
þat stríð móti herra páfanum sem
honum sjálfum horfði til sáriar
pínu, I., 330, 5 ; nú rísa málsemdir
af . . . hatri ok hermdum^ er hann
efldi móti erkibyskiipiniim, I., 350,
21; máþat ok vita, hverso ferliga þú
styggvir gamla konung í þvílíkum
ósóma, er þú eflir upp á hans
ástvini, L, 490, 2s- — 4. to aid, to
back, to give furtherance to : segir
Efla — cont.
ok sver um, ef þeir efla lengr
hans livin, at hann skal með ein-
hverju kyni raæta J^eim, I., 370, ^g ;
her meÖ fylgja þeir ríkismenn, er
. . . efldu svá manndráparann,
at, IL, 54, 20- — 5. to do, to per-
form, livat eru þér honum skvld-
ugir fyrir þetta alt, utan standa
með honum ok efla hans vilja í
öllumlutum ? I., 334, -. — 6. to set
up, to prepare, to arrange : eflir
Heinrekr konungr gamli veizlu
mikla, I., 452, 95 ; vendir konungr
Í Xormandi ok eflir þar stóra setu,
L, 472,90' — Jlcd. to groic strong,
to gain strength ; hann veiktist til
þess, at hann skyldi eflast, L, 166,
15; ef hon lytr á kné í falli sinna
formanna, eflist hon mest ok endr-
bætist, L, 400, 5 ; Heinrekr kon-
ungr ungi mægist vit Philippum
Frakka konung, ok eflist þar fyrir
bæði til lands ok fylgis, IL, 172,
20 ; eflast nil sumir . . . í þciri
hugsan, become firmly convinced,
I., 438,20« — 2. to gain authority,
to become valid : eigi er sá kosn-
ingr öflugr, fyrr ennprófast lögligr,
ok eflist fyrir herra páfans vald,
L, 124, ^. — 3. to tahe groivth, to
mature: meÖ Ijósum ritningum
hafa marger hluter svo vorit fyrer
ætlaðer af Guði, at þeir skyldu
eflast Í sina frammkva^md, II. ,
184,
4. to increase, to sicrll
efldist sva metna^r með honum,
at, r., 320, jg. — 5. to arise, to
originate : höfðingi landsi;is var
öllum þeim samvinnandi, er login
smáðu, ok þat skilr T1.<'mm- cvki-
330
GLOSSARY
Efla — cont.
byskup, at þar af eflast allar úhæf-
ur, I, 360, 5 ; enn af þessu efni
lögligrar hirtingar viÖ bjskupana
efldist svá mikill ófriÖr, I., 482, 27-
— 6. to prevail : leiddi hann
skilrik vætti, hversii sa vani ok
f)essi annarr þveraðist mot kirkj-
unni, ok liver j a meinsemd hann
fliitti Guðs fólki, ef hann efldist í
kristninni, I., 302, g.
E fling (-ar), /!, enabling, empower'
ing : sem einn er efling allra góðra
hluta, who alone giveth poioer
toioards good things being done,
1., áZ^, 22*
Efne-tré, «., timber, II., 118,22«
Efni (-s), n., prop, raw material ;
hence. Jig-, 1. matter, discourse :
priorr Robert skrifar þar um eitt
dýi'ligt efni, I., 36, g. — 2. nature,
circumstance : at því réttara megi
hann oHum hitum skipa, sera hann
skilur framar hversu til gengr ok
efni ^-ikr máhmum, I., 38, 9 ; gefr
hann sik betr liðngan at skoða
vöxt ok efni málanua, I., 114, j.
— 3. affair : ok innan litils tima
fær hann svá hagat sinu efni, L,
36, 3 ; kann ok vera, minn herra,
ef svá kastaði um mínu efni, at,
&c., I., 64, 22 ; þat efni skal vel
byrja, er svá miklu varOar, at hail
góðan enda, I., 80, 4 ; á nefndan
launcardao; biorirr herra Thomas
electus allar vigslur ok segist áýv-
ligt af því efni, I., 88,20 — 4.
cause, reason : byngist nú enn af
þessu efni hugr erkibyskups, I.,
160,22* sannliga var þeim efni
gefit, at segja &vá til himnakon-
Efni — cont.
ungsins, L, 34, 7 ; þat úfriðar efni
. . . hngðnm vér at yÖur vitra
mundi lægt hafa, I., 394, 8 ; enn
af þessu efni lögligrar hirtingar
við byskupana efldist svá mikill
()friðr,L, 482,26.
Efstr, superl. ad., tippemnost, high-
est, L, 8, 15 ; efsti dagr, dies su-
premus, II., 190, ^g.
'EÁ.teV'iÖY,/., pursuit : heyrer hún, at
henni er efterför veitt, she hears
that she is being followed, IL,
168,1.
Efter-komandi {sc. menn), m. pi.,
posterity, IL, 182, j.
Eftir, efter, prep, with dat. and
ace. — I. with dat., 1. indicative
of motion, after : fálkinn snarar
upp eftir {in pursuit of) einum
fugli, II., \A2,^. — 1. fig., pur-
suant to, according to, following :
eftir vana, e. konungligum vana,
I., 30, 14, 62, 23 ; e. orðum ok sögn
priors Roberts, I., 32, 20 ; e. guÖ-
spjallinu, L, 86, 5 ; e. atviknm, L,
108, g, 112, 23. — : IL, with ace,
1. local ; behind: Ijost er vorbit
af letrum þeim er lærÖir menn
leiföu eftir sik, L, 2, 3. — 2. after :
eftir kveðjnsending til höföingja í
landinn, L, 74, u. — 2. temp.,
after : eftir bans dag, L, 6, 25 ;
e. þessa liðna, L, '2Q, g, cfr. 28, ^ ;
e. páskir, L, 86, 27, &c. &c. Adv.
1. local, behind : enn herra páfiun
sitr eftir, L, 308, ^ ; kálfr var eftir,
IL, 120, 5 ; — back : halda efth', to
keep bach, to retain, IL, 114, 13.
— after, in a fig. sense: var svá
gjÖrla eftir farit, so carefully was
GLOSSARY.
331
Eftir, efter — cont,
the thing followed up in detail,
I., 24, 14. — 2. temp., after : næsta
dag eftir, I., 492, 21.
Eftir-dæmi, n.^ example, I., 82,2,
94,13, 136, 22> 194, g. — 2. imita-
tion, following after, ef nokkurr
vill koma minn veg með eftir-
dæmi, I., 208, 25.
Eftir-komendr, m. pi., successors in
office : þar yfir er lesinn opinber-
liga páfans boÖskapr at Aiigusti-
nus skal vera Kantiiariensis erki-
byskup, ... ok bans eftirkomendr,
I., 40, ig. — 2. posterity, I., 186, 12?
204, le.
Eftir-látr, ad., yielding, pliable, ob-
sequious, I., 70, 3, 472, 9.
Eftir-leitan, f, pursuit : bans vizka
sér Í gegnum, hvat á mundi koma,
eðr hversu mörg eftirleitan ok
■ forgildra bonum mundi veitt af
Heinreki konungi, I., 252, g. —
2. inquiry : býðr bann sínu föru-
neyti, at þeir kosti með alki frétt
ok eftirleitan at fa þenna mann,
I., 102, 20« — 3. mental self-re-
search : bugleiddum vér meÖ oss
með friðsamri eftirleitan, hvert
Ijti þér myndit oss finna, L,
146,20.
Eftir-læti, n., obsequiousness, páfann
griinar ... at byskuparnir muni
dirfast eigi þvi siðr með eftirlæti
vit konunginn at gera vígslu
þessa, I., 452, 2 ; fylgi ok efterlæti
sem nokkurir kardinalis höfðu
ólögliga veitt Heinreki konungi,
II., 186,21.
Eftir-mál, n., blood-suit, L, 142, j-.
Eftir-mæli, n., obsequious advocacy
of the cause of one side: at hafa
úti báÖar bendr, aðra til lofs
ok eftirmælis við konung, I.,
300, 1 ; SVC til eftirmælis við kon-
unginn, at allar þær þynganir,
sem nú voru lesnar upp á skaða
kirkjunnm-, skreytir bann ok fegr-
ar mecS falligum lit, I., 300,3;
byskupinn samsetr þat sama bref
meö úeinurð ok eftirmæli við
konunginn, I., 338, 20- — 2. plia-
bility, subservience : þær eignir,
sem nyliga bafa undan lagzt fpir
umboÖsmanna vanmegn eðr eftir-
mæli YÍð ríkismenn, tekr bann, I.,
118,24.
Eftir-sýn,/., " after-sight^' the looh,
the appearance of a thing, when
done : er eigi þa betra eptir-
synar [at] bafa belldr beðit um
brio ok þolat um stundarsakir,
n., 268, 10.
Eggja (aS), v.a., to urge, to per-
suade, to advise, L, 76, 12, 286, ig.
Egg-teinn, m., *' edge-rod^' a sword,
IL, 2Q>, 17.
Egna (d), v.a., to set {a trap), I.,
302, 2.
Ei, ai/t'.,=eigi, I., 52,13, 350,28,
472, 18 ;IL, 132,15.
EiÖr (-S, -ar), m., an oath, L, 166, 20 ;
leggja á eið sinn, to attest with
oath, I., 212, ig.
Eið-rof, n., breach of oath, L,
214,28.
Eið-rofi, 7n., one who breaks his
oath, traitor, L, 220, ^.
Eið-stafr, m., the subject formulated
to which an oath is sworn, II.,
,36,3.
332
GLOSSARY.
Eiga (á, átta-áttum, ætti, átt), v.a.,
to ow)if to possess : ok hann veit
víst, at kirkjan á, I., 118, 25 ;
fundii þeir brátt, hvern föSur þeir
áttii fyrir innan, I., 1 10, 9. — 2.
to have : hann átti þrjá syni, I.,
4, ]^7 ; dóttur átti hann eina, I.,
26, 18 ; Isibell, er átti Eiríkr
konungr, had for wife, I., 22, 4 ;
kail átte sér konii, IL, 118, 13. —
Fig. eiga hluti, to have a port in,
to he concerned in, I., 120, 4;
haun átti ávint had head-wind to
heat against, I., 90, jg. — 3. to
he in duty hound, ought, should :
hversu hvert mál á að hneigjast,
sem bezt samir, I., 112,23; hann
á nú Guös réttar at reka, I.,
118,13, her til hefir þú verit vorr
formaðr, ok af þ\ i áttum vér þér
at hlý^a, I., 218, 10; þessa jörð
Eckam skulum vér aldri upp gefa,
ok engan hlut annan, þann er
Cantuariensis kirkja á meÖ réttu
at hafa, I., 226, jq ; sagt5i hann til
hafa vit ok flesta hluti aðra f)á er
fylgja eiga göfugligum heilagrar
kirkju höföingja, I., 74, jg; raeð
þvi at einginn jarðligr maÖr á
mik at dæma, I., 220, 29.
Eigi, adv., not, I., 16, 2, 3 ; eigi því
minur, none the less, I., 8, 22 ;
eigi síör, no less, I., 14, n.
Eigin-húsfrú, /*., laivful -wife, I.,
254,4.
Eigin-kvæntr, ad., having a laivful
wife, L, 12,9.
Eiginliga, adv., properly, L, 48, 2-
— 2. specially, particularly, L,
450, 18-
Eigin-ligr, ad., oton : nefnir hann
serhvern eiginligu nafni, hy his
own name, L, 510,27; hlaupa
framm . . . afkynjaðir synir á
fööur eiginligan, L, 542, ^g. — 2.
proper, properly hclonging to :
Alex, hefir þar yfir sanna vissu,
at þessi vígslugerð er eiginlig
Thomasi erkibyskupi, I., 450, 22 ;
veikleikr manns náttúru hefir þat
eiginligt, at likamr berr otta sinna
kvala, L, 520, ^9 ; þat var öðrum
eiginligt af skapan, er annar hafði,
II., 146, 5. — 3. private, indi-
vidual: ottast hann, at þat kallist
meir framit ok þolt fyrir nokkura
hans sjálfs eiginliga sök, enn
vernd eÖr frelsi Gu^s rettar, I.,
228, 12«
Eiginn, ad., own, I., 80, jg, 108, 24,
300, 24, 368,
14*
Eigin-orí5, n., title to ownership,
þessa alia peninga skal Thomas
erkibyskup koniinginnm með
skilríki aftr lúka, meO því at
honum fellst eiginor^it, I, 188, s-
Eigin-sonr, m., own son, II. , 194,2«
Eign (-ar, -ir),/!, ownership, posses-
sion, property, L, 6,^0; Gu^s
eign, the property of the church,
L, 118,9; kasta eign a, io seize^
to confiscate, I., 348, 21-
Eigna (að), v.a., to appropriate:
eigna þér eigi annars vald, make
not thine own the power of another,
I., 364, 24. — 2. with dat. of the
person and ace. of the thing,
to charge with, to impiite to :
einginn maÖr i Englandi girnist
meirr sannan friÖ kirkjunnar
enn hann FJálfr, þótt honum
GLOSSARY.
333
Eigna — cont.
eignist síðar allar únáðr, I.,
176, 2. — Med., to become pos-
sessed of, to acquire, to have :
1,28^,42,22, 276,3, 400, 23; n,
186,13.
Eignar-maðr, m., owner, II., 142 -.
Eignar-nafn, n., own name, II.,
156, 15. — 2. title indicative of
ownership, I., 118,
11'
Ei-lífð (-ar, -ir), /*., eternity, I.,
520, 21.
Ei-lííliga, adv., eternally, II., 62, i-.
Ei-lifr, ad., eternal, I., 150, 20?
234, 18- — 2. perpetual, life-long :
keyrÖir af laudi briitt í eilífa
útlegS, I., 142, 9.
Einarðar-tala, f, frank speech, I.,
172,21.
Einarðliga, adv., frankly, uprightly,
fearlessly, boldly, I., 86,^3, 326, 20?
■ 414, ;, 456, 22.
EinarSligr, ad., frank, outspoken,
I., 346, 23.
Einar^r, ad., determined, I., 118, 17.
Ein-eygr, ad., one-eyed, I., 230, 22?
^ÚZ, 24,.
Ein-faldr, ad., simple, plain : e.
kanúka búnaðr, I., 240, 23 ; €*.
bróSir, I., 250, 23- — 2. single-
minded, sincere, upright, I., 36, 9,
196, 1.
Ein-feldi, n., simplicity of life, I.,
30,20- — 2. single-heartedness, I.,
204^ 11.
Eingi, II., 136, 10» sec foil.
Eiuginn (from einn, and gi a neg.
/>«/•<. 4-hinn ; eingin, ekki, I,, 62,
11, 110,11, 286,17; gen. eingis, I.,
54,9,336,23; einkis, II., 162,93;
euskis, II., 26.3,3^; avc. fern.
Einginn — co7it.
einga, I., 234, 3 ; eingva, I., 14,2,
160, 9 ; öngva, avugva, II., 66, 17 ;
dat. Jiiasc. öngum (aungiim), I.,
16,6, eingum, I., 6,30), ad., no,
none.
Eining (-ar),/, unity, IL, 240, jo-
Einkanliga (einkannliga), adv.,
chiefly, especially, particularly,
principally, I., 20,6, 44, 19, 388, 25;
II., 168,9, 170,26- — 2. singu-
larly, strangely, I., 412, jg.
Einkanligr (einkannligr), ad.,
strange, singular, wondrous :
ma vitrum manni virÖast bæÖi
einkanligt ok stórum lofsamligt,
at ein persona ok sama bafi öðlazt
svá forkuiinligt upphaf ok frá-
bærau enda, I., 16, 20 ; varÖ her
einkanlig nýlimda, ... at á liá-
vetrar tíma fá þeir svá æskiligt
leiði, I., 516,22; livern dag mátti
þar sjá vit bans steinþró nokkut
einkanligt dýrðartákn, II., 86, 15 ;
sér hann Heinrek kouung með
svá einkanbgum bætti, at útaUigr
fuglafjöldi flykkist at honiim, I.,
388,22- — 2. especial, particular :
sendir kveðjii GiUibert . . . með
skyldri þjónkau einkanligrar
blýÖni, L, 380, 21 ; ekkja kynstór
ok auðug, bim var einkanligr vin
Tbóme, L, 164, 20-
Einkar {prop. gen. o/'eink ?), adv.,
particularly, singularly, cxcecd-
ingh^ I-, 10, 7, 14, 22, 72, 14,
474, 13.
Ein-leitr, ad., one-eyed looking, odd
looking, II. , 146, 7. — 2. odd,
peculiar, strange, unsociable, II.,
285, .,.,.
334
GLOSSARY.
Einligr, ad.j single, II., 102, 5.
Ein-litr, (=einhlitr), ad., compe-
tent, II., 28, 5.
Ein-læti, n., unsociable ways, I.,
2.Z, 21«
Ein-mæli, n., private talk, L, 462, ^q.
Einn (ein, eitt), card, num., one,
I., 2, 3 ; at eins, only, I. 16, 13.
— 2. sole, alone, only: hann
flýði fyrr af konungs garði fyrir
þá eina sök, L, 36, 23 ; eigi einum
sánim eða sjúkum til fagnaðar,
II., 86, 19.
Einn-hverr (einliver, eitthrert, ace,
sing. fern, einshverja, II., 12, g)?
pron. indef., some, some one, I.,
3Öj 15> ' ^> 15 230, 21, 23«
Ein-orð, I., 466, ^5, see einurð.
Ein-ræÖi, n., wilfidness, masterful-
ness, I., 274, 24.
Ein-seta,/., hermitage, I., 206,3.
Einsliga, adv,, hi a solitary, se-
questered position, I., 242, 13. —
2. in the hearing of afeio, pri-
vately, I., 524, -^.
Einsligr, ad., private, I., 20, 26«
Ein-synn, ad., having the sight of
one eye only, L, 232, 29.
Ein-sögn,y., statement of one wit-
ness only, I., 188, 9.
Ein-urð (-ar), /'., frankness, bold-
ness, sincerity, L, 64, 30, 162, 2?
430, 22.
Einvalds-konungr, 7n., sovereign
king, L, 380, 26-
Ein-vild,/'., wilfulness, I., 450, ^3.
Ein-vistir,y.joZ., solitary life, retire-
ment, II., 10, 14.
Ein-þykki, n., wilfulness, master-
fulness, I., 178,13.
Eira (Ö), v.a,, to spare, to forbear
to afflict, IL, 292, 12-
Eista, n., pi. eistu, testicle, II.,
102,13.
Ek {gen. min, dat. mer, ace. mik ;
dual, yit, gen. okkar, dat. ace.
okkr; pi. vér, gen. vár, vor, dat.
ace. oss), pron. Ipers., I, I., 14, 27,
passi?}i.
Ekki, neuf. of einginn, as subst.,
7iothing : ekki finst hans life
bjartara, II., 2, 21.
Ekkja (-U, -ur), f, a widow, IL,
162,2.
Ekkju-domr, m., widowhood, i.e.,
vacancy of a see, I. 62,4.
Eldr (-S, -ar), m.^ fire, I., 384, ^5 ;
jiame^ II., 2, 3.
Elds-gangr, m., ^^flre,^^ conflagra-
tion, I., 12, 11.
Ella, ac^v., 07' else, I., ] 88, ^.
Ellefti (ellipti, IL, 270, 23, IL,
289, 13), ore?. mm;w., eleventh, IL,
110,i5-
Elli-stoð, /., prop of old age, II. ,
275, 24.
EUri, comp. of gamall, older : enn
þar als staðar, sem meiri fjrnd er
á fallin leiðir hann til ellri manna
vætti, I., 118,29.
Elska (-u),/., love, L, 70, jo-
Elska (aÖ), v.a., to love, I., 14, 25,
284,20.
Elskari, (-a), m., he who loves, I.,
372,2; '' lover," 11., 116,6.
Elskr, ad., i?i the phrase elskr at,
fond of, attached to, IL, 118, ^y.
Elskuliga, adv., kindly, lovingly,
I.,314,g.
GLOSSARY.
835
Elskuligr, öí/., loving : e. móðir, I.,
18,4. — 2. beloved: samir nú at
þat ^-íkist til elskxiligs bróður vors
Thoraam, I., 334,22« — 3. dearly
wished, desirable : venda þeir
aftr Í veg ok koma heiin meÖ
elskiiligri farsæld, I., 94, 2 ; elskii-
ligt var honum at vera þvílíkr
fyrir GiiÖs augum, I., 94, 22« — 4.
winning f engaging : frammburðr-
inn var bæði mjiikr ok mikilvirkr
með reyndum röksemdum ok
sætleik elskuligum, I., 104, 5.
Elta (t), v.a., to pursue^ to chase,
I., 232,22; n., 180,1.
Elztr, superl. oý gamall.
Embætti (embetti), n., office func-
tion : taka hvárir sitt embætti,
I., 72, 1 ; prédikanar-embætti, I.,
118,2; þeir aftignoÖust byskups-
dóm ok heilögu embætti, II.,
38, 9. — 2. service in church : svá
fremr hann ok embættið, at öllum
var bugbot í er hjá stóðu, I.,
102, 24, ; þá tíma sem hann pré-
dikar gengr hann í því embætti
svá lýstr ok lærðr af Guði, I.,
104,3.
Embættis-gerð, f., officiating {at
services in churchy þeiri sömu
góðfýsi heldr hann framm í aUri
sinni embættisgerð, at bans heilög
ásjöna |)ornaí5i aldri frá tárum,
I., 102, 14. — 2. church service :
einga nýjung leiðir hann í em-
bættisgerÖ sína, utan heldr hefir
hann alt eftir, heilagra feðra sein-
ing, I., 102, 22- — 3. episcopal
adininistration : þessu næst er
greinanda, hversu signaðr Thomas
Embættis-gerð — cont.
var í sinni embættisgerð bæði varr
ok athiigall, þat er vígshigerðum
til hejTÍr, L, 110,15.
Enda (að), t-.a., to finish, to conclude,
I., 42, 15, 194, 26« Med., to come
to an end : hugsit, heilagr faÖir,
hversu málit skal endast meÖ þ^i-
likt boð ok andsvör, L, 384, i^.
Enda (d), v.n., to finish, to come to
an end ; occurs only once, and in
the med. mood : svá endist bréf
til bvskupsins, I., 358, 9.
Enda, adv., and withal, moreover,
n., 178,13.
Endaligr, ad., final, conclusive, I.,
304,5.
Enda-ljkt (-ai', -ú'), /'., close, termi-
nation, I., 480, 2«
Endi (-a, -ar), w., end, termination,
I., 76,16, 80,5, 120,12, 270,4,
444,9.
Endiliga, adv., finally, ultimately,
1., 142, 28*
Endi-mark, n., land-marh, boun-
dary : gjör svá vel, gakk eigi um
endimarkit, svo mikit sem skap-
arinn hefir þér veitt, L, 362 24. —
2. a sign, a token, a miracle :
eitt Í milium annarra endemarka
finnst svá skrifat, at í nökkurum
árgang öðlaÖist J)á albætta heilsu
sá, er áðr var krjpplingr, II.,
134,10.
Endir (-is), w., end, termination, I.,
236,23.
Endr-beiða, v.a., to ask repeatedly,
to reiterate a question, honum
verir mæðusamtat svara mörgum,
því at málit var bæíSi seint ok
vanmegut, ... ok varð oft at
336
GLOSSARY.
Endr-beiöa — cont,
endrbeiÖa, ef skiljast mætti, II.,
76, 17.
Endr-bæta (tt), v.a.^ to better, to
amend, to improve, to reform :
hvarrtveggi þessarra endrbætti
sinn stétt fyrir tár ok trega, I.,
166, 5 ; enn nú se GuÖi lof, at þat
er misgeröut, leiddi bans miskunn
yÖr fyrir augu ok endrbættuð svá
vel yÖaru stétt, at I., 304, jy; at
heilög kirkja frelsist af Ijotri svi-
YÍrÖingu ok endrbætist til fegri
asjouu, II., 24, 8 ; þat liggr meÖ
bans bjarta, at ... . leysa þá,
sem flekkazt höfÖii af samneyti
úmildra, ok hvat annat meÖ þeim
endrbæta, er hann sér þörf á
vera, I., 504, 25. — 2. to restore,
to repair : yðarri bæÖ til heyrir
aftr at kalla ok endrbæta til frið-
samligrar farsældar . . . hvat
er kristni Guiis ok almúganum
verÖr til áskilnaÖar, I., 278, 5 ;
þat er báttr góös böfðingja, at
reisa kirkjur ok fyrndar endrbæta,
I., 362, 9 ; Med., to recover : ef
hon lýtr á kné i falli sinna for-
manna, eflist bon mest ok endr-
bætist, I., 400, g ; to recover health,
to be convalescent : þetta ráÖ tekr
bann meÖ góðum vilja, þótt nauÖ-
igr, ok endrbætist í fuUa heilsu
eftir fa daga, I., 316, 14.
Endr-lifna, v. inchoat., to revive, to
quicken into life again, II., 88, 12«
Endr-minning, f, recollection, me-
mory, II., 174, 27.
Endr-nýja (aí5), v.a,, to renew : bann
vill endrnýja þau privilegia sinnar
kirkju,sem nú sýndust mjökfyrnd,
Endr-nýja — cont.
I., 122,23. — 2. to refresh, to re-
awaken, to resuscitate : enn öðrum
aukr barm ok endrnyjartil áminn-
ingar, II., Q6, 7. — 3. to repeat:
varÖ opt at endvrnyia bit sama
aðr sagtt yröi, II., 280, 9.
Engill (s- englar), m., an angel, I.,
14,11; n., 62,24.
Engla-söngr, m., song of angels, II.,
66,8-
Enn, adv., but : bver bans lifsbok
Ijooar enn leynir eigi, I.,2, 21 ; enn
Heinrekr styrkist nii í konungs-
valdi, I., 8, 5. — 2. tha7i : framar
enn fyrr, I., 30, 22 ; eigi kom fyrr
aftr straumrinn at snúabjólit, enn
allir limir bins sæla Tbóme bófust
úr vatuinu, L, 34, ^. — 3. still,
still further, yet : at boon þeim
er enn lifði, I., 8, 13 ; Vilbjálmr
BastarÖr, sem enn var bann jarl
i RúÖuborg, I., 10, 3 ; at bans
dæmum gerÖi svá Stepbanus
Langatún í England!, ok enn stóan
þrír meistarar vestr á Skotlandi,
I., 22, 2 ; ok því krefjnm vér enn
af yðr, I., 152, 25 ; ok enn spyr
bann, II., 224, go-
Enn (en, et)=binn, bin, bit, indef
art., the, I., 478,8; H., 132, 21,
134, 7 ; ekkjan ferr til laugar meÖ
þessi tvö enu yngri börnin, II.,
162,6.
Enni (-s), n., front, forehead, II.,
287, 32-
Enskr, ad., English, I., 20, 19, pas-
sim.
Epli, n., an apple, I., 250, 9.
Er, pron. 2. pers. jt?/. = þér, II.,
269, 11.
GLOSSARY.
337
Er, see vera.
Er, relat. part.^ which, icho, that,
I., 2,2« — 2. ichen, when as, I.,
6, 2- Very frequent.
Erencli, n., I., 504, ^o; H., 22,5,
28, 4 ; 5^^ eyrendi.
Erfa (ð), v.a., to inherit, I., 8, jo-
Erfé (-ar, -ir), f., inheritance, suc-
cession, I., 136,22? 1-^-? 23 5 Sit and
með erféum, ^3/ rz^^í o/" inheri-
tance, I., 42, 16, 22? 442, 17.
Erfiði (-S), n., labour, travail,
trouble, I., 394, n ; II., 270, .4.
Erfiðis-laun, n. pi., wages, II.,
192,7.
Erfiðis-sveiti, m., sweat from labour,
II., 208, 25.
Erfingi (-ja, jar), m., an heir, suc-
cessor, L, 26,18, 70, 1, 324, 9.
Erindi, n., II., 10,7, 186,13, 188,2-
See eyrendi.
Erindr, ad., expired, dead, II.,
152, 13.
Erki-byskiip, m., archbishop, I.,
10, 11 ; passim.
Erkibyskiips-dæmi, n., archbishop-
rick, I., 320, g.
Erki-djákn, in., archdeacon, I., 38, 2«
Erki-stoll, m., arch-see, I., 8, ^q ; IE,
Ertr, /!, pi., peas, I., 250, 9.
Ertra-réttr, m., ^^ pul/nentariu?n,^^ a
dish of peas, L, 242, ig.
Eta (-11, -ur),y., a crib, a manger, I.,
510,5.
Eta (et, át-átum, æti, etinn), v.a., to
cat, I., 514,3. — Med. etast, to
consume by envy and malice, I.,
56, 15.
Evkaristia, /'., the Eucharist, II.,
154,23-
K541.
Expens, outlay, I., 92, jg.
Eyða (dd), v.a., to make void, to
evacuate, to desert : eyða þeir bans
samsæti, I., 200, 20- — 2. to de-
stroy : höfðu þau verit auðug at
fé áðr eldsgangr eyddi góz þeira,
I., 12, 12- — 3. to undo, to an-
nul: þá tign ok frelsi sem Guð
gaf siuui kristni skal aldri eyða
með mínii játyrði, I., 150, ^ ; f)essi
ersúorðagerð . . semvérbuðum
eingiim inanni at bera, ok því
skulnm vér hana meÖ öllu eyða, I.,
200, 7 ; allar skipanir, sein hann
hafði sett við Clarendon . . . skal
hann eyða okaftr kalla, II., 36, go-
— Med. eyðast, to come to nought ;
enn e£ þat eyðist, if it should prove
to be baseless, L, 400, 14 ; því lát
liggja þær getur sem þú vilt gjarna
at eyðist, I., 438, i^ ; eyðist þat
alt fyrir honum, comes all to
nought, II., 120, n.
Eyði-hús, n., a dese?'ted, tumble-
doicn house, I., 230, 29-
Eymd (-ar, -ir), f., ivretchedness,
misery, I., 6, 15, 332, 26» H-?
150, 13.
Eymdar-fuUr, ad., full of misery,
II., 74,12.
Eymdar-herbergi, n., a home full of
ic/etchedness and misery, II.,
150, 4.
Eyra, n., an ear, I., 112, 15, 182,17-
Eyrenda-menn, m.pl., men irho have
errands on hand, errand-bound
travellers, I., 522,7.
Eyrendi, ;/., message, mandate, in-
structions, commission : eigi er
þat váit eyrendi at eflaþrætiir, 1.,
282, 14 ; sem hann er fercSar húinn
338
GLOSSARY.
E}Tendi — cont.
ok hyggst hafa oil sin eyrindi, I.,
64, 5 ; ábótinn segir sik sendan til
crkibyskups af Alexandre páfa
með því eyrindi, at, I., 160,6 '■> ^^n^l-
ir leggr ok konungrinn viÖ cardi-
nalem at hann styði svá ejrindit,
at eigi þarnist þat sína framm-
kvæmd, I., 68, ^. — 2. harangue^
speech: svo lyktar byskup sitt
eyrindi, I., 152, 19 ; enn erkiby-
skup lætr hrynja snarpt eyrendi á
berar br3'nn Hilario, I., 156, ^; í
fyrstu hlyddi hann athugliga öUu
bans eyrindi, I., 300,29; ok einn
jarl af Englandi skytr á eyrindi,
hann segir svá, I,, 432, 4. — 3.
errand, business : enn þegar í
óttn heíir hann sik nppi at fylgja
sinuni eyrendnm, I., 50, 3Q. — 4.
cause, affair : riddarar fl}'tja ]}yí
fastara e}Tendi byskupanna, I.,
498,3.
Eyrendr, ad., {prop, out of breath,
breathless), expired, dead, I.,
546, 17.
Eyrindi, see eyrendi.
F.
Fa, see far.
Fa (fæ, fékk-feingnm (fingu, II.,
246, 93)? feingi (fengi) feinginn),
VM. — 1. to get, to obtain, to attain :
erkistollinn í Cancia biðr þess höf ð-
ingja, er hannfékk fræ gstan um
allasina daga,I., 8,27 ; ennþví ræðr
líf ok hlýðni, hvárt þeir fá þat, I.,
42,2 ; til þess . . at sú nytsemdheil-
agrar kirkju, er þér haíit hér byrj-
at, fái æskiligan enda, I., 78, jg ;
Fá — cont.
at heilög kirkja í Kancia fái {)"yí
skjótara sinn lögligan soma, I.,
78, 21 ; varla fékk röddin sitt
frelsi til frammburðar, I., 102, 17 ;
eigi því síðr fær hann öll sín mála-
lok á garðinum, I., 116, n- — 2. to
receive in return, to find : Nú fyrir
þvílikt, ok annat gott sem hann
gerði, fékk hann þá blíðu vorrar
frú, I., 22, 7 ; þar er hann vísar
frá sér dygSinni, fær hann eingva
þökk af konunginum því heldr
þar i mót, L, 154, jq; fær góðan
róm á sínu máli, receives applaiise
to his speech, I., 80. q. — 3. to
come in for by chance : Ef orð-
felli byskups fekk nokkut þrot,
I., 36, 17 ; því vill hann hlifa ser
at annarr fái vandkvæðit, I.,
142, 22- — b. to find : varla mátti
þann fá af allri þeira fjöld, I.,
20, 17. — 4. to acquire, to master :
sem nngi Thomas hefir yiirfarit
þann kennidóm er hann ma f á í
föÖurhúsi, I., 18,23. — o. to pro-
cure, to secure : þar til fekk hann
sæmiligan formanu, I., 10, g ; leita
enn lærÖir menn at fa samþykt
ok játyrÖi kosningsins af sign-
uðum Thomasi, I., 80, 12 ; Thomas
erkibyskup tekr því tómliga at fá
honum né eina borgan, I., 188, 12 ;
fæst þessum vitnisbui-O ekki mot-
kast, L, 192, jg. — 6. ivith a past
participle of the governed verb; to
be able, to aff^ord, to manage: fekk
hann löngu skilt, hversu stormenni
Í Englandi hugði honum flátt,
þótt fagrt léti, I., 58, n ; sem kon-
ungs scndiboðar fá skilt, at her
GLOSSARY.
339
Fá — cont,
eru kappötur fyrir kosning, I.,
72, 17 ; fain vér eigi greint, hvílíkt
fjölmenni þangat sókti, I., "^^^, 32 ;
því at haDU fær eigi við haldizt,
I., 92, 20 ; lianii fær á einga leið
snarazt undan, I., 142, iq ; þat
fær eigi atgerðalaust verit, I.,
144,12; erkibyskup svarar hér
svá til, at hann lögliga tálmaðr
fékk eigi farit sjálfr, I., 186, 4 ;
látið hann eigi fá fyrirkomit ykkru
siðlæti, I., 498, 31; þetta fær
hér eigi unnizt, I., 16, 2« — 7- to
affect, aiimr er sá maÖr, er sér lætr
öngrar hrygðar {gen.) fá, hverja
skamm eðr skaða sem fær heilög
kristni, II., 14, y^. — 8. to cause :
yíir þessa hirtiug ok mæÖu, er
hárklæðit fær houum meÖ sinni
úmýkt fremr hanii þá góðfýst, I.,
96,2- — 9. to hand over, to de-
liver: svo sýndist mér, sagði
Thomas electus, sem einn virðu-
liffr ma^r kæmi til min ok feingi
til geymslu x. puud silfrs^ I.,
84, 26 ; enn þat er þér sögÖut oss
fá herra konunginum hamar ok
öxi fyrir sæmd ok góðvilja, I.,
404, 4. — 10. to reach, to take a
harbour : tekr haun í haf ok fær
þá höfn i Flandr, er Grafningr
heitir, I., 126, 3 ; fner hann þá
sömu höfn er hann let fyrr út af
England!, I., 490, ^. — 11. luitJi
prepositions : fa a, to affect, I.,
36, 10 ; fa til, to procure, I., 44, 24 ;
fa orð af, to get a word out of,
IL,280,24.
Faðerni, n., fatherhood, I., 160, ^^ ;
238,
22-
Faðir (föður, pL feðr), m., father,
I, 16, 26- — 2. /9/., fathers of the
Church,!., 50,^; 102,23; 150, 10;
popes: postoligir feðr, I., 26,6«
FaÖma (-að), v.a., to embrace, II.,
279, 13.
Faðmr (-s, -ar), 7n., embrace, bosom,
I., 22,9, 80,3, 334,19,488,17.
Fagna (að), r.n., to ''fawn,' to
rejoice, I., 94, 2 ; 194, 22- — 2. v.a.,
to welcome, I., 128, 9 ; 256, 24 ; f-
ómjúkliga, to give a rough recep-
tion, I., 202, 17.
FagnaÖar-dagr, w., day of rejoicing,
IL, 126,5.
Fagnaðar-fuUr, ad.,J'ull of joy, II.,
112,5.
Fagnaðar-grátr, m., joyful weeping,
L, 536,21.
Fagnaðar-letr, n., a letter bringing
glad tidings, II., 190, 1.
Fagnaðar-samliga, adv., rejoicingly,
I., 374, 24.
Fagnaðr (-ar, -\v),m., joy, gladness,
I'?24, 23; 98, 10; 234,19.
Fagna-fundr, m., joyful meeting, I.,
120,25; 288,23,4Í4,23.
Fagnandi, pres. part., rejoicing, I.,
222, ,7.
Fagr, ad., {dat,pl. fögrum, I., 20, 23;
comp. fegri, I., 50, 7 ; sup. fegrstr,
I., \^\,Y<^ , fair , beautiful , I., 16, j ;
lata fagrt, to show a fair face, I.,
58, 12 ; fögr oris, fair, smooth
words, I., 132, 15 ; handso/ne,
shotvy, fögr klæði, I., 3H,^^; fair,
desirable : I., 88, jo ; bright : fagrt
lj()s, IL, 46,15.
Fngrliga (fngurliga, 11. , 122,5),
(/dr.. I'air/t/, beautifully, 1., 2, jo?
Y 2
340
GLOSSARY.
Fagrliga — cont.
20,4; 80,25, 114,3; handsomely,
I., 248, 24 ; sweetly, 100, 25.
Fagr-mæli, /?., pi., fair ivords,
smooth language, I., 258, 24.
Fá-gætr, ad., rare, unusual, I.,
112,14, 558,1.
Fá-kuunligr,Gí/., rarely knoion,rare,
I., 318,20-
Fal, see fela.
Fala (-aS), v.a., to beg to purchase,
to bid for, I., 476,20«
Fálki (-a, -ar), m., a falcon, II.,
142,,.'
Falkiner, m., a falconer, II.,
140,20-
Fálkr, m., a falcon, I., 32,2-
Fall, n. a fall, failure, I., 166, 1,
174, 9, 350, ^.—2. fall, death, II.,
10,1. — ^- interruption, pause : ok
semút gengr yfirfjórÖu leccionem,
verðr fall á tíðinni, II., 64, g.
Falla (fell, féll-féllum, félli, fallinn),
v.n. — 1. to fall : jafnbrátt sýnd-
ist lienni, sem tolf stjörnur af
himni felli niðr yfir kne hrtini,
I., 14, 9. — 2. to fall, to stumble :
bann vill hafa svá sem skygn
augn bæÖi bak ok fyrir,utan áeing-
an yeg megi hann falla, I., 86, ig ;
ei nefnast þeir fyrir þá grein, at
nokkurr elr^^ki fallit, heldr at haDn
upp risi eftir þeira dæmi, efhann
hefir fallit, 1., 166, 2- — 3. tofioiv,
to rush (of water): Tems. . . gekk
henni svá 11 ær, at hon fell í serk
benni, I., 12, 17; á þessi var svo
fallin, at hon hefir hafa bakka ok
fellr meÖ óðstreymi, L, 32, g;
geingr nii þessu næst blóðit svá í
vöxt nmbergis hann, at um síÖir
Falla — cont.
fellr í munninn honum, I.,232,ii.
— 4. to fall, to falter, to fail : þessa
alia peninga skal Thomas erki-
byskup konunginum meÖ skilríki
aftr liika, með því at houum feilst
eiginorðit, enn konungiinu vill
hafa, I., 188,7; efhann fellr at
máli, skal hann þola byskupa
dom ok annarra rikismanna, I.,
212,19; enn e£ klerkr feilst fyrir
vottum eðr viörgeingr, þá skal
hann siðan enga vernd af kirkj-
uuni hafa, I., 296, 1. — 0. to fall
in, to lapse: skal bans goz alt upp-
tækt ok falla í konnngs gar^, fall
to the crown, I., 332, 5. — 6. to
go against : her í mot falla aðrir
cardinales, er svá segja, I., 308, 20-
— 7. Impers., to drop, tofcdlupon,
fellr houum haudleggr himnakon-
ungsins, I., 6, 20- — 8. to befall,
segja ok nokkurir, at sKkt felk
konunginum makliga, I., 214, jg ;
ok þvi fell sem Guð vildi, I.,
302,11; ^kulu þá ij. ok ij. sækja
af hverjum lifnaði með þau vanda-
mál er falla kunnu, 1., 370,4« —
8. with prepositions : — f. a, to fall
on, enn þar als staÖar sem meiri
fymd er á fallin, I., 118, 29. — f.
frá, to fall away, to die, I., 6, 9. —
f. framm, to fall down face fore-
most, L, 544, g. — f . Í, to fall into,
to come in for : hann hefir fallit í
óbliðu nokkiu*a, ok vill mi leita
friðar, I., 158, ig. — f. niðr, to fall
down ,t of cdl into desuetude, tocome
to nought, I., 152,18- — ^* samt,/o^í
together, to correspond : svá felh-
samt Í öíírum greinum skaplyndi
GLOSSARY.
341
Falla — cont.
þeira, I., 54, 24. — f. til, to happen :
fellr til með honum hneyri eðr
lióstakyn, sem verða kann, I.,
52, 4 ; annarr lutr fellr sá til, er
mikla hræring leiðir af, I., 144, 4 ;
fellr þat efni til, atstefna er lögð,
I., 468, 8« — f. undir, to sort under,
to be referable to, er nú þessi sýn
fallin undir Ijósa skýring, I.,
16, 11. — f. yfir, to fall upon, to
befall (one) : fa þeir skilt, at
kosningr er fallinn yfir þenna
Thómam, I., 24, ^g.
Fallerast, v. med., to falter, to fail, to
make a mistake, I., 60,2; 246,22'
Falligr, ad., fair, sightly, I.,
300,5.
Fallinn, ad., fitted, shaped, of a
manner, fashion., nature : I., 14, 22?
22, 23» 30, 27, 32, g, 104, 22) 248,24-
— 2. fit, proper, appropriate, I.,
8j 25) ^4, 13.
Fall-valtr, ad., unstable, perishable,
fleeting, vain, I., 232, 28«
Fair (föl, fait), ad., for sale, in the
market : II., 120, 24.
Fals, n., deceit, II., 290, 27.
Falsaör, p.p., falsified, failed, de-
feated, I., 448,20'
Falsari (-a)., m., a traitor, I.,
ðoö, 7.
Fals-lauss, ad., not false, genuine,
true, II., 134, 3, 182, jq; guileless,
sincere, I., 456, 24» 460, 23 > unfail-
ing, II., 174,23-
Falsligr, ad., false, hypocritical, I.,
204,10.
Fals-yrði, n. pi., false ivords, deceit-
ful language, I., 432,12«
Fám, see far.
Fang, n., bosom, embrace, I., 258 3 ;
taka ser í fang, to undertake, I.,
354, ig.
Fanga (að), v. a., to take prisoner,
I., 374,6.
Fangelsi, n., prison, I., 356, 7.
Fangi (-a, -ar), m., priso9ier, I.,
532,7.
Fanginn, p.p., taken prisoner, cap-
tured, I., 8,1, 188,16.
Fann, see finna.
Far, n. {fare), that which fares,
travels ; a craft, ship, sail : þat
far sem Milon klerkr er í tekr
annat lægi í Flandr viö Sand, I.,
484, 19. — 2. passage on board
ship : annat er mitt erendi til
yÖar, herra, enn leita fars, I.,
486, 7. — 3. going on, behaviour,
conduct : ok þann sé ek eingan
lut Í bans fari, at lionum lirindi,
I see nothing in his conduct that
may disqualify him, I., 76, n.
Far (fa, fátt ; dat. pi. fám, paucis,
I., 84,18, ace, pl.ik, I., 316 15),
ad.,feiv, L, 8,25, 14, 20) 244, 1^,
78, 11, 168, 3 ; lætr sér fátt um íiun-
ast, lets himself be but little
affected, I., 188,13.
Fara (fer, fór-fórum, færi, farinn),
v.n., 1. to fare, to go, to travel, to
proceed: tok ovaigiligt lausagoz
lit af konungs gaiði, at hanu mætti
vel fara lands ok lagar, I., 6, 9 ;
Maild segir : far til hallarinnar
litT á garðinum ok prófa þjir, I.,
16,3 5 fí^i'ií^i báÖar samt iit á víðan
vöil, 1., 16, 7 ; ck skal i atað l'ara
ok sýna yðr þat, er mín unnasta
færcSi mér i nótt, I., 21,6; svá
ferr Lann i brutt ok i'rægir þenua
342
GLOSSARY.
Faia — cont.
lut, I., 116, 13. — 2. to betake
one's self, to bestir, to go to :
eftir þat ganga þeir út, enn herra
erkibyskup ferr at sofa, I., 98,27 5
cfr. II., 100, 8- — 3. Fig., to
move, to travel, to go abroad :
bans bleziit ásjóna liefir dreift
farit, L, 2,13; sá kvittr ferr meÖ
fólkinu, at konimgsmenn muni
lessia liendr á mik með harðind-
um, I., 206,(3; nil sem einn liafÖi
öðlazt þvílíka myskunn, þó at lágt
færi í fyrstu, II., 72, 5. — 4. to
•proceed, to act, to behave : nii
svárasandi sem f or konuugr þessi,
I., 6,20 ; Þ^^í ^t bans bugdirfð for
úhölliim fæti, I., 58,2 ; ^^^'á bar til
Í gýslu byskups Sarisberiensis, at
einn prestr for svá vanstiltr, at
hann særði mann tilólifis,I., 142, 13.
— 5. to tend, to aim : játta nil allir
kosningi iipp á Thómam, þótt
hjörtii sumra færi annan veg, I,,
76,20- — 6- fo fare, to turn out :
hafa þær iðnir farit sem verÖa
kann, I., 2,g. — Inipers. : ferr hon-
um sem háttr er veraldar höfð-
ingja, it faretli with him after
the manner of worldly lords, I.,
8, 5. — 7. with the adverb vel : — a.
to fare well : eingi byskup blezar
lionum eðr biðr hann vel fara, I.,
156, g. — b. to conduct ones self
to behave : var kvámnmanni mikil
forvitni, hverr af staðar-fólkinn
mundi svá vel fara, I., 52, ^q. — c.
to go, to turn out : munu þá vel
fara, ef ver skulum byskuparnir
þegar krjiipa, er veraldligt vald
veitir OSS nokkura stygð, I., 194, jq.
Fara — cont.
— 8. With prepositions : f. af,
to doff : erkibyskup ferr af káp-
unni ok vefr henni um herðar sér,
I., 246, 10« — f' ^^' {impers.) to
take {such and such) a turn,
I., 468, iQ. — f . eftir, to follow
out : her er hlaÖit niðr i öllum
byskups skriiða, ok svá gjörla eftir
farit, at jafnvel fylgdi bagallinn,
T., 24, Yi' — f. framm, — a. to go on,
to come to pass : litim a, þessu
næst, hvat framm ferr romversk-
um byskupum, I., 24, 24 ; þat
sama ferr framm, I., 30, ^- ; ef
þetta ferr framm meÖ þolinmæÖi
Guðs, myndi yður vinátta íijótt
frá mér víkja, I., 64, jg ; ferr þetta
svá merkiliga framm með vottum
bundit, L, 80, g. — b. to proceed,
to act : þeir boíi capitulo Cantua-
riensis, at þeir f ari framm til kosn-
ings eftir fráfallinn erkibyskup
Theobaldum, L, 64,1^, (•/)'. 68,9;
vér bjóðum þér, at þii segir oss,
einum samt, hverr orÖrómr á legst
þat, er vér förum framm, L, 86, iq ;
f ari byskupinn framm, hennar lög-
ligr dómari, prófi málit ok dæmi
siðan, I., 182, 20; Ayzt herra by-
skupi, hvat nú er framm far it í
raóti honum, I., 192, g. — f. 1, m
the phrase f. i dóm, to be brought
into court, I., 186,5. — f. með. — a.
with dat. pers., to accompany :
byðr hann i stað, at sii fylgd, er
fara skyldi með canceler til Eng-
lands, kallist inn fyrir hann, I.,
66, 2« — b. ivith dat. of the thing,
to carry, to have on hand, to have
in charge, to deal with : enn þeir
GLOSSARY.
Fara — cont.
sem með rógi fara rangturna allar
gerðir, orð ok vilja erkibyskups,
I., 176,27; eingi um aldr síðan
skal á Iianii kæra, hvat bann hefir
staÖit, e^r með konungs gozi farit,
I., 80, 10« — c. with ace. of the
person, to deal loith, to have in
charge : lengi hefir livizkan farit
með þik, I., 212, 2« — d- ti^ith ace.
of the thing, to have on hand,
have i?i charge : hann for með
málaferli nokkur, ok þótti varða,
I., 50,21« — e. absol. to form an
addition : ferr þat með, at hann
átti áA^nt í sínum valdsdögiim, I.,
90, 15 ; her með ferr þat til £rá-
bærrar sæmdar, I., 128, i^. — f.
niðr, to tumble doion, II., 282, ^. —
f . til, to bestir, to betake one's self:
hversii ferligt er, e£ þeir fara til
• at deila, I., 158, iq. — b. to come
in additionally, to be added to :
þetta heldr hann eingan sættar-
fund, utan friÖarkoss fari til eftir
svo stora misþykt, I., 448, 9. —
c. to happen, to chance : svo for
til um dag sem Thomas hefir sik
úti ... at hann fleygir sinum
fálk at fugli einum, I., 30,2;; svo
ferr til, at Philippus er dreginn
undir opinbera húðstroku, I.,
144, 14. — f . undan, to escape : ef
þeir eru allir í stórmælum, er vígðu
son minn eðr nær várii, munum
vær eigi einir undan fara, I., 502,
14. — b. to evade : I., 286, ^3. — f.
úr (or), to drop out of: ferr hann
svá or sögu þessarri, I., 8, 4.
Farar-blómi (-a), ?n., jicigeantry in
travelling, I., 146, ,j, 230, 19.
Far-kostr, m., a crafty I., 44,24«
Far-leugd, f., long journey, I.,
272,2,.
Farmr (-s, -ar), m., 1. freight, er
eigi þa betra ok kasta þa helldr
farminum til lifs mönnum, II.,
268,5. — 2. contents, þeim gaf
vel skilia, at þessi kistill var eigi
iarðneskr, heildr til kominn af
sealfri himinrikis cvria, at hann
með sinvm farmi skyllde vera
fyrir sogn okominna Ivta, II.,
286,11.
Farnaðr (-ar) m,, benefit, advantage,
iveal, II., 265, 3^.
Far-sæld, /"., prosperous journey,
good speed : svo venda þeir aftr
Í veg ok koma heim með elsku-
ligri farsæld, I., 94, 2, cfr., 132,21-
— 2. earthly prosperity, happi-
ness, bliss : ma kirkjan vel siðar
þvi fraraar fagna í sinni farsæld,
I.,^ 194,23; c/KL, 278,6, 340,3.
Fá-sinni, n., scanty company, lone»
liness, I., 242, 19.
Fasta (föstu, föstur), /"., a fast, I.,
174,4; Lent, II., 285,9.
Fast-mæli, n.pL, solemn vow, firm
engagement, L, 216, 12, 330, 20-
Fast-orðr, ad., trusty, trustworthy,
of good faith, L, 464,25-
Fastr, (föst, fiíst), ad., fixed, firm,
steady: stendr þó sjálfr viðrinn
fastr ok úskelfdr i sinni stöðu, I.,
182,9; compact: föst fylking, I.,
158, 19. — 2. real {pf property) :
tekr hann gull, er merkir vald ok
forræði sta^ai-ins í ölluin lutuni,
föstum ok lausuni, 1., 90,0 » í^'^'í'"
hann sik cinariSan at kalla aftr
undir kirkiuna fasta oiun ok
344
GLOSSARY.
Fastr — coat.
laiisa, I., 118,ig. — Z.firm, deter-
mined: enu þar er svá fast fyrir,
at hvergi viknar til, but it {the
archbps. demeanour) is so firm^
Sfc.. I., 488,8. — 4. fast, as an
adv., closely, fast, at þeir megi
oil þeira ráÖ ok frammferði því
smásmugligar skilja, sem þeir
fylgja fastara, I., 264, ^j. — b.
hard, violently: fellr hann niðr
ok brýzt iim fast, II. 76, 7. — c.
Jirmh/. determinedly, sendiboðar
eru djarfir ok knjja fastá orskuröi,
I. 466, jg. — d. mightily, Taunt-
ingly : hælist fast um, at nú hefir
hann fengit vald yfir Thómam,
L, 414,3.
Fat (-S, pl. föt), n., garment, I.,
400, 12.
Fá-tækliga, adv., poorly, after the
manner of poor folk, I., 246, 24.
Fá'tækr, ad., dat. /?/. fatækiom, II.,
262,33; poor, L, 38, ^^, 98, i„
200,23.
Fá-tækt, (fatökt, II., 287,2), /•»
poverty, I., 242, jg-
Fá-YÍzka (-u), f., ignorance^ I.,
300, 1,.
Fé (fjár, pl. fé), n., means, wealth,
money, property, I., 6, 4, 100, 2»
118,27.
Feðgar, m. pl., father and son or
sons, I., 390, 14, II., 172,22-
Feðr, {occurs only in dat.), m.,
father, I., 166, g, 382, 4, I., 490, jo.
Feginn, ad., fain, glad, agreeably
relieved, II., 30, ^g ; as a subst.,
fegins hendi, icith open arms, II.,
156,23.
Fegin-samliga, adv., gladly, rejoi-
cingly, II., 276, 10.
Fé-gíald, n.,fine, I., 212,26-
Fé-gjöf, /., gift, present, I., 54, 29-
262,22-
Fegra (-að), v.a., to beautify, to put
a fair face upon, I., 300,5; ^^
smoothe, I., 388, ^ ; to palliate,
IL, 10,3.
Fegra, compar. adv., see fagr.
Fegrð (-ar), /., beauty, I., 16,13,
124, 10? 234, 21 ; purity, þessari
{i.e. Mariu) þjónar hann með
hugskotsins fegrÖ, I., 20, 23 ;
glory : ok þó kriinast hanu
þegar með píslarvættis fegrö í
andanum, I., 274,3.
Fé-hirðir (-is, -ar), in., shepherd, I.,
32, g.
Fé-hirzla,y., treasury, I., 6,3.
Feigr, ad.,'fey^ doomed {to death),
I., 532,25-
Feitr, ad., fat, luscious, II., 88, 5.
Fé-kátliga, adv., in a manner evinc-
ing that one is in easy circum-
stances, ínóg for ek fékátliga,
sem ek var erkidjákn, " satis
copiose, satis abundanter, satis
honorifice . . . co7iversatus sum^*
L, 402,14.
Fékk, see fa.
Fela (fel, fal, [faldi, IL, 292,5,]
fálurn, fæli, falinn), v.a., to hide,
to conceal, þoku, er oftliga felur
sjálfa sólina með sínum fordrætti,
II., 44, 10- — 2. ivith dat. and
acc, to commit to, to deliver
to, fal lienni a hendi allt sitt rað,
II., 262, 19 ; heilögum Dionisio
ok öUum helgum fel ek mik á
hendi ok kirkjunnar sök, I., 542, 13.
GLOSSARY.
345
Fé-lag, n.^ partnership, II., 122, 13.
Fé-lagi (-a, -ar), in., fellow, comrade,
companion, I., 104, ^, 170, 25 ;
friend, I., 30, iq, 348, 3 ; colleague,
L, 292, 28.
Félag-skapr, m., fellowship, friend-
ship, I., 30,15, 158,9.
Fé-lát, n., forfeiture of goods or
money, I., 180, 19.
Fell, &c., see falla.
Fella (-d), v. a., to fell, to bring
down, L, 170, ^g í f- ^r, to
shed tears, I., 372, ^7, II., 16, 26 ;
f. horn, to shed horns {of ani-
mals), I., 476, 11. — 2. to impose :
f. bölvan á, to hnpose, pronounce a
curse upon, I., 500, 13.
Felms-fullr, ad., filled with fear,
frightened, I., 534, n.
Fé-raál, n. pi., claims to money,
legal proceedings for recovery
. of money, I., 192, i^, 224, j^.
Fe-mikJll, ad., wealthy, I., 52, 26-
Fé-munir, m. pi., money\s worth :
biÖr framm-fallinn vora frii, at
hún muni leggja framm við hann
af sinum hannyrðura þat, er sýni-
ligt væri milli kiimpána, þótt
eigi tæki stóra fémiini, I., 24, g.
— 2. means, I., 38, i^,. — 3.
money, I., 108, iq. — 4. effects,
II., 6, 5.
Fé-múta,y., a bribe, I., 112,^7; II.,
2> 15'
Fen, n., a fen, slough, bog, II.,
120,16.
Fengi, &c., sec fa.
Fé-uýta, v.a.,to appropriate, II. ,8,25.
Fé-^m?í,f,fine, extortion,!,, 234,23-
Fei'ð (-ar, -ir),/'., wandering, move-
ment : her með cr flökt ok lerð
Ferð — cont.
byskupanna til ok frá, I., 216,22«
— 2. journey, I., 64,4,9, 30, ig,
90, 11, 120, 18, 212, 5. -- 3.
company, attendance, retinue :
siguaðr Thomas ok oil sú ferð, er
honum fylgir, tekr þá stefnu til
Englands moti Cancia, I., 70, 21.
— 4. throng, crowd, midtitude,
lærðir ok leikmenn hafa sik iit af
staðnum framm á veginn í moti
honum, ok eigi siðr sjálfir car-
dinales, raeð svá mikilli ferð, at
eigi sátu meirr eftir hjá herra
páfanum enu einir tveir, I., 128, 17.
Ferðast, v. rcjl., to travel, II.,
25/, 21'
Ferð-búinn, ad., ready for a jour-
ney, I., 506, 14.
Fer-faldr (-fold, -fait), ad., fourfold,
L, 400, 13.
Fé-ríkr, ad., wealthy, I., 48, gg.
Ferliga, adv., insolently, I., 216,22»
Ferligr, ad., dreadful, teriible, hor-
rible, I., 158, 10; II., 10,11; ^6^"
ligt (til) frásagnar, horribile
dictu, I., 176, 1^, 420, 12 ; fear-
fully deformed, II., 136, 12; reck-
less, " insolens " ; ferligt ord gerir
optliga stygð godvm manne, II.,
249,2.
Fé-?ekt,/., money fine, T., 220,1-.
Fé-snikni,/., í7re(?<:/yb;' money, cupi-
dity, I., 112,21.
Festa, (-t), v.a., to fix, to ffffix: f. a
gcilga, to hang to the gallotcs, I.,
556,1-; to tic : þar með þá llíku
er honum var fest fyrir augu, IL,
112,2.3.
Festa (-U, -ur), /"., handsel, pledge,
bail, I., 166,19,498,0.
346
GI-OSSARY.
Fé-sterkr, ad., ivell furnished with
money, I., 244,9.
Fé-f)iirfi and £ee-þuríi, ad., in need
of moneij, l.,2Q2,^T, IL, 246, 15.
Figiira (-11, \\v),f., figure, metaphor,
L, 234, 20; II., 228, 7.
Fil-bein, n., elephanfs bone, i.e.,
ivory, I., 24, 9.
Fimm, card, num., five, I., 218, 3.
Fimm-liimdrat, car. num., five hun-
dred,!., 188,1.
Fimm-táudi, wi/. num., fifteenth, I.,
246,3.
Fimm-tigi, card, num., fifty, II.,
90, n.
Fimm-tiigaudi, ord. num., fiftieth,
II., 196,9.
Fingr {gen. fingr), m., a finger, II.,
144,22.
FiugT-gull, 71., finger-gold, a ring,
I., 476, 24, 478, 8.
Finna (finn, fann-fundum, fyndi,
fundinn), v.a., 1. to find, unnr þar
kominn kistil eiun snjóh^'ítan,
I., 24,8; eigi höfum vær fundit
dagstætt nær sio-naðr Thomas var
kjörmn í Lundúnum til erki-
byskups, I., 86, 04, ; tiéðan líðr ok
þat, er Alexander páfi elskar
Heinrek konung, ok þolir lionum
meira enn dæmi finnist til, I.,
92, 15. — 2. to find ont, to dis-
cover, hann fann fyrstr manna, at
því sem kunnugt er vorðit norSr
hintj-at, at hann braut uokknrn
skilning út af hverjum salmi í
saltara, I., 20, 96 ; finnr hann ok
{dvÍ gjörr sem hann ferr víðara,
hversu lögleysur ok vondariivenj-
ur eru í móti kirkjunni svá sem
hefðaðar, I., 1 18, 5 ; eigi mun finn-
Finua — co7it.
ast, þar sem kristnin er rett
haldin ok lögliga varðveitt, at svo
skuli dæmast vígðr sem úvígðr,
I., 152, 1; þat ístórmæli, sem í
dag heíir fundizt npp á vorn skaða,
viljum vér traktera meÖ oss til
þeira beztu andsvara, I., 198, ^^ ;
lætr hann nokknr þau orð um
fara, sem hann megi honum sakir
gefa eðr finna, I., 260, ^. — 3. to
pe?'ceive, to observe, aldri fanst
ofran með honum, I., 36,25; ^^
er þat finna gamhr iivinir erki-
byskups, draga þeir sik framm iir
skugganum, I., 176, ^j. — 4. to
deem, to esteem : eingan finn ek
tiHeldan svá at vera erkibyskup
sem Thomam, I., 76,9. — o. to
find, to lay to one^s charge : hug-
leiddum ver me'ð oss, með frið-
samri eftirleitan hvert lyti þér
myndit oss finna, I., 146, 20; þat
mótkast, sagði hann, er oss rétt-
liga fundit, I., 214,23. — 6. to
find, to frame, to contrive : hann
bar ok til klerkdom at finna svá
meistaralig orð, I., 172,25. — 7.
to meet, to call upon, to have
audience of: hann hugsar gera,
sem nil lysti margan i Englaudi,
at finna fyrst Thóraam I., 50, 24;
þeir finna postcligau herra Alex-
andrum í þeim bæ Franziæ er
heitir Munipeler, I., 92,26 ; sign-
naðr Thomas gerir eingva dvöl á at
finna konunginn, L, 120, 17, cf.
264,19, 266,22, 296,14. — R^ci-
proc. finnast, Í0 meet, 128,22- —
8. fig. to find, to procure, finna
sjálfan sik fyrir, to pay with one's
GLOSSARY.
3-Í7
Finna — cont.
01C71 self for a fault, to pay
dearly, I. 154, ^g. — 9. icith
prepositions, f. fyrir, to meet
with, II., 54, 11 ; finnast um, to
take to heart, to be affected by, I.,
12,18,250,24.
Firði, see fjörðr.
Firr, cidv,, compar. iirr, I., 472,25,
afar : liann resignerar áðr í hönd
Heinreks uoga alt þat léii ok
aiiðræði, er lianii liafði baldit nær
ok fiiT af kninimni, a nigh and
ctfar, i.e., at home and abroad,
I., 82, 17 ; nær eðr firr, at home or
abroad I., 254, ig.
Firra (ð), v. a,, prop., to remove.
— 1. to debar from, to deprive
of: mun Drottinn svá gejma
bans, at freistni vondra mauna
íiiTÍ eigi Thomam erkibyskup
þeiri hjálp ok friði, sem bann bafði
þegit í Frakklandi, I., 432, i^ ;
hvar fyrir bans föÖur er þat ann-
ast, at firra bann eigi sinni bjálp,
II., 82,1. — 2. to deliver from :
Guð fiiTÍ OSS þyi, God deliver us
therefrom, i.e., God forbid, L,
328, 19 ; biðjandi mikilliga at bann
firri þá alia samt svá bráðu áfelli,
I., 162, 21. — 3. mcd. — a. to absent
one's self, to retire : sæmdi mér
barðla lítt, at firrast mína kirkju,
I., 294, ^ ; enn er psálminum líðr,
firrist erkibyskupinn nokkiit lílt,
sem bótandi bruttferð sinni, II.,
66, 2.5. — b. to become estranged,
þegar flýði íi'á mór öll bans vin-
átta. Enn þótt bon bafi firzt
mik um tíma, þaif ek þar um
eingis man lis íylgi, ef ek vil ban a
Firra — cont.
aftr kaupa, L, 292, 25. — c. to be
removed, at forsjá romverskrar
kristni, . . . lýsi þat er leynist,
at efasemd firrist björtu sérbverra,
II., 52,8- — d. to deviate from :
ef ek keypti svá dýrt dauðligs
manns vináttn, at ek gerði þá
bur(Si sem þrælborna, er vorr
Herra frjálsaði með sínu blóði,
firðist ek liarðla mjök eftirdæmi
bins bcilaga Petri, I., 430,30- —
e. to avoid : forkimnligri er sú
list, at standa óbrenndr á glóðinni,
enn at firrast eldinn ok vera ú-
skaddr, I.,50, 9; enn því fremr
berra erkibyskup þetta miskimn-
arverk beldr á nátt euu dag, at
bann firrist alia hræsni, I., 98, 39.
— f. to leave, to desert, á sama
langardegi firrast bann ok fyrir-
láta margir þeir, er með bonum
þángat riðu, I., 200, jg.
First, superl. of firr, adv., as far
away as may be, I., 38, 13.
Fiska-fátt (fiskr, far), adv., bafa
fiskafátt, to be scantily supplied
ivithfish, I., 256, 23.
Fiski-maðr, m., fisherman, I., 402,io.
Fiskr (-jar, -ar), /;/., a fish, L,
258,3.
Fjall (-S, -fjöll), n., a mountain, I.,
388, 20; ''lit noriSr um fjall, all the
way north over (across) the Alps,
L, 90, 1,.
Fjandi (-n), m., the foe, the fiend,
the devil, 1., 148. g, 170. .5; U-,
ÍL, 12«
Fjand-maðr, ;;/., foeman, enemy, I.,
482,28-
348
GLOSSARY.
Fjand-skapr (-ar), ?w., enmity, II.,
Fjár, see fé.
Fjarðar, see fjörðr.
Fjár-eigandi (-a), m., possessed of
means ^ IL, 148. 12«
Fjár-forráð, n. pi., stewardship, I.,
178,5.
Fjár-heimta (-u, -iir), f., money
claims, II., 263, ^g*
Fjár-lilutr, m., means, moneys, L,
212,15.
Fjár-lán, n., lending of money, loan,
I., 3S6, n.
Fjár-lutr, ???., = fjár hlutr, I., 270,2o-
Fjar-lægð, /., soJour?i in distant
parts, I., 342, 13.
FjaiTÍ, adv., far off, L, 52, 13 ; far
away, veraldligt vald stendr mjök
fjarri at leggja dom yfii* klerka
mal, I., \'^2,2^\ far from, fjarri
manna bygðiim, I., 230, 29.
Fjarski (-a), m., far distance, re-
moteness, I., 394,10.
Fjár-sök, f, money matters ; or^
action fur damages, I., 204,22«
Fjár-upptaka, f., seizure of goods,
distraint, confiscation, I., 408, 20-
Fjar-vist,y., separation, absence, I.,
324, 19 ; exclusion {from a con-
ference) I., 328, 21-
Fjórði, ord. num., fourth, I., 90, 20)
482, 2.
Fjoiir, ace. «e?<^. fjogr/br fjögui-, I.,
26,17, r/r. 34,1,, fjora, I. 122, n,
gen. 2^1' fjögurra, L, 252, ^^^four.
FjórtáD, card, raim., fourteen, I.,
88,5.
Fjöðr (fjaðrar, fjaðrir) /., feather,
II.,154,26.
Fjöld.y., multitude, 1., 2,4.
Fjöldi (-a), on., multitude, I., 88, 7,
224, 1, 350, 6.
Fjölgazt, V. med., to grow manifold,
to multiply, L, 146,26) 250,7«
Fjöl-meiini, n., throng, crowd, mul-
titude of people, I., 88, 1 ; 128, 22?
178,8; company, I., 312,9.
Fjöl-mennr, ctd., largely attended,
accompanied by many, I., 208, 13.
Fjöl-skylda (-11, -ur, II., 162,8),
/'., many duties, pressure of
business, I., 50, ig, 98, 30; 100, 22»
412, 23. — 2. trouble, inconveni-
ence : enn eg skal fara með þér,
at sjá þessa kií, er þér leiðir
fjölskylcla af, IL, 124, 13.
Fjör, n., life, I., 400, 12.
FjörÖr (fjarðar, dat. firði, jl>/, íirðir),
m., afirth, a bay, II., 284, 9.
Fjöturr (-S, dat. fjötri, acc. fjötur,
pl. fjötrar), on., fetter, II., 16, 20-
Flá (flæ, fló-flógum, flægi, fleginn),
v.a., to flay, to skin, II., 120, ig.
Flár (flá, flátt), ad., false, insincere,
deceitful, I., 58, 12.
Flatr (íiöt, flatt), ad., flat, I., 500,18-
Flattr (-ar, dat. ílætti), m., flaying,
skinning, II., 120, 13.
Fkiut, see fljóta.
Fleiri, comp., more, I., 2, 3, 42, 3,
102,21, 192,
10»
Flekkast, refi. to become soiled, ob-
scured: þar er fölnar fegrð heil-
agrar kristni eða fiekkast heunar
bird, L, 322,26, cfr. IL, 264,3i.
— 2. to be tainted, stained, guilty:
páfiim sendi til bans af sinu
vakli tvo legates, at þeir geri
bonum alia skyidu, með lausn ok
likn allra bluta, er þeir sjá hann
Í ilekkaðau, II., 30, 17.
GLOSSARY.
349
Flekkdttr, ad.^ spotted, I., 234, ^.
Flekkr (-s, -ir), m., \.a spot, a speck,
kemr rauðr flekkr í vinstri kinn-
iiia, II., 160, 17. — 2. spot, stain,
disgrace, II., 12, g.
Flestr, superl, to fleiri, most, I., 74, ^3.
Fletta (tt), v.a., to strip, flettir af
ser skríiðaniim, I., 482, 21. — 2.
to strip, to deprive of: flettandi þá
brott af öUu dómsatkvæði, I.,
414, ig; af flettr öllu embætti, I.,
458, 3 ; hversu liann
fagna'ði,
sæmdum.
L, 482,16;
I., 490, 24.
flettist or
af flet ta
Fleygja (ð,), v.a., to make fly, to
cast {a liaxok) : fleygir siniim fálk,
L, 32, 2« — 2. flg. to hurl, to
. throio, to fling : fleygir svá marg-
an flutning ok florinn í eyrun á
þeim, II., 26, j^. — 3. f. af, to
throio over, hann fleygir af J)veru
málinu öllu, I., 198,23«
Flíka (u), f., a snip, shred, clout,
II., 1 12, 23»
F1ÍS (-ar, -ir), f., a splinter: at
þeim falli flisin, i.e., that the shaft,
the dart of the archbishop^ s au-
thority, may strike them, I., 120, 5.
Fljota (flýt, flaut-flutum, flyti, flot-
inn),v.n.,tofloiv, to run: liktrenn-
anda vatn mimdi fljota af hennar
kviÖi, sem Græðarinn sag(5i Sama-
ritane hvern flytja mundi til bins
eilifa lifs, I., 12,20; f« yfii'5 lo
flow over, I., 232, ^). — 2. fig. to
float — a. to he on the surface, to
act under pretence : þótt þú látir
annat yfir fljóta, I., 250, 26« — ^^^
to rise, to soar, þá er alt flaiit i upp-
litningar bæð ok ilmandi gæzku
fyrir GuÖi, I., 104,21. — ^- ^^
Fljóta — cont.
float among, to be mixed tvith,
þat flaut með annat, sem eigi var
bjart i konungsins bjarta, I., 70, 2 ;
enn þótt nokkut grand fljoti með,
vill herra pafinn sakir elsku fað-
ernis ser lata kenna, I., 160, jq.
Fljotliga, adv., speedily, quickly,
I., 372, j3.
Fljotr (fljot, fljott;, ad., 'fleet;
quick, swift : renna upp vendir
tveir . . . meiS svo fljotum vexti,
II., 60, 15 ; enn þat mál er eigi
fljott, I., 80, 13, cfr. I., 195, ^^. —
2. hasty, hann vottar, priorinn, at
erkibyskup var einfaldr maÖr, nokk-
ut fljotr i sinni bind, L, 36,9. — 3.
rapid: sakir varygðar flygandi
liugsanar, gerir hann allasina þj ón-
ustu með fljótii yfirbragÖi, per-
formed his service with rapid de-
livery, I., 104, 1- — Fljott, as an
adv. soon, I., 24, 13, 32, 15, 64, 19,
128,7; quickly, I., 194,24; sud-
denly, L, 248, 29.
Fljot- tækr, ad., quick of learning,
' sharp; I., 20, j.
Fljot- virkr, ad., swift-working, II.,
26,5.
Fljot-virkt,/., speedy working, quick
efl'ect, II., 80, 14.
Fljúga (flýg,flaug-flugum, flygi, flog-
hm),v.n.,tofly,'l., 326,j6, II., 10,03.
Floa (-Í)), v.n., to flow, II., 287, 27.
Flokkr (-S, -ar), m., a flock, crowd,
midtitude, I., 506, 3.
Florinn, in., a florin, coin, money,
L, 112,13, 116,6.
Flotna {-i\'^),v.n.,to get afloat, f. upp,
to be cast adrift, to become home-
less, 1., 430, 3.
350
GLOSSARY.
Flótta-g'jarn, ad.^ given to rim away,
I., 166,11.
Fl(5tta-grein,y.5 account, relation of
a flight, I., 474, § ; « kind, an ap-
pearance of flight, I., 536, 5.
Flótta-maðr, m., a runaway, I.,
408, 09.
Flotti (-a), m., L, 142, n; tekr á
flótta, takes to flight, I., 200, 17.
Flugr (-s), m., flight of a bird, ferr,
at afla veiðiskapar fjrir þá fjgling,
er fálkinn slær með síuum Aug ok
snarri Dattúru niðr af loftiuu, II.,
140,23.
Flutningr (-5), m., report, I., 284, 24 ;
evil report, slander, I., 120, n. —
2. message, I., 160, 12« — 3. re-
monstrance, arguing ; þeira fals-
ligum flutningi svarar svá erki-
byskup meðíhógværÖ, I., 204, iq. —
4. pleading, urging of a case, I.,
270, 20. — ^. support, aid, fur-
therance, I., 344, 24. — 6. interest,
influence, I., 528, ig.
Flutti, &c., see flytja.
Flygandi, ad., fluttering, unsteady,
L, 102, 26-
Flfja (ð), V.71., to fly, to take to
flight, I., 36, 22) 180,20, 238,10-
Flykkjast, r. med., to flock, I.,
"^^) 22*
Flýta (tt), v.a., to hasten, f. ferÖ, to
hasten on one's journey, I., 518,26 >
II., 152, 11.
Flytir (-is), m., speed, I., 32, 17 ;
hurry, L, 536, 19.
Flytja (flyt, flutti-fluttum, flytti,
fluttr), v.a., to flit, to carry, to
bring, to convey : eru kosnir viriSu-
ligir sendiboðar til berra páííins
Flytja — cont.
curiam, at þyggja pallium ok hon-
um beim flytja, I., 90,9; þegar
ferr hann þaðan um nottina, sem
segist óttusöngr, stígr á skip ok
flyztupp eftir vatni því,er klaustr-
ið stendr bjá, I., 256, 5 ; syslu-
maÖr gripr bann ok flytr hann
framm undir byskups dom, I.,
142, 15. — Fig. segir at likt renn-
anda vatn mundi fljota af hennar
kviði, sem GræÖarion sagÖi Sa-
maritane hvern flytja mundi til
bins eilifa lifs er þar af drykki,
I., 12, 21« — 3. f. sik, to move one's
self i.e., push on, or for, I., 64,28-
— 4. to relate, to report : flytj-
andi lieldr sniÖhvasst af framm-
ferðum erkibyskups, I., 120, §; því
at honum er flutt at berra erkiby-
skupifylgir mikit folk, I., 128, 23 ;
ok því er rett flutt, at i þeimstormi
stóð upp einn Tbomas erkiby-
skup, I., 182,4; svá mikla frægÖ
sem ver heyrðum af j^ðr flutta
margan dag, I., 332, 25- — 5. to
deliver : flytjandi sjálfr þetta bit
bjálpsamliga erindi til lofs ok virð-
ingar sælum Thómasi, II., 188, 2-
— 6. to urge, to plead, to fur-
ther : þóttust þeir bezt hafa, er
bans vinir voru, at bann flytti
þeira mál, at fá einbverja sæmd,
I., 38,22 5 Þ^^ sama flytjum ver,
mins berra sendiboðar, at til sé
látið an dvöl, I., 78, 26 ; enn er
þeir sjá þenna fagnafund, er mis-
baldnir þikkjast, fordjarfast þeir
ok þegja, þvi at þeim sýnist eigi
færi at flytja, meðan svá stendr,
I., 122, 2 ; nú flytið þat fyrirmín-
GLOSSARY.
351
Flytja — cont.
um herra konungiuum, at þetta
málbíði morgins, I., 198, 13, cfr. 2q,
22'
Flæma (d), to drive away forcibly^
to expel, 1., 488, iq.
Flærð (-ar), /., ivile, guiles deceit,
treachery, I., 300, go-
Flærð-semd, (-ar), f., guilefulness,
deceit fulness, I., 302, 2-
Flökt, n., flutter, excited movement
to and fro. Í., 216, 23-
FolgiiiD, ad.^ hidden, IL, 276, ^^.
Folk, n., {dat folkino, II., 50, 17,)
folk, j^eople, I., 74,9, 78,4, 128, 24 ;
congregation, I., 104, 3.
F(51k-Yopn, n. pi., iveapons used in
ivar, armour {as opposed to those
allowed to be carried in peace), I.,
408,28,522,9.
Folska, (-u), f., senseless raving,
folly, impudence, I., 528, 27.
Fontr (s), m., baptismal font, I.,
330, 4.
For, see fara.
ForaS (-s), n., a slough, I., 388, 23 ;
perilous place, peril: hjálpit
hjörð yðra, enn hrindit eigi
frainm í daiiðligt forað, I.,
396,18.
Foraðsligr, ad., perilous, disastrous,
dangerous, hazardous, I., 396, 23.
For-boð, n., prohibition, L, 506, jg ;
XL, 120,20- — 2. interdict, L,
3o8, 22' 384, 14, 456; 26-
Forboða, v. a., to interdict, L, 298, j.
For-búÍDD, ad., ready, made ready
for reception, I., 372, 7.
Forða (að), v.a., to save, f. ser, to
save one's self, I., 230, 17, 268, n,
Forða — cont.
536, 3. — med. forðast, to avoid,
L, 8, 20, 108, 9, 164, 16, 198, 7 ; to
shun, I., 328,15; to escape, I.,
404, 03. — pass, to be saved, I.,
238,19.
For-djarfa (að), r.ö., to spoil, to cor-
rupt, to upset, to confound, I.,
144, 10- — med. to be confounded,
I., 122,1,216,28, 300,17.
For-dráttr, m., that which is drawn
in front of something so as to hide
it, a veil, a cloud, IL, 44, n.
Forðum, adv., foinnerly, aforetime,
erst, of yore, I., 172, 23, 256, 7.
For-dyri, 7i., door, portal, vestibule,
IL, 62, 1.
For-dæma, v.a., to condemn, I.,
220, 23-
For-dæmdr, j^.^j., damned, con-
demned: f. pin a, pain of dam-
nation, I., 196, 30; f. villa, II. ,
42, 10. _ _
For-dæmiligr, ad., condemnable, L,
302, 19.
For-dæmÍDg, /., condemnation, L,
164,,.
For-ellri, foreldri, n., parent, fore-
fathers, I., 8, g. — 2. predecessors :
sá Frakkakonungr, sem gullsius
missir, afkynjast svá mjök síim
foreldri, at hann berr eigi um aldr
úlialla sína krúno, I., 478, j^,
336, 26-
For-feðr, m., pl., ''forefathers^ i.e.,
predecessors, I., 84, g, 118, 17.
For-ganga,y., leadership, protection,
L, 404,25-
For-gildra (-11), /'., a trap, snare, I.,
252,
'» 8-
352
GLOSSARY.
For-hrumr, ad., utterly decrepit^ II.,
138, 13.
For-liugaðr, ad.^ preconcerted^ I.,
516,5.
For-hugsaðr, ad.^ having made up
one's mind beforehand, ready , I.,
326, 26«
For-liiigsan, f., purpose, plan, II.,
202,16.
Foringi (-ja, -jar), w., leader, chief,
I., 208, 17, 218,9.
For-kunnligr, ad,, famous, I., 16, 22 ;
f. maðr, an extraordinary man,
I., 36, 21 ; f- list, superior art, I.,
50, 8- — magnificent, gorgeous, I.,
494, 13.
For-kuunr (-ar), f, curiosity : því at
honum er foi'kimnr, at freista enu,
hversii at faii meÖ þeim,/or he is
curious {anxious) to know, 8fc.,
I., 468, 16' — 2. that ivhich calls
forth admiration : forkunnar
vænn, goodly to admiratio?i, of ex-
ceeding goodliness, II., 64, 7.
Forliga, adv., forcibly : býð ek yðr,
at þér flytið mik þangað til grafar,
ef yðr er eigi fovliga l>annat, I.,
488, 15 ; — vehemently f violently,
furiously, \., 320, g, 348, 23-
Forligr, ad., reckless, * insoiens^ I.,
266,4.
For-litligr, ad., contemptible, despi-
cable, I., 344, 27.
For-litning, /., pride, supercilious-
ness, disdain, I., 94,22' — con-
tempt, I., 328, 21, 358, i"'8, 420, 20-
Form, 91., shape, bodily build, I.,
248, 23 ; — ,^9' fo7'f7i : eftir rettu
formi ritninga, according to the
right method of interpreting
Scripture, L, 100, 26-
For-maðr, m., a ^ foreman^ master,
leader, chief, head, superior:
þjóuar nú si mum forma nni með
þeim hugarkrafti, at aldri faiist
ofrau meÖ honum. I., 36, 24 ; höfð-
ingjar virðu hann sem sér jafnan,
ok óttuðust hann sera sinn for-
mann, I., ^%, ^ ; virðandi er ok sá
þjónustumaðr, er svá góðan lut
kjöri sinum formanni, I., 172, 28 ;
her til hefir þú verit vorr f ormaðr,
ok af þvi áttum vér þér at hlýöa,
I., 218, iq; nú sem þessir fjórir
riddarar eru samsvarnir í dauÖa
erkibyskupsins sera formenn ok
leiðtogar glæpsins, I., 516, ^g;
þar er formaðr ýfir priórr einn,
L, 244, 11 . — 2. prelate, ruler in
the church, bishop, I., 2,22,
80,4, 90,6, 134,9, 296,5.
For-mali (-a), m., precaution, direc-
tion, I., 458, 1.
Forman (-ar), /'., formation, form-
ing, II., 52, 19.
Formanns-lauss,0!í/.,2í?^V/^owí a bishop,
vacant, I., ^2, 14, 190, 17.
Formanns-stettr, m., episcopal state,
I., 86, 4.
Formera (að), v.a., to form, I.,
284,12.
Formæli, n., discourse, pleading.
I., 28, 11. ; II., 262, 13. — interces-
sion, favour, I., 356,9.
Forn, ad., old, ancient, I., 30, 15,
134, 9, 152, 4 ; at fornu, of old, I.,
US, 19. ^
Forn (ar, -\x),f., offer, offering, pre-
sents, I., 104, 12 ; II., ^^-i 11- — 2.
sacrifice, victim^ I., 364, 17, 542, ig.
Forna (að), v.a., to offer, to bring
offering, L, 104, ^^.
GLOSSARY.
353
Fórnar-hjól, w., ^ wheel of sacrifice'
probably the wafer, not, as trans-
lated, the pyx, II., 154,24,.
Fornar-lamb, n., lamb of sacrifice,
I., 544,,.
Fórn-færa, v.a., to offer, to bring
offering, I., 104, 20- — ^- lo sacri-
fice, II., 22, 7.
Forligr, ad., violent, passio7iate, I.,
154, 5 ; f. orð, intemperate lan-
guage, I., 266, 4.
Forr, ad., masterful, I., 44, ^2? 284, g ;
— rash, I., 430, ^7.
For-ræði, n., rule, administration, I.,
90,1.
Fors, n., violence, insolence, I., 276,3,
278, 19, 454, 5. See forz.
For-sát, y., an ambush, I., 486, n,
488,,.
For-sjá, /., foresight, II.,
heed, care, I., 32, 17.
For-sjáll, ad., prudent, I.,
52,6;
36, 10,
54, 26 j II'j ^2, 12»
Forsjá-maÖr, m., constable, II.,
273,^9.
For-sió,f,2)rovidence, care: almatt-
igs Guðs forsjó ok várt samþykki
heSr kjörit yðr til bvskups, I.,
78, 1 ; vorr Herra beri þar forsjó
fyrir, I., 258, i- — 2. provision :
þessu næst skoÖar hann, hverja
forsjóeðr beneficmmhverjum bann
megi veita, I., 110,26- — ^- over-
sight, care, charge, administra-
tion : býðr Thómase canceler, at
eftir konunojlio-um vana búi hann
sik til heimferðar i England, at
skipa kirkjunni ok gózi hennar
þá forsjó af krúnunnar hálfu, sem
fyrrvarsagt, I., 64,2; niáþatsýnast
vel trúlegt, at þeim, er boObkapinn
K 541.
For-sjó — cont.
báru, hafi hannfengit sitt umboí),
at veita staðnum forsjó, I., 480, 21 ;
at bann gjaldi skyn ok göða grein
herra konunginnm fyrir allan þann
fjárhlut er hann liafði undir sinni
forsjo, þá er hann var canceler, I.,
212, 16- — 3. heed, precaution, setið
lækniug liðnum lilutuni ok forsjd
iikomnum, II., 18,22-
For-sjóligr, ad., gifted with fore-
sight, prudent, I., 44,22-
For-skot, n., interval from the date
of a notice to the date luhen, what
is notified, takes place, II., 202, 20-
For-smán (ar),y., contempt, I., 456, 3.
For-spá, /'., divination, prophecy, I.,
478,2,.' — 2. o^^^e/?, I., 460,10.
For-spá (ð), v.a., to foretell, to pre-
dict, II., 178,15.
For-staða, f, ward, protection, I.,
310,1.
For-stjdri(-a, -ar), m., ruler, bishop,
I., 72,15; \\,,\^,^,. — 2.''patro-
nus,'' patron saint, II., 64, 21-
Forsugr, ad., insolent, I., 270,25.
For-sögn, f, order, direction, I.,
480, 11 ; II., 138,7. — 2. announce-
ment, indication, I., 520, 13. — 3.
prophecy, II., m, 13.
For-tekinn, ad., express, unreserved,
exclusive, peremptory, I., 166, 2?,
214,1,498,1,.
For-tölur, f, persuasive arguments
representations, I., 132, q, 158, 5,
236,21,326,10,441,13.
For-verandi, pi. forvereudr, m., pre-
decessor, I., 478,11.
For-verari, ?;/., predecessor, 1.,
102,19, 172,12.
354
GLOSSARY.
For-vitnast, v. med., to pry, to scru-
tÍ7iize, to inquire into, II., 284, 3.
For-vitni {gen. ibrvitnis, I., 436,9),
/!, curiosity^ I., 52,9, 208, 17.
Forz, 7^., masterfulness^ overhearing
demeanour, violence, ill-will, I.,
190,29, 140,19,488,7.
Forzugr, ad., violent, 7nasterfid, II.,
250,3;.
For-þykkja (-u), /., offence, 1.,
462,13.
Fostra (-11), f. {projj., a foster-
daughter), a pet {coiv), II., 120, 9.
Fóstr-íaÖir, m., a * foster father,'
tutor, II., 206,8-
Fostri (-a), m., a \foster-son,^ pupil,
I., 504,5(1= fostr-son, L, 120, ^q).
— 2. a ^foster-father,'' master:
Hon (J..e. kyrin) þoler þat eigi vel
ok Till leita fostra sins, II., 120, g.
Fóstr-jörð, f, ^foster-earth,' native
soil, II., 224, 17.
Fostr-land, n., ^foster-land,' native
country, I., 28,27, 276,17-
Fóstr-móðir, /., ^foster-mother,' a
nurse, II., 158,8-
Fostr-son, m., ''foster-son,' disciple,
jmpil, I., 120,18, 124,22-
Fotar-mein, n., hurt in the leg, II.,
94,3. ^
Fotar-stúfr, m., the stump of the leg.
IL, 130
5 13'
Fota-þváttr, m., icashing (f feet, I.,
100,3.
Fota-þvottr, id,, I., 100, jg.
Fdt-brotiun, ad., hrcken-legged, I.,
232,25.
Fotr (-ar, dat. fæti, j^i- fetr), m. —
1. foot,!., 32,18, 98,19, 144,2;
far a úliöllum fæti, to march on an
unfaltering foot, i. e. to act loith-
Fotr — cont.
out fear or hesitation, 1., 58,2;
hafi þér ok svá lofsamligar per-
sonur Í ySru riki, at miu lausung
fer lágt fyrir þeira fótum, i.e. that
my unrestricted, unascetic life
bears no comparison with theirs,
I., 64,21 ; á fæti, a-foot, I., 484,22-
— 2. leg, IL, 96,12-
F(5t-spor, n. pi., foot-prints,!., 540,23-
Fót-troÖ, n., the treading under foot,
oppression, I., 168,7, ^02, iq.
Fót-troðinn, ad., trod under foot,
trampled doion, I.,70,g; II., 106, 4.
Fot-veill, ad., lame, IL, 283,8-
Frá, prep, with dat., from, myndi
your YÍnátta fljótt frá mér víkja,
L, 64,19; mutéra þarf hann sjálf-
an sik frá þeiri samþykt, er nú
liaí'ði kaun veittiim hríÖ konungs-
ins vilja, L, 80,13; frá því sem
sögnna byrja^i, ýrom the time
when, I., 24,25- -^W' hans ásjóna
þornaÖi aldri frá tárum, I., 102,15..
— 2. as an adv., from, héðan upp
í frá, henceforth, L, 4, 2» cfr. héðan
í frá, 1., 80, 25- — away, out of:
falla frá, to fall off', to depart life,
I., 6, 9 ; eingan kunnum ver frá
taka utan Thómam enska, I.,
20,19-
Frá-bærr, ad., rare, extraordinary,
I., 16,225 128,19; exceeding great,
L, 462, 19.
Frá-fall, n., demise, death, I., 62, g,
296,24; n., 22,21.
Frá-fallinn, ad., departed, dead, L,
12,3,28,1,66,15.
Frá-leiddr, ad., turned away from
in loathing, I., 52, ^9.
GLOSSARY.
355
Framan, udv.^ in front : tekr framan
Í .handveginn á kyrtlinum, seizes
the arm-hole of the kirtle in front,
I., 64, lY ; — frontward, towards
the front, into : stökkr einn mikill
fiskr or vatninu ok framan í fang
erkibyskupi, I., 258, 3. — (from
the front) through the front,
through the first fart : svá sitr
hann framan til messu-máls, thus
he sits through the (fore-) first
part of the day up to the time of
mass being said, I., 102, 7.
Framan-vert, adv,, frontward, in
front, I., 544, jg.
Framar (framarr), compar. adv.,
further^ more, more fully, more
perfectly, at framar se hlýðandi
Guði enn mönnum, I., 150, 3 ;
þat er hann kann framar kirkjunn-
ar log enn aÖrir Kantuariensis
erkibyskupar fyrir honum, þýÖa
þeir til svo vaustiltrar djörfungar
at hann þikkist einn vita alt, I.,
178, 14 ; því framar, («//) the more.,
\., 194,22; ^^ " higher degree:
allir þeir sem framar voru mentir,
1,238,25.
FramarHga, adv.^ far, munu þér svá
framarliga kúgaðr sem sá maðr,
er sínum herra leitar æfinligra
hneyxla, shall you he as far pun-
ished even as such an one who,
Sfc, I, 164, 9.
Framast, super I. adv., furthest, most
fully, to the utmost, erkibyskup
var . . . eigi svo forsjáll í sinum
orðum ef á hann fékk, sem hóg-
værisregla býðr framast, I., 36, ^ ;
hann treysti Thomasi framast allra
manna at halda sina erfingja til
Framast — cont,
hásætis, I, 68, 25 ; konungr hefir
tekit or þessu máli allan trega, sem
hann ma framast, I., 78, 20; þí
öllu framar, for this, more than
anything else, I, 144, ^g ; þær
bækr er framast fylgja Heinreki
gamla, which most favour the
cause of H., II, 8, 22-
Framdi, see fremja.
Frarait, see fremja.
Framliga, adv., boldly, bravely, I,
166, 12-
Framm, adv., 1, local : forth, all the
way: ok sem þeir framm koma,
arriving at their destination, I,
72, 1, cfr. I, 90, 12 ; lærðir ok leik-
raenn hafa sik út af staÖnum
framm á veginn, I, 128,15; þaðan
framm var hariSla skamt áðr óssinn
sjálfr tók viö, I, 32, iq; framm
j^v, forth over, i.e, past, I, 32, 4 ;
fara framm see fara. — Fig. :
framm í dauða ájT, forth all the
way unto dcatlCs door, I, 6, 29 ;
tárin framm {i.e. bursting forth)
af bans augum samfluta því vatni,
er hann þvær meÖ, I, 98, 20.
2. — Temp. : forth, on, onward,
towards : dregr framm at langa-
föstu, time draws onwards to
Lent, I, 22, ^ ; framm frá, on-
wards from, i.e, after, in suc'
cession, I., 26,4, cfr. I., 84,9;
liðr nú svá framm til þings, I.,
130,3 ; framm urn, forth beyond,
jjost, IT., 98, 20«
Framm-bera, v,a., to take forth, to
lay before {a meeting), þessu uæst
var frammborit .... bref gamhi
koniings, I., 74,.,; to set forth,
z 2
856
GLOSSARY.
Framm-bera — cont.
to lodge (« charge), I., 186, j ; to
promulgate, to publish, I., 458, 28-
Framm-burÖr, 7n., 1. carriage, de-
livery, conveyance, I., 330, 14. —
2. delivery of speech, utterance,^.,
36,19,104,4, 102,17,278,2.-3.
relation, information, I., 260,3«
Framm-eggjan, /'., egging-on, exhor-
tation, I., 174, 19.
Framm-fall, n., genuflexion, kneel-
ing, I., 98, 22 ; II., 92, 5.
Framm-fallinn, p.p., kneeling, I., 22,
26' 5^? 39 98, 19, 340, 8«
Framm-fara, v. a., to act,to proceed :
HérmeÖ stefni ek yðr öllum by-
skupum, ... at þér svarit mer a
páfagarði, hvat þér hafit moti oss
framm-farit, I., 222, 5 ; birtir síÖ-
an þeim, sem nær voru, hvat Hein-
rekr konungs hefir nú cnn framm-
farit, I., 370, 29.
Framm-farinn, p.p., departed, dead,
I., 10,19,296,28.
Framm-ferð, plur. franim-ferðir, /.,
proceedings : byskupar byrja sina
frammferð með því npphafi, I.,
74, (5 ; nú þótt þessi frammferÖ
ræri lofsamlig, líkar lion eigi öll-
um því holdr, I., 120,2; Þ^ssi
fraramferð líkar eigi Tliómasi, I.,
140, 1 ; yðra frammferð liugleidd-
ura vér með oss með friðsamri
eftirleitan, I., 146,19. — taking of
proceedings, acting on a coinjnis-
sion, II., 28, 5. — 2. exercise, prac-
tice : með lögligri frammferS
heilagrar röksemdar, II., 238, 5.
— 3. device: snyst bann berliga
með öðrum öfundarmönnum til
þess vegar, at minka erkibyskup
Framm-ferÖ — cont.
ok bans kirkju meÖ þeiri framm-
ferÖ, af illgjarnra manna tillÖgii,
at . . . legátavald . . . skuli bann
þiggja brott af Kantuariensi
kirkju, L, 178, 22« — 4. adminis-
tration, því at svá er bljóð orð-
anna, at ríkisstjörn ok frammferð
Í landinu hafi hanu fordjarfat, I.,
144,10.
Framm-ferði, n., manner of proceed-
ing, I., 264, 14.
Framm-flytja, v. a., to carry onward,
to continue, I., 4, 7.
Framm-för, y., departure^ death, I.,
62,8, IL, 182,3.
Framm-ganga,/*., authoritative pro-
ceedings, II., 20, 3.
Framm-geystr, p-P-t vehemently
urged forward, I., 544, 20«
Framm-girnd,/!, over -zeal, reckless
masterfidness, I., 454, 5.
Framm-gjarn, ad., forward, ambi-
tious, L, 44, 21, 270,25.
Framm-hleypi, n., temerity, wanton-
ness, L, 506, 2^ ; II., 10, 19.
Fraram-bvass, ad., pointed, sharp,
cutting, keen : f . svör, I., 72, g. —
2. eager-minded, I., 284, g.
Framm-bvöt, f, egging-on, L,
514,7.
Frammi, adv., prop., in froyit, to
the fore, jorward : frammi fyrir,
in front of, L, ^2, 2, 54, 12 ; hafa
sik frammi, to keep in the front
ranks, to come boldly forward,
T., 174, 21 ; bvat er bann heyrði af
ritningum ok lagadomum var hon-
um tiltækt, er bann vildi frammi
bafa, when he wanted to bring
GLOSSARY.
357
Yrammi— con f.
them to hear on each subject in
question, I., 28, 2-
Frammi-staða, f., standing at the
front, dauntless bravery, I., 58, 5 ;
aid in carrying measures adopted,
I., 216, 10 ; stout assistance, reso-
lute aid, I., 350, 20*
Framm-koma, v.n., to arrive at one's
destination.
pervenire.
330, 20- — 2. to come true, to be
fulfilled, " evenire;' II., 222, 24.
Framm-kominn, p.P', arrived at the
place of destination, II., 10, 5. —
2. come forth, born, 1., 2G, 21. — 3.
far gone {of a diseased person),
n.,80,5.
Framm-kvæma, v.a., to fulfil, to
consummate: ok þá framm-
kværadi Drottinn sinn vilja í
þessu raáli, II., 186,23.
Framm-kvæmd, /'., carrying out,
execution : undir lecj^r ok herra
Co
konuugrinn við cardinalem, at
liann styði svá erindit, at eigi
þarfnist þat sína frammkvæind, I.,
68, 2« — 2. furtherance, advance-
ment,prosecution, því ýtir ábótinn
florin á garðiuumokætlar atsmyrja
ráð erkibyskups til frammkvæmd-
ar málisinUjI., 116,7. — 3. efforts,
activity: meiri- af sjálfs síns til-
stilli ok frammkvæmd, enn annarra
túlkau eðr tilniæli, L, 36, ^. — 4.
fulfilment, accomplishment, com-
pletion, consummation, II., 184, ^,
226,7.
Fiammkvæmdar-lauss, ad,, ineffec-
tive, in vain : flytja honuni, hvcrsii
þeii'a eriudi ok útferð í curiam
Frammkvæmdarlauss — cont.
hefir á alia vesfa frammkvænidar-
laus orðit, I., 320,9.
Framra-lag, n., contribution, II.,
999
^^-> 12*
Framm-leiða, v.a., to U ad forth, to
take up before, to introduce, at hinn
helgi Thomas erkiliyskvp væri
framleiddr af sialfii gvðs moðvr
Marie . . . fyrir haleitan domstol
ok gvlligan, II., 279, 13.
Framm-leiðis, adv., still further,
I., 74, 22) j^ersistently, 350, jg.
Framm-leypi, /'., rashness, temerity,
foolhardiness, I., 276, g.
Framni-liðenn, II., 60, Q.=foll.
Framm-liÖiuu, ad., departed, dead,
I., 548, n.
Framm-liitr, ad., prone, eager, I.,
46, 5, 142, J.. — bent against, un-
favourably disposed towards, I.,
204, 22.
Framm-lög, n, pi., money, gifts,
bribes, I., 350, 3Q.
Fraram-sagðr, p.p., given forth, spo-
ken out, delivered, pronounced, II.,
184,1.
Framm-setja, v.a., to set forth, I.,
18, 23.
Fmmin-settr, pp., set forth, framed,
I., 290, 23 ; shown forth, placed :
lieldr var þar i miðju fiammsett
réttlætisvog með WTgð eftir at-
vikum, I., 112,22.
Framm-svD, /"., vision, omen, I.,
16,ig.
Framr (from, framt), ad., for-
ivard ; in this sense only in the
ncut : framt : sva framt scm, so far
as, i.e., to the utmost that, I.,
252,20; l^i-'ii' erii pinaudi meÖ
35S
GLOSSARY.
Framr — cont.
harÖri stríðu,ok þó eigi svá framt,
yet not to such an extent, II.,
52, 26« — 2. eminent : þar eru
svá margir byskupar, framir menn
ok mikils verðii', I., 88, g.
Frain-staða. /'., support, aid, autJw
riti/, II., 256, 19.
Fram-stauda, v.n., to stand forth,
II., 250,39.
Frá-skila, ad., separated, parted,
I., 440,9.
Frá-skildr,7^.jy., separated, debarred,
excluded from : því setjum ver
J3Ík, JÓD, með þessu voni bréfi í
sterkasta forbo'ð, fráskildan Guðs
líkam og heilagi'i kirkju, I., 358,
22 ; at próííi málin ok úr<kiirða
síðan, allri appellerau fráskildri,
L, 286,11, r/KL, 412,9.
Frá-skilliga, adv., pririlf/, apart, I.,
314, 1,.
Frá-snúiun, ad., turned aicay from,
n., 134,22.
Frá-sögn, y., relation, tale, report,
I., 52,22, 112,14, 128,5, 176,1,,
492,22; tekr hann Herbert til
frásagnar, charges Herbert to set
jnatters forth, I., 268, 7. — 2.
digression from the main story,
episode, anecdote, I., 474,26.
Frá-tekinn, j:?.p., taken away, pre-
vented, II., 178, ig.
Frauð, n., froth, foam, II., 280, 1.
Frá-vera (-u, dat. fravero, I., 486,
n),f"f absence, I., 286, jg.
YTk-\eT2iiná\, ad., absent, I., 190, 1,,
326, 21.
Fregna (að), 3. jires. ind. fregn and
fregnar, i\a., to learn by rumour,
Fregna — cont.
I., 62,16, 340,19, 354,3, 468,15,
476, 19.
Freista (að), v.a., to try, 1., 16, g,
468, 16 ; to attempt, to venture, I.,
364, 30.
Freistanar-andi, w., spirit of tempta-
tion, I., 472, 16.
Freistanar-eldr, m., fire of tempta-
tion, L, 430, 13.
Freistni, f, temptation, I., 158, 5,
234, 30.
Freka (-11), /., bold?iess, eagerness,
L, 140,3.'
Frekliga, adv., boldly, forwardly,
J.., i-±-, 1»
Frekr, ad., bold, boldly expressed,
f. eiðr, L, 330, 1;.
Frelsa (ð), v.a., to free, to liberate,
to redeem, to deliver, I., 222, 31.
Frelsi, n., freedom, I., 6, 15, 46, 3,
liberation, deliverance : Kallaðist
konungr f)at goz hafa lagt til
frelsis Jorsalalandi, I., 138, q. —
2. dispensation : hann gaf syni
sinum fult vald til samþykkis
ok frelsis allra þeira greina, er
Thomasi til heyra, I., 78, 24. —
3. right, privilege : her með ferr
þat frelsi, at hvar sem stendr
konuugs fé, er í bans valdi, svá
tæra rikuni sem fátækum, 1., 48,
14; f. kirkjunnar, the right of the
church, L, 72, 13, cfr. I., 124, go-
— 4. title to property, því at
hann sesfist engau rekstr eðr
mæÖu vilja bera fyrir því fé ok
frelsi, er hann veit efalaust kirkj-
unnar eign, ef hún skal úrænt
vera, I., 118,27.
GLOSSAKY.
859
Fremd (-ar), f., fame, distinction,
1,518,5.
PVemi, adv., in the phrase, sva fremi,
50 far only, in that case only,
I., 164,4.
Fremja (frem, framda - frömdum,
fremdi, framinn), v. a., to do, to
perform, to exercise, enn alt
framdi liann þat meÖ leynd, ok
seui first manna orÖlofi, I., 38, i2>
fremr hann þá góðfýst ok lítil-
læti, I., 96, 3 ; því fremr herra
erkibyskup þetta miskunnarverk,
I., 98, 27 ; því óttast hann, . . .
at þat kallist meirr framit ok
þolt fyrir nokkura bans sjálfs
eiginliga sök, I., 228, u; at sjá
vígslíi fremist fyrir iitan alia
röksemd Thome erkibyskups, I.,
450, 15. — 2. to execute, fremit
hegning guðligra laga, II., 18,20-
' — 3. refi., fremja sik, to distin^
giiish one's self, I., 514, ^5.
Fremjandi, gerund, o/' fremja: hvat
er fi'emjanda væri, quid agendum
SZt, J.I, Áó^, 3Q.
Fremri, comp. ad., more forward,
i.e., more important : ok er oss
þat fremra, er þér f jrirlítit herra
páfann, I., 356, 20»
Fremstr, superl. ad,, foremost, i.e.,
principal : tekst hann með fremst-
um vinum erkibyskups, I., 36,
4; er þar nefndr fremsti maðr
af þeim meistari Adam, I., 90, 9.
Neut. fremst, to the utmost : sem
fremst bera formenn traust a, to
the utmost that the bishops con-
sider to be safe, I., 194, 20, cfr.
sem fremst er þreytanda eftir
lögunum .1. 358, ^5.
Fresta (að), v.a., to delay, I., 386, iq.
Frett (-ar, Av), f, news, I., 328, 7,
452, 14. — 2. inquiry, II., 102, 20-
Friða (Ö, t), v.a., to pacify, I.,
60, 18 ; to appease, I., 36, ^g ; to
bring about peace : nil at samdri
sætt ok friðuðu máli milium
þeira snéri sá Guðs maðr ótta-
lauss ok öruggr heim, II., 22,3.
— 2. tofe?ice, to icard, to guard,
to defend : konungsvaldit skal ok
friða kirkjunnar sæmd, enn eigi
þyngja, L, 338, 3.
Friðan (-ar), /., appeasement, I ,
322, ,,.
Friðar-gerð, /!, peace- mailing, I,,
424,27,464,4.
Friðar-greiu, f., understanding con-
cerning peace, I., 200, 4 ; í t,for
the sake of peace, I., 336, 3^, con-
dition of stipulation as to, peace,
I., 404,^,0-
Fri^ar-gæzla, f, maintenance of
peace, I., 284,2-
Friðar-koss, ?7i., the kiss of peace,
the" pax;' 1., 132,15,446,25.
Friðar-spell, n.,' rupture of the
peace, disturbance, I., 138, 2.
Friðar-vegr, m., path of peace, I.,
446,21.
FriÖ-gjarn, ad,, peacefully disposed,
1., *±I^, IQ.
Friö-gjörð, f., settlement of peace,
II., 273, 13.
Frið-heilagr, ad,y inviolate, hallowed
by the protection of the law, I.,
408, 10, 496, 22.
Frið-kaup, n., purchase of peace, I.,
196,26,308,19.
Frið-land, n., land of peace, asylum,
place of refuge, L, 264,27-
360
GLOSSARY.
FriÖligr, ad.^ peaceful of aspect,
quiet, I., 486, 25.
FriS-mælast, v. med,, to sue for
peace, II., 144,24, 154,2-
Friðr (-ar, dot. sing, friðinum, I.,
464,25), ^^v peace, I., 138, n,
140,4.
Fríðr, ad., fair, beautiful of aspect,
II., 279, '17.
Yv\6-?>dA\\\\gai,,adv. , quietly , I., 120, i^.
Frið-samligr, ad., peaceful, I., 278, e-
Frið-samr, adj.^ peaceful^ quiet,
trancj[uil, I., 146, 20? 276, 7.
Fri(5-semd, f, peaceful disposition,
I., 386,16.
Friö-semi, f., peacefulness, peaceful
address, I., 336, 20» 480, 25.
Frið-vænligr, ad., of peaceful aspect,
1., 338, 13.
Frið-væiiD, ad., giving hope of peace,
1., 308, le.
Frjals, ad., free, exonerated, irre-
sponsible, I., 212, 23 ; f. af sökiiini,
free from guilt, innocent, I., 540,
11 ; með frjálsu, freely, without
let or hindrance, II., 54, 21.
Frjálsa (að,) v. a., to liberate, to set
free, to dispense, to absolve :
Herra konuiigrÍDn hafði vald at
frjálsa Thómam bæði af stétt ok
ístöðu, I., 68, 23. — 2. to alloio,
to permit : sé síðan styrkr ok
staðfastr í vingan ok virðing
heilags Petri ok vorri, frjálsi
stefnugeiÖir til vor ok bröður
vors Thomam erkibyskups, I.,
378,20. — 3. to spare, to save:
jainfraram biðjum vér, at þér
vikit til friöar ok frjálsit oss af
rekstri, I., 396, 26»
Fi'jálsan, f, leave, dispensation :
tálmar hann at koiiungrinn geii
honum orlof ok frjálsan, I.,
64, 30.
Frjálsi, n., freedom, liberty, deliver-
ance : I., 68, 9, 174, 17, 458, 9.
Frjálsleiki, m., liberality: bjóöandi
honum svá meÖ frjálsleika, hvat
er hann vill af þeirra gózi hafa,
making him freely loelcome to
whatever he may choose of their
goods,!., 128,5,290,5.
Frjálsleikr, m., id., I., 372, g-
Frjálsliga, adv., with freedom, with
liberty, I., 354, 13. — 2. freely,
gratis, I., 268, 29-
Frjosamr (-söm, -samt), ad,, fruit-
>/,IL,88,5.
Fijosemd (-ar), /., fruiffulness, II.,
230, 16.
Froöa (-n), J. {froth), foam, II.,
76,7.
FróÖ-leikr, m., lore, knoioledge,
learning, I., 106, g.
Fromr, ad,, righteous : geisli guðs
enn frome, ray of God's righteous-
ness, II., 290, 'i.
Yvoúun, p.p., frozen, I., 104,7.
Frú {gen. -r, -ar and frú, I., 20, 25?
22,8, d(^t' frú, I., 22,1),/., lady,
I., 16,2.
Frum-burðir, m.pl., the right of the
firstborn, II., 276, g.
Frum-tign,/i, pinmacy, supremacy :
þetta er ok skrifat fyrir þá sök,
at siÖar í þessu máli gerist þá
enn Ijósara, hversu þat sarair, ef
nokkurr kennimaðr í Englandi
fyllist þess, at grípa iindir sik
kirkjunnar frumtign í Kanncia,
I., 42,8; Þ^tta flytja meÖ þeim
GLOSSARY.
Í61
Frum-tign — cont,
nokkurir cardinales. er meirr
elska presentur Heinreks kon-
uno-s enn frumtion lieilaoTar
kirkju, I., 284, 21 ; Heinrekr
konungr heiir þat meÖ höndiim,
at lata vígja til krúnu Heinrik
son sinn, ok því svá brátt, at
heilagr Thomas skyldi missa
þeirrar sæmdar er houum einum
til heyr^i eftir æíinlioTÍ frum-
tign Kantuariensis kirkju, I.,
450, 10- — 2. authoríty^ sanction :
ma þar nefna til þrjár greinir, er
noterast í sögu þessi, er allar
þurftu frumtiguar a£ herra páf-
anum ef þær samþykkja lögunum,
I., 124, J. — 3. privilege, her
fjlgir fjórða grein í frumtignum
Kantuariensis kirkju, I., 126, ^ ;
less hann oftliga svá falHt decre-
• tum, er vottar frumtign ok frelsi
klerkanna, 1., 182, 17. — 4. glory :
eigi mun yíða lesit i frumtignum
heilagra, at ein persona hafi
öÖlazt svá forkunnligt upphaf
ok frábæran enda, I., 16, 21, c/)".
n., 4, 15.
Frum-vaxta, ad., grown up, of ripe
age, II., 126, 13, 162, 3.
Fræði, n.pl., lore, learning : heilög
fræÖi, holy lore, I., 18, g.
Frægð (-ar),y., great neios, I., "^Q, 29 ;
good report, favourable account,
I., 262, 2 ; fame, glory, I., 58, ^
Frægja (Ö,) v.a., to praise, to extol,
I., 2,11, 116,13; 11-» 84, 24;— ^o
honour, to advance, II., 226, jg. —
Pass, to be renowned : er eigi at
einsfrægist um England, I., 16, ^3.
Frægr, ad., comp. frægri, I., 50, g,
famed, renowned, I., 2, jp 20, 7.
— 2. notorious : menu mjök
fraígir af illgerðum, I,, 228,4.
Frækilega, adv., gallantly, L,
514,15.^
Frænda-bálkr, ?n., kinsmen, family,
I., 510,29-
Frændi (-a, frændr), m., kinsinan,
relation, relative, I., 8, 13, 142, 14.
Frænd-kona, f., kinsivoman, II.,
116,1.
Frænd-lið, n., company of relatives,
II., 150,13.
Frænd-semi,y., kÍ7iship, relationship,
I., 348, 9.
Fugl (-S, -ar,) m., a bird, I., 32,2,
246,13.
Fugla-fjöldi, m., flock of birds, I.,
388, 22«
Yug\ii'Ye\^v,f., folding, II., 142, oq*
Full (fvll), m., sullenness, sulkincss,
enmity: ok ef nockor fvll e^a
£eð heiir a oröit, II!, 26Q, 05.
Full-gera, v.a., to fulfill, to satisfy,
I., 234, 17 ; to bring to fulfilment,
to settle, I., 284, 17.
Full-gerr, ad., fully arranged, de-
cided, I., 6^, 23 ; carried out to the
full extent, completed, L, 324, 1.
FuU-gildi, n., full value, full-gildis
hlutr, a full enough share, T.,
28, i.
Full-gjörla, adv., quite clearly, II.,
136, 14.
Full-komliga, adv., perfectly, I., 2, 7.
FuU-komligr, ad., absolute, I.,
450, 14.
FuUnaör (-ar), ;;/., satisfactory,
just award, I., 272, ;, 1 12. 5.
362
GLOSSARY.
FuUr, «í/., full : allar skukkur ok
hrukkur línklæÖisins voru svá
fiillar, at flj'tr yfir, I., 232, jq. —
2. Fig., full, perfect : f. vald, />^//
power, I., 78, 23 ; skiljast þeir
með fallri blíðu, 122, g, cfr.
128, 9 ; með fuUum seutentia, icith
a plenary sentence, I., 144, j ; f.
vandlætis, /)/// oyr^rt/, I., 174, 21;
f. með h^ivi,Jilled with, I., 322, g.
— I^eut. in adverbial phrases,
as : með fullu, fully, I.j 30, j,
38
64,
?12j
116, ig; til fulls, tV/., I.,
FuU-rétti, n., full right, full resti-
tution, I., 190, ig.
FiiU-rikr, ad., right well furnished
tvith money, I., 272, 15 ; very
wealthy, \\., 194, 13.
Fiill-sæla, y., hliss, happiness, pros-
perity, I., 50, 12? 364, j^.
FuU-tekinu (-enn), ad., fully re-
gained, quite recovered, XL, 72, j- ;
complete, XL, 54, 15.
Full-ting, ??., azW, assista?ice, I.,
310,1, 322,24.
Full-tingi, «., id., I. 254, ^q.
Fiina (að), r.w., ^0 7-0^, XL, 40, 2-
Fundr (ar, -ir), ?n., meeting, I.,
76, 22 ; keDnimanna fundi', a synod,
I., 6, 13 ; almenniligr fundr, general
congregation of Grey - ?nonks,
generale capitidum, X., 370, 2 ;
general council, XI., 184,25,: kon-
ungs fundr, royal parliament, I.,
162, 7. — 2. interview, audience :
jafnbrátt sem hann hefir orlof á
fund Thome, I., 52, i^ ; rikismenn
Í landinu sækja bans fund, I.,
128,4; sækir konungs fund, I.,
160,13.
Furðuliga, adv., wondrously, mar-
vellously, I., 28, 14.
Fygliug (-ar), f, fowling, I., 32, 2 ;
XL, 140, 23.
Fýla (-u),/., stinh, L, 234,3»
Fylgd (ar), /'., following, retinue :
var at orðum gert, at eingi höfð-
iuo^i Í öllu EnHaudi heldi svá
lystuliga sina fylgd, L, 48, 24 ;
r/r. 66,2,12. 84,4, 120, 15, 170,2,
198, 11, 222, 19, 25, 224, 3. ~ 2.
attendance, waiting, service :
leggr hann nil af um stund
erkidjákns þjóuustu, enn tekr í
staðinn konungliga fylgd ok hirð-
sií5u, X., 46,20' — 3. fell OIL' ship,,
support, party : því er auðsýnn
vegr yðvarri vizku, at lokka frá
honum fylgdina sem alvarligast,
ok leiða svá til yðar, I., 158,2i ;
er kunnigt, hversu vel ok virðu-
liga þér hófut y'ðart riki til Guðs
ok rómverskrar kristni með fylgd
ok ilutningi, L, 344, 24.
Fylgdar-maðr, m., follower, fellow,
L, 436, 2.
Fylgi, n., companio7iship, fellow-
ship : her með skipar konungrinn
þeim til fylgis nokkura sæmilega
menn af sinum klerkum, X., 260,23.
— 2. alliance : b^'ðr sik framm
Í svardaga til fylgis með Friðreki
keisara ok þeim, er hann rill hefja
ok halda moti Alexandro páfa,
X., 330. 12 ; hafa til fylgis, to have
for allies, XX., 174, 4, — S. fellow-
ship, support, backing, siding
with : at þeir veiti yðr fylgi aftr
moti erkibyskupinum, L, 158,23,
ýta þeir þegar bæði flutning ok
fjárlut YÍS cardinales sér til fylgis
GLOSSARY.
363
Fylgi — cont.
I., 270, 20 ; tann setr sik berliga
framm í fjlgi með konunginum,
I., 298, 22 ; lia^a Í fy^i^ ^ö Aare
the support of\ II., 182,29. — 4.
lordly might and jjower, II.,
172,20.
Fylgja (Ö), r.a., 1. to follow, er mi
draumrinn iiti, enn lians þýðing
er SÚ rett skilin, er her fylgir, I.,
232, 2 j^; her fylgir fjórÖa grein í
frumtignum Kantuariensis kirkju,
I., 126,1. — Fig., to follow, to
obey, to act on : her standa nil
allir byskupar um hríð, sem
fylgjandi orðum erkibyskups, I.,
154, 2 ; kennir hann ok úspart,
hvat hafnanda er, eÖr hvat fylgj-
anda, I., 174, gj,. — 2. to accom-
p>any, ok svá gjörhi eftir farit, at
jafnvel fylgdi bagallinn, I., 24, ^^ ;
signaðr Thomas ok oil sii ferÖ, er
honum fylgir, tekr þá stefnu til
Englauds, I., 70, 21 ; houum er
flutt, at herra erkibyskiipi fylgir
mikit folk, I., 128, 23. — Reciproc,
to accompany each other, to keep
company : sva skulum ver fylgj-
ast, Í lofi Guðs, meðan vér lifum
báÖir, I., 310,25. Fig. — a. to ac-
company, i.e., to appertain to, to
belong to : því at þess háttar nafni
fylgdi mikill vandi með ýms störf,
I., 38, 4 ; bænar góðfýst ok ölmusii-
gðe(5i fylgdi honum alia tíma, I.,
38
J 10 »
sacfÖi hann ba^ði til hafa
vit ok vilja góðan ... ok fiesta
luti aðra, þá er fylgja eiga göfng-
ligum heilagrar kirkju höfðingja,
I., 74, 15 ; ef hann kallar þat
fylgja krúnu sinni, at halda öið-
Fylgja — cont.
venjur allar i Englandi, I., 442, 15.
— b. to accompany, i.e., to form
an addition to, to be in addition
to : þó let hann þegar fylgja í
öðru orði, at þér myndit siðar betr
gera, I., 382, jj. — 3. to favour, to
support, to side icith : þann tíma,
sem bastarðr tók riki í Englandi
fylgdi hann erkistolnnm i Cancia,
I., 10,9; aðrir fylgja framm kon-
ungs orðum, I., 74, ^g; birtir
þá Friðrekr, hvat í honum bjó,
því at hann fylgir þeim eardina-
libus, er verr höfðu, I., 90, 25. —
4. to follow up, to pursue, to pro-
secute, to execute ; sem fyrst
dagar helir hann sik uppi, at
fylgja sinum erindum, L, 50, 30;
heldr fylgja þeiri skyldumeðhugar
krafti er ek tok af sjálfum Guði,
I., 206, 13 ; ok sá sem framar fylg-
ir erendinu til hirtingar, skal
meÖ öllu einlítr til frammferÖar,
II., 28, 4.
Fylgjandi, ad., following, to come,
I., 410, 20.
Fylgjandi (-a, pi. fylgendr), m.,
follower, I., 434, g.
Fylgjari (-a, -ar, dat. pi. fylgjorum,
I., 206, 11), m., follower, comrade,
companion, I., 330, jg.
Fylgju-samr, ad., wont to accom-
pany, belonging to, II., 72, 17.
Fylkiug (-ar,-ar),/.,7-a«^,I., 108,19.
Fylkja (t), v.a., to draw up in order
of battle, II., 174,2.
Fylla (d.), v.a., to fill : engi rödd er
þcssi samlík, at svá skjótt hafi
flutzt ok fyllt allar álfur, 11.,
26,8; ^^^^ ii^i refahalarnir fyrst
364
GLOSSARY.
Fjlla — cont,
með svá miklii blóði sem þeir
veröa fyldir, I., 2?>2,^.— Med., to
be filled with : er fyldust syncla-
myrkri at fyrirkoma rétt^ásum ineð
sínum ólögligum dómi, I., 236, ^.
— Fig. xmtli gen., to sivell ivith
presumption^ to presume : hversu
þat samir, ef nokkurr keunimaðr
í Englaudi fyllist þess, at grípa
undir sik kirkjunnar frumtign, I.,
42, 7. — 2. to fulfill, to accom-
plish : er eigi auðvelt at gTeina,
hversu alvarliga hann leggr sitt
lif ok mæÖu til þess, at alt væri
skilríkt ok fagrliga fylt, þat er
honum var umboðit, L, 88,19;
krefr kouungrinn, at Thomas meö
öðrum lýðbyskupuin fylli sitt fyrir-
heit, I., 162, 11 ; byskupliga fyldi
heilagr Thomas klausu þessa, L.
182, 11 ; ok þat trúist ábótinn vel
fylt hafa (^of a promise), I., 318, 17.
— 3. to complete, to finish : sumir
páfarnir fyldu eigi árit heilt, I.,
26, 15.
Fylliliga, adv., fully, thoroughly,
explicitly, I., 352, 15 ; II., 257, g.
Fylling (-ar), /., fulfilment, II.,
134, 14 ; 2. full corroborative evi-
dence, II., 112, 25.
Fyllr (-ar), /., ^ fill,' fulness, satia-
tion, II., 282, 34.
Fyri=fyrri, II., 68,27.
Fyrir, prep, with dat. and ace. —
with dat., I. local, l.=:Lat. ante,
before, at the head of: gengr
hann fyrir öðrum til festu, I.,
166,19. — 2. Fig. — ii.=:Lat. coram,
before : þat fylgir her með, sem
dásamligt er til frásagnar, ok fá-
Fyrir — cont.
gætt fyrir eyrum kristninnar, I.,
1 12, 15. — b. Lat. pro, for : vilj-
um ver bera fyrir GuÖs nafni,
hvat er á gnýr, I., 150, 19. — c.
against : þá er þér þykkist byrgja
hjálparveg fyrir öðrum strengir
þú aftr lífs inngöngu fyrir þér
sjálfum, I., 424, 14. — d. = Lat.
ab, for, from, against : er hann nil
vel hirðr fyrir sinum ovinum, I.,
256, g. — e. to, before : J)á reglu
hélt hann síÖan meÖ byskups
embætti svá lofsamliga, sem fám
er máttuligt, at hvárki hneig
fyrir öðru, I., 84, jg. — II. temp.
=.Lat. ante, before: nú svá sem
ver liöfum byrjat konungatal í
Englandi fyrir þeira stórtíÖindum
sem eftir kvomu, I., 8, 24 ; nú er
um far it þær framm-sýnir er fyi'ir
runnu sælum Thómasi, I., 16, 17 ;
hann veit ok í sínu brjósti, hversu
mikinn vilja hann hefir til at veita
meira Guðs ölmusum, enn aÖrir
fyrir honum í Kancia, I., 118, ig;
þú finnr þá ofsókn', er eingi framdi
fyrir þér, I., 424,12- — \>.=-Lat.
inde, ago : hann byrjar nil þann
hátt, heimkominn á föÖiirgarð,
sem þeim er venjuligt, er fyrir
litlu hafa í skólu verit, I., 28,22;
gnogliga birtist bans vili nú fyrir
litlu, I., 74,25.
II. IV ith ace, before : l.=Lat.
ob, before : virðist eigi nauðsynlegt
at setja sem með nýrri letrgerð
þat, er áðr var fært ok fagrliga
samit, frægt ok borit fyrir margan
mane, I., 2, n. — 2. = Lat. ad,
before, up to : býðr hann í stað,
GLOSSARY.
365
Fyrir — cont.
at SÚ fylgd er fara skyldi með
canceler til Euglands, kallist inn
fyrir hann, I., ^Q, 3 ; ganga svo i
fyrstu inn fyrir hann, at þeir hald-
ast Í hendr, I., 120,22- — 3.
causal and instrumental, Lat.
per, through, by : nu gefi þat
Jesus Kristr fyrir árnaðarorð sinn-
ar sætu móður ok meyjar, I.,
4, 5 ; fýst Heinreks konungs er
nu svá heit í þessii máli, at á
eingan hátt svæfist hún fyrir slík-
ar mótbárnr, I., Q^, ^ 5 fyi'i''
píslarvætti var hann krúnaÖr ok
settr í hit himneska sæti, I.,
14, Yj ; hann flýði fyrr af koniings
garði fyrir þá eina sök, I., 36, 93 ;
svá semr hann lif sitt, at bæÖi
fyrir kenning orðs ok eftirdæmis
megi hann leiSa lýð sinn á sanna
• lifsgötu, I., 94, 12 ; svá kjörinn ok
conflrmeraÖr má eigi vígjast af
nokkurum lýÖbyskupi, nema fyrir
herra páfans boÖskap, L, 124, 7;
eðr hvað skal þá kirkjunnar réttr
eðr röksemd standa, ef vorr erki-
byskup gefr oss slíkt eftirdæmi,
at fyrir höfðingjanna ógnarliót
skuii hann sina sæmd uppgefa,
I., 194, g. — 4. in the comhina-
tio?is f. innan, in the fig. sense, in-
ivardly : fundii þeir livern föÖur
þeir áttu fyrir innan, I., 110,9;
f. utan, where the noun following
utan is governed by fyrir = a.
Lat. ultra, beyond: fyrir utan
haf (= f. haf utan), I., 6,27 ; efr.
fyrir sunnan sjó, I., 78, 15. — b.
= Tmí. prœter, i.e. except : ok
fyrir utan þá skymsemd krafði
Fyrir — cont.
eingi skylda at lúka þessi hjálpar
gjöld, L, 140,-; gefit þeim gott
orlof at eta tvimælt í dag, livat
er GuÖ gefr, fyrir utan kjöt, L,
256, 19. — o. Lat. prœter, past,
by, náliga þröngist hverr fyrir
annan at krjúpa undir konungs
vald, I., 156,23; sem hon heyrir
þetta, Terðr henni annars hugar
við, ok skundar þegar framm
fy rir borÖit, I., 250, 4. — G. =
Lut. prœ, on account of, by
reason of for : svefntimar bans
voru eigi langir á nóttina, fyrir
þjónkan fátækra, fyrir tár ok
trega, I., 108, 13. — 7- Lat. pro,
— a, for, on account of: nil ma
synast likligr til þess blessaÖr
Gregorius páíi, fyrir þá gæzku,
er hann lagí^i upp á Englands
kristni, I., 124, ^g. — b. for, on
behalf of: fyrir Gu'ðs nafn, I.,
156, 13. — c. instead of: hann
löííliíía tálmaðr fékk ei^fi farit
sjálfr, enn skipaÖi skilríkan and-
svaramann fyrir sik, I., 186,5;
her eru kappötur fyrir kosning
ok ógreiði fyrir góÖan vilja, 1.,
72, ig. — d. to, in favour of: cvn
þér skyldugir eigi at eins erki-
byskupsdom fyrir honum upp at
gefa, I., 192,21. — e. for=as,
significative of skírlífr klaustra-
maðr merkist fyrir ridtlara þann,
er geymir sitt goz ok lif, í luktri
borg, I., 50,2; allir þeir er eltu
þenna bustígul frá sinni bygtS
voru vanaÖir einhverju lýti, er
þýðisfc fyrir þeira andh'g sar, I.,
232,23. — ^' fi''-> "' return: m'l
366
GLOSSARY.
Fyrir — coat.
fyrir þvílíkt ok annat gott, er
hann gerÖi, fékk bann þá blíðu
vorrar frú, sem vel má segjast at
hou tæki haau sér í faðm, I.,
22,g ; nú skal Thomas erkibyskup
iTDia f)vi síðr út af Franz, at fyrir
bvert bréf, er Heinreki' konungr
sendir, skal Taxa virÖing bans, I.,
442,21.
Fyrir-bjóða, v. a., to forbid^ I.,
204,24,216,3,452,5,506,15.
Fyrir-boSa, v.a.^ toforebode^l., 12, -^^.
Fyrir-biiinn, ad.^ prepared^ made
ready, I., 432, 21-
Fyrir-búnaðr, /«., preparation^ I.,
'482,8.
Fyrir -burðr, ;;?., portent, omen, II.,
'24,26.
Fyrir-dæma, i\a., to condemn, I.,
328, 1; II., 269, 29.
Fyrir-farandi, ad., p>receding , past,
^T., 410, 20.
Fyrir-farastj v. med., to perish, I.,
364, 1,.
Fyrir-gera, v. a., to forfeit, L, 186, g,
■428,11/
Fvrir-beit, n., promise, I., 54, ^.^,
'162,11,318,2; IL, 230,9.
Fyrii'-koma, v.a,, to undo, to destroy,
to bring down, I., 204, 9, 208, 23,
498, 31.
Fyrir-kveða,r.a., to prevent: biyggja
sii litla fyrirkveðr með öllu at
ríða ler.gra, I., 32, 15 ; 'pass, to
forbid : riki konungsins, borgir
ok bæir, skulu fyrirkveOast bonum
til alh*ar vfirreiðar. L. 506
5 12-
Fyrir-láta, v.a., to leave, to desert, to
forsake : munkrinn andvarpar þá
Fyrir-lata — cont.
sárliga ok biðr meÖ tárum, at
hann fyrirláti hann eigi, II., 68, ^;
þeir sjá konunginn svá reiðan, sem
búinn til áhlaupa, enn erkibyskup
af öllum fyrirlátinn. L, 188, 20;
héðan er svá skrifat, at á sama
laugardegi íirrast hann ok fyrir-
lata margir þeir, er með honuni
þangat riÖu, I., 200, ig ; mun þat
rétt fyrir Guði, at Thomas erki-
byskup af sviptist sinni sæmd ok
valdi fyrir vilja Heinreks konungs,
þar sem hann befir eigi at eins
fyrirlátið fóstrland ok frelsi, heldr
ok þolat báska lífs, I., 308,03. —
2. to give up, to renounce : þótt
þú fjTÍrlétir alt þitt riki, kván-
fang ok fé . . . fengir þú varla
Guði ömbunat sitt lán, I., 364, iq.
3. to forfeit, to lose : er þá sýnt,
at ek mun falla í konungs reiði,
ok reiknast með þeim, er í sömu
tíð fyrirláta bæÖi Ijós ok líf, L,
198, g. — 4. to forgive, to con-
done : Yeiti Guð þeim líkn, er svá
gerði, ok gjarna fyrirlátum vér,
I., 404,3; sj-nir baun konungrinn
sína mýkt, at eigi ofsækir bann
frammliðinn, heldr gjarna fyrir-
lætr sálunni þat, er hann misgerði,
11., 12, 1,.
Y jYÍV'\átmng,f., forgiveness, pardo7if
*I., 174,15.
FjTÍr-leggja, v.a., to fordo, to bring
down, enn síÖan konungiinn æðist
viö þetta orð, með svá forligri
bræði, sem alt bans vald væri
fyrirlagt, I., 154,5. — Med. fyrir-
leggjast, to lie down from fatigue,
to give up : heldr bann ekki til
GLOSSARY.
367
Fyrír-leggi a — cont.
dvala, ok hefir sik þegar framm a
veginn, ok eigi laiigt, aðr haun
fyrirlegst með öllu, því at vegrinn
var svá meinligr, sem fyrr sagði,
I.,248,2.
Fyrir-lita, v.a., to despise, II., 4, ^.
Fyrir-litinn, ad., held in contempt,
despised, \., 328, 23»
Fyrir-litning, /., contempt, I.,
406,20.
Fyrir-meun, m. plur., foremen, bi-
shops, II., 269,26-
Fjrir-mæla, v.a., to curse, L, 276, iq,
Fyrir-nemast, v. med., to neglect, to
omit, to forbear, I., 418, 90'
Fyrir-sjó,y'., providence, IL, 68, 22-
Fyrir-smá, vm., to disdain, to despise,
to throw contempt on,to disregard:
einn hofgarS fann ek þann fyrir
litlu, er gull fvrir-smár, ok skipar
þó malum harðla vel, L, 116, 15;
nú með þvíat þú viU þær siðvenj-
ur fyrirsmá verðr þú Ijóss mein-
særismaðr, L, 218, ^7; nú með því
atjiann fyrirmáÖi bæÖi yöra til-
lögu, ok allra annarra, stendr yðr
þat á eingan veg at styðja hann,
I.,442,9.
Fyrir-ætlaðr, ad., predestined, I.,
28,13; n., 184,3.
Fyrir-ætlan (-ar), /., purpose, L,
70,12, 516,8-
Fyrn (-ar), f, long lapse of time,
age, IL, 200, 15.
Fyrnd (-ar), f., long duration, con-
tinuance : er vel kuiinigt, at S(51ar-
hitinn muterar malminn, svo at
blý snýst í silfr, ef fyrndin verðr
svo mikil stöðunnar, sem iiáítúran
Fyrud — coat.
beiðist, IL, 222, i^-. — 2. lapse
of right to property: enn þar
als staÖar, sem meiri fyrnd er á
fallÍD, leiÖir hami til ellri mauna
vætti eðr letr skilrík, ok tekr sva
undir kirkjuna, L, 118,29-
Fyrndi', ad., grown old, fallen into
decay : þat er háttr góðs liöfð-
ingja, at reisa kirkjur ok fyrndar
endrbæta, I., 362, 9. — 2. lapsed
{of proprietary right), I., 122, 2^.
Fyrr, comp. adv., before, erst, al-
ready, above : hann byrjar nú
þann liátt, heimkominn á föður-
garÖ, sem þeim er venjuligt, er
fyrir litlu hafa í skóla verit, þat
er at studera sina bok ok staðfesta
þat upp Í sjálfs sins minni, sem
fyrr heyrði hann af meistara
munui, L, 28, 24; hann flýði fyrr
af konungs garði, fyrir þá eina
sök, at eigi sæi hann lýti leik-
valdsins mot kirkjunni, I., 36,22 ;
sem fyrr var sagt, I., 64, 2 ; fyrr
Í páfatali er Alexander tertius
var nefndr, ferr þat meÖ, at hann
átti ávint í sinnm valdsdögum,
I., 90, 14; héÖan rennr sú grein,
sem fyrr var getit ok skrifat, I.,
92,
2-Í'
2. in combination with
enn = Lat. priusquam, or ever;
ok fyrr enn þeir kvomu framm,
I., 90, 12 ; passim.
Yyn'i, adv., before, abo2W : lágu þá
höfðingjalausir þrír byskupsstólar
ok tólf klaustr, til vitnis um þat,
sem tjáðist fyrri, I., 6, 25. — 2.
formerly, erst, once upon a time :
hann (Paulus) var fyrri mot-
stöÖumaör GuÖs kristni, I., 80,27.
368
GLOSSARY.
Fjrri — cont.
— 3. JÍ7'st {of two events succeed-
ing each other) : nú sem mjök
líðr aftansöng bræðra, er jafnau
syng;ja fvrri, I., 536, ^.
Fyrri, comp. ad., the first of two :
hann hefir ok þjónustu í stað erki-
bj^skups, Í fyrra fótaþvætti, I.,
100,3.
Fjrr-lita, v.a., to despise, 11., 286, 37.
Fyr-smá, v.a,, I., 420, 14, seeiyvivsmL
F}Tstr, superl. ad., first, I., 18,3,
26,5, "^^^s^ 90,20; sem fyrst, as
soon as may he, ivifhoitt delay,
I., 120, 17 ; Í fyrstu, at first, I.,
120,22; affyrsta, /)öwi the first,
I., 266,28.
Fysa (t), V.71., to long, to desire,
to yearn : því fær liann meÖ sinni
frammleypi þat, er hann fysir,
I., 276, Q ; því at herra páfinu er
friðgjarn, ok fysti injök, at únáðir
ok deilur mætti lægjast, I., 412, jg ;
sá fundr er svá laginn, at erki-
byskup fysir eftir at leita, ef hann
kynni fó . . . þann kærleik af
koinmorinum, sem forðum varraill-
um þeira, I., 472, ^ ; þeir fýsast
þaun frið, er syndugir eignast, I,,
480,24; efter svo dýrliga vitran
vakDar hún, ok fýser þrátt at
vitja þeirar kirkju, II., 166,19. —
v.a., to nrge, to persiiade : enn
J)ótt mín imigauga til Guðs em-
bættis sé mér harÖla óttanlig,
þorÖi ek eigi þvi heldr at gefa
erkistólinn í vald Heinreks kon-
ungs, þótt ek væri þess fýstr af
bræÖrum mímim, I., 306, 20«
Fýsiligr, ad., desirable, I., 556,8-
Fyst, II., 96, 13, see fyrstr.
Fýst (-ar, -ir), lust, desire, I., 20, 14,
234,17.
Fæð (-ar),y., 1. paucity, smallness
of number, privacy : því kjós,
hvart þat gerist í fæð eðr fjölda,
I., 522, 26' — 2. rare communi-
cation, estrangement : því at svá
kann verða, eftir fæð ok fjar-
YÍst, at siðan verðr heitari ástúÖ
manna í milium, I., 324, 19 ; brugÖ-
it er ok þeiri skipan sem Lofuis
kouuugr hat'ði haldit um hríö, at
íinna erkibyskupinn, ok þar er
auÖfundit, at fæð er inngeingiu
með honum, I., 436, 1.
Fæða (-u),f,food, I., 316,5,12.
Fæða (-dd), v.a,, to feed : hann
hafÖi alia götu sælliga fæðzt meö
væuum kosti, I., 316,8. — 2. to
nourish, to maintain : þat hugar
harðindi hefir hann fætt meÖ
löngum úvana, I., 280, 13. — 3. to
bring forth, to give birth to : nu
líðr svá tíð Maildar, at hon tekr
sott, at fæða sinn biirð, I., 14, 7.
Fæddr, ad., born, I., 20, ig.
Fæðing (-ar, dat. siiig. feðÍDgiuni),
f, birth, the act of bringing
forth, I., 14, 8-
Fæðsla (-U, -ur), /.', feed, feeding,
I., 108,18.
Færa (ð), v.a., to let fare, to move,
to bring : ek ska) í stað fara ok
'sýna yðr þat, er mín unnasta
færði mér í nótt, I., 24, g ; þær
bækr er framast fylgja Heinreki
gamla, setja þat í fyrstii, eftir
andlát erkibyskups, at ránfengi
þat er honumfluttist af Kantuaria,
léti hann flest aftr færa, II., 8,34.
— 2. Fig. to bring to notice:
GLOSSARY.
369
Færa — cont.
virðist eigi nauðsynligt, at setja
sem með nýrri letrgerð þat, er
áðr var fært ok fagrliga samit,
L, 2, lo; similarly at færa í frá-
sögn, to bring into a tale^ to
record, I., 186,13; to bring to
bear, Thomas erkibyskup sér,
liversu mikit raegn konungrinn
færir í at brjdta login, I., 162, ^3;
færa samt, to add uj), I.,
190, 21- — Med., færasi, in the
phrase : f. undan, to back out of,
to beg to be excused, I., 216, g? cfi';
218,19.
Færi, n., occasion, opportunity, I.,
122, 1 ; IL, 46, ^.
Færr, ad., well enough to be up and
about, hale, capable, I., 202,9«
Fæzla(.u),/.,/ööí/,IL, 281,4.
Föður-dráp, n., parricide, II., 40,i5.
Föður-garÖr, m., paternal home, I.,
28,21-
Föður-hús, n., father'' s house, pa-
ternal home, I., 18, 29.
Föður-lauss, ad., fatherless, I.,
490, 12.
Föður-leifS, f, patrimony , inheri-
tance, I., 48, 16.
Föðurliga, adv., fatherly, L, 334, 29.
Föðurligr (foðorligi^ II., 266,39),
ad., fatherly, I., 108, 19, 130,12«
FögnuÖr (gen. fagnaðar, ^j/. fagn-
aðir), ni., good ivelcome, cheer,
entertainment, joy, rejoicing, I.,
30,12.
Fölna (að) , v.n., to groic pale, to
fade: þar er fölnar fegrð heil-
agrar kristni, I., 322, 25 ; ok þó at
dreyrinn (Irægi burtaf höfutsárinu
uiu alia iiottina, föliiaði eigi þvi
Fölua — cont,
lieldr SÚ bin skæra andlitsins
fegrð, I., 554,12.
¥'ó\n?Li\, f.,fadÍ7ig, dwindling away:
fölnan fellr í frændsemi þeira
feSga, the love between father and
son begins to fade away, II.,
172,21.
Fölski (a, ar), m., properly the white
ashes left by combustion on char-
coal gleeds ; dust, II., 200, 15.
For (farar, ííiviv),f, journey, voyage,
byr hann sik til þeirar farar
með allri stormennsku, I., 122, 20-
— Fig. way : líkaför fengu marg-
ir, at Í þeira föruneyti höfðu
fremstir verit, II., 40, 9.
Föru-nautr, m., fellow traveller,
comjjanion, I., 104, n.
Föru-neyti, n., attendance, escort :
byr hann sik til þeirar farar meÖ
allri stormennsku, bæði at rikdom
ok vegligu föru-neyti, I., 122, 22-
— 2. fellowship , companionship :
tekr hann ser til hlifóar várs
Drottins líkam, ok lætr upp undir
kápuna, styrkist hann þegar í
huginum af svá blezuðu föru-
neyti, I., 208, n; hann sendir
meistara Herbert, ok enn annan
sinn klerk, vitran mann, at slast
Í föruneyti meÖ sendi-boÖum
konungsins, I., 264, 12 ; var einn
maðr, Symon at nafni, enskr at
kyni, hann elskar sælan Thómam
ok býör sik í bans föruncyti
framm til Englands, I., 474, jg.
A A
870
GLOSSARY.
G.
Gabb (-s), «., mockery : þeir lífa þá
til bans me(5 gra glcnsi e(5r gabbi
nokkuru, I., 22, ^g ; scoffing,
reproaches : hann setr Thomasi
erkibyskupi gildan umlestr meS
graleitu gabbi, I., 434, g.
Gabba (aÖ), v.o!., to mocli, to revile :
Her fyrir er Thomas gabbaí5r og
hleginn, II., 285,20-
Gagn-færr, ad., penetrating: fljot-
virk ok lifandi er sjá rödd ok
gagnfærri hverju sver^i, cfr, viva
cnim vox ejus et efficax, et pene-
trahilior omni gladio ancipiti,
n.,26,6.
Gagna (að), v. a., to be of use to, to
be profitable to, to suit : ráÖ-
leggja ... at hann næri sína
náttúru meÖ þeiri fæðu, er hans
liíi gagnar,!., 316, 13. — 2. to avail,
to save : því at manns fullting mátti
honum eigi gagna, I., 34, q.
Gagn-sta^ligr, ad., adverse, contra-
rious : er eigi undarligt, at mer
gang! margt gagnstaÖligt, I.,
306, 17 ; — contrary to, opposed
to, inconsisteiit with : því meir
varu fylgjandi lutir likamligri
natturv gagnstaÖligir, II., 287, 30«
Gálgi (-a, -ar), m., gallows, I.,
556,16; n., 110,11.
Gait, see gjalda.
Gamall (gömul, gamalt), ad,, old,
aged, ancient, I., 26,24, ^^^^
passim, — 2. 0/" such and such
an age: sonr hennar var miss-
eris gamall, half a year old,
IL, 162,4.
Gaman (-s), n., game, jollity, merri-
ment, I., 22, 19 ; IT., 285, 11.
Ganga (geing (geng), gekk-geingjum
(gengjum), geingi (gengi), gein-
ginn (genginu) ; imperat. gakk, I.,
362,23; II., '234, 1), V.W., to go,
generally. 1. to walk, to be en-
dowed ivith the power of walk-
ing; blinder sjá, en halter ganga,
II., 226, 14. — 2, to go, to pro-
ceed on foot ; hon hug'ðist koma
til Kristskirkju þar í Lundunum
ok vildi inn ganga, I., 12, 24. —
3. to move : var straumrinn því
sterkari, sem hjolinu gekk nærri,
I., 32, 10.
Prepositional constructions : g.
a, to invade: reisir hann sik
örÖigan meö rettlæti laganna
móti svá bölvo^um hernaði, sem
nú geingr á kristni GuÖs í Eng-
landi, I., 182,14,- þessarra þriggja
gjafa, dýröar, vizku, styrktar,
mistu þeir konungar, er for(5um
geingu á Gu^s rétt, I., 344, 1. —
g. af : to proceed, to spring
from : væri þessi hans gerð loflig,
ef hún gengi af hjarta meÖ sönnu
hjarta ok góðvilja, I., 464, n. —
g. at — a. to go towards, to ap-
proach: þar af sýnist honum,
eina ndtt, sem ma^r gengi at
sænginni, II., 50, g ; — b, to set
upon, to attack : herklæöast þeir
sem Í sterkasta stríÖ, birtandi
fyrir öllum sambandsmönnum, at
þeir skulu ganga at erkibyskup-
inum, I., 532, 24. — c. to crowd
toivards (entreatingly) : ganga
lærí5ir menn at erkibyskupi, þar
sem hann sitr í sama staö, biðj-
GLOSSARY.
371
Ganga — cont.
andi, ... at hann forði sér, I.,
536, J. — g. fyrir : — with fyrir
governing clat., to go before,
to set an example : þar ineð
hiartanliga elskandi vara fru
sanctam Mariam moövr Cristz, er
fyrir gengr öllum þeim með ha-
leitu epterdömi, II., 2S^, 23« —
luith fyrir governing ace. — a. to
go to {passing by or round at the
same time): hann skal ganga klæð-
lauss fyrir |)á kirkju, sem þeir
nefna til, II., 36, 9. — b. to wait
upon, to pay one's respects to: þar
finna þeir Hlöðvi Frakka konung,
ganga fyrir hann ok kveSja sem
houum somdi, I., 261, ^g. — g. i,
— with Í gov, dat., ' versari : '
gengr hann í því embætti svá
lýstr ok lærðr af GuÖi, at framm-
burÖrinn var bæði mjúkr ok mikil-
virkr, I., 104, 3. — luith í gov.
acc, to join: byskuparnhv sjálfir
ganga i J)enna flokk, at standa i
áleitni ok umlestrum upp á skaÖa
síns andligs föSur, I.,l76, ^5; sem
ungi Thomas hefir . . . yfir farit
Jjann kennidóm, er hann má fá í
föðurhúsi, gengr hann i skóla til
hærra náms, I., 18,29. — g. inn,
to come on, to arrive: hvortveggi
forSaÖi'sór um stund fyrir ovina
valdi, þar til inn gekk fyrir ætluð
tíð af sjálfum GuSe, II., 4, 20«
— g. inn til valds, to accede to
power : eftir þessa liðna gongr iim
til valds herra Alexander páíi
þriði, I., 26, 9. — g. með — the prep,
governing dat., — a. to be ivith,
to aid, to help : ok svo geingr
Ganga~co?ii.
nú með honmn mildi Guðs, at öll-
um J)essum þiggr hann einhverj-
ar hjálpir, I., 350, q. — b. to con-
fess, to achncwlcdge : eun með
því gengr hann, at hann haf ði kært
fyrir vinum sinum, svo sem erki-
byskupiun væri einn af hans mein-
gerðarmönnum, II., 36, 5 ; gekk
með, at ofgert var, II., 20, go- — the
prep, used elliptic ally — to be
pregnant: var þetta svá þýtt af
vitrum mönnum, ... at meiri
mundi verÖa dýrð ok virðing þess
burðar, er hún gekk með, enn jarð-
lig kristni mætti með taka, I., 14, 5.
— g. meðal, to mediate, to go
between: ok svo er nú geit um
aUa hluti, sem þeim sýndist örugt
í falslausan frið, er á meÖal gengu,
I., 462, j. — g. milium, to go be-
tween, to mediate: segja þá lik-
ast, at alhr tregar myndi úr leggj-
ast malum byskups, ef þvílíkir
geingi milium fyrir vald ok góð-
o*
til,
in va-
vilja, I., 326,9.
rious phrases : g. t. vegar, to be
transacted, to be brought to settle-
ment: svá mikit efni gengr eigi
til vegar fyrr enn Tomas erki-
byskup er nær, I., 280, 25 ; —
g. t. festu, to enter a bail, to give
security : munum ver á hætta, at
leysa byskupana, ef þeir ganga til
löghgrar festu fyrir oil sin afbrot,
at standa á kirkjunnar dome, I.,
498, 9 ; enn ef þeir vilja eigi til
festu ganga, fa þeir öngva lausn
af OSS, hverr sem þat ílytr, I.,
498, j2. — g- t. vaxtíir,ío advance,
to develop, to increase: ok litlu
A A 2
372
GLOSSARY.
Ganga — cont.
síðar geingr enn til vaxtar viiðing
Thome, I., 48, 5. — g. t. sýslu,
to perfœ'm a task : ma þat hug-
leiða hjartagóðr maör, hversu
klerkr sá mundi úglaÖr ganga til
þeirar grátligrar sýslu, at plága
ok pina nauðigr svá blezaða per-
sónu, I., 98,4,. — g- '^^ ^^ 9^
about, to come forward, to go
between, to take the lead : nýliga
hefir upp sprungit mikit missætti
milium kirkjunnar ok konungs í
Englandi, er auÖveldliga myndi
lægzt hafa, e£ góðvili ok vizka
hefði um geingit, cfr. si adhibita ei
** fuisset modcrata ciiratio^^ I.,
276, 2. — g. upp yfir, {^fig. from
storm-clouds rising^, to rise over-
whelmingly : þessi hræring ok
órói geingr eigi upp yfir almenn-
ing heilagrar kristni, lieldr í eins
manns ofsokn til fjár ok frelsis, I.,
196, 18« — g- út, — a. to come to
a close, to terminate : ok brátt í
veginum risa upp ymissar orðræður
með fylgdinni hversu þing þetta
hefir út geingit, I., 170, g. — b. to
turn out : enn hversu þetta gekk
út virðist vitrum mönnum æðra
flestum jarteignum, II., 90, 7. —
g. vit, to be in comparison to :
eru þessar ölmusugjörðir svá stór-
ar at eingi erkibyskup í Cancia
hafði geingit meirr enn til hálfs
vit Thömam, I., 100, ^q. — g. yfir,
to prevail : hverr megi vpp tina
eða i frasavgnn færa alia þaa illing
er yfvir gekk i þann tima, II.,
2/4, 27.
In other phrases : g. afskeiðis, to
Ganga — co7it.
go astray : enn er þessar skipanir
spyrjast í Franz, harma góðir
menn allir hversu Heinrekr kon-
ungr gengr afskeiðis, I., 332, 12«
— g. fremstr, to go foremost, i.e.,
to take a principal part in : sum-
ir rægja hann .... ma her til
nefna þrjá byskupa er fremstir
ganga, I., 176,23. — g. hátt. — a. to
act with a high hand : fyrir þat
annat, at konungs rikit gekk svo
hátt yfir England í þessa tið, I.,
62, ij. — b. to be of chief import :
enn a£ þeim. ix. (i.e., vönum) sem
hærra ganga, harmar sva herra
páfinn at hann ma eigi tárum
halda, I., 302, ^S' — ©• "^^^ ^^
xoeigh heavily on : enn flyttu ferÖ-
inne, því at sottin geingr mer
nær, II., 152, n- — saga geingr,
the story relates to, concerns : sva
skrifar Robert, at sá maðr væri
náfrændi hans, er sótti konungs
garð, á þessi tíð, sem sagan geiugr,
L, 50,21.
Med. gangast, to do, to ivork, to
come off, to succeed: hug^ist
hann at vinna í einum rykk bát5a
samt, herra páfann ok herra
Thomas erkibyskup enn
er þat gekkst eigi, synist honum
aftr venda, I., 410,26. — g. vit, to
obtain, to gain authority, to pre-
vail : fyrirbýðr hann ok sterkliga,
at þeir úvanar gangist vit, er nú
voru nyliga innleiddir af konungs-
mörinum, I., 174,27.
Recipr. gangast a, to attack mutu-
ally : nú er eigi undarligt, þótt
af þvilikura ófriðareldi angrist ok
GLOSSARY.
373
Ganga — cont,
sturlist Romania, síðan stóreílis-
menn gangast a, sem með sterkasta
stríði, I., 92,18. — 2. to dispute,
to ivrangle : svo gangast á kar-
dinales með greinum; þvíat vinir
Heinriks konungs biðja berliga
herra páfann, at hann viki eftir
konungsins vilja, I., 310,8.
Lnpers, 1. to do, to fare, synir
Drottinnhonum með tveim draum-
um náliga bæÖi þessa heims götur
ok annars lífs, hversu konungin-
um mundi ganga, I., 388, ;^8' — ^*
to go on, to proceed : ok eigi gengr
þat langt áðr konungr með vitru
sinni dæmir þenna Thómam meiri
sæmdar makligan, I., 46, 22« — 3. in
p)repositional constructions : — g.
til. — a, to come to pass : sem Tho-
mas er heimkominn,geingr svatil,
at Rikeus kemr til garðs, ok þiggr
veizlu eftir vana, I., 30, ^3, cfr.
192, ij. — b. to take proceedings
{in law cases) : at því réttara
megi hann öllum lutum skipa, sem
hann skilurfremr hversu tilgeingr,
ok efni vikr málunum, I., 88,9.
— c. to work, to operate : sem
byskupinnhefir prófatmálitprests-
ins, hversu Ijott er, gengr bæði
til með honum úþoran raóti kon-
unginum, ok úheil samvizka til
crkibyskups, I., 142,20« — d. to
bring about, to cause : skrifar
hann til herra páfans, greinandi í
fyrstu hversu þeir Heinrckr kon-
ungr fundust in Monte Martirum,
ok hvað þá gekk til, er þeir sæt-
tust eigi, I., 454,25. — e. g. t. efuis,
things take such and such a turn :
Ganga — cont.
núgeingrsvotilefnis,athúspreyjan
er með barne, II., 150, g. — g. um,
to adopt a course : eigi hæfir
vitru, at bera lengi rauða kiun
fyrir bráðan punkt, er fljott ma um
líða til meinleysis, ef hagligan veg
er um geingit, I., 194, 25. — g. upp
Í hávaða, to take the turn of a loud
brawl: því at eigi seinna enn sið-
venjur koma til greina, geingr upp
Í hávaða fyrir konunginum, I.,
Ö0O, 22*
Ganga (göngu, göngur), /. — 1.
walk, faculty of walking : héðan
ríss him upp með réttum fótum
ok sterkri göngu lofandi Guð, II.,
84, g. — 2. pi. göngur = ivays :
enn hverja þjálma nær eðr firr
Heinrekr konungr egnir fyrir fætr
Thómasi erkisbyskupi, ferr hann
frjáls ok liöugr, því at Guðgreiðir
bans göngur, I., 254, jg. — 3.
procession : riss hann upp um
síðir ok biðr bera krossinn fyrir
ser. Var nú skipan á göngunni
mot vana, því at svá sem erki-
byskupinn liafði jafnan fyrstr farit,
svá ferr hann nú síðastr, I.,
536, 10.
Gangandi-fé, n., live-stock : karl var
eigi rikari at ganganda fé enn
hann átti kú eina svartflekkótta
ok kuýflótta, II., 118, ^5.
Garðr (-ðs, -ar), m., a ' garth^
court, homestead, home, I., 16, 4,
30, 14 ; royal rcsidejtce, I., 48, .^;
pnpal court, I., 94, j ; archiepi-
scopal jmlace, 1., 106, 20? 23*
Gata (götii, götur), /;, prop, rood,
Jig. path : gefi þat Guö Drottinn,
874
GLOSSARY.
Gata — cont.
at þú líkist honum a gota lifs ok
réttlætis, I., 82, 4 ; sá er haltr, er
vel veit, hvat liann skal gera ok ætti,
enn drepr fæti svá hart í sinni
vLvenju, at hann lialtrar brott af
Guðs götu, I., 234, 13 ; sýnir
Drottinn honum meStveim clraum-
um náliga bæði þessa heims götur
ok annars lifs, I., 388, 17 ; alia
götu, all through, from beginning
to end, II., 286, 20-
Gaum-gefð, f., heed, attention, I.,
46,21.
Gaumr (-s), on., heed, I., 54, 5 ;
522, 21»
Gefa (gef, gefr ek, I., 198, g, gaf, 2
pers. gaft, I., 310, 17 ; gáfum, gæfi,
gefinn), v.a., to give : honum
gafst ekki borinn erfingi, at sitja
mætti yfir hans hásæti, I., 26, 17 ;
er SÚ misgrein þessarrar innleiðslu
tvennrar, at í síðari gefast eigi
penningar, I., 100, 5. — 2. to give
into one's charge, to commit to one's
care: gefr konungrinn kjötligan son
sinn, er heitir Heinrekr ungi, at
hann skal sitja undir tygt ok
meistaradom cancelers, I., 48, jg.
— Med. gefast, to come to pass :
herra Thomas hyh' harm sinn 1
siitfullu hjarta, því at hann grun-
ar, sem gafst, at{)essir menn leggj-
ast of mjök i liftjdn, I., 168, 5.
— g. Í vald, to give one^s case into
the hands of the adversary : erki-
byskup kærði bæði á konung ok
byskupa, um aflagliga vígslugerð
við Heínrek ung-a, enn konuno-r
gafst Í vald um þat alt bæði fyrir
sina hönd ok byskupanna, II.,
Gefa — cont.
20,18« — Impers,, it is given, it
folloivs : af þeim Guðs gjöfum
sem nú voru greindar, gaf fmt
vitrum mönnum vel skilja, at hann
var fyrirætlaðr mikilli stett í
kristni Gu(5s, I., 28, 17.
Prepositional constructions :
g. til, to offer as a bargain : þvi
at þeim harðj'ðgismanni, er standa
átti undir hans álögum var mikit
gef an da til, at hann hefði foröazt
hvárttveggja, I., 110, 3. — g. upp,
to give up, to give liberty to :
hann gaf upp sagSan Kadonensem
ábóta, at hann yrði Kantuariensis
erkibyskup, I., 10, iq. — 2. to give
tip, to deliver, " prodere : " þetta
votta þeir svá rétta glosu til
ganga, at glæpamenn, þótt vígðir
sé, gefist upp réttri hirting undir
konungs vald, I., 148, 17. — 3. to
give tip, to surrender: eru fier
skyldugir, eigi at eins erkiby-
skupsddm fyrir honum upp at gefa,
heldr annat tiu lutum meira, I.,
192,22- — g' út, to expend: enn
mestan hluta þess fjár vil ek lit
gefa, til þess, at minkist þverúÖ
ok þrjózka Thomas erkibyskups,
I., 498,28.
In various phrases : g. efni : to
supply material, to give occasion:
nil þótt þér hefðit gefit oss efni, at
tala nokkut stríðara til yðar, f)á
víkjum vér heldr a^ra leið, I.,
334,27. — g. efni til, to give rise
to, to occasion : páfinn hafÖi löngu
girnzt at sjá ok heyra Thomam
fyrir svá góða frægö sem hann gaf
efni til, I., 128,27- — 8- íorsjó, to
GLOSSARY.
375
Gefa — cont.
take 'precautions : setið lækning
liðnum hlutum ok gefit forsjo u-
komnum, II., 18, 22- — g- gaum, to
give heed : J)vi at bans ákef ð gefr
eingu gaum, I., 276, g. — g. í sök,
to account as a guilt: lýsist heðan
því framar, hversu afskapligt er,
ef hirting byskupanna rneð y Övarri
skipan eftir lögnuum skjlcli gefast
Í sök ok sættaiTof erkibyskupin-
um, II., 22, 2- — fg. sik í dauða, to
deliver one^s self up to death :
fremit hegning guðligra laga eftir
þann er löguuum fylgdi, ok fyrir
þeira soma er gaf sik í dauÖa,
II., 18,21. — E' si^ liðugan, to give
one^s self more time, to apply
one's self more to, ^' vacare :" eun
{)6tt erkibyskup siti með öllii
kauplaust yfir áskilnaðargrein
sinna undirmanna, gefr hann sik
betr liðugaa at skoiSa vöxt ok efni
málanna, I., 112,26-
Gegn,adv., against : í gegn, again,
back : ok því skrifar liann aftr í
gegn til serbverra bluta svarandi,
I., 398, 6 ; in return : Tbomas
gefr bonum aftr í gegn at kon-
uDgrinn er með öUu gleymandi þá
dygðar þjónustu, er bann segist
bonum veitt bafa, I., 470, g.
Gegna (d), v.a., prop, to ansiccr, to
heed', impers. to concern^ to relate
to : litim á þessu næst, bvat framm
• ferr romverskum byskupum frá
því sem söguna byrjaöi, at þat
mál loiðist framm með skynsemd,
þar til er sá nefnist, er siigunni
gegnir framast, I., 24, ge-
Gegnt, prep. with dat., against :
Tbómas erkibyskup sezt niör með
sínum klerkum í þat berbergi sem
konungrinn bafði áðr í setið ok
rýmt, ok byskupar annan veg
gegnt bonum, L, 212, 12-
Gegn-um, cidc, through: því at á
dýraveiði varbann skotinn í gegn-
um, at úvilja sjálfs síns riddara,
!•> 6, 22 ; Jlg- ' oim því varar liinii
beilagi Tbomas, at biisbóníbnu
baldi þar trúnað yíir, at bans
vizka sér í gegnum, bvat á mundi
koma, L, 252, 7.
Geisa (t.), v.n., to rush on at a
reckless rate : þeir eru pinandi
með barðri striðu, ok þó eigi svá
framt, at þat gangi allt í banorðs-
sök erkibyskupsins, nema þeira
róg bafi geisat svá guðrækilega,
at berum orÖum bafi þeir provo-
cerat konunginn, I., 54, ^. — v.a.,
to cause to behave overbearingly :
ma af sliku marka, bversu batt
illmennit geisaði þvi er samkvæmt
sitr milli böfuðs ok berÖar, II., 8,16.
Geislaðr,jo.j9., bright, sliiniiighj con-
spicuous : þessi blessaðr maÖr
binn vngi Tbomass var þegar
gieddr ok geislaðr með agiötu
siðferði, II., 284, go-
Geisli (-a, -ar), m., a ray, beam, II.,
290, 1.
Gekk, see ganga.
Geld, see gjakla.
Gengi, gengu, gengum, see ganga.
Gera (0), v.a., to do : raærin gorir
sva, I., 16,5; eftir svá gert rííSr
bann lit af {)cima stai^, I., 84, jg.
— 2. to perform : berra páfinii
gi'unar . . . at l)yskuparuir muni
376
GLOSSARY.
Gera — cont.
dirfast eigi því síðr með eftirlæti
vit konunginn at gera vígslu þessa,
I., 4:52,2 1 gerÖist sú vígsla með
allri sæmd ok heiðr, I., 90, 4. —
3. to despatch, to send off: eru
bref ffer út af Eno-landi suÖr urn
sjo, I., 62, 5 ; hann gerði oft heim-
onliga menn sin a, at vitja sjúkra
manna herbergi, I., 108,20? ^^60
ölliim skunda gerir hann sina
sendiboða meÖ bréfum til páfa-
gar^s, L, 174, g; lætr hann líða
nokkura daga, áÖr hann gerir
klerka sina með brefum til Eng-
lands, II., 10,2. — Med. gerast.
1. to become : þróaðist hon svá
i göðii liíi, at i fulltiða aldri
gerðist hon abbadis yfir þeim
lifuaði, I., 252, 28« — 2. to come
about, to come to pass, to take
place : ok af þeiri gistingu ger-
ast þau ráð, I., 30, 15 ; enn nú
þessu næst skal aftr vikja til
Heinreks koniings ok sjá, hver
tiðindi gerast á hans dögum, L,
12,5; skjórnaði hann Cantuariam,
þar til saga greinir . . . hver
skipan gerðist eftir hann frá-
fallinn, I., 12,3.
Ill various phrases : g. dvöl,
moram facere : signaðr Thomas
gerir eingva dvöl á at íinna
konunginn sem fyrst, I., 120,17.
— g. kunnigt, to make known :
þvi hæfir oss eftir voru viti, at
gera ySr kunnigt, til hvers ver
erum sendir a yðvarn fund, I.,
282, 12 ; cfr. 282, 22, IL, 255 2- —
g. at orðum, to remark : ok var
at orÖura gert, at eingi höfÖingi
Gera — cont.
i öUu Englandi heldi svá listuliga
sina fylgd, I., 48,33. — g. ra^S
fyrir, to take care of: vér biðjum
Guð, at hans mildi geri ráð fyrir
oss, I., 210,28- — g. rett af, to do
justice by : J)vi at valdsma^r af
konungs hálfu yfir þeim stað, er
stefndr sitr i, skal gera rett af
honum, L, 298, 5. — g. ser skrök-
semd, to feign, " simulare ; " þótt
Heinrekr konungr gerÖi sér þvi-
lika skröksemd linaÖist eigi
harmr þeira viÖ slikt, II., 12, jg.
— g. til, to do by, to behave
towards : segir hann alt af bern-
sku verit hafa digran ok dramb-
visan,
ok
als þess
góðs, er honum var vel til gert,
I., 428, 4. — g. sinn veg — a. to
proceed on one^s way, " acce-
lerare" : ok f)\á taka þeir fljött
orlof ok gera sinn veg framm til
Sennonis borgar, I., 266, ^g. —
b. to walk along, " ambulare " ;
enn þar bar svá til, sem ek gerði
minn veg frá borg Cattania, at
ek ætlaði framm til Siracusam,
I., 94, 20« — g' út? ^^ despatch an
envoy or a legate, I., 414,8.
Gerð (-ar, -ir), f., doing, action,
act, I., 178,1, 234,2, 300,7,
404, 23 ; measures, proceedings,
I., 284,24.
Gerr, {dat. plur. gervum, I., 132,
12), ad., done, I., 182, jg-
Ger-samliga, adv., thoroughly, per-
emptorily, I., 152, 7.
Gestr (-S, -ir), m., a guest, visitor,
L, 250, 2-
GLOSSARY.
377
Gest-risinn, ad,^ hospitable, II.,
148,16.
Geta (get, gat-gatum, gaBti,
getit), v.a.'i to mention, I., 92, 24, ;
178,23-
Geta (-U, -ur), /., guess, surmise,
conjecture, I., 438, 14, 512, 24,'
GetnaÖar-limir, m.,'pl.,manly parts,
II., 106,6,284,3.
Geyja, v.n., to bark, I., 234, ^o*
Geyma (d.), v.a., loith ace. and
gen. — 1. with aec. — a. to
hold, to compass, to enclose :
hann var svo grannligs vaxtar,
at hann matti fyrir manns
augum Í litlum sta^ geymast, I.,
24, 22« — t>. to keep, to take care
of: sá heiter eiginliga canceler,
er geymir konuugs innsigli, I.,
48, 2 ; sá bróðir geymir at nokk-
iirum lut fátækra manna £é, I.,
100.1. — ^* ^^ watch, to guard:
þar fyrir talar hun til þernu
sinnar, er geymdi vögguna, I.,
14,26' — ^' ^^ ^^^^ ^^''^ ^/j ^^
husband : at þeir álíti með vand-
virkt, liversu sú renta ok vitværi
aktast inn ok geymist at þagat
liggr, I., 108,22- — ^- ^^ heed, to
see to : enn þat geymir vakrliga
Lofuis konungr, at á hverri stefnu,
er hann heldr viÖ Heinrek
konung, lætr hann jafnframm
vera Thomam, I., 426, 4. — f. to
keep, to observe : gerir hann sér
})á liking, sem hann vili login
gjarna geyma, I., 262, 5 ; cfr. II.,
246.2. — g. in the phrase, g. sik,
to control one's self: aumr var
ek minnar dirfðar, at ek dramb-
Geyma — eont.
samligr ok hegomligr skyldi þora,
at skipast geymsluraaðr yfir vin-
garði Guðs, þar sem ek nam aldri
at geyma sjálfan mik, I., 172, jg*
— 3. absoL to guard against :
lata þeir alia þá menn eiða vinna,
er Í samvitand eru þessara úráða,
at hvárki nær né firr skulu þeir
þeira trúnað opinbera, ok eink-
anliga geyma, at erkibyskiipinn
megi eigi víss verða, I., 0I6, n.
— 2. loith gen., to guard :
þar dvelst sæll Thomas vel þrjá
daga, ok lætr vötnin geyma sin,
I., 242,14; kalla fjölskyldur at
móíurinne, svo at him geymir
eigi ráðsins, that she forgets
what she is about, II., 162,9;
mun Drottinn svá geyma bans, at
freistni vondra manna firri eigi
Thomam þeirri hjálp ok friði,
sem hann haféi þegit í Frakk-
landi, I., 432, 13.
Geymari (-a), 7)i., keeper, steioard,
watchman, I., 544, iq ; II., 138, 26 ;
guardian {saint), II., 284,27»
Geymslu-lauss, ad., heedless, II.,
208,8.
Geymslu-maðr, m., keeper, steioard,
watchman, I., 172, 15.
Geystr, ad., violent, II., 98,2«
Giftast, V. med., to marry: lion
giftist suðr um sjo, I., 26, 19.
Gildr, ad., prop, big; metaph.
strong, mighty : g. umlestr, good
scolding, I., 434, 5 ; masterful,
powerful, II., 114, 25 Í g. þjófi', «
big thief, II., 140,3.
Girnast, v. med., to yearn for., to
desire, I-, 14, 24» 128, 25 ; g- li
378
GLOSSARY.
Girnast — cont,
and g. framm a, id.^ I., 64, ^7,
168,7.
Girnd (-ar, -ir), jf., desire^ wish:
yfir þenna skilning hvarntveggja,
samkall lærÖra manna ok konungs-
ins girnd yfir kosniuginum, eru
bref gjör, I., QQ^ ^g. — 2. lust,
fleshly desires : í þeim aldri sem
næstum er girndiu með holdligri
fýst ok holdligri blíðu, I., 20, ^^ ;
þá er hann deyddi sinn likam ok
sitt hörund meÖ hárklæði ok húð-
strokum, ok þjáÖi frá röngum
girndum, I., 104, 29 ; eingi beiÖni
úleiférar girndar sigraði hann,
L, 108,3.
Gista (t), v.a., to be the guest of, to
stay as a guest ivith : þessa
Súuamitem gister Heliseus oftliga,
11,230,1.
Gisting (-ar), /'., the staying as a
guest : ok af þeiri gisting gerast
þau ráð, I., 30, 15 ; a night's quar-
ters 'i I., 434, 3 ; Jig. visit, II.,
230,11.
Gjald (-S, gjöld), n., tax, impost :
hann setr úþoUigt gjald á klaustr
ok kirkjur í Englandi, I., 6, 7 ;
enn sakir þess at konungsgarðr
hefir haldsaman muun stendr
þetta gjald ar frá ári, I., 138,9.
— P I., punishment : biðrhann þar
til virða sína þjonustu ok þeira
vináttu, at úvinir Thome erki-
byskups taki sín gjöld sem login
dikta, I., 456, 13.
Gjalda (geld, galt-guldnra, gyldi,
goldinn), v.a., with acc, and gcn.
— 1. with acc. — a. to yield, to
render^ to pay, to offer : þysja
Gjalda — cont,
inn konungs menn með þeim
boðskap uppáThómam erkibyskup
at hann gjaldi skyn ok góða grein
herra konunginum fyrir allan
þann fjárhlut, er hann haföi und-
ir sinni forsjó, I., 212, i^; máttu
þá sjá ok skilja minn kærasti
bróðir, hver lo£ ok þakklæti þeir
mundu gjalda GuSi, I., 100, 15.
— b. to return, to pay in return
for : mi ma auðsýat vera, hversu
heilögum Thómasi mundi þat afla
til verðleiks, at þola jafnan mein-
gerðir, enn gjalda öngvar í móti,
I., 508,10. — c. to restore, to
deliver, to give up to : ok gjalda
honum ok hans mönnum kirkj-
ur sinar meS eignum ok öUum
hlutura, er þeir létu an lögum, I.,
422, 23 ; ef hennar biikr er þaðan
Í hurt, megum vit stöðugt halda,
at kýrin er þér aftr goldin, II.,
124, 21. — 2. with gen., to pay for,
to suffer for, to expiate for : allir-
frændr ok felagar Thome erki-
byskups skulu hans gjalda, I.,
348, 4 ; enn ei" þat eyÖist, hvers
skulum ver þá gjalda, er þér látit
OSS mæta einn öllum Jounga ? I.,
400, 14 ; nil skulu allir yÖar gjalda,
I., 502, 5 ; segja at hans háls ok
höfut mun um si'ðir gjalda sius
frammhleypis, I., 506, 24.
Gjarn, (gjörn, gjarnt), ad., willing,
ready ; occurs only in the neuter
gjarnt ; natural, congenial to:
konungrinn gerir með sinni lund,
sem honum var gjarnt, as ivas
his wont, I., 62, 22-
Gjarna, adv.. readily, ivillingly.
GLOSSARY.
879
Gjarna — conf.
gladly : hann skipaÖi gjarna aftr
eignina, I., 8,19; gjarna I^agu
þeir sæmdir ok sýslur af krún-
unni, I., 56, 20 5 ^^ nokknr kirkja
eðr kennimaðr fiust af honum
mishaldinn, leggr hann í dom sem
fyrr, ok vill gjarna bæta, I., 384, 5 ;
hefði hann þessum æðri fundit,
væri þeh' gjarna her komnir, sakir
ySvarrar tignar, I., 282, 2^- —
fain : gjarna vill hann því kaupa
nil, at hafa rettu færri, ok vera
eigirettkendrafhenni, I., 250, y^ ;
honum likar eigi lygðin enn vildi
þó gjarna levnast, I., 252,9. —
2. generally, usually, habitually :
er J)at ok alsiða miðil þess háttar
manna, at þann tíma sem þeir
búast í sitt fóstrland heim venda,
kaupa þeir gjarna skólabækr, I.,
. 28, 27 ; rcykelsi lagt á glóð leitar
í loftið gjarna, I., 104, 22 ; sam-
lagast f)essir heimskum mönniim,
er líf ok mannkosti dæma gjarna
eftir veraldligri ásjónu, I., 222, 15.
Gjöf (gjafar, gjafir),/., gift^endmc-
inent, I., 28, 17, 66, j? 88, 23 ; at
^öí, by gift, l.,Z22,\^,
Gjöra (ð), v.a., to do: þótti ok
fjrsta manni mikit áræði, at bvrja
þat, sem einginn haföi, áðr gjört,
II., 70, 14 ; g. sinn veg, see gera
(in vaiious phrases). — g. sér
um, to mahe of to take notice of :
Guðs maðr gjörir sér ekki meira
um, enn svarar : ógnarhót eru
slíkt, I., 520, 2- — Med. gjörast víss
lira, certiorem fieri : gjörast f^eir
vísir um at eigi mun hálsinn
borga, f)<5tt enn ræni þeir kirkj-
Gjöra — cont.
juna, I., 480, 07. — 2. as a verb
auxiliary, do : giorðir Guðs lavg
bioða, thoic didst pro?imince, II.,
290, 29 ; giordu gvmmar vida guðs
uin moti striða, people did in
many places strive against God's
friend, II., 291,3. {The form
gjöra occurs Jirst, I., 480, 27-)
Gjörla, adv., thoroughly, minutely,
carefully, I., 24, ^^. — clearly,
I., 34,3 ; II., 150, 13, 289,26-
Gjörr, ad. — I. done : ok svá gjörfii
biðr hann íara hvern undii* yðvarn
herradóm, er vill, this having
been done, these things having
been complied icith, I., 382, 19. —
2. made, i.e., icell made, handy,
deft, skilled: hon er væn ok
vitrmál ok leggr á alt gjörva hönd,
I-, 22, ,,.
GjöiT, compar. adv., superl. gjörst,
clearly, distinctly, I., 118,5,
160,23; 11,112,13.
GlaÖliga, adv., gladly, II., 104, 9.
Glaðligr, ad., full of rejoicing, II.,
904.
Glaðning (-ar), /., mirth, pleasure,
ajnusement, I., 22, 90, 30, 23.
Glaðr (glöð, glatt), ad., glad, gay,
merry, I., 20, ig, 438, 19 ; rejoicing,
I., 174, 20.
Glað-værr, ad., joyful, I., 224,9.
Glata (að), v.a., to lose, II., 150, jg.
Glatan (-ar),/., perdition, I., 70, j^.
Gleði,/.,>y, gladness, I., 4, 9 ; 82,5.
Gleðja (gleÖ, gladda-glöddum.gleddi,
gladdr), v.a., to gladden, I., 430,
12. — Med. to rejoicCy Í., 250, jg,
461,16.
380
GLOSSARY.
Glens, and glenns, II., 285, ^i, n.,
mockery, scurrilous conduct, I.,
09
Gleiinzligr, ad., scurrilous, II.,
285, 3().^
Gleyraa (-d), v. a., icith dat. and
ace, to forget : sá liefir flekkott
auga, er svá þykkist vitr, at þar
fjrir gleymir hanu sannri vitru,
I., 234, 4 ; liðu svo frarnm nokkur-
er dagar, at ungi mac5r gleymer
verkit an iðran ok yferbot, II.,
126,21.
Gleypa (t), v.a., to swallow, I.,
72, 13-
Glóð (-ar, -ir), /., ' gleeds,' burn-
ing embers, I., 50, g, 104,22«
Glosa (að), v. a., to gloss, to inter-
pret, I., 14,15.
Glosa (-u), /., gloss, commentary,
I., 3d, 20«
Gluggr (-S, -ar), m., a icindoic, I.,
244,1,.
Glys, n., (^ gloss'), glitter, showy
things, I., 24, ^.
Glæpa-maðr, m., trespasser, sinner :
enn þat er oss eigi Ijosara, livar
þér byskuparnir vilit svara þeim
letrum miðil landa, at ybr skal
mislika, þótt opinberr glæpamaðr,
sé píndr með stórmælum, I., 406,26.
— a criminal : þetta votta þeir
svá rétta glósu til ganga, at glæpa-
menn, þótt vígðir sé, gefist upp
réttri hirting iindii' konungs vald,
I., 148, 17. — a villain : svo ganga
þcssir glæpamenn út af mustar-
inu, at þeir hafa margar greinir
verri ok úmannligri enn þeir, er
krossfestu Jesum Kristum, I.,
548, 8.
Glæpiligr, ad., wicked, I., 514. 17.
Glæpr (-S, -ir), m. — \. folly : minn
glæprer svá mikill vorðinn í þeiri
herfiligri niÖran ok vanvirÖu, er ek
hefir gert kkkjunni ok klerkdóm-
inum, at berliga dæmir hann mik
úverðugau, at standa fyrir Guði
mínum í kennimanns þjónustu,
I., 170,28 ; vér allir vorum blektir
ok blindir . . . miskunna mér
kærasti faðir, ok leysit mik af
þeima glæp, I., 440, § ; enn síðan
vér foröuðumst hans umsátir,
snéri hann sínum glæp uppá herra
konunginn, at vanvirða svá alt
bans ráð ok ríki, I., 276,13; því
játta ek, at vesall glæpr færir þau
þyngsl at heilagri Guðs kristni
sem hún þolir í England!, I.,
306, 7 ; í sannleik eignast þat
efni tvenna undirstöðu, at firra
þá glæp, sem gera vildu, ok at
kynna kyrkjunnar sök, I., 400, g^.
— 2. ivicked folly, trespass,
wickedness, guilt : þeyt rödd þína
sem móthorn, segjandi fólkinu
glæpi sína, I., 424, 7 ; því at þeim
barðýðgisraanni, er standa átti
undir bans álögum var mikit gef-
anda til, at hann befði forðazt
hvarttveggja samt, þat er at skilja,
tjlverkan glæpanna, ok hirting
þvilika, I., 110,5; finnr bann
glæpinn, er hann i fell fyrer þessa
misþyrming siniiar móður, II.,
128, 20- — 3. crime : svá var kon-
ungrinn fjarii þeira fyrirætlan,
at þann tima, er glæprinn gerðist,
bugði hann þá vera á sínum garði,
II., 12. 2 ; bannsettr raeð öllu
fyrir svo báðuliga skemmd, at
GLOSSARY.
381
Glæpr — cont,
hann hafði lagzt með tveimr
sy strum, enn verndar síðan glæp-
inn með þrjózkii, II., 148, 23.
Glæpsamligr, ad., wiched, I., 546, ^g.
Glæpska (-u), f., folly, wickedness,
I., 454, 10, 546, 6-
Glæsiligr, ad., showy, grand, splen-
did, proud, brilliant, I., 44, 2,
278,2.
Glæstr, ad., glittering, showy, splen-
did, I., 416, 9.
Glöð, glöðum, see glaðr.
Glöddu, &c., see gleðja.
Glöggr, ad., clear, clear-headed,
sharp, keen : maðr svá fljóttækr
minnigr ok glöggr í allri greiii til
brjosts ok bækr, L,20, j ; Heinrekr
konungr var vitr maör ok gloggr í
allri grein, þegar á ungiim aldri,
I., 44, II. clear of percej^tion :
síðan lyftir hann upp auguniim
svá glöggr í sinne grein, at hann
kenner bæði föður ok móöur, II.,
160, iQ. — Neut. glöggt or glögt,
as an adv., clearly, distinctly:
nokkorir af hirðsveitinni ganga
framm, er glögt segjast vita hverir
konungligir vanar hafa verit i
Englandi, I., 166, 25 ; ser hann
glöggt báÖum augum hvar hann
la, II., 82, 19.
Gnesta (t), v.n., to clash, to crash : g.
Í eyrum, to tingle in the ears, II.,
18, 10-
Gnogliga, adv., sufficiently, I., 74,25.
(^nýj^ (gíiýj gnúði, &c.), v.n., to
tear {^against, as luind or ivater
rushing), in the phrase, hvat er
(sem) á gnýr, however it may
Gnýja — cont.
storm, come what may, I., 150, jg,
182, 11.
Gnæfa (ð), v.a., * imminere^ to
hang over, to he imminent :
skyra honum þar með, hvert áfelli
yíir gnæfir öllu hans ríki,I., 458, jg.
Gnægja (ð), v.a., to satisfy, II.,
254,13.
Góð-fúss, ad., kindly disposed, I.,
284, 2 ; jnous, devoted, I., 2, i2'
GóÖ-fýse, II., 12, 10? ^^<? góðfýsi.
Góð-fýsi, f., devotion, piety, I.,
102, 14.
G6ð-fýst,y., devotion, piety,!., 38,io>
96, 3 ; loving kindness, I., 368, g.
GóÖ-girnd (-ar), f.^ goodwill, I.,
36, 14, 208, ig.
Góð-gjarn, ad., kindly disposed, I.,
446,8.
Góð-gripr,w.,a good, precious thing,
ornament, I., 554,24«
Góð-mannliga, adv., in a manner
becoming a good man, virtuously,
II., 285,4.
Góð-mannligr, ad., friendly, kindly,
fair : þessi vegr sýnist oss hvárki
lögligr né góðmannligr, I., 328, jg.
Góðr (góð, gott), ad., good,frequ.
góðrar ættar, well horn, I., 12, lo-
— Neut. gott as a suhst,, good.
things, I., 30, 1.
Góð-vild (-ar), /!, goodwill,!., 208, jg,
336, 19.
G6^-Y'úi,m.,goodivill, I., 46, 21, 128, 5.
Góð-viljugr, ad., friendly, kindly
disposed, II., 156, jq.
Goldinn, see gjalda.
Golf (-s), n., floor, I., 54, 12, 250, 22-
GÓZ, /i., goods, means, property,
wealth, I., 12, 12» 250, jg.
82
GLOSSARY.
Gráöur, /. pi, ^ gradus,' grades,
steps in front of the altar, I.,
538, 4, 8«
Gradus, m., step, II., 218,25.
Grafa (gref, gróf-grófuija, græfi,
grafinn), v.a. — \. to bury : betr
skal profa þat mál áðr enn piltr-
inn er grafinn, II., 160, g, cfr. II.,
102, 14. — 2. to furrow : eigi grofv
þyckvar hruckvr hanns enni,
II., 287, 32- — 3. to carve : stendr
sniahuitr kistill Ivktr vandliga ok
orþinn meÖ sva miclv yfirvöttis
formi meistarliga, at engi iarðligs
mannz bond matti sva fagrliga
lika ok grafa, II., 286, ^. — Im-
pers., to suppurate, to fester :
grefr þá lærit ok fólinn raeÖ munn-
um ok vogföllum bæÖi uppi ok
niðri, II., 96, 24. — Med, grafast,
fig., to be mentally in a state of
moi'bid agitation, to be racked by
passion: grefst hann innan með
sinni grimd, ok gerir sendiboða
með bréfum til konungs í Franz,
I., 440, 28.
Graftar-embætti, n., burial sei^vice,
I., 066, 19.
Grá-leitr, ad., grey-looking, i.e., rude,
rough, coarse, I., 434, g.
Grámunka-búnaíJr, m.^ habit of Grey
monks, I., 314, g.
Grámunka-klaustr, m., monastery of
Grey monks, I., 2o6, g.
Grámunka-klæSi, n., = grámimka-
búnaÖr, I., 314,28.
Grámunka-lifna^r, m., order of Grey
monks, I., 368,26.
Grámunka-regla, f, rule of Grey
monks, I., 316, 5.
Grámunkr, m., Grey monk, I., 312, 35
370,8.
Grand, n., grain, slight drawback,
I., 160, 10.
Granda (að, t), v.a., to hurt, 1., 540, 9.
Grand-varr, ad., heedful against
doing ivrong, pure of purpose,
1*5 68, 24 — 2. chaste, II., 2, ^q*
Grand-veri, n., heed against doing
wrong or harm, II., 272, ^y.
Grann-vaxinn, ad., slender, slim, of
growth, I., 28, 9; II., 288,14.
Grár, ad., grey, i.e., rude, rough,
coarse : þeir líta þá til bans meÖ
grá glensi, L, 22, 17.
Grata (græt, grét-grétum, gréti,
grátinn), v.a., to weep, to shed
tears, I., 110, 10; to cry, II.,
281, 30; to mourn, to bewail, I.,
348,15,404,19,21; IL, loO,!^.
Grátandi, gerund of grata; lamen-
tandus, II., 14, 1-.
Grátaudi, pres. part, of grata ; — 1 .
as ad., bewailing : því at sumum
þar grátundum líkams mein veitt-
ist heilsa, II., 88, 3. — 2. as subst.
weeper : ok gret me (5 grátundum,
I., 110,10.
Gratias, f pi., grace at table, I.,
108,4.
Grátligr, ad., ivoefid, sad, sorrowful,
I., 306, 25 ; II., 162, 17 ; tearfid,
I., 316,19.
Grátr (-s), m., weeping, I., 242,22;
sorrow, II., 74, n.
Grefta (að), v.a., to bury, II., 158,
lU 26-
Greftra (að), v.a., to bury, 11. , 2,4.
Greiða(dd), v.a., to unravel, to make
plain: bann greiddi jafnan vitr-
liga varKlar spurningar, I., 28, 13,
GLOSSARY.
883
Greiða — cont.
cfr. II., 288, 19. Med. fig. ^ to dear
up, to become enlightened, II.,
232, 3. — 3. to set forth, to deliver :
því þjkkir mönnum sem nokkur
verakllig gleði, hversii listuliga
hann þykkist sína tölu greiða, I.,
278,23«
Greiði (-a), 7n., furtherance, solu-
tion : ok því vilja þeir þat ekki
lieyra, sem erkibyskupsins malum
er til greiða, I., 272,9, cfr. II.,
251,8.
Greiðr, ad., ready, ready to hand:
þat sem hann heyrði um sinn í
heilavgum ritningvm eða laga-
domvm var honvm greitt ok til-
tekt livern tima, er hann vildi
frammi hafa, II., 288, 22« — Neut,
greitt, in adv. sense, readily,
ivithout let or hindrance, I.,
'j27'
Grein (-ar, -ir), f., prop, a branch
{of a tree), hence, fig., icith
the implied notion of divi-
sion, distinction, Sfc., in various
senses determined by the context:
— 1. dissension, difference of
ojnnion, matter of dispute : raeirr
enn einum þeira mundi þat fagrt
sýnast, at bera hæsta rödd i vígslu-
gerö svá mikils herra, ok þar
hélt vit um tíma at greinir mundi
til renna, I., 88, 12 ; krefr konungr-
inn með mikiUi ákefð, at Tho-
mas erkibyskiip með öðrum lýÖby-
skupum fylli sittfyrirheit, at styrkja
þá sömu konungs vana, sem þeim
risu greinir af, I., 162, ^2 ; Hein-
rcki konungi flyzt af hljóÖi, at
Tliómas erkibyskup með öllum
Grein — cont.
sínum greinum muni gefast í hans
vald, I., 426, 20- — 2. discernment,
jjcrception ; svá snarpr i grein ok
skilning, at haun greiddi vitrliga
vandar spurningar, I., 28, ^2 ; sá
er nefskorinn, ev eingvaskynsemd-
ar grein berr á sína gerð, I.,
234, 2' — 3. detailed account :
þysja inn konungs menn með
þeim boðskap upp á Thómam
erkibyskup, at hann gjaldi skyn
ok góða grein .... fyrir allan
þann fjárhlut er hann hafði undir
sinni forsjó, I., 212,14. — 4. ar-
ticle, point, matter : er nú Ijóst af
settum greinum, at lærdómrinn
hafÖi svá til mikiUar virðingar
hvárki vald nó ráðinn vilja, I.,
68, 19 ; enn mót þessarri grein
hvarritveggjo skipar signaðr
Thomas sína gdðgirnd ok vizku,
L, 36, 13, cfr. ij. ; þessir fara ok
frammkoma, fylla með svardögum
ok fastmælum þat ^'illmlnar boð meö
öllum greinum sem áðr var tjáð,
L, 330,21; hann býÖr lærðum
mönnum, at á nefndan dag komi
þeir til Lundúna, at svara sér meS
réttri skynsemd til sagðra greina,
I., 146,5. — 6. point, peculiarity:
svá fellr samt í öðrum greinum
skaplyndi þeira, L, 54, 35. — 6.
reason^ cause : ok fyrir þá grein
at heilög bók segir svá mikit af
hans meistaraddm, at um síðir
hail hann fagrliga skilit sjö liöfuÖ-
listir, I., 20,3; var Jjat likligt, at
hans tárh'g góðfýst leiddi atSra
menn til tara, oinkanliga fyru* þá
grein, at hann lærði þat eina er
384
GLOSSARY.
Grein — cont.
hann liföi sjálfr, I., 104,9; svá ok
Í aðra grein, at sá kvittr ferr með
fólkinu, at konungsmenn muni
leggja hendr á mik með harÖincl-
um, I., 206, g. — 7. matter,
thing : maðr sváfíjóttækr minnigr
ok glöggi' Í allri grein til brjosts
ok bækr, I., 20, ^ ; bans signuð
elska ok beimonleikr kemr aftr í
Öllum greinum til Tbomam erki-
byskups, I., 440, 19. — 8. charge:
ok ef þeir eignast þyngri grein
af þessum tveimr, eru þeir sekir
sannlio:a þess meinlausa dreyra,
IL,54,4.
Greina (d), v. a. — \.to divide : með
því, at fémál er í milli ok greinir
mest Í siindr yðvart samþykki, I.,
224, j4 ; |)á bar ek bugsan fyrir
þ\á, at mik skyldi eigi stort greina
mot bans vilja, I., 292, ^9 ; ok sera
{)á greindi mjök á, greatly divided
in opinion^ II., 8, 13. — 2. to dis-
tinguish, to discriminate, to dis-
cern : sem bun greinir, með bverju
sottarfar bennar bofst i fyrstu, II.,
156, 2 ; þvi at bann er bæði skygn
at greina sik ok aðra, I., 284, 5. — 3.
to group hy points, to class under
proper heads, to digest : þeíta by-
skupannabrefflyzt berraTbomasi,
þar sem bann sitr í Franz ; ok
sera hann befir þat greint ok arti-
culerat, snýr bann til þess vegar
at gefa þeim likt moti liku, I.,
398, 2' — 4. to discuss, to debate,
to examine, to reason on : at þeir
báðir sarat greini fagrliga, eftir
réttu formi ritninganna, hversu
þat rennr í samþykt, sem sýnist
Greina — co7it.
sundrligt, I., 100, 25. — 5. to set
forth, to record, to state, to enume-
rate : at margs manns lif dro til
útlegðar, ok suma una síðir, sem
greinast mun, alt framra í dauða
dyrr, I., 6, 19 ; af þeira Guðs gjöf-
iim, sem nú voru greindar, gaf
þat vitrummönnura vel skilja, at,
I., 28, 2- ; j(5k bann mikit Eng-
lands konungs riki, þótt þat
standi eigi meðgreindum atburS-
ura eðr skýrri frásögn, I., 06, 25 ;
jþeir koma framra fyrir Heinrek
konung, tjándi honum bálfnauð-
ugura berra páfans bréf, bvert upp-
brotit ok yfirlesit beldr þvílíkan
skilning, sem þessu næst mun
greint verða, I., 332, go-
Greindr, p.p., in ser greindr, special,
particular, I., 406, g ; cfr. 422, j.
Greiniliga, adv., distinctly, plainly,
directly, I., 186, ^.
Greri, see groa.
Greyfast, v. med., to ' grovel,' to
burrow, to bury one^s self, to
sink into: sá er bryggbjiigr, er
svá alvarliga legst undir ok verald-
ar ábyggju, at þar fyrir gleymir
bann allri upplitning, enn grey fist
niðr Í jarðliga blíðu, I., 234, 5.
Greypiligr, ad., heinous, fell, I.,
546, 18-
Grimd (-ar ),/*., cruelty, rage, fury,
rancour, I., 156, 20) 178, 5, 546, g.
Grimdar-hatr, n., cruel hatred, II.,
168,19.
Grimdar-kyn, n., kind of cruelty,
manner of revenge, I., 346, 27.
Grimliga, II., 287, 24> = grimmliga.
GLOSSARY.
885
Grimmast, med.,to become enraged :
L, 144,18, 176,9.
Grimmleikr, (-s) m., rancour, ill-ioill,
malice : I., 1 78, 32 ; brutality^ I.,
514, n.
Grimmliga, adv., cruelly, I., 374, g.
Grimmr, ad., savage, cruel, blood-
thirsty, I., 542, 15, 25.
Gripa (grip, greip-gi'ipum, gripi
gripinn), v.a., to ' grip ^ to seize,
to lay hands on, I., 42, §, 142,5;
11,54,8.
Grip-deikl (-ar, -ir), /!, unlawful seiz-
ure of property, robbery : I.
118,3; 408,21.
Gripr (-S, -\v),m.,aheep-sake,athing
of value : meðr því at fuglinn var
hinn vænsti gripr, II., 142, 7 ;
beiT þá huerr þeira fram þann
grip, sem hverium til heyrir, II.,
285,29«
Grjotligr, ad., stony, hard, obdurate,
II., 8, 9.
Grc5a (græ, (3. grærr, II., 267, le)
greri, grerum, greri-grí5iun), v.n.,
to grow lohole, to heal: sár þat
stóraj er Etvarðr klerkr fákk, var
fyrr gróit ok allieilt, cnii likamr
erkibyskups væri kaklr (x gólíimi,
I., 552, 13 ; iafnan groa skiott
stor sar vudir [læknis] hendi, II.,
267,13.
Gróðr (-rar), m., healing : spurt
liefir liann ok, liversu föÖurliga
herra paiinn leitar honumlækning-
ar, ok fær eigi til grtjiSrar lians
meiiium vikit, I., 340, 23 ; hugsit,
herra, hvárt mcirr stendr til gróÖr-
ar, mikit sar i likam, eÖr limr
afhögginn meÖ öUu, I., 384, 19.
K 541.
Gruna (að), v.a., to misdoubt, to
suspect: I., 168,5, 450,28; g-
urn, id., I., 250, n.
Grund-völlr, m., foundation : efldi
liann klaustr of gnindvelU i þeini
stað, er Kadon heitir, founded a
monastery, ^c, I., 10, 4 ; þat must-
eri höfðu eflt af gruiidvelli kon-
ungar i Englandi, I., 136, g ; berra
crkibyskup stendr cnn úhneigÖr,
þvi at samvizka luias befir æski-
ligt rum ii goðum gruudvelli, I.,
158,12; ^^"^^ Þ^tt þer kjósit yðr
svá afskapliga iÖii, at striða kristn-
inni, befir boii svá góÖan gruiid-
völl, at eigi má bon falla fyrir
y«r,I., 406,3.
Grun-lauss, ad., without suspicion :
þeim er eigi grunlaust : they were
not without misgivings,!., 55i, 21-
Gvunn,(-s) n., ground, bottom : slikar
greinir risa af grunni með kon-
imgsins bjarta, such ^natters rise
from the bottom of the hiiig\<i
heart, i.e., bore witness to the
hinges settled determÍÉiation, I.,
352,2.
Griinr (-ar), m., suspicion : bor mcM
skal bann ok þola dóm fyiir })á
alia ódygö ok cic'Srof, grim ok ill-
giriid or bann befir gert krimunni
I., 214, 28; byskupinn vildi giun
á bera i fyrstu er bann JieyrcNi,
II., 104,2,.
Grunsamr, ad., suspicious, I., 51,j,..
Gra^, sec groa.
Gra3Öa (dd), v.a., to heal, I., 384, 21 ;
II., 94, 3, 267,19.
Gra^ðari (-a), m., llculcr, the Sa-
viour, I., 12,21; Í5' Englands
f)jó(Sa, the healer^ reformer of the
B B
386
CxLOSSARY,
GræÖari — cont.
English jicojile^ St. Thomas^ IT.,
290, 30«
Græddr, P-P-, healed, I., 300, 24»
384, 23.
Grærr, see groa.
Gröf (grafar, graiir), f., a grave, II.,
88, 15-
Gröftr (graftar, daf. grefti), m. 1.
burial: bj'ð ek yðr, npp á lilýÖni,
at þér fljtiÖ mik þangaÖ til graftar,
ef yÖr er eigi forliga bannar, I.,
488, 14 ; þessu næst skrýða þeir
hanu til graftar, I., 558,3; ^'^o""'
liiisprevja bans ok frændr með þvi
orlofi dómarans, at taka baun til
graftar, II., 110, jy. — 2. tomb,
sepulchre : þetta samþykkja for-
menn kirkjunnar, at skript ok
stúkur upp liikast, . . . með anÖ-
færum veg til graftar Gnðs ást-
vinar, II., 86, ^3 ; bvat er koiiimgs-
valdit kann ogua folkinu, ákafast
sókn þyi meir til graftar erki-
bvskups, II., 90, 9. — 3. a crypt :
sem kista er fagrliga gjör meO
sönnuni lási, gengr berra erki-
byskup niðr í gröftinn með lærðum
mönnum, II., 200, 2 ; gaiiga þeir
með bátíðligiim sÖDg niðr í gröfti,
II., 204, ig ; varv vpploknar bvrðir
ok lasar sva at bans groptr ok
steiuþro var þa avUvm beimil til
atsoknar, II., 282, 21.
Guð (s), 711., God, I., 2,5.
Guð-d(5mligr,«fi?., divine,!!., 194, 15.
Guð-dómr (-s), m., godhead, II.,
236, 18.
Gut5-bræddr, ad., pious, relicÍGiis,
devoted, II., 234, 4.
GuÖ-lastan (-ar), f., blasphemy, I.,
498,18.
Guðligr, ad., godly, on God's be-
half: vel má segja, at beilagr
Tbdmas stendr nú í guÖligu striði,
I., 184, 3 ; bituar bann i sínu bjarta
með guÖligu vandlæti, I., 266, 1.
— 2. divine, I., 46, 13, 50, 14 ; II.,
230,13.
Guð-niðingr (-s), m., sacrilegious;
villain, II., 271, 23.
GuÖ-rækiliga, adv., in a manner to
thrust, to drive from. God,!!.,ó4^, ^.
GiiÖ-rækiligr,ö!í/., that thrusts,drives
away from God, II., 18,9.
Guð-rækr, ad., god -forsaken, I.,
548,23-
GuS-spjall (-S, -spjöU), n., gospel, !.,
86,5.
GuÖspjalla-maði*, m., Evangelist, II.,
274, 34.
Guð-spjallligr, ad., evangelical, II.,
226,20.
Guðs-spjalla-bók, /'., the New Test.,
I., 348, 13.
Guð-vefr, m., costly raiment, !.,
«4,15.
Giddu, guldum, see gjalda.
Gull (s), n., gold, I., 104, 13. — -
2. golden ring, I., 90, 1, 478, 10, 13 ;
cfr. also vigslugull, 1., 306,2;.
Gidligr, ad., golden, II., 279, 15.
Gull-ker, n., golden vessel, I.,
416,5.
Gull-kross, m., golden cross, !!.,
132,22-
GuU-peuingr, m., gold coin, II.,
2.10,13.
Gulls-peniiingr, m., id. I., 498,26-
Gyldi, see gjalda.
GLOSSARY.
387
Gyrða (t), v.a., to gird^ to hrace^ I.,
98, 18.
Gy rðr, ad.^ yi^'t, braced^ I., 408, 26«
Gæða (lid), v.a., to endow, to confer
upon : látiÖ yí$r eigi læging í
þykkja at lúta þeim, er yðr skap-
aði ok gæddi góðum lutum, I.,
424, 13 ; kcnungrinn ok aller út frá
þóttust sem gædder Guís gjöf, er
þeir máttu í uokkiiru til þjÓDa,
II., 206, 2; sjálfan liátíðisdag sinn-
ar upptöku gæddi hanu skínönd-
uni hjartteignum, II., 206, 19. —
Med., to receive gifts, to be fa-
voured, to be blessed by : bjartr
hlutr er þat blezaða líf, er
Thomas leiðir framm í Pontis, er
nil ííæddist litlii með ííuðlio;ri
vitran, I., 318, 22«
Gær, adv., in the 'phrase: í gær
yesterday, II., 90, 20, 22^ 23-
Gæzka (-u), /'., goodness, excel-
lence : her er vottr klerkdoms
Stepliaiii, ok bætti þat alia vega,
er mannkostum heyrði . . . því
samþykker þat önuur bans gæzka
at hann kallar til Kantúaríam
nökkura sæmiliga kenniuienn,
&c., II., 198,17. — -• sweetness,
acceptable ness : sömu leiÖ for
lians signa^a bæii til himna, þá
er haun íornfærÖi, er alt flaut í
upplitningarhæð ok ilmandi
gæzku fyrir GuÖi, I., 104,25- —
3. kindness, favour : enn fyrir
liverja mátti hann sína gæzku ok
góí^vilja y(5r kunnan gera, iiema
voldugustu menu af sínum lönd-
um, I., 282,21 ; styiSi þá heldr
meÖ konungligri gæzku, I., 378,
25. — 4. grace : gæzka GuÖs mis-
Gæzka — co7it.
kunuar var auÖsýn með honum,
I., 18, 2 ; f3ví at æ skipaðist til
meiri gæzkii bans hjarta, seiu
bænar orðiii upplesin geingii til
vaxtar með veizlum ok ámiuii-
inguin Vilrs Drottins gjafa, I.,
88, 21 ; gef mér gæzku suinna, II.,
289,25.
Ga3zku-verk, n., jjlur., loorks of
grace and mercy, II., 6, iq.
Göfugliga, adv., nobly, mercifully,
I., 556, 11.
Göfugligr, ad., noble, exalted, I.,
550, 16 ; generous, I., 550,7,-
glorious, II., 44, 13.
Göfiigr, {super I. contr., göfgastr, I.,
38'^>22j) ^^v noble, exalted, I.,
210, 10, 228, 2 ; glorious: g.
pining, martyrdom, I., 558,8.
Gömlum, see gamall.
Gömul, see gamall.
Gong, n. pi., passages, I., 534, 17.
Göngn, göngur, see ganga, sb.
Go til, götiir, see gata.
H-
Ilá-altari, ')i., high-altar, II,, 60,8,
212, 15.
HáíS, (-s), n., mockery, I., 14S,4;
II., 18,4.
HáÖiiliga, adv., shamefully, I.,
^óZi, iQ, oOO, 12«
Háðidigr, f/i/., mocking, insulting:
hvar cr beyrt, at nokkurr inair
gangi svá í konungs herbergi, oss
B B 2
388
GLOSSARY.
Háðuligr — cont.
ok váru ráði til háðuligrar sví-
virÖu ? I., 214, 9 ; enn er Thomas
erkibyskup hefir þolt J)vílík orÖ,
er bæði voru hörð ok háÖulig, I.,
428, g. — 2. heinous, atrocious,
horrible : hann hafði skrifat til
herra páfans, hversu skrifta skyldi
þess háttar mönniim, er á nokk-
urn hátt hafði samlagazt þeim
háÖuliga glæp, II., 42, ^.
HáÖung (-ar), /., shame, confusion,
I., 300,18.
Háðungav-lauss, ad., loithout shame,
IL, 24,2.
Haf (-s^ böf), n., sea, ocean, I.,
126,8,478,29,488,24-
Hafa, (heíi, ek hefir, I., 172, 9,
hafóa-höföum hefÖi, haft), v.a. to
have, in various applications :
1. to have, to be possessed of;
at hóglífis
hendis, hvat
Guðs lofi af þraut ok þolinmæí^i
þessa píslarvotts, I., 2,^5; liann
skal hafa uskert konungsvald í
öllum þeim greinum, er at Ivita
krúnunni, I., 66, 21 ; J^Sf-, to be
possessed of, as a quality : hann
hefir fjögiir ár yfir tuttugu, I.,
34, ij.. — 2. to obtain : jafnbrátt
sem hann hefir orlof á fund
Thome cancelers, skilr hann vel,
at þessi vöxtr ok klæðabúnaðr
heyrir eingum mauni utan honnm
einiim, I., 52, 14. — 3. to use, to
employ : diktar hann drottning-
unni marga fagra lofsöngva, þá
sem heilög kristni heldr ok hefir
j^íöan, II., 285, 2- — 4. to pre-
serve, to keep : J)essi blezaðr maðr
maðr hafi
er hann
gu'nist
nær-
1
Hafa — cont.
hinn vngi Thomass var þegar
gieddr ok geislaðr meÖ ágiötu
siðferði, halldande sinn likam ok
sal i hreinum meydome, II., 284,
2Q. — 5. to hold: kennimanua
fundi í landinu, er þeir kalla
sinodos, vildi hann einga hafa
lata, I., 6, 14 ; málstefnu hafa
þeir þá stora, með þvi umfangi,
at liverr hælir sinni ástvinu, I.,
22, 13. — 6. to have, to make use
of, to shoiD, ^ prcB seferre^: játta
þat ok til, at hann skal heyra
hroðr sinn, e£ hann hefir sama
einlæti á því leikmóti, er vera
skal næsta morgin, I., 22, 21« —
Reflexive constructions : h. sik
brutt, to betake one's self away, I.,
120, 7; h.s. framm í veg, to pro-
ceed on one's way, I., 270, 13 ; II.,
142, 11 ; h.s. til fundar, to proceed
to a ^nesting, I., 470, 1 ; h.s. uppi,
to be on the alert, I., 50, 29. — Med.,
hafast at, to be busy about, to be
at, I., 22, 10^ 24, 5 ; hafast viÖ, to
maintain one's self, to keep, to
divell, I., 28,
19-
Adverbial
constructions : hafa a, to show
forth: Orðsnild bans var svá
falliu, at mikit la undir löngum,
hverjar upptektir voru á hafÖar,
ef hann talaði með rika menn,
I., 36, 12. — h. frammi, to have
ready at hand : svá var hann ok
furÖuliga minnigr, at hvat er
hann heyr^i af ritningum ok
laojadomum var houum tiltækt á
hverri tið er hann vildi frammi
hafa, I., 28,16; ^^- ""^^^j ^^ ^^^P
tip : krefr skynsemd, at hann hafi
GLOSSARY.
389
Hafa — coat.
iiti því meiii vernd ok bariSfengi
fjrir löuduiium, sem þau voru
víðari, I., 60, 3. — li. til, to havc^
to be endowed ivith: til erkibysk-
ups Í Cancia sór hann eingau
betr falliun enn Tbomas, sagði
haim bæði til liafa vit ok vilja
góðan, orðsnild ok siðvendi, &c.,
I., 74, j3. — In various phrases :
hafa at merkja, to signify : enn
klerkrinn skildi eigi í þenna
punkt, hvat liiin baföi at merkja,
I., 86, 2« — li. bezt, to be best off:
Sannliga þóttust þeir bezt hafa,
er bans vinir voru, at hann Hytti
þeira mál, I., 38, 21- — li* meö
höndum, to have on hand : Hein-
rekr konungr hefir þat með höud-
iim, at lata vigja til kriinu Heiu-
rek son siun, I., 450, 7. — h. sees,
to occupy a seat, I., 106, -^^. - — h.
verr, to be in the lorong : hann
fylgir þeira eardinalibiis, er verr
höfðii, I., 90,25- — b. vissii, cer-
tioremjieri: allir þeir af erkiby-
skupsins fylgd, sem framar voru
menutir, leituðusuÖrum sjó, þegar
þeir böfðu vissu síns virðuligs
föður, I., 238,20.
Haíinn, jo/>., see hefja.
Hafna (að), v.a., io refuse, to spurn,
to repudiate ; toith dat. : illvili
blindar hann, sva, at hann hafnar
andligu lifi, I., 234, ^ ; 'J'hónias
erkibyskup hafnar hvcrs mjinns
ráðum, I., 278, 13. — with ace. :
kennir hann ok úspart, hvat haf n-
auda er, cðr hvat fylgjanda, I.,
174,2],; sa hafnar niik cr yðr
fyrirlítr, . . . er hitt mikUi sárara,
Hafna — cont.
at þér hafnit þanu, er y ðr skapaði,
I., 334, 13, ^5.
Hainan,/., repudiation, I., 408, j.
Haga (aÖ), v.a., to manage, to bring
about, I., 36,3.
Ilagliga, adv., deftlij, cunningly,
skilfully, I., 314,19.
Hagligr, ad., suitable, fitting, I.,
Hagr (-S, -ir), m., condition, state:
nú er sva komit þírium hag, sem
eigi er kjörHgt, I., 218, u. — 2.
favour, good luck, advantage :
sitr svo glaðr yfir Guðs gjöfum
þann dag, sem honum sniiist alt í
hag, I., 200, 25.
Hag-ræða (dd), v.a., to prepare, to
dispose, II., 230, jg.
Hag-ræði, n., judicious management
of property, advantageous stew-
ardship, I., 178, 6-
Haka (höku),jf!, chin, II., 114, 9^,
116,7.
Halda (held, hélt-héldum, héldi,
haldinn), v.a., gencr. to hold, to
keep. — I. to hold. — 1. to lay
hold on : ok rett samtíða þessum
orðum stökkr einn mikill íiskr er
vatninu ok framan í fang erkiby-
skupi ok er haun haldinn í stað,
I., 258, 4 ; svo geymdi GuÖs maðr
nú frammliÖinn sitt góz ok heil-
agrar kirkju, atþjófr var haldinn
ok sinum samdra'tti frátekinn,
II., 140, 13 ; ek þikjumst skilja, at
frændi minn cr haldinn tvonnri
sekt, II., 151
? 4-
Fig* to hold.
to maintain, to be of opinion : ef
hennar biikr er þaðan i hurt,
megum vitstööugt halda, at kyriu
S90
GLOSSARY
Halda — coat.
er þér aftr goldin, II., 124, 21- —
2. to hold, to keep up, to main-
tain : belt hann sik til skola bæði
innanlands ok jafnvel alt til Franz,
einkanliga í höfutborg Paris, er
æfinlio-a hefir baldit fræe-astaa
skola á NorSrlöndum með lærðum
ok bóklistum, I., 20, 7. — 3. to
hold, to maintain, to enjoy : bug-
leiddum ver, . . . bvert lýti þér
myndit oss finna, at ver skulim
síðr makbgr, enn aðrir konungar
fjrir OSS, at bera iihalla krúnu
meÖ þeim réttarbótum . . . sem
baft befir ok bald it bverr eftir
annan, I., 146,23; eiuginii þykk-
ist úballa krúnu bera, utau bann
haldi með kappi þat, sem belt
bans forellri, I., 8,7,3. — 4. to
hold, to perfomn : siðabækr þeira
bjóða, eftir páfans setning, at æ
inuan þriggja ára skulu þeir balda
einn almenniligan fund, I., 370, j ;
cjr. 326,205 416,19. — 5. to hold,
to preserve in memory : kaupa
þeir gjarna skólabækr, at þeir
megi balda með fuUu þat gott, er
þeir skildii, I., 30, ^. — 6. to hold,
to contain : þeir koma framni
fjrir Heinrek konung, tjándi
bonum bálfnaivðugum berra páf-
aus bréf, bvert uppbrotit beldr
þvilíkan skilning, I., 332, 19 ; cfr.
I., 410,7.
II. to keep. — 1. to keep, to
hold, to detain: (bann) beldr
byskupsstola ok ábótadiemi svá
lengi undir sinu valdi, sem bann
lystir, I., 6, 3. — 2. to keep, to
keep company with: varla nuUti
Halda — cont.
þann fá af allri þeira fjöld, at eigi
beldi eina vinkonu sér við bond,
I., 20, 13. — 3. to keep, to treat,
to entertain : var at orðum gert,
at eingi böfðingi 1 öllu Englandi
béldi svá lystuliga sína fylgd,
I., 48,23; — 4. to keep, to deal
ivith, to behave towards : voru
þeir, sem fyrr mátti likt beyr-
ast i sögunni, svo böndlaðer ok
baldner, sem konungs svikarar,
II., 166, 2- — 5. to keep, to re-
strain: b. tárum, I., 304, ^. —
6. to have, to retain, to enjoy:
jafnvel skulu úskyldii' meun bans
gjalda, ef þeir bafa bonum beim-
olligir verit, þótt þeir baldi lands-
vist at kalla, I., 356, 4. — 7.
to keep, to detain {in prison) :
undrum ver ok, er þér vitið Vil-
bjálm, kapalín vorn, í yÖvarri by-
skupssýslu baldinn í böndum ok
dýflizu, enn sýnit bonum eingva
mennsku, I., 3ó6, 26 ; sakir batrs'
við Thómam erkibysknp belt bann
nokkura klerka sem beifangna, I.,
418, iQ. — 8. to keep, to keep to,
to persist in: enn ef þér baldit
uppteknUjdæmi GuÖ miðil vár ok
yðar, I., 410, ^. — 9. to keep, to
fulfil (a promise, ^-c.) : þeir skulu
fara til Jorsaialands. Ok þat
balda þrír af þeim með iðran ok
góðviljn, II., 38,14. — l^* ^^ ^^^P
to, to follow, to observe, to obey :
ok þá reglu belt bann síðan með
byskups embætti svá lofsamliga,
sera fám er máttuligt, I., 84,1-;
geingr bann fyrir öðrum til festu,
játtandi fyrst upp á sin sannindi,
GLOSSARY.
sol
Halda — cont.
sem eið vinnandi, at halda alia
forna konuDgsins vana, I., 166, oq ;
eigi mun finnast, þar sem kiistnin
er rétt lialdin ok lögliga varðveitt,
at svo skiili dn^mast vígðr sem
iivígðr, I., 152,2; ok ef þelta
veitist, viljum ver yðr þjóna . . .
at höldiium ok heilum Guðs rétti
í alia staÖi, I., 346, ^o; of an á
Benedictus reglu, er þeir halda,
hafa þeir ok setningar mjök smá-
brotnar Bernardi ábóta, I., 370, 9 ;
fari hann aftr ok heim komi með
fullum friði, ok þd með þeiri yíii-
bót, at hanu láti haldast allar
koiumgligar siðvenjur, 1., 384,9.
— 11. to keep, to sustain, to
back up : (hami) býðr sik framm
Í svardaga til Ijlgis með Friðreki
keisara ok þeim, ei' hann vill hefja
ok halda moti Alexandro páfa,
I., 330,13.-12. to keep, to fit
cut, to equip, to maintain ; her
með skal konunorinn halda hcila";a
Jorsalalandi til starfs tvö hundrat
riddara, II., 36, 24- — Reflexive
constructions : h. sér réttum, to
keep one^s self straight, to bear
up against, I., 436,5; ^^* ^^^^ ^^^
skola, to frequent a school, I.,
20,5 '■> ^^' ^^^ ^^* ^^' ^^ ^^^P (f^^'ff^l/
from : konungrinn fell í sára
hrygð, svá sem hann spurði þat
ferliga verk, svá at þrjá daga helt
liann sik út af heilagri kirkju, II.,
10, 12- — Med. haldast, to be held,
to be observed, to be in force : því
krefjum vér enn af yiSr, at þer
veitið konungdóniiuum ficlsi ok
frið, réttarbætr ok laudsvana
Halda — cont,
þvílíka ok svá niarga, sem syndir
verða, at urn haus daga héldují,
I., 152,27; ^^1 Þ^ss, at sá friír
haldist, sem settr var milium kirkj -
uunar ok konungsins, I., 498, 5 ;
haldast við, to keep one's stand,
not to retire or take to flight :
rymir heria Alexander brott af
Roma því at hann fær eigi við
haldizt, I., 92,20; aðrir, þeir er
hugsterkari váro eðr meir elskuðu
hann, héldust við, II., 110, 20;
haldast í hendr, to hold hands
together {ivalk hand in hand) :
þeir mæta konunginum í þeim
stað,erSuðhamtiin heitir,ok oan"-*
svo í fyrstu inn fyrir hann, at
þeir haldast i hendr, I., 120, 23. —
^W- ^^ follow one another's e.r-
ample: enn eftir bans dag var
því líkt, sem konuugar héldist i
hendr framm at eldinnm, þá er
hverr dr 6g með höfðum rétt ok
frelsi kirkjunnar nndir krimuna,
I., 46 2- — Prepositional construc-
tions : h. á veg, to start on one's
way, I., 246,7; h. af to hold of,
^' tenere <fe"; hann resisnerar
áðr i bond Heinreks unga alt þat
lén ok auðræði, er hann hafði
halditnærok fyrr af kriinunni, I.,
82, 17 ; — h. framm. — a. to con-
tinue {what is already i?i progress):
enn or A^ilhjálmi kemr þetta aftr-
kast,bregðrhonum heldr i brún,ok
þó heldr hann framm fenNinni, I.,
414,21 ; þótt ekk vissa, at lif mitt
lægii skanti, skalek framm halda,
J)vi at nogu longi hefn- {)at folk
ráðlaust farit í minni frávero, [.,
392
GLOSSARY.
Hadla — cont.
486, lo^ — b. to sustain, to keep
up, to show forth : ok þeiri sömii
góðfysi heldr bann framm í allri
sinni einbættisgerÖ, at bans beiiög
ásjána þornaÖi aldi'i frá tárum, I.,
102, i^. — b. framm á veg, to
start, set off, on one's way, I.,
264, 2« — b. eftir, to retain, I.,
228,25, n., 114, 13. — b. með, to
hold by, to stand by, to aid,
I., 372, 3. — b. með sér, to keep
to one's self, to preserve : bvat
belt sá með sér af kraftinum, er
tapaÖi sæmdina með frægðinni,
I., 170,19. — b. til dvala, to keep
loitering : þessi maðr er Kantiia-
riensis erkibyskup utan ek faller-
ist. . . . enn er siguaðr Tbómas
heyrb' orðræ^u þeira beldr bann
ekki til dvala, I., 248, 1. — b. til
rikis, til erkibyskups, til básætis,
to aid, assist, back up for or to-
wards, I., 66, 25, 28) 29» 70, 1. — b.
upp, to hold up, to uphold : þær
setniugar, sem beilagir feÖr lög-
festu til uppbeldis beilagri kirkjii,
skulu bar í landi eigi niörfalla,
meðan ek má þeim upp balda, I.,
152,ig. — b. upp svörum, to be
the spokesman : með þvi, at þér
eruð skipaðir várt böfuð ok berra,
bælir, at þér baldit upp svörum
fyrir ofes, I., lóO, j^. — b. vit, to
be on the point of: þar belt vit
um tima, at greinir mundi til renna,
for a ivhile things icerc on the
point cf breaking out into disscii-
sion, I., "88, 12; ft'ingu þessir á
stóru bkipi svá mikit vás bæði
etorms ok ofsævis, at þeim belt
Halda — cont.
vit liáska, I., 2G4, ^ ; ganga svá
sendiboðar út af stefuunni, at
beldr vit bót, bversu þat muni
lýÖa, er konunginn í Englandi
skal eiugis virða, I., 286, 21. —
Phrases : b. trúnat yíir, to keep
secret, I., 252, g ; b. i virktum, to
show honour towards, I., 442, 3 ;
b. bendr af, to abstain from, I.,
452, 18.
Haldandi, gerund, of h^úádi, '' obser-
vandus : " sannliga sýnist mér, at
þessir blutir væri svá haldandi
sem J)ér baíit sagt, I., 194, 15.
Haldinn, p.p., captive, I., 508, 17.
Haldsamr, ad., tenacious, retentive,
I., 138,9.
Há-leitliga, adv., exaltcdly, II.,
184, 2^.
Há-leitr, ad., exalted: se, minn
berra, bversu siðsaman maun ok
beilagan þér vilit setja yfir þat
báleita sæti ok svá marga miinka
ok dýrligar personur, sem þar
þjóna Guði, I., 64,15; bér með
runnu at margir lutír, er Tbómasi
gáfust i sök, at kjósast til svá
báleitrar stéttar, I., 68, ig ; b.
góðfýst, I., 116,28; li. birðir, I.,
482, 10. — 2. elate : af þessi vitr-
ran fyldist binn sæb Tbomas með
svá báleitum fagnaði, I., 316, 29«
3. festive, solemn : enn at dikta
dauðaráð í bálcitum tíma, var enn
til mikils auka þeira glæps ok
vesalda, I., 518, 15. — 4. glorious :
enu er notarius í?ér þat báleita
tákn, er piltinum veittist með svá
mikilli flj ótvirkt,reunr bann framm
GLOSSARY.
393
Haleitr — cont.
til höfatkirkjiinnar, boSauili kors-
bræðrum sinn fagnað, II., 80, 13.
Hálfo (-u), y., quarter^ direction :
efter svá gert ríðr hann vit af
þeiin staÖ í þá hálfu er víkr til
Kanciam, I., 84, 20- — 2.=" half
in : behalf : (liami) býðr Thómase
canceler, at eftir kouurigligum
vana biii hann sik til heimferðar
i England, at skipa kirkjunni ok
gózi heuuar þá forsjó al krúnunn-
ar hálfu sem fyrr var sagt, I.,
64, 2 ; þar er þá Heiurekr ungi
konungr, ok heíir séð sitt valds-
bréf af half 11 fet^r sins, I., 72, 95.
Hálf-nauÖigT, ad.^ lialf- unwilling,
Hálfr, ad.^ half: h. stuud, half an
hour, II., 118, j. ; h. húð, one half
of a hide, II., 122, 9 ; bálfr þriði,
half- third-= two and a half, II.,
198, iQ ; til halfs, by the half to
the extent of one half, I., 100, ^q ;
bálfu {ivith a compar. folloioing)
%//«//; I., 404, 13.
Hált'-virði, n., half jj rice, II., 120,25«
Hali (-a, -ar), m., tail {brush), I.,
lob, 22) 23'
II alia (að), v. a., prep, to mahe to
incline ; hence : to recline, to lean
on: enn erkibyskup ballaðist a
þann silki-kodda rauSan, er liggr
yfir bne bróÖnrins, II., 60, 12- —
2. to bring out of balance, to
ivarp : alia tinia finst hann verit
hafa liinu rcttvisasti domare, er
livorki hallatSi rettum dome fyrir
féniútur uó manna man, II., 2, 15,
(fr. 286, 21. — Ilf/l. balla sik aftr,
to fall back, to return to a former
Ilalla — cont.
state, II., 178, 19. — Med. ballast
at. to draw toivards, to draw
7'ound, II., 38, 10; ballast or, to
fail, to recede, to recoil from, II.,
28, 5 ; ballast til, to point towardsy
II., 178, 9 ; ballast undan, to de-
cline, to beg off, 1., 168, j-.
Hals, m., neck, L, 158,255 248,8,
286, 23, 386, 3 ; II., 80, 2^. — 2. a
man, a fellow, II., 140, g.
Haltr (holt, halt), ad., lame, limp-
ing, I., 230, 22 ; II., 226, li-
Haltra (að), v.n., to icalk lame, to
limp, I., 234, jL2'
Hamarr (-s, -rar), m., a hammer,
I., 118,4, 396, 4.
Há-messa (-u), f., high mass, I.,
508, 27«
Hamingja (u), f, good luck, good
fortune, II., 224, 24.
Há-mæli, n., openly expressed lan-
guage, II., 8, 8.
IIaud,y., = bond, I., 24, jq.
Ilauda, bandar, see bond.
Ilaudar-bak, n., the back of the
hand, II., 220, g.
Handa-verk, n., handiwork, II.,
230, ,.
Iland-draga, v. a., to seize upon with
a violent hand, L, 496, 2,3.
Ilaud-fenginn, p.p., delivered into
the hand, entrusted to, II., 16,17.
Iland-f esta (-11), f., handsel, plighted
assent, I., 152, 2S'
Iland-lanii, ad., lamc-handcd, 1.,
"O^, 25) ^'^ij 10*
Iland-lcggja, v.a., to handsel, to
pledge, to plight, I., 160, 20«
Iland-lcggr, m., an arm, 1., 6,21,
148,02.
S9i
GLOSSARY.
Hand-taka, v.a., to touch, to exa-
mine by hand, II., 284,2.
Hand-vegr, m., armpit : því næst
reuna upp vendir tveir blómgaðir,
sérlivarr af sínum haudvcg, II.,
60, i^. — 2. shoulder-joint : páliii-
ari TÍkr þá at beuni djaifliga,
ok varpar skikkju-skautit iit á
handveginn, svo at hann ser full-
gjörla, hvat iindir er, II., 136, ^^.
— 3. armhole in a garment : her
Í mot brosir binn signaði Thomas
nokkut Htt, ok tekr framan í
handveginn á kvrtlinum, er hann
bar, I., 64, 12-
Hand-viss, ad., quite certain, I.,
64, 3, 188, 11 ; inevitable. I., 8, 19.
Hanga (hangi, hékk-héngum, héngi,
hangit), v.n., to hang, II., 110, j^,
114,23-
Hann (hiin [or hon, I., 14, ^, 2] þat),
pron. 3 pers., he., I., 4, jg.
Hannyrð (-ar, -ir), /., handicraft,
T 99
Hár (-s), /Í., hair, I., 28,9; II.,
288,15.
Hár (há, hátt) sup. hæstr, I.,2,ij^, dat.
hófnm, I., 14, j^, ad., high : hou
hefir háfa bakka, I., 32, g ; hann
þóttist staddr á fjalli nokkurii
mjök háfu, I., 388, 20- — 2. tall:
Thomas erkibysknp var maðr
einkar sömibgr ok kennimaunligr
i sinv Hfi, haiT maðr á vöxt ok
grannvaxinn, II., 288, j^. — 3.
high aloft : þetta hvorttveggja
var buudit upp halt fyrir allra
manna augum í Kantuariensis
kirkjii, II., 112,2^.-4. loud:
ber þat til samtíða, at ungr piltr,
er hann átti, kveðr vit halt ok
Hár — cont.
feUr Í hjá honum, II,, 82, jg : enn
þat heyrir karl í mörkina, at hiin
(kýrm)kveðr við hátr, II., 120, g;
hrapar eitt gullker af sinne stöðu,
svo hátt ok hvellt niðr á múrinn,
at hann heyrer glögt, II., 140,
9. — Fig . — a. high, exalted : hvi
synist yðr, vitrum mönnum, at
vikja tii min svá háfum lutum,
yíir mína byrÖi úleysta ? I., 78,
g. — b. high, imperious : konungs-
ríkit gekk svá hátt yfir England
í þessa tíð, ok upp frá Vilhjálmi
rauða, sem fyrr var greint, I.,
62,9. — c. high, noble, elevated:
enn hversu bans mannkostir voru
hálir ok almáttkum Guði þægiHg-
ir, birtist þessu næst fyrir þá
himneska vitran, er hann þiggr í
Pontis, I., 316, 15. — d. high, im-
portant : skammast nú Gillibeit,
þvi at krokar bans ok slægðir
hafa nil enn um sinn roðit bans
Tonda kinn ; ferr þó eftir hit
hærra, þá er páfinn slær hann, I.,
200,1,.
Harð-bry^ti, n., hardness of heart,
L, 408, 18.
Harð-b^Tstr, ad., of a hard heart,
II., i 70,1.
Harð-feUigr, ad., hard, I., 552, 21.
Harð-fengi,^!, hardihood, bravery,
I., 60, 8, 534, 1-.
Harðiudi, n., hardihood, obstinacy:
þat, er hann hefir statt um sinn,
mun hann eigi auðveldliga um
venda; ok l>vi raá skilja, at þat
hugar harðindi beíir hann fætt
með löngum úvana, L, 280, 13. —
2. harsh dealings : frá þvilíkri í^ök
GLOSSARY,
395
Harð i n d i — con t .
koma þar niðr harðiiidin öU ok
hermd konungsins, sem Thomas
erkibyskup er, I., 180, 93 ; skulum
vér eigi því heldr fyrirlíta liann,
heldr halda mecS honum móti Heiii-
reki koiiungi, hver harðindi sem
hann færir at honuni, I., 372, j..
Harðla, (harla, II., 174, ^g), adv.,
righty very, greatly, mightily, ex-
ceedingly, I., 12,19, 32,7, 44, i2>
78, 10 ; II.j 30, ig.
Harðleiki (-a"), m., hardness : h.
hjartans, hardness of heart, I.,
336, 17-
Harð-lífi (-s), n., hard living, austere
habits, asceticism, I,, 2,23, 178,4,
316,6; IL, 10,12, 236, e"
Harð-lífr, ad., austere, ascetic, I.,
94,15.
Harðliga, adv., fiercely, I., 384,26-
Harðligr, ad., harsh, rough, I.,
286, 26.
Harð-lyudr, ad., hard of heart, I.,
110,8.
Haið-mæli, n., harsh, uncouth lan-
guage, II., 90, 16-
Harðna (aÖ), v.n., to harden, I.,
180, 11 ; to increase in severity,
II., 150,10.
Ilai ði' (hörð, hart), ad., hard, rough,
stiff: biistigull cr meÖ hörðu
hári, 1.5 231,97. — Fig. hard, tor-
pid : oftliga mýkti hanii þat
hjarta . . . cr áðr var hart ok
f rosit Í langri vanra^kt ok synduni,
I., 104, 7. — 2. hard, fierce, rough,
violent : eiui konungsmenu komu
at þeim, ok drogu af þeim kostiiin
iiicS harðri hendi, I., 49 1, 23 ; kyn-
í'erÓi þcss iiiaiiiia voru kalhiÖir
Harðr — cont.
Brochi, ok var eitt hit harðasta
folk Í Englandi, I., 320,25- — ^^
heavy, severe, {of illness) : feHr
haun Í svá harðan krankdóm, at
hann legst í rekkju, I., 316, g- — 4.
hard, relentless, stern, severe : ok
svá sem hann birtist áðr heitr í tár-
ligri viðrkomning, svá virðist hann
nú harðr með heilagri hirting, I.,
510,26' — ^- ^^^'f''^) defiant, de-
termined : enn er Heiureks kon-
ungs sendiboÖar heyra þvílíkt and-
svar, er eingi þeira svá harðr, at
veriida kynni þat, er hann sagði,
I., 266, 15. — 6. hard, fast : enn
bustío;nll leitar nndan hart ok
lilykkjótt higat ok þagat, I.,
230, 17 ; hvar fyrir renna þessir
svá hart, eÖa hvat hræðast þeir,
II., 110,25 ; Robert . . . átti
nngan son innbyrðis, er illa kunni
sig at vakta, saker æsku, þá er
skipit tók harðan skrið með fuU-
nm byr, II., 208, 7. — 7. hard,
energetic, effective : fyllist sá blez-
aðr herra meÖ várs Drottins
vandlæti, ok skrifar sem harðast
til herra páfans, at hann standi
sterkliga í herbiiðum himnakon-
ungs, I., 420, 22-
Harð-rétti, n. austere habits, asceti-
cism, L, 98, 7; II., 180,11.
Harð-snúinn, ad., hard knit, harsh,
uncouth, rough, I., 252, 15.
IIarð-ý(Sgi, ?z., hardihood, obstinacy,
I., 164, g, 191,20; hardness oj
heart, II., 48, i^-
IIar<Sý(Sgis-jöknll, m., icy hardness
(oJ' heart), 1., 336, 9,).
39G
GLOSSAHY.
Haróýðgis-maðr, ?;?., a man of
hardened heart, I., 110,2; ^J
fierce disposition, I., 352, jg.
Harðýðgis-orð, n., fierce language,
L, 154, 16.
Há-revsta (aÖ), v.n., to make noise,
Há-reysti, /'., load shouting, loud
excited talk, I., 230, ^q, 428, 26-
Hark, n., noise, alarm, I., 532, jj.,
534, iQ.
Hár-klæði, n., hair'cloth, I., 94, j-..
Harla = liarðla, II., 174, 13.
Harma (að), v.a., to grieve, to
sorrow, L, 164, ^g, 288, 24, 388, 13,
510,15.
Harmanligr, ad., regrettable, sad,
sorroicful, II., 247, 93'
Harma-töliir, f. pL, wailing lan-
guage, lamentations, I., 164, 91.
Harmr (-s, -ar), m., regret, sorroiv,
grief, L, 268, 90, 278, 12, 438,
18> 29'
Harm-sleginn, ad., smitten by grief,
11,152,15.
Harm-þrunginu, ad., swollen tcith
grief overichelmed by sorrow, I.,
534, 12, II., 2, 9Q.
Ha-setti*, ad., high strained, loud:
leiða þeir hinn siguaða Thomas
erki])jskup meÖ sútfeingnnm söug,
eigi hásettum hljóðum, heldr
börmuDgarfullum andvörpum, I.,
o5o, 13.
Háska-Famligr, ad., fraught with
danger, perilous, I., 356,9]..
HáskL (-a), m., peril, danger, I.,
150,90, 228,7,424,20, IL, 174,19.
Há-sæti, n., a throne: geingr þá
til hásætis at erfðum Heinvekr,
er fyrr var nefndr, I., 42, ig ;
Há-sæti — cont.
banu treysti Tbomasi framast
allra mauua at lialda sina erfingja
til hásætis, e£ bans inisti við, I.,
70, 1» — 2. high, exalted, majestic
station : þótt í aðra grein sém vér
bonum skuldbundnir til mýktar ok
góðvilja fyrir {^at básæti, er bann
beldr yjBr Guðs fólki, I., 404, lo- —
3. precedence, priority , preference :
ena sú álitning yerðr eigi rétt, ef
mannamunr eðr ríkdóinr belir ba-
sset i með yðr, I., 400, 20« — 4. resi^
dence (i'oyal) : setr Heinrekr kon-
ungi' sitt básæti í Lundunum,
þvi at sá var mestr staðr ok glæsi*
ligastr í landinu, I., 44, 1.
Hásætis-borð, n., ^high table^ I.,
106,6.
Hásætis-tign, f., majesty of the
throne, I., 132, 7.
Hata (að), v.a., to hate, to loathe,
I., 116,10,232,27.
Há-tíö (-ar,-ir),y!, high-tide, festival,
feast, feast-day: stendr nálægt
lÍTÍtasunnudags bátíð, I., 86,29;
eun á trinitatis bátíÖ vígist bann
byskiip Í sjálfri höfut-kirkjimni,
I., 90, 2 ; enn sú var bans forsögn,
þat er til beyrir Rodgeiri erki-
byskupi af Jork, at bonum skal
berast boðskapr berra pafans á
þeiri liátíð, sem bann er beima á
stóliniim, I., 480, 13. — 2. festive
celebration : ok þá fyrstu bátíð,
er þeir béklu sínum feÖr Tbómasi
erkibysknpi at stóHuum í Kancia,
kuunum vær ei greiua með öðrum
bætti, enn sókn með ofPr var svo
mikil, at þótt fátækr tæki með í
GLOSSARY.
S97
Há-tíð — cont.
morgiu því öUu gozi, væri hann
fullríkr at kveldi, II., 194, 9.
Hátíðar-bald, ?«., celebration of a
feast-day^ observance of a festival,
IL, 184,' 17, 194,19, 208,3.
HátíÖis-dagT, m., feast-day, saint's
c?ay, I., 94,4; IL, 206,18.
Há-tíðliga, adv., solemnly, II.,
188,22? 192,22'
Há-tíöligr, ad., solemn, festive, I.,
82, 8, 374, 24, 494, 15, 23.
Hatr (-s), n., hatred, I., 70, n,
112,21.
Hatr-samligr, ad., angry, mad,
funoiis, I., 546,21.
Háttr (háttar, liætti, I., 526, 25),
7n., custom, manner, ivay : ferr
houiim sem háttr er veraldar
höföingja, I., 8, g; þat er háttr
góÖs höfðingja, at reisa kirkjur
ok fyrndar endrbæta, I., 362, § ;
vor Herra kemr meS inörgum
háttum andligrar vitjanar til krist-
ins manus sálii, II., 230,2; ^^^
þar svo skipat, semháttr er heims-
ins, at menn eru mislikir, I.,
270, 21- — 2. habit, mode of life :
hann byrjar nii þann hátt heim-
kominn a föðurgarÖ, sem þeim
er venjiiligt, er fyrir litki liafa í
skola verit, I,, 28,21« — 3. man-
ners, conduct, deportment : liús-
bóndinu er vitr raaðr, ok mcrkir
með sér, at sá bróöir, er Kris-
tianus kallast, hefir ser einn liátt
ok liawersku yfir bori^inu, I.,
248, 22« — 4. manner, fashion :
svá fremr hann ok emba^ttið moð
fögriun h;L'tti,at ölhun varhiigbót
í, er hjá stóðu, I., 102, 2v — 5'
Hattr — conf.
nature, condition : hann greinir
herra páfannm allan hátt á síuu
falH, L, 174, g. — 6. kind, qualify :
er þat ok alsiða miÖil þess háttar
manna, of þoir bafa til tæripeninga,
at þann tíma seiu þeir búa.st í sitt
fóstrland heim vendii, kaupa þeir
gjarna skólabækr, I., 28,25;
bar fyrir mik nokkiit í nótt,
sagöi hann. Á hvern hátt var
þat ? I., 84,2í; margir aörir góöir
menn renna til hafnarinnar, styÖja
skipit í lendingunne, falla framm
ok fagna síniim feÖr með tárum
ok þess háttar orðum : blezaðr
sér þú komiun, faðir fátækra ok
föðurlausra, I., 490, n ; nýr er
þessi háttr dómanna ; kann ok
vera, at hann so eftir nýjum lögum
diktaÖr, I., 186, 13. — 7. degree :
leggr hann likani sinn undir þján
ok þyngslir, föstur ok meinlæti,
meÖ svá miklum hætti, at jafnvel
leggr hann um hríð sjálft altaris
emba^ttið, I., 174, 5 8. mcaiis :
alt er samt ok áðr, hölliu tekr
með öngum hætti, I., 16, q ; fýst
Heinreks konnngs er nú svá heit
í þessu máli, at á eingan h;itt sva'f-
ist hon fyrir slíkar mútbárur, I.,
GCy, 1 ; ef þeim prófast hann meÖ
nokkurinn Iiætti fa^rr, skulii þeir
bjóða honnm ;í konungs fund,
L, 202,9.
Ilaukr (-s,ar), m., a hawk, I., 30, 25 ;
II., 140,22.
Ilauss, ?«., head, skull, T., 516,19;
n.,287,2,,
Há-vaíSi (a), y;í., noise, braicl, brawl-
ing language, I., 24, jg, 336, 23.
598
GLOSSARY.
Há-vetr, m.^ * lúgh-winter^ in the
phrase um h., in the heart of
winter, I., 516, 2V
Héðan, «i/i*., 0« this, 071 the hither
side : æ iunan þriggja, ára skulu
þeir halda einn alinenniligan fund
af öllum klaustrum sama lifnaÖar
f jrir héðan hafit, I., 370, 3. —2.
hence, henceforward: I., 60, n^,
92, 13, 408, 26 ; li« ^^5 henceforth, I.,
156, II ; b. frá, from henceforth,
I=, 526,2; b. ífrá, id., I., 80,25,
526, Q ; h. upp ífrá, id., I., 4, j.
Hef, see hefja.
Heföaðr, jy.p', secured hy right of
prescription, I., 118,-.
Hefi, see hafa.
Hefja (lief, hóf-hófum, bæfi, bafinn),
v.a., to heave, to lift zip : eigi kom
fyrr aftr straumrinn at snúa bjólit,
enn allir limir bins sæla Tbome
bofust úr vatninu upp á þurt land,
I., 34, 2 ; baun befr síí)an upp
bendr sinar til Guðs, ok lyktar
raeð þvi bæniuni, I., 52, 7. — 2.
to translate : vilja þeir eigi lengr
þola, at þeira dýrligaste faÖer
liggi svo lágt í skiiptinne, sem
f}Tst er banu var leiddr, beldr at
baun tignist ok í virðuligan stað
upp befist, II., 196, 19. — 3. to
elevate : enn la yfir otti bæÖi af
konungs álfu ok bans rikismanna,
ef Tbomas eikibyskup er bafinn
til beilagleiks ok jartegna, II.,
70, iQ. — 4. to exalt, to extol : þvi
var bevriligt, eftir reglu Drottins,
at sá bæfist er sik lægði, I., 36, 27 ;
segja svá skipat af feðrunum, at
Guös réttr ok beilugrar kirkju
skal befja konungliga tign, enn
Hefja — cont.
bvergi minnka, I., 338,9. — 5. to
promote, to advance : befja þeir
allir samt til páfadóms sterkan
þrætumann, er bet Octouianus,
I., 90, 26 ; þegar annarr villu-
páfínn Talt, bó£ bann annan, alt
til fjórða manns, I., 92, 5 ; (bann)
býðr sik framm í svardaga til
fylgis með Friðreki keisara, ok
þeim, er bann vill befja ok balda
moti Alexandre páfa, I., 330, 12«
— 6. to set a-going, to advance :
svá mikil var sii eymdar ágirnd
til fjár ok frelsis, er bann bof ok
efldi mot kristnum rett, I., 6, 15 ;
litlu síðar kemr Ro^bert aftr, ok
befr ákall til rikis, I., 6,29. — 7.
to raise, to commence, to begin :
nú sem Tbomas canceler er inn
kouiinn, befr Heinrekr byskup
sitt mál til bans á þessa leið, I.,
76, 27 ; sem þing er sett, er eigi
langt, áðr enn sjálfr beiTa kon-
ungrinn befr sina ræðu á skaða
klerkdómsins, I., 146, 14. Phrase :
befja böfuðs, to lift np one's
head, to show oné*s self ivithout
fear : eingi þorði liöfuÖs at befja
fyrst eftir, II., 271,33. — Med.
to take rise, to originate, to begin :
þar bófst únáðin sem afskap-
ligast mátti sýnast, ok mestan
úfrið kristninni af leiða, I.,
132,9; synist vel fallit, at lysa,
með fám klausum, bversu þat blez-
aða sæti hófst í röksemd valds
ok virðingar yfir öllu Englandi, I.,
40,4; því at áeggjanarorð til
befndabefjast af bans nninni opin-
berliga, I., 512, 26 ; ennlitlu síÖar
GI.OSSARY.
390
Hefja — cont.
sem hiin greiner, meÖ liverju
sottarfar hennar hofst í fyrstii,
kallar hún til sin þær léttakonur,
sem fyr hafði-hún, II., 106,3. —
2. to betake one's self, to bestir
one's self: sjá her nii tlýrÖligan
mann, er fyrir tvö vætti svá ná-
lægrar pínii hefst eigi til flótta eíSa
verndar, I., 520, 27 ; h- undan, to
evade, to resort to evasive means :
konnngr bregÖr á lund sina, svar-
ar urn fatt ok hefst undan, I., 466,
jy. — 3. to presume, to arrogate,
to assume : kæra þegar með hörÖ-
um anda, hvi hann hefist atbann-
setja bysknpana, I., 490, 23.
Hefna (d), v.a., to revenge : konung-
lig ógn kann aÖ vega nogu snarpt
ok hefna sin, ef hann þykkist
harÖliga beiddr, I., 384, 26 ; hælist
hann mikit um, segist hafa hefnt
sin á þeim svikara, I., 434, 7.
Hefnd (-ílv), f.,]n(7iishme?it, aveng-
ing : enn allar þær skriftir i
Englandi, semvárr Herra tók eigi
til sin meÖ bráðii hefnd, skipa
kardiuales npp i sýslur byskup-
anna, sem lilotnast, II., 40, 20-
Hefnda-lauss, ad., un-revenged, I.,
514,3,.
Hefndar-hugr, m., revengeful spirit :
verÖr Heinrekr konnngr við
þessa sögu forliga reiðr, svá at
hefndar-hugr æsir hann framm i
bræÖi mótikirkjunui, I., 320, q. —
2. chastising, punisJiing mind:
enn yðr sé nær ok samrá^r als-
volíhigr GuÖ, leggjandi allan
hefndar-hug lögligrar striÖu upp
á yðvart brjósl, II., 24, g.
Hefndar-sverð, n., sword of revenge,
I., 416,24, ^^^y\S'
Hefta (t), v.a., {to hobble), to curb, to
restrain, I., 164, g. — Med. heft-
ast af, to be restrained from, I.,
204,2,.
Hegna (d), v.a., to punish, to chas-
tise, to rebuke, I., 342, 24.
Hegnaðnr-hamarr, m., hammer of
revenge, II., 2, 19, 286, 27.
Hegnaðr (-ar), m., revenge, see hegn-
aðar-hamarr.
Hegnd (-ar), /., punishtnent, I.,
456,5.
Hegning (-ar), /., punishment, I.,
118.4, 416,27-
Hégóma-dýrð, /'., vain glory, I,,
406, 3, IL, 234, 10.
Hégómi (-a), m., vanity, I., Q^^ j-,
1 / b, 9.
Hégómligr, ad., vain, I., 214, jg; II.,
HeiÖarliga, adv., honourably, xocr-
thily, creditably, I., 284^13, II.,
25o, 22'
HeiÖingi (-ja, jar), m., a heathen, pa-
gan, gentile, II., 18, j^.
Heiðinn, ad., heathen, I., 6, 5, 54, o^,
546, 10.
Heiðr (-s), m., honour, I., 90, 5, 2m,
8, 324,17, 494,11; heiöur, II.,
290, ,.
Heilagleikr, 7n., holy living, I.,
370, 8 ; saintliness, II., 50, jj ;
holiness {the Papers title), I.,
278. 5.
Heilaghga, adv., in a hoi// /n<in)ier,
I., 166,5, IL, 2, JO.
Heilagligr, ad., godly, pious, devout,
I., 280, 07.
400
GLOSSARY.
Heilagr (heilög, heilagt), or/., holy^
I., 8, Y\ ; li* Andi, Holy Ghost, I.,
14, j^g ; h. dornr, a holy thing, a
relic, I., 136, 14 ; h. fræði, holy
lore, I., 18,6; ^' kirkja, I., 38, j.;
h. kristni, I., 38, 5 ; h. likami, a
Sainfs remains^ I., 136
>io? ^^^
undiihyggja, holy artfulness, I.,
46,12' — -• ^^^ ^ snhst. a saint, I.,
16, 2^.
Heili (-a), m., tlic brain, I., 546, 20)
548, 13.
Heili-vágr, in., healing halm, II.,
281, 1;.
Heill, ad,, whole, unimpaired,
intact, full, complete, entire :
her riinnu raargir mot einum,
því at siimir pafarnir fyldu eigi
árit heilt, I., 26, 15 ; enn þat hefir
þami skilniug, at hans lif ok limir
með veraldligii valdi so af þér
lieilir lialdiiir meS öllum þeim
vönum, sem hann vill hafa í sínu
vakli ok riki, L, 218, 14; alia lof-
samliga vana her í landinu viljum
ver halda, heilli vigslu vorri, I.,
152,30; r/)-. 166,21, 346, 11; líÖr
svá út heill máiiuðr, II., 80,26- —
2. ivhole, safe, cured: þegar an
dvöl fylgir sá kraftr nmbandinii,
at þeir verða báöir heilir, II., 80,
26 ; sem þeir koma með skipinu
þar sem hann sitr á bylgjunum,
taka þeh' hann heilan upp í skipit,
II., 210,1. — 3. sound: hverr
mundi þann kalla með heilli sam-
vizku {of sound mind), er brýtr
föður sinn undir bardaga, I., 362,
14. — 4. whole, sincere, upright :
þessi byskup lieitir Gillibert, kyn-
Storr maðr ok klerkr mikill, orð-
Heill — cont.
snjallr ok meðallagi heill manna
Í milium, I., 44,8; Frakka kon-
ungr biðr hann kærliga, .... at
hann skyli mykjast ok taka Thora-
am erkibyskiip heim í land meÖ
heilli sátt, I., 446, ig ; þessi striða
ok stórmæli skulu oil publicerast
ef eigi sættist hann fyrri með heli-
um hug ok alvarligum friði til
Thomam erkibyskups, I., 458, 25.
— 5. wholesome, salutary : því
sér ek eigi likara iitveg honum til
hirtingar, enn ' your skilning ok
skipan leggi honum heilt ráð með
harÖri hendi, I., 280, 1-. ; faÖir er
skyldugr at gefji heil ráð syni sin-
um, með öUu því, sem hann veit
honum hjálpsamligt, I., 322, 19 ;
hvern da^niÖi hann þann sinn win
eramoti snerist heiUikenmngu,II.,
262,32. — 0. hail {in salutation) :
, . . svá at allir fyrir þer kné-
falla, ok svá segja: Heill, herra,
her er sá sem Guð hefir valit, I.,
364,4.
Heilliga, adv., wholly, sincerely,
uprightly, fully : oftliga biðr sá
blezaðr konuno^r, at hvárrtveo:o:i
þeira sættist heilliga, I., 426, g. —
2. to the full extent, in all com-
pleteness, in full earnest : bregða
þeir við báðir sem röskir menu,
sækja Heinrek konung fyrir sunn-
an sjó, berandi honum heilliga
ok stórum einarðliga, hvat er þeim
var boðit, L, 458, 15,
Heil-ræði, 7i., sound advice, whole-
some counsel, salutary admoni-
tion, I., 18,13, 342,1;, 376, 14; II.,
20,5.
CLOSSAEY.
401
íleilsa (að), v. a., to greet, to salute ;
with dat. : vilja þeir lágt eÖr eigi
lieilsa erkibyskupinum, sem þeir
koma fyrir hann, I., 490, 21 ; (þeir)
fara svá snúðigt, at þeir gefa eigi
gaum, {)6tt þeim verÖi heilsat af
nokkunim, I., 522, 22« — loitli ace,
hváiTgi þeira (konunganna) heils-
ar hann {i,e. Thomas erkibyskup),
I., 432, 28 ; ^^1'^ Þ^i^' ^ fiuna
Heinrek konung í Norðmandi, ok
heilsa hann a£ erkibyskups hálfu,
I., 466, Y^' — li' a, to accost, sem
hann er ferÖar búinn . . . geingr
hann ok tekr orlof, heilsar merki-
liga á konungiuu sem í þeira
skilnaði, ok snýst í brutt, I., 64, g.
Heilsa (-u),/., health : her fyrir gefr
honum þá tiUögu einn góðr maðr
ok vitr, at svá sem Guð eflir
heilsu hans, muni hann segja
messu á þriðja daginn, I., 202, 23 ;
hanu segir föður sínum vitran
þessa, ok kveðst hafli styrka von
sinnar heilsu, II., 70,^0. — 2. 5«/-
vatioa, redemption : þá heilsu
sendi Guð siuu fölki, er efter lík-
ams dauÖa á krossinum reisíi
mannkindina til lífs ok Ijóss fiá
eilífum myrkrum, II., 228, 25.
Heilsu-bot,/., cure, II., 72,^2.
Hcilsu-drykkr, m., curing, restora-
tive potion, II., 72, 2«
IIeilsu-gjöf,y!, restoration to health,
II., 108, 5.
Ileilsu-leysi, n., ill health, II.,
88,11.^
Heilsu-níð, n.^ ivholesome counsel,
I., 358,17,
Ileim, adv., home, homeward : þann
tima sem þeir búust í sitt fóstr-
K 541.
Heim — cont.
land heim venda, kaupa þeir
gjarna skólabækr,I., 28, 27 ; skrif-
ar hann ok til Heinrek s sonar
sins heim í landit, I., 6Q, 21 ; sagði
at erkibyskup mætti sváfara heim
sem heiman, I., 340, ^. — Phrases:
sækja heim, to visit : (in prayer),
I., 22, 25 ; sniia heim til (Roms)
Romam peter e, I., 354, iq.
Heima, adv., at home, Í., 100, ^,
178, 11;
Heima-fólk, n., household, household
people, I., 550, ^^
Heima-maðr, m., one of the house-
hold, I., 520, 5. — heima-menn, the
household, I., 268, ^.
Heiman, adv., from home, I., 340, ^.
Heima-seta, f, remaining in quiet
at home, I., 416,1(3.
Heimfarar-leyfi, n., leave to return
home, I., 10, ^9.
Heim-ferð, f, going home, return
home, home journey, I., 64, ^,
132,12, 404,23.-2. departure
from this for the other world, II.,
184,8.
Heimferðar-dagr, m., day of depar-
ture, 2iO>ssion day, II., 200, 5.
HeimferSar-tíÖ, /'., anniversary of
passion or nativity, II., 134,10.
Heimiil, ad., rightful, legitimate ;
in the phrase eiga heimilt, to have
a right to : faðir a heimilt at
gjöra við son sinn, hvárt er honum
likar, I., 382, 13.
Heim-kominn, ad., returned home,
I., 28, 21; arrived, I., 480,23 {of
a letter).
Heim-kvoma {-\x),f, return home,
I., 94,1, 338,26, 472,22.
C C
402
GLOSSARY.
Heim-leiðis, adv., homewards, I.,
462,22; n.,96,15.
Heimligr, ad., worldly, worldly-
mindcd,!., 156, 12? 232, 23*
Heimolligr, ad. = heimoiiligr, I.,
312,,, 314,15.
Heiinonleikr, ?n.,fond7iess, intimate
fj'icadship, intimacy, I., 120, 9,
3/2,19.
Heimonligr, ad., intimate, \., 52, 26)
84,21, 180,1. — 2. i^r ivy, private,
I., 24, s ; h. ráðgjaíi, privy conn-
cillor, I., 36, 5. — as a suhst.,
secretariiis, private secretary,
" tahellio;' I., 30,16-
Heimr (-s, -ar), m., the woi'ld, I.,
68, 17 ; the ivorUVs ivays, I.,
116,5.
Heims-bygð,y!, the inhabited earth,
II., 62,9,84,23.
Heimska (að), v.a., to deceive, to
befool, I., 54, 17.
Heimskr, ad., stupid, foolish, I.,
222, u.
Heimsliga, adv., in a worldly man-
ner, II., 268, 6-
Heimta (t.), v.a., to fetch, to bring
home, to gather : af lians ráði
heimta st svá lan-ðir menu dagliga
bvott frá erkibyskupi, sein ax af
hveitikorni, I., 158, 25 ; b. saman,
to collect, to gather, I., 380,2- —
2. to claim, to demand, to exact :
konuDgs valdi sainir eigi, at
heimta Jivilikt fe með svá mikiili
freku, sem önniir konungs inu-
gjöld, I., 140, 2 ; nil heimtum vér
af y (Sr fjTÍrheitna dygS, I., 378, 1, ;
nema þú tjáir ranglátum ranglæli
sitt, mun ek hans blóð ok líf af
þinni hendi út heimta, I., 424, iq.
líeit (-s), n., a voiv, II., 216,29-
Heita(heit, hét-hétum, héti,lieitinn),
v.n., to hight, to have a name, I.,
4, 17, 12, 9, 26, 19. — 2. to pi'Oinise,
I., ^22, 25, 220,6, 470,1;, 220,4;
h. a, to make a vow to, II., 92, 2,
292, 33.
Heitaii (-ai-), /., threat, I., 528, 235
530, 21-
Heitr, ad,-, hot, warm, I., 14, ig;
ardent, I., 64, 31 ; neut. heitt as
adv., hotly, ardently, I., 108, 1,.
Held, see halda.
Heldr (heldur, I., 488, e), adv., bat,
but also: lierjar eigi á heiÖinii
dóra eðr útlenzka höfðingja lieldr
á hiun saklausa sveÍD, Drottin
Jesum, I., 6, 5 ; pellit merkir heil-
agleik ok fegrð Guös ástvinar, er
eigi at eins frægist um England,
heldr um öU Norðilönd, I., 16, i, ;
(þeir) eru eigi af oss bannsettir,
heldr af sjálfum páfauum, I.,
496, 10- — 2. rather : er hér eigi
langt at biða, áÖr audsvör koma
mót, heldr frammhvöss ok ýmis-
lig, I., 72,6; heldr — enn, rather
than, I., 98,28; any more than,
II., 116,22; því heldr, any the
more, I., 120,3, l^^í 10 ; ^^'^ more^
I., 144,16-
Héldu, héldum, see halda.
Helga-vika,y., holy week, I., 86,30-
Ilelgr, ad., holy, I., 18,19; ^v.hst,
a Saint, I., 542,13-
Hella (t.), v.a., to pour, II., 160,13.
Helt, see haldu.
Helviti (-s), n., hell, I., 254, 12.
Ilelzt, superl. o/' heldr, inost, chiefly,
I., 22, 2Q, 476, 12-
GLOSSARY.
403
Henda (t), v.a. (^properly to have
hand on in throwing and catch-
ing) hence : to catch, to seize, to
coins upon, to befall : eigi þorum
vér þegja, sem þik tekr heuda, I.,
360, 27. — 2. the phrase : lienda
gamau, henda skemtan at, to take
pleasure, find amusement in, J.,
22, ]^9, 30, 25.
Ilendr, see bond.
Heugja(d), v.a,, to hang, TI., 110,ii,
116,9.
Hepta (t), vxi., to restrain, to curb,
II., 265, g, see hefta.
Her, adv., here, I., 16, 2, 18, 15,
26, ij, ; in this case, I., 84, 27.
Hérað (-a^s, -ÖÍ5), n., country-side,
II., 194, 21 ; county, II., 204, 12-
Herbergi (-s), n., harbour, quarter :
þá er Richeus for at sinum erind-
um ok dvelst í Lundúniim, befir
haiin oi'tast berbergi ok góðaii
fögnuð bjá GiUibert viii sinum,
I., 30, 12 ; íyrirkveðr Iionum lo£-
ligr vaui, at ganga fyrir svá ríkan
mann á síÖkveldi ; því bncigir
banu sik til herbergis, I., 50, 23 ;
cfr. 52, 8, 17. — 2. hostelry, einn
tima, sem cauceler dvelst í bans
{the ostler's^ berbergi, stendrbann
upp um miðnætti ok gengrtil ber-
bergis er canceler bafði, I., 54, g ;
ríðr bann siÖan fiamm til Lun-
dúna, ck sem bann sitr þar yfir
borS um kvcldit með sinni fylgd,
kemr einn okunnr klerkr utan
at bcrberginu, II., 104,^3. — 3.
lodging, room,, apartment, cham-
ber : stendr bann {the ostler) upj)
um mifiiiætti, tekr skriíMjús ok
geugr til berbcrgis, .sem canceler
Herbergi — cont.
liaföi, I., 54, 7 ; á bvcrja nott sem
úti var óttusöngr, eru innkallaðir
þrcttán fátækir menn i nokkut
lejniligt berbergi. Í þetta berbergi
gengr sjálfr erkibyskup, I., 98, ^j,
17 ; syslast bonum vænt berbergi
li konungs-garði, eigi langt fra
páfans boll, I., 130,2« — ^* J^'Ouse,
divelling : liafði bann fleira mis-
boÖit i sinni þarvero, böggit skóg-
inn ok smiÖat sér þar af berbergi,
I., 508, 7.
Herbergis-sveinar, m. pl., those of
the {royal) household, bér með
bannfærir bann marga af konungs-
ins böll, bæði ráðgjafa, birÖmenn
ok berbergissveina, I., 418, i^.
Herbergja (ð), v.a., to harbour, to
lodge, to tahe in : því at þann
ilm, er bann berbergði a£ guðligri
ritning, tjáðe bann sinne björÖ
með sætri ok signaðri kenning,
II., 234, 12« — with dat. f þvi at
ekki bjarta uppreists metnaðar
bæð berberger i bonum (? ?), II.,
230, 24. — Med. to j^^d 2fp at :
bonum fráleiddum berr sva til
oftliga, at Tbomas canceler bcr-
bergist í {dví þorpi, I., 52, ^q.
Her-búð (-ar, -ir), f, castle: fell
bann framm i berbúð bimnakon-
ungs{=^ the church of Canterbury)
réttlætisvöndr ok veraldar Ijós,
I., 238,25« — PI' camp, taberna-
cles, " castra " ; J)ii vcizt, bvcrn [)ú
befir kjörit at standa fyrir þínum
berbúðum, I., 31, ^q ; (liann) skrif-
ar sem baröast til berra paiaiis,
at bann standi sterkliga í berbúö-
uni bimnakonuiigs, I., 120, ^ii-
CC 2
404
GLOSSARY.
Heiöa (t), v.a., to harden, to make
hard, harsh, fierce : kæra þegar
meÖ hörðum anda hví hann heíist
at . . , herða bugi manna, ok þó
öngum til bata í sinni tilkvomu,
1.5490,20; þessirnú nefndir herSa
sína liugi, ... at fara sera,flj(5t-
ast til Englands, at taka af lífi
liinn mesta úvin konungsins, I.,
516, 2 ; sjáum nú í fyrstu þá vonda
meiiD, sem hcrtu konungsins bug
með röngum fortölum, II., 52,23-
— 2. to brace ?(j) the mind, to
adojjt a set pui'pose, fixed deter-
mination, mislikar konungi þetta
mótris ok berðir nii þegar buginn
sinu moti erkibyskupi, I., 140, 7;
beimrinn meS sinum kumpánum
berðir sik móti mér, I., 204, ^3 ;
(bann) berÖir sinn bug í moti því
orði Heinreks konungs, er liauu
kallaði Tbómam sælan sæmd sinni
aftignaöan, I., 266, ^. — 3. to
make rigid, stern, severe, austere:
bonum sýndist æ fegra at berða
sitt lif fyrir guðliga tign í öllu
J)ví, er bann mátti, I., 312, 26- —
4. to encourage, to urge strongly :
bann berðir berliga berra páfann
til réttrar frammferðar, I., 456, iq.
Herðr (-ar, -ar),/, a shoulder: ma
af sliku marka,bversu batt illmenn-
it geisaSi því er samkvæmt sitr
milli böfuðs ok berðar, II., 8,17.
— PL shotdders,!., 246, II, 314,ig;
11., 278, 31.
Her-eftir, adv., after this, next, I.,
74,27-
Heremita, 7n., a hermit, I., 8, 3.
Her-fang (-s), n., booty, II., 270,33.
Iler-fanginn, ad,, taken captive, I.,
358,6,418,11.
Her-ferð,y*., armed expedition, war-
fare, I., 60, 15.
Herfiliga, adv., disgracefully, I.,
180,19.
Herfiligr, ad., dire, fell, dreadful,
1,148,5,172,1.
Her-folk, n., warriors, armed host,
I., 516, 20; n., 178,2-
Her-forur, f pi., arms, ivar-equip'
ments, II., 54, 1^.
Her-blaup, n., a raid, I., 546, 15.
Her-vopu, n.,pl., weapons, 1., 180, 20*
Herja (að), v. a., to harry, to make
war, II., 18,1^; b. a, to war
against, I., 6, 4 ; b. upp a, to make
war upon, I., 364, 7.
Her-kastali (-a, -ar), m., a fortress,
stronghold, I., 370, 15, 536,26.
Her-klæðast, med., to put on war
gear, to arm, I., 532, 22-
Her-leiddr, ad., captive, I., 118, n.
Her-]eiðsla,y., captivity, II., 228, 31.
Herma (d), v.a., to repeat, to aver,
to state, I., 356,19.
Ilermd (-ar, -\Y),f., malice, rancour,
rage, fury, I., 170,5, 180,23,
350,23, '^^^? 21*
líermdar-orð, n. pi., harmful, angry
language, I., 226, 1^.
Herna^ar-tol, n. pi., warlike imple-
ments, I., 534, 3.
Hernaðr (-ar), m., warfare, I., 6,4,
182,14, 320,30-
Herneskja (-u, -ur), f., armoury,
arsenal: í bans vald ok vilja eru
náliga komin oil konungs nu'il ok
rikisstjorn . . . gull ok gersimar,
ok allar konungligar berneskjur
GLOSSARY,
40o
Herneskja — cont.
I., 48, 13. — 2. armed following :
SÚ I'iddarlig herneskja, er honuru
fylgir og verndar á bak ok fyrii ,
skal nil lialda hann örnggan fjrii
hverjum manni, I., 502, 9, cfr. 22«
Her-6p, n., toar-cjy, L, 548, 3.
Herra (-a, -ar), m., lord, I., 40, 9 ; the
Lord, I., 40, 12«
Herra-domr, wz., lordship (title), I.,
152, 11 ; ?7tight, power, I., 166, §,
342, ig. — royal office, commis-
sion, I., 296, 13.
Herraliga, adv., lordly, I., 500, j.
Her-skjöldr, m.,icar'shield, warfare,
I., 4, iQ ; military forces, I.,
138,11.^
Her-skrúði, m., accoutrements, mili-
tary equipage, I., 522, 9.
Her-tekinn, ad., made captive, I.,
408, 30; II., 24, 3, 274, 14.
Hertoga-d(5mr, m., dukedom, I.,
92, 15-
Her-togi (-a, -ar), 7n., a duke, I.,
26, 20«
Hertuga-d(5mr, m., duchy, I., 42, jy.
Iler-tugi (-a, -ar), m., a duke, I.,
92, 2- — 2. leader of a host, I.,
170, 1,.
Her-virki, n., havoc, devastation, II.,
180,2.
Her-vopu, n. pi., tveapons, I.,
180,20.
Hestr (bests, -ar), m., I., 32, j,,
Hetta (-11, -ur),/., ^^ cuculla," hoed,
ccivl, I., 314,16,19; II., 111,10.
Hejra (ö), 1;.«., ^o /íí?^;*, tolperccice
through the ear: 1. ?í;2í/í ace:
játta (þeir) þat ok til, at bann
Heyra — cont,
skal beyra bróðr sinn, ef bann
befir sama einlæti á því leikmóti,
er vera skal næsta morgin, I.,
22, 21 ; bvat er bann beyrði nf ritn-
iugum ok lagaddmum, var bonura
tiltækt, á bverri tíÖ, I., 28, 15 ;
'bann er nii innkallaðr, at merki-
liga beyrist af öllii stórmennt,
bvat berra konungrinn opinbcrar
af sinum vilja, I, 66,9; b. til,
to hear something moving in the
direction in lohich one has been
listening: (bann) geugr til ber-
bcrgis er eanceler baföi, gengr inn,
blýÖist um ok beyrir til eingis, I.,
54, g. — 2. to listen to, to give
heed to, to pay attention to : enu
þdtt signaðr Tlidmas vænist Jjar nin
Yottum, at þessapeninga bail kon-
ungrinn eigi léÖ bonum, beldrgef-
it, þá beyrist {jat a cingan vcg, I.,
188, 4; sá ma(5r triiist eigi yðarri
vizku vel lika, er ser einum trúir
ok eingis manns nið vill beyra, L,
274, 23 ; cfr. 276, .^ ; þer samir, at
beyra kennimenn, eun eigi læra,
I., 3G2, 21. — Ger?(nd, beyrandi,
audiendus, I., 76,i8. — v. n. with dat.
of the person, to belong to : þesgi
vöxtr ok klæðabúnaðr beyrir eing-
nm manni ntan bonum einum,
I., 52,15. — 2. to be Jthe property,
business, concern, of: lieyrir yíSr
ok eiukanliga lærÖum mönnum,
at styðja þat mál, I., 78, 27 ; þótt
liennar formaimi beyri moSskyMu,
at kalla aftr jörÖina, u(íar oí-s, at
þat dvelist á vorum dögum, I.,
226, 5 ; nú beyrÖi y^"r vel, vinum
konungsins, at tjá slíkt l'yrir boii-
406
GLOSSARY.
Heyra — cont.
nin, I., 496, 26« — 3« ^^ ^^'^'^? to Jit :
eigi vill hann nii kallast Thomas
erkibjskup, lieldr bróÖir Ivristia-
niis ; ok J)at Dafn heyrir honum
vel, því at Kristianus þýðist Krist-
inn maðr, I., 242, ^ '> Þ''»'í 'i^^^^
tvennr vegr honum heyra, I.,
196, g. — 4. to 2^oint to, to oppli/
to: hverjum, son minn, heyra
þessi orð ? I., 170, 22 ; rennr út
margt folk, sakh' forvitnis, á veg-
inn moti honum ; ok þemi, er iit
fara, ma vel heyra þat er sann*
leikrinn segii-, at GuÖ FaÖir bh'tir
þat oftliga fyrir sraasveinum, er
leynist fyrir spekingum, I., 436,
10» — 5. h. til, to belo7ig to, to be
the duty, concern, business, pro-
perty of: önnur jafnmörg (by-
skupsdæmi) skulu til heyra tveim
byskupum, Eboracensi ok Lun-
chuiensi, I., 40, 22 '■> Þ^^ ^i' svá mik-
it lén, sem Jíeim manni til heyrir, er
kallast barún í riki konungsins, I.,
^^^ ;^o5 hann er ok legatus herra paf-
ans norðr til Englands, at sýsla ok
nmsjá þat, er rómversku sæti til
heyrir, L, QQ, g ; vendir hann um
sinu siðferði . . . sem þeim manni
til heyrir er Skaparann elskar
yfir alia luti, I., 94, ^ ; fyrirbjóð-
um vér öllum yðr ... at sitja
héðan ífrá nokkurn þann dóm, er
minui pei'sónu til heyrir, I.,
206, 1.
Heyrandí (-a, -endr), w?.. hearer,
listener, I., 130, 9.
Heyriliga, adv.,Jit1y, becomingly, I.,
558, 16 ; n., 44, 1.
Heyriligr, ad., Jit, jirofer, suitable
becoming : L, 36, 27, ^4, 20, 274, 12
310,27, 340,24.
Heyrin-kunnngt, neut. ad., known by
fame, rumoured, 1., 128, 12-
Heyru (-ar),/., hearing, L, 294, 13.
Higat, adv., hither, I., 230, j^, II.
285, 34.
Himinn, (-?, -nar), m., heaven, I.
l-lj 9Í II'J 118, 10) 188,12-
Himin-riki, n., kingdom of heaven
L, 44,25.
Himna-konungr, m.. King of heaven
I-j 6,21) 34,8, 156, 17.
Himna-riki, 7i., kingdom of heaven
II., 184,8.
Himneskr, ad., heavenly, I., 14, 17,
60,2, 316, 4.
Hindra (aS), v.a., to hinder, I.
290,10.
Hingað-burðr, m., nativity^ birth, I.
510,2.
Hiugat, adv., hither, I., 20, 2s ; H*
92, 13-
Hingat-burðr, m., nativity, birth, I.
82, 12-
Hinn (hin, hit), .def. art., the, I.
Ö) 5) 14, 1;, 21, ace. pL hinn,442, 24
Hirð (-ar), f, court, I., 30, 19; 11.
8) 18«
Hirð-fólk, n.,peo'ple of the court, I.
190,10,290,9.
HirÖiligr, ad.^ pastoral, II., 226, 13
Hirðir (-is, -ar), tn., herd, shepherd
I., 74, 8, 86, 19, 542, 15.
Hirðr, p.p., kept, protected, scfc, I.
256, 8.
Hirð-siðr^ m., courtly manners, I.
30, 19. ^
Hirð-svcit, f., court, courtiers, T.
166,94.
GLOSSARY.
407
Hirta (t), v.a.^ to i)unish, I., 298, 7,
334, 23j 342, 20«
Hirting (-ar),y., j^unishment, chas-
tisement, I., 30, 27, 1 10, 5, 148, 11,
17» 344, 20«
HirtÍDgar-maðr, m., chastise?-, I.,
362, 1.
Historia,/'., histort/, II., 234, ..
Hiti (-a), WÍ., //eö/, tvarmth, ardour,
I., 316,30,
Hitua (að), v.n., to grow icarm,
hot, ardent, incensed^ I., 264,28»
502,18.
Hitta (tt), v.a., {to hit), to find, to
come upon, to find out, II., 270,
31, 276, 13. — med, hittast a, to
coincide with, II., 288,37. — ^^'<^
yhrase, liitta sjálfan sik fyrir, to
jyay dearly for, I., 530, 27.
Hjá, adv., by, beside, I., 108, ^. —
2. at, by, in the sense of outside,
. not taking parting:. French, ^ hors
de; I., 22, 16.
Hjal, ;?., conversation, discussion, II.,
262,28.
Hjala (S, t), v.a., to talk, to prate,
n., 272, 10.
Hjálmr (-s, -ar), m., helm, helmet,
I., 522,3.
Hjálp (yTV[ '\v),f, help, relief, assist-
ance : svo geingr nú mecS honum
mildi Guðs, at öllum þessum þiggr
lianii einhverjar Ljiilpir í ýmissa
staði, I., 350,3; hann vill baniia
honum allar hjalpir, J)á er liann
reiknar hvern milium sinna livina,
er honum gcrir gott, I., 368, 23- —
2. help, ministry, pastoral care :
skrifar hann til Alexandrum . . .
at hann muni veita honum til
Luncluna f)ann byskup, í ríkinu
Hjiílp — co)it.
er vitrastr væri til ráðagjörðar
ok vænastr til hjálpar öucl ok lík-
ama, I., 44,6; Þ^ ^i' Heiurekr
konungr bað oss, at ver skipaðim
yðr byskupsstól i Lundunum,
bæði til rikisstjóruar, sakir vizku
yðarrar, ok eigi siðr audligrar
hjálpar, veittum vér þat, I., 378, 2,
cfr. II., 265, 20- — 3. salvation :
þetta et saklausa lamb fórnfærÖist
. . . i þeim staÖ sem fórnfa'ri.st
várs Ilerra blóÖ allri krisítni til
hjálpar, II.,22,io.
Hjálpa (að), v.a., to help, to aid, to
succour: — icith dat.'kYmwx Frakka
konungs hefir þat lengi fylgt, at
útlægja eigi saklausa, holdr at
hjálpa þeim sem iitlægðir verða,
I., 270, iQ. — 2. to support by
grounds of reason : enn ef vitr
maðr hugleiðir, hjálpa J)vi máli
sannar greinir, I., 68, 7. — 3. to
save : því hefir byskupinn sig nii
framm meS brefi herra páfans, at
hjálpafólkinOjleiðandiþá til iðran-
ar sem sakaÖir váro, II., 50, j- ;
hvat er nii til ráÖs, sagíSi hann,
svo at ek raegi hjalpast ? II., 128,
op,. — with ace, to save : ein er
allra vor bæn, sem tarin votta,
at {)cr hjalpit hjörð yöra, enn
luindit eigi framm í dauíSligt
forað, I., 396, ^-. — li. til to tend
aid, to afford help, T., 431,2o«
Iljálpar-gjöld, //. pi., reserve fa.res,
subsidiary imposts ; konungs vaJdi
samir eigi, at heimta í)vílíkt fó
með svá mikilli freku, sem önnur
konungs inngjöld, heldr sem atvik
ok rauðsyn beiddi, landsrt)lki til
408
GLOSSARY.
Hj álpar-g j old — cont,
friðar, ok fyrir utau þá skynsemd
krafði eingi skylda at lúka þessi
hjálpar-gjöld, I., 140, g.
Hjálp-samligr, ad., salutary, profit-
able, I., 118,1, 322,20, 368,1,
446, 21 ; II., 188,2-
HjarÖar, -ir, see hjörÖ.
Hjarðar-sveinu, m., shepherd, I.,
402,9.
Hjarta,7jZ. hjörtu, n., heart, I., 18, 13,
74, 7 ; af h., ivith all one's heart,
I., 388,;.
Hjarta-góðr, ad., tender-hearted, I.,
98,2-
Hjartaliga, adv., heartily, cordially,
1,150,,.
Hjartaligr, ad., heartfelt, I., 102, ig.
Hjartauliga, adv., Í7i a heartfelt
manner, dearly, II., 284, 22«
Hjart-teign, /., miracle, 11., 126, 10,
130,12.
Hjartteigna-blom, n., flower of mira-
cles,U., 148,5.
Hjartteigna-fórn, /., offering of
miracles, II., 146, ig.
Hjartteigua-gjörð, /., iccrking of
miracles, II., 196, ij.
Hjol (-s), n., wheel, I., 32, 10 ; wheel
of fortune, I., 156, n, 394,28. —
circumference, round base, II.,
220,23«
Hjon, n. pi., a married couple, I.,
12, 10J12 ; Il'j 228,13.
Hjiiskapr (-ar), ???., married state,
icedlock, I., 254, iq.
Hjörð (lijarSar, hjarÖir), /, a herd,
floch, I., 86, 19, 142, 25 ; II.,
234, 13.
Hjörtu, hjörtum, see hjarta.
Hlaða (hleð, hlóð-hlóðum, hlæði,
hlaðinn), v.a., to load, i.e., to pack ;
her er hlaðit niðr íöllum býskups-
skrúða, I.,24,i3. — 2. to load,to heap
upon, to overwhelm : útlægðr er
nú áÖr erkibjskupinn ok allir lians
fræudi% gózin upptekin, úhlýðni
hlaðin með svá iihevrðum iUvilja,
að bann skal þarnast bæna miðil
kristinna manna, I., 450, 3 ; enn er
Reinaldr hefir svá sagt, mæla þeir
við erkibyskup margfalda fólskii,
hlaðandi brigzli á brigzli, I., 528,2;.
3Ied. tocroiod round, to come home
to: Joessar greinir tjám vér yÖr
eigi sem Jærandi, beldr sýnandi,
hrersu þessar greinir allar hlaðast
at Jdni decau, I., 406, 22«
Hlátr (-S, -rar), m., laughter, I.,
278, 24, 280, g.
Hlaupa (bleyp, hljóp-bjjópum, blypi,
blaupinn), v.a., to run, I., 230, 24 ;
h. iipp, to rush up, to fly into
passion, I., 530, 21 ; b. framm, to
rush en, L, 374, 4, 542, 14.
Hlaupa ri (-a), m., a r up.- aw ay, a
coward, I., 500, ;s
Hleginn, p.j[i. í7/*blægja.
Hleifr (-S, -ar), m., a loaf, II.,
122,2.
Illeypa (t),r.«. {to let run), to send
an express : þat er nii ráös tekit,
at bleypt er nú upp í býinn til
þess ríka manns, er reyndr var at
góöum ráðum, IL, 152, 13. — 2. in
the phrase b. iit {to let leap out),
to thrust, to gouge out, II.,
102,13.
Hlifa (ð), v.a., to save, to sjoare one's
self, I., 142, 22- — 2. to protect, to
2r«7Y/,L, 222*; c, 408,11.
GLOSSARY.
409
Hlífð (-ar), /., protection^ defence^
aid,l., 182,2,208,9; II., 6,3.
Hlífðar-litr, ???., 'colour of defence,''
unreal plea, II., 06,9.
Hlita (tt), v.a., to lean on, to rely
on, I., 218, i9.
Hljöð (s), n., sound, song, strain :
leiÖci þeir hinu signaða Thómam
meÖ sútfeingnum söng, eigi liá-
settum liljóðum, helcli- hörmungar-
fuUum andvörpum, I., 008, 13. —
2. sound, sense, drift,' meaning,
gist: því at svá er hljóð orðaniia,
at ríkisstjórn ok frammferð í
„landinu hafi liann forcljarfat, I.,
144,9. — 3. silence: þar er favluar
feorrÖ heilao-rar kristni eÖa fleckaz
hennar birti þa megrm ver eigi
þat f jrir sal vara lilioði hylja eða
orðalaYst lata, IT., 264
J 35 '
af
hljóði, under cover of silence,
secretly, I., 426, jg.
Hljóöa (að), v.a., to sound, to cry :
eiun af klerkimum heyrir í svefui,
nærri miðnætti, at eiu skærlig
röcid hljóðar þessa tvo versa upp í
loftið, I., 238, 12 ; lians dreyri ok
dauði hljóöar liátt iim alia kristni,
II., 16,4 5 kernr yfir liann rödd,
svá liljqðandi : Tlióraa, Thdma,
kirkja niín mun dýrkast í blóði
J)ínu ; I., 316, 21. — 2. to bear out
a sense, to have a meaning, to
import : enn hversu sem vandlæti
laganna liljóöar, sýnist mér efa-
laust, at i þemia punkt sc harðýðgi
heftanda, I., 194, ^9 ; þar cm ok
með [)cim klerkar, er bcra bref
byskupanna, ok liljúðar þat alt
eitt sem riddararuir ilytja, I.,
49G, 7.
Hljota (hlyt, hlaut-hiutiim, hlyti,
hlotit), v.a., to obtain, to receive
in one's lot, to come by, to come in
for : lyftir margr ma^r til bans
þegar sínu hugarfari, at hann
muni liljota sætiÖ í Cancia, I.,
62, 20 ; þeir hÖfðu ætlað sér þá
tign," er bann blaut, I., 176, 21 ;
íinzt nu fatt til bota flester anauÖ
bliota, II., 291,20.-2. to be
obliged, forced, must needs : þins
mun {3rællinu bliöta þurfa fylgis
niota, II., 293, 7. Med. bljotast, to
result from, to come out of: fyrir
því at ver siam h verso mikit gott
af þessv mætti hliotaz. þa letom
ver þetta eptir yÖr, II., 265,92.
HJotnast, v. med., to be fated, to come
by by fate: nii sem Yilbjálmr,
Reinaldr, Hugi og Eikarðr hafa
lyktað þá grimd ok glæpsku er
þeim blotnaðist af Ijótu lifi ok
illu kynferÖi, I., 546, g. — 2. to
have, to receive a due allotment :
enn allar þær skriftir í Englandi,
sem várr Herra tok eigi til sin
með bráíSri hefud, skipa kardinales
upp i sýslur byskupanna, sem
blotnast, II., 40, 21-
Hlutast, 7ned., in the j^hrasc, h. i,
to join in, to take joart in, I.,
170, 7.
Illuti (-a, -ar), m., part, piece, II.,
112,21.
Hlutlauss, ad., without a share in,
''expcrs," I., 510,25; II-, 10,1c,
50,n.
Illutr (-ar, -ir), in., lot, part, piece,
share : ban 11 suíðr sundr skautaun,
ok bindr sinn lilut upp urn hals
hvorum piltiuum, II. , 80, 21.
410
GLOSSAEY.
Ulntr—cont,
Phrases: eiga hlut i, to have a
share in, I., 120, 4 ; eignast hlut i,
to take part in, I., 546, jg. — 2.
a thing, I., 156, ^q, 220, 13, 344, jg,
510,8.
Hlut-vandr, ad., heedful of one's
share, upright, honest, I., 376, 19.
Hlýða (dd), v.n., to listen : ver
höfum þagat urn stund, ok hlytt
með hógværö, liversu þér byskiip-
arnir vilit skipa við konungligan
rétt, I., 146, ig ; ifyrstu hlýddi
hann athugliga öllu hans eyrindi,
I., 300, 28 ; ver liöfum hlýtt ok
J3agat, ef nokkurr yðar vildi minn-
ast vigslii sinnar ok vernda frelsi
kristninnar, I., 398, 25. — 3ied.
hlýÖast um, to listen inquisitively,
to stand eaves-dropping, I., 54, g.
— 2. to obey : ek var fyrr með
Heinreki konungi hans canceler,
hlýðandi hans boði gott ok ilt, I.,
210, 4 ; her til hefir þú verit vorr
formaÖr ok af því áttum vér þér
athlýöa, I., 218,11.
HlýÖiun, ad., obedient, I., 16, 26«
Hlýðni, f., obedience, I., 18, 28?
90, 22> 148, 8- — allegiance, horn-
age, I., 330, 10,25, 384,29.
Hlykkjottr, ad., ivinding, tortuous,
L,230,i;.
Pllægja, (hlæ, hló-hlógnm hlægi,
hleginn), v.a., to laugh to scorn,
II., 285,21«
Hnara, probably mistake for snara,
{cfr, II., 142, 1 : fálkinn snarar
iipp eftir ehium fugli), I., 32,3.
Footnote 2 withdrawn.
Hne (-s), n., knee, II., 96, 9.
Hnefi (-a, -ar), m., a fist, II., 283, jg.
Hneigja (Ö), v.a,, loith dat, and ace,
to bow to, to make obeisance : eftir
svátala^ hneigir hannkonunginum
ok gengr lit af herberginu, I.,
64, 27. — 2. to bow to, to obey, eigi
er þat vart eyrendi at efla þrætur
. . . sízt fyrir svá ágætum herra,
sem þér erut, hvers boÖi ok banni
oil kristnin hneigir, I., 282, 17. —
Reflexive constructions : hneigja
sik, to boiv down, to bend doxon,
to kneel, I., 542, §, cfr, II. ^
287, 15. — h. s. til herbergis, to
turn, to betake one's self, I.,
50, 28« — Med. hneigjast, to in-
cline: þat var likligt þótt hans
náttúra beiddi, at hann hneigðist
á daginn til nokkurrar hvildar,
I., 108, 11 ; sem þetta bréf Lun-
dúna bysknps kemr í Rom ok
heyrist af herra paflmum, sýnist
sem hann hneigist nokkut til
friðsemdar á konunginn með þess
háttar fortölum, I., 386, 15. — to
be decided : var J)ar í miÖju
frammsett rettlætisvog, með va\gS
eftir atvikum ok reglu laganna,
hversu hvert mál á at hneigjast
sem bezt samir, I., 112,24. — h.
undan, to slip away from, I.,
464,13.
Ilneigc^r, p.p., drooping, I., 438, is.
Ilneisast, med., to suffer shame, I.,
210,1.
Hnekkja (t), to bend back, to beat
back, to check, to rebuff, I.,
464,12.
Hné-liðr, m., knee-joint, 11., 82, 26-
Hneyking (-ar), f., oppression,
degradation, disgrace, 1., 400, j,
11., 274, 20.
GLOSSARY.
411
Hneyri (-a), m., a sneeze, I., 52,5.
Hneyxli (-s), n., shame, scandal, I.,
164, n- ,
Hniga (hnig, hneig-hnigum, hnigi,
hnigiun), v.n., to come clown, to
come to ruin, I., 80, 20« — 2. h.
fjrir, to yield to, I., 84, ^g.
Hnita (hnit, hueit, &c.), v.n., to
hit, to touch, to strike against,
L, 382,9.
Hnútr, (-S, ar), on., a knot, I.,
112,15,118,7.
Hnýta (tt), v. impers., to suffer from
bumps and contracted siiieivs^ II.,
82, 26«
Hnöggva (jyret. hnögg), vm., to
stumble, I., 164, 30, II., 286,4.
Hc5f, see hefja.
Hof-fdlk, n., courtly people, courtiers,
I., 106,18.
Hof-garÖr (-s), m., royal court,
. palace, I., 30, §> 116, 14.
Ilof-lauss, ad., measureless, immo-
derate, exorbitant, extravagant,
L, 302, 25, 506,28.
Hof-list, /., courtly parade, I.,
142,19.
Hof-menn, m., pi., knights, I.,
248,10.
Hof-samligr, ad., moderate, L, 888,9,
368, 8, 450, 21.
Ilof-samr, ad., calm, quiet, I., 188, 13.
H(jf-semd (-ar), f., moderation, I.,
100, 19 ; 152, ig ; abstemiousness,
I., 178,3; quietude, quiet com-
posure, I., 536, 13.
Hofu, hofum, see hefja.
Ilófum, dat. sing, of luir, I.,
Ilóg-bærr, ad., calm, I., 310, j^.
Hóglífis-maðr, m., a man of retired
habits of life, a recluse, I., 2, 15.
Hogliga, adv., lightly, gently,
calmly, I., 382,8, 530,9.
Hog-lyndi, n., calm temper, gentle
disposition, I., 384,24, II., 267,32.
Hóg-værÖ (-ar),/., quiet demeanour,
calmness, I., 7G, 3 ; moderation,
self-control, I., 194, 1.
Hógværðar-maðr, m., a man of
meekness, I., 396, iq.
Hóg-væri (-s), /., meekness, lowli-
ness, I., 394, 20, 492, 3.
Hógværis-regla,/., rule of courtesy,
L, 36, 10.
Hóg-værliga, adv., lowly, humbly, I.,
210,20.
Hóg-værr, ad., calm, I., 162, 13.
Hoi (-s), n., holloicness from sup-
puration, IL, 98, Q.
Hold (-s), n., flesh, I., 220, .5, IL,
96,10.
Holdgan (-ar), /!, incarnation, I.,
240,9.
Holdligr, ad., fleshly, I., 20, 14.
Holf (-s), n., a vault, vaulted roof,
II., 114,9.
Holligr, II., 270. 28- See holdligr.
Hollr, ad., gracious, ])roj>itious,
GuÖ sé mér h., so help me God,
I., 530,23.
Hora (að), v.a., to commit adultery,
L, 166, 3.
Hór-dómr (s), m., whoredom, adul-
tery, I., 254, 1 J, 366, g.
Ilorfa (0), v.n., to look : enn aMrir
horfa npp á {look to) sjiilfra sin
áviiiniiig, I., 76, 15 ; rinnit [mnn
maiin, or yÖr flýi, [)ví at viíS skal
ek taka ok horfa í GiiÖs hardnga,
I., 532,3; horfa vitS, to look
412
GLOSSARY.
Horfa — cont,
round, to look about, I., 478, y. — 2.
to face, to turn toioards : f)essir
fara með væpntu liði, at vakta
þær hafair, sem þeim þykkir von
erkibyskups ok einkanliga þá
vík, er Dorobernia ;heitir, ok
beinast horfir moti Flandr, I.,
484, 8 ; heir hann upp höndina
svo at handarbakit horfer at
skrininn, II., 220, g. — 3. to
point, to tend, to ahn, to look
out: enn mi. er at sjá til Eng-
lands, hvat þar horfir til mikilla
tiðinda, I., 60, 20 ; enn er erki-
byskup sér, hversu horfir, grunar
hann um, at kerling muni hafa
fengit nokknrn ávital, hverr maðr
hann er, I., 250, ^i ; einkanliga
sýnist þeim öllum samt þungliga
horfa þat, er svá stendr millnni
Inta, at erkibyskup kasserar þeira
appelleran, I., 410, § ; sem þetta
heyrir jarlinn af þeim stað, er
Bononia heitir, hversu ófriðliga
horfir, I., 484, j^, horfer þat ei
væuliga, II., 150,7. — 4, to re-
gard, to heed: ok þeir sálugir
menn horfa litt á sina úhæfu,
I., 190,23.
Horn (-s), n., a horn, I., 476, 9, jp
Hosta-kyn, n., cough, I., 52, 5.
Hot (-s), n. pL, threat, I., 286, 22?
394,15,436,16,530,2; IL,263,9.
— 2. regard, consideration : mæla
þeir alt eftir konungs vild, segja
ekki utan virðingar hot ok guð-
ligum soma hvergi mot er kon-
ungrinn vill hafa, I., 336,29-
Hot, n., a ivhit, a trifle, kveiktizt
kur en Ijotc kappa GuÖs aa mote
Hot — cont,
siðar synu bote, a whit later, some
time thereafter, II., 290,35.
Hdta (aÖ), v.a., to threaten, I.,
174, 29 ; II., 6Q, 26.
Hotan (-ar, -ir),/., threat, I., 162, jg?
394,21.
Hdtanar-orð, n. pL, threats, I.,
392,3.
Hrapa (að), v.n., to tumble, II.,
140,9.
Hrapan (-ar),y., destruction, down-
fall, ruin, I., 70,15, 306,25, 340, n-
Hrein-ferði (-s), n., purity, I., 418, 23.
Hrein-fei'ðugr, ad., of chaste con-
versation, I., 30, 24.
Hreinleikr (-s), m., purity, chastity,
1., 2, 23.
Hrein-lifast, v, med., to lead a chaste
life, I., 50, 5.
Hrein-lifi (s), n,, chaste manner of
life, chastity, I., 20,22, 50, 15, jg.
Hreinlííis-maðr, m,, a man of pture
/i/í^, I., 312,23; II., 224,1^.
Hrein-lifnaðr, m., pure living, con-
ventual life, I., 364, 12'
Hrein-lifr, ad., chaste, I., 54, 15 ;
pure lived, of conventual habits,
II., 182, 15.
Hreinliga, adv., in a pure, chaste
maimer, II., 284, 2.4.
Hrein-lyndr,o!f/., upright, II., 148,i6.
Hreinn, ad., clean, I., 94, 19; II.,
216,13.
Hreinsa (að), v.a., to clear out, to
sweep up, to empty : enn er le-
hirzlan var náliga hreinsut, legst
Viliijálmr konungr í hernað, I.,
6,3. — 2. to cleanse, to purify,
I., 174,22, 430,9, 510,20; il.,
42,13,226,1,.
GLOSSARY.
413
Hreinsan, (-ar), /*., cleansing, lieal-
iag, II., 86, jg, 222, 7.
Hressast, mccl., to revive, to recover,
n., 274, 21.
Hreyta (it), to hurl, to scatter about,
I., 546, 20.
Hríð (-ar), /'., prop. ^ pvecclla,^
hence ; a while, I., 52, 27, 56, 13,
80,19,524,6.
Hriiida (lirind, hratt-hrundum,
liryndi, hrimdinn), v.a., to thrust,
to push: si^au liriuda þau búkii-
um aftr í fenit, II., 120, ^9. —
fig^t to drive, to push on : hrindit
eigi sauí5um Guí^s á villi-stigii, I.,
406, 1. — h. brott, to repel : enn
hann vildi, sem varÖ, öllvm þeim
ovenivm brott lirinda, sem höfð-
ingiarnir höfóu aðr leitt vpp a
kirkivimar ska'ða, II., 286, 35. —
2, to reject, to disqualify : þann
sé ek eingan hit í bans fari, at
honum hrindi, ok eggjandi vil ek
vera, at hann se kjörinn, I., 76, n.
— 3. to spurn, to scorn : sa guU-
penningr, sem veröldina lokkar
ok dregr með megni, er í þessum
stað hataðr ok hruudinn, I.,
116,10.
Hringdr, p.p., rung, I., 82,9; II.,
188,22'
Ilringr (-s, -h), in., a ring, II.,
154,11.
Hripsa (aÖ), v,a., to snatch, to rive,
to seize, II., 271,9.
Ilris-runnr, m., bush, II., 120, 15.
Ilrista (t), v.a., to shake, to bring
to tremble, I., 200, 15.
IlrúÖr (-s), ?n., ])7aise, I., 22, 21-
Hrosa (að), v.a., to boast, to glory
in, 1., 154, ijj.
Hrukka (-u, ur),/., a crease, a fold,
L, 232, 9; a wrinkle, II., 287, 33.
Hrumr, ad, decrepit, II., 292, 31.
Hrummr, ad., id., II., 82, 7.
Hrygð (-ar, -ir), /'., sadness, sorrow ^
grief, I., 80,21,24, 200,23, 340, n ;
II., 10, 10.
Hrygðar-mál, n., matter of sorroio,
II., 30, 21.
Hrygg-bjúgr, ad.^ bent, crooked, I.,
234, 13.
Hrygg-dreginn, ad., suffering from
spine curvature, II., 138, 20-
Hryggihgr, ad., sad, sorrowful, I.,
308, 2- — woeful, grievous, I.,
318,24.
Hryggja, (ð), v.a., to grieve, I.,
374,10.
Hryggr, ad., sad, sorrowing, regret-
ful, I., 240, 1.
Hryggva, (Ö), v.a., to grieve, II.,
50,7 (278, 1).
Hrynja (hryn, hrundi-hrimdum,
hryndi, hruninn), v.n., to drop,
to tumble, to rush down, I., 156, j.
HræÖa (dd), v.a., only in the med.
hræöast, to dread, to fear, I.,
536,16,- II., 110,25, 292,,.
Hræðiligr, ad., fearful, terrible,
dread, II., 18,23.
Hræðsla (-u), f, fear, fright, I.,
404,16.
Hræ-fugl, m., ^carrion bird,' bird
of prey, II., 142, 26-
Hræra, (ð), v.a., to stir: sa djöfuls-
hmr stcytir sverðsoddinnm niðr í
hausinn boraÖan ok hrærir blóðit
meíi heilaniim, I., 546, 20 > hingat
stígr nú GuÖs engill niSr af
himni, at hræra tjörnina í Ilierú-
salem, II., 80, ly. — 2. Jig., to stir.
414
GLOSSARY.
Hræra — cont.
to stir up^ to agitate, to disturb :
SÚ grimd ok ágangr með ýmissri
umleitan, er Heinrekr konungr
brærir móti Thomasi erkibyskupi
hristir nú þegar raargs manus
bjarta, L, 200,^5; hægir hógværi,
enn liótan hrærir, I., 394, ^i >
(þeir) kæra þegar rneð börðum
anda, bví hanu befist at bannsetja
byskupana, . . . ok bræra svo
alia jörð með ófriði sinna framrn-
ferða, I., 490,25 ; vaiia vildi bann
skilja sik með öllu blutlausan af
þessu verki, mest fyrir þaun ótta,
er margar meingerðir erkibyskups
befði brært bann til nokkurrar
bræÖi, II., 10,18; býðr baun, at
J)ér greftið Thómam svo sæmiliga
bjá sínum forfeðrum . . . bér í
Kancia, sem eingiu sturlan um aldr
befði brært bans lífdaga, II., 12,15.
— Z. to move : prestr skal af-
tignast siuui sæmd, ok bræra aldri
sinn fót út af iðranarbúsi, I.,
144,2; crkibyskupinn er stiiddr
af Helgum Anda svá fast, at
bann brærist bvergi úr sporum,
I., 540,17. — ^^9' {of t^f'C affec-
tions) to move : ástin . . . brærði
björtu {3eira at sækja sem fyrst
lands ok lagar svá blezaÖan föður,
I., 258, 16« — Bejl. b. sik, to bestir,
to betake one's self] II., 100, 1.
Hrærðr, ad., moved, touched, II.,
68,2.
Hræring (-ar), f., commotion, I.,
144,i, 196,18.
lliæsni, f., boastftdiiess, hypocrisy,
T., 98,29, 178,4; II., 8,11).
Hræzla (-u), f,, fear, fright, I.,
544, 2, 556, 17. See also bræðsla.
Húð (-ar, -ir), f., a hide, skin, II.,
120,19.
HúÖar-sala, /'., sale, disposal of a
hide, II., Í22, 6.
ílúS-stroka (-u, -ur), f., flogging :
svo ferr til at Pbilippus er dreg-
inn undir opinbera búðstroku, I.,
144,15, C/>. 222, 18. — 2. /«í7e/-
lation, baun deyddi sinn likam
ok sitt börund með bárklæði ok
búðstrokum, I., 104,29, cfr, II.,
36, 11, 62, 19.
Hugar-angr, n,, sadness, dejection,
I., 308,6; n., 66,16.
Hugar-far (-s), 21., thought, way oj
thinking, niind, I., 62, 20? 1^2, 5.
Hugar-kraftr, ?;«., strength of mind,
stoutness of heart, firmness of
purpose, I., 36, 24, 206,13; IL,
4,5;
Hug-astir,/!, pi,, fond love, heart-
felt affection, loving-kindness, I.,
238, 23.
Iliig-boð, n., foreboding, II., 160,3.
Hug-bót,y., change of mind for the
better, I., 308, 14. — 2. spiritual
comfort, I., 102, 25.
Hugðar-maör, m., attached friend,
IL,6,7.
Hug-dirfö, f, courage, daring, I.,
58,2«
Hug-djarfr, ad., bold, brave, stout-
Jicarted, II., 1 16, i>.
Hug-fastr, ad., fixed in the mind,
in the phrase : bonum er bugfast,
he is determined to, II., 214, 25.
Hugga (að), v.a., to comfort, I.,
54,289 56,7, 1'2, 6, 508,17; II.,
66, 20.
GLOSSARY.
41,
Huggan (-ar),/., comfort, I., 174, jo,
288,12; II., 66,21.
Hugganar-efiii, «., cause, matter of
comfort, II., 68,4.
Huggari (-a), m., comforter, II.,
2, 21.
Hwg'gx'^i, f., kindliness, I., 274, 1,
compassionate disposition, sf/m-
pathy, I., 456, ig.
Hug-kvæmiligr, ad., memorable, I.,
308, 4.
Hug-kvæmr, ad., to he recollected,
to he home in mind : hann lætr sér
hiigkvæmt vera, hversu forfeðr í
Kancia höfðu röksamligir verit
í simii inngöugii, I., 84, 7, cfr.
1 10, ij. ; of a nature to remind :
meistsri sá, er þetta komponeraði
meÖ latíuu, segir sæmiliga hug-
kvæmt hafa vorðit til dæmis,
livcrsu Satliau líkti sik örlátan á
fjallinu forðum, I., 472, 13.
Hug-lauss, ad., faint-hearted, I.,
500, 7.
Hug-leiða (dfl), v.a., to consider, to
ponder over, to turn one's mind,
one^s attention to, I., 34, 3, 68, 7,
88, 10, 134, ,^, 136,21, 146, 19,
178,31.
Ilug-lciöing (-ar),/., contemplation,
I., 102, 13,
Hug-næmr, ad., icorthy of being
remembered, I., 342, u.
Ilugr (-ar, -ir), m., mind, I., oG, ^,
134, 19, 100, 22- — vcríSa annars
liugar vi(S, to he taken aback, 1.,
250, 3 ; hugr segir um, tlie mind
forbodes, I., 462, 2-
Hugsa (aÖ), v.a. and n., to think,
I., 50,23, 54,3; to assume, I.,
100,11; to mean, to intend, I.,
Hugsa — eonf,
540, 13 ; to ponder over, II., 48, ^ ;
to look after, to keep loatch on,
II., 162,10.
Hugsan (-ar, -ir), f, thought, I.,
54, 5. — 2. purpose, intention, I.,
70,5,162,2.
Hugsíiuar-tími, m., time for con-
sideration, I., 292,12.
Hug-skot (-s), 71., mind, spirit, I.,
14,13,20,23,38,1,^,102,2.
Ilugskots-auga, n., mind's eye, I.,
234, ,.
Hug-sterkr, ac?., courageous, stout-
hearted, II., 1 10, 19.
Hug-stæðr, ad., that stands fixed
before the mind, ever memora.ble,
L, 112,2.
Hug-vit (s), n., understanding,
talents, parts, abilities, I., 28, 10,
232,29 ; II., 288, ig.
líug-þekkr, ad., acceptable to one's
mind, favourite, I., 266,28-
Hulda (-u),y., secresy, I., 522, jq.
Huluing (-ar), f., cover, veil, I.,
196, 12.
Hum (-s), n., twilight, I., 52, 1.
Ilunang (-s), n., honey, II., 70, q,
Huuangligr, ad., honeyed, I., 102, 3 ;
n, 112, 2.
Ilundr (s, -ar), m., a dog, I., 234, iq ;
II., 22, 11.
Huudrat, n., one hundred,!., 100, 7.
Hungr (-s), n., hunger, II., 180, 17.
Huugraudi, pr. p., starving, II.,
88,11.
Hurð (-ar, -ir), /!, a door, I., 534,9 ;
II., 270, 10.' ' •
llurr, m. {hurry), excited report, I..
202,1«.
416
GLOSSARY.
Hús (Lúss), 7i.f a Jwiise, liomc, I.,
192,5; — a religious establish'
ment, I., 138, 13.
Hús-bondi, m., a host, I., 54, 3,
248, 13 ; a master, II.. 76, 23?
280, 22-
Hiis-bÚDÍngr, ?/^., furniture, ap-
pointments, I., 548, 19.
Hús-frejja, /., the ' Freyja ' o/ the
house, goodwife, mistress, II.,
_ 116,23.
Avi'i-ivú,/., goodivife, I., 12,9; II.,
152,24.
Hús-karlar, 7n. pL, household, I.,
172,13; II., 263,19.
Hiis-preyja, /., = húsfreyja, II.,
126,15,150,6.
Hvað, hvat, neut. of a lost pron.
hvar, interr. and indef, what. —
1. interr. : hvat leiigra, ivhat
more 7 I., 68, 2 ; hvathefir at þýða
þessi varjgðargrein ? I., 86,15. —
2. indef, what : hvat herra kon-
UDgrinn opinberar af sinum vilja,
I., %%, 9 ; hvat er, xchatsoever :
at hóglífismaör hafi uærheudis
hvat er hann girnist, . . . af þraut
ok þohnmæði þessa píslarvotts,
I., 2, 16 ; hvat er hann heyríi af
ritningum . . . var homim tiltækt,
á hverri tíð er hann vildi frammi
hafa, I., 28, i^. — Adv., after
verba sentiendi et declúrandi^ how:
sjám nú þNÍ næst, hvat líðr lands-
stjón, I., 26,12; ^^^ ^i' ^^ ^J^^ til
Englands, hvat þar horfir til mik-
illa tíömda, I., 60, 20; ^jám . .
hvat líðr sendiboðum, I., 70, 17 ;
eingi . . skal . . á hann kæra,
hvat hann hefir staðit, eðr með
konungs gózi farit, I., 80, iq.
Hvaðan, adv., whence, I., 290, 14.
Hvar, adv., indir. interr. where,
I., 48, 14, 214, 7 ; passim.
Hvárki, adv., neither, I., 58, 6, 94, 21,
358, 26-
Hvárr (hvar, hvárt), j^^'^n, indef,
cither, each, * utér ' ; sem þeh'
framm koma, taka hvárir silt
embætti, I., 72, 1 ; jpelra í milium
var svá mikil ástúð, sem tveggja
ná-stæðra manna, hvárt sem þeir
voru dauli^a báðh' samt, eðr sér
hvárr, I., 120, 21 ; fvi skrifar
hann sitt href hvárum þeira, I.,
356, 11 ; er nú skipan á komin,
því at sin herbergi hafa hvárir,
I., 434,25 ; maðr 1 munkabúningi
sitr undir höfði haus ok styðr
sinni hendi hvárn veg at höfðinu,
II., 60,11. — 2. pron. indir, in-
terr. : lohich, ivhat, what hind of:
(Gillibert) segir hann Ijsa því i
sinum vanmetnaSi, hvárt hugarfar
hann hafði, I., 208, 22-
Hvárr-gi and hvárgi, pron. indef,
neither : konuilgr er ungr, ok
erkibyskup eigi gamall, ok því
hefir hvárgi her vissu yfir, I.,
168, 9 ; er Ijost af þvi sem eftir
ferr, at livárgi þessarra snerist til
bata, I., 358,28; báðir nú likir
með stygÖar yfirbragði til Thómam
erkibyskups, því at hvárrgi þeira
heilsar hann, I., 432, 23.
Ilvárki = hvárrgi, I., 84, jg, 286, g,
358,26-
Hvárt, adv., whetlier, I., 42,2, ^^Ö> i2j
120,20, 192,14.
Hvárr-tveggi and hvár-tveggi, pron.
indej., both, * uterquc^ I., 26, 13,
GLOSSARY.
417
6>
Hvárr-tveggi — cont.
50, io> 36, 14, QQ, i8> 68, 22j 120,
410,19.
Hvass (livöss, hvasst and hvast),
ad.y sharp, edged, I., 212, s ; II.,
220, 23- — J^9'i fieen, penetrating,
I., 28, 10.
Hveiti-korn, a., a grain of ivheat, I.,
1*^8,28? II'? 58,23«
Hvellr, ad., clear - sounding, II.,
26, 5 ; loud- sounding, thundering,
I., 118,4; hanging, II., 140, iq.
Hverfa (hverf, hvarf-hiirfum, hyrfi,
horfinn), r./i., to turn : h. aftr, to
return, I., 8,13, II., 275,3; h. briitt,
to turn aicay, to vanish, II., 68, 3 ;
h. burt, to go abroad, II., 293, 15 ;
h. frá, to depart from, I., 100, ig
(492, 10) — abs., to vanish : þá
er hirðirinn hvarf, dreifðust sauÖ-
irnir, I., 170, 15.
Hvergi, adv., nowhere, I., 472, 24 ;
in no direction, I., 538, ig.
Hverr and hver (hver, hvert), j^row.
interr* and indef — 1. interr.,
who : hverr mundi nú trúa því,
sem flyzt af yðr ? I., 334, g. — 2.
indef., who, what : þú veizt,
Drottinn minn, hvern þú hefir
kjörit, J., 34, 9, hæfir oss, eftir
voni viti at gera yðr kunnigt,
til hvers vér erum sendir á yÖarn
fund, I., 282, 13. — b. ivho,
2vhich, * c/ualis ' ; sálin hvarf aftr í
líkam, at bocSa þeim, er enn lifði,
hverr dauði honum var handviss,
I., 8, 18 ; orðsnild hans var ok svá
fallin, at mikit la undir löngum,
hver jar upptektir voru á hafðar,
ef haun talaÖi með ríka menu, I.,
36, 12 ; birtist ok hverir þeir voru,
K5il.
Hverr — cont.
þá er brestrinn kom, at brjota kon-
ungsins vináttu, I., 66, 19 ; eiginui
raun hefir hann ok profat, hvert
ottaefni stendr í hjá konunginuni,
I., 80, 16 ; hugleiÖ heldr, hverr þii
vart, er þú komt í veraldar Ijos,
I., 364,1. — c* ^öcA, everi/ one :
syndist góðfúsum mönnum nyt-
samligt, at setja samt í eina bok
. . . þat er af hverra orðum hæst
berr, I., 2, 14 ; verðr . . . þykk-
settr stiginu í loganum, þá er
hverr erfir annan í úleyföum hit-
um, I., 8, 9 ; segir, at likt renn-
anda vatn mundi fljota af hennar
kviði, sem GræÖarinn sagði Sa-
maritane hvern flytja mundi til
hins eilifa lifs, I., 12, 21; þekkr
ok þýðr hverjummanni, I., 16,27;
hvat er hann heyrði af rituingum
var honum tiltækt á hverri tíð,
er hann vildi frammi hafa, I.,
28, ig ; upp frá borðinu stóð hann
í hvern tíma heldr vanraettr enn
ofmettr, I., 106,30; skoðar hann
. . . hverja forsjo cðr beneficium
hverjum hann megi veita, I.,
110,26; Heinrekr konungr gerir
sik svá mjúkan, at þeir er friðinn
leita, kjósa upp á hverja grein,
I., 460, 19.
Ilvers-daghga, adv., every i/r/y, II.,
284,28.
Hverso, adv. = hversu, I., 490,27-
Hversu, adr., how, I., 8, og.
Hvert, adv., whither, 11., 11,22,
291,17.
Hver-vetna, adv., everywhere, I.,
530,5; II., 272, 9.
Hvi, adv.y why, 1., 78, 7, 300, 9, 360, 14.
D D
418
GLOSSARY.
Hvíla (d), V.05., to give rest to, to
rest : legst hann niÖr í sængina
fyrír tvenna sök, þá aðra, at hvíla
nokkut mæddan líkam, I., 230, ^.
— i'.n., to take rest, to rest: jar-
tegiia blom hins virÖuliga Thome
pislarvotts, er hvilir í Kancia,
mun brátt nálægjast, II., G6, ^q. —
Med., to rest : I., 242, ^, 488, ^;,
510, 12; n., 228, 13. — 2. to pause :
sem her er komit tölunoi, hvílist
hanu litla liríð, enn leggr si San til
þessi orð, L, 280, jg.
Hvikl (-ar, -ir), /., rest, I., G2, 2,
108, 10.
Hvilikr, pj'on. interr. and iiidcf.,
which, what, ' qualis,^ I., '66, 39,
130, 9 ; II., 206, 3.
Hvirfill (-s), m., the top of the head ;
hence: apex, top, the highest point,
II., 176,2,.
Hvirfil-viudr, nh, a lohirJwind, I.,
1 82, 8.
Hvisl, n., lohisper, II., 8, g.
Hvisla (-11),./"., id., II., 272, ^^.
Hvitasimnu-dagr, w., Whitsunday,
I-j ^Ö, 29-
Hvít-fyssi, a., foaming rapids, I.,
oJj j2*
Hvitr, ad.,iDhite, I., 84, jg ; 94, jg; II.,
226,26.
Hvortveggi = hvárrtveggi, I.,
5o0,24;n., 86,1, 220,29.
Hyggja (bygg,hugði-hugöum, hygí5i,
liugat), v.a. and n., to thinh, to
imagine : sem haun er feriSar
búinn, ok hyggst bafa oil sin
eyrindi, geingT bann ok tekr orlof,
I., 64, 5 ; byggi þér, berra ábóti,
sagði hann, at eingi megi Guði
lika an yÖrum sið ? I., 76, ^. — 2.
Hyggja — cont.
to suspect, to misdoubt : vottaiSi
þessi maÖr, .... bverja dygð ok
guSbræðslu hann hafði fundit meÖ
sælum Tbóma.si móti þvi sem
flestir bugðu, I., 52, 21 ; svá próf-
aÖist í sannleik, at sá er breinlifr
ok siðlátr, er grnnsamr maðr
bugÖi sér likan, I., 54, ^g ; eigi
tekr hann Dorobernensem sem
Tondir menn bugÖu, beldr fær
bann þá sömu böfn, sem bann let
fyrr iit af, L, 488,28- — 3. to
think, to dream : siðar dreymdi
bana draum an nan : bon bngðist
koma til Kirstskirkju foar i Lund-
linum, I., 12, 23 ; hann biigðist
drekka, ok kendist svá sætt, sem
bunang væri, II., 70, 5. — 4. to
be disposed toivards : fekk bann
löngu skilt bversu stormenni i
Englandi bugÖi bonum ílátt, þótt
fagrt léti, L, 58, ^^' — 5. to in-
tend : her mættist fyrirætlan Guðs
ok nndirbyggja Heinreks kon-
nngs, at þat sama verði Thómasi til
dýrkanar, er konungrinn hugði
til glatanar, ok þat kristninni til
uppreistar, er haun hugÖi til biap-
anar, I., 70, ^,, 15. — JVith prep.
b. af, to give up a thought, to im-
agine not, I., 538, 25. — h. at, to
apply one^s mind to, I., 168, 20?
240,4, 262,20, 11., 269,17.
Hyggja (-n), /., thought, mind, II.,
269,27.
Hæð {-Q.v),f,fig., height, exalted
position, eminence : bann treystir
eingum sinum undirmönnum til
þeirar réttvisi, at þeir standi ú-
balHr í þeim bæðarmuu, sem nú
GLOSSARY.
419
Hæð — cont.
sýndist í milium konungs ok erki-
byskups, I., 286, ^^. — 2. exalted-
7iess, highness, elevation : hver
lians lífsbók, sem lesin varð, Ijóð-
ar enn leynir eigi, hver hæðar-
skuggsjó ok höföingja spegill
liann hefir veritformönnumkristn-
innar, I., 2, 21 ; ^^^^^^ dýrðligr
dauÖi er honum í Guðs auoJiti meir
til vokliigrar hæðar, enn nokk-
nrrar minkamir, I., 554, ^q ; natt-
vro skynsemiunar hæð, high
talents, II., 269, 5. — 3. highness
{as a title) : Heilagr faðir, segir
hann, yÖarri hæð ok heilagleik til
lieyrir aftr at kalla ok endrbæta
.... hvat er kristni Guðs ok al-
miigamim verðr til áskilnaÖar, I.,
278, Q. — 4. elation, haughtiness,
pride, superciliousness : þvímerk-
ir sæti predicanar embætti, at sá
sem aðra lærer skal likjast sitj-
anda manni, lærðr íjvqv Guðs
augliti, an allri hæð ok hégóma-
dýrð,II.,234,i6.
Hæðiliga, adv., shamefully, II.,
174,20.
Hæðiligr, ad., shameful, heinous,
wicked, II., 130,3.
Hæfa (ð), v.n., to fit, to suit : sá
bróðir geymir at iiokkuram lut
fátækra manna f e, sem þessu mann-
tali hæíir, I., 100,2; Þ^* (Þi^g)
sem hann heldr í Turon hæfir
þessum stað sögunnar, I., 122, jg ;
þeir sjá lykla marga einhvers
staðar á múrinum ok bera til
livern at öðrum, þar til portinu
hæfir, I., 222,25. — 2. to behove:
i varygö ok vitru hæfir yÖr at
Hæfa — cont.
leiða þá persónii í faðm heilagrar
kirkju, er þér kjósit henni til for-
manns, I., 80, 2 ; meS þvi at þér
erut skipaðir várt höí'uÖ ok herra,
bæfir, at |)ér haldit upp svörum
fyrir oss, I., 150, j^ ; látiÖ mik
lieldr beva krossinn, þvi at svá
hæfir, I., 210, 22-
Hæfi, see hefja.
Hæfr, ad., proper, becoming, I.,
90,21-
Hægendi, n., holster, pillow, II.,
278, 30.
Hægja (ð), v.a., to case, to assuage,
to sooth, to still, I., 192,27,
394, 20-
Hægliga, adv., easily, I., ooO, 20-
Hægr, ad., easy, light, I., 376, g. —
conip. hægri, easier, i.e. right, the
right hand : hann vill sýna Guði
ok mönnum sitt bægri bandar
umskifti, I., 84, -, cfr. 106, g,
254, 13 ; b. vegr, right hand side,
1.5 554, ^.
Hælast, med., to boast, to vaunt, I.,
180,8,434,7.
Hæll (-S, -ar), m., the heel, II., 271,
19 ; fara á h., to recede, to retire, to
give way, I., 206, jo-
Hærra, (bæra, II., 212, 15), adv.
comp., higher, I., 24, 17 ; 7nore
decided, more pronounced, I.,
oKJ^j 28*
Hætta (tt), v.a., to risk, to venture,
(á,til), I., 498,7, 468,26-
Hætti, bættir, see háttr.
Hættliga, adv., perilously, danger-
ously, T., 32, 13 ; II., 168,26-
D D 2
420
GLOSSARY.
Hættligr, ad., fraught with danger,
dangerous, perilous, I., 86, ^q, 14,
340,^,396, 11; IL, 10,23.
Hæverska (-u), /., good manners,
I., 248, 22 5 civility, kindliness,
courteousness, I., 474, jg-
Hæverskliga, adv., courteously, I.,
268,5.
Hæverskr, ad., courteous, polished,
I., 3/2, 12-
Höf, see liaf.
Höfðingi (-gja,-gjar), m., lord, chief,
I') 2,21) 6,5, 48,9, 5^8,15.
Höfðingja-dæmi, n., lordship, pri-
macy, I., 166,7.
Höfðingja-lauss, ad., without a ruler,
vacant, I., 6, 24, 134, 7, n, 296, ^^.
HöfÖings-skapr, ??i., primacy, I.,
40,19; lordly ways, I., 178, n ;
guardianship, patronage, I.,
222,29.
Höföu, liöfðum, 5ee hafa.
Höfgi (-a), m, heaviness, slumber,
L, 14,8.
Höfn (hafnar, hafnir), f., haven,
port, harbour, I., 280, ^, 484, g.
486, 11.
HöfuÖ (-s), n., head, I., 506, 34 ;
með höfÖum, headlong, I., 46, 3.
— 2. /ie«i/, c'^z*?/', I., 150, 13.
Höfu^-borg, /*., capital city, L,
20,7.
Höfuð-faðir, w., patriarch, II.,
224, 5.
Höfuð-kirkja, /*., cathedral church,
I., 86,22, 494, IP,.
Höfuð-listir, /1 jo/., principal arts,
L,20,5.
Höfuð-sár, /2., wound in the head,
I., 554, „.
Höfuð-smiðr, in., head smith, master
Wright, II., 220,21-
Höfut-garðr, m., chief residence, I.,
60,17.
Höfiit-glæpr, m., enormous crime,
I., 456, 14.
Höfut-kirkja, ^ee höfuð-kirkja.
Höfut-staðr, m., cathedral see, I.,
124,21.
Hogg (-s), 72., « bloiö, I., 542,20;
ri., 22,e.
Högg-orusta (-u, dat., hoggoröstu),
f, pitched battle, II., 174,2«
Höggva (liögg, lijó - hjuggum,
hjöggi, höggvinn), v.a., to hew,
to cut : setti hann öxi á einn
skjótinn ok hjó a£ brott rofuna,
I., 508, 4 ; hinir sækja at grimm-
liga, berja ok bölfa, höggva hurðir
ok brjóta, I., 534, 9. — 2. to loound
by slashing: tekr hún lindahníf
sinn ok höggr á herðarnar, II.,
116, 19, efr. ] 18,1. — 3. to deal a
blow, I., 544,1,7; h. framm, to
come down sword in hand, II.,
16,2.
HokuU (-s), m., a mass-hackle, a
chasuble, I., 208, g.
Höldum, see halda.
HöU (hallar, hallir), f., a hall,
palace, I., 16,4,6,30,8-
Holt, höltu, höltum, see haltr.
Höliim, see hali.
Hönd (bandar, bendr), f, hand, I.,
20, 18 ; meÖ haröri hendi, sum-
marily, I., 320, iq; kjosa ser til
handa, to choose, to take in hand,
to have on hand, I., 340, 21 ; eiga
fyrir höndiim, to have awaiting,
to have in store, I., 424, 4.
GLOSSARY.
421
Höndla (að), v,a., to lay hand on :
samlíkjast þessi orð voriim Herra,
Guðs Syni, þá er Gyðingar höndl-
öðu hann, I., 540, 4. — 2. /ic/., to
seize y to take hold of: skrifar
til herra páfans, tjándi bæÖi
mjúkliga ok þó einarðliga, hvert
missýni höudlaði hug herra
páfans, I., 414, § ; sér hanu þegar,
at konungrinn er höndlaðr með
harmi nokkurum, I., 438,1;. — ^^
to treat, to deal icith : hverr sá
bjskup eðr aiiuarr maðr, er meS
yðr stendr leugr, skal svá höndl-
ast sera konungs svikari, I.,
218,3,- Í þaiiu tíma . . . voru
þeir . . . svo höudlaðer ok haldn-
er sem konungs svikarar, II.,
166,2.
HörÖ, see harðr.
Hörðu, hörðum, see harðr.
HörmoHga, adv., woefully, griev-
ously, II., 16, 5.
HörmuÖu, see harma.
Hörmuligr, ad., sad, sorroioful, I.,
418, 26 ; 508, 18 ; woeful, grievous^
I., 196,3,238,20 5 miserable, II.,
134,21.
Hörmum, see harma.
Hörmum, see harmr.
Hörmung (-ar, -ar), /., grief, great
sorrow, I., 424, 1. — 2. calamity,
II., 6, 20 — 3. dreadful deed, I.,
520, 17.
Hörmungar-efni, ??., cause of grief,
II., 12,21.
Hörmungar-fuUr, ad., sorrowful, I.,
558, 13.
Hörmungar-grein, f, grievous af-
fair, II., 52, 10-
Hörmungar-lauss, ad,, without sor-
row, I., 356, 19.
Ilörmungar-orð, n. pL, lamenta-
tions, II., 272, 9.
Hörmungar-tíðindi, n. jjL, sadneivs,
I., 454,1-.
Hörund (-s), n. (prop, skin), flesh,
L, 104,23; II., 72, 16.
Hörönd, id., II., 216,13.
I,i.
I, prep, with dat, and ace. — A. loith
dat. — I., local, indicative of sta-
tionary condition. — l.in, within,
{the notion of harrier or limit
implied) : i luktri borg, I., 50, 5 ;
Í föðurhúsi, I., 28, 20 ; i vöggunni,
I., 14,23; Í brjosti, I., 118,11.—
b. {the notion of barrier or limit
being absent) ; in : í kristninni,
I., 2,5; Í landi, I., 4,22; Í loga-
num, I., 8,9; Í veginum, on the
way J I., 256,
13'
e. about,
throughout : í ölKi Englandi, I.,
48, 23 ; hugsar hann at her muni
hkr heimr ok í öðrum stööum, I.,
116,5 ' segjast vita,hverir konung-
Hgir vanar hafa verit í Englandi,
I., 166,26' — 2. pointing to an in-
directly local state : in : i húminu
sér hann at frammi fyrir muster-
inu Hggr maör, I., 52, 1 ; svimr í
leik veraldarinnar, I., 72, i^ ; vera
Í útlegÖ, I., 112,10. — 3« i'ldicativc
of possessive relations, and tech-
nically circumscriptive of the
gen. — a. subjective ; in, i>t\ as
422
GLOSSARY,
— cont.
to : digr í vexti, I., 14, 2 ; blíðr
Í ásjónu, yfirbragði, I., 18, ^,
28, 10 ; g'öggr í allri grein, I., 20, 1 ;
hvass í hugviti, ástuðigr í allri
viðræðu, skoriuorÖr í formæli,
I., 28, 11, 12 ; fljótr í sinni lund, I.,
36,9; forsjáll í sínum orðum, T.,
36, 10 ; í hans fari, I., 76, n. — b.
objective ; in : er fullgildis Llut
mun eignast í sögu þessi, I., 28, ^.
— 1)1 abstract connections. — 1.
possessively/ : — a.f]'o?n a subjective
point of view ; in, ivithin : er í
hans valdi svá tæra ríkum sem
fátækum, I., 48, -^- ; yðr í hendi
leikr tvíeggjat srerö, i e., ihe au-
thority of Cathedra Petri, II.,
16, 18« — h.from an objective point
of view : Heinrekr styrkist nú
Í konuDgs valdi, I., 8, 5. — 2.
medial — a. in a subjective sense :
hann er Yorðinn kunnugr í svá
vanstiltri tuiigu, by, through such
a 10 anion language, I., 144, g ;
byrjar haun í sínu andsvari þá
grein fyrsta, by his ansiocr he
first attacks, I., 300, 30 ; í varygð
ok vitru hæíir yðr at leiða þá per-
sónu í faðm heilagrar kivkjii, i.e.,
by the aid of Sfc, I., 80, 2- —
b. in an objective sense : i Guðs
lofi, God permitting, I., 2, j^g ; í
þessu orði gjörir Guð byskupinn
svá þöglaLi, by, at this word, S)^c.,
I., 280, J ; ver væntum í Guði
at heilög kristni forðist fyrir
vorar ger^ir niðrfall, by God=
by God's mercy, I., 404, 22« —
3. implying condition, after verbs
signifying to be, to remain, to
—cont.
continue, to abide, to dwell, S^c. :
sem hann var smásveicn í sauða-
geymslu, I., 18, 22? frequent. — 4.
collective ; in : í þeiri (samknndu)
er hundrat fatækra manna, I.,
100, g. — II. temporal. 1. sug-
gestive of a moment'' s duration ;
in, at: í augabragÖi, I., 32,23;
Í fyrstu, I., 300,28; í óttu, I.,
50, 29 ; Í vígshi sinni, at his coro-
nation, I., 282,27 5 ^ hans andláti,
I., 10, 20* — 2. o/" protracted
duration; in, during : í mannsins
nppvexti, I., 18,3; Í barndomi,
during childhood, I., 18, 21 ; í
hans þarvistar dvöl, during the
continuance of his sojourn, I.,
20, 10 ; Í rénan, a-waning, I.,
52, 28 ; Í fulltíða aldri, at the age
of ripeness, I., 252,27. — B. ivith
ace. — I. local. — 1. indicative of
inotion : into : hverfa í sitt föður-
land,I.,28, 27, geingr erkibyskup
Í sitt herbergi, I., 108, g ; drifr
folk saman í einn stað, I., 72, 23 ;
venda i veg, I., 68,3. — 2. indi-
cative of condition or state : setja
Í varöhald, I., 8, 2 ; kemr i hans
rum, I., 12, ^; kemr í staÖinn, I.,
50, 26 ; sálin hvarf aftr í líkam, I.,
8, 18- — 3. in abstract relations :
into: kemr ser í hans þjónustu,
I., 36,1 ; var nauíísynligt, at sa
leiddist Í málit, I., Q'^, 21 > Þ^*
reunr i samþykt, sem sýnist sundr-
ligt, I., 100, 26' — 4. in a dis-
tributive sense ; into : hann leysti
sundr í liðu alt þat flærðsemdar
net, I., 302, ^ ; sa hugr sem dreif-
ist
1 margar
ok ymissar fjöl-
GLOSSARY.
423
I — cont.
skyldur, leiðist fljótt ok stundum
blekkist, I., 412, 93 • — 5. the
notion of motion being altogether
absent; in, for the purpose of:
efldi liann kkiustr af grimdvelli
Í sæmd bins signaða Stephani, I.,
10,5. — 6. in a vicarious sense ;
in, for(^= as an equivalent of) :
tempran þá, er hann vandist at
hafa, . . . virða þeir í þaun
liégóma, &c., I., 178,9; várr
Herra þiggr eigi rán í sína fórn,
II., 56,11. — ^' adverbially: í
stað, at once, instantly,!., 24:, q',
instead of: haun hefir ok þjón-
iistii Í stað erkibyskups í fjrra
fótaþvætti, I., 100,3; with verbs,
excepting those of motion, it cor-
responds to the Engl, therein :
hvert efui her rniin í vera, I.,
250, 2 ; þykkir vandi nokkr í vera,
I., 252,1, &c. — II. temporal;
in, at, Í anriaD, í þcnna, tíma, I.,
12,8,56,16, 46,15; í Þ^tta sinn,
þenna punkt, I., 32, 13, 66, 4;
í nótt, last night, I., 84, 23? í
dag, to-day, I., 202, 12 ; í morgin,
in the morning, II., 194, 12.
Iblástr, m., inspiration, II., 192, 13.
Ið, see inn, indef. art., I., 548, 24.
lÖja {-\x),f, business, task, occupa-
tion, II., 146, 13.
Iðju-leysi, n., idleness, I., 108,9«
Iðu (-ar, -ir), f, occupation, busi-
ness : Í þeiri sýslu . . . var cinn
falkiner klokr á þess háttar iðn,
II., 140,21- — 2. ivorh, paform-
ance {literary) : fleiri enn einn
eðr tveir . . . hafa skrifat . . .
líf ok lofsamligar mannraunir
Iðn — cont.
. . . Thome . . . hafa þær iðnir
farit sem verða kann, at þat er
einn setti fiamar ... let aunarr
um líða, I., 2,g. — 3. undertaking,
deed, task : enn þótt þér kjósit
yðr svá afekapliga iðn, at stríða
kristnmni, I., 400, 2-
Iðran (-ar), /*., repentance regret,
L, 110,6, 142,10,408,25,420,1.
Iðranar-hús, n., penitentiary, house
of coi-rection, I., 144,3.
Iðranar-psálmr, m., penitentiary
psalm, I., 228, 23.
Iðrandi, ^jar^ pres., repentant, I.,
410, 21 ; «5 a noun, in., a peni-
tent, II., 226, ij,.
Kuliga, adv., frequently^ I., 44,3.
l-fra, adv., from, I., 76,6-
Ifalaiiss, ad., not doubting, without
misdoubting : ok til þess, at her
um sertii ifalauss með öUu, skal
ek fa þér ii. votta, er kirkjan skal
sýna þér á morgin, at hún er
vígð, II., 132, 19.
Ifalaust (ifvalavst, II., 278, 20), neut.
of ifalauss, as adv., without
doubt, undoubtedly : þat triium
ver ifalaust, at hvárki haíi veröld-
in heyrt no vitað, at her til hafi
nokkurr Cantuar. erkibyskup
verit svá dæmdr, I., 186, ig.
Iiir-girnd,y., over-tveening ambition,
II., 247,37.
I-huga (að,), v.a., to consider,
to ponder : þessi maSr ilivgar
drauminu, II., 278, 13.
Ill-ger(S, /'., evil deed, misdeed, I.,
2^28,,, 516, 1;.
IllgerMar-maSr, m., evil-doer, mis^
creanty II., 18, 13.
424
GLOSSARY.
lU-girnd, /!, evil desire, malice, I.,
214,29.
lUgirndai-hjortu, n. pi., hearts full
of malice, IL, 88, ^y.
Illgirndar-hót, n, pi., malicious
threats, I., 506, 23.
Ill-girni,y., malice, I., 176, 13.
Illing (-ar), f, corruption, II.,
274, 2;.
Ill-menni, n., a wicked man, II.,
lUr, ad., evil, corrupt: oftliga kemr
á eitt mot góðr vili Gu^s ok illr
ok vondr vili manns, I., 70, g,
c/)-. 274,20.
Illræðis-maðr, m^y evil docr^ mis-
creant, II., 138, 26«
Illsligr, ad., malignant, virulent, II.,
96,10.
lilt, n., of illr, as a noun, evil:
þeir rangt skilja meS ilium vilja.
Be a£ pafaligu valdi svá hirtir, at
þeir snarist frá illu ok geri gott,
I., 274, 21, cfr. 358, 13.
Ill-vili, m., * ill-ivill,' malice, hatred :
úhlýðni hlaðin meÖ svá úhejrð-
um illvilja, aÖ hann skal þarn-
ast bæna miðil kristinna manna,
I., 450, 4 ; corrupt mind, per-
versity, ivickedness : sá er ein-
sýnn, er sér með hugviti hvat
er fremjanda væri, enn iUvili
blindar hann, svá at hann hafnar
andligu lífi, I., 232, 30.
Ill-viljaðr, ad., * ill-willed j' tvicked,
L, 360,1.
Ilmandi, pj-es. part., fragrant,
odorous, sweet, I., 16, 9, 104 21;
IL, 200,13.
Ilmr (-s), m., fragrance, odour, I.,
234, 3 ; II., 234, 12-
Ilska (-u), f., badness, perversity^
unnaturalness : sumir rægjahann
fyrir eina samau ilsku sinnar
úlýðsku, I., 176, 22' — 2. malice,
hatred, ill-will : hvert þat brugg
ilskunnar, er í þeim brauzt móti
Thómasi, var sannliga móti krún-
unni, I., 6Q, 21 ; enn FriÖrekr
keisari ferr svá ofdrukkinn með
ílskunni, at þegar annarr \t11u-
páíinn valt, hóf hann annan, alt
til fjórða manns, I., 92, 5 ; enn
hvat leggr konimgrinn her í mot,
utan þat sem hann hefir nægst,
þat er öfund ok ilska, I., 368, 10»
— 3. ivickedness, iniquity, im-
morality, vice : ok vel ma segja,
at þeir lær^irmenn, sem nú ganga
mjök afskeiðis í Englandi, eru
stórliga frammlútir til ilskunnar
I., 142,4.
Ilsku-fuUr, ad., full of evil, fraught
tvith trouble : sannliga sýnist mér,
at þessir lutir væri svá haldandi,
sem þer, herra Heinrekr, hafit
sagt, ef ilskufuUir timar væri eigi
svá harder uppá OuÖs kristni, I.,
194,16.
Ilsku-grimd (illsku-), /., savage
atrocity, II,, 272, 29.
Ilsku-þoka, /1, gloom of wickedness,
II., 46, 26.
Inn, adv., in, into, I., 16, ^7 ;
passim.
Inn (in, ið and it),=hinu, indef.
art., the, I., 548, 24 ; II., 262, 23, 24-
Innan, loc. prep, with gen., within,
I., 36, 2, 260,28 ; i- haudar, within
hand, i.e., handy, easy, 11., 140, 1.
Innan-lands, adv., within the land,
I., 20, 6.
GLOSSARY.
42,
Inn-b}TðiSj adv., on board, II.,
210, 8.
Inn-dæll, ad., delightfid, I., 28, u.
Inn-ganga, v.n., to enter, to pass
through: hygg at, hversu likzt
liefir þröngleiki kirkjuunar . . .
fordyri á Kristskirkju í Liin-
dúnum, er kviðug Mailld mátti
eigi innganga, II., 62, 3 ; ok þar
er auðfundit, at fæð er inngeingin
með honum, I., 436, ^.
Inn-ganga, f., entry, strengir þú
aftr Hfs inngöngii fyrir þér
sjálfiim, I., 424, ^^. — 2. accession
{to the archiejnscopal office') :
hann lætr sér hugkvæmt vera,
hversu forfeÖr í Kancia höfóii
röksamligir verit í sinni inngön-
gu, I., 84, 9 ; enn þótt mín inn-
ganga til GuSs embættis sé mér
harðla óttaulig, þorði ek eigi því
heldr at gefa erkistólinn í vald
Heinreks konungs, L, 306, ;l-.
Inn-gangr, m., advent, beginning :
föstii inngangT kemr at hendi
" adest caput jejimii,^^ II., 285, 9.
Inni, adv., within, I., 20, 12«
Inniliga, adv., carefully, minutely,
exactly, II., 273,4.
Inn-kallaðr, /?./?., smnmoned in, I.,
66,8, 76,21«
Inn-kominn, p.p., ' come in,^ intro-
duced, manifest, I., 284, 7.
Inn-Ieiða, v.a., to lead in, to show in,
to take in, to introduce: moti lysing
eru innleiddir aðrir þrettán fátæk-
ir, I., 98,31. — 2. to accept and
act upon, to adopt: þyrmit með
þoliumæði, þótt áminningar yðrar
sé seinna iuuleiddar til friðai' ok
Inn-leiÖa — cont.
frammkvæmdar, enn þér vildit,
L, 340, 9.
Innleiðsla (-11), y., leading, shoxoing,
taking in, introduction : er sú
misgrein þessarrar innleiðslu
tvennrar, at í siðari gefast eigi
penningar, I., 100, 4. — 2. inno-
vation, novelty : svá mikil var sú
eymdar ágirnd til fjár ok frelsis,
er hann hóf ok efldi mót kristnum
rétt i Englandi, at af þeim inn-
leiðslum, siðleysum ok óvönum
leiddi svá margar limar, at niargs
manns líf dróg til iitlegðar, I.,
6,16-
Inn-renta, f, income, revenue, J.,
296,25.
Inn-sigli, n., seal, I., 48, 2, 168, jg.
Inn-verliga, adv., in a cordial, heart-
felt manner, II., 265, 24.
Inn-virÖuliga, adv., carefully, I.,
268,13; hindly, sympathisingly,
478,4.
I-nog, adv., enough, plentifully, I.,
100, 8 ; sufficiently, I., 430, p
Irlands-ferðjy.,^^?^'^^^/ to Ireland,
II., 34,10.
I-staða, /., position, office : lierra
konungrinn Iiafði vald at frjálsa
Thömara bæði af stétt ok ístöðu,
Itur, ad., excellent, noble, II.,
291, iQ.
Ivanar-lauss (zrifanarlauss), ad., not
doubting, confident, II., 280, ^g.
426
GLOSSARY.
Já (ð), v.a., to set I/ yes, to give con-
sent to: hverjum, son miun,
heyra þessi orð ? Kétt yðr sjálf-
iim, raÍDn herra, . . . er jáðuð
at halcla {3á bölvaða koniingsins
vana, &c., í. 170, 23.
Jafn, (jöfn, jafnt), ad., equal, I.,
06,4.
JafnaD, adv., ahvai/s, 11., 76, 23-
Jafnast, v. ?ned., við, to equal, to
match, I., 546, 9.
Jafn-brátt, adv., fort hicith, I., 14, 9 ;
j. sem, as soon as, I., 52, ^3.
Jafu-framm, adv., at the same time :
biðjum]vér jafnframm, at þér sam-
þykkit vorn vilja í Guðs uafni,
I., 78,5; þat geymir vakrliga
Lofiiis konungr, at á liverri stefuii
er Lauu heldr við Heiurek kou-
uDg, lætr hanu jafnfrair.m vera
Thomam, I., 426, g ; together
ivith : taki þér yðr til fylgdar
einn af vorum heimolliiiiim möiiii-
um jafnframm því bréfi, er vér
skrifoöum til Englauds, I., 464, g.
Jafn-langr, ad., of equal length, II.,
234,22-
Jafn-margr, ad., equally many, I.,
40,22.
Jafn-raikill, ad., equally great, II.,
266,8.
Jafn-saman, adv., together : nv
treystomz ver yðarri vitzko her
vel vm at þer leggit stvnd a við
konvnginn vm allt þetta jafn-
saman, II., 266, 1 ; er eigi þa betra
Jafn-saman — co)it.
ok kasta þa helldr farminvm til
lifs monnvni helldr en allt tyniz
jafnsaraan ? II., 268, 5.
Jafnn-skiott, adv., equally swiftly,
II., 278, 23.
Jafn- vel, adv., even, L, 20, g, 24, ^^.
Jam-framm, adv.,=^]sLfnh\, j. sem,
as soon as, II., 74, jg.
Jam-vel, = jafnvel, adv., even so,
even in the same manner, II.,
144,26.
Jarða (ð), v.a., to inter, to bury, II.,
271,2,.
Jarðar-kot, n., cottage, II., 126,4.
Jarðar-skaut, n., corner of the earth,
II., 26, 10.
Jarð-fólginn, ad., buried in the
earth, hidden, concealed,!!., 86,;.
JarðHgr, ad., of the earth, earthly,
!., 14 5,220,28, 378,26; icorldly,
worldly minded, !., 236,6.
Jarðueskr, ad., earthly, !., 20, 20 ;
secular, !., 220, 24.
Jarð-riki, n., the earth, the world,
L, 14,12; II., 42, 23, 132, 14.
Jarl (s, -ar), m., an earl, L, 8, jj.
Jar-tegn (-ar, -ir), /., a miracle, I.,
4, 4 ; IL, 64, 2-
Jartegna-bl(5m, n., flower of mira-
cles, II., 66, 9.
Jartegna-gerð, /., worhing of mira-
cles, II., 92, 10.
Jarteign,/.,=jartegu, II., 74, ^
Játa (að), v.a., to say yes, to
assent to : þessu játar konungrinn
blíðliga, at þat má gjörast utan
hans forþykkju, L, 462^;, 464,8-
— 2. to concede : spyrjandi með
röksamligri einorð, hvárt eignir
þær ern lausar, er hann játaði á
GLOSSARY.
427
Játa — cont.
sættarfundinum, I., 466, ^g, cfr.
466, 9. — 3. to promise : heilagr
Thomas hafÖi játað honum, aÖ
vígja húsit, enn þar til unnust
lionum eigi lífdagar, II., 132,3.
Játari (-a, -ar), m., confessor, I.,
552,1; XL, 288, 31.
Játning (-ar), /*., confession, I.,
310,16,438,30; H., 40,ii.
Játta(-tt), v.a.: 1. to affirm, to vow,
to declare : (þeir) játta þat ok til,
at hann ska! heyra hróðr sinn, e£
hann hefir sama einlæti á því
leikmóti, er vera skal næsta morg-
in, I., 22, 20- — 2. to confess : því
játta ek, at vesall glæpr færir
þau þyngsl at heilagri Guðs
kristni, sem hou þolir í Englandi,
I., 306,7; ok ek játtar því, at
mín kynferð er eigi af konunga
ætt, I., 400, 27. — 3. to assent to,
to consent to : leyndri guðs þolin-
mæði . . . játta ek, þótt mjök
óttandi, I., 82, 7 ; þar með for þat,
at ek játti meirr þeim vanda móti
mínum vilja fyrir koiumgsins
skyld, I., 306, 14; enii seudiboðar
yörir vildu því öngii játta fyrir
yðra hönd, er þeim þótti Guðs
rétti nokkut hættligt, I., 340, g. —
j. sik undir, to profess obedience
to, I., 234,7; j. sik framm ; to
appeal to, I., 296^ n.
Jat-yr^i, >«., consent, I., 80, 12-
Jok, joku, SfC, see auka.
JÓ1, 71. pL, Vide, Christmas, I.,
508, 15.
Jóla-boð, n., Vule-feast, I., 512, 21.
Jos, josii, i^c, sec ansa.
Jung-frii, /., the Virgin,!., 18, ig,
84,1,.
Jöfn, jöfnn, jöfnum, see jafn.
Jöfnuðr (or jafnaör, gen. jafnaöar),
m., comparison : því eru þeir
tveir menn vel teknir til jafnaðar
sin Í milium, hinn beilagi Sebas-
tianus ok þessi Thomas, L, 54, jg.
3 '6v'6{]'díi^m',]?íV^\Y),f.,earth, ground :
ser hann at frammi fyrir musterinu
liggr maðr til bænar framm -fall inn
alt til jarðar, L, 52, 3 ; hann tok
or jörðu heilagan likam Eðvarðar
konungs, I., 136, 10. — 2. the
earth : her eftirjsýndist klerkinum,
sem myrkr ok þoka þröngdi
jörÖina, I., 236, , ; yðarri posto-
ligri tign er handfengið vald á
himui ok jöröu, II., 16,13. — ^*
' land, ' estate, farm, : skutlar
jarÖir ok eignir kirknanna ok
dregr undir konungsgarð, I., 6,1,),
cfr. 118, 10; karl bjo . . . þat
var ein auÖigs manns jör^, er
hann leigði ok liggr við skogaruef
nokkut, II., 118, j,.
K.
Kaf(-s, köf), n., subjucrsion, plunge,
dive : þegar sem piltrinn hafði
tekit eitt kaf af þeim fyrsta stcyt,
er honum varpaði, skaut honuni
hatt upp iir sjonum, II., 208, j,;
hence : the deep itself: sem biist-
iguU kemr iil sjofar, hleypr Iiuiin
á kaf, ok kom ahbi upj) sí^all,
I., 230, 21-
Kaf-fcriS,/!, subnicrsion, J I,, 208, jy.
428
GLOSSARY.
Kafna,
v.n..,
to he
drowned,
II.
162,
u-
Kaldr
(köld,
kalt),
ad., cold.
I.
552,
13 •
Kalekr
(-S, -
ar), m.
, chalice,
CifJ)
552,7; IL, 68,29-
Kalendarium, n., calendar, II., 84,^2.
Kálfr (-S, -ar), ?n., a calf, II., 120,5.
Kalinn, p.p.^ fig. chilled, torpid,
II., 50, 20-
Kail (-S, köU), w., call, cry, II.,
162, 19.
Kail, karl (-s, -ar), m., a carl^ churl,
n. 118,13,15.
Kalla (aS), v.n., to call, to call out,
to litter a cry : sdú til iðranar,
kallandi með bans (Davíðs) rödd,
I., 366, iQ. — 2. to utter, to say,
to declare : vel ma svá kalla, at
cardinales geingi með þrætum í
tvo staði, I., 272, 5 ; enn þat, er
þér kölluðuzt appellera oss til
herra páfans, virSum ver, . . .
sem þér hafit með öllu þagat, I.,
406,27- — v.a., to cally to name:
konungrinn veitir lionum serliga
til aftektar . . . þat ríki, er jiýiv
iiienn kalla bariiniain, I., 06, 9 ;
viljum ver vikja nefnilega vorri
ræðu til þeira ólifismanna, er þér
kallit klerka, enn ver köUum því
verri erm úlærða menn, sem þeir,
&c., I., 148, 1, 2 ; fyrir utan erki-
byskups tign munum ver kall-
ast yí5rir jafningjar, I., 220, ^ ;
kann vera, at nokkurum sýnist,
sem þessi bók megi með réttu kall-
ast ein ok samhaldin ásjána, &c.,
I., 4, 3. — 4. to call, to beckon, to
fetch : konungrinn talar þá ok
kallar hann aftr til sin, I., 64, 7 ;
Kalla — cont.
býðr hann í stað, at sú fylgd, er
fara skyldi með canceler til Eng-
lands, kaliist inn fyrir hann, I.,
66,3 ; er svo lofsamligr hans vani,
at hann sendi skosvein sinn at
kalla fyrr nefndan klerk, I., 100,24«
— 5. to * call,' to cite, to summon :
enn um morgininn timanliga kallar
konungrinn sitt ráð, bh-tandi þeim
bréf ok beiðslu erkibyskups, I.,
270, 1 ; f)vi at til þessa valds
kallaði mik eigi lögligr kos^ningr,
I., 306, 12« — -^'i various phrases :
k. aftr, to reclaim, I., 118, jg,
226, g ; to call bach into former
state, to restore, I., 278
J 5'
k.
Í moti, to call out in answer, to
cry again, II., 124, 2. — k. saman,
k. samt, to call, to summon to-
gether, I., 122, jg, 240,^, 414, 29.—
k. til, to ' call in,' I., 182, 23. —
k. til sin, to call aside, I., 248, g^.
— at kalla, so to say, nominally,
I., 336, 16-
Kals-lauss, ad,, unmolested, I.,200,27.
Kauceler (canceler, I., 44, ^g), m.,
IL, 247,16.
Kann, see kunna,
Kanoki (-a, -ar), w., a canon regu-
lar,W., 272,13.
Kanunki, m., id., II., 58, 3.
Kanúka-búnaðr, m., a canon's habit,
I., 240, 23.
Kápa (-U, -ur), f, a chest, II.,
222, 13 ; see blýkápa.
Kápa (-U, -ur), f, a monKs cope,
' cappa clericalist I., 208, iq. — 2.
a cloak, I., 246,11«
Kapalin, 7n., a chaplain, I., 356,
5' 26'
GLOSSARY.
429
Kapella (-u, -ur), /., a chapel, I.,
418,22-
Kapitulum, /?., chapter of a cathe-
dral, II., 30, 2-
Kapp (-s), ;?., strife, contention : ver
hugðum, at þér sæktið ánauð ok
fátækt . . . eigi til þess, at brjóta
kappi við konuiiginn, I., 394, ^^.
— 2. master fulness, hardihood :
einginn þykkist úhalla kmnu
bera, utan hann haldi meö kappi
þat, sem belt bans foreUri, I.,
Kapp-ata (-ötu, -ötur), f, mutual
contention, wrangling, dispute,
I., 72, 17.
Kappi (-a, -ar), m., champion, knight,
I., 446,2; n.,276,9.
Kapp-samr, ad., overbearing, mas-
terful, II., 114,25.
Karar-maðr, m., one bedridden, II.,
. 226,16.
Karbúnkúlus, m., carbuncle, dia-
mond, I., 476, 7.
Kárina, f, severe penance {from
French, careme = quadragesimal,
11., 38, 2.
Karl (-S, -ar), m., a male, a man,
I., 348, 7. See also Kail.
Karl-ma(5r, m., id., II., 162, 20-
Kassera, v. a. {French cacher), to
reject utterly, I., 410, 9.
Kasta (-að), v.a., to cast, to throw,
to fling : (fig.) þeir eru nii í kúr-
biigum, bvárt bcrra Tbómas kast-
ar eingu klatri á þá, I., 392, ^3 ;
væri mér sá dómr makliga diktaðr,
at iir svá beilögu sæti væri ek
með vanvirðu brott kasta^r, I.,
172, ig ; k. ímót, to object, T.,
170, 4 ; k. eign á, to sequester, I.,
Kasta — cont.
320, iQ. — Impcrs. k. um, to turn
about, to change, I., 64, 22 ; k. upp,
to roll up, to evolve : litbi siSar
kastar upp þykkri þoku yfir
jör^ina, I., 230, 26«
KastaH (-a, -ar), m., a castle, I.,
48, 12. _
Katbalogia, a catalogue of saints,
n., 188,15.
Kaiipa (keypta, keypt), v.a., to buy,
I., 28,27, 242, 16.— i^/^., to pur^
chase, I., 150,20,430,26; k. aftr,
to re-purchase, to secure again,
I., 292, 27.
Kaup-ferð, f, market journey, IT.,
1/8,26«
Kaup-staðr, m., market town, II.,
102,1,.
Kaup-tún, n., id., I., 48,12-
Kaus, see kjosa.
Keisari, m., emperor, I., 90, 20«
Kem, see koma.
Kenna (d), v.a., derived from
kanna, to probe, to search (kanni,
a probe) ; kenna means primarihj
to touch that for which search is
made, hence: 1. to feel, to find,
to realize : konungr . . . kendi
líkþrár þegar í æsku, II., 212, 99;
eigi kendi ek þat mins valds, at
samþykkja þær nýjungar, sem liér
standa skrifaÖar, I., 294, 14 ; ok
af þeim sætleik, er bann þóttist
kenna um alt sitt lif, vaknar banu,
&c., II., 70, 7; Sttlvar Í likamaunm,
enn eigi kendi liann þess beldr
enn dauðr, I., 116, 21; biispreyja
bin sjiika kennir gjörln, livat ser
liiir, II., 150, iQ ; k. sik, to realize
one\s true state, 11., 230, ^o. — 2.
430
GLOSSARY.
Kenna — cont,
to perceive^ to recognize : miðar
hann vit dagbriminni bæÖi vöxt
bans ok klæÖabúnat, at því heldr
megi hann kennast þótt sí^'ar
sæi.
I.,
52
J 12 >
kennir hann
brátt, at þar liggr Thomas can-
celer, I., 54, j^ ; sem krossinn
kennist, þikkjast þeir vita, hverr
fylgir, I., 490, g ; lyfter hann
iipp augunum, svo glöggr í sinne
grein, at hann kenner bæíi föÖur
ok móður, II., 160, jg. — Med. k.
YÍð, to acknowledge : vitra þín
vill eigi við kennast, hversu slikt
er afskapligt ok hinum lægrum
háskasamligt til eftirdæmis, I.,
356, 23^ — 3. to taste : hann þarn-
aÖist aha fæðu, utan kendi lítið
af kjarnamjolk, IL, 10,13; hann
hugÖist drekka ok kendist svá
sætt sem hunang væri, II., 70, g.
— 4:. to teach, to inculcate : elsku-
lig móðir . . . kynnir honum
otta Guðs ok kennir heilög fræði,
I., 18,6; ^^^^ fyrst sjálfir þat
ráÖ, er þér kendut oss, I., 406, ^ ;
kennir hann ok úspart, hvat hafn-
anda er eðr hvat fjlgjanda, I.,
174, 23. — 5. to lay to one's charge,
to ascribe to : þótt nokkut grand
fijoti með, \'ill herra páíinn sakir
elsku faÖernis sér lata kenna, I.,
160,11.
Kenni-domr, m., course of study,
I., 18,28-
Kenni-maðr, m., teacher, clerk,
clergyman, I., 378, 23 ; « prelate,
I'j 1S> 18? 42,7, 362,21, 3*^Sj 23 ;
kennimanna fundr, a synod, I.,
Kenni-maÖr — cont.
6,13; kennimanna þing, id., I.,
122, 14.
Kenni-mannligr, ad., prelatial, epi-
scopal, I., 220, 17.
Kenning (-ar), /., perception ; nef-
lauss maÖr hefir einga kennino-
ilms eðr fýlu, I., 234. 3. — 2. teach-
ing, i.e., preaching : svá semr
hann sitt lif, at bæÖi fyrir kenning
orðs ok eftirdæmis megi hann
leiða sinn lýð á sanna lífsgötu,
L, 94,12; ^fr- 11., 234,13.-3.
doctrine, faith: hvern dæmði
hann þann sinn win er a moti
sneriz heilli kenninngo, II., 262,32.
Ker (-s), n., a vessel, II., 88, g.
Kerling (-ar, -ar), /., a carline, old
woman, good-wife, I., 250, 1 ; II.,
122, ig.
Kerra (-n, -ur),/., a car, carriage,
I., 554, 24.
Kerti (-is), n., a candle, II., 46, 20-
Kertis-ljos, n., candle - light, II.,
277,16.
Kertis-stika, /'., a candlestick, II.,
•^^^8, 20'
Kertis-sveinn, m., a link-man, 11.,
168,25.
Keyra (ð), v. a., to drive, to push, to
force : eru sumiröllu göðu afflett-
ir ok keyrÖir af landi brutt, I.,
142, 9, cfr. 348, 9 ; þér megiÖ kon-
unga Í fjötri læsa, ok ríkismenn í
rekendur keyra, II., 16, 21. — Im-
pers., to tiunble, to be precipitated :
honum stökkr fótr svá hættliga, at
hann keyrir niðr í ána, I., 32, ig.
Kinn (-ar, kinnr), /., the cheek, I.,
200,9.
GLOSSARY.
431
Kinn-roÖi, m., a blush of shame, T.,
408,24,442,11.
Kippa (t), v.a., to pull, to pluck, I.,
528,2) ^^^j 20 ; ^' Í niimn. Jiff., to
pull up, to curb, II., 265, g.
Kirk j a (-ii, -iir), /., church, I., 6, 7 ;
passim.
Kirkju-d) rr, n. pi., church door, II.,
130,6.
Kirkju-eign,/*., church property, I.,
3o4, 23.
Kirkju-golf, n., church fioor, I.,
550, 18.
Kirkju-gröftr, m., church burial,
II., 160, 5.
Kirkj u-holf, n., church roof, the vault
of the nave in a church, II.,
114,8.
Kirkju-réttr, m., canon law, I.,
204
1 9-
Kirkju-sókn, f., a parish, II.,
280,10.
Kirkju-vigsla,y., consecration of a
church, I., 186,5.
Kirkj u-vörðr, m., sacristan or seæton,
II., 140,11.
Kista (-11, -ur), /., chest, coffin, II.,
198, 24.
Kistill (-S, kistlar), m., a small
chest, a casket, I., 24, 8-
Kjallara-maðr, m.y a cellarer, I.,
518,25.
Kjarna-mjolk (kjarni = kernel), /'.,
almond milk : hann þarnaíSist alia
fæÖii, iitan kendi litiÖ af kjarna-
mjolk (= cibumqiie . . . prœter
lac amygdalarum, non sumpserit.
De gestis post martyrium. Ma-
terials, IV., 409, 10-), II-, 10,13.
Kjosa (kýss, kaus-kusum, kysi,
kosinn), r.c, to choose generally.
Kjosa — cont.
1. to desire, to choose for one's
self to adopt : hann fregnai* alia
þá frammferð, sem Heiurekr
konungr kyss ser til handa innan
lands ok utan, I., 340, 20 ; ^k
nam aldri at kjosa ne bera
byskupsins tign ok nafn með
skyldugu embætti, I., 306, 30. —
2. to select, to single out, to fix
upon : geri sá góði lierra oss
kunniigt, hvern staÖ hann kýss í
voru riki, I., 372, 5. — 3. to elect,
to designate, to nominate : (hann)
heldr byskiipsstola ok cibótadæmi
svá leDgi undir sinu valdi, sem
hann lystir, siðan formenn falla
fra, enn eigi skal aðra til kjosa,
I., 6, 10 ; cfr, 68, iq ; þat er skrifat
lögmál, at kapitulum hverrar
kirkj u skal kjosa ser byskupsefni,
1.^124,3.
Kjör (-s), n., choice, I., 524, n.
Kjöra (pres. ind. kjöri, med. kjör-
ist, I., 404, 20; imperf kyÓTÍ, pi.
knriim, imperf. subj. keyri, j).p.
kjörinn), v.a. = kjosa, 76, 2, 78, 1,
402, 18, 412, 20- — k. til, to select,
to designate far : kjöri hon hann
sjálf til hins hæsta keniiiraanns,
I') 1^J17' 19-
Kjörligr, ad., to be chosen, desirable,
preferable, I., 402, 5.
Kjöt (-s), m.,fiesh, meat, I., 256 90?
512,10.
Kjötligr, ad., after the flesh, k.
sonr, oion son, I., 48, jg.
Kláí^i (-a), m., itch, irritation, I.,
366, 25.
Klappa (aí5), v.a., to tap, to raj), I.,
438,,.
432
GLOSSARY.
Klatr (-s), n. {clatter?), trouble, I.,
392,14.
Klausa {-u,-Mv)^f., {clause,) phrase,
expression, observation, I., 448,
15 ; passage, notice, sentence, I.,
8,25,40,3, II., 198,2.
Klaustr (-s), w., a cloister, monas-
tery, I., 6, 7.
Klaustra-kirkja, f., a minster, I.,
228, 23«
Klaustra-maðr, m., inmate of a mo-
nastery, a monk, I., 50, 3, 522, 19 ;
II., 272, n.
Klaustri (-a), w?.,=klaustr, I., 258, g,
288,17.
Klenodiiim, n., ornamental trijle,ll.,
285,15.
Kerka-kápa, /., ' cappa clericalist
a monies cope, I., 208, 7.
Klerka-klæði, n. pi., church vest-
ments, I.J 240, 23.
Klerk-domr, m., scholarship, I., 36,
19, 172, 25 ; n., 198, 13.— 2. clergy,
L, 172,2.
Klerkdóms-maSr, on., a man of
scholarly attainments, I., 260, ig.
Klerkr (-s -ar), m., a clerk, scholar,
student, I., 22, iq. — 2. a clerk,
priest, I., 84, 21, 146, n.
Klokka (-11, -ur),/., a bell, I., 82,9.
Klokliga, adv., cunningly, slily,
craftily, I., 472, 25.
Klókr,aí/., skilled, expert, proficient:
her til kveðr konuugiinn þá menn,
er kallast klokir á þess háttar
reikning, I., 190, 21 ; í þeiri sýslu
.... yar einu falkiner klókr á
þess háttar íöd, II., 140, 21. — 2.
sly, wily., astute: (hann) segir
konnnginn svá myrkan mann
ok klókan í málsemdum, &c., I.,
Klókr — cont.
326, 22« — 3. skilfully executed,
clever : þá skal bera til sýnis þat
klókasta smáþing, sem hvers hjá-
kona hefir sprangat, I., 22, 23.
Klók-samligr, oí/.,' Í7idicative of as-
tuteness, crafty, icily, I., 444, 23.
Klók-skapr (ar), m., craft, cunning,
loile, l.,29S„,.
Klukka {-u, ur), /., a bell, I.,
494,12.
KlæÖa (dd), v.a., to clothe, fig. to
deck, to cover, I., 36, 13. — Med. to
dress, II., 220, n.
Klæða-búnaör, m., habit, dress, I.,
^^j 11? 15' 240, 21.
Klædtlr, p.p., dressed, I., 204, g ; II.,
144, 8.
Klæði (-s), 71., clothes, dress, gar-
ment, I., 48, 24,98,13, 236, 15, 314,
17, 548, 19.
Klökkva (t), v.n., to be inwardly
moved, I., 274, i-
Kne (knes, dat, kniam (knjám), I.,
558, 2 ; ace. sing, kneit, II.,
281,37,283,17; ace. plur. knia,
II., 279,25), n., knee, I., 14, 10;
lúta a kne, to stoop, to succumb,
I., 400, 5.
Kné-fall (-s, -foil), n., genuflection.
I.J -54, 13, 98,26, 216,26;
II., 90,
21' 164,4.
Knéfalla, v.n.,tofallon knee, to bow
down : sem f)at er þegit, geingr
bann inn ok knéfellr fyrir heiTa
páfanum, I., 306, 3. — 2. to bow
down to, to humble ones self
before, to submit to, I., 364, 4,
5Ó0, 13.
Knefi (-a, -ar), m., a fist, II.,
138, 16-
GLOSSARY.
433
Knúðr, II., 90, jg? see knýja.
Kuúinn, II., 266, 5, see knýja.
Knútr (-S, -ar), /w., a knot, bamp^
{caused by contraction of the
sinews or otherwise), II., 138, 13.
KnýfiU (-S, knýflar), m., short horn,
IL, 118,18.
Knýflottr, ad., short-horned, II.,
118,ir.
Knýja (kný, knúði-knúðum, knýði,
kniiinn and knúðr), v,a., to press,
to force, I., 396, 9, 466, jg*
Knýta (tt), v.n., to form knots, to
contract, II., 281,37.
Koddi (-a, ar), 7n., a pillow, II.,
^1 12' 1*J^> 22*
Kolim (að), v.n., to grow cool, I.,
322, 12.
Koliian (-ar),y., the groiving colder,
I'j 52, 28«
Koma (kem, kom-komum, kæmi,
kominn), v.n., and a. to come, gen-
erally. — 1. v.n., to come, litlu
síÖar kemr Rodbert aftr, ok liefr
ákall til rikis, I., 6, 235 ^^^ ^r um-
farit þær framm-sýnir, er fyrir
runnu sælum Thome, sem bann
kom inn í veraldar Ijos, I., 16,17. —
tofolloiu : á næsta morgin er kemr
ska] lionum tjást áskilnaöarefni
þeira Heinreks konungs, I., 292, 5.
— 2. loith an implied temporal
notion, to proceed, to come on, to
come about: eftir bæn gjörva líðr
nóttina ok kemr málstefna, I.,
24,2; er nú svo komit, at by-
skupar byrja sina frammfcrð meíS
þvi upphaíi, at gera ba^i til GuíS.s,
^c, I., 74,5; lierra Thomas hug-
lciÖir þetta mál, í hvern háska
K 541.
Koma — cont.
nú er komit, I. 228, 7 ; cr þá svá
komit tíma, at Heinrekr er kon-
ungr, enn Tliómas canceler á hans
garði, I., 251, 4 ; sem hér er komit
bréíi byskupsins, L, 384, g. — In
various phrases : k. á, to come to
pass, I., 252, 7. — k. eftir, tofol-
loiu, I., 8, 25- — k. fmnim, pei'venij'c,
I., 224, g, — k. samt, to congregate,
I., 130, 4. — k.til. — a. to come about,
I., 478, 10 . — b. to be in addition
to, I., 130, 17. — k. við, to touch, to
arrive at, I., 484,
23-
med.
komast við, to be touched, to be
inwardly moved,!., 272, 93. — v.a.,
ivith dat. to let come, to bring,
to set, to plant, ^c : . . . var
hann svá raeinligr með hvit-
fyssi ok stórgrýti, at eingi hestr
mátti par fæti koma, I., 32, 13 ; var
þetta svá þýtt, ... at meiri mundi
verðadýrð ok virðing þessa burðar,
er hon gekk með, enn jarðlig kristni
mætti . . skilnÍDg á koma, I.,
14, g. In variozis phrases : k.
framm, to bring about, to effect
I., 66, ig. — k. hettu a, to
ft, to adjust, L, 314, jg. — k.
(honum) í vináttu, to get one into
another's good graces, or favour,
I., 258, 21- — k. rdtum undir sik,
to strike root, I., 182, 7. — k. ser í
þjónustu, to secure a place, post,
situation, for one's self I., 34, jg.
— 3Ied. komast, to ' get ' along,
to bring one's self on, through, rr
off; I., 14,,, 222,,,.
Komandi, pres. part., as subst. m.,
{dat.pl. komundum), a vomer, an
arrival, il., 192, ^g.
V. E
434
GLOSSARY
Kona (-U, -ur, gen. pL, kvenna), /.,
a female, a woman, I., 348, 7 ;
IL, 72,7, 150,7; « ^«^y» I-J
12, 18? *^2, 25.
Konunga-tal, /?., enumeration, list
of kings, I., 8, 93-
Kouung-domr, m., royalty, royal do-
minion, sovereignty, I., 6, 23» 26, 2^-
Konungligr, öí/., royal, I., 46, ^9.
Konungs-dottir, /"., a king's daugh-
ter, princess, I., 28,3, 204,4.
Konimgs-dæmi, /?., kingdom, I.,
382,;,.
Konungs-garbr, ?72., royal court, re-
sidence, I., 60, 1 ; * M<? Crown,^
I., 6, 11 ; ^/if royal exchequer, L,
6,1.
Konungs-menn, m. pi., courtiers, I.,
58, 16.
Konungs-riki, n., royal authority,
^I., 370, 17.^
Konutigs-skrúð, n., royal robes, II.,
176,6.
Konungs-sveinn, m., royal atten-
dant, a page, I., 438, 9.
Konungs-vald, n., royal power, I.,
338,3.
Koppr (-S, -ar), ;«., a c?/p, I., 550, 20.
The meaning o/' koppr //ítí', how-
ever, seems to indicate that the
blood clots on the marble floor
represented the form of a coagu-
lated substance turned out of a
cup.
Korn-hestr, m., " equus cui'sor," a
courser, charger, II., 168,27.
Korn-hlaða,y., granary, I., 482,4.
Korona (-u, -ur), f, the {anointed)
crown of the head, II., 18,15.
Kórr (-s), m., choir, chancel : erki-
byskup . . . predikar lengi eftir
Korr — cont.
evangelium yiir kor kirkjunnar,
I., 510, 1 ; efter evangelium geingr
sjálfr herra páfinn . . . upp á kór,
flytjande sjálfr þetta hit hjálpsam-
liga erindi til lofs ok virðingar
sælum Thómasi, II., 188,2« — ^*
chapter {of a cathedral) : hann
sendir meistara Jon heim til
Kanciam með því bréfi til bróður
Thómam, er þar stóð æztr maðr í
kór (= beÍ7ig senior canon in the
chapter), I., 482, 13.
Kórs-bróðir (-ur, -bræðr), m., canon
of a cathedral, I., 72,3 144,5,
il., 78,2.
Kosinn, jy.p. o/'kjosa, I., 76,3.
Kosningr (-s), m., election, I., 40, 21»
62,12,306,12,402,23,
Koss (-, ar), m., a kiss, I., 448, 3.
Kosta {2L6),v.n., to cost: því hefir
hann sik nu frammi sem nýrr í
annat sinn, hreinsandi folkit . . .
hvárt sem heldr kostar með blíðu
eðr stríðu, I., 174. 23 ; sá var einn
af bræÖrum í Kancia, at svápínd-
ist, at sumir menn ætluðu lífit
kosta, II., 665 17. — v.a., to engage,
to hire : kostar erkibyskupinn þar
til þann vildasta meistara er fast
mátti, II., 210, 26* — 3. to go to
the expense of to try, to strive, to
endeavour: þeir eru fotbrotnir,
handlami, visnir eÖr lasmærir, er
þat kosta með allri ástundan, at
fullgera ffstir sins likama, I.,
234, 17 ; þér megit eigi dissimu-
lera, ef eins manns vanstilli sturlar
heilaga kristni með dul ok dramb-
visi, ok þess kostar at hverr
bati annan, I., 278, n.
GLOSSARY.
435
Kosta-boð, n. pl.y offers clogged with
conditions, conditional proposals,
I., 326, 27j 27j 498, 21«
Kostr (-ar, -ir), m., choice, a thing
to be chosen ; hence condition :
nil er, son minn, at kjosa um
tvo kosti, II., 214,
26 >
Guð
virði, sagði hann, hversu koster
þesser eru ojafner, II., 216,3;
litlii síðar kemr Rodbert aftr ok
hefr ákall til rikis, eiin Heinrikr
vill eingum kosti iipp gefa, I.,
6, 30, cfr. 438, 29- — 2. expense,
outlay : fjrr var lesit, hversu
Vilhjálmr konungr setti gjald a
kirkjur allar í landiun at kvitta
honiim aftr þann kost, er Rodbert
bróðir bans hafði or landi, I.,
138, 5. — 3. food, fare : einn samt
hefir hann herbero;i ok eigi rikara
kost, enn bröðirinn kaupir úti,
hvárt sem verÖr ertraréttr eðr
eitthvert potagium, I., 242, ^5,
270,1, 436, 2o> 514,2- — treat, en-
tertainment : kórsbræðr ok eink-
anliga formaðrinn í Kancia
tóku hann með miklum faguaÖi
ok væiium kosti, II., 108,13. —
provisions, necessaries : koma
menn erkibyskups, er heim skyldu
hafa flutt þann kost, er kirkjunni
var nauðzunligr
konung:
menn drógu af þeim kostiun . . .
erkibyskup segir, at þaun kost
mun hann vel aftr bæta, I., 494,25,
27? 29«
Ivot-karl, m., a cottager, L, 394, 2^,
400,
'5 2/
Krafði, see krefja
Kraíinn, see krefja.
Kraft-auðigr, ad., largely endowed
loith poioer, I., 508, 20«
Krafta-verk, n., supernatural ivorks,
?niracles, I., 116, 21«
Kraftr(-ar, -ar), ?n., strength, p02ver,
energy : hvat belt sa með sér
af kraftinum, er tapaði sæmd-
ina með frægðinni ? I., 170, 20;
skrifar Lofuis konungr til páfans
. . ei með lægra krafti elskunnar,
I., 456, 9. — Í krafti, by virtue of:
fyrirbjóðum vér öUum y6T, i
krafti lýðninnar, ... at sitja
héðan ífrá nokkurn þann dóm, er
minni persónu til heyrir, I., 204, 25;
cfr. 206, 8, undir krafti, id., 358, £.
Krank-domr, 771., ailment, indis-
position, disorder, I., 202, j,
316,9,11,, 70,18.
Krankr, (krönk, kraukt), ad., ailing,
indisposed, disordered : stendr
hann upp alheill raeð svo hreiriu
höröndi ok heilu brjosti, sem
aldre á daga sina hefði hann
krankr orðit, II., 216, 14. — 2. in
bad conditio?!, bad, evil : þat
veri hugleiðanda, sem undir
hulning ok skugga þolinraæði.s,
hversu timarnir eru krankir, I.,
190,13 5 g^i^o'' hann xij. milur
þann dag mjök krankan veg, I.,
254,25.
Kraptr, m., a crypt, II., 282, u-.
Kraup. See krjiipa.
Krauptr, ;;/., a crypt, see kröptr.
Krefja (kref, krafða-kröfSum, krefði,
krafinn), v.a., to demand, to
claim, I., GO, 7, 148, jg, 168, ^,
424,4, 492,13; IL, 94,14.-^0
charge, k. um,I., 186, 05. — k. hiiss,
to demand quarters, II., 124, j.
E E 2
436
GLOSSARY
Kreppa (t), v.n., to contract, to knit
{of sinews and muscles), II., 82,o6,
281,37.
Kringja (d), v.ci., to sn?TO?(nd, I.,
242,13.
Kringla (-u), /'., t/iat v)Inch eiicmn-
passes, a circle, bond, II., 236,6.
Kringlótír, ad., round, hinn kringl-
otti, the 7'ound one, i.e, the coin,
I., 116,3.
KrismaÖr, ad., anointed, I., 342, ^g)
374, g.
Krismaligr, ad., id., II., 287, 25-
Kristiligr,ai/,, becoming a Christian:
stefna þessi er eigi kristiligri cnn
svá, at &c., I., 190,10« — Christian:
elskuliii móðir tekr liann kiisti-
lignm orðum, I., 18, 5.
Kristiiin, ad.. Christian, I., 306,^ ;
k. réttr, canon laio, I., 6
1 16'
44
?19-
L, 2
535
Kristni, /'., Christendom,
14,5.-2. the church, I., 4, 20,
24, 23) 28, 19, 44, 26) 1 12, 12? 124, jg,
170, i„ 172, 8, 192, 25, 222, „
274, 16, 306, 10, 374, 1-, 378, -,
382, 5, &c.
Krjiipa (krýp, kraup-kriipum, krj'pl,
kropinn), v.n., to creep, II.,
138,22« — 2. to kneel, to bow. to
submit, I., 204, 9 ; II., 90, 1-.
Krokr (-s, -ar), m., a * crook,'' trick,
idle, I., 200, g.
Kropit, II., 234, iq, see krjúpa.
Kross (kross, -ar), nu, the Cross,
I., 398, 19. — 2. cross, sign of
a cross : berr lianii yfir evkaris-
tiara Í kross, II., 154, 2i. — 3.
cross, burden : cf nokkurr vill
konia minn veg með eftirdæmi, taki
haun krossinu ok fylgi mer, I.,
Kross — coat.
208, 26« — 4. crosier : sá klerkr, er
krossinn berr fyrir erkibyskupi,
hlutast nil í málit, I., 170,6, C^^-
^ 208, 15.
Krossast, v. refl., to take the crw
sadcr^s cross, I., 4, 22, 352, 12.
Kross-festa, v.a., to crucify, I.,
^48,9«
Kross-festr, p./>., crucified, II., 18, 7.
Krima (-U, daf. knmo, I., 478, 15,
-iir),y., croivn, the crown of the
head : hann sveiiiar til svcrðinu
ok sníÖr náliga biirt af Löfoinu
alia kriumna, I., 544, 15 ; leggja
þeir líkamaiin á barir ok saunia
við höfuðit afsnið krúnunnar, I.,
554, 1. — 2. croion, diadem : eing-
inn þjkkist iilialla krimu bera,
utan liann lialdi með kappi þat,
sem belt bans forellri, L, 8, -. — 3.
* tke crown ^ the State, I., 42, 22,
^212,24,382,18.
Krúna (a^), r.a., to crown, I., 14, 17,
274, 3, 450, 11, 508, 22- — ^i^f^-
to have the crown of one^s head
^cutoff, 11., 2^,^^.^
Krúnaðr {dat. kriinoSiim), p.}^-,
crowned, I., 524, 15.
Kriinu-dagr, m., day of croioning
II., 194,
16"
Krnpu, krupnm, see krjiipa.
Kryp, see krjiipa.
Kryplingr and kvypplingr (-s, -ar),
7n., a cripple, II., 134, 13, 264,9.
Krytr, 771., rattle : síðan kerar krytr
nökkur í brjóslit, þar til at grátr
fylger, IL, 164,12-
Kröfðu, kröfðum, see kreíja.
Kröptr (kraptar, krepti), m., a
crypt, L, 554,18,556,9,11., 282, n.
GLOSSAKY.
437
Kufl (-S, -ar), w., ' coiol^ a monk^s
habit, I., 314, jg.
Kúga (að), v.a.f to * coíí;,' to press,
to drive, to force, I., 164, 3, lo?
348, 13.
Kugan (-ar), f., ^ coicing,'' ever-
bearing, masterfulness, I., 162, ^g*
Kumpáni, m., companio?i, comrade,
1,24,11,248,20.
Kiinna (kann, kunni - kunnum,
kynni, kunnat), v.n, and a., to
know, to know how to : príórr
Robert skrifar þar um eitt dýrligt
efni . . , hversu hann kunni ok
vildi sæma sinn herra, L, 86,7.
— 2. to recognize : með því
sama marki vitraÖist hann síðan
mörgum raönnum, ok auÖkendist
svá þeim, er áðr kunnu hann eigi,
I., 554, 7. — 3. to be able, to
afford : hann (kistillinn) er luktr
ok sva líkaÖr, sem aldri kunni
manns hand sva poUisera, I.,
24, iQ ; þvílíka kallar spámaÖrinn
sem þá hunda er eigi kunna
geyja, I., 234, 10, er yÖr bæði
veitandi sönn elska ok allr sá
stjrkr, sem hin romverska móðir
kann yðr veita, I., 304, 21 ; gleym
eigi, at 'kemr þér ríkari, sá er af
konungunum kann at taka bæÖi
líf ok ríki, I., 366, 20« — 4. as an
auxiliary verb expressive of
potentiality : may, might : hafa
þær iönir íarit sem verða kann,
I., 2, 7 ; bans blezut ásjóna hefir
dreift farit, sem þat skírastíi gler
kann auðsýna, I., 2, 19 ; kann þat
ok at þrýsta margs manns lííi
nógu mjök, J)ótt eigi sé hann
íæddr í svá fi^laðri veröld ok rík-
Kunna — cont.
dóm sem þar var, I., 20, 14;
skulu þá ij. ok ij. sækja af liverj-
um lifnaÖi með þau vandamál, er
falla kunnu, I., 370,4-
Kunnasta (-iistu), /, ability : vilj
um vér yðr þjóna með allri vorri
kunnastu = to the best of our
ability, poioers, I., 316, iq ; renna
margir flokkar ut í mot honum,
bæði burgeisar ok lægra folk,
fagnandi honum raeð aUri kunn-
astu, I., 506, 5.
Kunnátta (-u), /., knoivledge, skill,
ability: (hann) hefer at hendr
um eina stund, ok þuklar limu
aftr Í lag meÖ svo blezaÖri kunn-
áttu, at þenna pilt fan* hann aftr
móðurinni albættan til allra liÖa,
11, 136, 19.
Kunnigr, ad., knowing, acquainted
with, at home in : i þeim hluta
lands hefir hann oft verit ok er
mjök kunnigr, T, 244, 4. — 2.
knoivn, I, 20,27, ^^^iq^ l^ö, 3,
^266,10, 370,24, IL, 265,7.
Kunningi, m,., acquaintance, 11,
18,3.
Kunnliga, adv., in a manner showing
acquaintance, familiarity, with :
ma likligt synast, at sá bölvaðr
háls hafi of mjög alinn verit í
garÖinum, svo kunnliga sem hann
for, IL, 140,6.
Kunnr, ad., knoivn, I, 282, 22, 448, g;
acquainted with, II, 283,3-.
Kur-hugi, m., 'cowering mood,' de-
spondency, I., 392, 13.
Kiiria, /*., the papal court, I., 260, 14.
Kurr, 7n., * quarrel, ' enmity, II,
200, 33.
488
GLOSSARY.
Kusu, kusum, see kjosa.
Kvað, see kveða.
Kváðu, kváðum, see kveÖa.
Kvalari (-a, -ar), 771., executioner :
hann tekr sjalfs sins höndum þá
hulning af ásjónuuni, sem kvalar-
inn haföi fengit honum í uppfest-
ingunni, II., 110,22-
Kvaldr, p.p., II., 104, g, see kvelja.
Kvámu-maðr, wi., a visitor, an ar-
Hvalf I., 52, 9.
Kván-fang, n., wedded wife, I.,
364, n.
KveÖa (kveð, kvaÖ-kváÖum, kvæt5i,
kveÖit), v.a., cfr. Eng. * quoth^
to say, to utter, to declare : hvn
kvaÖ ser enga þorf þess. kvaz
eigi vilia stoÖ þaa, II., 282, § ; lif-
lat kvat hann ok davði Thomas
erkibyskups, II., 278, i ; kveðst
hann viröa ok yÖr unna sem sin-
um herra ok andaligum £eðr, I.,
382, 3, cfr. 15 ; hann . . . kvezt
hafa stjrka von sinnar heilsu, II.,
70, iQ ; Samson kvezt hann heita,
II., 76, 22 ; kvoðvzt þeir skylldv
sockva þvi i nockvrnn pytt eða
festa aa galga, II., 271, 7. — 2. to
call, to call out, to cry : ungr
piltr, er hann átti, kveðr við hátt
ok fellr í hjá honum, II., 82,15;
c/r. II., 120,8.
KveÖja (kveð, kvadda-kvöddum,
kveddi, kvaddr), v.a,, to call upon,
to summon, to request ; I., 382, 28?
438,22-
KveÖja (-U, -ur),/., greeting, salu-
tation, I., 266, 27> 322, 15, 504, 7 ;
— leave-taking, farewell greet-
ing, I., 474, 20.
Kveðju-sending, f, salutation, I.,
74,11, 328,9; n., 92,24; minni
kv., salutatio 97iinor, I., 422, 17.
Kveif (-ar),y., * coifý' mitre, ^pileus,^
I., 538,18.
Kveikja, (t), v.a., to kindle, II.,
^290,33.
Kvein (-s), 7i., lame7itatio7i, II.,
^*^-"? 22' 16-^j 19«
Kveld (-s) n., eve7iÍ7ig, I., 226,22»
246,6,468,23.
Kvelja(kvel,kvalda-kvöldum,kveldi,
kvalinn), v.a., to * kill,^ to pain,
to t07'me7it, II., 78, 19, 104, g.
Kveljari (-a, -ar), m., ^ killer,^ mur-
derer, assassÍ7i, II., 6, g.
Kvenna, ge71.pl. ©/"kona.
Kverk, pi. kverkr, f, the throat,
II., 70, 26.
Kverka-mein, 71., bronchial affec-
tion, II., 68, 18, 70, 20-
Kvíða (kvíði, kveið-kviöum, kviði,
kviðit), v.a., to be anxious about :
ei stendr oss, kristnum mönnum,
at kvíða nokkuru, I., 438,2-
Kviö-blástr, m., abdo77iÍ7ial swellÍ7ig,
II., 70, 26-
Kviðr (-ar,-ir; kvi«vr, II., 277,28).
m., the belly, abdo77ien, II., 70, ig?
74, 16, 168, 28. — 2. the wo77ib, I.,
12? 2ij 544, 12«
KviÖugr, ad., pregnant, II., 62, 2.
Kvikende, 71., a quick thing, creature,
II., 120,21.
Kvikna, v. inch., to quicken, to ma'
7iifest signs of life and activity,
n.,74,3.
Kvikr, ad., quick, alive, II., 40, 2»
Kvikvendi, 77., a quick thÍ7ig, crea-
ture, I., 236, 23«
GLOSSARY.
439
Kvíslast, V. med.^ to branch off, I.,
432,2,.
Kvistr, (-S, -ir), m., a twig, a sprig,
I. 182,7; II., 142,2.
Kvitta (að), v.a., to liquidate, to
pay up, to refund, I., 138, ^.
Kvittr, (-s), m., a rumour, T., 206, q,
248, 27.
Kvoma (-u), f., coming, arrival,
visit, II., 108, 23.
Kvonar-mundr, m,, dowry, II.,
148, 19.
Kvæði, see kveða.
Kvöl (kvalar, kvalir), f.-> pain, tor-
ment, I., 520, 20 ; II-? 40, 4.
Kyn (-s), n., kin, family, race : enn
þat er greinanda, at var einn
maðr, Symon at nafni, enskr at
kyni, I., 474, 14 ; cfr. I., 514, ^
— 2. nature, kind, sá steinn hefir
þat kyn, at hann vex framm í
enni undir horni þess dýrs, er
unicornis heitir, I., 476, 9. — 3.
kind, sort, mode, maimer : allir,
er ofsækja dýrit, eru á einnhvern
hátt vanaðir á sína limu . . . varra-
lausir eðr lasmærir með ein-
hverju kyni, I., 230, 23 ; segir ok
sver um, ef þeir efla lengr hans
úviu, at hann skal með einliverju
kyni mæta þeim, I., 370, 19.
Kyn-ferð, f., kin, kindred, family,
L, 402,1.
Kyn-ferði, n., id., I., 320, 24, 378, n,
546,7; II., 148,1,.
Kynjaðr, ad., native {of), II.,
102, 1,.
Kyn-kvísl,/,/a/?i%, I., 506,25-
Kynna (t), v.a., to bring to one's
knowledge, to make acquainted
with, to inculcate : elskulig móÖir
Kynna — cont.
kynnir honum otta GuÖs, I., 18, 5.
— 2. to make known, to inform,
to announce, to notify, to declare,
L, 190,23, 266,23,272,19,400,24.
Kynni, see kunna, II., 84, 23.
Kynning (-ar), /'., knowledge :
hversu kom þat í þína skilning
ok kynning ? I., 318, 12. — 2. ac-
quaintance : Priorr spyr þá, hvort
klerkrinn hefir nokkura kynning
af {Deim manni, er hann fanu á
veginum úti, II., 104, ig.
Kynnis-leit, f, family visit, I.,
474,15.
Kjn-s\ó^,f,fa}7iily, I., 402,2«
Kyn-storr, ad., high-born, I., 44,7,
88,13; IL, 164,19.
Kyn-þáttr, m., family, II., 156, jg.
Kyr {gen., kýr, dat., ace, kvi, pi,
kyr &c.),f, a cow, II., 118, ig.
Kyrktr, p.j). of kyrkja, strangled,
IL, 118,6.
KyiT, ad., quiet, still, I., 162, ig,
262, 11, 532, 1 ; halda kyrru fyrir,
to remain inactive, I., 392, ij,.
Kyrrleikr, m., quietude, I., 316,3.
Kyrtill (-S, -lar), m., a kirtle, tunic,
IL, 176,7.
Kýs, see kjosa, IL, 22, jg.
Kyssa (t), v.a., to kiss,l. 120,24,
446, 27' — 2. to touch lightly :
hefr hann upp höndina með gull-
inu, svo at handarbakit horfir
at skrininu, lætr síÖan hjc5Ht kar-
bunkuli kyssa framan á mitt
brjostit, IL, 220,9.
Kæmi, see koma.
Kæra (ð), v.a., to complain, to be-
luail, to denounce : þeir voni
aÖrir af bans fræudum, at hehlr
440
GLOSSARY.
Kæra — coat.
vildi leita ser iitvega, enn kæra
sik fyrir honura, I., 350,9, til
þessa þings skrifar Heinrekr kon-
ungr, sem kærandi fyrir domara,
liversu þat samir, at hreinlifra
manna hús í Pontis skal . .
halda hans mótstöðumann, I.,
370, 13 ; (þeir) falla flatir honum
fyrir fætr syrgjandi ok kærandi
upp á Thómam erkibyskup, liversu
liann hefir grimmliga viðr þá
gert, I., 500, ^g ; hann kemr lieim
til rika raanns, er bólstaðinn átti,
ok kærer sik fyrer honum, II.,
120,27- — ^* ^^ reproach, to blame,
to cast blame upon : þó ^ilja þeir
lágt eÖr eigi heilsa erkibyskupinum,
. . . utan kæra þegar meÖ hörð-
um anda, livi hann liefíst at bann-
færa byskupana, T., 490, 22- — 3.
to arraign, to accuse, to impeach :
frændr bins vegna kæra hann fyrir
konungs raldi, I., 142, ^^. — 4. to
bring charges against, to charge :
konungsins vald leysir Thomam
af ölluni lutum ok serhverjum, er
krúnunni varöa, svá at eingi um
aldr siÖan skal á hann kæra, hvat
hann hefir staí5it eðr með konungs
gózi farit, I., 80,10 ; stefnir honum
á nefndum degi til þess staðar, er
Norðantún heitir, at hann svari
þar öUum þeim greiniim, er á
hann munu kærast, I., 184, ^o ; ffr.
190,11,220,7,526,17.
Kæra (-u, -ur), /., complaint, I.,
470, ig ; accusation, I., 214, 5.
Kærleikr (-s, -ar), m., love, fondness:
konungrinn syuir sik vel bliðan,
riss upp af sætinu mot erkibyskupi,
Kærleilcr — cont.
ok kyssast með kærleik, I., 120,24.
Heinrekr vigslufaSir bans dvelst
eftir hjá honum með samharman
ok heilögum kærleik, I., 206, go*
— 2. friendliness: skilja (þeir)
siðan með bhðum kærleik, I.,
464, 19. — 3. favour, good graces :
herra konungrinn leggr til hans
svá mikinn kærleik, at hann verðr
sem annarr höföingi yfir öllu Eng-
landi, I., 48, 9 ; Heinrekr konungr
fregn, hversu Thomas erkibyskup
er sæmiliga settr bæði með kost
ok kærleik herra konungsins i
Franz, I., 376, 5.
Kærligr, ad., fond, loving, I., 128,i.
Kærr, ad., dear, beloved, intimate,
I., 366, 8, 386, 18, 518, ^. — In neut.,
that of which one is fond, habitu-
ally attached to, in the habit of
doing, Sfc. berr svá til, sem hjon-
um er kært, at Maild er með barni,
I., 12,13; studium heilagrar bækr
var honum harÖlakært, I., 100,2i '•>
þessir hafa tracteran í fyrstu af
konungsins vönum, er nú var
kærast til umræðu, I., 160, 4 ; hann
hafði spacerat at sjá til veðrfalls,
sem siglingamönnum er kært, T.,
486,3.
Köld, Köldum, see kaldr.
Kölluðu, see Kalla.
Köllum, see Kalla.
Kör (karar), f, the bed of a con-
firmed invalid, H., 214, 20-
Körlum, see Karl.
GLOSSARY,
441
L.
LáÖ (-s), n., land, soil, II., 291, n.
La, see liggja.
Laða (að), i\a., to invite, to hid ivcl-
. come : her cr haun (Thomas) laí-
aðr ok leiddi' til hvildar eftir langa
mæðu, I., 258,10- — 2. to draw,
to move, to allure : leiði hann
yðr ok laÖi sem sin a eiginsonu af
nálægri dýflizu til samlags valJra
manna ok eihfra fagnaða, II.,
194, 2« — 3. to accept, to adopt,
to embrace : an öllum e£a laÖaði
gjarna signaðr Thomas þetta heil-
ræði til sins hjarta, L, 18, 12; liti
karðir menn til þessa háleita herra,
Thómam erkibyskups, laSandi
hans eftirdæmi sér til andligrar
ömbunar, II., 238, 4.
Lag (-s), n., prop, that which is laid,
a layer; hence: proper shape,
order : (hann) þuklar limn aftr
i lag með svo blezaÖri kunnáttu,
at þenna pilt fær hann aí'tr móð-
iirinne albættan, II., 136, ^g. — 2.
fashion, mode, manner, way, I.,
'22,13; IL, 238,3,285,10. — 3. i
öðru lagi, secondly, on the other
hand, I., 468, 13, 504, 21« — For
the pi., see log.
Laga, see log, I., 46, 5.
Laga-domr, m., judgment, verdict
at law, L, 28, 15.
Laga-dæmi, n. pi., law precedents,
11., 262, 16.
Laga-hald, n., abidance in, obser-
vance of, the law, I., 44, 19, 70, 4,
346, 1, '374, 1.
Laga-löstr, probably a wrong read-
ing for : alagalaust, q.v.
Lagar, ^í';?. o/lugr.
Laga-setning, f., legislation, I.,
Lagði, see li'ggja.
Lag-færa (ð), v.a., to amend, to re-
form, II., 36,22'
Laghlighr, /. e., lagligr, ad., lawful,
IL, 259, 10.
Laginn, p.p. of leggja, laid, I.,
32, 7; deposited, paid in,l. ,138, i^.
Lág-lendi, n., loic land^ level ground,
L, 388,20'
Lágliga, adv., i?i a loic voice, I.,
"I? 13> ^*^? 23'
Lágr, ad., low : enn þrctinn svá
geystr, at hann var eigi lægri enn
lærit sjálft undir, II. , 98, 3. ; lágt
used as adv. loiv, low down,
adown : min likamlio: lausuns:
fer lágt fyrir þeira fótum, I.,
64, 21 ; hann legst mörgu sinni
lágt til jarðar undir þann lima,
er bans tmnaðar-klerkr veitir
honum, I., 98, ^ — 2. of the
voice, rumour, S)C., low, subdued,
cabn, quiet, hann svarar einum
þeira, bæÖi lágt ok linhga, I.,
434, 12 ; hann kallar til Kantnari-
am nokkura sæmiliga kennemenn,
ok þó lágt i fyrstu, II. , 198, 13. —
3. low of station, humble, inferior:
var hann a? þvi lægri fyrir Guði,
sem hann var a'Öri fyrir mönnum,
I., 36, 26 ; Ileinreki Englauds
konungi sendir Thomas, liigr
þjónn Kantarabyrgis kristui,
kveðju, I., 342,3; herra Thomas
erkibvskup var uóííli«ínr í^ræddr
ei«j;inui vitru fyrir guöliga mildi,
442
GLOSSARY.
LágT — cont.
enn uýliga særðr a£ sér lægra
manni, I., 300, ^o'
Lágu, Lágum, see liggja.
Lamb (-s, lörnb), n., a lamb, II.,
6,1.
Lamdr, />./?., beaten, mai?ned, I.,
230,22.
Laminn, p.p. smitten, II=, 100,3.
Lampi (-a, -ar), ?n., a lamp, II.,
14,20-
Lán (-s), n., grant, bestowal, endow-
ment : hverr maðr er J)"\d meirr
skyldbundinn Guði, sem hana
þiggr meira lán í þessum heimi,
I., 334, 2 ; lát þér þörf vinna lánit
svá at þú forðist ránit, I., 362, 25,
cfr, II., 269, 7.
Land (-s, lönd), 71., land, L, 4, 22 ;
lands in the phrase 1. ok la gar
•:=. by la7id, I., 6, 2-
Landa-mæri, n., boundary, I., 06,27.
Landa-skifti, n., landmark, boun-
dary, frontier, L, 56, 29«
Land-eigandi, m., possessed oj laiid,
landed proprietor, IL, 126,;.
Land-flæma,r.a.,foea;/í^/Mecoíí?zír?/,
to banish, I., 324, g, 348,22'
Land-heiT, on., an army, 11., 178,25-
Lands-bygð,/*., country, IL, 190,2«
Lands-folk, n., inhabitants of a
country, L, 140,4, ^^^^ 23'
Lands-höfóingi, m., a lord, I., 240, 2-
Lands-kýr, /., the cow forming the
stock of the farm, IL, 126,4.
Lands-stjorn, /., government, L,
26,12,44,18-
Land-stjórnarmaðr, m., prime ^nini'
ster, I., 68, 13.
Lands-vani, m., custom, * consuctudo,^
L, 152, 26 5 II'j 2^, 21«
Lands -vist,y*., residence within the
land, right of domicile, L, 356, 4.
Land-tjald, 71., tabernacle, L, 522,2-
Langa-fasta, /;, ' lo7ig fast^ Lent, I.,
22, n-
Lang-haldr, ad., ' long-holding ,^ of
long grudges : harmar herra pá£-
inn, at Heinrekr konungr er svá
langhaldr ok hatrsamr, L, 376, u.
Lang-lifr, ad., long-lived, L, 26, ig.
Lang-mælgi,y.; long discourse, dif-
fuse7iess, prolixity, II. , 144,29.
Lang-mæli, 7i., id., I., 130, 7 ; II. ,
110,12.
Langr (long, langt), ad., long, L,
6,17; langt, n., as adv., far, I.,
32, 3 ; langt ífrá and langt af, far
from {it), L, 76, q, 430, 31 ; löngu,
dat. neut., as adv., long ago, 1.,
14,19.
Lang-rækr, ad., persistent in hatred,
oflo7ig g7udges, I., 44, 13.
Las, see lesa.
Las-mærr, ad., decrepit, I., 230, 23.
Lass, 771., ' latch,^ '■ sera^ a lock or
bolt, L, 192, 3 ; IL, 200, 1.
Lasta, see löstr.
Last-ii'ðigr, ad., wicjked: einkanliga
riss þat mál af því lastúðga
grunni, er fyrr var skrifat af skutl-
an ok gripdeild, er fyrr leiddist
upp á Gu^s eign, L, 118, 7.
Lát (-s), 71., loss, IL, 166, 17.
Lata (læt, lét-létum,léti, látiun), v.7i.
and a., to behave : lokusveinar
slá sér lausum með stengr ok
stafi ok lata mjök ferliga, L,
216, 22; Þo er hann ráÖinn, hversu
styggiliga sem Frakka konungr
lætr, at honum skal hann fylgja
til gistingar, I., 434,
with
GLOSSARY.
443
Lata — cont.
sem, to make believe : konuiigr
let sem hann skyldi þyrma hou-
um, I., 10, 1^ ; konungriun lætr
sem þat líði hjá honum, I.,
62, 22* — 2. to feign : þegar slær
sér þar inn umgröftr ok áleitni,
hvárt hann muni sjúkr nokkut,
þótt hann láti svá, I., 202, g ;
Thomas erkibyskup lætr eigi sem
hann heyre, at Heinrekr konungr
sé þar í landi, I., 446, 3. — 3. to
let, to cause: sendiboðar taka
kórsbræðr meÖ konungs orðsend-
ing ok bréfiim, hveru kosning
hann viU gerast lata yfir setið
í Kancia, I., 72, 5 ; hann lætr gera
sæng sína milium tveggja altara
í Klaustrakirkjunni, I., 228,22-
— 4. to let, to allow, to permit :
kennimanna fundi í landinu . . .
vildi hann einga hafa lata, I., 6, 14 ;
minn faðir, sagði hann, látið mik
heldr bera krossinn, I., 210, 21;
þó let hann þegar fylgja í öÖru
orði, at þér mundit síðar betr
gera, I., 382, i^. — o. to let, to
let be, to leave alone : Latum ver
nú Thómam í skóla vera gott at
nema, . . . enn lítim á þessu
næst, hvat framm f err rómverskum
byskupum, I., 24, 22 ; iHa er sá kostr
kominn, er þeireta ok di'ekka,
sem kallast vinir várir, enn sjá ok
heyra svivirðu vara, ok lata þó
hefndalaust, I., 514, .^. — 6. to
leave, to depart from : Hvar fyrir
lætr þii 083 svo skjótt, góÖi faðir ?
L, 510, yj' — 7. to lose, hvat má
þar um ætla, hvereu sáran angi-
þeir mundu fá, er höfÖu látið svá
Lata — cont.
blezað faöerni, L, 238, 21 ; í þessu
orÖi gerir GuÖ byskupinn sváþögl-
an, sem hann hafi látiÖ tunguna,
L, 280, 2 ; 1. lífit, to lose one's life,
L, 196, 7, 446,2, ^«^2, 5. — In va-
rious phrases : — 1. af, to give up,
I., 118, 21. — 1. at baki, to leave be-
hind, to turn the back upon, I.,
204, 27. — 1. fiigrt, to shotv, to put
on, aspecious appearance ,pi^ovej'b:
hyggja flátt þótt fagrt láti, foul
thought, a fair mien notwith-
standing, L, OS, 13. — 1. frammi, to
show forth ^ to display, I., 212, g. —
1. seint við, to be slow to act {on a
suggestion or request), I., 134,17.
— 1. til, to yield, to concede, I.,
78, 26? 336, 3]^. — b. to give forth, to
let out, I., 86, !• — 1. uppi, to draw
forth, to discover, ^ depromere,^
I., 458, 2- — !• lit af, to set out {on a
sea voyage), to put off, L, 474,9,
490, 1.
Latina,/'., Latin, I., 32, 21.
Látinn, p.p., lost, II., 283, 3g.
Latr (lot, latt), ad., lazy, I., 180, 20?
416, 26-
Laufi (-a), m.y poet., a sivord, II.,
292,1,-
Laug (-ar, -ar), /., a bath, 11.,
162,6.
Laug, see Ijiiga.
Laugar-dagr, ;«., * bathing day,'
Saturday, I., 86, 30.
Laugar-vatn, n., the water of a bath,
II., 164,16.
Laugligha = lögliga, IL, 259, 25.
Laug-móðr, ad., dazed, drmosy,
faint, with bathing, II. , 162, g.
444
GLOSSARY.
Laun-djiT, /". 7>/., secret door, I.
230,6. ■
Laun-mæli, n., secret talk, I., 250,1,
Laiisa-goz, n., chattels, I., 186. - ; ,
money, coin, cash, I., 6, j ; II.,
218,13. •
Laus-máll, ad., untrustworthy, I.,
470,16.
Lausn (-ar),y., ahsohdion, I., 174,9, !
304, 13, 498, 12- — 2. salvation : '
nil varð liér, seiii ritað er, at oft- |
liga kemr á eitt mot góÖr vili
Guðs ok illr ok vondr vili manus, j
sem YÍrðiiligast dæmi má til leiða
lausiiina sjálfa, ^-c, I., 70,9.
Lausnari (-a), 7n., the Saviour, I.,
108,15; IL, 6, 8.
Lauss, ad., loose ; lausir lutir, chat'
tels, 1., 90, 2 ; laus eign, movable
property, I., 118,18; laust, ??., as
adv., loosely, iinsteadily, feebly,
I., 156,2.
Laust, see Ijosta.
Laut, see liita.
LávarÖr, m., the Lord, I., 108, 15.
Lét5i, léðum, see Ijá.
Legáta-vald, in., lecjalion, office of a
legate, I., 178,23, 334, 19.
Legatiis, ?;/., a legate of the Pope,
I., 126,2.
Leggja (legg, lagða-lögðum, legði,
laginn), v.a., genercdly, to lay, to
put, to lay on, to impose : legg
einixum manni vio^sluhond an
forsjo, I., 110, 15. — 2. to grant,
to bestow, to confer upon : Guð
lao"$i ÍDeim báðum meiri sæmd enn
áðr, I., 166,6; svo rainnist hann
þeira sæmda er þér bafið honum
lagt, I., 502, 2 ; lagði honnm
jungfrú Maria svá blíðan butí, I.,
Leggja — cont.
18, 16 ; sér ek eigi likara -atveg
bonum til birtinorar, enn vður
skilning leggi bonum beilt ráð, L,
280, 16 ; er yðr bæði veitandi sönn
elska, ok allr sá styrkr, sem bin
romverska móðir kann yðr veita
ok ma y^r leggja, L, 304,22« — 3.
fig., to lay doicn, to lay aside, to
leave off: leggr baun um bríð sjálft
altaris embættið, L, 174, 5 ; berra
páíian baféi gert þeim báðum
áminnÍDg þar um svá frama, at
leggja embættið, ef þeir befði eða
béldi eignina, L, 354, 25. — 4. /o
lay down, to value, to estimate :
sá maðr trúist eigi yðarri vizku
vel líka, er rill . . . virSa eingis
vald ok vilja konungs, nema
beldr leggja bans berradom svá
ódýrt sem als ekki, I., 274,26;
enn gerÖir Guðs manns í framm-
ferÖum ok flótta leggr bann svá
lágt, at bann setr bonum spurn-
ingar grein, bvi bann lysti, einn
primas, at leiÖa svá mikinn óróa
inn i Guðs kristni, L, 300,8- In
prepositional constructions and
idiomatic phrases : — 1. a., to impose
upon, to visit with : þeir allir samt
verðskylda sér stríÖa ráðning, ef
erkibyskupinn vili á þá leggja, L,
392,10. — 1. á eið, ^o testify on
oath, I., 212,18- — 1. af, — a. to
leave off, to give up : leggr bann
núafum stund erkidjákns þjón-
ustu, L, 46, 18 ; siðan leggr bann
af dagferðir, I., 244,3; keisariun
leggr af illzskv þeiri at taka þa
fleiri {i. e., þrætupáfa),!!., 257, 2;
utan þér beftið yðart barðýðgi, ok
GLOSSARY.
445
Leggja — cont.
afleggit þrályncli . . . munu þér
kúgaðr, I., 164,8. — b. to renounce^
to resign : fyrir yöra illgirnd ok
ofsa munum ver eigi af leggja
konungstignina, I., 152, 22- —
c. to retract: segist nil vilja af
leggja þeim orSum, er liann hefir
ytygt áör, I., 160, 14. — 1. af ser,
to lay aside, to put off] to do off,
to doff, L, 84, 14, 208, 4.— 1. aftr,
to restore, I., 348, 25, 460, 23. — 1-
at jörðu, to lay to earth, to pro-
strate, to lay low, to smite doivii,
I., 544, 12- — 1- eftir, to leave he-
hind : þat herra páfans vakl, er
liann eftir lagði bjá oss, skal yðr
iiægjast, e£ þér betrizt eigi, I.,
408,
4 »
heldr vill hann levsa
steininn tvennu verði, enn leggja
liann efter, II., 216,25.-1. sik
framm, to signalize one's self, to
lay one's self out, I., 498, 15. —
1. fyrir sik, to make one's business,
I., 408, 2- — 1- fseð til, to shoiv
estrangement, II., 152, 7. — 1.
bug a, to give one's mind to, to take
care, I., 384,
21'
-- 1.
leyfi, to
leave optional, to give leave to, I.,
414,17. — ^' ^ ^J^^' ^^ discover,
to unveil, to disclose, I., 244, 12.
— 1. Í moti to give in return, to
requite, I., 6Q, 21' ^^"^? 6- — ^. ^
pant, to give in security, I., 224,
jg. — 1. kárínu, to impose penance,
II., 38,2- — 1- lif ^ií-t til, to
apply one's self unsparingly to,
to act energetically, I., 38, 17. —
1. ni(Sr, to leave off, to discontinue,
J., 358,4. — Icggjast ni?lr af, /o
hang back from, to keep aloof
Leggja — cont.
from, to shirk from, to refrain
from, I., 416, 97. — 1. orð : her
ineÖ leo:£:r bonum einn rikr maðr
svá Tallin orð, to cast ivords at,
to twit, I., 278, 25. — 1. orð me(S,
to add icords to, I., 500, 23. —
1. orskurð á, to give a- decision, I.,
190,26« — 1. stefnu, to appoint
a meeting, I., 468,9. — 1- stund
a, to study, to endeavour, to try,
II., 263, 7. — 1. sverði, to deal
a blow with a sword, II., 14, 23.
— ]. til. — a. to add to, I., 104, 25 ;
II., 218, 17. — b. to attribute to, II.,
10,3. — c. to put forth, to lay
out, to bring to bear, I., 454, g. —
d. Í0 put in an advice, to coun-
sel, I., 194, 1, 464, 22. — 1. til
bænar, to turn to prayer, I., 492,
7. — 1. til leyfi, to give leave, II.,
265, 13. — 1. til kærleik : berra
konungrinn leggr til bans svá
mikinn kærleik, to bestoiv on, I.,
48, 8- — 1. til raun, to make a
trial of, to try, I., 464, 23. — 1.
til samþykt, to give consent, to
assent to, I., 366, 2- — 1. imdir, to
suggest, to stipulate, I., Q>Q, 31. —
1. iindir andsvar, to make the
subject of an ansiver, to give a re-
ply to, I., 382, 27. — 1. upp a, to
do on, to put on: svo lagÖi hann
sömu mirrn upp a sinn likam, þá
er hann deyddi sinn likam ok sitt
liörund með liárklæði ok bú(S-
strokum, I., 104,27- — 1. út. — a. ^o
lay out, to lay down, to sacrifice :
þér ættiS mik jit verja ok ycSart
blóð fyrir mitt lit at leggja, I.,
208,30« — h.to lay out, to expend^
446
GLOSSARY.
Leggja — cont,
to lavish : þá veri tar min þegin
er ek legg út fyrir yðr dagliga, I.,
366, 14. — 1. yfir sik, to put on (a
robe), I., 208, 7. — Med. leggjast
með, to lie with, to fornicate, II.,
260, 9. — Li hernaÖ, to go to war,
I., 6, 3. — 1. á {of rumour), to go
abroad, I., 86, 9. — 1. niðr í, to
fall, to sink into, I., 24, ^g* — !•
til f j andskapar, to conceive hatred,
?nalice against. II., 263, 14. — 1.
iindan, Í0 lapse, I., 118,23' — 1.
uudir, to be subjected to, to fall
under, I., 196, 21« — !• ^^9 lo
fall away, to vanish : segja þá
líkast at allirtregarmyndi ur leggj-
ast malum byskups, ef þyílíkir
geingi milium, I., 326, g*
Leggr (leggjar, -ir), m., a leg, II.,
96,
J 9«
2. the stand in a candle-
stick, II., 234, 23.
Legg-þáttr, m., id., II., 234, 25.
Legoiðs-sök,y., charge of fornica-
ti09l, II, 116,1.
Leg-sta^r, ;??., tomb, II., 86, q.
LeiÖ (-ar, -ir), /., wag, road, I.,
104,23; II., 94,22- — 2. ivag,
mannsj', mode, I., 142, ^9 ; sömu
leið, likewise, I., Q6, 29
Lei^a (dd), v. a., to iiiter, to entomb
{cfr., láð, soil, leiði, a tomb) :
hann tok or jörðu heilagan likam
E^varðar konungs, er leiddr hafði
verit i Luudunum, I., 136, -^i '•>
var ný steinþró áðr tilbúin, ok í
þessari leiða þeir liinii signaða
Thómam erkibyskup, I., 558, ^ ;
hvartveggi leiddist í nýrre stein-
þró a£ sinum hugðarmönnum, II.,
6,6-
Leiða (dd), v.a., to make loath, the
person in dat., the thing in ace. :
tjár hann Heinreki konungi, at
hann hafi þann GuÖ fyrir augum,
er honum leiði alia lysting þessa
lífs, I., 426 10- Med, to grow
tired of, I., 34, ^^.
LeiÖa (dd.), v.a., to lead: því er
réttligt, at sá sé leiðtogi, er ábyrgj-
ast skal þann sem hann leiðir, I.,
364, 29. — In prepositional and
other phrases : l.á einmæli, to lead,
to take aside for private talk,
I., 462, 9. — 1. af, to originate in,
to rise, to spring from, to groio
out of, to result from : af þeim
siðleysum . . . leiddi svá langar
limar, at margs manns lif dro
til útlegðar, I., ^.)Y!\ þar hofst
únáðin, sem afskapligast mátti
sýnast ok mestan úfrið kristninni
af leiða, I., 132, ^ ; þat dregr
drjúgt, er af honum {William
Rufus and his rule) leiðir, I.,
136,23; iinuarr lutr fellr sá til, er
mikla hræring leiðir af, I., 144, ^;
cfr. héðan leiðir, hvaðan leiðir, I.,
146, 2, 450, 23« ; — 1. aftr, to bring
back : sýnist eingi annarr vegr
lögligr eðr lofsamligr . . . enn
Thomas sé aftr leiddr í alia særad
ok TÍrðing, I., 310,7. — 1. at
tíökum, to bring charges home to,
I., 396, 21- — 1- brott, to lead astray,
I., 158,4- — 1. framm af veröld,
to take away from the world,
to bring to death, I., 62, ^. — 1.
getum, to guess at, I., 512,25- —
1. hjá sér, to let go by, to leave un-
heeded, I., 444, ij. — 1. Í. — a. to
bring into : þessi sögn lei^ir þann
GLOSSARY.
447
Leiða — cont.
djn Í landit, at, ^c, I., 60, ^^, cfr,
192,24,. — ^' ^^ introduce: oinga
nýjung leiÖir hann í embættisgerð
sína, 1., 102, 22- — 1- í samþykki,
ío induce to consent., to inveigle
into acquiescence^ I., 450, 13. — 1.
inn, to lead in, to introduce, to
bring home, I., 86, 23- — !• inn til
sin, to lay to heart, to adopt, I.,
150, 29. — 1. lif, 1. framm- lif, li£-
daga, daga, to lead life^ SfC.,1., 8, 2?
148,8, 310,27, 318,24,. — !• samt,
to bring together, to confront, to
compare, I., 888,7. — ^* ^i^ ^il,
to bring one^s self towards, to
point to, I., 52, 22. — 1. skilning
af , to draw conclusion or inference
from, II., 168, 14. — 1. til lykta,
to bring to conclusio7i, to bring
to an end, I., 276, n. — 1. til
minnis, to call to mind, I., 80, 26.
— 1. til stéttar, to advance to
a position,!., 46,24« — ^* til tára,
to bring to tears, I., 104, 9. — 1.
til vott, vætti, to call a witness,
to lead tvitnesses, I., 114, g,
118, 29' — !• uppá, to bring upon :
riss þat mál af skutlan ok grip-
deild ei* fyrr leiddist upp a GuÖs
eign, I., 118,9. ^ed., leiðast af,
to fall back, to recede, to with-
draw from a position : fyrir þessa
hans undirtekt af leiðast þeir
sinni ástöðu, L, 248, jg. — 1. til,
to be persuaded into : hann hafði
leiÖzt til úleifðrar samþykktar
meÖ konunginum, I., 350, 27.
Leiðangr, m., expedition, crusade,
I., 138, lO'
Leiddr, p.p., entombed, interred, II.,
^J 6*
LeiÖi, n., luind at tvill, fair wind,
L, 516,24-
LeiÖr, ad., loathsome, repulsive, dis"
gusting, 1., 112,18-
Leið-rétta, v.a., to correct, to bring
to amended ways of life, II.,
274,30.
Leið-rétta, f, correction, amend-
ment, reformation (of life), I.,
360,22,424,1; IL, 274,30.
LeiÖ-rétting^ f, cori'ection, amend-
ment, I., 360, 26-
Leið-sögn, f, guidance, direction,
oversight, I., 486, 21.
Leiðtoga-lauss, ad., without a head,
without a leader, II., 281,25«
Leið-togi, m., guide, leader, I.,
18, 12, 86, 19, 364, 28 j instigator,
516,19.
Leifa (ð), v.a., to leave : 1. eftir
sik, to leave behind, L, 2, 2 ; báðir
leifÖu þeir fémuni sínum kveljur-
um, II., 6, 5 ; enn þat er justisar
leifa kirkjunni fari til byskups,
where leyfa is a wrong spelling,
I., 296, ig ; leifði hann {i.e., Pe-
trus) OSS formönnum þat dæmi, at
kaupa eigi standi igan frið með
vanvirÖu lagan n a, where leyfði is
the wrong spelling, 1., 430, 25.
Leigja (ð), v.a., to hire: leigja
eitt ross fyrir penning silfrs, I.,
248, g ; to rent, to tenant : hann
gefr honum fyrst lands-kúna ok
þar á ofan jaröarkot, er hann
hafiSi áðrleigt, II., 126,5.
Leigu-maÖr, m., hireling,!., 14:2,21',
180, 20-
448
GLOSSARY.
Leigu-maniiliga, adv., hu'cling-icise,
like a hireling. I., 156,2.
Leikafleik, lék-lékum,léki, leikinn),
v.a.^ to play icif/i, to dealicith, to
treat : var einn maSr sva sarliglia
leikinD, at avgvm bans var vt-
levptt, II., 283, 30- — v.n., to i^lay^
to move, to wave : vÖr í hendi
leikr tvieofgriat sverÖ til beornino-ar,
II., 16,13; 1. á hjóli, to move, to
twist, to ticirl on a wheel, to rest on
a shifty, nnsfable foinidation, I.,
394, 28. 1. Í eldi ástarinnar, to
play in, to he all aglow with, the
fire of love, I., 1 10, 9. — 2. to move
about without restriction^ to vaunt,
to play fast and loose, to do
one s pleasure : iUviljuðum mann i
var lett at lifa ok leika í hærri
stétt ok lægi-i, I., 360, ^ ; brátt
miin birtast, ef Tbomas skal len^
leika öriiggr, bvat rangindum þér
ok aðrir þolit af bonum, L, 502, jg.
Leik-folk, /i., laity, I., 278, jg.
Leikinn, p.j^., dealt with, Sfc, see
leika.
Leikligr, ad., indicative of spoi't,
sporting, sportlike: (bann) spyr
þegar, því bann færi i þvílíkan
stað, svo sem raeð leikligri boflist,
11., 142,10.
Leikligr, ad., lay, 1. vald, lay, secu-
lar power, I., 440, g.
Leik-maðr, m., a layman, I., 48, 22»
68,14, 128,15.
Leik-mot, n., play-^ ?neet,' meeting
of a gay and playful character,
L, 22,22.
Leikr (-s, -ar), m., play, amusement,
I., 32, 2} 72,16; II., 80, 12-
Leikr, ad., lay, laic, I., 70, 7.
Leik-vald, n., lay powers, secular
powers, laity, I., 42, 13, 260, 96>
298,11,344,10.
Leingstum, dat. pi. of leingstr
(lengstr), 5?/^:)f77. o/'laugi', as adv.,
mostly, generaU'/, usually, I.,
102,20.
Leir-búð,y., clay tabernacle, circum-
scription for the frail body of
man, I., 544, 19.
Leiri' (-s), m., clay : ökkvast leirrinn
Tið fætrna, I., 246, 9 ; cfr. 254, 95 ;
II., 168,6.
Leita (aí5, \,subj. pi. leitaðim, I., 406,
23), v.a., with ace, to look for, to
search for: leitaðu dæmiriíninga
ok sjá, bvat þér bæfir, I., 364, 13;
bréf yðar kom til vor . . . meira
til áleitni enn styrkÍDgar mót
ástinni, er eigi leiíar sinn ávinn-
ing, L, 398,
to seek
16-
irith
gen.
því mun yðr sýnast
ofmælt, at vér leitaðim saka
eftir áfellit, L, 406, 23 ; bann
hefir fallit í óblíðu nokkiira,
ok vill nú leita friðar. L, 158,
16 ; því vanmegnast þeir frá
þeim krafti, er leitar eilífra
fagnaða, L, 234, ig ; spurt befir
bann ok, hversu föðurliga berra
páfinn leitar bonum lækningar,
L, 340,22? C/'^. II., 96,11.-3.
to try, to endeavour, sem þessi
tilbúnaðr er allr I'lt, leita enn
lærðir menn at fa samþykt ok
játyrði kosningsins, &c., I., 80, n.
— 4. to (look), to tend, to aim :
reykelsi lagt á glóð, leitar í loftið
gjarna, I., 104, 22 > ^vá sem vend-
ir leita til bimins, sva munu
vaxa ok margfaldast bans dýrðar-
GLOSSARY.
449
Leita — cont.
lof fyrir Drottni, II., 60, 20- —
In prepositional and other
phrases : — 1. at, to search for, II..
270,10« — 1. brutt, to seek to get
away, I., 2225 21- — !• eftir, to seek
to take aivay : berliga sýnist
eftir leitað blóði ok lífi þessa
mauus, erkibyskupsius, I., 196, 5;
cfr. 388, 12« — k til, to make an
effort, to try, to endeavour : ok
þólt hunn leiti svo til, at einginn
maði' sýniligr uiegi honum fia
hrinda, bægir honum eigi því
síðr Guðs dóinr ósýniligr, sem
óvinrinn sjálfr sé fyrir honiim, II.,
12(5, 27' — b. to resort to: léttir
hann brutt £rá þvísa lífi, enn
leitar til Theobaldum, góðrar
minningar, Kantuariensis erki-
byskups, L, 34, ^g- — !• undan,
to seek to get away, I., 230, ^^.
1. lit af, to seek to come away
from, I., 230, 3. — Med. leitast
urn, to feel one's way, to try : í
leyíi leggr hann þeim um at leitast,
ef nokkurr friðr má formerast
með þeira tiUögum, I., 414,^8'
Leita-maðr, m., one who is in the
habit of resorting to, II., 148,27»
Lemja (lem, lamda-lömdum, lemdi,
laminn), v.a., to heat, to smite, I.,
182,13,286,8.
Lén (-S), n.,feof, I., 56, 9, 82, j^.
Lend (-ar, -ar),/!, the loin, I., 26,21-
Lending (-ar), /'., landing, landing-
stead, I., 490, 9.
Lengd (-ar, -ir), f., length, extent,
IL, 60, 23, 206, 5.
Lengi, adv., long, I., 6, g ; compar.
lengr, L, 334, 25.
K 541.
Lengja (d), v.a., to make long, to
prolong : sendiboðar þurfa eigi
at lengja sinn veg alt til Roms,
L, 92,26 5 <fr. II., 216,17; (o
continue, þetta starf þurfi þit
eigi lengja, L, 16, iq. — 3Icd. to
grow longer, to go on, to proceed,
nil mun synast sem stigagreiu
þessi liiti at konunginum í
Englandi, eigi því minnr {jott
sagan lengist, I., 8, 23.
Lengra, comp. of langt, nenf. of
langr, as adv., further, I.. 32, ig.
Léus-maðr, m., feoffee, I., 140, 12.
Leo, in., a lion, L, 156, 20«
Lereft, n., {linen cloth '^) some thin
fabric used for monachal habits,
I., 314,e.
Lerka (að), v.a., to mortify the
body with penances, II. , 6, iq.
Lesa (les, las-lásum, læsi, lesinn),
v.a., prop., to * lese,' to gather
together ; hence to read : hver
hans lífsbók, sem lesin varð,
Ijóðar enn leynir eigi, hver hæSar
skuggsjó ok höí'ðingja spegill hann
hefir verit, L, 2, 20 ; tfr- 38, (., 7.
— 2. to read the service in
church : á laugardaginn, sem
erkibyskup hefir lesit, L, 190, 2.
— 1. samau í sínu hjarta, to
digest, to lay to heart, L, 102, 2«
— 3. to give vent to a torrent of
abuse : enn hvárt Heinrekr kon-
ungr las nokkut annat fy rr á
veginum, greinir eigi bok, enn þat
er skrifat, at hann setr Thomasi
erkibyskupi gildan umlestr, I.,
434,3.
Lest (-ar, -ir), /'., caravan laden
with ]>rovisions,a convoy, 1., 508,0.
F F
450
GLOSSARY.
Lestr (lestrar), w., reading, I.,
20,26.
Let, léti, létum, see lata.
Letania,y*., litany, I., 228, 28'
Letr (-s), n., writing, written woi'k,
record, deed : I., 2, 2? 168, n,
352,16; IL, 108,2.-2. a letter,
I., 414, 13.
Letr-gerÖ,/., writing, I., 2, ^q.
Letrliga, adv., in tvriting, II.,
208
? !•
Letrligr, ad., appertaining to letters,
IL, 232,3.
Letta (tt), v.a., to lighten, to mahe
light, to lift, þeir breiÖa klæÖi
sin á bakit, ok létta erkibyskupi
svá til reiÖar, I., 248, 9 ; þat
náttmyrkr léttist uokkuð, er lagð-
ist yfir Englands kristni, þá
er Thomas erkibyskup var sak-
lauss drepinn, IL, 44, 3. — 2. to
mahe light, to ease : þat herra
páfans bréf . . . sem þeir bera
heim til Eoglands þyngir heldr
enn lettir alia þa frétt, er þeir
liöfðu at flytja konunginum, I.,
328,7; herra erkibyskup vildi
gjarna lyfta hann upp ok letta
hans harm, I., 438,29- — 3. to
rid, to remove : lettist ok brátt
þessi tálman, því at þeir sjá lykla
marga á múrinum ok bera til
hvern at öðrum, þar til portinu
hæfir, L, 222, 22« — Impers. to
become easy, to be relieved of
pain : líÖr nú á raánadaginn, at
hann liggr ok lettir þó mikit, I.,
204, 1 ; ok sem ek dvaldist þar
nokkiirar nætr, þótti mér enn
framar letta fætinum, II., 96, 17.
Létta-kona, /., midwife, IL, 156,4.
Letti (-a), m., delivery, giving birth
to a child, IL, 156, g. — 2. ease,
light-hearted demeanour, I.,
160, 16.
Lettir (-is), m., relief, alleviation,
IL, 68, 22, 96, 12-
Léttliga, adv., lightly ; horfa létt-
liga, to have a bright, reassuring
outlook, L, 190,30.
Lettr, ad., light, easy, I., 14, §,
360,1,454,19.
Leyi'a (ð), v.a., to give leave, to
permit, I., 40, 23, 62, 13, 134, 15.
Leyfi (-s), n., permission, I., 414, 17.
Leyna (d), v.a., to conceal, to hide :
L, 2, 21, 404, 2. — Med. to re-
main unknown, unobserved, un-
discovered, L, 252, 25 436, 12 ; to
steal away, to abscond, L, 252, 17 ;
1. til, to make a stealthy attempt,
IL, 140,3.
Leynd (-ar),y., a secret, secrecy, L,
38, 13, II. 54, 16-
Leyndr, ad., secret, hidden, mys-
terious, I., 54, 29, 82, 5, 282, n.
Leyni, w., hiding place, L, 244, 5,
318,8.
Leyniliga, adv., pHvily, privately,
I., 64, 8, 86, 13 ; secretly, L, 156, 5.
Leyniligr, ad., lonely, L, 242,4.
Leysa (t), v.a., prop., to loose. —
Impers., to go loose, to cut adrift :
vildi erkibyskup fa til mann, at
styÖja nokkut farkostinn, at eigi
leysi meÖ öllu til brots, I., 44, 24.
— 2. to solve : er sá örvita, er þeim
vill mýgja, er á stjórnarvald yfir
honum. bæÖi at leysa ok binda,
L, 3G2, 18« — 3. to dissolve, to
break up : enn liversu hann leysti
Í sundr í liðu alt þat flærðsemdar
GLOSSARY
451
Leysa — cont.
uet .... bar mikla dásemd í
hjörtum beyrandi manni, I., 302, ^ ;
Jann tirna sem fundrinn leysist
ok menn búast til burtreiðar, víkr
Tbómas erkibyskup at Heinreki
konungi ok leiðir bann á einmæii,
I., 462, g. — 4. to solve f to unravel,
to settle : skyldumst rer af þjón-
ustutekjunnar abyggju at leysa
þær sömu questiones, II., 52, ^.
— 5. to undo, to ivithdraw, to
remove, þetta áfelli skal eigi f\Tr
leysast, enn berra páfaGiim ok oss
veitist lölig yfirbót, I., 358, 7. —
6. to absolve, both in secular and
ecclesiastical sense, L, 80,8, 174,225
296, 11, 350, i2- — ^' to free, to de-
liver : 1. iir lífsbáska, I., 34, - ; c/r.
238, 15. — 8. to discharge {duty),
II., 98, 11. — 9. to ransom, to re-
deem : beldr vill bann leysa stein-
inn tvennu verði, enn leggja bann
efter, II., 216, 24 ; Jesus Kristr
smíSaöi sína beilaga kristni ok
leysti bana til sin nieð svá miklu
verÖi sem er sjálfs bans bl(5(5, I.,
344,7. — Med. to become free,
to loithdraio, to depart, to break
up : ok svá býst bann beiman í
öðru lagi at byrja visiteran, síÖan
bann leysist af konungs garði, I.,
504,2i;'e/r. II.,218,23.
Lið (-s), n., a flock, a band, I.,
484, 3, 5 ; an army, II., 174, ^.
Liða (líð, leið-liðum, liÖi, liðinn),r.«.,
to pass, to icear on : ok er litið
leið, sögðu jústisar valdsins at þat
befði æfinliga konungs eign verit,
I., 6, II ; enu cr stuudir liðu, cfld-
ist svá mctnaíSr mcÖ bonum, at
Liða — cont.
bann let bera kross fvrir sér, I.,
320, ig. -— 2. to pass away, to
come to an end: miner lifdagar
munu brátt liða, I., 372, go ; yduart
ualld . . . beri þa forsio, at þetta
strid metti lida, II., 255, 90- ~^
connected icith this sense is the
phrase : einbvern líðr, one comes
to an end, the rendering being :
next after, out-taken, excepted:
þin vinátta þótti mest verð i öllu
landi þegar konunginn leið, I.,
394, 27' — 3. to take rise from, to
originate in, to proceed from : béð-
an liðr ok þat, er Alexander páfi
elskar Heinrek konung ok þolir
bonum meira enn dæmi finnist til,
I., 92, ;^3. — Impers. to wear on :
liðr nóttina ok kemur malstefna,
I., 24, 2 ; liðr nú til stefnudags,
I., 72, 22 ; nil sem mjök liðr aftan-
söng bræÖra, . . . ganga lærðir
menn at erkibyskupi, I., 534,25»
— 2. to go on, to fare: sjám nú
til, . . . bvat liðr sendiboðiun til
Englands, I., 70, 17 ; vitjar bann
sjálfr mörgu sinni þessa sálubúss,
at eiginni raun se bonum Ijost,
bvat þeim liÖr er þar liggja, I.,
108, 23 ; ef bann varð svikinn með
fortölum, er fyrst særði erkibysk-
upinn, bvat mun þá binum liða ?
IL,48,i.5.
Liðinn, p.p. of líða, late, i.e., gone,
departed this life, I., 26, 3.
Liðr (-S, and -ar, -ir, ace. pi. liðu),
m., a joint of a limb : þar var ein
kona svo bjiig ok bryggdrogin, at
a þrinir árummiitti bún aldri upp
réttast, enn . . . gekk svo í burt,
F F 2
452
GLOSSARY.
Liðr — cont.
at bæði var hiin rétt ok í öllum
liðum albætt, II., 138, 94- — 2.
limb of the body : þemia pilt fær
bann aftr nióÖrinni albættan til
allra liÖa, sem aldri befói bann
kraukr orðið {of a deformed
child), II., 136,21.-3. article,
point {in an argument) : enn
bversu bann leysti sundr í liðu alt
þat flærðsemdarnet . . . bar
mikla dásemd í björtum beyrandi
manni, I., 302, 2-
Liðugr, ad., free, clear, quit : þér
vorut . . . lejstr ok liðugr geiT
a£ öUum þeim lutum, er konung-
ÍQum ok bans garði til beyrðu, I.,
192, 13, cfr. 220, 14. — 2. at leisure :
írefr bann sik betrliðus:an atskoða
vöxt ok efni málanna, enn þeir
sumir, er skrapa binn mállausa,
I., 112,25; cfr. 336,18. —3. at
liberty, disengaged: þegar vér
verðum liöugir bér af, skulura vér
gjarna til yðar koma, I., 464, j. —
4. free, unhindered : ferr bann
frjáls ok liÖugr, þvi at Guð greiðir
bans göngur, I.,2o4, jg. — ö.free,
open, admitting of free access : eru
f)á liðugar dyr ok lofiit innganga,
II., 130,-.
Lið-veizla (-u), /*., help, aid, assist-
ance, I., 388,24«
Lif (-s), n., abdomen, belly : kviðr-
inn bljop meö ofverkjum í óbæri-
ligan þrota, svá at allt lifit sýktist
af iipp ok niðr, II., 74, i^. — 2,
the body : af þeim sætleik, er bann
þóttist kenna imi allt sitt lif i
þeim blezaíia drykk, vaknar bann
brátt aftrdreginn i allan sinn sjúk-
Líf — cont.
dóm, I., 70, 7. — 3. life, vita vi-
talis : þessir . . . fara sem fljot-
ast til Englands at taka af lifi
binn mesta iivin konungsins, I.,
5L6, 4, cfr. 536,22; vera lifs, to
be alive, II., 152, ^. — 4. life,
moral existence, conversation, con-
duct : nú sem (f)eir) bafa lyktað
þá grimd ok glæpsku, er þeini
blotnaSist af Ijotu lifi ok illu kyn-
feröi, I., 546,7; ekki finst bans
life bjartnra, II., 2, 21. — 5. life,
biography : fleiri enn einn eðr
tyeir af þeira fjöld bafa skrifat á
fmsum timiim lif ok lofsamligar
mannraunir binságæta Guðs pisl-
arvotts Tbóme, I., 2, 4.
Lifa (ð), vji., to live, I., 8, jg, and
passim. — v.a., to live, to act, to
do : bann læríJi þat eina, er bann
lifÖi sjálfr, I., 104,10.
Lifandi, pi^es. p., living : ser lifanda
ichile yet alive, I., 454,7; dat.
pi. lifmidum, II., 166, g.
Lif-dagar, m. pi., life-days, I.,
510,11; n., 12,1.5.
Lifga (að), v.a., to bring to life
again, II., 168, ig.
Líf-gjöf, f, grant, preservation of
/j/Ml'., 210,3.
Lif-lát, n., the losing of life, csp.
violent death, untimely end^ I.,
106,9, 202,19; murder, II., 14, g.
Lifláts-stund, /'., hour of death, II.,
270,10-
Lif-lauss, ad., lifeless, dull, slug-
gish, I., 22, 18.
Liiligr, ad., life-like, fresh, I.,
554,9 ; II., 288, 10-
Líf-Iæti, ?í.,=lif-lát, II., 4,15.
GLOSSARY.
453
Líf-mikill, ad.^ well alh'C, lively,
health I/, II., 156,8.
Lifna (aÖ), v. inchoat., to come to
life again^ to reviie, II., 1GÍ, i;.
LifnaÖr (-ar), w., manner of life,
I., 34,15, 106,9. — -• convent,
inonasteri/ : I., 252,98, 368,26?
3/0, 1,7, 12«
Lif-saga, f, life, personal history,
biography, II., 232,9.
Lífs-bók, /!, hook containing perso-
nal history, biographical memoir,
I., 2, 20 ; " liook of life " {biblical),
I., 156, 16.
Lifs-brauS, n., breadof life,l.,40,ii.
Ijih-gsita, f, path of life, I., 94, 14.
Lífs-háski, m., peril of life, I., 34.5 ;
n.,74,,.
Lífs-tími, m., life time, II., 56, 23.
Lifs-vegr, m., manner of life, I.,
o5o, 23'
Lífs-þáttr, m., (þáttr = thread,
. strand). Jig., thread, element of
life, II., 236,6. — 2. (þáttr=//w-
torical thread, memoir, short bio-
graphy), special ^^life,'' biogra-
phy, I., 4, 4.
Líf-tjón, n., peril of life, I., 168,6-
l-iggja (ligg, lá-lágum, lægi, legit),
v.n.,to lie, to lie down, to lie in
bed : ser hann, at frammi fyrir
musterinu liggr maðr til bænar
frammfallinn alt til jarðar, I.,
52, 2 ; lit)r nú svá mánadagrinn
at hana liggr, I., 204, i- — 2. to
lie, to tend, to aim : bans vegr
liggr nokkut hærra enn þeira
manna, er leggjast niÖr í saur ok
syndir þessa bins auma lifs, I.,
24, 17, nú liggja bans vegar beim-
leiöi?, II., "102, 18- —3. to re-
Liggja — cont.
main : votta ... at bjá þeim
liggr boíSskaprinn, I., 458, 27 ;
þessir eru nokkiuir konuugs
vanar uppnefndir ok þó enn
fair bjá þeim, sem enn liggja
iitaldir, I., 168, 4 ; tvö byskupssæti
Vigornen ok Hereforden liggja
böfðingjalaus, I., 134, -. — 4. to
lie on the mind, to weigh on the
heart : þau undanskot ok skutlan,
er bannkallar gjör móti kriinunni,
liggja bonum eigi vel, I., 144, 20 ;
þat liggr með bans bjarta, at vitja
sinn lýÖ ok vikja til GuÖs boðorða,
I., 504, 22 ; er þat vel trúanda, at
eigi lægi bonum þá i minna riimi,
bverjar lofgjörðir bann var skyld-
ugr Tboma erkibyskupi, II., 82,
20- — I>i various phrases : 1.
eftir, to lie left behind, I., 544, 25.
— 1. fyrir, to aivait, to be in stoi^e :
ferr þá enn til orðræðu bvat fyrir
mun liggja, ef reiöir undir fotum,
I., 436,2^5 bvat liggr þá fyrir
ykkr? I., 500,9- — 1- ^^K^, to
lie lightly on the mind, I., 376, g.
— 1. Í skauti, to be at stake, I.,
486, 16« — 1« næst, to lie nearest to
heart, II., 22, 20* — !• til, to sort
under, to appertain to, I., 88.3.,
cfr. I., 108, 22- — !• inidir, to lie
under, I., 286,8- — b. to be sub-
ject, under the dominion of, I.,
58, 4, 118, iQ. — c. to depend on,
þetta lif er svá fallit, at alt eftir-
lætið liggr undir ánauð ok mæíSu,
I., 60, 10 ; orÖsnild bans var ok
svá fallin, at mikit la undir löng-
um, bverjar upptektir voru a
bafðar, ef bann talaði meÖ ríka
454
GLOSSAKY.
Liggja — cont,
menn, I., 36, 12- — 1- "^'i^j ^^ be pro-
vided against : f orboÖ lá viÖ í Eng-
landi, ef nökkurr át af sjálfdauðu
kvikende, II., 120, 20- — ^- 7^^'? ^^
he imminent ^to threaten^ I., 162,22?
484, ;^9. — 1. þungt, to lie heavily
on, to cause great concern, I.,
332, 13.
Lik (-s), n.^ a dead body, a corpse,
II., 164, 8.
Lika (ai), v.a., to make a like-
ness, to shape, to form, to figure:
stendr sniahuitr kistill Ivktr vand-
lega ok orþinn með sva miclv
jfirvöttis formi meistarliga, at
engi iarOligs mannz hönd matti
sva fagrliga lika ok grata, II.,
286, 1 ; cfr. haun er luktr ok sva
líkaÖr sem aldri kunni manns
hand sva pollisera, I., 24, ^q;
hann likar sik góðan með kné-
faUi ok segir sva, puts on a fair
face, I., 216, 25 ; vill hann eigi
hlutlauss vera af þessu illvh'ki,
heldr likast frændum sínum hvat-
andi sverðinu ofan í toman
hausinn erkibyskupsins, I., 546, 25.
— 2. Impcrs., to like, I., 48, 17,
0)6, 12, 108, g, 296, 27 ; to please, to
find acceptance, II., 275, ^^.
Lik ami (-a, -ar), m., the body {dead),
I., 546, 18J 550,12-
Likamliga, adv., in the body, I.,
354,7,512,13.'
Likamligr, ad., carnal, worldly, I.,
64, 20 ; corporeal {punishment),
I., 144,13.
Likamr (-s, -ir), m., the body, I.,
S, 18? 58, 6 ; « corpse, I., 552, 13 ;
Likamr — cont.
Drottins 1., corpus Domini, the
host, I., 208,9.
Likast, superL neut. oflikx, as adv.,
likeliest, most probable, I., 326, g.
Likendi, n., similarity, L, 48, 5. — 2.
probability, likelihood, II., 82, 4.
Likindi (-s), n., like manner, IL,
170,12.
Liking (-ar, -ar),/., semblance, pre-
tence, gerir hann ser þá gliking,
at hann vili login gjarna geyma,
I., 262, 5. — 2. similitude, nú sem
manndrápsmenn eru settir undir
iÖran, má heyrihga segjast i þá
liking, sem þat náttmyrkr léttist
nokkuÖ, er lagðist yíir Englands
kristiii, II., 44, 1. — 3. comparison,
má nil þegar hans brjósti taka
þá liking, at loft hefir skirt verit,
enn missi nú nokkut, ok dragi af
mestu birti, L, 134, 20«
Lilya (t), v.a., to make like: (þeir)
likðv sik enn i þvi riddavrvm
Pilati iarls þeir er gvö krossfestv.
er þeir Ivtskiptv með ser sialfs
drottins klæÖvm, II., 270, 34, cfr,
L, 472,14. — Med. to resemble,
L, 82,3, 196,25; IL, 4,5.
Likligr, ad., like to, to be expected :
nú má sýnast likligr til þess, blez-
aÖr Gregorius páfi ... at erki-
stólnnm haíi hann geíit svá mikit
frelsi, L, 124,18; likely, probable,
L, 104,8, 454,1.
Likn (-ar), f, mercy, L, 174,
9?
404,2; n., 30,
16*
Líkna (að), v.a., to show, to have,
mercy, to take pity on, II ., 40, 5,
274,31.
GLOSSARY.
455
Líknar-hönd,y., hand of mercy, 1.,
508, ^7.
Likr, ad,, like, similar, I., 18, ^g.
— 2. likely, suitable. Jit, pro-
mising : I., 46, 6, 280, 15; II., 122, g.
— 3. like, proper, befitting, I.,
- 10,13.
Lík-þrá,/., leprosy, I., 364, jg ; H-,
172, p
Lík-þrár, í/í/., leprous, II,, 134, ^^,
226,15.
Lilja (-11, -ur), /:, a lily, I., 552,3-
Lima-lát, n., maiming^ mutilation,
L, 142,e.
Liinar,y*jy/., branches, II., 60, 22- —
2. ramifications, I., 6, 17. — 3.
limbs : skyldi ek hann til rikis
halda upp á mitt lif ok limar, I.,
66, ^3.
Limi (-a, -ar), m., a rod offiagella-
tion, I., 98, 1 ; II., 36, n,
Limr (s, -ir), w., a limb, a member
ofthebody,l.,3A:,^,9S,.^,2,U,^^,
544,11.
Lin (s), n., linen, I., 232, 4.
Lina (að), v.a., to soften, I., 376, 15.
Med. to soften, to sober down, to
give way, to subside, I., 492, g ;
II., 12,17. — ^'.^' ^^ 9^^'^ '^'(^ij/i io
abate, to subside {of pain or ill'
ness), I., 204,2.
Linda-bnifr, m., a knife borne in the
belt, II., 116,19.
Lin-hjartaÖr, ad., tender-hearted, I.,
510, 13.
Lin-klæði, n. pi., linen raiment, I.,
232,9.
Linleikr, m., gentleness, meekness,
I., 340,12; IL, 267,33.
Linliga, adv., meekly, I., 434, jq.
Linr, ad., gentle, I., 528, 7,29.
Lin-skauti, m., a clouty snip, shred
of linen, U., 80,^0 (^^0,^).
Juiqnor, fiuid, IL, 154,25-
List (-ar, -ÍT),f., adroitness, clever-
ness, L, 54,01 ; art, I., 50, g, (IL,
232,,).
Listiiliga, adv., stately, elegantly,
I.} 48,24, 2/ 8, 29.
Lita (lit, leit-litum, liti, litinn), v.n.,
to look, to glance, L, 22, 17. — 2.
to regard, to consider, to give at-
tention to, to examine, L, 24, 23,
110, 21, 202, s, 368, 12 ;IL, 122, 13.
Jled. litast vel, to set a fond eye
on, L, 52,97.
Litill {neut. lítið aíid lítt, I., 6, n,
108, g), ad., little, small : dat. litl-
um, I., 24, 21 ; litlu, dat. neut. as
adv., little, short, L, 32, g ; litlu
siðar, a little later, I., 12,22- —
2. feeble : var litillar heilsu ok
kendi likþrár, IL, 172, 15.
Lítil-látliga {also spelt litilátliga),
adv., meekly, humbly, L, ] 72, 26»
486,6. — 2. reverently, in a de-
votional manner : þeir ganga allir
samt framm at steinþrónnisvo litil-
látliga sem skyldiigt var, IL. 2OO57.
Litilleikr {spelt litileikr), m., narrow
compass, humbleness, IL, 230,25«
Lítil-lætast, med., to humble one's
self, IL, 230, 12.
Litil-læti, n., humility, meekness, I.,
18,27.
Litillætis-verk, n., a deed of conde-
scension, an act of mercy, IL,
134,19.
Litil-magni, m., an inferior^ an un-
derling, I., 110,1; II., 262,25.
Litla, ace. neut, of litill, used as
s^ubst., a trifle, I., 24, n.
4:.6
GLOSSARY.
Lit-prúÖr, ad., of fair comjylexion,
I., o54, iQ.
Litr (-ar, -ir), m., colour : vatn bans
skifti V. sinnum sinum lit, II.,
226,25. — 2. ki/e, complexion :
likara sýndist því, at liann hefði
sötlio^a sofnat, avo:vm ok mvnni
aptr loknum meÖ lifligvm lit, II.,
288, 10« — 3. feigned appearance,
pretence, I., 300, 5, 320, jg.
Litt, adv., little, I., 404, ^^ ; líttað
(= litt at), a little, II., 262,14.
Ljá (Ijæ, léði-léöum, léÖi, léð), v.a.,
to lend, to grant the loan of, I.,
188, 3 ; II., 124, 10. — 2. to grant,
to bestow, I., 360, 23. — 3. to let
loose, to slacken, to give loose :
minnir hann á konunginn meirr
onn um sinn, at hann Ijá tauminn,
ok leyfi, at formenn sé kosnir
kirkjunum til stjornar, I., 134, ^g.
Ljóða (að), v.a., loudly to pro-
nounce, to enunciate, to promul-
gate, I., 2,21-
Ljóö-byskiip, m.,a suffragan bishop,
I., 88,5,296,4.
Ljos (-s), n., a light, I., 198, g; II.,
14, 20; koma í Ijós, to come to
light, to be born, II., 106,9.
Ljos-ker, n., a lantern, II., 158, ^g.
Ljosliga, adv., clearly, unreservedly ,
L, 510,9.
Ljós-litaðr, ad., of fair complexion,
I., 28,9.
I joss, ad., light, fair : hann var
Ijoss ok rjóðr yíirlits. II., 27G,3o.
— 2. clear, manifest, I., 2,2, 42, g,
218, 17. — 3. upright, sincere :
Heinrekr konungr var . . . eigi
Ijoss i skaplyndi, I., 44, 12-
Ljosta (lyst, laust-lustum, lysti,
lostinn), v.a., to smite, L, 364, jg ;
1. undir, to nudge, {for the pur-
pose of a private suggestion^, I.,
486, 28 j inipers., 1. upp, to flash
up suddenly, II., 166, 21.
Ljotliga, adv., in a fell, heinous
mcinner, II., 14, 21, 180, ^2-
Ljotr, ad., ugly-, hideous, I., 112, jg,
176,185 318,21 ; IL, 12, 5;/o2i/, I.,
178,3, 498,15, 518? 28 5 l^'^d, abo-
minable, I., 140, 14, 254, iQ.
Ljúfr, ad., lief, sweet, acceptable,
II., 291, 26«
Ljuga (lyg, lang-lugum, lygi, log-
inn), v.a., to lie, to speak false-
hood, l.,\1S,^, ^02, ^^.
Ljúka, v.a., to lock : 1. upp, to un-
lock, to open, II., 188, n. — 2. to
finish, to bring to a close, II.,
293, 1. See lúka.
Loða (dd), V. n., to cleave, to stick
to : prov. engi tekr saa i tiorvna er
eigi loði við = he that toucheth
pitch shall be defiled {Eccli,
XIII, 1), II., 275,19.
Lof (-s), n., permission, I., 2, jg,
70, 15, 134,8. — 2. -grant, endow-
ment, virtue, enn þeim steini
hefir Guð lagt svo mikils háttar
lof, I., 476, 14. — 3. praise, I., 2,
13,122,10,300,1; n.,4,14.
Lofa (að), v.a., to permit, to allow,
I., 202,13, 300, g, 406,29; IL,
283, 3. — 2. to praise, I., 258, 4,
284,14,430,20; II., 283, 3.
Lo£-gerð,y., praise, I., 50, 13.
Lof-gjörö,/., eW., II., 72,18.
Lofi (-a, -ar), 7n., the palm of the
hand, IL, 138, 14.
GLOSSARY.
457
Lofliga, ad., laudably, creditably,
ill a manner to he recommended,
I., 336,31.
Lofligr, ad., allowable, permissible.
lawful, I., 350,11,512
' 12-
■ 2.
praiseworthy, recommendahle, I.,
50,27, ^ö?i9j 464, 11 ; laudable,
adorable, I., 324, g.
Lof-messa, /., commemoration ser-
vice, II., 206, 3.
Lof-samligr, ad., praise worthy,
laudable, I., 2, 4, 50, iq, 310, g.
Lof-söngr, m., a song of praise, II.,
188, 17.
Loft (-s), n., air, sky, I., 104,22?
134,20? 390,18, 510, 21^
Lof-versi, m., panegyric, encomium,
I., 22,1.
Log (-s), n., a light, a torch, II.,
234, 2g, 236, 18.
Log-brandr, m., firebrand, I., 14, i^, ;
II., 2,e.
Logi (-a, -ar), m,, a fiame, I., 8, 9,
14, 14.
Loginn, see Ijiiga.
Loglanss, ad., not lighted, IL,
226,2,.
Lok (-s) n., close, end, termination ;
in the phrase: liða unclir I., L,
28,20, 352, 7.
Loka (-11, -\xv),f., a lock, a bolt, IL,
140,4.
Lokinn, p.p., finished, I., 536, 19.
Lokka (að), v.a., to lock, 1. wt^^., un-
lock, II. , 140,3. — 2. to entice, to
decoy, to beguile, I., 110, 9,
158, 21 ; to allure, to induce, IL,
274,30,280,2,.
Lokn-sveinn, m., porter, page, L,
210,21,524,,.
Losta-taumr, m., rein of lust, I.,
99
Lostinn, see Ijosta.
Lot, n., slackness, retnissncss, I.,
174,18.
Lotinn, ad., louting, bent, hoioed
down, IL, 144, n.
Lotning, y., reverence, II., 108,13.
LúÖi, see lyja.
Lúðra (að), v.n., to trail, to crawl,
to cringe, IL, 272, 17.
Lugu, see Ijiiga.
Liika (lýk, lauk-lukum, Ijki, lokinn) ,
v,a., to lock, to close : 1. upp, to
unlock, I., 72,13, 192,5.-2.^0
close an account, to settle a debt,
to pay, I., 140,5, 1^8,7, 330,29-
— 3. to finish, to bring to a close,
L, 4, 8, 510, 10, 536, g. — Impers.
and med,, to come to an end, to
terminate, to finish, I., 44, j,,
82,9, 136,23, 188,23, 240, ig,
3/2, 22«
Luktr, p.p. of lykja, locked, shut,
closed : (hann) fínnr þar kominn
kistil einn snjóhvítan með skín-
anda fílbein, hann er Inktr ok svá
líkaðr, sem aldri knuni manns
hand svá pollisera, I., 24,9, cfr.
50,5. — 2. shut up, shut in, en-
closed: tekr hann ser til hlífðar
várs Drottins líkam, luktan i pro-
pitiatorio, I., 208,9. — 3. inclosed,
surrounded : er hann nu vel hirÖr
fyrir sinum ovinum, því at sá
staðr er alia vega luktr vötnum,
I., 250,9. — 4. drawn to, close,
narrow : hann berr fyrir utan
þan klæði, sem bæði eru hvít ok
hroin . . . mcð hvítum skinuum
ok luktum eiinuni, L, 94, 20«
458
GLOSSARY.
Lukti, see ijkja.
Lund (-ar, -ir), f., temper^ disposi-
tion, mind, I., ^6, 9, 62, 2i> 198, 23,
280,11,326,23, 448,6.— 2. u'a^,
mode, manner,!., 14,9, 78, i2'
Liis (-ar, lyss), /., a louse, II.,
271,19.
Lustu, lustum, see Ijosta.
Liisugr, ad., lousy, II., 271, ig.
Lúta (lýt, laut-lutum, Ivti, lotinn),
v.n., to " lout^'' to bow, to bend, to
stoop : e£ iion (kirk j an), lýtr á
kné í falli sinna formanna, eflist
hon mest ok endrbætist, I., 400, 5.
2. to bow to, to submit: látið yðr
eigi læging í þykja, at lúta þeim,
er yðr skapaði, I., 424, jg. — 3.
Jig., to take a downward turn, to
go down, I., 156^ n. — Preposi-
tional uses : 1. at. — ?i.,to incline,
to point towards : nii mun sýnast,
sem stigagrein þessi lúti at kou-
unginum í Englandi, I., 8,22- —
b. to sort under, to appertain to :
hann skal hafa úskert konungsvald
Í öllum þeim greinum, er at lúta
kriinunni í þessu máli, I., QQ, 22 ;
sá er samþykkr, er ásakan lýtr at,
ok þegir hann þó, I., 362, 4. — c.
to come to, to fall to one's share :
skilr herra Thomas, at þessi vandi
vill at honum lúta, I., 292, iq. —
1. undir : — a., to bow to, to
submit to: lætr hann á líkan hátt
undir lúta ríkan sem iiríkan, I.,
140, 11. — b. to go back to, to
fall to, e£ erkistoll, byskupssæti,
&c., eru höféiugjalaus . . . lúta
þegar allar þessar eiguir ....
undir konunírs-orarð, I., 296
'j 25-
Lutr (-ar, -\r), m., lot, part, portion.^
I., 2, 20- — 2. a thing, matter, I.,
Lut-skipta, = hlutskifta, v.a., to
allot, II., 270, 35.
Lutu, lutum, see liita.
LýÖa = hlýöa, v. a., I., 220, ,3,
282, 1,.
Lýða, probably a mistake, for hlita,
q.v., I., 286,22-
Lýð-byskup, m., a suffragan bishop,
L, 124,6.
Lýðinn = hlýÖinn, I., 118,3.
Lýð-maðr, w., a layman, I., 404, 15 ;
n., 282,11.
Lýöni, /., = hlýöni, I., 204,25,
206,8.
Lýðr (-S, -ir), m., folk, people, I.,
118,3,196,26.
Lyfta (t), v.a., with ace, to lift,
erkibyskup vildi gjarna lyfta
hann upp, I., 438, 23. — with dat.,
to raise, I., 62, 19 ; II., 6, 19. —
1. ferÖ, impers., to betake one^s
self 071 a journey, I., 90, jq. — 1.
brutt, burt, to move away, to
break up, I., 46, 14, 474, j^-. —
Med. to rise : lyftast þessir hvarir-
tveggju nú þegar til únáSa, I.,
120, 6.
Lýg, s^^ Ijúg''^-
Lygð (-ar, -ir),y., a lie, falsehood, I.,
*252, 1, 402,23; II., 290,27-
Lýja (hiði, lúðr), v.a., to tire, to
wear out, I., 182, 12.
Lyk, lýkr, see liika.
Lykill (-S, -lar), 7n., a key^ I., 222, 23 ;
IL, 188,8.
Lykja (lukti), v.a., to close, II.,
200, 11. — 2. to deliver up to, to
pay, II., 220, 23.
GLOSSARY.
459
Lykt (-ar, -ir), /!, fulfilment,- dis-
charge^ hvat maðr játar fjrir
þröngving eina samt, geingr hon-
um eigi nær hjarta til góðra lykta,
I., 462, 5. — 2. end, close, conclu-
sion : SÚ varð Ijkt á þeira máli,
1.5 218 27. — at lyktum, finally,
I., 82,2; IL, 279,10; til Ijkða,
for good, utterly, II., 277, 27«
Lykta (aö), v,a,, to finish, to end, to
terminate, I., 52, 7, 132, ^v
l^jkir, p.p., shut, closed, II., 282, ^o*
Lýsa (t), V.71., to beam, to shine :
houiim fylgir svá mikil birte,
at hann lysir í myrkri, I,, 476, ^7 ;
lýsanda kerti uierkir vorn Herra,
II., 236, iQ. — Impcrs. to be-
come light, to daivn : ríÖr hann
brutt leyniliga a£ Lunduuum fyrr
enn lýsir af degi, I., 156,5- — ^'^-i
to throio light on, to make clear,
to shoiv, to explain, to manifest,
to declare: I., 40, 3, 208, 21, 280, 10;
II., 52, g. — Med., to become
clear, manifest, to appear, I., 44,
13>
66,20, 136,21, 294
526, s.-
2. to publish, to promulgate, I.,
418,3,510,30.
Lysing (-ar), /, daion {of day), I.,
98,31.
Lyst, see Ijosta.
Lysta (t), v.n., to lust, to desire, I.,
6,9,40,9,214,13.
Lystiligr, ad,, dainty, luscious, in-
viting^ delicious : enn þótt margir
(rettir) ok lystiligir væri honnm
settir, t(5k hann a£ fám, I., 106,27.
— 2. delightful, II., 1 72, 13.
Ly sting (-ar), /!, desire, hist fulness,
I., 426, 10.
Lystr, p.p., illumined, enlightened,
I., 104,3.
Lyt, see liita.
Lyta-lauss, ad., flawless, unimpeach-
able : þat, er þeir framm bera, er
þegar með konungs boÖi skrifat
sem lögprófat ok l^'talaust. I.,
166,28' — blameless, without re-
proach : því má hin rómverska
móðir eigi lengi þegja yfir slíkum
hlutum, svo at henne se lytalaust,
II., 22,23.
Lýti, ji., fault, I., 146, 20 ; blame,
disparagement, I.^ 294, g, 300, 2 ;
misconduct, abuse, I.. 36, 23.
Lyttr, ad., dishonoured, disgraced :
lægÖir ok lyttir eru þeir {the
priests) komnir undir leikmanna
log, enn eigi fyrr, I., 152, 9. — 2.
deformed, I., 234, 19.
Lægð (-ar), f., loioness, humble con-
dition, IL, 230,25.
Lægðr, p.p., degraded, I., 152,9.
Lægi, see liggja.
Lægi, n., a berth, road, anchorage,
L, 484, 20, 486, 23.
Læging (-ar), f., humiliation, I.,
424, If.
Lægja(ð), ^".a., to lower; 1. and 1.
segl, to loiver sail, to furl sail, I.,
486, 24, II., 208, 22- — ^[ed., to go
down, to decrease: lægðist kvið-
blástrinn enn kverkr mýktust,
II., 70,26« — 2. to keep doicn, to
repress, to subdue : lægit yíSra
úsannsýni, I., 396,5. — ^* to hum-
ble: þér . . . sáÖ ok heyríSut, hvcrsii
ek lægði mina tign, I., 442, 5, —
Rcficx., 1. sik, to humble one*s
5r//;i., 36, 2s, 366, 5,1,, 430,1. —
4. to allay, [rdi I'lfric^arefni hugÖ-
460
GLOSSARY.
La^gja — cont.
urn ver at yí5ur vitra mvndi lægt
hafa.L, 394,10; páfinn erfriðgjaru
ok fysti mjök, at únáðir ok deilur
mætti lægjasl, I., 412, j^; cfr.
446, 9, 528, g. — Impcrs. and med.,
to abate, to subside : lægir nú heldi'
háfaöa klerkauna, I., 24, 15, cfr. I.,
276,1.
Lægi'i, cowpar. of lágr, I., 36, 265
300,25.: CIS sitbst. an inferior,!.,
35G, 2i'
Læki-dómr, m., medicament, II.,
96, u.
Lækning (-ar),/., remedy, I., 386, 7 ;
IL, 18,22-
Lækuir (-s, -ar), Jn., a leech, medi-
cal man, I., 384, 20; Hv 142, ^q.
Læra (ð), v. a., to teach, to instruct,
L, 18,9, 104,10,362,21,406,21.
Lær-dómr, m., the learned profes-
sion, the clergy, I., 68, 19, 314, jo ;
XL, 8,11.
Lærdóms-maðr, m., clerical person,
in pi., the clergy, I., 122, 13.
Lærðr, p.p., taught, instructed:
gengr hanu í því embætti svá
Ivstr ok lærðr af Guði, at framm-
burðrinn var ba^Öi mjúkr ok mikil-
virkr, I., IO4.3. — 2. as a noun
subst., a learjied man, a clerk,
in pL, the clergy, I., 128, 14,
160, 90, 294, 20 ; cfr. lærðir menu,
I., 2,2, 34,16.
Læri (-s), n., the thigh, II., 96,9.
Læri-sveinn, m., disciple, I., 110, 17,
210,2.
Læsa (t), v.a., to lock, to close, to
shut, II., 202, li ; to tie, II., 16, 20 ;
to compass, II., 236,6.
Læsi, see lesa.
LæstT,p.p., shut, I., 222,20-
Læt, see lata.
I Log, gen., laga, n. pL, law, laivs,
I., 00,22, "^,7, 124,2'
Lög-brot, n., breach of laiv, tres-
pass, I., 110,6, 268,21-
Lögðu, lögðum, see leggja.
Lög-festa, I'M., to sanction by law,
I., 152,16.
Lög-leiðandi, gerund, of lög-leiða,
sanctionable, I., 284, 25.
Lög-leiddr, p.p., sanctioned, passed
into law, I., 168,12-
Lög-levsa, f, lawlessness, illegality,
abuse, I., 118,6, 236,8-
Lögliga, adv., laicfully, I., 152, o.
Lögligr, ad., legal : nefuir bok stund
ok stað þar til ... at hann haii
unnit meS . . . lögligri ástöðu,
liver landa skifti höföu at fornu
verit milium Franz ok Nordmandi,
I., 56,29- — 2. lawful, prescribed
bylaw, canonical, I., 68,9, 110, 20»
112,6, 118,2,304,18.
Lög-maðr, m., judge, justice, I.,
296,15.
Lög-mál, n., law, law-provision, I.,
124,2.
Lögr (lagar, legir), m., the sea;
gen. lagar, as adv., by sea, I., 6, 2,
258, 17, 518, 2«
Lög-saminn, ad., legally framed,
I., 296, 33 ; good in law, I.,
302,18-
Lög-tekinn, ad., passed into law,
having the same power as a
royally sanctioned law, I., 332, 9.
— 2. authentic : þat greina lög-
tekuar bækr, at herra Karúlus
iiiikli . . . for út yfir haf til Jor-
£ala, at frjáUa landit, I., 476, j.
GLOSSARY.
461
Lög-tekning, y'., canonisation of a
saint, II., 188,13, 194,5.
Lönd, löndum, see land.
Löngu, dat. neut. of langr, as adv.,
long ago, I., 14, jg, o8, n-
Löugum, dat. pi. of langr, timum
or stundum being understood,
mostii/, generally, most fre-
quently, I., 36, 12 ; n., 234, 9.
Löstr (lastar, lesti, lestir), m,, vice,
sinfulness, iniquity, ivickedness,
crime, I., 112, 20? 360, ig ; II., 6, n,
52,19.
Lot, lötu, lötum, see latr.
M.
Ma, see mega.
Ma (ð), v.a., to laipe out, II., 12,9.
Maðr (nianiis, manni, meun, manna,
mönnum), m., man, a man, I.,
•^5 115 12> "^'^J 8*
Magna (að), v.a., to imbue icith
strength. — Med., to sivcll, to in-
crease, I., 512,29.
Mágr (-S, -ar), /?/., a relative by
marriage, II., \4:S, -^^, father-in-
law, II., 174,^.
Makliga, adv., deservedly, I., 172,1-,
214,19; IL, 154,5,190,16.
Makligr, ad., ivorthy, I., 46,23,
146,21, 202,21; n., 192,c. — 2.
deserved, due, I., 154,9, 464, ^ ;
II., 178, 26.
Mál (s), n., speech, " loquela^^ fa-
cultas loquendi, ei því ólíkast
sem þá er dauðvoni maðr þiggr
málit, II., 74,3; eftir þat liðit
sezt hann upp ok helir íVngit niál
Mál — cont.
sitt, II., 76, 9. — 2. speech, ha-
rangue, address : sem Thomas
er inn kominn, hefir Heinrekr
byskup sitt mál til bans á þessa
leið, I., 76,28, cfr. IL, 253,35. —
3. discourse, writing : nu sem
greint er í stuttu máli, bversu
signaðr Tbómas skipar ómjukliga
við sjálfs sins líf, I., 98, 10 ; bann
bar pallinm meÖ erkibyskups
nafni, sem enn mun síðar get it
verða í þessu máli, L, 260,20« —
4. matter, subject : litim á þessu
næst, hvat f ramm ferr róm verskum
bvskiipum, at þat mál leiðist
framm með skynsemd, L, 24, 25. —
5. a case, a law case : hann o'ent^r
oftliga til þess skóla, er heilagrar
kirkju log lesast . . . at þvi rétt-
ara megi hann öllum latum skipa,
sem hann skilur framar, liversu til
geingr ok efni vikr málunum, I.,
38, 9. — 6. concern, business, af-
fair : sannliga þóttust þeir bezt
liafa, er bans vinir voru, at hann
flytti þeira mál, at fá eiubveija
sæmd, próventur eÖr beneíicia, L,
38,22, vilja þeir þat ekki heyra,
sem erkibyskupsins malum er til
greiða, L, 272, g. — 7. state affairs,
public matters: i bans vald ok
vilja eru naliga komin oil kon-
ungs mál, I., 48, 13. — 8. charge,
commission : sakir þess at Vil-
bjalmr hefir framit meÖ öUu sitt
mál ok vald í þessu máli, vill
konungrinn lionum öngva lotning
veita, IL, 30,9.
Mála-efni, n. pi., the gist, bearing of
a case, IL, 246, ly.
462
GLOSSARY.
Mála-ferli, n. pi., law cases, law
suits, I., 50,22> 112,12.
Málu-gjöf, f,, a soldier's pay, I.,
50,7.
Mála-lok, n. pi., settlement, deci-
sion {in matters oflaw\ I., 116, 12«
Mála-skifti, n. pi., nature, condition
of one's affairs, affairs, II.,
182, 19.
Mála-skipan, f., settling of laiv
cases, 1., 38,5.
Mála-YÖxtr, 7n., the state, condition,
nature, gist of a case, I., 50, 24?
142,26,282,2.
Mál-efni, n. pi., = mála-efni, I.,
262,21- — 2. matters of impor-
tance, affairs, I., 116, ^.
Mál-lauss, ad., speechless, mute,
dumb, I., 114, 2 ; II., 76, q.
Mál-leysi, n., dumbness, II., 76, 20-
Málmr (-s, -ar), m., metal, I.,
104,19.
Mál-semd (-ar, -ir), /•, talk, 1.,
350, 22 5 phrase, sentence, cardi-
nalis skeinkir honum skreyttar
málsemdir, þær sem erkibyskupinn
skilr eitrligar fyrir innan ok kirkj-
unni meinsamligar, I., 416, 7.
Máls-háttr, m., manner of expres-
sion, hann tjár á margan veg með
skreyttum málshætti, at erkibysk-
up vægi til fyrir þröngvandi
nauÖsyn, I., 164, 15.
Mál-snild,/., eloquence, I., 414,26-
Mál-snjall, ad., eloquent, I., 260, ig.
Mál-ste£na, /., meeting I., 22, 13. —
2. parliament, council, I., 190, 9 ;
conference, I., 518,13.
Man=mun, II., 279, 4, 5.
Mána-dagr, m., Monday, I., 202, 3.
Mánaðr, mánuí5r (-aí5ar, -ir), m., a
month, I., 480, 2 ; II., 80, 27.
Mann, manni, see maí5r.
Manna-missir, wi., loss of life, II.,
166, 15.
Manna-munr, m., respect of persons,
I., 112,21.
Mann-dauði, m., mortality, II.,
158,6.
Mann-domr, m., manhood {the man-
hood of Christ), I., 472,16; II.,
236,18- — ^' humanity, manly,
humane conduct, I., 356,8, cfr.
II., 258,20-
Mann-dráp, n., manslaughter, I.,
142,18, 152,6, 236,24, 366,8;
murder, assassination, I., 518, 24,
28- — 2. mortality, loss of life :
enn eigi greinir bok, at manndrap
yrði raickit i þeiri sott, II., 261,i5.
Mann-drápari, 771., a murderer, I.,
372, 23, 542, ig.
Manndráps-maðr, m., id., II., 48,
15? 21-
Manndráps-sök, f, case of man-
slaughter, case of murder, II.,
54, 16-
Manneskja (u),/*., ^'humana pietas,^^
human 7iature, huma7iity, II.,
14, 10.
Mann-fjöldi, ?;^., multitude of peo-
ple, a crowd, I., 178, n, 522, 1 ;
II., 60,7,280,6.
Mann-kind (-ar), f., human-hind,
II., 228, 27.
Mann-kostir (-s, -ir), m., virtues,
high, noble qualities, I., 50, 14,
316,15, 510, 7.
Mann-kyn, 71., 7nanhind, I., 544, iq ;
II., 228, 30-
GLOSSARY
463
Mannligr, ad., human, I., 164^25?
208, 8, 536, 12 ; ^f inan, I., 236, 3.
Mann-raun, /*., trials, tabulation,
L,2,5; 11,276,11.
Mann-tal, n., number of people, L,
100, 2.
Mann-val, n., select company, I.,
106,4, 130,4.
Maiin-vandr, ad., for lohich it is
difficult to find the Jit man, re-
quiring a man of exceptional
qualities : enn í þetta rúm, er svá
var maunvant at standa miðil
röksemdar GuÖs laga ok framm-
lútrar áo^irni konunors, sér erki-
byskup eingan mann likara enn
Thomam, I., 46, 4.
Mann-vii'ðing, f, honours, II.,
269, 19. — 2. respect of person,
II., 263, 10-
Marg-faldast, med., to multiply, II.,
60,21.
Marg-faldliga, adv., manifoldly, I.,
46, 7, 356, 10, 372, 9.
iMarg-faldr, ad., manifold, I., 56, 12,
108,5.
Marg-háttaðr, ad., of many kinds,
multifarious, I., 530, 2 ; II., 6, iq.
Margr, ad., many, I., 2, n ; 30 20,
passim.
Marg-tækr, ad., signification doubt-
ful; either: one icho has many
ways of taking matters ; or, one
ivho may be taken-=. sought, sup-
jjlicated by many, for various
and different purposes: þetta,
sem nil hefir lesit verit, er nokkur
tilvisan vitrum manni, hversu
margtækr ok mikilvirkr sæll Tho-
mas erkibyskup heiir verit í sínum
kraftavorkum, I., 116, 20-
Mark (s, mörk), n., a mark, token,
sign, I., 30, jo, 48, ig, 506, ,8,
554, 5, 14 ; II., 100, 13 ; at marki,
in full earnest, I., 72, 13, 144, 19.
Maika (að), v.n., to take mark, to
observe, to perceive, to learn, I.,
246,12,466,4.
Marka-tal, n., number of marks (cfr.
mörk), I., 190,27.
Marknaðr (-ar, -ir), m., a market,
IL,120,24.
Marmara-heUa, /., a marble slab,
IL,200,ii.
Marmari (-a), m.,marble, I., 540, 93.
Mat, see meta.
Mátér, n. measure ; m. er sett
valdi þínu, ' habetis pofestatis
* vestrœ privilcgia,' I., 362,22-
Mátt-farinn, ad., * might-foregone,'
enfeebled, II., 281,8-
Mátti, see mega.
Mátfigr, ad., ace. fern. sing, máttka
for máttiga, mighty, I., 214, 14.
Máttu, máttum, see mega.
Máttugr, ad., mighty, I., 334, 4.
Máttiiliga, adv., mightily, II.,
278,21-
Máttuligr, ad., in jrroportion to
one's strength, jjossible, I., 84, ig.
Málu, mátum, see meta.
Mátuliga, ady ivithin measure, not
too much, moderately, I., 350, 3Q.
Mátuligr, ad., which circumstances
permit, possible, I., 490, g.
Með, prep, with dat. and ace, A.
with dat. — I. local. — 1. with, in
company icith : Thomas hefir sik
iiti með roörgum kumpaniiin til
leiks, I., 32, 1 ; býðr at si'i i\V^(\, cr
fjira skyldi mcðcanccler,kallÍ!<t inn
464
GLOSSARY.
Með — cont,
fyrir lianii, 1., 66,2- — II. of ab-
stract associations. — 1. loith., to-
gether with : girudin meS holdl-
igri f jst, I., 20, 1 J ; kom samt
Í einu brjosti vitrleikr með
Guðs ótta, I., 80, 22- — 3. tvith,
bi/, the purpose of aiding,
abetting, being implied: kon-
ungr skiftir skape, svá nú í mot
kristniuni sem fyrr stóð hann með
henni, I., 378, 5. — 4. among,
amidst : þarf ok eigi at segja, at
þar styndi oil kristni, þótt einn
eðr tveir öfundsamr leyndist nieð
Guðs fólki, I., 404,2- — 5. tvith,
in the sense of being associated
with, surrounded or accompa-
nied by : long var sú dagþingan
með ýmsum atvikum, I., 76, 13 ;
svarar hian siguaði Thomas meÖ
tárum, I., 78, 7 ; gengr staðarfólk
út í móti honum með andligri
gleði, I., 86, 21- — 6. about,
in ; of attributive peculiainties :
klætíi . . . svá mundanglig, at
hvárki voru þau né með þeim ofr-
anar mynd né fortlitning, I.,
94, 21 ; gæzka Guðs miskunnar
var auðsýn með honum, I., 18,2.
— 7. ivith, qf concrete chaj'acter-
istics : sýndist henni burðrinn sem
einn logbrandr meÖ svá liófum
loga, I., 14,14; vai' hann (óssimi)
svá meinligr með hvítf yssi ok stór-
grýti, I., 32, 12' — 8. ivith, indi-
cating possessive notions : með
því nafni, I., 26, 9, 40, -^q, ; vera
með barni, I., 12, 13. — 9. expres-
sive of instrumental and medial
notions ; by, through : hver höfð-
MeÖ — cont.
ingja spegill hann liefir verit með
hieinleik ok harðlíd, meö ölmusu-
gæði, &c., I., 2, 23 ; þessarri þjónar
hann meÖ hreiiilifi, I., 20, 22 ;
veita honum einhvern vansa með
of beldi, I., 42, ^o ; at hann haíi
unnit með sinni vitru ok lÖ2:leííri
ástöðu, hver landaskifti at fornu
höfða verit milium Franz ok
Nordmandi, I., 56, 23 ; þar J)iggja
þeir með sönnum góðvilja herra
páfans öU sín eyrendi, I., 92, 28«
— 10. against: skipar haun sik
nil enn at nýju öndverðan með
allri bans yörgirnd, I., 162,^5;
taka nú refahalarnir með ' take
against, = seize, receive, svá miklu
blóÖi, I., 232, 7; hann tekr með
bréfum herra konungsins, I.,
260, 28* — III. temporal, with,
by : endar hann sitt vald með
dauíSadegi, I., 42, 15. — Adverbial
phrases : með fullu, fully, L,
30, 1 ; m. leynd, clandestinely,
I., 38, 13; m. öllu, wholly, com-
pletely, 1., 80, 20; II., 4,9; m.
því, ivhereas, I., 22, 24, 40, j, 52, 23.
— B. ivith ace. : with, suggestive
of a^ecting or influencing the
object governed by the prep. :
lengi helir uvizkan farit með þik
ok ykkarr skilnaðr muu seiun vera,
I., 212,2 ; mikit la undir löngum
hverjar upptektir voru á hafðar,
ef hann talaði meS rika menn, I.,
36, 13.
Meðal, adv., between, I., 274, 24.
Meðal-ganga, f., intercessio?t, I.,
16, 15, II., 72, 15.
GLOSSARY.
465
Meðal-lag, n., ^middle-layer,' of a
middling sort : dat. meÖallagi as
an adv., middling-iuise, I., 44, ^ ;
til meðallags, id., I., 376, 20-
Meí5an, adv., while, during, I., 10, ^3,
28,1.
Með-ferð, /., conduct toioards, II.,
265
' 29*
Með-ferði, n., manner of life, I.,
30, 25 20*
Með-tekt, /*., reception, acquisition,
IL,222,7.
Mega (ma, mátti-máttum, raætti,
matt), v.n., to may, I., 4,3, 22,8,
26,18, 30,1, 106,7, 246,2,. — 2.
to be able, to afford, to have an
opportunity, I., 20, 17; II., 54, 19*.
Megin (-S, dat. megni, ace. megn),
n., ^ main,' might, power, I.,
116,9, 128,13, 142,17, 162, 13;
meS öllu megni, as fast as he
could, I., 230, 18 ; by might and
main, I., 254,9,- öllnm (avUvm)
megin, on all sides, II., 277, 14.
Megn, ad., large, stout, bulky, II.,
146, 22-
Meiða (dd), v. a., to hurt, to injure,
II., 281, 37.
Meiðsli, n., maiming, I., 142, n.
Mein (-s), n., harm, hurt, I., 334, 14 ;
illness, II., 68, 19, 98, g. — 2.
trouble, L, 340,23; vexation, I.,
396, 4.
Meina (að), v. a., to harm, to hurt,
I., 46, 13 ; to hinder, to obstimct,
400,18.
Mein-gerð, f, hurtful deed, injury,
' iniqua obligation I., 202, 285
214,20 ; 362,17 » I-*-'? 1^>i7j20'
Meingerðar-kyn, ??., hind of injury,
I., 504,9.
K541.
Meiugerðar-þing, n., court oý perse-
cution, I., 222,17.
Mein-lauss, ad., harmless, guiltless,
L, 324, 4, 350, ig, 444, -, 542, 1«.
Mein-leysi, n., harmlessness, guilt-
lessness, innocence, I., 170, ig,
194,25; II., 10,8.
Meinliga, adv., hurtfully, painfully,
I.,420,3o;II., 142,2.
Meinligr, ad., hurtful, troublous,
wearying : vegrinn var svá
meinligi', sem fyrr sagði, I.,
248, 3. — 2. perilous, dangerous :
var hann (ossinn) svá meinligr
með hvitfyssi ok stórgrýti, at
eingi hestr mátti þar fæti koma,
I., 32, 12« — 3. noxious, injurious,
pernicious : enn þat var af því
meinlig hugsan, at nú var svá
fóttroðinn vígðr sem óvígÖr, ok
svá dreginn til dóms lærðr sem
leikr, I., 70, 5 ; þyugist uú enn
af þessu efni hugr erkibyskups,
því at hann skilr því gjörr, hversu
ástundan konungs er djúp ok
meinlig kristninni, I., 160, 23.
Meinlæta-lauss, ad., without hurt,
without pain, I., 96, ig, 138, 14.
Mein-læti (-s), n., pain, hurt, II.,
100, 3. — 2. infliction, penance :
I., 556,22; II-j 62,21.
Mein-mæla, v.a., with ace, to insult
with opprobrious language, I.,
498, 17.
Mein-mæli, n.pl., insulting language,
I., 204, 8.
Mein-samligr, ad., hurtful, harmful^
I., 416,9.
Meiu-samr, ad., id., I., 556,24.
G G
466
GLOSSARY.
Mein-semd (-ar, -ir), /., injury, I.,
302, 7. — 2. disorder, perverse
condition, I., 358, 17.
Meinsæra-muÖr, m., a perjurer, a
traitor, I., 218, 17, 526, 9.
Mein-særi (-s), n., perjury, I.,
526, n.
Mein-yrði, 71.pl., insulting language,
I., 208, 20.
Meiri, comp. to mikill, more, I.,
14:, j^, passim.
Meirr, adv., more, I., 36, i, 128, 17.
Meistara-domr, m., scholarship,
mastery, I., 20, 4. — 2. training,
IL, 140,05.
Meistara-ligr, ad., masterly, I.,
172,25.
Meistara-nienn, m. pL, men of high
scholarly attainments, I., 106,7.
Meistari (-a, -ar), m., master, scholar,
I., 10, 7 ; master, teacher, I., 210,2 '•>
master- Wright, II., 212, ^.
]Meistarliga, adv., masterly, II.,
220,20,285
J37-
iMennska (-ii),/!, manly conduct, I.,
358, J. — 2. human nat^ire, " Az^-
mana pietas^^ II., 272, 22«
Mentr, ar/., educated, cultivated, I.,
238,25.
iMerkiliga, «i/v., clearly, audibly,
I., 66, 9 ; attentively, I., 240, 4 ;
2;i Ö72 important manner, I.,
354, g ; solemnly, I., 64, g, 80, 7.
Merkiligr, <:/f/., ^0 be noted, remark-
able, important, weighty, I., 12, j^,
74, 21, 554, 3 ; merkiligt, as a
subst., a matter of importance, I.,
524, 7.
jNIerking (-ar), f., exposition, ex-
planation, interpretation, I., 210,
14? 254, j3.
Merkis-mailr, m., standard-bearer,
leader, I., 158, 20» 206, 14.
Merkja (t), v. a., to remark, to ob-
serve, to perceive, I., 52, ^5. — 2.
to signify, I., 16, 12, 86, 3, 232, jg,
546,9.
Messa (-11 -ur), f., a mass, church
service, I., 102, ^g.
Messu-klæði, n. pi,, mass clothes,
robes, I., 102, ^, 208, q.
Messu-mál, n., time for mass, ser-
vice hour, I., 102, 7.
Messu-söngr, m., mass song, chant,
L, 480, 14.
Messu-timi, m., the hour of the
mass, time for service, II., 285, 27.
Meijtr, supcrl. #0 mikill, greatest, I.,
30, 24, passim.
Meta (met, mat-matum, metti, met-
inn), v.a., to esteem, to value, I.,
518, 5 ; to estimate, II., 267, 33.
Metiun, P'P; accounted of, I.,
30,8.
Met naðar- full r, ad., full of ambition,
I., 214,16.
Metnaðar-liót, n. pi., ivays, manners
indicative of ambitious intent :
fölnan fellr i frænclsemi þeira
feðga, svo at margar greiner ok
metnaðarliót . . . verÖr þeim til
áskilnaÖar, II., 172,22«
Metnaðar-maí5r, m., a great, lordly
person, I., 48,25 ; « w^«?^ of am-
bitious conduct, I., 214,23.
Metnaðar-samr, ad., ambitious, mas-
terful, I., 4, 21.
Metnaðr, (-ar),wí., ambition,!., 320, iq,
394j 20' — 2. haughtiness, I., 258,
29. — 3. state, pomp. I., 262,13.
MetorÖ, n. pi., honours, I., 48, 10,
516
? 12'
GLOSSARY
467
Mey (meyjar), /., a maiden^ virgin,
I., 4, g, 18, 10.
Mey-domr (-s), m., chastity^ II.,
284,21-
MiiSa (að), v.n., to take an aim, to
mark, niiðar hann vit dagbrim-
inni, I., 52, iq.
Miðil, adv., amidst^ between, I.,
10, 16, 46, 5, 286,7; hvar . . .
raiðil landa, where on earth, I.,
406, 25.
Mið-nætti, /2., midnight, I., 54, j.,
238, 12-
Miðr, ad., dat. masc. miðjum, neut.
miðju, mid most J middle, I., 12, ig,
112, 22, II-, 118,7-
Miðr, adv. comp., less, I., 58. 9,
398, 21.
Miðvikii-dagr, m., mid-iueek day,
Wednesday, I./ 26Q, 20-
Mik, ace. sing, of ok.
Mikill, co7np. meiri, sup, mestr, ad.,
great, I., 6, 14, passim.
Mikilliga, adv., greatly, earnestly,
pressingly, I., 162, 21«
Mikil-mennska (-u), f., personal
greatness, superior ability, pre-
eminence, L, 88, 3, 92, 30, 128, 3,
266,30- Ironically, airs, self im-
portance : sýnir enn Gillibert af
Lundiinura sina mikilmeimsku,
því at hann stendr fjrstr upp, I.,
274,13.
Mikils-háttar, ad., imjyortant, high-
placed, I., 278, 18.
Mikil-virkr, ad., effective, effica-
cious, mighty, I., 104,4, 116, 20-
Mikla (að), v.a., to magnify, I.,
214,24.
Mila (-U, -ur),/., a mile, I., 246,6,
518,1.
Mildi, /., mercy, grace, I., 8, 17,
164,26, 284, 11; II., 72,15.-2.
bounty, liberality, I., 54, 23, 290, 5.
Mildr, ad., merciful, compassionate,
II., Q^, 18. — 2. kind, gentle, I.,
542, 14. — 3. liberal, bountiful, I.,
108,29» 550,8-
Milli, adv., among, I., 24, 1.
Milium, adv., amongst, I., 18,9,
410,9; hetween, I., 56,30, 58, 16,
410,12, Í m. id., I., 286,16-
Milska (að), v.a., to mix, I., 512, 90;
II., 72,13.
Milska (-u),/, mixture, II., 74, 19.
Min, gen. sing. o/"ek.
Minka, and minnka (aÖ), v.a., to
lessen, to impair, to injure, I.,
178, 21, 420, 09, 528, lo- Med. and
impers. to grow less, to dwindle,
L, 180,11,498,23; II., 293,2.
Minkan (-ar),/, disparagement, de-
gradation, dishonour, I., 554, 16.
Minkanar-grein,/., disparaging re-
marks, I., 394, 2«
Minkun = minkan, II., 288, 5.
Minn (min, miiX), pron. poss., mine,
I., 34j 8, passim.
Minna (t), v.a., m. a, to remind, to
call to one's 7nind, I., 134,14.
Med. to remind of one's self, to
make one^s self felt : enn litlu
siðar minntist aftr þrotinn, ok þó
eigi svo.verkmildll sem í fy rstn,
II., 96^19; to be mindful of I.,
316, 1; m. a, to recall, I., 158,9,
192, 19.
Minnast, v. mcd. (cfr.Germ. minnc =
love), to exhibit inutual signs of
affection, to embrace, to kiss, with
the prepp. til and við, I., 268, g,
272,9,446,24,494,20.
G 0 2
468
GLOSSARY.
Minni (-s), ?^., ^ mind,'' memory, re-
membrance, I., 28, 24. 78, ^4, 546, ^ ;
hafa Í minnum, to keep in memory,
to bear in mind, II., 12, 4.
Minni, comp.; iwper/. minnstr ; less,
least ; smaller, smallest, I., 22, g,
106,10,300,13,342,4,540,10.
Minnigr, ad., ' mindful,' endowed
with strong memory, I., 20, 1.
IVIinniligr, ad., to be remembered,
L, 282,25,394,22; IL, 234,6.
Miuning (-ar), /1, memory, recollec-
tion, remembrance, I., 34, ig. — 2.
admonition: eftir þatliÖithaíi þeir
þá minuing eftir reglii, at engi
• þeira lesi leccionem eÖa frammi
syngi nokkurn hlut, II., 58, 5.
-^. memorial, memento, keep-sake :
þú skalt fara til Kantarabyrgis
ok bera sælum Thdmasi kveðju
mína með þessarri minning, II.,
152,5. — 4. mention: nú hafa
lesin verit þrjú bréf . . . er
öll gera minning af þeiri rödd, er
dreyri virðuligs . . Thóme sendi
til himna, I., 24, n.
Minnka, v.a., to lessen = minka, I.,
338,2-
Minnkau (-ar), f., disparagement,
shame, II., 144,2»
Minnr and niinnur, adv. comp., less,
I., 228,8, 556,23.
Mirra (-u),/., myrrh, I., 104,25-
Mis-bjóöa, v.a., to ill-treat, to ill-
use, to lorong, I., 490, 19, 508, g.
Mis-felli (-s), n., a matter amiss,
misconduct, oversight, trespass,
transgression : viljum ver ok at
þú segir oss einarðliga ok þó leyni-
liga, hvert misfelli þú sér oss
hættligast, I., 86, 14 ; Samuel grét
Mis-felli — cont.
margan dag misfelli Saul kon
ungs, I., 388, 11 ; sitr hann m
heima framm til jolanna, me(
mikilli nytsemd, leysir margai
mann af siuum misfellum, I,
508,16.
Mis-för, pi, -farar, /., misconduct
evil ways: Thomas erkibyskup
harmandi með tárum síð ok árli
misfarar Heinreks konungs, I.
388, 14.
Mis-gera, v.a., to transgress, U
trespass, I., 304, 16 ; II., 12, j,.
Mis-grein, /., difference, I., 100,4.
Mis-haldinn, ad., ill-treated, ill
used, injured, loronged, I., 120, 21
530, 13 ; II., 6, 22«
Mis-jafnt, 7ieut. of mis-jafn, as adv.
variously, I., 462, 1.
Mis-kunn (-ar),/., mercy, grace, I.
16, 15, 98,20-
Mis-kunna (aÖ), to forgive, to shoi
mercy, to be merciful on, I., 186, c
348, 18.
Miskunnar-faömr^ m., bosom o
mercy, I., 182, 27.
Miskunnar-fullr, ad., full of mercy
having been shown abundan
grace, II., 282, 35.
Miskunnar-timi, m., season of mercy
gospel dispensation, I., 388, iq-
Miskunnar-verk, n., act of mercy
I., 178, 23« — 2, charity, alms-giv
ing, I., 108,30-
Miskunn-samliga, adv., mercifully
I., 366, 7.
Miskunn-samr, ad., merciful, I.
334, 3.
Mis-lika, v.a., to ^ mis-like,' to tak
to heart, to take offence at, to dis
GLOSSARY.
469
jVIis-líka — cont.
like, I., 140,6, 180,5, 396,18,
406,25,448,3,468,2.
Mis-likr, ad., ' mis-like,^ unlike each
other, varying, differing, I.,
270, 22-
Mis-munr, m., misconduct, II.,
126, le.
Missa (t), t'.ö., to lose,l., 134, 21;
with gen., to forfeit, I., 344, ^ ; to
forego, 450, g. — Impers. einlivers
missir viÖ, to be no more, I.,
70,2.
Misseri, n., half a year, II., 162, ^.
Mis-sýni, n., * mis-sight,' deception,
delusion, mistake : tjándi bæði
mjiikliga ok þó eiaarSliga, hvert
missyni höndlaði hug herra páf-
ans, þá er hann gerði út slíka
sendiboða, I., 414, §.
Mis-sætti, n., discord, I., 274,28,
446, 10 ; n., 176, 16-
Mis-verki, m., trespass, transgres-
sion, I., 510,7.
Mis-þykt, /., id.,l., 136,17,448,9,
462,25; n., 144,18.
Mis-þyrming, f., ill-treatment, II.,
128, 21.
Mjófast, V. med., to grow thin, II.,
226, 17. — 2. to become narroic,
to narroio : konungr ser nil at
sundin mjofast heldr til utsigl-
ingar, I., 460, ^
Mj(5lk(-r),/.,m7^, II., 226,26.
Mjúk-látliga, adv., meekly^ gently,
condescendingly, I., 98, 13.
Mjiiklátr, ad., meek, humble, de-
voted, II., 92, 4.
Mjúkliga, adv., humbly, loivly, I.,
264, 26 ; reverentially, respect-
Mjiikligii — cont.
fully, I., 326, 19 ; sweetly, softly,
gently, II., 6Q, 19.
Mjúk-læti, /«., humility, devotion, II.,
86, 9.
Mjúkr, ad., soft: þótt þær kæmi
svá forlirumar til bans með knút
ok ofverkjum, at eigi mætti mjúkr
lóíi meiulætalanst í náud koma,
&c., II., 138, 14. — 2. smooth, fair,
ingratiating : þat tekr hann til
ráðs, at skrifa allan málavöxt til
Thómam erkibvskups, biðjandi
með mjúku ydrbragði, at hann
úrskurði málit, I., 142,27- — ^*
sweet, elegant, caj)tivati?ig :
frammbui'ðrinn var bæði mjúkr
ok mikilvirkr, I., 104, ^. — 4.
pliant, yielding, easy, accommo-
dating : Heinrekr konungr gerir
sik svá mjúkan, at þeir er friðinn
leita, kjósa upp á hverja grein,
I., 460, 19, c/r. 462,10.
Mjúk-yrði,/., smooth language, ele
gant delivery, I., 414,27-
Mjök, adv., 7nuch, I., 20, 15 ; very,
I-, 44, 21 ; far, I., 50, 26-
Móðir {gen., dat., ace, móÖur,
several times spelt móðr), f,
mother, I., 4, 6, passim.
Móðr, ad., loeary, tired, I., 246, 17.
Moður-bróðir, ??«., uncle on the
mother s side, I., 28, 1.
Móður-faðir, m., grandfather on the
mother's side, 1., 136,7»
Móður-hús, «., native place, II.,
206, 15.
Móður-kviðr, m., womb, II., 8, 3.
Mó(Sur-ligr, ad., motherly, II.,
276, 7.
4; 70
GLOSSARY.
Möðar-tunt^a,/"., native speech, ver-
nacular language, I., 284, ^^.
Morgiun (-s ; dat. morni, I., 236, 24 ;
morgnar), m., morning, I., 22, 22»
204, 3 ; á morgin, to-morrow, I.,
256, 2i i um raorgininn, on the
morrow, I., 270, 1 ; í morgin, to-
morrow, I., 290, 22« — b. in the
morning : sokn með offr var svo
mikil, at þótt fátækr tæki með í
morgin, væri hann fuUrikr at
kveldi, II., 194,12.
Morgunn, m. = morginn, I., 496, 4,
506, 6, 14.
Mót (-s), n., ' meety meeting : á
þat mót sækir ok signaðr Tho-
mas, I., 460,8, cfr. II., 154,18;
ganga til móts við, to go to
77ieet, T., 258, 15, 23« — ^^^»
móti, and apocopated mot, used
as an adv. and a prep, with
dat., against : her runnu marg-
ir mot einum, against, in
competition with, as it ivere, I.,
26, 14 ; mot þessarri grein hvarri-
tveggjo skipar signaðr Thomas
sina góðgirnd, I., 36, 13 ; hvert
þat brugg ilskunnar er í þeim
brauzt móti Thómasi, var sann-
liga moti knmunni, L, 56, 22« —
2. in a local sense, towards :
Thomas .... tekr þá stefnu til
Englauds moti Cancia, I., 70, 22 5
in a temp, sense, against : annan
tima, moti lysing, eru innleiddir
aðrir þrettán, I., 98, 31. — 3. con-
trary to : þessir vanar bera \'itni,
hversu þér féllut hátt . . . . er
þér sóruð .... at halda þá
mót almenniligu frelsikirkjunnar,
L, 304, 11. — 4. in return : gjarna
Mót — cont.
þágu þeir sæmdir ok sÝsliu' al
krúnunni, enn lögðu henni hati* í
móti, I., 06, 21.
Mót (-s), n., mode, means, way, I.,
220, 30«
Mót-bára, f., objection, remon-
strance, I., 66, !•
Mót-dráttr, m., opposition, IL,
148,28«
Mot-gaugr, m., resistance, oppo^
sition, antagonism, contention
boðinn til motgangs ok mein-
gerða, I., 202,2;, cfr. 352, 4, 400,
15. — 2. adversity, tribulation
II.,230,8.
Mot-horn, n., a horn blown to call
together a meeting, a bugle, a
trumpet, I., 424, 7.
Mot-kast, ?«., objection, remon-
strance, I., 68,18, 76,14, 78,12,
168 11, 214,22; IL, 114,16.-2.
vexation, trouble, L, 304, 19.
Mót-rás, f., procession to meet one,
I., 494, 3.
Mot-ris, n., opposition, contumacy^
I., 140,e.
Mót-staða, f., • * withstanding,^ op-
position, I., 170, ig.
MótstöÖu-maðr, m., opponent, anta-
gonist, enemy, L, 80, 27, 288, 9.
Muna (að), v.n., to make a {the)
difference, IL, 180,25«
Muna (d), v.a., to mind, to remem-
ber, to recollect, IL, 271, 29.
Mundangligr, ad., measured, mode-
rate, modest, L, 94, 20.
Munka-klaustr, n.,, monastery, I.
536,4.
Múnka-regla,y., monastic rule, 11*
224,
14*
GLOSSARY.
471
Múnkr (-s, -ar), w., a monk, I.,
')3-
Miinni (-a, -ar), ni., the aperture
of a boil, open sore, ulcer, II.,
96, 24' 1^> IS*
Munnr (-s), m., mouth, I., 28, 25?
72,13,306,5; throat, L, 322,3."^
3I1111U (ypres. mim, imperf. mimdi,
pres. suhj. muni, imperf. myndi,
a defective auxiliary verb form-
ing future and conditional sen-
tences; shall, loill, may; occur-
ring frequently on almost every
page,
Murr (-s), m., a wall, I., 164,23,
222, 2i' — 2. ''^ pavimentum^'* pave-
ment, stone-floor, II., 140, ^o-
Mustari (-s), n., ^íninster,^ a churchj
temple, I., 54:8, §.
Musteri, 7t., id., I., 52, 2, 540, 14.
]Miisteris-dyrr, f pL, church-door,
IL, 126, 24.
Milt era, v. a., to change, II., 222, ^g ;
m. sik frá, to depart from, to
change mind, I., 80, jg.
Mýgja (ð), v.a., to oppress, to over-
whelm, '■^ potestati suæ subficcre,^^
I., 362, 1,.
Mykill, ad., =. mikill, II., 4, 3,
et passim.
Mykil-mennzska, f, = mikil-
mennska, II., 252,2.
Mýkja (t), v.a., to make lithe, to
make smooth : myk þú tungu
mina, II., 289, 29. — 2. to soften,
to mitigate, to smooth down, to
allay, I., 104, g, 144, j^, 160, g,
202, 25, 394, 12- — Med., to become
sojt, to soften, I., 342, g, 386, 19,
550, 23.
My kj audi, gerund of mykja, to be
softened, I., 384, 2^-
Mykla, v.a., = mikla, to magnify,
IL, 194,23.
Mýkt (-ar), f, meekness, humility,
I., 64, 26, 98, 22» 1 10, 6, 152, 11 ; sub-
missiveness, loyalty, I., 404,p3. —
2. conciliatory disposition, I.,
200,4, 460,3.
Mýktar-andi, m., conciliatory spirit,
I., 352, 6-
Mylna (-11, -ur), /., from Lat. mo-
lina ; a ?nill, " molendiuufn,'' I.,
32,9.
Mynd (-ar, -ir),f, shape, form, ap-
pearance, I., 94,21.
Myrginn, m.., = morginii, II.,
285, 26'
Myrkr (-s), n., dark?iess, gloom, I.,
232, 28> 236,4, 448,12.
Myrkva-stofa, f, a dungeon, I.,
164,3,202,19.
Myrkvi (-a,), )n., obscurity, T.,
236,5.
Mys-kunn,/., = miskunn, II., 30,13.
Mys-kuimsamr, ad. = miskunnsainr,
II., 98, 18.
Mæ^a (-n), f, fatigue, iocaiiness,
I., 258, 11. — 2. worry, trouble,
affliction, I., 60,10, 90, 13, 118, .,6,
192,8,280,25.
Mæða (dd), v.a., occurs only in the
Med. mood, to grow weary, I.,
8,17, 422,3.
Mæddr, ad., hard tried, wearied,
weary, I., 230,2; II., 276,6,
281,8.
Mæðgin, n. pi., mother and son, 11.,
126,15.
472
GLOSSARY.
Mæðiliga, adv., wearily, I., 246, 12 ;
II., 102, 24 ; suffering severely,
IL,214,4.
Mæði-samr, ctd., wearisome, trouble-
some, II., 280, Q.
Mæðr, y., mother, I., 550,26; H*)
14,10» '^^t \i 271,13.
Mæðu-samr,=mæðisamr, II., 76,15.
Mægjast, V. med., to become allied by
marriage: m. viö, II., 172, 19.
Mæla (t), v.a,, to speak, I., 72,9,
250, 16 ; II., 124, 2 ; to contend,
I., 298,12; ^Gd. mælast fyrir,
to be spoken of, I., 518, 5.
Mær (^the oblique cases refer to the
thema mey, q.v.), f, a may, a
maiden, I., 252, 26 ; !!•> 270, 15.
Mæta (tt), v.n., to meet, I., 120, 21-
obviam ire, I., 482, 29. — Reci-
proc. mætast, to meet each other,
to meet, I., 70, n, 128, 24, 486,3.
— 2. to come in for, to encounter,
to undergo, to suffer, I., 58, 7,
110,7,202,18,214,20.
Mætr, ad., precious, I., 196, 2»
■^^0, 22'
Mætti, see mega, I., 6, 2-
Mætiir, {gen. mæt&),f pi., high es-
teem, I., 476, 28'
Mörg, mörgum, see margr.
Mörk (markar, merkr), /., a mark,
weight equcd to half a pound or
eight ounces, II., 106, ig.
Mörk (markar, merkr),/'., woodland^
forest land, I., 230, 13 ; II.,
118, 22'
MöttuU (-s), m., a mantle, '"^palli-
um," I., 538, 17.
Möttuls-skaut, w., '^ pal Hi lacinia,"
mantle skirt, I., 538, 21«
N.
Ná (nær, náði-náðum, nætSi, náí5),
v.a., to afford, to be able :
hverjar heilsubætr er harm vann
folki sinu . . . nær eingi maðr
letri lukt, II., 138, 19.
NáÖ (-ar, -ir), /'., quiet : látið oss í
friÖi ok frelsi heim fara til stols
vors ok þar sitja með náðum, I.,
346, 9. — 2. rest {sleep) : sakir
þess, at erkibjskup er nii veg-
móðr, gefst honum brátt orlof til
sinna náða, I., 130, 1; riss harm
upp svá vakrliga, at þá eru enn
aðrir menn í náÖum, I., 100, 19 ;
Heim-ekr komingr segir nauðsyn
krefja, at menn taki náÖ eftirlanga
mæÖu, I., 448, n ; gengr herra
erkibyskup niðr í gröftinn, meÖ
lærðum mönnum nökkuri stund
efter completorium, sem veraldar
folk er i náðum, II., 200, 4. — 3.
peace, protectio7i, shelter, asylum :
Heinrekr kouungr biðr Hlöðvi
... at hann láti þann Thómam
hvárki hafa friðlancl, né nokkura
náð i öUmn Franz, I., 264,27,
cfr. I., 422, 15. — 4. immunity
from molestation, safety, security :
allr varnaðr ok eignir Kautuari-
ensis kirkju skulu standa meö
fullri nácS, ok frelsi, I., 262, 7. —
5. comfort: alia þá náð ok nauÖ-
syn, sem þér vilit af voru riki
þiggja, skal í y^ru valdi vera, I.,
290, 1 ; se þessu næst, hversu hann
setti sælum Ileliseo fjora hluti til
náðar, sæng ok borÖ, sæti ok
kertisstiku, II., 232, jg.
GLOSSARY.
473
NáÖugr, ad., at ease, undisturbed,
quiet, I., 292, 3.
Náðuligr, ad., quiet, calm, tranquil,
I., 316,3.
Nafn (-S, nöfn), n., a name, I., 4, ^3,
passim.
Nafu-frægr, ad., famous, celebrated,
IL, 132,11.
Ná-frændi, m., close relative, I.,
oO, 20'
Náinn, ad., nigh, close, near (of
relationship), II., 148, 15.
Nálgast, V. med., to approach, to
come near to, I., 128, n, 208, 14,
436,8,490,2.
Náliga, adv., near {each other), at
short intervals (?) synir Drottinn
honum meö tveim drauraum náliga
bæði þessa lieims götur ok annars
lífs, liversu konunginum mundi
ganga, I., 388, 17. — 2. well-nigh,
almost, I., 6, 3, 84, 9, 242, 13.
Ná-lægð (-ar-), /., presence : her
fylgja þeir ríkismenn, er fjrir
nálægð ok visso máttu stöÖva
glæpinu, ok jafnvel vernda by-
skupinn enn gerðu hvarki, II.,
54, 18. — 2, proximity, neighbour-
hood: þessi maðr for brutt af
Dedeford {read Bedeford) ok í
meiri nálægÖ við byskupsstól míiis
herra, II., 106, 3 ; í nálægð vit
erkistólinn í Kanncia sat einn
bóndi, II., 148, n. — 3. temp., in
the phrase : í nálægð, lately, lat-
terly, a short while ago, I.,
174, 1,.
Ná-lægjast, v. med., to come near to,
to approach, I., 506, 3 ; II., 58, 21,
66, 11.
Nálægr, ad., anigh, yiear approach-
ing, near to, I., 128,13, 506,19;
II., 68,21« — 2. present : leiði liann
yðr ok laði af nálægri dýflizu til
. . . eilífra fagnaÖa, II., 194,2-
Nam, see nema.
Nam (s), n., study, instruction, 11.,
284,18.
Nám-tíð, f., season of study, I.,
18,3. ^
Námu, námum, see nema.
Nánd (-ar, -ir), nearness, proximity,
n., 138, 15.
Ná-setja, v.a., to lay out (« dead
body) : siðan var þvegit likit ok
skrytt ok nazett, II., 271, 22.
Ná-stæ(5r, ad., closely related, I.,
120,19.-
Nátt {gen. nætr, dat., ace. nátt, pi.
nætr, gen. pi. nátta), /., night,
L, 556, 3, II., 166, 3 ; natta, as
adv., anight, at night, II., 234, 9.
Natta (að), v. impers., to become
night, ' noctesco,' I., 228, 24.
Náttar-þel, n., night-time, II.,
232, 1;.
Nátt-myrkr, n., night darkness, II.,
44,2.
Nátt-setja, v.a., to lay out (a dead
body), I., 554, 20. This form,
though common enough, is pro-
bably, ivhat it is here, nothing
but a cœ-ruption of the older and
better násetja.
Náttúi-a (-u), /., nature, condition,
constitution, I., 108, n, 316,;, 12,
556,24.
Náttiirligr, ad., natural, I., 400, 4.
Natturuligr, ad., id., I., 234,21, II.,
62,17.
474
GLOSSARY.
Náttúru-staðfesti, y., natural stead-
fastness, native consistency, II.,
236,15.
Náttúru-steinn, m., magic stone, a
jewel of rare fine quality, I.,
476,15."
Nátt-veizla, f., night quarters,
entertaimnent for the night, I.,
432,21.
Nauð (-ar, -ir), f., woe, affliction,
tribulation, I., 518,9, H-j 22, ^g,
274,;.
Nauðigr, ad., unwilling, I., 98, 4,
538,3.
NauÖ-staddr, ad., afflicted, needy,
I., 442, 18.
Nauð-sun, /., need, necessity, I.,
462, 29, 558, 7.
Nauðsunligr, ad., needful, necessary,
IL, 94,19.
Nauð-syn (-ar, -jar),/., need, ivant :
ek skal Ijá þér aðra kú fyst til
þinna nauðsynja, II., 124, u. —
2. necessaries of life : alia þá
náð ok uauðsyn sem þér vilit af
voru ríki þyggja skal í yðru
valdi vera^ I., 290, 1. — 3. 9ieccs'
sity : konungs valdi samir eigi, at
heirata þvílíkt £é raeð svá mikilli
freku, sem onnur kouungs inn-
gjöld, heldr sem atvik ok nauÖsyn
beiddi laiidsfólki til friðar, I.,
140, 1 ; Drottinn Jesús Kristr dó
fyrir oss, hlýðinu föður alt til
krossins, sýnandi oss svá geranda
fyrir hans sök, ef nauðsyn kallar,
I., 398, 19. — 4. trouble, tribula-
tion : megum vér eigi baki snúa
við vorum sonuin, er til vor kalla
í sínar nauðsynjar, I., 322,23;
enn þau hot, sem þér drógut
NauÖ-syn — cont.
um nauÖsyn herra páfans, . . .
sama yðr liaröla lítt, I., 404, jg.
— 5. m pl. only : nauSsynjar,
nature^s errands, I., ^ÖQ, y^-
Nauð-synligr, ad., necessary, need-
ful, I., 2, 9, 68, 21.
Nauðuliga, adv., perilously, I.,
360, 17.
NauÖungar-eiÖr, m., an oath forced
against one's will, I., 350, iq.
Nauð-zunligr, aí/., = nauðsynligr, I.,
494,26.
Ná-Yerandi, ad., present, II., 192, 15,
^202,19.
Ná-vist,/., in-dwelling, II., 232, 14.
Ná-vista,/., id., I., 50, 14.
Ne, adv., nor, I., 94, 21; né eiiin,
none at all, I., 188, 13.
Neðau, adv., below, beneath, I.,
32,9, II'j 88, 1.
Nef-langr, ad., having a long nose.
I., 28
JlO*
Nef-lauss, ad., noseless, I., 234, 2«
Nefna (d), v. a., to name by name, to
mention, I., 24, ggj '^Q, 5, 30, g. —
2. to nominate, to select, I., 72, ig,
298, iQ. — 3. to state, to appoint :
nefnum ver yðr dag, in accessione
domini se þér þar kominn, I.,
396,24; cfr. 72,19,414,29.
Nefniliga, adv., Dan. 7iavnlig, in
particular, I., 146, 27.
Nef-skonnn, ad.y ivith the nose cut
0^, L, 230, 22.
Nei, n., negation, disapproval, II.,
144,4; as an adv., no, I., 532, k).
Neisa (-u), /., shame, disgrace, II.,
274,12.
Neisu-lauss, ad., free from shame,
undis graced, II., 274, 14.
GLOSSARY.
475
Neita (tt), v.a.y to deiiy^ to r£iiounce,
I., 166, 2, 430, 20 ; ^0 give refusal
to, to refuse, II., 292, 3^.
Nema (nem, nam-namum, næmi,
numinn), v.a., prop, to take, to
secure : n. staðar, locum tenere,
to stand still on the spot, I.,
246,19; hence. — 2. to catch, to
learn, I., 24, 23, 172, jg. As an
auxiliary verb, to do, to manage .
ek nam aldri at kjosa né bera
byskupsins tign ok nafn meiS
skyldugu embætti, I., 306,29-
Nema, adv., unless, I., 142, 7, 424, § ;
except, I., 220,29; nema heldr,
as a correl, to a foregoing eigi
at eius, but far rather, but more-
over y I., 204, 18«
Neniia (t), v.n., to bring one^s self
to, to make up one^s mind to, I.,
478,16, II., 214,23.
Neyða (dd), v. a., to force, to oblige,
I., 366,15.
Neyta (tt), v.a., to use, to make use
of, to avail one's self of, I.,
70, le-
Neyti (-s), ii., fellowship, mutual
aid, I., 470, ig.
NíÖa (dd), v.a., only in the 7ned.
formj níðast, in the phrase n. a,
— a. to commit an act of cowar-
dice or villany on, II., 54, g. —
b. to commit an act of apostacy,
níðast á trú, I. 330, ^.
Níðingliga, adv., dastardly, I.,
ó56, 2-
NíÖingr (-S, -ar), m., prop., a das-
tard, a coivard ; one ivho un-
justifiably rebels agai?ist spiritual
authority, I., 416,25.
Níðings-skapr, m., a dastardly
crime, I., 540, 15, 546, jg ; II.,
22, 13.
Níðings-verk, n., a dastardly out-
rage, L, 546, 22'
Niðr, adv., down, adown, I., 8,ig,
84,15,494,,.
Niðra (aíS), v.a., to slight, L, 324, o ;
to dishonour, to humble, I., 432, g,
510,28-
Niðran (-ar),^., humiliation, abase-
ment, I., 172,1»
Niðr-brjóta, v.a., to break doicn,
to bring to ruin, I., 546, 3.
NiÖr-brot, n., beating down, hum-
bling, subjugation, I., 162, 1 ; í
niðrbrot, at the peril of destroy-
ing, I., 304, 10.
NiÖrbrots-maðr, w., destroyer, I.,
408,22-
Niör-fall, n., down-fall, I., 228, 13,
404,23,434,19.
Ni^r-hrapan, /., tumbling down,
ruin, I., 434, 21«
Niðri, adv., down below, I., 238, ., ;
II., 98, 1.
Niðr-settr, 7^./)., allayed, IL, 10, 24.
Nitjándi, ord. num., the nineteenth,
IL, 184, 7.
NÍU, card, num.y nine, I., 304,5.
Njota (nýt, naut-nutum, nyti,
notit), v.n., to enjoy, I., 196, s-
— 2. to derive advantage, bene-
fit, aid, avail from : þoldiini vér
margliáttaÖar meingerðir, hot ok
brigzli, forz ok íjár iipptektir ;
svci mjök njótum vt'r þcss sátta-
bréfs, er konungrinn scndi licini
í land, at vér ok váiir menu
skyldim hvervetna í'iiÖ Iinla, I.,
530,3; í//-. II., 293,s.
476
GLOSSARY.
Nog, adc, enough^ 1., 324, 3.
Nogliga, adv., amply, I., 44, jg,
300,2,, 434, 27; IL, 232,3.
Nogr, ad., ample, plentiful, enough,
I., 238,2, 444,19; plenty {of), I.,
64,2,.
NokkuiT, pron. indeý., some, some
one, certain, I., 4,2, 32,4, 1^6,2, ;
some = alinquantus, I., 20, 28 :»
28, 12; any, L, 202,9, 336,18-
— Nokkut (nökkuö, II., 146,7),
as an adv., somewhat, I., 36, 9,
202,20.
Norðan, adv., with af : from the
North, I., 26, 11, 90, 17, 416, 23.
Norðr, adv., north, northward, I.,
20, 27, 66, 7.
Norðr-háifn, f, northern quarter,
Europe, II., 263, 23'
Notarius, m., a notary, II., 78, jg.
Notera, v.a., to notice, L, 122, 25.
N(5tt (nætr, pi. nætr),/., night, I.,
12, 15, 84, 24, 104, 16 ; urn nottina,
over-night, I,, 268, 29, 492, 21«
NÚ, adv.^ now, I., 2, 12, passim. —
2. rhet., now, now then, I., 26, 12,
passim.
Numinn, see nema.
Ný-borinn, ad., newly horn {of
a calf), II., 120,4.
Ny-farit, supine of a v. inus.,
nýfara, lately gone, newly de-
parted, sá maðr hefir nýfarit burt
af Kancia, II., 102, 17.
Ný-fæddr, ad., newly horn, II.,
156,12.
Nyjung (-ar), f, news, tidings, I.,
390,26 ; n., 110, 1. — 2. novelty:
svá feiT hann í briitt ok frægir
þenna lut sem eina nýjung, I.,
Nýjung — cont.
116,13; ^^ ^^ i^yjung grimm-
leiks ok ofse údæma innleidd, II.,
14,17. — 3. in7iovation : einga
nýjungleiðir hann í embættisgerÖ
sína, I., 102,22; biðjum vér . . .
yðarn herradóm . . . atþérleiÖit
eigi í land yðart nýjungar í móti
heilagri kirkju, I., 152, 12.
Nýjungr, m., innovation, margir
articuli þar a£ voru eigi konungs
vanar heldr vándsligir nýjuugar
u]3p á skaða kirkjunnar, I., 168, 1.
Nj-kominn, ad., neicly, lately, just
arrived, I., 40, ig, 52, 17.
Nýliga, adv., newly, lately, latterly,
I'J 6,15, 118,22, 174,28.
Ný-lunda,y!, a new thing, strange
occurrence, a wart'e/, I., 516, 22,
11., 280, 5.
Nyrr, prop., nýr, ný, nýtt, ad., new,
I., 2, iQ. — 2. recent : nú á nýjura
tímum, I., 2, 12 ; at nýju, anew,
I., 94, 3, recently, I., 118, 19.
Ny-tekinn, ad., new, startling, I.,
300, ig ; newly conceived, II.,
150,15.
Nyt-samligr, ad., useful, expedient,
profitable, I., 2, jg, 122,24,268,16,
462,7,470,23.
Nyt-semd (-ar, -ir), f., benefit, profit,
privilege, advantage, I., 38, ig,
72, 2, 136, 10, 328, js, 508, 16.
Nytsemdar-erindi, 71., beneficial
work, II., 186,17.
Ný-vorðinn, ad., lately come to pass,
II., 106, 23.
Nægð (-ar), f^ plenty, fulness,
abundance, I., 98, 20? 232, 12 ; H-j
92,9,110,3.
GLOSSARY.
477
Nægja (ð), ^".a., occurs only in the
med. form, to be satisfied, I.,
144,i-, 280,01. ^
Næor, ad., plentiful, plenteous, I.,
262,13,368,10.
Næmi, see nema.
Nær, adv., near, nigh, I., 12, ^-,
84, 22«
Nær-gætr, ad., guessing true, I.,
^oz, 3.
Nær-hendis, adv., near at hand,
within reach, I., 2, ig.
Næring (-ar), f., nourishment, II.,
96, 21.
NæiTÍ, adv., nigh, near to, I., 100,6;
IL, 110,13.
Nær-verandi, pres. p., present, I.,
314,1,.
Næstr, super I., nearest, next, I., 6, 26 5
7iext following, I., 28, 2 ; neut.
næst, í/ð ö/< adv., next, I., 12, 4 ;
o/ity lately, I., 186, 15; /g5^, most
recently, I., 440, 21-
Nöðru-kyn, n., generation of vipers,
I., 546,12.
Mökkur, II., 212,20; nockvod, II.,
266, 30, see nokkurr.
Nöktr, ad., naked, II., 36, 12, 290, 23.
Nös (nasar, nasar), f, a nose, II.,
287, 35.
Nöstr, see næstr.
0, Ó.
Ob-beldi (-s), n., violence, I., 410, 19.
0-beygðr, pp., unbent, I., 522, 2-
Ö-blekktr, pp., undeceived, 7iot
hood-ioinkcd, II , 236, 1^.
Ó-brendr, p.p. unhurnt, I., 50, g.
Ó-bæriligr, ad., unendurable^ in-
sufferable, II., 70, 17.
Ö-bærr, ad., unbearable, exceeding
one's strength, I., 78, g.
Ö-bættr, ad., unreformed : svá
skygoj^ þessir óbættir þat skæra
Ijós, er nú leynist í Kautarabyrgi,
II., 44, 19. — 2. unatoned for,
leita þú eftir eun framar þeim
óbættum glæp, er þig miin þröng-
va því dauðligar, sem þú liefir
meir vanrækt, I., 128, ^-.
Öðal (-S, óðöl), n., fixed property,
I., 92, 23.
Odd-viti, m., leader, I., 200, 15.
Ó(5-streymi, n., furious torrent,
rapids, I., 32, 7.
Ö-dygí5, /., disloycdty, treason, I.,
214,23.
Ó-dæmdr, ad., not judged, not sen-
tenced, unpunished, II,, 116,3.
Ö-dæmi, n., unparalleled, ?nonst?'ous
thing, enormity, II., 8, ^j, 26,19.
Ö-dæmiligr, ódömiligr, ad., un-
paralleled, unexampled, II.,
18, 9, 28/, 27.
Ofan, adv., from above : her mátti
sjá akrinn Axæ döggvaðan ok
blómgaðan bæði ofan ok neðan,
II., 88,1. — 2. down, adown,
doivnwards : maÖrinn fellr ofan,
II., 116, le, cfr. 2i' — Phrases:
ofan ii, over and above, in addi-
tion to, I., 370, 3 ; þar a ofan, to
boot, II., 126,4; ^^'^^ h down
into, II., 160,13; fyrir ofan, up
above, II., 116, 15.
OfaiT, comp. adv., projt. higher up ;
but temp, higher up in time, later,
II., 286, ,2.
478
GLOSSARY.
Of-beldast, v. med.^ to become turbu-
lent^ to rebel : Sal konungr var
valdr af GuSi, ok er hann ofbeld-
ist uieð óhlýðni, fjTÍrfórst haun
ok oil haus ætt, I., 364, j^.
Of-beldi, n., turbulence^ arrogance^
I-? 26. 105 42, iQ, 214, 21-
Of-dirfö, f.. fool-hardiness : þat er
haun stendr á sínum skilnÍDg við
liverii sein hann á at skifta, þýÖa
þeir til einþykkis ok ofdirföar,
I., 178,14. — 2. overweening pre-
sumption : EodgeiiT erkibyskiip
iætr bera kross fyrir sér um sýslu
Kantuariensis kirkjii . . . sýDÍst
herra páfanuni þessi ofdirfö á
eingan veg þollig, I., 392,2«
Of-djarfr, ad,^ foolhardi/, turbulent,
rebellious, I., 148, 3.
0£-drukkinn, cid., Jig. over-drunh,
intoxicated, reckless, heedless, I.,
Officera, v.a., to officiate, I., 102, 3.
Officium, >?., office ) church service,
I., 468,26.
Offr, offur (-s), n., an offering, I.,
104, 13, 15 ; II, 78, 1.
Offra (aÖ), to offer, to bring offer-
ing and sacrifice, I., 50, ig ; H'?
170,2,.
Of-gera, v. a., to over-do, to go to
excess : enn ef her finst nokkut
ofgert Í, ok Till hann bæta eftir
lærðra manna domi í sinu riki,
L,382,2o,c/>--n., 20,20,273,18.
Of-gejstr, ad., over-rash, reckless,
heedless, I., 454, 13.
Of-gjöra, see ofgera.
Of-metnaðr, m., presumption, I.,
506, 23.
0£-mettr, ad., * over-fed,^ surfeited ;
upp frá borðinu stóÖ hann í
hvern tíma heldr ranmettr enn
ofmettr, I., 106, 30.
Of-mæltr, ad., stated, set forth, in
an exaggerated manner, I., 406,28«
Ofr=offr, II., 158,14.
Ofra=oíFra, II., 206,0.
Ofr-afl, n., molestation beyond one's
power to cope with, I., 390, 7 ;
tumultuous fray, I., 534, jg.
Ofran=offran,IL, 206,5.
Of ran (-ar), f., pride, presumption,
superciliousness^ I., 36, 25, 94, 21«
Oívíi'&t,v.med., to act presumptuously
and overbearingly, to exult:
(hann) skrifar til herra páfans, at
hann standi sterkliga í herbúÖum
himna konungs, at eigi ofrist
úmildir svá mjök, at þeir sýnist
vega sigr á Thómasi, I., 420, 23-
Ofr-efl-i, n., over-match, I., 354, 15.
Ö-fremjast, t'., med., not to dare on
account of shyness, or sense of
shame, II., 136, n.
Ofr-hiti, m,, excessive, heat, I.,
234,28-
Öfriðar-eldr, 7n., heat of enmity,
I.J 92, 17.
Ö-friðliga, ad., unpeacefully , un-
peaceably, threateningly, I.,
484,14.
Ö-fi'iðr (-ar), yn., fight, I., 166, n. —
2. vexation, worry, enmity, I.,
92
> 10'
226
>17 '
II., 256,4.-3.
commotion, disturbance, turmoil,
I., 482,27.
Of-riki, n., oppression, molestation,
I., 276, 19.
GLOSSAKY.
479
Ö-frægð,y., dishonour^ II., 10, 15.
(3-frændsamligr, ad., unbecoming of
kinsmen J II., 174, j.
Ofsi (-a), m. insolence, violence, I.,
58, loj 152,21,484,8; II., 14, jg.
Of-sokn, f., perseciition, I., 196, jg,
368, 18, 378, 10.
O^-sóíXt, p.p. ö/'ofsækja.
Of-stærð, y*., stomachy overiveeninc/
ambition, I., 432,2«
Ofstæris-maðr, m., an overweening
pierson, I., 434, jg.
Of-sækja, r.a., to pursue, I., 230,21«
— 2. ^0 'persecute, I., 226, 19.
Of-sæla, /'., '^over-bliss,'' too great
a happiness^ I., 368, 21.
Of-sævi, of-sæíi, n., high sea, I.,
264, 1; IL, 246,24.
Oft, eomp. oftar, superl. oftast, adv.,
often, frequently, I., 38, i^, 216, ^.
Of-tekjayy*., exceeding presumptioii,
I., 392,4.
Oftliga, Oi/t;., often, frequently, I.,
38,6-
Oft-samligr, öí/., frequently re-
peated, habitual, I., 388, 15.
Of-verkir, m. pi., excessive aches,
IL, 138,13.
Of-þreyta, v.a., to over-fatigue, to
wear out, I., 444, i^.
Ó-íæra, f, peril, II., 178,7.
O-gifta, f, ill-luck, fatality, II.,
128,3,292,1«.
Ógiftu-maÖr, ?n., a luckless wretch,
a wicked person, II., 10,19.
Ó-glaðligr, ad., cheerless, 11., 152,2i.
Ógn{-(ir,-ir),f., threat, intimidation,
I., 182,3, 196,31, 498,32, 506,23,
532, 12- — 2. aive, fear (of), I.,
134,9,176,27; IL, 178,16.
Ógna (að), v.a., to threaten, I.,
212,9. — 2. to aive, to inspire
ivith a sense of fearing devo-
tion : þegar sem hann ser messu-
klæðin ok skriiðanii at ser bor-
inn, ognar hann siuni samvizku
með svá lítillátri hugleiðing, at
þegar eru tárin úti, I., 102, j,.
Ógnan, (-ar, -ir),/, threat, II., 90, 5.
Ógnandi, m., threatener, II., 90, 13.
Ógnar-lidt, n.pl., threats intended
only to intimidate : eun Gu^s
maðr gjörir sér ekki meira urn,
enn svarar : Ógnarhót eru slikt,
I., 520,3. — 2. threats of a fear-
ful nature, threats of terrible in-
tent, I., 528, 27.
Ognar-orð, n.jyl., threatening words,
I., 456,23; n., 180,13.
ó-greiði, 7n., tardiness, reluctance
to facilitate transaction of busi-
ness, I., 72, 18.
ÓgTligr, ógurligr, ad., awful, fear-
ful, 11., 18,8,278,;.
Ö-græÖiligr, ÖC?., incurable,!., 196,22-
Ógustus, m., the month of August,
11,261,13.
0-hallr, ad., not leaning, strait, 11.,
234, 24.
O-hamingja, f, mishap, misfortune,
II., 10,9. ^
Ó-hegndr, ad., nnpunished, II., 44, g,
^ 46, 26-
Ö-heyrðr, ad., unheard of, I., 348,6,
424,12.
0-heyriligr, ad., unheard of ?non-
strous, II., 12,3, 86, 5.
Ö-hlýðnast, v. med., to disobey, I.,
Ó-lilýðni, /!, disobedience, I., 364, jg,
406,13.*
480
GLOSSARY.
Ö-hæfa (u), y., enormity^ abomina-
tion, II., 8, 20«
Ö-hægindi, óhægendi, ?i., uneasiness,
discomfort, II., 82, 26» 282, 5.
Ö-bægliga, adv., uneasily, in a
troublesome manner, II., 94, 4.
Ö-bæverska (-u), /'., incivility, want
of good manners, I., 462,26«
0-jafn, ad., ' uneven,^ unequal, not
to be compared, II., 216, 3.
Ok (-s), n., a yoke, I., 218, 20,
234, 1,.
Ok, conjunct., and, I., 2, 7, passim.
— 2. then, I., 382, 30-
Okkarr, okkur, okkart, possess, ad.,
of the first pronoun dual, our,
ours, II., 228, 17.
Okkr, dat. and ace, dual of ek,
II., 170, 21.
Ö-kominn, ad., to come, future, I.,
460, 10; IL, 132,25, 224, io.
Ö-kristiligr, ad., imchristian, II.,
142, 24.
Ö-kunnr, ad., strange, not known
to those present, 11. , 104, i2' — 2.
unknoivn (to), II., 182,4»
O-kunnugr, ad., unknown (to), un-
familiar {to), I., 80, 15.
Oleum, n., oil, II., 88,4.
Ö-leyfór, ad., not permitted, illicit,
uidawful, I., 298, i^.
O-leystr, ad., un-released, un-re-
moved, I., 78, 9. — 2. un-absolved,
II.,48,n.
Ö-lííi (-s), n., fatal state of (a per-
son's) life; særa til ólííis, to wound
mortally, I., 142, 14.
Ólífis-maðr, in., a person of forfeit
life, I., 148, 1.
Ó-líkr, ad., unlike, different, various,
I., 48,26, 190,7; II., 14, 1, 74, 2.
Olli, pi-et. of valda, q. v.
Ó-lýginn, ad., ' unlying,' truthful,
^ II., 278,26-
Ö-lærÖr, ad., unlearned, as a subst.,
a laic, II., 60, 7, 192, go-
Ó-lögliga, adv., unlawfully, ille-
gally, II., 186,22-
Ö-lögligr, ad., unlawjul, illegal, I.,
236, 7.
Ö-makligr, ad., unworthy, undeserv-
^ ing, II., 128,8, 168,17.
O-megin (-s), /^., fainting swoon,
II., 126, 19.
O-mildr, ad., iniquitous, wicked, I.,
182,17,276,18.
0-mjúkliga, ad., un-indul gently,
austerely, severely, I., 98, n,
^ 202, 17.
Ó-náð, f, disturbance, II., 122, 25 ;
worry, vexation, I., 370, jg.
Op (-s), n., whoop, cry, I., 230, 13,
534,11.
Opin-bera (aÖ), v.a., to lay bare, to
unveil, to discover, to reveal, I.,
66, 10, 516, 10.
Opin-berliga, adv., publicly, I., 40, 15,
146,2,454,4.
Opin-berr, ad., open, public, I., 56, 2,
144, 15 ; discovered, found out, I.,
176,19; manifest,!., 214:, Y2'
Ö-píndr, ad., unpunished, I., 454, 22«
Opinn, ad., open, I., 524, 4 ; patent :
0. bref , I., 452, 5 ; segja í opin
augu, to declare in one's face, I.,
458,16.
Or = úr, I., 154, n, 516, 7.
Orð (-s), n., a ivord, I., 2, 14 ; gera
at orðum, to make a common topic
of, I., 48, 23.
OrÖa-fjöldi, m., diffuse discourse,!.,
280,
'j25-
GLOSSARY.
481
Orða-fuUtingi, n., pleading in behalf
of others, I., 54,26'
Orða-gerð,y., construction of words,
framing of speech, I., 200, 5 ; as-
sertion, II., 114, i8'
OrÖa-glæsur, /'. pL, slippery Ian-
guage, I., 458, 17.
Orða-grein,y., articulation of speech,
IL, 280, 20.
OrÖa-laust, neut. ad. orÖa-lauss, as
an adv., unmentioned : lata o., to
pass over in silence, II., 264, gg.
OrÖa-skrejting, f, elegance of ex-
pression, I., 380, 15.
Orð-fagr, ad., fair-spoken, eloquent,
I., 44, IP
Orð-fall, n., expression, saying, II.,
212,7.
Orð-felli, ?i. speech, talk, I., 86,17,
290,16-
OrÖ-flaug,y., ejaculation, I., 216,23,
520, 11 . — 2. travelling rumour,
I., 6ö(^, 13.
OrÖ-frægr, ad., praisefully spoken
o/, I.,'20,2,.
OrÖinn, see verða.
Orð-lof, n., public praise, I., 38, 13.
Orð-rómr, in., rumour, I., 86,9,
202, le.
OrÖ-ræða, f, talk, language, dis-
cussion, conversation, I., 170, ^,
246,25, 318,6, 472,17, 498, 15,
524, 6.
Orð-sending, f, message, I., 72, 4,
13^, 6, 2ó2, 12»
OrÖs-kviðr, m., a proverb, I., 484, n.
Orð-suild, fy eloquence, I., 36, u,
H14.
Orí5-snjallr, ad., eloquent, I., 44,8.
Orðs-tírr, m.,fame, I., 394, 21.
K541.
Orð-tak, n., mode of expression,
IL, 4,23, 168,5.
Organum, II., 200, 13.
Or-lof, n., permission, leave, liberty,
I'? *^2, 1^, 64,30, 212,18, 296,6»
504, 11« — 2. leave, audience, I.,
290,15, 306,2; leave, farewell,
I., 290, 7.
Or-lofa, v.a., to permit, I., 294, 12,
528, 22'
Ö-rói (-a), m., disturbance, I., 60, 13,
192, 23, 300, iQ ; ivorry, vexation,
L, 90, 18, 276,7.
OiTusta (-U, -ur), /., a battle, fight,
I., 8,1.
Or-skorðr, m., = or-skurðr, II.,
249, 13.
Or-skurða (að), v.a., to decide, I.,
296. 15, 302, 19. ^
Or-skurðr (-ar, -ir), m., decided
answer, decision, I., 190, 26, 198, 7,
266. 16, 466, 18-
Ort, orti, &c,, see yrkja.
Ö-sannligr, ad., baseless, II.,
114,16-
Ö-skaddr, p.p., unscathed, II.,
- 106, 13.
Ö-skýrr, ad., indistinct, II., 76, iq.
Ö-snöggliga, adv., unstintedly, II.,
216,23.
O-somi (-a), m., disgrace, dishonour,
I., 148,10, 490,28; wickedness,
crime, I., 152, 5.
Ö-sprunginn, p.p., ' un-burst,' un-
heart-broken, II., 70, 20-
Oss, dat. and ace. pi. of ek.
Öss (gen. OSS, pi. osar), m., the
mouth of q river, I., 32, u.
Ostr (-S, -ar), m., cheese, I., 250,9.
Ó-styrkr, ad., feeble, weak, II. ,
H H
482
GLOSSARY
Ó-sýniligr, arf., invisible^ II., 128, ^.
Ö-tallegr, ad., innumerable, II.,
188,19.
Ó-taUiga, adv., innumerably, II.,
86, 20«
Otta (-u),y., early morn, I., 50, 29.
Otta (að), v.?i., to fear, I., 82, 7. —
Impers., ottar oss, mefears, I.,
226, g. — illfec/. Í0 y^«^', ^o mis-
doubt, I., 56, 4, 176, i8> 198, 2 ; II. >
^ 274, 3.
Otta-efni, w., cause of fear, I.,
^80,16.
Ötta-lauss, ad., fearless, I., 520, 21 ;
11., 22, 4.
Öttanligr, ad., fear-inspiring, I.,
306, 18.
Ötti (-a), m.,fear, L, 18, 5, 158, 17.
Öttu-söngr, m., matins, áhverja nótt,
sem úti er óttu-söngr, eru innkall-
a^ir þrettán fátækir menn í nokk-
ut leyniligt herbergi, I., 98, 15;
cfr. II., 64, 5. — cfr. : " diebus sin-
gidis post synaxim decantatam,
quam cito post gallicÍ7iium sub
profunda nocte decantare consue-
verat, mox clam in conclavi aliquo
introducebantur fratres trede-
cim.
Ö-umræ^iligr, ad., unspeakable, I.,
_ 318, 10; n., 84,19.
0-vani (-a), m., abuse, a£ þeim inn-
lei^slum, siöleysum ok óvönum
leiddi svá langar limar, at margs
manns lif dro til útlegí5ar, &c., I.,
6, 17.
Ö-varliga, adv., unwarily, heed-
lessly,11., 1Q,^o.20S,^.
Ö-varr, ad., unaware, unwary ; at
óvöru, unawares, II., 10, 23»
96,5.
O-venja (-u), /., abuse ; hann harp-
ist fast, ok bravt niði* siÖvenivr
er allra kellzt vorv oveniur, bæði
nyiar ok fornar, II., 276, 3.
Ó-veríiugr, ad., unworthy, I.,
^*^-^) 21*
Ó-veri (-a), m., irritation, itch, þar
sem fotrinn sýndist sléttari ok
minnr blásinn, þutu upp smá-
bólur meÖ óvera, II., 98, 4.
Ö-vígír, ad., not ordained, lay, I.,
70, 6, 194, 13.
Ó-vin, m., = óvinr, I., 214, 27.
Ó-vinr, m., an enemy, a foe, I.,
166, 12, 486, iQ. — 2. the fiend) II.,
58, 19, 128, 2.
Ö-vit, n., state of unconsciousness,
fainting swoon, II., 84, 4.
O-vitandi, ad., not knowing, igno-
rant of in ignorance, II., ^(y, 19.
Ö-vægiligr, ad., not to be weighed,
measureless, I., 6, j.
Ó-vöru see ovarr.
Ox, see vaxa.
Ö-þokki, m., ill-feeling, enmity :
konungrinn hugði allan óþokka
ni^rsettan á þeim fundi, er friÖr
formera^ist í Franz, II., 10, 23 ;
dislike, antipathy, II., 154,5.
Ö-þoUigr, ad., intolerable, I.,
378,13.
Ö-þrotnandi, ad., that does not
waste, II., 88, 4.
Ö-þökk, oþavk, f, censure, blame,
II., 271,2-
GLOSSARY.
483
P.
Páfa-dómr, m.^ j)opedom, papacy, I.,
90, 2g.
Páfa-garðr, w., ^'pope's garth"
the papal courts I., 124,9.
Páfa-sæti, w., papal see, the see of
Rome : ok at rækðvm ok reknvm
Octoviano af pafvasæti valdi hvn
ser til herra ok hirðis Alexanðr,
II., 275, 16-
Páfa-tal, n,f succession of popes, I.,
90, 15.
Páfi (-a, -ar), m., pope, I., 40, ^q ;
passim.
Pallium, n., the episcopal pall, I.,
42,1,90,8,124,9.
Pálmarí (-a, -ar), m., a palmer, a
pilgrim, I., 136, 13.
Pálmi (-a, -ar), m., a palm-tree,
hjartteignaforn bins bleza^a
Thome erkibyskups samlikist vel
þeim uppreistum viði, er pálmi
heitir, 11., 146, 30'
Pálm-YÖndr, 7n., a palm wand, a
branch of the palm-tree : harm
berr fagran pálm-yönd í sinne
hende, II., 136, 7.
Pantr (-s), m., a pawn, pledge, secu-
rity, I., 224, 16.
Páska-dagr, m., the day of Easter,
n., 76,3.
Paska-vika, f, Easter week, II.,
86,3.
Páskir, f pi., Easter, I., 86, 27 ;
II., 74,15.
Pati (-a), m., a child's pet ex-
pression for father : skal ek
Pati — cont.
þetta drecka, pati minn? II.,
281,3.
Patronus, I., 542, 12.
Pax, the kiss of peace, I., 468, 26'
Pell (-s), n., a pall, a coverlet of
precious fabric, L, 14,22.
Peningr (-s), m., a coin, I., 188, 3 ;
II., 122,10.
Penningr (-s), m., id., I., 98,25;
money, II., ^Qi, 7.
Persona (-u),y., person, I., 16,21-
Pilagrimr, m., a pilgrim, I., 540,26-
Pilagrims-ferS, f, pilgrimage, I.,
258, 20; II-, 106, 16-
Piltr, 7n., a lad, I., 14, ig.
Pina (u), f, pain, suffering, I.,
196,30, 330, g. — 2. punish-
ment, penalty .^ I., 184, 5, 540, n.
— 3. passion (death), I., 552, ^q ;
II., 4,18.
Pina (d), v.a., to plague, to inflict
pain, I., 98, 4. — 2. to vex, to
annoy, to worry, I., 310, 3. — 3. to
censure, to punish, I., 334, 24?
396,15.
Pinandi, gerund, of pina, to be
punished, I., 496, 19.
Pining (-ar), f, passion, stiff ering
of death, I., 558,8; ^^'i 1^^> 9'
Píningar-dagi', m., day of passion,
II., 192,21.
Piningar-rödd, /., cry announcing
passion, II., 2Q, 13.
Piningar-Yottr, m., a martyr : er
þat boðanda þoim Giiðs piningar-
Aott til lots ok virÖingar, at him-
neskt Ijós kom iiij. sinnnm yfer
bans alltari, II., 226, 21-
Pínu-lauss, ad., unpunished, I.,
356, 11.
H H 2
484
GLOSSARY.
Pipra(að), v.n., to tremble, to qui-
ver, to shake^ I., 182, ^q.
Pisl (-ar, -ir), /., passion, 11., 4, 39,
112,4.
Pislar-efni, n., cause of suffering, I.,
^368, 18.
Pislar-mark, m., sign, emblem of
passion, the cross, I., 208, 23.
Píslar-pálmi, m., palm of passion,
II., 6,1
Pislar-sigr, 7n., victory through
passion, martyrdom, II., 236, 24«
Píslar-váttr, and -vottr, m., a mar-
tyr,!., 2,^; 11,108,6.
Píslar-vætti, n., martyrdom, I.,
14,17-
Plága (að), v.a., to plague, to tor-
ment, I., 98, 4.
Plága (-u), f, severe punishment,
torment, I., 144,27.
Plástr (-æs), m., " emplastrumj'' a
plaster, II., 96, 13.
Pollisera, v.a., to polish, to execute
dainty handiwork : (hann) finnr
þar kominn kistil einn snjóhvítan,
með skínanda filbein, hann er
luktr ok svá líkaðr, sem aldri
kunni manns hand svá pollisera,
I'j 24, 10'
Port (-s), n., a gate, I., 222, jq.
Postoli (-a), an apostle, I., 40, n.
Postoligr, ad., apostolic, 1., 2Q, g.
Potagium, n., soup, meat: bróðirinn
kaupir úti, hvárt sem verÖr ertra-
réttr eÖr eitthvert potagium, T.,
242, ij.
Prédika (aÖ), v.a., to preach, I.,
104, ^.
Prédikan (-ar), f., preaching ^ I.,
118,1 ; 11,230,..
Presenta {\x),f., a present, I., 2G2, 15.
Presentera, v.a., to present, I., 54, 1.
Prestr (-s, -ar), m.. a priest, L,
86,31.^
Prests-vigsla, /., a priest's ordina-
tion, I., 88, 23.
Primas, a primate, I, 40, ig.
PríóiT (-s), m., a prior, I., 32, 20»
passim.
Prisand,/"., jomow, I., 556, 22«
Priss, m., state, pomp, lordliness,
L, 262,23.
Privilegium, I., 40, 19, 122, 23.
Procession, y, procession, I., 86, 22«
Prof (-s), n., legal inquiry, I.,
lis? 255 282,3.
Profa (að), v.a., to examine, I.,
124,10, 182,21. — 2. to try, to
test, to make an experience of,
to prove, I., 46,8, 474, 4. — 3. to
attempt, to make a trial of, to
try, I, 16, 4. — 4. to prove, to
demonstrate, I, 54, n. — 5. to
try, to vex, to worry., I., 158, g.
Profan (-ar), f., examination, I.,
110,20.
Propheta, II., 228, 14.
Propiciatorium, I., 208, iq.
Prosa, a hymn introduced into the
mass on certain festival days,
I., 20, 26? 22, 5.
Protomartjr, I., 206, 26-
Proventa, f., prebend, advancement^
I') 38, 23«
Provocera, v.a., II., 54, 2.
Prúðligr, ad., glorious, II., 292, 17.
Prúðr, ad., glorious, II., 292, 2^.
Prýí5a (dd,), to beautify, to bedeck,
I., 550, 26 ; II., 88, 15 ; to glorify,
II., 210,9.
Prýði, /:, beauty, glury, II, 190, 19,
290, 10, 293, 12.
GLOSSARY.
485
Publicera, v.a.^ 458, 24«
Púki (-a, -ar), m. ^ puck,^ the fiend^
Fund (-S), n., poinid, in the biblical
sense of grant, bestoical^ I., 84,27«
Punktr, piingtr, II., 247, i^ (-s, -ar),
m., point, nick of time, I., QQ,^^
86, 2, 266, 265 330, 29, 486, 9, 506, 7.
— 2. circumstance, state, I., 170,3.
— 3. decision, step taken, I.,
194,24.
Pjttr (-s), )n.,a pit, pool, II., 271,8»
R
Ráð (-s), n., advice, counsel : Mailld
móðir bans var bæði vitr ok viljug
til at gefa honum góð ráð, I.,
18,8; ^^^ (lærÖir) . . . dregnir
undir limalát ok skeradir, nema
■þeim verÖi iindan skotið með rök-
semd ok ráÖi herra erkibyskups,
I., 142, 7 (þeir) ganga . . . framra í
veg um nóttina sem Jesús Kristr
gerir ráð fjrir, I., 230, 7. — 2.
settled agreement, resolution : af
þeiri gisting gerast þau ráð með
forniim félagsskap, at Thomas
muni Ijfta sinni ferð ok gerast
heimonligr Richeo, I., 30, 15. — 3.
consultation, deliberation : hversu
erkibyskiip skipast virðuliga til
sætis, ráðs ok tillögu meÖ herra
páfanum þarf eigi langmælis, L,
geno;r bann á ráð með
' o
130,
sínum spekingum, hvat upp skal
taka i þvílíkum vanda, I., 148,26;
siti þeir nú uin stund á ráði, sem
þeim likar, 1., 240,3. — 4. discre-
Ráð — cont.
tiofi, judgynent, way of thinking
and doing : bíðandi höfum vér
beðit ef þér vildut víkja yðru ráði
á réttan veg, I., 360, ^3 ; gejm at
þínu ráði, at þá sér þú oigi van-
búinn, þvi at nú er þinn tími, I.,
36Q, 22- — 5. councillor, coun-
cillors, council ; . . . konimgsins
kauceler ok landstjóriiarmaðr, þar
með æzta ráð, ok þeira lögum eigi
nær enn úvígðr leikmaÖr, I.,
68, 13 ; því sitr herra Thóinas með
sínu ráí^i (=:rá(5uneyti, I., 112, ^g),
L, 112
,19; iiin morgininn timan-
liga kallar konungrinn sitt ráð,
birtandi þeim bréf ok beiðslu
erkibysknps, I., 270, 2- — 6. rule,
power : hann verðr sem annarr
höfðingi yíir öUu Englandi, næstr
konimgi í virðing, ráði ok met-
orðum, I., 48, jo-
Ráða (ræð, réð-réðum, réði, ráðiun),
v.a.,to unravel, to interpret : finst
henni um draiiminn ok segir ein-
iim vitriim manni, ok sá ræðr
harðla spakliga, I., 12,19. — 2. to
affect, to determine : þessiim tveim
levfist Í hena páfans bréfi at beiða
pallium a£ romversku sæti, enu
því ræðr líf ok hlýðni, hvárt þeir
fá þat, I., 42, 2 ; Guí)s réttr er svá
röksemdarfullr, at ekki hatr eðr
liermd á honum at ráða, I., 170, g.
— 3. to resolve on, to decide : svá
feingii þeir ok dáligan enda, er
réÖu manndráp eðr vuduu úbættir
með öllu, I., 23G, 21- Preposi-
tional uses ; r. á, to attack, to set
on, I., 544, 13. — r. af, to make up
one^s ?ni7id, to decide, I., 252, ,. —
486
GLOSSARY.
Ráða — coat,
r. Í veg, to betake one's self a-
journeying, to set off, I., 262, 13.
RáÖa-gerÖ, f., project, plan, plot,
conspiracy, I., 44, g, 216, 5, 240, 3,
346,27,410,12,516,27.
Báða-gjörð, /., = ráðagerð, II.,
262, 20«
Eáö-gjafi, m., counsellor, I., 86,5;
councillor, minister oý state, I.,
44, 21, 190, n-
Ráðinn, ad., made up, resolved, de-
cided, determined, I., 64, 9, 390, 2.
414,9,434,1.
Ráð-Iauss, ad., heedless, I., 222, ^3 ;
misguided, astray, I., 486, 17.
Káð-leggja, v.a., to counsel, to ad-
vise, L, 206, 25, 316,11.
RáÖ-leysi, n., folly, recklessness, I.,
204, 24, 358, 14, 472, 23, 532,
26-
Ráðning (-ar), chastisement, rebuke,
I., 342, 19, 392, 9.
Ráðu-neyti, n., council, I., 60, 17,
112, 16 ; counsel, I., 296, 3Q.
Ráð-vandr, ad., just, strict, up-
right,!., 112,8,260,17.
Rak, see reka.
Raka (að), v,a., to shave, II., 8, 15.
Ráku, rákum, see reka.
Rakinn or raktr ? II., 291 , ig.
Rakki (-a, -ar), m., a cur, a dog,
I., 512, 5, II., 140,24.
Rakti, see rekja.
Ramliga, adv., strongly, firmly, I.,
182,7.
Ran (-s), n., robbery, usurpation,
I.,60,i3, 152,6, 364,1.
Rán-fengi, n., spoils, plunder, II.,
8, 23-
Rang-dæma, v.a., to judge unjustly,
I., 204, 33.
Rang-dæmdr, />./>.? wrongfidly
judged, I., 206, 4.
Rangindi, n. pi., wrongs, injustice,
iniquity, I., 502, ig, 526, 7.
Rang-látr, ad., wrongful, unjust.
I., 118
> 4?
334,
9,
iniquitous,
424,8.
Rangliga, adv., wrongly, wrong-
fully, unjustly, unlawfully, I.,
8> 11, 148, 20, 324, 12-
Rang-læti (-s), n., iniquity, wicked-
ness, I., 358, 14, 424, 9.
Rangr (röng, rangt), ad., wrong,
perverse, evil, I., 192, 4.
Rang-snúa, v.a., to pervert, I.,
112,20;
Rangyndi = rangindi, II., 263, ig.
Rann-sak, w., inquiry, I., 294, 27.
Rann-saka, v.a., to inquire, I.,
110,23.
Ráns-maðr, in., a plunderer, robber,
L, 418,16,11., 56,17.
Rás (-ar),y., course, I., 508,23-
Rasa (a'ð), v.n., to stumble, to trip,
L, 222,11.
Rasandi, p, pres., headlong, heed-
less, I., 6,20, 222, 13, 276,3,
332, 28«
Raska (að), v.a., to disturb, to inter-
fere with, I., 140,13.
RauÖ, see rjóða.
RauÖr, ad., red, blushing, I., 4, 19,
194,24; IL, 60,13, 130,17,226,26.
Rauf, see rjúfa.
Rauk, see rjúka.
Raun (-ar, -ir), /., trial, I., 156, 3,
194, 26, 464, 24. — 2. experience,
I., 32, 13, 108, 24, 258, 28« — 3.
proof, I., 354, 15.
Raust (-ar, -ir),^!, voice, II., 40,22«
GLOSSARY.
487
Refa-hali, /w., a fox tailj I., 232, 3.
Refligr, ad., vixen, foxlike, I.,
236, 20«
Refr (-S, -ar), a fox, I., 236, 22-
Refsa (að), v. a., to chastise, I.,
526,23.
Refsing (-ar), /., chastisement, I.,
182,20,416,27.
Regla (-U, -ur),/., rule, ordinance,
I., 36,27, 84,17; IL, 58,5.-2.
?iio?iastic rule, religious order, I.,
370,9,
Reglu-faðir m,, founder of a re-
ligious Older, L, 370, g.
Reglu-hald, n., observance of monas-
tic rule, religious discipline, II.,
58, 3.
Reglu-hús, n., religious house, I.,
76,3, 84,10'
Reglu-lifnaðr, m., religious order,
I., 76,2.
Reglu-maðr, m,, member of a re-
ligious order, a regular, I., 72, 15,
94,15,106,15.
Eegn (-s), n., rain, I., 256, j.
Reið (-ar), f, a ride, riding, I.,
248,10.
Reiða (-u), f, readiness : vera til
reiðu, to be read?/, I., 488, 4.
Reiða (tld), v.a., properly to let
ride, but only impers., to rock, to
shake, to quake, to become un-
settled : ferr þá enn til orÖræðu,
hvat fyrir mun liggja, ef reiðir
undir fotum, in case their posi-
tion should become untenable, I.,
436, 25.
ReiiSast, v, med., to become angry,
7vroth, wrathful, I., 36, 15,
346, 22-
Reið-fara, ad., a-faring, a- journey-
ing : verÖr konimgr vel reiðfara,
the king sped luell, I., 60, ig, cfr,
246,5.
Reiði, indecl., f., wrath, anger, I.,
150, 17. — 2. a deed that deserves,
provokes anger, I., 418,9.
Reiðr, ad., angry, wroth, wrathful,
L, 188,19,528,5.
Reið-skjóti, m., a riding horse, I.,
248, 5. _
Reiðu-búinn, ad., ready, I., 150, 17.
Reiðuligr, ad., looking angry, II.,
180, 7.
Reifar, f. pi., swaddling cloth, I.,
510
,4'
Reika (aÖ), v.n., to wander, to stray :
proverb : fari sá ráðlauss, sem
reika vill, I., 432, g.
Reikan (-ar),y., ivandering in quest
of livelihood : þessu næst skoðar
hann, ef vígslan ferr frainm,
hverja forsjo eðr beneficium hverj-
um hann megi veita, at eigi
þröngvi þann öreign á reikanar
stig : '* ne postquam promoti, pa-
lantes et vagi, seu conductitii,
sacros or dines non religioni, sed
potius quœstui haberent et osten-
tui," 1., 110,27.
Reikna (aÖ), v.a., to reckon, to
calculate, to sum up, I., 188, j,
190, 18. — 2. to nwnber, to count,
I., 198,5. — 3. to account of , to
charge, I., 498, 13.
Reikningr, (-s -ar), m., account, I.,
190,15; 212,29.
Reinn=hreinn, II., 275, 13.
Reis, see risa.
Reisa (t), v.a., to let rise, to raise,
to rear : þat er háttr goOs höfð-
488
GLOSSARY.
Reisa — cont.
ingja, at reisa kirkjur, I., 362, 9;
r. upp, to raise up from the dead,
IL, 124, j7 ; r. ráð móti, to con-
ceive an availing plan against,
to counteract, II., 174, 22 ; reisast
a, to rear up against, to raise the
standard of revolt, I., 394, 15. —
2. ' to set up^ to construct, to
compose, to frame: þat (bréf) er
svá reist með mýkt ok bænar-
orÖum, at hena páfinn muni
senda tvo legatos at prófa öll þau
mál, I., 412,5.
Reiting (ar),/"., provocation, affront,
11,144,27.
Reitr (-ar, -ir), m., the space be-
tween two rungs in a ladder, I.,
8, 16 ; space : vikja sæmdir sér um
reit, the successio?i to the crown
passed from one branch of the
family to the other, I., 26,22-
Keka (rek, rak-rákum, ræki, rek-
inn), v.a., to drive, to chase,
to expel: því var hann líkþrá
lostinn ok or kirkju rekinn, I.,
364, 18 ; konungr kallar yðr. Til
þess, segir einn af kumpánum,
at reka oss alia brutt af rikinu,
I., 438, 11 ; at rækðvm ok reknvm
OctOYÍano af pafvasæsti valði hvn
ser til herra. ok hirðis Alexanðr,
II., 275, 15; r. af höndum, to
repudiate, II., 277,26- — 2. with
gen., to wreak, to assert, I., 118, 13.
— Med., to go on a toilsome
journey, L, 408, 3.
Rekendur, the spelling indicates
probably that to the scribe the
gender ivas f. pi., although the
word is otherwise a m. pi., and I
Rekendur — cont.
generally spelt rekendr, e.g., her
með hafði hon sva marga rekendr
ok lása^ Post. Sög., 601,29, {Cod,
Skardensis), chains, II., 16, 21-
Rekja (rek, rak'ða - röktum, rekti,
rakinn), v.a., to unfold, to spread,
-L-> 14, 27-
Rekkja (-u), f., a bed, L, 316,9,
IL, 78,23-
Rekstr (-rar), m., toilsome journey-
ing, proceeding with labour and
trouble, wearying travel: rekstr
ok mæðu erkibyskupsmeÖ útlegð-
ar pínu harmar herra páfinn ok
hans cardinales, I., 290, 17 ; sem
ek veik aftr í veg skipaðist nú
annan veg við rekstrinn enn fyr,
þvi at nú létti dag £rá degí, I,,
100, 11 . — 2. proceedings, espe-
cially relating to law contests,
law dispute, litigation : þær
eignir sem nýliga hafa undan
lagzt . . . tekr hann meÖ sterkri
hendi an öllu prófi aftr undir
erkistolinn, því at hann segist
eingan rekstr eðr mæðu vilja bera
fyrir því fé ok frelsi er hann veit
efalaust kirkjunnar eign : " re-
spondit nullo modo se velle liti-
gare super his quœ ad dominium
suum pertincre fuisset 7iotis si-
mum," I., 118, 26 5 um fjárlán,
heilagr faðir, er eigi at tala, því at
rekstr ok útgerÖir konungsmanna
hafa sopat oil vor lausafe, I.,
386, 12 ; biðjum vér at þér víkit til
friðar ok frjálsit oss af rekstri,
I., 396, 27 ; SÚ er bæn konungs til
þeira (kardinála) at þeir bjóðist
til rekstrar ok mæÖu þar um . . .
GLOSSARY.
489
Rekstr — cont.
ok fái vald at dæma yfir Thomam
erkibjskup, I., 412, 13.
Renan (-ar), f., decrease, wane, I.,
'^^■i 28'
Renna (renn, rann-runnum, rynni,
runninn), v.n., to run, to go, to
proceed on foot : bryggja . . . er
féhirðar vöndust at renna, I.,
32, 8 ; þeir renua þegar í bygðina,
er næst var, I., 248, g ; enn er
hann nálgast kastalann, rennr út
margt folk á veginn moti honiim,
L, 436,9; ^y^oJ^ sárliga góðir
menn rennandi framm til kirkj-
unnar, I., 550, 5. — 2. to flow :
I., 12, jg, 542, 24- — Prepositional
uses : r. at, to flow together, to
converge^ to combine, I., 68, j^. —
r. fyrir : — a. io precede, to take
place previous to, I., 332, ^x- —
b. to go before, to portend, I.,
• 12, 13, 16, 17. — r. mot, to run
against, to race against, I., 26, 14.
— r. mdti : — a. to go to meet,
T., 90, 13. — b. to run counter, I.,
192, 4. — r. til hugar, to occur
to, II., 80,22- — r. til Bjnar, to
give a glance, to turn the eye,
to look about, II., 156, 2- — r.
undir, to come to the aid of,
* succurrere,' I., 36, jg. — r. upp,
to sprout, to shoot up, II., 58, 23-
— r. yfir, to fall on, to spread
on, to sink on, I., 14,12-
Rennari (-a), m., a runner, courier,
king's messenger, I., 262, jq*
Renta {-\\),f, rent, income, I., 38,3,
294,21-
Resignera, to resign, I., 82, ^g.
Retta (tt), v.a., to make straight,
fig., to right: einn klerkr bans
kom fyrir hann ok bað hann retta
nial sitt við einn konvngsmann,
II., 271,36; r. við, to be righted,
to recover, IL, 118, 3 ; réttast upp,
to stand straight, II., 138,21-
— 2. to stretch : seni fálkinn
snarar upp efter einum fugli, rétter
einn kvistr sik meinliga í mot
honum, II., 142,2-
Réttar-bót, /, law amendment, a
' novel; enactment, I., 146, „g,
152,27,324,7.
Rett-borinn, ad., legitimate, lawful,
L, 330,8.
Rétt-dæmi, n., justice, I., 8,17.
Rettendi, n. 7?/., = réttindi, I., 530,14.
— 2. privilege, II., 4, jq.
Réttindi, n.pL, right, justice, fair-
ness, lawfulness: I., 232,20, 182,
21,262,21,346,7,362,5.
Retting (-ar),/., righting, reforma-
tion^ II., 274, 28-
Rétt-kallaðr, ad., truly found, right-
ly judged, T., 220, 1.
Rett-kenndr, ad., recognised, I.,
250,1,.
Rétt-kjörinn, ad.,
elected, I., 350, 21-
Rett kristinn, ad.,
362,19, ^^'^i 22*
Rett-leitr, ad., ' straight-faced; of
regular features, I., 28, iq.
Rettliga, adv., rightly, I., 148,5,
306,22-
Rettligr, ad., fair, reasonable, equi-
table, 1.5 364, 2«.
Rí'3tt-læta, (tt), VM., to justify, II. ,
230, ,1.
canonically
catholic, I.,
490
GLOSSARY.
Réttlætis-vopn, n, pi., weapons of
righteousness, I., 70, iq.
Rettr, ad., ' right, ^ straight : feJlr
erkibyskup framm á gólfit meö
réttum líkama, I., 544, 9 ; gekk
liún svo í burt, at bæði var hún
rétt ok í öllum liðum albætt, IT.,
138, 23 ; af miðri understöðu þeira
fóta skal leggrinn rísa réttr ok
óhallr allan veg, II., 234,23- — 2.
Jig., straight, unbent, not giving
signs of succumbing to adversity,
I., 436, 5. — 2. unbiassed : sitr
heilagr Thomas rettr ok úhallr í
málaferlunum, I., 112, ^g. — 3.
upright, straightforward: kon-
ungr er æskumaðr ok áhlýðinn,
enn ráðgjafar ríkir ok eigi mjök
réttir, I., 44,21. —just, II., 2, 15.
— 4. due, according to law, I.,
108, 23« — 5. lawful, legitimate,
I., 266, 11. — 6. proper, fit, I.,
86, 19, 306, 9. — Neut. rett, as
adv., right, true, rightly, aright.
1., 46
J 12»
100,
11?
298
J 11-
2.
just, even, I., 66, 4, 170, 22? 52,
ig ; með réttu, rightly, rightfully,
truly, I., 4, 3, 106, 7.
Rettr (-ar), m., right, law, I.,
146,17, 152, 14 ; IL, 273,21.
Rettr (-ar, -ir; ace. pi. rettu), m.,
a dish, course, cover, I., 106, 27
250, 7, 13.
Rett-skilinn, ad., rightly understood,
I., 232, 14.
Rétt-skýrt, neut. ad., as adv., right-
ly interpreted, I., 268, 13.
Rétt-vísi, f., justice, I., 112, 17,
196, 13, 442, e.
Bétt*\áslega, adv., justly, II., 2, jg.
Rétt-víss, ad., in the right, I., 284,
18 ; just, I., 236, 7; IL, 2,14, 4, g.
Reykkja, = rekkja, II., 283,9-
Reyna (d), v.a., to try, to strain :
hann reiknast á meðal þeirra
manna, er GuÖs þolinmæði hafa
reynt í fremsta lagi, II., 180,28.
— 2. to come to certainty about,
to experience, to prove, I., 158, 13,
190,«, 300
'j8>
J 13>
358,
16*
Reyndr, ad., proven, I., 104, 5.
Ribbaldi (-a), m., a ^ ribald^ a law-
less person, I., 110, 2-
Ríð, = hríí5, I., 258,23-
Rií5a (-u), f, {jprop. * tremor^ cfr.
reiða, verb,) ague, ^ quartanœ,^
II., 72, 7.
Ríí5a (ríÖ, reið-riðum, riði, riðinn),
V.71., to ride, I., 32, 5, 200, 19. —
2. to swing, to roll ; r. at, to come
down upon unawares, I., 300, ig.
RiÖa, different word from the pre-
ceding, though identical in form,
v.a., to rub, to smear, II., 281,27-
Riddara-domr, m,., knighthood, I.,
156,17-
Riddaraligr, ad., knightly, I., 502,9-
Riddari, (-a, -ar), m.., a knight,
champion, soldier, I,, 6, 225 50, 4 ;
IL, 270,34-
Rið-skelfdr, ad., * tremor-shaken,^
smitten with ague, II., 226, 18-
Riðu-sjúkr, ad., suffering from
ague, II., 80,22-
RiÖu-sótt,y!, ague, II., 78, 20-
Rigna (d), impers., to rain, I., 230,27-
Rík-dómr, m., riches, wealth, I.,
20,16,122,21,474,12.
Riki (-s), ?i., reign : Vilhjálmr tók
ríki, því at Lann var elztr, I.,
4, 18 ; var Robert næstr ok tók
GLOSSARY
491
Ríki — cont.
ríki at öldrum, I., 6, 26> f^f^' 336, g*
— 2. * r2cA ' (d'^i bishop-rick), rule,
episcopal government, I., 132, 23.
— 3. kingdom, realm {in a geo-
graphical sense), I., 44, 5, 06, io>
198, 27 ; hut eilift riki, kingdom
of heaven, I., 336, 9. — 4. feo^,
feud: kouungrinn veitir honum
sérliga til aftektar ok áviunings
þat ríki, er nýir menn kalla ba-
riiniam, I., 56, g.
Ríkis-maðr, m., a mighty, poiverful
mail, a magnate, a lord, I., 1 18,
24, 212, 20*
Ríkis-stjórn, f., government of the
realm, ' government^ I., 48, 12?
122, 4 ; administration, I., 144, ^q.
Bikja (t), v.a., to reign, I., 28, 1,
252,25.
Rikr, ad,, mighty, powerfid, high,
great, I., 50, 27, 60, g. — 2. mas-
terful, overbearing, I., 44, 21. —
3. rich, wealthy, I., 48, ^5, 494, 5.
— 4. stern, severe, I., 110,i. — ^*
heavy, bitter : en þo braz enn
harmrinn yfvir hvgganina, ok
varð ríkri, II., 283,2- — Proverb:
sjón sögu ríkri, trustier sight thaii
'5ay,'IL, 284,5.
Ríkuligr, ad., opident, luxurious, I.,
200, 19.
Risa (riss, reis-risum, risi, risinn),
v.n., to rise ; r. upp, to rise, stand
2ip, L, 52, 6 ; fig. to regain footing,
to take a former stand, I., 166, j ;
to rise up from the dead, II.,
46, 13. — Mostly in prepositional
phrases and fig. sense : to take
origin from ; to rise,rear (^against),
Sfc. : riss þat mál af því lastúðga
Rísa — cont.
grunni, oj-iginates in the wicked
cause, 1.5 118,7; greinir r. af,
differences arise from, T., 162, ^2 ;
r. af grunni, to rise from the bot-
tom, to swell from the inmost core
{of the heart,) I., 352, 1 ; r. í móti,
to rise against, I., 126, q ; r. miðil,
to rise between, I., 10, jg.
Risanda, neut. gerund, in impers.
sense: ef ek segi konungs vilja
þvert Í móti risanda : if I say
that the luill of the king should
be risen against, I., 198, 2-
Rita (að), v.a., to icrite, I., 70,7,
412,9.
Ritning (-ar),/., scripture, I., 28, 15,
76, 17, 100, 26, 364, 13.
Rjóða (rýð, rauð-ruðum, ryði, roð-
inn), va., to redden, to make
blush, I., 200, 9.
RjóÖr, ad., red, blushing, fresh {in
the face), II., 44, 21.
Rjiifa (rýf, rauf-rufum, ryfi, rofinn),
v.a., to * rive/ to rend, to rescind,
to break, I., 202,^,, 29Q,^^, 362,5,
448,,, 518, 27; 11., 256,11.
Rjúka (rýk, rank- rukum, ryki, rok-
inn), V.71., to ^reek/ prop, to
steam, to smoke, to fly up in spray
before the gusts of a hurricane, but
in a slang sense, to 'fly ' ; seg-
ist hafa verit þyngaðr f}TÍr bans
skyld um allan þann dag, ok þat
fleira sem bann lætr rjúka, beside
other things which he lets fly {at
Thomas) : cfr. Engl., a tor rent of
abuse, I. 448, 17.
Roa (ræ, reri-rerum, reri, rdinn),
v.n., to row, to go out a-Jishing,
II., 162,21.
492
GLOSSARY.
KoSi (-a), 711., redness, II., 96, ^q-
Roðinn, p.p. of rjóða, reddened,
stained with blood, I., 548, 26 5
IL, 192,1..
Roðna (aS), v., inchoat.. to become
red, I., 552, ^ ; to blush, II., 136, 15.
Eofa (-U, -ur),/., a tail, L, 508, 4.
Rofinn, see rjiifa.
Rog (-s), n., slander, I., 64, 25,
176, 27^ -^02, 11, 512, 18 ; II-j 54, 1.
RokinD, see rjúka.
Roma (aÖ), v.a., to speak about, to
pass opinion on, I., 464, 28«
Roma-skattr, m., Peter s pence, T.,
380, 2.
Rómr (-s), m., expression of opinion:
svá segir Rikarör ok fær góðan
róm á sínu máli, I., 80, g; hver
mun rómr á falla, ef konungrinn
tekr öxi fyrir ástúð, hamar fj^'ir
heiðr, &c. L, 396,3; sættabréf
þetta heimkomit í landit fær
þungan róm af ranglátum, I.,
480, 24.
Rómverskr, ad., Roman, I., 24, 24,
42,1.
Róner, pl. of rómn, see róa.
Rósa (-u),/., a rose, I., 552, 3.
Ross, n., a horse, I., 248,7-
Rot (-ar, rætr),/., a root, I., 182, g,
430,14; IL, 146,22-
Rotinn, ad., * rotten,^ withered,
IL, 228, 24.
Ruðu, see rjóða.
Rufu, rufum, see rjúfa.
Rugla (aö), v.a., to shuffle, to let
slip by dishonest means : því
krefjum vér yíSr, ... at alia þá
klerka, sem þér rangliga ruglið
undan voru valdi í ýmissa staði
Rugla — cont.
. . . skipi þér aftr undir vorn
handlegg, L, 148, 21- — 2. to con-
found, L, 272,5.
Riiku, see rjúka.
Rum (-s), n., ' room^ place, seat
{metaph. from an oarsmanHs seat
on the rowing bench), I., 12, 1,
118,12, 250,21- — 2. space, L,
16,3. — Z. fig., abode, station,
stand, I., 158,12- — 4. place, i.e.
office, post, position, condition, L,
292, 22) 384, g. — Hggja í rúmi,
to have on the mind, II. , 82,21-
Rúmr, ad,, loose, easy, I., 236, ig ;
IL, 287, 37.
Rýð, ryði, see rjó^a.
Ryfi, see rjiifa.
Rjki, see rjúka.
Rjkkr (-jar, -ir), 7n., a wrench, pull,
sivoop : þá er hann sor sik undan
honum, hugðist hann at vinna í
einum rykk báða samt, berra páf-
ann ok berra Tbomam, I., 410,22«
Rýma (d), v.n., to make room, to go
away, to quit, to vacate, I., 8, ig,
10,17,60,1,92,19,212,11,442,20,
480, 17, 524,3. Impers. to re-
move, to dissolve, to ' lift,' IL,
50, 15-
Ryttr, 7;í., ^ vox,' a cry: ryttr var
beyrðr, grátr ok miki] ýbng : vox
. . audita est, ploratus et ulula-
tus multus, II-, 271,15.
Ræða (dd), v.a., to speak, to talk, to
discourse, II. , 278, ig.
Ræða (-U, -ur), /!, speech, talk, I.,
272, 26) 308, 2 ; a sermon, I.,
510,22-
RæÖi, ??-, stewardship, L, 320, 23.
GLOSSARY.
493
Eæfr (-s), w., roof, vault in a church,
n., 278, 34.
Rægja (ðj, v.a., to slander, I.,
142,16,176,21, 184,2,502,20.
RækÖr, p.p. of rækja to reject, re-
pudiate, II., 275, 15.
Ræki, see reka.
Ræki-brekka (rækibræka) /., better
ræsi-brekka :=. the modern hræsi-
brekka, stall of praise, whicJu f^o
doubt, represents the true primi-
tive form ; a stall lohere sellers
praise their ivares exposed for
sale, I., 24, 3.
Ræna ( d), v. a., to rob, to plunder,
L, 344,28, 364,8.
Ilæsibrekka,y., see ræki-brekka.
Rætast, V. med., to come true, I.,
416,,.
Ræzla = hræðsla, II., 271, 30.
Rödd (raddar, raddir), f., voice,
I., 88, YYi 102, 17, 238,12'
HöÖur = ræöur, pi. of ræða, II.,
285,23'
Rökkur, f pi. {Dan. rug, Swed.
rugg), rugs, lurappings, II., 54, 14.
Röksamligr, ad., conformable to
law, '^canonice intrans " : hann
lætr sér hugkvæint vera, hversu
forfeÖr í KanciahöfSu röksamligir
verit í sinni inngöngu, I., 84, g.
— 2. conformable to the laivs and
methods of exegesis : þat blezaða
hugskot sitr þá enn eftir í sama
stað, lesandi saman í sínu hjarta,
sem huiiangligan sætleik, þat, sem
áSr vartracttírað með röksamligiin\
skilning ok concorderan, I., 102,4.
— 3. bold, frank, zealous, au-
thoritative, L, 132,y, 184,(3, 460,15.
Röksemd (-ar-ir),^., reason, reason-
ing, argument, I., 104,-, 124,9,
182,15. — 2. authority, I., 40,4,
76,17,94,5, 142,7, 194,5,334,23.
Röksemdar-fullr, ad., zealous, de~
cided, authoritative, I., 110, 1.
Röktu, röktura, see rekja.
Röskliga, adv., briskly, energetic-
ally, I., 174, 16, 470, 3.
Röskligr, ad., dauntless, I., 542, 19.
Röskr, ad., brisk, active, stout,
energetic, I., 58, 1, 244, ig, 458, 13,
500,24; II., 168,25.
S.
Sá, see sjá.
Sá (sú, þat, gen. þess, {)eirar[{)eirrar,
II., 8.20], þess, dat. þeim, þeiri
því, acc. þann, þá, þat, Pl,
þeir, þær, þaii ; þeira, without ex-
ception; þeim; þá, þær, þau),jo;wi.
dem., this, that, I., 12,8, passim.
Sá (pret. sáði, p.p. sáð), v.a., to soiv,
I., 300, 20-
SáÖ (-s), n., seed, IL, 291,32.
Saddr, ad., satisfied, satiated, I.,
324,2.
Sáð-jörð, f, ' seed-earth* soil, II.,
^274,33.
Sáð-korn, n., seed-corn, seed, II.,
274,33.
Safna (að), v.a., to gather, to co??i'
bine, L, 140,7,. II., 178,2-
Safnaðr {-íít, -ir), m., congregation,
I., 20,12; meeting, I., 74, jg ;
company, II., 156, j,,; number,
IL, 168,20.
494
GLOSSARY.
Saga (sögu, sögur), /., 'saga,' a
narrative, history, tale, I., 8,4;
IL, 112,12.
Sagða, see segja.
Sagðr (sögð, sagt), p.p. of segja,
said, aforesaid, afore-mentioned,
L, 10,10, 146,5.
Sagnar, sagnir, see sögn.
Sakaðr, jyp., accused, incriminated, .
II., oO/is-
Saka-fdllr, ad,, loaded with guilt,
11., 274, 2.
Sakar, see sök.
Sakar-gi£t,y., charge, indictment, I.,
146,12.
Sak-bitinn, ad., * guilt-bitten,'^ guilty,
II., 52,21.
Sakir, see sök.
Saklauss, ad., innocent, guiltless,
L, 6,6, 270,9, 400,10; saklausir
sveinar ' Innocents,' II., 22,8. — 2.
* imjuunis,' exempt from : sé þeir
svá saklausir af pínunni, sem þeir
em frjálsir af sökinni, *' sint i?7i-
munes a poena sicut extiterunt a
causa,'' I., 540, ^q.
Sakleysi (-s), n., absence of cause:
var þat eigi fyrir sakleysi, at hann
mæddist nokkut, it was not that
there ivas not a cause ichy, ^-c. i.e.,
it was not without reason, not to
be wondered at, or : no wonder
that, ^r., I., 422, 3.
Sak-næmr, ad., involving guilt,
imputable, I., 350, 28«
Sakrista, m., sacristan, II., 72, g.
Sak-vernd, f, palliatives, but in the
sense of shuffling, quibbling,
prevari^atio?i, I., 444, 23 : II.,
28, 20«
Sal (-ar, -ir), /;, the soul, I., 8, 13,
54, 17.
Sala (sölu),/., sale, IL, 120,33.
Sála (-u),/, soul, II., 230,3.
Sálmr (-S, -ar), ?n., psalm, hymn, I.,
20, 29 ; II.j 58, 7.
Saltan (-a), m., Psalter, I., 20,29«
Sálu-bót, y., salvation, II., 220, 7.
Sálu-búð,y., a hospital, I., 108,26«
Sálugr, ad., cfr. Dan. s'ólle, ' silly,'
hapless, wretched, unfortunate,
doomed, fated, I., 190, 23, 488, 1 ;
II., 134,23, 136,2«
Sálu-hús, n., a hospital, I., 108,24«
Sálu-messa, yi, soul-mass, requiem,
I., 468, 25«
Sálu-tjón, n., soul's peril, perdition,
I., 386, 4.
Sama (d.), v.n., to beseem, tobehove,
to suit, I., 42, 7, 140, 2, 334, go?
342,13,404,13; IL, 220,25«
Saman, adv., together, I., 76,7,
102, 2«
Saman-brotinD, ad., folded i(p, I.,
14, 23«
Saman-kominD, ad., come together^
I., 552,21; II., 64,4, 150,13.
Saman-runninn, ad., run together,
coagulated, I., 550, 19.
Sam-band, n., alliance, I., 330, ig,
3oO, 22«
Sambands-mat5r, m., a confederate,
conspirator, I., 532 24«
Sara-binda, v. a., to knit together, to
join,l., 38,24; Med. to ally to-
gether, I., 216, ig.
Sam-bland, n., intermixture, I.,
394,1.
Sam-blanda, v,a., to mix, I., 534, 20«
Sam-blandinn, ad., mixed, I., 4, 3 ;
mixed up with, II., 152, 7.
GLOSSARY
495
Sam-bundinn, ad., implicated, ■ in-
volved in, II., 44, 6«
Samdi, see semja. '
Samdr, p.p., framed, settled, II.,
22, 3.
Sam-dráttr, m., a hoard of stolen
goods, pelf, IT., 140, ^4.
Sam-dægris, adv., on the same day,
L, 452,27; n., 210,9.
Sam-eiginn, ad., comm,on, I., 108,
16> 29) 138, II ; 11., 194, 24.
Sam-fastr, ad., continuous, II., 38, ^'
Sam-fljóta, v.n., to flow into, tojloiv
together with, I., 98, 21.
Sara-haldinn, ad., continuous, I.,
174, „.
Sam-liarma, v.n, with dat., to grieve
ivith one, I., 204, 7, 348, 30-
Sam-harman, /., grieving together
with, I., 206, 19.
Sam-hleypi, n., concourse, banding
together, raid, I., 486, 10»
Samhleypis-maðr, M.., one who joins
in a raid, II., 54, g.
Sam-hljóða, v.n., to concord, to ac-
cord, to agree with, II., 24, 14.
Saminn, ad., gathered^ placed
among : saminn til helgra doma
með sæmd j sialfri Roma, entered
among saints, SfC, II., 292, 29. —
2. settled, I., 150, ^.
Sam-kail, 7i., summons, I., 66, jg-
Sam-kunda, /., a gathering, I.,
100,6; ^ conference, II., 218, 21.
Sam-kvæmr, ad., conjoint ? II., 8, ^g.
Sam-lag, n., fellowship, commu-
nion, community : varast samlag
eí5r samneyti þrætu-manna, I.,
344, 21 ; óbættr þessi glæpr
fyrerbýör þér kristinna manna
samlag, IL, 128,24 ; ^^^^^ ^^""
Sam-lag — co)it.
yðr ok laí5i sem sína eiginsonu
af nálægri dýflizu til samlags
valdra manua ok eilífra fagnaða,
IL, 194, 3.
Sam-laga (aíS), v.a., to join, to add
to, to unite with: hann (páfinn)
samlagaði sína röksemd byskups-
ins valdi, I., 354, n. — Med., to
enter fellowship with, to join : of
mjök af leiðist þá hit rdmverska
vald sinni skyldu, ef vér skulum
synast . . . þeim samlagast, er
byskupinn forÖast, I., 328, 15. —
2. to join in : þvílíkum þakklæt-
isgerömn viÖ sjálfan Guð samlag-
ast sömiim páskum sú kona, er
Ermelin hét, II., 82, 23. — 3. to
have share in, to partake of: legg
eingum manni vigsluhönd an
forsjó, at eigi samlagist þú syndum
bans : " manus cito nemini impo-
sueris, ne communices peccatis
alieoiis,^* I., 110,19; hann hafói
skrifat til herra páfans, hversu
skrifta skyldi þess háttar mönnum,
er á nokkurn hátt hafði samlagazt
þeim háðuliga glæp, er varð í
drápi erkib., II., 42, ^.
Sam-lesinn, ad., collected, II., 228,;.
Sam-liÖs, gen. of sam-liÖ, as ad., in
the phrase: vera samliðs, to be
jointly aiding, I., 518,23«
Sam-likan, comparison, I., 18,22«
Sam-likjast, med., to resemble, I.,
540,3; II., 146, 19.
Sam-likr, ad., equal, II., 231, 22 ;
comparable to, II., 26, 7.
Sam-milska(5r, ad., blended together
with, 1., 108, 15.
496
GLOSSARY.
Sam-myndaðr, ad., * coi^formis^ I.,
96,1.
Sam-myndast, niecL, to confœ'm {(o):
virðist honuni heyriligt, at hann
sammyndist þeim í klæðna(5i, I.,
312, 24«
Samnast, med., to gather together,
to congregate, II., 271,9.
Samnaðr (ar -ir), m., ' capituhim,^
congregation^ chapter {of a cathe-
dral), I., 68, g.
Sam-netja (að), vm., to entangle :
bjóðum vér þér, undir hæstu banns
pínu, at þú samneter livárki kon-
unginn né aðra menu þínu for-
boöi, I., 358,25, cfr. II., 269, ^-ji
páfinn vill tjá fyrir lærðum
mönnum at þeir geyrai sin með
varygð, at samnetjast eigi þrætu-
mönnum, I., 130,i5.
Sam-net jaðr, p.p. of samnetja, en-
tangled, involved in, I., 418, 24.
Sam-neyta (tt), v. a., to communi-
cate with, to be in communion
with, I., 406, 19, 482, i^.
Sam-neyti, n., co?n?nunio)i,i., 344,2i,
Ö0Z, 22*
Sam-neytuðust, a slip for samnetj-
uðust, II., 06,3.
Sam-pínast, 7ned., to have sympathy
for, to take compassion on, I.,
188, 17, 388,29-
Sam-pining,/., sympathy, I., 110,io,
268, 13.
Sampiningar-Tatn, n., tears of com-
passion, I.. 164, 22-
Samp (söm, samt), ad., the same,
I., 66, 29j 102, 2-
Sam-ráðr, ad., of one mind ivith
another, II., 24, 5.
Sam-reiknaör, ad., added up, I.,
46, 16.
Sam-reiknast, med., to be counted
among, II., 184, 17.
Sam-ræÖay., conversation, I., 250,2o.
Sam-setja, v.a., to put together, to
compose, to frame : byskupinn
samsetr þat sama bref meÖ úein-
urð, I., 338, 19. — 2. to concoct, to
invent, to get up : enn þeir, er sam-
setja svá mikinn sálubáska, segja,
at þessir eru nokkurir konungs
vanar uppnefndir, I., 168, i- — 3.
to put together, to amalgamate,
to unite : þat hefir þann skilning,
at ser greint lögmál kirkjunnar
ok curiæ samsetist undir siðvenjur,
ok tapi svá kirkjan æfinliga sinni
frumtign, I., 406, 7.
Sam-settr, ad., composed of, made
up of, I., 236, 17.
Sam-sveit, f, congregation, com'
pany, II., 186, 7.
Sam-sverjast, med., with dat.y to
conspire with one, I., 334, 9.
Sam-sæti, company at table, ^ party ^
L, 106,21, 200, 20, 454,1; IL,
106,21.
Samsætis-bruni, m., fellow burning,
I'i ^5 20«
Samsætis-menn, m. pi., company
at table, I., 106, 13.
Samt, neut. of samr, used as an
adv., together : setja s., to put to-
gether, to compose in writing, I.,
2, 13 ; þar koma samt fjórtán lýÖ-
byskupar, I., 88,5; ver vildum
hafa komit undir yðarn dóm þessu
öllu samt, I., 384, 7 ; nú lystir
OSS at leiða samt ij. vini GuSs,
1., 080, 7.
GLOSSARY.
497
Sam-tal, n., discussion, conversa-
tio7i, conference, I., 74, ^7, 414,28,
492,10; n., 28, 11.
Sam- tern pran, f., mixture, composi-
tion, i.e., ointment, unguent, II.,
82, 14.
Sain-tengja, v.a., to conjoin, to make
consistent with, II., 52, 1, 176, gg.
Sam-tíða, adv., at one and the same
time, I., 258,2, ^^^jsj 436, 17 ;
II., 76, 24, 78, iQ.
Sam-velldi, n., communion : maa
þaa hverr sia ok skilja hvartt liann
er staddr ok skipaðr innan faSms
kristninni eða afsniðinu liennar
samvelldi, II., 275, 12.
Sani-vild, f., consent, assent, II.,
196, le.
Sam-viniia, v.a.^ to cooperate, I.,
360, 3.
Sam-vinnandi, 1 • ^ v
^ . . , \sce samviroandi.
bara-vinnandisk, j
Sam-YÍröandi, ger. of sam-virSa, to
he estimated equal to or equal
loilh : this should he the reading,
II., 4, 17 : Hver lieilngra manna
er samviroandi framar sjálfri GuÖs
pínn, loho among saints has suf-
fered passion more closely re-
sembling the passion of Christ
than Thomas Í So also the pas-
sage, II., 46,13; ^^ Þ^ reist upp,
samvinnandi pislarvottum, sem
va^r tri'ium, is evidently a cor-
ruption of the older passage,
preserved in A. M. 234; ef þv
hefvir sannliga vpprisit ok ert þu
samvirðandi pislarvattura gvÖs
sem ver trvvm, II., 277,7-
Sam-vitand, f., cognisance, conni-
vance, I., 516, 9; II., 12,7.
K 541.
Sara-vizka,y., conscience, mind, rea-
son, I., 78,10, 236,6; II-» 154,9.
— 2. consciousness : Samson
kvezt hann heita, góðrar samvizku,
on recovering his full conscious-
ness, he told people his name was
Samson, II., 76, 22'
Sam-þykki, w., consent, assent: ekki
brcf geingr út af garÖinum utan
með bans vikl ok .samþykki, I.,
48,4; GuSs íbrsjó ok vart sam-
þykki liefir kjörit yðr til erki-
byskups, I., 78, 1, cfr. 200, 3. —
2. agreement, concord, state of
being of one mind: varð því
uokkuru likt iim þeira saniþykki
meðan þeir lifðu báÖir, I., 10, 13 ;
fémál er í miUi ok greinir mest í
sundr yíSart samþykki, I., 224, 15;
oftliga viunr mcira til samþykkis
liuleikr ok hógbær livíld, enn
stríðleikr ok stórmæli, I., 340, 12.
Sam-þykkja (t), v.a., to bring into
harmony, into concord and good
understanding, to bring into one-
ness of mind : mikla stvnd leggr
konvngr á at samþyokia Tbomas
við sik, II., 263,8- — 2. to con-
sent to, to assent to, to agree to :
biðjuni vér at þér samþykkit vorn
vilja Í GuÖs nafni, I., 78, 5 ; þetta
saniþykkjaformeun kirkjunnar, at
fekript ok stúkur upp h'lkast, IL,
86,11. — v.n., to correspond to:
liugsit uni . . . bvárt gidlkerit í
Babylon samþykkir eigi lijörtnm
yíSnim, I., 404, 17 ; setjuni nú
Sunamiteni þessa fyrer sal bins
signaÖa Tbonie, at vær sjaum þvi
betr, hversu samþykkist snnnleikr
ok HgiirM, II., 230,27- — 2. to
I 1
498
GLOSSARY.
Sam-þykkja — cont.
accord ivith, to agree loith : nú
mim svá sýnast, með brá(5u tiUiti,
at þat samþykki varla kirkjunnar
lögiim, at kouungligt vald setti svá
mikinn þátt í kosning- þenna, I.,
68,4; iná þar nefua til þrjár
greÍDÍr . . . er allar þurftu frum-
tignar af herra páfiimim, ef þær
samþykkja lögunum, I., 124, j.
Sam-þj'kkr, ad.y consenting, I.,
362,3.
Sam-þykt, /i, agreement, concord,
one mind : ... at heilög kristni
mætti fagnat fá meÖ samþykt ok
viuáttu beggja sinua liöföingja,
I., 3SÖ, 21. — 2. consent, assent :
kita emi lærÖir menn at fá sam-
þykt ok játyrÖi kosningsins af
signuðum Thómase, I., 80, 125 ffi'-
18, 296, 29- — 3. concordance :
... at þeir báðir sanit greini
fagrliga eftir réttu formi ritning-
anna, hversii þat rennr í sam-
þykt, sem sýnist suudrligt, I.,
100, 26-
Sanuara, comp. adv., truer, I.,
148,13.
Sanna (að), v.a., to find to he true,
XL, 4,19; to declare to he true,
I., 214,15; to prove, to demon-
strate, II., 273, 27.
Sannendi and sannindi, n. pi., tridh,
truthful statement, I., 160, 20?
192,1-, 238,28, 380,15 5 II., 1 2,30,
100,19.
Sanu-heilagur, ad., truly holy, cata-
logued a saint, II., 292, 28«
Sann-kristinn, ad., truly christian,
i.e., uaschismatic, orthodox, ca-
tholic, I., 330, 8-
Sannleikr (-s), w., truth, I., 54, 15;
reality, I., 294, 7.
Sannliga, adv., truthfully, rera-
ciously, I., 312, 17; reliably, cer-
tainly, I., 264, 8 ; verily, I., 34, 7,
06, 22«
Sannligr, ad., true, just, fair, I.,
212
5 26-
Sami-orðr, ad., true-spohen, truth-
>Z,IL,60,5. -
Sann-profan, f, truthfid, reliable
proof, I., 52, 13.
Saimr (sönn, satt), ad., true, real,
I-,
18,27,
62,2, 234
' 5 '
sincere,
upiight, I., 150, 23 ; satt er þat,
iron., why, of course, no doubt I I.,
248,13- — 2. trusty, firm, strong,
II., 200, 1.
Sann-sögur,y. jp/., reproaches: cnn
er þeir fiiinast, fara í orÖ nokkur
ok sannsögur me(5 þeiai, '• inter
" viandum niutuo se invicem
" objurgantes" I., 470, 5.
Sannyndi = sannendi, I., 372, 27.
Sann-yrði, /'., truthfulness, I,,
398", 4.
Sár (-s), n., a sore, a ivound, I.,
232, 23, 384, 21«
Sárleikr, (-s), m.^ pain, passion,
IL, 18,18,98,6-
Sár-liga, adv., sorely, painfully,
hurtful ly, bitterly, I., 204, 14,
390, 21, 512,20? 5oO, 5.
vSárr, ad., wounded, hurt, bruised,
I., 108, 17. — 2. sore, tender,
apprehensive : samvizkan tjár
þeim þærljótar sakir, þótt enn sé
leyndar, er þeir óttast með sárum
hug, ef opinberar koma iiiidir erki-
byskups dóm, I., 176, 19. — 3.
bitter : þeir ero raeÖ sárum angri.
GLOSSARY.
499
Sárr — cont.
I., 228,3. — ^' pciii\ftfl : s. clauSi,
1.^236, 3 ; er hitt miklii sárara, at
þér hafnit þann, er yðr skapaði,
L, 334, 13.
Satt, neut. of sannr, I., 308, ^9,
cohere I now think satt is a
hctter reading : satt friðkaup
Iieilagrar knstai=^7v/£', real pur-
chase of peace for holy church.
Sáttr, ad., agreed, of one mind, I.,
170, ij; at peace again, recon-
ciled, I., 352, 26'
Sauða-geymsla, /'., shepherding, I.,
18, 22'
Sauða-hús, n., a sheep-pen, a fold,
1,306,10.
Sauðr (-ar, -ir), a sheep, I, 170, 15,
210,1,504,27.
Sauma (að), to sew, to stitch, I.,
554
'!•
Saung-laust, see sönglaust.
Sauug-raust, see söngraust.
SauiT (-s), m., filth, I., 24. ig..
Saurga (að), v. a., to defile.
I-,
170, 10; 11., 8, g. — 2. to violate,
*' deturbare,'' II., 14, 10.
Saurigr, contr. saurgi', ad., unclean,
IL, 282, 25.
Sé, see sjá, and vera.
Sefa (að), v. a., to calm down, to
soothe, to soften, I., 144, ig.
Segja (segi, sagía-sögðum, segða,
sagðr), v.a., to say : vel ma segja,
at bans blezut ásjóna hefir dreift
favit, I., 2, 1- , passim. — 2. to
declare : sögðu justisar valdsins,
at {)at heföi æfinliga komings eign
verit, I., 6, 11, passim. — 3. to
narrate, to tell : finst henni urn
Segja — cont.
drauminii ok segir eiiium TÍtrum
mauni, I., 12,19.
Segl (-s), n., a sail: kegja s., to
take in, to furl sail, II., 208,22-
Seiun, ad., occurs only in the neuter
seint, as adv., slowly, I., 134, 1-.
— 2. late,l.,2n,^_Q.
Seinna, comp. adv., later, I., 432, 29.
Sekja (t), v.a., occurs only in the
pass, sense, to incur guilt, to he
made guilty, I., 500, 99.
Sekk, see sökkva.
Sekr, ace. sing, f em. sekja, I., 78, 10,
ad., guilty, Í., 294,,, 362,, ; II.,
•18, 15-
Sekt (-ar, -ir), /'., guilt, I., 386, 10 ;
IL, 154,,.
Sektar-fullr, ad., guilty, II., 170,3.
Selja (d), v.a., to sell, II., 122, n,
289, 6 ; s. framm, to give up,
to deliver, I., 532, ^.
Sem, rel. part., as, I., 2, 9 ; which,
I., 2, 20 ; temp, part., ichen as,
when, I., 16, ig ; in all these senses
very frequent.
Semja (sem, samdi-somdum, semdi,
saminn), v.a., (prop, to join), to
put together : af einum valdsmanni
var alt bans ráðuneyti svá sett ok
samit Í varygÖ ok völdum rétt-
^-ísi, I., 112,16. — 2. to concert, to
settle : yðvaiTÍ tign, beilagr faðir,
sýndist betr at semja ok frið gera
milium Englands konungs ok
Thomam erkibyskups, II., 20, j,-
— 3. to compose, to shape, to
frame, to form, I., 2, 10, 94, 1,,
296,1, 412, 3. — r./i., to agree:
geri bann þat sama vit mik, ok
11 'Á
500
GLOSSAllY.
Semja — coat.
munum við vel semja, I., 428,24«
— Kcfl. constr. s. sik to shape
one's course of life^ to conduct
oiie\ self, I., 342, 23.
Senda (d), v.a., to send, I., lOOj 24'
Sendi-bci, «., a message, J., 482, jg.
Sendi-boði, (-a, -ar), m.,a messenger,
a legate, I., 66, 125 326, 93.
Sendi-maðr, m., (episcopal) mes-
senger, I., 270, 19, 360, ^g, 370,23.
Sending (-ar), f., a gift, a presents
I., 54,2, 106,22, n., 234,5; god-
send, I., 258, 4.
Senniliga, adv., truthfully, II.,
284,17.
Sentencia, m I I., 144, ^.
Sér, dat. of the refl. pron., sik,
sibi, I., 24,23.
Ser-hverr, pron. indef, each, I.,
80,8,382,1,430,9.
Sér-hvorr, 7;/"o«. mdef., each of two,
II., 60,1,.
Serkr (-s), m., a sarh, a shirt, I.,
12, 17.
Sérliga, adv., specially, I., 56, g,
298,19.
Sérligr, ad., separate, apart : skipar
erkibyskupinii ridduruin ok u(Sni
hoífólki sérligt borð, I., 106, ig.
Sess, m,, a seat, I., 106, j,.
Set, n., a see {episcopal chair),
sendiboðar taka kórsbræðr ok
munka með kouuDgs orðsendino;
ok brefum, hvern kosning bann vill
gerast lata yfir setið i Kaiicia,
I., 72,5 ; bonum er eigi okimnigt,
hvat setið í Kancia befir til vegs
ok vanda, I., 80, 15.
Seta (-u), y., sitting, i.e., the esta-
blishment of a royal court : Yend-
Seta — co?it.
ir konungr í Normandí ok eflir
þar stóra setu, I., 472, go-
Setja (tt), r.a., causal, to sitja, to
let sit, to set. — I. ivith ace. only,
to set, to seat, to place : fyrir
pislar vætti var liaiin krúuaðr
ok settr í bit bimueska sæti, I.,
14,17.' — ^^' ^^^^"^ ^^^^' <'f i^^^
j^erson and ace. of the thing, to
set before, to offer, to give : bann
er postuli Englismauua ok setti
þeim lífsbrauð af muDui Aiigus-
tini, I., 40, 11 ; þótt margir
(rettir) ok lystiligir væri bonum
settir, tok bann af fám, I., 106,28«
— 2. to ' set,' to enforce : setti lög-
liga profan þeim, er vigjast vildu,
I., 110,20- — ^led., to sit down, to
take a seat : Tbomas erkibyskup
sezt ni(5r með sínum klerkum, I.,
212,10- — 2. to settle, to alight :
baukrinn snarar langt ifrá bonum
eftir bráÖinni framm yfir á nokk-
ura ok sezt þar, I., 32, 4. — s.
sik moti, to set one^s self against,
I., 130,15. — 2« ^^ P^^ together,
to compose, to frame : þat er
einn setti framar ok fullkomliga,
let annarr um líða, , . . virbist
eigi nauÖsynlegt at setja sem
með nýrri letrgerð þat, er áðr var
fært, I., 2, 7, 9. — Phrases : s.
borÖ, to ^ set' a table, I., 98, jg.
•- — s. log, to enact laws, to legis-
late, I., 152,13- — ^- ^'^^i ^^
arrange, make plans, to bring
matters about, I., 446, 4. — s.
skilning af, to put a matter in
such and such a way, II., 198, g.
— s. skrift, to shrive, to prescribe
GLOSSARY.
501
Setja — cont.
penance, I., 182, 22« — s. (sætta-)
fund to call a (peace-) meeting,
I., 4G0, 3. — s. þing, to open a
council, a parliament, I., 184, jg.
— s. (stein) Í fingrgull ; ilutti
hann þenna karbunkulum lieim
Í Franz ok let setja í skærnsta
fingrgull, to ' set ' a stone in a
ring, I., 476. 24,- — Prepositional
uses : s. gjald a, to impose taxes,
to levy imposts, I., 6, g, 138,4. —
s. á erindi, to rise to deliver a
speech, to hold forth, I., 164, 12«
— s. Í sitt compon, to insert, I.,
52, 21. — s. Í sæti, to shoiu to a
seat, to bid be seated, to install,
I., 14, 17. — s. Í varÖhald, to put in
prison, I., 8, 2* — s. samt, to com-
pose, I., 2, 13,
Setning (-ar, -ar), /'., tradition, I.,
102,23, II., 273,21. — 2. enact-
ment, rule, canon, ordinance, I.,
124,
11? 1*^2,26, 194, J2J 334, j^g.
3. enshrinement, translation {of a
saint^s relics^, II., 212, ^g.
Sétti, ord. num., sixth, I., 296, ^g.
Settr, p.p., set forth, stated, I.,
68, 19.
Sex, card, num., six, I., 240, 15.
Sex-tigir, card. numb, m, pi., II.,
216,27.
8íð, adv., comp. síðar, I., 2, g, ^np.
síðast, II., ^Q, 20> IfíÍG^ CLt « Idte
hour : síð ok aria, late and early,
I., 388,13; koma þar síð um
kveldit, I., 522, g ; skryðizt nv
kennimenn gvðs rettlæti, þo at
nockvrv se til siiS, although it be
at a somewhat late hour, II.,
275,5.
Siða (-U, -ur), side, ' latus,^ af sinni
siðu, e.x' latere suo, II., 18,13.
Siða-bækr, f, pi., ' rule-books,^
statutes, monastic rules, I., 368,29.
Síðan, adv., f'om the time that,
after, Germ, seit, I., 6, 9 ; si-
thence, then, afterwards, I., 52, 7,
80, 9 ; since, inasmuch, lohereas,
I., 92, 18, 410, 11.
SiÖari, síðastr, comp. and sup. ad.,
later, latter ; latest, last, I., 8, 1,
248, 19 ; at and í síðustu (dat.
sing. fem. stund being under-
stood), at last, I., 236,2; II->
26,21.
Siðarla = síðarliga, adv., late, I.,
480, 18.
Sið-bót, /'., correction of morals,
héðan ferr hann til siðbótar fólk-
inu, tjándi með sætum árninning-
nm, at þeir forðist misverka, I.,
510, 7. — 2. morals, moral con-
duct, manner of life, hváritveggi
maðr . . . bjartr í allri siðböt,
I., 54,27.
Si8-£erði, n., habits of life, conduct,
I., 94, 10, 106, g. — 2. morals :
leiðandi aftr í faðm heihiirrar
kristni þá, sem áðr höföu sínum
mannkostum ok siÖferði liörmu-
liga tapat, II., 58, ig.
Sið-góðr, ad., of high morals, of
noble conduct of life, '' sanctitate
prœclarus^^ I., 88, ig.
Siðir, ace. pi., f, of si6 =la(e hour,
ivhich does not occur as a noun
in Thom. Saga ; in the phrase :
um siðir, at last, I,, 6, ig, 20, ^,
232,11,456,17.
Sið-kveld, n., advanced evening, á
s., late at night, I., 50, jg.
502
GLOSSARY.
SíÖla, adv., late, I., 228, j.
SiÖ-látr, ad., religious, of pure
manner of life : prófast ... at
sá er s. er grunsamr maðr liugÖi
sér líkan ; " factum est ut reli-
giosus inveniretur qui luxuriosus
putahatur,^'' I., 54, ^g.
Si^-lejsa,y., abuse, corruj^t practice
or customs : af þeim innlei?iíliim,
siðleysum ok óvönum leidcli svá
langar liniar, at margs maims lif
dro til útlegðar, I., 6, j; ; setr
haiin (páíinii) á endaligaii or-
skurð, at þessir níii vanar eru
bölvaðar siÖlejsur, ok afdæmdar
nllri GuÖs kristni, I., 304, g, cfr.
11., 42,11.
Sið-læti (-s), 71., religion, religious
constancy : látið liann eigi fa
fjrirkomit ykkru siðlæti : " ne,
quœso, fr aires, religionem ves-
tram circumveniat,^' 1., 498, 31.
Siðlætis-maðr, m., a man of strict
religious principles, I., 10,7.
Siðr (ar, -ir), m., custom, ' consue-
tudo : ' nil vill komingrinn sættast,
at höldiiiim sið ok soma, er höfðu
í'yiTÍ konungar, I., 396, 13. — 2.
hahit, rule {monastic) : liyggi þér,
lierra ábóti, at eingi megi Giiöi
líka an yðrum sið ? I., 76, g. — 3.
manner of life, morals : ungr
maðr ok tiginnar ættar, fagr í sið-
um ok góÖrar f rægðar, I., 134, 35.
— 4. rite, creed, religion : savk
heilagleiks bans hef vir verit vand-
læti almeuniligrar trvar ok vornn
{i.e. vors) kristiligs siðar, II.,
276,2.
Síðr, ad., long (of clothes), I., 94, jg,
232, 5 ; slouching, II., 144, ^q.
Síðr conip., sizt sup., adv., less,
/e«5^, I., 14,11, 282,15.
Sið-samr, ad., religious : sé, minn
lierra, sagði bann, bversu siðsam-
an mann ok beilagan þér vilit
setja yfir þat báleita sæti, *' Quam
" religiosum,''^ inquit, '* virum,
" quam sanctum in tam sancta
" sede . . . constitui desideras^^
1,64,1,.
SiS-semd, ý., religion : segja þat ú-
beyriligt ok aflaga, at sá skipist
forstjori yfir regliimönnum ok
siðsemdar, sem áÖr svimr í lausung
veraldarinnar, I., 72, 15. — 2. re-
ligious observance : etr bann kjöt,
ok allir aðrir í höUinui, segir því
fylgja nieiri siðsemd til dýrðar
bátíðimii, " sejucundum exhibuit,
ita etiam quod ea die, quæ scxta
feria erat, et JVataJis Domini dies,
carnibus, sicut alii, vesceretur ;
eas tali die sumere, quam absti-
nere religiosius judicans,'^ I.,
512,11.
Siðsemdar-bús, n., religious house :
eigi var ek kjörinn til þess valds
ok virðingar af kirkjunni e^r
klerkum, eigi af klaustri eÖr siö-
semdarhúsi : " non sicut prædeccs-
sores met de ecclcsia, sed de aula
assumptus sum ad ojficium hoc.
JVon de claustro, nee de loco rcli-
gionis aliquo,^' I., 172, n.
Sið-vendi, /'., zealous observance oj
good morals, I., 74, n,.
Sið-venja, /*., custom, habit, custo-
mary observance, II., 126, 23' —
2. ^ customs^ ^ consuetudines,^ royal
customs, ^jus consuetudinis,' I.,
70,4,218,17,344,18.
GLOSSARY.
5o:
Sí-fella, f., continuity^ í s., ivitkout
intermission, II., 283, .,5.
Si-felldr, acL, constant, continuoits, \
II., 78, 21. !
Siga (sig, seig-siguni, bigi, siginn), |
v.n., to sink, to fall, I., 14,8-
SiglÍDga-maðr, ?n., sailor, I., 486,2-
Signaðr, ad., blessed, I., 18, 13.
Signum, n., a sign, I., 292, 15.
Sigr (-S, rar), m., victory, \., oO, 7,
^ 154, 13, 552, 15.
Sigra (að), v. a., to conqner, to over-
come, I., 108,3.
Sigr-samligr, ad., auguring of vic-
tory, victorious. II., 190, 17.
Sigr-vegari (-a), w., conqueror, vic-
tor, I., 548, 4.
Sik, jyron. reji.^ himself, I., 8, ^,
passim.
Silfr (-s), n., silver, L, 84,27, 248, 7.
Sili (-a, -ar), m., a halter, þeir . . .
leigja eitt ross . . . þat er beisl-
■ laust ok söðuUaust, nema liefir
sila iiokkurn iiiu liálsinii, " tantum
" prolectam circa coUum habe-
bat;' I., 248, g.
Silki-klæði, n. pL, silken raiment,
L,84,i5; II., 60,9.
Silki-koddi, m., a silk-covered pil-
low, II., 60, 12-
Silki-þráÖr, m., a thread of silk, II.,
130, 1;.
Sil-vetni, n., Fr ovine. Swed. sela-
vatten, still'Water,pond,\., 32, ^i*
Simonia, I., 112, jo-
Sin (-ar, -ai),y., a sinew, a nerve,
II., 283, 12*
Sina, apparently a mis-writ for sýna
ace. fern, from sýnn, clearly to
be seen, open^ clear, evident, II.,
o4, 22-
Sinn (siu, sitt), pron. poss., his, her,
hers, I., 4,5, passim. — 2. each,
either, II., 60, jj.
Sinn, n., moment of time, hour, time,
I., 32, 13 ; iini s., once, I., 38, 15,
134,13; ^^ iiinni, this time, T.,
478,19.
Sinua (t), v.a., to heed, I., 270, 93.
Sinnis, probably a corrupt reading
for sins máls, I., 72, lo-
Sinodus, I., 6, 13.
Sin. and sins gen. of sik, I., 36, 1,
54, 19, passim.
Sira, indccl., sir, a title applied to
all orders of the clergy from the
bishop to the deacon, both ex-
clusive, I., 76, ig.
Sitja (sit, sat-satum, sa^.ti, setinn),
v.n., to sit, I., 98, jg. — s. lija, to sit
by, to take no part in, I., 22, k-.
— s. eftir, to remain sitting, I.,
102, 2« — s. yfir malum, to hear
causes, I., 108,9- ~ -- ^^ reside,
I., 60, 17. — v.a. in s. dom, to
sit in judgment, I., 216,8.
Sitjan (-ar), f, siding with, taking
party, II., 54,8.
Sjá {pres. ser (ek), I., 448, ^ ; y>/.
sjam, I., 22, 10, 386, 4 ; i^rct. sa,
pi. 2. sáð, I., 442,4; iinperat. se,
I., 246, 21, 448,17 5 sjá, L, 364, 13),
v.a., to see, I., 12, 5, passim. —
Reciproc. to see each other, to
meet, I., 354, g, 472, ig. — Med.
sjást fyrir, to look before one*s
self, to be cautious, I., 46Í, 22- — s.
uni, to look round, 11., 68, 27. — 1>.
to give heed to one's self, to amend
one's loays, to refonn, I., 352, 21-
Sja, pron. de/n., /his, II., 68,13,
276,,.
504
GLOSSARY.
Sjáldr (-s), 71., the pupil of the eye,
11,14,20.
Sjálf-dauðr, ad., dead a natural
death, not hilled, IL, 120, 21«
Sjálfr, í/a^. sjólfiim, I., 198,3, 358, 17,
pron. dem., self, I., 6, 22 ; vei^i/,
I., 14,8.
Sjálf-ráði, ad., on one''s own aecord,
free to act, at liberty to do what
one pleases, I., 502, 24.
Sjám, see sjá.
Sjánda (= sjáanda), gerund of sjá,
to be seen, I., 42, 13.
Sjándi, pres. j^art. of sjá, loohing,
having an eye to: ei til guUpenn-
ings sjándi, I., 112,9.
Sjappel, n., a chaplet, I., 232, 2«
Sjó-bygð,y*., the sea-coast, the coun-
try-sides along the sea, I., 520, n.
Sjóðr (-S, -ir), m„ a pnrse, I., 508, 3.
,Sjófar-kyn, n., nature of the sea,
n.,96,5.
Sjo-fercS, jf., 5ca voyage, I., 244, jg ;
IL, 208, 4.
Sjoii (-ar, -ir), y., that whichis seen,
a sight, reality, IL, 284, 4. — 2.
countenance, face, presence, II.,
^88, 7.
Sjor {gen. sjofar, I., 230, gj, -'^^,
the sea, I., 56, 27.
Sjúk-dómr, m., sickness, illness,
disease, I., 62, ^ ; II., 68, 19.
Sjúknaðr (-ar), m., id., II. , 100,3.
Sjiikr, ad., sick, I., 108, ^7, 202, g;
diseased, L, 360, 5 ; unhealthy,
unwholesome, L, 356, jq-
Sjö, c«rf/. num.^ seven, I., 20,4.
Sjöndi, 07y/. num., seventh, I.,
29G,23.
Sjotján, card, num., seventeen, IL,
134,27.
SkaÖi (-a), m., ' scathe^ hurt, harm,
injury, L, 146, j^, 168, 1, 198, 14,
268,15. — 2. /o.^,IL, 142,8.
Skað-vænligr, ad., dangerous, peril-
ous, hurtful, I., 160,9, 194,4.
Skaka (skek, skók-skókum, skæki,
skekinn), v. a., to shake, L, 156, 22,
170,14; IL, 162,22; s. höfut, to
wag one's head, IL, 18,2- — 2.
to brandish, to flourish {a
weapon) : segja þann ótta yíir-
korainn, sem konimgsins sverS sé
skekit yfir bans liáls, I., 164, jg;
þeim má réttliga virÖast at dauSa
sverö sé skekin yfir haus höfði,
L, 5ö2, 19.
Skakkr (-s, -ar), m., obliqueness :
ein draka gekk a£ hægra veg hans
ennis í skakk nm þvert andlitið,
aslant, right across the face, I.,
554,4.
Skal, see skulu.
Skalf, see skjálfa.
Skamm, = skömm, IL, 14, 13.
Skammast, Med.y to be ashamed, L,
200,8; IL, 18,14.
Skammar, see skömm.
Skamnir (skömm, skamt), ad.^ short,
n.,40,10.
Skamm-sýni,y"., fig., short-sighted-
ness, L, 232, 28'
Skanir, ad., = skammr, L, 32, n,
494,9.
Skap (-s), 71., mind, temper, I.,
280,7; n., 92,2.
Skapa (að), v.a., * to shape,^ to create,
I., 248, 2t, 334, ig.
Skapan (-ar), f., creation, IL,
146,6.
Skapari (-a), m.. Creator, L, 54, i^.
GLOSSARY.
505
Skap-lyndi, /i., temper^ I., 44, i2>
54,25-
Skap-raun, /., provocation, I., 400,
16,408,20.
Skari, (-a, -ar), in., a croicd, flock,
IL, 148, 16.
Skarts-maðr, m. a man of slioxc and
magnificence, I., 54, gi-
Skaum (skavm) = skömm, II.,
Skaut, see skjota.
Skaiit (-s), /<., a ^ sheet, ^ a shirt of
a garment, into tvhich tots to be
drawn ivere thrown, hence : þótt
ek vissa at lif mitt lægi í skauti,
skal ek framm halda, even if I
knew that the lot of my life ivas to
be drawn :=fhat my very life was
at stake ; cfr. " nee si mcmbra-
tim discerpendits sim ab incepto
itinere de sister em, ''' I., 486, ^g.
Skauti (-a), m,., a corner, a piece of
■ cloth, a clout of linen, II., 80, ^.
Skein, see skina.
Skek, skekinn, &c., see skaka.
Skelf, see skjálfa.
Skelmis-drep, (?) w., (?) pestilence'?
IL, 274,2,.
Skemd (-ar, -ir), maiming, I., 142, g.
— 2. shame, I., 148, 7.
Skemmd,y., shame, II., 90,2-
Skemdr, ad., maimed, II., 130, 15.
— 2. ill-treated, sha?ned, I.,
184,5.
Skemta (t), v.a., to amuse ; s. ser,
to amuse one^s self, II., 108,24«
Skemti\n (-ar, -ir), f, amusement^
I., 30, 2i, 106,19.
Skemtiliga, adv., merrily, gaily, I.,
310,20.
Skenkja, spelt akeinkja (t), v.a., to
pour out for, to serve drink, I.,
416,7.
Skepiia (-11^ -ur), f, matter, clement,
substance, I., 5 10, 25.
Skepnu-börn, n. pl.,s. Guðs, children
created in the image of God, I.,
520, ,,.
Skerpa (-u, -ur), /, throe, anguish
of travail: með fyrstu skerpu,
sem henni kemr, fæÖir hún svein-
barn, II., 156,6.
Skeyti (-s), n., a shaft, a dart, I.,
ZO-\, 9g.
Skifta (t), v.a., to distribute, to
divide : gjaldit aftr heilagri kirkj-
u eignir sinar . . . er Jjer hafit
skift ok skutlat higat ok þagat,
I., 346, 6 ; skiftir siðan verðinu
miðil erkibjskups ok sin, II.,
122, 11. — 2. to ' shift,' to change :
nokkurir segja, at þat muni kon-
unginum vænast til hiigbotar, ef
skift er formauni i Kancia, I.,
308, 11 ; s. skapi, to change one^s
mind, I., 378, 4 ; II., 92, g. — 3.
to interchange : maðr ok fugl
skiftu svo, at maðrinn hafði fugls
auga, enn fnglinn þá aftr manns
auga, II., 146, j. — 4. to ex-
change: skiftandi leirbúÖ heims-
ins Í I1ÖII himiurikis, I., 544, 19.
Prep, uses : s. um, to change
from one {place or state) to
another, I., 118, 12 ; II., 286, 7. —
s. við, to deal with, I., 178, 13.
Skifti, n. j)l., dealings, transactions,
!•> Ö, 30, 284, ig.
Skikkja (-11, '\\v),f, a cope (monk's
cope), I., 81, 16 ; a cloak, II.
136,1.
506
GLOSSARY.
Skikkju-skaut, 7i., the sheet, the
skirt of a cloak, II., 136, 13.
Skila (a^), v.a,, to deliver {the thing
delivered in dat.), II., lo4, ^g.
Skildi, see skjöldr.
Skildi, skildu, &c., see skilja.
Skilja (d, supine skilt), v.a., prop, to
divide, to part asunder ; in which
sense it occurs only in the med. :
ok skiljast þeir með fullri blíÖu,
they part in full friendship, I.,
122,6. — 2. s. við, to separate from,
to divorce, II., 182, i^^. — Med,
skiljast viÖ, to desert : várt er, at
skiljast eigi við yðr, I., 150, ^^. —
b. to separate : svá skiljast þeir
þar \ið, eiin ríða til Lundúna, I,,
72,22» — 3. Impcrs., to divide,
to separate : skilr þeira konunga
rett sva mikit sern gull ok blý, I.,
210,7. — b. to part: skilr sva
með þeim, thus they parted, I.,
32,3. — c. s. a, to diverge, to
differ, to disagree, ef lærða menn
skilr á eðr leikmeim, I., 294, 20-
— 4. to digest, to understand,
I., 20,4, 24,16, 30,1, 58, 11, pas-
sim.
Skil-raáli, m., condition^ I., 406, 4.
Skilna^ðr (-ar) m., parting, I., 64, q,
212,2; o^i'^ ^' ^^^' ^^ separate
from, to desert, I., 158, 2-
Skiluing (-ar),y., understanding , I.,
14,6, 28,13. — ^* discretion, I.,
280, 16« — 3. i?itcrpretation, sense,
IL, 52, 11.
vSkilningar-aldr, m., age of discre-
tion, I., 348, 12 ; 11*, 126, 14.
Skilningr (-s), m., understanding,
I., 132, 4. — 2. interpretation, I.,
102,4. — 3. sense, reason: bans
Skilningr — co7it.
crendi ferr þvílíkt, sem þat bail
öngvan skilning, as if no one under-
stood what it could mean, I., 504,
13. — 4. under standing, agreement,
negotiation, I., 66, ig. — 5. gist,
point {of an argument), II.,
228, 6-
Skil-orð, n., saving clause, condi-
tion, reservation, I., 180, 6, 326, 1-,
374, le-
Skil-riki, n., account : veita s., to
render account, I., 212,17. — 2.
evidence, substantial proof, I.,
^^"^j 18* — ^' good faith, honesty,
L, 460, 23.
Skil-rikr, ad., upright, honest, I.,
•^^5 18* — ^' ciuthentic, genuine, I.,
120,1« — ^' authorised, trust-
worthy, reliable, I., 186, 4. — 5.
convincing , satisfactory as to evi-
dence, II., 78, 1«
Skilrikuliga, adv., truthfully, re-
liably, II., 108,27.
Skin (-s), n., shine, lustre, II.,
275,1.
Skina (skin, skein, skinit), v.n., to
shine, to beam, in Jig. sense only,
II., 2, 5, 50, 15, 114, 13, 275, 33.
Skinandi, ad., shining, bright, I.,
24,9; II., 84,20-
Skinn (-s), w., a skin : bvit s., ermine,
L, 94,20.
n., a ship, L, 256, 5,
Skip (-s),
484,16.^
Skipa (að), v.a., to ordain, to order,
to command : skipar herra páfinn
með valdi Roma kirkju, hversu
rikit skal sundi" grcinast undir
formanna stjorn í byskups sýslur,
I., 40, 13 ; konungi likar sva vel
GLOSSARY.
507
Skipa — conf.
ok bezt sem hanu skipar, I.,
48,^8. — 2. to appoint: þjónar
þessum ok Jjvær einn bróðir skip-
aðr af erkibyskupi, I., 98, 32 ; bun
lærÖi hann at virða Iiina sælii
mey, Mariam, ok skipa liana lifs
ok vega hiun visasta leiðtoga, I.,
18, 1^; segja þat ok einkar mjuk
iiliejriligt ok aflaga, at sá skipist
forstjori yfir regliimonnum ok
siSsemdar, er áðr svinir í leik
veraldariuuar, I,, 72, ^5 ; Heinrekr
konuugr bað oss, at ver skipaðim
yðr byskupsstól í Limdiinum, I.,
376, 26* — ^- ^^ settle, to dis-
pose of: (hann) býðr Thómase
canceler at skipa kirk j mini ok
gozi hennar þá forsjó af krún-
iinnur hálfu, I., 64, ^ ; hann geingr
oftliga til {)ess skola, er heilagrar
kirkjii log lesast, at því réttara
megi hann ölkim lutum skipa, sem
hann skilur framar, hversu efni
\ikr málunum, I., 38, 3 ; einn
hofgaið fann ek þann, er gull
fyrirsmár, ok skipar þó malum
har(51a vel, I., 116,15; ^^^''^^ Þ^^'
greinir, er oss koma til áskilnaðar,
gefum ver i Guðs vald, at þér
skipit eftir yðvarri vild, I., 4-26,30.
— 4. to bequeath : hann lagði
ástúð til kirkjunnar í Kanncia
skipandi þangat með ánefndu
æskiligt ofh' í guile ok sílfri, II.,
182, 12« — Med., to be disposed,
to be placed, to be translated :
skipast hann sannheilagr maðr
upp i niillim annarra heilagra
doma i því uývigða musteri, I.,
136, 12- — 2. to change : sem ek
Skipa — cont.
veik aftr i veg, skipaðist nú aunau
veg við rekstrinn, II., 100, jq ; s.
sik, to take up a position, I.,
292, 93. — Prepos. uses : s. aftr, to
return, to restore, I., 8, 19, 204,^. —
s. mot : mot þessarri grein hvarri-
tveggjo skipar signaðr Thomas
sina góðgirnd : arraijs, arranges,
sets, I., 36, ij,. — s. við, to deal
with, I., 98, 13, 146, 17. — s. or, to
order out, to expel, I., 152,;. —
s. til sætis, to show to a seat, to
bid be seated, I., 292, u.
Skipan (-ar, -ir., f., dispositio?i,
arrangement, I., 8, ^^ ; II., 220, 25.
— 2. order {of a procession), I.,
536, 10« — 3. change, I., 12, 3,
434,95. 1. order, command, I.,
^ 280,"i6.
Skipari (-a), m., a sailor, I., 486, 21.
Skipveri {pi, skipvei-jar), m., one oj
a crew, pi. a crew, II., 208, 22-
Skira (ð,), v.a., to baptize, I.,
14,19; II., 156,12.
Skir-dagr, ?n.. Maundy Thursday,
IL, 84,1,.
Skirleikr, m., brightness, II., 288,6-
Skir-lifi, /«., chastity, I., 52,23«
Skir-lifr, ad., chaste, pure of life,
I., 50, 3.
Skirn (-ar),/., baptism, I., 458,21-
Skirr, ad., * sheer,' bright, I., 2, 19,
210, 9. — 2. serene (sky), I., 134, 91.
— 3. pure, II., 275, ig.
Skjaldar, see skjöldr.
Skjiílfa (skelf, skalf-skulfum, skylfi,
skolfiun), v.n., to (rcinhl(\ to
quake, li., 20, 4.
Skjálfti (-a), ///., shivers, tremor, II.,
78,21.
508
GLOSSARY.
Skjóta (skýt, skaut-skutum, skyti,
Bkotmn), i\a., to ^ shoot,' I., 6,22*
Fiff. skjóta iindan, to shove off,
to get surreptitiously out of the
loay, I., 142, 7 ; s. á erindi, to
hurst into talking, I., 432,4,; s. í
brjóst, to inspire, to inspirit, II.,
274, IS.
Skjóti (-a, -ar), m., a horse, a riding
nag, I., 492, 21» 508, 3.
Skjotr, ad., swift, Jieet, II., 40, 10,
280, ig. — 2. sudden, IL, 291, 21.
Skjott, neut. of skjotr, as adv.,
soon, coinp. skjotara, I., 78, 21,
290, 12 ; super!, skjotast, in short,
IL, 276,19.
Skjöldr (skjaldar, skildi, pi. skildir),
m., a shield, I., 50, q; ^g., pro-
tection, defence, I., 154, ^3, 184,4.
Skoða (aí), v. a., to look after, to look
into, to ifiquire, to examine, to con-
sider, I., 110,25; ^^"> 110,18,
124, 19, 228, 5.
Skogar-iief, n., the skirt of a wood,
IL, 118,15.
Skogr (-ar), m., a icood, a forest,
I., 508,6; n., 16,23-
Skok, skoku, skokiim, see skaka.
Skóla-bók, f, a school-hook, I.,
28,27.
Skola-klerkr, in., a scholar, IL,
280,5.
Skolfit, see skjálfa.
Skóli (-a, -ar), a school, I., 18, j-.
Skorin-orðr, ad., out-spoken, free-
spoken, frank, I., 28,11«
Skorpuaði', p.p. of skorpna, shrivel-
led, 11., 2^,^-,.
Skorta (t), v.a., to he * short ' of to
lack,l., 162,16,216,19; IL,212,
2Q ; s. við, to he lacking, II. , 2^^ 19.
i Sko-sveinn, in., a page, I., 100, 24«
! Skot-spouii, m., a hutt, a target to
he shot at, a mark, I., 366, ig ;
IL, 18,1.
tSkotinn, see skjota.
Skrapa (að), r.a., to ^ scrape,^ L,
114,2-
Skraut (-s), n., pomp, state, I.,
68, 16.
Skraut-menni, a man of state, jwmj),
magnificence, 1 , 54,23»
Skreið, see Skríða.
Skrejta (tt), v.a,, to make fair, to
hedeck, to palliate, L, 300, 5,
Skreyttr, p.p. of skreyta, ornate,
decorous, 1., 164, 15, 278, 21-
Skríða (skríð, skreiÖ-skriðum, skriði,
skriðiim), v.7i., to creep, to crouch,
IL, 130,5.
Skrið-ljós, n., ' lanterna^ a lantern,
I., 54, 7 ; IL, 46, 20-
Skriðr (-s), m.,pace of a vessel sail-
ing, ' way ' ; taka skrið, to he
under way, IL, 208, 7.
Skrifa (aÖ), v.a., to write, L, 30, 3,
passim.
Skrift (-ar-ii-,) /., arecord, L, 178,28.
— 2. penitence : þegja skulu allar
kirkjiirok eingiu þjóiinstafremjast
utau skirD, ok skrift dauð-stöddum
mönnum, ^\onnii ecclesiœ cessante
officio prœter haptisma j^arvulo-
rum et pœnitentias morientium,''
I., 458, 21- — 3. shriving, shrift,
penance, L, 182,22; H-j 36,2.
Skrifta (að), v.a., to shrive, to im-
pose penance, L, 142,2, 324,3.
Med. to confess, IL, 128, ^2..
Skrifta-boS, n. pi., canonical shrift,
1,140,10,11., 58, 10.
Skrin, /<., a shrine, IL, 212, 5.
GLOSSARY.
509
Skrín-gjörð, /., shrine making.^ II.,
210, 24.
Skrín-setning, f.^ cnshriucment, II.,
196,3.
vSkript (-ar),/., a cri/pt^ II., 86,4,
196,18.
Skniði (-a), m.^ clerical robes of
office, I., 24, 19. — 2. cliurch crna-
ments, II., 204,22-
SkrýÖa (dd), v.a., to robe, I., 234, 29.
— 2. to enshi;oif (I, þessu næst skrýða
þeir hunn til graftar, I., 558,3;
siðaii var þvegit likit skrytt ok
nazett, II., 271,22-
Skrýddr, ad., robed, I., 208, q,
482, 18.
Skrýðing (-ar),/, robint/, I., 102, iq.
— 2. enshrouding : ok er þeir
afklæí^a likit til þvattar ok skryð-
ingar þaa finnz þat er fair vissu
fyrr,IL, 271,17.
Skrök-semd (-ar, -h'),f., dissimula-
tion, Jiypocrisy, II., 12, ig.
Skuggi (-a, -ar), m., a shadoiv, I.,
176,12, 196,12,236,27.
Skugg-sjó, /., a mirror, ^ spectdifmj*
in the Jig. sense of high tf/pe,
pattern for imitation, I., 2, 21,
324,13.
Skukka (-U, -uv), f, a fold, plait,
crease, " siniis^'' I,, 232, 9.
Skukkottr, ad., foldy, ^^ sinuostis,''
L, 232,4.
Skiild (-ar, -ir)/, « debt, I., 220, ig.
Skukl-bundinn, skuU-biindinn, II.,
269,24» f^id., in duty bound, I.,
404,10.
Skulfu, &c., see skjálfa.
Skulu (pres. skal, impeif. skyklu,
skyldi, subj. pres., skuli, iinpcrf.
skyldu and skyldi), a dcfcclice
Skulu — cont,
auxiliary verb for forming the in-
finitive tenses ; shall, should, the
notion of destiny, duty, necessity,
determination or settled purpose
being implied ; very frequent.
Skuuda (acS), v.n., to hasten, I.,
206,18,250,3,490,15.
Skundi (-a), m., haste, I., 174, g.
Skill' (-ar, -ir), /"., a shoiver, I.,
510,19,
Skur-goð, n., a carven image, an
idol, I., 386, 3.
Skut-breiðr, ad., broad of beam, cf
boiv, I., 314,24.
Skutla (að), v.a., to dissipate : *' dis-
fribuere," I,, 6, 10, 346, g. — Med.
to be dissipated, made away with,
II., 132,24- — ^. ^^ ^^ shaken, to
be confounded, I., 132,4. — c. to
split (into factions), I., 90,03.
Skutlau (-ar), f, dissipation, I.,
118, Q. — ' 2. subterfuge, I.,
144,20.
Skutu, skutiim, see skjota.
Skyggja (ð), v.a., to obscure, 11.,
Skygn, ad., seeing, having the
sight of one's eyes, II., 106,5,
146,7; ^. ^"o"> seeing eyes, I.,
'8<Q, 17. — 2. fig. clear-sighted,
discerning, I., 284, 5 ; II., 236, 14.
Skygnast, v. med., to look about, to
spy; s. iim, to pry about, I., 54, n.
Skyla (d), v.a., to so-een, to shelter,
II., 168,20.
Skykl (-ar, -ir), f, sake, in the
phrase : fyrir (einhvcr.'i) skykl,
for one's sake, I., 266, 05, ^ 18, jg.
Skyliki (u, ur), /!, duty. I., 140,5,
278, 20, 33 !,._,,;.
510
GLOSSARY.
Sky Ida (að), vm., to charge loith,
to ordcr^ to command^ I., 332, g.
Med. to he in duty bound, to he
obliged, L, 338,5, 368,27,404,8,
510,3; to oice, to be beholden to,
I., 524,16.
Skvld-bundinn, ad., in duty bound,
i., 322, 2i. —2. beholden to, 1.,
334,1, 52'4, 03.
Skyldi, see skulii.
Skvldr, ad., mlated to, I., 348, 5. —
2. due, " debitus;' I., 380,21- — 3.
duty-bound, I., 524, 17.
Skylfi, see skjálfa.
Skyn (-s), /'., discernment, judg-
ment, reason, I., 332,28 '•> H'?
20, 01. — 2. account, reason ren-
r/W,L, 190,1^, 212,1^, 526,16.
Skynja (að), v.a,, to consider, to
revolve in one's ?ni?id, I., 52, 4;
I., 248, 23 ; to inquire into, to
examine, II., 146, 4.
Skvn-lauss, ad., destitute of reason,
brute, I., 516, p
Skyn-leysi, n., senseless behaviour,
1,216,19.
Skyn-samligr, ad., reasoning, en-
dowed with the faculty cf reason-
ing : s. skilningr, II., 230, 15. —
2. reasonable, fair, equitable, I.,
168,10.
Skynsamr, ad., rational, I., 516, ^
Skynsemd (-ar, -n), f, perceptio?i,
observation, I., 108, 1. — 2. rea-
sonableness, rational i:>rinciple,
reason, I., 60,7; in. pi., reason-
ing, sensible argument, I., 278, 3.
— 3. sense, common sense : sumir
töluðu skynsemd, I., 76, i^ — 4.
rationale, just account, I., 190,25.
Skynsemi, f, reason, I., 196,2- — "
2. reason, cause, I., 62, 7.
Skyra (ð), v.a., to explain, I., 50,3.
Skyring, (skyriugina, II., 46, 13,) /:,
explanation, I., 16, 12, 302, 17.
Skýrliga, adv., in a manner clear
and conscious, IL, 110,23.
Skýrr, ad., distinct : ean er þessa
manns orð lieyrast svá skýr ok
fagnaÖarfull, II., 112,5. — ^. clear,
2rell-spohe?i, ' disertus ' .- skoriii-
orðr ok skyr i frambvrði, II.,
288, 17. — 3. express, detailed :
þótt þat standi eigi með greindum
atburðum eðr skýrri frásögn, I.,
56, 25 ; <"/'■- I-j 36, 23- — 4. trust-
worthy, upright, honesty reliable,
liafði jafnan vent með skýrum
möuniim, II., 76, 23.
Skýt, see skjóta.
Skyti, see skjóta.
Skæðr, ad., * scathing,^ savage, I.,
542,1,.
Skærleikr, m., briqhtness, purity,
II., 284, 28.
Skæriigr, ad., clear- sounding, I.,
238, 12-
Skærr, ad., ' sheer, ^ glittering (penn-
ingr, gull), I., 98,25, 476,24- —
2. bright, shining (Ijos), II.,
44, 12 ; fig.', bright, beaming , fair :
fölDaði eigi því heldr sii skæra
andlitsins fegrð, I., 554, 12. — 3.
sincere, upright, honest : heyrðum
vér ok hversu skæra játuÍDg þú
gerðir af þíuum kosning, L,
,310,16.
Skömm, skavm, (skammar, skamm-
\v), f., shame, II., 22,23, 272,23-
Slá (slæ, sló- slogum, slægi, sleginn),
v.a., to ' slay ' ; to smite, I., 5öQ, g.
GLOSSARY.
511
Slá — cont.
— 2. to kick : kornhestr koii-
un^sins slær fætinum til mannsins,
II., 168, 27- — 3. to Jiing : snyr
hann aftr ok slær upp kirkjunni,
Jiings open the church door, I.,
536, 24- — 4. to knock : konungs
oguir slogu brutt a£ þeim, ' knocked
out of them,' allan styrk, I.,
182, 3. — 5. to slap, to snub : ferr
þó eftir hit hærra, þá er páfinn
sla^r hann, I., 200, jo- — 6. to break,
to burst ; in the phrases : slá sér
lausum, to break out, to burst loose,
i.e., to behave in an uncontrolled
and swaggering man7ier,l.,2\6,
21 ; and slá sér inn, to break,
to burst into, to seize hold of, to
occupy/, I., 202,5. — Med., slást
Í föruneyti, to throio one's self in
among, to join company luith,
travellers, I., 264, 12« — Impers.,
to burst: slo þrota í holdit, II.,
96,9.
Slagr, (-S, -ir), m., a knock, IL, 96, g ;
a kick, II., 126, 19. — 2. fig., a tack :
ma vitr ma^r eftir leita, hvi kon-
iingr þessi haféi annan slag frá
herra páfanum ok annan til,
steered one tack towards, the
other away from, the pope-, i.e.,
'played fast and loose ivith him,
L, 410,17.
Sleginn, see sla.
Slétt-mælgi, /., smooth, specious
loquacity, II., 236, 12«
Slétt-mæli, «., smooth language ^ I.,
394, 1.
Sléttr, ad., even, plain, flat, I., 550,
25. — 2. smooth : [mr sem totriun
sýndist sléttari ok minur blásinn,
Sléttr — cont.
þutu upp smábólur, II., 98, 3. —
3. fig., smooth, soft : eigi er brjost-
it bjart, þótt orÖiu fari slétt, I.,
448,7.^
Sliðrar,y. /?/., a sheath, a scabbard,
IL, 16, 1.
Slikr, ad., such, I., öQ, 2«
Slita (slit, sleit- slitum, sliti, sHtinn),
v.a., to tear, to break, I., 238, ^g.
Sljofa (aÖ), v.a., to blunt, II., 26, jg.
— 2. to dumbfound, to confuse,
L,276,2,.
SIÓ, see slá.
Slogu, slogum, see slá.
Slokna, v.n., to be extinguished, to
expire, to die, II., 112, 17.
Slyppa (-U, -ur), f,, a surplice, I.,
«4,16.
Slyppr, ad., scot-free, ' immunis,'
IL,268,2.
Slæ, see slá.
Slægð (-ar, -ir), f, idles, astute-
^ 71^5^, L, 200, 8, 236,22; n.,28,20.
Slægi, see slá.
Slægligr, ad., loily, I., 236, 21-
Slökkva (t), v.a., to extinguish, II.,
14, 20«
Smá (ð), v.a., to make little of, to
throw contempt upon, I., 360, 4.
Smá-barn, n., little child, II., 162,13.
Smá-bóla, f, small blain, in pi. a
rash, II., 98, 4.
Sma-brotinn, ad., minute, I., 370, lo-
Smáðr, 7^.p. o/'smá, dishonoured, I.,
144
j7-
Sma-dropi, w/., small drop, II.,
92,12.
Smá-leitr, ad., slight to look at, I.,
262,
'i IG*
512
GLOSSARY.
comp. smæri, II., 146, 27 ;
Smán (-ar, -ir),/., a slight, dishonour,
I., 450, 12 ; il., 42, 12.
Smá-piltr, m., a little hoi/, II.,
134, 20«
Smár,
ad., small, I., 550, 20^
Smá-rakki, m., a lap - dog, II.,
118,18.
Smá-smugliga, adv., ininutely, in
detail, L, 174,8; IL, 228, 5. —
2. in close conformity, strictly,
11., 236, 10.
Smá-smygli, n., exactness, puncti-
liousness, II., 236. 23.
Smá-stigr, m., a by-path, afoot-path,
I., 242, ,.
Smá-sveÍQu, m., a little boy, I.,
18, 22 ; in])l., the young, I., 436, 12'
Smá-vægr, ad., of small weight,
light, slight, II., 140, g.
Smá-þing, n., a trifle, I., 22,23.
SmíÖa (aÖ), v.a., prop., to forge ; to
create, to rear, to set up, to build,
L, 344, 6, 508, 6 ; H., 232, n- -
2. to frame, to concoct, I., 450, ^3.
Smíði, n., a smith's work, II., 234, 21.
Smjiiga (smyg - smaug, smiigum,
smygi, smoginn), v.a., to creep
through, to penetrate : florinn
smaug aldri lians samvizku, I.,
112,1^.
Smurðr, ad., anointed, I., 498, 17.
Smurning (-ar), /., ointment, un-
guent, II., 82, 13. — 2. anoint-
ment, unction, I., 338,5, 342,25»
— 3. embalmment, I., 558,7.
Smyrja (smyr, smuriia, smyrði,
smurír), v.a., to smear, to rid), to
lubricate, {in a somewhat slang
use =^) to bribe, I., 116, 7. — 2.
Smyrja — cont,
to anoint, I., 18,2o> "^^0, jo- — 3.
to embalm, I., 104,26, 558, 4.
Smyg, smygr, see smjúga.
Smyrsli, n., ointment, unguent, II.,
Jo, 22'
Snfira (aÖ), v.n., to shoot, to turn
quickly, to fly with exceeding
swiftness : haukriim snarar langt
Í frá honum eftir bráðinni, I.,
32,3; cfr. II., 142, 1 ; the read-
ing liDara, and footnote ^, I., 32,
to be cancelled; skipit snaraði
framm, swept along, II., 208, 21.
— Med. snarast, to turn : s. í
gegn, to turn against I., 268, 19.
— s. milium, to turn up between,
to cause a dispute, I., 290, 93. —
s. moti = s. Í gegn, I., 34, ^^,
150,25« — ^' undir eiun skjöld, to
huddle together, take shelter
under, I., 154, ^2.
Snara (snöru, snörur, snaror, II.,
252, 25)5 y*., « snare, * laqueus,'
I., 238, 16, 276, iQ ; a halter, a
hangman's rope, II., 110, 1.
Snarleiki, m., swiftness : s. vindarins,
the force of the wind, II., 208,26.
Snarpleiki, m., roughness, I., 234, 23.
Snarpr, (snörp, snarpt), ad., rough,
" hir.sufus;' I., 94, 17, 556, ^i- — 2.
keen, acute : s. í greiii ok skilu-
ing, ' rationis vigebat acumine^
I., 28, 12. — 3. harsh, bitter, se-
vere ; erkibyskup la^tr Iirynja
snarpt eyrendi á bcrar brýnn
Hilario byskupi, I., 156, 1. — 4.
forcible, effective, trenchant :
konunglig dgn kanu at vega nogu
snarpt, I., 384, 26« — 5. fresh,
brisk: byrrinn var snarpr, II.,
GLOSSARY.
513
Siuirpr — cont.
208,20« — 6. severe, acute: fær
hann í þann sama punkt svo
snarpan sjiikdom, at hann sezt
aftr, ok er livergi færr, II., 178, i^.
SnaiT (snör, snart), ad., swift, II.,
140, 24- — 2. smart, sharp : sá
maír fékk snart svipuhögg af
Thómasi, II., 178,12- — "^- fid'
nncompromising, ^per emptor y :
þeir flytja svá snart erindi sem
hér stendr, I., 161^ q.
Snemma, adv., early, II., 271, 22«
Sueri, snerist, snerum, see snúa.
Snerpa (t), v.a., to point, to add
force to, to impress pointedly, I.,
134,1,.
Snerta (snert, snart-snurtura, snyrti,
snortinn), v.a., to touch, to con-
cern^ 1., 192, 1^.
Snia-hvitr = snjohvitr, II., 28 5, 3g.
Sníða (sníð, sneið-sniðum, sniði,
• sniðinn), v.a., to cut, to slice, to
chip, I., 374, -, 544, ^^ ; s. sundr,
to rend, to cut asunder, II., 80,23.
Snið-hvasst, adv., trenchantly, bit-
terly, I., 120, 8.
Sniðinn, see af-sniðinn.
Snild, snilld (-ar\ /., elegance, I.,
392, 17 ; scholarship, II., 276, 27«
Snildar-maðr, m., a man of scho-
larly attainments, II,, 44, 15.
Snjallr (snjöll, snjallt), ad., elegant,
smart, I., 278, 9.
Snjó-hvítr, ad., white as snciv, I.,
24,9; II., 202,4.
Snúa(sný, sneri-snerum, sueri, snii-
inn), v.a., to turn, with ace. : eigi
kora fyrr aftr straumriun at snúa
hjólit, enn, 1., 34, j. — 2. with
dat., fig. to turn : sneri hann
K511.
Suiia— ro/i/.
sinum glæp upp á herra konung-
iun, I., 276,12« — 2. to convert:
sniiandi liennar (kirkjunnar) tign
ok frelsi upp í liáð ok herfiligan
þrældóm, I., 148, ^. — 3. to change :
snyr erkibyskup ræðu sinni, I.,
510, 21« — with prepp. s. aftr, to
turn back, I., 506, 21. — ?. brott,
to turn away, I., 250, 5. — s. til
herbergis, to turn in, I., 230, 93. —
Med. snúast, to turn : s. í brutt,
to turn away, I., 64, 7 ; s. í hag,
to turn about in one's favour, I.,
200.25. — 2.^0 change: snerist
konungrinn ... til fremri iðranar,
II., 180, 15, blý snýst í silfr, II.,
222, ,e.
Snúðigr, ad., in the phrase : fara
snúðigt, to proceed with a disor-
derly, liotous demeanour, ' gras-
saii,^ I., 522, 21«
Sný, see sniia.
Snæðingr (-s), m., a ?neal, repast,
IL, 158,22-
Snör, see snarr.
Snöru, snörur, see snara.
Sofa (sef, svaf-sváfum, svæfi, sofinn),
v.n., to sleep, I., 98, 27 ; II., 277,2q.
Sofandi, ad., sleeping, asleep, II.,
232,19.
Sofna (að), v.n., to have a sleep, I.,
108, 7, 242, 7 ; to fall asleep, I.,
390, 17, 554, iQ.
Sofuaðr, p.p., fallen asleep, II.,
232. 26.
Sokn (-ar), y., concourse of people,
IL, 90,9, 224,26-— 2. parish,
see kirkju-sokn, II., 280, i,v
Sókuar-fólk, n., parishioners, 1.,
494,1.
K K
5i4
GLOSSARY
Sóknar-menn, w., jt?/., id.^l., 180, ^3.
Sól (-ai'),f., the sun, II., 44, j^.
Sólar-liiti, 7?i., the heat of the sun,
II., 222, le.
8(51-staða,y*., solstice, II., 110,13.
Soma (d), v.n., to beseem, L, 264,20«
Sómi (-a), m,, honour, I., 34, ^y. — 2.
preferment, I., 88,3. — 3. preroga-
tive, I., 146,25.
Sonr (sonar, sjni, synir), wi., son,
!•> **? 17> ^^' 11*
Sópa (að), ?*.«., occurs only in med.
phrase, sopast um, to siveep zip,
to rake together, II., 140, 7.
Sór, see sverja.
Soi'g (-ar, -ii'),/., sorroiv, I., 006, 4.
Sorgar-efni, n., cause of sorroiv, I.,
404,23.
Sorgligr, ad,, sorrowful, II., 50, 4.
Sott (-ar, -ir), f., illness, disease,
II., 80,99. — 2. epidemic, II., 108,4.
3. travail of childbirth, 1., 14,;.
Sottar-far, ??., nature of disease, I.,
202,8; II., 152,24.
Sotti, sottu, &c., see sækja.
8pá (ð), v.a., to {prophesy^, to
pre-figure, II., 286, 15.
Spacera, v.n., spatiari, I., 486, 2-
Spá-dómr, m., prophecy, I., 438, 13 ;
II., 224, 11 {gift of prophecy, II.,
224,14.
Spádóms-orð, n., pL, icords of pro-
phecy,11., 22^, 2S'
Spakliga, adv., sagely, wisely, I.,
12, 19; II., 152,23.
Spalinr, ?n., psalm, II., 247, 35.
Spá-maðr, m,, a prophet, I., 234, 9 ;
II., 228, 9.
Spá-orð, n., prophecy, II., 271, 14.
Spara (ð), v.a., to spare, to reserve :
sparit heldr GuÖi nokkut, enn
Spara — cont.
ætlit yðr allan dóm, I., 394, 4;. —
2. to spare, to forbear jiutting into
use : hvárki líf né líkam sparir
hann til at efla ríkit, I., 58, q ;
kardinalis sparir hvárki klerkdóm
né klókskap, I., 298, 25. — s. sik.
to spare one's self to forbear
doing, to recoil from : þeir mega
rettligar heita fjandans verkrekar,
eun vísfðir klerkar, er til ein^rar
skemdar spara sik, I., 148,7*,
Reinaldr Bjarnar son, er sik til
öngrar ílsku sparir, I.,^514, 14.
Spá'SHg{\,f, prophecy, II., 212,2;.
Spegill (-s), jn., a mirror, I., 2, 22'
Speki,/., wisdom, II., 2,5.
Spekingr (-s, -ar), m., a man of
much wisdom, I., 148, 275 436,42'
Spekt (-ar),y., wisdoin, I., 106,8-
Spilla (t), v.a., to spoil, to disturb :
s. kirkju friði, II., 292, g. — 2.
to corrupt, II., oQ, 45. — s. fyrir
einhverjum,íope?'re;-í C7ie^s mind,
I., 498,23.
Spilling (-ar), /'., derangement, II.,
/c>, 21«
Spinka (að), v.n., to sprawl, II.,
116,6.
Spor (-s), n., a foot-print, 1., 540,25;
a step, I., 540, jg ; II., 84, 4.
Sporgöngu-maör, m., imitator, fol-
lower, I., 196, 2^.
Spranga (aÖ), v.a., to * icorh,^ to do
fancy needlework, I., 22, 24.
Spratt, see spretta.
Spretta (sprett, spratt-si^ruttum,
sprytti^ sprottinn), v.n., to spirt,
to spring up {of a well), I., 556,8.
— 2. to turn up, to come to pass,
I., 438, 23.
GLOSSARY.
515
Spriaga '(spring, sprakk-sprungum,
sprjngijSprunginn), v.n.^to spring,
to start ; springr iipp fyrir þeini
þat dýr, er bustígull lieitir, I.,
230, 14. — 2, Jig.., to spring up, to
hurst out, to originate : nýliga
heíir upp sprungit mikit missætti
milium kirkjunnar ok konungs í
England], L, 274,28«
Spruttu, &c., see spretta.
Spurðu, &c., see spyrja.
Spurning (-ar), /*., iiiterrogation,
question, matter to he answered :
hann setr honum spurningar grein,
hvi hann lysti, einn primas, at
leiÖa svá mikinn óróa inn í GuÖs
kristni fyrir svá lítiÖ efni, I.,
300, 9. — 2. questio9i, matter to
he solved, *' qiiæstio : " hann
greiddi jafnan vitrliga vandar
spurningar, I., 28, la-
Spyrja (spyr, spurða - spur^um,
spyrÖi, spur^r), v.a., prop, to
track, to trace, hence : — 1. to ask,
to inquire, I., 24, 5, 248, ^, 266, 9.
— 2. to learn through inquiry, to
hear, to have intelligence of, I.,
238, 27« — Med., to he rumoured,
I., 350, 14.
Staða (stöí5u), standing, continuance
in one and the same júace : blý
snýst í silfr, ef fyrndin verÖr svo
mikil stöðunnar, sem náttúran
beiÖlst, II., 222, 17. — 2. « [stand,
a pedestal: hrapar eitt gullker
af sinni stöðu, IL, 140, 9. — 3.
a place ivhere anything stands
planted, founded, Sfc, position,
I., 182,9.
Staðar-fólk, n., towns-jyeople, I.,
52, 10? 86, 21«
Staddr, ad., placed, present, I.,
308, g, 372, 3Q. — 2. circumstanced:
gleymir hann sjolfum ser ok
hversu nauðuliga hann er staddr,
I., 360, jjr. — ^. fixed, settled, de-
termined : segir þó, með stöddum
orðum, at svá sem áskilnaör þeira
varð á almenniligu þingi, svá skal
ok þeira sættargerð með sama
hætti, I., 160, 17 ; GiUibert . . .
segir þat undir biðstund erki-
byskups, at hugsa með stöddu ráði,
hversu honum hæfir at vægja
framar enn fyrr,I., 198,25 ; þessum
býðr erkibyskupinn með stöddu,
" injungens eis " hvárt konungrina
viU halda orð sin, I., 466, g.
Stað-fastr, ad., steadfast, constant,
!•> 38, 24.
StaÖ-festa, v.a., to fix : s. þat upp i
sjálfs sins minni, sem fyrr heyrÖi
hann a£ meistara munni, I., 28,23-
— 2. to settle : á þeim fundi er
þat staÖfest, ... at sendibo'ðar
. . , skulu gjörast til kuriam, II.,
186, 2« — 3. to make up one^s mind,
to resolve, I., 228, 14, 21, 310, ^g.
StaÖ-festa, f, firmness, constancy,
I., m,i8.
Stað-festi, f, steadfastness, con-
stancy, I., 4, 1 ; II., 4, g. — 2. fixed,
invariahle hahit, I., 98, 30.
Sta^inn,p.j9. o/'standa,e;i the phrase :
s. at, taken flagrante delicto, I.,
152,5.
Stað-leysi, n., lack of resistance,
weakness, I., 200, 21»
Staðr (-ar, -ir, dat, pi. stöíJum), m.,
in a general sense, place, spot, I.,
552, 18 ; Í þíinn staí), instead there-
of I., 0, 4 ; Í staðinn, instead, L,
K K 2
.510
GLOSSARY.
Staðr — CO lit.
46, 19 ; Í stað, instantly, I., 24, g.
— 2. a place, a town, I., 10, ^,
44, Y — 3« ^^ cathedral establish'
mcnt, a see, I., 90, ^, 548, 2o. — 4.
steadiness ,Jirtnness, poicer of re-
sistance, I., 156. 22«
Stafa (uð), v.a., to dictate: s. eið,
to fornmlate an oath, I., 330, jg.
Staf-lauss, ' stoffless,^ icithout a
stich, II., 84, 2, 282, p
Stafr (-S, -ir), ;;?., a stich, a staff , I.,
216, 21 ; 11,282,8.
Stal, see stela.
Stálu, &c., see stela.
Stamr, öí/., stuttering, stammering,
^ I., 28, 12; IL, 288, 1;.
Standa (stend, stóð-stóðum, stæði,
staðinn), v.n., to stand, to he on the
feet, I., 52, 3. — 2. to stand firmly,
to make a stand, not to yield:
þeir játaallirat standavel,ok koma
svá fyrir konuiig, I., 150, 21» —
3. to stand, to be erectly placed :
i^tigi þeira frænda stóð uppreistr í
dvnjanda loga, I., 8, 14. — 4. to
stand so-and-so high, to reach :
sýndist henni buiðrinn sem einu
logbrandr með svá hófum loga,
at Í liimiii stóð, T., 14, jj. — 5. to
stand with a certain direction, to
point, to aim : er ávint raun æra
nm söxin bæði af ofbeldi Rom-
verja ok þeim stormi, er standa
mun norðaii af Anglia, I., 26, j^.
— 6. to stand, to consist, to be
located or placed, to be found :
hvar sem stendr konuugs fe,
er Í bans valdi, svá tæra ríkum
sem fátæknm, I., 48, 14. — 7. to
stand, to be at a standstill, to
Standa — cont.
stop : lætr hann lier star.da
sakir bógværðar, I., 194, ^. — 8.
to stand so as to exhibit a par-
ticular appearance, to shew, to
look : liugleiðir binn sæli Tbómas,
bversu þat mun stauda fyrir Guði,
sem bans ábyggju til beyrir in
provincia, I., 134,5. — 9. to
stand on, to remain, to continue,
to last : stóð þetta gjald ár af ári,
I., 138,9; i^ieSan rauuar timi
stendr, I., 194, og ; þingit stóð urn
sex daga, I., 240, 15. — 10. to be-
hove, to beseem : ei stendr oss,
kristnum monnum at kvíða nokk-
uru, I., 438, J. — 11. to suit, to
Jit : stendr vel at greina, bvat þyí
veldr, er vir^uligr berra Alexan-
der páfi rennr á veginn moti þeim,
alt noror nm f jail, I., 90, ^2 ; kall-
aðist konungr þat góz bafa-lagt
til frelsis Jorsalalandi, ok stæði
vel læi'ðum raönnum at bera þat
aftr konungi sinum, I., 138, 7. —
12. to stand in relation to, to
manage, to husband: eingi nm
aldr síðan skal á hann kæra, bvat
bann befir staði't eðr með konungs
gózi farit, I., 80, ^q. — v.a., icith
dat. : to stand by, to back, to sup-
port : sjá þeir undirbrot beilagrar
kristni ok þá vanmegnast þeir at
standa benni, I., 158, 2« — 2- to
stand forth icith, to show : s. skyu
fyrir, to render an account for, I.,
526, 15. — Prep, uses : s. a, to lie
on, to depend on, II., 128, g. — b. to
stand against, to be chargeable to:
einskis kvnsbeitrof stendr á oss við
beilagan Tbomam, II., 218, jg- — ^-
GLOSSARY.
17
Stíinílá — cont*
a dómi, to abide hi/ a verdict, I.,
498, JO- — s. fyrir, to stand in the
way, I., 100, 22 ; 1I-? 46, 25. — b.
to stand in front, to defend, I.,
162, 2- — s. með, to stand by, to
aid, to support, I., 218, 3. — b. to
understand, II., 54, j^. — s. upp,
to rise to one's feet, I., 222, 9. —
s. til, to ' stand to ' {cfr, to stand
to reason), to bide {heeding), I.,
384, jg. — s. undir, to support
II., 269, 12-
Starf (-S.), n., a task, I., 16, jq,
408,2 5 ^^^5 H> 1^4>i; military
service, II., 36, 21«
Starfa (að), ^^a., ifo minister to, to
nurse, IL, 96,21-
Steðja {iniperf staddi, supine statt;,
v.a-, to * steady,^ to fix, to de-
cide : þat, er hann hefir statt um
sinn mun hann eiai auÖveldliga
umveuda I., 280, n.
Stefna (d), v.a., to point, to direct.
I., 542,
18-
2. to summon, to
cite, xoith dat. and ace, I., 184, 7,
218, 22, 222,3, ^30,28- — ^'^n., to
take a direction, to aim, I., 230, jg,
•^ 242,4,506,2.
Stefna (-u), f, direction, aim, I.,
70, 22- — 2. summoned meeting,
a council, a i^arliament, I., 22,^^^,
^ 154,17,162,9,468,,.
Stcfndr, p-p.. summoned, cited, I.,
^ 294, 20. '
Stefnu-dagr, m,, a day for ivhich a
meeting is summoned, Í., 72, 23 ;
^ II., 285,11.
Stefnu-gerö,y!, appeal, I., 378,20.
Stcfnu-timi, m., time appmnted by
a summons, I., 202,-., 168
7:i>
Ml-
Steinu, (-S, -ar), ??i., a stone, I.,244,i ;
a jewel, I., 476,3.
Stein-scttr, ad., studded with pre-
cious stones, II., 212, 11.
Stein-J)ró, f, stone-sepulchre, a
tomb cut into a rock, or made of
masonry, I., 558, n ; II., 6, 7.
Stekk, stekkr, see stökkva.
Stela (stel, stal-stálura, slæli, stol-
inn), v.a., to steal, II., 140,2-
Stend, stendr, see standa.
Sterkliga, adv., strongly, I., 534, g :
stoutly, firmly, I., 350, ^, 416, 21 :
jyeremptorily, I., 174,27«
Sterkr, ad., strong {hand), I.,
11^) 25- — 2. fij'}n {ivalk), II.,
84, g. — 3. strong, rapid, vehe-
ment,'sivift {ciunent), I., 32, 10.
— 4. mighty, powerful, violent,
I., 90, 26« -— 5. stern, strict, per-
emptory {interdict), I., 358, 29 ;
II.,30,3.
Stett (-ar), f, position, station, I.,
28,19, 48,'i, 360,2.
Stéttr (-ar), 7n., order, rank, class,
hvcrsu ma yÖvarr stéttr {i.e., the
bishops') sjá i mot svá mikilU
elsku, ef þér óttizt miðr GuíS enn
mann ? I., 398, 20« — 2. state, condi-
tion : því skipar hann aftr sína
hugsan í f jrra stétt, at standa me5
einnrð fyrir kirkjunni, I., 162, 2 :
hváirtvcggi þcssarra endrbættl
sinu stótt fyiir tár ok tregn, I.,
166, 5, cfr. 30 í, 18.
Steypa (t), v.a., to found, to cast, to
mould, II., 212,5.-2. ///., to
plunge: stcypa stórmæli ylir ríki.
II., 28, 12.
wStoyta (tt), c.a., to thrust, 1.,
546, 19.
518
GLOSSARY.
Steytr (-s), m., a plunge, IT.,
208, i,.
Stig (-s), n., a rung in a ladder, a
step, I., 8,15.
Stiga (stig, steig-stigum, stigi,
stiginn), V.71., to step ; s. á .bak, ;
to get on horseback, to mount, I.,
222, 27 ; ?. a best, to mount a
horse, I., 432,26 5 s. á land, to
step ashore, to land, I., 488, ^^ ;
s. af, to dismount, I., 32, ^q; s. á
skip, to go on board ship, to em-
bark, I., 256, 5 ; s. niðr, to de-
scend, II., 86,]^7.
Stiga-grein, f., tale of a ladder, L,
8,21.
Stigi (-a, -ar), m., a ladder, I., 8, 9.
Stigr (-S, -ir), m., a path, ivay, I.,
110, 28.
Stig-vel, n., a stirrup, " ascenso-
rium," I., 464, ^g.
Stilla (t), v.a., to ' still,^ to tame,
to stibdue, I., 500, 22«
Stilbbga, adv., calmly, I., 382, ^.
StiUÍDg (-ar),/., calmness, quiet, I.,
276,2.
Stinga ( sting, stakk-stungum, stjngi,
stunginn), v.a., to ' stick,' to
thrust, I., 538, 17.
Stirðr, ad., stark, stiff, II., 287, 36«
Stjarna (stjornu, stjörnur), /.; a
star, I., 12,9.
Stjorn (-ar), f., government, rule,
I., 40,15.
Stjorna (að), to rule, to govern, I.,
12,2,62,2,434,17; IL, 230,16.
Stjornari (-a), m., ruler^ governor,
11,230,17.
Stjórnar-vald, n., power of govern-
ment, I., 234, 7.
Stjorn-samr, ad., strenuous, solici-
tous, zealous in ruling, I., 270,25.
StoÖ (-ar, -ir), prop, a proj), a
pillar, hence support, II., 8, 4,
282,9,
Stóð, see Standa.
Stoða (aÖ), v.a., ivith dat., to stay,
to support, to avail, I., 416,29,
458,17.
StoÖa-maðr, m., supporter, helper,
n., 262, 32.
StoSu, &C.J see átanda.
Stoli (-a), m., a stole, 1., 98,8.
Stolinn, see stela.
StoU (-S, -ar), m., a * stool,' a chair,
a seat, a throne, II., 279, 17. — 2.
a chair, a see, I., 116, 27, 470, 22«
Stolpi (a, -ar), m., a pillar, I.,
488,26; IL, 20,1.
Stóreílis-menn, m., men of exceeding
might and poicer, I., 92, i^.
Stor-fengr {ace, storfengjan), ad.,
largely endowed, II., 269, iq.
Stór-góðr, ad., right, very good, ex-
cellent, I., 72, g.
Stór-grýti, 7i., a heap of boulders,
I., 32,12«
Storliga, adv., greatly, I., 142, 4.
Storligr, ad,, fig. great, big, heavy,
II.,26,is.
Stor-lutr, m., weighty matter, mighty
events, I., 12, 14 ; II., 186, 9.
Stor-menni, 71., great people, I.,
56, 1; lords, II., 210,26.
Stor-mennzka, f., lordliness, I.,
122, ,1.
Stor-merki, n. pi., miracle, I.,
32, 19.
Stormr (-s, -ar), m., storm, I.,
26,11, 170,14.
GLOSSARY.
519
Stór-mæla, v.a., to excommunicate^
to put under interdict, I., 366, 3,
^96, 21 ; II'5 ^^j 2> 15*
Stórmæla-bréf, n,, liter a excommU'
nicatoria, I., 466, ^.
Stór-mæli, 7i., a grave case, I.,
198,13. — ^' ecclesiastical cen-
sure, excommunication, I., 340, 13,
406, 26-
Storr, ad., great, large, big, mighty,
L, 22,1^, 100,9, 182,8.
Stór-tákn, n.pl., great miracle, II.,
80, 17, 102, 22.
Stór-tíðindi, 7i. pi., great tidings, I.,
8j 24 J ^^'i lö>7*
Stórum, dat. of storr, as adv.,
greathj,!., 4,21.
Stór-virki, a., mighty deed, I.,
544, 22'
Strandar, ^ee strönd.
Strangr (strong, strangt), ad., strict,
stern, harsh, severe, I., 148,26«
Strauk, see strjúka.
•Straumr (-s, -ar), m., * stream,^ tor-
rent, rapids, I., 32, 9 ; current in
the sea, II., 94, 25.
Strengja, spelt streingja (d), v. a., to
tie, to bind, to fetter, I., 68,125
496, 13. — 2. to bolt, to shut up,
" seras objicere," I., 1 42, ^q, 192, 3,
534, 8, 536, 23 ; IL? 86, 5 ; s. aftr,
to close, I., 424, j^.
Stríð (-s), n., quarrel, strife, I.,
284, 11; 11., 17^,^. — 2. fighting,
feats of ivar, I., 58, 2»
Stríða (dd), v.a., ivith dat., to act
sternly towards, to visit with
severity, to inflict penances and
penalties upon : hann skal því
frekligar stríða lærdóminum, sem
erkibyskup skriftar ómjúkara bans
Stríða — cont.
mönnum, I., 142, 1 ; mjök mislíkar
OSS öllum, hversu þér hafit strítt
Jocelin byskupi, bróðiir voriim, I.,
396, 19 ; þótt hann striddi nokk-
urum með Guðslögiim ok heilagra
feÖra setuingum, var honum þat
rétt fyrir GuÖi, I., 508, n. —
With prepp. : to strive, to strug-
gle, to war, to fight : s. fjrir, to
fight for, I., 34,9, 408,26- — s.
moti, to oppose, to fight, to strug-
gle against, I., 204, 15 ; II., 4, 9,
286, 31. — s. upp A, to tvar against,
L, 58,4, 426,12.
Stríða (-11, -ur),/*., obstinacy, oppo-
sition, defiance: fyrir þá sök er
strí^um virðanda ok vægjanda, at
þessi hræring ok drói geingr eigi
upp yfir almenning beilagrar
kristni, I., 196,17; hefir upp
sprungit mikit missætti, . , . . er
auðveldliga mundi lægzt bafa, ef
goðvili ok vizka befði um geingit,
meirr með stilling enn stríöu, I.,
276, 2« — 2. rigour, severity,
sternness, harshness : svo liarÖa
stríÖu setr konungrinn her á . . .
at hverr maör . . . er fanst í
nokkurri frændsemi við heilasran
Thomam, er nii keyr^r 1 iitlegcS,
I., 348, Q ; nú risit upp, hcilagr
fa(5ir, með stríðu kristiligs réttar,
II., 18,19; hann veik ser hiiarki
a£ rettri reglv fyrir konvngsins
bliðu ne striðii, II., 286, .5. — 3.
punishment, penance, penalty:
fyrirbýíir hann sterkliga, at I)cir
iivanar gangist vit . . . ok f)ar
yfir hotar hann andligri stríðu,
I., 174j29; bjóðum vór ySr, at
520
GLOSSARY.
Stríða — cont.
þér verndit oss með þeiri stríöu,
er lögiu leggja þeim, er þvílíkt
gera, I., 206, 9 ; nefndr er dagr af
herra páfanum, nær þessi stríÖa
ok stórinæli skulu öll publicerast,
I., 4öS, 24; er Ijóst a£ lögiim at
þeir eru pínandi með hartSri
stríðu, II., 52, 25.
Stríðara, comp. adv.. more severely^
I., 334, 28*
StríÖleikr, w., stern proceedings,
iafiiction of spiritual peiialties,
I., 340,13.'
Stríð-mæli, n, pL, stern, secerc lan-
guage, I., 342, 21.
Stríðr, ad., severe, sei'ious, violent :
erkibyskup fær svá stríðan krank-
dóm ... at hann má á eiugan
luítt úr rekkju rísa, I., 202, ^ ;
Rodgeir erkibyskup af Jork £ékk
svo stríðan augnaverk, II., 92, ^ ;
þótti mér líkast, sem beygðr
maniisfino;r kæmi at mínu au2;a,
Dieð svo stríðum áverka, at þegar
gekk augat niðr á kinnina, II.,
144, 23. — 2. stern, harsh, severe :
s. ásakan, stern rebuke, I., 110, 7 ;
s. ráðníiig, severe correction, I.,
392,,.
Stritt, n. as a suhst., severe demea-
nour, stern language, I., 108,9.
— 2. adversity, tribulation, I.,
136, 2-
Strjiika (btryk, strauk-strukum,
.stryki, strokinn), v.a., to ' streak,^
to rub, I., 400,17.
Stroud (strandar, strendr), f., a
strand, coast, beach, II., 96, 4.
Strong, see straiigr.
Studdi, sec styÖja.
Studdr, see styðja.
Stúdera, to study, I., 28, 23.
Stúderan,/., study, I., 108,14.
Stúdium, n., study, learning, I.,
100, 21- — 2. a study, a studio, a
library, I., 24, g.
Stúka (-11, -ur), f., a chapel {inside
a cathedral or a minster)^ II.,
86, i2i = afstiika.
Stukku, &c., see stokkva.
Stuldr (-ar, -ir), m., ^stealth,' theft,
I., 152,6.; 11., 140,8.
Stund (-ar, -ir),/'., a moinent of time,
time, a ivhile, I., 66, 2q ; um s.,for
a while, I., 46, 13, 100, 17 ; dat.pl.,
stundum, whiles, now and then,
off and on, I., 204, g. — 2. an
hour, one twenty-fourth of the
day, II., 110,15.
Stund, /I, a different word, = Lot.
studium, occurs only in the sing.,
and hardly otherwise than in the
phrase leggja stund á = studium
in aliqua re ponere, 11., 263, 7,
265, 35.
Stunda (aÖ), v.a., = Lat. studeo, to
be intent on, I., 110, 25 ; to try, to
endeavour, II., 114,15.
Stundi, sec stynja.
Stundligr, ad., temporal, worldly,
I., 150,20,236,15, 336,8.
Sturla (aÖ), (Germ, stöhrcn, Dan.
styrre, Siced. störa), v.a., to stir,
to disturb, to trouble, I., 92, jg,
120,3,132,5.
Sturlan (-ar), /., unsettled state,
disturbance, trouble, I., 194, jg,
284,7,346,20.
Styðja (sty^, studdi, styddi, studdr),
v.a., to stay, to steady, to prcj)
up, I., 44,21, 490,9;
s. at, to
GLOSSARY.
21
StyÖja — cont.
steady, II., 60, ^ ; s. sik viÖ, ío
steady one's self by, to lean on,
II., 281,3g. — 2. to support, to
aid, to further, I., 68, ^, 336, 7,
362, 10 /n., 1263.
Stygð (-ar, -ir), /, offence, II.,
290, 2S' — 2. frowning look, fro-
ivardness, disfavour, disjyleasure,
L, 194,11, 198,8, 432,0;.
^tyggja (ð), v.a., to offend, L, 112, q,
160,15 5 Med., to be offended, I.,
I., 426, 31 ; s. við, to be offended
at, L, 462, 13.
Styggiliga, adv., frowardly, frown-
incjly, I., 434, ^
Styggr, ad., froicning, cross, cross-
grained, II., 32, 5.
Styggva = sryggja, I., 490, 27.
Styndi, see sty-nja.
Stynja (styn, stiindi, styndi, stuuit),
v,7i., to 'iigh, to grcan, I., 396, j.
Stynr (-s, -ir), m., a sigh, a groan,
n.,6,3.
Stýra (ð), v.a., with ace. and dat.,
to * steer, ^ to rule, to govern, I.,
324,5; II., 290,1,.
Styrj-öld, /*., disturbance, tumult, I.,
130,11."
Styrkja (t), v.a., to ^strengthen,'
to give validity and force to, to
enforce, I., 162, n ; s. til með, to
((id, to help on, II., 122,4. — Med.
to become strengthened, to gather
strength, I., 208, 10 ; II., 80, iq. —
b. to become firmly established,
I., 8,5.
Styrkr (-s), m., strength, power, 1,,
312, 28* — 2. strengthening, for'
tijication, comfort, I., 174, iq.
Styrkr, ad.^ fortified, firm, II..
08,6,70,10.
vStyrks-maðr, m., supporter, I.,72, n.
Styrkt (-ar),y., corroboration, vali-
i/%, I., 168,16; II., 24,15.
Styrktar-maðr, m., supporter, I.,
340, 2.
Stæði, see standa.
Stæli, see stela.
Stæra (ð), v.a., occurs only in the
Med., to increase, to stcell, I.,
258,26.
Stærð (-ar), f., greatness, i. e. am-
bitious 7naste? fulness, sto^nach.
I., 236,27.
Stöðu, see staÖa.
Stöí?ugr, ad., ' steady,' steadfast,
firm, determined, I., 466, 10 ; II.,
2, 16, 130, 25. — 2. settled, agreed
o/^I.,216,^, 260,13, 410,1/; II.,
210,25; s. ráð, settled thought,
determination, I., 248,96'
Stöðum, see staðr.
Stöðva (að), v.a., to bring to a
standstill, to stay, to stop, to ar-
rest,!., 2^2,^1 II., 54,19, 264,,.
Stökkva (stekk, stökk-stiikkum,
stykki, stokkiun), v.n., to juntp.
to bound, I., 258, 2« — 2. to spring
to one's feet, torush vp. I,, 154, n.
3. to trip, I., 32, 13.
Stöng (staagar, stengr), /!, a prle, <t
rod, I., 216,21-
Störf, see starf.
8Ú, /e/y^ o/'sa, cp v.
SiiiSr, adv., south, south ward, 1.,
26, 19, 60, 15.
iSukka (a^j, v.a., to squander,
^ I., 190,10, 212,1,.
Snkku, 3. impcrf. pi. of sukkva.
II.,2S7,3,.
b'Á-Z
GLOSSARY.
Snmar-tími, yn., summer-time, II.,
no, 13.
Summera, r.«., to sum vp, I., 88,7.
Siimr, ad., some, I., 6, ^s? pcissim.
Sum-staðar, adv., in some places,
XL, 98,4.
Sund (-s), w., a sound, an inlet, I.,
460, 1.
Sundr, adv., asunder^ in sunder, I.,
2,19, 14,27, 40,1,, &c.
Sundr-grein, /., a difference, dis-
pute, II., 78, IS.
Sundrligr, ad., discordant, I.,
100,27.
Sungu, &c., see syngja.
Sunnan, adv., in the souths I., 6Q, vj '■>
from the south, I., 518, 2i'
Siinnan-YÍndr, w., 2í.'í«í/ from the
south, I., 510, 20'
Suspendera, v.a., I., 152,6.
Silt (-ar, -ir)j/o sorroio, mourning,
L, 172,5; IL, 64,20-
Siit-fenginn, ad., mournful, I.,
558, 12.
Sút-fullr, rtiZ., 2V/., I., 168,5.
Svá, and svo, adv., so, Lat. tarn, I.,
6
5 14 >
svá .... at, ta?n . . . ?íí,
100,9; SV'^ • • ^em,ta?n . ,ejuam,
1., 86, 23< — 2. íAwi, Xa^ 57c, I.,
24, 6- — 3. so, Lat. ita {ýolloivcd
hy at), I., 4, 7. — 4. lihewise, I.,
104, 27.
Svall, 5ee svella.
Svar (-S, pi. svör), ?i., a/i answer,
a reply, I., 150, j,, 364, 27, 384, g.
Svara (aS), i^.«., ^0 answer, I.,
36, 15, 268, 15 ; to answer for, I.,
430, 19.
Svar-dagi (-a, -ar), m., an oath, I.,
330, 12-
Svarðr, ^j.jt?. of sverja, sworn, I.,
368, 17,
Svarfa (aÖ), áfjocZí svarva, to ruh, IT.,
281,31.
Svart-flekkottr, ad., dark speckled,
II., 118,ie.
Svart-hárr, ad., dark-haired, II.,
262, 11.
Svartr (svört, svart), ad., dark,
black, I., 28,9, 84,15, 210, 12»
318,21.
Svefn (-S, -ar), m., sleep, I., 46, 21;
IL, 24, 18.
Svefn-timar, m. pi., hours of sleep,
L, 108,12.
Svefnugr, ad., sleepy, drowsy, II.,
146,12.
Sveifla (aS), v.a., tosicing, to brand-
ish for a blow, I., 544,14,.
Sveigingar-orð, n. pi., reproachful
allusions, I., 392, g.
Sveik, see svikja.
Svein-barn, n., male-child, II.,
156,7.
Sveinn (-s, -ar), m., a child : sak-
lausir sveinar, Innocents, II.,
22,8; «60?/, IL,222,25. — 2. Ö.Z
attendant, I., 290,9, 312,5,
522,8.
Sveipa (t), v.a., to ' sweep^ to swing,
to brandish, II., 116, 15.
Sveit (-ar, -ir), /., a company,
crowd, " turba^"* II., Q^, j. — 2.
a suit, order, state: eigi höfum
vær skýrt fundit, hversu lengi
Thomas var í Kancia áðr hann
gekk til þeirar sveitar, at gerast
Kantuariensis kirkju erkidjákn,
L,38,i.
GLOSSARY.
523
Svella (svell, svall-sullum, sylli, soil-
inn), V.71., to swell, to rankle,
^ L, 144,11,426,16.
Sverð (-s), n., a sword, I., 50, q.^
Sverðs-brot, n. pi., fragment of a
sword, I., 544, 25.
Sverðs-oddr, m., the point of a sioord,
L, 546,19.
Sverja (sver, sór-sórum, særi,
svarinn), v.a., to sivear, to de-
clare on oath, I., 160,8, 166,22»
218, 12.
Sviði (-a), ?n., a burn, a smarting
pain, I., öh^, 1 ; II., 98, 5.
Svifta (t), \iterat. causal to svifa,
cfr. skifa andskiitB., rifa andv\ii2i,
&c.], v.a.y to make to vanish, to
n.,
308
J 21 J
deprive of, I.,
^92, 14.
Svik, n. pi., treason, I., 214, 13.
Svikari (-a, ar), 7n., traitor, I.,
214,11.^ !
Svikja (svik, sveik-svikum, sviki,
svikinn), v.a., to betray, to act
traitorously to, II., 38, ig.
Svikligr, ad., deceitful, ll., 48, ig.
Svima (að), v.n., to ^ swim,^ to swirl,
to 7 oil, I., 72, ig.
Svina (að), v.n., to subside, to go
down, II., 96, 14, 284, u,.
Svinnr, ad., tvise, true, II., 289,25«
Svipa (-11, -ur), f, a whip, I.,
^ 390, 5.
Svipu-högg, n., the lash of a whip,
II., 178,12.
Svi-vir^a (-u),y*., shame, I., 300,20-
Sví-virða (Ö), v.a., to disgrace, I.,
170,10,180,1,, 510,24.
Sví-virðing (-ar), der. from svi =
síð- in síðr, less, and virða, q.v.,
[c/r. Sived. sid-vordnad, and sido-
Sví-virðing — cont.
vördnad from 0. Swed. siþ or
siþer = /c55, and vördnad, respect f]
0. Swed. sœ-wir^ing, si-vy?]>ing,
si-ivyrdhning, cfr. 7nod. Swed.
dial. sivÖ7'da, f, shaine, I.,
208,26.
Sví-virðr, ad., sha)ned, defiled, II.,
^i 6> 272, 7.
Svo = svá, I., 30, 2-;, passim.
Svæfa (ð), v.a., causal to sofa, to
put to sleep, to lull, I., 6Q, 1 ; to
appease, II., 48, ig.
Svör, see svar. •
Svört, see svartr.
Svörum, see svara.
Sykjast, v. med., to becoi7ie sick, to
fall ill, II., 74, 18, 100, 19, 158, 11.
Sýn (-ar, -ir), /., eye-sight: kom
einn blindr maí5r, er fyrir tveim
arum haföi sýnar mist, II., 82, g.
— 2. vieiv, out- look : vikr karl
burt Í mörkina at velja ser efnetre,
fell' þá sýn í milium bans ok
kýrinnar, II., 120. 1. — 3. vision,
apparition, phantom, I., 12, 14,
84,28,230,8; II., 46,2.
Syna (d), v.a., to shoiv, I., 24, g,
382. 17. — 2. to show forth, to
signify, I., 342, 26. — Med. to be
seen, I., 24, 12 ; II., 277, 9. Refi.
to seem, I., 2,12, 4,^, 14,9,
52,4, &c.
Synd (-ar, -ir), /., sin, L, 24, jg,
104,8.
Synda-bönd, 7i., pi., bonds of sin, I.,
508. 18.
Synda-flekkr, m., spot, defilement of
SÍ71, II., 274, IS.
Synda-gjald, m., wages of sin, I.,
346,21,508,5.
524
GLOSSARY.
Synda-lausn, f., remission of sins,
I., 336,2-
Synda-myrkr, n., gloom of prevail-
ing sinfulness^ I., 236, g.
Synda-þoka, /'., fog of prevailing
sinfulness, II., 58, 20«
Syndgr, ad., — syndugr, II.,
282,25.
Syndligr, ad., si??fi(l, I., 30, 26-
Syndugr, ad., sinful, I., 204, ^9,
^ 306, 24.
Syngja (syng, söng-sungum, syngi,
sunginn), r.n., to sing : syugst
þá Te deuDi með hringdum
klokkiim, I., 82, 3. — 2. to per-
form certain ecclesiastical rites
and ceremoines ; to officiate at
festivals, I., 102, 9 ; s. í bann, to
jn'oclaim excoynmunicatioii on, I.,
406, 18 ; s. yfir, to perform, to
' read^ funeral service, IL, 158, 13.
Syni (-s), n., a shew, I., 22,23.
Sýniligr, ad., prop, visible, but:
sightly, woriJiy of being shoivn,
I., 24, p
Syun, ad., visible, clear, evident,
manifest, I.. 198, ^; efldu þeir
svá manndráparann, at liann
skyldi með frjálsu fara í sýna
{doubtless the right reading for
sina) Guðs reiði, II., 54, 22 ; uú
er sýut, noiv is manifest, II. ,
66,8; síí^^r syiiv \ioiQ,just a short
while thereafter, II., 290, 35.
Syrgiligr, ad., sorroivful, sad, 11.,
180,23.
Syrgja (ð), v.a., tosoiroic, togrieci,
to mourn, I., 500, is-
Sýsla (-a, -ur), f, business, tash,
duty, charge, I., 64, 3, 98, 4,
502,20; n., 140,26- — 2. office,
Sj'sla — cont.
uppointment,
OD, 20) '2, 25 -
40,15.
Sysla (að), v.a., to negotiate
preferment,
3. a diocese.
I.,
I.,
I..
2. to procure, I., 24, 4,
130,2, 244,1^,248,5.
Sýslu-maðr, m., a hinges bailiff,
" lictor;' I., 142, 5, 294, 26-
Systir (-ur, -ur), f., a sister, II.,
148,23.
Systur-son,wí.,525íe;'5-so?i, a nepJiew,
I., 26, 2,; 11., 148,13.
Sýta (tt), v.a., to grieve, to mourn,
I., 552, ig ; II., 88,3.
Sæfa (Ö), v.a., prop, to put to sleep,
hence, to hill, L, 544, iq.
Sæi, itnperf of sjá.
SækiligT, ad., actionable, liable to
legal process, I., 350, 25.
Sækja.(sæki, sótti-sóttum, sækti,
sóttr), v.a., to '' seeh'' ', to sue for.
to press for : þetta skal ok eigi
rneiiT sækja at sinni, I., 478, 19 ;
ok með því Frakka konungr sæker
þetta svo fast, at lianii leggr bæn
til, II., 218,3. — 2. to pursue, to
prosecute, to continue.: svá sækja
{)eir sína ferð meö miklum piis,
I., 262, 22- — 3. to proceed, fám
vér eigi greint, hvílíkt fjölmenni
þangat sótti, I., 88,1 ; sækja svá
frá fc^kipum í þann stað, sem þeir
höföu ákveðit, I., 516, 35. — 4. to
visit, to come to, to come upon, to
overtake, I., 92, 22, HO, g, 122, 20,
128,4,258,16. — 5. to fetch, I.,
32, 5, 124, 9, 488, g. Phrases : s. at :
sækir þú núherklæddr at í kirkju
til min,"«f? ?)ie in ecclesiam arma-
tus accedis,^' I., 540, 2 ; — s. heini,
GLOSSARY.
52Ö
Sækja — conf.
to pa// a visit, to vi^it, I.,
22,0-.
Sæla (u, -ur), v. a., bliss, earthly
happiness, I., 210, 13 ; II., 269, 25.
— 2. salvation (of the soul), I.,
210,13.
Sæll, ad., happy, fortunate ; sæl er
Kancia sins föíur ok forstjöra,
II., 226,9.-2. blessed, "bcatus,"
I., 2, 13, 16, 26, 430, 21-
Sælliga, adv., luxuriously, I.,
316,7.
Sæma (d), v.a., to honour, I., 14, n,
36, 7, 334, 12, 430,21- — 2. to cele-
brate : kallandi samau byskupa
með ánefndum degi ... at sæma
vígslu Heinreks uuga, I., 452, n.
— 3. to be in accordance ivith ?
or, to associate with .^ I., 190, g. —
Impers. to beseem, to befit : sæmdi
mér barðla lítt at firrast míua
.^ kirkju,!., 294,3.
Sænid (-ar, -ir), f, honouring, re-
verence, veneration, respect : þeir
megu réttligar heita fjandans
verkrekar, enn vígðir klerkar, er
til eingrar skemmdar spara sik,
miklu síðr enn margir úlærÖir, er
með sæmd ok hlýðni laganna
leiða framm alia sina daga, I.,
148, 9 ; krefjum vér yÖr byskup-
ana, fyrir þá sæmd ok lilýðni er
þér erut skyldugir kriinunni, at
. . I., 148, 19 ; hvat belt sá með sér
af kraftinum, er tapaði sæmdina
með frægÖinni ? I., 170,2); ek
vil hvárki leyniliga né opinber-
liga standa í mót sannyndum Guðs
oðr skyldri sæmd, L, 428, 15. — 2.
- 3.
ho7iour, glory, I., 10
' 5'
Sæmd — cont.
dignify, high rank, I., 26, 32- — 4.
prerogative, privilege, J., 146,33.
— 5. preferment, advancement,
i., 38, 22» 46, 23«
Sæmáí{r'fer<5,f, honourable journey,
L, 132,22.
Sæmdiir-vald, n., post of ho7iour, I.,
1 i 8, 29.
Sæmiliga, ad., honourably, I.,
260,27, 338,24, 376,^; ftíy, be-
fittingly, I., 472,13.
Særaibgr, ad., seemly, pretty much
as it ought to be: erkibyskup
vigir til kriinu þenna nýjakouuno-,
ok því var vinátta þeira sæmilig,
I., 42,24. — 2. goodly, fair, an-
sivering the purpose, I., 54,9. —
3. worthy, venerable, I., 10, g,
38,25, 106,8, 260,23,
Sæng (-ar), /, a bed, L, 54, 13,
228,22.
Sængar-klæÖi, n.pl., bed-clothes, II.,
216
) 11"
Sængar-kona, y., a woman in child-
bed, I., 348, 10.
Særa (ð), v.a., to wound, to hurt,
I., 142,14, 300,21, 25-
Særi, n., an oath, I., 330, 97,
350, 13.
Sæta (tt), v.a., to seat, to place;
occurs only once in the impers.
sense, to suit, to fit [be in j>roper
2)lace) : því sætir þat ráð, I.,
196,20.
Sæti (-s), n., a seat, I., 14, 13, 46, 21,
&c. — 2. a see, episcopal chair,
I., 10,4, possim.
Sætleikr (-s, -ar), ?»., sweetness, I.,
102,3; II., 70,7, 112,2.
Sætbga, adv., sweetly, I., 510,^.
526
GLOSSARY.
Sætr, ad.^ siceet, dear, I., 4,-,
80,2,.
Sætt (-ar -ir), f., settlement of
peace, agreement, reconciliation,
I., 352, 11, 17, 396, ig.
Sætta (tt), V. a., to bring about peace,
to reconcile, occurs only in the
refi., to become reconciled, I.,
92,12,396,12,426,8; H-, 28,15.
vSættar-bréf, n.^ a deed containing
terms of peace, I., 464, 27.
Sættar-fundr, m., meeting for the
purpose of reconciliation, I.,
448,8,460,3.
Sættar-gerð, f., arrangement for
reconciliation, I., 160, 19.
Sættar-rof, n., breach of settled
agreement, II., 22, 2-
SöðuU (-S, söðlar), m., a saddle, I.,
^ — , 27*
Söðul-lauss, ad., icithout a saddle,
I., 248, 7.
Sögð, see sagðr.
SögÖu, see segja.
Sögn (sagnar, sagnir), f,a ' saiv,^ a
neics, rumour, report,!., 60,13;
II., 24, 19. — 2. 7iarrative, rela-
tion, I., 32,20-
Sögu, söguna, sögunni, see saga.
Sök (sakar, sakir), /'., cause {action
invoicing responsibility), j I.,
294, 12, 350, 0, 540, n ; II., 4, 7.
— 2. a charge, blame, I., 68, 15,
184,19, 260, 1- — 3. offence, guilt, I.,
176,18, 186,18- — 4. sake, reason,
account ; in the figure : fyrir . . .
sök, I., 36,23, 42,5, 1^6,17, or:
sakir, icith a gen, following, for
this reason, or sake, 07i that
account, I., 6,27, 12,17, 86,1.
Sökkva (sekk, sökk-sukkum, sykki,
sokkinn), v.n., to sink, to fall, to
fall in, II., 287, 34.
Sökkva (t), v.a., causal to preced-
ing, to make to sink, to plunge,
to sink, II., 271, 7.
Sömdu, see semja.
Söug, see syngja.
Söng-hljoð, n.pl., chaunt, I., 358,4,
n.,64,8.
Söng-lauss, ad., silent, where no per-
formance of public worship takes
place, ^' sÍ7ie ca7itu," II., 132,5;
7ieut. sönglaiist, ivithout chaunt-
ing, II., 277, 22-
Söngr (-S, -var), ?n., song, singing.,
L, 492, 26- — 2. chaunt, I., 208, 3.
Sönu, see sannr.
Sötr, II., 285, 3, = sætr.
T.
Tabula, f, altar table, II., 212, ig.
Taka (tek, tók-tökum, tæki, tekinn),
v.a., to * take,'' to get hold of:
þetta litla tekr haun ok tjár
kumpanum, I., 24, n. — 2. to take
to one's self, to embrace : vel ma
segjast, at hon tæki hanu ser í
faðm, I.^ 22, g. — 3. to hold, to
contain : þetta fær her eigi unn-
izt, því at rúmit tekur eigi, I.,
16, 3. — 4. to receive, to have :
her um viljum ver af yí5r taka
Ijös andsvör, I., 148, 23 ; þat vald
. . . er ver tokum í andligri
stjorn Guði veitanda, I., 198, 1 ;
hann er innkallaðr ok virðuliga
tekinn af herra páfanum, I.,
GLOSSARY.
527
Taka — coat,
292, ij. — o. to take up, to
assume: lesS'r liann nu af um
stund erkidjákns þjónustii, eun
tekr Í staðinn konungliga fylgd
ok hirðsiðu, I., 46, jg. — 6. to
take, to conceive : enn þat er
sagt var af skrúÖa þeim, er meíS
vizku svá takanda, at, I., 24, 20-
— 7. to accept : er þat sæti {see)
hættligt hverjum, er tæki, I.,
396, 12« — 8. to accept, to agree
to : tekr erkibyskup þetta ráÖ
með mikilli samþykt, I., 202, 28«
— I7i various, prej^ositional and
other, phrases : t. a, to touch, II.,
200, ig. — t. á sik, to take upon
one's self, to undertake, I., 292, -.
— t. efa to harbour doubt, I.,
462, 2» — t. frá, to except, I.,
20, 19. — t. hvild, to take rest, to
. repose, I., 290, 21« — t. höfn, to
make a haven, to put into a har-
bour,!.., 516,25« — t. Í, ^0 touch
{going below the surface), II.,
275, 19. — t. Í frið, to take into
one's good graces, to become re-
conciled to, II., 20, 15. — t. land,
to ' make ' land, i.e., to land, I.,
490, 15. — t. malum {dat.), to
respond to, I., 382, §. — t. með,
to receive, I., 14, g, 232, g ; II.,
136, 17. — t. með lausn, to alloxo
absolution to, II., 38, jg* — t«
orðum, to have private talk to,
I., 18, 4. — t. orlof, to take
leave, I., 64, -. — t. ráðniug, to
undergo penance, II., 36, j-. —
t. riki, konungdom, to succeed
to the reign, I., 4,ig, 6,2g, 26, 21.
— t, samtal, to engage in dis-
Taka — cont.
cussiofi, I., 74, ig. — t. sik samau,
to draio together, to complot, I.
506, iQ. — t. skilning, to form an
idea, to come to a conclusion, II. ,
46, 5. — b. to gain presence of
mind, II., 20s, ig. — t. skip, to
take a berth on board shijj, to
embark, I., 516, 20- — t. sott, to
' take ill; to fall ill, I., 14, ^, II.,
158,9. — ^* ^^^ ^<^ bestir one*s
self, to set to ivork, I., 308, ^q. —
b. to take up a story, or a matter,
I., 176, g. — t. til orös, to use
{such and such) an expression,
I., 48, g. — t. til sin, to take a
matter into one's own hand, to
make one's authority felt, II.,
160,\o' — t. trú, to receive re-
ligion, to change paganism for
Christian faith, I., 40, 13. — t.
upp, to adopt {as a fashion), I.,
84, 15. — b. to ^ take up,' i.e., to
resolve on doing, to betake one's
self to, L, 148,27, 238, .,260,11.
— t. upp borð, to • remove ' tables,
to ' clear ' the tables, I., 108, j. — t.
vel, blitt, {ivith dat.), to receive
one friendly, hospitably, to give
one a good cheer, I., 250, jg,
426, 21« — t. við, to begin {ichere
something terminates), I., 32, n.
— Pass, takast í sundr, to be
taken asunder, to be broken into
bits, I., 2, 19 ; tekst hann mei>
fremstum vinum erkibyskups, he
is taken, he is held, I., 'S6, ^. —
Med. takast, to have way, to come
off, I., 16,8, 251,10, 280,5.—
Impers. to * take,' i.e. to amount
^o,L, 24,1.
528
GLOSSARY.
Takn (-^'), /i., a tohcn, a miracle.
II., 68, 1,.
Takn-samligr, ad.,miraci(hus, omi-
nous, I., 546,3.
Tal,,/!, deceit, II., 265,26«
Tala (að), ?;.w., to speak, to utter
words, I., 16, 1, 64, 7 ; t. meS, to
speak icitk, to speak to, I., 36, ^3.
Tala (tölu, tölur),y., a tale, number,
II., 88,7. — 2. a speech, I.,
Talda, &c., see telja.
Talma (að), v.«., zí^'íV/í ace, to resist,
to oppose, to hinder, to check, to
prevent, I., 50, jg, 64,29, 186,4,
254, 13, 380, ,.
Tálman (-ar, -ir), /., hindrance,
check,!., 192,4, 534,5.
Tanna, see tönn.
Tapa (að), v.a., icith ace. and dat.,
to lose, I., 170, 2o> 234, 21, 270, 22«
Tar (-s), /?., a tear, I., 58, 14.
Tárast, 7ned., to shed tears, I.,
242,20,268,12.
Tar-fellast, med. of tárfella, to shed
tears : hann liktist Guðs syni í
j[)ví, er tárfeldist f jrir sina pining,
I., 520,15.
Tailigr, ad., tearful, * lacrimosus,^
i.e., deeply contrite: t. góðfýst,
devotion accompanied bi/ intensely
deep sense of contrkioii, I., 104, §,
368, g.
Tniimr (-s, -ar), m., a rein, I., 134, 15.
Tegund (-ar, -ir),^, kÍ7idy condition,
II., 52,17, 276,12.
Toikn, n. pL, relics, II., 150, 2, 25*
Teiiin (-S, -ar), w., a pole, a rod,
11., 18,1.
Tekinn, tekit, see taka.
Tekja (-u, -ur), /. presumption, 1.,
462,15«, c/^- oftekja.
Telja (tel, talda-tölduui, teldi, tal-
inn), v.a., to tell, to enumerate,
to narrate, I., SQ, 12. — Med. in the
phrase ; teljast undan, to beg off,
to back out of, I., 78, 12.
Tempra (að), v.a., to mix, to tone,
to blend {cfr. sam-temprau), I.,
552, 3. — 2. to temper, to nnode-
rate : svá temprar hann þat meö
vitru ok varúð, at konungi likar
svá vel ok bezt, sem hann skipar,
I., 48, 16 ; t. sina tungu, I., 266, ^ ;
t. sik, to control one's self, L,
280,6.
Tempran (-ar), /'., moderation, I.,
^178,7.
Ténaðr (-ar), m., helj), aid, assist-
ance, fu7'thera?ice, I., 50,25.
Tendra (að), v.a., to enkindle, II.,
226,23.
Teunr, see tönn.
Tesauria, II., 216, 24» = ihesaur.
Teygja (ð), v.a., to stretch; t. sik,
to stretch, to struggle, I., 22, 13.
Thesaur, m., treasure, IL, 200, 12-
Tið {-Sir,-ii'),f.,time,mo7nent: hvat
er hann heyrði af ritningum ok
lagadómum var honum tiltækt
á hverri tiÖ, er hann vildi frammi
hafa, I., 28, iq. — 2. season,
pei'iod, nu liðr svá tið Maildar, at
hon tekr sott, I., 14, 7 ; hvortveggi
forðaði sér um stand fjTÍr óvina-
valdi, þar til inngekk fjrirætluð
tíð af sjálfum Guði, II., 4,21- —
3. an hour = 2? ^ ^ com7non
day, II., 118,6, 158,13, 289,13.
— 4. ca7io7iical hour, service tii7ic,
' hours ' : segir allar tíðir af
GLOSSARY.
529
hinum sæla Stephano, I., 206, 25 ;
Kanntuariensis kirkja hefir tvenn-
ar tíðir sungnar á hvern dag, þat
er at skilja, klaustramanna ok
klerka, I., 534, 23 ; ok sem út
gengr yfir fjörÖu Leccionem, verÖr
fall á tíöinni, II., 64, g.
Tíða-lauss, ad.y without public ser-
vice being performed {of a vacant
churcli), II., 282, ^g.
Tíðast, superl. adv., as fast, quick,
eagerly^ as possible, I., 232,8,
250,8; II., 76,14.
TiOindi, tíðendi, n. pi., news, in-
telligence, event, I., 12, 5, 60, n ;
phenomenon, I., 476, 7.
Tíðr, ad., commonly talked of, II.,
265, 28'
Tíð-rætt, ad. neut. as adv. in the
phrase : vera tíðrætt um, being
much talked about, I., 350, ^g.
Tiginn, ad., noble, of noble birth,
L, 106, 20? 134, 245 288, 15.
Tign (-ar, -ir), f, dignity, high
rank, majesty, I., 42, 4 ; II.,
269, 8« — 2. honour, glory, adora-
tion, I., 2, 13 ; II., 238, 15.
Tigna (að), v. a., to hold in honour,
to worship, to celebrate, I., 104, 12 ;
II., 8,7, 194,20- — 2. to advance
to honours, to elevate, to exalt, I.,
364, 3.
Tignar-hæð, f, exalted position,
majesty, I., 332, 23.
Tignar-klæÖi, n. pi., robes of glory,
II., 224, 8.
Tignar-mark, n., token of dignity,
L, 310,23.
Tignar-sæti, n., elevated position,
post of honour, I., 64, 295 396, 2«
K541.
Tigr (-ar, -ir), m., a number of ten
decas, I., 190, 27.
Tiguliga, adv., nobly, in an exalted
manner, I., 388,8; II-> 190, 21-
Tiguligr, ad., stately, II., 68,26«
Til, prep, with gen., to, towards. — I.
in local and material 7'clations. —
1. to, towards : er piltriun til kirkj-
u borinn, I., 14, ig ; alt til Franz,
all the way to, I., 20, g ; similarly
also: framm-fallinn alt tiljarðar,
L, 52, 3 ; geingi- til herbergis, I.,
54, 7 ; lialda sik til skola, to go to
school, I., 20, 5. — 2. at, on, by,
beside, til hægri bandar, til vinstri
bandar, on the right, the left hand
side, I., 106, 15. — II. in abstract
relations. — 1. to, towards, at : þeir
líta |)á til bans, I., 22, 17, 24, 4 ;
nil er at sjá til Englands, I., 60,19 ;
kveðjusending til böfðingja, I.,
74, 11 ; befr Heinrekr byskiip sitt
mál til bans, I., 76, 23 ; talar bann
svá til bans, I., 84, 23 ; sömu leið
for bans signa^a bæn til bimna,
I., 104, 23 ; frásögn, er leiÖir sik
til bænar ok skirlifis, I., 52, 23. —
2. suggestive of aim, purpose, and
the like : befr ákall til rikis, I.,
6,29; Tbomas befir sik úti til
leiks ok fyglingar, I., 32, j ; bann
geÍDgr inn í sitt stúdium bæÖi til
bænar ok beilagi-ar ritningar, I.,
100, 20; frægist ... til misknnn-
ar ok meðalgöngu vit biun bæsta
GuÖ, I., 16,15; ^fi' ^^^^ röskr
til stríÖs, traustr til friSargæzlu,
I., 58, 1, 284, 2 ; vart samþykki
befir kjörit yðr í æzta bysknp.s-
yæti a öllu Englandi til dyrtSar
beihigri þrenniugu, til stjórnar
L L
530
GLOSSARY.
Til — cont.
kristninni, I., 78,3. In these con-
nexions it sometimes takes the
infinitive of the verb in circum-
scription of the gen, of the noun:
hvárki líf né líkam sparir hana
til at efla rikit = til eílingar rikinu,
I., 08,6. — ?). indicative of de-
signation ; to, for : Lanfrancus
vigði til krunu Yilhjálm raiiÖa,
I., 10, j2 ; hefja þeir allir samt til
páfadóms sterkan þrætumanti, I.,
90,26 5 kjöri lion hann sjálí' til
hins æzta kennimanns, I., 18,17;
GuÖ Drottinn kjöri hann til kon-
ungs, I., 18, 20; til erkibyskups
ser hann eingan betr fallinn, I.,
74, 12- — *!• suggestive of aim and
jnirpose being realised; to: at
honum sé til lofs ok dýrðar, I.,
4, 8 ; at þat sama verði Thómasi
til dýrkanar, er konungrinn hngði
til glatanar, ok þat kristninni til
nppreistar, er hann hugSi til hrap-
anar, I., 70, 13, jg ; mun enskr órói
honum til mæðu siðar greinast,
1., 90,18« — 5. indicative of dis-
position of mind, to, towards,
Lat. erga : hatr Júða til vors
Herra, I., 70, ^ : finst eingi ver-
aldar stjornari ... til yðar góð-
fúsari, I., 284,2- — ^- pointing
an illustration: as to, concerning:
glöggr Í aUri grein til brjosts ok
bækr, I., 20, 2 ; til marks um at
sæll Thomas hefir Parisarklerkr
verit, I., 20, 9. — 7. indicative of
comparison ; to, i.e., as much as :
hofsemd bans ok harÖlifi virða
þeir til hræsni, . . vandlæti . . .
til jjrimdar, . . . fjárforráð . . .
Til — cont.
til ágirni, höföingsskap ... til
drambsemi, þat er hann stendr a
sinum skilning . . . til einþykkis,
&c., I., 1/8, 4, 55 g, 11, 13.
Adv. too, in addition to : játta
þat ok til, at, S)-c., I., 22, 20;
leggr til einn ábóti, I., 74, 27 ;
til lagði hann ok mirram, I.,
104,25; er þat ok til, þriðja
grein er sú til, I., 108,7,8- —
2. Í7i return : aðrir svara her
til, I., 72, 12' — 3. suggestive of
possession of qualities : ha fa til
YÍt ok vilja góðan, to have, as it
were ready to hand, I., 74, 13. —
4. suggestive of yielding, lata til,
to grant, to give assent to, I.,
78, 26« — Temp, to: alt til krúnu-
blóðsins, all the time to his pas-
sion, I., 4, J.
TiI-búiuD, ad., ready made, I.,
558, IP
Til-biinaðr, rn., preparation, I.,
122,22? 416,1. — ^' ai'rangement,
settlement, I., 80, n.
Til-dráttr, m., antecedent and con-
current causes, leading up to an
issue, II., 44, 7.
Til-fallion, ad., befitting , fit, suited.
L, 66,
16'
Til-farandi, ad., coming, arriving,
II-, 90, 11.
Til-feldr, ad., fit, befitting, suited,
I., 76,9.
Til-felli, 71., that which happens, an
occurrence, case, I., 172, 30-
Til-för, f, the concurrent causes of
an event, II., 22, 14.
Til-gangr, ' m., concurrent causes,
II., 275,35.
GLOSSARY.
531
Til-heyreligr, ac?., appertaining to,
due, becoming, befitting, I., l72,3o.
Til-komandi, ad., approaching, IL,
281
> !•
Til-kominn, ad., arrived, II., 204, g.
Til-kvorna,y., arrival, I., 256, ^g. —
2. advent, the co7ning of the Lord,
L, 132,3. — 3. return home, I.,
482,9,490,26.
Til-lag, n., suggestion, proposal, II.,
130,4.
Til-laga (-lögu, -lögur), f., utter-
ance, observation : hann er nil
svá harðsniiinn í sínum tiUögum,
að öll kristni í Englandi mundi
falla, ef þessi ofstærismaðr skal
henni lengi stjórna, I., 434,15- —
2. suggestion, proposal, counsel,
L, Í30,6, 150,3, 178,23, 196,25,
308, 12) 328, 10) 392, g.
Til-leiðsla,y., persuasive guidance,
I., 76, 19.
Til-lit, n., a glance, I., 68, 4, 428, 25.
Til-lögu, -lögur, see til-laga.
Til-mæli, n., request, I., 338, 27. —
2. commendation, intervention,
" inter ventus,^^ I., 36, £•
Til-rás,y., concurrent circumstances,
II., 52, 18.
Til-raim,/*., attempt, I., 422, g.
Til-skipan,y., ordiiiation, ordinance,
IL, 196,4.
Til-sokn, f., concourse of visitors,
influx, I., 88, 4 ; II., 282, 17.
Til-spurn, f, news obtained by in-
quiry, rumour, fame, II., 282, 1.
Til-stefndr, ad., summoned, I., 72,22'
Til-stilli,y., device, design, I., 36, j.
Til-tekinn, ad., selected, I., 12, j,
84, ^0- — 2. adduced, I,, 166, 13,
*>10
Til-teyging,y!, temptation, I., 412,24-
Til-tækr, ad., reachable, ready at
hand, I., 28, ig ; IL, 288, 22.
Til-verkan, f, committal, perpetra-
tion, I., 110,4.
Til-verki, w., cause, I., 492, 1.
Til-visan,/'., indicatioii, I., 116,19;
IL, 128, 20'
Tilæskingar-sonr, m., an adopted
son, IL, 238, g.
Timanliga, adv., early, L, 270, j.
Timi (-a, -ar), m., time, I., 2, 4,
passim; um tima,ybr iz tvhile, I.,
88,12; Í annan tima, again, II.
220,''ig.
Tina (d;, v.a., to gather, t. upp, to
gather up, to gather together, to
collect IL, 274, gg.
Titlingr(-s, -ar), m., a tit, a sparrow,
^passer,' I., 238, jg.
Tin, card, num., ten, I., 86, 5.
Tiund (-ar, -ir), a tithe, I., 108, 26»
344,14.
Tiundi, ord. num., tenth, IL, 158, q.
Tjá {pret. tjáði, pp. tjáðr and téðr),
r.a., Í0 show, to exhibit: þetta
litla tekr hann oktjárkumpánura,
I., 24, 11 ; t. sik, to shoiv, to ten-
fold^ to develop itself, L, 314, ig.
— 2. to show forth, to deliver :
tjá honum síðan bréf Heini'eks
konungs af Englandi. Hvert upp-
brotit hefir likan skilning ok fyrr
var skrifat, L, 264, 20; cfr. 314,4.
— 3. to bestoiv, to confer on : oss
ma þat réttliga virða til óhæ-
versku, ef vér förum svii . . .
at vér þökkum eigi höfðingjum
þa góðvild ok velgerðir, er þeir
hafa oss téð, L, 462,09. — 4. to
impart, to imbue : þann ilm er
L L 2
532
GLOSSARY.
Tjá — cont.
hann herbergÖi a£ guÖligri ritning
tjáðe hann sinne hjörÖ með sætri
ok signaÖri kenning, II., 234, 13.
5. to indicate, to signify, to dis-
covei' : samvizkan tjár þeim þær
Ijótarsakir . . . er þeir óttast mecS
- sárum hug, ef opinberar koma
undir erkibyskups dóm, I., 176, ^7 ;
fjrst tjár hann (vor Herra) henni
(sálunni) handaverk sín í skepn-
unni, II., 230,4. — 6. to explain,
to set forth : I., 50, 24, 164, ^4,
292, 5, 378, 17, 27 ; H.j 230, 17. —
7. to relate, I., 6, 25, 34, 7.
Tjald (-S, tjöld), n., a tent, II.,
204,4.
Tjara (tjöru),/., tar, II., 275, jg.
Tjon (-s), 71., loss, forfeiture, I.,
180,19; 11., 268,4.'
Tjörn (tjarnar, tjarnir),/., a tarn,
II., 86, 18.
Tok, toku, &c., see taka.
Tol, n.pl., implements, instruments,
I., 552, 25.
Tolf, card, num., twelve, I., 6, 24.
Tomliga, adv., leisurely, I., 188, 12.
Tomr, ad., empty, I., 482, 4, 546, 26 ;
II., 220, 13.
Ton-laust, n. ad., as adv., sine cantu,
II., 46,29.
Torg (-s), n., a market place, II.,
120,23.
Tor-kenna, v.a., to disguise, I.,
240,21.
Tor-sottr, ad., difficult, II., 280, g-
Traktera (að), v.a., to treat, to pon-
der over, to consider, I., 198, 15.
Trauö sQe tröð.
Trauðr, ad., occurs only in the neut.
trautt as adv., scarcely, hardly,
I., 102,21; II., 278,22.
Traust (-s), n., trust, reliance, I.,
18,15, 1-^8,10. — 2. strengthening,
backing-up, I., 288, 14. — 3. trial,
venture, in the phrase bera traust
a, ÍÖ consider safe to venture, I.,
194,21.
Traustr, ad., tritsty, ^ stout, firm, I.,
284, 2- — 2. 5«/e, proof, secure,
I.J 50, 14 ; II., 18, 23.
Tre (-s), 71., a tree, I., 182, 5, 7 ; II.,
146,21.
TreÖ, tre^r, see troÖa.
Tregi (-a, -ar), 7n., let, hindrance,
obstacle, I., 78, 20 326, g. — 2. con-
tritio7i, repe7ita7ice, mournful con-
dition, I., 102, ig, 108, 13, 166, 5.
Tre-virki, 71., woodwork, I., 534, 4.
Treysta (t), with ace, to make
timsty, firm, stout, in this sense it
only occurs in the med. : her fyrir
treystist hann at biÖja kouungmn
... at hann skrifi til herra páf-
ans, I., 442, 29; v.a., with dat., to
trust in, to rely on, with at, or til,
or k, following : hann treysti Tho-
masi framast allra manna at halda
sina erfingja til hásætis, I., 68, 25 ;
varla vildi hann treysta nokkurum
manni til þessarrar prófanar, I.,
112,3; híinn treystir eingum sin-
um undirmönnum til þeirarrétt-
visi, I., 286, 13. — 2. to try the
strength of, to resort to for aid or
abetment : treystir hann nú á vini
sina, I., 350, 5 ; þar treystir á
herra pafinn . . . sem er Gilbert
Lundúna byskup, I., 370, 17.
GLOSSARY.
538
Troða (treð, tróð-tróðiim, træði,
troðiun), 1*.«., to tread, I., 514, ^,
Trii (-ar), /., religion^ faith, I.,
40, 12 ; n., 276, 1 ; upp á mína
trii, itpon my faith, I., 282,29-
Trúa (ð), v.a., to trow, to believe,
L, 74, 26' 200
J !•
Pass, sá maðr
trúist eigi yðarri vizku vel líka,
" apud vestram sapientiam non
" crcditur sapere,^'' I., 274, 21« —
2. to believe in, to trust, I., 8, 3,
258, 27«
Tniandi, pres. p., believing, II.,
86,9.
Tni-festi,y'.,y?/v?i belief, II., 90, -^o.
Tniligr, ad., credible, likely to be
true, I., 480, 20*
Trii-lyndr, ad., trusty, reliable,
faithful, upright, I., 54, 26> 344, ^9.
TrúnaSar-eiðr, m,, confidential oath,
I., 492, 15 ; oath of allegiance, I.,
526
>i"
Trúnaðar-klerkr, m., private chap-
laiti, 1.5 98, 2«
Trúnaðar-maðr, m., confidential ser-
vant, II., 152, 2«
TrÚDaðr (-ar), yn., trust, faith, reli-
ance, I., 18,15, 252,4. — 2. fealty :
þú sort minum lierra, konung-
inum, at veita honum tmnað, I.,
218, 13. — 3. confidence, I., 228, 26»
— 4. confidential commission, I.,
376,18, 484,17.
Triir, ad., faithful, I., 296, 31.
Trygð (-ar. -\v),f., trustworthinesSy
good faith, I., 214, jo, 474,4.
Tryta (tt), v.n,, to trot about : kell-
ing trytir æ sem tíðast, " rustica
. . . discurrit , festinat,^^ I., 250, 7.
TröÖ (traÖar, traÖir),y!, a fold, II.,
274,35.
Tulkan (-ar, -ir), f, pleading, rC'
co?n?nendation, I., 36,2-
TuDga (-U, -ur), f, the tongue, I.,
144,6,266,6,280,2,402,26.
Tuttugu, card, num., twenty, I.,
34, 14.
Tvá, ace. masc. of tveir, I., 38, 25.
Tve-faldr, ad., two-fold, II., 154, 5.
Tveir, tvær, tvö {gen. tveggja, dat.
tveim, ace. tvá, tvo, tvær, tvö),
card, num., two, I., 2, 3, 8, 1, 34, 13,
50, 19, 62, 3, 120, 19.
Tvennr, ad.,bini, I., 192,26, 196,6;
double, II., 216,25; i^^'o, twofold,
IL,236,i;.
Tvi-deila,/'., division into two fac-
tions, I., 74, 17.
Tví-eggjaðr, ad., two-edged, I.,
342, 26, 534, 4.
Tvi-faldr, ad., of two kinds, twofold,
I., 62, 7, 348, 16. — 2. double, I.,
108,31- — 3. double-dealing, in-
sincere, I., 74,26-
Tví-mælt, n. ad., as adv., in the
phrase : eta t., to eat tico courses
of viands, to have a double meal :
^^fac igitur caritatem eis, ut pro
adventu tuo comedant hodie vin-
guia^^ which implies, although it
does not exactly express, the sense
of the IceL context, I., 256, 19.
Tvi-skifta, v.a., to divide i?i two,
II., 112,18.
Tvo, ace. oftveÍT.
Tvær, fefn. o/^ tveir.
Tvo, neut. of tveir,
Tygt (-ar),y!, correction, discipline,
I., 48,20«
Tygtan (-ar), f, correction, I.,
504, 14.
534
GLOSSARY.
Týna (d), v.a., to destroy, occurs
only in the Pass. : týnaz, to be
lost, II., 268, 5.
Týndr, p.p., lost, I., 360, 20«
Tæki, &c., see taka.
Tæma (d), v. a., to empty, occurs
only in the] med. phrase : tæmast
til, to he at leisure, " vacare,'^ I.,
20, 24.
Tæra (ð), v.a., to bestow on, to grant,
I., 48,15.
Tæri-peningai', m, pL, spending
money, pocket money, I., 28, 26-
Töldu, &c., see telja.
Tölu, see tala, sb.
Töluðu, &c., see tala, vb.
Tönn (tannar, tennr), /., a tooth, II.,
160,13.
TöpuðUj see tapa.
U, Ú
Ú-aflátligr, ad., unceasing, incessant,
persistent, I., 182, 27.
Uann-leti, II., 248, ge* = vandlæti.
t7-beygðr, ad., unbent, I., 2, 23.
Ú-bjartr, ad., ' un-bright,' sullen,
gloomy, ill-willed, I., 66, 14.
Ú-blíða, f., unkindness, ill-favour,
^ anger, L, 410,24, 436,4-
tJ-bættr, ad., having done no boot
for, un-reformed, un-repentant, I.,
92, 10, 236, 25.
IJdáða-verk, n., a heinous crime, I.,
^ 546,8.
\j-áyg^,f., faithlessness, I., 528, 21.
TTdæmi, n. pi., a thing unexampled,
I., 420,3.
"C-dæmiligr, ad., unexampled, I.
^ 456, 5, 528, 20, 550, 4.
tJ-einurö,/!, insincerity, I., 338,19-
TJ-fagr, ad., ugly, hideous, I.,
318, 23-
T7-fremd,y., want of boldness, blush,
shame, I., 408, 24.
L"friðar-maðr, m., worrier, perse
cutor, II., 277, 19.
TJfriðar-stormr, m., storm oý disturb-
ance, war-storm, brunt of riotous
and disorderly proceedings, I.,
^ 542, 20.
tJ-friðr, m., disturbance, I., 132, 10,
262, ig. — 2. state of war, ivar-
fare, I., 352, 15.
Ú-frægja, v.a., to slight, to dis-
honour, I., 276, 14.
tj-færa (-u, -ur), f, an impassable
place, I., 34, g.
tT-för,y., disaster, I., 386, g, 404, 19.
iT-gifta, y.*, lucklessness, fatality, I.,
514,8 5 II., 292,16.
C-glaðr, ad., sad, mournful, I.,
98,3.
tJ-gleðja, v.a., to sadden, occurs only
in the med. úgleðjast, to become
sad, downcast, I., 436, 2-
Uggandi, pres. p., in fear, II.,
90,18.
Uggligr, ad., doubtful, misgiv'
ing : bonum þykir uggligt, ef
svá gerist, at skifti þeira fari sem
miðil herra djflizunnar ok band-
ingjans, þá er annair lemr enn
annarr liggr undir, I., 286, 5.
Uggr (-s), prop., apprehension, fear,
I., 534, 21 ; 11., 6, 15.
Ú-græðiligr, ad., incurable, irrepa-
rable, I., 310, 3.
GLOSSARY.
535
tJ-hallr, ad.^ not leaning on one
side, not halting, not limping,
unbent J steady : hans hugdirfö for
úhöUum fæti, hvar er hann lysti,
I., 58, 2» — 2. untottering : einginn
þykkist úhalla krúnii bera, utan
lianii haldi meí5 kappi þat, sem hélt
hans forellri, I., 8, 7, cfr., 146, 22»
478, 15. — 3. unbiassed f því sitr
heilagr Thomas með sínu ráði
réttr ok iihaUr í málaferlunum,
L, 112,^9; hann treystir eingum
sínum undirmönnum til þeirar
réttvísi, at þeir standi úhaUir í
þeim hæðar mun, sem nú syndist
milium konungs ok erkibjskups,
^ L, 286, 15.
tJ-harmandi, pres. p., without grief
and sorrow, I., 378, 12«
tj-hegndr, ad., unpunished, II.,
277,19.
tJ-heill, ad., ^ un-whole^ insincere,
I, 142,21.
TJ-hentiligr, ad., ill-suited, unser-
viceable, unprofitable, I., 4, 20'
IJ-heyrðr, ad., unheard oý, I.,
420, 12.
tJ-heyriligr, ad., not to be listened
to, horrible, abominable, detest-
able, I., 72, i„ 422, 25.
T}-hlýðni,/., disobedience, T., 186, 7.
IJ-lmeigðr, ad., un-bent, un-yielding .
erkibyskup stendr enn úhneigðr,
því at samvizka hans hefir æskiligt
rum á góðum grundvelli, L, 158, n.
— 2. without a sign of an impres-
sion having been made, not show-
ing any sign of having taken a
stamp, I., 550,25-
Ij-hræddr, ad., fearless^ I., 522, 2«
TT-hæfa (u), f., enormity, outrage,
shame, abomination, I., 180, 15,
^ 190, 24» 320, 20-
tJ-kominn, ad., to come, future, II.,
18,22'
Tj-kristiligr, ad., unchristian, un-
charitable, I., 332,10.
tJ-kunnigr, ad., unknown to, strange
to, unacquainted with, I., 2G8,2.
TJ-kunnr, ad., unknown, strange,
foreign, I., 308, 7.
Tj-leyfÖr, ad., un-alloioed, un-law-
ful, illicit, I., 8, loj 108, 3, 350, 27.
tJ-leystr, ad., * un-loosenedj un-re-
lieved, un-absolved, I., 78, 9.
TJlífis-maðr, m., a doomed mati, I.,
540, e.
tJ-likligr, ad., unlikely, improbable,
incredible, I., 476, ig.
TJ-likr, ad., unlike, I., 64, 23, 140, ig,
318,21«
C-lýðska, úlýzka,y., unmannerliness,
unnaturalness, ill-nature : sumir
rægja hann fyrir eina saman ilsku
sinnar úlýðsku, I., 176, 22«
tJ-lærör, ad., unlearned, lay, I.,
72, 24j 194, 13.
\SvL\,prep. with ace. — I. local. — 1.
suggestive of movement in or
about the place : about, through-
out : er eigi at eins frægist um
England, heldr um oil NorÖrlönd
Tv 10,13' 14; ?:engr inn, hlýöist
um, ok heyrir til eingis, I., 54,9. —
2. expressive of movement through
the place : — a. through : Terns . .
rennr um mi(Sja borgina Lnndiin,
I., 12, 16- — b. past, over, beyond :
aðrir skyldu þá um reit ryma mhv
undan,! ,8, j^ ; (fi\ a similar phrase
536
GLOSSARY.
Um — cont,
in an abstract sense^ I., 26, 22 5 ^^^
giftist suÖr um sjo, I., 26,^9 ; norÖr
umfjall, I., 90, ^^. — II. temporal.
' — 1. during, for : um alia sina daga,
!•? 8, 27 ; uni dag, I., 30, 27 ; um
brio; I., 52, 27, 56, 12 ; um stund,
I., 100, 22, um nætr ok daga, I.,
104. 15. — 2. ahout^ at (in a ter-
minative sense) : um síðir, I.,
20,4, 28,4; um sinrxy for once, L,
38, J5. — III. in abstract relations :
— 1. over, about, suggestive of
change : ef svá kastaði um míuu
efni, I., 64,22» vendir bann um
sinu siðferÖi, I., 94, ^o- — 2. about,
concei'ning : til marks um, I.,
20, 9 ; skrifar um, I., 36, g ; um
lagahald, I., 70, 4 ; um sitt efni, I.,
74,4; disputera um belgar ritning-
ar, I., 108,6- — ^- '^^'^^^^ ^ notion
of purpose implied : for, before,
Lat. ob : sendist þeir um dom
byskups, before, i.e. for the pur-
pose of being judged, I., 294,27«
"C-makligr, ad., unworthy, I., 132, 7,
322, 2P
TJ-mannliga, adv., unmanly, in-
humanly, I., 348, 10-
TJ-mannligr, ad., unmanly, inhuman,
I., 548, 9.
Um-band, n., a bandage, II., 80,25.
Um-bergis, adv., around, I., 232, ^,
502, 22-
Um-bjóöa, v. a., to commission, em-
power, I., 38, 19, 180, 21«
Um-boð, w., commission, I., 172, 34,
330. 16, 480, 21 ; full powers, II.,
218, 10.
Umboðs-maðr, m., an attorney, com-
missioner, I., 118,23, 408,8; u.
Umboðs-maðr — cont.
konuugs, a king's bailiff, or
a law officer under the crown, I.,
296, 14,. — 2.0 vicar, I., 454, jg.
Um-bót,y., emendation, reformation,
^1,360,12,408,25; n., 90,13.
Um-brot, n., rebellious disposition,
L, 410, 19.
Um-biiast, med., to make snug a
^ ship, 1., 486, 24.
TT-merkiliga, adv., disdainfully, con-
temptuously, I., 338, 17.
Um-£ang, n., preparation, arrange-
ment, I., 22,14.
Um-fara, v.a., to go over, to pass
in review, I., 16, ig.
Um-£ramm, prep, with ace, beyond,
besides, I., 48, ig.
Um-gangr, m., circumference, peri-
phery, ' setting : ' var steinninn
svá viÖr með þeim umgang er
gullit gerÖi, at náliga klæddi
böndina, I., 476, 25.
Um-bugsan, f, consideration, 1.,
202, 11. — 2. planning, plotting,
scheming, I., 328, 26-
Um-hyggja, /., care, I., 108, 19,
^486,19.
tJ-mildr, ad., iniquitous, wicked, I.,
420,24,504,24.
tJ-minnast, med., to become unmind-
>/o/,L,470,6.
Tj -minnigr, ad., unmindful, forget-
>7,L, 428,4 5 IL, 14,11,272,24.
tJ-mjúkara, comp. adv., less softly,
i.e., more roughly, more sternly,
more severely, I., 142,2«
Um-leita, v.n., to seek in various
ways, to cast about for : varla
ofef r hann sik liÖugan at bafa nokk-
ut samtal með sendiboðum, þótt
GLOSSARY.
537
Um-leita — cont.
þeir umleiti með goÖvild ok friÖ-
semi, at, &c., I., 336, ^g.
Um-leitan, jf., proposal, friendly
suggestion : liefer hann umleitan,
at erkibyskup mune samþykkja
fjrer hönd heilags Thome, at hann
lejse steininu, &c., II., 218, 3. — 2.
a shift put forward, expedient,
or terms, proposed insidiously : sú
er ein þeira umleitan, at herra
páfinn dæmi konunginn réttvísan
í öllum skiftum þeira crkibysk-
ups, L, 284,18, cfr. 286,9; ^"^^ð
frií^samri umleitan, tvitk proposals
of peace, I., 326, g. — 3. device,
design, a deep-laid scheme : hvat
leggr konungvinn her í mot, utan
þat sem hann liefir nægst, þat er
of und ok ilska með þeiri umleitan,
at enn megi hann erkibyskupinum
Í nokkuru þyngja, I., 368, i^. — 4.
attempt, trial : eftir þetta liÖit
þyngir svá meinit, at mín umleitan,
vinnr ekki, IL, 96, 23. — 5. temp-
tation : svá sem Græðari vor þoldi
freistanar anda þá umleitan siðasta
uppá sinn manndóm, I., 472, ^g,
c/r. 416,n.
Um-lestr, m., censure, rebuke : hann
setr Thómasi erkibyskupi gildan
umlestr með gráleitu gabbi, I.,
434, 5. — 2. disrepute, ill fame :
betri er orÖstirr af yíirbót, enn
umlestr af yfirgirnd, I., 394, 22- —
3. slander : byskuparnir . . . standa
í áleitni ok umlestrum upp á skaÖa
sins andligs föður, I., 176, ig ; þat,
er hann talar eigi, Ijúga þeir með
Ijótum umlestri, I., 178, 3.
Um-líÖa, v.n., to pass over, I.,
194,2,.
Um-liðinn, p.p. past: u. orð, ivords
already uttered, I., 302, 9 ; rang-
læti umliÖiu, I., 424, ^q,
Um-rá(5, n., deliberation, considta-
ieo72,I.,44,i8, 392,12.
^m-v&\^,f.^ journey, travel, passage
through, I., 290, jp
Um-ræða, /., talk, discourse, dis-
cussion, L, 160, 4.
Um-sát,^/. umsátir,/, icay-laying,
ambush, I., 276, jg, 308, 25.
Um-sjá, v.a., to look after, I., 66,7.
Um-skifti, n., change, I., 64, j^,
84,7,408,31.
Um-vending, /., return to a former
state, change, I., 440, 17. — 2.
turning round, twisting about,
perversion : þessi er sii orðagerð
ok um vending, sem ver buöum
eingum manni at bera, I., 200, 5.
Um-voltinn,/>.p., tumbled over, come
down, I., 350, 13.
IJ-mýkt (-ar), f, roughness, * hir-
sutia,' I., 96, 3.
Una(uui, undi-undum, yndi, supine
unat), v.n., prop, to abide : u. sér,
to find pleasure in abiding, I.,
268, 23, to find pleasure in : u.
mannkostum, I., 510,7,- u. ilia
viö, to be displeased at, II., 271, 1.
Ú-náð, f, ^ wipe ace, ^ worry, vexa-
tion, ' L, 90,19, 120,6, 132,9,
216,20.
tj-náöa, v.a., to disturb, to disquiet,
I., 154,15.
Unat-samligr, ad., delightful, II.,
224,24.
538
GLOSSARY.
Undan, adv., from under, I., 58, 15 ;
off, I., 78, 13 ; away from {inaking
place), I., 8,16-
Undan-dráttr, m., designed delay,
1,188,14.
Undan-færsla,y., evasion, II., 28, 20«
Undan-skot, n., the act of making a
criminal escape from his legal
forum, elusion, subterfuge, I.,
144,19.
Undarligr, ad., wonderful, ivon-
drous, strange, I., 92, 17, 172, ^^
232,2-
Undir, prep, icith dat., denoting
rest, and ace. denoting motion.
— I., with dat., under, beneath,
below : virðuligur maÖr sitr undir
höföi bans, II., 60, n ; fig. undir
slnu yaldi, under his power, I.,
6, 8 ; standa undir bans álögum,
to have to stand under, to
hear, to endure, I., 110,3 — b.
* behind,^ underneath : segir kon-
unginum þat undir biðstund
erkib., I., 198, 24. — II-> ^^'^^^ ace,
under, beneath : tekr bann ser til
blífóar várs Drottins líkama ok
lætr upp undir kápuna, I., 208, 10 ;
þér snarizt nii allir undir einn
skjöld, I., 104,13. — 2. in abstract
relations. — a. suggestive of sub-
jection : vann Vilbjálmr alt Eng-
land undir sik, I., 4, 15 ; bverr
dro rétt ok frelsi kirkjunnar undir
krúnuna, I., 46, 3 ; tekr undir
erkistolinn, I., 1 1 8, 25 ; gripa undir
sik, I., 42, 8 ; liggi' undir borg
Tolosam, I., 58,5 í komnir undir
leikmannalög, I., 152, iq. — b. im-
plying a notion of gj-oundwork,
basis, subject : er nú þessi sýn
Undir — cont.
fallin undir Ijosa skyring, I.,
16, 12 ; textus vorðinn undir fagra
glosu, I., 36,20- — III., te?)iporal,
to, unto : tillaga Gilliberts er sú
at malit bíði frammleiðis undir
konungs atkvæÖi, I., 74, 22-
Undir-brjota, v.a., to subdue, to
crush, I., 410,27.
Undir-brot, w., break-down, subver-
sion, ruin, L, 158, 1, 414,12-
Undir-búa, v.a., to prepare, to ar-
range, I., 478, 1-
Undir-byskup, m., a suffragan
bishop, I., 186,21-
Undir-byggja, f, cunning, deceit,
I.,46,i2, 412', 4, 432,12, 472,21.
Undir-lagðr, p.p., subjected to, in-
cluded in (j)ena?ices), II., 48, ig.
Undir-mair, m., one in a lower po-
sition than the person spoken of,
an inferior, a subject, I., 112,26,
172,27, 234,9, 286,14, 362,7,
472,23-
Undir-staða, f., a foundation, a
base, II., 234,23, 30- — 2. under-
standing, I., 132, 1, 300, 15.
Undir-standa, v,a., to understand,
I., 280, 20-
Undir-tekt, /'., rejoinder, I., 248, 15.
Undra (að), v.a., to marvel, I., 42, 3,
356,25,442,1.
Uudran (-ar), /., wonder, astonish-
ment, I., 208, 3 ; II., 48, 12-
Ung-menni, n., coll. young people,
youth, II., 281,6-
Ungr, ad., young, I., 18, 37, 44, u,
&c.
Unna (ann,unni-unnum, •^xm\,supine
unt), v.a., to love, I., SQ, 2, 108, 14.
GLOSSARY.
539
Unna — cont.
— I.to grant, to allow : u. viðr-
mælis, to allow, to graiit an inter-
view, I., 328, 10-
Unnasta (-u, -ur), f., lady-love,
sweet-heart, I., 20, 21; 11.? 118, 2«
Unnasti (a, -ar), m.,a (^male) lover,
I., 54, 4.
Unnizt, see vinna.
Unnu, &c., see vinna.
Ú-nytsamligr, ad., unprojitable, I.,
324, 13.
t3^-nýttr, p. jj., frustrated, annulled,
I., 420, 17.
Upp, adv., up : upp á þurt land, I.,
34, 2 ; standa up, to get up, I.,
54, 7 ; bregSa up, to take forth,
to turn up, I., 54, ^q ; á vín upp
= upp á vín, 05 concerning
wine, I., 108,2.
Upp-brjota, v.a., to break, to tear
open, to open, I., 74, ^o? 264, 21-
Upp-burðr, m., divulgation, publi'
cation, exhibition, II., 283, 4.
Upp-byrja, v.a., to begin, to take
origin, to start, I., 4,7.
Upp-diska, v.a., to dish tip, T.,
454, 3.
Upp-festing, ff the act oj hanging
[a man), II., 110,23.
Upp-fæði, w., bringing up, breeding,
IL, 158,9.
Upp-gangr, jji., stir, disturbance,
over-bearing violence, riotous
domineering, I., 202, 26) 484, g.
Upp-gefa, v.a., to give up, to drop a
matter, to leave off, I., 260, 9 ; to
leave, to part from, to quit, I.,
286,29.
Upp-haf, ?«., ' upheaval,' beginning,
commencement, I., 2^,,^, ^^,\\\
til upphafs, for a beginning^
I., 552,5.
Upp-haf ari (-u), m., originator, per'
petrator, I., 300,91.
Upp-baíiðr, pp. of upphef ja, exalted,
II., 279, 6.
Upp-hafliga, adv., originally, II.,
*^4, 65 146, 24.
Upp-hafning, /., exaltation, I.,
552,9.
Upp-heQa, v.a., to begin, II.,
277,21.
Upp-heldi, n., maintenance, sup-
port, L, 38,5, 86,6, 152, ^7,
404,24-
Upp-heldismaðr, m., supporter, I.,
82,1,390,14.
Upp-högg, n., the act of cutting
open {a door), I., 534,2-
Uppi, adv., up above, at such and
such a point, II., 1 16, 7. — Fig.
tip and astir : befir hann sik uppi,
1-5 50,99; ^áta u. to promulgate,
to publish, I., 458, j.
Upp-kast, n., suggestion, proposal,
I., 216,6. — 2. sum and sub-
stance, II., 228, q.
Upp-kveyktr, ad., enkindled, I.,
Upp-lesinn, ad., read out, 'given
o< I., 88,22; n., 64,9.
Upp-litning, /, spiritual looking
up, rising on high, I., 104,^4,
234,15,
Upp-lokinn./?.yi., unlocked, opened,
II., 86,16-
Upp-nefndr, ad., enumerated, I.,
168, 3.
540
GLOSSARY.
Upp-næmr, ad., easily * lifted^'
easily caught, I., 502, g.
Upj)-rás, f\, sprouting up, growth,
II., 60, J. — 2. commencement, II.,
Upp-reist (-ar), f., redress, repara-
tion, restoration, I., 70, ^^, 228, 13,
278,7; II., 20,7. — 2. ^>oa5í,
pride, glory: víkrþar til einkan-
liga Torii mail, sem er uppreist ok
sæmd yðarra laiida, Thomas erki-
byskup a£ Cancia, I., 322, 23-
Upp-reistr, p.p., raised up, set up,
planted, I., 8, i^. — 2. straight,
standing straight up, II., 146, 20«
— 3. ' stuck up,^ proud, strutting,
II., 144, 12« — 4. unyielding,
lordly, masterful, domineeinng,
II., 174,21. — 5. aspiring, lofty :
u. metnaðr, lofty atnhition, II.,
230, 23.
Upp-risa (-u), f, resurrection, II.,
48, 7, 98, 17.
Upp-risa, v.n., to rise up, to arise,
to bestir one's self, II., 14, 23- —
2. to rise up from the dead, II.,
277,6-
Upp-risinn, p.p., risen again, up
again, on one's feet again, I.,
164,26- — 2. risen again from the
grave, II., 46,12-
Upprisu-dagr, m., day of resurrec'
tion, II., 84, 13.
Upp-ræta, v.a., to root up, to eradir
cate, to refute, I., 148, ^5.
Upp-segja, v.a., to give out, to de-
clare, to pronounce, I., 186, 10-
Upp-sitja, v.n., to sit, to occupy a
seat, to be seated, I., 106,6»
512,9.
Upp-sníða, v.a., to cut up, I.,
430,15.
Upp-taka, v.a., to take up, to ' clear
away ' {the table), I., 250, 15. —
2. to take up, to interpret, to ex-
plain, to put a construction on,
I., 400, 22-
Upp-taka (-tökii),y., confiscation of
property, I., 408, 20- — 2. the
taking up of a saints relics,
translation of a saint, II., 210,17.
Upp-tekiun, p.p., confiscated, L,
450, 3. — 2. taken up, assumed,
adopted : lieldr Hemrekr konungr
uppteknum hætti, I., 452, 9, cfr,
410,2-
\J^^-ieVt,f., confiscation, I., 530,3,
— 2. * taking up,^ construction
put on language addressed to
one, a reply, a rejoinder : orð-
snild bans var ok svá fallinn, at
mikit la undir longum, hverjar
upptektir voru á bafðar, ef bann
talaði meðríka menn, I., 36,12-
Upp-tendra, v.a., to kindle, I.,
430.
14-
Upp-tendran, /'., enkindling, I.,
82,5; II., 232, 5. •
Upp-tækr, ad., forfeited to cotifisca-
tion, I, 332,5.
Upptöku-dýrð, f, the ceremony of
the translation of a saint, II.,
196,2-
Upp-vaktr, p.p-t roused, stirred,
brought into commotion, I., 528, g.
Upp-vöxtr, m., growing up, growth,
I., 18,4, 30,21-
Úr, owe of, I., 34,2,5-
Ú-ráð, n., folly, a wicked purpose,
L, 516,9.
GLOSSARY.
541
"C-ráí^vandr, ad.^ not nice as to the
propriety of one'* s actions, iniquit-
ous, wicked, I., 324, g*
Urð (-ar, -ir),/*., a heap of stones,
I., 34, 6.
Urc5u, &c., see verÖa.
tJ-réttsýni, f, unfairness, I.,
^ 402, 15.
tJr-ganga, /., escape out of, delivery
from, I., 444, 14.
tJ-rikr, ad., * un-mch^ poor, I.,
^ 140,12.
tJr-skuröa, v. a., to decide, I., 142,
27, 286, 11, 294, 23.
tJr-skurðr, m., decision, I., 294, 13.
tJ-ræntr, ad., un-rohbed, un-de-
spoiled, 1.5 118,28'
tJ-samlyndr, ad., not of the same
mind, of a different disposition,
I., 64, 23.
Ú-sannsýni, f, want of considera-
tion, unfairness, ingratitude, I.,
396, 6, 404, g ; injustice, 438, 31.
C-siðir, m. pi., evil manners, i.e.,
abuses, trespasses, II., 263, n-
C-skaddr, JO./?., unscathed, I., 50, 9,
196, 17 ; unÍ7npaired, I., 340, 19.
C-skelfdr, ad., unshaken, not tremb-
ling, not tottering : þdtt kvistir
trésins bifist e^r brotni af storum
stormi, e^r sterkum hvirfilvindi,
stendr þó sjálfr viÖrinn fastr ok
úskelfdr í sinni stöðu, I., 182, 9.
— 2. intrepid, fearless, I., 538, 9.
tJ-skerðr, ad., unshorn, entire, com-
plete, I., 66, 22> 154,1; unim-
paired, L, 310, 20«
Ú-skírr, ad., not bright^ dull, base,
I., 210, 9.
U-skyldr, ad., not related to, I.,
356,2-
tJ-spaiT, only in the neut. uspart
as adv., unstintedly, I., 54,28« —
2. without reserve, I., 174,24,.
tJ-spiltr, ad., * unspoilt,^ flawless :
Ú. mál, business from which flaws
and hindrances are absent, hence,
taka til úspiltra mala = to go
straightway to business (Jiind-
rances and flaws having been re-
moved), I., 452,21»
tJ-spurðr, ad., not asked, I.
530,1-.
Ú-staðfesti,/., want of firmness, I.,
216, 7.
U-S}Tija, in the phrase at úsyDJii,
without restriction, clogged with
no onerous conditions, f'eely :
þvílík er bans ömbun til þess
orlofs, er þér gáfut honum aftr
at úsynju í sitt fóstrland, cfr.,
" ingratus ille, permissœ rever-
sionis im?ne7nor," I., 502, j^.
TJ-særr, ad., not to be sworn, I.
518, 27.
TJt, adv., out, I., 6, 1 ; out abroad,
I., 98, 26 ; út Í frá, out beyond the
point, I., 502, 5.
IJ-tal, n., untold multitude, I.,
340,10.
tJ-talinn, ad,, not enumerated, I.,
168,,.
U-talligr, ad., untold, innumerable,
1., 388, 22'
Utan, jore/?. 1. loith ace, ivithout : n
alia dvöí, I., 278, g ; u. ef, with-
out a doubt, I., 526, ,. — 2. tvith
gen., outside, outside of, beyond :
u. lands, outside of the country,
abroad, I., 38, 19. — Adv., ex-
cept : ekki brc'f gengr út af
garÖiuum utan ineÖ linus vild, I.,
542
GLOSSARY.
I7tan — cont.
48, 4, — 2. except that, but, ( =
Sived. utan) : konungrinn . . .
lætr sera þat líöi hjá honum,
utan býðr Thómasi canceler, at
eftir konuno-liorani vana búi hann
sik, <S:c., I,, 62,22» Iivat heiir at
þýða þessi varygðargrein bins
sæla Thome, utan, í fám orÖum,
at, 86, 16- — ^' beldr, so far from
it, that, on the contrary, not only,
but far rather, I., 20,20? 1^2,23,
354, i8« — fyrir u. — a. outside of:
litinn part af beinum lætr erkiby-
skup fyrir utan kistuna, II., 202, g*
— b. beyond the outside, be-
yond; f. u. haf, beyond the seas,!.,
6, 27- — c. on the outside, outmost,
over all: hann berr fyrir utan
þau klæðl, sem bæði eru hvit ok
hrein, I., 94, jg. — d. tcithout :
hann flýði sitt fostrland fyrir utan
ogn ok afarkosti, I., 276, 17. —
Conj. with subj., lest : hann vill
hafa svá sem skygn augu bæði
bak ok fyrir, utan á eingan veg
megi hann falla, I., 86,13. — ^*
vnless : þessi maÖr er Kan-
tuariensis erkibyskun, utan ek
fallerist, I., 246, 22-
Út-breiða, v.a., to spread out, II.,
60,22-
tJt-brjotr, m., attempt at escaping,
or, at having the point carried, a
shift, I., 284, ig. — 2. outburst
^ of anger, II., 142,23.
tJt-ferð, f, a journey abroad, I.,
320,
2-
2. departure from this
world, II., 172, 12«
Ct-gerð, f, exaction, extortion, I.,
38G, 12-
Tjt-gjald, n., a duty^ due, tax, I.,
^ 138,13.
tJt-greiðsla, f., defrayment, I.,
188, 10-
tjt-hafinn, off?., borne to the grave,
buried, I., 10, 15, 90, 23.
TJt-helling, /!, shedding (of blood),
IL, 274,29, {of tears), II.,
^287,22.
tJt-hleypa, -ley pa, v.a., to gouge out,
to thrust out, II., 102, 13, 283, 31.
IJti, adv., out, in the open, I., 32, 1. —
Fig. hafa úti, to keep up, to main-
tain, I., 60, g. — 2. out, over, at
an end : á hverja nott sem úti var
óttusöngr, I., 98, i^ ; sem em-
bættið er úti, I., 208, 4.
Úti-byrgðr, ad., shut out, excluded,
^ I., 158,17.
tj-tiginn, ad., without honours or
preferments, I., 4,22«
Ut-lagÖr, ad., outlawed, banished,
II., 264,37.
Ut-legð, f., outlawry, banishment,
exile, 1., 6,18, 112,10, 142,9,
234, 22'
UtlegÖar-tími, m., term of banish-
ment, I., 508,1.
Út-leiða, v.a., to bring to an end,
II.,236,8.
Tj t-lendr, ad., strange, foreign, I.,
54, 28) 200, 23.
tJt-lenzkr, ad., id., I., 6, 5, 342, n ;
IL, 136,11.
tJt-leypa = út-hleypa.
tjt-lægðr, jo.p., outlawed, I., 270, 10,
328, 22'
Út-lægja, v.a., to debar, to shut out
from, to exclude : hverr skal þá
svara fyrir kirkjuna, i Cancia, ef
herra Thomam skal útlægja frá
GLOSSARY.
43
0±Ó
Út-1 æg j a — co7it.
fíeirri dagþingan, er hennar réttr
ok nytsemdir skulu trakterast, I.,
328, 17. — 2. to outlaw, to banish,
to exile, L, 270,9, 294,3,322,29-
Tjt-lægr, ad., in exile, I., 350, 3^7.
IJt-reið, f,, royal processions through
the kingdom, II., 214, 3.
tJt-reka, v.a., to drive out, I.,
232, 20«
U t-sigling, f., sailing out, sailing
through (/^arröít's), I., 460, 2-
Ct-skýra, v.a., to eæplain, I., 38,7.
Ct-stÍDga, v.a., to gouge out, II.,
, 102, j2.
Ct-vegr, m., device, design, plan,
scheme^ arrangement, I., 264, ^^,
278, 14, 280, 15, 298, 23, 326,2,, 414,
12» — 2. support, shift, livelihood :
þeir voru aðrir af bans frændum,
at heldr vildu leita ser útvega enn
kæra sik fjrir honum, I., 350,9.
Út-þröngva, v.a., to force out, I.,
526
' 7-
tJ-vani, m., a bad habit, I., 280, jj^.
— 2. abuse, abuses, I., 134, 10,
416,23.
(J-vanr, ad., unaccustomed to, I.,
246, 14 ; — unacquainted with, I.,
326,23-
tJ-varr, ad*, not aware, unwary,
occurs only in the phrases : meÖ
úvöru, I., 300, 17 ; at úvöru, I.,
426,25; ^* úvörum, I., 374, 4 ; all
meaning unawares, all of a sud-
den,
tJ-venja,^., evil habit, wickedness,
I., 234, 12- — 2. abuse, I., 118, q,
^ 236, 10.
Ú-verðr, ad., unioorthy, unfit, I.,
112,5.
TJverSugr, ad., id., 172,3. — 2. un-
deserved: at úverÖugii, undeser-
^ vedly, L, 142, 17.
U-vígðr, ad., unconsecrated, I.,
^68,14. ^
Ú-víkjanligr, ad., headstrong, un-
yielding, I., 338,9,416,13.
\j-\i\i,m., ' un-ivilfulness,' at úvilja,
unintentionally, against one's
will, I., 6,22-
U-viljandi, adv., not willing, tinin-
tentionally^ I., 350,2-
U-vinr, m., enemy, I., 176, n,
354, 12«
tJ-viss, ad., uncertain, I., 114, 4.
U-vitandi, pres. p., not knowing^
unaware^ in ignorance of, I.,
264,13,526,14.
U-vitr, ad., unwise, foolish, I.,
246, 23.
tJ-vitugr, ad., ignorant, I., 238, jq.
Ú-vizka,/.,/ö%, I.,212,i.
U-vænligr, ad., unpromising, un-
encouraging, I., 414,5.
TJ-vænligra, comp. adv., more un-
promisingly : segja eigi úvæn-
ligra af sinni ferð, having no
icorse news to tell, ^c, I. 494, 25.
U-værÖ, f, irritation, itching, I.,
066, 25.
lí-vöru, see úvarr.
Uxi (-a, pi. yxn), m., an ox, I.,
400, 12.
Uxu, see vaxa.
Ú-þolHgr, ad., unendurable, intoler-
able, I., 6,6.
TJ-þoran, ?i., faint -hcartedness, I.,
142,21,200,21.
Ú-þrotnandi, prcs. p., un-uuistinf/,
II., 252,31.
544
GLOSSARY.
tT-þyílíkr, ad., * un-that-Vike^ in the
figure : eigi ú., 7iof, unlike that, I.,
414, 25.
V.
Vaféi, see vefja.
Yafðr and vafiSr, p.p. of vefja,
wrapped, I., 510, 5 ; II., 271,18«
"S^'afningr (-s, -ar), ?n., wrappings,
II; 54, 1,.
Vagga (vöggu), f., a cradle, I.,
14, 20, 348, n.
Vagl-eygr, ad., wall-eyed, I.,
232,24.
Yaka (t), v.n., to he awake, to
keep awake, to watch, I., 390, ^q ;
II., 146, 10 • ^^' yfii'j ^^ ' wake,^
to watch over a dead body, II.,
158, 16.
Yakandi, prob. a wrong reading
for vaknandi : her með endr-
lifnuðu andir lærðra manna sem
vaknendr meS Jakob af þungum
svefni, i.e., herewith came to life
again, the souls {or spirits) of
learned men, as if waking up
with Jacob from a heavy slum-
ber, II., 88, 13.
Yakna (að), to wake up, to awake,
I., 390, 20 ; II., 14, 23.
Yakr, ad., watchful, I., 486, 19,
284, 20.
Yakrliga, adv., early awake, early,
* matutine,' L, 100, jg. — 2. watch-
fully, heedfuUy, carefully, I.,
426,4.
Yakta (aÖ), v.a., to watch, L, 46, 20»
484, g ; V. sik, to take care of one's
self 11., 20s, ^.
Yaktan (-av),f,iuatchfulness, heed,
attention, I., 112, 1.
Yakti, see vekja.
Yald (-S, void), 7i., power, ovina v.,
power of enemies, I., 256, 17 ;
spec, secular, royal power, I.,
6, 8» 12- — 2. office, I., 480, 17.
— 3. reign, I., 26,9,42,15.
Yalda (veld, olli, supine valdit), v.a.,
to cause, to occasion, I., 90, 13,
316,11,444,2,448,26.
Valdr, /)./). ofvelja, elected, I., 90, g,
364,14; II., 275,27,28; chosen,
elect, I., 44, 25, 366, 13. — 2. choice^
excellent, exquisite, II., 212, iq.
Yallari (-a, -ar), m., a pilgrim, a de-
stitute wanderer, I., 500, iq.
Yalds-bref, n., commission, I.,
72, 25-
Yalds-dagar, m.pl., days of power,
reign, I., 90, iQ, 122,14.
Y aids-hand, f, the hand, arm of
poiver, I., 420, 25. .
Yalds-maÖr, on., one who bears au-
thority, person in authority, croivn
officials, justices, ^ capitales mi-
iiistri,' toivn- authorities, I., 184, n,
298,3; II., 104,29; valdsmenn ok
almúgi, high and low, aristocracy
and commonalty, II., 174, 7,
178,19; af einum valdsmanui var
alt bans ráðunejti ( ?) I., 1 12, 15.
Yalinn,^./?. r?/' velja, chosen, elect,
II., 240, 3. — 2. choice, excellent,
rö7'e, I., 108,2, 374,30.
Yallar, see völlr.
GLOSSARY.
545
Valska {gen. völsku),y., the French
language : hann svara^i aa latinv
en liiun spurÖi aa wavlskv : " at
ille Gallice interroganti respon-
dit sermone Latino^^ II., 277, 4.
Vanaí5r, p.p. of vana, to deprive of
a limb, disabled^ maimed , I.,
230,21.
Van-biiinn, ad., unprepared, I.,
366, 22«
Yanda (að), v. a., prop, to execute
loith care ; but occurs only in
the phrase v. urn, to censure, to
rebuke, I., 180, yj, 344, 15.
Yanda-mál, n. pi., grave, important,
difficult matters, I., 370, 4 ; II.,
52,3.
Vandar, see vöndr.
Vandi (-a), m., habit, custom, I.,
280, 21»
Vandi (-a), m., difficulty, perplexity,
embarrassment, I., 150, ^, 252, i,
292, c). — 2. rish, responsibility,
I., 38,4, 80,16,498,7.
Vand-kvæði, n., a matter of diffi-
culty or perplexity, I., 142, 23,
260, 11. — 2. vexation, trouble,
I., 196,21,444,10.
Vandliga, adv., carefully, II.,
2/9, 10, 28o, 3g.
Vand-læti, 71., zeal, jealousy, I.,
36,21, 112,2, 174,21, 266,1.
Vandr, ad., difficult, hard, puz-
zling, I., 28, 13.
Vandr, ad., evil, I., 328 07 ; II.,
50, 1,.
Vand-ræ^i, n. pi., troubles, diffi-
culties. I., 180,11.
Vandskapar-fullr, ad., full of wich-
edness, I., 514, k^.
K .541.
Vands-ligr, ad., mischievous, I.,
166, 29.
Vand-virkt,y., close attention, carCy
I., 108, 21 : II., 200, 20.
Vand-viiktr, ad., minute, detailed,
careful, II., 128, ig.
Van-dygS, /., disloyalty ; þetta
tilfelli þýða svá lians öfundar-
menn, at nú sýnist fyrir manna
augum, hversu hann ferr ráðlauss
ok rasaudi meS sinni vandygð ok
þrályudi, t., 222, 13.
Vand-yikligr, ad., judicious, care-
ful : takit iipp . . . staÖfesti af
davða bans ok af taknum hans
vandyrkligrar avmbonar : take ye
up . . . constancy, seeing his
death and the tokens of his judi-
cious reward, II., 275, g.
Vand-yrkr, ad., careful, punctilious,
closely attentive in one^s icork,
IL, 262, 21.
Van-færr, ad., infirm, II., 138,3.
2. — unfit, unable, disqualified,
I., 292, s, 306,2,.
Van-lieilsa,/!, illness, II., 152,24 >
ill-health, II., 90, ig.
Van-hluta, ad., deprived of one's
share, wronged : stefnura ver
yðr alia samt 11 pp á páfans garÖ
ok heilagrar kirkju dom, er . . .
þeim hjálpar er vanhluta vcrOa,
" quod etiam ne faciatis, matrem
nostram, omnium refugium op-
pressorum, Ilomanam ccclcsiam
appcllo;' I., 206, 5.
Vani (-a, -ar), m., wont, custom,
habit, I., 62,03; ^'^'^'^' vana, as
usual, I., 30,14; usually, 1.,
426, .>2. — 2. royal custom, " co/i-
suetudo,' I., IGO. ^, passim.
M M
546
GLOSSARY.
Vau-máttr, in., failing^ waning
might, infirmity^ yeeblcness, I.,
202,1,; ÍL, 100,1-.
Yan-megn (-s), w., weakness, I.,
118,03.
Yan-megn, ad., feeble, II., 76,17.
Yan-megnast, med., to lose strength,
I., 234-, 18 ; to lack strength, to
fail, I., 158,9.
Yan-metnaðr, in., disfavour, dis-
grace, I., 208, 21.
Yan-mettr, ad., ' under-fed,^ not
having eaten one's fill, I., 106, 30.
Yann, see vinna.
Yanr, ad., wont, accustomed, I.,
264,9.
Yan-rækja (t\ v.a., to neglect, I.,
298,5; n.,'128,5.
Van-rækt, f, negligence, heedless-
/^65^,1., 104,;, 362,5.
Van-sami, n., dislionour, disgrace,
L,402,6.
Yansi (-a), dishonour, discredit, I.,
42,10,162,1.
Yan-signaðr, ad., un-blessed, god-
forsaken, II., ö^, 21.
Yau-skilningr, ;;/., misunderstand-
ing, miscojistruction, I., 148, 15.
Van-stilla (t). v.a., to disturb, I.,
202, 2,.
Van-stilli, f, want of restraint,
intemperateness, recklessness, I.
278,10,280,6.
Van-stiltr, ad., reckless, I., 142, 13,
144, g, 178, 16- — 2. unrestrained,
uncontrolled, I., 528, 99; II..
126, 1,.
Van-sæmd, /.J dishonour, I., 164, 3.
Vanta (að), v.a., to want, to fail,
I., 74, 94.
Yan-trúnaðr, m., disloyalty: þeir
sveri þann eið, at gera konunginum
einoran vantrúnað í sinni bnitt-
o
veru, " assecurabunt quod nee in
eundo nee in moram faciendo
perquirent malum vel damnum
regi rel regno,^' I., 296, g.
Van-TÍrða, v.a., to disregard, I.,
432,6. — 2. to slight, to dis-
honour, I., 276, 13.
Vau-virSa (-u, -ur), f, dishonour,
I., 172, 1, 9, 430,26-
Yan-virSr, ad., dishonoured, I.,
186,21.
Yar, see vera.
Yár, gen. pi. of ek.
V'ár (-s), n., spring, II., 6Q, iq.
Yara (varði, vart), v. impers., to be
aware, 1, 41 4,15, 438,95; H., 292, 3.
Yara (að), v.a., to warn, I, 252, q,
med.,and reflex, to warn one's self,
to heed, to beware, I., 110, 19; I.,
490,18.
Yarða (aÖ), v. i?npers., to imjjort, to
concern, L, 30,24, 80,5, 382,9;
II., 266,2.
Yarð-hald, n., a prison, I., 8,2«
Varð-veita (tt), v.a., to preserve, I.,
134,28,206,20; II., 284, 24. — 2.
to observe, to pay heed to, I.,
112,11.
Yargr (-s, -ar), m.^ a wolf, I.,
142,24.
Yarla, adv., scarcely, hardly, I.,
20,17, 106,20, 258; 27.
Yarmr (vörm, varmt), ad., warm,
I., 486,5.
Varnaðr (-ar), m., warning, I.,
364, 94.
Varnaðr (-ar), m., jn-ojyerty, I.,
212,18, i^62, 6, íí06, 29.
GLOSSARY.
547
Varnar, varnir, see vörn. 1
Varpa (aÖ), v.a., to throio, tojling,
to hurl, to cast, with dat., I.,
208, 19, 408, 285 510, 22 5 with ace.,
II., 136, 13. — N.B., in the pas-
sage : sem honum varpaði niÖr í
óÖstreymit, I., 32, 22) ^he reading
should possibly be varp, pret. of
verpa, impers., a later scribe
might have modernised the clas-
sical construction by substituting
the iveak imperf. for the strong.
Varr, ad., wary, heedful, I., 110, 15.
Várr (vár, várt), pron. poss., our,
ours, I., 22, 1, passim,
Varra-lauss, ad., lipless, I., 230, 23.
Váru, varum, see vera, :
Var-úð (-ar), f, ivariness, heed,
moderation, I., 48, 17.
VarygÖ (-ar), f, wariness, heed, I.,
80, 2, 102, 26 ; til varygðar,/or the^
sake of precaution, in anticipa-
tion of an emergency, I., 350, 12«
Varygðar-grein, f, matter of pre-
caution, I., 86,15,
Vás, n., sea toil, I., 246, ^^, 262, 26-
Vata (-S, vötn), n., water, I., 34, 2,
244, 1, 256, 6.
Vatn-þrungiim, ad., dropsical, II.,
22G, 17.
Vax, n., wax, II., 236, jg.
Vaxa (vex, ox, (vox) -uxum, jxi,
vaxinn), v.n., to groio, to increase,
L, 16,26, 38,12, 442,22, 476,9;
XL, 60, 21.
Vaxtar, see vöxtr. '
Ve(5r (-s), n., weather, I., 24G, s-
Ve^r-fall. the turn, the look of the
iceather, I., 486,2«
Veð-setja, v.a., to mortgage, I.,
220, 8.
Yefja (vef, vaföa-vöfóum, veféi,
vafðr), v.a,, to fold, to wrap,
I., 234,6, 246, 11; med. er svá
vafðist afskapliga hverr með
öðrum, became entangled, em-
broiled, implicated, I., 454, n.
Yega (veg, vá-vágum, vægi, veginn),
v.a., to fight : sá maÖr, er hrein-
lifist Í veröldinni, þýðist fjrir
þann riddara, er vegr meÖ sverði
ok skjöld á víÖum velli, I., 50, q,
2. to kill, to slay, I., 142, i^,
354, 12, 520, 24.
Vegar-lengd, f^ length of journey,
II., 100,2-
Vegar-vás, n., toil of travelling, I.,
2/2, 24.
Vegar-visir, m., guidance, I., 290, 10.
Yegligi', ad., noble, I., 104, n, 122,
21, 416,1^.
Yeg-ljost, n, ad., as adv., light
enough to discern where the road
runs, I., 254,23-
YegmóÖr, ad., tired, I., 130,1-
Vegna, originally contracted from
veguna, ace. pi. of vegr, in the
phrase : á vegna, 07i the ways of,
on behalf of Commonly, through
confusion of cases, the form
figures as gen. pi. of vegr, as if
the nom sing, were vegii; cfr.
þegu-þegna, in phrases like:
beggja vegua, on both sides, 1.,
174, 11 ; SÚ frægð flýgr út í ríkit
fjögnrra vegna, rumour Jiieth
abroad to all four quarters, I.,
86,30, sinna vegna, on his own
part, I., 208, 13.
Vegr (-ar, but vegs, II., 166, 17, -ir),
m., a IV ay, road, vikr .svá til veg-
iuum, at bann geingr lija kirkjii
M M 2
548
GLOSSARY.
Vegr — cont.
nokkurri, I., 50, 30 ; alia vega,
from everywhere^ I., 388, 23' — 1^-
on every side, I., 206,9. — 2.
path of Ufe, I., 18, 12? 24, ^7, 366,
jg. — 3. course : bið ek með allri
mjkt, at þér \ikit annan veg, that
you adopt a different course, I.,
G4
> 26«
Phrases : gauga til vegar,
to take a course, to proceed to a
settlement, I., 146, 2 ; gera veg a,
to proceed ivith, T., 286, 20-
Vegr (s), in,, honour, glory, I., 80,
15, 282, 95. — 2. hoasty pride, II.,
290, 15. '
Vcg-sama (að), v.a., to honour, to
(jlorify, I., 18,10» 170, 13 ; II.,
202,23.
Veg-semd (-ar, -ir), f., state, cerc-
vdony ; gjörÖist sú kirkjiivígsla
með mikiUi vegserad, I., 136, g- —
2. reverence, honour, I., 150, 24?
504,15; n., 204, 21.
Vei, n., icoe, I., 236, g, 252, 19.
Veiði-hundr, m., hunting dog, I.,
30,26«
Veiði-maðr, m., a hunter, I., 238, jg,
476,8.
Veiði-skapr, m., ^ game,' It., 140,22«
Yeikja (t), v.a., to weaken, occurs
only in the refl., to become feeble,
to fail, I., 166, 15.
Veikleikr, m., iceakness, I., 164, 95?
520,19.
Veikr, ad., weak, feeble, I., 300, 13.
Veita (tt), v.a., to show, to display,
to present: erkibyskupi veitir
liann oinga virÖing, I., 258, 29. —
2. to yield, to allmv, to concede :
baÖ haun Theobaldum, at liann
bkykli aftr takast í haus þjónuslii.
Veita — cont.
Enn erkibyskup vildi þat eigi
veita, I., 58, 17. — 3. to grant, to
bestow, to confer upon, to favour
loith : gengr Thomas ... til
borðs með svá gott mannval, at
fám liöfðingjum veittist þvílíkt,
I., 106, 5 ; þat er einn rikasti staÖr,
er Frakka kouiingr veitir hoDiim í
sínu riki, I., 132, 19, ek særi mína
sál í fordæmda píuu, ef ek segi
þat vald fyrir konungligar ógnir
upp gefauda, er vér tókum í and-
ligri stjórn, Guði veitanda, I.,
198, 1 ; vel er ok minniligt hví-
likan veg ok virÖing konungriim
veittiyör, I., 282,26- — v. fylgd,
L, 214, 26» V. fylgi, L, 158,22,
to yield aid, assistance. — 4.
to convey, to transfer, to ap-
point : skrifar hann til Alexan-
drum pafa, ... at bann muni
veita boniim til Lunduna þanii
byskup Í rikinu, er vitrastr væri,
I., 44, 4. — 5. to bring forward,
to render, to deliver: þysja inn
konungsmenn meÖ þeim boðskap,
.... at hann . • . . . veiti þat
skilríki nil í stað, at eingum kon-
ungsins varnaði liari bann siikkat
an órloíi, I.,212, 17. — 6. to bestow
on, to apply to : skipit þá legatos
af ycSru sæti, er þessum málavöxt-
iim veiti lögligt prof, I., 282,2»
7. to administer : bann legst
mörgu sinni lágt til jarðar undir
þann lima, er bans triinaðarklerkr
veitir bonum, I., 98, 2- — 8. to
bring upon, to visit wÁth, to in-
flict: þótt visum manni se þat
Ijóst, fyrir þá styrjöld er nú veitt-
GLOSSAEY.
549
Veita — cont.
ist kristninni, I., 130, 12; v. á-
hlaiip, to visit with a raid, I., 60,
13. — 9. to offer, to bring as
offering : ma hverr vitr inaSr
liugleiða, hversii dásamlig lof
þeir mundu Guði veita, er her
sá iipp a, I., 34, 4. — 10. to bestoio
as bounty or charity, to give : því
mátti liann mikit veita ok niarga
liugga at berra konimgrinn veitir
honnm sérliga til af tektar þat riki,
er iiýir menu kalla banmiam,
I., 56, 7 ; bann veit ok í siiiu
brjosti, bversu mikinn vilja
bann be fir til at veita meira Guðs
ölmusum enn aðrir fjrir bonum,
I., 118, ig. — 11. to treat to, to
entertain : gleÖizt af því gózi, er
ek ma yðr veita, I., 250, iq. — 12.
to affront, to offer an insult : at i
þessu máU gerist þá enn Ijosara^
hversu þat samir, ef nokkur kenni-
maðr fyllist þess, at gripa iindir
sik kirkjiinnar frumtign í Kann-
cia, domdraga bennar formaun,
eðr veita bonum einbvern vansa,
I., 42, 9.
Veizla (-U, -ur), f., grant, endow-
onent : a£ þvílikri konungsins
vináttu ok veizlum margföUlum
lögðu Tbómasi margir libjartan
bug, I., 56, 14. — 2. bounty, cha-
rity, þótt vær bafim lífs næring af
GuÖsforsjó okgóðra nanna veizlu,
I., 342, 13 ; síðast fiunr baun
Frakka konung,þvi at bans veizlor
ok velgjörðir váro svá þakkandi,
I., 474, 23. — 3. bestoivul, grant,
gift : æ skipaÖist til meiri gæzku
bans bjarta, sem bænarorÖin upp-
Yeizla — cont,
lesin gengu til vaxtar mcS veizl-
um ok ámiuningum várs Drott-
ins gjafa, I., 88,22; ^^S^^' liann
skyldugan at ömbuna Guði meÖ
öðrum bætti sínar veizlur, I.,
426,12- — 4. a cheer, an enter-
tainment, a banquet {cfr. Engl,
ivassail), I., 30, j^, 45*2,25; H.,
108, 19.
Vekja (vek, vakti-vöktum, vekti,
vaktr), v,a., to loakc, to rouse from
slumber, I., 232, 17. — 2. to stimu-
late, to prompt, to animate : ma
þat vel skilja bversu þvilík tákn
mandu vekja sjúka menu at sækja
Tbómam erkibyskup, II., 82,5.
— 3. to stir up, to rouse, to ex-
cite : reiðr maíSr vekr þrætur, I.,
528,5.
Vel, adv., well, I., 2, i-, pt^^ssim.
Veldi (-s), 71., power, I., 210, jo-
Yebgerö (-ar, -iv),f., hospitality, 1.,
462, 28-
Velgerningr, -gjörningr, in., mercy,
IL, 14, n (272,2,).
Vel-gjörÖ = velgerð, I., 474, 93.
Velja (vel, valda-völdum, veldi,
valdr, valinn), v.a., to choose, I.
172, 29 ; to elect, I., 364, - ; to se-
lect, I., 56,1 ; II., 2,3. j\lcd.
veljast til, to join together; 11.,
12, 18 ; to band together, I.,
514,8.
Vel-kominn, ad., welcome, I., 120, i-,,
250,17.
Veita (velt, valt-ultum, ylti, oltinn),
v.n., to tumble, to roll, to come
doicn, to fall into, I., 92, 5 ; 11.,
150, 17.
550
GLOSSAEY.
Velta (t), v.a,, to roily to toss about,
I., 162,22? '>ned. to lorithe about ^
IL, 282,5.
Velting (-ar), /*., tossing at sea,
L, 246, 13.
Venda (d)^ v.n,, to icend, to turn :
V. aftr, to turn back, I., 60,3,
120,13,410,26; V. Í veg, to turn
on one's way, to wend one^s loay,
I., 68,3, 94, 1. — v.a. with dat.,
to give a turn, to cause to turn :
komir þii sjálfr slíkr í konungs
lierbergi, mun hann venda sínu
sverði upp á þinn háls, I., 210,27«
V. til, to turn towards, to direct
towards, I., 282, 20? 290, 13. — v.
um. — a. to turn round, to mahe
a direct change : vendir hann
um sinu siðlerði, I., 94, ^q. — b.
to reverse : þat er hann hefir statt
um sinn, mun hann eigi auðveld-
liga um venda, I., 280, 12- — c.
to twist about, to garble : hann
vendir um orðum sínum ok gerir
því annan lit, z.c, he garbled the
Jormulated reyly of the bishops,
I., 154, 7.
Vendir,/?/. í^/'vöndr, II., 60, jg.
Venja (ven, vandi-vöndum, vendi,
vaninn), v.a., to ' wean^ to ac-
custom, to discipline^ I., 98, 5. —
Med., to be wont, to he in the
habit of, I., 32,8, 178,7,282,20,
420,4.
Venjuligr, ad., wonted, usual, cus-
tomary, I., 28, 22, 346, 20-
Vér,p/. o/eg.
Vera (pres. em, imperf. var, var-
um, váru, váro, vorum, voru,
subj. j)^'^^' se, 2. pi. séiÖ, I.,
384, 15, imperf væri, væra, I.,
Vera — cont.
486, 21 ; supine, verit), the verb
substantive, to be. — 1. to be in
existence, to exist : i þenna tíma
var sá maðr í Lundiuiun, I.,
12, g. — 2. expressive of qualities,
endowments and the like : vera
djarfr, I., 68,10; gull er fegrst
ok dýrast yfir allan malm, I.,
104,18; bæði þessi hjón voru
góörar ættar, I.^ 12, ^q ; svá var
hann furðuliga minnigr, I., 28, 14 ;
very frequent. — 3. in the func-
tions commonly ascribed to it as
an auxiliari/ for forming the
passive mood, it really indicates
qualifying conditions : er svá
margfaldliga var strengd í krún-
unnar þjónustu, I., 68, n ; ex-
ceedingly frequent. — 4. indica-
tive of continuation, sojourn,
dwelling, and the like : sem þeim
er veujuligt, er fyrir litlu hafa í
skóla verit, I., 28, 23 ; heiir verit
tvo vetr með hirðsiÖum, I., 34, 13.
— 5. pointing to general objec-
tive state or condition : eftir hans
dag var þvi líkt,' sem, &c., I.,
46,1.
Veraldar-elska, f, worldliness, I.,
406,2.
Veraldligr, ad., earthly, II., 160, 4 ;
worldly, L, 278, 22 ; secular, I.,
130, ig, 182, 25«
Verð (-s), n., value, price, II.,
122,11, 218,5, 19- — 2. ransom,
I., 344, 7.
VerÖa (verð, varÖ- urðum, yr^i,
(vyrÖi,) orðinn (vorðinn)), v.n., to
become., L, 64,io, 128, 12, 454,9;
V. fyrir, to happen to be in the loay.
GI^OSSARY.
551
Verða — cont.
I., 534, iQ. — 2. to he obliged^
must needs, I., 10, 17, 30, ^g.
Verðleikr, m., merit, desert, due, I.,
4,6, 508, 10; II-5 '^2>25 S^5 5-
Verðr, ar/., worth, I., 88,9, 394,27«
Verð-skylda (að), v.a., to deserve,
I., 364, 21 ; V. sér, to eanz, 392, 9.
Verðugr, ad., deserved, I., ^Q,^^
88,15.
Verja (ver, varða-vörÖum, verði,
Yarinn), v. a., to defend, to pro-
tect, I., 208, 29, 234, 27 ; II.,
266,23.
Verk (-sj, n., a deed, an act, action,
I., 192, 15, 406, 15. — 2. work, in
the special sense of loriting, com-
p)Osition, L, 4,7, 52,21-
Verk-færi, n., tool, implement,
instrument, II., 162, ^5.
Verk-mikill, *ad., paiuful, severely
aching, II., 96, 20«
Verkr (-jar, -ir), m., ' wark,^ an
ache, pain, II., 98, 23» 283, n.
Yerk-reki, m., doer, commissioner,
I., 148,6; II., 22,12.
Vemd (-ar -ir), f, ivard, defence,
protection, I., 60, g, 218, 21,
228, 12, 296, 2, 530, n.
Vernda (að,) v.a., to icard, to de-
fend, to protect, I., 148, 10, 170, 3,
206,8,266,15.
Verndari (-a), in., a defender, a
protector, II., 238, 26«
Verndar-maðr, m., id., II., 284, 27.
Verpa (verp, Aarp-iirpum, yrpi, orp-
inn), v.a. with dat., to throw, to
fling, to hurl, I., 180, 19, 426, i^^.
Verr, comp. adv., worse, I., 202, jq-
Verri, comp. of vondr or illr, I.,
548,9.
Versa-skifti, n.pL, alternate verses :
lesa eftir versaskifti, of two per-
sons reading out a psalm each
taking every alternate verse, II.,
66, 25.
Versi (-a, -ar), m., a verse, I.,
238, 12-
Veröld (veraldar, -aldir), f, the
ivorld, I., 2, 9, 16, 17, 19, passim.
Vestr, adv., west, westward, I., 22, 3.
Vestr-hálfa, f, ivestern 2Vorld-
quarter, occidence, ivestern
Europe, II., 275, 13.
Yesöld (vesaldar,-ir),y., woe, misery,
forlorn condition, I., 54, 99, 196, .^,
348,15,518,9.
Vetr (vetrar,j9/. vetr), m., a winter,
I., 256, !• — 2. ivinter, in the
sense of a year, I., 34, 13, 240, 19.
Yetr-Dætr, f. pi., icinter-nights, the
feast of St. Calixtus, Oct. lath,
I., 240, 15.
Yexti, see vöxtr.
Yeykleiki = veikleiki, II., 150, 22-
YiÖ, and vit, prep, ivifh dat. and
ace. — I. with dat, suggestive of
measured aim; against: miðar
hann vit dao;brimiiini bæði vöxt
bans ok klæðabúnat, I., 62, n. —
II. loith ace. — 1. local: by,
near by : kemr hann til grá-
munkaklaustrs, er stendr vit stað
bins beilaga Audomari, I., 256, 3.
— 2. in subjective relations ; by,
near, with, beside: varla mátti
þann fá ... at eigi béidi eina
vinkonu sér við bond, I., 20, 13.
3. in comparative relations ;
against : ciiigi erkibyskup i Can-
cia bafði gengit nieir enii til
bálftí vit Thómam {in alnisgiv-
552
GLOSSARY.
Yið — coat.
ings), I., 100, 10« — 4. towards^
Lat. erga: þar mættist elska
Giiðs vit maunkiudiiia, ok hati*
JúÖa, T., 70, iq; hlýðni vit Eoma
kirkju, I., 90,22 '■> lif^fuan \v6 sinn
formann, I., 408, ^. — 5. by, icith,
be/ore, Lat, apud and coram :
frægist til meÖalgöngu við Guð,
I., 16, 15 ; til árnaÖarorðs við
sælan Thomas, I., 4, g. — 6. at
{on the occurrence of), fellr á kné
vit hvert heilags manns nafn, I.,
228, 28« — 7. icith, suggestive of
interchange, after verba loquendi
et declarandi, frequent . — 8. adv.
in phrases as hafast vit, vitam
dcgere, I., 28, jg ; bregða vit, to
start, I., 52, g, &c.
Viða (-U, -iir), /., a halter, a hang-
incut's rope, II., 114, 12-
Vííia, adv., far and wide, I.j 2, ^j,
88, 1, 448, g.
Við-bragð, n., mien, presence, ap-
pearance, II., 285, 30- — 2. turn
toivards one, favourable, good
turn, I., 258,6.
Víðerni (-s), n., expanse, II., Q2, 4.
Viö-frægð,/.,/rt?«í?, I, 350,18-
Við-komning, f, the state of being
inwardly moved, I., 510, 25.
ViS-laga, f, formulated penalty in
case of non-compliance, I., 358, 20,
408, 16.
Við-kvæmiligr, ad., fitting, proper,
II., 156,14.
Við-]endr, ad., possessed of extensive
domains, reigning over vast terri-
tories, I., 42, iQ.
Viðr = við, prep., I., 500, 95.
YiÖr (-ar, -ir), m., a stetn, a bole oj
a tree, I., 182, 9 ; II., 146, 20,22-
Yíðr, ad., loide, easy, loose {of
clothes), I., 94,19, 236,4. — 2.
wide, broad {of cloths), I.,
14,24,. — 3. large, huge {of a
ring), I., 476,25. — 4. broad, ex-
tensive {of lands), I., 60, 9.
YiÖr-ganga, v.a.., to confess, I.,
296, 2.
YiÖr-komDÍng,y., the state of being
inwardly moved, I., 164, 22«
YiÖr-kvæmiliga, adv., bejittingly,
n.,228,6.
YiÖr-mæli, n., conversation, confer-
ence, I., 328, 10-
Yið-ræ?>a, /., conversation, I., 28, n ;
IL, 288, 17.
YiÖ-sjón,y., warning, f., II., 40, §•
Yi^-tal, n., conversation, conference,
L, 326, 14.
Yið-væri, on., the ivhercwithal to
maintain life, II., 158, 2-
Vigor, ad., ordained, in orders, I.,
70, 6j 348,7 ; hallowed, consecrated,
II., 154,23.
Vigja (Ö), v.a., to hallow for
sacred use : páfinn .... lætr
þegar gera meÖ stóru lérefti einn
grámunka búnat ; þenna vígir
hanii, I., 314,6. — 2. to ordain
{a priest), to consecrate {a
bishoj^), to crown {a king), L,
42,23,86,31, 110,21,124,6.
Yigsla (-U, -iir),y., an ordination, a
consecration, royal crowning, I.,
40,21, 110,21,282,27.
Yígslu-ííiðir, m., a consecrator, I.,
180,26.
Yígslu-gerð, -gjörð, f, the act or
ceremony of ordination, consecra.
GLOSSARY.
ooó
Vígslu-gerð — C071Í.
tion, L, 88,11, 110,16; II.,
"^i 115
132, 13-
Vígslu-gull, 7^., consecration ring^
I., 306,27; coronation ring^ I.,
476,27."
Vígslu-hjartteign, f.^ miraculous
church consecration^ II., 134, ig.
Vígslu-hönd,y!, consecrating hand,
Í., 110, IS.
Vígslu-pallr, m., degree in holy
orders, II., 226, lo, 270, g.
Vigslu-sonr, m., one icho receives
consecration at the hands of
another, I., 180,27-
Víg-tól, implements of icar, I.,
552, 21.
Yik (-r, -r), a ' icick,' a bight, a
bay, I., 478, 28-
Vika (-U, -ur), f, a week, I., 86, 30«
— 2. a mile, II., 148, 13.
Yikja (vik, veik-YÍkum, viki, vikit),
V. impers., to be of a sinuous ap-
pearance, to turn about, to ivind :
vikr til veginum, the road xoinds,
L, 50, 30; veik svá við leiÖinni,
id., II., 94,22' — v.n., to trend, to
tend, to point, to verge : ríÖr hann
lit af þeim stað í þá half u, er víkr
til Kanciam, I., 84,20; gleymir
hann sannri YÍtrii, er víkr til
himinríkis, þá er hann vefr sitt
Imgskots auga í veraldar hégóma,
I., 234, 5. — 2. to turn in a cer-
tain direction, to change one's
course or line of conduct : bið ek
með allri mýkt, at þér vikit annan
veg, I., 64, 26« — ^*-^- 'it-'ith dat., to
turn, to give direction to, to de-
termine, to change : skal nú þessu
næst YÍkja málinii til þeira tramm-
Víkja — cont.
ferÖa, er haas sýslu ok ylirfcrð
til heyra, L, 116, 22 ; ^^ því réttara
megi liann öllum lutiiin skipa, sem
hann skilur framar, hversu til
geiigr ok efni víkr iiiálunum, I.,
38, 9 ; Thomas vikr sínu meðferði
. . . verÖr hann nii at víkja sinu
meÖferÖi, I., 30, 9, jg ; leitar hann
þess vegar, ef nokkurr . . . innan
lands feingi vikit honum, I., 376,
17 ; víkja sér, to move one's self
to move, 1.5 26,22- — 3. to yield, to
take an impression, I., 550, 9,. —
In prepositional phrases : v. af tr,
to turn bach, I., 12, 4. — v. at, to
turn towards (one person towards
another), I., 318,8; H., 112,17.
— b. to concern, to refer to, I.,
44, 19. — c. to impose upon {as a
duty) : almennilig stjornheilagrar
kristni Ær at yðr þeiri forsjó yfir
andligum sonum yðnim, at þeirer
vel vilja, styrkist, I.,274, jg (IL,
252, 5). — d. to advert to, to
notice, to dilate on, I., 400, 21. —
V. brutt, to turn away, to retire,
I., 102, 1. — V. eftir, to follow, to
comply with, I., 310, iq. — v. frá,
to turn, to drive, to chase away,
II., 122, ig. — b. to turn away
from, to depart from, to desert,
I.J 64, 19. — c. to depart from, to
leave {a point in the thread of a
narrative), I., 318,28' — "^' til, ^o
hint at, to point to, I., 56, 24. —
b. to signify, to indicate, to stipU'
late, I., 312,9. — c. to allude to,
I., 350, 19. — d. = v.* at, c. : hvi
sýnist yÖr, vitruiu möiiimin, at
vikja til mill sva luifiim Itituni, I.,
554
GLOSSARY.
Víkja— cow^.
78, Q. — Pass, víkjast til, to be re-
ferred /o, to he returned again to,
I., 334,
21'
Vikjanligr, ad., of a soft, yielding
or impressionable nature {of mat-
ter), I., 540, 24- — 2. disposed to
give in, to yield, II., 34, 9.
Vikna (að), v. inchoat., to give loay,
to yield, I., 164, 5, 350, g. — v.
fyrir, to give in, II., 28, 21 ; v. til,
id., L, 488, g.
Viku-dagr, m., day of the week, II.,
238.13. ^
Yild (-ar, -ir),^., "^ willing ^ free will,
own choice, I., 210, ^i, 426, 30. —
2, good ivill, consent, permission,
I., 48,4, 134,22; n., 140,15.
Yildr, ad., choice, excellent, II.,
212,1.
Vili.(vilja), m., will, I., 64, 9.
Yilja (d-), v.a., to ivill, to wish, to
desire, I., 6, 14, 28, ig, 528, 13.
Viljaðr, ad., pleasing to, according
to 07ie^s will, II., 269, 13.
Yiljanliga, adv., wilfully, of one^s
own accord, I., 308, 15.
Yiljugr, ad., willing, ready, I.,
18, g; II., 238,9.
Yilla (t), v.a., occurs only in the
med., to go astray, to err, II.,
275, 25.
Yilla (-U, -wv),ý.,error, iniquity,!!.,
42, 11, 292, 9 ; schism, I., 330, 21-
Yilli-ráða, ad., confounded, !.,
374. 14.
Y'illi-stigr, m., path of error, I.,
406,2; 11., 58,16.
Yilli-svin, n., a wild swine, II.,
16,23.
Yilltr, ad., gone wrong, erring^
straying, !., 236, n.
Yillu-maðr, m., a heretic, !,, 330, 23,
420,4.
Yillu-páíi, m., a schismatic pope,
antipope, I., 92, 5, 352, 7.
Yin = vinr, I., 72, n.
Yin (-s), 71., wine, I., 108, 2, 496, 24.
Yin-ber, ??., ^vine-berry,' the fruit
of the vine, grape : lofandi Guð
ok þat dýröarsamligt vínber, er
honum gaf þvílíkan heilsudrykk
sins verðleiksok ávaxtar, I., 72, 1.
Yinda (vind, vatt-undum, yndi,
undiun), v.a., to ivind, to twine,
to ttvist, I., 232, 3.
Yindr (-ar, -ar), m., ivind, !., 426,
15 5 -^I-> 208, 27«
Yingan (-ar), f, ingratiating, ob-
sequious complaisance, I., 298, 13.
— 2. favour, I., 500, 5.
Yín-garÖr, m., a vineyard, I., 172,
15? ^44, ig.
Yin-kona, f., a female friend, !.,
20,18.
Yinna (vinn, vann-iinniim, ynni,
imninn), v.a., to do, to perform : v.
eið, to deliver an oath, I., 166, 20 ;
engi taknn mætti hann nv vinna
neraa gvð væri meíS honvm, II.,
275, 34. — 2. to work, to operate,
to take effect : flærðin kann þat
oft vinna, at hon særir oft sinn
upphafara, I., 300, 21 ; bans hjarta
angrast af þeiri sturlan, sem
syndagjaldit kann at vinna þeim
sem Guðs ótta hefir frá sér vísat,
I., 346, 21 ; sem þetta vinnr eigi,
segja þeir, at bræÖr hafi lokit
sinum aftansöng, I., 536, g ;
þyngir svá meinit, at min um-
GLOSSARY.
000
Vinna — cont.
leitan vinnr ekki, II., 96, 24» — 3.
to carry through.^ to establish, to
win : nefnir bok stund ok stað
þar til, ... at haun hafi uunit
með sinni vitru, hver landaskifti
at fornu höfðii verit milium Franz
ok Norðmandí, I., 66, 93 ; ábóti
einn rikr kom til Kanciam með
málaferlum nokkiirum, er hann
vill vinna, I., 116,2. — 4. to tcin,
to overcome, to conquer: hugðist
hann at vinna í einum rykk báSa
samt, herra páfann ok herra
Thomam, I., 410, 22 5 vann Yil-
hjálmr Rúðujarl England nndir
sik, I., 4, 14 ; V. yfir, to overcome,
I., 216, 15. — ivitk the person in
dat., and the thing in ace, to do
something to some one : slikt skal
af engum manni heyrt, at ne einn
hafi Ijst at veita konungsvaldi
• svá mátka vanvirðu, sem þessi
hefir OSS vunnit, I., 214, j.^; lát
þér þörf vinna lánit, I., 362, 35.
— Med. in almost a passive
sense : þetta fær her eigi nnnizt,
this cannot be done, I., 16, 9 j ok
sem ekki vinnst at, as the ob-
ject could not be effected, I., 258,
23 ; dagr vinst, day is worked,
utilized, with a negation = lasts,
suffices, I., 494, g ; cfr. klerkdomr
vanst mer eigi, II., 94,^3, and
unnust eigi lifdagar, II., 132,4.
In a reciprocal sense : viunast
þeir Theubaldus jarl svá í neyti,
enter companionship for mutual
services, I., 470, jg.
Vinr (-ar, -ir), m., a friend, I.,
30,9.
Vin-samliga, adv., friendly, I.,
37852»
Vinstri, ad., left : v. bond, leýl hand,
I., 106, ig; þýSa til vinstri bandar,
to take up in a sinister manner, to
put an unfair construction upon,
L, 178,2; þ. a vinstra veg, id.,
II., 263,""23.
Yin-sa^ld, f., popularity, II., 212,3.
Yinza (að), v.a., to ivinnoic, II.,
162,11.
Yirða (t, t.), v.a., prop, to value, to
put a price on; hence, — \. to
rate, to set down as equivalent
to : bdfsemd bans ok barðlífi virða
þeir til bræsni, I., 178, 4 ; fjár-
forráð ok bagræði kirkjunnar virða
þeir til ágirni, I., 178, ^. — 2. to
estimate, to take into considera-
tion, to regard, to have regard
to: fám vér eigi greint, hvilikt
fjölmenui þangat sótti víða um
lönd, bæði af kirkjunni ok curia;
virða marsir bar til konunírsins
vináttu, I., 88,2; væri yðr ok
virÖanda i bvern óróa þér hafit
leitt oss, I., 192, 23 ; fyrir þá sök
er stríðum viríianda ok vægjanda,
opposition must be taken into con-
sideration, as to how far it may
serve a purpose, {but virSanda
seems a doubtful reading.) I.,
196,17; 6ru sex hlutir hugsaudi
ok virÖandi í hverju niáli, II.,
52, ig; virÖum vér her til kon-
ungsins blicSu, in doing which
toe have regard to the king^s
friendship, I., -198, j,)- — 3. to
form an estimate, to form an
opinion, to come to a conclusion, a
decision, to deem, to hold, to coh'
556
GLOSSARY.
Virða — cont.
sider : herra Thomas hugleiðir
þetta mál ... ok virÖir meí^ sinni
vitru, at kirkjunnarsök er minnur
kunnug innan um kristnina, heldr
enn svá miklii máliheyrir, I., 228, 7 ;
hæföi yÖr at virða, hvern endá
þessi mál skulu bafa, I., 400, ^g ;
skyldar hanu til Rikard af Luci
. . . meO öllum höföiogjiim í laiid-
inu, at virða þær sem lögteknar,
I., 332, 8 ; hér með skaltu biÖja
hanu sem þii kant bezt, at hann
virði mik eigi samblandna þeiri
fæð, er bóadi minn leggr til bans,
II., 152, g. — 4. to esteem, to
value : seg svá Thomasi, at hann
virði þat me(5 þessum fátæka
búnaði, at þvílíkan bérum vér
sjálfir, I., 314, 9. — 5. to regard,
to respect : blezaðr sé sá byskups-
garðr, er svá var fyrir Guðs ástríki
fagrliga siÖaðr, ok á þeim tíma
mjög Yirðandi, I., 114, 4 ; virÖandi
cr ok sá þjónustii-maðr, er svá
góðan lut kjöri sínum formanni,
I., 172,27- — 6. to honour, to re-
verence : bún lærÖi hann at vir(5a
ok vegsama hina sælu mey, Guðs
inóðnr, I., 18, 10; höfÖingjar virí5u
hann sem sér jafnan, I., ^%, 3 ; at
liiin merke þaöan, hvcrre tign
Skaparinn er viiðandi,II., 230,6-
— Med., to seem, to appear, I.,
2, 9, 16, 19, 496, 21, 510, 26- — 2. to
be charged with, II., 22, jg. — 3.
to deign, ^' dignari,'' I., 372,21-
Vivðing (-ar, -ar), /., reverence, re-
spect : ætlar erkibyskup, sakir
páfans virðingar, at flytja stand-
andi sitt erindi, I., 292, 13. —
Viröing — co7it.
2. honour, dignity, I., 14, 4, 40, 5,
48,5, 106,24,25, 396,5.
YirÖinga-maðr, m., a man in high
position, I., 230, 12«
Virðingar-munr, m,., respect of per-
sons, '•'• personcB reverential'' I.,
140,10.
Virör, ad., respectable, honoured,
I., 382,10, 394,24 ; II., 184,24.
Virðuliga, adv., loorthily, honour-
«%,L, 130, 6, 272, 16, II., 236, 28.
VirÖn-ligr, ad., venerable, I., 60, 20 ;
honourable, I., 84,4, grave^ I., 70,9.
Virgull (-s,-lar),w., a halter, a hang-
man's rope, II., 112, 16, 116, 15.
Yh*kða-menn, m. pi., reformed peo-
ple, reclaimed or restored to
divine favour, II., 274, 36.
Yirki (-s), n., fabric, frame, struc-
ture, II., 132,5.
Virkr, ad., working, v. dagr, icork-
ing-day, I., 206, 27.
Virkt, and virkð, II., 274, 36 (-ar,
-ir), f., friendly care, favour,
honour, reverence, I., 442,3, 478,ii.
Virktar-folk, n., favourite friends,
I., 522,
18'
Virkta-vinr, m., a favourite friend,
beloved friend, II., 72, 19.
Visa (að), v.n., to point, to tend, to
lead, fari þeir nú sem vegr visar,
I., 286, 28' — v.a., to direct, to
show, V. frá sér, to repel, I.,
154,9, 346,22-
Vísdóms-menn, w. pi., men of wis-
dom, I., 148,14.
Vis-eyrir, m., royal tax, crown re^
venue, I., 138, 13.
Visinn, ad., cfr, to * wizen,' withered,
I.,' 232,26.
GLOSSARY.
557
Visitera, v.a., to visit (a diocese),
I, 320, 15.
Visiter an,/!, visitation, 1., IIG, 27)
504
'21-
VÍSS, ad., knoiving, certain of, I.,
316,10; ^*- ^'^^^i "^ adv.,
38? 11»
certes, surely, I., 174, 3 : II., 102, 4.
— 2. wise, I., 2, 11, 18, 12, 130, n-
VÍSS, seems to he a neuter noun,
(^Engl. ' tcise,') occurs only in the
phrase: öÖru viss, otherivise, I., ,
428, 9. See öÖruvíss.
Vissa (-11), f., certainty, I., 74, 24? |
108,0, 326, 2s. ' " j
Yit, (-s), n., consciousness, II.,
1 16, 22« — 2. knoivlcdge, under-
standing, I., 282, 12- — 3. rea-
soning powers, mind, reason,
sagacity, penetration, I., 58, jj.
Vit, prep.y see við.
Vit, dual of eg, I., 310, 24.
Vita (veit, vissa- vissum, vissi, vitað,
siqnne ;), vm. [fro7n vit=T:póc-ccTza, ;
cfr. viti, a pointer, leader, signal,
^c], to ^face^ to look, to point in
a certain direction : þetta veit við
alt öÖruvíss enn Gillibert af Lun-
dúnum flutti ininum herra, this
faces, turns, or points towards the
main issue otherivise than, ^-c, I., ■
220, 19 ; svá veit vit sem ek kann '
segja yðr, so the matter turns, i
points, (i.e., i?i relation to the sub-
ject discussed), even as I can '
tell you, 1., 274, 2^. I
Vita (veit, vissa-vissum, supine
vitat\ v.a., probably a different
word, to ^ wit/ to hnow, I., 34,8,
G4,8, 118, 21 ; n., 56,19. |
Vitand, f, knowing, knowledge, I.,
O-k^, 9.
Viti, n., a * ivite,^ error, fault, I.,
364,23-
Vitja (að), v.a., ivith ace. and gen.,
to visit, to pay a visit to, I.,
374, 27 ; to perform episcopal
visitation, to visitate, I., 504, 93 ;
to come back, to return to, I.,
486,27.
Vitjan (-ar), /!, visitation, II., 230,3.
Vitkast, V, med., to regain one's
mind, II., 226, 1-.
Vit-lauss, ad., ' witless,* out of one's
mind, mad, II., 40, ^, 152,22;
delirious, II., 280, 33.
Vit-leysi, n., nonsense, folly, II.,
160, e.
Vitni, n., witness, I., 188, ^ ; IT.,
216,6 ; testimony, I., 6, 25, 304, 9.
Vitnis-burör, m., testimony, I,,
192,16; n., 110,9.
Vit-orð, 71., knowledge, cognizance,
L, 212,22; IL, 273,1;.
Vitr, ad.., wise, I., 2, 15.
Vitra (-u), f., wisdom, sagacity,
discretion, I., 46,8«
Vitra (að), v.a., to reveal, I., 554,5;
II., 78,3, 277,33.
Vitran, vitrun, II., 168, n (-ar, -ir),
/:, vision, I., 374, n ; II., 44, ^.
Vitrleikr, m., wisdom, discretio/i, T.,
80, 22.
Vilrliga, adv., ivisely, clenrlf/, I.,
28, 13;
Vitr-máll, öí/., seyisible, I., 22,15.
Vit-væri, n., provisions, sustenance,
I., 108,22.
Vizka (-11), /!, knowledge, discretion,
11., 52,17.-2. wisdom, I., 36, 3,
102,6. .
558
GLOSSARY.
VoÖi (-a), m., peril, danger, I.,
188, ig, 388, 285 "^^^i 17«
Vog (-ar, -ir), f., (a steel-yard,
scales), balance, I., 112, 22.
Yog-föll, n. pL, pus oozÍ7ig from, a
festering wound or sore, discharge ,
'lL,98,i.
Volað (-s), n.^ woe, misery, II.,
150, 1;.
Volaðr, ad., destitute, I., 38, n.
Voldugr, ad., mighty, lordly, I.,
130, 4, 282, 22» 334, ^g.
Volli, = olli, see valda.
Yon (-ar, -ir), /., hope, I., ^^, 2 ;
II., 14, 1, likelihood, I., 484, g.
Vondr, ad., evil, wretched, I., 48, 23,
408,29.
Von-leysa, y., a thing out of question,
preposterous7i€ss, 1., 412, ^.
Yonligt, 71. ad., as adv., likely, II.,
124, 1,.
Yopn (-s), n., weapon, I., 70, ^g,
374, g.
Yopna-burÖr, 7n., a7'7)iour, I., 522, 7,
^"-^j 27*
Yopn-lauss, ad., imar?ned,l., 522,2o.
Yor (-s), n., spring, sp7'Í7igtimef I.,
86, 27.
Yorðit, see verða.
Yor-kynnd, /'., indulgence, I., 256, 24.
Yorr, pi. of minii, our, ours, I.,
20, 25J passim.
Yoru, see vera.
Yotta (að), v.a., to witness, to bear
witness, to testify, I., 8, 9, 36,8,
52,13, 172,99; to announce, I.,
62, g.
Yottr (-S, -ar), w., a witness, I.,
80,7, 1 14, g, 296,1.
Yunninn, p.p. of vinna, done, I.,
454,20«
Yyrði, I., 454, 9, see verða.
Yægð (-ar), /'., equity, mercy, I.,
112,22, 1^^0,9. — 2. toleration, for-
bearance, I., 302, 20« — 3. yielding,
submission, resignation,!., 192, 2g.
Yægðar-laiist, adv., without 7iiercy,
I., 180, 13. — 2. U7ireservedly, I.,
482,22.
Yægiliga, adv., meekly, ge7itly, I.,
168,17. — 2' cautiously, slowly,
II., 146,26.
Yægja (ð), v.n., to yield, to give
way, I., 164,15, 196, 17, 198,26,
228,21, 446,9.
Yæna (d), v.a., to give hope : mys-
kunn hiranakonungs vænir fólki
sínu, at jartegna-blóm hins virð-
uliga Thome . . . mun brátt
nálægjast, II., 66, 9. — 2. to hope,
II., 254, 11. — Med., to hold out
hope, to decla7'€ one's readiness to
show or prove : þótt Thomas
vænist þar um vottum, at þessa
peninga hafi konungrinn eigi léð
honum, heldr gefit, þá heyrist þat
á engan veg, I., 188, g.
Yænligr, ad., likely, hopeful, I.,
76,10-
Yænn, ad., hopeful, likely, pro7)iis'
ing, profitable : skrifar hann til
Alexandrum páfa, at hann muni
veita honum til Lundúna þann
byskup i rikinu, er vitrastr væri
til ráðagerðar ok vænastr til
hjálpar önd ok likama, I.,
44, g ; er sá vegr vænn til friðar,
I., 224, 15 ; nokkurir segja, at þat
muni konunginum vænast til hug-
botar, I., 308,13. — 2. goodly,
well-favou7'€d, of prepossessing
appearance, I., 22, jg, 554, iq.
GLOSSARY.
559
Vænn — cont.
— 3. conspicuous, distinguished,
honourable : þvílíkir eru sam-
sætismenn virÖuligs Thome erki-
bjskups, hafandi svá vænan sess,
sem fjrr vai* tjáð, I., 106, ^^. — 4.
choice, exquisite : pell einkar
vænt, I., 14, 22 ; liann liaf ði alia
götu sælliga fæðzt með vænum
kosti, I., 316,8, cfr. II., 108, is-
Vænta (t), v.a., to hope for, to ex-
pect, L, 280,20, 378,3, 404,22;
II., 74, 7.
Yæpna (t), v.a., to arm, I., 140,^9 ;
refl., id., II., 20, 2«
Væpntr, ad., armed, I., 248, jo,
484, 5.
Vær = vér, we, I., 486, 14, passim.
Yæra, 1 imp. subj. of vera, I.,
486,21.
Væta (-u), f., wet, ivetness, I.,
246,9,254,25.
Vætti, n., indication, testimony,
I., 520,27; n., 236,19.
Vættr (-ar, ir), f., a wiglit, a thing,
an object : avngv vætta eii'a, thei/
leave nothing in peace, II.,
Vöfðu, &c., see vefja.
Vöggu, see vagga.
Yöknuð, &c., see vakna.
Vöktu, see vaka, and vekja.
Vökva (að), v.a., to saturate, to
soak, II., 280, 3g.
Void, see vald.
VöUr (vallar, vellir), m., a field,
plain, laivn, I., IG, g, 50, 7.
Völsku, see valska.
Vöndr (vandar, vendir), m., a ivand,
II., 60, 14. — 2. a rod, a scourge,
II., 238,25-
Vöndust, see venja, I, 32, g.
Vönum, see vani,
Vörn (varnar, varnir), /'., defence,
II., 28, 23«
Yötn, see vatn.
Yöxtr (vaxtar, vexti), 771., grotcth,
development, increase : gengr
enn til vaxtar virðing Thome, I.,
48,5; gengr í svá óba^riligan
vöxt krankdómr uiiga sveius, II.,
70, 18 ; addition, eking out of:
leggr sá maðr til vaxtar jaiteign-
iuni, at þann hnút, er kvalarinn
setti á virgulinn, let hann mæta
sjálfum barkanum,IL, 112,15. —
2. structure, inward coii7iexion,
7iature, condition : gefr hann sik
betr liðngan at skoða vöxt ok
efni málanna, I., 114, 1. — 3.
figwe, fori7i, stature, I., 14, 1,
52,11, 314,23- — 4. size, great-
ness, magnitude : eftir þessum
atvikum ok tilrás eiga domar
rétta formau, enn eigi eftir
ásjónu ok vexti lastanna, II.,
52,19.
Y Y.
YÖar, gen. pi. of þíi.
Yðr, dat. a7id ace. pi. of þú.
Yðvarr (yður [yðr, I., 64,9], yÖvart
a7id yðart, gen. yðvars (yíSars),
yðvarrar (yðarrar) , y ð vars ( y ÍSars),
dat. y^rum, yíSvarri (yiSarri), yíSru,
acc. yövarn (yöarn), yðra, yðvart
(yðart). Plur, Notn. yövarir
560
GLOSSARY.
Yövarr — cont.
(jðrir), yðrar, yÖur ; Gen. yÖvarr-
íi (yöarra) ; Dat. yÖrum, acc,
yðra, yðrar, j^^ur^pron.poss., your^
yours^ I., 64,
19? 20?
76,
6>
146, 19,
148,10, 15, loO, 29? lo2, 2ij 158,21)
192,14,28,204,18, 208,30, 274, i^,
18? 22? ^^8,4, 280, ig, 282, 1, 2, 25'
28» *^^*
Yíir,/>rí'/>. with dat. and ace, over.
— I. with dat. — 1. local, signi-
fying stationary condition, over,
above : hann þottiz sia hiun helga
Thomas hvila erendan yfvir alt-
arinv, II., 278,29; at sitja mætti
yfir bans hásæti, I., 26, 13 ; in a
metaph. sense drawn from a chest
being locked: strengja herbergi
yfir l^yskupi = shutting the bishop
up, I., 192,3. — 2. fig., over,
above, at the head of : at sáskip-
ist forstjori yfir reglumönnum, I.,
72, 15 ; þat blezaða sæti bófst í
röksemd vakls ok virðingar yfir
öllu Eiiglandi, I., 40, 5, cfr. go- —
3. over, i.e., presiding, watching :
sitja yfir malum, I., 108,9. — 4.
concerning, regarding : vandlæti
yfir þvílíkri úhæfu, I., 180,15;
þegir nú yfir fní orði, I., 166, 21.
5. on account of: yfir lífláte
Thome hefir Frakka konungrtár-
ligan harm, I., 14,2. — ^^' '^^^^^
acc. — 1. in local relations, over,
above, alrft : segja þann ótta
yfirkominn, sem konungsins sverS
sé skekit yfir hans báls, I., 164, 19.
— 2. from above : sigr yfir ban a
léttr böfgi, I., 14, 8 ; sem toLf
stjörnm* af bimmi fi^lli niÖr yfir
kné benni, I., 14, lo- — 3. across
Yfir — cont.
in the sense of ' on : ' sýnist honum
sem yfir báaltarið liggi framm-
liðenn Thomas, II., 60,8- — 4.
over, across, xoith a notion of
movement implied : haukrinn
snarar . . . yfir á nokkura ok
sezt þar, I., 32, 4 ; yfir þetta signaÖ
borð beyrist eingi rödd nema
beilög leccio, where, however, the
sense may as well be ' over,^ ' at,'
I., 106, ig. — o. over, about, through-
cut : konungs rikit gekk svá bátt
yfir England í þessa tíÖ, I., 62, 9.
-- 7. over, above, beyond: elska
yfir alia hliiti, I., 94, n ; setr
Thomas oil miskunnar-verk tvi-
föld yfir bans dæmi, L, 108, 31. —
6. concerning, on, about : yfir
þenna skilning . . . eru bref gjör,
I., Q6, 17. Adverbially : her, þar
yfir, beyond this, about that^ I.,
20, 24, 40, 15 ; yfir framra, over and
above, I., 168, 14 ; elliptical : \\{ii^
vald yfir, I., 108,28 ; bggja yfir, to
prevail, L, 162, 22 ; bafa vissu
yfir, I., 168, 9, &c.
Yfir-bot, f, amendment, reforma-
tion, repentance, I., 394, 91, 408,
25. — 2. amends, reparation, sa-
tisfaction, I., 358,8, 440,8-
Yfir-bragð, n., air, expression,
countenance, presence, I., 18, 1,
432,27; II'? 288, g.
appear-
ance, manner, way, I., 104, 1.— «3.
pretence, feigned appjcarance, I.,
142, 27.
Yfir-bæriligi', ad., extraordinary,
11., 76, 5.
Yfir-dómari, m., supreme judge, TI.,
293, g.
GLOSSARY.
5G1
Yíir-fara, v. a., to pass in recieiv, I.,
11
'5 28*
Yfir-ferð, /'., journey^ travelling
through^ I., 524, 20- — 2. episcopal
visitation, I., 1165 23*
Yfir-gangr, m., ' over-ioalking^ over-
hearing conduct^ insolence, pre-
sumption, I,, 324, g.
Yfir-girnd, /., ovcr-ioeening ambi-
tion, masterfulness, jyresumption,
insolence, I., 162, jg, 268, 20? 394,
22, 432,3.
Yfir-hrygð, /i, exceeding grief, H.,
2ll, 28-
Yfir-klæíSi, n., *" over-clothing^ outer
garment, mantle, I., 52, 17.
Yfir-kominn, p.p., come over, gone
abroad, generally spread, I.,
164, ,8.
Yfir-lagðr, p-p.^ added to, II.,
134,15.
Yfir-lesa, v. a., to read through, I.,
■ 264,29, 332,19, 392, n.
Yiir-lit, n., countenance, expression,
IT., 276, 30.
Yfir-settr, j^'P") pl^if^d over, II.,
16, 19.
Yíirstöðu-maðr, m., one ivho stands
over the grave during the burial
of a dead person, a * mourner,'' I,,
558, 14.
Yfir-vald, n., management, stetoard-
ship, I., 320, 21-
Yíir-vættis, gen. sing, of yfirvætti,
as adv., exceedingly, 11., 285, 37.
Yfir-vöttis, id.
YkkaiT (ykkur, ykkart), di/al. poss.
pron., your, yours, I., 318, 14.
Yling (-ar), f., lamentation, " ulu-
latus;' II., 271,15.
K 541.
Ymisliga, adv., variously, II.,
^ 110,18.
Ymisligr, ad., various, I., 72, 7.
Yiniss, ad., various, I., 38, 4,
106,27-
Ymist, neut. of ýmiss as adv., at
whiles, now . . . now, I., 232, 13.
Yms, ad., the contracted form of
ymiss, II., 72,6.
Ynni, see vinna.
Yppa (t), v.a., to * ujj,^ to raise,
to bring to the surface, to show
signs of I., 506, 22«
YrÖi, see verða.
Yrkja (yrki, orti-ortum yrkti, ortr),
v.a., to ' work,* but : to utter lan-
guage, to frame sentences : hence
y. a. — a. to address, I., 6G, 23. —
b. to call upon, to challenge, I.,
^ 292, 6.
Yta (tt), v.a., to ^ utter, ^ to proffer,
to hold out, to put forth, I., 1 10, g,
270,19.
Ytri, yztr, comp. and sup. ad., outer,
outward, outermost, I., 72, 2, 98,
8 ; II., 146,27-
Yxi, see vaxa.
1».
í'á, temp. adv. and conj., then, 1.,
22,23, passim.
í*á, acc.pl. of sá.
Þaðan, adv., 1. loc, thence, I., 2M,
J. — 2. causal, thence, therefore,
102,15; A'' ^^^^'"^ reason, 1., 58,13.
i*agat, adv., thither, T., 84, g.
I^agna (að), v. inchoaf., lo grow
silent,!., 170,7, 192,7-
N N
562
GLOSSARY.
í^agnar, see þögn.
Þágu, 3. pi. imp. ind. of þyggja, I.,
200, 20*
i^akinn, ad., ^ thatched^ covered,
crowded, II., 90, ^i*
Pakka (aÖ), v.a., to thank, to give
thanks, I., 192, 7, 372, ^, 462, jg.
Pakkar, see þökk.
Fakk-læti, n., gratitude, 11., 74, ^,
100,15.
Fakklætis-gerð,/., thanksgiving, II.,
82,23._
Fakklætis-orð, n., id., 1., 478, 3.
Þakk-samliga, adv., thankfully, II.,
273, 1,.
Pak-lauss, öí/., thatchless, roofless,
1., ZoO, 28«
Þak-vana, ad., id., I., 232, g.
Pangat, adv., thither, I., 40, 20«
I^ar, adv., there : þ. at, thereat,
thereby, there-beside, I., 16, 9 ; þ.
Í mot, to meet that, in return
therefore, I., 154, ^^ ; þ. til, /oca/,
thither, I., 10, g, 38,3; temp.,
thereunto, until : I., 4, 22 ; abstr.,
therein, in that matter, as con-
cerning that, I., 88, 2 ; þar með,
therewithal, to boot, I,, 68, 13 ;
thereamongst, among the rest, I.,
88, 5 ; þar um, therein, as con-
cerning that matter, I., 108, 3. —
2. thither : þar koma samt fjórtán
Ijóðbyákupar, I., 88, 4.
í*arf, see þiirfa.
í'arfa (aÖ), v.a., prop, to stand in
need of to require, only in the
med. in the sense of being in a
needy condition, being without^
being destitute of: þeir bera bol-
öxar ... ok þar með önnur hern-
aðartól hörð ok tvíeggjuð, hvort
í'arfa — cont.
sem brjóta þyrfti múr eÖa trévirki,
at þeira glæpr þarfist því framar
alia tálman, that their crime be
the more destitute of all checks^
i.e., have all the freer and surer
course, I., 534, 5.
Þarfr, (þörf, þarft), ad., useful,
I., 74, 8.
i*ar-kvoma, /'., arrival thither, I.,
272,1,.
Parnast, med., to be voithout, to
want, not to have, to be destitute
of: J3at hyggjum vér þarnast
ílest oil dæini ofsóknar, at eiun
maðr vyrÖi svá sem píslarefni
allrar siunar ættar, I., 368, yj '■>
hann hefir svo sagt, at hann
þarnaðist alia biðstund, at líkþráin
fellr öU niÖr af honum, that all
delay was wanting till, Sfc, i.e.,
that without a moments delay,
Sfc, II., 216, 10« — 2. to have to
be without, to be deprived of, to
have to forego, to forfeit : hvart
myndit þér kjörit hafa af því,
sem ek set framm : hafa þolat
með hugarkrafti' eðr þarnast
lilýðni af öllu Englandi, cfr, " ct
tam rcgem ipsum quam innume-
ros cum eo populos a vestra, quod
absit ! obedientia irrevocabiliter
avertatis^^ I., 384, 28 5 iihlýÖni
hlaðin með svá úheyrðum iU-
vilja, að hann skal þarnast bæna
raiðil kristinna manna, I., 450, 4.
— 3. to need, to require : imdir
leggr ok konuiigrinn við cardi-
nalem, at ban 11 styði svá crindit,
at cigi þarnist þat síua framm-
' kvæmd, I., 68, j. — 4. to abstain
GLOSSARY.
563
Þarnast — cont,
from, to forbear : miSvikiidagr er
á morgin, ok því hæfirossat þarn-
ast, cfr. " quarta^ " inquit,
" feria est, et oportet nos hodie a
" talihus abstinere,^^ I., 256, 21 ;
etr liann kjöt . . . segír því fylgja
raeiri siÖsemd til dýrÖar hátíÖinni,
á livern dag sem haua berr, at
þarnast öngra loíligra Guðs gjafa,
cfr. " eas {sc. carnes) tali die su-
mcre, quam abstincre religiosíus
judicans" I., 512, ^2 ; bann þarn-
aðist allafæÖu {cíbum non sump-
serit) utan kendi lítiÖ a£ kjarna-
mjólk, II., 10, 13.
í*ar-vera, /'., sojourn, I., 372, j^.
Þar-vist,/., id., I., 20, 10, 474, ^g.
E*at, n. demonstr., this, that : þat
til marks, this being a token there-
of, I., 30, 10 ; þat sama ferr fraram,
I., 30, 17 ; for þat ok sva, so mat-
ters turned out, I., 30, 21« — In
the dat., því : 1. therefore : ok
því stígr hann af bestinum, I.,
32, ig ; því léttir bann brutt frá
þvísa lífi, I., 34, 17, &c., very fre-
quent. — 2. with comparatives =
I^at. CO, Eng. the {instriimentalis
of that), {jvi beldr, sjaldnar, síðr,
I., 52,12,29» 116,11, ^f^., frequent.
— þvíat, because, I., 2, ^, &c.,vcry
frequent : með því at, ivhereas,
whilst, I., 22, 2\:) frequent.
Þáttr (-ar, þættir), m., prop., a
strand, one of the threads of
xnhich a string, which is more
than one-twined, consists, cfr.
lífsþiittr, I., 4, ^. — 2. part,jKtr'
iicipatio7i, I., 68, g.
I*ef-laus.s, ad., unsavoury, I., 316, g.
Pegar, adv., when: studium beil-
agrar bækr var honum bariSla kært,
þegar eigi stóð fjölskylda fyrir,
I., 100, 21 ; verjj rare, er and sem,
in various combinations, tahing
its place in this sense. — 2. forth-
with, at once : ok þegar l)regí5r
sá vit, er frammi liggr, ok riss
þegar iipp, I., 52, 5, frequent. —
b. already, already now, some-
times preceded by nú : Heinrekr
var vitr maðr þegar á imgum
aldri, I., 44,11; þessarri þjónar
haim nú þegar með breiulííi, I.,
20, 22 ; sé hér nú þegar fork un 11-
ligan maun, I., 36, 21«
Þegja (þegi, þagða-þögðum, I)egí5a,
þagat), v.n., to be silent, I., 22,17,
122,1,186,12.
Pegu (-S, -ar), 771., prop, a thane,
but in poetry a ge7ieral ter7ufor
* person,^ * one,"* ' people,^ II.,
66,1.
Feima, dat. sing, masc, of þessi,
!•; 84,19,440,7,8.
Fekju-ræfr, n., roof, II., 60, ig.
I'ekkiligr, ad., graceful, comely,
pleasing, goodly, II., 46, 1, 276, 30.
i*ekkr, ad., acceptable, favourite,
loell liked, beloved, I., 16,27,
74,9; IL, 62,22.
í'ér, pi. of {)ii.
Ferna (-u, -ur), /!, a maidservant,
l'> 14? 26-
Pessi (þessi, þetta, gc7i. þossa
(þessar, I., 376, ig, is a inistakt),
þessarrar, þossa ; dat. í)ossiim,
þcssarri and J)ossi, I., 268,17;
II., 50, 10, þossu ; ace. þenna,
})essa, þetta. 1*1. þossir, þessjir,
\)[i?,ú, and þcssor I., 238, 2«; II.,
N N 2
56é
GLOSSARY.
Pessi — cont.
259, 23) ; 9^^- í)essarra, and þessa,
II., 273, 5 ; dat. þessum ; acc.
þessa, þessar, þessi, pron, de-
monstr.y this. Passim.
í*essor, see þessi.,
Peyta (tt), v.a., to blow (a tvind
instrument) : þeyt rödd þína,
let thy voice resound, I., 424, g.
í^í = því, I., 144, ig, see sá.
i'lggj''! (Þ'gg. þá-þágum, þægi,
þeginn), v. a. — \. to get hy pray-
ing for, to obtain, iMt. impetrare.
— a. ivith dat. of the person and
acc. of the thing, öllnm þessum
þiggr hann einhverjar hjálpir í
ýmissa staÖi, T., 350, 7 ; báðir þágu
írið sínu l'ólki, II., 4, 23. — b.
^vith acc. only : lyktar svá stef-
nuna, at sendiboðar þyggja meÖ
öllu ekki ntan þat, at herra páfinn
gefr þeim orlof, &c. I., 286, ^7 ;
allra manna skilinngr er einn í
því máli, at þat sé hit hæsta
hjartteignablóm heilags maiins, ef
hanii þiggr þá til lífs meÖ síuuiii
veiÖleik, bem áÖr eru daiiðir,
II., 148, 5 ; fyrir sitt blóö ok
baua má hann þegit haí'a, at
þat sé falslaust, er finnst í
sumum bókum af iðran konunji-
sins, II., 182,9; þiggja þeir raeð
sönnum góðvilja heixa páf'ans öU
sín eyrendi, I., 92,28- — 2. to
agree to, to acquiesce in,toaccej)t,
with acc: þat þiggr konungiinn,
at Gillibert verÖr Lunduniensis
byskup, I., 44, 9 ; Kieheus kemr
til garðs ok þiggr veizln eftir
vana, I., 30, 14 ; alia þá náð ok
nauÖsyn, sem þér vilit af voru
I^igg'a — cont.
riki þiggja, skal í yðru valdi vera,
I., 290, 2» — 3. to receive : nú
vill svá vera í setning laganna, at
allra þessarra greina bail Can-
tuariensis kirkja þegit privilegia,
I., 124,12; þessu sanitíða, sem
sæll Thomas þiggr birtingina, var
ábótinn staðarins in nan kirkju,
I., 318,,.
I*ik, acc. sing. ö/"þú.
Þikja = þikkjai II., 124, i„ 142,25,
154,3.
Þikkja (I., 278,21, 286,5, 410, 15,
424,17,438,-22,31,476,18,490,18;
II., 30, 8, ^'^, 27.— Med. I., 120, 25,
178, ig, 210,25, 284,23, 320,3,
334,14, 356,16, 384,26, 390,4,7,
410,10, 468,21, 490, g, 524,22;
II., 68, 23), = Þykkja, g. v.
Þí-líkr, ad., = þvílikr, II., 272, 9.
I*ing (-S), n., a meeting, parliament^
council, I., 122,14, 146,8«
i*ing (-s), 71., a thing, cfr. smáþing ;
in pi., belongings, ejects, I.,
320,12.
Jring-bera, v.a., to bring into court,
to make public, I., 162, 1.
I'ing-hiis, n., council chamber, meet-
ing house, 1., 170,10.
I*inn (þín, þitt ; gen. þíns, þinnar,
þíns; í/aí, þínnm,þinni,þínu; acc.
þinn, J)ína, þítt; Pl. þínir, þínar,
þín ; gen. þinna ; dat. þínum ;
acc. þina, þínar, þín), pron. pass.,
thy, thine, I., 64, 9, passim. '
Fins, see þú.
í*it, dual. of^\x, II., 247,20«
I*já (ð), v.a., to injlict pain, to
plague, II., 280,32« — 2. to mor-
tify {the body,) I., 104, 29.
GLOSSARY.
565
rjálmi (-a, -ar), ni. {etymol. imcer-
tain : Jilm, in the sense of fine
thread, sjnders web and the like,
cfr. þoka, fog, þjöl, /?/c, SfcJ), a
snare, a trap, " laqueus '' : enn
liverja þjálma nær eðr firr Heiu-
rekr konungr egnir fyrir fætr Thó-
niasi crkibyskiipi, ferr liann frjáls
ok liðugr, I., 254, ^g ; heldr egruli
hann sér ok oss byskupunum þær
snörur, (" et sibi et fratribus suis
contexit laqueos,^') at ef vor vizka
heféi eigi skilit þá ?ömu þjálraa,
myndi þessi mál enn til verri
lykta leitt hafa, I., 276, ^05 C^^«
IL, 252,26.
i*ján (-ar, -'ir),J'., infliction of pain,
II., 130, 11. — 2. mortification {of
the body), 1., 174, ^.
Þjdð (-ar, -\v),f., a people, a nation,
I., 60, 19 ; II., 16, 90 : people, folk,
II., 292", 39.
í*jóð-biaut,y'., highway^ I., 242, j.
f'jofr (-S, -ar), m., a thief, ]I.,
140,3.
í^jóna (að), r.a., to serve, I., 20, 21,
36, 24- — 2. to irait vpon, I.,
98, 32, 452, 26 ; Þ- ^i^5 ^^ minister
to, to contribute to, to partake in,
II., 52, 22- — 3. to serve as a type,
to correspond, to apply to, II.,
234, 19. — xcith dat. of the person
and ace. of the thing, to serve one
icith, to supply one trith, I., 98, 23.
í*jónkan {-ur),f, icaiting upon, Í.,
108,
13«
latus^ I., 380,21. — 3. servility,
obsequiousness, I., 112,9. — 4.
paying of respects, doing homage,
obeisance, 1., 494, 7.
I'jonn (-S, -ar), /;/., a servant, I.,
322, 15, passim.
2. servitude, ' famu- \
Fjonnsta {-\\),f, service, condition
of a servant : cigi gengr þat langt,
áðr konungi- með vitru sinnidæm-
ir þenna Thómam meiri sæmdar
makligan, enn vera einfaldrar þjón-
ustu, I., 46,2j. — 2. divine ser-
vice, I., 458, 20« — 3. officiation :
ma vera, at betr se ski^^aO, at ver
sem heima ok sæmiim þá sömu
hátíð með várri þjóniistu, I.,
506, 21 ; ek fell í Imgarangr, cf
ek skyldi enga þjónustu gjöra
mega, hvarki Drottins várs pínu
né (lýrðligri upprisu, i.e., anight
officiate neither on Good Friday
nor at Easter, II., 98, j-. — 4.
the administration of the viati-
cum, performance of the last rites,
II., 40, 11. — 5. attentive care of,
and able discharge of duties :
sakir vizku, lítillætis ok þjónustu
tekst hann með fremstum vinum
erkibysknps, cfr. ^' pro?nere?ite in-
dustj'ia gratisque sujfragantibus
obsequiis inter prim os et prœcip uos
ejus familiar es in brevi admissus
est,'' I., 36, 4. — 6. task, under-
taking, deed, part : liér næst eni
þeir menn er sér vÖldu þá bölfoÖu
þjóiiujítu, at bera fólk-vopn ok
lierfórur í vafning eðr rökkum
upp á garÖ erkiliyskupsin?:, II.,
54, 13. — 7. flffiee, aj>pointment,
j)OSt : lcggr haiin nú af lun stunil
crkidjákní? þjóiiustu, cnn tekr í
ytaÖinn konungliga íylgd ok liirð-
fiiv'Su, I., 10, li, ; kenninianns þjón-
ustn, pastoral rjfice, 1., 172, j,
r//-. 364,17.
I'jóimsta (a(N), r. a., to administer
the s(HT(im(u(, II., 7S, 9(}.
5C6
GLOSSAEY.
fjónustu-gjörð,/., officiation, mhiis-
tration at liohj rites, II., 44, 20«
I^jouustu - maðr, ?;?., servant, I.,
1 '79 990
Pjonustu-sveinn, w., id., I., 342,5.
i*j(5nustu-tekja, y!, acceptance of
office, incumbency of the duties of
office, II., 52,4.
i*j(5ta (þýt, þaut-þutum, þyti, þot-
inu), v.n,, to howl, to ichine, to
ichistle, I., 434,11. — 2. þ. iipp,
to break out, to swell {of skin
eruptioii), I., 98, 4.
r6, conj, with subj., although, I.,
2Q, 14. — 2. adv., yet, I., ó^, .,
100, H.
1*0, 3. sing. imp. ind. of þvá, II.,
274, ig.
I*óf (-s), n., prop, fulling {pfter the
comynon ancient fashion of tivo
men lying on their back, stamp-
ing with their feet through either
end of an open barrel the cloth
to be fulled), hence, sloic, unavail-
ing, impotent, midual ojiposition,
I., 76, 17.
i>oka(-u),/,./b^,L, 230,27.
Pokkast, v., impers. to find favour,
to be acceptable to: pavanom þock-
aðiz enskis þeirra ræða iafnvel
sem iarlsins, II., 263, 3^.
?oku-f{ill, u., a ' come down ' of fog,
n.,44,5.
Þola (þoli, þoldi-þoldum, I)jl(li,
supine þolat and þolt), v.a., to
* thole,' to suffer, to be afflicted :
i>oli beldr einn ma(5r nokkur
vandkvæði, enn oil kristui Guðs
leggist iiudir ógræðiligan harm,
I., 196, 20» ottast hann, ef hann
J)olir þegar líflát, at I)at kallist
Fola — cont,
meir framit ok þolt fyrir nokkura
bans sjálfs eiginlega sök, enn
vernd Gu^s réttar, I., 228, ^^,
Y\. — 2. to endure : segir hann
Tliomam kirkjunni því nauðsyn-
ligri, sem hann þolir þyngra,
1-5 58, 19 ; þessi er sök til ófriÖ-
ar, er herra Alexander þolir
náliga út um xx. ár ok eitt, I.,
92, 11 ; ranglæti þitt ok ráðleysi
höfum vér þolat, sem fremst er
þreytanda, I., 358, 15 ; hvárt myndi
þér kjörit hafa af því, sem ek
set framm : hafa þolat með hugar-
krafti, eðr þarnast hlýðni af öUu
Englandi, I., 384,28' — ^* ^^ bear,
to stand : því þolir eigi konungr-
inn þvílíka ok svá röksamliga
frammferð, I., 184, g; ek mátti
varla þola klæði af lagt eða yfir,
II., 98,7 nil ef hann mátti ekki
J)ola hálfa stund dags þá snöro, er
npp var sett alt undir höku, hvat
er þá um hinn at tala ? II., IIB,^,.
— 4. to tolerate : allar þær þyng-
anir . . . skreytir hann ok fegrar,at
því framar megi þat með nokkur-
um hætti vel þolast, I., 300, 7,
— Ó.ivith clat, of the person and
ace. of the thing ; to bear with
one, to treat icith unwilling in-
dulgence : hcðan líðr ok þat, er
Alexander páfi elskar Heinrek
konnng, ok þolir honiim meira enn
dæmi finnist til, I., 92, j^.
I'olin-móðliga, adv., patiently, I.,
528, 28-
Þolin-mæði, f., long-suffering, I.,
2,17. — 2. permission, I., 64, ig.
— Z. patience, I., 150, ig.
GLOSSARY.
567
í'olligr, ad., tolerahle, endurable,
allowable, I., 174, 30, 302,28-
i'ora (þori, Jjorða-þorðnm, þyrði,
supine þorat), v.a., to dare, to veri'
ture, I., 134,8,12, 180, 17, 504, 15.
Forna (aiS), v. inchoat., to become
i/r?/, I., 102,15. — 2. to 'fall,' to
shrivel {of a dead body), I.,
554,14; II., 287,31»
I*orp (-s), translation of ' ville ' in
Morevillc,a village, a township, a
town, I., 52, 25, 246, 7, 514, 13 ; II.,
122,24,204,3.
Pott = þó at, conj. with subj.f al-
though, albeit, notwithstanding :
kann þat at þrýsta margs inanns
lifi, þótt eigi se hann fæddr í svá
glaðri verölcl, I., 20, jg ; þótt eigi
tæki stóra fémuni, I., 24, 1 ; þótt
lianu bæri £ögr klæði, var hann,
&c., I., 38,13; ^^ Þ"^'^ heldr megi
hann keunast þótt síðar sæi, I.,
52, 12 ; lögðu Thómasi margir
höfðingjar iibjartan hug þótt þeir
tíýndi sik blíða, notwithstanding
that, ^c., I., 56, 14 ; sá byskiip er
úverðau vígir . . styggir stórliga
mjök sjálf'an Guð, þótt vígðr betri
síðaD sitt ráð, I., 112,7.
I*6ttumst (ek), see þykkja, II.,
96, 14.
rráðr (-ar, þræðii), 7n., a thread, a
string, II., 164, 7.
Þrá-gjarn, ad., obstinate, I., 280, 15.
I'rá-lyiidi, n., obstinacy, I., 164,8,
222, 13, — 2. hostile attitude, I.,
338, 11.
Frar (þrá, þrátt), ad., proj). obsti-
nate, occurs only in the neut. in
the sense : eagerly, vakiiar lion,
ok fyser þrátt at vitja þeirar
I'rár — cont.
kirkju, sem syner liennar voru
greftaðer at, II., 166, j.j.
Praunging, see þröuging.
Praungsl, see þröngsl.
Praungva, see þröngva.
I'raut (-ar, -ir), /, trial, I., 2, i^ ;
trouble, 204:, iq; II., 70,21-
Preif, see þrífa.
Þreniiing (-ar), /., Trinity, II.,
289, 18.
Prennr, ad., threefold^ * tcrni^ I.,
42, 20, 104, 12-
Prettán, card, num., thirteen, I.,
98,15. ^
Prettándi, ord. num., thirteenth, I.,
240,10.
í*ré-vetr, ad., three years old, II.,
162, 4.
Þreyngva, II., 46, 17, 21, see
þröngva.
Preyta (tt), v.n., to struggle, to
strive, I., 400, 7 ; II., 238, 8- —
2. to endure, to suffer, I., 358, 15,
368, 13.
Preyttr, ad., tired, iceary, II.,
282,7.
PriÖi, ord. num., third, I., 26, 9,
100,5,6; Þ- t^i^i?i'> Tuesday, I.,
202,2,.
Þrífa (þnf, þreif-þrifum, í)rili,
þrifinn,) v.a., to seize : þ. til., to
grasp after, II., 281,32«
í'rír (þrjíír, þrjii, gen. þriggja, daf.
þrim, acc. þrjá, þrjár, þrjú), card.
num., three, I., 22, 2, 102, 21, 101,
11 ; II-j 10, 11, 24, 10-
í^rj()t-lyiidr, ad., of a stubborn, obsti-
nate disposition, II., 275,;,.
tijozka (u), /'., obstinacy, 1.,
408,28-
5G8
GLOSSARY.
í*r(5ast, r. mcd.^ to grow, to thrive,
to increase, I., 252, 27 ; II., 90, ^3,
148
3 1*
I^rot (-s), 11., failing, faltering, loss,
I., 36, 18-
Proti (-a), ;//., sivelling, II., 74, ^7,
96, 10.
Frotna (að), inchoat,, to come to an
end, to fail, 1., 226, u, 450, 5.
Frimginn, p.p. of þröngva {prop.
þryngva), borne down, oppressed,
IL, 144,11.
Frútna (að), v. inchoat., to swell,
11,70,18,172,25.
Frýsta (t), v.a., to ' thrust,^ to press,
to iveigh upon, I., 20, 15. — 2. to
force, to compel^ I., 296, 21.
Fræl-boriim, ad., slave-horn, I.,
430, 29.
í*ræl-dómr, m., thraldom, slavery,
i,.148,5.
í*rælkau (-ar), f., bondage, I.,
552,20.
Fræll (-S, -ar), m., a ^ thrall,^ a
slave, a bondsman, \., 170, 9^ ;
11,94,9.
í*ræta (-u, -iir), f, altercation, dis-
pute, quarrel, I, 76, jg, 272,5,
282, 15, 528 ; 6 ; 11, 275, ^.
Prætu-maÖr, m., a schismatic, I,
90,26,122,11, 130,15,344,21.
" Frætu-páíi, m., a schismatic pope,
antipope, I, 92, g.
Þröng,/., throng, I, 494, 7.
Pronging (-ar),/, tribulation, afflic-
tion, I., 356, 8 ; II., 258, 20«
í'röngleiki (-a), m., narrowness, II.,
60,05.
I*röngr, ad., prop, narrow; but, tight^
11,236,5.
i^rongslir,/. pi., trouble, tribulation,
affliction, I, 92, 22-
í*röngva, þraungva, þreyngva (d),
v.a., prop., to make narrow. In
this sense, but in the impers. mood
the verb occurs : Heinrekikonungi
þikkir nú at þröngva, II., 30, g. —
2. to thrust, to push, to urge : at
eigi þröngvi þann öreign á reikau-
ar stig, er Guði skyldast at þjóna
með sannri staÖfestu, 1,110,27;
útalligr fuglafjöldi fljkkist at
honum alia vega, ok vill þröngva
honum at foraÖi einn, I, 388, 23 ;
vilja nú lærðir menn þröngva hann
inn eftir kirkjunui, I, 538, 1. —
Med. to press one's self on, to
push on : náliga þröngist liverr
fyrirannan atkrjiipaundir kouungs
vald, I., 156,23; í)röngvist fyrer
hann einn ok annarr, svo at aldri
fær hann inn komizt, II., 126, 25.—
3. to press, to squeeze {to thrash) :
sníðr náliga hurt af höfðinu
aUa krúnuna, svá at lítit eina
hélt í framauvert, þröngvandi svá
hveitikornit brutt af háhninum, I.
544, ig. — 4. to throng, to crowd:
gengr hann iit af því herbergi
sem áðr haí^i hann setið, at eigi
þröngist hann af fjöhnenni, I.,
128, 22* — 5. to encompass, to in-
close, to invest, to envelop : her
eftir sýndist klerkinnm, sem myrkr
ok þoka þröngdi jörðina, I, 236,
4. — 6. to press, to urge, to force,
to oblige : hann tjár á margan
veg . . . at herra erkibyskup vægi
til fyrir þröngvandi nauíisyn, I.,
164, ig. — 7. to oppress, to over-
weight, to bear down : þér þröng^'-
GLOSSARY.
569
Fröngva — cont.
it mitt lif, I., 78,9; þótt vaii-
ináttr þröngvi mik, skal mik lieldr
Í börum bera, enn ek rjiiii steth-
una, I., 202, ^^ ; vei þeiin, er
með lögleysu þröngva réttvísa,
I., 236, 9 ; impers. : þar fyrir
þröngdi raik svá, at ek þóttist
lííit lata, I., 374, g.
I*röagving, f., pressure^ force, I.,
462
J i-
í*ii, gcii. þín, J)íns, 1., 310, ^3 ; dat.
þér, ace. þik ; dual., þit þið, gen.
ykkar, dat., ace, ykkr ; pi. þér,
gen. ySar, dat., arc, yðr), thou.
Passim.
Pukla (að), v.a., to feel, to touch, to
sound, to manipulate, to pass
hands over, II., 136,19.
I*uug-bæiT, ad., heavy, dire, II.,
10,20-
í'ung-í'ærr, ad ,* heart/ ' {of a road),
L, 246, 10.
i'uugi (-a), m., weight, burden :
forðizt at auka þyngsl yfir þuiiga,
I., 394, 19. — 2. heaviness, slum-
ber, I., 390,20- — ■^- oppressive
feeling, 11., 170, ^g. — 4. dimness,
gloom, II., 44, 5. — 5. trouble,
adversitg, I., 180,-; II., 38, n).
— 5. opposition, animosity, anti-
pathy, I., OS,-..
i^ungliga, adv., heavily, I., 410, 3;
IL, 269,13.
I^ungr, comp. þyugri, sup. þyngstr,
ad., heavy, in the fig. sense :
oppressive, onerous, troublous, I.,
58, 19, 08, 6, 332, 13 ; þ. rómr,
adverse opinion, unfriendly re-
ception, I., 180, 2i-
Þurfa (þarf, þurfti-þurftum, þyrfti
supine fjurft), v.a. 1. with infini-
tive, to need, must needs, I., 42,3,
64,16,80,13,02,25,400,10,402,26.
— 2. with gen. and ace, to require,
to stand in need of, I., 124, 1,
244,8, 200,4,438,31*; II., 146,3.
Fiirfondi, pres. p., as ad., needy,
I, 30S,s.
Þurr, ad., dry, I., 34, 2- — 2. dry,
without condiments or savoury
sauces : liefir hanii þá bindiiKli,at
hafa einga fæðu, utan cftir Grá-
munka reglii, enn þat er þurt ok
þoflaust ; cfr. " sol is pulmentariis
arid is et insipidis,jux'ta quod Cis-
terciensis ordinis regular is insti-
tutio habet, vescebatur," I., 316, g.
Fus-hundrat, card, num., one thou-
sand, I., 82, 12-
fiiiiti, &c., see þysja.
Þú,simdrat,= þúsluiudrat, I., 100, ,7.
í*iitu, &c., sec þjóta.
Þvá (þvæ, þó-þógum, þvægi, þveg-
inn), v.a., to wash, I., 08, 13 ; II.,
274, 18.
±*varr, sec þverra.
Þváttari (-a), ///., a fuller, ^fullo,'
L, 242, 10.
Þváttr (-ar, dat. þvætti), m., leash-
ing, II., 27 J, 17, cfr. fóta-þváttr.
ÞveiT, ad., * athwart,' straight
across: ein tlraka i^ekk afhæíiia
veg bans cnnis í skakk urn {jvoit
andlitið, L, .554,1; rt<^ygii" at'
þveru míílinu, throws the matter
straiglitwayover, i.e., prevaricates
utterly, I., 198, 21. — 2. directly
opposed: et* liann setr sig þvcmii
móti (jiiðs vilja, 1., 100,2,;; g^'Tr
saniþykki ok \só nijíik iiin [)vcr-
570
GLOSSARY.
í'veiT — cont.
an hug, I., 134, 19 ; cfr. II., 132, g ;
]}\evt (þvers), í mot (móti),
straight against, I.. 170, ^, 198, 2,
270,26; IL, 146,11.
I'verra (þveiT, þvarr-þurrum, þyrri,
þorrinn), v.n., to dry up, to
tvaste, to dwindle, I., 554, 1^; II.,
90, 13, 293, 4.
í'ver-iið (-ar), /., obstinacy, perti-
nacity, stubbornness, I., 340, 12,
498, 23.
í*ví, see þat.
í*ví-líkr, ad., such-like, such, I.,
22, 6> passim.
í*vísa, another form for dat. sing., n.,
ö/'þessi, I., 34,17, 50, 19, 94,,, 230,27-
í*væ, þvægi, see þvá.
í*ýða (dd), v.a., to interpret, I.,
14,3, 50,6, &c.— r./i., ^^ ^W'^^fy^
I., 86, 15.
Þýðing (-ar),/'., interpretation, I.,
y6,i; IL,24,27.
í*ýðr, ad., prop, sociable, hence affa-
ble, courteous, gentle, I., 16, 27.
i'.vggja {\>JgEy Þá-þágum, þa^gi,
þeginn), v.a., to accept, I., 56,6,
2^. _ 2. ^o o^'/ö2/í, 180,9, 200, 3.
Þykkja (þykkir,þótti-þóttum, þætti,
supine þótt), v.n., occurs only in
the impers, mood, to think, to
deem, to consider, I., 50, 22, 230, 23,
294, 2, 322, 9, 328, 28) ^38, 25»
454, 1 ; II., 50, 19. — Metl. to deem,
to hold, to opine, I., 8, 7, oQ, 5,
102,6, 144,7, 178,10, 234,4,
278,23,436,3.
i^ykkr, ad., * thick,' dense {fog),
I., 230,26; l^i^g^j deep: eigi
grofvu, þyckvar hnickvr bans
enui, II., 287,39.
Fykk-settr, ad., crowded, I., 8, 9.
i^yldi, see þola.
Fynga (að), v.a., doubtless the
primary form of þvinga, ichich
does not occur in Thom., to ivcigh
down, to bear doivn, to oppress :
sé, hversu væna fylgd várr Græð-
ari veitir oss, lit af valdi þeira
er OSS þynguðu, I., 224, 4 ; segist
hafa verit þyugaðr, L, 448, ^q.
Pyngan (-íiY),f, imposition, onerous,
clogging, condition : (hann) skrif-
ar aftr í England, ... .at kou-
ungrinn áminnist ... at mýkjast
alvarliga til herra Thomam, ok
kalla hann heim fyrir utan aUa
þyngan, I., 386, 20« — 2. oppres-
sive measures : kardinalis sparir
hvárki klerkdóm né klokskap at
hafa uti báðar hendr .... svo til
eftirmælis við konunginn, at allar
þær þynganir, sem nú voru lesnar
upp a skaða kirkjunnar, skreytir
hann, I., 300, 4. — 3. trials, trou-
bles,!., 288,2^.
Þyngd (-ar),/., ^burden,' hardship,
j)e7ia7ice, 'I., 236, 2.
i'yngja (d), v.a., prop., to make
heavy; hence: — 1. to impose a
burden upon, to oppress ; with dat.
and ace. : hvat leggr konungrinn
her Í mot, utan þat sem hann liefir
nægst, þat er öfund ok ilska, meÖ
þeiri umleitan, at enn megi hann
erkibyskupinum i nokkuruþyngja,
I., 368,12; • • • fremi miskunnar
verk ok þyngi eigi kirkjur eðr
kennimenn, I., 378, 23. — 2. to add
importance to, to make more se-
rious : þat herra páfans bréf, sem
þeir taka út ok bera heim til Eng-
GLOSSARY.
571
I*yngja — cont.
lands, þyngir heldr enn lettir alia
þá frétt, er þeir höfðu at flytja
konunginura, I., 328, 7. — 3. to
aggravate : hiigleið þat, bróðir,
í þíiium dómum ok skri£ta-
boðum, at flestar af þessum grein-
uin þyngir bæöi stuiid ok staÖr,
II., 08, n- — ^^^^- ^^ í^''^^
heavy, gloomy, anxious, þyngist
iiú enn af þessu efni hugr erki-
byskups, I., 160, 21- — Impers., to
grow heavy, to become serious:
eiukanliga síðan þyngdi meö
þeim Heinreki konimgi, II., 234,
„. • to qrow severe, intense, viru-
lent, ^c., II., 68, ^o'^to become over-
borne, over-powered, by illness,
11., 98, 15-
i^yngri, comp. o/þungr.
I*yngsl, n, pi., oppression, trouble,
I.?180,2, 306,8.
^yngslir, f. pL, penances, I., 174,4.
í»ýnnast, med., to grow thinner, to
dissolve {of fog), II., 08,19.
Þyrfti, see þurfa.
í'yrftugr, ad., standing in need, in
want of, II., 263, 27.
I*yrma (d), v.a., to spare, I., 10, i^,
26' 216, 26, 276, 20 {'^^here Robert-
son's suggestion. Materials, iv.
* p. 337, fcotnoterj, is borne out by
the Icel. Saga). — 2. to bear ivith,
to forbear, l.y 196,15,340,8.
i'yrri, see þverra.
í*ysja (þyss, þusti-þustum, þysti,
supine þust), v.n., to rush, I.,
Cií^, 12«
í'yss, ;//., rush, I., 230, n.
I*ýt, þýtr, 5C<? {)jóta.
í'ægiliga, adv., in a manner accept-
able, satisfactorily, agreeably,
acceptably, I., 40, 2«
í'ægiligr, ad., acceptable, 194, 1- ;
devoted, II., 108, 13.
í*ætti, þættir, see þáitr.
í*öga (þagnar),/., silence, II., 279,
32- — 2. silent attitude with re-
spect to a thing, non-interference
on behalf of: leyfði (should be
leifði) baun oss, formöunum, þat
dæmi, at kaupa eigi stuudligan friiS
með vanvirÖii laganna, eða þögn
kirkjunnar réttinda, I., 430, 27.
í*ögull, ace. þöglan (þauglan), ad.,
silent, mute, I., 280, 2 ; II., 253, 27.
í*ökk (þakkar, þakkir), f., thank,
thanks, I., 154, ^o, 374, 12, 442, 29 ;
the phrase : fyrir livers ma 11 us
þökk, irrespective of thanks, i.e.,
without respect of person, I.,
458,23-
I'örf, see þarfr.
í'örf (þarfar, þaríir),/., need, neces-
sity, I., 504,25. — 2. lohat is re-
quired, satisfaction : enn þetta
vinnr bonum þörf á önga hind,
I., 144,18; bit þór þörf viniia
lánit, svo at þú forÖist ránil, I.,
362, 25.
Æ.
Æ, adv., aye, always, ever, I., S, 15,
passim ; æ innan þriggja árji, every
third year, I., 370, j ; ai síðaii,
ever since, I., 25 I, j^ — 2. corre-
sponding to Engl, all, Scotch^
572
GLOSSARY.
Æ — cont,
cC : æ því injákara, all the more
meehlt/, I., 36, jg; sÍDularly æ því
lægri, cdl, i.e., ever the Icicer,
I., 36, 25 ; ^' sem tic^ast, at its
e/uickest, I., 232, g.
Æíiast, med. of æða, to rage, to go
071 furiously, to behave madhj, I.,
170, 9.
Æöi, /., rage, fury, L, 162, i^ 512,
25, 530, '285 546,21. — 2. maimer,
ways, II„ 277, 33.
Æ^i-saraligr, ad., furious, I., 538, g.
Æðii, comj). ad., higher, nobler, I.,
406,30.496,11,554,25.
Æfi, /'., age, life-time, I., 110, 27»
126, g.
Æfinliga, adv., always, for ever, I.,
6, 12, 406, 8, 476, 2g.
Æíinligr, ad., perpetual, I., 164, jo,
168,16,450,10.
Æf'sta, 5ee efstr, II., 269, 30-
Æpa (t), v.n., to whoop, to hoop, to
utter the cry of pursuit, I., 548, j.
Æra (ð), V.71., from órar in the
sense of fancies, to be seized by a.
desire, to yearn, I., 14,2^.
Æra (ð), v.n., from ar, an oar, to
row, to pull, I., 20, 10-
Æra (-u),/., honour, II., 144,3.
Ærinn, ad., svfficient, plentiful, II.,
265,3-
Æsa (t), v.a., to incite, I.. 320, g. —
2. Í0 rouse, to agitate {the sea),
II., 96, 1- — ^í(d. to become en-
raged, I., 226, 13.
Æska (-11),/., {ffi' ærska from órar,
Me íríVf/ «^<',) youth, II., 214, j.
Æsku-maðr, ?w., a young man, a
youth, I., 44, 20.
Æsku-tími, m., time of youth, I.,
1^, 17-
Æskiligr, ad. (oska), desirable, I.,
78, 18, 174, 13.
Æsku-blóm (öskiiblóm), bloom of
youth, I. ,2,.', IL, 284,25-
Ætla (að), v.n., to intend, I., 292,
13 ; æ. framm {^of a jjriest), to be
about to proceed to ordination, I.,
110,
23-
V.a., with dat., to in-
tend something for some one, T.,
I., 496, 25 ; æ. sér, to intend for
one's self to mean to have, I.,
176, 205 394, 18«
Ætlaii (-ar), /'., intention, II., 174,
15. — 2. guess, conjecture, II.,
271,10.
Ætlun (-ar), /*., thought, II., 214, 7.
Ætt (-ar, -it), f, family, I., 12, iq.
Ætt-]ÖT^, f, native place, II., 138, 9.
Ætt-land, n., native country, I.,
294, 1.
Ætt-menn, m. pi., descendants, I.,
8, 12 ; kinsfolk, family , I., 402, ^.
Æxla, r.a., to make larger, to cause
to increase, I., 314,22«
Æztr, sup. ad., highest, I., 78, 2,
494,17; Il-> l^, 8« — 2. foremost,
senior; seiulir meistara Jon heini
til Kanciam meÖ því bréíi til
bróður Thdmani, er þar stóíi æztr
maðr í kór, i.e., ivho was the
senior canon, I., 482, 12' — 3.
ultimate, final : æzti skilniugr, ///-
tima ratio, gist, II., 228,^.
0
Öðlast, v. med., to get in one's lot, to
obtain, I., 16,22» 88, 14 ; II., 70, ^,
74,19.
GLOSSARY.
573
Öðru, öðrum, 5<?eannarr.
Öðru-víss, adv., othcrivise, I., 220, ^g.
Öflga (íið), v.a., to imbue vjith
strength, occurs only in the Med.,
to become strengthened, to become
valid {of an election), I.. 92, 3.
— 2. to hold out, to command
strength, I., 388, 27« — 3. to tahe
effect, I., 516,6.
Öfliiðu, see afla, I., 416, 14.
Öflugr, ad., full, complete, plenary
{poivers), I., 412,23- — ^* '^^l^^^
I., 124,,.
Öfund, avfvund, II., 270, ^gj (-í^r),
/., envy, I., 126, g.
Ofuiidar-maðr, envicr, ill-ioisher, I.,
178,21.
Ofund-samr, ad., envious, jealous, I.,
320,26«
Okkvast, V. med, {this is also the
modern form of the word, lohich is
still in common use in eastern
Iceland, as well as its immediate
primitive ökkvi, m., a lump, ex-
crescence^ Syc), to cleave, to gather
in lumps, I., 246, 9.
Old (aklar, aklir), f., age, but spec.
' times,^ ' temporal xoitli reference
to the ^ common weal ' of the land,
J.., 0Ö0, 29'
Öldrum, dat. pL o/aldr.
Ollum, dat. pi. of allr.
Ölmusa (-11, \\v),f., alms, I., 100, 12«
Ölmiisu-gerð,^!, almsgiving, charity^
L, 100, 8.
Ölmusu-gæði, n. pi., bounteousness,
I., 2, 23.
Ölrnusu-inaÖr, m., one who receives
alms, a pauper, I., 98, ^ ; a desti-
tute person, I., 348, 19.
Öl-værð C-ar),/., cheerfulness caused
by wine, I., 250, ^e- — 2. fond
friendship, I., 410, 27.
Ömbun, avmbvn, IL,275,3, (-ar),/.,
recompence, reward, return for.
I., 58,18, 112,9, 518,9, 520,21;
„ II., 122, 14.
Ömbuna (aÖ), v.a., to requite, I.,
364,5,12,426,11; II., 10, 28.
Olid (andar, andir), /!, spirit, soul,
I., 44, 6 5 II., 90,22, 265,19.
Öiid-vegi, n., a throne, I., 354, 3.
Önd-verðr, ad., face foremost at the
front, fronting : hann sér bnítt, at
hérgeingr inn öndverðu brjósti svo
klæddr maðr, sera liann bafói mætt
á veginum, I., 144,8. — 2. hence —
a. facing, opposed : skipar hann
sik nú enn at uýju öndverðan með
(= mot) allri bans yfirgirnd, I.,
162, 15 ; nú hefir ek litt skipat mik
öndverðan bans vilja, I., 292,23.
— b. the head-most, foremost,
front most, first, beginning : i
öndverðri sögunni, in the begin-
ning of the saga, I., 84, n, 508,
19 ; Í öndverðum ófriði, at the out-
set of a battle, I., 166, n.
Öngr, gen. fern, öngrar, II., 14, 12 ;
dat. öngum, passim ; ace. öngvan,
öngva, I., 494, 10, 498, 12, ad.,
none, = einginn.
Or (örvar, dat. öru, pi. örvar), f,
an arrow, 1., 366, 18»
Orðigr, ad., stout, stubborn, deter-
mined, I., 74,19, 182, 13.
Or-eigi (oreiga, örcigar), m., (t desti-
tute person, I., 500, 11.
Or-eigu {-i\v),f, poverty, destitution,
I., 110, 27. '
574
GLOSSAKY.
Ör-endi, íí., = eyrendi, II., 267,5-
Ör-indr, = örendr, ad,, expired,
IL, 170,n.
Örk (arkar), /., the ark of the cove-
nant, L, 364, 20«
Ör-látr, ad,, liberal, bounteous, I.
322,11,472,1,.
Örr, ad., prop, moving, hence, agile,
active, prompt ; hut the word
occurs only in the neut. ört, in
the phrase ört iim þrjá mánaði =
freely, fully, quite for three
months, I., 474, 5.
Ör-ugga, v.a., to make bold, 11.,
30, 1.
Ör-iiggr, ad., unfearing, unappre-
hensive, not suspecting : sneri sia
gvi)s maí5r sinni ferð lieim til
stols sins orvggr ok ottalavs, II.,
273, 30. — 2. fearless, intrejnd,
bold: hann samlagaði sina roksemd
byskupsins valdi, at hann mætti
öroggr vega Guðs úvini, I., 354,
12- — 3. unhesitating, unwavering,
firm, determined : herra konungr-
inn hafSi vald at frjalsa Thom-
am, bæði af stett ok ístöðu, hafði
hann ok vilja oruggan, I., 68, 24 ;
Okkvast — cont.
voro eigi a^rir skolaklerkar hans
kumpanar sva öruggir til hrein-
lifis, II., 285, 5. — 4. safe, secure,
sure, reliable : svo er nú gert, urn
alia hluti, sem þeim sýndist örugt
í falslausan frið, I., 460, 23; krefr
hann þegar sjálfr utgreiOslu
á öllii gózinu nií. í stað, ella
borgan svá örugga, at gózit sé
haudvist, I., 188, n. — 5. certain,
clear, JI., 218, 15. — 6. trusty,
strong, enduring : er sá fótr minn
miklu oruo-o^ari enn sa anuarr, er
aldri sýktist, II., 100, 13.
Or-vilnan (or, vili), f, despair, II.,
267, ,,.
Ör-vita, ad., ' witless,' mad, I., 362,ig.
Ör-vænta v.a., with gen., to des-
pair of, IL, 267, 23«
Ör-vænting, y., despair, I., 394, ig.
Ör-vætta, v.a., to despair, = ör-
vænta, II., 267, 23«
Osku-dagr, m., Ash- Wednesday, II.,
^ 285, 10.
Ox (axar, dat. ace. öxi, y>/. axar),/'.,
an axe, I., 396, 4 ; cfr, bolöx.
ADDENDA, &c. TO GLOSSARY.
Áfall (-s), n., ^^ onfall" impetus
given hy the ivind to a shoreward
rushing wave, II., 284, ^^.
Af-brigði, n. pi., trespass, II.,
263, 13.
Af-högg, 7i.y *' præcisio " ; afhœg-
git giorir ok orvilnan heilsunnar
þar er skiott grær iafnan mikit
sár iindir góðum lækni, II., 267,
15. — 2, that which is cut off :
hann liafði bandit fotarstiifinn vit
aíhöggit, he had bound, or tied, the
stumj) of the leg to that part of it
ichich he had cut off, II., 130, 13.
A£-höggva, v.a., to cut off, II.,
• 267,20.
Af-Mt, Gf/i/; leaving off, renuncia-
tion ; árnandi öllum líknar, er
hans dýrkan frægja með afláti
annmarka, II., 240, ^.
Af-leiðis, adv., off" the right way,
i.e., in a sinister way (=:til vin-
stri bandar, I., 178,2): ecki
giorði bann þess ne m^llti er eigi
þyddi bans vvinir afleiðis, II.,
263, 22.
Amælis-laiiss, ad., blameless ; n.,
ámælislaust, as adv., without
beinq blamed or censured, II.,
. 274,', 1.
Á-naii^, add, : struggle, strife : J)vi
at þotta líf er svá fallit, at alt
oftirla^4i(S liggr iindir ánauð ok
mæÖn, I., 60, ^O'
And-varp, add. : ])l., and-vörp, I.
102
'16-
At-ferÖi (-s), 71., ways, habits, I.,
100,15.
At-vik, add: proposal, suggestion,
intimation, endeavour to carry
a thing through : long var sii
dagþingan með ýmsam atvikiim
ok mótköstum, I., 76, 13.
Auka also occurs as a weak verb
(að) : þa er avkaz gvðs giafir i
lanino þa avkaz sva skuldin, &c.,
II., 269,21.
Bak, add: as adv., behind: bann
vili hafa sva sem skygn augu bæÖi
bak ok fyrir, I., 86, 1-.
Bann-setning (-ar), /!, excommuni-
cation, I., 92,9, 406, 17.
Banorðs-sok,y., guilt of manslaugh-
ter or murder, II., 52, og'
Bastarðr(-ar), m.,abastard, I., 10, 3.
Bei^ni, add: request, I., 180,3.
Benda, «í/í/.' to point, to indicate :
jþessir veudir benda fyrir frægð ok
dyrð þessa manns, point to, prog-
nosticate, II., 279, 2-
Ber-fættr, read berr-íættr.
Berja, add under rued. : absol.,
bcrjast, to toss, to writhe abouf^
IL, 280, 1.
Bernska (-n), f, childhood, I.,
428, 3.
Birta, v.a., add as a primitive sense :
to mahc bright, to give <i light tint
576
GLOSSARY.
Birta — coat.
to : dreyriun birtist fyrir heilann,
I., 552, 2.
Bita, I'M., add as a primarij sense :
to bite {with the teeth) : siimir of-
verkjiim lostnir, svá at þeir bitu
af ser iiugr, 11., 40, 12« — Further,
to cut {of an edged instrument) :
sverð yður eru eigi búnari at bita,
enn ek er, at lata liiit, I., 532,5.
Boðuiiar-tí$,/.,/eör5^ of the Annun-
ciation, ir., 8i,i5.
Borð-búnaÖr, m., table furniture,
II., 270, 32.
Borgar-maðr, w., a burgess, 0 citi-
zen, II., 281, 21-
BráSa-byrgð, read bráða-birgð.
Bráð-ráða, r.a., with dat., hasti/i/ to
resolve, II., 273, jg.
Brenna (brenu, braon-brunnum,
brynni, bruniiinn), v.n., to burn,
to be alight, II., 234, 96, 277, 13.
Bresta, add b. i., to crack against :
blóÖrefillinu brestr í marmara-
num, I., 544. 23-
BrigSa (að), v.a.,with dat., to alter,
to change : því skal þat brigöa
yðvarri siÖsemi ? I,, 53G, jg-
Bringa (-u, -iir), /'., brim {of a can-
dlestich) : >kal loggrinn {the stick)
risa réttr ok ohallr all an veg upp
under bringuna, II., 234, 21.
Brjost, add: faqadc, flank: sem
sknnit er algjört . . . horfði
annat brjost í austr enn annat í
vestr,IL, 212,16.
Bijota, add under med. brjotast um,
to writhe about, II., 76, 7, 280, j.
Brodilr (-S, -ar), m., a spike, the
spike of a candlestick on which
Broddr — cont.
the wax candle is poised, II.
234, 25.
Bróðir, add: gen. bróðurins, II.,
60, 13.
Bróðurligr, add: fra broiSvrligv
hatri, fro??i hatred of brothers, II.,
270, il.
Bruni (-a), m.,fervour, ardour, II.,
26,19.
Brutt-reið (-ar), f, ridi?ig away,
departure, II., 32, -.
Brutt-vera (u), /'., absence, I.,
296,8.
Bræði, anger, doubtless a mistake
for bræðr, brothers, i.e. the fra-
ternity of Canterbury, II., '^Q, ^.
Brött, brott = bnitt, II., 262, 34.
Buðkr, bovðcr (-s, -ar), m., a box,
II., 286, 7.
Bulla, /!, a papal bull, I., 340, jg-
Bænar-orð, add : words of the
Prayers, I., 88, 21-
Dag-stæddr, ad., fixed to a day,
dated, I., 86,24.
Dags-werk, read dags-verk.
Daiiða-maÖr, add: one who causes
death, slayer, killer, II., 270, 13.
Dauða-staðr, 7n., the place where
death is met with, II., 270, n.
Dramb-latr, ad., proud, haughty,
II., 262,2,.
Dre'dii add under med: to spread,
to expand : bver skömm eör skaði,
sem ger er dotturinni, dreifist sú
svívirðing alt til mætSriunar, II.,
24,i,(/r. 92,21, 202,11.
Drepa, add: d. niör liöfði, to droop
with the head, II., 18,4.
Dreypa (t), v.a., causal to drjiipa,
to let drop, þegar sera piltrinn
GLOSSARY.
577
Dreypa — cont.
bergði þanii'drykk, er dreyrÍDii
var Í clreypt, II., 70, 20 ; pi'estr
skal fyrst taka vatn bins heilaga
Thome ok dreypa í mimn pilt-
inum, I., 160, 2»
Diimbr, acL, dumb, II., 276, ^g.
Dyur, add: commotion, I., 60, ^j^.
Dæma, 4. add d. dom to frame, to
pass a sentence, T., 206, 2-
Efni, add: material fit for a pur-
pose, hence, that which gives pro-
mise of becoming something : se
her nil cfui dýiiigs maims, I.,
6i, 28 ; rfj'' koiumgs efni. — Also :
pretext : haiiu fær sér þvílíkt efni
Guðs ótta útibyrgðum, I., 158, 17.
Eftii'-leitau, add: search, scehing,
striving after : e. Guðs miskunnar,
II., 240, [.
Eftir-LTti, add : delight, bliss ; alt
eftirLTtit b*oo-r undir ánanð ok
mæÖu, I., 60, ^q ; hann er meirr
skvllbvudinu fyrir eptiil(^ti heims
þessa sælunnar, II., 269, 35.
Eggjau (-ar), /"., cggiiig on,
534, IP
an oa/f
ir..
Eik (-ai-, cilcr), /.,
112,3.
Einkanliga, add: lonely, solitarily,
after the manner of a recluse, I.,
01^, 3.
Ein-mana, ad., solitary, alone, I.,
232
'J 5?
Eitr (-s), n., poison, I., 4 16, 5.
Eitrligr, ad., poisoiions, venomous,
L, 416,8, 500,1-.
Englismenn, m, pi,, Knglishmvn,
II., 212,7.
Ertra-soÖ, m.j a dish (f peas, II.,
276,9.
K 541.
FagnaÖr, add: good cheer, enttr-
tainment, festivity, I., 494,23;
II., 108,
18«
Fálkr, add: I., 246, jg.
Fall — 2. add, L, 552, ^g.
Far — 2. after: ^ passage on board
ship ' add : * noulum.'
Farsæld, add: — 3. happy issue,
desirable solution : segja þat
vænast til farsældar, ef konungi--
inn vildi sækja páfans fund, I.,
326, 7.
Fastara, comp. adv., closer, faster, I.,
264, 15 ; more eagerly, I., 348, 23-
Fá-tækligr, ad., poorly, poor looking,
II., 176,7.
Feðr, strike out the parenthesis, and
add, I., 72,25.
Fo-hirzla, add : treasure, II., 276, 13.
Fevh, add : — 5. rush of an advanc-
ing crowd, II., 144, 7.
Fjall-garÖr, m., a monntain range,
II., 174,13,
Fjár-hlutr, add: possessions, pro-
perty, II., 4, o.
Fjar-vist, add: fjarrvist.
Flekkast, rcfl.,read: Flekka (að),
v.a., to taint, to stain, to defile,
II., 30, 17. — iMed.
Fljotast, supcrl. adv., as swiftly as
may be, II., 80, 3.
Formali, add: preface, II., 2,9.
Frami (-a), /;/., renown, distinction,
prowess, I., 06,23,
Framm-bera, add : to deliver (a
speech)., to hold forth, I., 308,3»
Framm-ferð, add, as a primary
scjise : Journey abroad: gerMr
(iui^s minns í franunferíSum ok
HV)tta h'ggr hann svá hígt, 1.»
300,8.
o o
578
GLOSSARY.
Framm-flytja, add: to deliver {a
speech\ I., 308, 3.
Framm-leypi, y., = frammhleypi, I.,
276. 6. '
Frá-skilliga, add : out of the way^
lonely^ solitarily, I., 242, 9.
Frá-tekinn, add: deprived of, II.,
• 140,1,.
Fræða (dd), v. a., to instruct, to en-
lighten, II., 269, 5.
Full-greindr, ad., f idly set forth, II.,
260,15.
Full-kominn, ad., entire, I., 228, 26«
Full-saddr, ad., thoroughly satisfied,
II., 265, 3.
FuU-tíða, ad., of ripe age, I.,
252,27.
Fyrir, prep, icith dat., add: — f.
against : at ... . þessi megi
stjorua, sem erkibyskupinn hefir
til skípað, at biia fyrir siani heiiii-
komu, I., 480, 19.
Fyrir, adv., in front : hann vill hafa
svá sem skygn augu bæði bak ok
fyrir, I., m, j;, cfr. 502, jo- —
2. in front of ahead: ríðr sæll
Thomas þar eftir, sem Frakka kon-
uugr ferr fyrir, I., 434, 23^ — 3.
before : (hann) þvær frammfallinn
þeira fætr, er fyrir sitja, I., 98, ^9.
Folhion, n ? = föhian, fading, II.,
263, 3.
Föötu-inugangr, m., caput jejunii^
II., 285, 9.
Gagn>staðhgr, add : opposed, an-
tagonistic, inimical, I., 334, jq*
GarÖr, add : court-yard, I., 532, 14,
534,8.
Gefa, under various phrases add :
gefa ser at um, to evince an inter-
est in, I., 246, 19.
Gey ma, p. 377, 2nd col. line 6, 3
read 2 ; tine 13, 2 read 3.
Geystr, add: inflamed.
Gleggr, ad., = glöggr, II., 262, j,.
Gleypa, add: to devour.
Granuligr, ad., slight, miniature, I.,
^4, 20*
Greinar-laust, n. ad. as adv., ivith-
out any reason assigned, without
any qualification, I., J 38, 15.
Grimmliga, add : furiously, savage-
ly, I., 534, 9.
Grund- valla, v. a., to found, to estab-
lish, I., 370, 7.
Guð-hræÖsla, /'., fear of God, I.,
112,11.
Göltr (galtar, gelti), m., a hog, a
boar, II., 16, 23.
Hafa, under various phrases add :
h. litið um sik, to behave quietly,
Hágr, add: behaviour, manner of
conversation, I., 94, 7.
Hálmr (-s), m., straio, I., 544, 17.
HarÖ-leikr (-s), m., cruelty, I.,
318,27.
Harð-undinn, ad.; * hard-ttvisted^
hard-hearted, II., 156, jg.
Harð-ýðgi,/., = harð-ýðgi, n., I.,
426,15.
Harm-kvæli, 71. pi., torment, pain^
dire trouble, II., 192,2«
Hatr-samr, ad., persistently hating,
I., 376, 11.
Ilátta (að), VM., to shape, to regu-
late, I., 91, 7.
Haust (-s), n., autumn, II., 158,3.
Heilagr, add: heilug, I., 210, jq,
434, 19 ; heilugum, II., 260, jg.
GLOSSARY.
579
Heimill, add: — 2. free, permitted :
steiuþro var þaa avllvm heimil til
atsoknar, II., 282,22-
Heims-endi, m., the outermost re-
gions of the world, II., 278, 2^-
Helgan (-ar), /'., consecration {of a
church) : (hann) segist kominn at
fylla sitt fyrirheit í helgan kirkj-
unnar, II., 132, jg. — 2. transla-
tion {of a saint), II., 196,6.
Herða, add h. sik inn at, to press
heavily on, II., 150, jq-
Her-draga, v.a., to take jjrisoner,
II., 54, g.
Hirðir add: pastor, I., 74, g.
Hjá-kona,y,, a mistress, I., 22, ^^.
Hjálp-ræíi, n., availing counsel,
aid, help, II., 128,4.
Hlif (-ar, -ar), f., protection, I.,
234,27.
Hniga, arfi/; to sink down, as one
in the act of kneeling down : hon
hnigr til jarÖar í ómegin, II.,
126, 19.
tíressast, add : ' hilaresci^
Hiigan (-ar), f., opinion : sannliga
er þat mín hugan, at yðr sé til
reiðii heilsugjöíin, ef þér sparit ei
kostinn, II., 214, 12-
Hug-áreitiug, /., spite, spitefulncss,
I., 334, 14.
Hugsa, add: to call to mind, II.,
112,2.
Ilús-bóndi, add: householder:
ma^r liet A'illijálmr, cinn góðr
húsbóndi i Kantúaria, II., 68, j-.
Hvata, liuota, i.e. hvota (að), v.a., to
point, to thrust : hvatandi sverðinu
ofan i toman haiisinn crkibjisk-
upsins, I., 540, 2Q'
Hvild, add : gentleness, modcrationi
I., 310,13. ^
Hylja (byl, huldi, hyldi, hulinn),
v.a., to hide, to conceal, I., 168, 4;
IL, 46, 23, 264, 33.
Hælast, read: bæla (d), v.a., to
praise, I., 22, ^^ : mcd., S)C,
I^ra (að), v. impcrs., to repent:
mjök iÖrar mik, I., 440, ,3. — Mcd»
to regret : ma vera, at hann iðrist
þess innan siðarri tima, I., 454, 7.
Iðuliga : add: consta?itlg, I., 178,
29, 312, ly.
lima (að), v.n., to give out a sweet
smell or fragrance : dýrðliga ilmar
yðvart land, II., 190, 10; af þess-
um dyriSarsamligum akri ilmaði
svolangt, IL, 224,,.
Jafuaðr (-ar), m., comparison, I.,
5-i. IS-
Jail = jarl, II., 90, ^^.
Kannzelier, kannziler = kanceler,
IL, 232, 15, 24.
Kárína, /Ó;- "ifre/T," read forty days,
Kenui-dtSmr, add pastoral teaching,
L, 110,24.
Klæð-lauí^s, ad., stripped, naked,
II.,36,9.
Klæðnaðr (-ar), m., clothing, dress,
habit, L, 314,11. — -- fi9' Oeirh,
L, 302,g.
Koma, under various phrases, add :
k. upp, to duck up, I., 230, 24.
Konnugs-efni, w., cfr. efni (Adden-
da, p. 577) heir apparent, I., 26,21«
Konungs-stefna. /'., meetinc/ of'kinf/s,
I., 436, 1,.
Konungs-tign, /!, royal majesty, I.,
336, 2t. '
Ko-st-gæfi, ;/., industry, assiduity,
sedulity, cða meíS hvcrí«o miklo
0 0 2
580
GLOSSAllY.
Kost-gæfi — cont.
kostgæíi herra Heinrekr konvngr
bað OSS at ver leg^ini leyii til
at er tekit edra b}'skiipsstol, II.,
265,12.'
Kraför, j).p. of krefja, demanded,
claimed, I., 532, g.
Krjiipa, «c?i/; to kneel doivn : haiin
liafði áðr kropit at fotum fátækia
með tár ok trega, II.. 234, ^q.
Kvein, add: cof7iplaint, I., 174,2*
Kritta, add : to acquit, to absolve,
I., 76, 26-
Kyn-ferð, add: I., 220, n-
Lágliga, add: quietly, silenthj, I.
230,5.
Láu, add^ as a primary sense :
loan, II., 266, 7.
Lána (að), v.a., to lend, I., 380, 5. —
2. to grant, to bestow, II., 269, 19.
Lang-YÍst, f., long sojourn, I.,
534, ig.
Lát, add: death, demise, II.,
24, ,9.
Lata, under various phrases add:
lata Tel yfii> to express satisfaction
with, I,, 72, 10-
Lansung (-ar), f., ' looseness,^ dis-
soluteness, I., 64,20' — 2. fickle-
ness, I., 292, 29.
Leggr, 2, for stand, read stick.
Legg-J)áttr, /07* id, read: ^= leggr 2.
Leit (-ar, -ir), search,\l., 120,6.
Leysa, under Med. add : to dissolve,
to break tip : þann tíma sem
fimdrinn leysist ok menn búast
til biu'treiðar, I., 462, g.
Likami, dele {dead).
Likamligr, add : after the flesh, II.,
270,23.
Litil-mcuni, w., manikin, I., 22, ^o.
Ljosara, comp. adv., clearer, JI.,
42 ^
Lotning, add : regard, coiisideration,
II., 30, 11.
Lykja, add : to come to an end tcith,
to exhaust : hverjar heilsubætrer
haun vann folki sinu uær eingi
maðr letri lukt, I., 138, jg.
Lymska (-11), y., idle, guile, deceit,
1., 412, 26«
Lægja, add under Reflex: 1. sik uu-
dan, to give loay, to take an
impression : marmarinn
læorði sik undan at taka meÖ bloð-
iun, I., 550, 23.
Lögr, add : a * loch,^ II., 174, 13.
Mála-greinir,/.j!>/., the setting forth,
discussio7i, of matters under dis-
pute, II., 32, 2.
Mali (-a), m., soldier^s pay, I.,
166,10.
Mána^r, ac^if; acc.pl., mánuðr, II.,
280, 32«
Maun-kind, add: I., 70, iq-
Matr (-ar), m., ^ meat,' food, I.,
98, 2i, 228, Q.
Megn (-s), «., another form for, and
probably the ground-form of most
of the cited examples under, me-
gin, L, 88,4.
Meinger^ar-maðr, m., one icho
wreaks harm, hurt, who provokes,
II., 36, 6-
Meiiiligr, add: superl. meinlegstr,
I., 302,26-
Meistari, add: master, steward, I.,
360, 2i.
Minkanar-grein, f., clause, state-
ment, involving disparagement.
I., 394
> 2*
GLOSSARY.
581
Mis-þykt, /'., for id. read =• mis-
sætti.
Mjúkara, adv., more ri\eeldy, more
gently, I., 36, le-
Móður-hús, add : original fouiida-
tio7i, ' domus {ecclesia) matrix^' I.,
370,11.
Mot, add : Jig. towards, meira til
áleitni enn styrkingar mot ástinni,
er eigi leitar sinn ávinning, I.,
398, iQ. — Temp, against, to-
ivards : annan tima moti lýsing
eru innleiddir aorir þrettáii fá-
tækir, T., 98,31-
Mót-gerÖ (-ar, -ir), /'., pj'ovocation,
I., 328, 28-
Mynd, add : fashion, manner : kjörí
hon Iiann sájlf . . . á nokkura
líka mynd ok lesit er af hinum
lielgaDavíð, I., 18, ig.
Myrkr, ad., prop, darkf dim, hut
obscure, dissimulating, crafty, I.,
. 326, 22-
Ká, i'.ö., add, as a primary sense:
to reach (ivith the hand) : (liann)
þrifr til sveinsins, ok fyrri en hann
feingi til bans nað þaa sa hann,
&e,IL,281,33.
Ná-lægr, add: near at heart, I.,
308,18.
Nam, add : I., 1 8, 29«
Náimi, ad., close {of relationshij)),
II., 260, 2-
Naut (-s), n., a neat (a coio), II.,
TOO
l^-, 16-
Nema, v.a,, add under 2 : to learn,
certiorem fieri: nv megv þer af
þoira frasavgn nema liversv mikill
liarmr .... oröin er, II., 274, 7.
Nou-timi, m., the hour of nones,
three o'clock p.m., I., 106,3.
N(5tt, add : under the phrase : um
nottina : during the night, I.,
230, 6 ; also : á nótt, on {at) or
during the night, T., 230,9-
Ný-kvæntr, ad., newly married,
II., 148, 12-
Ný'vigðr, ad., neudy consecrated,
I., 136,13.
Næra (Ö), v.a., to nourish, I.,
316,12-
NöÖsyn (noðsyn), = nanÖ-syn, tl.,
262,26,264,, 265,15.
Ö-bliða, /'., un kindness, disfavour,
I., 158, ig.
öðr (óð, ótt), ad., prop, mad, cfr.
Germ, ivut, hence: hasty, rash,
quick, in the phrase : or ei ott at
greina, it is {a /natter ) jiot soon
told, II., 206, 4.
ÓtViÖar-maðr, ?n., worrier, persecu-
tor {bully), IJ., 46, 2G'
Oft-samligr, ad., frequently repeat-
ed, I., 388, 15.
Of-verkir, add : II., 40, n-
Ögnandi, /br m. threatener, read:
pres. p., threatening.
O-lyfjmi (6, lyf), /'., abomination, I.,
404, 18.
Orð-fleyta (tt), v.a., to give currency
to a rumour, I., 292,29-
Orð-færi, n., manner of speech,
mode of expression, II., 6, n-
Ó-imibreÖiligr, ad., = óuraræÖiligr,
II., 264, 20.
Páfa-tala, f, series of popes, I.,
26,3.
Pisl, add: jjain, torment.
Pislar-piUmi, read píslarpálmr.
Fist ill (-s), 7;/., ' the epistle.' I.,
482, ly.
582
GLOSSARY.
Prest-bróðir, m.y lay br other, {\f rater
conversus ') ? I., 244, ^g.
Prestr, add: dat. prestDum, II.,
261,0.
Prof, add : trial, experiment, test,
II., 116,19.
Rang-turna (að), v.a., to turn the
wrong loay, to pervert, to miscon-
strue, I., 176,27.
Pas, add: galop, II.. 116, j^.
Pasa, add: to he in a state of con-
fusion, I., 208, 32-
liaun, add : gen. raiinar, as an adv.,
in reality, I., 58, 9.
Peikna, add: to calculate, to specu-
late,!., 528,1.
Peka, add : Impers. to drift : ef í
þann sjó rekr, II., 96, 3.
Pétt-virÖing, f. fair estimate, fair-
ness, I., 400, 22-
Riða, v.a., read ríða.
Piða {-u),f.,for II., 72, ;, read, IL,
281, 15.
Piddaraligr, read riddarligr.
Sá, jyroji. dem., after sú add (svó ?
IL, 206, 5).
Sam-bláslr, w., conspiracy, I.,
ÁoA, 22*
Sam-haldiiiii, add: comjylete, I.,
4,3.
Sam-ráði = samráðr, II., 274, 17.
Sann-lieilagr, = sannhcilagur, I.,
136,12-
Sannleiki (-a), m., = sannleikr, I.,
334, 11.
Sáttar-bréf, n., letter testifying cf
reconciliation, I., 530,4.
Sax, jy/. SÖX, the bows of a vessel,
I., 26, 10.
Segja, add : s. upp, to throw up (an
engagement), to refuse, L,
^o'±, 24.
Sénn (sen, sét),^.;?. of sjá, as ad.,
seen, I., 342, g ; IL, 48, 9.
Setja, under Phrases add: s. at
{impers.), to grow ivan {of a
corpse), II. , 288,2«
Setningr (-s), m., regulated habits,
L, 106,2.
Sið-semi, /'., religious worship, I.,
536,18.
Smw, pr on. p OSS., under 2» add: I.,
516,21.
Sjá, pron. dem., add : L, 450, 15.
Sjaldan, adv., seldoin, IL, 269, 28«
Sjolfan, ace. sing of sjálfr, q.v., L,
368, 23.
Skaiu-hendr, ad., short-handed,
short-armed, i.e. poiverless, IL,
^67,25.
Skelmis-drep, n., remove the notes of
interrogation, and aad : a stoli
skelmisdrepsins, '' in cathedra
pestilentice.'^
Skipn, add: — 5. to organise, to
propagate ; s. kristni, I., 40, 7. —
Also, under prepos. uses : s.
undir borð {impers.), to seat
{persons) at table,!., 248, 19.
Skjota, add: s. malum til, to ap-
])eal, IL, 265,31, 267, 1.
Skrifari (-a), ni., a tvriter, notary,
IL, 280, 31.
Skyldugr, «<-/., í/í/í', L, 332,24; oiv-
ing, indebted, !., 334, g.
Skyn,ybr (-s) read (-jar).
Skynsemdar-orÖ, n. pi., well reason-
ed argument, L, 414, 1^.
Gl.OSSARY.
583
Slíta, add : fund slítr (impers.), a
meeting breaks iipy dissolves, 1.,
168, 22j
Sljor, ad. J prop, blunt, hence : lax,
remiss, I., 430, ^q.
Smá, v.a., add: 1., 144, 7.
Snara, under Med. add : s. undan,
to * get out ofit,^ I., 142, jg.
Sujor (snjofar, ace. snjo), m,, snow,
I., 540,2^.
Sniia, under Med. add: sniiast að,
to turn in favour of, to counte-
nance, I., 90,29.
Solar-fall? IT., 278,35.
Spilla, add : s. um, to undo what has
been loell done, II., 180, 21.
Spyrja, add : sp. til,/o have news of,
I., 518,11.
Staðr, add : als sta^ar, everyivhere,
I'j 118, 28'
Steyir, add : — 2. strife, enmity, I.,
480, 7.
Stig, add: as a primary sense:
step, pace, II., 282, 1.
Stiga, add : s. á fdt, to step on the
foot, II., 283, 9.
Stór-mál, n. pi., iveighty matters,
II., 267, 1.
Styrkingar-stoð, f, pillar oj sup'
port, II., 275, 29.
Styrkr, add: marka styrkt, to see,
to perceive, clearly, I., 504, 2q-
Sub-djákn, ?n., subdeacon, I.,
332, 17.
Sundr-lyndi, n., discord, L, 140,8.
Simd-tjörn, /'., ' sivimming tarn,^
bathing pool, II., 282,25-
Sut-fenginn, add (-feinginn).
Sút-fullr,ybr id. read : sorrowing.
Svefn, add: II., 146,25»
Sykjast, after, to become, add
* diseased!
Sýn, add . — 5. a look, a glance:
him ser iipp augum ok renner til
synar, I., 156, 2-
Synja (að), v.a., to refuse, II.,
269, 32»
^ým\igv,forbut, insert : II., 126,27.
— 2.
Sækja, add: to persecute, þeir
sóttu sælau Thómam erkibyskup,
svá sem til útlegðar, fyrir svikara
nafn ok fépínur, I., 234, 22- — to
prosecute, to sue, to arraign : bi-
skupa þá höfum vér eigi bannsett,
heldr páfinn sjálfr, ok ef þér vilit
þat kæra, sækit hanu þar um, I.,
526,19.
Sæma, /or ; to be in accordance ivith ?
or to associate ivith ? read : to
confer ivith,
Sox, see sax.
Taka, under various phrases add:
t. jörð, to touch the ground:
hnytti ok krepti fotinn í hné-
liðnum, svá at eigi tók jörÖ, II.,
84,1.
Templum-bræÖr, 7n. pl., templars,
I., 164,1,.
Ti^v, for ' talked of,' read: occur-
ring.
Tíðast, superL adv., at the quickest,
as quickly as possible, I., 250, 7 ;
II., 76, 14.
TiUögu-maÖr, m., counsellor, I.,
470, 12-
Tyna, add: to lose, to foifeit : ok
ef þor tynið vinattv annais livars
konvng.sins þa hvgsiÖ or liverr
skaði af ma goraz, II., 263, 32.
584
GLOSSARY.
Um-brot, n. p/., writhing, tossing
about, II., 84, 4.
Um-vandan (-ar), /"., zeal, zealous-
ness, I., 116,25.
Undan-dráttr, m., add : tardiness.
Undirdögr? II., 140, 13.
Uppfestingar-maðr, m., a hanged
man, II., 114, -.
Upp-runi (-a, -ar), m., sprouting vp^
beginning, II., 62, ^.
"Csann-sýni, n,, injustice, I., 438, 3^.
tJt-legð, add (-ar, -ir), and II.,
t^t-skyriug (-ar), /'., explanation, I.,
232, ,6. "
Vaí5a (veð, ÓS, -óðum, æÖi, supine
vaðit), v.n., prop, to wade ; hence :
to rush : liann veÖr tramm at erki-
byskupiuiim, I., 538, 14.
Vafðr, add ; I., 556, 20-
Vald, under 2. office, add: I,, 64,4.
Valda, after oUi add (voUi, I.,
448,26;)
Yan-sami, n., disgrace, I., 402, g.
Yarr, add : neut. vart in the phrase :
eigi er vartt at vita, it is not clear
or easy to hnoic, II., 283, 20*
Venja (-u), /!, custom, II., 267,3.
Verða, after yrði add vyr^i, I.,
368, 18.
Yið-bragð, add: movement, turn:
ma þat réttliga viiða til óhæ-
versku, ef vér forum svá af FraDz
með fljótu viðbragÖi, I., 462, 97.
Yiðr-komning, add: emotion, I.^
510, 25.
Yiðr-kvæmiligr, ad., ft, proper, I.,
312,13.
Yild, add : — 3. desire, aim, inten-
tion, ^ pleasure,^ I., 70, 4.
Yiljandi, ad., loiUing, of free ivill,
I., 310,1;.'
Yiuua, add under 4 : v.á., to do
perpetual damage to, I., 44,27.
Yitiia (að), v.a., to testify, 11.,
284,1.
Yætti, add as pi'imary sense : evi-
dence, I., 120, 1.
Yfir-komÍDD, add: ^ come on, ^ pre-
vailing, I., 178,20-
Yíir-reið (-ar), f., episcopal visita-
tion in his diocese, I., 506, 13.
Yfir-vinna, v.a., to overcome, I.,
298, ,,.
Pannigiu, adv., thus, II., 88,9.
jÞannug (þaiinvg), i.e., þann veg,
adv., thither, II., 283,7-
i^egja, add: þ. yfir, to treat ivith
indifference, I., 134, 13.
i^iggja, add : þ. brott af, to alioiate
from, to have deprived of I.,
^^178,2,.
í*jónustu-tekja, add: taking of the
sacrament) II., 280, 34.
i^orau (-s), n., boldness, II.,
170,3.
í*riðju-dagr, w., Tuesday,!., 240, ig.
i*imgr, add: dull, þ. eyru, II.,
267,26-
i'verast, med., proj). to put onc^s
self athivart, hence : þ. gegn, to
loar against, I., 302, g.
í'víligr, ad., like, such-like, I.,
490,20.
i^yrsta, v.impers., to thirst, II., 7G, n.
INDEX.
INDEX.
Icelandic proper names, which in the preface (or elsewhere) are found represented
in accommodated forms, are given here in those of the vernacular speech ; d, when soft,
is represented by 5 ; th by þ, which follows y in the alphabetical order ; cross references
are given from accommodated to vernacular forms.
A.
Aachas ; see Ahaz.
Abel, son of Adam, ii. 24, 270, 278.
Abingdon, abbey of, viii.
Achsah ; see Axa.
Adam, abbot of Evesham, 1161-(1191),
sent by archbishop Thomas for the
episcopal pall, i. 90.
Adelaide ; see Aldæla.
Adele, daughter of William the Conqueror,
and mother of king Stephen, married to
Stephen count oi Blois, i. 26.
Adrianus IV., pope, 1154-1159, r. 26;
crowned Frederic Barbarossa, i. 90 ;
confirms the privileges of St, Frides-
wide's, Ixxv.
Adriaticum (mare) ; see Mare Adriaticum.
Agiippa, consul of Rome, a.u. 717, clxii.
Ahaz, king of Juda, B.C. 741-728, i. 364.
Akranes, a parish in the provostship of
Borgarfjör'Sr, Icel., xxix.
Akrar, a homestead in the parish of
Blönduhlíb', Icel., xl, xlvi.
Alan, abbot of Tewkesbury (1188-1202),
contemporary biographer of Thomas,
Ixxxix-xc.
Albert, cardinal of St. Lawrence, commis-
sioned to execute judgment for the
murder of archbishop Thomas, ii. 30.
Alditha, a woman cured of a crippled leg,
II. 283.
Aldaela (Adelaide, or Alix de Savoie),
queen of France, 1114-1136, d. 1154,
married to Louis le Gros, mother of
Louis VII., grandmother of Philip II.
August, I. 478 ; II. 172, 212, sqq.
Alexander (LlcAvellyn), the cross-bearer o
archbishop Thomas, cxi ; i. 446.
Alexander III., pope, 1159-1181, i. 26;
translates Gilbert Foliot to London,
44 ; flies from Italy to France, 90 ;
bestows the pall on archbishop Thomas,
90, 92 ; holds councils at Kome and
Tours, 122-130; urges Thomas to keep
peace MÍth king Henry, 1 60 ; absolves
Thomas from his oath to observe the
customs of Clarendon, 174; deprives
Thomas of his legative office, 178-180 ;
gives audience to rival missions from
the king and the archbishop, 270-286
(ii. 246, 250-255) ; receives the arch-
bishop in audience, 290-302 ; condemns
the customs of Clarendon, 304 ; rein-
states Thomas in the see of Canterbury,
308-312; writes to king Henry to
make peace with the archbishop, 322-
324 (ii. 264-265) ; refuses an interview
with the king, 328 ; remonstrates with
the king for his alliance with Fred.
Barbarossa, 332-336 (ii. 269) ; sends u
588
INDEX.
Alexander III. — cont.
mission to the king, 336-338 ; makes
peace Ayith his various enemies, 352 -,
returns to Rome, 352-354 ; writes to the
bishop of London to intercede "with the
king on behalf of the archbishop, 376-
380 (II. 265-266) ; writes a conciliatory
letter to king Henry, 386 ; sends, at
king Henry's request, two legates to
England, 412 ; writes to influential men
in France and England to interest
themselves in bringing about peace,
422 ; writes to king Henry on the same
subject, 422-424 ; sends two legates to
England, 444 ; refuses king Henry's
request to authorize the archbishop of
York to crown his son 450 ; forbids the
bishops of England to perform the
ceremony, 452 ; authorizes the arch-
bishop of Rouen and the bishop of
Nevers to threaten king Henry with
interdict unless he make peace with
Thomas, 456 ; suspends the archbishop
of York, 456-458 ; excommunicates the
bishops of London and Salisbur}-, 458 ;
receives letters from various quarters on
the death of archbishop Thomas, ii.
14-24 (272-274) ; instructs the arch-
bishops of Sens and Rouen to inter-
dict king Henry's cismarine dominions,
26-28 ; authorizes two legates, cardinals
Theotwin and Albert, to bring king
Henry to terms with the church, 30 ;
instructs the bishop of Exeter how to
deal with accessories to the murder of
Thomas, 50-60; canonizes Thomas at
the request of the people of England,
186-194.
Alexandr ; see Alexander.
Alexsander; see Alexander.
Alimannia, i. 330.
Alix de Savoie ; see Aldæla.
Almes, abbey of, i. 160.
Alphred, bishop of Worcester, 11.58-1160,
I. 134.
Alvena, a woman cured of disease, ii. 283.
Ambrosius, archbishop of Milan, 374-
397, I. 366.
Amiens, i. 254 ; ii. 38.
Anastasius IV., pope, 1153-54, i. 26.
Andakiil, a parochial district in Borgar-
fjör^r, xxix.
Andegavia, Andigavia (Aujou), i. 42,
322.
Andreas ; see Andress.
Andress ; see St. Andrew.
Anglia ; .9ee England.
Anglo-Saxon, books, viii; language and
alphabet in connection with Icelandic
speech and orthograph}-, viii, ix.
Aujou ; see Andegavia.
Anselmus, Anselm, prior of Bee in Nor-
mandy, afterwards archbishop of Canter-
bury, 1093-1109; banished by William
Rufus, I. 10, 84 ; his prayers used by
Thomas, 102.
Antigonus, "king of the Jews," b.c. 39-37,
clxii.
Autonius Saga, xxxiv.
Aquitania, Aquitannia, Aquitaiue, i. 42,
322 ; II. 110, 114.
Archadius (Arcadius), eastern emperor,
395-408, I. 366.
Argentan ; see Argentheus.
Argentheus (Argentan), a vision at,
announcing the death of archbishop
Thomas, ii. 24, 278.
Ari forgilsson, the 'Learned,' b. 1067, d.
1148, ix.
Arnarfjör^r, a bay and district in the
north-western peninsula of Iceland, xii,
XXX.
Ames, provostship of, in southern Iceland,
XXX.
Arngrimr, abbot of í*ingeyrar, d. 1362,
probably conversant with an early and
rare Latin poem on Thomas, xxiii ;
wrote a saga of bishop GuSmundr Ara-
son, xxvii, Ix-lxix ; not the author of
T., Ixiv-lxix.
Aries, I. 126.
Arngrimr Jónsson, surnamed the
'Learned,' b. 1568, d. 1648, had the
loan of T. about 1589, xl, xlvi.
Arni Da'Sason, owner of T., xli, sqq.
INDEX.
589
Árni Magnússou, Icel. historian, b. 1663,
(1. 1730, xlvii.
Árni Oddssou of MiSgar'Sar, xxxix ;
lienchman of bishop Murtoiun of Skál-
hoit, xli ; bailiff of I*órsness-|)ing, xlii ;
owner of T,, ib.
Arni Olafsson, bishop of Skálholt, 1413-
1430, clxvii.
Arnoul ; see Arnulf.
Arnulf, bishop of Lisieux, 1141-1181,
introduces Thomas to king Henry, xcix ;
regains royal favour by counsels adverse
to Thomas's interests, i. 158 ; writes to
pope Alexander an account of the
leception of his legates by king Henry,
338-340 ; is charged by papal legates
to bring the king to terms, ir. 34.
Arundel ; see Rundinel.
Arundinel ; see Rundinel.
Ásgeirsá, a homestead in ViSidalr, north
Icel., xlvi, xlvii.
Asinius Pollio (C.)» consul of Rome, a.u.
714, clxii.
Aspiciens-bok, an autiphonary of the imrs
hiemalis of the church service accord-
ing to the Roman Breviary, i.e., from
• the first Sunday in Advent to the first
Sunday in Lent; derives its name from
the first word in the respond of the
first lesson on the first Sunday in Ad-
vent : " aspicicns a longe, ecce video
" Dei potentiam venientem, etc.,'' ix.
Ass, a homestead in the district of Koldu-
hvcrfi, the church oT, possessed of a
' Thomas söngr,' xxix ; dedicated to
St. Thomas of Cant., xxx; possessed
an effigy of Thomas, xxxi; and sagas
of him, xxxiii.
Asta, married to Ivar Jónsson Hólmr,
clxv.
Audomaropolis ; see Audomarus (St.
Omer) .
Audomarus, Saint, bishop of Terouanne,
666-695, I. 256 ; from whom derives
its name :
Audomarus (St. Omer), a town of Franco,
I. 264; II. 246.
AuSunu, probably an Icelandic monk at
Kyme priory, Lincolnshire, x, xi.
Auöunn í*orbergssoQ, bishop of Holar,
1313-132], his church registers referred
to, xxix-xxxiii.
Augustinus, archbishop of Canterbury,
598-604; I. 40, 76, 84, 12-1, 126, 554;
II. 271.
Augustinus de Undinis, a papal nuncio at
the court of Denmark, clxiv.
Augustus, Cæsar, clxiii.
Auis, a lady of Stafford, a favourite of
king Henry II., i. 52, 54.
Aumale, ii. 38.
Austreberta (Austreberthe de Monlreuil),
nunnery of, i. 254.
Austrhalfa = Austrriki.
Aiistrriki, the Orient, ii. 108,
Auxerre, a town in France, i. 38,
Avranches; 6t't' Brinchas.
Axa (Aachsah), daughter of Caleb, ii.
86, 88, 282.
B.
Baal, I. 386; ii. 275.
Babilon, i. 352, 404 ; ii. 257.
Babylon ; see Babilon.
Baldewinus of Boulogne, xcviii.
Baldwin, archdeacon of Exeter, i. 62.
Bartholomeus (Bartholomew), bishop of
Exeter, 1161-1184; present at arch-
bishop Thomas's consecration, i. 88 ;
attends the council of Northampton,
190-196 ; counsels submission, 216-
218; is .sent by king Henry to liomo,
260, 280 (ii. 251) ; is commissioned by
the pope to shrive the accomplices in
the nmrder of Thomas, ii. 10-42, 50-
58 ; has a vision concerning the arch-
bishop's miracles, ii. 50, 277-278.
Bár6"ar(hilr, a valley in nortlierM Iceland,
X x \ i i .
590
INDEX.
BarSaströnd, a district in western Iceland,
XXX.
Baronius, cardinal, i. 1 30.
BastarSr ; see Vilhjálmr Rú^ujarl.
Bee, Beccura, priory in Normandy, i. 10,
12.-
Beauvais, ii. 38.
Beda venerabilis, (672-735) ; his works
studied in Iceland, ix ; his authority as
computist, clxi-iii ; he probably the
source of the mistake about the pro-
vince of London, i. 40.
Bedeford (Bedford), ii. 102, 104, 106, 283.
Beimiui, a friend of archbishop Thomas,
II. 130-134.
Benedict, prior of Canterbury, 1155-1157,
afterwards abbot of Peterborough, ob.
1193 or 1194; the date of his < Mira-
cula', Ixxi-lxxv ; a list of the same,
clv-vi ; he probably the main source of
T., Ixxv-lxxvii ; the chronicle going by
his name quoted, cxxxix ; his miracles
in T., II. 24, sqq. ; n life of Thomas
ascribed to him, ii. 44 ; letter to him
from Robert of Cricklade, ii. 92-100.
Benedict ; see St. Benedict.
Beneventum, i. 444, 456.
Berenorar, bearer of letters of excom-
munication from archbishop Thomas,
cxl.
Bergr Gunnsteinsson, translator of Thomas
saga, Iviii.
Bernard ; see St. Bernard.
Bernard Wilfried's or Willard's son ; see
BjarnvarSr VilraSsson.
Bernardus (de Saint-Saulge), bishop of
Ncvers, 1160-1177, i. 456.
Bertinus-klaustr (St. Bertin's) near St.
Omer, i. 260, 286.
BessastaSir, a homestead in the parish of
Alptanes, in the church of, an effigy
of Thomas, xxxi ; residence of governors
of Iceland, xlii-xliv.
Birkhampstead, castle of, i. 56.
Bituricum ; see Bourges.
Bjarnvar'Sr Vilrá'Ssson, called the * Book-
wise,' an early missionary bishop in
Iceland, viii.
Björn Einarsson, pilgrim to Canterbury,
clxiii.
Björn, surnamed the English, xii.
Björn Jónsson, of Skar'Ssa, annalist,
clxiii.
Blesis (Blois), i. 26, 470; ii. 16.
Blois ; see Blesis.
BlönduhlíS, a parish within the provost-
ship of Skagafjörðr. xl, xlvi.
Bologna, i. 38.
Bolonia (Boulogne), i. 252, 254, 484,
486.
Bononia ; see Bolonia.
Borgarfjört?r, a bay and district in south-
western Iceland, xxix, xlvi.
Bosea, Boseham, Bosham ; see Herbert of
Bosham.
Boston ; see Bótúlfs-steinn.
Bótiilfs-steinn (Boston), i. 244.
Bourges (Bituricum, Biturica), i. 354 ;
II. 257.
Bourneville in Normandy, i. 12.
Brandr Jonsson, abbot of Ver, afterwards
bishop of Hdlar, 1263-1264, xxvii,
clxi.
Brandr Sæmundarson, bishop of Holar,
1162-1201, xvii.
Brautarholt, a homestead in the parish of
Kjalarnes in southern Iceland, clxix.
Breta-sögur, historiae Britannorum by
Geoffrey of Monmouth, ix.
Brido ; see RikarSr Brito.
Brinchas (Avranches),' meeting at, be-
tween king Henry and the Pope's le-
gates, II. 36-42.
Broe, Broi, Brois ; see Bræis.
Brussels, xcv.
Brynjolfr Sveinssun, bishop of Skálholt,
1639-1674, xlvii.
Bræis, I. 144.
c.
Cadomum ; see Kadon.
Caen ; see Kadon.
INDEX,
591
Caiaphas ; see Caifas.
Caifas, the high priest, i. 196.
Caleb, II. 88.
Calixtus ; see KaHxtus.
Calixtiis III., antipope, 1168-1178, i. 92
352 ; II. 257.
Caneia ; see Cantuaria.
Caninius Gallus, consul of Rome, a.u.
717, clxi'..
Canterbury ; see Cantuaria.
Cantuaria (Canterbury), see of, v, vi,
clxvii; I. 8, 12, 40, 62, 68-86, 12-t-
126, 102, 174, 178, 186, 220, 226, 244,
262, 306-310, 346, 354-360, 390, 396,
404, 418, 428, 450, 456, 460, 466, 480,
482,488,492-496, 504, 506, 518, 522,
534, 540, 558 ; ii. 8, 12, 16, 18, 22, 44,
60,68-84,98, 100, 102, 108, 112,114,
138, 144, 148, 150, 152, 154, 158, 182,
194,202-210, 216,224, 226, 236, 246,
258, 260, 264, 274, 279, 286, 287.
Canute the Great, king of England, 1017-
1035, procures from the Pope a promise
not to exact extravagant fees for the
bestowal of the pall, i. 126.
Cardiff castle, i. 8.
Carnotum (Chartrcs), see of, i. 436, 466.
Cattania (Catania), tOMn of Sicily, ii. 94,
284.
Cecilia, daughter of Vigfúss Ivarsson
Hdlmr, ii. 294.
Celestinus II., pope, 1143-1144, i. 26.
Celtres ; see Carnotum.
Cenomannia (Maine), i. 128.
Charlemagne ; see Jvarulus mikli.
Chartres ; &ee Carnotum.
Chateaudun, i. 160.
Chaumont ; see Mons Calvus.
Christchurch ; see Krists kirkja.
Ciprianus, sou of a noble lady, brought to
life again, ii. 164-168.
Clair-Marais and Clarus ^lariscus ; sec
Klaremareis.
Claremont, i. 376.
Clarendon, Clarenthon ; sec Clarenton.
Clarenton (Clarendon), great assize of,
cxxiii; council of, &c., i. 160, 162, 168,
186, 2ÍV4 ; II. 36.
Cleopatra, clxiii,
Collinson (John), county historian, i.
514.
Compienne ; see Kompin.
Compostella, a city of Spain, ir. 224.
Constance, queen of Castille, consort of
Louis VII. le Jeune, of France, i. 56.
Constantinus the Great, Roman emperor,
306-337 ; I. 362-476.
Cosenza, a town of Sicily, ii. 40.
Cretel = Crickladc.
Cricklade ; sec Robert of Cretel.
Cumberland, i. 514.
D.
Daði Árnason, owner of T., xl, sqq.
Damascus, i. 228.
Danegeld, cviii ; i. 140.
Davis, king of Juda and Israel, i. 18,
164, 166, 344, 366, 402; ii. 16, 86,
148, 182, 282.
David Fitzgerald, bishop of St. David's,
1148-1176, I. 88.
Dedeford, ii. 102, 104, 106, read Bede-
ford, q.v.
Degleotesta (?), ii. 226.
Denmark, xlii, clxiv.
Detford, II. 103, 105, 107, read Bedford.
Diceto (Radulphus de), a contemporary
chronicler, cxxxix; i. 130.
Dionysius (St. Denis), martyr, i. 542; ii.
287.
Dionysius (St. Denis), monastery of, i.
444, 446.
Dionysius Exiguus, clx-clxii ; ii. 270.
Domitius Calvinus (C), consul of Home,
A. u., 714, clxii.
Doram, ir. 30 ; sec Gorham.
Dorobernia (Dover), cxl ; i. 4!<4, 488,
504.
Dorothea " the German," wife of Ami
Oddsson of MiSgartNar, xlii.
Douai, xciv.
Dover ; sec Doroberuia4
592
INDEX.
Dovra; see Dorobernia.
Drontheim, archbishop of, xxiv.
Duchesne (Andre), i. 58.
Diigdalc (Sir AVilliam), Ixxv, xciii.
Du Meril (Edelestand), xxiii.
Durham ; see l)3'nhóhnar.
Dynhóhnar (Din-holms, by popular ety-
mology from Duuhelm-eusis, Durham),
II. 284.
E.
Eastry ; see Hestræi.
Ecka, an estate, i. 226.
Edda by Suorri Sturlusou, philological
treatises attached to, viii, ix, xxii.
Edmundus (=Ingimundr), son of Ivar
Vigfússon Hólmr, clxix ; ii. 294.
Edward Confessor, king of England, 1041-
1066, his saga, ix ; his laws, cviii ; his
translation, i. 136.
Edward Grim, a secular clerk of Cam-
bridge, contemporary biographer, Ixxxi-
Ixxxii ; I. 540, 542, 552.
Egiptus (Egypt), I. 48.
Einar Gilsson, Icel. poet of the 14th cent.,
wrote an encomiastic poem on bishop
Gudmund Arason, Ixi.
Eirlkr Magniisson, king of Norway, 12/9-
1299, xxxvi ; I. 22.
Eldeminster ; see Valdemuustr.
Eleemosyna ; see Almes.
Elias of Evesham, compiler of the Quad-
rilogus prior, Ixxvi, xciv.
Eliseus ; see Heliseus.
Elisha ; see Heliseus.
Ellendrus ; see Erlendr.
Emelin ; see Ermelin.
Engey, an island near Reykjavik, the
church of, dedicated to Thomas, xxx ;
possessed an eflagy of him, xxxi.
England, vii, xiii, x-xiv, clxvii ; i. 4-10,
16, 22, 26, 40-44, 48, 50, 56-66, 70,
80,82,90,92, 120, 121-128, 132, 138,
England — cont.
146, 156, 166, 182, 192-196, 246, 252,
258-266, 270, 282, 284, 286, 294, 296,
300, 308, 318-322, 326, 330, 334, 340,
342, 348, 352, 354, 358, 360, 370, 372,
376, 378, 380, 384, 386, 390-396, 398,
410, 412,416,420, 422,426, 428, 432,
440-444, 450, 452, 456, 460, 464, 466,
474, 480, 486-490, 516 ; ii. 2-8, 20,
30, 32, 40, 48, 96, 108, 142, 150, 162,
- 172, 174, 180, 186, 190, 194, 198, 212,
216, 224, 226, 238, 246, 248, 249, 252-
255, 257, 258, 266, 268-273, 286-289.
Englismenn (Englishmen), i. 354, 356 ;
II. 196, 212.
Equitania, Equitannia ; see Aquitauia.
Eric ; see Eirikr.
Eric of Pomerania, king of Denmark,
1412-1439, clxvii-viii.
Erlendr, Vigfiiss son Holms, clxix.
Ermelin, Ermilin, a decrepit woman of
Canterbury, ii. 82, 84, 281.
Esau, II. 276.
Esechias (Hezechiah), kiug of Juda, i.
344.
Espoliu (Jon) ; see Jon Espoliu.
Estrehi ; see Hcstræi.
Ethelbert, king of Kent, 568-616 ; i. 40-
42.
Etvar'Sr ; see Edward Grim.
Eugenius II., Pope, 1145-1153, i. 26.
Eustacius, a clerk of Boulogne, xcviii.
Evesham ; see Ornaham.
Evrard, dean of Ecclesia Morinensis, i.e.
Boulogne, i. 484.
Exenford ; sec Oxford.
Eye, castle of, i. 56.
EyjafjörSr, a bay and district in northern
Iceland, xxxii, xliv.
Eyjardalsa, a homestead in Bar'Sardalr,
at the church of, an effigy of Thomas,
xxxii.
Eynesford, living of, i. 120.
Eyrr, the manor of Rafn Sveinbjarnarson,
xii.
INDEX.
593
F.
Falaise ; see Phalase.
Faudulfhus, Pandulphus, bishop of Nor-
wich, 1222-1226, II. 204.
Ferentinum, i. 458.
Filippus, Philip, II., king of France, 1180-
1223,1. 478; li. 172, 212, S(jq.
Filippus, Philip, count of Flanders, i. 252,
254, 264; II. 248.
Fiiinr Jonsson, bishop of Skálliolt, 1754-
1789, the church historian of Iceland,
xliii, xlvi, clxiv-vi.
Fitzstephen ; see William Fitzstephen.
Flæmingj aland ; see Flandr.
Flanders ; see Flandr.
Flandr (Flanders), 1.126, 128,246, 248,
252, 484, 488, 516 ; ii. 238, 246.
Flanndr ; see Flandr.
Flateyjarbok, ix.
Flæmingjaland ; see Flandr.
Folliot ; see Gillibert.
Frakkland ; see Franz.
France ; see Franz.
Frannz, Frans ; see Franz.
•Franz (France), i. 20, 56, 92, 122, 128,
132, 174, 264, 288, 326, 346, 354, 376,
398, 414, 420, 422, 426, 430, 432, 436,
'438-448, 462, 464, 468, 474, 476 ; ii.
12-16, 24, 30, 172, 214, 236, 246, 257,
284.
Frederick ; see Fri^rekr.
Frederick III., king of Denmark, 1648-
1670, xh-i.
Frideswide ; see St. Frideswide's priory,
Oxford.
Frit5rekr (Frederick) Barbarossa, German
emperor, 1152-1189; his relations to
Rome, I. 90, 92, 122, 130, 330, 352 ; ii.
256, 257.
K 541,
G.
Galfridus (Geoffrey of Monmouth), bishop
of St. Asaph, 1160-1175, ii. 198.
Galfridus (Geoflfrey) V., Plantagenet,
duke of Anjou, i. 26, 28.
Galfridus (Geoffrey), son of king Henry
II., I. 390.
Galkerus (Sir Walter Tyrell), i. 6.
Garnier de Poute Saint Maxence, author
of a French life in verse of archbishop
Thomas, Ixxxvii-lxxxviii., i. 12 and
passim.
Gascogne ; see Gaskonia.
Gaskouia (Gascogne), i. 58.
GeirariSr (Gerard), a subdeacon surnamed
the " Shoeless " sent by the Pope with
letters to England, cxxiii, cxxvi ; i.
332, 444.
Gelasius II., pope, 1118-1119, i. 26.
Gelldvinus, sonof Godevinus, a " notary "
at Canterbury, ii. 280.
Geoffi'ey; 5ee Galfridus.
Geoffrey (Arthur), bishop of St. Asaph,
1152-1154, present at the consecration
of archbishop Thomas, i. 88.
Gerard ; see Geirar"Sr.
Germany; see Alimannia and Mislenda.
Geruasius (Gervase de Comhelle), one of
the most pronounced enemies of arch-
bishop Thomas on his return, i. 484,
sqq.
Gervase, contemporary chronicler, exxxix,
I. 58.
Gibbon (Edward), i. 130.
Gilbert ; sec GiUibert.
Gillibert (Gilbert), father of archbishop
Thomas, a citizen of London, i. 12, 30 ;
II. 224.
Gillibert (Gilbert) Folliot, bishop of
Hereford, 1148-1163, afterwards of
Loudon, 1163-1188, Ivii ; i, 44; takes
part in the election of Thomas, 74 ;
assists at the archbishop's consecration,
88 ; betrays enmity towards the arch-
bishop, 176 ; counsels submission at (he
P r
594
INDEX.
Gillibert Folliot — cont.
council of Xorthampton, 190-192 ; mis-
represents Thomas's proposals to the
king, 198-200 ; sets up a counter appeal
to Eome on behalf of the bishops of
England, 206 ; reviles Thomas for
caiTjing his cross himself, 208-212 ;
proposes to the archbishop to mortgage
certain estates to the king, 224 ; is
sent -with five other bishops on a mis-
sion to the Pope, 260 ; his harangue
before the Pope, 274, (ii. 252); is
requested by the Pope to intercede
with the king on behalf of Thomas,
376 (II. 265, 266); his reply to the
Pope, 380-386 (n. 267-68) ; is charged
by archbishop Thomas Avith taking an
enemy's part against him, 408 ; is ex-
communicated by Thomas, 418 ; assists
at the coronation of the young king,
452 ; his excommunication confirmed
by the Pope, 458 ; is again excommu-
nicated for assisting at the coronation,
482 ; refuses, at the instance of the
archbishop of York, to come to terms
Trith Thomas, 498 ; is absolved at
Avranches, ii. 38.
GiUibjarkr ; see Gilbert Foliot.
Gisli Jdnsson, bishop of Skálholt, 1558-
1587, xxxiv.
Gisli íorláksson, bishop of Holar, 1657-
1684, xlvii.
Gisors, a frontier castle of ísormandy, i.
58.
Gizur Hall>son, clxv.
Gjöíiingjar ; see G3"^ingar.
Gloucestershire, i. 514.
Gniipr, a homestead in ISIiSfjör'Sr, the
church of, dedicated to Thomas, xxix,
XXX ; a Thomas saga at, xxxiii.
Godevinus ; see Gofridus.
Godskal, abbatof St. Berlin's, 1163-1177,
I. 256, 288.
Gofridus, a " notary " (according to Bene-
dict a " baker") of Canterbury, ii. 280.
Gorham, a castle of Normandy, ii. 30-
32.
Gottskal ; see Godskal.
Gottskalk Gottskalksson, bishop of Hdlar,
1442-1457, xxxii.
Grace de Tracy, mother of Wilhjalmr af
Traz, I. 514. "
Gradus Mercurii, i. 386.
Grafningr (Gravelines), a sea town of
Flanders, i. 126-128, 246-248, 254.
Graham, the place now called Grantham?,
I. 242.
Grantham (?) ; see Graham.
Gratian, subdeacon, commissioned by the
Pope to bring about peace between king
and archbishop, i. 444.
Gravelines, Graveninges ; see Grafningr.
Greece ; see Grikkland.
Gregorius (Gregory), Pope, the Great,
590-604, "apostle of the English," i.
40 ; divides England into dioceses, ih.;
confers privileges on Canterbury, 124 ;
cited, 166, 232,412.
Gregory VII., Pope, i. 154.
Grenja5arstaí5r, a parsonage within the
provostship of i*ingey, xxxii.
Grikland ; see Grikkland.
Grikkland (Greece), i. 352 ; ii. 257.
Grimsnes, a countryside in southern Ice-
land, clxix.
Grund, a homestead in EyjaíjörSr, xlv.
Gualenses (Waloons ?), i. 60.
GuSlaugr Suorrasou enters monastic life
in England, viii.
GuSmundr Arason, born 1160, bishop of
Holar, 1203-1237, xvi ; his friendship
for Eafn Sveinbjarnarson, xviii ; com-
pared to Thomas by contemporaries,
xix ; excommunicates Kolbeiu Tuma-
son " in Icelandic," xx ; is foreshadowed
a saint in a vision, xxi ; his priestly and
episcopal career, xxiv-xxvi ; his sagas,
in their relation to T., Ix-lxix, cfr. clxi.
GuSmundr Arnason, xl, xliv.
Guiimundr Svertingsson, author of a
" drápa " on Eafn Sveinbjarnarson,
xiii.
Gu'SriSr Inglmundsddttir, wife of Vigfúss
Ivarsson Ilolmr, clxvi-clxix, ii. 294.
GuSri^r Vigfússdöttir Holms, ii. 294.
Guido de Cruce, a papal legate, clxvi.
INDEX.
595
Guidon ; see Paschal III., antipope.
Gunnlaugr Leifssou, monk of i'mgeytar,
ob. 1218 or 1219; his paraphrase of
Geofírey of Momouth's prophecy of
Merlin, ix.
Gunzilinus ; see Gilbert Foliot.
Gustus, son of a noble widoAv, brought to
life by archbishop Thomas, ii. 164-
168.
Gutreda ; see GuSrfSr.
Guzalin (Jocelin of Louvaine), younger
brother of Adeliza, queen of Henrj- 1.,
joins the band of Broc against the arch-
bishop, cxl, I. 484.
Guzalin (Guzalinn, Jocelin), a priest of
Canterbury, ii. 154, 156, 261.
Gy'Singar, i. 196, 420, 546 ; li. 18, 2?0,
289.
H.
Hadrian ; see Adrianus.
Hafnar-fjörtSr, a harbour in south--Nvestern
Iceland, resort for English traders of
old, xxxi, clxvii.
Hafreholme ; see Havelorr.
Ilagi, a homestead -within the provostship
of Rangárvellir, in the church of, a pic-
ture of Thomas, xxxi.
Hallr Gizurarson, lögsögumaíJr 1201-1209,
concerned in the election of bishop Pall
Joussou of Skálholt, xvii.
Hallr Teitsson, clxv.
Hampshire, i. 252.
Hamrar, a homestead in the provostship
of Rangarvellir, the church of, dedicated
to Thomas, xxx ; possessed a Thomas
picture, xxxi.
Haraldr Gu'Siuason (Harold Godwinson),
king of England, 1166, i. 4.
Havelorr (Haverholme ?), i. 244.
Haverholme ; see Havelorr.
Haverol ; see Havelorr.
Haverolot ; sec Havelorr.
Ha-wkdale (Haukadalr), a homestead in
Southern Iceland, clxiv.
Heinrekr (Henry) of Blois, bishop of Win-
chester, 1129-1171, takes part in the
election of archbishop Thomas, l. 74-
80 ; consecrates Thomas archbishop, 88,
124; sides with the archbishop, 180;
attends the council of Northampton,
190; discountenances submission, 194.
Heinrekr, cardinal of Pisa, legate of the
Roman see to England, i. 66 ; takes
part in the election of Thomas, 74-76.
Heimekr HI., German emperor, 1028-
1056, 1. 4.
Heinrekr IV., German emperor, 1056-
1105,1.4, 26.
Heinrekr I., surnamed Beauclerc, king of
England, 1100-1135, i. 4 ; succeeds to
the crown, 6 ; his dealings -with his bro-
ther Robert, duke of Kormandy, 6-8 ;
continues the policy of his forefathers
towards the church, 8 ; his long reign,
26 ; his church policy appealed to in
support of " the customs " by king
Henry II., 152 ; his customs described
as abuses by Thomas, 344.
Heinrekr gamli ; see Hemy I. and II.,
kings of England.
Heinrekr II., king of England, 1154-1189,
succeeds king Stephen, i. 28, 42 ; is
crowned by archbishop Theobald, 42 ;
chooses London for residence, 44 ; re-
quests the Pope to appoint Gilbert Fo-
liot to London, 44 ; personal descrip-
tion of, ib, ; accepts, at the instance of
archbishop Theobald, the services of
Thomas, 44-46 ; raises Thomas step by
step to the chancellorship, 46-48 ; en-
trusts him with the education of his son
Hemy, 48 ; his relations to lady Anice
of Stafford, 52, 54 ; confers flivours on
the chancellor, 56 ; his wars, 58-60 ;
nommates Thomas to the vacant sec of
Canterbury, 62-66 ; his relations, as
duke of Anjou, to Pope Alexander, iii.
92 ; his friendly interview with Thomas
at Southampton, 120; another friendly
meeting between king and archbishop,
P p 2
596
INDEX.
Heiurekr II., kiug of Euglaud — cojit.
1 32 ; "was present at the translation of
Edward Confessor, 13G; his first es-
trangement from Thomas, 136, sqq. ;
holds a council at Loudon, 146-156;
at Clarendon, 162, 168 ; begins to per-
secute the archbishop, 176 ; causes
Thomas to be deprived of his legatine
office, 178-180 ; holds council at North-
ampton, 184-216; sends letters to France
ordering the arrest of Thomas, 252 ;
sends a mission consisting of five bishops
and others to Pope Alexander, 260-
262 ; confiscates clerical property -within
the diocese of Canterbury', and gives the
administration of the see in charge of
his courtiers, 318-320; he is rebuked
by the Pope, 322-324 ; requests an in-
terview with the Pope which is refused,
326-328 ; he plans an alliance with the
German emperor, 330-332 ; treats a
papal mission with contempt, 336-338 ;
he banishes Thomas' kinsmen and friends,
346-350 ; his policy towards the Pope,
410 ; requests the Pope to send two
legates to settle peace, 412 ; forbids
prayers to be said for the archbishop,
420 ; is urged by comminatory letters
from the Pope to make speedy peace,
422 ; has an interview with Thomas at
Montmirail, 426-432; requests kiug
Louis to refuse asylum to Thomas in
France, 440-442 ; goes on a pilgi'image
to St. Denis, 444 ; has another meeting
with Thomas, 446 ; refuses the kiss of
peace to the archbishop, 448 ; causes his
son to be crowned, 448-454 ; comes,
under threatened interdict, to terms with
Thomas, 460-464 ; treats the arch-
bishop's messengers ungi-aciousl}', 466 ;
meets Thomas at Tours, 468-470 ; and
again at Chaumont, 470-472 ; receives
bishops appealing against the arch-
bishop's excommunications, 500-502 ;
keeps Christmas, 1170, in Normand}-,
512 ; is urged by the bishops to take
measures of revenge against Thomas,
ib. ; utters words of anger which certain
Heiurekr II., kiug of England — cont.
knights construe as meaning the arch-
bishop's life, 514 ; exculpates himself by
messengers to Canterbury from all par-
ticipation in the murder of Thomas, ii.
8-12; orders the archbishop's body to
be honourably buried, 12 ; secures the
support of certain cardinals by bribes,
26 ; his cismarine dominions laid under
interdict, 28-30 ; meets the Pope's le-
gates at Gorham, 30-34 ; his expedition
to Ireland, 34 ; makes peace with Rome
at Avrauches, 36-42 ; prays to the saint
for the life of his pages, 169-170 ; visits
the mart3'r's tomb, 170; his penauce at
Canterbury, 174 ; overcomes the rebel-
hon of his sons, 174-178; his death,
184.
Heiurekr uugi, sou of king Henry II.,
instructed by chancellor Thomas, i. 48 ;
marries princess Margaret of France,
56 (ii. 172); acts as regent, 60; is
invested with fulljsovereign powers in all
things relating to the election of Thomas
to Cantei"bury, 66 ; is present at the
election, 72-82 ; meets, in company with
the archbishop, his father, at South-
ampton, 120; vision prognosticating his
death, 390 ; is crowned king, 448-454
(ii. 20) ; forbids the archbishop to travel
about England, i. 506 ; enters bail for
his father at Avrauches, ii. 38; rebels
against his father, 172-178; makes
peace, 178-180.
Helgi, a relative (nephew) of bishop Gu'S-
mund Arason, xxvii.
Heliseus (Elisha), ii. 88, 228, 232, 282.
Henry ; see Heiurekr.
Heniy, abbot of Croyland, xciv-xcv.
Herbert of Bosham, contemporary biogra-
pher of Thomas, xci-xcii, i. 46 ; present
at Merton when the archbishop was
ordained a regular, i. 84 ; he instructs
Thomas in holy writ, 100-104 ; joins
Thomas after his flight from North-
ampton at St. Bertius, 258 ; is sent by
Thomas on a confidential mission to the
court of king Louis and the pope, 264-
INDEX.
597
Herbert of Boshnm — cont.
274, 288; (ii. 247-251); lie stays at
Pontigny with the archbishop, 312 ;
fetches a grey monk's habit for his mas-
ter from pope Alexander, 314 ; is sent
on a mission to king Henry to ascertain
his intention as to the execution of the
conditions of the peace, 466.
Herfur'S (Hereford), ii. 265.
Herluin, an Austrasian noble, founder of
the abbey of Bee, i. 12.
Herniitorium, i. 242.
Herodes Antipas tetraeha, i. 454 ; ii. 18 ?.
Herodes the Great, "king of the Jews," clxi-
ii.
Hestræi (Eastry), i. 244.
Hieremias ; see Jeremiah.
Hierusalem ; see Jdrsalir.
Hilarius (Hilary), bishop of Chichester
1147-1169, present at the election of
Thomas to Canterbury, i. 74, 76 ; assisted
at the consecration of Thomas, 88 ;
deserts the cause of the church at the
council of London, 154; attends the
council of Xorthampton, 190; counsels
submission, 194 ; declares to Thomas the
•determination of the bishops to abandon
his cause, 218 ; proposes to Thomas to
mortgage certain estates to the king,
224 ; is sent by king Henry to Rome,
260 ; causes merriment in the curia by
a slip in Latin grammar, 278 Cii. 253).
Hitardalr, a parsonage in the provostship
of Þverá, lix.
Hlauduir ; see Illö'Svir.
Hlcjdvir (Louis) VII., Le Jeunc, king of
France, 1137-1180, gave his daughter
Margarete in marriage to the young
prince Henry, son of Henry II., i. 58 ;
favoured the party of pope Alexander
III,, 90-92 ; appoints Sens for his resi-
dence, 132; received in audience the
mission sent by king Henry, as well as
the agents of archbishop Thomas, 261-
268 (ii. 247-249); meets Thomas at
Soissons, 288, 290 ; grants Thomas
residence at Sens, 370-374 ; persuades
the pope to annul the legatine powers
Hlödvir (Louis) VII. — conl.
conferred on cardinals William and Odo,
414 ; for further references, see Lofuiss.
HofiFell, a homestead within the provost-
ship of Skaftafell,the church of, possessed
of an effigy of Thomas, xxxi.
Holar, the see of the northern diocese of
Iceland, xvi-xix, xxx, xxxii, xxxiv,
xlvii.
Holar, a holding of Grimsnes, clxix.
Hdlmr, Innri-Holmr, the church of, dedi-
cated to Thomas, xxix.
Honorius II., pope, 1124-1130, i. 26.
Honorius III., pope, 1216-1227, ir. 196-
198.
Hosiah ; see Ozias.
Hrafnagil, a homestead in Eyjafjöríír, the
church of, possessed of a Thomas effigy,
xxxii ; and of a Thomas saga, xxviii,
xxxiii.
Hruni, a homestead in the provostship of
Arnes, the church of, dedicated to
Thomas, xxx.
Hubert Crivelii ; see Urban III., pope.
Hugh ; see Hugi.
Hugi (Hugo, Hugh) L, archbishop of
Sens, 1142-1168, i. 374.
Hugi af Morevil, one of the four knights
implicated in the murder of archbishop
Thomas, i. 514, 546 (ii. 38-40).
Hugi de Sancto Claro, i. 418.
Hugi byskup af Dynhdlmum, ii. 284 =.
Hugo Duuelmensis (H. do Puisac), bishop
of Durham, 1153-1195, ii. 102, 104,
106.
Humbertus Lombardus, archdeacon of
Bourges ; see Lhban III., pope.
Hdnavatn, provostship of, in northern Ice-
land, xxxiv-xlvi.
Ilungrvaka, the history of early Christianity
in Iceland, viii.
Huntingdonshire, cxiv.
Ilvammr, a homestead in the provostship
of llangarvellir, the church of, dedicated
to Thomas, xxx; possessed a i>irlure of
Thomas, xxxi ; and a Thomas saga,
xxxiv.
508
INDEX.
Hvammr, otherwise Kirkju-Hvammr, a
homestead in Mi'Si^ör'Sr, the church of,
dedicated to Thomas, xxix; possessed
an eflBgy of him, xxxi ; and a Thomas
saga, xxxiv.
Hörgárdak", a valley within the district of
Ejjaíjör^r, xxxix, xlvi.
Höskuldssta^ir, a homestead within the
provostship of Hunavatn, at the church
of, a Thomas saga, xxxiv.
I.
Iceland, early communication with Eng-
land, vi ; commercial intercourse Avith
England, vi-vii ; English trade in, vii-
viii ; records of Thomas of Canterbury
brought to, xiv; ii. 293.
Ida, daughter of Matthew, count of Flanders,
and of Mary of Blois, i. 252.
Ilchester ; see Yualcestr.
Ingiri^r (Ingerida), daughter of Vigfuss
ivarsson Holmr, ii. 294.
lunocencius ; see Innocentius.
Innocent III., antipope, 1178-1180, i. 92.
Innocentius I., pope, 402-417, i. 366.
Innocentius II., pope, 1130-1143, i. 26.
Innocentius III., pope, 1198-1216, ii.
198.
irland (Ireland), ii. 32.
isabella ; see Isibell.
isahac, Isaac, patriarch, ii. 224.
isibell (Isabella), daughter of Robert I.
Bruce, king of Scotland, queen of Nor-
way, 1293-1299, ob. 1358, xxxvi., i. 22.
Island ; see Iceland.
isleifr Gizurarson, bishop of Skalholt,
1056-1080, clxiv.
Islendinga sogiu*, sagas relating to the
settlement and early history of Iceland,
\'iii.
Israel, i. 18, 402 ; ii. 228.
ivar Jdnsson Hólmr, clxiv-v.
ivar's, clxix, read Vigfuss.
Ivar Yigfusson H<51mr, ob, 1371 ; clxv-vi.
Ivar Vigfússon Hólmr, son of the Canter-
bury pilgrim Vigfús Ivarsson Ilolmr,
clxviii-ix ; II. 294.
J.
Jacob, patriarch, ii. 88, 270.
Jacobus i. Kompostella, St. James of Com-
postella, II. 224.
Jaffe (Philip) Regesta Pont. Rom., i. 94,
354, 386, 392.
Jeremiah, ii., 271.
Jerusalem ; see Jdrsalir.
Joannes, a clerk of archbishop Thomas's
(John of Salisbury?), i. 446.
Jocelin af Ballolio = Jocelin de Bailleul,
bishop of Salisbury, 1142-1184, assisted
at the consecration of Thomas, i. 88 ;
evinces secret malice toward Thomas,
142, 176 ; seizes a living belonging to
Canterbury, 354 (ir. 238) ; is excom-
municated by Thomas, 356-358, 396,
406, 418; assists at the coronation of
the young Henry, 452 ; excommuicated
by the pope, 458, 482 ; is persuaded by
Roger of York not to come to terms
with Thomas, 498 ; goes to king Henry
in Normandy to agitate against Thomas,
498-500 ; is absolved at Avranches, ii.,
38.
Johannes ; see Calixtus III., antipope.
Johannes (Woodnesbergh), prior of Can-
terbury, 1411-1428; II. 293.
Johannes Cantuariensis (John of Salis-
bury ?),i. 38.
Johannes Crisostomus, i. 366.
John ; see Joannes, Johannes, and Jon.
John the Marshal, cxi-cxii, cxvi.
John III., bishop of Poitiers, 1162-1182,
I. 434.
John of Salisbury, bishop of Chartres,
1176-1180; contemporary biographer of
Thomas, Ixxx-lxxxi., i. (38) 466, 482 ;
(II. 42, 184).
INDEX
599
John de Siidlej, i. 514.
JÓU Arason, bishop of Holar, 1524-1550,
xxxii, xliii.
Jon Baptista, his altar in the crypt of
Canterbury cathedral, i. 554 ; ii. 271.
Jon Bjarnason of Grund, xlv.
JÓD Eiriksson, surnamed Skalli, bishop of
Hdlar, 1358-1391, his church registers
referred to, xxx-xxxiv.
Jon Espolin, b. 1769, d. 1839, Icelandic
historian, xlii, sqq., clxiv-ix.
J(5n af Exenford (John of Oxford), dean
of Salisbury, afterwards bishop of Nor-
wich, 1175-1200, sent by king Henry
to arrange an alliance with the German
emperor, i. 330 ; joins Joceliu, bishop of
Salisbury, in seizing a living belonging
to Canterbury, 354 (ii. 258) ; is excom-
municated by Thomas, 358, 396, 406 ;
(ii. 259); his excommunication renewed,
418 ; accompanies Thomas returning to
England, 464 ; prevents Thomas's ene-
mies from doing him violence on land-
ing, 490.
J(5n Gerriksson, bishop of Skálholt, clxviii.
Jon Gu^mundssou, " the Learned," Iviii-
Ix.
Jon Hallsson ; see Jon Hestr.
Jdn Hestr, translator of Thomas saga,
hiii-lx.
Jon Holt ; see Jdn Hestr.
Jdn Jdnsson, priest of Melar, xlv.
Jdn Jdnsson, priest of Myrká, xxxix.
Jdn Loptsson, clxv.
Jdn af Oxenford ; see Jdn af Exenf.
Jdn Pictavensis byskup (bishop of Poitiers),
1 162-1 Í81 ; 1.434; SI. 34.
Jdn Sigur~Ssson, Icelandic savant and poli-
tician, born 1808, died 1879, ix, clxiv-
viii.
Jordan, a knight, li. 156-160, 261.
Jork (York), i. 38, 176, 408, 450, 480,
482.
Jdrsalaland (Jerusalem's land, Palestine),
I. 138, 352, 476; ir. 36-40, 218, 224,
257.
Jdrsalariki ; sec Jorsalalaud.
Jdrsalir (Jerusalem), cviii ; i. 6, 164, 1965
476, 492 ; II. 46, 48, 86, 136, 226, 277.
Joseph, son of Jacob, i. 48 ; ii. 270, 289.
Josephus (Flavins), the historian of the
Jews, clxi-ii.
Juarius = luarius ; see Ivar.
JiitSar (Jews), i. 70, 222, 364, 548.
K.
Kadon (Caen), i. 10.
Kalixtus n., pope, 1119-1124, i. 26,
Kancia, Kanncia ; see Cantuaiia.
Kantarabyrgi ; see Cantuaria.
Kantúaria ; see Cantuaria.
Kantuariensis kirkja ; see Cantuaria.
Karlus ; see Karúlus.
Karúlus mikli (Charlemagne), i, 476 ;
II. 218.
Katania ; see Cattania.
Kato, a clerk, ii. 106.
Kelduhverfi, a district in northern Iceland,
xxix-xxxi, xxxiii.
Kirkjuhvammr ; see Hvammr.
Klaremaries (Clairmarais), monastery of,
I. 256.
Klarenthun ; see Clarenton.
Klængr Teitsson, clxv.
Kolbeinn Tumason, a chieftain of Skaga-
fjör'Sr, died 1208, xix, xxi.
Kompin (Compienne), i. 264 (ii. 247).
Kristin Jdnsddttir married to Da15i Arnasou,
xliv.
lii-istianus, name assumed by archbishop
Thomas, i. 242-248.
Kristján skrifari, xliii.
Krists kirkja (Christchurch), a church in
London, i. 12.
Kross saga, xxxiv.
Kyme, a priory of Liucolushiro, x, xi.
Kynn = Kyme.
600
INDEX.
Landuáma bók, ix, xii.
Laiifrancus (Lanfranc), prior of Bee, then
abbat of St. Stephen's, Caen, afterwards
archbishop of Canterbury, 1070-1089,
I. 10; croTTued "William Eufus, ih., cfr.
84.
Langton ; see Stephanus Langatún.
Lateran, council of, i. 122.
Laudver ; see Hlö'Sver and Lofuiss.
Laurentius, a priest, i. 120.
Lecestr; see Robert af Leccstr.
Le Mans, exxxiii.
Leuidonus ; see Innocent III., antipope.
Liberius, pope, 352-366, i. 226.
Lincoln, x, xi ; i. 144, 242.
Lincolnshire, x, xi.
Little Citeau, i. 160.
Lodvir ; see Lofuiss.
Lodvis ; see Lofuiss.
Lofuiss (Louis) VII., king of France (cfr.
HlöSvir), recommends the archbishop's
case earnestly to the pope, i. 420;
interests himself in bringing about
peace between Henry and Thomas, 426-
432 ; his estrangement from and recon-
ciliation with Thomas at Montmirail,
434-442 ; -syrites to the pope on behalf
of the archbishop, 444 ; brings about
an interview between Henry and Thomas
at Montmartre, 444-448 ; urges the
pope to punish the king and the enemies
of Thomas for the coronation of Henry
the young, 456 ; brings about peace
between Henry and Thomas in Prato
Proditorum, 460 ; refuses the famous
* carbuncle ' to Thomas, 476-478 ; ii.
212 ; receives a mission from Canterbury
announcing the death of Thomas, ii.
14; writes to the pope to punish the
offenders, 14, 272 ; his death, 172.
London ; see Lundún.
Loptr Guttormssou, the Mighty, of MotSru-
vellir, clxviii.
Loptr Sæmundarson, clxv.
Louis ; see HlöS\ir and Lofuiss.
Louis (VI.) le Gros, king of France,
1108-1137, I. 58.
Louvain, town of Holland, xciv,
Loviss ; see HlöSvir and Lofuiss.
Lucens (Vallis Lucens, Yauluisant), i.
374.
Lucius II., pope, 1144-1145, i. 26.
Lundún, pi. Lundúnir, i. 12, 28, 30, 60,
68, 72, 82-86, 124, 136, 146, 156, 176,
192, 206, 208, 260, 274, 376, 380, 386,
392 402 403, 418, 452, 506 ; ii. 62,
104, 206, 224, 265, 286.
Lundiinir, archiepiscopal province of (I),
I. 40.
Lupus ; see Wolf (Christian).
Luxonion (Lissieux), i. 158, 338.
Lyuu (King's Lynn), xi.
Lyttleton (George lord), author of 'The
history of the life of Henry II.,' i. 140.
Lyxion ; see Luxonion.
Lqdverr ; see HlöSvir.
M.
Magnus, butler to bishop Jon Gerriksson,
clxviii.
Máhilld ; see Maild.
Maild, Mailld, mother • of archbishop
Thomas, i. 12-16; ii. 2, 60, 62, 222,
286.
Maine; see Cenomannia.
Maledon ; see Melun.
Mansi, I. 122.
Manuel Comneuus, Greek emperor, 1143-
1180, I. 130.
Manwin of Canterbury, miracle of, ii. 82.
Mare Adriaticum, ii. 94.
Margaret, princess of France, daughter of
Louis VII,, married to Henry, son of
Henry H., king of England, i. 58.
Margaret, sovereign queen of Denmark,
1387-1412, clxiv, clxvi.
Margret Da'Saddttir, xl, sqq.
INDEX.
601
Margret (Margarita), Vigfiiss jlottir
Holms, clxviii ; II. 294.
Margret (^Margareta), Össur's daughter,
mother of Vigfús Ivarsson Holmr,
clxviii ; II. 294.
Maria (Mary), the Virgin, v, xxiii, xxx,
xxxii, clxix; I. 18; 104, 388, 542; ii.
182, 284, 285.
Maria Magdalena, ii. 182; feast of, i.
460.
Mariu saga, clvii-clx, cfr. ii. 284-289.
Marteinn Einarsson, bishop of Hólar,
1549-1556, xli.
Mary of Blois, abbess of llumsey in
Hampshire, wife of Mathew, count of
Boulogne, i. 252, 254.
Matheus, jarl af Bolonia, 1168-1191, i.
252, 254.
Matilda ; see Mattild.
Matthew, count of Flanders ; see Matheus,
jarl af Bolonia.
Matthew Paris, chronicler, i. 130.
Matthias, the high priest, clxii.
Mattild, daughter of Henry I., wife of
Geoffrey, duke of Anjou, mother of
Henry II., i. 26.
Matz, a secretary, xxxix, xliii.
Maud, daughter of Matthew, count of
Flanders and Mary of Blois, i. 252.
Maurer (Konrad), clxiii.
Mayenne, ii. 32.
Melar, a parsonage in Borgarfjör^r, xlvi.
Melun ; see Kobert de Melun.
Mcrenton ; see Merintonia.
Merintonia (Merton), i. 84.
Merlin, prophecy of, ix.
Merton ; see Merintonia.
Mi'Sfjör'Sr, a bay and district in Northern
Iceland, xxix, xxxi.
Mi'Sgar'Sar, a homestead on Snœfellsnes,
xli.
Miklibaer, a parsonage in SkagafjörSr,
xlvi.
MikligarSr (Micklc- Garth, Constantino-
ple), I. 130.
Milo, a clerk (or dean?) of Boulogne, i.
484.
:Mí1o II., Anglus, bishop of Tcrouanne,
1159-69, I. 288.
Milo Trevorensis ; see Milo II. Anglus,
bishop of Terouanne.
Mislenda (Germany), i. 4.
Mons Calvus (Chaumont), i. 470.
Mons Martirum (Montmartre), i. 446,
454.
Mons Mirabilis (]Montmirail), i. 426, 432.
Montmartre; see Mons Martirum.
Montmirail ; see Mons ^Mirabilis.
Montpellier ; see Munipelcr.
Moölld (gen. Moalldar) ; see Mailld.
Múli, a homestead within the provostship
of i*ingey, the church of, possessed of
an effigy of Thomas, xxxii.
Muncheham ; see Vingecham.
Muudeham ; see Vingecham.
Muuipeler (Montpellier), i. 92, 94.
Munkaþvcrá, monastery of, in the district
of Eyjafjörðr, possessed a Thomas saga,
xxxiv.
Myrká, a parsonage in Ilörgárdalr within
the provostship of EyjafjorSr, xxxix.
Mö'Sruvellir, a monastery in the district of
EyjafjorSr, possessed an Q^^^y of Tho-
mas, xxxii ; and a Thomas saga, xxxiv.
N.
Nabagodonosor (Nebuchadnezzar), i. 344.
Nathan, the prophet, i. 366.
Nero, emperor of Bome, i. 430.
Neufchatel, a frontier castle of Normandy,
I. 58.
Neufle, frontier castle of Normandy,
58.
Nevres, ii. 38.
Nicolaus ap Gurgant, bishop of Llandaflf,
1118-1183, assisted at the consecration
of archbishop Thomas, i. 88.
Nielssou (Sveinn), xxx.
Nigel, bishop of Ely, 1133-1 169, assisted
at the consecration of archbishop Tho-
m;is, I. 88.
602
INDEX.
Nigri Montes, ii. 108.
Nor'Santún, ^Nor'Santhún (Northampton),
I. 184, 186, 222, 240, 246, 248, 268,272,
432 ; II. 247.
NorSmandi (Normandy), cviii ; i. 4, 42,
56, 60, 78j 128, 140, 336, 464, 466, 472,
500 ; II. 32.
Nordmannia ; see Nor'Smandi.
Nor«rhálfa (Europe), i. 370; ii. 108,
263.
Nor^rlönd, the lands north of the Alps, i.
20.
Normandi ; see Norðmandi.
Normannia ; see Nordmannia.
Northampton ; see Nor(5antún.
Northiunberland, i. 514.
Norway, xiii, xlviii, clxiv, clxvii.
0.
Octovianus ; see Victor IV., anti-pope.
Oddgcir i'orsteinsson, bishop of Skálhlot,
1366-1381, XXX.
Oddi, a homestead in the provostship of
llangárvellir, xvii ; at the church of, a
mass sung for Thomas of Canterbury,
xxviii ; the men of, clxi-s'.
Oie, a seaport of Flanders, i. 246
Ólafr Haraldsson, St. Olaf, king of Nor-
way, 1015-1030, sends Rudolph, a mis-
sionary bishop, to Iceland, viii ; a saga
of him referred to, xxxv, xliii.
Ólafr Rögnvaldsson, bishop of Hólar,
1459-1495, his church registers referred
to, xxxi-xxxiv.
Ólafr fóríSarson, hvítaskáld, ob. 1259,
author of philological treatises in Edda,
xxii ; quotes an early poem on Thomas,
ib. ; composed a ' drapa * on Thomas,
xxiii.
Ornaham (Evesham), i. 90.
Orvieto, I. 444.
Osbem Witdeniers, a kinsman of Thomas,
xcviii, ci.
Otford ; see Ottcnford.
Otho ; see Otta.
Otrardalr, a homestead in Arnarf jör^r, the
church of, dedicated to St. Thomas,
XXX.
Otta (Otho), cardinal, commissioned by
the pope to arrange peace between king
Henry and Thomas, i. 412.
Otteford ; see Ottenford.
Ottenford (Otford), i. 224.
Ourse; see Urso.
Oxeneford ; see Oxford.
Oxenford ; see Oxford.
Oxford, cx; I. 160, 330 ; II. 76, 258, 280,
284.
Oxinf jord ; see Oxford.
Ozias (Uzziah, not Hosiah, as printed in
the translation), clxxiii-iv ; i. 364.
P.
Tagi, I. 130.
Pall ; see Paulus.
Pall Jonsson, bishop of Skalholt, 1195-
1211, introduces the English yard
measure in Iceland, vii ; his saga quoted,
vii, xi, xvii-xviii; studied in England,
xi-xii.
Papia (Pavia), i. 298.
Paris, xcv ; university of, i. 20-24 ; ii.
232, 284.
Paschal ; see Paskalis.
Paschal III., antipope, 1164-1168, i. 92.
Paskahs (Paschal) II., pope, 1099-1118,
I. 26.
Paul ; see Paulus.
Paulus, the apostle, i. 80, 110, 132, 228,
310; II. 188,257.
Petr ; see Petrus.
Petr Nicholasson, bishop of Hdlar, 1392-
1402, his church registers referred to,
xxix, xxxi-xxxiv.
Petragoris (= Petrocorium), Perigueux,
not Perigord, as erroneously printed in
the translation, ii. 110-112.
INDEX.
603
Petrs kirkja. St. Peter's at Rome, ii.
188.
Petrus, the apostle, i. -44, 164, 166, 310,
354, 378, 380, 402,430,456; ii. 26, 188,
236, 257.
Petrus I., atbot of Vauluisant, 1159-1179,
I. 374.
Petrus Vivus, chronicler, i. 130, 132.
Pevensey castle, i. 30.
Phakse (Falaise), i. 62, 78.
Pharao, king of Egypt, i. 344.
Phelippes cle Almosue ; see Philip, abbot
of Almes.
Philip, abbot of Almes, commissioned by
the pope to persuade Thomas to accept
the 'customs,' i. 160.
Philip, count of Flanders ; see Filippus.
Phihppus II., king of France ; see Fi-
lippus.
Philippus de Bræis, a canon of Bedford,
I., 144.
Pilatus, II. 270.
Poutigny ; see Pontis.
Pontiuiacum ; see Pontis.
Pontis (Pontigny), a monastery of grey
monks in France, i. 312, 326, 340, 348,
354, 368-378; il. 255, 257.
Q-
Quadrilogus, older and younger, xciv'
xcv.
K
liafn Jcinsson, xl, xli.
liafu Sveinbjarnarson of Eyrr in Arnar-
fjörðr, ob. 1213. jNIade a vow to Thomas
of Canterbury, xii-xiii ; went on a pil-
grimage to Canterbury, xiii ; founded a
chapel in the cathedral (?), ib. ; brought
Rafn Sveinbjarnarson — coiif.
to Iceland records relating to Thomas,
xiii-xiv ; his relation to bishop Gu5-
mundr Arason, xviii-xix.
Ralph of Escures, archbishop of Canter-
bury, 1114-1122, I. 10.
Rangárvellir, provostship of, in Southern
Iceland, xxviii, xxx, xxxi, xxxiv.
Ranulf and Raniilf af Broch ; see foil.
Ranulph af Brok, administers the see of
Canterbury, i. 320 ; is excommunicated
by the archbishop, 418 ; organises oppo-
sition to the archbishop on his return,
484 ; heaps abuses on him, 498 ; is
excommunicated again, 510-512; joins
the assassins, 518-520 ; commits an
outrage on the dead body of Thomas,
546.
Ranveig, a woman, her vision, xxi-xxii.
Reading, monastery of, cni.
Redinges ; see Reading.
Reginald ; see Reinaldr.
Reginald, earl of Cornwall, i. 198.
Regulus, son of a noble widow, brought to
life by the martyr, ii. 164-168.
Reinalldr, one of the archbishop's house-
hold at Canterbury, i. 520.
Reinalddr (Reginald de Warenne), i.
484.
Reinaldr Bjamarson (Reginald Fitzurse),
joins three other knights to take the
archbishop's life, i. 514 ; his interview
with the archbishop at Canterbury, 522-
532 ; his altercation with the archbishop
in the cathedral, 538-540; his part in
the murder, 542-546 ; absolved at Av-
ranches, ii. 38-40.
Reykjavik, capital of Iceland, xxix.
RicariSr ; see RikarSr.
Richard ; see RikariJr and RigarSr.
Richard, an English trader in Iceland,
clxvii.
Richard, prior of St. Martin's, Dover,
afterwards archbishop of Cantorbuiy,
1174-1184,1. 466, 504.
Richard Peche, bishop of Lichfield, 11 Gi-
ll 82, assisted at the consecration of
Thomas, i. 88.
604
INDEX.
Kiclier de I'Aigle ; see Rikerus.
Kicheus ; see Eikerus.
Richter (Emil Ludwig), ed. corp. Jur.
Can., I. 154.
Rigar'Sr (Richard the Poor), bishop of
Salisbury, 1217-28; assisted at the trans-
lation of Thomas of Canterbury, ii. 198.
Rikarðr, master of the Templars, i. 164.
Rikar^r, cellarer of Canterbury, brings the
archbishop the first news of the approach
of the knights, i. .518.
Rikar'Sr Brito, one of the four murderers
of Thomas, i. 514, 546 ; ii. 38-40.
RikarSr ;af Luci, the great justiciary of
king Henry II., charged with promoting
the election of Thomas, i. 66 ; absolves
the ' elect ' from all secular obligations,
78-80 ; has an interview with Thomas
at St. Bertin's, 258 ; is commissioned to
promulgate laws absolving the nation
from allegiance to the pope, 330-332 ;
excommunicated by the archbishop, 418.
RikarSr erkidjákn af Peituborg ; see Rik-
ar^r af Yualcestr.
RikarSr af Yualcestr, archdeacon of Poi-
tiers, afterwards bishop of Winchester,
1174-1188, sent by king Henry to
arrange an anti-papal alliance with Fre-
deric Barbarossa, i. 330 ; charged by
king Henry to promulgate laws ab-
solving the nation from allegiance to
the pope, 330-332 ; excommunicated by
Thomas, 418.
Rikærus ; see Rikerus.
Rikerus (Richer de I'Aigle), i. 30.
Ripur, a homestead in the provostship
of SkagafjörSr, in the church of, an
effigy of Thomas, xxxi-xxxii,
Robert, a knight, goes on pilgrimage to
Canterbury, ii. 208.
Robert, bishop of Bath, 1136-1166, as-
sisted at the consecration of Thomas,
I. 88.
Robert of Broch, a relative of Ranulph de
Broch, administers under the latter the
see of Canterbury, i. 320 ; commits an
outrage, 506-508 ; excommunicated by
the archbishop, 512 ; joins the assassins,
Robert of Broch — coiH.
518 ; shows the murderers the way into
the archiepiscopal palace, 534 ; is pre-
sent at the murder, 546.
Robert I., Bruce, king of Scotland, 1306-
1329, I. 22.
Robert de Chesney, bishop of Lincoln,
1148-1167, assists at the consecration
of Thomas, i. 88 ; attends the council
of Northampton, 190 ; urges resistance,
196.
Robert of Cretel (Cricklade), prior of
St. Frideswide's, a contemporary bio-
grapher of Thomas, xlix, liv-lvi, Ixxiv-
Ixxv, xcii-xciv ; his miracle stories,
clvi-vii ; referred to as a writer on
Thomas, i. 32, 36, 38, 50 ; ii. 92-108,
110, 114, 284.
Robert, earl of Leicester, attends the
council of Northampton, i. 198 ; has an
interview with Thomas, 220.
Robert de Melun, bishop of Hereford,
1163-1167, consecrated by Thomas, i,
134 ; counsels conciliation, after the
council of London, 160; remains fast
friend of the archbishop, 180-182; offers
to carry the cross for him, 210; is com-
missioned by the pope to remonstrate
with the king against his persecution of
Thomas, 378-380.
Robert, prior of Oxeneford ; see Robert of
Cretel.
Robertson (James Craigie)^ canon of Can-
terbury, quoted, i. 38 ; ii. 88.
Robertus Canutus ; see Robert of Cretel.
Rochester, tower of, i. 120.
Rodbcrt, duke of Normandy, cviii, i. 4-8,
138.
Rodgeirr (Roger de Pont l'Evéque), arch-
bishop of York, 1154-1181, his ambi-
tious designs, exxxv- exxxvi ; shows
open hostility to Thomas, i. 176 ; is sent
by the king on a mission to the pope,
260 ; his strictures on Thomas before
the pope, 280 (ii. 253-254) ; is ap-
pointed by the king to the charge of the
province of Canterbury, i. 320 ; is for-
bidden to carry the cross through the
INDEX.
605
llodgeirr — cout.
southerzi [province, 390, 392 ; is forbid-
den to crown the king's son, 450-452 ;
crowns Henry the Young, 452 ; is sus-
pended by the pope, 458, 462, 480, 482 ;
persuades the excommunicated bishops
not to come to terms with Thomas,
498-500; spends Christmas, 1170, with
the king in Normandy urging a revenge
on Thomas, 500-502 ; is absolved, ii.
38 ; cured of ophthahuia at Canterbury,
88-92.
Roger, count de Clare, i. 120.
Roger, a monk of Croylaud, compiler of a
composite life of Thomas on the basis
of the older Quadrilogus, xcv, cxxi.
Roger the Great, count of Sicily, i. 132.
Roger (?),bishop of Hereford ; see Robert
de Meluu.
Roger of Neu stria ; see Roger us Neu-
strieusis.
Roger de Pontiguy, so-called, a contempo-
rary biographer of Thomas, x, Ixxxii-
Ixxxv ; I. 12, passim.
Roger de Pont I'Eveque ; see Rodgeirr,
archbishop of York.
Roger Fitzcount, bishop of Worcester,
1164-1179; consecrated by Thomas, i.
134; sides with archbishop Thomas,
1 80 ; counsels caution at Northampton,
198; sent on a mission to the pope by
king Henry, 260 ; observes silence while
other bishops censure Thomas before
the pope, 282 (ii. 254) ; is a frequent
pilgrim visitor to Canterbury, ii. 112.
Rogerus Neustriensis, friend of Thomas, i.
40.
Rollant ; see Alexander III., pope.
Rollu(!) Trevernensis, i. 288.
Horn, city and church of, i. 40, 92, 122,
124, 132, 262, 328, 352, 354, 376, 378,
382, 386, 390, 396, 406-410, 416, 444,
450, 454-458; ii. 12, 26,30, 96, 186,
224, 257, 266.
Roma, Rome; set- Rom.
Romaborg ; see Rom.
Romania ; see Rom.
R(5ma-Skaltr, Peter's pence, i. 330, 380,
386.
Romverja Kirkja ; see Rom.
Romverja Kristni ; see Rum.
Romvcrjar (Romans), i. 26.
Romversk Kristni ; sec Rom.
Rosa Árnadóttir, xl, xliv.
Roskild (Hroarskelda), clxvi.
Rotherodus (Rotrocus de Warwick), arch-
bishop of Rouen, 1165-1183, constituted
peace-maker by the pope, 1.456; com-
missioned by the pope to interdict the
king's cismarine dominions, ii. 28.
Rouen ; see Ru'Suborg.
Rudder (Samuel), i. 514,
Rudolph, abbot of Abingdon, an early
missionary bishop to Iceland, viii.
Rúí5uborg (Rouen), i. 4, 10; ii. 28.
Rumse}-, nunnery of Hampshire, i. 252.
Rundinel (Arundel) ; see Vilhjálmr, jarl af
Rundinel.
s.
Sains, Sainz, Sainnz (Sens), city and see
of, I. 114, 132, 180, 266, 270, 354, 372,
374, 392, 448, 474, 492 ; ii. 16, 28, 247.
257, 258.
Saladin, king of Babylon, i. 352 ; ii. 257.
Sahsber (Salisbury), i. 176, 354, 356, 418 ;
II. 258.
Salisborg ; see Salisber.
Salisbury, archdeacon of, ii. 34.
Salltundr (Saltwoode), i. 516, 520.
Salomon (Solomon), king of Juda, i. 156
168, 172, 266, 528.
Saltwude and Saltuude ; see Saltundr.
Samson of Oxford cured of dumbness, ii.
76, 78, 280.
Samuel, the prophet, i. 18.
Sandr ; see Uitsand.
Sandvik (Sandwich), i. 216,490,496; ir.
238.
Sandwich ; sec Sandvik.
606
INDEX.
Sarisber ; see Salisber.
Sarisborg ; see Salisber.
Saul, king of Israel, i. 344, 364.
Saxland (Germany), i. 124-126.
Segni (Signia), ii. 190.
Selja, the mass of the men of — Seljumauna-
messa, xviii.
Selvogr, a parish -within the provostship of
Ames in South-western Iceland, xxx,
xxxiv.
Sennonis ; see Sainz.
Sens ; see Sainz.
SigurlSr Jonsson, priest of Grenja^arsta"Sr,
son of bishop Jon Arason, his church
registers referred to, xxxii, xxxiv.
Sikiley (Sicily), i. 130, 352; ii. 40, 94,
257.
Siracusa (Syracuse), ii. 94, 96, 284.
Skaftafell, provostship of, in eastern Ice-
land, xxxi, xlvi.
Skagafjör'Sr, a bay and district in northern
Iceland, xxxi, xlvi.
Skalholt, the see of the southern diocese
of Iceland, vii, x, xi, xvi, xxxiv, xlvii,
clx^^i.
Skar'Ssá, homestead in northern Iceland,
clxiii.
SkinnastaiSir, parsonage in the provostship
of i*ingey, English books belonging to,
ix.
Skotland (Scotland), i. 22 ; ii. 174.
Skiimssta'Sir, a homestead in Landcyjar
within the provostship of RangárvelHr,
at the church of, a picture of Thomas,
xxxi.
Snorri í^orgrimsson, go^i, viii.
Snæfells-jökull, xli.
Soissons; see Suescon.
Solveig Jons dottir, clxv.
Somersetshire, i. 514.
Sophia, daughter of Loptr of Mo'Sni-
vellir, clxviii, ii. 294.
Southampton ; see SutShamtún.
Staford (Stafford), i. 52.
St. Andrew, xxxii.
St. Andrew's monastery, near Northamp-
ton, I. 222.
Stanley (Arthur Penrhyn), dean of
Westminster, i. 136.
St. Benedict, his rule, i. 370.
St. Bernard, i. 370.
St. Bertiu, hermit and abbot, i. 256.
St. Columba's monastery by Sens, i. 132.
Stephanus ; see St. Stephen.
Stephauus (Stephen), king of England,
1135-1154, 1. 26-28, 42, 252.
Stephanus Langatiin (Langton), arch-
bishop of Canterbury, 1207-1228, author
of hymns in praise of the Virgin, i. 22 ;
translates St. Thomas, ii. 196, 198, 210.
Stephanus saga, xxxiv.
Stephen, earl of Blois, i. 26.
St. Frideswide's priory, Oxford, Ixxiv-v,
xcii-iii.
St. Etienne de Caen ; see St. Stephen's.
St. Gilbert of Sempringham, i. 242.
St. Hallvard, national saint of Norway,
xxi.
St. John the Baptist, xxxii ; see Jon
Baptista.
St. Magnus, earl of Orkney, 1103-1115,
xxi, clxix.
St. Martin's monastery near Dover, i. 504.
St. Modestus, i. 452.
St. Nicholaus, xxix, xxxi, xxxii.
Stockholm, xlix, 1, lii.
St. Olaf ; see Olafr Haraldsson.
St. Omer ; see Audomarus.
St. Oswald, his saga, ix.
Strönd, a homestead in the parish of
Selvogr, the church of, dedicated to
Thomas, xxx ; had a picture of Thomas,
xxxi ; and a Thomas saga, xxxiv.
St. Sebastian, i. 54.
St. Stephen, protomartyr, i. 202, 206.
St. Stephen's monastery at Caen, i. 10.
St. Stephen's chapel, Westminster, i. 136.
Sturla i*(5r1Sarson (Thordson), xxvi.
St. Vitus, I. 452.
Su'Shamtún (Southampton), i. 120.
Suescon (Soissons), i. 228, 290.
Sueskon ; see Suescon.
Sunamitis, the Shunammite, ii. 228.
Sunamittitis ; see Sunamitis.
Sussex, I. 30.
INDEX.
G07
Svikara Eng (Pratum Proditorum), i.
460.
Symou, archdeacon of Sens, i. 474, 492.
SjTacuse ; see Sfracusa.
Sæmuudr Sigfússon, the Learned, xxviii,
clxiv.
T.
Teitr Isleifsson, clxv.
Teitr Þorvaldsson, clxv.
Terns (Thames), i. 12 ; ii. 224.
Temps ; see Tems.
Tenchbray, battle of, r. 8.
Tenham, ex.
Terouanne (Taravannae), i. 288.
Thames ; see Tems.
Theobald ; see Theobaldus.
Theobaldus, prior of Bee, afterwards arch-
bishop of Canterbury, 1139-1161, i. 10,
12 ; description of him, 34-36 ; crowns
Henry II. 42, 344-346; introduces to
to him archdeacon Thomas, 46 ; refuses
to release Thomas from his oiRoe as
chancellor, 58; his death, 60-62, 66,
84.
Theoballdus a£ Blesis (Theobald of Blois),
I. 468-470 ; II. 16, 20-24, 273.
Theodosius, emperor, i. 366.
Theotwin, cardinal of St. Vitalis, ii. 30.
Theuballdus jarl ; see Theoballdus af
Blesis.
Thoballdus ; see Theoballdus af Blesis.
Thomas Becket, born December 21st, 1117,
ci ; archbishop of Canterbury, 1 1 63-
1170; news of his death brought early
to Iceland, vi; a vow made to him by
Rafn Sveinbjarnarson, xii-xiii ; his ob-
servance of Christmas day falling on a
Friday imitated at Skálholt and Holar,
xiv-xvi, Ixii-lxiii ; alleged blood rela-
tionship with Vigfiis Ivarsson Ilólmr,
clxvii ; visions indicative of his great-
ness, I. 12-16; his infancy and early
Thomas Becket — cont.
education, 18; goes to school, 20; his
mental attainments, ib. ; his sojourn at
the University of Paris, 20-24 (ii. 284-
286) ; writes meditations on the Psalter,
and hymns to the Virgin, 20-22 ; re-
turns home from school, 28 ; enters the
service of Richer de I'Aigle, ib.-, his
fondness of sport, 30 ; miraculous escape
from drowning, 32-34 ; enters the ser-
vice of archbishop Theobald, 34-36 ;
his archidiaconical career, 38 (cfr-. 402) ;
enters the service of the king, 46 ;
becomes chancellor, 48 (cfr. c-cii) ;
charged with the education of the
young prince Henry, ib, ; his religious
devotion and chastity, 50-56 ; his
lordly ways, 56 ; is envied by the nobi-
lity, 56-58 ; rectifies the frontier of
Normandy, 56 ; personal bravery and
energetic administration, 58 ; requests
archbishop Theobald frequently to re-
lease him from the court, ib. ; joins an
expedition against the king's enemies, 60 ;
is nominated archbishop of Canterbury
by the king, 62-64 ; is elected arch-
bishop, 70-82 ; is absolved of all secular
obligations, 80 ; is ordained canon
regular at Merton, 86 ; is ordained
priest and consecrated bishop, 88-90 ;
receives the pall ft-om the pope, 92-94 ;
his ascetic habits, 94-96 ; his charities,
98-100; his studious habits, 100; his
pastoral work, 102-104 ; his household
ways, 106-108 ; his sternness, 110; his
episcopal zeal, 110-120; has an inter-
view with the king at Southampton, 120-
122 ; attends the council of Tours, and
renews certain ancient privileges of Can-
terbury, 122-132 ; consecrates bishops,
134 ; consecrates a church (at Westmin-
ster) and translates the body of Edward
the Confessor, 136, cfr. cvii ; refuses to
pay the *' Jerusalem tax," 138, cfr. cviii ;
causes of disagreement with king Henry,
138-146; dit-pute with Henry at tlie
council of Loudon, 14G-156; ho sues
for pardon, and retracts privately, IGO;
608
IXDEX.
Thomas Becket — cant.
conflict at Clarendon, and acceptance
of the "customs," 162-174; retracts
his consent to the customs, 174-176 ; is
deserted by some of the bishops, 176 ;
deprived of his legative office, 178-180 ;
his troubles at the council of Northamp-
ton, 184-222 ; his flight abroad, 222-
260; sends messengers to plead his
cause to the king of France and the
pope, 264-288 ; meets king Louis at
Soissons, 288-290 ; pleads his cause
before the pope and his cardinals, 290-
302 ; resigns his see into the hands of
the pope who reinstates him therein
aorain, 304-310 ; his removal to Pon-
tigny, 310-312 ; receives a grey monk's
habit from the pope, 314; his manner
of life at Pontigny, 316-318; persuades
the pope to refuse an interview to the
king in his absence, 326 ; writes to
king Henry, 340-346, 360, 368; his
care for his banished kinsfolk, 348-350 ;
takes leave of the pope on his return to
Kome, 354 ; excommunicates the bishop
and dean of Salisbury, 356-360 ;
leaves Pontigny for Sens, 368-374 ;
visions, 388-392; correspondence with
the bishops of England, 394-410 ;
dealings with the legates William and
Otho, 414-416 ; excommunications,
418 ; Henry forbids prayers for the
archbishop, 420; interview with king
Henry at Montmirail, 426-432 ; es-
trangement of the French king, 432-
438 ; restoration to the favour of the
same, 438-440 ; interview at Mont-
martre, 446-448; he sends messengers
to England to announce to the bishops
the Pope's displeasure at their taking
part in the coronation of Henry the
Young, 452 ; complains of their dis-
regard of Canterbury in the matter,
454-456 ; meeting with king Henry in
Prato Proditorum, 460 ; peace with
king Henry, 460-468; meeting with
king Henry at Tours, 468-470 ; and at
Chaumont, 470-472; return to Eng-
Í Thomas Becket — cont.
I land, 474-494, cfr. cxxxix-cxl ; for-
i bidden by the young king to travel
! about the country, 504-508 ; his last
j Christmas day, 508-512 ; receives news
1 of the approach of the knights, 518-520 ;
\ his passion, 522-544 ; outrage on his
body, 546 ; removal to the crypt, 552-
554 ; laying-out and burial, 556, 558 ;
considerations on his life and death, ii.
2-6 ; consequences of the murder, 8-
58; miracles, 60-184; canonization,
184-196; translation, 196-210; en-
shrinement, 210-212 ; acquisition of the
great carbuncle of the French regalia,
212-222; remarkable Tuesdays in his
life, II. 238.
Thomas Bernardsson, i. 418.
Thomas saga, history of, v-xxxiv.
Thomasskinna, history of, xxxv-xlviii.
Thormod Torfason ; see formóíSr Torfa-
son.
Thorir ; see forir.
Thorvald ; see í*orvaldr.
Thumas ; see Thomas Becket.
Thurlacus ; see í*orlákr.
Thykkvibær ; see í*ykkvibær.
Tolosa (Toulouse), i. 58.
Toi-fæus ; see í'ormó'Sr Torfason.
Torfi Jonsson, xl, xlv.
Toulouse ; see Tolosa.
Tours ; see Turon,
Tracy ; see Vilhjálmr af Traz.
Traz ; see Vilhjálmr af Traz.
Tunbridge, castle of, i. 120.
Turon (Tours), council of, i. 122, 128,
130-132 ; meeting at, between king and
archbishop, 468.
Tyrell (Sir Walter) ; see Gallterus.
u.
Uingeth ; see Vingecham.
Uitsaud (Whitsand), i. 478, 484.
INDEX.
609
Ulfrida (Úlfrí'Sr, or more probably Hdlm-
fri^r, in the common pronunciation :
HdlfrilSr), daughter of Vigfúss Ivarsson
Holmr, II. 294.
Unger (Carl Richard), lii and passim.
Upsala, clxviii.
Urban, a Cistercian abbot, exxiii-cxxiv,
cxxvii.
Urbanus II., pope, 1088-1099, i. 4, 26.
Urbanus in. (Hubert Crivelli), pope,
1185-1187, xcii,cvi; I. 106.
Urso, ancestor of Fitzurse, i. 514.
Uzziah^ king of Juda ; see Ozias.
V.
Valburg, i. 230.
Valdemunstr, monastery of, i. 256.
Vallis Lucens ; see Lucens.
Varmilækr, a homestead in the provostship
of Þverá, the church of, dedicated to
Thomas, xxx ; possessed an eflBgy of
Thomas, xxxi.
Vatnsfjör'Sr, a homestead in Western Ice-
and, clxiii.
Vauluisant ; see Lucens.
Ver, otherwise Alptaver, another name for
the monaster}' of í'ykkvibær, q.v.
Vestmystr (Westminster), i. 136, 452.
Vestrhalfa, western lands, occidens, ii.
108.
Vezelay, excommunications of, exxxii, i.
418.
Victor IV., anti-pope, 1159-1164, i. 90,
92 ; II. 275.
Vi^ey, island, and abbey of, near Reykja-
vik, in the church of, an altar dedi-
cated to Thomas, xxix ; Thomasskinna
probably belonging to, xliv; privileges
conferred on, clxvii.
Vigfuss ivarsson Holmr, ob. 1262, clxiv.
Vigfiiss ivarsson Holmr, vii, clxiv, sqq.
Vilchin, bishop of Skálholt, 1394-1406,
his collection of church registers referred
to, xxviii, xxxi, xxxiv.
K541
Vilhjálmr (William), chaplain to arch-
bishop Thomas, i. 356 ; ii. 258, 259.
Vilhjálmr, a citizen of Canterbury, ii. 68.
Vilhjáhnr jarl af Rundinel (earl of Arun-
del), treaty with archbishop Thomas on
behalf of the king, at Northampton, i.
220 ; is sent as ambassador to the pope,
260 ; his speech to the pope, i. 282 ; ii.
254-255, 263, cfr. Ii, xc.
Vilhjalmr, cardinal bishop of Pavia, i. 298 ;
412,416.
Vilhjalmr II.,rauíSi (Rufus), king of Eng-
land, 1087-1100, cviii; 1.4; crowned
by Lanfranc, 10 ; his church policy, 6,
44, 62 ; his principles of church govern-
ment adopted by Henry II., 136, 138.
Vilhjalmr RúSujarl (earl of Rouen), sur-
named * Bastar^r,' king of England,
1060-1087, conquers England, i. 4 ;
founds St. .Stephen's monastery at
Caen, 10; his relationship to king Ste-
phen, 26 ; dominions added by him to
the English crown, 42.
Vilhjalmr (Guilielmus de Champagne),
bishop of Chartres, 1165-1176, i. 466 ;
archbishop of Sens, 1168-1176, i. 446;
bearer of excommunications from Rome,
458 ; writes to the pope to revenge the
archbishop's murder, ii. 16 ; is autho-
rised to interdict the king's cismarine
dominions, 28.
Vilhjalmr af Traz (de Tracy), one of the
four assassins of archbishop Thomas, i.
514, 538, 542, 546 ; II. 38-40, 48.
Vilhjalmr, sou of Jordan, a knight, ii. 158,
261.
Viliamr (Guilielm de Joinville), arch-
bishop of Reims, 1219-1226, ii. 204.
Vincent de Beauvais, i. 8, 300.
Vincestr = Yvelcestr.
Viugecham, i. 224.
Virgilius, archbishop of Aries, 588-610, i.
126.
Vivianus, archdeacon of Orvieto, sent by
the pope with a letter to king Henry, i.
332 ; commissioned to negotiate peace,
444.
Vivien, ' le clerc, i. 54.
QQ
610
INDEX.
w.
TVaberghe, Walbergetone, Walberton,
Walburgetone ; see Valburg.
Wabridge forest (cfr. Yalburg), cxiv.
Waldeminster ; see Valdemunstr.
Walter (brother of Theobald, archbishop
of Canterbury), bishop of Eochester,
1148-1182, assisted at the consecration
of archbishop Thomas, i. 88 ; attended
the council of Northampton, 190, 198.
Wendover, chronicler, i. 82.
Westminster ; see Vestmjstr.
Wharton, Anglia sacra, viii.
Wichiridus ; see Vigfúss Ivarsson Holmr.
Willelmus, archbishop of Sens; see Vil-
hjálmr.
Willeton, manor in Somersetshire, i. 514.
William of Canterbury, a contemporary
biographer of Thomas, Ixxxv-lxxxvii.
William Corbeuil, archbishop of Canter-
bury, 1123-1136, I. 10.
William Fitz Stephen, a contemporary bio-
grapher of Thomas, Ixxviii-lxxx,
William L, king of Scotland, 116.5-1214,
II. 174, 179, 180.
William of Eynesford, i. 120.
William of Malmesbury, i. 42.
William of Newbury ; see Willielmus Neu-
burgensis.
William de Eos, i. 120.
Wilham de Tracy, grandfather of Vil-
hjálmr af Traz, i. 514.
William de Turbe, bishop of Norwich,
1146-1175, assisted at the consecration
of Thomas, i. 88.
William the Wicked, king of Sicily, 1154-
1166,1. 130.
Willielmus Neuburgensis, i. 58.
Wincheham, Wingecham, Wingeham,
Wingham, Wingheham, Wyngucham,
Wynguchm ; see Vingecham.
Witham, a river of Lincolnshire, i. 242.
Wolf (Christian), commonly known as
Lupus, editor of the editio princeps of
Quadrilogus prior, xciv.
Woodstock, ex, I. 54, 138, 160.
Wytfridus, fiHus Juarii j see Vigfúss ivars-
son Hdlmr.
Y.
York ; see Jork.
Ypres, town of Flanders, xciv.
Ysland ; see Island.
Yualcestr, Yuelcestr (Ilchester), i. 330,
418.
i>.
i'erney, an island in southern Iceland,
clxvii.
Þingey, provostship of (í'ingej'jarpröfasts-
dæmi) in northern Iceland, xxix, xxxii.
i*iuge}Tar, a monasterj- in the district of
Húnavatn, Ix.
i'dr'Sr Einarsson, xl, xliv.
í'orgert5r, í*orlak's daughter, clxv.
i'orgils Bö'Svarsson, surnamed Skar^i,.
xxvii, xxviii, xxxii.
í^órir, archbishop of Drontheim, Ixi.
i^orkell, a relative of bishop Gu'Smundr
Arason, xxviii.
Forlákr Guðmundsson, clxv.
í*orlákr í'órhallssou, bom 1133; prior of
Ver, 1168-72; abbat, ib., 1172-1178;
bishop of Skalholt, 1178-1193; cano-
nized saint, 1199 ; studied at Paris and
Lincoln, x ; his eflBgy set up in the
church of Kyme, x-xi ; his sagas, x,
xiv-xv ; his observance of fast days,
xiv-xvi ; his scribal industry, xvi ; his
interference with * jus patronatus,' xxvi.
i'orleifr Arnason, provost of Kálfafell,
xlvi.
INDEX.
611
tormó^r Torfasou, born 1636, died 1719,
xxxix, xlvi, xlviii.
í'órsnesB-þing, a district in Western Ice-
land, xli.
i'orvaldr Gixurarson, clxv.
Þorvaldr Loptsson, clxviii.
í^verá, provostship of, in Borgarfjör'Sr,
XXX.
í'ykkvi-bær, Augustinian abbey in the
parish of Alftaver, in the district of
Þykkvi-bær — cotit.
Skaftafell, -whence it frequently bears
the short name of Ver, xi, clxi.
Ö.
Össiir, father of Margaret, the mother of
Vigfúss Ivarsson Hohnr, clxviii.
X 0 N D 0 N : Printed by E t E E and Spottiswoodb,
Printers to the Queen's mo&t Excellent Majesty.
For Her Majesty's Stationery Office
[B 1275.— 750.— 11/88.]
i
H
T&omae saga erkibiskups
PONTIFICAL INSTITUTE
OF MEtDlAEVAl. STUDIES
0» OUEEN'S PARK
Toronto 5 Canada
26691^
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11